Tektronix_Catalog_1983 Tektronix Catalog 1983
User Manual: Tektronix_Catalog_1983
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 454
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
Expanded coverage ....
for a growing product line.
2
Tek 's 1983 Catalog is thicker by some 80 pages, describing the superior performance, increased productivity and unmatched value you expect from Tektronix. Each major product introduction is marked /I8fI
for easy reference.
Each Tektronix Sales Engineer specializes in the products and applications for a major area of customer activity : digital design and test,
computer graphics, communications, and general test and
measurement.
You can receive additional product information by calling your nearest
Tektronix Sales Office listed on pages 9, 10, 11 , or by returning the
reply card in this catalog .
IMPORTANT
INFORMATION
34
DESIGN
AUTOMATION
DIVISION
L
85
INFORMATION
DISPLAY
DIVISION
L
-.l
126
COMMUNICATIONS
DIVISION
L
215
INSTRUMENT
SYSTEMS
DIVISION
L
Service and Support
2
Power Source Considerations
6
Information on power sources and power cord/plug options.
Environmental Characteristics
6
Information about how to interpret environmental specifications.
Microcomputer
Development Products
37
The 8500 Series offers the broadest range of
quality multiple microprocessor and microcomputer development support available today.
Computer Graphics Products
Terms Of Sale
8
Information on prices, terms, shipping estimates, and best method of transportation on
Tektronix products, accessories and replacement parts.
Details about ordering , training , calibration,
maintenance, repairs , parts, service, terms of
sale and warranty.
86
Sales and Service Offices
9
A complete listing of Tektronix worldwide sales
and service offices. Consult the listing for the
one nearest you.
Indexes
12
Functional and alphanumeric indexes for quick,
easy access.
Logic Analyzers
54
Tektronix Logic Analyzers save time and money in designing, evaluating, manufacturing and
servicing digital products. From 8 to 104 channels with sophisticated modules for high speed
timing analysis, stimulation of the circuit under
test, and microprocessor analysis .
OEM Imaging Products
For both OEM and end-users, we offer a wide
range of display monitors for direct viewing or
photography; X-Y (random dot scan or vector)
and raster scan (video) displays. Modular Packaging is available on many instruments.
Communication Network
Analyzers
Fiber Optic Time
Domain Reflectometer
The 830 Series family of Data Communications
Testers are designed to identify faulty elements
in a data communications network. The 834
offers a high degree of programmability which
allows easy go/no-go testing .
The 851 Digital Tester is a first-line, multifunctional service instrument developed to meet the
needs of the digital service industry.
Laboratory and Portable
Oscilloscopes
216
Versatile, easy-to-operate oscilloscope families, with your choice of plug-in or portable
configurations. From 500 kHz to 1 GHz bandwidth ...conventional , dual beam oscilloscopes.
Multimode, variable persistence storage, waveform digitizers, realtime and sampling, choose
the configuration that fits your application.
Signal Processing Systems
225
Waveform Digitizing Instruments and Systems,
with specifically designed digitizers, systems
and software.
138
The OF150 is capable of making quantitative,
calibrated loss and distance measurements on
multi mode fiber optic cables and installations.
Cable Testers/TOR
140
These TDR cable testers provide installation
and maintenance people with fast, accurate,
portable tools for checking the internal condition of fiber optic and metallic cables and
locating faults .
IEEE-488 Pro1lrammable
and Manual General
Purpose Instruments
21
An overview of some of the important factors
involved in selecting products to meet your
needs.
Tektronix GPIB product systems are described, as well as individual waveform measurement instruments, graphic controllers, and
peripherals.
Quality
448
Discussion of Tektronix quality standards.
Semiconductor Test Systems
78
Tektronix offers comprehensive solutions for
automated test and measurement problems
encompassing linear and digital ICs, LSI/VSLi
devices, microprocessors and discrete
components.
117
A wide range of computer display terminals,
desktop computers, graphic peripheral products and supporting software.
127
IEEE-488 Compatible
Instruments
338
TM 5000 products are fully programmable via
the IEEE-488 bus, and provide state-of-the-art
calibration standards. They are compatable
with almost 40 TM 500 manual instruments.
You link together literally hundreds of customized systems. Programmable, manual, or
mixed.
Television Products
142
Tektronix Television Products time, test, measure, correct and display the television signal
world-wide.
Spectrum Analyzers
198
High performance 490 Series Portable Spectrum Analyzers covering 50 kHz to 220 GHz
with full programmability/GPIB option and ease
of operation features. 7000 Series compatible,
lab grade plug-in spectrum analyzer family covering 20 Hz to 60 GHz.
Curve Tracers
396
Deliver comprehensive information about a
multitude of semiconductor devices and integrated circuits.
Photometer/Radiometer
406
Measures luminance, illuminance, irradiance,
light-emitting diode output, & relative intensity.
Cameras, Isolaters, Probes,
Carts and Accessories
410
Extend your measurement capabilities. Contains selection guides, charts, descriptions, and
specifications.
TEK
CUSTOMER
INFORMATION
CONTENTS
Service Network ...................... ....................... 3
Maintenance Agreements ................................3
Ordering Information ....... ............................... 3
Repair Parts ....................................................4
Provisioning .................................................... 4
Service Training .............................................. .4
Service Publications ........................................ 4
Product Operation ................................. ......... 5
Product Applications ....................................... 5
Traceability ..................................................... 5
International Service ........................ .............. 5
OEM Information ............................................. 6
Warranty ......................................................... 7
Terms of Sale ..................................................8
Sales and Service Offices ...............................9
Functional Index ............................................ 12
Alphanumeric Index ...................................... 17
When you buy a Tektronix product, you are
buying more than an oscilloscope ... or a
computer terminal ... or a logic analyzer ... or
any of our numerous test and measurement
products . You are also investing in the
many people and services behind your
Tektronix product.
A staff of Customer Service Representatives serves as your initial interface with the
company.
Trained Sales Engineers give you expert
advice, applications assistance and after
sales support.
A network of service centers throughout the
U.S. and around the world provides prompt
and competent calibration, maintenance,
and repair service.
2
The long term support program ensures
years of service after a product is removed
from the production line.
The training and support program offers
classes in Tektronix product theory,
operation, maintenance, and repair at our
main plant in Beaverton, Oregon
and at various locations throughout the
world. Audio and video training tapes are
also available.
Each of these services adds value to your
Tektronix product.
CUSTOMER
INFORMATION
TEK
Sales Engineers
Your Sales Engineers are fully prepared to
respond to your technical and business requirements. They have a strong technical
background and extensive product and
business training . Periodic refresher courses
fully acquaint them with new products and
services. Be sure to take advantage of their
services.
Worldwide Service Network
With every Tektronix product comes a longterm commitment to professional service,
extending far beyond your warranty period .
We seek to establish a working partnership
to best meet your requirements, at the time
of purchase and in the years to come. No
product is shipped until service support is
solidly in place.
We offer a worldwide service network with
the technical back-up and total company resources to keep your Tektronix products
running as reliably as the day they're installed . Local accessibility is offered by 85
Service Centers and Tektronix supported
service technicians in over 50 countries (see
pages 9-11 for specific locations). Some
1,400 people around the world are dedicated to servicing Tektronix products
exclusively.
Communications
Your Sales Engineers are a valuable communication link between you and the
factory. They know the exact person to contact in each circumstance, and can reach
that person fast and easily. Let them help
your communications on any problem related to your Tektronix products.
Training programs, service bulletins and our
own diagnostic tools all contribute towards
making our service people among the most
highly skilled in the world .
Today's business demands put a higherthan-ever requirement on equipment
uptime. You can depend on Tektronix for
the technical expertise, extensive inventory
and prompt response that make us your
best choice and, at bottom line, your best
value in long-term service support. It's our
business keeping yours on-line.
For more detailed information please use
the reply card in this catalog.
Maintenance Agreements
A Tektronix Maintenance Agreement provides a planned program of regular service
that protects the continuity of your product's operation--and paves the way for the
fastest, most effective response to unplanned downtime. A Maintenance
Agreement assures you of priority service,
be it an emergency situation or otherwise.
One agreement covers all scheduled inspections, repairs, replacement parts,
adjustments, and labor costs. Required
product updates are installed automatically,
keeping your product in top condition. You
can confidently plan maintenance programs
and budgets without facing open-ended
service charges later. Additionally, a Tektronix Maintenance Agreement eliminates
special training costs for your own maintenance personnel, as well as expensive
service equipment, spare parts and special
tools . It's everything you need within a low,
fixed fee.
We also offer several other types of Service
Programs . A Tektronix Service Representative can help tailor one to the requirements
of your operation.
Ordering
There are many types of products, each designed for specific application areas. Your
Sales Engineer can help you select the one
best suited to your present and future
needs, and will be happy to arrange a demonstration of the product ... in your
application if you so desire.
If you are a Purchasing Agent or Buyer, your
Sales Engineer or Customer Service Representative can provide information on
prices, terms, shipping estimates, and best
method of transportation on Tektronix products, accessories and replacement parts.
3
SERVICE NETWORK
TEK WORLDWIDE
Time and Material Service
Factory-trained technicians are standing ready to
repair and calibrate, or recondition and overhaul
your Tektronix instruments. Marginal components
and wom parts are replaced and required updates installed. All qualified calibration measurements meet requirements for traceability to National Standards.
Firm Price Service tells you service charges in
advance for repair and calibration of over 250 test
and measurement products. Ask us for price
information and program details. Pick-up and
delivery is available at selected locations. On-site
service is offered for information display products, microprocessor development, signal processing and semiconductor test systems.
For service, replacements parts, answers to warranty questions, or other help, please contact the
Tektronix facility nearest you. Please do not return
instruments or parts before receiving directions.
Repair Parts
In support of its self-maintenance customers,
Tektronix maintains over $40 million in available
parts, from components to assembly level. Our
objective is to be able to provide you the right
part in the right place at the right time.
In addition to on-hand inventory, we have a
special manufacturing operation that builds replacement parts for discontinued items.
Parts ordering is more convenient when you use
the toll-free phone number in your area to contact
a Tektronix parts order desk. Phone numbers for
the continental United States are shown on the
adjacent map. Parts orders for current and discontinued products are usually processed and
shipped from on-hand inventory. Please give
product type number and serial number for fastest possible service.
Module Repair and Return
Tektronix factory service offers a convenient,
cost-effective means for many customers to obtain repairs on specified modules for information
display products, microprocessor development,
signal processing and semiconductor test systems. Modules are sent to our Beaverton repair
facility, repaired and returned promptly. Our module repair center offers good turn around, helping
maximize customer uptime.
Provisioning
If desired, Tektronix can provide complete packages of spares for both individual products and
product groups. Provisioning assures you of
stock on-hand in case of component failure .
Recommendations are based on study of fieldfailure data of product components. Cost ceiling
and time frame for which a spares kit applies are
to customer specifications.
Service Training
Tektronix has established a comprehensive Customer Service Training Program designed to enhance the value of our products as long-term
investments.
Formal classroom training is offered at a number
of Tektronix field locations throughout the world.
4
Match Your Own Location With Ours
No matter where in the world you put your Tek equipment to work, Tel< Service is nearby.
From Australia to Zambia, at 44 Sales Offices across the U.S.A. , and in 50 countries around the world, local service is at hand. Some
1400 service people the world over are dedicated to servicing Tel< products exclusively.
We also offer audiotapes on operation, circuit
description and calibration; videotapes covering
basic concepts, operation and applications; and
multimedia training packages that incorporate
printed material, audiotapes and videotapes for
independent study.
Information regarding these training opportunities
is available from your nearest Tektroni x
Sales/Service Office. You may also request a
copy of the Tektronix Service Training Schedule
on the return card in this catalog.
Service Publications
Service manuals, available for every Tektronix
instrument, contain circuit schematics, parts lists,
operating, maintenance and troubleshooting
information.
TEKNOTES (an English only publication) is a
periodic newsletter with information about product modifications, new service procedures and
maintenance functions . Your Tektronix Sales Representative can place your name on its mailing
list.
In addition, service information is available to
customers on ANSI standard 105 x 148 mm
negative microfiche. Included in a product maintenance set are operator/service manuals, manual changes, data sheets, reference cards and
information regarding product modifications. A
subscription , available through your local
Tektronix Sales/Service Office, includes a basic
set of microfiche and quarterly updates to keep
information current.
TEK
Tektronix Direct Parts Order Desk Toll-Free Numbers
800-323-1654
(in Illinois {,
312-259-7580)'
Irvine
714-556-8080
For your convenience, you may order parts directly by calling the desk at the toll-free number for your area.
Operation
Your Tektronix product can be most useful to you
when you are familiar with all control functions.
Your Sales Engineer will be glad to demonstrate
the use of your product in various applications to
help you become more familiar with its operation.
If your product is to be used by several engineers
or other users, your Sales Engineer will be happy
to conduct informal classes on its operation in
your location .
Applications
To assist you with in-depth knowledge of specific
areas, your Sales Engineers are backed up by
specialists in such fields as: Signal Processing
Systems, Television Products, Information Display
Products, Spectrum Analyzers, Logic Analyzers,
and Microcomputer Development Products. At
your request, they will arrange to demonstrate
Tektronix instruments for you - in your application, if you wish.
Traceability
The reference standards of measurement of
Tektronix are compared with the U.S. National
Standards through frequent tests by the U.S. National Bureau of Standards.
The Tektronix working standards and testing apparatus used are calibrated against the reference
standards in a rigorously maintained program of
measurement control.
The manufacture and final calibration of Tektronix
products are controlled by the use of Tektronix
reference and working standards and testing apparatus in accordance with established procedures and with documented results.
Certificates of traceability to NBS are available
with new products, as well as products you may
have serviced at a later date.
A certificate of compliance stating that a particular product being shipped conforms to its published (or quoted) specification is also available.
International Service
Tektronix products are serviced in all countries
where they're locally sold. Conditions within a
country may limit the type of service available;
therefore, some of the programs discussed here
are not available in all countries. Specific country
service capability can be obtained from your local
Tektronix Sales or Distributors Office.
A Quality Partnership
The advantages of working with Tektronix extend
far beyond our excellence in products. You also
get a long-term commitment to professional service. All-out support backs designed -in
performance.
Your local Tektronix Service Representative can
tell you more about those services by which you
can best benefit and profit from your working
partnership with Tektronix.
Our Product Reliability
Is Your Foundation
Any system is only as reliable as the components
that go into it. At Tektronix, we're committed to
producing the most dependable system components possible. You can be confident that the reliability we design into our equipment can help
keep your customers satisfied. That's reliability
you can build on.
'See the listing of Tektronix Worldwide Sales and Service Offices at the end of this section. For countries where a local representative is not listed, contact the appropriate Tektronix Worldwide Marlr
11 Keppel Road. Keppel House
Singapore 0208
Phooe: (011) 65 - 2246070
Telex: RS 28450
SRI LANKA
AUSTRIA
Rohde & SchwarzTektronix Ges.m.b.H.
Soonleithnergasse 20
A - 11 00 Vienna
Phone: (222) 62 61 41
Telex : 133933
BELGIUM
Stewart Roche Limited
G.P.O. Box 61
Colombo
Phone: 25846. 25847. 25848
Telex: 1307 COLUMBO AJB ROCHES
CE1307
Cable: LAXAPANA Colombo
TAIWAN
Tektronix nvlsa
Keiberg Pari<
Excelslorlaan 3
1930 Zaventem
Phone: (02) 720.80.20
Telex: 26713
Cable: TEKBEL
Heighten Corporation
11 th Floor 342 Min Cheng East Road
P.O. Box 46 - 65 Sheng
Taipei 104 ROC
Phone: 551 - 9916
Telex: 21472
Cable: HEIGHTEN . Taipei
THAILAND
Rohde & SchwarzTektronix Ges.m.b.H.
Soonleithnergasse 20.
A- l100 Vlenn., Austria
Phone: (222) 62 61 41
Telex: 133933
Dynamic Supply
Engineering R.O.P.
12 Sol Pasana 1. Ekamai
Sukhumvit 63
Bangkok 11
Phone: 392 - 8532. 392 - 5313
391 - 9571
Teiex: 82455 OYNASUP TH
Cable: Oynasupply
URUGUAY
Coasin Uruguaya S.R.L.
Casilla de Correo 1400
Correo Central
Ubertad 2529
Montevideo
Phone: 78-46 42
Telex: UY 6571 OROCUER
Cable: COAUR , Mootevideo
VENEZUELA
Equilab, C.A.
Torre KLM 6 " Piso
Avenida Romulo Gallegos
Santa Eduvigis
(Apartado 60497)
Carac •• 107
Phone: 283. 1166 (5 lines)
Teiex: 21860 EOUIX
Cable: EOUILAB. Caracas
AREAS NOT LISTED,
CONTACT:
Tektronix, Inc.
Distributor Sales
MS 51 -297
P.O. Box 500
Bea.erton. Oregon 97077
Phone: (503) 643 - 8841
Teiex: 910 - 467 - 8708
Cable: TEKTRONIX
AFRICA, EUROPE,
MIDDLE EAST
ALBANIA
Rohde & Schwarz Tektronix Ges.m. b .H.
Sonnleithnergasse 20
A- 1100 Vienna , Austria
Phone: (222) 62 61 41
Teiex: 133933
ALGERIA
Sales:
Tektronix Limited
P.O. Box 36
Guernsey. Channel Islands
Maintenance:
Measurelec
144 Bd Salah Bouakouir
Algie ..
Phone: 61.50.99 and 61 .50.24
Teiex: 53733 TEKNY OZ
ANGOLA
Tecnidata
Representacoes
Tecnicas e
Electronica Aplicada
Lda
Rua Sociedade de Geografia
21-21A
(Caixa Postal 1619)
Luanda
Phone: 32025 - 32309
Telex : 3019 TECOATA AN
Cable: TECNIOATA
BULGARIA
CZECHOSLOVAKIA
Rohde & SchwarzTektronix Ges.m. b.H.
Sonnleithnergasse 20.
A- l1oo Vienna, Austria
Phone: (222) 62 61 41
Telex: 133933
DENMARK
Tektronix AIS
Herlev Hovedgade
Post Box 575
OK - 2730 Hertev
Phone: (2) 84 56 22
Telex: 35239 Tekas OK
EAST AFRICA (Kenya,
Tanzania and Uganda)
Rohde & Schwarz Eng.
& Sales Co. Ltd.
A. B. C. Place Building 2
Waiyaki Way
(P.O. Box 46658)
Nairobi. Kenya
Phone: 62326
Teiex: 22030. 22961 ENGSALES
Cable: ENGSALES Nairobi
EGYPT
Giza Systems
Engineering Company
2 Medan EI Mesaha
(P.O. Box 1913)
Dokki. Cairo
Phone: 841200. 849399. 849200
Teiex: 92096 EKA UN
93644 ALKAN UN
GERMANY, FEDERAL
REPUBLIC OF
Tektronix GmbH
Sedanstrasse 13- 17
0 - 5000 Cologne 1
Phone: (221) 77220
Telex: 888-5417
Ernst- Reuter- Platz 3 - 5
0 - 1000 Berlin 10
Phone: (030) 3139081
Telex: 185804
Schoenhauser Strasse 62-64
0 - 5000 Cologne 51
Phone: (221) 37980
Telex: 888 - 5541
Kieler Strasse 407
0 - 2000 Homburg 54
Phone: (040) 54830
Telex: 213749
Kriegsstrasse 39
0 - 7500 Karllruhe 1
Phone: (0721) 27981
Telex: 782 - 5301
Ehrenbreitsteiner Strasse 36
0 - 8000 Muenchen
Phone: (089) 14851
Telex: 5 22 953
Cooaustrasse 36
0 - 8500 Nuernberg 60
Phone: (0911) 646081
Teiex: 626255
FINLAND
Tektronix 0 Y
Larin Kyostin tie 4,
SF-00650 Helsinki 65
Phone: (0) 722 400
Telex: 12- 3435 TEKOV SF
SALES AND
SERVICE OFFICES
TEK
FRANCE
Tektronix
Siege Socia l B.P.13
Z.1. de Courtaboeut.
IVORY COAST
Sitel
Blvd. Giscard D'Estalng -
Avenue du Canada
de Marcory Zone 4A
Abidjan 01 BP 2580
Phone: 353600 or 353502
Telex: 3354 SITEL CI
Cable: RAY BACH Abidjan
JORDAN
Consult-Tel
P.O. Box 35055
91941 Les Ulis Cede.
Phone: 907 78 27
Telex: TEKOR 690332
Cable: TEKOR
Centre Regional de Lyon
163. Boulevard des Etats-Unis
69OO8-Lyon
Phone: (78) 76.40.03
Telex : TEKLYON 300150
Centre Regional de Rennes
103A, Avenue de Crimee
35000 Rennes
Phone: (99) 51 21 16
Telex : TEKREN 740829
Cenlre Regional de Strasbourg
Rue du Marechal Lefebvre
67100 Strasbourg
Phone: (88) 39.49.35
Telex : TEKSTBG 890470
Cenlre Regional du Sud-Est
Z. I. Rue Andre Ampere
13290 Alx-Les·Mille.
Phone: (42) 26 62 03
Telex : 440045
Centre Regional de Toulouse
284. Route Saint-Simon
31300 Toulouse
Phone: (61) 40 24 50
Telex : TEKTOUL 530243
Centre de Maintenance
Paris Ouest
La Defense
39 Boulevard des Bouvets
92000 Nante ..e
Phone: (1) 776 13 53
Telex : TEKNANT 613737
GREECE
Marios DalleHgio
Representa Ions
2. Alopekis Street
Athens 139
Phone: 721 - 0669, 721-1860,
724 - 9511 /2/3/4/5
Telex : 216589 RADX GR
Cable: DALMAR Athens
HUNGARY
Rohde & SchwarzTektronix Ges.m.b . H.
Sonnleithnergasse 20,
A- l100 Vienna . Austria
Phone: (222) 6261 41
Telex : 133933
ICELAND
Krist jan O . Skagfjord Ltd.
P.O. Box 906
Reykjavik
Phone: 24120
Telex : 2133 KOS IS
Cable: KOS Reykjavik
IRELAND
Tektronix U.K. Limited
Dublin
Deans Grange Estate
Kill Lane
Black Rock. Co. Dublin
Phone: 850685/850796
ISRAEL
Eastronics Ltd.
11 Rozanis Street
Tel-Baruch
(P.O. Box 39300)
Tel Aviv 61392
Phone: 475151
Telex : 342610 DATIX IL
33638 RONIX IL
Cable: EASTRONIX Tel Aviv
ITALY
Tektronix S.p.A.
Via Lampedusa 13
20141 Milan
Phone: (02)8466946/8466446
Telex: 315217 TEKMIL I
Piazza Antonio Baldini 45
00141 Rome
Phone:(6) 8278041 /4
Telex: 616018 TEKROM I
Via Cardinal M. Fossati 5
10141 Turin
Phone: (11) 330143, 372163
Telex: 212543 TEKTOR I
Carrefour
Amman
Phone: 36668
Telex: 22345 CONSLT JO
Cable: CONSULTEL
KUWAIT
Tareq Company Ltd.
P.O. Box Satat 20506
Phone: 436100 & 436045
Telex : 22315 ZUAITER KT
Cable: ZUAITER KUWAIT
LEBANON
Projects S.A.L.
P.O. Box 11 -5281
Beirut
Phone: 331680
Telex: 20466 LE
Cable: PROJECTS Beirut
MOROCCO
SCRM
75 Avenue Fal Ould Oumeir
Rlblt Agdal
Phone: (07) 749-47
Telex: SCRM 32739 M
THE NETHERLANDS
Tektronix Holland N.V.
Meidoornweg 2
1171 JW Badhoevedorp
(P.O. Box 164
1170 AD Badhoevedorp)
Phone: (2968) 1456
Telex : 18490
NIGERIA
Obodex Nigeria Ltd.
2 Ola Ayinde Street
Ikejl
(P.O. Box 6352-Lagos)
Phone: Lagos 935116
Telex: 26744 DATA NG
NORWAY
Tektronix Norge A/S
Brobekkveien 53
Oslo 5
Phone: (02) 64 57 70
Telex: 56-17690 TEK N
POLAND
Rohde & SchwarzTektronix Ges.m.b.H.
Sonnleithnergasse 20.
A-11oo Vienna , Austria
Phone: (222) 62 61 41
Telex : 133933
PORTUGAL
Decada Equipamentos
de Electronica Lda.
Rua Pedro Nunes 47c
1000 Lisbon
(P.O. Box 1128-1003 Lisbon Codex)
Phone: (19) 574159
Telex: 18469 NONIO P
Cable: TLX 16469 NONIO P
QATAR (Arabian Gulf)
Business Comunications
Qatar
P.O. Box 3656
Dohl
Phone: 325851
Telex: 4454 BCQ DH
Cable: BCQ/DH
REPUBLIC OF
SOUTH AFRICA
Protea Physical & Nuclear
Instrumentation (Ply.)
Ltd.
P.O. Box 39127
Bramley 2018
746 6th Sireet
Wynberg, Standton
Transva.1
Phone : (27 11) 786-3647
Telex : 4-24409 SA
(Capetown)
P.O. Box 12
Goodwood 7460
Cape
Phone: (21) 96-3439
Telex: 5-77551 SA
P.O. Box 47031
Natal
Greyville 4023
3 Florida Centre
273 Florida Rd
Greyville 4001
Durban
Phone: (031) 39-1100
Telex: 60981 SA
ROMANIA
Rohde & SchwarzTektronix Ges.m.b.H.
Sonnleithnergasse 20. A-II 00
Vienna , Austria
Phone: (222) 62 61 41
Telex: 133933
SAUDI ARABIA
Rola Trading Corp.
P.O. Box 3172
Riyadh
Phone: 465-4406/465-0972
Telex : 200315 ROLA SJ
SPAIN
Tektronix Espanola S.A.
c/Condesa de Venadito 1-5 Izq
Madrid 27
Phone: (1) 404-1011
Telex: 46014 TKME E
Gran Via Carlos III 97G
Barcelona 28
Phone: (3) 330-2008
Telex : 97398 TKBE E
SUDAN
Cine & Photo Supply CO.
P.O.Box 393
Khartoum
Phone: 81151 .81156.81277,75887
Telex : 22304 PHOKI SO
Cable: PHOTOKINA
SWEDEN
Tektronix AB
Box 4205
Anderstorpsvagen 12
5-171 04 Solnl
Phone: (8) 83 00 80
Telex: 17831 Tekswed S Stockholm
Cable: TEKTROSWED
Sveagatan 3-9
S-413 14 Gothenburg
Phone: (031) 42 70 35
SWITZERLAND
Tektronix
International A.G.
P.O. Box 2142
CH-6300 lug
Phone: 042 21 91 92
Telex: 868808
Cable: TEKINTAG
SYRIA
General Trading Co.
Sanaa Street NO. 3
(P.O. Box 798)
Damaicul
134. Bridge Rd .
6025 103 A Street
Maidenhead, Berkshire SL6 8DJ
Edmonton, Alberta
Phone: (62 8 ~732 11
Telex : 847378
(Manchester)
T6H 2J7
Phone: (403) 434-9466
Telex: 037-2795
1842 Woodward Dr.
Ottawl, Ontario
K2C 3R8
Phone: (613) 225-2850
Telex : 053-4119
(Vancouver)
4519 Canada Way
Burnaby, B.C.
V561Kl
Phone: (604) 438-4321
Telex : 043-54602
Unit 68. Border Place
1313 Border SI.
Winnipeg, Manitoba
R3H OX4
Phone: (204) 632-4447. 632-4448
Telex : 07-55584
(Halifax)
Burnside Commercial Centre
10 Akerty Blvd.
Sovereign House
232/2:14 Stockport Road
Chaadle. Stockport SK8 2EA
Phone: 061-428-0799
(Scotland)
Pentland House.
Almondvale So. Livingston.
West Lothian. EH54 6NG
Phone: Livingston 3276617
Telex: 727056
USSR
Rohde & Schwarz
Tektronix Ges.m.b.H.
Sonnleithnergasse 20.
A-l1oo Vienna , Austria
Phone: (222) 62 61 41
Telex: 133933
YUGOSLAVIA
Rohde & Schwarz
Tektronix Ges.m.b.H.
Sonnleithnergasse 20,
A-l1oo Vlennl. Austria
Phone: (222) 62 61 41
Telex : 133933
ZAMBIA
Baird and Tatlock
(Zambia) Ltd.
Chandwe Musonda Road
(P.O. Box 1038)
Lusaka
Phone: 75315/6
Telex: 4277
Cable: PIPETTE. Lusaka
Brunell Road
(P.O. Box 1097)
Ndola
Phone: 3522 & 2253/4/6
Telex: 3441
Cable: PIPETTE, Ndoia
ZIMBABWE
Protea Medical Services
(Pvt) Ltd.
111 Kelvin Road South
Salisbury
(P.O. Box 2766
Graniteside. Salisbury)
Phone: 704094
Telex: 4102 RH
Cable: MANLY
AREAS NOT LISTED,
CONTACT:
Tektronix Limited
P.O. Box 36
GUlmsey. Channel Islands
Phone: Guernsey (0481) 35781
Telex: 4191193
Cable: TEKTRONIX GUERNSEY
CANADA
CANADA
Tektronix Canada Inc.
P.O.Box 6500.
50 Alliance Blvd.
Barrie, Ontario
Phone: 114807. 224170. 559108
Telex: GITCO 411283 SY
TURKEY
Erkman Elektronik Aletler
L4M 4V3
Phone: (705) 737-2700
Telex: 06-875672
Cable: TEKANADA
Ticaret Anonim Sirketi
Toronto
Necatibey Caddesi 92/3
Karakoy. Istanbul
Phone: 44 1546144 76 51
Telex: 23353 MSE TR
Cable: INGMESUER , Istanbul
TUNISIA
Societe EI Eslek
Unit 20-21
89 Galaxy Boulevard
3 Rue de la Monnaie
1001 Tunis Republique
Phone: 244372
Telex : 13664 ESLEK TN
UNITED KINGDOM
Tektronix U.K. Limited
Beaverton House
36-38, CoIdharbour Lane
P.O. Box 69
Hlrpenden Harts AL5 4UP
Phone: (5827) 63141
Telex: 25559
Cable: TEKTRONIX Harpenden
Rexdale, Ontario
M9W 6A4
Phone: (41S) 675-3865
Telex: 06-989324
(Montrell)
900 Selkirk Street
Pointe Claire, Quebec
H9R 3S3
Phone: (514) 697-5340
Telex: 05-821570
Cable: TEKANADA
Suite 106
301S. 19th SI. N.E.
Cllgary, Alberta
T2E SY9
Phone: (403) 230-1836
Telex: 038-21730
Dartmouth, Nova Scotia
B3B lJ4
Phone: (902) 469-9476
Telex: 019-31534
CANADIAN AREAS
Not Listed, Contact:
Tektronix Canada Inc.
P.O. Box 6500
Barrie. Ontario
L4M 4V3
Phone: (705) 737-2700
Telex: 06-875672
Cable: TEKANADA
TEKTRONIX
WORLDWIDE
MARKETING
CENTERS
U.S.A.
Tektronix, Inc.
U .S. Marketing
P.O. Box 1700
Belverton, Oregon 97075
Phone: (503)627-7111
For additional literature,
or the address and phone
number of the Tektronix
Sales Office nearest you,
contect
P.O. Box 4828
Portland. OR 97208
Phone: 800/547-1512
Oregon only 800/452-1877
Telex: 910/467-8708
TLX: 15-1754
Cable: Tektronix
AFRICA, EUROPE,
MIDDLE EAST
Tektronix Europe B.V.
European Headquarters
Post Box 827
1180 AV Amstelveen
The Netherllnds
Phone: (20) 471146
Telex : 18312 18328
AMERICAS/PACIFIC
(ASia, Australia, Central
South America, Japan)
Tektronix, Inc.
Distributor Sales
P.O. Box 500
MS 51-297
&
Beaverton, Oregon 97077
Phone: (503) 643-8841
For additional literature,
or the address and phone
number of the Tektronix
Sale. Office neare.t you,
contact
Phone: (800) 547-1512
Oregon only:(8oo) 452-1877
Telex : 910-467-8708
TLX : 15-1754
Cable: TEKTRONIX
11
INDEX
TEK FUNCTIONAL
C
A
A to D Converter ... ..... ...
AC RMS Digital Voltmeter .
Accessories
........ 284
350-353
Cables .... .. .... ...... .. .. .. .... .. .. .. .......
.. ...... ....... ......
.. .. .... .. .. 444
Probes .........................................
.. ...... ...................... .................. 442
Sampling ....... .. .
.. .. .. .... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ......... .. .. .... .. .. .... .. .. .... .. .. 286-289
Spectrum Analyzer .. .. .
.. .... .... .. .. .. .. .... .. ......... .. .. .. ....... .... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... 214
TM 500 ............................................................................................... 348,394-395
Viewing .. ... .. .. ... ... .. .. ... .... ..... ...... ... ... ......... .. .... .. .
.. ... .. .... .. .. .. .... 447
Accessory Power Supply ............ .............
Adaptors
.. ....... 431
BNC ...................................... ............ .............
.. .............. .. ................
BSM ..... ............................................................................................... .............
Cable Input .. .. .... ...... ....... .. ... ...... .. .. ...... ..... ..... ... .. .. .. ..... ............. .. .. .... ..... .. ........
Camera Mounting ...... ............... ........................................... .............. ...........
Curve Tracer
................................ .............. ..... .... ..................... ..............
F .. ... ... . ... ..... ...... .... .... .... .... .. ........ .. ..
.. ......
GR ............................................... ....................................... ..........
N ................................................. ...................................................................
SMA (3 mm) ... ... . .. ..... . ......
... ..... ... .. .. ...... ... .... .....
Probe ..................................... .....
..
Probe Grounding .........................
... ................
.. ...................
Rack .. . ....... .... .. .... .. .. .. .. .. ..
444
444
444
414
405
445
444
444
445
444
444
446
Aids, Digital Servicing .. . ..................... .. ......... ......... 57,67,137,365,428,433
Air Line, GR ...
.... ..
.. ..... .. .. .. .. ..
.. .. .. .. .... .. .. .. 444
Alphanumeric Terminals ...............
...... ............... .. ....
.. ... 85-99
Amplitude Generator, Constant
..... .. .. .. .. .. .....
.. ... 380
Amplifiers
Bandpass Riter .
.... .
.. ......................................... 377
CATV Preamp ....................
.. .... ...... 213
Current Probe ............................ ..................
.. ...... .. .. .... . .... 375,437-438
Differential ........ .. .... ...... .......... .. .. ... ...... ......... .
.... 234,272,305-306,376
Differential Comparator.
.. ............................. .... .. . 234,272,305
Dual Trace ................... .... .. .. .. ......
.. 234,271 ,274,287,298,304,308,404
Dual Trace Differential ........
.. ............................ 306
Four Trace ............
...................... .. .. .... ..... .. .. .......
.. ...... .. .. .. 304
Operational .............. .... ..... ..
.. ... ........ .... .. ....... .... .. .. ....... .. .... ... . .... ...... 376
Programmable ................
.. ......................................................... 270,275
Single Trace .......... .. .... ... ........... .. .. ..
234,270-271 ,274,285-286,304
Waveform Digitizer .. ......
... 302-303
Analyzers
Audio
......................
.... .... .. 382
Data ..........................
.. ........ 57,67
Data Communications
....... ........ .. ..... .......... ...... .......................... 127-137
Distortion ....................
.......... .. ............ .... ... .. .. ........ .... .. ........ .. .. .. .. 382
Logic ...... . .......... .. .. .... ..
.. ........ .................................................... 54-76
Spectrum .. .. ........................
.. ............ .. ................ .. .. ...... ........ .... .. 198-214
Television Sideband .... .. .. .. .
.. .......... .... ...... .... .. .... .. ............. 210,21 3,234,253
AN/USM 281C Oscilloscope, Military Designator ........................ 248-249
AN/USM 425 Oscilloscope, Military Designator .. .... .. ........ .... .... . 318-319
APL Terminals
.................................... 89,91
Application Notes
Portable ............ .
......... .... .. ..... 311
7000 Series .. .. .. .... ..
.... .. ... 236
5000 Series .. .. .. ...... .
....... 292
... 200-201
ATB, Spectrum Analysis
Attenuators
BNC ... ...... .... .. ... .. ... .. ........................
.. ............... .. ............. ......
GR ..................................
........... ......
............... .. .. ..
.. ............... .. .......... .. ....... . ...
N .. .. .. .. .. ........ .. ........................... ......
SMA (3 mm) .... .. .. ........... ..... . . . . . . . .. .......... ...... ..... ............
Step .........................
.......... ........
.. ....
444
444
444
445
213
Audio Analyzer . .... .... .. ...... ...........
.. .... ..................................... 382
Audio Sweep Generator ..... .... ...... .........
.. ...................................... 384
Automated Test Equipment ...
78-84,225-229,340-392
Automatic Video Corrector . .......................... .....................
... 189-190
Automatic Video Measurement Set ......... .... .. ........ .. .....
.. 184-188
B
Bandpass Filter/Amplifier .... ................... ............
.. ......... 377
Battery Operated Oscilloscopes ........................ ...... ...... ....
309-337
Battery Packs .......................
.. .. ...... .. .... .............. .. 315
Battery Power Supply .......... .. .. .
.. .. .. .. .. .. .... .. . .. ... .... . 319,348
Bistable Storage Monitors ...... ....
.. .. .... .. .. .... .. .. ...... .. .. .. .. .. 123-124
Bistable Storage Oscilloscopes ................... 252-256,300-301 ,324-337,386
Blank Panel Plug-in Chassis ...... ...... ........ .......... .............................
446
BNC, Accessories .. .................
.... ...... .... .. ...... ....
444
BSM, Accessories ........ .. .. .... .. ..
... .................. ........ .. ...
.. ... 444
12
Cabinets, Plug-in Storage
...... .. .......... ..
Cable Input Adaptors .................. ..
Cable Testing
Fault Locating .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..... .. ..
Rber Optic .................. ..
Metallic ... ...... .... ...... ... .... .... ...... ..... ..
Time Domain Reflectometer (TOR)
446
.. 444
139
...................................
.. ... 140
................ 141
................. 140
Cables
BNC ..........
.......... .. .... .
.. ... .. ........ ..... . ....
BSM .... .... .....................
.. .. .. ......... .. .... ....
GR .....................................................
....
...... .................... ................................
..
N .. .. .... .. .. .. ...... .. ...... .. .. .. .
SMA (3 mm) ..... .. ....................................................................... ..................
444
444
444
444
444
Calibration Fixtures .. .. .. .... .... .. .. .. ........ .. .... . .... .. ..... .. .. .......... .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. ..... 179
Calibration Generators ...................................................................... 377-380
Calibration, Oscilloscope
.................... 279,314,332
Calibration and Other Services
........................... 4
Camera Adaptors .....
.. .... .... .... .. .. .... .. .. .. .. .. .... 414
Camera Carrying Cases
...................
.. .. .. ....... .. .. ......... 416
Camera Mounting Adaptors ...........
..................
.. .. . 414
Camera Writing Speed Enhancer.
.. 414-416
Cameras, Oscilloscope/CRT Display .
.. .... 414-416
Capacitor, Coupling (see Coupling Capacitor)
Cards
Programmable Of A Converter .. . ............ .. .. .. .
.. ........... 389
Programmable Development ...........
.. ........ .. .. 390
Programmable Digital Input/Output
.............. 389
Programmable Relay Scanner ...... .. ........ .. ........ .. .......
.. ...... 389
Carrying Cases, Camera ............ ... .....................................
.. .... 416
Carrying Cases, Plug-in .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .... .
.. .. ..... .. ... 21 4,447
Carts, Laboratory and Portable Instruments .. .
.. .. .... .. .. . 425
Carts, SCOPE-MOBILE .....
...... 424-425
CATV Preamp .. .. .... .... .. .. ..... .. .. ...
.... .
.. ......... 213
Chassis, Blank Panel Plug-in .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .
... 446
Color Graphics Terminal ................. ......................... ...........
.. 96
Color Television Picture Monitor.
.... .... .........
.. .. 154
Communications Test Equipment
Analyzers
Data ... .......... .. .. .. ...... .. .. ...... .... .
.......... 57,67
Sideband .. .. .. ........ .
...... 210,213
.... . 198-214
Spec trum ................................ ..
Automatic Video Measurement Set
... ................ ... .. 184·188
Cable Fault-Locaters ....................................... ..
................................... 139
Demodulators ..........
.. ........ ...... .
.. .... .. 181-183
Frequency Counters .. .
.. ............. ..
282,355-362
Generators
Audio Sweep ...... ..
..
................ ...
........ ... .............. 384
Noise Measurement Set .......... ..
......
.. ............ .. 178
TV Oscilloscopes ........................ .
.. ............. 234,279,310,316,330,332,337
Vectorscopes .... .... .. ...... .. .... ........ .. ..
.. ................ ................. 150
VITS Inserters ...................... .
.. ..... 171 ,174,191
Waveform Monitors .................. .
...... ..... .. ....... 145
Computer-Based Systems, Desktop
Computer Controlled Oscilloscopes
Computer Graphics Products
.... .............. 97-99
.. . 225-229
.. ......... 92-94
. . 92-94
.. ....... 97-105
.. ..... 108-110
.... .. . 106-107
.. ..... 86-107
.. 123-124
.............................. 444
Computer Display . ................
........... ........
Display Terminals . . ......
Graphic Systems .............
Hard Copy Units ... .. .... ..
............ .. ..... .. ............. ....
Interactive Digital Plotter
Interactive Graphic Units ....................
Storage Display Monitors
...... .... .. .. .. .
Connector Accessories
Controllers, System ........... .......
.. ........... 25,26,97-99,119,391
Constant Amplitude Generator .......................
.. ...... .. .. .. 380
Continuous Recorder . .............. ....... ........... ..... .
125
Converters
A to 0 .......................... .. .............. ........ .......... .. ...... ...... ...... ... ..
.. .. .. . 284
o to A ........ .. ........ .. ............. ..................................................... ... ............. .. . 389
Copy Units, Hard ..................... .. ......................................
.. ........ 108-110
Cords, Patch .. .. .. .. .. .. .... .. .
.. ... ........ .. .... .. ...
.. .... .. .. .. . 444
Corrector, Automatic Video
......... .. ........... 189-190
Counters, Digital
Frequency ...... ............ ...........
...................... ...... ... ...... 282,355-362
Time Interval ...... ...... .. .. .
.... ...... .. .. ... .. .. .. ....... ...... .... ..
... 282,355-362
Universal ...... .... .... .. .. ....
.... .. .. ..... .. .. . .. .. .. .......... .... .... .. .. .. .
. 282,355-362
Coupling Capacitors .................. .............. ............... .........
.. ............. 445
FUNCTIONAL
INDEX
TEK
.....................
...... 447
Covers, Protective
........................ 446
Cradle Mount ................... ...... .
CRT
.......................
............ ...... .. .. ... .. 447
Light Filters .. .. .......... .
.................................................... .. ..... 447
Mesh Rlters .................. ..
.. ......... .... ................ .. 230-260,296-297,302
Readout Oscilloscopes .. .
............................. 290
Readout Plug-in .................. .
CRT Displays (see Displays)
Current Measuring Equipment .
284,305,351 -353,375,426-430,434-436
Current Probe Amplifier ........................................ .... .... ............ 375,428,434
Current Probes ........................................... ...................... 375,426-430,435-536
Curve Tracer Adaptors ................................................................... .... 404-405
Curve Tracer, Integrated Circuit ..................... ......................... ............... 403
Curve Tracers, Semiconductor .. ..................................................... 396-405
D
D to A Converter ................................................ ........................................ 389
Data Acquisition Probes .. .. .. .. ................... .... ....................................... 77,430
Data Acquisition Systems ................................... .......... .. ... .. ............. 225-229
Data Analyzers .....
.. .............................................. 34-53,57,67
Data Communications Analyzers, Testers ............................. .... ... 127-137
Delayed Sweep Oscilloscopes . 237-263,276-279,287,296-301,307,310,312324,330-333
Delayed Sweep Sampling Plug-in .. .......
..... .................................. ... 287
Delaying Time Bases ......
........... .. 276-279,287,299,307-308
Demodulators, Television .. ............ .
....................................... 181 -183
Desktop Computer Based Signal Process Systems ................ ......... 229
Desktop Computer ROM Packs ............................................................ 100
Development Instruments, Digital ....................................................... 54-76
Development Products, Microcomputer ................................ .... .... .... 37-53
Differential Amplifiers .. .. .... ...... .. ,................................. .. .... . 272,305-306,376
Differential Comparator Amplifier ................................................... 272,305
Differential Input Oscilloscope .................................. 237-260,272,294-297
Differential Amplifier, Dual Trace ...................... ............ .. .................. .... . 306
Differential Probes ........................................................................ 426,432,441
Digital Cartridge Tape Recorder .. ...... ........................... ................... .... .. . 113
Digital Counters ........ ...................
.. ... ................................ 282,355-362
Digital Delay ..... ...... .... .. ....................................................................... 281,365
Digital Delay Oscilloscope ............
.. ............... .... .... 237-260,281 ,365
Digital Development Instruments .
.. ........ 54-76
Digtial Input/Output Card ................. ... ......... ......... .. ... .. ........... ........ .. ...... 389
Digital Latches ........................................................................................ 54,365
Digital Multimeters
Oscilloscope Coupled with Temperature .......... .............. ....
... 317,284
DMM Oscilloscope ...................................................... 284,316,320-321 ,325,327
Digital Plotter, Interactive .................................................................. 106-107
Digital Photometer/Radiometer
.................................................... 406
Digital Readout Oscilloscope .. .. .. ................... .. .. .. 230-260,296-297,302,317
Digital Servicing Aids ... .............. .. .. ..... .. ...... .. .... .. ..... 57,67,137,365,428-433
Digital Service Instrument ......................................................... 57,67,69,137
Digital Storage Oscilloscopes
....... 234,259,294-295,299,310,330,331
Digital Storage Spectrum Analyzer ...... .. ...................................... 206-209
Digital Sweep Generators .................................. ....................................... 180
Digital Tester ... .. .............. ........................... ....... .... ..... ................. .. .... .... 127-136
Digital Voltmeters ............................................... .... .... .... .... ... ....... .... . 350-353
Digitizer Amplifier, Waveform
................................................ .... . 302
Digitizer, Programmable Transient .................................................. 261 -266
Digitizer, Programmable Waveform ............................................. 261 -266
Digitizer Time Base .... .... ...... .. ..
.. ...................... .... .................. 295,299
Digitizing Oscilloscopes ....................... ........... 258-266,294,295,310,330,331
Disc Storage Memory ............................ ........................................... 112-113
Display Formatter ... . .... .................................... ........................... .. ............ .. 57
Display Terminals .....
.. .............................................................. 92-94
Displays (CRT)
Bistable Storage ..... ...................
.. .. ... .... .. .. .. .. .. .... .. .. .......................... 123-124
Color Television Picture
................................................................. 154
Color Display ................
............................................... 125,154-159
Computer ................
.. ................................... ....... .. ..... ..... ..... .. .. ............ 92-95
High Brightness ................... ......... ............... .. .. .................. ........... ......... 118,157
High Resolution ..............
.. ...... ........ ..... .. .. .. .... 120-122,125
Large Screen ......................................................... ........................................ 124
Nonstorage ... ... ....... .
.. .............. .. .. .. ............ .. .................... ............... 120-122
OEM .. ..... ..
.. .. . ....... .......... .................... .. .... .. ................. .. .......... 120-125
Portable Video Test ................................................................................ 142-144
Raster Scan (Video) .... ... .... ..... ........ .. .. .. ............. .......................... .. ............ .. 120
RGB Color ............................................................................................... 125,157
Storage Display .............. ................. .. .. .. .. ........................................ . .. .. . 123-124
Television Waveform ....................................................
.. ... 145-160
Vector Display ........
.. ......................... ............... .. ........ 150-153
X-Y ........................... ....................... ...................
118,120-125,153
Distortion Analyzers ... .... ................
.. ............................... 382
DMM Oscilloscopes .............................. .. .. .............. 284,316,320-321 ,325,327
Dual Beam Oscilloscopes ...................... .............. .. ......... .. .... ............. 242,301
Dual Beam Storage Oscilloscopes .................. ....... .... .. .. ...... .. .. .. .... 242,301
Dual Time Base (Mixed Sweep) .............................. .. .. .. .. .. .... .... 278,279,307
Dual Trace Amplifiers .................... ........... 234,271 ,274,287,298,304,308,404
Dual Trace Differential Amplifiers .......................................................... 306
Dual Trace Oscilloscopes .. ....... 237-260,291 -306,309-325,328-337,385-387
E
Equipment, Automated Test ....... ............. ........... ..... 79-83,225-229,340-392
Equipment, Communications Test (see Communications Test Equipment)
Equipment, Current Measuring ...... 284,305,351 -353,375,426-430,434-436
Equipment, IC Test ........ .. ....... ... .. ...... .. .................................................... 81 -82
Events Delay ................................................. .. .. ..... ......... .... ......................... 281
Extender, Multifunction Interface ........................................................... 388
F
F Adaptors ............................................................
.. ..................... . 444
Fast Rise Pulse Generator .................................. ....... ......... 287-289,367-369
Fast Transfer Storage Oscilloscopes .. ............................. .......... .. .. ...... . 332
Fault Locating Cable Testing .... ... .. .......................................................... 139
FET Probes ..... ......... .. ....................................................... 426,428,431 ,432,435
Fiber Optic Cable Testers .............................. ............. .. .. .. .. .............. 138-139
File Manager ........ ......... .. .. .. .. .. ... ... ................................................................ 113
File System, Multi User ......................................... .................................. 112
Filters
Bandpass/Amplifier .............. ................ .. ............ ................ ... ........... .. ... 376-377
CRT Light ......
.. . . . . . . . . . ......... ................ ... ........................ 447
CRT Mesh .......................................................................... .. ........... .. .............. 447
Floating Measurements (Isolated) .................................................. 420-423
Formatters, Display .. .. .. .... .... ............................................................ ............ 57
Four Trace Amplifiers ......................................... ..................... ...... .. ...... .... 304
Frequency Counters ......
.. .................................................. 282,355-362
Function Card .. ... .. .... .. .... .... .... .................... .............................. .................... 389
Function Generators
....... ..... .... ... .. ................... .. .................. 370-374
G
Generators, Signal
Audio Sweep .............................................. ......... .. ... ............ .. ....................... 384
Calibration ................................................................. ... ... .. .. ............... .... 377-380
Constant Amplitude ..................... .................................................... .............. 380
Digital Sweep ............................................................................ ...................... 180
Fast Rise Pulse ......................................................................... 287-289,366-369
Function .............. ..... ....... ... ...... ... .. .. ........ .. ..... ........................................... 370-374
High Frequency ........................................................ ........ .. ..................... 367-369
NTSC .......................................................................................... 160-168,171 -173
PAL and PAL·M ...... ....... ................ ....... .. .. ................................. 161-167,174-177
Pulse .......................... ............... .. .. .... ............. ... ..................................... ... 287-289
Ramp ..............
.. .... .. .. ...... .. .... .. ..... .. .... .. ........... .. .. .......... .. .... 370-374
Rate/Ramp ....
.. ........................................................................... 373-374
RC Oscillator ..
.. ............. ........... .. ............................................. ..... 381 -383
SECAM ... .................
..... .. . .. .......................... . ................ 169-170
Sinewave .
.. .......................................... ....................... 370-374
Squarewave ...
.. ........ ................................................................ 374
Television Sync
.. ... .... .. ...... ........................ ... ..... .. .. 161
Television Test
... ................................ ..................................... ... 169-174
Time·Mark ......
... .. ........................................ ....................... 380
Tracking .. .. ..................
.. ........................................................ 212
Triangle .....................
.. .... .. ........ .. .... .. ..................... .. ............ .. .. ... 373-374
GPIB Products
Cables ............... ..........
.. ........................................................ .. .. ... ..... .. .... 29
Calibration Generator ................................ ....................................... 29,377-380
Controllers ...... .. .... .. . ................................................................ 29,97-99,1 19,391
Counter/Timers .. .............................................................. .. .............. 29,356,358
D to A Converter ................................................. .. .................................. 29,389
Desktop Computers ...... .............................................................. .. .. ....... 29,97-99
Digital Multimeter ...................................................................... .... .. .. .. .. ..... 29,351
Digital Plotter, Interactive X-Y ...................................... .... ...................... 106-107
Digital Storage Oscilloscope .... .. ..... .. ....................................................... 28,331
Digitizers .......................................................................... .. .. .. 28,261,263,265,268
Digitizer Systems ............ .................................................................... 28,228,229
Digitizing Oscilloscope .............. ............ .. .. .. ........................ ............. .. .. ..... 28,294
Extender ................................................... .... .... ..... .... ................................. 29,100
Rle Management System .................................................................. .. ..... 29,112
Interface ................................................................... .. ...... ................... .. ..... 29,388
Logic Analyzer .... ......
.. ........................................................ .......... 28,58
Multiplexer ................................. .............. ............. ..... ......................... ... ..... 29,226
Power Supply .. ............. .. .. ............................. ................................ ............. 29,363
RF Scanner ... .................................................................. ........................... 29,390
Spectrum Analyzers ....
.. .... .. .. .... .. ...... .... ..... ................................ 28,200,204
Waveform Processing Oscilloscopes .......
............... .. ..
.. .. .. ..... 28,259
Waveform Processing Systems .............................. .. ........................ ....... 28,229
13
INDEX
TEK FUNCTIONAL
GPIB Reference ...................
. . .............
.. ............. 21-33
GR Accessories .
... ........................ ..... ...... ....................
.. ......... 444
Graphic Computer Terminals .
.. ... 87-89,91,95
Graphic Systems ............ ...
.... .........................
.. .... .. 86-107
Graphic Units, Interactive .............. .................. ..
.. ..................... 86-107
Graphics Products, Computer (see Computer Graphics Products)
Graphics Software Library ..................... ............................................ 101 ,104
Ground Adaptors, Probe . ........................
.. .............. 447
Ground Isolation Monitor
......... 420-422
Ground Leads, Probe ........ .......... ..... ...... ........
... 442
H
Hard Copy Units
.................
.. 108
Hard Copy Video Units
.......... 109
High Brightness Monitor .................
... 157
High Current Transformer
.................... 375,434,436
High Frequency Oscilloscopes ...................
237-260,312-321 ,330-333
High Frequency Signal Generators
..................................... 367-369
High Gain Oscilloscopes ... .........................
.. .......... 237-260,291-306
High Resolution Monitor
................................. 120,121 ,123,154-159
High Voltage Probe ...
..... 354,420,423,426,440
Hoods, Viewing ...........
.. ............................... 447
Housing Accessory, BNC
................ ..
.. ........ 444
I
Image forming Module .
.. ................ 110
Input Adaptors, Cable ............ .....
.. ................. 444
Input/Output Card, Digital
..... 389
Inserters, VITS ..
......
171 ,174,191
Instrument Carts, Mobile .
.. .................................. 424-425
Instrumentation, Programmable ........ 21 -33,200-204,226,228-229,261 ,263,
265,268,351 ,356,358,363,372,378,388,390
Instrumentation Systems ............................ .................. .... .. ............... 225-229
Instruments, Digital Service ......................
.. ................ 57,67,69,137
Instruments, Digital Development
..... 54-76
Integrated Circuit Curve Tracer ...... ..... .... ..
.. ............... 403
Integrated Circuit Test Equipment
................. 81-82
Interactive Digital PloHer .. ........................
. 106-107
Interactive Graphic Units ........................
.. ............. 86-107
Interface Extender, Multifunction .
.. .................. 388
Interface Products .. .... .. .... . ........ ............ .. ...
...... .. .... ........ ... 388-389
Isolated (Floating) Measurements
............. 420-423
L
Laboratory and Portable Instrument Carts
......... 424-425
Latches, Digital ... .. ........... ....................... ........ .. .....
.. 57,365
Leads, Patch Cord ... .................. .........
. 444
Leads, Probe Ground ..........................
.. ... 442
Library, Graphics Software
..... 101 ,104
Light Filters, CRT
........................... ...... 447
Light Measurement .
.. ............. 406-409
Locator, Cable Fault .................
. .................. 139
Logic Analyzers .......................................
.. .................... 54-76
Logic Probe .................................................................................... 77,430,433
Low Frequency Oscilloscopes .
291 -308,322-329,334-337,385-387
M
Mainframes
General Purpose Instruments .
.. ............................... 342-346
Oscilloscopes ..............................................
..... 230-260,291 -297,300,301
Measurements
Automatic Video
.............................................................. 184-188
Current ........................
284,305,351-353,375,426-430,434-436
Isolated (Floating)
............................................................ ... 420-423
Light
........
................... 406-409
Mechanical Transducers
........ .. ...... . .. ............
.. ............... 293
Temperature .
.... .....
.. ... 352,354,432
Memory, Disc Storage
.................... 112-113
Mesh Filters, CRT ........
. .................. .. ...
.. ........... 447
Metallic Cable Tester ................ ...... .. ...........................
.. ............ 141
Microcomputer Development Products .................................... .. .. 37-53
Microwave, Spectrum Analyzers ...................................... ............ 198-207
Military Designator AN/USM 281C Oscilloscope .....
.. ........ 248-249
Military DeSignator AN/USM 425 Oscilloscope .
............ 318-319
Minicomputer Based Signal ProceSSing Systems
................... 228
Mixed Sweep (Dual Time Base) Oscilloscopes ..
.. ... 279,314,332
Mixers, Waveguide ................................................................................... 203
Mobile Instrument Carts
......... ...... ..
.. ....... 424-425
Modular Probes ...... ................ .. ..
.. ... 428,437-439
Module, Image Forming
...................... 110
14
Monitors
Bistable Storage ................................
.. ........ 123-124
Color Television Picture ...................
.. .................. 154
Color Display . ................................
....... 125,154-159
Computer ................................. .....
.. ............................. 92-95
High Brightness
...............
................. . 118,157
High Resolution
.................
. 120,121 ,123,154-159
Large Screen .
123-125,154-160
Nonstorage .....................
.................. .
.. ... 118,120-122
OEM .................. .............................
117-125,417
Portable Video Test ...........................
.. ............... .......... 142-144
Raster Scan (Video) .
.. ................ 120
RGB Color .
.. ........... 125,157
Storage Display ..............................
.. ......... 123-124
Television Waveform
............. 145-160
Vector Display .
.........................
.. ......................... 150-153
X-V ... ........... .. ...........................................
.. ...... 120-124,152
Mounting Adaptors, Camera . .............................
.. ................... 414
Mounting Dimensions and Adaptors ..... ...... .................. .
.. ... 446
Multifunction Interface, Extender ...... . .....................
. ... 388
Multimeters, Digital (see Digital Multimeters)
Multimode Storage Oscilloscope .. .. ........................ ............ 251-255,332
Multiplexer ... ................................................
.. .... 226
N
N Connector Cables and Adaptors ..... ........ .....
.. .................... 444
Network Analyzers, ROM Packs ..................................................... 131-133
Noise Measurement Set, Television .......... .. ................................ .. ....... 178
NTSC Generators ........................................
....... 161 -168,171 -173
o
117-125,417
OEM Products .......
Operational Amplifier ............................................................... .
......... 376
Oscillator ..................
.......................................... ..
........ 383-384
Oscilloscope Amplifiers (also see Plug-in Units)
Oscilloscope Calibration Equipment ............................... 377,379,380-381
Oscilloscope Cameras
................................................... 414-416
Oscilloscope Carts ..... ..... ........ ...............
.................. 424-425
Oscilloscopes
Battery Operated .
.. ............... 309-337
Calibrated (Mixed Sweep)
........... 279,314,332
Computer Controlled .................. .......... .......
.. ....................... 225-229
Coupled with Temperature
.......... .. ......
.. .............................. 284,317
CRT Readout . .
.. ..............
230-260,296-297,302
Curve Tracers
........................................ ........ 396-405
Data Analyzer .
.. ........................................................ ........ 54-77
Delayed Sweep ......... 237-260,276-279,287 ,296-301 ,307-310,312-324,330-333
Differential Input
237-260,272,294-297,300,305-306
Digital Delay
..................... ................................. 237-260,281 ,365
Digital Readout . ........................ 230-260,296-297,302,317,320-321 ,325,330
Digitizing
................................
............. 258-266,294,295,310,330,331
DMM ...........................
................................ 284,316,320-321,325,327
Dual Beam ........................... .. ... ...... ........ .................... ........
.. ......... 242,301
Dual Trace ....................................... 237-260,291 -306,309-325,328-337,385-387
High Frequency..........................
237-260,312-321,330-333
High Gain
........................... .................................. 237-260,291-306
Low Frequency .
291 -308,322-329,334-337,385-387
Military DeSignator AN/USM 281C .
. ................................. 248-249
Military Designator AN/USM 425 ......................
. 318-319
Mixed Sweep (Calibrated) ................... .
................................ 279,314,332
Nonplug-in ............................ ........... ........
.. .................................... 309-337
Plug-in ................................................... ..
237-260,291-306,384-387
Portable .
.. .... 309-337
Programmable .. .......................................................... .. ... 21-31 ,259,268,294
Rackmount . 240-247,254-257,293-297,300,312-317,321,329,331,344,384-387
Readout CRT .
230-260,296-297,302
Ruggedized ....................
248-249,318-319
Sampling Plug-in .............. ...
................................. 285-289,308
Storage
252-256,300·301,334-337,386
Bistable .
Digital ..........................
. ... 234,259,294-295,299,310-330
Dual Beam
...... 301
Fast Transfer ... ... ................................... ........ .. ..... .
.. ............ 332
Multimode .
...................................... 251 -255,332
Reference Information
................... .. .................................. 250-251
Variable Persistence ..........
252-253,255-257,297,332-333
Television .
................. 234,279,310,316,330,332,337
Waveform Processing ............................................................... 225-229,259-260
X-V Plotting
237'249,291 -301 ,310,312,325,330-334,384,387
TM 500 .
................. 385-387
TEK
P
................. ..... .. .. .. .......... 315
Packs Ba"ery
...................... .
.. 161-167,174-177
PAL and PAL-M Generators
Panel Plug-in Chassis, Blank .
....... 446
Patch Cords, Leads ...... .
.. ... 444
.. ................. ................ ..... ........ 60
Pa"ern Generator Probes .... .
Photometer/Radiometer, Digital ..
................ 406
Picture Monitor, Color Television
.... .. ......................... 154,157
Plug-ins
General Purpose Instruments ........................................................................ 338
Oscilloscope .. .. .... .. ... ...... .. ....................................................................... 237-263
Plo"ers, Interactive Digital X-V ........................................................ 106-107
Plug-in Carrying Cases ......................................... .. ................. .. .... ... 214,447
Plug-in Chassis, Blank Panel .. ................................................................. 446
Plug-in Storage Cabinets ... ...... ............................................................ 349
Plug-in Units
Ac RMS Digital Voltmeter
........................................................ 350-353
Bandpass Filter/Amplifier .
..... .. .... .. .... . 377
Calibration Generators .. ................
..... ... .................................. 377-380
CATV Preamp .....
.... . 213
CRT Readout
........... ... ... .. ... .. ..... 290
Curve Tracers .. .
................................... 290-308,404
Delayed Sweep Sampler ......
..................... .
.... . 287
Delaying Time Bases ............
........... 276'279,287,299,307-308
Differential Amplifiers ........ ...
........................
....... 272.305-306
Differential Comparator Amplifier ..
...... ..... .... ....... .... .......... ........... 272.305
Digital Counters ..... ... ... ... ...... ....... ...... .
.... .... .... ... ... ... ............ 282,355-362
Digital Delay
................. '"
............................................. .... ... 281 .365
Digital Multimeters ...
..... ... ......... 284.349-354
Digitizer Time Base ................. .................
....... .................... 295.299
Dual Differential Amplifier .......
..... .
..... ... ... .. ... ... 306
Dual Time Base (Mixed Sweep)
......................................... 278,279,307
Dual Trace Amplifiers .... . ..... ... ... ........ . .. 268,271 .274,287,298,302,304,308,404
Dual Trace Differential
.. ... ... ....... ..
..... ... ... ... ... .. ..... ... . 306
FET Probe Amp .. ... ..... ... .. .. ... .
................ ........................................... 273
Four Trace Amplifier
............................................... 304
Operational Amplifier
.. ...... ...... .. .. .. .. .. ....... .. ..... .. .. .. .. .. 376
Oscillators .. ...... ... .. ..
.. .... .. .............................. 381 ,383-384,387
Oscilloscopes .. .
.. ................ 237-260,291 -306,384-387
Power Supplies
to 20 V Variable ..................
.. ........................ ................. ... .. .. 363-365
for Plug-in Units .
.. ..................................................... .. 342·348
Programmable ...................
.. ..... .. ................................ 363-364
Programmable ............................. 20-33,268,351 ,356,358,363,372,378,388,390,
Ramp Generator ...........................
.. .......................... ...... .. .... ......... 370-374
Rate/Ramp Generator ............ ..........................................
........... 370-374
RF Sweep Generator ..
.. ............................................ 377,381
Sample/Hold Digital Voltmeter
.......................................................... 284
Sampling
............ ......
.. ............................. .... .. ..... 285-289,308
Sampling Heads ..
.. .................................................. 288-289
Single Time Bases ..........
.. ......................... 275-277,280,285,298,299,307
Single Trace Amplifier ....
270'274,285-286,304-306
Spectrum Analyzers .... ..... .... .....
.. ..................
.. .............. 206-211
TOR .. .
.....
................................... ..... .. .... 286
Tracking Generators ....... ....................
.... .. .......... ..
... .... .... .. .. .. 212
Universal CounterlTimers ...... .................... ......
.. ............... 282,355-362
Polarized Viewers ........................... .......................................................... 447
Portable Instrument Carts, Lab
... .... ... .............
.. ........... 425
Portable Oscilloscopes ....
.. ............................................. 309·337
Portable Oscilloscope with
Digital Multimeter/Temperature ........... ..... ...... ............
.. ...... 284,317
Portable Oscilloscope Power Supply .................................... ..... 315,319
Portable Spectrum Analyzer ........ ............................................ .. ... 199-205
Power Divider, GR ...... ................ ........ .. .... .. ...... .. ...... .. .... .
.. ....... 444
Power Divider, SMA (3 mm)
..........................................
.. ..... 444
Power Supplies
to 20 V Variable .
.... 363-365
Accessory ................................... .
.............. 431
Battery .. ........... .. ..
...... 319,348
for Plug-in Units ............... .. ....... ..
................. .. ............... 342-348
Portable Oscilloscope ................... ..
315,319
Programmable ......................... .
................ ...... .......... 363-364
Preamp Amplifier, CATV
.................................. 213
Preamp, Spectrum Analyzer
. . ... 213
Printers, Matrix ................ ..
... ...............
.. .... 52,111
Probe Adaptors .... .. .... . ........................... .
................... 444
...... .. .. ....... ....... 375,437-438
Probe Amplifiers, Current .................... .
Probe Chart, Recommended
........................... .. 426-430
Probe Ground Leads ..
................................. 444
o
o
FUNCTIONAL
INDEX
Probe Grounding Adaptors ....
.... ............ ....
.. ............. .. .. .. .. 444
Probe Tips
........ ........ . ........... ...... .... ........ .... ..
..... .. .......... 444
Probes
Accessories .................
.. ........................................... 442-443
Current ............. .. ............. ......... .. .... ..
..... .. 375,426'430,435-436
Data Acquisition ........................ ............................................................. 77,430
Differential ...................
.. ..................................................... 426,432,441
Environmental .............
.. .... . .... .. .. .. ............. 433
FET and 50 Ohm ................................................................ 426,428,431-432,435
High Current ............................................................................................. 375,434
High Voltage ............................................. .......................... 354,420,423,426,440
Logic ......................................... .. ... ... ... ............ .. ..... ...... ............ ..... ...... 77,430,433
Modular .................................................................. .... ...... ........... .. ... .. 428,437-439
Pattern Generator ... ...... ... ... ........ ............................................... ....................... 60
Recommendations ..... .. ......... ......... .............. .. ...... ... ........ .. .... ... .... .... .. . 426-430
RF ................
.. ................... . .... .... .. ............ ... .... .... .. .... .. .. .......... .. .. .............. 433
Temperature ... ......... .
.. ........................................................ 352,354,432
Sampling
.......................................................................... 429
Voltage ........ .. .. .
................... 426-427,429-430,432-433,437-441
Word Recognizer .. .............................. .... .
.. .. .... .......... 77
Programmable Amplifiers .......................................................... ...... 270,275
Programmable Digitizer ..................................................................... 258-266
Programmable Instrumentation (see GPIB Products)
Programmable Oscilloscopes .......................................... 21 -31 ,259,268,294
Programmable Spectrum Analysis .... ...... .. .............................. .... .... . 363-364
Processing Systems, Signal (see Signal Processing Systems)
Protective Covers
.... ............ .. .. .. .. .......
.. .... 447
Pulse Generators
.............. ... ....... .................. ... .... .... .. .............. .. .. ........ .. 287
R
Rack Adaptors .....
.... .................. ...........
.. ...... .. .... ...... 446
Rackmount Model Instrument Carts
.... .. ........................ .. . 424,425
Rackmount Oscilloscopes ............... 240-247,254-257,293-297,300,312-317
Ramp Generators ................................................................................. 370-374
Raster Scan Display Units .... .. .. .. ...... ........ ............. .......... .. ........ ..... ...... .... 120
Raster Scan/Video Hard Copy Units ..................................................... 109
Rate/Ramp Generators ....................................................................... 373-374
RC Oscillator .. ...... .. .... .. .... .. ...... .. ..
.. .............. .. ................. ... 383-384
Readout Oscilloscopes, CRT ..........
.. ................ 230-260,296-297,302
Readout Oscilloscopes, Digital .....
.. ...... 230-260,296-297,302,317,
320-321 ,325,330
Readout Plug-ins, CRT ..........................................
.. .. ..................... 290
Recorder, Continuous Reference Information
.............. ...... .. .. 125
Recorder, Digital Cartridge Tape .... ....................................................... 113
Reference Information
Camera Recommendations ....
.. .. ..... ...... ...... .. .... .. .... ... ... ...... .. .... 411-414
CRT Phosphors ............................................. .. .. .. ...... .................. .. .. .... .. .... .. .. 219
General Purpose Interface Bus ............................... ............. .......... ....... .. . 21-33
Modular and Integrated Oscilloscopes
........................................... .. .. .. . 216
Oscilloscope Specifications .......... ...... ...... ...... .. ............
.. ................. 217
Probe Recommendations .... . ................
.. .... .... . 426-430
Sales, Ordering, Customer Support .....
.. ...................... .... .... .. .. .. ...... 3-9
Sampling Applications ... ........................... ........
.. ..... ........... 224
Signal Processing .................................. ... ... .... .. ..... ..... .... ... ...... ........ .. ............ 225
Storage Displays .............. ............ ................ .... .. .....
.. .. .. .... .. .. .. .. .... .... .. 220
Waveform Digitizers .. .. .......... .... . .... .. ............................................................ 223
Reflectometer Cable Testing, Time Domain ......... .. .... .. ..... .... .. ....... .. .. . 286
Refreshed Alphanumeric Terminals ....
.. ...... ........ .. .... . 85-99
RF Probe .. .. ........ .. ........
.. .. ...... ..
.. .... .. ........ .............................. 433
RGB Color Monitors ............................................................... .. .... .. .. .... 125,157
ROM Packs
Network Analyzers ........
.. .......... ....... .... .... .. .. .. ..... .. ................... 131 -133
Desktop Computers ................................................................................. .. .. 100
Ruggedized Oscilloscopes ....................... ................. ........ 248-249,318-319
S
Sample/Hold Digital Voltmeter . .... .... .. .... ..... ...
.. ............... 284
Sampler, Delayed Sweep .. ....... ........................
.. ................. 287,308
Sampling Accessories .. .. . .. .................. ...... ..........
.. .................. 286-289
Sampling Heads Plug-in Units .. ........ ....... ..........
.. .. .. .. ........... 288-289
Sampling Plug-in, Delayed Sweep ............................. .. ... .... .. .. .. ..... 287-308
Sampling Plug-in Units
. ...... .. .............
.. .. 285-289,305,308
Sampling Probes .. . .................................................................................. 429
SCOPE-MOBILE Carts $ ..
.. ........... ...... .... ................ .. .... 424-425
Semicondutor
Automatic Test Equipment .
.............. ............... 78-84,225'229,340-392
Curve Tracers .... ..
.. ...... .. .... .. .... .. ... .... .. .. .. . .................. 396-405
Servicing Aids, Digital ................. .............................. 57,67,137,365,428-433
Single Time Bases ...........
... 275-277,280,285,298-299,307
Sideband Analyzers, Television
............ .... . .......... 210,213
15
INDEX
TEK FUNCTIONAL
Signal Generators
........ 384
Audio Sweep ..
.......... 377-381
Calibration .......... .
Constant Amplitude
......... ............................ 380
..................
.. ................... 180
Digital Sweep ........ ...................
..... 287-289,367-369
Fast Rise Pulse .
.......... 370-374
Function .........
.....
...... 367-369
High Frequency
..... 160-168,171 -173
NTSC.
....... 161-167,174-177
PAL and PAL-M
Pulse
.................................................. 287
Ramp ........................ ..
.......................... ... .... 370-374
Rate/Ramp .................. .
........................ ................ 373
.. .. .... .. ..... 381 -383
RC Oscillator ........ ..
... 169-170
SECAM ......................... ........... ..
........... _......... 370,374
Sinewave .......... .
.. ....... 374
.. ................... ..
Squarewave .............
.. ......... 161
Television Sync ...... .....
.. .............. ..
Television Test Signal
...... ......... .
....... 169-174
Time-Mark ................ ................ .
370,380
.................
... 212
Tracking ...................... .. .
..... 373
Triangle .......... ..
Signal Pickoff ....... ............ ..
......... 436
Signal Processing Systems
Minicomputer Based .
.. ............ 228
Desktop Computer Based
.................. .. ............................. 225-229
Signal, TV Correctors
.................. .. ...... .. .......... .. ........ .. ....... 189
Single Trace Amplfiers .................... ............... 234,270-271 ,274,285-286,304
SMA (3mm) Accessories ......................................................................... 444
Software Products ........................ .... ........... .... ..
41 -50,100-105,225-229
Spectrum Analyzers
Accessories ........................... ..
.. ........ .. .. . 214
.... 206-209
Digital Storage ............ ..
...... 206-211
Plug-in
.................. .
........ 199-205
Portable ........................... .
......................... 213
Preamp ...... ..
Programmable
....... 363-364
..... 213
Step Attenuators ..
Storage
Cabinets, Plug-in
.......... .. .....
.. .. .. .. .. 446
Display Monitors ... ...................
. ........ 123-124
Memory, Disc ...........................
.. .................................................. 112-113
Oscilloscopes, Digital .................................. 234,259,294-295,299,310,330,331
Oscilloscopes, Digitizing ................ ...
258,266,294,310,330,331
Spectrum Analyzers, Digital
............ .. _........
.. ................... 206-209
Sweep Generator, Audio
............ .......... ............
.. 384
Swept Frequency Systems ........... ......
.. .. .. .. 212
Sync Generator, Television
............ .. .. 161
Systems
Automatic Test .................................. .
78-84
......... . 225-229
Data Acquisition .............................. .
............ 229
Desktop Computer Based .............. ..
Graphic ..............................................
............ 86-107
.. ............ .. . 212
Swept Frequency .. .
Test and Measurement
............ 338-395
T
Television Products
Automatic Video Correctors ...................... .. ..
....... 189-190
Automatic Video Measurement Set
......... 184-188
Calibration Fixtures .
.................... 179
Color Picture Monitor
.. 154,157
Demodulators ................ .
.. ... 181-183
...... 180
Digital Sweep Generators
Noise Measurement Set
..... 178
Oscilloscopes .. .. .... .. ................ .. .. .
... 234,279,310,316,330,332,337
Picture Monitor, Color
.......................
............ 154,157
Sideband Analyzers
210,213
Signal Correctors .
............. ........ 189
Sync Generators ........................... ..
..... 161
Test Signal Generators ............... ..
.. ........... 169-174
Vectorscopes ................................................ .
.................... 150
VITS Inserters ...................
.. .............. .
.. ..... 171 ,174,191
Waveform Monitors
.................. .
.......................... 145
X-V Monitor ................................ .
........ 153
Temperature Measurements
. 352,354,432
.
...........
352,354,432
Temperature Probe .........
....................... 85-99
Terminals, Alphanumeric ........................ .
............ 89,91
Terminals, APL .. .....
Terminals, Color Graphics
........... 96
.............. 92-94
Terminals, Display ... ........................................ .. .
16
Terminals, Graphic Computer .... ...
. 87-89,91 ,95
Terminals, Refreshed Alphanumeric
. 85-99
Terminations
BNC ......................... ... ..................
.................
..... 444
GR
.... .
...................................
..................... 444
SMA (3 mm) ... . ... .
..... . ..................................... ................... 444
Test and Measurement Systems ...
......
.. ....... 338-395
Test Equipment, Communications (see Communications Test Equipment)
Test Equipment, IC .. .. .. .. .. .. .......
.. ...................................... 81 -82
Test Monitor, Portable Video ........ .. ......
.. .. 142-144
Test Signal Generators .. . ...... .. ............. .
..................
.. .. . 169-174
Test System, Automatic .... ....
. .. 78-84
Testers, Digital
....... 127-136
Testers, Fiber Optic Cable
...... 138-139
Testers, Metallic Cable ......... .... .. ...... .. .... .....................
.. ........ 141
Testing, Cable (see Cable Testing)
.. .......... 284,317,349,351 -353
Thermal Readout ..............
Time Bases, Delaying ............................................ 276,279,287,299,307-308
Time Bases, Digitizer ...... ...... .. .. .......
.. .......... 295,299
Time Bases, Dual (Mixed Sweep) ................................ . .......... 279,314,332
Time Bases, Single .....
275-277,280,285,298-299,307
Time Domain Reflectometer Cable Testing .................. .. .................... 286
Time Interval Counters .......
.. ..................... 282,355-362
Time Mark Generators .......
.. ..................................... 380
Tips, Probe
.......... ............. ...
......................... ... ............. 444
Trace Recording Cameras .
.. .......... 411 -419
Tracking Generators ........................ ..
.. .......... 212
Transducers ...... .... . ........ ...... .. ........ ....
.. ...................... 293
Transformers, High Current ..
.. ......................... 375,434,436
Transistor Curve Tracers .. .
.. ................................ 396-405
Transient Digitizer .................
..................
.. ... 261 -266
Triangle Generators
.......................................... 373
U
Universal Counters ..
.......... 282,355-362
V
Variable Persistence Storage Oscilloscopes .
. .. 252-253,255-257
Vectorscopes ................................................ .
. . 150
Video Corrector, Automatic ....................... .................
.. ... 189-190
Video Hard Copy Units ............................. ......
.. ... 109
Video Measurement Set, Automatic
.............. ...
.. ... 184-188
Video (Raster Scan) Monitor .. .............. ....
.. .. .. .. ................ 120
Video Test Monitor (Portable)
....... 142-144
Viewing Hoods and Accessories ................... .................. .
.. ............ 447
VITS Inserters .......................................
.. .............................. 171 ,174,191
Voltage Probes ......................................... 426-427,429-430,432-433,437-441
Voltmeter, Ac RMS Digital ...... .. ..
... 350-353
Voltmeter, Sample/Hold Digital ................. ..
.. ............ 284
W
Waveform Digitzer Amplifier ................ ..... .... .......... ........ ...... ...... . .... . 302
Waveform Digitzer, Programmable
........................................ 261 -266
Waveform Digitizing Instruments
....... 225-229,258-266,268,302
Waveform Monitors ............................................................
.. ..... 145
Waveform Monitors, Television ............................. ...................... 145-160
Waveform ProceSSing Oscilloscopes .. ..................... ....... 225-229,259-260
Waveguide Mixers ..................................................................................... 203
Word Recognizier Probe .... ...... ...... ...... ..............
.. ................ 77
Writing Speed Enhancers, Camera ...............................
.. ...... 414-416
X
X-V Monitor
................... .......... 120-124,152,153
............... _.......................... 106-107
X-V Plotting
TEK
ALPHANUMERIC
INDEX
Type
Instrument Description
AA 50 1
AF 501
AM 501
AM 502
AM 503
AM-6565/U
AN/USM-281C
AN/USM425(V) 1
A6302
A6303
A6901
A6902
CG 5001
Distortion Analyzer ............................... 382
Bandpass Filter/Amplifier .......... .. .... .. .. 377
Operational Amplifier ........................... 376
Differential Amplifier ............................ 376
Current-Probe Amplifier ......... 375,428,434
Amplifier Plug-In ................................... 248
Ruggedized Oscilloscope ................... 248
Portable Oscilloscope ......................... 318
Current Probe ........................ 375,428,434
Current Probe ............ ............ 375,428,434
Ground Isolation Monitor ..................... 422
Isolator ................................... .. ...... .. ..... 423
Programmable Oscilloscope
Calibration Generator .. ................ . 377 ,378
Programmable Oscilloscope
Calibration Generator .......................... 379
Current Transformer ............. .. ...... 428,436
Current Transformer .. .. .... .. ... .. ...... 428,436
Signal Pickoff ....................................... 436
Current Transformer .. .. .... .. ........... 428,436
CRT Terminal .. .. ...................................... 51
Oscilloscope Camera ................... 414,417
Oscilloscope Camera ................... 414,418
Oscilloscope Camera ................... 414,418
Oscilloscope Camera .. ................. 414,419
Oscilloscope Camera ................... 414,415
Oscilloscope Camera ................... 414,415
Oscilloscope Camera ................... 414,416
Digital AnalysiS System ................. ... 59-66
Digital Analysis System ........... ... ... ... 59-66
Digital Analysis System ................. ... 59-66
Digital Analysis System ........ .. .......... 59-66
Digital Analysis Mainframe .................... 66
Digital Analysis Mainframe
CG 551AP
CT-1
CT-2
CT-3
CT-5
CT8500
C-28
C-30B
C-31B
C-5C
C-51
C-53
C-59A
DAS 9101
DAS 9102
DAS 9103
DAS 9104
DAS 9109
DAS 9119
DAS 9121
DAS 9122
DAS 9123
DAS 9124
DAS 9129
DC 5009
DC 5010
DC 503A
DC504
DC 508A
DC 509
DC 510
DD 501
DF1
DF2
DL2
DL 502
DM44
DM 501A
DM 5010
DM 502A
FG 501A
FG 5010
FG 502
Page
~~;rVr5i~i~~7 ~naiy'sis' S'yste'm'::::::::::"58-~
Color Digital Analysis System ....... ... 58-66
Color Digital Analysis System .......... 58-66
Color Digital Analysis System .......... 58-66
Color Digital Analysis Mainframe .... 58,66
Programmable 135 MHz
Universal CounterfTimer ............... 355,356
Programmable 350 MHz
Universal CounterfTimer ...... .. .. ..... 355,358
125 MHz Universal Counter ...... ... 355,360
80 MHz CounterfTimer .. ...... ...... ... 355,362
1.3 GHz Counter ...... ........ .. ........... 355,360
135 MHz Universal
CounterfTimer ....... .. ...................... 355,356
350 MHz Universal
CounterfTimer ...... .. .... .. ................ . 355,358
Digital Delay .. .......... .. ...... .. .. .. .............. . 365
Display Formatter ...... .. .... .. ... .................. 57
Display Formatter .... .... ...... .... ..... .. ...... .. .. 57
Digital Latch ............. .. ... .... ... ..... .. ...... .. ... 57
Digital Latch .. .... .. .... ... ........................ .. 365
Digital Multimeter ...... .. ............... .... ..... . 317
Digital Multimeter ...... .. ............ .. .... .. .... . 353
Programmable Digital Multimeter .. .... . 350
Autoranging Digital Multimeter .... .. .... . 351
2 MHz Function Generator ........... 370,374
Programmable 20 MHz
Function Generator .. .. .. ................. 371 ,372
11 MHz Function Generator ......... 371 ,374
Type
Instrument Description
FG 503
FG 504,FG 504T
FG 507
3 MHz Function Generator ........... 371 ,374
40 MHz Function Generator ......... 371 ,373
2 MHz Sweeping Function
Generator ...................................... 370,373
Computer Display Module .................. 124
Computer Display Module .................. 124
Computer Display Module .................. 123
Large Screen Computer
Display Module .................................... 124
Automatic Change Over Unit ............. 168
Digital Photometer/Radiometer .......... 409
1 Mn, 75 n , 600 n Input for 7L5 ......... 208
1 Mn, 50 n , 600 n Input for 7L5 ......... 208
Programmable Multifunction
Interface ................. .............. ............... . 388
Interface Extender ........ .. ...... .. ............. 388
Sample/Hold Module .................. ..... .... 284
Fiber Optic TDR ................................... 138
Ruggedized Oscilloscope ................... 166
50 MHz Pulse Generator .... .... ...... 367,369
250 MHz Pulse Generator .. .. ........ 367,369
Calibration Generator ................... 377,380
Dual Output 50 MHz Pulse
Generator ................ .... ...... .. .......... 367,368
50 MHz Pulse Generators ............ 367,368
Graphics Software Library .................. 104
Graphics Software Library .................. 101
Microprocessor Personality Module ..... 71
Microprocessor Personality Module ..... 71
Microprocessor Personality Module ..... 71
Microprocessor Personality Module .... . 73
Microprocessor Personality Module ..... 73
Microprocessor Personality Module ..... 73
Microprocessor Personality Module ..... 73
Microprocessor Personality Module ..... 73
Microprocessor Personality Module ..... 74
Microprocessor Personality Module ..... 74
Microprocessor Personality Module ..... 74
Microprocessor Personality Module ..... 74
Personality Module Adaptor ...... .. .... 64,66
Programmable Triple
Power Supply ............................... . 363,364
Power Supply .. .. .. .. ... .. .......... .. ....... 363,364
Triple Power Supply .......... ........ ... . 363,365
10X Probe ............................. .. ... ... ..... ... 429
100X Probe ........................................... 440
10X Probe ............................................. 433
100X Probe .......................... .. ............... 440
10X Probe .................................... .. ...... . 429
1000X Probe ...................... .... .............. . 440
Current Probes .................... .. .... .... 428,435
1X Probe .. .. ........................................... 429
FET Differential Probe ...... ............ 428,432
10X Probe .. ........................ ..... .. ..... 428,432
10X Probe ......................... .. .... .. ............ 441
10X Probe ......................... .. ......... .. ....... 441
10X Probe .. .... .. .......................... .... 428,432
100X Probe .... .. .......................... .... 428,432
10X or 1X Probe .................................. 441
10X or 1X Probe .................................. 441
1X Probe ............................ ... .. ...... .. ...... 438
Voltage Probe .................. .. ..... ... .......... 428
10X Probe ................................ ... .......... 438
10X Probe ............................................. 438
GMA101A
GMA102A
GMA103
GMA125
GV3257A
J16
L3
L3-1
MI5010
MX 5010
M2
OF150
OS-245(P)/U
PG 501
PG 502
PG 506
PG 507
PG 508, PG508T
PLOT 10
PLOT 50
PM 101
PM 102
PM 103
PM 104
PM 105
PM 106
PM 107
PM 108
PM 109
PM 110
PM 111
PM 112
PMA100
PS 5010
PS 501-1
PS 503A
P6006
P6007
P6008
P6009
P6010
P6015
P6021 ,P6022
P6028
P6046
P6048
P6053B
P6055
P6056
P6057
P6062B
P6063B
P6101
P6104
P6105
P6106
Page
Color identifies It8N products.
17
INDEX
TEK ALPHANUMERIC
Type
P6107
P6108
P6120
P6125
P6130
P6149
P6201
P6202A
P6302
P6303
P6401
P6406
P6420
P6430
P6451
P6452
P6453
P6454
P6455
P6456
P6601
SC 501
SC 502
SC 503
SC 504
SG 502
SG 503
SG 504
SG 505
SI5010
SPG1
SPG11
SPG12
SPG2
SPG22
S-1
S-2
S-3A
S-3220
S-3270
S-3275
S-3280
S-3295
S-4
S-5
S-6
S-51
S-52
S-53
S-54
TDC
TDC-1
TDC-2
TD-1085/U
TG 501
TM 5003
TM 5006
Instrument Description
Page
10X Probe ...... " ..................................... 439
10X Probe ............................................. 438
10X Probe ................ .. ........................... 437
5X Counter Probe ... ...... ......... .. .. .. . 362,428
10X Probe .......... ... ... ... ........ ..... .. ..... ...... 437
10X Probe ............... ... ... .... ... .. .... ...... ... .. 439
FET Probe ...................................... 428,431
FET Probe ............... ... ...... ... ..... .. .... 428,431
Current Probe
(See A6302) .. .......... .............................. 428
Current Probe
(See A6303) ................... ....... ........ ...... .. 428
logic Probe ................................... 428,433
Word Recognizer Probe ......... ... .. .... ... . 428
1X RF Probe .............. .. ..... ...... 354,428,433
Temperature Probe ........ .... ... ... ........ .... 428
Data Acquisition Probe ....................... 428
Data Acquisition Probe ... ...................... 77
High-Speed Data Acquisition Probe .... 77
100 MHz Clock Probe ........................... 77
TIUMOS Pattern Generator Probe ..... 77
ECl Pattern Generator Probe ..... .. ....... 77
Temperature Probe ... .................... 354,428
5 MHz Oscilloscope .... ....... ......... .... .. .. 384
15 MHz Dual Trace Oscilloscope ....... 387
10 MHz Storage Oscilloscope ............ 386
80 MHz Oscilloscope .......................... 385
RC Oscillator ... ..................................... 381
leveled Sinewave Generator ... ... 377,381
leveled Sinewave Generator ...... 377,381
Oscillator ....... ............. .... ....................... 384
Programmable Scanner ........ ... ........... 390
Television Sync Generator .................. 161
Television Sync Generator .................. 161
Television Sync Generator .................. 161
Television Sync Generator .. ........... ..... 161
Television Sync Generator .... .... .... ...... 161
Sampling Head .......................... .. ........ 288
Sampling Head ............... ... .. ................ 288
Sampling Head .. ... ... .... ..... .. .. ............... 288
Automated Test System ... .. ... .. .... .... .. .... 80
Automated Test System ... ..... ... .. ..... ... ... 82
Automated Semiconductor
Test System ............. .. ................... ..... ... .. 81
Automated ECl Test System ............ ... 83
VlSI Semiconductor Test System ........ 79
Sampling Head ... .. ..... .. ........................ 288
Sampling Head ..... ........... .... ............ .... 288
Sampling Head .... ................................ 289
Trigger Countdown Head .. ..... .. ...... .. .. 289
Pulse Generator Head ......................... 289
Trigger Recognizer Head ... .. ........ ....... 289
Pulse Generator Head......................... 289
Television Down Converter ........ ... .... .. 181
Television Down Converter ................. 181
Television Down Converter ... ....... .... ... 181
Time Base Plug-In .. ... .. ............... .......... 248
Time Mark Generator ................... 370,380
Three-wide Mainframe ............. .. ... ... ... 343
Six-wide Mainframe ........... ........... ....... 344
Color identifies IA'I products.
18
Type
TM 501
TM 503
TM 504
TM 506,RTM 506
TM 515
TR 502, TR 503
TSG11
TSG12
TSG13
TSG15
TSG16
TSG2
TSG23
TSG3
TSG5
TSG6
TSG7
TSP1
TSP11
TSP21
T912
T922R
WP Series
1101
1105
1106
134
1360P
1360S
1405
1410
1411
1412
1420
1421
1422
1424
143/R143
1430
1440
1450-1
1450-2
1450-3
1460
147A
1470
1474
148/R148
1480C, 1480R
1481C,1481R
1482C, 1482R
1485C, 1485R
149A
1502,1503
172
Instrument Description
Page
One-wide Mainframe ........................... 345
Three-wide Mainframe ......... ... ... ..... .... 345
Four-wide Mainframe ............... ............ 345
Six-wide Mainframes ........................... 346
Five-wide Mainframe ........................... 346
Tracking Generators ............................ 212
Television Test Signal Generator ..... ... 163
Television Test Signal Generator ........ 163
Television Test Signal Generator .. ... ... 164
Television Test Signal Generator ........ 164
Television Test Signal Generator .. ... ... 166
Television Test Signal Generator .. ... ... 163
Television Test Signal Generator ........ 164
Television Test Signal Generator .. ... ... 164
Television Test Signal Generator .. ... ... 164
Television Test Signal Generator ........ 166
Television Test Signal Generator .. ... ... 163
Television Signal Processor ..... ...... .... .. 167
Television Signal Processor ....... .......... 167
Television Signal Processor ... ............. . 167
10 MHz Dual Trace Storage
Oscilloscope .................................. 310,337
15 MHz Rackmount Dual Trace
Oscilloscope ....... ........ .... ... ..... .. .. ... 310,329
Waveform Processing Systems ... 225-229
Probe Power Supply ............................ 431
Battery Power Supply ................... 319,348
Battery Pack ....... ... .... ... .. ... ...... ... ........ .. 315
Current Probe Amplifier ............... 428,435
Programmable Switch Controller .. ...... 226
Switch Matrix ......... ..... .... ... ..... .... ........ .. 226
Television Side-Band Adaptor ...... ... ... 213
NTSC Mainframe .... ... ....... ..... .. ...... .. .... 161
PAL Mainframe .................................... 161
PAl-M Mainframe ... .... .... .... ... ........... ... 161
Television Vectorscope ........................ 152
Television Vectorscope ..... ... .. .............. 152
Television Vectorscope ... ... .... .... ........ .. 152
X-V Display Monitor ... ......... ... ... ........ ... 153
SECAM Television Test Signal
Generator ... ... ......... .. ... ...... .. .. .. ... .... ...... 169
Television Noise Measurement Set .... 178
Automatic Video Corrector ................ . 189
Television Demodulator
Mainframe .. ... .. .. ..... .. ... .... .............. 181 -183
Television Demodulator
Mainframe ........ ..... ... ........... ....... ... 181 -183
Television Demodulator
Mainframe .... .. ........ .. .............. ... .... 181-183
Television Demodulator Mainframe .... 189
Television Test Signal Generator ..... .. . 171
Television Test Signal Generator ........ 168
Television Sync Generator .... .. .. .......... 168
PAL Television Test Signal Generator 174
Television Waveform Monitor ... ..... .... .. 145
Television Waveform Monitor ..... ......... 145
Television Waveform Monitor .............. 145
Television Waveform Monitor .............. 145
Television Test Signal Generator ........ 171
TOR Cable Tester ... ... ..... .. ......... .......... 140
Programmable Test Fixture ...... ..... .... .. 399
ALPHANUMERIC
INDEX
TEK
Type
Instrument Description
176
177
178
1900
1980
200-C
205
206
212
213
214
Pulsed High-Current Fixture ................ 400
Standard Test Fixture .. ....... .. .... .. .. ... .... 401
Linear IC Test Fixture .................... ... .... 403
Television Test Signal Generator ... .. ... 191
Automatic Video Measurement Set ... 184
SCOPE-MOBILE + 1.6V@20mA
VOL < + 0.5 V @ 10 mA; + 0.6 @ 20 mA
VOH -0,6 V to - 1 V
VOL - 1.65 to - 2V
with 50 Ilload to VH - 2 V
Logic Family
TTL- MOS
ECL only
Maximum Number of Inputs - Four data channels expandable to 16 channels with four modules; in high resolution mode
two Channels expandable to eight.
Maximum Sampling Rate - 330 MHz with internal or external
clock. 660 MHz with internal clock.
Memory Depth - 2048 words; 4096 words in high resolution
mode.
Clock - Internal : 3 ns to 5 ns, ± 5%; 10 ns to 5 ms. ± 1%.
External: From P6453 probe, 330 MHz maximum (1 channel
moving), 300 MHz all channels moving. Set Up Time: 3 ns
(4 channels or more), 2 ns (single channel). Hold Time: 3 ns
(4 channels or more), 0 ns (single Channel).
Trigger - Word recognition or pattern sequence comparison
Word Recognition: Single-level data word, externally armable
(from 91 A32 trigger). Delay: Selectable from 60 to 65541 sample periods atter trigger. Pattern-Sequence Comparison : Compare until equal or not equal.
Probe - P6453. See Data Acquisition Probes Table.
65
ANALYZERS
TEK LOGIC
91P16 AND 91P32 PATTERN GENERATOR MODULES
Up to 80 Programmable Data Output Channels.
Instruction Sat
Count(N) - Incremenl N values.
Goto - label and output vector (pattern).
Hold(N) - Hold output and inhibit clock for N cycles.
Repeat(N) - Hold output while generating N clock cycles.
Call - Call subroutine.
Return - Return from subroutine.
Halt - Output vector and inhibit clock.
External Control Lines - From trigger-time/base probe.
Interrupt - Jump to subroutine.
Interrupt Input - External clock probe selectable rising or fall.
ing edge.
Interrupt Setup Time - 7 ns minimum relative to EXT Clock
In . 72 ns minimum relative to clock output.
Interrupt Processing Delay - Four clock cycles (Response
Time).
Pause - Hold temporarily while asserted.
Pause Input - Selectable high or low true.
Pause Holdtime - 14 ns after pattern external clock transition.
Pause Pulse Width - 19 ns. minimum.
Inhibit - Tri-state all outputs while asserted.
Inhibit Input - Selectable high or low true.
Inhibit Delay Time - 70 ns maximum.
Pattern Data Width
91P16 : 16 parallel channels (two 8-ehannel probes).
91 P32 : 32 parallel channels (four 8-ehannel probes).
Expandable: 80 ch (one 91P16, two 91P32's & 10 probes).
Operating Rate - 25 MHz maximum (40 ns cycle time).
Output Data Skew - ... ,0 ns.
Pattern Memory Depth - 254 instructions or words (virtually
unlimited pattern length).
Number of Nested Subroutines - 16 maximum .
Number of Labels - 32 maximum.
Number of Strobes - One strobe per probe, expandable to
10 strobes (three modules, 10 probes).
Strobe Start Time - Selectable from 70 ns to 40.91 ~s in
40 ns steps.
Strobe Pulse Width - Selectable from 40 ns to 40.880 ~s in
40 ns steps.
Strobe Pulse Polarity - Selectable : positive or negative.
Clock Output - One clock line per probe (rising edge signifies
beginning of cycle).
Skew Between Different Probe Output Clocks - ± 5 ns.
Clock - Selectable external or internal.
Internal Clock : 40 ns to 5 ms ± 1% ± 1 ns.
External Clock : 40 ns min. Cycle time; selectable rising or failing edge.
1 clock output per probe.
Pause Input - Selectable high or low true.
Probes
P6455 TTLJMOS Pattern Generator Probe.
P6456 ECL Pattern Generator Probe. See Pattern Generator
Probes Table on previous page.
TAPE DRIVE OPTION 01 (DC 100 TAPES)
Over 160k Bytes
Stores 6 lull configuration instrument set-ups
Stores 30 lull acquisition set-ups
Stores 30 pattern generator files
Stores 30 define mnemonics files
Stores 15 reference memory files
Directory space for 32 files
I/O INTERFACE OPTION 02
RS-232
Selectable Baud Rates - 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600.
Inputs - Pin three Received Data.
Pin 5 Clear to Send
Pin 6 Data Set Ready
Pin 8 Data Carrier Detect
Outputs - Pin 2 Transmitted Data.
Pin 4 Request to Send
Pin 20 Data Terminal Ready
Other - Pin 1 Ground.
Pin 7 Signal Ground
Master/ Slave
Remote control of DAS 9100 by a DAS 9100.
Full duplex, asynChronous via RS-232 to 9600 baud.
GPIB
The Option 02 complies with IEEE Standard 488-1978 and w ith
Tektronix Standard Codes and Formats. (Talker and Listener
only).
Capacitive Load Due to this Device - 100 pF per signal line
maximum.
Lockout and Remote Lights Provided on Keyboard
Selectable Address
Selectable Controller Type
4 Rear-Panel LED's Provide Observable Handshake Lines
- SRO, NDAC , NRFD, DAV
66
FIELD INSTALLABLE OPTIONS
DAS 91 Fl - Field Installed Option, DC 100 Tape Drive
(Includes installation in Service Center) .. ,.................... $1,700
DAS 91F2 - Field Installed Option, GPIB Interface,
RS-232 Hard copy .... ,......,.... ,...................................... $1,300
MODULES
COMPOSITE VIDEO OUTPUT
VON -1.4 V to 1.6 V.
VOFF - 0.3 V to 0.7 V.
VSYNC - 0 V to 0.1 V.
THSYNC - 63.5 ~s ± 0 .1 ~s .
TVSYNC - 16.5 ms ± 0.1 ms.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dimensions
mm
432
241
597
Width
Height
Depth
Weight
kg
Net (without accessories)
22.0
91A32 Data Acquisition Module
in
17.0
9.5
23.5
Ib
48.0
Power - 1,000 VA maximum.
Temperature Range - Operating: O· C to + 50· C. Storage:
- 40 · C to + 65 · C.
Altitude - Operating : 3000 m (10,000 It) maximum. Storage:
15 000 m (50,000 It) maximum.
$4,250
91A04 Data Acquisition Module ......... $7,950
(Four channels at 330 MHz, including probes)
91AE04 Data Acquisition Module ....... $4,950
(Four additional channels at 330 MHz, including probe. Requires 91 A04)
91P16 Pattern Generator Module ....... $3,990
(16 channels at 25 MHz, including probes)
(32 channels at 25 MHz, including probes. Requires 91 P16)
STANDARD CONFIGURATIONS
$12,800
(16 channels at 100 MHz)
DAS 9102 Digital Analysis System
91A08 Data Acquisition Module
(Eight channels at 100 MHz, including acquisition probes,
P6454 Clock Probe required with first module for synchronous
operation)
91P32 Pattern Generator Module ....... $6,990
ORDERING INFORMATION
DAS 9101 Digital Analysis System
$4,990
(32 channels at 25 MHz, including probes)
$14,480
(32 channels at 25 MHz, 16 channels of pattern generation)
See Table on page 72 for available PM 's.
NOTES:
1. When selectin!l modules, check that you do not exceed the
following maximum numbers of modules or channels per
instrument·
TOTAL PER
INSTRUMENT
OTY
(64 channels at 25 MHz, 16 channels at 100 MHz, 16 channels
of pattern generation)
Modules
91A32
91A08
91A04
91AE04
6
3
4
1
3
Requires 91 A04
Color DAS 9121 Digital Analysis
System _____ ._ .......................... ___ ._._. _____ $15,700
91P16
91P32
1
2
Requires 91 P16
Data ACQuisition CH 's
104
DAS 9103 Digital Analysis System ... $18,900
(32 channels at 25 MHz, 8 channels at 100 MHz, 16 channels
pattem generation)
DAS 9104 Digital Analysis System ... $30,755
(16 channels at 100 MHz)
Color DAS 9122 Digital Analysis
System ...... __________________ .____ ................. $17,380
(32 channels at 25 MHz, 16 channels of pattern generation)
Color DAS 9123 Digital Analysis
System _______________ .__ ........................... _ $21,800
(32 channels at 25 MHz, 8 channels at 100 MHz. 16 channels
pattem generator)
Color DAS 9124 Digital Analysis
System ____ ._._ .......................... __ ._________ $33,655
(64 channels at 25 MHz, 16 channels at 100 MHz, 16 channels
of pattern generation)
NOTES:
1 All data acquitision modules, pattern generator modules, and
mainframe options are also available for the standard configurations with the exception of those already included in the
configuration; i.e. DAS 9104 includes the Option 01 Tape
Drive.
2 If standard configurations are ordered with additional modules, check that the correct number of power supplies are
included .
3 The 91 A04 modules can share a + 5 V power supply only
with a 91 A32 data acquisition module or an empty bus slot.
MAINFRAMES
DAS 9109 Mainframe __ ._ ...................... $5,500
DAS 9119 Mainframe .......................... $5,950
(ATE Version) (Deletes CRT and keyboard ; adds Option 02)
DAS 9129 Color Mainframe ................ $8,400
OPTIONS
Option 01 - Tape Drive .......................................... +$1,450
Option 02 - RS-232C,
GPIB and Hardcopy Interface ...................... ,............ +$1,150
Option 03 - Additional Power Supply .... ,.. ,............... +$800
Option 04 - Two Additional Power Supplies .. ,...... +$1 ,600
Option 05 - Rackmount Hardware ........................... +$200
Option 88 - Mainframe Shipped with modules installed and
checked out as part of the mainframe ............................... NC
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORD AND PLUG OPTIONS
Option AI - Universal Euro 220 V/ 16A, 50 Hz ........ ,.... , NC
Option A2 - UK 240 V/13A, 50 Hz ................................. NC
Option A3 - Australian 240 V/l0A, 50 Hz .......... ,........... NC
Option A4 - North American 240 V/ 15A, 60 Hz ............. NC
Option A5 - Switzerland 220 V/ l0A, 50 Hz ...... ,............ NC
SPECIAL
REQUIREMENTS
2. When adding modules, check that the correct number of
power supplies are also selected. The mainframe includes
sufficient power for two modules. One additional power sup.
ply (Option 03) is required for three or four modules. Two
(Option 04) additional power supplies are required for a total
of five or six modules.
PMA 100 Personality Module Adaptor $3,550
(Includes Motorola tape.)
Option 01 - Delete Motorola Disassembly Tape ....... -$175
Option 02 - Delete Motorola Disassembly Tape.
add Intel Tape (062-8589-00) ........................ ,...... ,............. NC
Additional Intel Tape
Order 062-8589-00 .... ,..................................................... $225
Option 03 - Delete Motorola Disassembly Tape,
add Zilog Tape (062-8591-00) ................ ,........................... NC
Additional Zilog Tape
Order 062-8591-00 .......................................................... $225
ADDITIONAL PROBES
P6452 Eight Channel Data Acquisition Probe.
Order 010-6452-01 ......................................................... , $730
P6453 Four Channel 330 MHz High Speed
Data Acquisition Probe. Order 010-6453-01 ............... $1,560
P6454 100 MHz Clock Probe. Order 010-6454-01 ........ $265
P6455 Eight Channel Pattern Generator Probe for TTLJMOS.
Order 010-6455-01 ..................................................... ,.... $575
6456 Eight Channel ECl Pattern Generator Probe.
Order 010-6456-01 ...... ,...... ,............................................ $575
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
l00A Certified Data Cartridge from Tektronix (pkg of five).
Order 119-1350-01 .................................. ,....................... $120
GPIB Cable, two meter. Order 012-0630-03 .................... $90
GPIB Cable, four meter. Order 012·0630-04 ......,.......... $150
RS·232 Cable, two meter. Order 012-0815-00 .... ,........... $55
Hard Copy Unit Cabla, 75 ohm, 42 in Coax, BNC.
Order 012-0074-00 .............................................. ,............. $17
Hardcopy Unit Cable, 75 ohm, 10 in Coax, BNC.
Order 175-2753-00 .................................. ,................. ,.. $13.50
Additional Power Supply. Order 020-0707-00 .............. $750
DAS Set·Up and Hold Calibration Fixture
Order 067-1037-00 ...................................................... , $1,200
Carrying Case for Probes. Order 016-0672-00 ............... $80
Rackmount Hardware Order 016-0463-00 .. ,................. $200
For DAS 9100 Series training and other training information,
contact your local Sales Office or request a copy of tha
Tektronix Customer Training Catalog on the return card.
SONYi'TEKTRONIX@
DATA
ANALYZER
308
Four Analyzers in One
Up to 25 Channels of Word Recognition
Triggering
Ultra-Portable
Easy to Use
Cost Effective
The 308 is a 20 MHz, four-in-one portable Data
Analyzer. It provides parallel timing, parallel state,
serial state and signature analysis in an easy to
use convenient package.
With the color-coded keyboard you can easily
control all the functions of the 308 Data Analyzer.
The 308's unique menu readout displays all of the
status and operator mode information on its selfcontained CRT. The status information is always
displayed as the first line in all modes of operation
to provide you with instant identification of what
you're doing before, during , and after data
acquisitions.
The 308 Data Analyzer provides data acquisition
via one eight-channel high-impedance probe
(1 Mf!, 5 pF) for parallel timing and parallel state
modes. For serial and signature acquisitions, a
single-channel high-impedance probe (10 Mf!,
13 pF) is used. All four modes are provided with a
selectable threshold , TIL or Variable (+ 12 to
-12 V), to allow data acquisitions from any digital
logic family.
Input formats are selectable between Hexadecimal, Binary, Octal or Decimal. For the parallel
state mode, direct display of acquisition memory
is provided in Hex, Binary and Octal simultaneously.
In the Serial State mode the display provides
readout in Hex, Binary and ASCII simultaneously,
plus parity error indication .
In the parallel timing mode, a unique selectable
memory window is provided to allow you to select
the section of acquisition memory you wish to
view. The window size is programmable for 42,
84, or 168 bits of display width.
A cursor mode is provided for parallel timing,
parallel state and serial state that gives word
position information with respect to the delayed
trigger word. For parallel timing the cursor provides decoding of the timing diagram in anyone
of the four formats .
The 308 Data Analyzer comes with an 8 x 252 bit
reference memory to provide compare and "Restart If" functions. The reference memory "Restart
If" function can be used in both parallel modes
and the Serial State mode.
The 308 can have up to 16 bits of external word
recognition with an optional probe. It provides a
word recognizer trigger out signal (TIL) to trigger
other external equipment. An external qualifier
input, selectable for trigger or clock, is provided.
When used in conjunction with the eight-channel
data probe, plus the word recognizer probe, a
total of 25 bits of word recognition for triggering is
provided.
The 308 signature analysis portion gives signatures in two different modes, Repeat and Hold. In
the Repeat mode, a signature is taken and
displayed; once displayed, the 308 takes another
signature. This process repeats until the stop key
is pressed. In the Hold mode, the 308 allows the
acquisition of signatures manually. By pushing
the Hold key, the 308 will acquire and simultaneously display up to eight signatures on the
screen.
CHARACTERISTICS
SIGNAL INPUTS
Parallel Timing and State - Multiline probe-tip, eight data
lines, one clock and one ground lead.
Maximum Number of Inputs Input Impedance -
Eight.
1 MO, 5 pF.
Logic Swing - Minimum : 500 mV + 2% of threshold voltage
peak-te-peak oantered on threshold voltage.
Maximum : ± 40 V or less, to at least threshold voltage.
Maximum Nondestructive Input Voltage: - 40 V to + 40 V.
Input Mode - Selectable.
Sample or Latch (to 5 ns with 500 mV overdrive voltage).
Serial State -
Single channel probe input.
Input Impedance - 10 MO, 13 pF. Nondestructive maximum
input voltage 500 V peak at probe tip, 250 peak at BNC input
connector.
Logic Swing - Minimum : 500 mV + 2% of threshold voltage,
peak-te-peak oantered about the threshold.
Maximum : ± 30 V peak.
Selectable Parity -
Odd, Even or None.
Selectable Bits Per Character parity if active).
Selectable Input Logic -
5, 6, 7 or 8 bits (includes
Positive or negative (at probe tip).
Synchronizing Word (Synchronous mode only) - Programmable to require two equal words. If not programmed defaults
to ASCII word SYN.
Hunt Word (Synchronous Mode only) - Programmable to
require one word. If not programmed, defaults to ·XXXXXXXX·
(Not defined). One Hunt word is equal to three Hexadecimal
· FF·s (Une idles).
Stop Bits (ASYNC Only) -
Responds to one or more.
Signature Analyzer
Single channel data input via probe 10X
10 Mf!; 13 pF Clock start, and stop inputs provided by Data Acquisition Probe. Slip-on tip to allow
characterization of tri-state bus lines.
Width of Oat. Input - Minimum 10 ns, with 400 mVoverdrive
from threshold voltage.
Threshold Voltage -
Selectable.
TTL -
+ 1.4 V to + 0.2 V.
VAR -
- 12 V to + 12 V.
67
SONYi'TEKTRONIX@
~~ltYZER
CLOCK
Parallel Timing and State
External Clock Period -
50 ns minimum.
Pulse Width - High-Logic Level: 24 .5 ns minimum. Low-Logic
Level: 24.5 ns minimum.
Data Setup Hold Time Data Hold Time -
25 ns minimum .
0 ns minimum.
Internal Clock Frequency Sample Intervals sequence.
20 MHz.
.. 50 ns to 200 nsl sample in 1-2-5
Data Pulse Width to Ensure Sampling + 10 ns minimum.
1 sample interval
Qualifier Input
Selectable-Trigger or Clock
Input Threshold -
TTL Level + 1.4 V ± 0.2 V.
Maximum Input Voltage Serial State -
- 5 V to + 10 V peak.
Synchronous or Asynchronous
Internal Clock for Asynchronous Mode Selectable Via Keyboard - 50, 75, 110, 134.5, 150, 200, 300, 600, 1200,1800,
2400, 4800 and 9600 bits per second (baud rate).
Internal Clock Accuracy -
± 0.02%.
External Clock for Asynchronous Moda External Clock for Synchronous Mode -
Up to 9600 baud.
Up to 9600 baud.
MEMORY
8 X 252 bits Data Acquisition Memory.
8 X 252 bits Reference Memory.
TRIGGER
Parallel Timing & State
Synchronous or Asynchronous.
External Qualifier.
Data Word Recognizer - Eight channel, programmable in
Hex, Binary, Octal or Decimal.
External Word Recognizer Probe - 16 channel, programmable in Hex , Binary, Octal or Decimal.
Input Threshold -
TTL level ( + 1.4 V ± 0.20).
Programmable from 0-65535 delay by
Data Position - Selectable in Pretrigger or Posttrigger Positions, First Trigger Mode (Internal Select).
Serial State
Data Word Recognizer - Programmable to require a sequence of two words (or characters).
External Trigger -
Data Position -
Serial State
Displays Hex, Binary, & ASCII simultaneously.
12 Word or Character Display.
Search Mode, Inverse Video Display of Word .
Compare Mode; Inverse Video Display of Differences.
Positive or Negative Display Logic.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Selectable for Pretriggering or Posttriggering.
Framing Error Detection - When a valid stop bit is not detected , data acquisition is stopped.
mm
Dimensions
237
117
359
Width
Heights
Depth
in
9.3
4.6
13.9
kg
Weights
Net without probes
Net with probes
Programmable for one bit 0, 1, or ·X·.
Trigger Delay - Programmable from 0 to 65535 delay by
word count (character).
Inverse video highlighting.
Signature
Displays the edge selects for clock, start and stop. Also displays each Signature taken simultaneously.
Displays a four digit Signature.
Displays Characters - 0 - 9, A, C, F, H, P, U.
TTL (+ 1.4 V + 0.2 V).
Word Recognizer Trigger Out Trigger Delay clocks.
Search Mode -
Compare Mode - Inverse video highlighting of differences.
Positive or Negative Display Logic.
3.7
4.5
Ib
8.0
10.0
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
Line Voltage Ranges -
90 V to 132 V ac, 180 V to 250 V ac.
Line Frequency Range Power -
48 to 440 Hz.
40 W maximum.
Temperature Range -
O· C to 50· C, operating .
DISPLAY
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Status information of the 308 is always displayed at the top of
the screen. Also, the menu of the 308 is displayed with all fields
visible. In the Serial State the 308 provides an extended menu
for additional Serial capabilities.
Accessory pouch (016-0654-00); P6107 Serial Data Probe
(016-6107-03); P6451 Active Probe (R Angle Connector),
(016-6451-05); power cord (161-0104-00).
Timing Diagram
Programmable Window Memory Size.
Cursor Position Pointer and Word Decode.
Positive or Negative Display Logic.
ORDERING INFORMATION
308 Data Analyzer .............................. $3,950
Parallel State
Displays Hex , Binary & Octal simultaneously for quick decode.
12 Word Display Table.
Option 01 -
P6406 Word Reoognizer Probe __ .......... _ +$420
1105 Battery Power Supply .............•.. $1,375
1105 Power Supply provides 1.5 to 2 hours of nominal
operation.
Option 01 - 230 V Operation ,...................... ,................. _ NC
The SONY· /TEKTRONIX· 308 is manufactured and marketed
in Japan by Sony/Tektronix Corporation, Tokyo Japan. Outside of Japan the 308 is available from Tektronix , Inc., its marketing subsidiaries and distributors.
Tektronix oilers service training classes on the 308 Data
Analyzer. For further training information, contact your local
Sales/Service Ollice or request a copy of the Tektronix Service Training Schedule on the return card in the center of
this catalog.
68
TEK
7002
MICROPROCESSOR
LOGIC ANALYZERS
Microprocessor Analyzer
Unprecedented Triggering Power in Both the
State and Timing Modes of Data Acquisition
Disassembled Mnemonics for Fast, Simplified Interpretation of State Information
Up to 52 Data Channels
A Unique Configurable Menu to Enhance
Testing Power
Synchronous (External Clock) and Asynchronous (Internal Time Base) Operation
Configurable to Individual 8 and 16 Bit
Microprocessors
The 7002 Logic Analyzer plug-in can acquire up
to 52 channels of state information in the synchronous mode, using the clock of the system under
test. The basic instrument contains 28 channels,
with an expansion option (03) increasing this to
44. A timing option (01) provides eight additional
channels for a total of 52 synchronous channels.
Alternatively, the timing option provides eight
channels of asynchronous information, using the
7oo2's own clock. The state and timing sections
can be operated independently, or used as a
trigger source for one or the other.
All the 7002's data acquisition resources are
under the control of a unique user language,
which allows them to be configured accoraing to
the needs presented by a particular situation.
Through user programming, almost any combination of resources can be employed to construct
specific triggers or data qualifiers.
Synchronous resources include four independent
word recognizers up to 48 bits each, two universal time/event counters which can interact with
each other and may be reset on the fly, and
several modes of clock qualification. Asynchronous resources include a word recognizer, and an
8-channel glitch recognizer with an independent
memory.
A series of Personality Modules can adapt the
7002 to the specific characteristics of individual
processors, both 8- and 16-bit. Once data is
acquired , it can be displayed in the disassembled
mnemonics of the processor in use, as well as
Hex, Octal , ASCII and Binary formats . Also available will be a general purpose Personality Module
which will enable the user to support those
microprocessors not specifically supported by
the 7002, or for other general purpose logic
analysis tasks.
CHARACTERISTICS
DISPLAY
Type - State Table, raster scan.
Format - 32 characters/line, 24 lines.
Channels Displayed
Basic 7002: 28; (8 Data, 16 Address, 4 Control).
Acquisition Memory Locations Displayed - 19 maximum.
Radices Available
Data : ASCII, Hex, Binary, Octal.
(Mnemonic disassembly for each supported microprocessor).
Address: ASCII, Hex, Binary, Octal.
Control: Binary, Mnemonic Disassembly.
SIGNAL INPUTS
Signal inputs for the 7002 are obtained through optional Personality Modules which (along with Option 03) determine the
number of input channels available.
Input Channels, Basic 7002 - 35; (8 Data, 16 Address, 10
Control, 1 External Trigger).
Input Impedance - Determined by Personality Module used.
External Trigger
Input Impedance: 1 M!l ± 2% (compatible with lOX Coded
Probe).
Threshold: 1.4 V.
Setup Time: 10 ns (at BNC).
Hold Time : 18 ns (at BNG).
CLOCK SYNCHRONOUS ONLY
Raw Clock Input - 20 MHz maximum.
Time Between Qualified Clocks - ;;. 100 ns.
Setup/Hold Time - Determined by Personality Module used.
Number of Qualifiers - Six maximum (can shilt or divide
qualified clocks by up to four positions or times).
DATA QUALIFICATION
Compiex Data Qualification allows the acquisition memory to
be turned on and off at any time using Word Recognizers and
Counters. This process simulates a large acquisition memory
and pattern search capability.
MEMORY SIZE (BASIC 7002)
Acquisition Memory - 28 X 256 bytes.
Storage Memory - 28 X 256 bytes.
COUNTERS
Universal Counters - Two.
Counting Mode
Resolution, Time Mode: 1 ms or 1 I's.
Accuracy: ( ± 1 count) X (number of start/stop cycles) ± 0.01 %
of value.
Maximum Count: 65,534.
Events Mode - Maximum Count - 65,534.
Control Mode
Resolution, TIme Mode: 1 ms or 1 I's.
Minimum Interval Generated: Two.
Maximum Interval Generated: 65,534.
Generating Interval Accuracy: (- 0, + 1 count) X (number of
start/stop cycles) ± (0.01 % of value) + (0 to 0.2 1'5).
Event. Mode
Minimum Interval Generated: Two.
Maximum Interval Generated: 65,534.
WORD RECOGNIZERS
Word Recognizers: Four.
Channels, Basic 7002: 31 (32 if timing option (01) is installed).
TRIGGERING
Can be triggered from any of the word recognizers or from
either of the counters, in the control mode. (Has ability to track
and trigger on very complex program flows).
Trigger Position (Number of qualified clocks displayed after
the trigger point)
Trigger Before Data: 240.
Trigger Centered: 128.
Trigger Alter Data: 16.
Zero Delay: Zero.
Trigger Output - TTL compatible (capable of driving a 50 !l
unterminated transmission line).
Accuracy - One qualified clock + 86 ns ± 35 ns alter event at
probe tip.
PROCESSOR HALT
The Processor can be halted when the 7002 stops acquisition.
Processor Halt Delay - Two qualified state clocks alter the
7002 stops acquisition pius Personality Module delay time.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
Ac Power
Une Voltage Ranges: Determined by 7000 Series mainframe.
Power Consumption: 49 W maximum at nominal line voltage
(all options).
Size - Three wide 7000 Series plug-in.
Weight - 3.6 kg (8 Ib).
Temperature Range - Operating: O" C to SO " C. Nonoperating: - SS"C to + 7S"C.
Altitude Ranges - Operating: Sea level to 4S00 m (15,200 It).
Nonoperating: lS 000 m (50,000 It).
Tektronix offer. service training classes on the 7002 Microprocessor Analyzer. For further training information, contact your local Sales/Service Office or request a copy of the
Tektronix Service Training Schedule on the return card In
the center of this catalog.
69
ANALYZERS
TEK LOGIC
OPTION 01 -
TIMING OPTION
The Timing Option provides the 7002 user with eight additional
channels of asynchronous data acquisition at sample rates of
up to 50 MHz.
SIGNAL INPUTS
Number 01 Channell - Eight (using a P6451 Data Probe).
Input Impedance: 1 MO shunted by ",,5 pF.
Logic Swing - Minimum: 500 mV + 2% of threshold voltage
centered on threshold voltage. Maximum: - 15 V to at least
threshold voltage + 10 V. Maximum Nondestruct Input Voltage : - 40 V to at least + 40 V.
Threlhold Voltage - Programmable from - 6.35 to +6.35 in
50 mV increments.
Data Setup/Hold Time - Data Setup: 20 ns. Data Hold: 2 ns.
CLOCK
The 7002 has a conflgurable menu
ThiS example, useful for
Debugging Real-Tlme.P Programs,
Will tflgger If Address F820 IS
NOT FOUND Within 100 ms ~f
the
occurrance of Address BOOO.
All test parameters supplied
by prompts. - - - - IF clause defines a data
stream event, which may be
either Single or compound.
The 7002 may Simultaneously
monitor up to 4 Word Rcognlzers
and 2 Counters.
Alynchronous - Sample Rates : 20 ns to 5 ms in a 1-2-5
sequence. Accuracy: ± 0.01 %.
Synchronous - Maximum raw input clock frequency :
20 MHz. (Obtained from system under test via the Personality
Module). Minimum Time Between Qualified Clocks: 100 ns.
THEN clause defines a
response to the event. In thiS
case, seltlng counter # 1 to
zero and then Incrementing
every millisecond. - - - - ' - - - - '
MEMORY SIZE
Acquisition Memory - 8 X 255 bytes.
Glitch Memory - 8 X 255 bytes.
At the same time the counter
IS set. branch to the second
test (bracketing allows
WORD RECOGNIZERS
One Data Word Recognizer Eight channels (ANDed
together).
One Glitch Word Recognizer - Eight channels (ORed together but AN Oed with the Data Word Recognizer).
External Trigger In - Can function as a word recognizer.
Simultaneous actions). - - - - - - - - ' . . . . .
TRIGGERING
Sourcel - Timing Option Data Word Recognizer; Timing Option Glitch Word Recognizer; Main Section (7002) Word Recognizers ; External Trigger In.
ililii..Ii.............iiii..............
Sequenllal Aclivltles are mOnitored
uSing multiple ' tests '
The 7002 now mOnitors the data
stream for an event to satisfy
the second tests IF clause.
DIGITAL DELAY
Maximum Delay -
65,534 sample clocks.
GLITCH LATCH
Pulse Width -
> 5 ns. Asynchronous Mode only.
DISPLAY
Timing Diagram Mode - Number of Channels: Eight. Window
Size: 124 words in XI mode or 31 words in X4 mode. (Data
channels can be relocated by the user). Numeric Formats: Hex,
Octal, Binary, ASCII. Glitch displayed as a • in the table beside
DATA. Timing Display: Glitches are displayed by an + above
the line where the glitch occured. Maximum Number of Words
Displayed: 19. Numeric Formats: Hex, Binary, Octal ASCII.
Number of Words Scrolled: 255. Trigger Position Accuracy:
± I-bit (Asynchronous Mode).
If the event occurs, then branch
back to test #1 and start the pregram over. Concurrent measurements are In the same test.
Or If counter # 1 has reached
100 ms, then activate the tflgger
MISCELLANEOUS
The P6451 Data Acquisition Probe comes standard with an
Option 01.
OPTION 03 -
EXPANSION OPTION
The Expansion Option provides the 7002 with the ability to
support most 16-bit microprocessors.
SIGNAL INPUTS
Adds an additional 16 bits to the 7002. 8 Data, 8 Address.
WORD RECOGNITION
Maximum Number 01 Channels - 48; (16 Data, 24 Address,
6 Control, 1 External Trigger, 1 Timing Option (if timing option
installed).
DISPLAY
Maximum Number 01 Channels - 44 ; (16 Data, 24 Address,
4 Control).
MEMORY SIZE
Acquisition Memory - 44 X 256 bytes.
Storage Memory - 44 X 256 bytes.
ORDERING INFORMATION
7002 Logic Analyzer ........................... $4,800
Option
Option
Option
Option
01 - Timing ................................................. +$2,000
7D02F01 - Timing, Field-Installed ................. $2,350
03 - Expansion ........................................... +$1,300
7D02F03 - ExpanSion, Field-Installed ........... $1,500
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Hardware Kit, electrical equipment (fits any 7600 or 7400
mainframe). Order 016-0669-00 ........................................ $10
Service Maintenance Kit Order 067-0939-00 ............... $750
70
By uSing the proper personality module. software
flow can be displayed uSing
the mnemonics of the chip
under test. here the Motorola
MC6802
MICROPROCESSOR
LOGIC ANALYZERS
TEK
OAS 9100 And 7002
SYSTEM CHARACTERISTICS
MICROPROCESSOR SUPPORT
Clockl Qualilier Inputs - Setup: 55 ns maximum. 35 ns typical. Hold: 0 ns maximum.
Addresl and Data Input. - Setup: 45 ns maximum. 25 ns
nominal. Hold: 0 ns maximum.
SETUP/ HOLD TIMES'
Tektronix will support all popular microprocessors
with the OAS 9100 (using the PMA 100) and 7002.
The following support is now available.
Microprocessor Type
Support Features'
8-BIT
8080
8085
Z80
6800
6802/6808
6809/6809E
6502
1802
8031
8039/8035
8048/8049
8051
8748
8751
6801 /6803
FM , OM
FM, P-C, OM
FM , P-C, OM
FM , P-C, OM
FM , P-C, OM
FM , P-C, OM
FM , OM
STD, OM
STD, OM
STD, OM
STD, OM
STD, OM
STD, OM
STD, OM
STD, OM
16 BIT
8086
8088
Z8001
Z8002
68000
9900 TMS/SBP
MULTIBUS-
FM, P-C, OM
FM , P-C, OM
FM , P-C , OM
FM, P-C, OM
FM , P-C, OM
STD, OM
CM, STD, P-C, OM
-PMA 100 adds 5 ns maximum to setup time.
Personality Module Available
ORDERING INFORMATION
PM 101
PM
PM
PM
PM
PM
PM
PM
PM
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
and
and
and
and
and
and
and
and
PM 101 OPT 01
PM 104
PM 105
PM 102
PM 103
PM 111
PM 101 OPT 02
062-6001 -00 (Application
062-6003-00 (Application
062-5999-00 (Application
062-5999-00 (Application
062-6003-00 (Application
062-5999-00 (Application
062-6003-00 (Application
062-6000-00 (Application
$1,400
Option 01 -
8080 Mnemonics .....•..•..•..........••••......... + 5300
Option 02 -
6502 Mnemonics ................................... +5300
PM 102 6800 Personality Modules
PM 103 6802 Personality Modules
Manual)
Manual)
Manual)
Manual)
Manual)
Manual)
Manual)
Manual)
PM 106
PM 107
PM 110
PM 108
PM 109
PM 101 and 062-6002-00 (Application Manual)
PM 112
'FM - Full Mnemonic Disassembly
P-C - Pre-Conflflured,
CM - Control Mnemonics
Single Plug, Interconnection
OM - Mnemonics may be developed using DAS Define Mnemonics
STD - Standard Radices
(Hex, Binary, Octal)
PM 103 Default Trigger Menu
For those 8-Bit and 16-Bit microprocessors not currently supporled by specifIC personality modules, and for general purpose
applications, the PM 101 General Purpose Personality Module or DAS Define Mnemonics capabilities are available. See Data Sheet
AX-4489 for details on PM 101.
- MULT/BUS is a registered trademark of Intel Corp.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
PM 100 Series
PM 101,102,103
104,105,108
Microprocessor Personality Modules
The PM 100 Personality Modules are high performance data acquisition modules designed to
interface specific microprocessors to the 7D02
and PMA 100/DAS 9100 Digital Analysis System.
PM 102 through PM 112 interface with the system
under test through a single plug for error free
connection . The interface to the logic analyzer is
also a single plug for easy change of processor
type.
The modules, operating synchronously with the
system under test, demultiplex busses, synthesize signals necessary to track processor status,
and transfer data to the logic analyzer memory. A
synthesized control function allows triggering or
data qualification on instruction fetches . The Personality Module also provides full mnemonic disassembly and formatting for the display.
When used with the 7002, word recognizer displays are formatted in the mnemonics of the
processor control signals. The processor may be
halted by the personality module when the 7D02
triggers.
COMMON CHARACTERISTICS
Operating Temperature - - 15·C to + 55 · C except for
PM 109 which is O· C to + 50 · C.
Storage Temperature - 62 · C to + 85 · C except for
PM 109 which is - 55 · C to + 75· C.
Operating Altitude - 4.5 km (15,000 11).
Storage Altitude - 15 km (50,000 11).
Dimensions
Width
Height
Depth
Weights
Net
mm
120
170
203
kg
1.2
in
4.7
6.7
8.0
Ib
2.6
PM 112
PM 106,107
109,111
mm
120
48
203
kg
1.2
in
4.7
1.9
8.0
Ib
mm
170
157
305
kg
2.6
1.2
in
6.7
6.2
12.0
Ib
2.6
Cable Lengths Irom Module to 7002 - 1.22 m ± 25 mm.
Module to ~p - 330 mm ± 12 mm. (Except for PM 101 which
is 350 mm ± 13 mm and PM 111 which is 470 mm ± 1.3 mm.)
PMA 100 or DAS 9100
PM 103 Mnemonic Display
SYSTEM CHARACTERISITCS
SETUP AND HOLD TIMES
Data Inputs -
Setup: 40 ns maximum. Hold: 0 ns maximum.
ORDERING INFORMATION
PM 102 _............................................... $1,400
PM 103 ................................................ $1,400
PM 101
General Purpose Personality Module
Data Acquisition and Display Formatting for
any Type of 8- or 16-bit Microprocessor
The PM 101 Personality Module offers data acquisition capabilities designed to fit any type of synchronous digital system including those with 8- or
16-bit microprocessors.
71
MODULES
FOR LOGIC ANALYZERS
TEK PERSONALITY
MICROPROCESSOR PERSONALITY MODULE SPECIFICATION SUMMARY
MODULE
Processors
Supported
PM 101
PM 102
PM 103
PM 104
PM 105
PM 106
PM 107
PM 108
General
Purpose
Logic
Analysis
Including
8 & 16 Bit
It p • 1 ,2
6800
68AOO
68BOO
6802
68A02
6808
8085
8085A
8085A-2
Z-80
Z-80A
Z-80B
8086
8086-2
8086-4
8088
Z8002
28
28
28
44
Required number of
Channels
DAS 9100
28
44
PM 110
PM 111
PM 112
68000L4
Z8001
68000L6 Z8001A
68000L8
68000L10
PM 109
6809,
68A09
68B09
6809E
68A09E
68B09E
MULTIBUS·
44
44
Required 7002
Option 03
44 Stored
Channels
7002
w/Option 03
28 without
SIGNAL INPUTS
Address
Data
Control
w/Option 03
24
16
10
16
8
9
16
8
9
16
8
10
16
8
10
20
16
15
20
8
15
16
16
15
24
16
10
1/2 LSTTL
25 pF
1/2 LSTTL
40 pF
1/2 LSTTL
40 pF
1/2 LSTTL
40 pF
1/2 LSTTL
40 pF
1/2 LSTTL
40 pF
1/2 LSTTL
40 pF
1/2 LSTTL
37 pF
OVI
0.5 V
2.4 VI
7V
o VI
0.6 V
2.0 VI
7.0 V
o VI
0.6 V
2.0 VI
7.0 V
OVI
0.6 V
2.0 VI
7.0 V
o VI
0.6 V
2.0 VI
7.0V
- 0.5 VI
+ 0.5 V
2.0 VI
7.0 V·,
- 0.5 VI
+ 0.5 V
2.0 VI
7.0 V·,
- 7V to
+ 15V
± 15 V
± 15V
- 7 Vto
+ 15 V
- 7 Vto
+ 15 V
- 5V to
+ 7 V·,
- 5 Vto
+ 7 V·,
Impedance
(nominal)
Yin low
min/max
Yin high
min/max
Maximum Input
Non-destructive
Threshold
Voltage
Hysteresis
(nominal)
DISPLAYED
CHANNELS
Address
Data
Control
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
YES
44
YES
28
44
NO
YES
16
16
17
8
16
9
7002
w/Opt 05
24 max
16 max
16
1 LSTTL
70 pF
1/2 LSTTL
40 pF
1/2 LSTTL
40 pF
Except
PHALT
l-LSTTL
1/2 LSTTL
35 pF
OVI
0.5 V
2.4 VI
7.0 V
- 0.5 VI
+ 0.5 V
2.0 VI
5.5 V
o VI
0.5 V
2.0 VI
7.0 V
o VI
0.6 V
2.0 VI
7.0 V
- 0.5 VI
0.6 V
2.0 VI
5.5 V
- 7 V to
+ 15V
- 7 V to
+ 15 V
± 7V
- 7to
+ 15 V
- 0.5 to
5.5 V
1.4 V
1.4 V
1.4 V
1.4 V
1.4 V
1.4 V
1.4 V
1.4 V
1.4 V
1.4 V
1.4 V
1.4 V
0.4 V
0.4 V
0.4 V
0.4 V
0.4 V
0.4 V
0.4 V
0.4 V
OV
0.4 V
0.4 V
0.4 V
7002
w/Option 03
24
16
4
7002
w/Opt 03
24 max
16 max
4
16
8
R/W,
NMI ,
IRQ ,
FETCH
16
8
R/W,
NMI,
IRQ,
FETCH
16
8
R/W,
1/0
MEM ,
INRQ
(any
interrupt)
IFC
(FETCH)
16
8
R/W,
(INTER
REQ),
1/0
MEM ,
FETCH
20
16
8
(see text)
20
8
8
(see text)
16
16
R/W,
1/0
MEM ,
INTREQ,
IFe,
(FETCH)
24
16
4
(see text)
16
16
(see text)
16
8
R/W,
IIFC,
(lIFC +
IFC2),
INT
20 MHz
(100 ns min
between
Qualified
Clocks)
2 MHz
6 MHz
10 MHz
6 MHz
8 MHz
5 MHz
4 MHz
10 MHz
6 MHz
8 MHz
5 MHz
Minimum Pulse
WidthHigh/Low
25 nsl
25 ns
180 nsl
180 ns
180 nsl
180 ns
70 nsl
40 ns
70 nsl
70 ns
105 nsl
105 ns
44 nsl
44 ns
70 nsl
70 ns
220 nsl
210 ns
50 nsl
50 ns
Input
Impedance
(nominal)
50 k!l
50 k!l
50 k!l
50 k!l
50 k!l
50 k!l
50 k!l
50 k!l
50 k!l
50 kU
50 k!l
1/2 LSTTL
15 pF
35 pF
35 pF
40 pF
40 pF
40 pF
40 pF
37 pF
70 pF
40 pF
35 pF
35 pF
58 ns
90 ns
90 ns
63 ns
60 ns
80 ns· 5
80 ns· 5
65 ns
50 ns
73 ns
73 ns
58 ns· 5
CLOCK
Maximum Input
Frequency
PROCESSOR
HALT DELAY
2 Qualified
Clock
Cycles Plus .
1/3 Clock Period + 2nsl
2/3 Clock period - 15 ns
For complete information and data sheets on microprocessor analysis products described, contact your nearest Tektronix Sales Office .
• / Option 01 8080 mnemonics
· 2 Oplion 02 6502 mnemonics
· 3 Except minimum/maximum, HOLD, Reset, 2.0 to 5.5 v .
•, Except minimum/maximum, HOLD, Reset, - I to + 5.5 V.
•, Requires user modification to enable.
'. MULT/BUS is a registered trademark of Intel Corp.
72
TEK
MICROPROCESSOR
LOGIC ANALYZERS
-------_!
. . ~r-
~~
IN AL. DX
FEBFB CMPB AL.ISE
FEBFC
96
CODE FETCH
FEBFD JA FEC00
0FFE4
00
I /O READ
FEBFE
01
CODE FETCH
FEBFF RET
FEC00?HOVB AL.'E2
FEcal
E2
C0~E FETCH
0047A
EEED MEMORY READ
FESED ORB AL.AL
FEBEE
CO
cnD! FETCH
FEBEF JNS FEBEA
FEBF0
F9
CODE FETCH
FEBF1~ANr9
AL·.7F
FEBF2
7F
CODE FETCH
-TFEI~FA
009
010
011
012
013
014
Ol~
016
017
(118
PM 104 8085
SYSTEM CHARACTERISTICS
SETUP/HOLD TIMES'
Data and Address Inputs ALE Input -
•••••
FFIlF7
.~-
Personality Module
o ns maximum.
FEBF3?CALL
FEBE'" "''''11
Setup: 50 ns maximum. Hold :
This 8086 mnemonic display shows disassembled instructions
entering the 8086 queue. In this illustration instructions that
enter the queue but are not executed are flagged with question
marks. Operands for which there is no data (as when the instruction is flushed before the operand is retrieved) are marked
with asterisks. (7002 Display)
Setup: 40 ns maximum. Hold: 0 ns maximum.
HOLD Input - Setup: 120 ns (measured to trailing edge of
CLK, t" or TWAIT). Hold : 0 ns.
READY Input - Setup: 135 ns maximum (referenced to rising
edge of T, . Hold: 0 ns.
'PMA 100 adds 5 ns maximum to setup time.
Order PM 104 ." ....... " .............. " ......... $1,400
PM 105
Z-80 Personality Module
SYSTEM CHARACTERISTICS
SETUP AND HOLD TIMES (MAXIMUM)
Parameter
Address 0-15
Setup'
Hold
Units
50
5
ns
Data 0-7
35"
10"
ns
Ml
39
18
ns
MREO
22"
0"
ns
10RO
22"
0"
ns
WR
90"
5"
ns
BUSAK
46
4
ns
8086 State Table Display (7002 Display)
SYSTEM CHARACTERISTICS
MAXIMUM SETUP AND HOLD TIMES
(Minimum and Maximum Modes)
46
4
ns
Parameter
Setup
Hold
Units
4"
ns
Address
45
20
ns
Relative to falling
edge of ALE
Data
30
0
ns
Relative to falling
edge of clock
on T, state
Ready
80
0
ns
Relative to falling
edge of clock at
74
0
ns
0"
ns
'PMA 100 add 5 ns maximum to setup time.
., Relative to rising edge of clock on T3 for Ml cycle or to the
trailing edge of T3 for memory or 1/0 cycles.
., Relative to rising edge of clock on Tl for MREO and to rising
edge of clock on TW for 10RO.
., Relative to rising edge of the clock of the last T state prior to
an Ml cycle .
•, Relative to trailing edge of the clock of T2 state for a memory
cycle or to TW for an 1/0 cycle.
X
X
C2 Code fetch goes to a high
whenever an instruction is
being fetched.
X
X
C3 IRO - is the combination of
INTR and NMI
X
X
X
X
C8 Machine state (Tl)
X
C9/Wait
A20-23 prOVIde queue level lOformat,on and BHE.
X
ORDERING INFORMATION
PM 106 ................................................ $1,800
Option 01 -
Option 01 - With Service Test Unit ........................... +$500
Or Service Test unit may be ordered separately :
without power supply Order 067,1024,00 ..................... $500
PM 108 Z8002 Personality Module
Order PM 105 .•.........•.................... " •.. $1,400
PM 106 8086 Personality Module
PM 107 8088 Personality Module
ALE width (TLHLL)
ALE falling edge (TCHLL)
40
55"
SETUP AND HOLD TIMES (MAXIMUM)
Setup'
ns
Hold
Units
Min
Max
Min
Max
Address 0-15
-
34"
-
0
ns
Data 0-15
-
40"
0
ns
READ/WRITE
-
40"
-
0
ns
40"
-
0
ns
ns
Units
ns
60
SYSTEM CHARACTERIST[CS
Parameter
SIGNAL TIMING MINIMUM MODE (Synthesized)
Min
With Service Test Unit ........................... +$500
PM 107 ...... " ........................................ $1,800
iR~H1'HT~~~~\X
Max
X
X
X
Notes
Typical
X
C7 HOLD acknowledge line
provides visual indication
of a HOLD acknowledge condition on the screen when 7002
is running
All Maximum Mode Status Unes, Series Resistance: 10 !l
additional.
'PMA 100 add 5 ns maximum to setup time.
Parameter·
When used with the Tektronix 7002 Logic Analyzer, the PM 106/PM 107 solves the major problem
encountered when debugging an 8086/8088
based design; that is understanding what is happening in the instruction queue. The logic analyzer acquires all the information transmitted across
the data bus. Queue status is decoded to determine which instructions were actually executed
and which were fetched but not executed.
Cl Mi lO [2LS F). When C2
is low. C 1 indicates whether
present operation is a memo~ or
input-autput access. When C is
high, Cl goes high , when the
second to the last byte of the
instruction queue was the first
byte of an executed instruction.
C6/Code fetch
35"
50"
X
C4 Mini max indication
INT
WAIT
X
C5 HOLD Acknowledge
HALT
NMI
Word Clock
Stored Recog Qualifier
Control Name
and Function
CO R/W [LST-F]. When C2 is
low, CO indicates R/W status when C2 is high CO denotes when
the last byte out of the instruction queue was the first byte of
an executed instruction.
Mi lO (TCHTCV)
33
110
ns
10/ MEM
INTA (TCHCTV)
68
.,
ns
INTREO
160"
-
-
-
DT/R (TCHCTV)
.,
110
-
ns
IFC
40"
-
0
ns
DEN (TCVCTV) (TCVCTX)
63
80
ns
IBUSAK
40"
ns
45
80
ns
IMREO
·s
ns
IRESET
-
0
WR (TCVCTV) (TCVCTX)
-
HLDA
.,
'Names given by Intel 8086 Users Manual.
" 0 ns after falling edge of clock for T2 cycle.
., Clock high width plus 33 ns.
•, Clock high width plus 100 ns .
•, Equal to or greater than 1 clock width plus 33 ns.
'S Greater than 1 clock width plus 100 ns.
0
ns
0
ns
0
ns
40"
0
l AS
/WAIT
'PMA 700 adds 5 ns maximum setup time .
., Referenced to falling edge of T3 .
•, Latched at falling edge of T2. Held until
cleared by interrupt acknowledge cycle .
•, Latched at rising edge of lAS.
'The 'OR' of Z8002 stopped and 7002 HALT.
ns
IPHALTED'
-
40"
40"
40"
Order PM 108 ..................................... $1,800
73
LOGIC
TEK ANALYZERS
PM 109 68000 Personality Module
Control Name
and Function
The PM 109 solves the major problem in debug'
ging 68000 based systems by flagging
prefetched but unexecuted instructions.
SYSTEM CHARACTERISTICS
SETUP AND HOLD TIMES (MAXIMUM)
(With Respect to Falling Edge of Clock)
Parameter
Setup'
Hold
Units
45
25
45
50
30
40
30
40
20
15
20
20
20
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
Address
Data
IUDS
I IPLO/IPL l / IPL2
IDTACK
IHALT
lAS
IBGACK
IReset
R/W
a
a
20
20
20
20
20
'PMA 100 adds 5 ns maximum to setup time
Control Name
and Function
CO
Cl
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
Stored
x
(FL·IACK) LOS
(OPC/EXT) R/W
(Fetch)
SUPER/USER
IBGACK
IINTR
X
X
X
Word
Recog
Clock
Qualifier
X
X
X
X
X
X
lAS
X
X
X
IHALT
IDTACK
lAs sampled
X
• Not recommended that these lines be used for clock
qualification.
ORDERING INFORMATION
PM 109 .............•....•..•••.•..•..•••..•.•..•...... $2,000
Option 01 - With Service Test Unit ........•..•••........•.... $1,200
Or the Service Test Unit can be ordered separetely:
Order 067·1025·00 ....................... _............................. $1,200
PM 110 Z8001
Personality Module
Stored
Word
Recog
N/S Normal/Syslem
X
X
CO Encoded • Read/Write Low on writes, refresh
and Interrupt ACK cycles
X
X
Cl Encoded - H~h on 1/0,
Interrupt AC and Fetch n.
Low on memory, Fetch 1,
EPA transfer, reserved
internal operation and
refresh cycles
X
X
C2 Encoded - High on
Fetches, Interrupt ACK
and refresh cycles
X
X
C3 Interrupt request combined NMI, VI, NVI
and SEGT(active high)
X
X
X
X
C5 True Z8OO1 R/W signal
X
X
X
C6 Low on internal operations, refresh and bus
acknowledge cycles
C7 Halt-Low indicates the processor is halted.
The PM 110 uses the
processor/stop signal
and the Z8001 continues
to execute refresh cycles
X
C8 /Wait - used to qualify
out wait states
X
C9 General clock qualifier ~enerated by the PM 110
active high)
X
Address
15 ns
23 ns
Relative to rising edge of AS
25 ns
25 ns
Relative to rising edge
of AS
N/S (normal
86 ns
a ns
AS
78 ns
.,
Relative to the falling
edge of the clock at T3
R/W
65 ns
STO· ST3
Wait
X
X
X
X
Word
RecOV
X
X
X
X
X
X
Clock
QuaUfier
X
X
~
• This line useful for word recognition only; not recommended
for clock qualification purposes.
ORDERING INFORMATION
PM 111
$1,600
40 Pin Low Profile Dip Clip Adaptor 100 mm Version
PM 111 6809/6809E Personality Module
The Tektronix PM 111 Personality Module is a
dedicated acquisition module designed for use
with 6809 microprocessor-based systems. By us·
ing the convenient Tektronix Low Profile Dip Clip
Adaptor, the PM 111 will also support the 6809Ebased systems.
40 Pin Dip Socket Order 136-0623-00 ......................... $2,40
I8V
PM 112 MULTIBUS Personality Module
The PM 112 plugs into the MULTI BUS' card cage.
It supports up to 16·bit data transfers and up to
24-bit addresses. Eight user·defined control lines
allow monitoring of all significant signals on or off
the bus. When the bus is making an 8·bit transfer,
the upper eight bits of the data word are used to
store user strappable data, address, or control
functions . A manual clock allows acquisition of
the state of a "stuck" bus. The built·in extender
function allows use on a "full" card cage. PM 112
conforms to IEEE Standard P796.
• MULTIBUS is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation.
SYSTEM CHARACTERISTICS
I system)
SYSTEM WORST-CASE SETUP HOLD TIMES WITH 7LD02
Setup"
Parameter
Relative to the rising
edge of the clock at T2
Data
Address
UDC lines
a ns
Relative to the rising
edge of the clock at T2
IMRDC,IMWTC
1I0RC,IIOWC
IINTA
65 ns
a ns
Relative to the rising
edge of the clock at T2
55 ns
24 ns
85 ns
a ns
Relative to the trailing
edge of the clock at T3
Vi,NVI
110 ns
a ns
Relative to the trailing
edge of the clock at T3
SEGT
85 ns
NMI
110 ns
a ns
.,
6809 Default Trigger Menu (7002 Display)
Relative to the trailing
edge of the clock at T2
or TWA for memory or I/O
cycles , and at TWA3 or
TWAS for acknowledge
cycles
MO,BUSAK
Hold
Units
Notes
- 5
- 5
a
35
55
55
ns
ns
ns
"
"
"
0
35
ns
" , 30 ns, typ
IBHEN
IINTO-/INT7
IINH1 ,11NH2
IINH1 ,IINH2
ILOCK , ACLO
- 5
50
10
55
45
50
ns
ns
ns
"
"
" , Word Rae
30
35
ns
" , Clock Qual
CBRQ
25
35
ns
"
Timing Option
- 5
65
ns
-2,-3
" PMA 100 add 5 ns maximum to setup time.
., With respect to falling edge of/XACX.
" With respect to rising edge of/BUSY.
ORDERING INFORMATION
PM 112
$1,400
Set of 10 leads with Pomona Grabbers.
Order 012-0670·00 ............................................................ $65
Relative to the trailing
edge of the clock at T3
" PMA 100 adds 5 ns maximum to setup time .
•, Minimum pulse width - 42 ns.
., Minimum pulse width - 28 ns.
74
Stored
READ/WRiTE
IIFC
I(IFC + IFC2)
iNT
BA
IIOCO
NMA
Order 015-0339-00 (Recommended) .. ,............................ , $42
Relative to the falling
edge of clock at T3
SNO·SN6
(segment
inputs)
Control Name
and Function
CO
Cl
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
Female Adaptor Order 380·0647-01 ............................... $30
Setup·' Hold
3 ns
Unit
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
g~ ~~~T)' ~E~~BREQ)
Order PM 110 ..................................... $1,800
SETUP AND HOLD TIMES (MAXIMUM)
32 ns
SYSTEM CHARACTERISTICS
SETUP AND HOLD TIMES (MAXIMUM "
Hold
Parameter
Setup"
ADDRESS
220
0
DATA
40
10
140
a
R/W
BA
190
0
BS
160
0
120
I(BMA/BREQ)
0
ISS"
INMI
a
95"
IIRQ
0
95"
IFIRQ
0
., All lines are measured from the source of the signal with
respect to the falling edge of E at the ZIF socket.
., PMA 100 adds 5 ns maximum to setup time.
'J All PM 111 Interrupt lines are sampled on the falling edQe of
E in contrast to the Motorola spec of sampling on the falling
edge of Q.
C4 Low on EPA, EPN and
IMO read or write cycles
SYSTEM CHARACTERISTICS
Data
Clock
Qualifier
6809 Mnemonic Display (7002 Display)
TEK
LOGIC
ANALYZERS
Display Formatters
There are two Display Formatters available with
the 7001 Logic Analyzer-the DF1 and DF2. Both
offer timing, mapping , and state table displays in
Binary, Hexadecimal and Octal formats. The DF2
offers additional formats for IEEE Standard
488/GPIB and ASCII.
The Display formatters are dedicated for use with
the 7001 . They provide complete alphanumeric
character generation , so that the logic analysis
package can be used in mainframes without CRT
readout (mainframe Option 01) .
There are also two modes of automatic data
acquisition in the DFI and DF2 that compare the
entire 7001 memory to the reference memory. If a
difference is detected, the difference and location will be intensified in the display read out at
the top of the CRT, and the number of resets
required to find the error will be displayed. This
function, called RESET IF 7001 = REF, allows full
comparison of stored and newly acquired data.
To compare only the tables selected by the
cursor control, use RESET IF TABLES = .
:'1"101 T R J
t~
...~ 4
RE~
7~~ .~ ~.
F91F
,,560
6~6 6
'::5 61
.562
1 ~6 a
ITAn
:·~63
956 9
S'6 A
D56 B
356 C
856 D
?S6 E
F!56 F
81)711
1071
4D72
CD 73
•.....-.-.•.. •
.'. .
OISPU'V'
• I :..:.
2564
AS6 !!
E56 7
TA .....
TF'IG
~63
D12B
2564
A~65
6566
£56;'
1568
9569
S~6A
D56B
~6C
!l56D
M6E
TRIG
DI2t
Digital Latches
on
The DL2 and DL 502 Digital Latches extend the
7001 Logic Analyzer's measurement capabilities
by detecting narrow pulses in a data stream that
cannot be captured by a logic analyzer alone.
Operating in an asynchronous mode, the 16
channel Digital Latches can detect spikes or
glitches between system clock edges that are
narrower than the sample clock interval or as
narrow as 5 ns.
otSPLAY
fO"MATTI"
7001
General Purpose Logic Analyzer
16 Stored Channels
Up to 1024 Words Deep
State or Timing
Up to 100 MHz Sample Rate
The 7001 is a dual-wide, plug-in instrument that
occupies one vertical amplifier compartment and
an adjacent time base compartment in 7000
Series oscilloscope mainframes. With this compatibility, you can configure a total logic analysis
system. Using a four-wide mainframe oscilloscope, you can combine your logic analyzer with
your analog oscilloscope and display the outputs
of both at the same time.
High Impedance Probes
18 Bit Word Recognizer
Clock Qualifier
75
LOGIC
TEK ANALYZERS
Synchronous Mode
7D01 CHARACTERISTICS
The 7D01 acquires 4, 8, or 16 CH of data and stores the data in
a 4k memory. Data storage format is selectable as 4 CH X
1016 bits, 8 CH X 508 bits, or 16 CH X 254 bits.
Data sampling can be asynchronous (internal clock) or synchronous (external clock). In asynchronous modes, sampling
rates can be selected up to 100 MHz in the 4 CH mode, up to
50 MHz in the 8 CH mode, or up to 20 MHz in the 16 CH mode.
External sampling clocks up to 50 MHz can be used in the
4 and 8 CH modes, and up to 25 MHz in the 16 CH mode.
SIGNAL INPUTS
Clock, Qualifier, and Data Input Source - Two multilead
P6451 Probes provide connections for 9 CH (9 input and
ground) each. CH 0-7 and clock are through probe 1, and
CH 8-15 and qualifier are through probe 2. Each probe attaches through a 25-pin connector at the 7D01 front panel.
Clock Qualifier
Setup
Hold
P6451
20 ns
o ns
External'
11 ns
7 ns
Requirement
Minimum Setup Time
12.5 ns or less
Minimum Hold Time
8.5 ns or less
Async Filter - Rejects recognized words that remain true for
less than an operator selected time period . Period is variable
from 10 ns to 300 ns.
W.R. Out Connector - A recognized word produces a displayed trigger marker and a front panel output for triggering
external circuitry.
Characteristic
1 M!l paralleled by 5 pF (at probe head).
Threshold at Probe Tips - Front panel switch selects fixed
TIL ( + 1.4 V ± 0.2 V), variable ( ± 12 V) or split(variable for top
probe, TIL for bottom probe). Front panel jack monitors variable threshold only.
HI Level
> 1.9V
LO Level
... 0.1 V
Impedance (Rising Edge)
50!l ± 10%
Channel 0 -
Maximum Logic Swing - - 40 V or less, to at least threshold
voltage plus 10 V. (Maximum nondestructive input ± 40 V.)
MEMORY
Format -
4096 bits.
Characteristics
Requirement
Threshold
+ 1.4 V, ± 0.2 V
(TIL Level)
Minimum Pulse Width
15 ns
Maximum Safe Input
Voltage
- 5 V or less,
toatleast + 10V
Triggered Light -
Indicates display trigger has occurred.
CURSOR
Bits per Channel
0-3
1016
0-7
508
0-15
254
Word Selection - Cursor appears as a movable second intensified spot on the CRT display. It is used to select and mark
aword.
Coarse and Fine Position Controls - Coarse control moves
cursor in increments of 16 sample intervals. Fine control moves
cursor in increments of 1 sample interval.
SAMPLING RATE
Asynchronous (internal clock) - Sampling Intervals are selectable from 10 ns to 5 ms in 18 steps using a 1-2-5 sequence.
Cursor to Trigger Position CRT Readout - The difference in
sample interval bits between cursor position and trigger position is displayed by the CRT readout at the top, right-hand
portion of the CRT graticule (e.g., TRIG ± XXX).
Data
Channels
Displayed
Maximum
Sampling
Rate
Minimum
Sampling
Interval"
Minimum
Data Pulse
Width"
0-3
100 MHz
10 ns
15 ns
0-7
50 MHz
20 ns
25 ns
= 0).
0-15
20 MHz
50 ns
55 ns
Trigger Intensified Marker - Intensified zone indicating the
trigger point, selectable by a switch (DATA POSITION).
'Minimum data pulse width to insure recording is one sample
interval + 5 ns.
Synchronous (external clock) - + or - edge of clock pulse
can be selected to initiate sample.
Data
Channels
Displayed
Maximum
Clock
Freq
Minimum
Clock
Width "
Data
Set-up
Time
Required
Data
Hold
Time
Required
0-3
50 MHz
10 ns
20 ns
0
0-7
50 MHz
10 ns
20 ns
0
0-15
25 MHz
20 ns
23 ns
0
'High and low clock width.
WORD RECOGNIZER
Word Recognizer - 16 data inputs, Probe Qualifier and External Qualifier. Output is true when input conditions match settings (HI, X, LO).
Asynchronous Mode
Intensified Zone
Location
Data Position
Switch Setting
Two, P6451 Data Input Probes (010-6451 -03).
DF1 CHARACTERISTICS
The DFI reformats the output of the 7DOI in a choice of five
display formats including Timing, Mapping and state table displays in Binary, Hexadecimal and Octal. It imposes no significant electrical characteristics on the 7DOI which affect measurement parameters.
The DF2 reformats the output of the 7DOI in a choice of seven
display formats including Timing, Mapping and state table displays in Binary, Hexadecimal, Octal, ASCII and IEEE Standard
488/GPIB. It imposes no significant electrical characteristics on
the 7DOI that affect measurement parameters.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
GPIB Probe Adaptor for the P6451 (103-0209-00). (A 24 pin
IEEE Standard Connector with quick connection to the P6451
Probe Head.)
DL2 CHARACTERISTICS
The 16 channel DL2 aids fhe 7D01 measurement capabilities
by detecting narrow asynchronous pulses of less than one
sample interval or as narrow as 5 ns in a data stream. The DL2
plugs into any compartment of a 7000 Series mainframe. Two
25 pin connectors connect the DL2 with the 7D01 . Data is
acquired via two P6451 Probes which plug into the front panel
of the DL2.
Minimum Pulse Width to Initiate Latch Minimum Amplitude to Initiate Latch threshold.
5 ns.
500 mV centered at
Minimum Sample Interval Asynchronous Clock -
50 ns.
ORDERING INFORMATION
7D01F Logic Analyzer (7D01 and
DF1 Display Formatter) ....................... $6,700
7D01F2 Logic Analyzer (7D01 and
DF2 Display Formatter) .......................
7D01 Logic Analyzer ..••..••............•.....•
DF1 Display Formatter ..••.....••..•••........
DF2 Display Formatter .••.....••...•••..••....
DL2 Digital Latch ......................•.•.•••••..
DL 502 Digital Latch ...........................
7603 Oscilloscope" •.••...•••...•••...•..........
$7,250
$4,650
$2,050
$2,600
$2,000
$1,800
$2,700
Near extreme right of display
Option 01 -
Near center of display
7704A Oscilloscope" ........................... $4,260
Posttrigger
Near extreme lelt of display
Option 01 -
Trigger Intensified Marker Accuracy - Position of intensified
zone with respect to word recognizer output.
Sample Interval
Control Setting
Maximum
Bit Error
10 ns
± 4 bits
20 ns
± 3 bits
50nst05ms
± 1 bit
(Deletes one readout board) .................. -$300
(Deletes one readout board) .................. -$300
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Clock Qualifier - Modifies ea~ier 7D01 to include clock qualifier feature (installation not included).
Order 040-0891-00 .......................................................... $170
'See pages 237 through 257 in this catalog for details on these
and additional 7000 Series mainframes. See pages 267
through 290 for details on complementary 7000 Series plug-
ins.
ENVIRONMENTAL
Temperature - Operating: O· C to + 40·C. Nonoperating :
- 40·C to + 75·C.
Any Single Channel
10 ns or less
Vibration - With the 7DOI and DFI or DF2 combined, frequency swept from 10 to 50 cps at one minute per sweep.
Vibrate for 15 minutes along each of the 3 major axes at 0.015
inch total displacement. Hold 3 minutes at any major resonance, or if none, at 50 cps. Total time, 54 minutes.
15 ns or less
32 W at nominal line voltage.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Pretrigger
Altitude - Operating: To 4500 m (15,000 It). Nonoperating :
To 15 200 m (50,000 It).
20 ns or less
Power Consumption -
AC POWER
Determined by the 7000 Series oscil-
Centertrigger
Minimum Input Pulse Width
(Asynchronous Mode)
Channels 0-3
76
Cursor Position Binary Data - The logic state of each displayed channel coincident with the cursor position is displayed
in Binary by the readout at the bottom of the CRT (HI = 1, LO
Format
Any Other Combination
Line Voltage Ranges loscope mainframe.
Triggers on rising edge of CH 0 data.
External Trigger/Qualifier Input Connector (EXT TRIG/QUALIFIER INPUT)
Front panel selectable.
Data Channels Displayed
Shock - Operating and nonoperating: 30 g's, 3'/, sine 11 s
duration, 2 shocks in each direction along 3 major axes, for a
total of 12 shocks.
DF2 CHARACTERISTICS
Source - Three-position switch provides selection of trigger
source from among channel 0, external (External Trigger/Qualifier Input), or internal word recognizer. A display can also be
obtained with front panel MANUAL TRIGGER pushbutton.
Minimum Logic Swing - 500 mV plus 2% of threshold voltage pop or less, centered on the threshold voltage.
Storage -
Requirement
TRIGGER
'Measured at external BNG jack. For 0 ns hold time, 42 inch
BNG coaxial cable is recommended.
Input Impedance -
Characteristic
Tektronix offers service training classes on the 7001 General Purpose Logic Analyzer. For further training information, contact your local Sales/Service Office or request a
copy of the Tektronix Service Training Schedule on the return card in the center of this catalog.
TEK ACCESSORIES
ACQUISITION PROBES
LOGIC
ANALYZER
DIP CLIP ADAPTORS
40-Pin-Low Profile Dip Clip, 100 mm cable (order M/F adaptor
belOW),
Order 015-0339-00 """"".""".".,,""""""""""",,.,,""""" $42
40-Pin-Low Profile Dip Clip, 300 mm cable (order M/F adaptor
belOW),
Order 015-0339-02 """""""""""".""""""""""""".",,,," $42
Male Adaptor lor 40-Pin-Low Prolile Dip Clip, for use with
PM 101 7002 General Purpose Personality Module or with individualleads such as the 10-wide comb set 012-0747-00,
Order 380-0560-05 """""""""""""""""""""""""."",,.,, $15
P6406 Word Recognizer Probe, replacement for SONY{TEKTRONIX 308 Option 01 only ,
Order 010-6406-01 """"", ... "".""".... ,.,,"",, ... ,,""""""" $541
Female Adaptor lor 40-Pin-Low Prolile Dip Clip, for use with
dedicated 7002 Personality Modules,
Order 380-0647-01 """"""""""""""""""""".""""",,.,," $30
Power may be obtained from the unit under test
or any 5 V supply,
•
Logic Leyel Thresholds
o or Low (Lamp Extinguishes): + 0.7 ± 0.1 V dc.
1 or High (Lamp Illuminates): + 2,15 ± 0,15 V de,
3
7
P6454 100 MHz Clock Probe, for 91A08,
Order 010-6454-01 "."""""""""""""""""""",,.,,",,",," $265
Flying Lead Set, 10 inch for P6452.
Order 012-0746-00 """""""".""""".""""""""""""".,,,,. $15
4
Minimum Recognizable Pulse Width -
T
1
Impedance -
Sense Leads, package of 10 ground (or VH) 5 inch green with
Pomona hook tip for P6455, P6456),
Order 012-0990-01 """"""""""""""""""."""""""""",,. $50
Leads with Grabber Tips, package of 2 for P6454,
Order 195-3659-00 """""""."",,.,,"""""""""""""""""" $15
Leads with Grabber Tips, package of 12 for P6451 . P6452,
P6455 , P6456,
Order 020-0720-00 """""""".""""""""".""""""""",,.,,. $33
High Speed Grippers, package of 10, flat pack for P6453,
P6454,
Order 195-1943-06 """"""".""".""""",,.,,"""""""""",,. $75
High Speed Grippers, package of 10 dip pack for P6453,
P6454,
Order 195-2234-06 "."".""""""".,,"""""""""""""""",,. $75
BNC Cable, 50 Il, 8 inch (connect 7001 to 0L2),
Order 012-0076-00 """.""".""""""""""""""""""""""" $17
PATTERN GENERATOR PROBES
TTL/MOS Pattern Generator Probe for P6455 , 8-Channel.
Order 010-6455-01 ."""""".""""""""""""""""",,.,,,,,,. $575
IOns.
",,7,5 kll paralleled by ",,6 pF,
Minimum Circuit Resistance lor Open Circuit Indication 10 kll,
•
Maximum Sale tnput -
2
± 150 V (dc or RMS) .
Minimum Recognizable Strobe Pulse Width Maximum Sale Strobe Input -
Diagnostic Lead Set, for P6452, P6455, P6456,
Order 012-1000-00 """"""""""""""""""""""""""".",,. $75
Sense Leads, package of 10 ground (or Vl) 5 inch, black with
Pomona hook tip for P6452, P6455, P6456,
Order 012-0989-01 """"""""""""."""""""""",,"",,",,. $100
Two bright lights in the probe tip indicate conditior.! of the logic signal.
CHARACTERISTICS
Order 010-6452-01 """""""""""""""""""""""",,",,"" $730
P6453 4-Channel Data Acquisition Probe, for 91A04/91AE04
300 MHz High Speed,
Order 010-6453-01 ".""."""""""""""""""""""""",,. $1,560
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Flying Lead Set, 5 inch for P6452,
Order 012-0987-00 """."""",,.,,"""""""""""""""""""" $40
•
.~.
P6451 Parallel Data Probe, replacement for 7001, 7001 F,
7001 F2, 7002 Option 01, WR 501 (Two probes required for
16-channel operation),
Order 010-6451 -03 """"""".""""""""",,.,,"""""""""" $545
P6451 ActiYe Probe (Right Angle Connector), replacement
for SONY{TEKTRONIX 308 only,
Order 010·6451 -05 """"""""""""""""""""""""""""" $545
P6452 8-Channel Data Acquisition Probe, for OAS 9100,
LogiC Probe
The small, lightweight, hand-held P6401 indicates
the state of logic levels in TIL, DTL, or any other
system with threshold between 0,7 and 2,15 volts,
A strobe input can be used to detect the coincidence of logic signals at two points, An indication
of whether a logic pulse has or has not occurred
can be obtained in a "store ' mode,
SPECIAL PURPOSE LEAD SETS
P6107 Serial Data Probe, replacement for SONY{TEKTRONIX
308,
Order 010-6107-03 """"""""""""".""",,.,,"""""""""" $117
P6401
Strobe Input Impedance -
20 ns,
± 30 V (de or RMS),
5,6 kll within 200;.,
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
1. 10 Wide Comb, 10 in leads - grabbers not inclUded,
Order 012-0747-00 """".""""""""""""""""",,.,,"""""" $50
2. 200 mm IndiYidual Connectors, grabbers not included.
Order 012-0655-02 """"."""""""""""""""""""""""",,. $70
3. 10 Wide Comb, with harmonica connector,
Order 012-0800-00 """"."""""""""."".,,"""",,.,,"""""" $30
4. Clothes Pin IC Clip Order 003-0709-00 "".,,"""""""" $31
5. GPIB Connector Order 103-0209-00 """""""",,,,",,. $180
Hook tip (206-0114-00); probe tip to 0,025 in square pin adaptor (206-0137-01); two alligator clips (344-0046-00); strobe
lead (175-0958-01); strobe lead (175-0958-00) ; white plug
(348-0023-00); accessory pouch (016-0537-00),
P6401 Logic Probe
Order 010-6401-01 ••••• _•••
$148
OSCILLOSCOPE PROBE
ACCESSORIES
Accessories to aid in probing digital circuits with standard oscilloscope probes may be found on pages 442 and 443,
6. Low Profile Dip Clip, 16 pin can be used with 14-or 16-pin
IC 's,
Order 015-0330-00 """"""""""""""""""""""",,",,"""" $35
7. Grabber Tip Order 206-0222-00 """""",,""""",,",,. $3.25
8. Color Coded Repfacement Lead Set", 400 mm for the
P6450 Probe or the P6451 Probe, Ten leads per set connects
probe lead to 0.025 inch, square pins,
Order 012-0655-01 "".".""."""""""."",,.,,""",,.,,"""""" $40
9. Indiyidual Connector", 400 mm 10 wire with Pomona Grabbers.
Order 012-0670-00 """""".""""""""""""""""."""".,,,,. $65
ECL Pattern Generator Probe for P6456, 8-Channel.
Order 010-6456-01 "." """"""",,.,,""""""""""""""""" $575
Probe Holder, clip-on holder accommodates probe pod for
P6451 .
Order 352-0473-01 """".".""""""""".",,.,,"""""""",,. $3,15
Pattern Generator Lead Set, 9 inch for P6455, P6456,
Order 012-0926-00 """."""""""""""""""""""""""",,. $100
BNC Cable, used with the Digital Latch.
Order 012-0118-00 """."""""""".""""."""""".""""""" $16
Pattern Generator Lead Set, high speed 5 inch harmonica for
P6455, P6456,
Order 012-1001-00 """""""""."""""""""""""""""".,,,, $50
• EMI can exist with the 400 mm length. This can be a problem
if using a digital latch,
77
TEK
SEMICONDUCTOR
TEST SYSTEMS
CONTENTS
S-3295 VlSI
Semiconductor Test System ...... .. ............. ..... ...
S-3220 lSI Production Test System .. .. .... .. ....
S-3275 lSINlSI
Semiconductor Test System . ..........................
S-3270 lSI
Semiconductor Test System
.... ..
S-3280 Ee l Test System ..........................
79
80
81
82
83
At Tektronix. we 've been planning for the
future for years . Since the early 70's
Tektronix has designed and built semiconductor test systems that have more than
kept pace with the rapidly advancing semiconductor device technology. We knew that
it would become increasingly difficult to test
these new devices with their increased
complexity, speed , and pin count, and that
functional testing would become more and
more important to the success of the semiconductor electronics industry.
Our testing technology has progressed in
advance of industry need. Marking the beginning of Tektronix' state-of-the-art testtechnology development, the first S-32oo
system was designed to characterize and
test LSI devices and microprocessors. Subsequent systems provided improved device
characterization and were designed for
quality control in production test environments. Then we tackled the challenge of
testing high-speed logic devices and solving unique problems associated with subnanosecond technologies . Our testing expertise has advanced so rapidly, in fact,
that we have announced six new S-32oo Series systems in the past four years - a phe-
78
nomenal pace unmatched in the semiconductor test industry. All of our test systems,
from the first system announced a decade
ago to the recent introduction of our
S-3295 , are backed by Tektronix' commitment to excellence.
Tektronix provides the hardware, software,
training, and applications support to solve
today's testing problems, and tomorrow's
as well. New and unusual device parameters are viewed as a challenge to our resources not as insurmountable problems.
The field-proven hardware and software in
every S-32OO system provides the versatility
to get the job done.
Every S-32OO system uses the same highly
advanced software - TEKTEST. So
there's only one language to learn. Using
TEKTEST, a test engineer can easily and
quickly generate and debug programs for
device testing or characterization and then
transfer these programs from one system to
another. And, using our foreground/background capability, up to four users can program or compile data in the background
while testing continues uninterrupted in the
foreground. A powerful debugging tool, Terminal Control Mode, gives the test engineer
interactive control of the test program.
All of the S-32OO systems feature highly sophisticated data reduction and graphics,
which make the test results manageable
and easy to understand.
We offer analog and digital capability to
meet the unique test requirements presented by new and increasingly complex devices. In fact, most manufacturers of captive devices use Tektronix systems for just
this reason. Tektronix is also a device manufacturer and has been testing its own ICs
and hybrids for years. We have developed
expertise and in-depth understanding of
complex testing .
At Tektronix, we've built on our past experience and knowledge about device testing
to create a total, compatible line of LSINLSI
test systems that can help solve your test
problems - today and in the future.
VLSI
SEMICONDUCTOR TEST SYSTEM
TEK
NIIIN
S-3295
State-of-the-Art Performance in VLSI
Development and Evaluation
256 Channels, 128 I/O Pins
State-of-the-Art Driver/Receiver
Programmable Dynamic Loads
128 Kilobit Local Pattern Memory
Automatic De-skew
DEC PDP-11/44 CPU
Dynamic Time-Set Selection
Advanced Color Graphics and Data
Reduction
To meet your changing test requirements Tektronix announces tomorrow's solution
State-of-the-art yesterday, today, and tomorrow.
From simple to complex, small scale integration
to very large scale integration, common integrated circuits to microprocessors, the evolution of
Tektronix systems continues to meet your test
needs. Tektronix semiconductor test systems not
only keep pace with what you're developing today, but also provide solutions for the test requirements of the future . The Tektronix S-3295 is
the newest generation in our system technology
evolution developed to handle tomorrow's complex, high pin count devices.
The S-3295 was designed to meet VLSI engineering evaluation needs in the computer, aerospace, and telecommunications industries, as
well as in semiconductor manufacturing. The
S-3295 is yet another industry-leading step forward for the S-32OO Series. It offers significant
performance increases in real-time pattern
generation/recognition , timing flexibility/accuracy,
resolution, and functional p:n capability. This system supports 256 independent pins (128 I,
1280), offering greater capacity and flexibility in
accommodating high pin count devices.
Subsystems within the S-3295 include the 2952
Pattern Processor, with its unique and powerful
capabilities, and the 2945 Clock Generator,
which provides 16 sets of 16 timing phases, accurate 125 ps edge-timing resolution , and splitcycle operation at all clock speeds. These two
subsystems provide uncompromised 20 MHz
test rates within the S-3295.
The S-3295 has been redesigned with all new
high performance pin electronics drivers and receivers. The new pin electronics cards provide
increased capabilities and performance in driver
and comparator formatting, clock phase distribution, signal transition times, and edge position
accuracy for optimized fidelity at high speeds.
Automatic de-skew of driver, comparator, and inhibit phase circuits enhance measurement certainty. Programmable dynamic loads eliminate
complex load boards. Local pattern memory of
128 kilobits per I/O pin can accommodate very
large patterns and minimize CPU transfers. Data
and clock channel multiplexing provides 40 MHz
real-time functional data rate on a reduced set of
pins. A Digital Equipment Corporation (DEC)
PDP-11 /44 offers up to 1 megabyte of main
memory. Color graphics enable easier reporting
and interpretation of engineering data.
The S-3295 is based on the proven S-32OO architecture that has been delivering test results
worldwide over the last decade. Proven features
like S-STMS (Single-Shot Time Measurement
Subsystem), SO-ohm switching matrix, a waveform digitizer, optional stimulus and measurement subsystems (GPIB instrumentation), and
compatible peripherals . And like all S-3200
testers, it features TEKTEST system software the industry leader in test languages for engineering evaluation and characterization .
Tektronix is committed to hardware and software
compatibility.
Device technology is changing - the new
Tektronix S-3295 System meets these changes
head-on.
79
PRODUCTION TEST SYSTEM
TEK LSI
.'$$$##111111111111111111111111111
MIN
S-3220
Full Capability 20 MHz Test System
Vertically-Oriented Pin Electronics
Simplifies Prober/Handler Interface
Minimal Floor Space Requirements
Cost-Effective For High-Throughput
Production Applications
Enhanced 1 k Pattern RAM Supplements
4 k per Pin Stored Memory
Single-Shot Timing Measurement
Uses TEKTEST"', Allowing Device
Characterization Programs to be Condensed
and Used in Production Testing
Up to 128-pin Test Capability
80
The Tektronix S-3220 is a versatile computer-controlled automated test system designed for testing and verifying the performance of the wide
variety of integrated circuits in use today. The
S-3220 is an ideal test system for users with requirements that range from SSI through LSI. In
addition to high-speed digital circuits, this system accommodates analog devices and dualfamily hybrids such as CODECs and ADCs.
The S-3220 is offered as a production-oriented
complement to the Tektronix S-3270 Test System. Since the S-3220 uses the TEKTEST control
software used in all S-3220 systems, programs
originally developed for engineering use can easily be condensed and employed in a high volume
production or incoming inspection environment.
The essential test related features of the larger
systems are retained in the S-3220, allowing
(with no loss in speed or accuracy) functional or
pattern testing as well as dc parametric and single-pass ac parametric testing .
The S-3220 is the first S-3220 Series system with
a vertical pin-electronics package that is integrated with the control/stimulus equipment rack . This
feature eases prober/handler mechanical interface and reduces floor space requirements an important consideration in most production
areas.
TEK
LSI/VSLI
SEMICONDUCTOR TEST SYSTEM
11111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111
1111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111
S-3275
Independent I/O Control on a Cycle-by-Cycle
Basis at Each Pin
16 Programmable Driver/Compare Phases
16 Programmable Timing Sets, Each Available on a Cycle-by-Cycle Basis (Split-Cycle)
Full Functional Data (Force, Inhibit,
Compare, Mask) to All Pin Electronics
Cards at 20 MHz Test Speed
Versatile Driver Formats
Tests Devices With Up to 128 Pins
Single-Shot Timing
Advanced Graphics and Data Reduction
Uses TEKTEST"', a Device-Oriented Test
Language With Networking Capability
Using a powerful set of testing features , the
5-3275 is more than able to measure the characteristics of today's complex L51IVL51 devices,
single-chip microcomputers, 16-bit processors,
memories, hybrids, analog L51 and others. The
5-3275 gives both the speed and data width
demanded by such devices, and combines them
with advanced software for effective data management and control.
An integral part of the 5-3275, the 2952 Pattern
Processor can send all four data bits to each pinelectronics card during each test cycle. These
four bits (force, inhibit, mask, and compare)
provide nine distinct test states to each pin card
resulting in 64 inputs and 64 outputs at clock
rates up to 20 MHz for true 128-pin test capability.
The 2952 combines the functions of pattern
sequencing and algorithmic pattern generation.
As a pattern processor, it allows sophisticated
control of pattern sequence programming. Loops,
subroutines, conditional branching , nesting , and
list pointers can all be used to control program
flow . Interrupts can be initiated from a number of
sources to start new pattern sequences (and
then return to the original). Phantom clock cycles
can be invoked to execute multiple processor
steps during a single cycle at the test head.
In the algorithmic pattern generation mode, the
processor controls the output of the X and Y
address generators, each 12 bits wide. This
address output may then be scrambled by a 4 k
topological memory. A 12-bit control (Z-axis) generator provides signals to manipulate control lines
to the device under test. A data generator produces 16 force data bits and 16 compare data
bits. Refresh algorithms are initiated by interrupts
to the pattern controller.
The 2945 Clock Generator is also part of the
system and exhibits performance to match almost any testing requirement. Cycle periods
range from 500 Hz to 20 MHz, with time resolution
to 8 ns. Up to 16 phases are available during
each cycle, with a phase-edge resolution of
125 ps and a pulse width down to 4 ns. 16 sets of
these phases can be programmed and then
selected on a cycle-by-cycle basis during testing.
The clock can be operated in a free-running
mode, or synchronized to a signal from the
device under test. These two modes are interchangeable from one test cycle to the next.
81
TEK ~~~ICONDUCTOR TEST SYSTEM
5-3270
day. It is also built to deliver results when new
devices appear.
Uninterrupted Error Storage at 20 MHz
With the S-3270, you can perform functional tests
at speeds up to 20 MHz. In some cases, the
system will test devices that operate at 40 MHz.
When you must test a microprocessor at Its
optimum speed, you need the S-3270.
Multiple Pattern Sources
Versatile Driver Formats
14 Programmable Channels of Timing
Information
Test Devices With Up to 128 Pins
Single-shot Timing
Advanced Graphics and Data Reduction
Uses TEKTEST"', a Device-Oriented Test
Language
Easy to Program and Edit
True Foreground/Background Timesharing
The S-3270 system tests LSI, microprocessors,
analog and digital hybrids, peripheral interface
circuits, RAMs, ROMs, and more. Designed to
deliver test results on the devices you see every
82
When testing one of the new, fast devices with
the S-3270, you will not have to stop the test to
log an error. The S-3270 keeps right on testing
while it catches the error and records its location .
Input/Output switching may also be performed at
a clock rate of 20 MHz.
The fully integrated waveform digitzer allows you
to perform linear and analog tests. The system
has 64 pin-electronic cards, each with input and
output capability, so you can test a device with
up to 128 pins. The 14-phase clock gives you
many programmable channels of liming Information, to properly and effectively test devices.
For total flexibility, the S-3270 features independent control of logic level definition at each driver
and receiver . You set the logic level on every
input and output channel, so you are not bound
by the limits of the system.
When device complexity dictates highly advanced patterns, the S-3270 gives you multiple
ways to produce those patterns - programming
on the disk or mag tape, toggling, using the 2942
Memory Pattern Generator, the PRAM and/or shift
registers . The S-3270 is equipped with 4 k of shift
register memory behind each pin, and it can be
increased to 8 k of memory.
High Performance Drivers (30 V swing) Allow
Versatility in Testing
The unique Single-Shot Time Measurement technique allows you to make a measurement With
50 ps resolution in one iteration. DynamiC measurements can also be made by moving strobes
(iteration) or by using the optional waveform
digitizer.
The basic system makes differential voltage measurements on your device with a resolution of
50 /lV. It also features sUb-nanoamp current measuring, especially important in testing CMOS devices. Kelvin sensing increases the accuracy of
the forced voltage, insuring that the levels at the
OUT will be exactly what you ordered.
When you are characterizing devices that are
fast , complex, and unfamiliar, you need a system
that is both capable and flexible, the Tektronix
S-3270.
Eel
TEK
S-3280
100k ECl Testing
Precision Fixturing
Sub-nanosecond Measurements
Full Graphics and Data Reduction Package
High-Speed Drivers
Sampling for Waveform Analysis
Uses TEKTEST '
Simple to Program and Edit
Tests High-Speed logic
CMl Capability
TEST SYSTEM
Testing sub-nanosecond logic devices requires
extremely fast pulses, clean edges, precise control of pulse levels, and highly accurate time
measurement capability. The S-3280 is designed
to meet the testing requirements of high-speed
logic devices.
This system is based on the proven architecture
of the Tektronix 8-3200 l81 test systems. The
8-3280 has the same advanced pattern generation capability and features multiple pattern
sources, from algorithmic patterns to memory
patterns to simple fixed or toggled bits. The
8-3280 also features a 20 MHz data rate with
interrupted error storage at that speed. like all
other 8-3200 systems, the 8-3280 uses a deviceoriented, English-like test language, TEKTE8T.
The 8-3280 was designed specifically to solve
Eel testing problems. Featuring sub-nanosecond
time measurement capability, the high-speed
hardware gives the 8-3280 the ability to test Eel
devices to their fullest.
One of the more important features of an Eel
test system is its ability to make accurate timing
measurements. The 8-3280 features three methods of making dynamic measurements. First,
Delta-T provides measurements with 50 ps resolution on any test vector, at 20 MHz data rate, in a
single pass. 8econd, our Waveform Digitizing
(sampling) capability provides 1 ps resolution to
digitize and store any waveform for further analysis. Third, for functional testing, the system's
strobed comparators will make tests on any or all
test vectors at 20 MHz. The system features 1 mV
programming resolution with dual-level comparators on every channel.
Because no multiplexing is necessary the system
uses the shortest possible path to deliver clean,
accurate signals to the device, thus minimizing
waveform degradation.
The 8-3280 will measure the parameters of today's Eel devices and will continue to be able to
test the more advanced high-speed logic devices
that are being developed. The 8-3280's advanced, high-speed measurement characteristics
make it a superior Eel testing solution .
83
SEMICONDUCTOR
SYSTEMS
TEK TEST
Training and Support
When you purchase a Tektronix S-3200 Semiconductor Test System , we want you to be able to
use that system to the fullest extent of its capabilities. We have an entire support staff dedicated
to helping you do just that. And an integral part of
that support is our professional training for your
test engineers and service technicians. Before
you purchase a system, a training specialist
works with you and your Tektronix Sales Specialist to identify your training requirements and
recommend an appropriate training schedule.
With the purchase of your system, you receive
credits for up to ten weeks of training in our
S-3200 System Basic Applications and Basic
Maintenance classes. We also offer advanced
training in test applications and maintenance as
well as tailor-made training seminars in special
interest areas. Additional training credits for the
basic courses may be purchased to allow for
staff expansion and turnover.
The courses are fast-paced, performance-oriented, and individualized . Instruction time in all classes is equally divided between classroom lecture
and hands-on laboratory experience. Each student is expected to choose specialized lab
projects which will meet individual job requirements, so your unique system applications become the focus of training.
Our instructors have extensive experience in test
system applications and maintenance. And they
stay abreast of modern instructional techniques,
advanced system applications, and hardware operation . Class size is limited to maintain a balance
of one instructor for every four students during
lab sessions.
84
For further information on class schedules, course
content, or your special training requirements ,
contact your Tektronix Sales Specialist or the STS
Training Coordinator at (503) 629-1187.
For More Information
For more information about the S-3200 Semiconductor Test Systems, contact the Test Systems
Specialist located in the office nearest you.
TEKTEST Software
The language of S-3200 Series systems ,
TEKTEST, is a device-oriented language, easy to
read and understand since it is very close to
English. System architecture was designed so
that programming, editing and debugging all use
TEKTEST. When making corrections in a program, there is no need to use a ' bridge" language
between the source language and the machine
language. Everything is written in TEKTEST. This
capability, that we call Terminal Control Mode,
gives the test engineer total control of the program. When editing program material during a
test, the test engineer can hold power to the
device, make the changes, and continue the test.
There is no need to re-sequence the program.
And , since these systems also feature true
foreground/background operation, up to four test
engineers can be using terminals interfaced to a
system, and the system will continue to test
devices without any throughput loss. Terminal
Control Mode and true foreground/background
make the S-3200 Series simple and fast to program and debug.
Portland , OR
The more complex a device, the more information
you need about that device. But with complexity
can com.:- confusion ... unless your test system
makes the picture clearer.
The S-3200 Series systems provides you with the
graphics capability to reduce testing data to
manageable, usable form .
Los Angeles , CA
Boston, MA
Philadelphia, PA
St. Louis, MO
Tektronix U.K., Ltd.
Harpenden , England
Tektronix
Orsay, France
Tektronix AB
Solna, Sweden
Tektronix Holland, B.v.
Badhoevedorp, The Netherlands
Tektronix BmbH .
Munich, Germany
Sony/Tektronix Corporation
Tokyo, Japan
Tektronix Canada, Inc.
Montreal , Canada
Tektronix Europe B.v.
Amstelveen , The Netherlands
TEK
COMPUTER GRAPHICS
PRODUCTS
CONTENTS
4006-1 Computer Display Terminal ................. 87
4012 Computer Display Terminal ................... .. 88
4014-1/4015-1 Computer Display Terminals .. 89
618 Storage Display Monitor ......... ........ ........... 90
4016-1 Computer Display Terminal ... ......... ... .. 91
4112 Computer Display Terminal .. .. .. .. .. ...... .... . 92
4114/4114-30 Computer Display Terminals ... 93
4113/4113-30 Computer Display Terminals ... 94
4025A Computer Display Terminal
........ .. .. 95
4027 A Color Graphics Terminal ...................... 96
4051 Desktop Computer ......... .. .................. ... 97
4052A Desktop Computer ...... ............. ........ .. . 98
4054A Desktop Computer
..... 99
ROM Packs ...... ......... . ...... .. ...........
.. 100
PLOT 50 Graphics Software ..... .. ....... .......... 101
PLOT 10 Graphics Software ..................... .. . 104
4662/4662-31 Interactive Digital Plotters .... 106
4663 Interactive Digital Plotter ....................... 107
4611 /4631 Hard Copy Units .............. .. ....... .. 108
4612/4632 Video Hard Copy Units .............. 109
4634 Imaging Hard Copy Unit ....................... 11 0
4642, 4643 Matrix Printer .......... .. .................. 111
4909 Multi-User File Management System ... 112
4907 File Manager ..................................... ... 113
4923 Digital Cartridge Tape Recorder ......... 113
........... 113
4924 Digital Cartridge Tape Drive
4952 Joystick ...... .........
... 114
..... 114
4953 Graphic Tablets ................
114
4954 Graphic Tablets
4956 Graphic Tablets ......
.. 114
Computer Graphics Supplies ..
.. 115
"The Graphics Standard"
Tektronix has set the standard in computer
graphics for the past 14 years. The introduction of new products like the 4110 Series
continues this tradition. Designed to be
compatible with existing product lines, the
4110 Series offers enhanced communications and local intelligence for maximum efficiency. These new products complement
86
a broad line of graphics equipment including color and monochrome display terminals, desktop computers, hard copy units,
graphics software and peripherals.
For additional product information and details on software and accessory support,
please indicate your interest on the reply
card enclosed in your catalog.
TEK
4006-1
Low Cost
Flicker-free High Resolution
Graphic and Alphanumerics
The 4006-1 Computer Display Terminal makes
interactive, high-resolution flicker-free graphics affordable to cost-conscious disciplines and departments. Priced competitively with many alphanumeric (only) terminals , the 4006-1 makes
graphic capability practical for the stock room ,
the classroom and the conference room as well
as for other graphic applications.
COMPUTER
DISPLAY TERMINALS
The 4006-1 connects readily to most mainframes,
thanks to its RS-232C Interface. A screen capacity of 2590 alphanumeric characters in addition to
its graphics capability allows the 4006-1 to operate in association with existing alphanumeric terminals to interpret statistical data and transform it
into meaningful charts, tables, graphs and
diagrams.
The 4006-1 is shipped with a Standard Data
Communication Interface conforming to EIA
RS-232C, asynchronous full duplex only. Option
01 is a full- or half-duplex interface.
PLOT 10 Software packages designed to be
used with the 4006-1 Computer Display Terminal
include: Terminal Control System, Advanced
Graphing-II, Easy Graphing, Interactive Graphing
Package, Preview Routines for CalComp Plotters,
Character Generation System, and the Interactive
Graphics Library.
OEM terms are available on these products.
CHARACTERISTICS
DISPLAY
CRT Type - Direct View Bistable Storage.
Dimensions - 190 mm x 142 mm (7.5 in x 5.6 in).
ALPHANUMERIC MODE
Format - 35 lines; 74 character/line;
2590 character full screen.
Character Set - 63 character (TIY ANSI Code).
Character Generation - 5 x 7 dot matrix.
Cursor - 8 x 8 dot matrix .
GRAPHICS DISPLAY MODE
(Vectors only)
Vector Drawing Time - 3.6 ms ± 0.2 ms.
Graphics Matrix - 1024 X x 1024 Y addressable points;
1024 X x 780 Y viewable points.
Baud Rate (Transmit and Receive) - 75 to 4800 baud.
ORDERING INFORMATION
4006-1 Computer Display Terminal ..... $3,900
Option 01 - Optional Data Communications
Interface ....................................................................... +$385
87
COMPUTER
TERMINAL
TEK DISPLAY
Basic Data Communication Interface included
with the 4012 is EIA RS-232C compatible (full
duplex only). The Optional Data Communication
Interface includes convenient switch-selectable
functions, independent transmit and receive baud
rates, and full- and half-duplex operation.
CHARACTERISTICS
DISPLAY
CRT Type - Direct View Bistable Storage.
Dimensions - 203 mm x 152 mm (8 in x 6 in).
ALPHANUMERIC MODE
Format - 74 character / line ; 35 lines/ display ; 2590
character/display.
Alphanumeric Cursor - Pulsating 7 x 9 dot matrix .
Character Set - 94 character (Full ASCII).
Character Size - 85 x 105 mils.
Character Generation - 7 x 9 dot matrix (with MOS ROM .I
Character Generation Rate - 1,000 characters.
GRAPHIC MODE
(Vectors only)
Vector Drawing Time - 2.6 ms.
Graphic Matrix - 1024 X x 1024 Y addressable points ;
1024 X x 780 Y viewable points.
Cursor - Thumbwheel controlled cross-hair Graphics Matrix ;
3 through 1023 X; 0 through 780 Y.
OPTION 01 DATA COM INTERFACE
Functions - Local/remote echo, full duplex and half duplex .
Data Rates - 110, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, and
9600 baud.
AC POWER
Line Voltage - 110 or 220 (high, med, low) V ac, strappable.
Line Frequency - 48 to 440 Hz.
Power-110W.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dimensions
Width
Height
Depth
mm
483
1054
737
Weight
kg
Net
40.9
Operating Temperature -
in
19.0
41.5
29.0
Ib
90.0
W " C to 40 " C.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
RS-232 Data Communications Interface (021-0065-00).
ORDERING INFORMATION
4012 Computer Display Terminal ........ $6,200
4012
High-Resolution, Flicker-Free Graphics
Full Upper and Lower Case ASCII
Character Set
Conventional Bus Structure For Peripheral
Add-On
The 4012 Computer Display Terminal combines
the world 's leading graphics with complete alphanumerics. Alphanumerics can tabulate computer
data, but graphics can amplify that data into
usable, immediately meaningful information . Highresolution graphic presentations and the full ASCII
alphanumerics, upper and lower case, are
available.
88
The flicker-free screen provides up to 1024 X by
780 Y displayed graphic points or as many as
2590 alphanumeric characters per display. The
TIY -style keyboard simplifies input while the
thumbwheel controlled crosshair cursor enhances
graphic interactivity. Using thumbwheel control,
the operator can direct the X-V cursor to make
additions or deletions of data on the display
screen.
Option 01 - Optional Data Communications
Interface .......................................................................
Option 02 - DEC PDP-11 w/KL-115 Controller ........
Option 04 - Data General NOVA Interface ...............
Option 06 - HP 21 OO-Series (12531 Card)
Interface .......................................................................
Option 16 - DEC PDP-11 w/DL-11 , PDP 11 /05 .......
Option 23 - 2741 Correspondence Code
Interface .......................................................................
+$525
+$525
+$525
+ $525
+$525
$1,325
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORD AND PLUG OPTIONS
Option A1 - Universal Euro 220 V/16A, 50 Hz .............. NC
Option A2 - UK 240 V/13A. 50 Hz ................................. NC
Option A3 - Australian 240 V/10A, 50 Hz ...................... NC
Option A4 - North American 240 V/15A, 60 Hz ............. NC
PLOT 10 Software packages designed to be
used with the 4012 Computer Display Terminal
include: Terminal Control System, Advanced
Graphing-II, Easy Graphing , Interactive Graphing
Package, Preview Routines for CalComp Plotters,
Character Generation System, and the Interactive
Graphics Library.
OEM terms available on this product.
COMPUTER
DISPLAY TERMINALS
TEK
CHARACTERISTICS
DISPLAY
CRT Type - Direct View Bistable Storage,
Dimensions - 483 mm (19 in) diagonal.
Display Area - 381 x 279 mm (15 x 11 in),
ALPHANUMERIC MODE
Character Set, 4014-1 - Full ASCII (94 printing characters),
Character Set, 4015-1 - Full ASCII and APL (188 printing
characters).
Character Formats - Four, program-selectable
74 character/line by 35 lines; 81 character/line by 36 lines; 121
character/line by 56 lines; 133 character/line by 64 lines.
Alphanumeric Cursor - 7 x 9 dot pulsating.
KEYBOARD
Normal Keyboard - Typewriter paired upper and lower case
with automatic repeating keys (4015-1 adds APL character
set).
GRAPHICS MODE
Vector Drawing Time - 127 m/s (5,000 in/s).
Addressable Points - 1024 X x 1024 Y (10 bits).
Viewable Points - 1024 X x 760 Y.
INTERACTIVE GRAPHIC MODE
Addressable Points - 3 X through 1024 X; 0 Y through
760Y.
Cross-hair Cursor - Thumbwheel controlled.
COMPUTER INTERFACES
Basic Data Communication Interlace - EIA RS-232C compatible, full duplex .
AC POWER
Line Voltage - 110/220 V ac (high, med, low).
Line Frequency - 46 to 440 Hz.
Power - 350 W,
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dimensions
Width
Height
Depth
mm
508
1105
825
in
20.0
43.5
32.5
Ib
Weight
kg
4014-1/4015-1
Net
66.0
483 mm (19 in) Direct-View Storage Display
RS-232 Data Communications Interface (021-0065-00).
150.0
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Selectable Formats in Alphanumeric and
Graphic Modes
High-Resolution, Interactive Graphics
Capability
Plug-In Intelligence Options
APL Character Set Available
The most effective way to display a large data
base is high resolution , big screen graphics, The
19-inch, flicker-free 4014-1 and APL-Ianguage
4015-1 Computer Display Terminals offer a multitude of capabilities for mapping, design, manufacturing , medicine, energy exploration and many
other diverse applications,
Firmware options provide up to 26k of graphics
memory for local symbols, stroke-drawn characters, overlays, or background graphics, all of
which can be redisplayed on command from the
host or keyboard, Reduce data transmission as
you redraw portions of your graphics from local
memory and generate circles and arcs by a single
command, Add local scaling, rotation , and clipping of graphics, Buffer communications between the host and keyboard, Reduce CPU
connect-time through local control of graphic
tablets, plotters, and tape and disk storage, A
variety of optional intelligence is available to help
you keep up with new methods in mapping,
process layout, financial graphing and much
more,
The 4014-1 and 4015-1 offer 1024 X by 780 Y
displayable points standard and up to 4096 X by
3120 Y displayable points with the optional Enhanced Graphics Module, Its 12 million point
capability is more than sufficient to solve most
complex mapping and design tasks, Full 94character ASCII includes four program-selectable
alphanumeric formats that display up to 8512
characters at once,
Tektronix PLOT 10, a versatile modular software
provides a library of proven graphics packages
for all levels of users, PLOT 10 Software includes:
Interactive Graphics Library (IGL), a system of 1/0
device drives primary commands and advanced
feature support for device independent applications: Terminal Control System (TCS) for linking to
existing applications, PLOT 10 Easy Graphing for
rapid generation business or scientific graphs
and much more,
Interactive previewing on the 4014-1 can considerably reduce time involvement in plotter trial-anderror graphic development. As a cartographer's
tool, for instance, the 4014-1 will draw precise
maps of cities states, and land formations , and
isolate and enlarge those areas you choose,
ORDERING INFORMATION
4014-1 Computer Display Terminal ___ $15,750
4015-1 Computer Display Terminal ••. $16,900
Option 01 - Optional Data Communications Interface + $525
Option 02 - DEC PDP-II w/KL-ll Teletype Control
Interface .... _.................................................................. + $525
Option 04 - Data General NOVA Interface ............... + $525
Option 05 - Peripheral Control Interface .................. +$790
Option 06 - HP 2100 Series (HP 12531 Card)
Interface ....................................................................... + $525
Option 16 - DEC PDP-II, -11/05 w/DL-l1 Control
(M7800) Interface ......................................................... + $525
Option 23 - Correspondence Code Interface + 2k
Output BuHer ............................................................ +$1,325
Option 27 - Additional 32k of Graphics Memory ...... + $200
Option 30 - Minibus Extender ................................... +$135
Option 31 - Display Multiplexer ................................ + $640
Option 34 - Enhanced Graphics Module.
(Factory installed only) .............................................. +$1,100
Option 36 - Dual Interface Capability .................... +$1,120
Option 40 - Programmable Keyboard .................... +$1,780
Option 41 - Expanded Symbol/Character Package. +$155
Option 48 - 220 V, 50 Hz ............................................... NC
Tektronix oHers service training classes on the 4014 Computer
Display Terminal. For further training information, contact your
local Sales/Service OHice or request a copy of the Tektronix
Service Training Schedule on the return card in the center of
this catalog.
OEM terms available on these products.
89
DISPLAY MONITOR
TEK STORAGE
Software support for the Graphics Attachment
includes basic routines for drawing lines, placing
text, and coordinate transformation. Advanced
routines for geometric structures and 3-dimensional displays are also provided.
The 618 offers the benefits of low-cost, highresolution graphics on a storage screen with
excellent interactivity. Two line widths can be
selected by software.
The 618 features a 19-inch diagonal CRT driven
as an X-V directed beam display, using analog
inputs. The display is horizontally oriented, with
the X-axis as the long axis.
CHARACTERISTICS
DISPLAY
CRT Type - Direct View Storage.
Dimensions - 48 cm (19 in) diagonal.
Display Area - 267 X 356 mm (10.5 x 14 in).
Stored Writing Speed - 150 m/s.
Refreshed Writing Speed - 500 m/s.
Write-Thru Contrast Ration - 4:1. (Written to background.)
M"ximum Z-Axis Repetition R"te - 1 MHz.
Stored Luminance - 5 flo
Resolution, Center Screen - 40 line pairs/in.
Resolution, Screen Edges - 35 line pairs/in.
Positional Accuracy - ± 1.25. (Percent of long axis.)
Stored Dot Writing Time - 5 ~s or less.
Settling Time - 5 ~s + 5 ~s/cm to within one spot diameter.
Viewing Time - = 2 minutes until hold mode; = 30 minutes
until AUTO ERASE.
Erase Cycle Time - 1.5 s, ± 20%.
618
High Resolution Graphics
Combined Stored and Write Thru Mode
19 Inch Diagonal CRT
Simultaneous stored graphics and refresh
information
An extra feature on the 618 is the Write Thru
Mode - a technique by which refreshed data
appears on the screen at the same time as stored
graphics. The stored portion of the screen
presents high resolution , high density graphic and
alphanumeric information , while the refresh portion of the display adds the benefits of selective
erase, interactivity, and dynamic motion, without
any loss of resolution .
High Speed Interactive Graphics adds a New
Dimension to the IBM 3277 Display Station. The
Tektronix 618 Storage Display Monitor can be
used with an IBM 3277 Model 2 Display Station
that is equipped with a 3277 Graphics Attachment. The Graphics Attachment (RPQ 7H0284
from IBM) allows the 618 Monitor to add a wide
range of graphic capabilities to the station. A dual
display station is thus configured with the IBM
monitor displaying alphanumeric data and the 618
displaying graphic information and special
symbols.
90
AC POWER
Line Voltage Ranges - 90 to 110 V ac, 108 to 132 V ac, 198
to 242 V ac, 216 to 264 V ac ijumper selectable).
Line Frequency - 48 to 66 Hz.
Power - 220 W maximum at 115 V ac, 60 Hz.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dimensions
Width
Height
Depth
mm
572
533
647
Weight =
kg
Net
Shipping
46.0
55.0
in
22.5
21.0
25.5
Ib
100.0
120.0
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Power cord (161-0066-00).
ORDERING INFORMATION
618 Storage Display Monitor •.•••.••••.. $11,445
Option 30 - Interconnecting Cable, _...................... __.. +$155
(61 B to IBM 3277 For use with IBM Graphics Attachment, IBM
RPQ 7H0284)
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORD AND PLUG OPTIONS
Option AI - Universal Euro 220 V/16A. 50 Hz .............. NC
Option A2 - UK 240 V/13A. 50 Hz ___ ........ ___ ........... _....... NC
Option A3 - Australian 240 V/l0A , 50 Hz ........ _............. NC
Option A4 - North American 240 V/15A, 60 Hz ............. NC
OEM terms "Yailable on this product.
COMPUTER
DISPLAY TERMINAL
TEK
CHARACTERISTICS
DISPLAY
CRT Type - Direct View Bistable Storage.
Written Image - Bright green on green background.
Dimensions - 635 mm (25 in) diagonal.
Display Area - 454 x 340 mm (18 x 13.5 in).
ALPHANUMERIC MODE
Character Set - Full ASCII (94 printing character).
Standard Character Formats - 74 character/line by 35
81 character/line by 38 lines ; 133 characterlline by 64
179 character/line by 86 lines.
Optional Character Formats - 74 characterlline by 35
81 character/line by 38 lines; 121 characterlline by 58
133 character/line by 64 lines.
Alphanumeric Cursor - 7 x 9 dot pulsating.
lines;
lines;
lines ;
lines;
KEYBOARD
Normal Keyboard - Typewriter paired upper and lower case
with automatic repeating keys.
GRAPHICS MODE
Drawing Time/Resolution Vector Drawing Time - 200 m/s
(8.000 in/s).
Addressable Points - 4096 X x 4096 Y (12 bits).
Viewable Points - 4096 X x 3120 Y.
Vector Formats - Five (straight, dotted and dashed lines).
INTERACTIVE GRAPHIC MODE
Addressable Points - 0 X through 1023 X; 0 Y through
780 Y.
Cross-hair Cursor - Thumbwheel controlled.
COMPUTER INTERFACES
Basic Data Communications Interface - EIA RS-232C compatible, full duplex.
AC POWER
Line Voltage - 110/220 V ac (high, med, low).
Line Frequency - 48 to 66 Hz.
Power - 450 W.
4016-1
636 mm (25 in) Direct-View Storage Display
High-Resolution, Flicker-Free Graphics
Selectable Formats in Graphic and
Alphanumeric Modes
Plug-In Intelligence Options
The 4016-1 features a high-resolution , 25-inch
display screen that allows designers of electronic
circuit boards, utility networks, automotive components, schematic diagrams, street maps or
similar applications to work with fine detail while
maintaining the total picture perspective.
Using a Direct View Storage Tube (DVST) display,
4016-1 graphic lines are sharp, stable and flickerfree , simplifying the study of fine details. Its
4096X by 3120Y viewable points, and finely
etched 10-mil wide vectors are uniquely suited to
display highly complex graphics. Thumbwheelcontrolled crosshair cursor makes it easy to
interactively manipulate the display.
Over 15,000 Displayable Characters
Besides enabling display of more high density
graphic information than any other terminal available, the 4016-1 provides high density alphanumerics for applications, from graphic labeling to
newspaper page layout. Over 15,000 characters
may be displayed simultaneously and may be
formatted as 179 alphanumeric characters per
line , like a line printer, or in two 85 character
columns, like an open book.
Three other larger character formats are standard
with the 4016-1, the largest of which is suitable for
group viewing.
Complete Tektronix 4014-1 Compatibility
The 4016-1 is compatible with 4014-1 application
software, communication support, and other
Tektronix peripheral devices. The 4016-1 is supported by the family of PLOT 10 Software
products.
Plug-in Intelligence
Using the modular 4010 bus structure, add-on
low-cost options include up to 26k of usable
graphics display memory, scaling, relative graphics, clipping, circular arc generation, rotation by
one degree increments, user definable stroke
characters, programmable keyboard, GPIB interfacing to the intelligent 4924 Digital Cartridge
Tape Drive, 4907 File Manager, and 4662 and
4663 Interactive Digital Plotters, plus the 4953 or
4954 Graphics Tablet.
Commands also allow a user to digitize data with
distance, time, or gradient filtering; edit graphics
from a host computer, local 4907, 4924 storage
device or Option 40 programmable keys, and
implement off-line plotting by accessing data via
local storage devices.
Added Enhancements
The 4016-1 includes a convenient detachable
keyboard and detachable display.
Other standard enhancements include hardware
generated solid, dashed, and dotted lines; point
plotting with software controllable point sizes and
incremental "relative graphics" plotting.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dimensions
Width
Height
Depth
mm
680
1278
756
Weight
kg
113.0
Net
in
27.0
50.7
30.0
Ib
250.0
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Wheel kit (040-0714-00); RS-232 Data Communications
Interface (021-0065-00).
ORDERING INFORMATION
4016-1 Computer Display Terminal ... $19,500
Option 01 - Optional Data Communications
Interface ....................................................................... + $525
Option 02 - DEC PDP-II w/KL-l1 Teletype Control
Interface ....................................................................... +$525
Option 04 - Data General NOVA Interface ............... +$525
Option 05 - Peripheral Control Interface .................. +$790
Option 06 - HP 2100 Series (HP 12531 Card)
Interface ....................................................................... +$525
Option 16 - DEC PDP-II. -11 /05 Control (M78oo)
Interface ....................................................................... +$525
Option 23 - Correspondence Code Interface + 2k
Output Buffer ............................................................ + $ 1,325
Option 27 - Additional 32k of Graphics Memory ...... + $200
Option 31 - Display Multiplexer ................................ +$640
Option 32 - 4014 Character Set ..................................... NC
Option 35 - Dual Interface Capability ....................... + $935
Option 40 - Programmable Keyboard .................... +$1,780
Option 41 - Expanded Symbol/Character Package. +$155
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORD AND PLUG OPTIONS
Option
Option
Option
Option
Al
A2
A3
A4
-
Universal Euro 220 V /16A, 50 Hz ..............
UK 240 V/13A, 50 Hz .................................
Australian 240 V/1OA, 50 Hz ......................
North American 240 V/15A, 60 Hz .............
OEM terms available on this product.
NC
NC
NC
NC
91
DISPLA Y TERMINAL
TEK COMPUTER
KEYBOARD
Normal Keyboard - 72 typewriter paired. upper and lower
case. programmable and autorepeating (seven lighted).
User-Delinable Programmable Function Keys terminal control. lour speciallunction .
Character Set -
ALPHANUMERIC MODE
94 (lull ASCII) or 128 in ' snoopy mode -.
Character Format -
Resolution -
80 columns. 34 rows. 7 x 9 dot matrix.
GRAPHICS MODE
640 horizontal x 480 vertical pixels.
Addressability -
4096 x 4096 points.
Command Syntax Line Types -
Eight . Four
PLOT 10 compatible.
Solid. dashed. erase.
Graphic Primitives -
Vectors. polygons. text.
COMPUTER INTERFACES
Basic Data Communications Interlace - EIA RS-232C compatible. full-or hall-duplex .
AC POWER
90 to 132 V ac, 6.25A maximum. 48 to 62 Hz or 180 to 250 V
ac. 3A maximum . 48 to 62 Hz.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
NIW
4112A
Raster Scan Monochrome Display
with Local Picture Segments
2-D Transforms, True Zoom and Pan up to
Three Memory Planes
Compatible with Tektronix 4010 Series
Designed to satisfy a broad range of evolving
needs, from basic line graphs to high density
design, the 4112A Computer Display Terminal
provides access to an unusually wide assortment
of graphics capabilities. Its powerful local intelligence keeps user interactivity high and host
dependency low.
The 4112A offers a bright, flicker-free 15-inch
(diagonal) raster scan display. Eight user definable programmable function keys are provided.
The 4112A is compatible with the popular
Tektronix 4010 Series of Computer Display Terminals . Programs developed for the 4012 or 4014,
for example, may require only minor software
revisions to run on the 4112A. Updating existing
programs for the new 4112A features is a simple
process using the modular device drivers and
advanced feature support of the Tektronix PLOT
10 Interactive Graphics Library (IGL) .
Local Picture Segments
A local picture segment is a group of graphic
primitives that describes a portion of a picture.
These primitives are retained in the terminal's
memory to be redrawn and manipulated at any
time . Schematic components, symbols, titles and
text can be defined as segments, for example.
then stored in local memory and redrawn when
needed , with minimal computer time and communications traffic required. Local segments may
92
Dimensions
mm
in
Width
Height
Depth
546
404
849
21 .5
15.9
32.0
Weight
kg
Net
46.3
Ib
102.0
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
also be rotated , scaled or moved around the
screen, by a simple command from the host
processor (2-D Transforms).
Zoom and Pan
An addressable display space of 4096 by 4096
points is accessible locally by simple, key-actuated zoom and pan or via the host. The
thumbwheel controls are used to pan the display
with a rectangular cursor and to set the viewport
dimensions of the magnified image.
Multiple Display Memory Planes
Two additional memory planes may be added to
the 4112A, via Option 20, to provide as many as
three display surfaces. This optional capability
enables a number of effects, including overlays of
text and/or graphic information.
Definable Dialog Area
At any time, the user can specify the size and
position of the region where communications
between terminal and host are displayed. This
dialog area is scrollable by the thumbwheels,
allowing for easy recall of previous
communications.
Local Programmability
Optional 4110 Series Local Programmability includes a Fortran 86 compiler. Low-level Terminal
Interface subroutines, a local version of PLOT 10
IGL and is implemented with CPM-86. (See page
105).
CHARACTERISTICS
DISPLAY
CRT Type Dimensions diagonal.
Scan Type -
Raster scan.
220 x 254 mm 18.6 x 11 .5 in) 381 mm (15 in)
50 or 60 Hz. non-interlaced.
Phosphor Type -
White P4.
MEMORY
Standard Display Memory -
72k bytes.
Standard Graphics Memory 672k bytes).
32k bytes lexpandable to
Power cord, 8 It . (161-0123-00); host port RS-232 Cable.
12 It. (012-0911-00); re-Iegendable key caps. package of 8.
(366- 1882-00) ; function key overlays . package of 6 .
(334-3290-01 ).
ORDERING INFORMATION
4112A Computer Display Terminal ..••. $9,600
Option 01 -
Extended Communications _.. _________ .. _.... _ +$950
Option 02 -
Current-Loop Interlace .. ___ __ .. _____ .... ___ _.... +$250
Option 4A -
United Kingdom Keyboard _.... _........ ___ .. __ .. ___ NC
Option 4C -
Swedish Keyboard ...................................... NC
Option 4E -
APL Keyboard ....................................... +$750
Option 4F -
Danish/Norwegian Keyboard ....................... NC
Option 10 -
Three-Port Peripheral Interlace ............. +$950
Option 11 -
External Video Output ............... _.......... _ +$800
Option 13 -
11 x 11 In Graphic Tablet with pen ____ +$3.300
Option 14 -
30 x 40 In Graphic Tablet with pen ____ +$5.500
Option 20 -
(2) Display Memory Planes ____________ .. ___ + $2.600
Option 24 -
Additional 32k bytes of RAM _________ .. __ ___ +$300
Option 25 -
Additional 64k bytes of RAM .. _____________ _ +$600
Option 26 -
Additional 96k bytes of RAM ____ __ __ ___ .. ___ +$875
Option 27 -
Additional 128k bytes of RAM ___ .. ______ +$1.150
Option 28 -
Additional 256k bytes of RAM _____ ...... + $2.300
Option 29 -
Additional 512k bytes of RAM ........... +$4.600
Option 42 -
Single Flexible Disk ............................ +$1.700
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORD AND PLUG OPTIONS
Option AI - Universal Euro. 220 V/16A. 50 Hz ... _........ _ NC
Option A2 - UK . 240 V/13A. 50 Hz _____ .. ______ .... _____ .. ___ _.... NC
Option A3 -
Australian. 240 V/ l0A. 50 Hz ___________ .. __ _____ _ NC
Option A4 -
North American. 240 V/15A, 60 Hz ____ .. __.... NC
COMPUTER DISPLAY
TERMINALS
TEK
GRAPHICS MODE
Addressability - 4096 x 4096.
Line Types - Solid dashed, defceused.
Drawing Speed (Storage) - 134 m/s .
Drawing Speed (Relresh) - 537 m/s.
Graphic Command Syntax - Tektronix PLOT 10 compatible.
ALPHANUMERIC MODE
Standard Displayable Character Set - 94 character (full
ASCII).
AC POWER
Line Voltage - 90 to 132 V ac, 11 A maximum or 180 to 250
V ac, 5.5 A maximum.
Line Frequency - 48 to 62 Hz.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS 4114A
Dimensions
mm
in
Width
Height
Depth
597
1290
813
23.5
51.0
32.0
Weight
kg
Net
Ib
107.5
237.0
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS 4114A30
Pedestal
Monitor
Dimensions
mm
Width
Height
Depth
584
425
582
Width
Height
Depth
508
70
229
mm
in
23.0
16.8
22.9
Keyboard
Weight
Net
4114A , . " ,
Direct View Storage Tube
with local Picture Segments
2-D Transforms, Refresh Support and Fast
Redraw
Compatible with Tektronix 4010 Series
The 4114A Computer Display Terminal satisfies
the needs of graphics users for faster, more
versatile throughput in high density graphics applications. Its local intelligence and expandable
memory can significantly reduce the delays and
costs associated with over-dependence on a
host computer. The 4114A has a resolution high
enough for the most complex engineering and
scientific graphics.
The 4114A is compatible with Tektronix 4010
Series Computer Display Terminals. Using the
modular device drivers and advanced feature
support of Tektronix PLOT 10 Interactive Graphics Library (IGL) makes updating existing programs a simple process.
A local picture segment is a group of graphic
primitives describing a portion of a picture, retained as a unit in local memory to be redrawn or
manipulated at any time. Schematic components,
symbols , titles, and text can be defined as segments, then stored and recalled without using a
string of commands. Local segments can be
rotated , scaled or moved around the screen , with
only a simple command from the host (2-D
Transforms).
Refresh Support
Local generation of more than 1500 cm or approximately 3000 short vectors of flicker-free refresh . Option 31 provides color enhanced (amber)
refresh for easy recognition of refresh information.
4114A30 Desk Configuration , . " ,
Computer display terminal operators can Improve
their performance with the efficiency, convenience and comfort of the 4114A Model 30,
modular Desk Configuration.
The pedestal module contains the power supply
and circuit board cage, and also houses one or
two optional flexible disk drives for convenient
local storage. Supporting the display at eye level
the table module can be installed on the left or
the right side of the pedestal. The keyboard for
the 4114A30 can be detached from the table
module for positioning in the lap, on the pedestal,
or underneath the display screen .
local Programmability
Optional 4110 Series Local Programmability includes a Fortran 86 compiler, Low-level Terminal
Interface subroutines, a local version of PLOT 10
IGL and is implemented with CPM-86. (See page
105).
CHARACTERISTICS
DATA TRANSMISSION
Data Rate - 50 to 19,200 b/s.
Data Type - 7-bit asynchronous serial ASCII , plus parity bit.
Block Mode - Option 01 Extended Communications.
Communications Interface - RS-232C.
DISPLAY
CRT Type - Direct View Storage Tube; 4096 x 4096 addressable points ; 4096 x 3120 displayable points; enhanced refresh ;
fast redraw.
Dimensions - 368 mm x 277 mm (14.5 in x 10.9 in) ; 483 mm
(19 in) diagonal.
Standard to 800k).
MEMORY
56k bytes ROM and 32k bytes RAM (expandable
KEYBOARD
Normal Keyboard - 72 typewriter paired, upper and lower
case, programmable and auto repeating, (five lighted).
User Definable Programmable Function Keys - Eight.
Graphic Cursor Control - Thumbwheels.
Alpha Cursor POSition - Key control.
Scrolling - Thumbwheels.
20.0
2.8
9.0
In
22 .3
30.0
33.5
565
762
851
Tabfe
1219
692
762
48.0
27.2
30.0
kg
Ib
165.9
364.9
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Power cord, 8 ft, (161 -0123-00) ; power cable, pedestal to
display , 21 in, (161-0145-00); host port RS-232 Cable,
12 ft, (012-0911-00); re-Iegendable key caps, pkg of 8,
(366-1882-00); function key overlays, pkg 01 6, (334-3290-01 ).
ORDERING INFORMATION
4114A Computer Display Terminal ... $17,900
4114A30 Computer Display Terminal:
Desk Configuration ........................... $21,400
Option 01 - Extended Communications .. ,................. +$950
Option 02 - Current Loop Interlace .......................... +$250
Option 4A - United Kingdom Keyboard .......................... NC
Option 4C - Swedish Keyboard ...................................... NC
Option 4E - APL Keyboard ....................................... +$750
Option 4F - Danishl Norwegian Keyboard ....................... NC
Option 10 - Three - Port Peripheral Interlace ........... +$950
Option 13 - 11 x 11 Inch Graphic Tablet wl Pen .... + $3,300
Option 14 - 30 x 40 Inch Graphic Tablet wl Pen .... +$5,500
Option 24 - Adds 32k bytes of RAM ........................ +$300
Option 25 - Adds 64k bytes of RAM ........................ +$600
Option 26 - Adds 96k bytes of RAM ........................ +$875
Option 27 - Adds 128k bytes of RAM ................... +$1,150
Option 28 - Adds 256k bytes 01 RAM ................... +$2,300
Option 29 - Adds 512k bytes of RAM ................... +$4,600
Option 31 - Color Enhanced Refresh .................... +$2,000
Option 40 - Ten-Slot Peripheral Bus Extender;
Nominal line VOltage ..................................................... + $350
Option 41 - Ten-Slot Peripheral Bus Extender;
90-110 line voltage ....................................................... + $350
Option 42 - Single Flexible Disk and Disk
Controller ................................................................... + $ I, 700
Option 43 - Dual Flexible Disk and Disk
Controller ............................... .................................... +$2,600
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORD AND PLUG OPTIONS
Option AI - Universal Euro, 220 V/16A, 50 Hz ............. NC
Option A2 - UK, 240 V/13A. 50 Hz ................................ NC
Option A3 - Australian, 240 V/l0A, 50 Hz ..................... NC
Option A4 - North American , 240 V/ 15A, 60 Hz ............ NC
Option A5 - Switzerland 220 V/ l0A, 50 Hz ................... NC
OEM terms available on these products.
93
COMPUTER DISPLAY
TEK TERMINALS
4113A
t.rav
Raster Scan Color Display
Local Picture Segments
2-D Transforms, True Zoom and Pan
Compatible with Tektronix 4010 Series
New Capabilities of Color Combined With
Local Intelligence
The 4113A Computer Display Terminal continues
the evolution of the 4110 Series of intelligent
display terminals by adding color raster features
while maintaining compatibility with the 4112A
and the 4114A.
The 4113A features true zoom and pan, and
multiple viewports. In addition , three memory
planes display any eight colors at one time (or 16
colors via Option 21).
Local Picture Segments
A local picture segment is a group of graphic
primitives that describe a portion of a picture.
Schematic components, symbols, titles, and text
can be defined as segments, then stored in local
memory and redrawn in a specified color as
needed , with minimal host time. Local segments
may also be scaled, rotated , or moved around the
screen, by a single command from the host (2-D
Transforms).
Zoom and Pan
An addressable 4096 X x 4096 Y display space is
accessible by key-actuated zoom and pan or via
the host. Thumbwheel controls pan the display
with a rectangular cursor and set dimensions of
the magnified image.
Multiple Display Memory Planes
Besides being used to specify colors, the memory (bit) planes provide for overlaying text and/or
graphic information , useful in the preparation of
mUlti-layer pictures.
t.rav
4113A30 Desk Configuration
Computer display terminal operators can improve
their performance with the efficiency, convenience , and comfort of the 4113A30, modular
Desk Configuration.
The pedestal module contains the power supply,
circuit board cage and also houses one or two
94
optional flexible disk drives for convenient local
storage. Supporting the display at eye level, the
table module can be installed on the left or the
right side of the pedestal. The keyboard for the
4113A30 can be detached from the table module
for positioning, in the lap, on the pedestal, or
undemeath the display screen .
Local Programmability
Optional 4110 Series Local Programmability includes a Fortran 86 compiler, Low-level Terminal
Interface subroutines, a local version of PLOT 10
IGL and is implemented with CPM-86. (See page
105).
CHARACTERISTICS
DATA TRANSMISSION
Data Rate - 9600 baud.
Block Mode - Option 01 .
Communications Interface - RS-232C.
Standard 800k.
GRAPHICS MODE
Addressability - 4096 X x 4096 Y points.
Resolution - 640 x 480 pixels.
Line Types - Solid, dashed.
Graphic Command Syntax - PLOT 10 compatible.
Graphics Primitives - Vectors, panels, text.
Colors (Three-Bit Plane) - Eight.
Colors (Four-Bit Plane) - 16.
Palette Salection - 4096.
ALPHANUMERIC MODE
Character Set - 94 (full ASCII).
Character Format - 80 columns, 34 rows, 7 x 9 matrix in
8 x 14 (pixel) area.
AC POWER
90 to 132 V ac, 10 A maximum or 198 to 250 V ac, 5 A maximum ; 50 or 60 Hz.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS 4113A
Weight
Net
mm
584
1350
787
kg
125.0
Width
Height
Depth
584
425
582
Width
Height
Depth
508
70
229
in
23.0
16.8
22.9
mm
Keyboard
Net
20.0
2.8
9.0
in
22.3
30.0
33.5
565
762
851
Table
1219
692
762
48.0
27.2
30.0
kg
Ib
166.1
365.4
ORDERING INFORMATION
4113A Computer Display Terminal ••. $16,500
4113A30 Computer Display Terminal
Desktop Configuration •..•.................. $20,000
KEYBOARD
Normal Keyboard - 72 typewriter paired upper and lower
case, programmable, auto repeating (seven lighted).
User Definable Programmable Function Keys - Eight.
Terminal Control Keys - Four.
Zoom and Pan Keys - Four.
Graphic Cursor Control - Thumbwheels.
Width
Height
Depth
Pedestal
Monitor
mm
Weight
MEMORY
88k bytes ROM, 32k bytes RAM expandable to
DISPLAY
Medium - Shadow-mask color raster tube.
Size - 483 mm (19 in) diagonal.
Refresh Rate - 60 Hz, noninterlaced.
Dimensions
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS 4113A30
Dimensions
in
23.0
53.0
31.0
Option 01 - Extended Communications .................... +$950
Option 02 - Current Loop Interface .......................... + $250
Option 4A - United Kingdom Keyboard .......................... NC
Option 4C - Swedish Keyboard ...................................... NC
Option 4E - APL Keyboard ....................................... + $750
Option 4F - Danish/Norwegian Keyboard ....................... NC
Option 10 - Three-Port Peripheral Interface ............. +$950
Option 12 - External Video Output ........................ +$1,150
Option 13 - 11 x 11 Inch Graphic Tablet w/Pen .... +$3,300
Option 14 - 30 x 40 Inch Graphic Tablet w/Pen .... +$5,500
Option 21 - Display Memory Plane ....................... +$1,500
Option 24 - Adds 32k bytes of RAM ........................ +$300
Option 25 - Adds 64k bytes of RAM ........................ + $600
Option 26 - Adds 96k bytes of RAM ........................ + $875
Option 27 - Adds 128k bytes of RAM ................... +$1,150
Option 28 - Adds 256k bytes of RAM ................... +$2,300
Option 29 - Adds 512k bytes of RAM ................... +$4,600
Option 42 - Single Flexible Disk and Disk
Controller ................................................................... +$1,700
Option 43 - Dual Flexible Disk and Disk
Controller ................................................................... +$2,600
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORD AND PLUG OPTIONS
Option AI - Universal Euro, 220 V/16A, 50 Hz ............. NC
Option A2 - UK, 240 V/13A, 50 Hz ................................ NC
Option A3 - Australian, 240 V/l0A, 50 Hz ..................... NC
Option A4 - North American, 240 V/15A, 60 Hz ............ NC
Option A5 - Switzerland , 220 V/l0A, 50 Hz .................. NC
Ib
275.0
OEM terms available on these products.
TEK
COMPUTER
DISPLAY TERMINAL
KEYBOARD
Normal Keyboard -
86 typewriter (4 lighted).
Programmable Keys -
81 .
ALPHANUMERIC MODE
Character/Line -
80.
Line/Display (Rows) Character Full Screen -
34.
2720.
Standard Displayable Character Sat - 128 upper and lower
case (lull ASCII); optional character sets available.
Character Size - 7 x 9 in and 8 x 14 dot matrix (graphic cells
are 8 x 14 matrix).
Cursor Type -
Wide underscore.
GRAPHICS MODE
Resolution -
28 addressable points/cm.
Line Types -
Solid, dashed, points, dark vectors (erasing).
AC POWER
Standard Power Ranges -
115 V ac, 3 A, 49 to 63 Hz.
295 W maximum at 125 V ac.
90 to 100 V ac; 105 to 125 V ac; 112 to 136 V ac.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dimensions
mm
Width
Height
Depth
445
317
540
Weight
kg
Net
27.2
in
17.5
12.5
21.2
Ib
60.0
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Keyboard overlay, blank, (334-3290·00); blank key cap, 1 :2,
(366-1748-00); key cap cover, 1:2, (2OQ-.2163·oo); blank key
cap, 1:1, (366-1749·00); key cap cover, 1:1, (200.2164.00);
power cord, (161·0066-00).
4025A
Alphanumerics And Graphics
PLOT 10 Compatible
ASCII Character Set and Finger Tip Editing
Forms Ruling Option Available
The 4025A provides a marriage of alphanumerics
and optional graphics. You can create and store
multiple graphs in memory, create multiple
graphs per page, and scroll graphics along with
alphanumeric information.
The Standard 4025A Forms Mode and Ruling
option can duplicate essentially any form . Visual
attributes include enhanced, blinking, inverted
and underlined fields . Logical attributes include
protected fields, alphanumeric unprotected or
numeric only.
To make data entry and editing easier, you can
divide the display screen into two separate dis·
play areas, each with independent scrolling. The
monitor area is used to communicate with the
host and the workspace area for the form or
graphic display. Hard copy output is standard.
The PLOT 10 Easy Graphing Software package
lets you interactively create bar charts with multi·
pie shadings, histograms, log plots, pie charts
and period axes, all with a wide variety of labeling
options.
The PLOT 10 Interactive Graphics Library pro·
vides all the tools needed for the most demand·
ing graphics application developer. Plot 10 IGL is
modeled after the ANSI/SIGGRAPH proposal for
a graphics programming standard.
The keyboard, an office typewriter configuration,
is immediately familiar to new users. Pre·defined
editing keys simplify insertion, deletion and input
of lines and characters. Sixteen user·definable
keys, plus nearly all other keys on the keyboard
can be redefined to generate a command or
character string at the touch of a finger.
A 16k display memory is standard with the 4025A,
expandable to 32k, allowing buffering and scroll·
ing of many pages. Graphic capability is added ,
with 32k memory, by Option 26.
ORDERING INFORMATION
4025A Computer Display Terminal..... $5,900
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
01 02 03 04 4A 4B 4C 22 26 31 36 38 -
Hall/Full Duplex Interface ...................... +$180
Current Loop Interface .......................... +$250
RS·232C Peripheral Interface" .....•...••••• +$330
GPIB Peripheral Interface" .•.................. +$440
United Kingdom Keyboard .......................... NC
French Keyboard ................................•........ NC
Swedish Keyboard ...................................... NC
32k bytes of Display Memory .......•...•••. +$100
Graphics, 32k bytes Memory ................ +$800
Character Set Expansion ROMs ........... +$450
Peripheral ROM .....•........•.......•.•...•.•.••... +$185
Keyboard Graphic Input Interface"" ...... +$400
"Requires Option 36.
""Requires Option 26.
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORD AND PLUG OPTIONS
Option
Option
Option
Option
AI
A2
A3
A4
-
Universal Euro. 220 V/ 16A, 50 Hz .............
UK, 240 V/ 13A, 50 Hz ...............••..•............
Australian, 240 V/ l0A, 50 Hz .....................
North American, 240 V/15A, 60 Hz ............
NC
NC
NC
NC
CHARACTERISTICS
DATA TRANSMISSION
Data Rate -
Programmable to 9600 baud.
Communications Interface -
RS·232C, full duplex standard.
DISPLAY
Medium -
Raster scan CRT, 640 x 480 points.
Dimensions diagonal.
Type -
229 x 163 mm (9 x 6.4 inl 300 mm (12 in)
Dot Matrix.
Relresh Rate -
Dot and Frame-30/s; Field·60/s.
Raster Lines displayed.
Display Memory -
Standard 525 line scan with 480 lines
Tektronix offers service training classes on the 4020 Raster
Scan Terminal Series. For further training information, oontact
your local Sales/Service Office or request a copy of the Tek·
tronix Service Training Schedule on the return card in the cen·
ter of this catalog.
16k bytes standard.
OEM terms available on this product.
95
GRAPHICS TERMINAL
TEK COLOR
Field Refresh Rate - 60/s.
Type - Dot matrix (each character position has 14 rows of
eight dots each).
Cursor Types
Alphanumeric - Wide underscore.
Graphic - Full screen cross-hair.
MEMORY
Standard Display Memory - 16k bytes.
Standard Graphics Memory - 48k bytes.
KEYBOARD
Normal Keyboard - 86 typewriter (four lighted).
Programmable Keys - 81.
Cursor Position - Key control.
Terminal Functions - Key control.
Scrolling - Key control.
Numeric Pad - Key control.
GRAPHIC MODE
Resolution - 26 addressable points/cm.
Line Types - Solid (one of eight colors), dashed, PLOT 10
compatible.
ALPHANUMERIC MODE
Standard Displayable Character Set - 128 (full ASCII).
Character/Line - 80.
Lines/Display (Rows) - 34 .
User Definable Character Sets - Up to 31 fonts .
AC POWER
90 to 120 V ac, 6A maximum or 108 to 132 V ac, 6A maximum;
550 W maximum at 125 V ac 48 to 63 Hz.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
mm
Dimensions
Width
Height
Depth
Full Color Graphics and Alphanumerics
PLOT 10 Compatible
Fully Supported Color Capability
Dynamic Displays Easily Created
Adding a Color Dimension to Graphics
The 4027 A adds full-color graphics to a compact,
high performance computer terminal. Colors are
selected from a 64-color palette with up to eight
colors simultaneously displayable. When selecting colors with the Lightness, Saturation and Hue
controls , you 'll find the 4027 A system as easy to
use as it is versatile.
Local capabilities include colored vectors, characters, symbols, and polygon fill . Firmware enables a second color to border the polygon, and
allows user selection of up to 120 different patterns or color combinations for polygon or pie fill .
Because these capabi lities are initiated by
firmware , not software, 4027A operation makes
minimal demands on host computer
communications.
Easy-to-use Graphic Software
For graphic representation , the 4027 A uses colorenhanced PLOT 10 Easy Graphing Software .
Easy Graphing simplifies even non-programmer
construction of line graphs with special symbols
and dashed lines, legends, titles, and grids , and
up to six curves or colored bar charts.
96
The PLOT 10 Interactive Graphics Library provides all the tools needed for the most demanding graphics application developer PLOT 10 IGL
is modeled after the ANSI/SIGGRAPH proposal
for a graphics programming standard.
Graphic Input
Graphic input capability consists of a graphic
crosshair cursor controlled by graphic cursor
keys. In addition to reporting the coordinates
back to the host, the terminal also reports the
color of the designated coordinate.
Memory
The standard 16k bytes of display memory (optional 32k), and 48k to 192k bytes of graphic
memory (optional 192k bytes) allow scrolling , dual
screen and multiple field formatting featured in
the 4025A Terminal.
The Standard RGB and video signal outputs allow
connection of the 4027 A to external video displays for group viewing and presentations.
584
482
584
in
23.0
19.0
23.0
Weight
kg
Ib
Net
45.4
100.0
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Keyboard overlay, blank, (334-3290-00); blank key cap, 1:2,
(366-1748-00); key cap cover, 1:2, (200-2163-00); blank key
cap, 1:1, (366-1749-00); key cap cover, 1:1 , (200-2164-00) ;
power cord , (161-0066-00).
ORDERING INFORMATION
4027A Color Graphics Terminal ........ $10,900
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
01 02 03 04 4A 48 4C 22 29 31 36 -
Half/Full Duplex Interface ...................... +$160
Current Loop Interface ......................... , + $250
RS-232C Peripheral Interface' .............. +$330
GPIB Peripheral Interface' .................... +$440
United Kingdom Keyboard .......................... NC
French Keyboard ......................................... NC
Swedish Keyboard ...................................... NC
32k bytes of Display Memory ............... +$100
192k bytes of Color Graphics Memory. +$900
Character Set Expansion ...................... +$450
Peripheral ROM Interface ...................... +$165
• Requires Option 36.
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORD AND PLUG OPTIONS
Option A1 - Universal Euro, 220 V/16A, 50 Hz ............. NC
Option A2 - UK, 240 V/13A, 50 Hz ................................ NC
Option A3 - Australian, 240 V/10A, 50 Hz ..................... NC
Option A4 - North American, 240 V/15A, 60 Hz ............ NC
CHARACTERISTICS
DATA TRANSMISSION
Data Rate - 9600 baud, receiving and transmitting, independently selectable.
Communications Interface - RS-232C full duplex. (Option 01 for half and full duplex.)
DISPLAY
Medium - Shadow mask, raster scan, 640 x 480 points.
Colors Displayable At Once - Eight.
Color Pallette - 64.
Dimensions - 191 mm x 254 mm (7.5 in x 10 in) 330 mm or
13 in diagonal.
Patterns - 120 user definable.
Dot/Frame Refresh Rate - 30/s.
Tektronix offers service training classes on the 4020 Raster
Scan Terminal Series. For further training information, contact
your local Sales/ Service Office or request a copy of the Tektronix Service Training Schedule on the return card in the center of this catalog.
OEM terms available on this product.
TEK
DESKTOP
COMPUTER
KEYBOARD
Normal Keyboard - 128 upper and lower case (full ASCII)
with auto repeat.
User Definable Function Keys - 10-shiftable to 20. Keys for
single-step program execution, auto numbering, rewinding
tape, autoload/execute first program.
Calculator Key Pad - Five math functions .
Numeric Keys - Ten.
CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT
Type - LSI 8-bit microprocessor.
Standard Memory Workspace - 16k bytes (32k with
Option 22).
Programming Language - BASIC with extensions.
Dynamic Range - ± 10 - J08 to ± 10308.
Numeric Accuracy - 14 decimal digits (12 displayed).
TAPE DRIVE
Cartridge - MagnetiC.
Type - 300A, 300XL, and 600A Certified Data Cartridges
from Tektronix.
Rewind Speed - 90 ips.
Search/Read Speed - 30 ips.
Structure - 256 bytes w/header.
AC POWER
Voltage Ranges (±10%) - 100, 110, 120 V ac ; or 200,220,
240 V ac.
Line Frequency - 48 to 66 Hz.
Power - 200 w maximum .
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
mm
Dimensions
Width
Height
Depth
The 4051 is designed to support other products
that comply with IEEE Standard 488-1978.
Powerful, Easy-to-Use Desktop Computing
with Extended BASIC
with direct host-to-terminal data transfer. Terminal
modes provide local intelligence and direct data
transfer between the built-in cartridge tape drive
and host computer.
High Resolution Graphics and
Alphanumerics
The GPIB is built-in and easy to program with the
4051 BASIC 1/0 commands. As the industry's
choice for connecting instrumentation it is our
choice for the 4051 and its many available
peripherals.
Desktop computing for a whole spectrum of
problem solving, data analysis, and decision making applications. The 4051 is stand-alone computing power that is approachable, affordable, and
able to grow as your applications grow. It includes integrated computing , peripherals, and a
GPIB interface.
GPIB Extender
The General Purpose Interface Bus Extender
provides a cost-effective way to interconnect
remotely located, IEEE Standard 488 compatible
instruments, allowing GPIB communication over
distances of up to 500 meters (1650 feet) .
Friendly Graphics
Commands like DRAW and ROTATE built into the
4051 give you full graphics flexibility while working
in your units, not machine or raster units.
The magnetic cartridge tape drive is built into the
4051 hardware and language . File management
commands like FIND, OLD, READ, and WRITE,
retrieve or store programs and data. A comfortable typewriter keyboard is integrated into the
system with a 36-character buffer that eliminates
lost entries.
Extended BASIC language provides both power
for the sophisticated programmer and simplicity
for the beginner. Input and output can be as
simple at INPUT or PRINT or can have FORTRANlike power with PRINT, DELETE and IMAGE
commands.
Data Communications Interface (Option 01) permits data exchange with a host computer. Option
01 also enables the 4051 to emulate a terminal
GPIB Extenders are always used in pairs: Two
4932 units or one 4932 and one 4909F02. The
4932 is compatible with any instrument that has a
GPIB interface, and is compatible with the
4909F02 via the coaxial "link" cable. See page 26
for more information.
CHARACTERISTICS
DATA TRANSMISSION
Data Communication. Interface (Option 01) - Full or hall
duplex .
Oata Type - Asynchronous.
Data Rate - Up to 2400 baud.
Printer Interface (Option 10) - EIA RS-232 and RS-244A
compatible up to 2400 baud.
GPIB Conformance - IEEE Standard 488-1978 (byte serial,
bit parallel).
OISPLAY
CRT Type - Direct View Storage.
Graphic Resolution - 1024 x 780 displayable points.
Dimensions - 192 x 162 mm (7.5 x 5.5 in).
Character Set - Full ASCII upper/lower case. (Also includes
Scandinavian, German, Central European, Spanish, special
graphic symbols.)
Character Format - 72 character/line, 35 lines.
465
345
826
Weight
kg
Net
29.5
Operating Temperature -
In
18.3
13.6
32.5
Ib
65.0
10· C to 40 · C.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
System software tape (020-0160-04); system software backup tape (020-0161-03); power cord (161-0066-00); blank user
definable key overlays, pkg of 10, (334-2630-02).
ORDERING INFORMATION
4051 Desktop Computer ..................... $6,295
Option 01 Option 10 Option 22 -
Data Communications Interlace ............ +$900
Printer Interface .......•.............••......•....... +$550
32k Bytes Total Memory ....................... +$150
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORD AND PLUG OPTIONS
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
AI
A2
A3
A4
AS
-
Universal Euro, 220 V/16A, 50 Hz .............
UK, 240 V/13A, 50 Hz ................................
Australian, 240 V/10A, 50 Hz .....................
North American, 240 V/15A. 60 Hz ............
Switzerland 220V / 1OA, 50 Hz •...................
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES FOR 4932
4932 GPIB Extender ........................... $1,195
GPIB Cable. 2 m, double shield.
Order 012-0630-03 ............................................................ $90
GPIB Cable, 4 m, double shield .
Order 012-0630-04 .......................................................... $150
Coaxial Link Cable, 50 ft , RG 6/U.
Order 012-1051 -00 ........................•.......................•........... $50
Coaxial Link Cable, 250 ft, RG 6/U.
Order 012-1052-00 ................................................••........ $105
Tektronix offers service training classes on the 4050 Graphic
System Series. For further training information. contact your
local Sales/Service Office or request a copy of the Tektronix
Service Training Schedule on the return card in the center of
this catalog .
OEM terms are ayailable on this product.
97
DESKTOP
TEK COMPUTER
KEYBOARD
Normal Keyboard - 128 ASCII , upper/lower case (full ASCII)
with auto repeat.
User Definable Function Keys - 10 shiftable to 20. Keys for
single-step program execution auto-numbering, rewinding
tape, autoload/execute first program.
Calculator Key Pad - Five math functions .
Numeric Keys - Ten.
CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT
Type - LSI , bipolar, 16 bit.
Standard Memory Workspece - 32k bytes total (64k with
Option 24).
Programming Language - High level BASIC with extensions.
Dynamic Range - ± 10- 30. to ± 10'0' .
Numeric Accuracy - 14 decimal digits (12 displayed).
TAPE DRIVE
Cartridge - Magnetic.
Type - 300A, 300XL, and 600A Certified Data Cartridge from
Tektronix .
Rewind Speed - 90 ips.
Search/Read Speed - 30 ips.
Structure - 256 bytes w/header.
AC POWER
Voltage Ranges (±10%) -100, 110, 120 V ac or 200, 220,
240 V ac.
Line Frequency - 48 to 66 Hz.
Power - 300 W maximum.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
mm
Dimension.
Ilg~~?e1
The 4052A is designed to support other products
that comply with IEEE Standard 488-1978.
Fast Processing
High Level BASIC
Extended Memory File Manager (Option)
The 4052A Desktop Computer provides computation and communications for a whole spectrum of
problem solving, data analysis, and decision making applications. It offers high performance standalone computing power, flexible data communications, and easy-to-Iearn , extended BASIC. These
features , combined with high resolution graphics,
make the 4052A an excellent choice for scientific
and statistical research , forecasting , data acquisition , and analysis.
For rapid calculation, the 4052A has a fast processor with microcode floating point. Fast proceSSing coupled with simultaneous display of text
and graphics meets the needs of most application requirements .
A magnetic cartridge tape drive is built-in, allowing both ASCII and binary programs or data to be
easily stored and retrieved using simple file management commands in BASIC.
New extended BASIC provides the simplicity
desired by the beginner and the flexibility and
power required by the experienced programmer.
Device independent keywords such as INPUT
and PRINT make programming input and output
operations easy. Fast matrix functions such as
multiply, inverse, transpose, identity and determinants are built into BASIC.
98
465
345
826
Width
Height
Depth
Friendly Graphics
Commands like MOVE, DRAW and ROTATE in
BASIC allow graphic displays to be created on
the 4052A using user defined units, not machine
or raster units.
GPIB Extender
The General Purpose Interface Bus Extender
provides a cost-effective way to interconnect
remotely located, IEEE Standard 488 compatible
instruments, allowing GPIB communication over
distances of up to 500 meters (1650 feet) .
GPIB Extenders are always used in pairs: Two
4932 units or one 4932 and one 4909F02. The
4932 is compatible with any instrument that has a
GPIB interface, and is compatible with the
4909F02 via the coaxial "link" cable. See page 26
for more information.
CHARACTERISTICS
DATA TRANSMISSION
Data Type - Asynchronous.
Data Rate - Up to 9600 baud.
Data Communications Interface (Option 01) - Full or half
duplex.
Printer Interface (Option 10) - EIA RS-232 or RS-244A
oompatible.
GPIB Conformance - IEEE Standard 488-1978 (byte serial,
bit parallel).
DISPLAY
CRT Type - Direct View Storage.
Dimensions - 192 mm x 141 mm (7 .5 in x 5.5 in) 282 mm
(11 in) diagonal.
Graphic Resolution - 1024 x 780 viewable points ; 1024 x
1024 addressable points.
Character Set - Full ASCII (German , Swedish, Danish/Norwegian, British, Spanish, Graphic and Business font selectable
under program control).
Character Format - 72 character/line, 35 lines.
Weight
kg
Net
30.8
Operating Temperature -
in
18.3
13.6
32.5
Ib
68.0
10°C to 40 · C.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
System software tape (020-0160-04); system software backup tape (020-0161 -03); power cord (161-0066-00); blank user
definable key overlays, pkg of 10, (334-2630-02).
ORDERING INFORMATION
4052A Desktop Computer .................. $9,900
Option 01 - Data Communications Interface ......... +$1,400
Option 02 - Four Slot ROM Backpack ..................... +$400
Option 03 - Four Slot Data Communications
Interface .................................................................... +$1,700
Option 10 - RS-232 Printer Interface ....................... +$550
Option 24 - 64k Bytes Total Memory ....................... +$290
Option 27 - 256k Bytes Extended Memory
File Manager ............................................................. +$3,500
Option 28 - 512k Bytes Extended Memory
File Manager ............................................................. + $4,500
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORD AND PLUG OPTIONS
Option A1 - Universal Euro, 220 V/16A, 50 Hz ............. NC
Option A2 - UK , 240 V/13A, 50 Hz ................................ NC
Option A3 - Australian, 240 V/10A, 50 Hz ..................... NC
Option A4 - North American, 240 V/15A, 60 Hz ............ NC
Option A5 - Switzerland 220V/10A, 50 Hz .................... NC
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES FOR 4932
4932 GPIB Extender ........................... $1,195
GPIB Cable, 2 m, double shield.
Order 012-0630·03 ............................................................ $90
GPIB Cable, 4 m, double shield.
Order 012-0630-04 .......................................................... $150
Coaxial Link Cable, 50 ft, RG 6/U.
Order 012·1051 ·00 ............................................................ $50
Coaxial Link Cable, 250 ft, RG 6/U.
Order 012-1052-00 .......................................................... $105
Tektronix offers service training classes on the 4050 Graphic
System Series. For further training information, contact your
local Sales/Service Office or request a copy of the Tektronix
Service Training Schedule on the return card in the center of
this catalog.
TEK
DESKTOP
COMPUTER
Proce ••or - LSI bi·poIar 16 bit.
Memory Work.pace - 32k bytes or 64k with Option 24.
Dynamic Range - ± 10- 308 to ± 10308 •
Numeric Accuracy - 14 decimal digits (12 displayed).
Programming Language - High level BASIC with extensions.
DISPLAY
CRT Type - Direct View Storage.
Graphic Re.olution - 4096 x 3125 viewable points; 4096 x
4096 addressable points.
Dimen.lon. - 385 mm x 282 mm (15 in x 11 in); 482 mm (19
in) diagonal.
VI.lbllity - Flicker·free.
Alphanumeric - Up to 132 character/line, 64 lines, four sizes.
SpeCial font. - Selectable uncler program control·Swedish,
German, British, Spanish, Danish/Norwegian, Graphic and
Business.
Graphic. - Vector drawing time - 15k crn/s.
Addr•••• ble Re.olution - 4096 X x 3120 Y Oot- 381 mm (15 in); Y-axis, > 254 mm
(10 in).
Repeatability ± 0.06 mm ( ± 0.0025 in); Option 31 ± 0.06 mm w/same pen, ± 0.25 mm w/pen eXChanged.
Time to Maximum Velocity - = 120 ms.
Resolution - 0.127 mm (0.005 in).
Plotting Rate - 406 to 559 mm/s (16 to 22 ips) vector
dependent.
Plotting Rate, Option 31 - User programmable from 10 to
570 mm/s in 10 mm/s increments.
Point Plotting Rate - Ten points/s maximum.
Character Set - Full ASCII.
Pen Control - Software or front panel Pen button; manually
disabled.
Writing Method - Fiber-tipped pen, nylon tipped pen, or wet
ink drafting pens.
Paper Size - 279 x 432 mm (11 x 17 in) maximum.
Paper Retainer - Electrostatic holddown.
Drive Characteristics - Two four-phase stepping motors,
each operating a pulley/cable system to propel the pen in that
motor' 5 respective axis.
4662
4662 Option 31
AC POWER
Voltage Ranges - 105, 116, 210, 232 ± 14% V ac.
Line Frequency - 48 to 66 Hz.
Power - 60 W typical, 90 W maximum.
Intelligent B-size (A3) Plotter
Intelligent B-Size (A3) Plotter
Multi-color Capability
8-pen Turret Version
Dimensions
Compatible in RS-232C ASCII Environments
Width
Height
Depth
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Built-in RS-232 and GPIB Interface
The 4662 is the first plotter with built-in processing power. It has the capability to operate independently, without bogging down computational
operations. Input data is internally buffered so
you can optimize data transfer from your host
processor, or move on to your next computation
while the 4662 is plotting. Incorporating state-ofthe-art technology, it provides an accuracy and
repeatability that no other plotter can approach
for the price.
When turned on, the 4662 automatically adjusts
for its nominal plot size regardless of how the last
plot was set up. To set a different plotting area or
adjust to a new paper size, you simply use the
SET control buttons on the front panel to define
the area. The 4662 plots on paper, vellum, mylar,
acetate-film and preprinted forms.
The 4662's digital stepping motors and internal
vector generator operate at high speed, with
microprocessor-c ontrolled acceleration and
deceleration.
Excellent Repeatability
There is no servo hysteresis and no drift as in
potentiometric feedback systems. There are no
slidewires to clean , no moving electrical contacts,
and no servo adjustments to be made.
Up to four 4662s can be configured in series, and
up to 15 4662s can be used with one GPIB device
like the Tektronix 4050 Series of desktop graphic
computers. Each plotter can perform its own job
simultaneously while the host processor turns to
other tasks. A simple, unique code activates each
plotter.
Supported by PLOT 10 and PLOT 50
Software
The 4662 Option 31 adds the convenience of an
automatic a-pen turret to the built-in processing
and feature-packed performance of the world 's
most versatile small plotter. With the Option 31 ,
you can insert any eight pens and program the
4662 to make the selection for you. Mix and
match hard-nib, fiber-tip and wet-ink pens. Include fine line widths for the most precise plots,
or for drawing several plots on a single page.
Work with nine available colors to add greater
clarity and appeal to presentations and cameraready plots.
Retrofit your present 4662 with the Option 31 turret. It can be installed quickly by any Tektronix
service engineer. Updating existing programs to
include programmed pen selection requires the
addition of just a few lines of code.
Operating Modes
The 4662 Option 31 has two input modes in
RS-232C: Alphanumeric (Alpha) and Graphic Plot
(Graphic). The 4662 Option 31 also has Graphic
input (GIN) to the host. A GPIB interface is also
standard.
4662
mm
517
203
495
Weight
kg
Net
Shipping
13.8
20.8
4662 Option 31
in
mm
20.4
8.0
19.5
in
654
203
495
Ib
25.7
8.0
19.5
kg
30.0
46.0
Ib
16.0
21 .0
35.0
46.0
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES 4662
Power cord (161-0066-00); digitizing sight (214-2409-01);
RS-232 Interface Cable, 15 ft , (012-0829-00); paper, 10 x 10
in, 100 sheets, (006-1698-00); fiber tip pens for paper, pkg of 3,
red (016-0589-00); green (016-0589-01); black (016-0589-02);
blue (016-0589-03).
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES (4662 OPTION 31)
Power cord (161-0066-00) ; digitizing sight (119-1432-01);
RS-232 Interface Cable, 15 ft, (012-0829-00); paper, blank,
100 sheets (006-2410-00); fiber tip pens for paper, 9-pen multicolor packs for paper (016-0687-00).
ORDERING INFORMATION
4662 Interactive Digital Plotter ............ $4,800
Option 01 - GPIB I/F Cable instead of
RS-232C I/F Cable
Option 20 - 8k Buffer ...
Option 31 - Eight Pen Turret
4662AOI - PLOT 10 Utility routines software
021-0339-00 - Option 31 Field Retrofit
kit for std 4662 ............................
u
•••• u
• • u _ H ____ H
H
•• H
•••••• H
•••••••••• H
u.U
H
NC
+$495
+$1,000
$460
•••••••••••••••••••••••• H.H •••
••••••••••••••••••••• H
HH HH •• H
••••••• H
•• H
HH ••••• • • HH.
H.HH • • • • H
•••••••••••••• • ••
$1,500.00
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORD AND PLUG OPTIONS
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
AI - Universal Euro 220 V/16A, 50 Hz ....
A2 - UK 240 V/13A, 50 Hz .....................
A3 - Australian 240 V/10A, 50 Hz ....
A4 - North American 240 V/15A, 60 Hz
A5 - Switzerland 220 V/1 CA, 50 Hz
UH H
H
••••••••••
H.H.HHH
H. H.HHH
HHHHHH.
H
HHHHHUHH.
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
Tektronix offers service training classes on the 4662 Interactive Graphic Plotter. For further training information, contact
your local Sales/Service Office or request a copy of the Tektronix Service Training Schedule on the return card in the center of this catalog.
106
OEM terms available on these products.
TEK
DIGITAL
PLOTTER
Features
In addition to the capabilities of the 4663, the
4663S offers the following high performance features as standard:
Integral GPIB and RS-232 Interface
This interface provides flexible plotter
configurability with a variety of host computers,
terminals and displays.
4663
Local Functions
Various graphic functions are implemented via
firmware . Page scaling, windowing , viewporting
and clipping are typical.
Circular Interpolation and Programmable
Macros
These features allow the precise drafting of circles and arcs, and for quick drafting of stored
graphics and symbols .
The 4663 IS designed to support other products
which comply with IEEE Standard 488-1978.
Hardware loop through RS-232C interface is standard and optional GPIB is available. The 4663 is
designed to support other GPIB products that
comply with IEEE Standard 488-1978.
Added Default Parameters
These parameters permit as many as four groups
of set-up instructions to be entered in plotter
memory, with Single-key recall.
Intelligent C-size PloHer
Dual Programmable Pen Control
Nine Character Fonts
RS-232 and GPIB Product
The Tektronix 4932 GPIB Extender provides a
cost-effective way to interconnect remotely located GPIB instruments, allowing communication at
distances of up to 500 meters (1650 feet) . See
page 26 for additional information.
CHARACTERISTICS
The 4663 is the first high speed , C-size plotter
with built-in processing power and 5.5k buffer
memory to free the host from many routine
computations. This intelligent plotter saves time
without sacrificing flexibility .
The 4663 can handle either European A-2 drafting
size or American C-size paper, mylar or acetate.
Fiber tip, hard-nib, or wet ink pens give you crisp,
clean camera-ready copies or overhead
transparencies.
A sprocket feed paper advance (Option 36) is
available for roll stock, with form feed remotely or
locally programmable. This option allows the 4663
to operate unattended with a variety of form
sizes.
The plotter features dual programmable pen control with interchangeable multicolor pens and is
capable of producing dotted or dashed lines from
local firmware . A built-in joystick allows easy
manual pOSitioning of the pen carriage crosshairs
for digitizing or page scaling adjustments.
Unique Parameter Entry Device
This front panel device lets you quickly identify or
select operating parameters without resorting to
binary switches, straps, status display devices,
and volumes of operator manuals. It allows you to
quickly program baud rate , pen type, acceleration, plotting speed, aspect ratio , page size and
many other parameters.
Excellent Penmanship
Nine character fonts come standard with the
4663, including the full ASCII character set. All
characters can be scaled , slanted, rotated and
may be centered when used as pilot symbols.
Maximum Ploning Area - X-axis, 569 mm (22.4 in) Y-axis,
432 mm (17 in).
Repeatability - ± 0.064 mm ( ± 0.0025 in).
Resolution - ± 0.025 mm ( ± 0.001 in).
Maximum Ploning Speed - 406 to 559 mm (16 to 22 ips)
vector dependent.
Point Ploning Rate - Ten pointsl s maximum.
Character Generator - 95 ASCII, 15 x 7 matrix, seven special fonts standard .
Paper Size - 420 x 594 mm (European A2), 17 x 22 in (US Csize).
Paper Retention - Electrostatic hold down.
Media Types - Paper, mylar or acetate.
Drive Characteristics - Microprocessor controlled stepping
motors controlling cable system connected to pen arm.
Baud Rate - 110 to 9600 baud.
Standard Interface - RS-232C, full duplex , loop-through.
AC POWER
Voltage Ranges - 90 to 132 V ac and 180 to 250 V ac.
Line Frequency - 48 to 440 Hz.
Power - 180 W typical.
4663S
Intelligent C-Size PloHer
RS-232 and GPIB Product
Downloadable Math and Character Sets
These sets permit alphanumeric versatility with reduced host dependency.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTIC 4663/4663S
Dimensions
Width
Height
Depth
mm
995
173
752
in
37.6
6.8
29.6
Weight
kg
Ib
Net
Shipping
386.0
454.0
85.0
100.0
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Power cord (161-0066-00); RS-232 Interface Cable, 15 ft,
(012-0829-00); fiber tip pen, pkg of 3, black , (016-0414-00);
red, (016-0415-00); blue, (016-0416-00); green, (016-0417-00);
paper translucent, white, No 1 sulfite, 17 x 22 in, box of
100 sheets,(006-3150-00); 4663S only, GPIB Cable, 2 m
(012-0630-03).
ORDERING INFORMATION
4663 Interactive Digital Plotter ............ $9,990
4663S Interactive Digital Plotter ••.••.• $10,900
Option 04 - GPIB only (deletes RS-232C for 4663) ...... _ NC
Option 36 - Paper advance ,.......... ,........ ,............... + $1 ,050
4663A01 - PLOT 10 Utility Routines Software ........... $750
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORD AND PLUG OPTIONS
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 -
Universal Euro 220 V/16A, 50 Hz ..............
UK 240 V/13A, 50 Hz .................................
Australian 240 V/1OA, 50 Hz ......................
North American 240 V/15A, 60 Hz .............
Switzerland 230 V11OA, 50 Hz ...................
NC
Ne
Ne
Ne
Ne
High Performance Features
As the first interactive digital plotter to combine
large plotter capabilities with C-size workstation
convenience, the 4663S typically does most of
the work relegated to the largest flatbeds and
drums at a tremendous savings in time and cost.
Using its dual-programmable pens, unique pushbutton parameter entry card, and the other highperformance features , you can enjoy easy command over many of the most sophisticated
plotting tasks.
Tektronix offers service training on the 4663 Interactive Digital
Plotter. For further training information, contact your local
Salesl Service Office or request a copy of the Tektronix Servioe
Training Schedule on the return card in the center of this
catalog.
OEM terms available on this product.
107
COPY UNITS
TEK HARD
4631
High Image Quality, Copies in Seconds
Fiber Optic Process
Storage Tube Compatible
4631
A Storage Display Copier
The 4631 Hard Copy Unit provides superior quality copies of any graphic and alphanumeric information displayed on a storage tube display. The
4631's fiber optic process uses dry silver paper
for the fine detail and photographic quality image
needed when copying complex graphics and alphanumerics. It requires no toners or chemical
additives of any kind. Copies can be made in either vertical or horizontal format . A special "slow
scanning " mode allows horizontal format images
to be made at even higher resolution and quality.
CHARACTERISTICS
4611
Low Copy Cost
High Contrast, Permanent Images
Electrostatic Process
Storage Tube Compatible
A Storage Display Copier
The 4611 provides low cost, high quality copies of
complex graphics and alphanumerics from storage tube displays at the press of a button. The
4611 is based on electrostatic (charge transfer)
technology, and uses electrostatic paper for high
contrast, permanent copies at an economical percopy cost.
The 4611 's high addressability and dot overlap
result in uniquely dark, smooth lines for optimun
electrostatic copy quality. The dry toning system
employed by the 4611 is cleaner, more convenient and more consistent than liquid toning
systems. Images are permanently fused and
made from safe ingredients. Typical user applications include quick preview copies before final
plotting, copies of intermediate steps during interactive work sessions, and final output copies for
reports , presentations, and file records .
Copies are vertically oriented in the standard
4611 . However, an option offering a 73 percent
larger horizontally oriented image is available. The
4611 is compact and lightweight, and can be
easily moved from desk to desk. It also can be
multiplexed to copy up to four teminals and l or
display monitors. Warm up lights and paper-out
indicators are provided.
Warm·up Time - Two minutes.
Copy Time - 24 s (vertical format) .
Paper Type - Electrographic (dielectric).
Image Size - Vertical Format: 190 x 147 mm (7.5 x 5.8 in).
Horizontal Format: 190 x 254 mm (7.5 x 10 in). Option 31: 190
x 226 mm (7.5 x 8.9 in).
Addressability - Vertical: 171 dots/in . Horizontal : 256
dots/in.
Toner - Dry Carbon.
AC POWER
Voltage Range - 90 to 128 V ac and 180 to 250 V ac. (High
range requires Options AI , A2, A3 or A4).
Line Frequency - 48 to 62 Hz.
Power - Warm-up: 300 W nominal, 370 W maximum. Operating: 215 W nominal, 290 W maximum. Idle: 120 W nominal,
185 W maximum.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dimensions
mm
in
Weight
Width
Height
Depth
425
16.7
181
7.1
525
20.6
20.0
45.0
CHARACTERISTICS
Warmup Time - Ten minutes.
Normal Scan - 18 s first copy; 9 s subsequent.
Slow Scan - 36 s first copy; 16 s subsequent.
Paper Size - 216 x 277 mm (8.5 x 11 in).
Paper Type - Tektronix Standard Dry Silver Paper, (Type
7770). 500 It roll.
Addressability, Normal Scan - Vertical: 79 dots/cm (200/in).
Horizontal - 67 dots/cm (170/in).
Slow Scan - Vertical : 118 dots/cm (300/in).
Horizontal : 134 dots/cm (340/in).
Image Size - Vertical Format: 180 x 137 mm (7.1 x 5.4 in).
Horizontal Format: 225 x 170 mm (8.85 x 6.7 in).
Option 31 : 163 x 190 mm (6.4 x 7.5 in).
AC POWER
Voltage Range, Standard - 104 to 126 V ac.
Strappable Low Range - 90 to 110 V ac.
Strappable High Range - 108 to 132 V ac.
Line Frequency Range - 48 to 62 Hz.
Power, Warmup - 620 W nominal ; 750 W on high range.
Power, Copy Process - 200 W nominal; 240 W on high
range.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Power cord (161-066-00); hard copy cable, IS-pin. 10 It.
(012-0547-00); electrographic paper. 2 rolls. (006-2838-00);
4.9 oz. dry copy toner. (006-2990-00).
ORDERING INFORMATION
4611 Hard Copy Unit .......................... $4,550
Option 01 Option 02 Option 31 (Not required
Landscape Image Format _... __ ._ ........... _. +$150
Four-Channel Multiplexer ._.................. _. +$600
Compatible with 4025A Terminal.
if Option 01 is ordered) __ .. _...... ___ ........ __ ........ NC
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORD AND PLUG OPTIONS
Option AI - Universal Euro. 220 V/16A. 50 Hz ............. NC
Option A2 - UK. 240 VII3A. 50 Hz .................. _............. NC
Option A3 - Australian. 240 V/ l0A, 50 Hz ..................... NC
Option A4 - North American, 240 V/15A. 60 Hz ........ _... NC
Option AS - Switzerland. 220 VII OA. 50 Hz ...... _____ ....... NC
For ordering Hard Copy Paper see page 115.
The 4611 is compatible with the Tektronix 4010
Series of Computer Display Terminals, the 4114A
and the 4025A Terminals, the 4050 Series of
Graphic Computing Systems, and the 4081 Interactive Graphics Terminal. The 4611 is also compatible with Tektronix 11 and 19 inch computer
display modules .
108
Net
kg
Ib
The 4631 can be multiplexed to copy up to four
storage tube terminals andl or display monitors. It
is compatible with the Tektronix 4010 Series of
Computer Display Terminals, the 4114 Terminal,
the 4025A Terminal, the 4050 Series of Graphic
Computing Systems, and the 4081 Interactive
Graphics Terminal. The 4631 is also compatible
with Tektronix 11 and 19 inch computer display
modules.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dimensions
mm
in
Weight
Width
Height
Depth
406
16.0
295
11 .6
648
25.5
Net
kg
Ib
29.5
65.0
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Interconnect cable. IS-pin. 10 It. (012-0547-00); Standard Dry
Silver Paper. (Type 7770). 500-1t roll . (006-1603-00).
ORDERING INFORMATION
4631 Hard Copy Unit .......................... $5,950
Option 01 - Copy Counter ... _................. _............... _.. +$120
Option 02 - Four Channel Multiplexer ...................... +$660
Option 31 - Compatible with Tektronix 4025A Terminal. NC
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORD AND PLUG OPTIONS
Option AI - Universal Euro 220 VII6A 50 Hz ............... NC
Option A2 - UK 240 V/13A 50 Hz .................................. NC
Option A3 - Australian 240 V/ l OA 50 Hz ....................... NC
Option A4 - North American 240 VliSA 60 Hz .............. NC
Option AS - Switzerland 220V/ l0A 50 Hz ._ .... _._ ..... _...... NC
Tektronix offers service training classes on the 4631 Hard
Copy Unit. For further training information, contact your local
Sales/Service Office or request a copy of the TektrOniX Service
Training Schedule on the return card in the center of this
catalog.
OEM terms available on these products.
TEK
VIDEO HARD
COPY UNITS
4612
A Video Display Copier
The 4632 provides permanent copies of graphic
and alphanumeric information from raster scan
terminals and other video signal sources. All
copies are horizontally oriented . Eight distinct
shades of gray can be copied with a special gray
scale enhancement option. The standard 4632
can clearly show six different shades of gray, for
polygon fill -in , bar charts, and many other
applications.
4632
The 4632 can be multiplexed to copy up to four
raster scan terminals , and can accept remote
copy signals. The 4632 is compatible with the
Tektronix 4025A 4027, 4027A, 4112A, 4113A Terminals and with a wide variety of raster scan terminals and video signal sources, including those
that produce RS-170, RS-330, RS-375A, RS-343A
and RS-412A type signals. The 4632 is also compatible with DEC MINC Systems and VT100 Series Terminals, with the HP 2640 Series, and the
AT&T Gemini 100 Systems.
4612
Low Copy Cost
High Contrast, Black and White Images
Electrostatic Process
Video Source Compatible
A Video Display Copier
Hard copy units such as the 4612 provide quick
and convenient copies of complex information
that has been displayed on a screen. These devices are essential to the use of graphic terminals, desktop computing systems, and video image processing systems. To fulfill a variety of
user needs , graphic and alphanumeric information is permanently recorded on paper at the
press of a button. These needs include quick
preview copies before final plotting , copies of intermediate steps during interactive work sessions, and final output copies for reports, presentations, and file records .
The 4612 provides permanent black-and-white
copies of graphic and alphanumeric information
from raster scan terminals and other video signal
sources. Based on electrostatic technology, the
4612 uses electrographic paper for high contrast
copies at an economical copy cost. The 4612 is
compatible with the Tektronix 4025A Terminal ,
the 4112A Option 11 Terminal, and with a wide
variety of raster scan terminals and video signal
sources including DEC VT100 Series terminals,
DEC MINC Systems, AT & T Gemini 100 Systems
and those sources that produce RS-170, RS-330
or RS-375A type signals.
The 4612 is compact and lightweight, and can
easily be moved from desk to desk. Its unique
dry toning process is convenient, non-messy and
superior to liquid toner systems. Images are permanently fused and made from safe ingredients.
Warm-up lights and paper-out indicators are provided . All copies are vertically oriented . The 4612
can be multiplexed to copy up to four terminals
and/or display monitors.
The standard 4612 unit is prepared for use with
525 line, 60 Hz sources. Adjustment for 625 line,
50 Hz is provided as an option .
CHARACTERISTICS
Two minutes.
Copy Time - 24 s.
Paper Type - Electrographic (dielectric).
Image Size - 7.5 x 5.8 standard (525 line, 60 Hz signals).
Addressability - 256 dots/in horizontal, 171 dots/in vertical.
Toner - Dry carbon.
Warm-up Time -
AC POWER
Voltage Range - 90 to 128 V ac and 180 to 250 V ac. (High
range requires Options AI, A2, A3 or A4.)
Line Frequency Range - 48 to 62 Hz.
Power, Warm-up - 300 W nominal , 370 W maximum.
Power, Copy Process - 215 W nominal, 290 W maximum.
Power, Idle - 120 W nominal, 185 W maximum.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
mm
Dimensions
Width
Height
Depth
425
181
525
Weight =
kg
Net
20.0
in
16.7
7.1
20.6
The standard 4632 is prepared for use with 525
line, 60 Hz sources. Many other adjustments are
provided as options, including adjustments for
625 liine, 50 Hz and for high resolution 1029 line,
60 Hz.
CHARACTERISTICS
Warmup Time - Ten minutes.
Copy Time - 18 s first copy; 9 s subsequent copies.
Paper Size - 216 x 277 mm (8.5 x 11 in).
Paper Type - Tektronix Standard Dry Silver Paper, (Type
7770), 500 ft roll.
Addressability - Incoming signal dependent.
Image Size - 203 x 152 mm (8 x 6 in).
Gray Levels - Six minimum (8 with Option 06).
AC POWER
Voltage Range, Standard - 104 to 126 V ac.
Strappable Low Range - 90 to 110 V ac.
Strappable High Range - 108 to 132 V ac.
Line Frequency Range - 48 to 62 Hz.
Power, Wenmup - 620 W nominal, 750 W maximum.
Power, Copy Process - 200 W nominal ; 240 W maximum.
Power, Idle - 120 W nominal, 185 W maximum.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Ib
45.0
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Power cord (161-0066-00) ; electrographic paper, 2 rolls ,
(006-2838-00) ; 4.9 oz, dry copy toner, (006-2990-00) ; SNC Interconnect Cable, 10 ft, (175-2753-00).
Dimensions
Weight
Net
ORDERING INFORMATION
4612 Video Hard Copy Unit ................ $4,400
Option 02 Option 03 Option 15 -
Four-Channel Multiplexer ...................... +$600
Setup for 625/50 Hz Scanning Std ............. NC
Video Input 15-pin Connector ..................... NC
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORD AND PLUG OPTIONS
Option AI - Universal Euro, 220 V/16A, 50 Hz ............. NC
Option A2 - UK, 240 V/13A, 50 Hz ................................ NC
Option A3 - Australian, 240 V/ l0A, 50 Hz .................... _ NC
Option A4 - North American, 240 V/15A, 60 Hz ............ NC
Option AS - Switzerland 220 V/l0A, 50 Hz .................. _ NC
4632
High Image Quality
Gray Scale Capability
Copies in Seconds
Video Source Compatible
mm
406
295
648
Width
Height
Depth
=
kg
29.5
in
16.0
11 .6
25.5
Ib
65.0
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Standard Dry Silver Paper, Type 7770, 500 It roll,
(006-1603-00) ; SNC Terminator 75!l (011-0102-00).
ORDERING INFORMATION
4632 Video Hard Copy Unit ................ $6,050
Option 01 - Copy Counter ................... _.................... +$120
Option 02 - Four Channel Multiplexer ...................... +$660
Option 03 - Setup for 625 Line/50 Hz ............................ NC
Option 04 - Setup for 1029 Line/60 Hz ......................... _ NC
Option 05 - Setup for Tektronix 4023 Terminal .............. NC
Option 06 - Enhanced Gray Scale ............................ + $840
Option 07 - Compatible with HP 2640 Series
Terminals ...................................................................... +$125
Option 08 - Compatible with DEC VT100
Terminals ...................................................................... +$125
Option 09 - Setup for AT&T GEMINI 100
Systems ....................................................................... +$125
fNTERNATIONAL POWER CORD AND PLUG OPTIONS
Option AI - Universal Euro 220 V/16A 50 Hz ............... NC
Option A2 - UK 240 V/13A 50 Hz .................................. NC
Option A3 - Australian 240 V/l0A 50 Hz ....................... NC
Option A4 - North American 240 V/15A 60 Hz .............. NC
Option AS - Switzerland 220 V/1 OA 50 Hz .................... NC
OEM terms available on these products.
109
IMAGING
TEK HARD
COPY
4634
System Bandwidth - 16 MHz minimum ( - 3 dB) in High Perlormance; 14 MHz minimum (- 3 dB) Standard.
Photographic Quality Images
Excellent Gray Scale and Resolution
Compatible with Most Raster Scan Video
Systems
Dry, Quick, Convenient Process
Large, File-Sized Image
Low Copy Cost
The 4634 Imaging Hard Copy Unit records images
of photographic quality from raster scan video
sources. It is easily coupled to video sources,
both analog and digital.
The 4634 can be quickly adjusted to accommodate a wide variety of line rates , interlaced and
non-interlaced , for both 50 Hz and 60 Hz systems.
The 4634 uses a CRT to expose the recording
material, a high quality dry silver paper. A fiber
optic faceplate efficiently couples the light output
to the paper and provides an image of high
quality and fine detail.
Video information is input through rear panel
connectors. If the signal input to the 4634 is
composite video, hookup is a simple BNC connection to a video loopthrough. The loopthrough
requires a 75-ohm terminator at the end of the
video chain, whether that be the 4634 or some
other video device.
The 4634 is available as either a rackmount or
benchtop model.
110
CHARACTERISTICS
Paper - Tektronix High-Performance Dry Silver Paper, (Type
7772), or switch selectable to Tektronix Standard Dry Silver
Paper, (Type 7770).
Paper Packaging - Rolls of paper encased in light-sealed
cylindrical cassettes.
Paper Dimensions - 216 mm x 152 m (8.5 in x 500 It).
Sheillile 01 Tektronix Paper - 12 months at 20' C with 50%
relative humidity.
Recording Technique - Raster scan video with liber optic
CRT.
Developing Technique - Heat via internal processor.
Warmup Time - 20 minutes.
Copy Time - 26 s.
Exposure Time (11 in Copy) - 8.5 s.
Copy Repetition Rate - ",, 12 s.
Copy Length Range - 178 to 279 mm (7.0 to 11 .0 in) in
19 mm ('I. in) increments.
CRT Spot Size - .. 0.15 mm (0.006 in) at 10 V grid drive.
Luminance Variation - .. 1.3 to 1.
Horizontal Image Size Range - 127 to 203 mm (5 to 8 in) lor
60 Hz field rate; 152 to 203 mm (6 to 8 in) lor 50 Hz field rate.
Vertical Image Size Range - Adjusts for correct aspect ratio.
Image Format - Horizontal scan lines in direction of exiting
paper motion.
Optical Density when used with High Performance Paper 1.45 maximum; 0.2 minutes.
Gray Shades - 12 with Tektronix 7772 paper; Six with Tektronix 7770 paper.
Resolution - At least 4.92 lines/mm (125 lines/in) with Tektronix 7772 paper; at least 3.94 lines/mm (100 lines/in) with
Tektronix 7770 paper.
AC POWER
line Voltage Range (±10%) - Jumper selectable lor 100,
115, 120, 200, 220, 230 and 240 V ac.
Line Frequency - 48 to 62 Hz.
Power, Operating - 750 W maximum.
Power, Standby - 240 W maximum .
Heat Dissipation - 820 BTU/hour average; 2560 BTU/hour
maximum.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dimensions
Width
Height
Depth
mm
425
266
686
Weight ""
kg
Net
30.5
in
16.8
10.5
27.0
Ib
67.0
Rackmount Requirements - 266.7 mm (10.5 in) of vertical
front panel space in standard. 482 .6 mm (19 in) cabinet,
440.4 mm (17 .34 in) depth behind rack panel ; 246.0 mm (9.68
in) in front 01 rack.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
High Performance Dry Silver Paper, (Type 7772), 500 It roll,
(006-2432-00); terminator, 75 ohm (011-0131-00).
ORDERING INFORMATION
4634 Imaging Hard Copy Unit ............ $7,900
Option 30 Option 45 -
Delete Rackmount Hardware .................. -$85
End-User set-up .......................................... NC
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORD AND PLUG OPTIONS
Option A 1 - Universal Euro 220 V/16A, 50 Hz .............. NC
Option A2 - UK 240 V/13A, 50 Hz ................................. NC
Option A3 - Australian 240 V/1OA, 50 Hz ...................... NC
Option A4 - North American 240 V/15A, 60 Hz ............. NC
For ordering Hard Copy Paper see page 115.
OEM terms available on this product.
TEK
MATRIX
PRINTERS
4642
60 Characters/Second Print Speed Standard
RS-232C Interface
The 4642 Printer provides 6O-character per second output along with a variety of print alternatives. This table top unit is compatible with the
Tektronix 4020 Series Computer Display Terminals and 4050 Series Graphic Systems. Interface
is standard RS-232C.
4643
CHARACTERISTICS
4643
Low Cost Printing
Flexible for Many Applications
Crisp, Matrix Quality Printing
Easy to Use
Printing Speed - 340 characters.
Condensed Character Density - 219 character/line.
Standard Character Density - 132 character/line.
Expanded Character Density - 72 character/line.
Throughput Rate
132 Columns Wide - 125 lines/minute.
72 Columns Wide - 200 lines/minute.
40 Columns Wide - 300 lines/minute.
Paper Slew Rate - 254 mm/s (10 in/s) minute.
Character Set - 128 (96 ASCII plus 32 international).
Vertical (Line) Spacing - 24 lines/mm (6 lines/in).
Horizontal (Standard Character) Spacing 39 characters/em (10 or 5 characterS/in).
Printing Matrix - 14-wire, 7 x 7 hall-dot matrix .
Paper Type - Continuous lanlold, edge perforated.
Paper Width - 76.2 to 406.4 mm (3 to 16 in) at 0.7 mm (0.028
in) maximum thickness.
Ribbon Type - Fabric, continuous loop cassette.
Ribbon Lile - Five million characters.
International Characters
High Reliability
A low cost alternative to conventional line printing, the Tektronix 4643 Printer provides fast, highquality, impact printing that is suitable for most
data processing applications. With high reliability
built in, the 4643 is a convenient and economical
choice requiring no preventive maintenance and
infrequent servicing .
Fast but not expensive, the 4643 Printer uses bidirectional operation to print 340 characters per
second. With a full 132 character line, speeds of
125 lines per minute are nominal. The 4643 Printer
rivals the speed of many line printers but is
available for the modest price of a matrix printer.
The 4643 provides three type faces : standard ,
condensed, and expanded. All three can be
program selected, allowing users to mix the
various fonts for greater reading impact.
Compatibility
The printer of choice for high technology systems, the standard Tektronix 4643 can be interfaced with most standard RS-232 data processing instruments and systems. Option 01 provides
a parallel interface. The 4643 is compatible with
the following Tektronix products: 4010 and 4110
Series Terminals, 4020 Series Terminals, and 4050
Series Desktop Graphic Computing Systems; the
8001 and 8OO2A Microprocessor Labs and 8550
Microcomputer Development Lab; the S-3250, S3270 and S-3280 Semiconductor Test Systems;
and the 4041 Controller.
AC POWER
Line Voltage - 90 to 136 V ac or 187 to 257 V ac.
Line Frequency - 50 or 60 Hz.
Power, Idle - 150 W maximum.
Power, Printing - 275 W maximum.
Width
Height Closed
Height Open
Depth
mm
671
213
571
594
Weight
kg
Net
30.0
Compact, Easy to Use
The 4642 is a table top unit, requiring minimum
space for operation. The standard printer employs a friction paper feed and uses inexpensive
roll paper. A tractor feed paper drive (Option 01)
can be used with both fan-fold paper and multipart forms.
A Choice of Features
A complete selection of features and accessories
can make the 4642 Printer even more versatile;
for example, a printer stand is available to convert
the 4642 to a floor unit. The 4642-1 is the 220 V
ac, 50 Hz version of the 4642. All options and
accessories are identical.
CHARACTERISTICS
Printing Speed - 60 characters.
Printing Width - 203 mm (8.0 in) maximum.
Character Density
Condensed - 65 mm (16.5, chars/in).
Standard - 40 mm (10, chars/in).
Elongated (Double Width) - Software selectable.
Character Set - 96 Standard ASCII.
Printing Matrix - 5 x 7 dot matrix.
Paper Type - Roll (Ian-Iold optionaL)
Paper Size (Width)
Roll - 250 mm (9.8 in) maximum.
Fan Fold - 102 mm to 305 mm (4 in to 12.1 in).
Ribbon Type - Cartridge, lilm ribbon .
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dimensions
A Variety of Type Faces
The 4642 provides a varied selection of upper
and lower case type faces . The standard format
prints in 80 columns, and provides a choice of
regular and elongated characters. A condensed
character set, selectable from a front panel
switch , gives 132 column output, with a choice of
regular or elongated characters.
in
26.4
8.4
22.5
23.8
Ib
67 .0
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Ribbon cassette (118-1314-00).
AC POWER
4642 -115 V ac + 10 to 15% at 60 Hz.
4642-1 - 220 V ac + 10 to 15% at 50 Hz.
ORDERING INFORMATION
4643 Printer
(2400 Baud Standard) ......................... $4,200
Option 01 - Parallel Interface (Cannot be
ordered with Option 02) ..................................................... NC
Option 02 - Specify Baud Rate 110, 150, 300,
600, 1200, 4800. 9600, (Requires
Option 61) .......................................................................... NC
Option 03 - 8500 Series Interface
Compatibility ....................................................................... NC
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORD AND PLUG OPTIONS
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
Al
A2
A3
A4
AS
-
Universal Euro, 220 V/ 16A. 50 Hz .............
UK, 240 V/13A, 50 Hz ................................
Australian, 240 V/ l0A, 50 Hz .....................
Nor1h American, 240 V/15A, 60 Hz ............
Switzerland 220 V/l0A 50 Hz ....................
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
mm
Dimensions
Width
Height
Depth
495
241
495
Weight
kg
Net
27.0
Operating Temperature Range 100· F).
in
19.5
9.5
19.5
Ib
60.0
4.4·C to 37 .7·C (40·F to
ORDERING INFORMATION
4642 Printer ......................................... $2,900
4642-1 Printer ...............••......•.....•...••.• $2,900
Option 01 -
Rear Feed Tractor Paper Drive ............. + $280
111
MULTI-USER
SYSTEM
TEK FILE
File Security
Several levels of file security are provided by the 4909. The
removable disk cartridge allows large collections of files to be
completely removed from the 4909 and placed in a physically
secure place. For archival storage, the removable cartridge is
highly effective.
ROM Pack Operation
Access to the 4909 from the 4050 Series of desktop computers will be via GPIB interlacing used in conjunction with a ROM
pack to provide file management operation. ROM packs for the
4050 Series include the 4051R10 for use with the 4051 . and
the 4052R10 for use with the 4052/4054.
Files cannot be affected at the volume level unless a master
password is known. If a master password was specified when
the original disk volume was formatted . subsequent reformatting cannot take place unless the master password is known.
thus prohibiting the modification of existing files .
English Command Operation
Without a ROM pack. devices supporting any IEEE Standard
488-1978. Compatible interlace can communicate directly with
the 4909. using English commands. The 4909 will respond to
ASCII command strings sent over the bus. and can therefore
be used by a variety of non-Tektronix desktop computers or
controllers.
For security. users permitted to use a file within other private
file workspaces can be given different levels of access. ranging
from read-only to write and delete.
Within a multi-user environment. access to files within a private
file workspace is controlled by an access list assigned to each
file .
4909
Shared Access up to 10 Users
Public and Private File Works paces for Operational Flexibility/File Protection
32 or 96 Megabyte Drive Capacity
Expandable up to 8 drives (768 Megabytes)
Indexed and Dynamically Allocated Files
Variable Length Records
Concatenated Volumes
English Command Operation Over HighSpeed GPIB
Time of Day Clock with Battery Backup
File Names up to 100 Characters Long
Multiple Level Library Names
The 4909 Multi-User File Management System is a
high performance mass storage system based on
a controller that provides advanced file management between up to ten desktop computers and
large capacity hard-disk drives. Flexible file management and a multiple level library structure
provides multiple file access levels. indexed
(keyed) file support. directly addressable bytes
within records . expandable records and files. and
enhanced data storage and retrieval. Permitting
host interfacing flexibility. plug-in options include
additional disk drives for expanded capacity.
Mass Storage Expandability
The 4909 offers 32 megabytes of data storage capacity as
standard. Optionally. 96 megabytes of storage capacity are
available. Each drive comes with a 16 megabyte removable
disk cartridge allowing data transportability and fast backup.
For increased capacity. additional disk drives can be added by
acquiring the 4909AC Auxiliary Cabinet. This cabinet will hold
one or two additional disk drives of either 32 or 96 megabyte
capacity. Interconnection with the 4909 is by a plug-in disk
interlace that can support two hard disk drives. A maximum of
four disk interlace plug-ins can be used on the 4909. supplying
a maximum of 768 megabytes of online mass storage capacity.
112
Multi~User Access
The cost effectiveness and contribution to productivity of a
mass storage system is enhanced when two or more users are
allowed to share information simultaneously. The 4909 allows
the sharing and updating of files by up to ten users. Private file
access is permitted alter users supply a User-ID and password. Access is permitted to a private file workspace if the user
entry matches a pre-defined User-ID list maintained by the
4909.
Users who do not provide a User-ID and password when ' signing-On" are automatically placed into a public file workspace.
All users utilizing the public file workspace have access to the
same files . each of which is collectively subject to operations
currently taking place by other users within the public file workspace. With public file workspaces. users of dedicated 4909
systems are not burdened by multi-user "sign-On" constraints.
Superior File Management
Designed for ease of use and superior file management flexibility. the 4909 lets you manage your files; they don 't manage
you! File names. for example. can be up to 100 characters
long. Multiple levels of files called libraries are provided. allowing files to be grouped acccrding to any particular criteria or
need. When files are created. users need not worry about how
big a file should be. nor what to do if they write more information than the file can hold. The 4909 provides for dynamic allocation or automatic expansion of files. eliminating this ' bookkeeping " task by the user.
Indexed Files
For users requiring faster . more flexible access to record information stored in files. the 4909 provides indexed or keyed files .
Each record can be stored and retrieved on the basis of an
alphanumeric key. The key used might be an employee' s name
or a product reference number. With indexed files . information
can be better organized. and quickly retrieved . A variety of useful commands are provided to allow complete control of indexed files . Indexed files don't have to be treated differently
from regular files . as they are on some systems that support
this capability.
True Concatenated Volumes
The 4909 introduces the concept of "concatenated " volumes.
File size is no longer constrained by the capacity of the drive on
which it is located . Multiple drives can logically be configured
together to appear as one. Any individual file can assume the
size of the total configured drive capacity. Fixed as well as
removable disk cartridges can be configured together. or kept
separate to allow removable cartridges to be transported between other 4909 hard disk systems. Also. when drives are
configured together. users need not be concemed with specifying on which 01 the volumes a particular file is stored.
Variable Length Records
Variable length records are supported by the 4909 to provide
additional flexibility in creating and updating files . This allows
records to change in accordance with user requirements .
InterfaCing Flexibility
The 4909 controller has eleven plug-in slots allowing a variety
of special purpose interlaces to be supported. In addition to
hard disk interlacing. access to desktop computers is provided
using a GPIB (IEEE Standard 488-1978) plug-in interlace. Assuming the 4909 Controller contained only a single disk interface. up to ten GPIB interlaces could be supported. A maximum data transfer rate of 240.000 bytes/second is possible per
GPIB interlace. with some performance degradation depending
on the number of users, and the amount of disk access taking
place.
Realtime System Clock
The 4909 's realtime clock. once set. automatically assigns the
time and date to a file. allowing users to keep track of when
files were created or updated. Files can be manipulated on the
basis of their time/date "stamps." e.g. a user may want to delete all files that have not been accessed since a particular
date.
GPIB Extender
The General Purpose Interlace Bus Extender provides a costeffective way to interconnect remotely located. IEEE Standard
488 compatible instruments. allowing GPIB communication
over distances of up to 500 m (1650 It).
GPIB Extenders are always used in pairs : Two 4932 units or
one 4932 and one 4909F02. The 4932 is compatible with any
instrument that has a GPIB interface. and is compatible with
the 4909F02 via the coaxial "link " cable. See page 26 for more
information.
CHARACTERISTICS
Capacity Per Drive - 32 or 96 megabytes (16 removable) .
Disk Data Transler Rate' - 1.2 megabytes/so
GPIB Data Transler Rate' - 240k bytes/s maximum burst.
Average Access Time - 30 ms.
Average Latency Time - 8.33 ms.
Recoverable Error Rate - Two in 10 Bits.
Number 01 Tracksl lnch - 384.
'Actual transfer rates are application and computer dependent.
AC POWER
Line Voltage and Frequencies - 120 V ac at 60 Hz. 240 V ac
at 50 Hz. 100 V ac at 50 Hz or 60 Hz.
Power - 1150 W maximum at 120 V ac. 60 Hz.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dimensions
mm
in
Weight
Width
Height
Depth
565
22.2
760
30.0
850
33.5
Net
kg
Ib
137
302.0
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
GPIB Interlace cable. 4 m (012-0630-04); cartridge disk .
16 megabyte (119-1462-00).
ORDERING INFORMATION
4909 Multi-User File System ............. $22,900
OPTIONS /FIELD UPGRADES
Option 33 - 96 Megabytes Disk ............................ + $4.900
4909AC - Auxiliary Cabinet ..................................... $13.000
4909F01 - GPIB Interface ......................................... $1.600
4909F02 - GPIB Extender ......................................... $2.095
4909F03 - Disk Interlace ........................................... $1.600
4909F10 - Controller Expansion ............................... $1.000
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORD AND PLUG OPTIONS
Option A1 Option A2 Option A3 -
Universal Euro. 220 V/ 16A. 50 Hz ............. NC
UK. 240 V/ 13A. 50 Hz ................................ NC
Australian. 240 V/ 1OA. 50 Hz ..................... NC
TEK
FILE MANAGER
TAPE RECORDER/DRIVE
4907 Option 31
4907
4924
File Manager
4050 Series Compatible
Built-in File Manager
The 4907 File Manager is a direct-access, flexibledisk device with a double density read/write feature . Its advanced multiple-level, file-by-name system includes a directory that maintains the user
files, passwords and available space. Several
drives may be connected to the 4907 for additional storage capacity.
Built-in ROMs and special 4050 Series ROM
Packs contain the 4907 operating system software . No 4050 Series memory is required to support the operating system . The 4907 can also be
used with some of the 4010 Series of graphic terminals and its compact size lets it fit on a desktop
or lab bench.
CHARACTERISTICS
User-Available Storage Per Disk Tracks Per Disk - 77 maximum.
Sectors Per Track - 32.
Bytes Per Sector - 256.
Rotational Speed - 360 rpm.
Average Access Time - 340 ms.
Transfer Time - 4.2 ms/sector.
630k bytes.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Weight
Dimensions
mm
In
Width
I
I
520
20.3
I
I
Height
195
7.7
I
I
Depth
640
25.7
I
kgl
Ibl
Net
27.5
60.0
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
4051 File Manager ROM Pack (020-0279-00); power cord
(161-0066-00); GPIB interface cable, 2 m, (012-0630-03);
cleaning pads, box of 10, (006-2398-00); label set, 0 to 9,
(334-3340-00).
ORDERING INFORMATION
4907 File Manager .............................. $4,620
Option 30 Option 31 Option 40 -
RS-232C Compatible (4923)
System Error Rate - 1 in 10' for 4923. 1 in 10' or less for
4924.
Start Time Read/Write - 25 ms.
Start Time Fast Forward/Rewind - 75 ms.
AC POWER
Easy-to-Use Data Storage/Retrieval
AC POWER
Line Voltage - 100 to 240 V ac.
Line Frequency - 50 to 60 Hz.
Power - 200 W at 120 V ac, 60 Hz maximum.
I
4923/4924 Tape Recorder/Drive
Two Disk Drives Total .......................... + 2,500
Three Disk Drives Total ...................... +$3,675
4052/4054 Interface .................................... NC
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORD AND PLUG OPTIONS
Option AI - Universal Euro, 220 V/16A, 50 Hz ............. NC
Option A2 - UK, 240 V/13A, 50 Hz ................................ NC
Option A3 - Australian, 240 V/ l0A, 50 Hz ..................... NC
Option A4 - North American, 240 V/15A. 60 Hz ............ NC
The 4923 Digital Cartridge Tape Recorder provides reliable , easy-to-use data storage and retrieval for the Tektronix 4006 and 4010 Series Terminals. The 4924 Digital Cartridge Tape Drive
supports the Tek 4050 Series Desktop Computers. Up to 15 tape drives can be mutiplexed to a
4050 acting as a controller on the GPIB. A single
4924 drive allows concurrent handling of merge
operations, and input/output transactions.
CHARACTERISTICS
Cartridge Type - 300A. 300XL Certified Data Cartridges
from Tektronix.
Usable Tape Length - 91.44 m (300 II).
Storage Capacity - 200 ,000 bytes , nominal for 4923 .
300,000 bytes, nominal for 4924.
Characters/Record - 128 eight-bit bytes for 4923. 128/256
eight-bit bytes for 4924.
Recording Density - 1600 bpi.
Data Transfer Rate - Standard, 9600 baud; Option 01, 110
to 9600 baud (4923 only).
Data Format - 8-biI binary or 8-biI ASCII.
Number of Data Tracks - One.
Recording Format - NRZ two-track, self-clocking.
Read/ Write Speed - 762 mm/s (30 ips).
Skip Forward/Reverse - 762 mm/s (30 ips).
Fast Forward /Rewind - 2.286 m/s (90 ips).
Line Voltage Range - 100 to 240 V ac Oumper selectable).
Line Frequency - 50 to 60 Hz.
Power - 62 W at 115 V ac.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Weight
Dimensions
mm
in
Width
Height
Depth
220
8.7
152
6.0
438
17.2
Net
kg
Ib
7.7
17.0
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Power cord (161-0066-00) ; GPIB Interface cable, 2 m ,
4924 only, (012-0630-0t).
ORDERING INFORMATION
4923 Digital Cartridge Tape
Recorder .............................................. $2,600
Option 01 -
Full Duplex (RS-232C) ................................. NC
4924 Digital Cartridge Tape Drive ....... $2,990
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORD AND PLUG OPTIONS
Option A1 - Universal European Power (220V/16A) ...... NC
Option A2 - UK (240V/13A) ............................................ NC
Option A3 - Australian (240V/ l0A) ................................. NC
Option A4 - North American (240V/15A) ........................ NC
OEM Terms available on these product • .
113
AND
GRAPHIC TABLETS
TEK JOYSTICK
4952
4953/4954/4956~G~ra:p:hi~C:~:b:le:ts"
Proportional Cursor Speed Control
AC POWER
Pen or Cursor Inputs
Line Voltage - 110 to 120 V ac.
Line Frequency - 60 Hz.
Power - 30 W maximum.
Worst Case Spec
The 4952 Joystick is available for Tektronix graphic systems users who need increased
interactivity. Activated by the Pointer command ,
this sensitive fingertip cursor control allows quick,
precise positioning of the cursor, making it easy
to develop accurate graphics.
The 4952 is Simplicity Itself
Just move the center lever in the direction you
want to move the cursor. Speed is controlled by
the angle and distance of the lever from the
center position. When you want to stop the
cursor, simply release the lever to its neutral
vertical position .
The 4952 is compatible with all of the Tektronix
4010 Family Terminals, 4081 Interactive Graphic
Systems and 4050 Series Desktop Computers.
CHARACTERISTICS
Control Actuation - Spring return to center.
Time Drift (Within 3D-second Period)
< 1 part in 1024.
Cursor Control Accuracy - 0.1%.
Resolution (X and Y) - 1 part in 1024.
Adjustable to
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
mm
Dimensions
Width
Height
Height w/lever
Depth
in
124
60
30
173
Weight
4.9
2.3
1.2
6.8
kg
Ib
0.9
Net
2.0
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
With the 4953/54/56 Graphic Tablets, you can
choose one of two input device options: a pen for
best convenience, or a push-button cursor where
exacting accuracy is required . You can input
points or vectors to digitize or display maps,
graphic drawings, schematics and other deSigns.
From precision mapping to exacting parts outlines, Tektronix Graphic Tablets satisfy a wide
range of user needs. You can select options from
a written "menu" placed on a Graphic Tablet. You
can store graphic input on peripheral disc or recorder devices, recall it later, and make quick,
dry-process copies on a Tektronix hard copy unit.
ORDERING INFORMATION
4952 Joystick (4014/4015) ___ •.....•...
H
••• H.
$625
Joystick (for 4010, 4012, and 4013) ....... +$75
Joystick (for 4050 Series) ___.. __.. _.. _......... +$100
Pen with inkless filler (119-0621-00): bias magnet, 11 x 11 in,
4953 only, (119-0686-00).
4954 CHARACTERISTICS
Size - 762 x 1016 mm (30 x 40 in).
Active Writing Area - 780 x 975 mm (30.7 x 38.4 in).
Resolution - 0.25 mm (0.01 in) minimum (12 bits).
Accuracy - ± 2.5 mm ( ± 0.10 in) over entire surface.
Repeatability - ± 1 point.
Operating Mode. - Single or multiple point entry using either
optical cursor or pen.
AC POWER
Line Voltage - 110 to 120 V ac.
Line Frequency - 60 Hz.
Power - 30 W maximum.
Tektronix offers all of the peripheral equipment
needed with your computer to configure a truly
interactive graphics system. Take your pick of the
279 x 279 mm (11 x 11 in) 4953 model, the drawing board-sized 1016 x 762 mm (40 x 30 in) 4954
model, or the 4956 in two sizes; the standard 510
x 510 mm (20 x 20 in) or the Option 33 version ,
910 x 1220 mm (36 x 48 in). The latter version is
large enough to accommodate E-size engineering
drawings. The 4956 is an IEEE Standard 488 device that connects to the 4050 Series Desktop
Computers.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Pen with inkless filler (119-0621-00): bias magnet for 30 x 40 in
(119-0687-00).
The 4954F32 Pedestal is a roll-around stand that
allows the 4954 to be raised or lowered or tilted at
any angle from vertical to horizontal.
Line Voltage - 115 V ac.
Line Frequency - 60 Hz.
Power - 60 W maximum.
4953 CHARACTERISTICS
Option 01 Option 02 -
~~
................
Joystick
Size - 279 x 279 mm (11 x 11 in).
Active Writing Area - 260 x 260 mm (10.24 x 10.24 in).
Resolution - 0.25 mm (0.01 in) minimum (10 bits).
Accuracy - ± 0.975 mm ( ± 0.030 in) over entire surface.
Repeatability - One point.
Operating Modes - Single or multiple point entry using either
optical cursor or pen.
4956 CHARACTERISTICS
Size - 510 x 510 mm (20 x 20 in): Option 33, 910 x 1220 mm
(36 x 48 in).
Resolution - 0.1 mm (0.004 in).
Accuracy - ± 0.1 mm (0.004 in) ± 1 LSB .
Repeatability - ± 1/2 LSB.
Repetition Rate - Up to 30 CPS.
Operating Modes - Point, Stream, Switch Stream,
Incremental.
AC POWER
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
GPIB cable, 2 m, (012-0630-01): PLOT 50 graphics tablet
supporting software tape (020-0223-00): bias magnet
(119-0895-00), pen with inkless filler (119-0621-00).
ORDERING INFORMATION
4953 Graphic Tablet, 279 x 279 mm
(11 x 11 in) ........................................
Option 48 -
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Graphic Tablets
Weights
Height
Depth
Weights
Dimensions
Width
Net
Height
Depth
Net
Option 48 - 220 V ac, 50 Hz power .. ,.. _, .... ,.. ,......... _...... NC
4954F32 Pedestal (for 4954 or 4956 Option 33) ...... _.. $1,325
4956 Graphic Tablet, 510 x 510 mm
(20 x 20 in) .•.•
4953
mm
in
390
15.4
31 .7
1.2
390
15.4
kg
Ib
2.4
5.2
mm
in
213
8.4
95
3.7
282
11 .1
kg
Ib
2.7
6.0
4954
mm
in
1143
45
51
2.0
946
37 .2
kg
Ib
23.4
52.0
rnm
in
213
8.4
95
3.7
282
11.1
kg
Ib
2.7
6.0
4954
mm
Opt 33 in
1416
55.7
50.8
2.0
1111
43.7
kg
Ib
32.4
72 .0
r,m
in
213
8.4
95
3.7
282
11 .1
kg
Ib
2.7
6.0
708
27 .9
38
1.5
711
28.0
kg
Ib
10.1
22.5
mm
in
343
13.5
124
4.9
381
15.0
kg
Ib
6.2
13.7
4956
114
mm
in
$3,795
4954 Graphic Tablet, 762 x 1016 mm
(30 x 40 in) ••••..•...••.....•............•........... $6,190
Controller
Dimensions
Width
H
220 V ac, 50 Hz power ............................... NC
H
••• HH ••••••• H
•••••••••••••••• HH
$5,670
Option 33 - Graphic Tablet, 910 x 1220 mm
(36 x 48 in) for 4956 .. ,................... ,.......................... + $2,600
Option 48 - 220 V ac, 50 Hz power ............................... NC
4954F32 Pedestal. (For 4954 or 4956 Option 33.) ...... $1,325
OEM Terms available one these products.
COMPUTER GRAPHICS
SUPPLIES
TEK
Pens, papers, and accessories for your Tektronix Copiers, Plotters,
Printers, and Graphic Display Devices.
ORDERING INFORMATION
HARD COPY PAPERS
4831 , 4832 Herd Copy Units Tek tronix Stand ard Dry Silver
Paper (Type 7770), single roll.
Order 006-1603-00 ... ........... ................... ......... .................. 580
Carton of 4 rolls. Order 006-1603-01 ............................. 5275
4833A Continuoul Recorder, 4834 Imaging Hard Copy
Unltl, Tektronix High Performance Dry Sil ver Paper (Type
7772), single roll. Order 006-2432-00 ............................. $185
Carton of 4 rolls. Order 006-2432-01 ............................. $660
QUANTITY DISCOUNTS FOR DRY SILVER PAPER
Discount
Price Per
Roll
4-9 Cartons
5%
65.31
261.25
10-19 Cartons
10%1
61.88
247.50
20 + Cartons
15%
58.44
233.75
Dlacount
Price Per
Roll
Price Per
Certon
4-9 Cartons
5%
156.75
627.00
10-19 Cartons
10%
148.50
594.00
20 + Cartons
15%
140.25
561.00
Standard
(Type 7770)
High Performence
(Type 7772)
Price Per
Carton
4611, 4812 Hlrd Copy Unill, Tektronix Electrographic Hard
Copy Paper, package of 2 rolls.
Order 006-2838-00 ............................................................ 528
DRY COPY TONER
4611 , 4612 Herd Copy Units, Dry Copy Toner, bottle 4.9 oz.
Order 006-2990-00 .. .......................................................... 522
PLOTTER PAPERS
4662 Interactive Digltll Plotter
Paper, blank sheet, 11 X 16.5 in (I 00 ea).
Order 006-2410-00 ............................................................ 510
Printed Pape..
Paper, Linear, 10 X 10 in grid ; 11 X 16.5 in (100 ea).
Order 006-1698-00 ............................................................ $12
Paper, Linear, 10 X 10 em grid; 11 X 16.5 in, (100 ea).
Order 006-1699-00 ............................................................ $12
Paper, Semi-log, 10 X 3 cycle, 11 X 16.5 in (100 ea).
Order 006-1700-00 ............................................................ $12
Paper, Semi-log, 10 X 2 cycle, 11 X 16.5 in (100 ea).
Order 006-1701 -00 ............................................................ $12
Paper, Full-log, 2 X 3 cycle, 11 X 16.5 in, (loo ea).
Order 006-1702-00 ............................................................ 512
4663 Interactive Dlgltll Plotter
Paper, blank sheet, 17 X 22 in, (100 ea).
Order 006-3150-00 ............................................................ $15
Vellum, 100% Rag content, blank sheet, 17 X 22 in, (100 ea).
Order 006-2836-00 .............. .......... .................................... 535
It's easy to order Tektronix accessories and supplies.
Just consult this listing for description, quantity, part number, and price. Then telephone your local
Tektronix Sales Office or call the toll-free Direct Order Desk number for your area.
Tektronix Direct Parts Order Desk Toll-Free Numbers
Paper, blank roll , 18 in X 200 ft , (C size after tear off) (2 ea).
Order 006-2837 -00 ............................................................ $40
Paper, blank roll, 18 in X 200 ft , (Metric size A2 after tear off)
(2 ea). Order 006-3473-00 ..................................................$42
800-225-4550
(in Massachusetts
617-861-6800)
•
Note: All prices apply to the 48 contiguous United States only, and are subject to change without notice.
115
GRAPHICS
SUPPLIES
TEK COMPUTER
Pen., paper., and accessories for your Tektronix Copier., Plotter., Printers, and Graphic Display Devices.
PLOTTER FILMS
·Qulck·Dry Plotter Film, (50 Sheets), 8 '12 X 11 in.
Order 006·5939·00 ............................................................ 52B
• New
Antistatic Polyester Film, 17 X 22 in. 100 sheets.
Order 006·2835·00 .......................................................... 5120
PLOTTER PENS FOR 4662 OPTION 31
AND 4663 PLOTTERS ONLY
WET INK PENS AND THEIR ACCESSORIES
Wet Ink Pens, Pen, PL3, 0.3 mm, (0.01 in) dia .
Order 016-0444· 01 ............................................................ 523
Pen, PL5, 0.5 mm, (0.02 in) dia. Order 016·0442·01 ....... 523
Pen, PL8, 0.8 mm, (0.03 in) dia. Order 016·0443·01 ....... 523
PLOTTER PENS FOR 4662 INTERACTIVE
DIGITAL PLOTTER, (STANDARD 1·PEN UNIT)
Fiber Tip Pens lor Paper. (3·pen packages)
Red. Order 016·0589·00 ................................................ 58.00
Replaceable Wet Ink Pen Tips, PL3, 0.3 mm, (0.01 in) dia.
Order 214-2706-00 ............................................................ 515
PL5, 0.5 mm, (0.02 in) dia. Order 214·2706-01 ................ 515
Green , Order 016·0589· 01 ............................................. 58.00
PL8, 0.8 mm, (0.03 in) dia. Order 214·2706-02 ................ 515
sa.OO
sa.OO
Raplacemant Wet Ink Pens Parts Kit, Contents: 1 Cap, 1
Body Section, 2 Lock Nuts, 6 Ink Cartridges.
Order 006-2968-01 ......................................................... $4.30
Black, Order 016-0589·02 ..............................................
Blue, Order 016·0589·03 ...............................................
Fiber Tip Pens lor Film, (3·pen packages)
Black. Order 016·0648·00 .............................................. 58.00
Brown. Order 016-0648-01 ............................................
sa.OO
Red , Order 016·0648·02 ................................................ 58.00
Orange. Order 016-0648·03 ...........................................
sa.OO
Yellow. Order 016·0648·04 ............................................ 58.00
Green, Order 016·0648·05 ............................................. 58.00
Blue, Order 016·0648·06 ...............................................
sa.OO
Purple. Order 016·0648·07 ............................................ 58.00
Magenta. Order 016·0648·08 ........................................ 58.00
Wet Ink Pens
7002 TB·O, 0.35 mm, (0.014 in). Order 016-0448· 00 ....... 524
7002 TB· l , 0.46 mm, (0.018 in). Order 016· 0449·00 ....... 524
7002 TB·2, 0.56 mm , (0.022 in). Order 016·0450·00 ....... 524
Replaceable Wet Ink Pen Tips
63 TB·O, 0.35 mm, (0.014 in). Order 016·0445·00 ...... 516.25
Blue, Order 016-0416·00 ............................................... 58.00
Green, Order 016·0417·00 .............................................
sa.OO
Brown , Order 016·0682·00 ............................................ 5B.00
Orange, Order 016·0683·00 ........................................... 5B.00
Yellow, Order 016-0684·00 ............................................
sa.OO
Purple, Order 016·0685·00 ............................................ 58.00
Magenta, Order 016·0686· 00 ........................................ 58.00
Multi-color (9·pen Package).
Order 016· 0687 · 00 ............................................................ 524
"Yellow, Order 016-0715-00
"Magenta, Order 016· 0716-00
Green, Order 016-0424·00 ............................................. 53.00
Blue, Order 016· 0425·00 ............................................... 53.00
Black, Order 016·0427·00 .............................................. 53.00
For Paper ("I, oz squeeze bottle), Black .
Order 016-0428· 00 ......................................................... 55.00
"279 mm X 432 mm "B· (11 in X 17 in) sheets.
Order 016·0711 · 00
Cleaning and Maintenance Systems, Cleaning Tank, Ultra·
sonic (1 ea). Order 002·1555-00 ..................................... 5170
"Metric Sizes: "A4· 210 mm X 297 mm.
Order 016-0709·00
Cleaning Fluid, 3069 Ultrasonic (8 oz).
Order 002·1556-00 ......................................................... 53.05
"" A3· 297 mm X 420 mm .
Order 016-0710·00
"New
Red, Order 016-0426-00 ................................................ 53.00
Cleaning Fluid, 3068, with strainer (5.2 oz).
Order 002· 0920·01 ......................................................... 53.20
Pressurel Suction Cleaning BUlb. Order 002· 1560·00 .. 510.25
PRESENTATION PACK
Contains supplies to make overhead transparency plots.
• Presentation Pack. Order 020-0888-00 ......................... 560
Pack includes :
Plotter Pens For Film (9).
Order 016-0470·00 ............................................................ 525
Quick Dry Plotter Film (50 sheets). Order 006-5939·00 .. 528
Pack also includes frames , covered pen tray, and storage box
not separately orderable.
PRINTER PAPER AND RIBBONS
4641 Printer Ribbon (box of (2). Order 119·0820·00 .... 5180
4642 Printer, Paper.Tab Stock , Fan Foid, 269.88 mm X 279.4
mm (10.625 in X 11 in) (2500 sheets per carton).
Order 002·0262-01 ............................................................ 560
Paper. Roll (box of (2). Order 002·1 084-01 ...................... 570
Ribbons (package of 4). Order 002·1451·01 .................... 570
Black , Order 016·0668-00 ................................................. 512
·4643 Printer, Ribbon Cassette.
Order 118· 1314·00 ....................................................... 513.50
Green, Order 016·0668· 02 ........... ..................................... 512
Blue, Order 016-0668·03 .................................................. 512
Fiber Tip Pens for Film. New pens specially formulated for
optimal results when used with ·Quick·Dry· Plotter Film
(006·5939· 00).
(3·pen packages)
·Black , Order 016·0469·00 .......................................... .....
·Brown. Order 016·0469·01 ..............................................
·Red, Order 016·0469·02 ..................................................
·Orange, Order 016·0469·03 ............................................
·Yellow. Order 016·0469·04 ..............................................
"Green. Order 016·0469· 05 ..............................................
"Blue, Order 016-0469-06 .................................................
"Purple, Order 016-0469-07 ..............................................
"Magenta, Order 016· 0469·08 ..........................................
510
$10
$10
510
510
$10
$10
510
$10
"Multi·Color (9·pen Package).
Order 016·0470·00 ............................................................ 525
·New
116
·INK JET PAPER
"Blank Paper, (500 Sheets).
"English Sizes: 216 mm X 279 mm · A· (8'12 in X 11 in) sheets.
Order 016-0712·00
Plastic Hard Tip Pens for Paper (3-pen packages)
Red, Order 016-0668·01 ................................................... 512
INK JET CARTRIDGES
"Cyan, Order 016· 0713·00
Brown, Order 016-0423-00 ............................................ 53.00
Magnifying Instrument, 3095 PMG. Order 002·1558-00 .. 580
Black, Order 016·0414·00 .............................................. 58.00
·4909 Multi·User File Management System, Cartridge Disk
(1 ea, 16 mB). Order 119· 1462·00 .................................. 5275
"Black . Order 016-0714·00
Humidifier, Pen Storage 746·700. Order 002·1559·00 .. 59.25
Red , Order 016·0415·00 ................................................ 58.00
MAGNETIC DISKS
4100 Series, 8·inch diskette, l·sided double denSity, soft sec·
tor box of 10 each. Order 119·1376-01 .......................... 5115
4907 File Manager, Flexible Magnetic Disk Cartridge
(box of (0). Order 119· 1011-01 ...................................... 5150
Extra Ink Cartridges, (1 ea). Order 016-0649·00 ........... 52.00
63 TB·2, 0.56 mm, (0.022 in). Order 016·0447·00 ...... 516.25
Fiber Tip Pens lor Paper (3-pen packages)
• Extra Length Cartridge, 450 ft long, (1 ea).
Order 119·1439·00 ................... ......................................... $45
Ink. for Wet Ink Pens, for Film ("I, oz squeeze bottle)
63 TB·l , 0.46 mm, (0.018 in). Order 016·0446·00 ...... 516.25
PLOTTER PENS FOR 4662 OPTION 31 (8·PEN UNIT) AND
4663 INTERACTIVE DIGITAL PLOTTERS
DIGITAL TAPE CARTRIDGES
Digital Tape Cartridge, 300 ft long, MagnetiC (box of 5).
Order 119·0680-01 .......................................................... $180
·Contact your nearest Tektronix Sales Office for prices of
items not listed .
TEK
OEM
PRODUCTS
CONTENTS
Specifications & Packaging .
.....
4041 System Controller ................. . ...............
634 Video Display ....
6068/620 Waveform Displays ......................
608/624 Direct Viewing Display ....................
GMA103 19·inch Display Module ..................
GMA101A/ 102A 19-inch Display Module ....
GMA 125 25-inch Display Module ..................
4633A Continuous Recorder .
690SR Option 42 Color Monitor ...................
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
124
125
125
The Tektronix OEM Commitment Support, Reliability, Performance,
Value
When you deal with Tektronix, you are
dealing with a supplier who stands behind
you every step of the way. As a world leader
in display technology, we are committed to
building lasting OEM relationships and supporting them with continuing new product
developments.
Your Tektronix resource starts with a broad
and comprehensive package of OEM support including: OEM service agreements
and capabilities throughout the United
States and in many countries; interface
assistance and applications engineering ,
custom mods and documentation; and OEM
pricing , terms, and conditions, to help make
you competitive.
At Tektronix, our product reliability is your
foundation . Your systems can only be as
reliable as the components that go into
them . Tektronix is committed to producing
the most dependable products possible.
You can be confident that the reliability we
engineer into every product will help keep
your customers satisfied and your service
costs down.
Consider the advantages of working with
us: product performance with built-in reliability and measureable value, in addition to
extensive OEM service and support. Your
local Tektronix OEM Representative will
show you how you can profit from a partnership with Tektronix.
117
OEM IMAGING PRODUCTS
TEK REFERENCE
The standard displays come without a handle, feet or covers. See your local Tektronix Representative for complete
specifications, options and ordering information, or use the
return card.
KEY SPECIFICATIONS FOR X-Y DISPLAYS
See your local Tektronix representative for complete specifications, options and ordering information, or use the return card.
608
MODULAR PACKAGING AND
RACK MOUNTING
PACKAGING FOR THE 620
Vertical Package - Includes handle, feet and covers.
Order 016·0409·00 ...................................... .................... $255
Horizontal Package - Includes handle, feet and covers.
Order 016·0410-00 ...................................... .................... $255
Rackmount With Empty Compartment- Slide-out19 in rack
assembly which rackmounts one 620 and an empty compartment horizontally. In the compartment you may put your custom electronic circuitry and combine it with the display. Includes frame . covers and rack slides. Not available with Options 06, 23. 28.
Order 016-0404-00 .......................................................... $295
Side-by-Side Rackmount - Slide-out 19 in rack assembly
which rack mounts two 620s side by side. Includes covers and
rack slides. Not available with Options 06, 23, 28, 31 .
Order 016-0405-00 .......................................................... $215
RACK MOUNTING FOR 6068, 608, 624
Rackmount and Empty Cabinet Kit - Slide-out 19 in rack
assembly which mounts a display monitor and an empty compartment horizontally. In the compartment you may put your
custom electronic circuitry and connect it to the display, all in
one enclosure.
Order 040-0601 -00 .......................................................... $290
Display/ Power Module Kit - Allows rackmounting of 606B,
608, and 624 with TM 503 Power Module. Minimizes mechanical design time. Simply design your own electronics using
TM 500 Custom Plug-in kits described on page 395. Then plug
them in. Fits standard 19 in rack .
Order 040-0624-01 ...... .................................................... $120
Rackmounting Kit for 6068, 608, and 624 - Slide-out 19 in
rack assembly which rack mounts any two of the above displays side by side. Includes covers and rack slides.
Order 040-0600-00 ............................. ............................. $180
Rackmount-to-Cabinet Conversion - Required to convert a
rackmount 6068 , 608 or 624 to a cabinet style.
Order 040-0602-00 .......................................................... $160
620
634
.I
Worst case
Resolution II
'
Nominal
Display Size
Position Accuracy/
Non-Linearity
Brightness
Brightness
Non-uniformity
Bandwidth
634 Option 01
1100 line
650 line
1400 line
800 line
< 0.38 mm (15 mils)
0.30 mm (12 mils)
0.08 mm (3.1 mils)
Display Size
98 x 122 mm
100 x 120 mm
98 x 122 mm
80x 100mm
Aoceleration Potential
22.5 kV
12 kV
",, 18 kV
5.5 kV
Bandwidth, X-Y"
;;. 5 MHz
;;.2 MHz
;;.3 MHz
> 3 MHz
Bandwidth, Z"
;;. 10 MHz
;;.5 MHz
;;. 5 MHz
5 MHz
Risetime
..;35 ns
..;70 ns
..; 116 ns
Input Rand C, X-Y'3
lMIl II"; 60pF
1 MIll l 47 pF
1 Mil II < 47 pF
1 MS'l ± 1% or
50 11 11< 47 pF
1 MIl or5 Mil
Input Rand C, Z'3
1 MIl II";60pF
1 MIll k 47 pF
1 Mil II < 47 pF
X-Y Phase Difference
"; 1" to 1.5 MHz
..; 1" dc to 500 kHz
< 1" to 1.0 MHz
I " to ;;. 500 kHz
Recommended Source
Impedance, X-Y and Z
..; 10 kll
..; 10 kll
..; 10 kll
5011 or ..; 10k 11.
Temperature Range
0 " to +50 " C
0" to + 55 " C
o to + 50 " C
0 " to 50 " C
Power Requirements"
61 W
"
61 W
75 W
Included Aocessories
Lined external implosion shield
(graticule) for adjustment purposes
Lined external im·
plosion shield
(graticule) for adjustment purposes
Recommended
C-5C , C-59A, C-28
C-5C, C-5C Option 01
C-28
C-5C, C-28
C-28, C-30BP
Cameras·'
"Measured at 0.5 ~A .
"Full spec would read : 'dc to .. : appropriate figure .
'3' 11< ' means ' paralleled by less than' .
"Line voltage selector allows operation from 100, 110, 120, 200, 220, and 240 V ( ± 10% on each range). 48 to 440 Hz. Number given
shows W maximum at nominal line voltage.
"The 620's power requirements are 90-132 and 180-250 V ac; 48-440 Hz line frequency, 22 W max. 0.2A at 120 V ac 60 Hz.
'.External 15 V dc 750 rnA power supply required for C-28.
APPLICATIONS FOR SELECTED OEM IMAGING PRODUCTS
Recommended
Display
Medical
Instrumentation
Electronic
Test Equipment
Defense
Electronics
~ O . 5%
within 9 em circle,
in corners. For Option 01 : 1%
within 9 em Circle, 2% at corners
515 cd/m' (150 fL) max
< ± 10%
1 Hz - 10 MHz std. 20 MHz Video
bandwidth available as Option 14.
Note: Standard 634 accepts the line/field rate of 525/60 and
625/50.
Discrete fine rates of 675/60 through 1083/60 can be
accommodated using Option 15.
'Merged raster lines.
118
Analytical
Instrumentation
634 Very High
Resolution
Video Display
Ultrasound raster
scan Computerized
tomography
Multi-imaging
cameras
High-density graphics,
alphanumerics &
imaging
Reconnaissance
& surveillance
Target acquisition
FUR LLLTV
Electron microscopy
608 High
Brightness X-Y
Display
Ultrasound M-Mode
Real Time Sector
scan B-scan
Spectrum analysis
Navigation & control
Automated test
systems Simulators
IR imaging
Mass Spectrometry
Nondestructive testing
NMR FTIR
620 General
Purpose X-Y
Display
Ultrasound A-Mode
Physiological
measurements
Logic analyzers
Automated test
equipment Spectrum
analysis RF-sweepers
TV waveform monitor
Electronic countermeasures Radar-A
scopes Sonar PPI
Nondestructive testing
Multi-channel
pulse height
analyzers
606B Very High
Resolution Y
Display
Nuclear multi-imaging
Gamma camera
Ultrasound
multi-imaging
High-density graphics
alphanumerics &
imaging
Imaging for scan
conversion
Scanning electron
microscopy
Micro probe Radiation
and thermal scanning
9x12 cm (flat screen)
~ 1%
6068
0.26 mm (10 mils)
KEY SPECIFICATIONS FOR 634 VIDEO DISPLAY
Video Display
624
Spot Size"
x-
TEK
SYSTEM
CONTROLLER
capability. Other options include an 8-bit parallel
TIL port. (Option 02) the program development
ROMs and carrier (Option 30), and a program
development/debug keyboard (Option 31). BASIC
is an excellent language, and was chosen for the
4041 . Its English-like commands, simple syntax,
and line-by-line interpreter implementation combine for friendly, easy to use. To improve the selfdocumenting characteristics and thus reduce
maintenance costs, 4041 BASIC is enhanced by
several features . Variable names may be up to 8
characters, allowing the programmer to select
meaningful names like RISETIME, VOLTAGE 1, or
DELAY Subprograms and program lines may be
named with examples such as SRQHANDL or
CALCRMS.
4041
The 4041 complies with IEEE Standard 488-1978
and with Tektronix Standard Codes and
Formats.
Optimized for Interfacing Flexibility
Modular Design - Rackmount or Portable
Efficient, Easy to use BASIC Language with
Extensions
Expandable Memory Capability (To 160k
Bytes) and Other Options
The 4041 Controller is a powerful, flexible, expandable IEEE Standard 488 systems controller
designed to work with Tektronix and other vendor's IEEE Standard 488 instruments. While the
basic unit is intended principally for execute only
environments such as production line testing , a
variety of options and peripherals will equip the
4041 for full interactive flexibility in research lab
applications Tektronix full line of terminals (graphics or alphanumeric, storage or raster, and color)
are compatible to create an optimum programmer interface in the more sophisticated areas.
Software features similarly span the range from
the occasional programmer to the sophisticated
programming team tacking complex products.
The basic 4041 compactness, permits configuration of very compact systems which can go into
applications impractical for earlier generations of
systems.
4041 Architecture
The 4041 controller contains three micro-processors. The CPU is the powerful 16-bit 68000.
Standard memory is 32k bytes (approximately
19k user-available), with optional 32k increments
to 160k maximum. A 20-character alphanumeric
LED display, 20 character thermal printer, DC 100
casette drive, 18 key system/function keypad ,
GPIB port, and a RS-232 port are standard. A
realtime clock and calendar capability are standard on the 4041 . Option 01 adds a second pair
of ports (one GPIB and one RS-232). The Option
01 GPIB port has Direct Memory Access
4041 BASIC includes many enhancements such
as FORTRAN-like subprograms. Variable passing
from main to subprograms and the ability to
declare any variables as local or global means
that a team of programmers can work quite
independently on a massive task, with the main
program ultimately being not much more than a
series of subprogram CALL statements. Other
powerful features include optional data types
(short and long floating point plus integer), a
COMPRESS command to optimize memory use,
a proceed mode which overlaps I/O and processing operations for maximum system speed, logical unit assignment capability, and up to 160k
bytes of memory directly addressable without
overlays or paging techniques.
Test and Measurement Orientation
The 4041 controller was developed and optimized
as an instrument controller. Many of the IEEE
Standard 488 functions are simple high level
commands in 4041 BASIC. Examples include
ATN, GET, LLO, and several others. In its powerup default condition, the 4041 implements
Tektronix Standard Codes and Formats and
thus can communicate instantly with Tektronix
IEEE Standard 488 instruments without any programmer attention to formats, syntax, delimiters,
number format, etc. However, the 4041 also has
virtually complete, programmable control over
every IEEE Standard 488 line and condition. When
this ability is combined with the 4041 's Logical
Unit assignment and stream specification ability,
virtually any IEEE Standard 488 instrument or
device can be easily handled. The stream specification ability means that a particular device's
format, syntax, end-of-message character, and
other idiosyncrasies can be described one time in
a Logical Unit assignment statement. Thereafter,
the programmer can control or obtain data from
that instrument as easily as from an instrument
which fully complies with Tektronix Standard
Codes and Formats.
The error trapping and handling capabilities of the
4041 are a particular importance in test and
measurement systems. Virtually any category of
error - in instruments, peripherals, on the bus, or
even within the 4041 - can be trapped and
handled by user specified software drivers.
CHARACTERISTICS
ARCHITECTURE
CPU - 68000, 16-bit.
Standard Memory - 32k bytes expandable to 160k.
DISPLAY
Type - LED.
Segments - 16.
Characters - 20 Alphanumeric.
IEEE STANDARD 488 INTERFACE
Transfer Rates Normal Mode
Input: > 5k bytes/so
Output: > 5k bytes/so
Transfer Rate Fast Mode
Input: > 16.5k bytes/so
Output: > 19.5k bytes/so
SERIAL INTERFACE
Type - Asynchronous RS-232.
Full Duplex - Full capability (half duplex not supported).
Transmit/Receive - Matched rate only.
Bits Per Character - 5,6,7, or 8 bits.
Stop Bits - One or two.
Parity - Even, Odd, High, Low, None.
Baud Rate - Selectable, any integer between 2 and 9600.
MAGNETIC TAPE DRIVE
File Structure - 48 named files (maximum).
Typical Capacity - 650 records (600 minimum).
Physical Record - 256 bytes.
Average Transfer Rate - 10.24k bits/so
Tape Cartridge - 100A Certified Data Cartridge from
Tektronix.
PRINTER
Method - Thermal, fixed head.
Capacity (Per Fixed Line) - 20 character Alphanumeric.
Speed - 2 ± 0.24 lines/s.
Line Spacing - 6 ± '/2 lines/in.
Character Set - 128 total.
Paper Size - 60 mm x 25 m (2.36 in x 82 tt).
ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS
Operating Temperature - Without data cartridge or printer
page: O" C to + 55" C. With data cartridge or printer page: O"C
to + 45 "C.
Storage Temperature - Without data cartridge or printer paper: - 40"C to + 75 " C.
Humidity - Without data cartridge or printer paper: 95%. With
data cartridge or printer paper: 85%. Nonoperating : 95%.
Altitude - Operating: Sea level to 4500 m (15,200 tt). Nonoperating: Sea level to 15 000 m (50,000 tt) .
EMI - Meets FCC Part 15. Subpart J . Class A and VDE 0871
Class B.
AC POWER
Line Voltage -
90 to 132 or 180 to 250 V ac ± 10%.
Line Frequency -
48 to 66 Hz.
Power Consumption -
120 W maximum.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
DC 100 Tape cartridge. blank (119-1350-00); system verification tape (062-5828-00); power cord (161-0066-00); roll of
printer paper (006-3557-00); loop back connector, RS-232
male (013-0198-00) ; blank overlays for FP keyboard
(334-4074-00).
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dimensions
mm
in
Width
Height
Depth
215.5
180
527
8.5
7.2
20.8
Weight
kg
Net
Net. with Options
7.8
8.8
Ib
17.5
19.5
For more complete description and Ordering Information refer
to pages 391-393.
119
HIGH RESOLUTION
DISPLAY
TEK VIDEO
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dimensions
mm
in
Width
Height
Height (Option 06)
Depth
Depth (Option 20)
214
133
149
423
367
8.4
5.2
5.9
16.7
14.7
Weight
kg
Net
Net (Option 20)
6.3
4.6
Ib
13.8
10.1
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
CRT graticule (337.2537. 01); CRT filter (378.0133.00).
ORDERING INFORMATION
634 Video Display
(Without handle, feet and covers.) ...... $2,900
634
High Resolution Low Distortion Display for
Critical Applications (1400 lines, shrinking
raster)
< 1/2% Non-Linearity Inside the 9 cm
Quality Area
Excellent Gray Scale and Brightness
Uniformity
Excellent Gray Scale and Brightness
Uniformity
The 634's CRT is designed to faithfully display
gray scale images. This CRT utilizes an advanced
gun design for excellent brightness uniformity
(variation is less than ± ten percent across the
screen).
The 634 may be operated on either ac or dc
power. Ac power is standard; Option 20 configures the unit for dc power.
CHARACTERISTICS
Option 01 - Resolution of 800 lines nom, 650
lines worst case ..................................................... ...... -$205
Option 06 - UL 544 Listing . (Covers included ;
not available with Options 20.) ... ....................•••.•........ +$100
Option 09 - UL 544 Component Recognition ................. NC
Option 11 - External Sync - switchable ................... +$40
Option 13 - Video Reverse ......................................... +$85
Option 14 - 20 MHz Video Amplifier ........... .............. +$145
Option 15 - High line rate. Factory calibrated at
1083/60. User changeable to rates between 675/60
and 1083/60 with supplied parts kit ............................ +$280
Option 16 - Remote Brightness. Contrast, Focus.
Video Reverse. Blanking ................................................ +$15
Option 20 - Dc Supply - + 23 V. - 22 V. + 9 V
(Unregulated) ................................................................ - $235
MECHANICAL PACKAGE OPTIONS
Rackmount kit to mount two 634_ side by _ide in 19 in
rack. Not compatible with Option 20.
Order 016-0403-00' ........................................................ $250
Rackmount Kit to mount one 634 and one empty
cabinet side by side. Not compatible with
Option 20. Order 016·0402·00' ...................................... $345
DISPLAY
The 634 Video Display monitor delivers extremely
high quality video images for both viewing and
photography. Applications include: medical diagnostic imaging , military infrared imaging, and
automated test systems.
Tektronix' distortion requirements surpass normal
standards. With the 634, you 'll have less than
'12 percent distortion inside a 90 mm circular area;
less than one percent for the rest of the screen.
The 634 has a flat faceplate that preserves
geometric accuracy in viewing and photographic
applications. Dynamic focusing assures crisp images, even in the corners.
Resolution on video displays can be separated
into two catagories: vertical and horizontal. Vertical resolution is limited by the video line rate
used. At the RS-170 rate of 525/60, approximately
480 lines are visible. Option 15 extends the 634
line rate to 1083/60, and improves the vertical
resolution . Determined by spot size and video
bandwidth , horizontal resolution typically exceeds
1400 lines per screen height at center screen .
Option 14 increases video bandwidth to 20 MHz.
CRT Type - Raster scan, monochrome.
Dimensions - 90 mm x 120 mm (3.5 in x 4.7 in), 15 cm (5.9 in)
diagonal.
Aspect Ratio - 4 x 3.
Resolution - Measured using the shrinking raster method (no
interlace) center screen at 100 cd/m', (30 fL) : 1400 lines nominal (1100 lines worst case) or 800 lines nominal (650 lines
worst case) with Option 01 .
Position Accuracy - ... 0.5% within 90 mm circle (.;; 1% with
Option 01); ';; 1% outside 90 mm circle (.;;2% with Option 01).
LINE/ FIELD RATE
Standard - 525/60 and 625/50.
Option 15 - 1083/60, adjustable down to 675/60.
Brightness - 515 cd/m' (150 fL) maximum.
Brightness Uniformity (Using J16 Photometer) Better than ± 10% over the scan area.
Phosphor Type - P45.
VIDEO INPUT
Signal CompoSite video with negative sync; RS-170
compatible.
Signal Level - 0.35 V p-p to 2.0 V p-p.
Maximum Safe Input - 5.0 V p-p.
Bandwidth - 1 Hz to 10 MHz (20 MHz with Option 14).
Impedance - 75 {lloop through; switchable 75 {l termination .
Return Loss - 46 dB to 5 MHz with or without internal 75 {l
termination and power on.
Dc Restoration - Referenced to back porch or sync tip.
SAFETY
Department of D.H.H.S. (BRH Rule 1020 10 (C) (1) standard.
UL 544 Listing (Option 06) and UL 544 Component Recognition (Option 09). C.S.A. certified.
'OEM pricing not available on rackmount kits. Quantity dis·
count information is available on request.
AC POWER
Voltage Ranges (±10%) - 100, 110, 120, 200, 220, and
240 V ac.
Line Frequency - 48 to 440 Hz.
Power - 50 w at 120 V ac, 60 Hz.
120
SPECIAL PRICING, TERMS AND CONDITIONS ARE AVAIL·
ABLE TO QUALIFIED OEMS. CONTACT YOUR LOCAL TEK·
TRONIX REPRESENTATIVE FOR COMPLETE INFORMATION.
TEK
GENERAL PURPOSE
WAVEFORM DISPLAYS
620
606B
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
CRT Graticule (337-2537-00).
General Purpose Economical,
Display
x-v Waveform
Many Packaging Configurations
(See page 118)
Exceptionally High Reliability
The 620 has Built-in Reliability
With fewer parts and lower power, display and
system reliability are improved, and service costs
are lower.
Package the 620 the Way Vou Want It
A wide variety of packaging configurations are
available for easy integration into your system.
CHARACTERISTICS
DISPLAY
CRT Type - Flat-faced rectangular CRT.
Dimensions - 100 x 120 mm (3.9 x 4.7 in).
Phosphor Type - P31 .
Spot Size - 0.38 mm (15 mils) at 0.5 ~A .
Linearity - The voltage required to produce a 25-mm deflection from any point on the CRT will not vary more than 5%.
Usable Brightness - Up to 100 cd/m2 (30 fL).
ORDERING INFORMATION
620 Display
(without handle, feet or covers) .......... $1,400
Option 01 - Internal Graticule
(8 x 10 div at 12.2 mm/div .) .... _.......................................... NC
Option 06 - UL 544 Listed.
(Includes handle, feet, and covers.) ............................. +$100
Option 09 - UL Component Recognition. (Not
compatible with Option 06.) ............................................... NC
Option 10 - Remote 25-pin Program Connector, X, Y,
l-axes. Single-ended inputs only.
(Not available with Option 31 .) ....................................... +$50
Option 20 - Delete ac power. External dc power
required (17 to 26 V, at 0.9 A.)
(Not available with Option 06 or 31 .) ............................. - $25
Option 23 - Handle, feet and covers.
(Not available with Options 06, 28, or 31 .) .................... +$80
Option 25 - TTL Blanking ........................................... +$50
Option 28 - With cover only - no trim strips, no feet.
(Not available with Options 06, 23, or 31 .) .................... +$70
Option 31 - Delete all rear panel BNCs, dc power connector
and ac power supply and switch. Provision for external dc power (+ 17 V unregulated) is provided. (Not compatible with Options 06, 10, 20, 23 and 28.) Can be used with 016-0409-00 or
016-0410-00 packaging ................................................. -$25
Z-AXIS AMPLIFIER
Bandwidth - Dc to ;;. 5 MHz.
Input Sensitivity Range - Not adjustable. t .O V will produce
maximum brightness with Intensity Control set at mid-range.
AC POWER
Voltage Ranges (±10%) - 100, 110, 120, 200, 220 and
240 V ac.
Line Frequency - 48 to 440 Hz.
Power - 22 W at 120 V ac.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dimensions
Height (without feet)
Width
Depth
Weight
Net(without handle, feet , and covers)
Shipping
mm
133
213
500
kg
5.3
6.9
in
5.2
8.4
19.7
Ib
11.7
15.2
Z-AXIS AMPLIFIER
Input - Differential ; BNC connectors.
Bandwidth - Dc to 5 MHz (- 3 dB).
Risetime - .. 35 ns.
Sensitivity Range - Adjustable from 0-1 V to 0-5 V for full
intenSity control.
AC POWER
Voltage Ranges (±10%) - 100, 110, 120, 200, 220, and
240 V ac.
Line Frequency - 48 to 440 Hz.
Power - 50 W nominal ; 75 W maximum at 120 V ac.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
6068
Dimensions
VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL AMPLIFIERS
Bandwidth - Dc to 2 MHz.
Settling Time - 1 ~s from any point on the CRT within
0.5 mm of final position .
Deflection Factor - Adjustable, .. 0.9 V to ;;. 1.5 V per
100 mm (vertical), .. 0.8 V to ;;. 1.2 V per 100 mm (horizontal).
Input Rand C - 1 Mil shunted by < 47 pF.
X-Y Phase Difference - , . maximum , dc to 500 Hz.
Maximum Input Voltage - ± 25 V (dc plus peak ac).
Recommended Source Impedance - .. 10 kll.
VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL AMPLIFIERS
Risetime - 116 ns or less.
Settling Time - < 500 ns with deflection-input attenuation in
IX position .
Bandwidth - Dc to at least 3 MHz (- 3 dB).
Input - Differential; BNC connectors.
Deflection Factor (Vertical and horizontal) - Adjustable, 0.5
to 2.5 V for 80 mm deflection.
Input Impedance 1 Mil or 50 Il ± 1%, paralleled by
< 47 pF; internally selectable.
X-Y Phase Difference - Not niore than , . to at least
500 kHz.
Maximum Input Voltage - With 1 Mil Zin, ± 100 V (dc peak
ac); with 50 Il Zin, ± 5 V (dc peak ac).
Very High-Resolution X-V Display for Applications Requiring the Most Critically Sharp
Photographs and Displays
Weight
The 6068 offers image stability, gray-scale performance, and uniform brightness, critical to the
quality of measurement or the accuracy of a medical diagnosis.
Uniform resolution and variable spot size are also
provided by the 6068. The 6068's metal bezel is a
solid mount for heavy cameras and prevents light
leaks or distortion .
CHARACTERISTICS
DISPLAY
CRT Type - Flat-faced rectangular CRT.
Dimensions - 80 x 100 mm (3.2 x 3.9 in).
Display Linearity - 1% of full scale along major axes.
Spot Size - 0.079 mm (3.1 mils) or less.
Spot Growth - Not > 20% at constant intensity within the
quality area (70 x 90 mm).
Brightness Uniformity - < 10% variation within quality area
(70 x 90 mm).
Phosphor - P31.
mm
133
213
519
Height
Width
Depth
=
Net
Shipping
kg
7.9
10.3
in
5.2
8.4
20.4
Ib
17.5
22 .7
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
25-pin connector (131-0570-00); 25-pin connector housing
(200-0821 - 00) ; power cord ( 161-0066-00) ; grat icule
(337-1674-00).
ORDERING INFORMATION
606B Display
(no handle, feet or covers.) .. _...... __ .. _... $4,450
Option 06 - UL 544 Listing. Includes handle,
feet , and covers ........... ................................................ +$100
Option 07 - Front-panel controls changed to
screwdriver adjustments . ............................................... +$30
Option 09 - UL 544 Component Recognized ................. NC
Option 28 - With covers.
(Not available with Option 06.) ....................................... +$70
SPECIAL PRICING, TERMS AND CONDITIONS ARE AVAILABLE TO QUALIFIED OEMS. CONTACT YOUR LOCAL TEKTRONIX REPRESENTATIVE FOR COMPLETE INFORMATION.
121
DIRECT
DISPLAYS
TEK VIEWING
( --
-
r
,
Z-AXIS AMPLIFIER
Z-Axis amplifier permits intenSity modulation of the writing
beam.
Bandwidth
608 - Dc to 10 MHz over usable range.
624 - Dc to 5 MHz over usable range.
Sensitivity range is adjustable from 0 to + 1 V to 0 to + 5 V for
full-intensity control.
Input Rand C
608 - 1 Mil ± 1% and < 60 pF.
624 - 1 Mil ± 1% and < 47 pF.
Linea, Common-Mode Signal Range (with Option 21) ± 5 V.
AC POWER
Voltage Ranges (±10%) - 100, 110, 120, 200,220, and
240 V ae.
Line Frequency - 48 to 440 Hz.
Powe, - 61 W maximum at nominal line voltage.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Option 23
!
'1'
U
608/624
High Resolution With Ambient Light Viewing
Expansion Mesh Halo Suppression
Excellent Gray Scale High Brightness
Displays
Optional UL 544 Listing
The 608 is Tektronix' finest directed-beam viewing monitor. It is extremely well suited for highperformance display applications such as medical and military imaging and electronic
instrumentation . The 608's high usable brightness, small spot size, and large screen give
excellent direct-viewing capability. When such
clarity or brightness is not required , the comparable 624 is recommended . Both the 608 and 624
produce detailed displays that are easy to read in
high ambient light and allow quality photographs.
Special CRT design suppresses expansion-mesh
halo, which ordinarily causes lower contrast and a
' washed out" appearance that interferes with
high-brightness gray-scale displays. Expansionmesh-halo suppression results in a more readable
display with subtle and accurate gray-scale images and detailed waveforms. In addition, imaging is critically sharp from corner to corner,
particularly on the 608, which uses dynamic
focusing .
The wide deflection factor facilitates integration
with a broad range of designs. An optional metal
bezel lets you use heavy cameras, including
those with motorized roll-film backs, without causing distortion, defocus, or light leaks.
In addition, optional full-differential inputs help
reject unwanted common-mode signals such as
ground noise and power-supply hum. Plus, the
608 can be ordered with gamma-correction for
photographic applications. This option produces
linear light-output changes with a linear change of
Z-axis input, typically within 20 percent.
Rackmount
Dimensions
mm
in
mm
in
Width
Height
Depth
213
169
518
8.4
6.6
2.4
213
133
483
8.4
5.2
19.0
Weight ""
kg
Net
Shipping
8.0
10.4
Ib
17.6
23.0
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
CRT Gratieule (337-2126-02).
ORDERING INFORMATION
608 Display
(No handle, feet, or covers.) .....•••........ $2,690
624 Display
(No handle, feet, or covers.) .••..•••.•..••.• $2,640
Option 01 - Internal Gratieule •. _...................................... NC
Option 09 - UL 544 Component Recognition ................. NC
Option 10 - 25-pin Remote Program Connector X, Y,
and Z, single-ended inputs ............................................. + $50
Option 20 - Without ae supply
( ± 18 V unregulated de supply required.) (624 only.) .... -$30
Option 21 - Full Differential Inputs (X,Y,Z) ................. +$50
Option 22 - Extended Gain Range 5X Attenuator ...... +$35
Option 23 - Handle, feet , and covers.
(Not available with Option 28.) ....................................... +$80
Option 25 - TIL Blanking ........................................... +$75
Option 28 - Covers only
(Not available with Option 23.) ....................................... +$70
Option 29 - Metal Bezel .............................................. +$70
CHARACTERISTICS
DISPLAY
CRT Type - Flal-faced , electrostatic.
Dimensions - 98 x 122 mm (3.9 x 4.8 in).
Phosphor Type - P31 (standard).
Spot Size
608 - 0.25 mm (10 mils) at 170 cd/m 2 (50 fL) ; maximum
brightness - 240 cd/m2 (75 fL).
624 - 0.3 mm (12 mils) at 170 cd/m2 (50 fL) .
VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL AMPLIFIERS
Bandwidth
608 - Dc to at least 5 MHz.
624 - Dc to at least 3 MHz.
Dellection Factor - Adjustable 50 mV/div to 0.25 V/div. Option 22 (5X attenuator) extends deflection factor to 1.25 V/div.
Input Rand C
608 - 1 Mil paralleled by < 60 pF.
624 - 1 Mil paralleled by < 47 pF.
X-Y Phase Difference
608 - One degree maximum to at least 1.5 MHz.
624 - One degree maximum to at least 1.0 MHz.
Maximum Input Voltage - ± 100 V (de plus peak ae).
Linea, Common-Mode Signal Range (with Option 21) ± 3 V. (Option 22 extends range to ± 15 V.)
Recommended Source Impedance - ,,; 10 kll.
122
SPECIAL PRICING, TERMS AND CONDITIONS ARE AVAIL·
ABLE TO QUALIFIED OEMS. CONTACT YOUR LOCAL TEKTRONIX REPRESENTATIVE FOR COMPLETE INFORMATION.
TEK
OEM
COMPUTER DISPLAY MODULE
CHARACTERISTICS
DISPLAY
CRT Type - Directed beam, Direct View Storage.
Dimensions - 48 cm (19 in) diagonal.
Addressable Area - 267 x 356 mm (10.5 x 14 in).
Stored Resolution - 40 line pairs/in center screen ; 35 line
pairs/in at screen periphery.
Stored Dot Writing Time - 5 ~s or less.
Stored Vector Writing Rate - 150 m/s (5900 in/s).
Refreshed Vector Writing Rate - 1200 mi s, (47,240 in/s.)
Viewing Time - At least 15 minutes at specified resolution.
Era.e Time - 1.5 s :t 20%.
DEFLECTION AMPLIFIERS
X-Y Input - Differential analog .
Origin (X = 0, Y = 0 Volts) - Center screen.
Input Sensitivity
Long Axis - 10 V p-p full screen :t 2.5%.
Short Axis - 7.5 V p-p full screen :t 2.5% of long axis.
Maximum Input Voltage - :t 6.5 V (dc +peak ac).
Input Impedance - 10 kll :t l0%. paralleled by < 100 pF.
Slew Rate (non-linear operation) - 5000 m/s.
Settling Time (non-linear operation) - 1 ~s + 2 ~s/cm to
within one spot diameter for vector lengths > 1 cm; 3 ~s to
within one spot diameter for vector lengths of 1 cm or less.
Positional Accuracy - All points within the CRT addressable
area are addressable with an accuracy of :t 1.25% of the long
axis dimensk)n.
Z-AXIS
Input Requirements - TTL compatible. LO True. (Strap selectable to HI True).
Risetime - 70 ns, limited to 1 MHz continuous repetition rate.
Input Impedance - 50 II (Strap selectable to 75 or 93 II).
Status Signals - 0 Busy, SLU (HCU availa~le when an appropriate hard copy device is connected).
AC POWER
Voltage Range - 90 to 110, 108 to 132, 198 to 242 or 216to
264 V ac Uumper selectable).
Line Frequency - 48 to 66 Hz.
Power - 315 W maximum at 115 V ac.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dimensions Horiz Fmt (no tilt)
GMA103
Storage and Color Enhanced Refresh
Graphic and Alphanumeric Display
Modular Construction, 19-inch, High Performance Display
The GMA103 is a high performance member of
the GMA display product family. Its storage mode
provides high resolution, high density graphics at
a low cost. Color and refresh add increased
viewability, selective erase, interactivity, and dynamic motion with the same high resolution . GMA
Family features include modular construction, a
blending of storage and refresh technology, and
interface/packaging options to configure a display for user applications.
Quick differentiation of working and stored information. By placing finalized data in store (green
display) while retaining working data in refresh
(yellow-orange display), you can achieve high
density, graphics while using your computer to
address other tasks.
Modular Construction
The CRT, low voltage power supply and printed
circuit board modules are arranged on a unique
high-strength wireform chassis. This construction
not only supports different performance, interface , and packaging options but permits easy
removal of modules for field service.
Operations
All display functions are completely programmable and designed to interface to TIL logic. The
GMA 103 is completely compatible with other
members of the GMA family. If refresh is already
being used in a GMA family display, no new
signals are required to support color refresh.
A CRT anti-burn circuit is provided to protect
against burning the CRT phosphor in the event
that X and Y deflection is not commanded to
move or is lost with the writing beam on. In
addition, the screen is automatically erased after
30 minutes from the last Z-AXIS or G-BUSY pulse
or VIEW initiate.
mm
487
461
705
Width
Height
Depth
Weight
kg
Net
Shipping
45.0
56.7
in
19.2
18.2
27.8
Ib
100
125
ORDERING INFORMATION
GMA103 Computer Display Module
Option
Option
Option
Option
33
34
35
43
-
Front Panel Push buttons
Analog Rear Conneclor
Digital Rear Connector
High Speed Vector/Dot Character Generator
Prices available to qualified OEM users_
Tektronix offers service training classes on the GMA Computer
Display Module Series. For further training information, contact
your local Sales/Service Office or request a copy of the Tektronix Service Training Schedule on the return card in the center of this catalog.
123
TEK g6~PUTER DISPLAY MODULES
GMA 101 A/GMA 102A
Modular Construction
19 inch Diagonal CRT
The GMA 10 1A has been tailored for applications
that emphasize storage graphics. This 19-inch
storage-only unit makes the benefits of low cost,
high resolution storage technology graphics available to the builders of OEM systems. High density interactive graphics are realized while your
computer is available to address an application
rather than drive the display.
The GMA 102A storage mode provides high density graphics at low cost, while its refresh feature
adds the benefits of selective erase, interactivity
and dynamic motion with the same high
resolution .
Both units are configured for optimum modularity,
with printed circuit board modules arranged on a
unique high-strength wireform chassis. This construction not only supports different performance,
interface, and packaging options, but permits
easy removal of modules for field service. Space
is available for up to three additional circuit
boards. The display on both units can be supplied with the CRT module tilted as far back as 15
degrees or oriented in either the horizontal or
vertical (page) format.
CHARACTERISTICS (Both Units)
DISPLAY
CRT Type - Directed beam, Direct View Storage.
Dimensions - 48 cm (19 in) diagonal.
AddreIBable Araa - 267 mm x 356 mm (10.5 in x 14 in).
Stored Resolution - 40 line pairs/in at screen center; 35 line
pairs/in at screen periphery.
Stored Dot Writing Time - 5 ~s or less.
Stored Vector Writing Rate GMA101A - 100 m/s (3937 in/s).
GMA102A - 150 m/s (5900 in/s).
Refreshed Vector Writing Rate GMA101A - 500 m/s (19,685 in/s) nonstore ; 16.5 vector meters (650 vector in) maximum at 30 frames/so
GMA 102A - 1200 m/s (47,240 in/s) write-thru and nonstore;
40 vector meters (1575 vector in) maximum at 30 frames/so
Viewing Time (At Specified Resolution) minutes.
Erase Time - 1.5 5 ± 20%.
At least 15
AC POWER
Voltage Ranges - 90 to 110 V ac; 108 to 132 V ac; 198 to
242 V ac; 216 to 264 V ac ijumper selectable).
Line Frequency - 48 to 66 Hz.
Power, GMA101A - 220 W maximum.
Power, GMA102A - 314 W maximum.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Horizontal Fonnat
Dimensions
mm
Width
Height
Depth
487
461
705
Dimensions, Chassis
Width
Depth
Vertical Format
mm
in
19.2
18.2
27.8
425
563
705
mm
425
610
in
16.8
22 .2
27 .8
in
16.8
24.0
Weight ""
kg
Ib
GMA101A
GMA102A
40.8
49.0
90.0
108,0
ORDERING INFORMATION
GMA101A Computer Display
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
30
31
33
34
36
37
38
-
Non-Hard Copy Compatible
Vertical Format
Front Panel Pushbuttons
Analog Rear Panel Connector
Excess Current + 5 Volt Supply
Green Glass CRT Filter
Blue Glass CRT Filter
GMA102A Computer Display
Option 30 - Non-Hard Copy Compatible
Option 31 - Vertical Format
Option 33 - Front Panel Push buttons
Option 34 - Analog Rear Panel Connector
Option 35 - Digital Rear Panel Connector
Option 36 - Excess Current + 5 Volt Supply
Option 37 - Green Glass CRT Filter
Option 38 - Blue Glass CRT Filter
Option 42 - High Speed Vector Generator
(Includes Option 36)
Option 43 - High Speed Vector/Dot Character Generator
(Includes Option 42)
Prices available to qualified OEM users,
GMA125
Combined Storage and Write Thru
25 inch Diagonal CRT
Designed exclusively for systems builders, the 25
inch GMA 125 is intended to satisfy display applications of the greatest size and complexity. Like
other members of the GMA Series, the GMA 125
provides low cost, high resolution , storage tube
graphics and unique flexibility of performance, interfacing and packaging.
CHARACTERISTICS
DISPLAY
CRT Type - Directed beam, Direct View Storage CRT.
Dimensions - 60 cm (24 in) diagonal.
Quality Area - 490 X 362 mm (19.3 X 14.25 in).
Addressable Area - 457 x 343 mm (18 x 13.5 in).
Visual Resolution - 40 line pairs/in, center screen; 35 line
pairs/in, at screen periphery.
Stored Dot Writing Time - 2 ~s or less.
Stored Vector Writing Rate - 200 ml s (7800 in/s).
Refresh Vector Writing Rate - 1500 m/s (59055 in/s) writethru and nonstore ; 50 vector meters (1968 in) max at
30 frames/so
Viewing Time (At Specified Resolution) - At least 15 min.
Erase Time - 1.0 s ± 12%.
AC POWER
Voltage Ranges are 90 to 132 V ac and 180 to 250 V ac at 48
to 440 Hz. Power dissipation is 350 W maximum (420 W maximum for Opt 36).
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dimensions
Width
Height
Depth
Weight
mm
610
478
531
kg
47.9
66.0
Net
Shipping
Ib
105.6
145.5
ORDERING INFORMATION
GMA125 Display Module
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
30
34
35
36
38
42
43
-
Non-Hard Copy Compatible
Analog Rear Panel Connector
Digital Rear Panel Connector
Excess Current (+ 5 V Supply) and Fan
Blue Glass CRT Filter
High-Speed Vector Generator
High-Speed Vector/Dot Generator
Prices available to qualified OEM users,
124
in
24.0
18.8
20.9
TEK
CONTINUOUS RECORDER
HIGH-PERFORMANCE COLOR DISPLAY
690SR
High-Resolution, 19 inch, RGB Color Display
Delta Gun, Dot-Shadow Mask CRT
Variable Scan Rates
Adjustable Picture Size and Aspect Ratio
Precise Color Convergence
4633A
Paper Roll Width -
216 mm (8.5 in).
'SheIf life is 12 month at 20"C w/50% relative humidity.
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
Line Scan Recorder
Black on White Recording
Excellent Gray Scale
100 mm/s Paper Speed
The Tektronix 4633A Continuous Recorder provides hard copy output from devices that provide
it with a Z-axis input signal concurrent with an Xaxis (horizontal ramp) signal. This OEM product is
designed for real time data recording and can be
modified for specific applications such as diagnostic, ultrasound and oil well logging.
Stabilized Color Balance
Recording Technique - Une-scan w/fiber optic CRT.
Developing Technique - Internal thermal processor.
Warmup Time - 20 minutes.
Image Width - 142 mm (5.5 - 7.9 in).
Image Format - Scan lines perpendicular to direction of exiting paper.
Recording Speeds - 10, 25 and 50 mmJs or 20, 40 and
lOOmmJs.
Gray Shades - Five levels minimum.
Resolution - 3.94 lines/mm (100 lines/in).
AC POWER
Line Voltages - 100, 115, 120, 200, 220, 230, 240 V ac
± 10% fjumper selectable).
Line Frequency - 48 to 62 Hz.
Power - 360 W typical ; 750 W maximum.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
mm
in
After the paper has been exposed by a fiber
optic CRT, it passes through a processor where
the latent image is thermally developed. The
developed image is then transported through an
opening in the front panel.
Dimensions
Weight
kg
Ib
Unwanted interruptions will be minimal. Big 500foot paper rolls mean few time-outs for reloading .
The paper is a full 8 '12 inches wide.
Net
30.5
67.0
The 4633A's image quality, convenience and
competitive pricing combine to make it a valuable
component of an OEM system.
The 4633A is available as either a rackmount or
benchtop model. The rackmount version fits into
any standard 19 inch rack.
CHARACTERISTICS
DISPLAY
Spot Size - 0.15 mm maximum (all0 V grid drive).
Luminance Variation - 1.3 to 1 maximum.
Optical Fiber Diameter - 10 I'm (4 X 10- ' in).
RECORDING MEDIUM
Dry Slivar Paper - Tektronix High Performance Dry Silver
Paper (Type 7772).
Optical Density - 1.4 maximum ; 0.2 minimum.
Paper Packaging - Ught-sealed cylindrical cassette.
Pap.r Roll Length - 152 m (500 It).
Height
Width
Depth
266
425
654
10.5
16.7
25.7
Heat Dissipation - 955 BTU/hour average; 1910 BTU/hour
maximum.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
High Performance Dry Silver Paper, (Type 7772), 500 It roll,
(006-2432-00).
ORDERING INFORMATION
4633A Continuous Recorder
Option 30 - Delete rackmount hardware
Option 48 - 220 V/50 Hz Operation
High Performance Paper (Type 7772) - One roll.
Order 006-2432-00
High Performance Paper (Type 7772) - Four rolls.
Order 006-2432-01
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORD AND PLUG OPTIONS
Option
Option
Option
Option
AI
A2
A3
A4
-
Universal Euro 220 V/ 16A, 50 Hz
UK 240 V/13A, 50 Hz
Australian 240 V/l0A, 50 Hz
North American 240 V/ 15A, 60 Hz
Prices available to qualified OEM us.rs.
Plug-in Interface Modules
Rugged Construction
Recommended for Television Display or
Computer Graphics
The 690SR family of high performance 19 inch
color display monitors, is designed to meet stateof-the-art television display and computer graphics needs. Precise, versatile electronics combined
with a high-resolution , delta gun, dotshadowmask CRT makes this monitor an ideal
choice for research and development and systems applications.
For OEM applications the 690SR Option 48 Mainframe with 69M41 RGB Interface Module provides
an optimum configuration to display high quality
images or graphics. Various CRT phosphors are
available to satisfy special needs for colorimetry
or for flicker reduction .
Rexible scan circuitry allows the 690SR Option 48
to be calibrated for any horizontal scan rate from
15 kHz to 37.5 kHz and be used with either interlaced or non-interlaced fields. (The standard display is factory-calibrated to operate at a 31 .5 kHz
horizontal rate .) With these scan rates, the monitor displays from 240 to 600 active lines, non-interlaced, at a 60 Hz frame rate; or from 480 to 1200
active lines, 2:1 interlaced at a 30 Hz frame rate .
Picture size can be adjusted from overscan to
underscan without significant loss in convergence
or linearity. This feature makes it possible to conduct experiments at various image sizes and aspect ratios or to set the monitor for different system characterisitics by merely readjusting the
size and position controls.
See page 157 for additional Information.
For ordering Hard Copy Paper see page 115.
125
TEK
NETWORK COMMUNICATION
ANALYZERS
CONTENTS
834 Programmable Data
Communications Tester ....
.......
834RDA ROM Development Aid.
....
834 ROM Packs .... .
.............................
833/832 Data
Communications Tester ................ ..................
830 Series Line Comparison
851 Digital Tester ....... ................... ... .
.... .
Bisynchronous System Exercising
128
130
131
134
136
137
Communications System Monitoring
Communications Equipment Check-out
Data Link Testing
127
DATA COMMUNICATIONS TESTER
TEK PROGRAMMABLE
834
Programmable
Allows Automation of Tests
Easy to Operate
Handles ASYNC/ASYNC BLOCK/BISYNC/
HOLC/SOLC
Portable and Lightweight
The Tektronix 834 Programmable Data Communications Tester is a powerful network troubleshooter designed to meet the demand for cost and
time-effective first-line field service. The 834's
portability (5.5 kg , 12 Ib), ruggedness , and ease
of use gives you a welcome independence from
bulky, expensive equipment.
128
The 834 is compatible with EIA RS-232, and
cCln V.24 interfaces and can be expanded to
many others with appropriate options. The 834
provides: system monitoring , DTE and DCE simulation to evaluate the entire network, bit error rate
testing for analyzing phone lines and modems,
the ability to calculate and confirm block check
characters, and internal self-diagnostics.
The fast 19.2 kilobaud rate lets you test the most
modern networks. The bright 16-character front
panel display is fully decoded in ASCII, EBCDIC,
HEX, your own , or optional character set.
We have programmed new features along with
common test routines and setups into a series of
application ROM packs that easily slip into the
834 and extend its testing capabilities in specific
areas.
MODES OF OPERATION
Monitor
The 834 monitors and records activity occurring
on the interface without interfering with data
transmission . The major control line status is
recorded with each character. Trigger capability
allows selective capture of data (refer to
Triggering).
Modem (OCE) Simulation
In this mode, the 834 functions as Data Communications Equipment (DCE) or modem simulator for
testing the Data Terminal Equipment (DTE). Messages can be sent to the unit under test (UUT),
and messages received from the UUT can be
examined and cause further action by the 834.
The sequence of events is controlled by a stored
program (in the 834) which can be manually
entered or stored in a user defined ROM (refer to
Programmability).
Terminal (OTE) Simulation
In this mode, the 834 performs as Data Terminal
Equipment (DTE) or terminal simulator for testing
the Data Communications Equipment (DCE) side
of the interface. Otherwise, operation is similar to
the modem (DCE) simulator mode described
above.
Bert Mode
In this mode the 834 performs bit and block error
rate testing using the 511-bit cCin standard
pseudo-random pattern. Additional patterns and
testing capabilities are available with appropriate
ROM pack.
Self Test Mode
In this mode, internal diagnostics and excercising
routines can be called up by the operator to verify
that the 834 is functioning properly.
PROGRAMMABLE
DATA COMMUNICATIONS TESTER
TEK
Basic Instruction Set (Additional Instructions Available in
ROM Packs)
CHARACTERISTICS
INTERFACE COMPATIBILITY
Compatible with EIA RS-232 and CCID V-24 interfaces. Optional interfaces also available.
HALT: mm
DATA TRANSFER
SEND: mm
Data Transmission
asynchronous.
Timing -
Synchronous
and
Stop and display message mm.
Send contents of message buffer mm as a frame .
Hall or full-duplex .
Bits Per Character - 5. 6 . 7.8.9 ; characters with live bits do
not include parity; characters with nine bits are availab~ in
asynchronous mode with parity.
Obtain next complete data frame for processing.
COMPARE : mm
JUMP EQ: ss
DATA TRANSFER RATES
JUMP NE: ss
Internal (Crystal Controlled) - 50. 75. 110. 134.5. 150. 200.
300. 600. 1200. 1800. 2400. 4800. 7200. 9600. and 19.200
bits/s; (synchronous lull-duplex up to .. 9600 bits/s).
External - limited to maximum of 19.200 bits/s; (synchronous full-duplex up to .. 9600 bits/s).
None. odd . even. all mark. all space.
RTS/ CTS Delay (Hall-Duplex Mode Only) - Programmable
from 0 to 9999 ms. (Defaults to 200 ms il not programmed.)
Accuracy -
CRC-16. CRC-CCID. LRC; (ex-
Bit Error Rate/Block Error Rate Tests - The 834 uses the
5"-bit CCID standard pseudo-random pattern sent in blocks
of 1000 bits. Errors are counted continuously or over a test
length of 10' or 1()6 bits stored In error. blocks sent. blocks in
error. and sync faults. See 834R03 link Test ROM Pack for
additional capabilities.
SET-UPS
ASYNCHRONOUS OPERATION
Stop Bits -
Transmits 1. 1.5 or 2; responds to 1.
End of Frame - One programmable character in any bit combination ; (defaults to OA); (ASCII New line).
Timing -
Jump to step ss if a match is found .
Normal or isochronous.
SYNCHRONOUS OPERATION
Synchronizing Character - Programmable to require any 1
or 2' characters (defaults to 32 32).
End 01 Frame - Programmable to recognize any of a number
01 idle conditions (Mark. Space. Syn) and/or a single character
(delaults to 37. EBCDIC EOT).
JUMP: ss
Jump to step ss.
IF TIME : ss
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Jump to step ss if the timer expires.
HDLC OPERATION
Clock -
RS-232 3 Connector Cable Assembly. front panel jumper set
(198-4006-00); US 115 V power cord (161-0066-00).
TIME OUT # pp
Start timer with value in parameter pp.
Use message mm for mask during COMPARE operation.
WAIT #
pp
Start time with value in parameter pp and do not proceed to
following step until timer expires (10 to 9999 ms).
INTERFACE ACCESS PANEL
All Pins (2 through 25) -
On or off.
Accessible.
Major Control Lines - May be connected or disconnected
from the 834 via rocker switches. These include: TXD. RXD.
RTS. CTS. DSR. GND. CD. TXO (DC E). RXO (DC E). DTR. TXO
(DTE).
Interface Conliguration - Can be modified using jumper
straps and the + 12 (space) and -12 (mark) V sources prOVided on panel. Control lines CD. RTS. CTS. DSR. and DTR are
program controllable with most ROM packs.
Probe - Via a dual LED display. allows checking the current
condition of any of the lines.
Marker - Allows the status of any interface line to be stored
with each received character. This storage is in conjunction
with the major control lines automatically recorded (CD. RTS .
CTS). The marker. CD. RTS. CTS. DSR. and DTR can also be
tested under program control with most ROM packs.
Mask Sequence trigger sequence.
Programmable to mask a 0-25 character
In Sync In HDLC bits).
Option
Option
Option
Option
A1
A2
A3
A4
-
Universal Euro 220 V/16 A ......•.•...........••••.
UK 240 V/13 A ••...•......................................
Australian 240 V/l0 A .................................
North American 240 VI IS A ......••.•..........•..
NC
NC
NC
NC
ROM PACKS
834R01 -
General Purpose ROM Pack ........................ $280
834R02A -
Bisynchronous ROM Pack (EBCDIC) ••...... $350
834R03A -
link Test ROM Pack ....••.........•..••.•.••........ $370
834R04 -
HDLC/X 25 ROM Pack ................................. $450
834R05 -
Extended Instruction Set ROM Pack ........... $240
834R06 -
Bisynchronous ROM Pack (ASCII) .............. $350
834R07 -
PARS/I PARS ROM Pack ..............•..•........... $375
Alphanumeric Display - t 6 fluorescent digits. (Each digit is a
5 x 7 dot matrix 9 mm high.)
834RDA -
ROM Development Aid ROM Pack ..•••.... $1 ,200
LED.
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Dimensions
=
mm
305
102
306
Width
Height
Depth
Weight
Current Loop Pod Accessory Order 015-0361 -00 ....... $350
=
in
RS-449 Interface Order A6741 •..••..•••..•......................... $750
12.1
4.0
12.4
User ROM Pack (empty) Order 020-0607-00 ......•••....... $110
kg
Ib
5.5
Net
Diagnostic ROM Pack 067-0986-00 .............................. $480
Carrying Case 016-0672-00 ............................................. $80
12.0
POWER REQUIREMENTS
Parity or frame error.
Parity error.
CRC error. abort sequence or short Irame «32
Line Voltage Ranges 115Vnom.
Line Frequency Range -
90 to 132 V ac; 180 to 250 V ac;
48 to 440 Hz.
ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS
Marker - Low-to-high or high-tO-low transition 01 marker can
be selected.
Buller Capacity ROM packs).
2699 character (expanded with some
Operating Temperature Range Storage Temperature Range 167"F).
Humidity -
PROGRAMMABILITY
Program Steps -
MIL-STD-1BBC _•.........................•.......... +$350
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORD AND PLUG OPTIONS
SDLC/SNA ROM Pack ................................ $450
Error Conditions
In Async -
Option 04 -
Extended Monitor ROM Pack ...................... $425
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Trigger Sequence - Programmable to require a sequence of
0-25 characters (0-5 if no mask programmed).
Current Loop Interface _.... __.__ ............... _ +$325
RS-449 (RS-422/RS-423) Interface ....•. +$750
834Rl1 -
Status Indicator lor Control Lines -
Trigger Location in Buffer - Start. center. end.
Match (Source 01 Data Being Searched lor Trigger Events)
- NONE. DTE. DCE.
Option 02 Option 03 -
834Rl0 -
Normal. derived. DTE.
TRIGGERING
ORDERING INFORMATION
834 Programmable Data
Communications Tester ....................... $3,990
DISPLAY
Clock - Normal. derived . DTE.
." 2. they may be different.
NRZI -
The MIL-STD-188C interface Is factory installed only. The current loop and RS-449 interfaces are extemal PODS which can
also be purchased as optional accessories and added at any
time. When a POD interface is not connected. the standard RS232 interface is functional.
Jump to step ss if a match is not found .
MASK: mm
+ 5 . - 15 ms.
Block Check Characters panded with ROM packs).
MIL-STD-188C Interface (Option 04) - Conforms to the military communication system technical standard MIL-STD-188C.
Menu selectable. inverted or normal data allows the B34 to
easily switch to an RS-232 compatible mode.
Search frame for a match with message buffer mm.
Codes - ASCII . EBCDIC. HEX standard (others available
with application ROM packs).
Parity -
RS-449 Interface (Option 03) - Supports both differential
(RS-422) and single-ended (RS-423) circuits. This interface permits the use of a 9-pin connector for secondary channels along
with the main 37-pin connector.
RECEIVE
Communications Mode -
OPTIONAL INTERFACES
Current Loop Interface (Option 02) - Operates in both twowire (simplex or half-duplex) and four-wire (full duplex) modes.
The current source for each of the two loops is selectable;
either extemally or internally supplied. Internal current sources
are 20 mA and 60 mAo
99 available.
Message Lengths -
50 totaling 3000 bytes.
Data Captured - Always the last 2699 character received
belore the program stops or before STOP is pressed ; (number
of characters expanded with some ROM packs).
-40 to 75·C ( - 40 to
95% relative humidity. 30 to 60 · C.
Operating Altitude -
Sea level to 4500 m (15.000 It).
Nonoperating Altitude Shock -
0 to 50 ·C (32 to 122· F).
Sea level to 15 000 m (50.000 It).
50 gs. ' /2 sine. 11 ms duration in each major axis.
A variety of training accessories are also available including
workbooks, video tapes. etc.
Additional information available in the B34 Selection Guide (request number 35W4922). Request copies at your local sales
office or via the return card in this catalog.
129
TEK ~~~ELOPMENT AID
Form Entry Functions
Several types of entries can be created using the
Form Entry Functions. These include menu additions (baud rates, translation code tables, directory entries, and sync idle characters); keystroke
sequences (power up and normal); character
strings (for addition to message buffers). These
functions can also be used to edit or modify
existing programs or routines .
834RDA
The System For Developing Customer User
ROMs For 834 ROM Packs
The Tektronix 834RDA is the tool that gives users
the ability to automate and extend the capabilities of the 834 Programmable Data Communications Tester by developing custom application
ROMs for use with 834 application ROM packs.
The 834RDA supports the generation of userdefined programs, set-ups and messages. It also
aids the user in extending the Baud, Code, Idle
and transfer function directory menus by adding
new menu entries.
PROMs are developed by building a ROM image
in the 834 system . The ROM image is the entire
contents of the ROM you are creating, including
all the messages, programs, power-up set-ups
and transfer functions that you develop. The
834RDA uses the RS-232 or an optional port on
the 834 to interface to an external PROM programmer, a printer or terminal , or a unit under
test. The 834RDA and 834 are used with an
external PROM programmer to read and write
PROMs. A terminal or printer used with the
system produces formatted listings of the ROM
image contents. With the 834 connected to the
unit under test, the ROM image can be executed
to verify operation and correctness.
New Key Codes
The 834RDA includes two additional Code menu
items. The KEYS translation code produces a
one-character representation of each key and is
used when editing key sequences. The DISPLAY
translation code makes all 834 display characters
available to the user for building new code translation tables.
Input-Output Functions
The 834RDA system can accept input from any
PROM burner that supports the TEK HEX format
and has an RS-232 interface. Error detection
checks are made to assure correct image transfer from the PROM programmer to the 834. The
ROM image contains all of the completed entries
plus the appropriate "overhead" data such as
header, trailer, byte counts and checksum information. Upon completion of new entries or
changes to the ROM image contents, the
834RDA ROM Development Aid can send a
completed ROM image back to the PROM
burner.
A listing of the entire ROM image or of individual
entries can be sent to a printer or terminal for
documenting purposes.
834RDA Menu
Level 1:
Copy Entry, Replace Entry, Delete Entry, Write
2K, Write 4K, Read ROM. Clear ROM, Print ROM.
Level 2:
HDR :, Size
created).
(list of additional entries as
Level 3:
The 834RDA also contains the Extended Instruction Set available in most 834 ROM packs.
Form Keys, Form Messages, Form Directory, Form
Baud, Form Idle, Form Code, Form Pupkeys.
FUNCTIONS OF THE ROM
DEVELOPMENT AID
Save Program/Setup Function
The Save Program/Setup Function provides an
easy method of saving individual instrument setups or simulation programs for storage in ROM .
These set-ups and simulation programs will be
callable by the user, or may be called up by
preprogrammed test routines.
Program Edit Functions
The program edit functions enable users to insert
and delete program steps. The resulting program
is automatically renumbered to reflect the
changes and all JUMP and CALL instructions will
be adjusted accordingly.
Record Mode
In Record Mode all keystrokes are recorded in the
order that they are entered until the exist command is executed. Afterwards, the keystroke
sequences may be edited. Record Mode is particularly useful for preprogramming 834 operations or test routines. It can also be used to
create individual instrument set-ups or simulation
programs for storage in ROM. The user can also
easily set up automated test sequences in
Record Mode by the call-up of previously programmed instrument set-ups and simulation
programs.
130
Program Debut Functions
The program debug functions enable users to
interrupt an executing 834 program, cause singlestep program execution, set a breakpoint and
display or change program steps, parameters,
and messages.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
The 834RDA should be used with an 834 having
level 04 or greater software. This can be verified
by placing the 834 in self-test mode; scrolling
down two levels to the L1ST-DSROM display, then
over one entry to L1ST-CSROM0. Press the start
key; the display will read "CSRM0;PN=0836-04"
or similar. This is the part number of the ROM
containing the pertinent 834 software, and the
last two digits should be 04 or greater.
A level 04 or greater ROM is supplied with each
RDA in case it is needed. If it is not, the ROM can
be erased and used for recording your custom
routines .
If additional information or updates are required,
contact your local Tektronix Sales or Service
Center.
The 834RDA system is compatible with several
PROM burners. Tektronix application note 35AX4780 is available with additional detail on PROM
programmer compatibility, selection criteria and
operation information.
Order 834RDA ROM Pack Development
Aid _.... _. __ . ____________ .. _. __ ..... _.......... _.. ________ $1,200
ROM
TEK
834
ROM Packs
834 ROM packs are firmware extensions of the
834 Programmable Data Communications Tester.
These products all contain the extended instruction set as listed on this page. They (except the
834R01) also include program debug and edit
functions plus the unique capabilities listed for
each individual ROM Pack.
Additional information is available in the 834
Selection Guide (request number 35W4922). Request copies at your local sales office or via the
return card in this catalog.
In each ROM Pack, at least one ROM space is
reserved for customer use. Each ROM space can
accommodate a 2k or 4k ROM or EPROM. The
custom ROM area of the ROM Pack can be
programmed using 2716, 2732, 2516 or 2532
single power supply EPROMs or combination of
the above.
As new ROM Packs have been introduced and
existing ROM Packs enhanced , the firmware in
the 834 has been expanded. The description for
each ROM Pack includes the 834 firmware revision level required to make available all the
capabilities of the ROM Pack. New 834's are
shipped with the latest firmware and will support
all the 834 ROM Packs in this catalog.
The software level of older 834s can be easily
verified as follows:
Place 834 in Self-Test mode.
Scroll down two levels (press ~ key twice) to the
LIST DSROM display.
key once to obtain the LIST
Press the CSROM~ display.
PACKS
EXTENDED INSTRUCTION SET
11 LOAD # pp
Load register with value in parameter PP
12 STORE # pp
Store register value in parameter PP
13 COMPARE # pp
Compare register value to value in parameter PP
14 INCRMNT # pp
Increment value in parameter PP by one
15 DECRMNT # pp
Decrement value in parameter PP by one
16 DISPLAY # pp
Display value in parameter PP
17 LOAD: mm
Load register with character from message M M
18 STORE: mm
Store register value in message MM
19 DISPLAY: mm
Display message M M
20 CLEAR: mm
Clear message M M
21 TRANSFR # pp
Invoke key sequence described by value in parameter PP
22 SETEIA = nn
Set EIA RS-232 control line specified by value NN
23 TESTEIA = nn
Test EIA RS-232 control line specified by value NN
24 TESTFRM = nn
Test for type of frame indicated by value NN
The display will read CSROM~=PN=fE36-XX .
The last two digits indicate the software level of
the 834 Data Communications Tester.
Contact your local Tektronix Sales or Service
Center if additional information or updates are
required .
General Purpose ROM Pack
The 834R01 ROM Pack' simplifies and expands
operation of the 834 Data Communications Tester
for use with asynchronous systems.
The following capabilities are programmed into
the 834R01 ROM Pack:
Sets up conditions for asynchronous operation upon instrument power up.
The addition of correspondence and baudot
character decode tables.
25 TESTKEY = nn
Test for keyboard input indicated by value NN
Additional idle menu selections.
26 BREAK # pp
Send BREAK for length of time specified in parameter PP
Split baud rate capability allows either the
transmit or receive baud rate to be changed.
"27 BCC: mm
Calculate and insert BCC for message MM
"28 PROTOCOL
Enables customized BCC calculation for particular protocols and translation codes
"29 BLOCK: mm
Compare frame to message buffer MM and count bit
errors
"30 CLEAR # pp
Press START key.
834R01
Set contents of parameter PP to zero
"31 CALL-ss
Program execution continues at step SS after placing the
number (SS+ 1) in the register .
"32 RETURN # pp
Program execution continues at step number contained in
parameter PP
"33 OVERLAY # pp
Invoke transfer function xx, where xx is the contents of
parameter PP
In addition to the Extended Instruction Set, the following
instructions are resident In selected ROM packs.
34 PACKFRM : mm
Pack control field data into message mm, or, if mm - 0,
unpack control field data from received HDLCISDLC frame.
35 HEXCONV : mm
Convert an item in the register to the hexadecimal value of
the item; add the hexadecimal character string to message
mm.
Basic printer tasks verify:
That characters are positioned and printed
properly. Also evaluates OTR response
and X-on, X-off feature.
Simulate and repeat modes (with and without
trigger).
Correspondence code set-up (sets the 834 to
the most common correspondence setup).
Baudot code set-up (sets up the 834 for the
most common Baudot code set-up).
Block asynchronous setup (sets up the 834 to
operate in the block-asynchronous mode).
Graphic test patterns for calibrating screen
attributes in Tektronix 4010 Series terminals.
Extended instruction set through the BREAK
instruction (#26).
"Level 3 or higher 834 software required.
36 AND # pp
AND the contents of the register with the value in parameter pp, then place the ANDed value in the register.
370R#pp
OR the contents of the register with the value in parameter
pp; then place the ORed value in the register.
"Not in 834ROI
131
PACKS
TEK ROM
,."
834R02A
834R03A Link Test ROM Pack
834R04 HDLC/X,25 ROM Pack
Bisynchronous (EBCDIC) ROM Pack
The 834R03A ROM Pack> extends the Data Communications Link testing capability of the 834.
The 834R04 ROM Pack> expands the operational
scope of the 834 when monitoring and simulating
HOLC and X.25 packet switching networks and
their components.
The following Bit Error Rate Test (BERT) patterns are provided in the 834R03A ROM Pack:
User defined (may. be 4 to 3000 bytes in
length)
2047-bit pseudo-random pattern
53-bit pseudo-random pattern
,."
834R06
Bisynchronous (ASCII) ROM Pack
511 -bit pseudo-random (CCID V.25) pattern
sent in block sizes of 511 bits instead of 1000
Continuous space
Continuous mark
Alternating spaces and marks
The 834R02A and 834R06 ROM Packs> extend
and simplify the use of the 834 in exercising
components of the IBM 3270 Information Display
System family and compatible terminals manufactured by other companies.
The following capabilities are provided in an
EBCDIC version in the 834R02A> and ASCII in
the 834R06:
Frame Summaries to provide frame level mnemonic summary on a frame-by-frame basis.
(This enables the user to quickly and easily
step through data a frame at a time while
viewing straight forward descriptions rather
than sorting through long streams of data.)
Automated BCC checking and insertion
Preprogrammed common bisync messages
Terminal setup and status tests
Attribute Exercise Pattern for testing screen
attributes and orders of a video display
terminal.
Multiple alignment patterns for video displays
New line/End-of-message patterns for testing
printers
Control Key Response test
Various utility programs
Extended instruction set, plus Hex conversion
The AND instruction, and the OR instruction
3 spaces alternating with 1 mark
The following capabilities are included in the
834R04 ROM Pack:
Frame-by-frame analysis of data exchanges
Packet-by-packet analysis of data exchanges
Construction of HOLC-formatted frames under applications control
LAP and LAPB setup-shutdown tests
Extended instruction set
Packfram instruction
Option 01 (Factory installed only) makes the
834R04 compatible with HOLC networks using
Bisync Framing .
'Level 5 or higher 834 software required.
1 space alternating with 3 marks
7 spaces alternating with 1 mark
1 space alternating with 7 marks
Additional test lengths:
10 kilobits
10 megabits
Timed termination
Independent transmit and receive baud rates
Over and under baud rate deviation tests (± 1,
2.5%)
Turn around delay measurement
Control line tests
Full and Half duplex ping-pong tests
Half duplex BERT
834R05
Bias distortion test
Extended Instruction Set ROM Pack
Gross start-stop distortion test
The 834R05 ROM Pack> is for users with unique
application requirements that cannot be fulfilled
by the standard application programming included in other ROM Packs. The 834R05 contains the
extended instruction set and program debug and
edit functions . The remainder of the ROM Pack is
reserved for user application ROMs.
Individual start-stop distortion test
Isochronous distortion test
Extended Instruction set
'Level 4 or higher 834 software required.
'Level 5 or higher 834 software required.
The 834R05 reserves room for three user ROMs.
'Level 4 or higher 834 software required.
132
TEK
lAY
834R 11
834R07
PARS/IPARS ROM Pack
The 834R07 ROM Pack- expands the operation of
the 834 Data Communications Tester for testing
Programmed Airline Reservation Systems.
The following capabilities are included in the
ROM Pack :
SABRE translation
Reversed Hexidecimal translation
834R 10
SDLC/SNA ROM Pack
The 834R10 ROM Pack- enhances the capabilities of the 834 when operating in an SDLC/SNA
environment by providing easy to read SDLC
frame and SNA command summaries. This allows
quick and straightforward analysis of data
transactions.
The following capabilities are included in the
834R10 ROM Pack:
Extended Monitor ROM Pack
The 834R11 ROM Pack- implements more powerful monitoring functions. It allows the recognition
of events to cause programmable actions rather
than simply triggering the 834. Using event-action
pairs provides the mechanism for manipulating
counters and timers that facilitate statistical analysis of interactions or events within a network as
well as complex triggering.
There are three event-action pairs available with
this ROM Pack plus a timeout-action pair that activates when an event does not occur within a
specified time.
The 834R 11 does not require the extended instruction set.
834R11 ROM Pack event selections:
Inverted data capabilities
Attribute tests for 3274 and 3276 displays
Direct Poll - continually sends a Go-Ahead
message and looks for replies after each poll.
Display alignment pattern
DCE Messages with or without masking
768 E-Pattern (64 X 12) for terminal alignment
New-Line/End-of-Message pattern for testing
printers attached to 3274s and 3276s.
DTE Messages with or without masking
960 E-Pattern (64 X 15) for terminal alignment
Control Key Response Test
65 Character Print (64 X 12) ' Stairstep'
pattern
Extended Instruction Set, plus
Reset Terminal - sends terminal reset command (3E HEX) to interchange unit to effect
erasure of all terminal screens.
Terminal Echo - polls an interchange and
when text message is received , echoes that
message back to the originating terminal.
Printer Test - tests new line function
Terminal Simulation - responds to direct
polls, write, erase/write commands, and unsolicited message commands.
ASCU Set-ups - for communicating to Agent
Set Control Unit Equipment
Extended Instruction Set
'Level4 or higher 834 software required.
HEX conversion
AND instruction
OR instruction
'Level 5 or higher 834 software required.
Error
Selected Control line change
834R11 ROM Pack action selections:
Trigger the 834
Decrement or increment specified counter
Start interval timer
Enable event-action pairs
Disable all actions except Enable
'Level 5 or higher 834 software required.
ORDERING INFORMATION
834R01 General Purpose ROM Pack .... $280
834R02A Bisynchronous ROM Pack
(EBCDIC) •.••.••..••..••..••.•.••..•.••.•••••..••..•..•.• $350
834R03A Link Test ROM Pack ••..••..•..•.• $370
834R04 HDLC/X.25 ROM Pack •..••.••..•.• $450
Option 01 - Bisynchronous Framing
(834R04 only) .••••...••.••.....••.•••...••....•••..•••.•...••.............•.... +$50
834R05 Extended Instruction Set
ROM Pack •..•....•..••..•........•...........••..••.•.. $240
834R06 Bisynchronous ROM Pack
(ASCII) .....................•..•.••..•..••••.•••..••..•.••• $350
834R07 PARS/IPARS ROM Pack •..••.•.• $375
834R10 SDLC/SNA ROM Pack •..•••.•.••.• $450
834R11 Extended Monitor ROM Pack .. $425
Additional information available in the 834 Selection Guide (request number 35W4922). Request copies at your local sales
office or via the return card in this catlog.
133
DATA COMMUNICATIONS
TEK TESTERS
833
Bit Error Rate Testing
CRC Character Calculation
String Search
Easy to Operate
Portable and Lightweight
833/832 PROM OPTIONS
The 833/832 user PROM feature gives the first
line service force a pre-programmed series of
tests. This PROM is user-defined for specific
applications so the 833/832 can be customized to
fit particular service needs. Use this PROM to
perform frequently used standard test sequences, and then, if necessary, create test
sequences directly in the 833/832 to make more
specific tests and further isolate faults .
The Tektronix 833 Data Communications Tester is
a high-performance, first-line service tool that
provides the service technician with the means to
locate problems in a data communications network. The 833 is lightweight (under 5.5 kg/12
pounds), compact, and portable. Keypad entry
and an easy-to-understand front panel simplify
learning to use the 833. A string search function
permits automatic examination of stored data.
The 833 Data Communications Tester operates
on RS-232, CCITI V.24, or current loop (option)
interfaces. The 833 can MONITOR the DCE and
DTE in synchronous, asynchronous, and HDLC
modes. HDLC data streams can be either standard or NRZI-encoded . The 833 can SIMULATE
the DCE in synchronous and asynchronous
modes and can also calculate and verify CRC-16,
CCITI-CRC and LRC-8 block check characters.
The 833 features bit error rate testing capabilities
to check modems and phone lines.
Echo and Repeat modes are also part of the
833's capabilities.
Built in, self diagnostic routines can assure you at
any time that the 833, like the 834 and 832, is
operating properly.
134
Support materials (manuals, user's guides) and
video tape training aids are available for all Data
Communications Testers.
For more information about how Data Communications Testers can help you identify problems in
data communications systems, contact your
Tektronix Sales Engineer.
In the U.S., write Tektronix, Inc., U.S. Marketing ,
P.O. Box 1700, Beaverton, OR 97075. In Africa,
Europe, Middle East, write Tektronix Europe B.V.
European Headquarters, Postbox 827 , 1180 AV
Amstelveen , The Netherlands. In Asia, Australia,
Japan , Central and South America write
Tektronix, Inc., Export Marketing, P.O. Box 500,
Beaverton, OR 97077. (For a complete listing
including telex numbers, see pages 10 through
12.)
832
Low Cost
Easy to Operate Key Pad
Portable and Lightweight
The Tektronix 832 Data Communications Tester is
a portable digital service instrument that can be
used to direct the user to possible problems in
data communications systems. It can monitor,
analyze, test and trouble-shoot data communications interfaces that conform to EIA standard
RS-232C, CCITI V.24 or current loop (option). The
832 operates as a serial-data-transmission monitor or as a modem simulator for off-line testing of
data terminal equipment (DTE).
In Monitor mode the 832 reads and selectively
records DTE data and Data Communications
Equipment (DCE) data, as well as recording the
status of key interface lines.
In Simulate mode the 832 simUlates the operation
of a modem. The 832 can send a message to the
DTE and record its response . This data can be
sent directly from the 832 or can be transmitted
upon receipt of an expected trigger from the
DTE .
Echo mode is the same as Simulate, except the
832 sends back to the DTE (echoes) any character sent by the DTE.
In Repeat mode the 832 can send data repeatedly to the DTE , or the 832 can be programmed to
repeat the transmission only upon receipt of an
expected trigger from the DTE.
TEK
833/832 CHARACTERISTICS
ELECTRICAL
Data Transmlulon Timing asynchronous.
Communications Mode -
Synchronous and
Half- or full-duplex.
Bits Per Character - 5, 6, 7, 8, 9. 5 bits/character cannot be
selected with parity; 9 bil/character, cannot be selected without parity and is available with 833 only.
Data Transfer Rates - Internal (crystal controlled) - 50, 75,
110, 134.5, 150, 200, 300, 600, 1200, 1800, 2400, and 4800
bits/second. 9600 bits/second at 8 bits/character, half duplex
only. Accuracy: within 0.5%. External : Determined by the DCE
or DTE clock.
Parity -
Odd , even, or none.
RTS/CTS Delay, (helf-duplex mode only) - Programmable
from 0 to 255 ms. If not programmed , defaults to 200 ms.
Accuracy : Within 1% ± 1 ms.
Trigger - Programmable to require a sequence of 1, 2, or
3 characters.
Trigger Position (Location of last trigger character in receive
buffer) - Posllrigger: 000 ; Center: 127; Pretrigger: 255.
833 ONLY
Block Check Charecters - CRC-16, CRC-CCID, LRC.
Synchronizing Character (SYN), (synchronous mode only)
Programmable to require one or two characters. If not programmed, defaults to ASCII SYN character.
Stop Bits (asynchronous mode only) -
OTHER
Connected to pin 1 of DTE connector.
Pin 1 Ground -
Pin 7 Signal Ground -
Connected to instrument ground.
Pins 9 thru 14, 16, 18, 19, 21 thru 23, Ind 25 - Connected
through switches (Breakout Panel DIP switches) to their corresponding pins in the DTE connector.
RS-232 DTE CONNECTOR (J2205)
INPUTS
Pin 2 Trlnsmitted Date, Pin 4 Requelt to Send MARK or OFF: - 25 V " V In ","+ 0.75 V.
SPACE or ON : + 1.5 V .. V in ","+ 25 V.
Input Impedance: 3 kll .. Z In .. 7 kll.
Pin 20 Data Terminal Ready, Pin 24 Trlnsmit Signll Element
Timing (DTE source) - MARK or OFF: - 25 V .. V in .. - 3
V. SPACE or ON: + 3 V .. V in "'" +25 V. Input Impedance with
Corresponding Pin in DCE Connector Disconnected : Z in
;;. 100 kll.
OUTPUTS
Pin 3 Received Data, Pin 5 Clelr to Send, Pin 6 Data Set
Ready, Pin 8 Carrier Detect, Pin 15 Transmission Signal Element Timing (DCE source), Pin 17 Receiver Signal Element
Timing (OGE sourca) MARK or OFF: V out .. - 7.5 V.
SPACE or ON : V out ;;.+ 7.5 V.
With Load Impedance: RL;;. 3 kll.
OTHER
Connected to pin 1 of DCE connector.
Pin 1 Ground -
Programmable to 1,
1'12, 2.
Pin 7 Signal Ground - Connected through a switch (Breakout
Panel DIP switch) to instrument ground.
Bit Error Rate/Block Error Rate Tests - Standard 511-bit
pattern stream for 1000-bit blocks; continuous, 10' or 1Q6-bit
block test; stores bits in error, blocks sent, blocks in error, and
sync faults.
Pin 9 thru 14, 16, 18, 19, 21 thru 23, and 25 - Connected
through switches (Breakout Panel DIP switches) to their corresponding pins in the DCE connector.
String Search - Programmable to search for one sequence of
1, 2, or 3 characters.
Full duplex DTE simulation.
832 ONLY
Synchronizing Character (SYN), (synchronous mode only)
Programmable to require one character, or two equal characters. If not programmed, defaults to ASCII SYN character.
Stop Bits (asynchronous mode only) -
Responds to one or
BREAKOUT PANEL
Probe Space: + 3 V ".V in .. + 25 V.
Mark: - 25 V .. V in .. - 3 V.
Input Impedance: .. 50 kll.
Marker - MARK or OFF: - 25 V ... V in .. - 3 V.
SPACE or ON : + 3 V < V in <+ 25 V (Schmill input).
+12 Volt Source - + 12 V ± 1 V (no load). Outputlmpedance "" 3 kll (each pin).
more. Transmits two.
RS-232 DCE CONNECTOR (J1405)
INPUTS
Pin 3 Received Data, Pin 5 Clear to Send, Pin 6 Date Set
Reidy, Pin 8 Carrier Detect, Pin 15 Transmission Signal Element Timing (DCE source), Pin 17 Receiver Element Timing
(DCE source) MARK or OFF: - 25 V ". V in .. +0.75 V.
SPACE or ON : + 1.5 V ... V in .. + 25 V.
Input Impedance: 3 kll ". Z in .. 7 kll.
Pin 20 Data Termlnll Ready, Pin 24 Transmit Signal Element
Timing (OTE source) - MARK or OFF: - 25 V ".V in
.. - 3 V. SPACE or ON: + 3 V " V in ". + 25 V. Input Impedance with corresponding pin in OTE connector disconnected:
Pin 20 Z in .. 40 kll. Pin 24 Z in ;;. 100 kll.
OUTPUTS
Pin 2 Transmitted Data, Pin 4 Request to Send MARK or OFF: V out ... - 7.5 V.
SPACE or ON : V out ;;. + 7.5 V.
With Load Impedance: RL .. 3 kll.
DISPLAY
2 hexadecimal digits : 7-segment, LED
Buffer Content displays.
Buffer Location Date Source Error -
3 decimal digits: 7-segment, LED displays.
DCE, DTE: 2 LED indicators.
Parity, Frame: 2 LED indicators.
No Trigger, No Syn -
POWER REQUIREMENTS
Line Voltage Rlnges -115 V - 90 to 132 V, 230 V -180
to 250 V.
Line Frequency Ringe - 48 to 440 Hz.
Power Consumption - "" 15 walls.
ENVIRONMENTAL
Temperature - Operating : + 0 · to + 50 · C ( + 32 · to
+1 22 · F). Nonoperating: - 55 · to + 75 · C( - 67·to + 167"F).
Humidity - 5 cycles (120 hours), + 30 · to + 60 · C, 95% relative humidity.
Altitude - Operating: To 4500 m (15,000 It). Nonoperating:
To 15 000 m (50,000 It).
Vlbrltion - Cycle the vibration frequency from 10 to 55 to
10Hz (linear or logarithmic sweep) for a duration of 15 minutes
in each major axis at a displacement of 0.64 mm (0.025 in) p-p.
Dwell for 10 minutes in each major axis at any resonant
frequency .
Shock - 50 g's, '/2 sine, 11 ms duration, three shocks in each
major axis for a total of 18 shocks.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dimensions
Width
Height
Depth
Weight""
Net
mm
330
102
305
kg
5.0
In
13.0
4.0
12.0
Ib
11.0
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Both 833/832
RS-232 Cable Assembly (012-0815-00) , jumper set
(198-4006-00) , power cord (161 -0066-00), Y -Connector
(012-0893-00) 833 only.
ORDERING INFORMATION
833 Data Communications Tester .•..... $2,750
Option OA - DATASPEED 40 ROM .......................... +$210
Option OB - IBM 3270 Exercizer ROM ..................... +$210
Option 02 - Current Loop Interface .......................... + $300
832 Data Communications Tester •••.... $1,995
Option OA Option OB -
DATASPEED 40 ROM .......................... +$210
IBM 3270 Exercizer ROM ..................... +$210
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Current Loop Pod Accessory
Order 015-0361-00 (833 only) ......................................... $350
Carrying Case Order 016-0672-00 .................................. $80
2 LED indicators.
RS-232 Control Lines - DSR, CD, CTS, RTS, DTR, and
MARKER : 6 LED indicators.
Probe -
Mark, Space: 2 LED indicators.
MEMORY
Receive buffer is 256 characters and send buffer is 255 characters. Basic instrument contains in memory a group of 7 separate standard test messages such as 'THE QUICK BROWN
FOX' - and the full ACII Alphanumeric sel.
There is provision in the 833/832 for installation of user defined
programmed EPROM containing messages specific to particular tests. A total memory space of 2048 characters is available
for user specif1C8tion.
135
SUMMARY
COMMUNICATIONS TESTERS
TEK DATA
830 SERIES PRODUCT LINE COMPARISON
832
833
834
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
Functional
Yes
Yes
Yes (FOX only)
511 Pattern
No
No
Functional
Yes
Yes
Yes
Multiple Patterns'
Yes'
Yes'
Functional & Diagnostic
9.6k baud
No
9.6k baud
No
19.2k baud
Yes'
256
255
2048 (data only)
No
256
255
2048 (data only)
Yes
3 address + 2 data
7 segment LED
3 address + 2 data
7 segment LED
12 data & 4 scratch pad
5x7 matrix flourescent
No
No
Fixed default
or manual
No
No
No
Fixed default
or manual
No
Yes
Yes (manual or from ROM pack)
Fixed default, program
initialization, manual
Yes
Strings
3 charac ters
3 characters
Errors
Events
No
No
No
No
1-5 characters (nonmasked)
1-25 characters (masked)
Yes
Yes
Parity check
Frame check
Block check function
Generate
Check
Type
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
None
Auto CRC Insertions
No
Yes
Yes
LRC, CRC, CRC 16,
CRC-CCID
No
Yes
Yes
LRC, CRC-16,
CRC-CCID,CCC-6'
Yes'
No
No
255 characters
No
No
No
No
255 characters
No
No
Yes
99 steps(extendable through overlays')
3000 characters
Yes
Yes'
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Hex
None
Hex
None
EBCDIC, ASCII , HEX
Correspondence, Baudot, Sabre, Reverse
Hex, User Defined
Monitor/Simulate
Monitor/
Limited Simulate
Monitor
No
No
Monitor/Simulate
Monitor/
Limited Simulate
Monitor
No
No
Monitor/Simulate
Monitor/Simulate
Monitor/Simulate'
Monitor/Siimulate*
Monitor/Simulate'
111b
11 .51b
12 Ib
Operation Modes
Monitor
DCE Simulate
DTE Simulate
Bit Error Rate Testing
Bias Distortion Test
Inverted Data Capabilities
Self Test
Maximum Data Transfer Rate
Separate Transmit/Receive Rates
Memory
Receive buffer (characters)
Send buffer (characters)
User PROM (characters)
Receive buffer search
Display
Number of characters & type
2699'
3000
Up to 16k (data or program sequence)
Yes
Operating Controls
Operator menu
Programmed sequences
Initialization
Programmable timeout
Triggering/Trapping
Error Check
Programmable:
Stored programs
Stored messages
Recallable keystroke sequences
Counters
Optional Interfaces
Current Loop
RS-449 (RS-422, RS-423)
MIL STD 188C
Codes
Standard
Optional'
Data Communications Environments
Asynchronous
Bisynchronous
HDLC/SDLC
X.25/SNA
PARS/IPARS
Net Weight
'Provided or enhanced With appropriate ROM pack.
136
5.0 kg
5.2 kg
5.5 kg
TEK
DIGITAL
TESTER
- ......
851
FUNCTION
-
Designed for Digital Field
Service Applications
N__
::'
\-,
mal
._..
:.~
AIC CIIIT
(~)
•
-
t~1
Small and Lightweight
(!.!)
.... ,
The 851 Digital Tester is an easy·to·operate first·
line service tool used to troubleshoot and main·
tain a wide range of digital equipment.
With this portable digital tester (only, 6 kg , 13 Ib),
a first· line service engineer can make many of the
same measurements that now require an oscillo·
scope, DMM , counter, timer, logic probe, ther'
mometer and special purpose test equipment.
One knob lets you dial 22 functions to perform a
wide variety of tests and measurements. Eleven
functions measure timing , two register plus and
minus peak voltages , three carry out DMM mea·
surements through separate leads and one reads
line voltage at the outlet. Another function allows
you to take temperature readings with an optional
temperature probe. The 851 also measures its
four input thresholds to adjust to the logic levels
of the equipment being serviced.
All functions are completely autoranging and the
indicator lights tell you exactly what range is
being used.
Range Indicator. - LEOs show function ranges in !l, kll, M!l,
MHz, kHz, ms, ~s and V.
Logic State Indlcatora - Red, yellow, and green LEOs show
valid and invalid logic state inputs for CH A. Red and green
LEOs show logic states above or below the threshold set for
CH Band C. Any state change indication is sustained
long enough to be visibie.
Threshold Levels bility ± 10 mY.
Resistance Ranges 20 Mil, and 50 Mil
:t 500 V (peak) ACVIDCV
POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE
PEAK VOLTS
Range -
± 30 v .
Accuracy - ± 2% of reading ± 3% of pop signal :t 90 mY.
Maximum time between recurrent peaks, 25 ms. Peak ampli·
tude must be maintained for at least 25 ns. Extendied tempera·
ture range: add ± 1% of reading ± 1% of pop signal ± 10 mY.
FREQUENCY
100 kHz (1 Hz resolution). 1 MHz. 10 MHz. and
Accuracy -
:t 0.005% of reading ± 1 count.
2 V, 20 V, 200 V, and 350 V.
Accuracy - 2 V and 20 V:
± 0.5% or reading ± 4 counts, 40 Hz to 1 kHz.
± 2% of reading ± 4 counts, 1 kHz to 25 kHz.
> 9% full scale.
200 V and 350 V:
± 0.5% of reading ± 4 counts, 40 Hz to 1 kHz.
Extended temperature range : add ± 0.2%.
TIME MEASUREMENTS
(Period. pulse width. transition time. time interval, and coinci·
dence time.)
Ranges and 10 s.
1 ms (IOns resolution). 10 ms. 100 ms. 1 s.
Minimum Time Interval Accuracy -
Accuracy - 2 V, 20 V and 200 V: ± 0.1% of reading
± 3 counts.
500 V: ± 0.15% of reading ± 3 counts.
Extended temperature range: add ± 0.05%.
LINE VOLTAGE
± 3% of reading.
INPUTS
Input Frequency Range -
40 Hz to 10 MHz.
lesistance and CapaCitance -
Overrange Indication -
10 M!l and ",, 12 pF.
Ib
6.0
13.0
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Three signal probes (010·0280·00), two
(012·0732·00).
Option 01 -
Five digits, fully buffered seven segment, 0.5 in LEOs.
Polarity Indication readings.
Safe Input Voltage -
kg
DMM
probes
(with temperature probe) ....................... +$160
50 ns.
READOUT
Type -
In
13.0
13.0
7.0
851 Digital Tester ................................ $3,220
3 probes; one for each channel A. B. C.)
~aximum
Net
mm
330
310
180
ORDERING INFORMATION
0 to 100%.
Minimum Pulse Width (HI and LO porlions) -
'ccuracy - ± 2' C (0.01 ' resolution). Extended temperature
'ange: add ± 1 ' C.
Width
Height
Depth
DUTY FACTOR
Range -
- 55 ' to + 150' C.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dimensions
35 MHz (except 17.5 MHz for
Accuracy - ± 1 count, ± A Input event or transition frequen.
cy multiplied by the Time Interval Trigger Error.
90 to 132 V and 180 to 250 V.
TEMPERATURE
Range -
(Totalize, frequency ratio. events count, and transitions count.)
Range - 0 to 99.999.
Maximum Input Frequency transition counting).
Ambient Temperature - Operating: +15 ' C to +40·C. Non·
operating: - 40 ' C to + 75·C. Extended operating range:
+ 5'C to + 50·C.
Altitude - Operating: to 3048 m (10,000 tt). Nonoperating: to
10 665 m (35,000 tt).
Vibration - Operating: 15 minutes along each of the 3 major
axes, 0.06 cm (0.025 in) pop displacement (4 g's at 55 Hz) 10 to
55 to 10Hz in 1 minute cycles. Atter cycle vibration in each
axis, hold frequency steady at 55 Hz for 10 minutes. All major
resonances must be above 55 Hz.
Humidity - To 90% at 30'C Tektronix Test Method #1 90%
relative humidity at 30 ' C for 4 hours.
Shock - Two shocks at 30 g's, '12 sine, 11 ms duration, each
direction along each major axis. Total of 12 shocks.
EMC - Reference Mil Standard 461 A-462 susceptibility as
specified. Conducted emission, relax 10 dB. Radiated emis·
sion, relax 15 dB < 100 MHz and relax 25 dB .. 100 MHz.
Weight""
COUNTING
2 V, 20 V, 200 V, and 500 V.
"ccuracy -
20 ns.
± 0.005% of reading ± 1 count ± Trigger Error.
DC VOLTS
Ranges -
Line Voltage Range - 90 to 132 V or 180 to 250 V.
Frequency - 48 Hz to 440 Hz.
Power Consumption - 57 w maximum.
ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS
Range - Off and 50 ns ± 20% to > 300 ns. Channel to chan·
nel delay mismatch: < 100% of setting.
Ranges 35 MHz.
AC VOLTS
Range -
Maximum input rep
200 !l, 2 k!l, 20 k!l, 200 k!l, 2 M!l,
(Average responding RMS calibrated for sinewave.)
Ranges -
Input A LO + 0.7 V; HI
Input Filter (Narrow pulse rejection) rate for pulse rejection - 20 MHz.
INPUTS
Maximum Safe Input Voltage (.. 1 kHz)
POWER REQUIREMENTS
TTL (nominal, in detent position) + 2.1 V; Input B and C + 1.4 V.
CHARACTERISTICS
(ACV, DCV, !l)
Resistance and Capacitance - 10 Mil :t 1% and "" 100 pF.
Red to black terminal. (Volts only.)
Variable (4 controls) range : ± 30 V ; seta·
Threshold Lock Indicator (LO > HI) - Red LED Indicates
when CH A LO and HI thresholds are locked together (LO
threshold setting is higher than the HI setting).
+ for positive readings, - for negative
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Temperature Probe Order 010·6430·00 ........................ $201
Rain Jacket Order 016-0639·00 ....................................... $15
Display flashes .
± 500 V at probe tip
.. 50 kHz).
137
TEK
FIBER OPTIC TOR
CABLE TESTER
Two filters provide signal averaging and incremental decreases in the RMS noise floor. Compared to Fast filter operation (fast sweep), the
Medium filter (medium sweep) provides a 7.5 dB
reduction and the Slow filter (slow sweep) a
15 dB reduction . By using the Fast-Medium-Slow
selection, you can pick the optimum signal acquisition speed/noise reduction combination.
The OF150 also offers two selectable pulse
widths. The short pulse increases resolution for
close-in measurements, while the long pulse extends distance/loss measurement range .
Easy to Use
The OF150 combines high performance with ease
of use . With Tektronix supplied manuals ,
craftspeople or technicians can learn to use this
instrument in two hours or less.
Portability and Convenience
Its compact size, light weight and rugged design,
plus the ability to operate easily from a 12 volt
vehicle system or external battery pack, enables
the OF150 to offer exceptional portability in a high
performance instrument.
OF150 CHARACTERISTICS
OPTICAL TEST SIGNAL
Wayelength -
820 nm (nominal).
Displayed Pulse Width Pulse: 1.5 m, ± 0.3 m.
OF150
Fiber Optic TOR
LCD Readout Resolution to 0_1 dB/1.0 Meter
Accurate, Repeatable Measurements
Built-in Chart Recorder
Digital Storage Provides Easy to View Waveform and Noise Reduction
Two Selectable Pulse Widths
Portable - Operates from 12 Volt Vehicle
System or Battery Pack
Unmatched Range
The OF150 is a high performance, easy to use,
portable instrument that can perform repeatable ,
accurate distance and loss measurements on
multi-mode optical fibers.
Typical applications include: splice measurement
through a one-way cable loss of up to 21 .5 dB to
within ± O.1 dB; detection of fiber ends, (four
percent Fresnel reflection) through a one-way
cable loss of up to 42.5 dB; and measuring
distance to discontinuities (such as splices, Fiber
faults and ends) to 19.9 km , with one meter
resolution .
Direct Readout Saves Time and Errors
The OF150 gives you direct LCD readout of
results, eliminating voltage-to-power and time-todistance computations and risk of operator errors . Direct readout assures accurate, repeatable
measurements every time. A built-in chart recorder provides a permanent record of the waveform
for reference and comparison .
Get an Accurate Picture of Splice Loss
Digital storage produces a consistently sharp,
easy-to -view trace . Signal averaging and
selectable filters help maintain waveform resolution, so that measurements are made as accurately at long distances as closer in.
138
Long Pulse: 5.5 m, ± 1 m. Short
Displayed Noise on the Incident Pulse (FAST filter).
System Pulse Rate -
< ± 1.0 dB peak
4.762 kHz, ± 5 Hz.
Optical Output Amplitude - .. 25 .W Time-average power
coupled into test fiber (50 .m core, 0.20 NA) (Long Pulse
mode).
Optical Pulse Amplitude Stability duration of a SLOW sweep.
< 0.4 dB drift over the
Absolute Maximum Optical Output Amplitude time averaged power.
Displayed Pulse Risetime - 6 dB point.
200 .W
< 0.7 m from - 20 dB point to
Displayed Pulse Falltlme - ... 5 m from trailing pulse comer
to the + 60 dB point relative to bottom of display range.
... 500 m from trailing pulse corner to the + 30 dB point relative
to bottom of display range.
< 2 km from trailing pulse comer to the
to bottom of display range.
+ 15 dB point relative
MEASUREMENT RANGE
Displayed RMS Noise Floor - + 1.8 div, ± 0.4 div from bottom of display range with Fast filter and 10 dB/div scale.
Decrease in RMS Noise Floor through Filtering - With medium filter: 0.75 div (7 .5 dB). With slow filter: 1.5 div (15.0 dB).
Optical Input Sensitivity - ... 0.40 .W input for 30 dB above
displayed RMS noise floor.
Dynamic Range - 105 dB (typical) between peak optical output pulse and RMS noise floor (Slow filter) .
Maximum Round Trip Fiber loss for Fiber End Detection 85 dB typical (assuming 4% Fresnel reflection).
Maximum Round Trip Fiber loss for ±O.1 dB SClttering
Signal Measurements - 43 dB typical (dependent on fiber
characteristics).
TEK
PORTABLE FIBER OPTIC TOR
CABLE TESTER
Vertical Scales -
CRT VERTICAL DISPLAY
10 dBl div and 2 dBl div (10 div).
jB Scale Accuracy - ± 0.5 dB over any 10 dB increment
'rom + 20 dB to + 70 dB, relative to bottom of display range.
ncremental dB Scale Accuracy - ± 0.05 dB (typical) over
my 1 dB, increment from + 10 dB, to + 70 dB relative to bot:om of display range.
CRT HORIZONTAL DISPLAY
listance Scales lisplay Limits :onnector.
>weep Time -
1 mldiv to 1000 m/div.
- 5 m to 19.9 km from front-panel
0.15 s (FAST); 3.15 s (MED); 55 s (SLOW).
)n·screen Distance Calibration -
4.88 ns/m.
'Zero" Distance Reference Accuracy -
± 0.5 m on screen.
LCD NUMERIC READOUT
listance Readout Range - 0 to 19.9 km.
listance Readout Resolution listance Cal Factor Range -
1 m.
4.8 to 5.0 ns/m.
listance Cal Factor Accuracy - Within 0.01 nslm of panel
ndication at center of scale (4.900); within 0.02 nslm of panel
ndication at scale end points.
Measurements
~eadout Range: - 25 dB to + 25 dB (one way fiber loss) from
:enter reference point.
~eadout Resolution: 2 dBl div scale: 0.1 dB ; 10 dBl div scale:
l .5 dB.
.088
)istanee Measurement Accuracy n Fiber Cal Factor.
I
± 0.3%· ± uncertainty
CHART RECORDER
Chart Dimensions - 40 mm x 125 mm (corresponding to the
full CRT graticule area).
± 0.2 major division match
Chart Distance Scale Linearity at any point.
Chart Vertical Scale Linearity ter, ± 0.3 major division.
Chart Running Time -
± 5% of deflection from cen-
16 s.
SAFETY
Meets Class I Laser product safety classification under Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. Optical output
connector interlock prevents optical output when interlock is
open.
ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS
The OF150 meets the specifications of MIL-T-28800B, Type III ,
Class 3, Style C except for Radiated Emission specification
RE-Ol .
Altitude - Operating: 4600 m (15,500 It). Nonoperating :
12000 m (40,000 It).
Temperature - Operating: -15'C to + 55·C. Nonoperating:
- 62'C to + 85 ·C.
POWER REQUIREMENTS
Ac Operation - 90 to 132 V ac, 45-440 Hz 180 to 250 V ac,
45-440 Hz 24 W nominal (55 W maximum).
Dc Operation - 10 to 16 V de 20 W nominal (33 W maximum).
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Optical fiber interface cable, 1 meter long, Deutsch Connector
on one end, protective cover on the other end (175-4572-00);
roll of chart recorder paper (006-3618-00); battery power cord
(161-0149-00) ; ac power cord (161-0118-00); interlock contact
ring (352-0654-01); replacement lens assembly (131-2741-02);
protective cover for fiber optiC interface cable (200-2736-00);
cable retainer (343-0170-00); ac power cord (161-0149-00).
ORDERING INFORMATION
OF150 Fiber Optic Time Domain
Reflectometer .................................... $17,500
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORD AND PLUG OPTIONS
Option AI - Universal Euro 220 V/16A , 50 Hz .............. NC
Option A2 - UK 240 V/ 13A , 50 Hz ................................. NC
Option A3 - Australian 240 VI10A, 50 Hz ...................... NC
Option A4 - North American 240 V/15A, 60 Hz ............. NC
Option A5 - Switzerland 220 VI I OA. 50 Hz ................... NC
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dimensions
(Without front cover, handle or feet)
Width
Height
Depth
mm
327
175
499
Weight
kg
Net (Includes accessories except manual)
16.6
in
13.1
7.0
20.0
Ib
37 .0
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
C-5C Camera .................................................................. $525
Hard Case (tranSit) Order 016·0658·00 ........................ $625
Solt Csse Order 016-0659-00 ..........•............................. $125
Chart Paper (roll) Order 006-3618-00 .......................... $9.25
Connector, Receptacle, Optical (1 each)
Order 131-2741-02 ............................................................ $60
Connector, Receptacle, Optical (10 each)
Order 013-0207 -02 .......................................................... $375
Instrument timing in accuracy plus distance cal factor indication error.
139
TEK
TOR
CABLE TESTERS
For easy carrying and operating in tight
spaces, these units are lightweight and
small and will operate at least five hours on
the internal, rechargeable batteries.
Since permanent records are useful in cable
maintenance, an optional, plug-in chart recorder is available for paper recording of
the test. The standard plug-in X-V output
module can drive an external X-V Recorder.
1502
This unit is directly calibrated in reflection
coefficient (rho) and distance. The 1502
uses a step-pulse and provides fault resolution to 0.6 inch on short cables. The 1502
performs to a maximum of 2000 feet, but
with decreasing resolution as the fault distance increases. The unit is matched to 50ohm cables, but may be used on others by
adjusting the front panel GAIN control or using optional impedance adaptors.
1503
Portable Battery Powered, SelfContained , Lightweight
Rugged Meets MIL-T-28800, Type III,
Class 3, Style A
Versatile Test Any Type Paired
Conductor and Coax Cable
Easy to UseProduces Results with
Minimal Operator Training
Time Domain
Reflectometry
These units use a technique called Time Domain Reflectometry (TOR) to identify and locate cable faults. When connected to a line
in the cable, the unit sends out an electrical
pulse that is reflected back to the unit by a
fault in the cable . Fault type is identified by
the shape of the display, and fault distance
is determined by the displayed interval from
the test pulse to the fault pulse.
"Also known as cable radar.
140
TOR *
The portable, rugged 1502 and 1503 TOR
Cable Testers are field maintenance tools
that are simple to operate and will test any
transmission cable under virtually any conditions. The 1502 is appropriate for testing
coax and other cables in aircraft, ships, radar sites, etc. The 1503 tests long runs of
coax or twisted pair cables in telephone and
other communications applications.
For long cables, the 1503 provides high-energy, 1f2-sine-shaped pulses. Range of the
1503, dependent upon cable type, is up to
50,000 feet. Resolution capability provides
for resolving faults as close together as
three feet on short cables. Impedance levels of 50, 75, 93 and 125 ohms are
selectable.
1503 Option 01
1503 Option 01 has Distance Cal switches
that make it more convenient for fault location in a variety of cables including coax.
When the 1503 Option 01 has been calibrated for each cable before trouble occurs,
and the records are kept, the Distance Cal
switches can be set exactly and damage
location can begin immediately.
Metric Instruments (1502, 1503)
For distance measurements in meters, instead of feet, there is Option 05 of both the
1502 and 1503. These instruments are fully
metric versions of the 1502 and 1503 with
no conversion from feet to meters involved.
The 1502 Option 05 has a distance resolution of 15 mm and measures 500 meters.
The 1503 Option 05 has a resolution of 0.9
meter and measures 10000 meters.
TEK
PORTABLE TOR
CABLE TESTERS
1502
CHARACTERISTICS
Shape -
TEST SIGNAL
Step rise. ~
Amplitude - 225 mV nominal (into 50 n load), dc coupled.
Aberrations - Within ± 5% during 1st 10 It alter rise. Within
± 0.5% peak beyond 10 It NOISE FILTER ·out:
System Rellected Rise - ..;;0.07 It (..;; 140 psI.
Jitter - ..;;0.02 It (..;;40 psI for X.l . ..;; 0.1 It (..;;200 psI for Xl .
Test Connector - BNC.
Termination - 50 n, within ± 2%.
Maximum Input - DO NOT APPLY EXTERNAL VOLTAGE.
VERTICAL SYSTEM
Display Range - ± 4 divisions.
Accuracy - Within ± 3%.
Calibration Point - 2 divisions - 1 p.
Dellection Factor - 5 mp/division to 500 mp/division, 7 steps,
1·2·5 sequence.
Variable - .. 3.5: 1 from calibration point.
Displayed Noise
NOISE FILTER switch ·out· - ± 5 mp or less.
NOISE FILTER switch ·in· - ± 2 mp or less.
HORIZONTAL SYSTEM
Distance Controls
Distance Dial
Range - 0 to 100 It for X.l . 0 to 1000 It for Xl .
Accuracy - Within ± 2% of reading ± 0.05 It for X.l . Within
± 2% of reading ± 0.5 It for Xl .
FEET IDIV Control
Range - 0.1 to 20 ft/dlvlslon lor X.1. 1 to 200 ft/division lor
Xl .
Accuracy - Within 2% of full CRT screen.
CABLE DIELECTRIC Scales (VpIVair) - SOLID POLY, 0.66;
SOLID PTFE, 0.70; Other VAR , 0.55 to 1.0. VAR is calibrated
for air when turned fully cw o
Sweep Repetition - 40 Hz within + 0 Hz, - 10Hz with
NOISE FILTER switch ·out: 4 Hz within ± 20% with NOISE
FILTER switch ·in·. 20 sl sweep nominal in chart recorder
mode (dependent upon chart recorder).
UNIQUE 1502 OPTION 05 CHARACTERISTICS
TEST SIGNAL
Aberrations - Within ± 5% during 1st 300 cm alter rise. WithIn ± 0.5% peak beyond 300 cm NOISE FILTER ·out."
System Rellected Rise - .;;2.1 cm (.;;140 psI.
Jitter - ';;0.6 cm (.;;40 psI for X.l . .;;3 cm (.;; 200 psI for Xl .
HORIZONTAL SYSTEM
Distance Controls
Distance Dial
Range - 0 to 25 m for X.l . 0 to 250 m for Xl .
Accuracy - Within ± 2% of reading ± 0.02 m for X.l. Within
± 2% of reading ± 0.2 m for Xl .
METERSIDIV Control
Range - 0.025 to 5 ml division for X.l . 0.25 to 50 mldivision
lor Xl .
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Watertight front co ver , TOR slide rule (003-0700-00);
50 n BNC terminator (011 -0123-00); precision 50 n cable
:012-0482-00); viewing hood (016-0297-00) ; X-Y output modJle (016-0606-00) ; replacement fuses (for front panel)
110 V ac (159-0032-00) or 220 V ac (159-0029-01); power cord
:161-0066-00); mesh Iilter (CRT) (378-0055-00); BNC femalela-female adaptor (103-0028-00).
ORDERING INFORMATION
1502 TOR Cable Tester ...................... $5,650
)ption 04 )ption 05 )ption 76 -
(with recorder) ....................................... $1,050
(metriC version) ................................ ............ NC
(P7 Phosphor) .......................................... + $35
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORD AND PLUG OPTIONS
)ptlon Al - Universal Euro 220 V/16A, 50 Hz .............. NC
)ption A2 - UK 240 V/13A, 50 Hz ................................. NC
)ption A3 - Australian 240 V/1 OA, 50 Hz ...................... NC
)ption A4 - North American 240 V/15A, 60 Hz ............. NC
1502 OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Chart Recorder Order 016-0506-04 ............................ $1,100
Chart Paper (roll) Order 006-1658-01 .......................... $7.50
Chart Paper (100 roll case). Order 006-1658-02 .......... $550
Accessory Pouch Order 016-0351·00 ............................. $25
Static Suppressor (helps protect Iront end
from damage). Order 011-0132-00 ................................... $45
Impedance Adaptor
50175 n. Order 017-0091 -00' ......................................... $115
50/93 n. Order 017-0092-00' ......................................... $115
50/125 n . Order 017-0090-00' ....................................... $115
·Should be purchased with following two parts:
Connector, BNC Female-to-GR
Order 017-0063-00 ............................................................ $43
Connector, BNC Male-to-GR
Order 017-0064-00 ............................................................ $75
1503
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Watertight Iront cover, replacement fuses (for front panel) 110
V ac (159-0032-00) or 220 V ac (159-0029-01) ; power cord
(161-0066-00); viewing hood (016-0297-00); 50 n BNC terminator (011-0123-00); X-Y output module (016-0606-00); mesh
filter CRT (378-0055-00) ; 9 It BNC-to-clip-Iead cable
(012-0671-02).
ORDERING INFORMATION
1503 TOR Cable Tester ..•...••••..••.•.••.•• $4,750
Option
Option
Option
Option
01
04
05
76
-
(Distance Cal) ........................................ +$375
(with recorder) .................................... +$1,050
(metriC version) ............................................ NC
(P7 Phosphor) .......................................... +$35
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORD AND PLUG OPTIONS
Option Al - Universal Euro 220 V/16A, 50 Hz .............. NC
Option A2 - UK 240 V/13A, 50 Hz ................................. NC
Option A3 - Australian 240 Vl l0A, 50 Hz ...................... NC
Option A4 - North American 240 V/15A, 60 Hz ............. NC
CHARACTERISTICS
'I.
TEST SIGNAL
sine within ± 20% / \
Shape Amplitude - 10 V ± 20% unterminated. 5 V ± 20%, terminated, ac coupled.
Aberrations - - 30 dB p-p. (Equivalent to ± 1.6%).
Duration - .;; 10 It (10 ns): .;; 100 It (100 ns): .;;1000 It
(1000 ns)."
Jitter - .;1 It for Xl0 (.;; 2 ns) . .;;10 It for Xl00 (.;;20 ns).
Test Connector - BNC.
Termination - 50 n, 75 n, and 93 n, within 1%; 125 n
within 3%.
Maximum Input - ± 400 V (de + peak ac at maximum frequency 01 440 Hz).
VERTICAL SYSTEM
Display Range - ± 4 division.
Accuracy - Within ± 0.25 dB (within ± 3%).
Calibration Point - 2 division - 0 dB.
Dellection Factor - 0 to 60 dB, 7 steps, 10 dB per step.
Variable - 0 to 18 dB additive to steps.
Displayed Noise
NOISE FILTER switch ·out· - - 80 dB RMS, random.
NOISE FILTER switch ·in· - - 86 dB RMS, random.
HORIZONTAL SYSTEM
Distance Controls
Distance Dial- Range: 0 to 2,500 It at Xl O. 0 to 25,000 It at
Xl00. Accuracy: Within 2% of reading ± 2 It for Xl0. Within
2% of reading ±20 It lor Xl00.
FEET/DIV Control- Range: 5 to 500 ft/division at Xl0. 50 to
5000 ft/division at Xl00. Accuracy: Within 2% of full CRT
screen.
CABLE DIELECTRIC Scales (VpIVair) - SOLID POLY, 0.66 ;
FOAM POLY, 0.81 ; VAR, 0.31-1.0. VAR is calibrated for air
when turned fully cw o
Distance Cal Scales, Option 01 only (VplVair) - Selectable
from 0.2 to 1.0 in 0.01 increments.
Sweep Repetition - 40 Hz within +0 Hz, - 10 Hz with
NOISE FILTER switch ·out." 20 sl sweep nominal in chart recorder mode (dependent upon chart recorder). 4 Hz within
± 20% with NOISE FILTER switch ·in.·
UNIQUE 1503 OPTION 05 CHARACTERISTICS
TEST SIGNAL
Duration - .;; 3 m (10 ns): .;;30 m (100 ns): .;;300 m
(1000 ns)."
Jitter - .;; 0.2 m for Xl (.;;2 ns) . .; 2 m for Xl0 (.;; 20 ns).
HORIZONTAL SYSTEM
Distance Controls
Distance Dial
Range - 0 to 500 m at XI. 0 to 5,000 m at Xl0.
Accuracy - Within 2% of reading ± 0.2 m for Xl. Within 2%
of reading ± 2 m for Xl0.
METERS/DIV Control
Range - 1 to 100 ml division at Xl . 10 to 1000 ml division at
Xl0.
1503 OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Chart Recorder Order 016-0506-03
Chart Paper (roll). Order 006-1658-01 .......................... $7.50
Chart Paper (100 roll case).
Order 006-1658-02 .......................................................... $550
Isolation Network (for balanced lines).
Order 013·0169-00 .......................................................... $155
Adaptor Cables (BNC-to-Clips)
9 loot. Order 012-0671-02 ................................................ $60
30 foot. Order 012-0671-03 .............................................. $70
Accessory Pouch Order 016-0351-00 ............................. $25
Direct Current Adaptor with Filter (for use with standard 12 V
automobile lighter plug with negative ground).
25 Foot Cord Order 015-0327-00 .................................. $160
1502 & 1503 COMMON CHARACTERISTICS
POWER REQUIREMENTS
Ac Power
Line Voltage - 117 V ac ± 20% and 234 V ac ± 20%.
Line Frequency - 48 to 410Hz.
Dc Power
Battery Pack Operation - At least 5 hours (+20· C to
+25·C charge and discharge temperature) including 20 chart
recordings.
Full Charge Time - 16 hours.
Typical Charge Capecity
Discharge
Temperature
Charge
Temperature
- 15·C
+20·C
to
+25·C
+55·C
O·C
40%
60%
50%
+20·C to +25·C
65%
100%
85%
+40·C
40%
65%
55%
EXTERNAL RECORDER INTERFACE
(STANDARD X-Y MODULE)
Horizontal- 0.1 V/division, source impedance is 10 kll.
Vertical - 0.09 to 0.13 V/division (adjustable), source impedance is 10 kn.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dimensions
mm
Width (with handle)
Width (without handle)
Height
Depth (handle extended)
Depth (handle not extended)
315
300
127
475
419
Weights
In
12.4
11.8
5.0
18.7
16.5
Ib
kg
Net (with front cover
and accessories)
Net (without Iront cover
or accessories)
Domestic Shipping (complete)
Export Shipping (complete)
=
=
8.2
18.0
7.3
16.0
11.1
16.3
24.4
36.0
LOGISTICS INFORMATION
'Duration times are within ± 20% at half amplitude.
For logistics data, see Tektronix Logistics Data Book.
141
TEK
TELEVISION
PRODUCTS
CONTENTS
380/381 Video Test Monitors "" .. ".""".".,,. "
1480 Series Video Waveform Monitors
"
528A Video Waveform Monitor """""""""""
520A Series Vectors copes ,,"
"
1420 Series Video Monitoring
Vectors copes """".
"".
650HR Series Color Picture Monitors """"".
690SR Television Color Monitor "
.
1410 Series Test Signal Generators """""""
1470/1474 NTSC Generators
143 SECAM Test Signal Generator """ .. .".".
147A/149A NTSC Generators. """." ..... ".,,"
148 PAL Test Signal Generator ,,""
1430 Random Noise Measurement Set . ,,
143
145
148
150
Calibration Fixtures """"". """""""""" ".
1450 Series Television Demodulators """"".
1980 Automatic Video Measurement Set "".
1440 Automatic Video Corrector
""".
1900 NTSC Digital Generator/lnsertor ". """.
179
181
184
189
191
TV Accessories "
."
152
154
157
161
168
169
171
174
178
" . 197
NIIIIII
380 Test Monitor with optional Battery Pack
High Performance Spectrum Analyzers
for Your RF Measurements
See pages 198 through 214 for details on
Tektronix lab grade performance spectrum
analyzers: rugged 490 Series portables for
measurements at the transmitter site and
the field; 7000 Series analyzers for plug-in
versatility and economy in high performance measurements; the 1405 Television
Sideband Adaptor (for 7000 Series and 490
Series spectrum analyzers) to analyze the
sideband response of a television
transmitter.
142
SONY1TEKTRONIX@
380/381
Ac or Dc Operation
NTSC or PAL Versions
Bright CRT
Precise Frequency Response
Noise Measurement
Probe Input
Line Selection
The 380 and 381 Test Monitors are compact,
lightweight instruments optimized for portability in
many television environments, including maintenance, engineering and EFP. The 380 is used in
NTSC systems, the 381 in PAL systems. Both
units have the combined capabilities of a precision waveform monitor, vectorscope, and general
purpose oscilloscope.
The flexibility of the 380 and 381 makes them an
ideal choice for a variety of applications. Video
technicians, for example, find them invaluable
when maintaining such video equipment as VTRs,
cameras, and transmitters, particularly in remote
locations. With an auxiliary oscilloscope trigger,
sweep, and display, the 380 and 381 are also
well-suited for maintaining other equipment, such
as audio systems, servos, and control and switching systems.
Video engineers make good use of their extensive measurement capabilities, which include differential phase and gain, tangential noise, vertical
interval line selection , short-time distortion ,
trace overlay, and a 0.5% calibrated amplitude
comparator, to name only a few . The operator
can choose to make video measurements from a
75-ohm or probe input.
Production personnel take advantage of the monitor's bright display and portability during remote
productions, on EFP carts, in production vans,
and in other remote applications. Pushbutton
controls bring up standard horizontal (line) and
vertical (field) waveform displays. A vectorscope
display provides easy monitoring of color bars
and chroma.
PORTABLE VIDEO
TEST MONITOR
can be ac or dc coupled , or dc restored, and
switched between a loop-thru and probe input,
with independent sync source selection. Calibrated vertical displays at 0.1, 0.2, 0.5 and 1.0 volts
full scale, along with a variable gain control,
provide a full range of amplitude control.
Discrete, and variable vertical interval, line selection allows any individual line in any frame to be
displayed and identified by line and field number.
All displays can be expanded horizontally 2, 5 or
25 times for increased clarity of fast Signal
components.
Vectorscope
In the vectorscope mode, the vector display of
either a full field or vertical interval signal can be
selected. The display can be referenced to either
the displayed signal or an external composite
color video signal.
Variable Volte Full Scale Range -
XO.2 ( ± 4%) 10 .., 1.4.
Maximum Input Signal
Loop Thru : ± 1.5 V de + peak V ae, (de coupled).
± 2.0 V pop al any APL (ae coupled).
Probe Xl : ± 5 V de + peak V ae, < 1 kHz (Signal Oul not
lerminated).
Probe Xl0: ± 0_5 V de + peak V ae, < 1 kHz (Signal Out not
terminated).
Maximum de Output Into 75 Q (Signal Out) Frequency Response -
± 0.5 V de .
Flat (from 50 kHz reference)_
Loop Thru (inciudingSignal Out): + 10' C to + 30' C: 50 kHz to
5 MHz ± 2%; 5 MHz to 10 MHz + 2%, - 5%.
Loop Thru (including Signal Out): + O' C to + 50' C: 50 kHz to
5 MHz ± 3%; 5 MHz to 10 MHz + 3%, - 5%.
Probe: Typically < 1 dB down to 15 MHz; < 2 dB down to
18 MHz ; < 3 dB down to 20 MHz.
IRE (380): Conforms to IEEE Standard 205, 1972.
LUM (381): < 3 dB down at 1 MHz; at least 40 dB down at
4.43 MHz.
A decoded R-Y (or V) line sweep display is
available, and the 381 is switchable between a
PAL or NTSC type vector display.
3.58 MHz (380): ± 1% of Flat at 3.58 MHz, bandpass
",,600 kHz.
Oscilloscope
In the oscilloscope mode, a selectable time base
from 50 milliseconds per division to 0.2 microseconds per diviSion, along with negative or positive
slope trigger for nonvideo signal observation are
provided.
Diff Step: Attenuation < 2 dB from 0.4 to 0 _5 MHz; ;;.20 dB at
14 kHz and 2 MHz; ;.40 dB at 3.58 MHz and 4.43 MHz.
Battery Pack
An optional battery pack attaches to the bottom
of the 380/381 for complete portability, providing
more than two hours of continuous operation. A
convenient recharger is built into the pack. The
battery pack is quickly replaceable for long term
remote operation.
4.43 MHz (381): ± 1% of Flat at 4.43 MHz, bandpass
",,800 kHz.
Linear Waveform Distortion (2T)
Pulse Preshoot: .. 0.5% of applied pulse amplitude.
Pulse Overshoot: < 1.0% of applied pulse amplitude.
Pulse Ringing : .. 0.5% of applied pulse amplitude.
25 pS Bar Tilt: .. 1%.
Field Square Wave Tilt: < 1%.
Pulse to Bar Ratio: 0.99 to 1.01: 1 (at 1.0, 0.5 or 0.2 V full
scale). 0.98 to 1.02:1 (at 0.1 V full scale).
Non·Line.r Wayeform Distortion
Differential Gain Displayed : < 0_5% at any APL
Signal Out: .. 1.0% of any APL
Differential Phase Displayed: .. 0.25 ' at any APL
CHARACTERISTICS
Signal Out: < 0.5' at any APL
Deflection Factor
Loop Thru
Probe Xl0
1V
0_5 V
0.2 V
0.1 V
Probe Xl
< 3%
< 2%
< 4%
....;;3%
.. 4%
< 3%
< 4%
...: 1%
Waveform Monitor
In the waveform monitor mode, the 380 and 381
have the flat frequency response (± 2% to
5 MHz) required for measuring or monitoring a
video signal. The monitors provide a full set of
Input filters , including chroma band pass, IRE or
low pass, and differential step. The input signal
143
Return Loss -
Loop Thru Input: .. 40 dB, dc to 5 MHz.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
380/381
Probe package (010-6149-03); cable assembly, external dc
(012-0406-00); carrying case (016-0663-02); 3A fast fuse
250 V (159-0015-02); 1.5A fast fuse 250 V (159-0156-00); 0.2A
slow fuse 250 V (159-0180-00); O.4A slow fuse 250 V
(159-0179-00); cover carrying case (200-2260-00); strap assembly carrying (346-0131-00); viewing hood (016-0297-00).
Calibrator Accuracy
100 IRE: ,,;0.5%.
Dimensions
Noise: 0 dB - 700 mV ± 5%. Step Accuracy: .. 1 dB. Instrument SIN: ,,; - 60 dB.
Width, w/handle
Height
Depth, handle not extended
Depth, handle extended
Probe
Input Resistance: 1 Mil, ± 2%.
Input Capacitance: ",,24 pF.
Weight
Maximum Safe Input Volt: 250 V dc + Peak V ac 1 kHz or
less.
Net
1 V Cal Out
Output Voltage: 1.000 V ± 0.005 V.
Waveform: Squarewave.
Frequency: "" 1 kHz.
Output Impedance: < 1 Il.
Vertical Geometry Horizontal Geometry -
.. 0.15 div error.
,,;0.15 div error.
Sweep Timing Accuracy and Linearity (over center 10 div)
TV Time Base - At 5 !is timing 1%, linearity 2%; at 10 !is
timing 2%, linearity 3%.
Au xiliary Time Base - Timing 4%, linearity 5%.
Magnilied Timing and Linearity - X2, X5 & X25: Add 1%,
error lor center ten divisions of unmagnified sweep.
Two Field Sweep Length Field Selector and 3).
mm
in
237
112
372
482
9.5
4.5
14.9
19.3
kg
ORDERING INFORMATION
380 Test Monitor
(For NTSC Systems) ...................... ____ . $5,495
Ib
5.5
12.1
BATTERY PACK
Dimensions
mm
Width
Height
Depth
209
68
353
8.4
2.7
14.1
kg
Weight
Net
381 Test Monitor (For PAL Systems) . $5,495
in
Option 11 -
With Battery Pack included ................... +$845
Option 89 -
Required for export orders .......................... NC
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Ib
Battery Pack Order 016-0693-00 (for 360) .................... $875
8.8
4.0
Order 016-0693-04 (for 381) ........................ _.................. $875
Camera Adaptor (mounts the C-30B camera)
Order 016-0327-01 .......................................................... $169
12.7 div ; ± 0.5 div.
Positive selection 01 Odd (2 and 4), Even (1
. ;I~;m;~;l;:~:;:~j::::3~----------"'IIlt
~mmm~;l;~;~;i
CAUTION
AC INPUT VOLTAGE
Line Selector
Variable Range - From "" line 17 01 the selected lield to 25%
into adjacent lield ; lines intensilied by the strobe in two Field
display.
Discrete (380) - Selects line 15 to line 21 .
Discrete (381) - Selects line 16 to line 22 and line 329 to line
335.
TO PREVENT elECTRIC SHOCK
00 NOT REMove COVER.
REFER SERVICING
TO OUALIFIED PERSONNEl.
t=1=:::::::il
Sync Input Requirements
TV Sync: 200 mV p-p to 2 V composite video.
Auxiliary Sync: ,,;20 mV at 50 Hz ; .. 10 mV at 50 kHz ,,; 50 mV
at5 MHz.
0
RANGE
D~
~D
NOMINAL
RANGE
HI214-250Y
230V
LO 180- 220V
MANUFACTURED BY
SONYfTEKTAONIX CORP .
TOKYO, JAPAN
Chrominance Bandwidth
Upper - 3 dB Point- Fsc + 500 kHz ± 100 kHz .
Lower - 3 dB Point - Fsc - 500 kHz ± 100 kHz.
Vector Phase Accuracy -
o
NOM :NAL
HI107132V
115V
LO 9O - 110V
FUSE
2SOV
O.2A SLOW
2SOV
O.4A SLOW
FREQ. 48-440 Hz
wAns (MAXI 3S
VAIMAXI
40
,,;2·
Subcarrier Regenator
Pull-in Range: Within 50 Hz 01 Fsc.
Pull-In Time : .. Is.
Phase Shift with Subcarrier Frequency Change: < 1· typically
Irom Isc to Isc + 10Hz, or Irom fsc to Isc - 10Hz; < 2· typically Irom fsc to fsc + 20 Hz, or from fsc to fsc - 20 Hz.
Phase Shift with Burst Amplitude Change: .. 2· from nominal
burst amplitude to ± 6 dB.
Phase Control Overall Range: ± 30 · (380), at least 80 · (381).
Vector Gain Accuracy: ,,; 2 IRE.
Differential Phase Accuracy: ,,; 10% of measurement ± 0.3·.
Optional Battery Pack
Power Output : 11 to 12 V dc; 6 Amp hours (O · C to + 40 · C); 3
Amp maximum.
Operating Time : > 2 hours.
Charge Time: 14 to 16 hours (O · C to + 40 · C).
Storage Temperature: (- 40 · C to + 60· C).
Power Consumption: 30 W maximum.
(
)
1
r,-__________________________
O
CAUll O N
TO "'('1 £H T £ UCtIlIC SHOCK
0~ -
~~~~~------~~
FUS(
~c
AC INPUT VOLTAGE
"' OMINA l
BIUII\IO£
,FIIIEO",-..oH,
"'..,"..'.'., . . .. !.!
....
ta r9
~ 0 '=OO'=""'='O"="O="""~I 01~1';~
~
DO HOT II £ MOV £ COV Ell,
IUF£IISlIlV1CIHO
t:l
••","c,""o"'
l'SOV
~
' -IIOH
L3
5OH~~~~~~~:~~;OIl'
l
~
,L-________~~~~~==~~~~~~~~
U'!"AV$T
lUV
011-011).00
380/381 and Optional Battery Pack Back Panels
Mains Voltage Range
115 V ac: 90 V ac to 132 V ac.
230 V ac: 180 V ac to 250 V ac.
Power Consumption - 35 W.
Mains Frequency : 48 Hz to 440 Hz.
DC INPUT VOLTAGE
ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS
Temperature
Nonoperating : - 25 · C to + 75 · C.
Operating: O· C to + 50 · C.
Altitude
Nonoperating:
(50,000 ft).
Operating : To 4500 m
(15 ,000 ft) .
Side panel of the 380/381 (vector switch on 381 only)
144
The SONY· ITEKTRONIX· 380/381 is manufactured and mar·
keted in Japan by SonylTektronix Corporation, Tokyo, Japan
Outside of Japan, the 3801381 is available from Tektronix, lne.
its marketing subsidiaries and distributors.
VIDEO MEASUREMENT
WAVEFORM MONITORS
1480
TEK SERIES
'I.
L..!!!
· '''1
= - 1:Q
<'
_.
_t..
F1
•
•
_.
•
1485R Option 01 PAL/NTSC Dual Standard Waveform Monitor (Rackmount)
1480
Bright CRT Especially Suitable
for Vertical Interval Testing
Advanced Measurement Modes
Amplitude Measurement Accuracy
Approaching 0.2%
Digital Selection of Line and Field
Probe Input Option
15-Line Display for VTR Applications
The 1480 Series Waveform Monitors have excellent amplitude measuring accuracy and many
unique operating modes that enable you to work
more precisely and accurately. The monitoring
needs of CCU, VTR , control room , transmission
facilities, transmitter, and special systems have
been researched thoroughly in order to assure
that the 1480's will fit your expressed needs. We
believe that the 1480's have anticipated your
needs for years to come. We will describe here
the things that 1480's can do, but there is nothing like seeing one to really communicate the impressive performance of these monitors.
The 1485C and 1485R PALINTSC, Dual Standard
Monitors (see photos) represent the essentials of
all eight monitors in the 1480 Series. The differences between the monitors in the series are essentially confined to what lines in the vertical interval are selectable, what filters are selectable
in the response mode, and in the field selection
modes. Dual-Standard Monitors recognize the
signal standard in use automatically and indicate
that standard with front panel indicators.
Vertical Interval Testing
Have you ever had to turn the lights down or
shade a CRT with your hand to see a particular
Vertical Interval Test Signal? That is not necessary with the 1480 Series because the CRT is
bright. So bright that one Vertical Interval Test
Signal selected out of four fields , can be seen
with ease even in a well-lighted area. This solution to VITS display problems required the design of a very high light-output , cathrode-ray
tube. But the bright CRT is just one of the
unique features of the 1480 Series.
More Accuracy, Greater Resolution
In recognition of the need for more accuracy the
1480's provide several advanced measurement
modes. In these modes the 1480's give you the
capacity to make amplitude measurements with
accuracy approaching 0.2%. In one mode a precision display offset is used. A proven video
measurement technique, offsetting displays with
an amplitude standard is an easy-to-use method
that achieves accuracy by eliminating parallax
and transfer errors. Transfer errors are eliminated
because you compare your signal to a precise
one volt standard rather than to graticule calibration. Measurements made with comparison techniques also have a high order of consistency and
repeatability. When your signal precisely matches the standard your signal amplitude will be determined to the value and accuracy of the offset.
The tolerance of the internal calibration signal
used as the standard is 0.2%.
Resolving power is an important factor in achieving very accurate amplitude measurements. The
1480's provide great resolving power through
calibrated five-times expansion of the vertical
display. Expansion not only means that signal
and standard comparison is more precise, it
means that the differences (errors) between signal and standard are easier to see and to
measure.
Greater resolution of the five times expansion is
facilitated by a vernier position control. With this
control any portion of a standard amplitude signal can be positioned on screen and then examined in detail. A 0.2% amplitude standard , 5X expansion, offset comparison, fine CRT spot size,
these are some but not all of the factors that
make the 1480's very accurate video monitoring
insturments.
Fast Time Base with an AFC Mode
The fastest sweep of the 1480's is 0.1 microseconds per division . Fast enough and bright
enough to examine T pulses even in the vertical
interval.
The 1480's are calibrated in microseconds with a
basic 2% time base accuracy. Less than ±3%
when using the multiplier. SOX is the greatest
range of magnification with steps of of 10, 5, 2,
and 1; calibration is in time and magnification
value. The sync recognizer has a new automatic
frequency control mode for the display of sync
jitter.
Dc Restoration and Dc Coupling
Other improvements provided by the 1480's include slow dc restoration which will display any
hum present, or a new mode (fast) to filter out
hum so that measurements can be made more
accurately. Also selectable are backporch or
sync tip dc restoration . A dc coupled input mode
is provided for measuring diode demodulator
output and other applications.
Side-By-Side Comparison Mode
We call this mode overlay or sweep foldback .
The 1480's can actually overlay a later segment
of a display on the earlier segment. Superimposing waveforms over other waveforms allows exact comparison of levels. With overlay you can
exactly compare the elements of complex vertical interval test signals. Add the extra resolving
power of five times vertical expansion with precision offset and the overlay mode reaches its full
potential.
Sure Line Selection and Positive Field
Identification
Digital selection of field and line assures positive
identification of displayed information. For example when you select line 18 of field 2 it is certain
that what you will see is line 18, field 2. Digital
techniques will not allow an incorrect selection.
Variable selection of other lines is provided for
full field signal analysis . In all line selection
modes a line intensifying strobe is provided with
video for picture monitor displays. A second line
strobe output is provided to strobe 520A Series
Vectorscopes, etc. Intensified two-field displays
on the 1480 help you locate the line or lines
selected.
Response Selection and A Unique Auxiliary
Mode
Many television measurements require the filtering of some components from the composite
signal. For example, luminance signal rejection
by 3.58 MHz or 4.43 MHz subcarrier filters for differential gain measurements. A selection of appropriate filters is provided in the 1480's; including low pass , IRE , subcarrier and one for
staircase linearity measurements call ' differentiated staircase". When your specialized or unique
measurements require a special filter, insert that
filter between the auxiliary video output and auxiliary input without breaking into the program line.
The auxiliary video input and output are buffered
by amplifiers to provide a precise 75-ohm source
and load.
145
VIDEO MEASUREMENT
MONITORS
TEK WAVEFORM
EXTERNAL
HOFIIZ IN
U NE
PIX MONITOR
OUT
STAOIE OUT
AUk
VIDEO OUT
/A
AUK
VIDEO IN
00000
VIDEO I NPUTS
B\
000000
••
HIGH Z BRIDGING INPUTS
LOOP THROUGH COMPENSATED fOR 15
( NOT INTERNAl l Y TERMINATED)
n
FUSE
EXT SYNC SWITCHED
WITH INPUT
SWtTCH'DI
( A' OR (8)
0000
eXT SYNC
\
ALWAYS
(B)
(A,
EItTERHAl SYNC
1485R Rear Panel
~
14815C
00000000
WAv. ..aIllM
•
MONfTO..
......
.
"
(B)
'\:!UTERNAL
(A) J
SYNC ~
\ : . . VIDEO INPUTS
d
TAPE T.W.
EXTERNAL
HORIZ IN
•
1480 NTSC Waveform Monitor (Cabinet)
Factors That Affect Displays, Graticules,
Focus and Brightness
Two graticules are provided . One, internal and illuminated, is used for most of your applications.
An internal graticule has no parallax. The other
graticule is external and can be easily changed ,
a feature useful for special applications. The external graticule is illuminated by a separate system with a control that turns the internal one
off- getting it out of sight so you can see only
the external one.
In the 1480 Series monitor, focus and brightness
controls compensate for changes when switching from two field to a faster time base and can
easily be set to an optimum level.
PROBE OPTION
The 1480's make convenient high impedance
probing available with a probe option. This option provides an input that accepts most
Tektronix probes . As a part of this option a
probe compensation waveform test point is pro-
146
PIX "'ONITOR
OUT
AUX
VIDEO OUT
J90l4
o
VI DEO IN
•
•iiG
~'j
UNE
STROBE OUT
FUSE
1485C Rear Panel
vided (A ten-times amplifier keeps full screen
sensitivities while using X10 attenuator probes.)
Balanced Operation for 124 Ohm (Option 06)
The 1480R Option 06 is a high-performance television waveform monitor designed for use in your
television operating center or by your field service force . It is designed for measurements in
long-distance, video transmission systems using
124-ohm balanced lines. WECO-style input jacks
allow this instrument to operate in a 75 ohm system. With these features the 1480R Option 06
has been disigned to operate in either a 124 ohm
balanced or 75 ohm unbalanced system .
Vertical sensitivity, with automatic bandpass limiting, has been increased to 0.05 volts full scale
for making differential phase and gain measurements with Bell Kelley or Telemet Test Sets. A 5
to 12 second, variable sweep has been added to
measure low frequency distortions and system
bounce caused by large APL changes in the video signal.
Each 1480R Option 06 is supplied with hardware
for both rackmounting and portable
configurations.
Slow Sweep (Option 07)
A random sampling technique is employed by
1480-Series Option 07 monitor to display longtime distortions. Sampling maintains display intensity at a level suitable for viewing and
photography.
A 1480-Series Option 07 monitor in the slow
sweep mode is triggered from APL change or by
a 50-60 Hz squarewave that has no field sync
and filtered line sync thru a loop-thru rear panel
input. Either + polarity, starting the slow sweep
on the transition from , at, or near black level to
peak or near peak white, or - polarity, white to
black, may be selected. In addition, a choice of
trigger source, either internal, stripped from incoming video, or external, through the External
Sync Inputs, is available. If insufficient or no trigger is present, the slow sweep will operate in a
1480
SERIES
TEK
free-run mode. This free-running mode has a noticeably reduced repetition rate; however, sweep
duration and linearity are unchanged.
The sweep duration is controlled by a variable
front panel control , located on the display
switch. Range of control over the duration of the
sweep is approximately 4 to 15 seconds.
CHARACTERISTICS
VERTICAL DEFLECTION
Inputs Input A and Bare 75 11 high impedance loopthrough. Return loss is .. 40 dB from dc to 5 MHz in a 7511
system. Aux Video Input is internally terminated in 75 11. Return
loss is .. 34 dB from dc to 5 MHz.
Scale Factor - A and B input calibrated 1.0 V ± 7 mY, 0.5 V
± 15 mY , 0 .2 V ± 7 mV . (0.05 V ± 2.5 mV Option 06) volts full
scale. Variable - Range for each scale factor at least + 40%
to - 50%. Aux Video Input 1.5 dB gain.
Maximum Input Voltage peak ac (dc coupled).
2 V p-p (ac coupled), ± 1.5 V dc +
Frequency Response - Flat - Flat to 5 MHz ± 2%; 5 MHz
to 10 MHz + 2%, - 5%. Low Pass - Attenuation .. 14 dB,
500 kHz and above. 3.58 MHz Band Pass - Amplitude within
± 1 % of amplitude in Flat response position . Bandpass
", 600 kHz. 4.43 MHz Band Pass - Amplitude within ± 1% of
amplitude in Flat response position. Bandpass ", 800 kHz. IRE
- Conforms to IRE Standard 23S-1 1958 amended.
Dc Restorer - Keyed type, may be turned off. Clamping
point : BACK PORCH/SYNC TIP.TIME CONSTANT:FAST reduces mains hum ;;.. 26 dB , SLOW reduces mains hum
< 0.9 dB.
Mains Voltage - Ranges 100, 110, 120, 200, 220, 240 V ac
± 10%. Frequency 48 Hz to 62 Hz, maximum power consumption 75 W. At factory , 1480, 1482 preset for 110 V ac. 1481 ,
1485 preset for 220 V ac.
CHARACTERISTICS, OPTION 01
lOX Probe Channel - Scale Factor 1 V, 0.5 V, 0.2 V full
screen with lOX attenuator probe. GAIN range ± 10%. Tilt
.. 5% on 50 Hz squarewave, high frequency response ± 3%,
25 Hz to 5 MHz. Referenced to 50 kHz. Input resistance 1 Mil,
± 2%, not including probe. Input RC Product 20 !'s, ± 1%, not
including probe. BNC connector accepts most Tektronix
probes.
lOX Probe Calibrator 0.995 to 1.005 V .
Duration -
4 to 12 s, variable with front panel control.
Linearity -
Non-Linear Distortion -
Differential Gain : .. 0.5%.
HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION
Time-Base - 5 !'s and 10 !'s timing accuracy ± 2% (center 10
divisions); 5 !'s and 10 !'s linearity ± 1% (center 10 division).
External Sync Input - Two loop-through high impedance,
with ;;..46 dB return loss in a 7511 system. Inputs are slaved to
A and B input or to A external sync input only.
External Sync Input Requirements - 400 mV to 2 V compoSite video or 200 mV to 8 V composite sync.
Field Selector - Positive selection of Field 1 or 2 in the NTSC
system. Positive selection of 1, 2, 3, 4, or 1 & 3 , 2 & 4 in the
PAL systems.
Line Selector - DIG-Selects lines 9 to 22 NTSC, line 9/322
to line 22/335 PAL, line 9/272 to line 22/285 PAL-M . VAR-Approx line 20 of the selected field to line 4 of the next related
field. 15 lines - Identical to VAR , except 15 successive lines
are displayed.
Sync - AFC Horizontal frequency range is 15 .75 kHz
± 200 Hz. Maximum Jitter with Respect to Input Sync: IOns
with 4 V RMS hum (30 ns with the addition of - 36 dB white
noise). Direct Horizontal frequency up to <;; 20 kHz. Maximum
Jitter with Respect to Input Sync: 12 ns with 4 V RMS hum
(90 ns with the addition of - 36 dB white noise).
OUTPUTS
Line Strobe - TTL amplitude pulse. Pulse coincident with line
or lines selected by VAR , 15 LINE or DIG modes of DISPLAY
switch.
Picture Monitor Output of incoming video with LINE
STROBE added . Output impedance is 7511. Output gain adjusted to unity with respect to A and B video input.
Aux Video - Output of incoming video. 75 11 output impedance. Gain adjustable to unity with respect to A and B video
input.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
RGB / YRGB Staircase Input - = 12 V for 12.7 divisions deflection . RGB sweep length internally selected for '13 normal
sweep. YRGB sweep length internally selected for '/. normal
sweep length.
± 5% of full-screen over the length of the sweep.
Indicator - Front panel indicator on when slow sweep is operating but sweep is not running .
Triggering Signal - APL change .. 10% to 90% (Bump or
Bounce), front panel selectable for either + or - level change.
Sensitivity change.
400 mV to 2 V pop composite video with APL
Rate - ... 0.2 Hz, free-runs at rates < 0.2 Hz or with no triggering signal.
Input -
Internal or External.
50/60 Hz Squarewave Triggering - SenSitivity 400 mV p-p
minimum to 3 V p-p maximum. Input Impedance = 10 kll ac
coupled (Rear Panel loop-through connectors not return loss
compensated.)
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
216
210
430
Width
Height
Depth
Weights
=
kg
Net
Shipping
9.8
24.1
mm
in
8.5
8.25
16.9
in
19.0
5.25
18.0
482
133
457
kg
Ib
21.5
53.1
Ib
11.2
24.1
24.6
53.1
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Two BNC right angle Adaptors (103-0031 -00); SWR Slide, ext
slide pair, (351 -0195-01) ; various external graticules (see matrix below)
Extemal
Graticules
wiTek PIN
Blank
331-0393-00
$5,595
1482C PAL-M Waveform Monitor __ .____ $5,895
1482R PAL-M Waveform Monitor ••.•••. $5,895
1485C PAL/NTSC Dual Standard
Waveform Monitor'l •••...••...•................ $5,795
Option 01 - 1 Mil, 20 pF Probe Input
(not available with Option 06, probe not included) ...... +$275
Suggested Probe: P6108 lOX Probe
2 m (010-6108-03); 3 m (010-6108-05) ........................... $101
Option 02 -
Carrying Case (cabinet version only) .... +$140
Option 04 - Tone Wheel Sync (1480C, and 1485C
only. Replaces 529 or T04 in some RCA VTRs-Check
with RCA for retrofit compatibility) .............................. + $795
Option 06 -
124 11 WECO Style Inputs (1480R only) + $1,885
Option 07 - Slow Sweep" (Option 07 performance
included with Option 06. Do not order with Option 06) . + $465
Option 08 - SECAM Field Identification
(1481C, 1481R, 1485C and 1485R only) ..................... +$315
~
1481C/R, 1485C/R meets European Broadcast Union Tech.
3221-E, Guiding Principles for design of Television Waveform Monitors.
., Option 07 satisfies EBA Tech 3321-E § 3.2.2.
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Mounting Cradles - A cradle assembly, with associated bezel, allows the 1480C Waveform Monitor to be mounted alongside a 9 in Conrac Picture Monitor in a standard 19 in rack . A
cradle and bezel are also available for mounting fwo 148OC's
side-by-side.
Cradle Assembly - Requires 8'1. inch rack space.
Order 014-0020-00 .......................................................... $225
Bezel - For mounting 1480C on operator's left and SNA-9
picture monitor on right.
Order 014-0023-00 .......................................................... $300
Bezel - For mounting 1480C on operator's right and SNA-9
picture monitor on left.
Order 014-0024-00 .......................................................... $225
1481 R/C
1482 R/C
1485 R/C
Bezel - For two 1480C's side-by-side.
Order 014-0022-00 .......................................................... $200
x
x
x
x
1480R Cradle Assembly - For mounting the 1480R in a
WECO backless rack .
Order 426-0309-00 ............................................................ $40
x
Trace Recording Cameras - Both the Tektronix C-53P and
the C-59AP can be used. The C-53P gives the largest image
possible on Polaroid pack film . The C-53P requires a battery
pack (016-0270-02) and camera adaptor (016-0342-00). The
C-59AP is less expensive but produces a smaller image on the
film . The C-59AP requires a camera adaptor (016-0224-01).
See camera section of this catalog.
CCIR
331-0393-02
CCIR K
Visual
331-0393-05
x
x
CCIR K
Photo
331-0393-07
x
x
GRATA
Visual
331 -0393-08
x
x
GRAT A
Photo
331-0393-10
GRAT B
Photo
331-0393-17
$5,595
1481R PAL Waveform Monitor'l
1480 R/C
NTSC
Composite
331-0393-01
GRAT B
Visual
331-0393-18
$5,495
1481C PAL Waveform Monitor"
R1480
1480
mm
Dimensions
$5,495
1480R NTSC Waveform Monitor
1485R PAL/NTSC Dual Standard Waveform
Monitor'l ..•..••..•••.••••••••..••...•••.•••.•... ____ . $5,795
CHARACTERISTICS, OPTION 06 & 07
Calibrator - Amplitude selected by dc Restorer switch. Sync
Tip: 1 V ± 0 .2%. Back Porch : 714 mV or 700 mV ± 0.5%.
Linear Waveform Distortion - Pulse/ bar Ratio : ± 1%.
SHORT TIME: preshoot, overshoot, ringing <;;0.5% on 100 ns
sin' pulse. LINE TIME: TILT or rounding .. 1.0%. FIELD TIME:
(Ac coupled) .. 1%.
Output voltage 1,000 V ± 0.005 V or
ORDERING INFORMATION
1480C NTSC Waveform Monitor
x
x
x
x
147
MONITORING
WAVEFORM MONITOR
TEK VIDEO
528A
Internal Graticule CRT Ac or Dc Input
Coupling
Video Output of Displayed Signal
Precise Frequency Response
Line Tilt and Pulse Response (K Factor)
Measurements
Different Versions for 525 or 625 Line
Systems
UL 1244 Listed and Certified to CSA 556B
The Tektronix 528A Waveform Monitor is intended
for television measurement and monitoring
applications.
The 528A provides bright, easy-to-read waveform
displays on a 5-inch (125 mm) CRT with illuminated internal graticule for parallax-free waveform
monitoring and measurement while only requiring
5 '14 inches of vertical height and '/2 rack width
mounting space. This permits mounting the 528A
side-by-side with another 528A or other monitors,
such as the Tektronix 1420 Vectorscope . A version of the 528A in a carrying case is also
available.
Selectable from the front panel , either of two
75-ohm video inputs may be displayed and the
selected input is available on the rear panel
VIDEO OUT connector for routing to a picture
monitor or other device. These inputs are normally
ac coupled, but are easily set for dc coupling .
148
Calibrated 1 volt and 4 volt full scale sensitivities
are provided for displaying video and sync levels
and a Variable Volts Full Scale control permits
uncalibrated displays from 0.25 volts to 4.0 volts
full scale. A built-in 1 volt calibration signal may
be switched on to confirm the vertical calibration.
Input signal characteristics can be evaluated by
using the Response switch in the Flat position for
full bandwidth display, IRE position for IEEE Standard 205 roll off display, Chroma position for a
display without luminance components, or Diff
Gain position for displaying the differential gain
error of the input signal. A dc restorer, that may
be turned off when not required , maintains the
back porch at an essentially constant level regardless of changes in signal amplitude, average
picture level, and color burst. Selectable external
sync capability is also provided .
RGB and YRGB waveforms from a color camera
are provided for by using a rear panel 9-pin
interface.
This compact instrument is especially suited for
monitoring signals from studio camera outputs,
video system inputs and outputs, production
switchers, and editing consoles. The 528A allows
the operator to adjust and monitor video and sync
levels, check and adjust system timing, ensure
continuity of the signal and perform camera
alignment procedures. The 528A also meets
many of the requirements of video tape recorder
monitoring bridges for VTR alignment and set-up,
differential gain measurements, line time tilt measurements, and pulse response (K Factor) measurements. In general, the 528A is well-suited for
all television applications where consistent video
quality monitoring is requirement.
Horizontal sweep selection includes: 2H (two
line), 1 !LS (expanded two line), 2V (two fields)
and 2V Mag (expanded two-field) . Displays of
528A Waveform Monitor mounted side-by-side with a 1420 Vectorscope in optional rack adaptor.
TEK
selected pins on the rear panel 9-pin receptacle. (A 9-pin mating plug is supplied as a standard accessory.)
AC POWER
Line Voltage Ranges - 99 to 132 V ac and 198 to 250 V ac.
48 to 66 Hz line frequency.
Line Frequency Range -
48 to 440 Hz.
Power Consumption - "", 48 W at 115 V ac. 60 Hz (528A is
factory set to 115 V ac; Option 03. set to 230 V ac).
SAFETY
All 528A Waveform Monitors shipped with case installed are
UL 1244 listed and CSA 556B certified. 528A's Shipped without a case are UL recognized components.
ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS
Operating Temperature Range -
O·C to +50·C.
Nonoperating Temperature Range Operating Altitude Range 41S 66 HI
198-264 V
FUSE DATA
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
-6A SLOW 99 - 132 V
. 3A SLOW 198- 264 V
Dimensions
mm
216
133
470
Width
Height
Depth
528A Back Panel
CHARACTERISTICS
VERTICAL DEFLECTION
Inputs - Two rear panel BNC connectors: (A and B) provide
two 75 {J loop through connections (normally ac coupled but
may be easily modified for de coupling); return loss for both
inputs (when terminated in 75 {J. operating or nonoperating): At
least 46 dB to 5 MHz.
Deflection Factor
1 V Full Scale : 140 IRE units ± 1% with 1 V input.
4 V Full Scale: 140 IRE units ± 3% with a 4 V input.
Variable scale.
Sea level to 15 000 m
Nonoperating Altitude Range (50.000 ft).
99- 132 V
Uncalibrated displays from 0.25 V to 4.0 V full
- 40· C to + 65· C.
Sea level to 4500 m (15.000 ft).
Output Signal Amplitude display.
Dc Level on Output Output Impedance -
1 V within 15% for 140 IRE unit
2 V or less into 75
75
{J
{J
load.
Weight
kg
Net with accessories
Shipping
6.8
10.4
In
8.5
5.25
18.5
Ib
15.0
23.0
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Power cord; 9-pin. plug connector (136-0099-01).
nominal.
Dc Restoration - Slow acting back porch dc restoration.
Blanking level shift caused by introduction of color burst is
1 IRE unit or less. APL changes from 50% to 10% or 90% will
cause a blanking level shift of 1 IRE unit or less. (May be
disabled).
Calibrator - An internal calibration signal provides a convenient reference to verify the deflection factor. Calibrator amplitude is 1.0 V pop ± 1%.
ORDERING INFORMATION
528A Waveform Monjtor (for 525 line) $2,285
Option 01 -
Without cover .......................................... -$30
Option 02 -
With blue protective carrying cabinet ...... + $65
Option 03 - Modified for use with 625 line (CCIR) television
systems and wired for use with 230 V ac 50 Hz power sources
(unless otherwise specified) ........... __ _____ .... _.... _____________ ...... _ NC
Frequency Response Positions
Flat : 25 Hz to 3.6 MHz. ± 1% of response at 50 kHz; 3.6 MHz
to 5 MHz. + 1%. - 3% of response at 50 kHz.
Provides four time base operating modes; baseline visible in
each mode with no external video or sync inputs.
IRE: Conforms to IEEE Standard 205 (Option 03. 625 line:
attenuation at 4.43 MHz is > 22 dB).
2 V Sweep Mode - Repetition Rate: Equal to II, field rate of
applied video or external sync.
Chroma - Response at 3.58 MHz does not vary between
FLAT and Chroma by more than 1%. bandpass "",600 kHz.
2 V Mag Sweep Mode cal blanking interval).
Magnification: "",X20 (expands verti-
Blank Half-Rack Width Panel Assembly
Order 016-0116-00 .. ________ __ __ __ __ ___ __ ____________________________________ _ $42
(Option 03. 625 line: Response at 4.43 MHz does not vary
between FLAT and Chroma by more than 1%. bandpass
"",800 kHz).
2 H Sweep Mode - Repetition Rate: Equal to Ii> line rate of
applied video or external sync.
Mounting Cradle A cradle assembly with associated bezel and
mounting brackets allows the 528A Waveform Monitor to be
mounted alongside a 9-in Conrac Picture Monitor in a standard
19-in rack.
Order 014-0020-00 _.. __ .. ____ _____ __ ______ .. ________________________________ $225
Diff Gain - Same as Chroma except that gain is increased by
a factor of 3 to 5.5.
Displayed Differential Gain - 1% or less with 20 to 90% APL
(when baseline is at 50 IRE and signal amplitude is adjusted to
100 IRE units).
Transient Response - 1 V Full Scale FLAT Response Position using 125 ns HAD sin' pulse and bar:
Preshoot: 1 IRE unit or less.
Pulse-Ta-Bar Ratio: 0.99 :1 to 1:01 :1.
Overshoot: 1 IRE units or less.
Ringing: 1 IRE units or less.
Low Frequency Till (dc restorer off)
Field Rate Squarewave: 1% or less.
Vertical Window: 1% or less.
25
~s
Pulse: 1% or less.
Maximum Input Levels - ± 5 V. ac coupled' . ± 1.1 V. dc
coupled (± 4.4 V in 4 V full scale position). Input signal amplitude should be limited to produce displays not exceeding
200 IRE units. (Flat and IRE positions).
'Exceeds CCIR recommendation 567. Para 0 .2.3.
OUTPUT
Video Output - The displayed signal is provided at the Video
Out rear panel connector.
Frequency Response -
25 Hz to 5 MHz within 3%.
TIME BASE
1 "s/DiY Sweep Mode - Accuracy center 10 major divisions.
1
~s/div ±
3% within
Linearity - 3% maximum non-linearity throughout horizontal
position range within center 10 major divisions.
Input -
BNC. 75
{J
Input Impedance -
EXTERNAL SYNC
loop-through connection.
"'" 15 k!l in parallel with ",5 pF'.
Input Signal Levels synchronize sweeps).
1.5 to 4.5 V pop (composite sync will
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Side-by-Side Rack Adaptor
Order 016-0115-02 w __ .. __________________ __________ _ __________________ _ __ _ $180
Bezel and Brackets (left side mounting of 528A).
Order 014-0038-00 _.. _.. __________ __ ___________________________ ___ ________ .. $315
Bezel and Brackets (right side mounting of 528A).
Order 014-0037 -00 _____ .. _______________________________ .. _____ ___________ .. $315
Camera, Trace Recording Tektronix C-5C Option 01 recommended for display photos. See camera section of this catalog.
Return Loss - 46 dB minimum to 5 MHz (when terminated in
75 {J loop through connection).
Input Voltage Levels - ± 20 V maximum.
'Exceeds CCIR recommendation 567. Para 0 .2.3.
YRGB AND RGB
The 528A can be used with color camera processing amplifiers
that provide the necessary signal switching and staircase signals. A 9-pin receptacle on the monitor's rear panel factory
wired for RGB (3 step) input provides the interfacing
connection.
Staircase Amplitude - A 10 V pop signal will produce a horizontal display of 9 divisions ± 15%.
Maximum Staircase Input Level maximum ac is 12 V pop.
± 12 V dc (piUS peak ac);
Control SignalS - The RGB and YRGB modes may be initiated by the application of external voltages (12 to 15 V dc) to
149
MEASUREMENT
TEK VIDEO
VECTORSCOPES
R520A NTSC Vectorscope
520A/521 A/522A
Luminance Amplitude
Chrominance Amplitude and Phase
Differential Phase
Differential Gain
The Tektronix 520A Series vectorscopes include
three basic instruments available in both cabinet
and rackmount configurations. These are the
520NR520A for NTSC, the 521A/R521A for PAL,
and the 522NR522A for PAL-M.
DISPLAYS
The vector display shows the relative phase and
amplitude of the chrominance signal on polar coordinates. To help identify these coordinates, the
graticule has points corresponding to the proper
phase and amplitude of the primary and complementary colors: R (Red), B (Blue), G (Green), Cy
(Cyan), YL (Yellow) , and MG (Magenta).
Any errors in the color encoding , video-tape recording, or transmission processes that change
these phase and/or amplitude relatiOnships cause
color errors in the television picture. Polar coordinate displays, such as those obtained on the
520A, 521A, and 522A CRT, have proven to be
the best method for displaying these errors.
The polar display permits measurement of hue in
terms of relative phase of the chrominance signal
with respect to the color burst. Amplitude is expressed in terms of the displacement from center
(radial length) toward the color point which corresponds to 75% (or 100%) amplitude of the particular color being measured.
The outer boxes around the color points correspond to phase and amplitude error limits ( ± 10° ,
±20%). For the 520A (NTSC) the inner boxes indicate ±2.5° and 2.5 IRE units, and correspond
to phase and amplitude error limits per EIA specification RS-189, amended for 7.5% setup. For the
521A (PAL) and 522A (PAL-M), the inner boxes
indicate ±3° phase angle and ±5% amplitude.
150
An internally generated test circle, used with the
vector graticule, verifies quadrature accuracy,
horizontal to vertical gain balance, and gain calibration for Ghrominance signal amplitude measurements. Two methods of measuring phase
shifts are provided. You can accurately read large
phase shifts from the parallax-free vector graticule. A precision calibrated phase shifter with a
range of 30°, spread over 30 inches of dial
length, is provided for measuring small phase
shifts.
Dual Vector Display
In dual-channel operation , successive samples of
channels A and B are displayed on a time-shared
basis. The switching rate is locked to horizontal
sync, and switching transients are blanked . You
can conveniently compare input/output signals
from video equipment on Channel A or B for
phase and/or amplitude distortion.
The subcarrier processing channel contains two
uncalibrated 0 to 360° phase-shifters and one 30°
Calibrated Phase shifter. While viewing Channel A
or B, you can switch either of the uncalibrated
phase-shifters, At) or Bf) into the subcarrier processing channel. Each phase shifter locks to its
respective channel when A and B channels are
time-shared , permitting independent phase control of the Channel A and B displays. Unequal
signal paths causing phase shifts are easily cancelled, leaving only phase and amplitude distortion caused by equipment deficiencies.
Video cable lengths may be accurately matched
for time delay at color subcarrier frequency to
less than 0.5° phase difference.
You can make accurate amplitude measurements
of chrominance and luminance from the CRT display. Use the internal 1 volt luminance amplitude
calibration test signal to check the gain accuracy
of Channel A and B amplifiers and the luminance
channel.
Time Base Displays
The linear time base operates at the line rate . Color signals may be demodulated along any desired axis, I, Q, and R-Y (for NTSC) , and U, and V
(for PAL and PAL-M), and displayed at the line
rate on a linear time base.
Luminance-Color Separation
A luminance channel permits the separation and
display of the luminance (Y) component from the
composite color signal. You can also combine the
Y component with the output of the chrominance
demodulators for R, G, and B displays at a line
rate . Amplitude measurements of color signal
components can be made with an accuracy of
3%.
Vertical Interval Test Signal Observation
You can display vertical Interval Test Signals from
front-panel selected lines of either field 1 or 2 on
the 520A Vectorscope. For the 521A (PAL) and
the 522A (PAL-M), you can display ITS from either
fields 1 and 3 or fields 2 and 4.
Differential Gain and Differential Phase
Measurements
The two main chrominance signal distortions differential gain and differential phase - can be
measured on the 520A (NTSC), 521A (PAL), and
522A (PAL -M) Vectorscopes . Differential gain
(Figure 1) is a change in color subcarrier amplitude as a function of luminance level. In the reproduced color picture, saturation will be distorted in
the areas between the light and dark portions of
the scene. The 520A, 521A, and 522A permit differential gain measurements with accuracy to
better than 1%.
Differential phase (Figure 2) is a phase modulation of the chrominance signal caused by
changes in the luminance signal level. The hue
will vary with scene brightness in the reproduced
color picture. Differential gain and differential
phase occur separately or together. You can read
differential phase errors from the precision calibrated phase shift control or directly from the differential phase markings on the graticule .
TEK
520A
SERIES
As displayed on 520A
': '"
-r-.
-- --
Figure 1. Differential Gain display from the 520A . Luminance is
on in lower trace. On upper trace, luminance is off. Minor divi.
sions of gralicule indicate 1% differential gain. Double
exposure.
..... ---~.-
75% amplitude Color Bar Signal displayed on the line sweep graticule. Pushbuttons select line-sweep displays of luminance
(Figure 3). decoded Red (Figure 4). decoded Green (Figure 5). and decoded Blue (Figure 6).
Power Consumption - 95 W maximum at 115 V ae/60 Hz.
(Rear panel selector provides rapid accommodation to six line·
voltage ranges. Factory set at 115 V ac for the 520A and 522A
and 230 V ac for the 521A.)
.~
.....
...---
~-..-
~
ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS
Operating Temperature Range -
The vectorscopes are available in two mechanical configura·
tions. a cabinet model and a rack mount model. These versions
are electrically identical. The rack mount models fit in a 19 in
rack and are provided with slide-out assembiies for convenient
access to internal components.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dimensions
Figure 2. Differential Phase presentation from the 520A using a
modulated staircase signal. Trace overlay technique provides
excellent resolution for measuring small phase changes. The
differential phase error from the reference point in top photo
(first step of staircase signal overlayed) to point of measure in
bottom photo (sixth step overlayed) is 1.2" .
O· C to + 50· C ambient.
MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Width
Height
Depth
Weights
Net
Shipping =
Cabinet
Rackmount
mm
in
mm
in
429
178
487
16.9
7.0
19.2
483
178
483
19.0
7.0
19.8
kg
Ib
kg
Ib
15.0
27.7
33.0
61 .0
15.0
27 .7
33.0
61.0
CHARACTERISTICS
Graticule - Two separate graticules provide reference for
vector and line sweep displays. The parallax-free vector graticule. or the luminance graticule. is automatically selected and
edge-lighted concurrent with operating mode selection.
Z·Axislnput- The Z·Axis INPUT connector accepts external
trace·brightening pulses for intensifying a portion of the display
during the time of interest.
Video Inputs - Dual BNC input connectors for each channel
permit 75 Il loop.through operation with a return loss > 46 dB
to 5 MHz (exceeds CCIR recommendation 567. Part 0 and
0 .2). Amplitude range is 0.7 V to 1.4 V Video (sync tip to peak
white).
AC POWER
Mains Voltage Range - 90 to 136 V ac or 180 to 272 V ac.
Mains Frequency - 47 to 63 Hz.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Smokei/ray filter. installed (378-0581 · 00); power oord; Rack·
mount: same as cabinet but includes rackmounting hardware.
and slide-out assembly (351·0195.01).
ORDERING INFORMATION
520A NTSC Vectorscope (Cabinet)
$7,425
R520A NTSC Vectorscope
(Rackmount) ........................................ $7,425
521A PAL Vectorscope (Cabinet) ....... $7,725
R521A PAL Vectorscope (Rack mount) . $7,725
522A PAL-M Vectorscope (Cabinet)
$8,295
R522A PAL-M Vectorscope
(Rack mount) ........................................ $8,295
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
75 II Voltage Step·Up Termination when used with a Tek·
tronix Vectorscope. the 75 Il Voltage Step-up Termination provides an X5 increase in chrominance amplitude and lets you
make more accurate Differential Gain and Differential Phase
measurements. Input impedance to the termination is a con·
stant 75 Il. Use of the termination requires a source of external
sync to the vectorscope.
Voltage Step'up Termination for use with 520A (NTSC). 522A
(PAL.M) Vectorscopes.
Order 011·0100·01 ............................................................ $70
Voltage Step·up Termination for use with the 521 A Vectors·
cope.
Order 011·0109·00 ............................................................ $85
Single Sideband Chroma Amplitude Corrector designed for
use with a Tektronix Vectorscope in transmitter applications
where a vestigial sideband signal is being demodulated with a
detecting diode. The corrector provides an X2 increase in chrominance amplitude and passes luminance components with lit·
tie or no attenuation. Input impedance is 7 Il.
Chroma Amplitude Corrector for use with 520A (NTSC). 522A
(PAL.M) Vectorscopes.
Order 011·0107·01 ............................................................ $70
Chroma Amplitude Corrector for use with 521 A Vectorscope.
Order 011·0108-01 .......................................................... $105
Recommended Camera for display photographs: C· 59AP
with adaptor 016-0295·01. See camera section of this catalog
for information.
R520A Cradle Assembly - For mounting the 520A in a
WECO backless rack.
Order 426-0667·00 ............................................................ $40
151
MONITORING
VECTORSCOPES
TEK VIDEO
1420
SERIES
~ ~~~~
"'_CTOA a cop.
0-,."IJT
oJ
1420
®
1420 Series Vectorscope rear panel
Series
Precise Vector Phase Accuracy
Parallax-free Internal Graticule
Half Rack Width
Proven Performance
Available in NTSC, PAL, PAL-M Models
Continuous 360· Phase Control
Each 1420 Series vectorscope is a compact, halfrack width instrument designed to display vectors
of the chrominance and burst components of the
composite video signal. This series of instruments
provides an effective way to meet basic
vectorscope requirements in CCU's, VTR's, and
similar applications. This instrument is particularly
well suited for side-by-side mounting with the
Tektronix 528A Waveform Monitor.
The illuminated, parallax-free internal graticule is
designed for the vector display of color bars and
burst. A special graticule feature allows differential gain or phase errors to be determined to
reasonable accuracy for many applications within
2°and 5%. (Higher resolution differential gain and
phase measurements should be made with a
520A Series Vectorscope.)
Two signal inputs, an external subcarrier reference input, and a PAL pulse input (1421 and 1422
only) are provided on the rear panel. The "A"
signal input is equipped with a switchable attenuator and may be used for viewing large signals
such as the subcarrier signal. Selection of the
signal to be displayed and selection of the locking signal for the subcarrier regenerator are accomplished with two front panel lever switches.
On the 1421 and 1422, a push-pull switch is
provided for selection of the external subcarrier
reference signal. All models have continuous
360° phase control of the displayed signal. PAL
and PAL-M displays on the 1421 and 1422 are
switchable to an NTSC display format.
1420 NTSC Vectorscope shown side-by-side with a 528A Waveform Monitor
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
CHARACTERISTICS
Chrominance Bandwidth - Upper - 3 dB Point: Fsc
+ 550 kHz ± 100 kHz; Lower - 3 dB Point: Fsc - 550 kHz
± 100 kHz.
Vector Phase Accuracy Pull-In Range -
Within 1· .
Within 50 Hz of subcarrier frequency .
Phase Control Range goniometer.
Input Amplitude Range -
360· continuous rotation with
At least 46 dB to 5 MHz.
1 to 4 V
p-p.
Phase Shift with Burst Amplitude Change nominal burst amplitude to ± 6 dB.
Within 2· from
Phase Shift with Subcarrier Source Change Phase Shift with Input Channel Change -
Graticule -
Within 0.5·.
Within 0.5· .
Phase Shift with Front Panel Gain Change -
Within 1· .
0.5· or less.
Differential Gain -
1•
Ib
15.0
20.0
75 !l termination (011-0102-00).
ORDERING INFORMATION
1420 Vectorscope for NTSC,
(factory wired for 115 V) ..................... $2,795
1421 Vectorscope for PAL,
(factory wired for 230 V) ..................... $2,895
1422 Vectorscope for PAL-M,
(factory wired for 115 V) .•................... $3,150
Option 01 -
Vectorscope without cabinet ................... -$30
or less.
+ $65
1% or less.
AC POWER
Mains Voltage Ranges - 90 to 132 V ac, and 180 to
250 V ac. Selectable by internal plug-jumpers.
Typical Power Consumption -
45 W.
Maximum Amps at lIS V ac, 60 Hz -
0.5 A.
48 Hz to 66 Hz.
ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS
Temperature Range
Nonoperating : +40·C to + 65·C.
Operating: + O·C to +50·C .
152
6.8
9.1
8.5
5.3
18.5
Option 02 - Vectorscope with protective
carrying cabinet ..............................................................
Internal, non-parallax, illuminated.
Mains Frequency -
kg
in
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Unity to + 15.12 dB ; Uni-
Input Amplitude Range External Subcarrier -
Differential Phase -
Weight =
Net (with Option 02)
Shipping
+ 20, - 20 V.
Front Panel Gain Control Range ty to - 6 dB.
Burst Jitter -
mm
216
133
470
Width
Height
Depth
1 V ± 6 dB.
Input Dc Voltage (Maximum) -
Input Return Loss -
Dimensions
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Side-by-Side Rack Adaptor
Order 016-0115-02 .......................................................... $1aO
Blank Half Rack Width Panel Assembly
Order 016-0116-00 ............................................................ $42
Graticule External, Scaled in 8 x 10 div.
Order 331-0406-01 ......................................................... $4.65
Camera, Trace Recording Tektronix C-5C Option 01 recommended for display photos. See camera section of this catalog.
TEK
XY DISPLAY
MONITORS
~tronlX
1424
""IX$Pl""
V~TOfI
INPUTS
TAACI!
ItOTolYION IfT!RNAllY
@
·(~I~~~"1.l
sn FOR
'Uti! DATA VOLTAGI! ""NOll
~ .7AM~
. . nOll).
:.~~'
"'21 (Ill
T('LOW)
,OIo-'12(tfI _
Z,INn:HIfTY)
.. ,IIY IIIA.
0
Y!V,~~':':"L)
CAlITlON
1'1)" CONTWURO flPlI! PfIIOnCTION
ItfI"lACIONlYWITJo4210Y'UU
Of' SPEC'nlO T't'H: AND
RATING .
0
0
0
o
1424 Display Monitor rear panel
1424 xv Display Monitor
Available in NTSC and PAL Models
Half·Rack Width
Proven Performance
The 1424 XY Display Monitor provides a vector
display of the croma portion of the television
signal by utilizing the decoder in a Tektronix
650HR Picture Monitor or other suitable monitor.
By interfacing the 1424 with the proper picture
monitor, vector displays for NTSC, PAL and
SECAM color television systems can be obtained.
Dual standard displays can be obtained by inter·
facing the 1424 with a Tektronix 655HR (NTSC &
PAL) Picture Monitor or a 656HR (SECAM & PAL)
Picture Monitor.
The Z axis input allows the writing beam to be
modulated for special applications.
CHARACTERISTICS
VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION SYSTEMS
Deflection Factor
Vertical (Y): 0.100 VIcm ± 2%.
Horizontal (X): 0.100 V/c m ± 2%.
1424 XY Display Monitor shown side·by·side with a 528A Waveform Monitor
Z AMPLIFIER
Input Requirements - Input Signal: Analog input, dc to
500 kHz over a 0.0 V to + 1 V range. (Linear amplifier modu·
lates writing beam.)
Input Rand C -
100 kfl, within 10%, paralleled by ".;; 70 pF.
Signal Source Impedance Level -
,.; 1 kfl, recommended.
Circuit Response
Risetime: 150 ns or less.
Falltime: 300 ns or less.
Bandwidth -
Input Rand C -
Maximum Amps at 115 V ac, 60 Hz -
Bandwidth (X and Y) Amplifiers -
;;. 500 kHz.
Signal Source Impedance Level -
".;; 1 kll, recommended.
Mains Frequency -
XY Display Monitor without cabinet ........ -$30
• For Ampex VTRs -
AC POWER
Mains Voltage Range -
90 to 132 V ac and 180 to 250 V ac.
Typical Power Consumption -
Option 01 -
Option 04 - External SECAM/PAL Graticule,
Blank CRT .................................................................... +$100
Option 05· - Combination NTSC/PAL Internal
Graticule CRT ............................................................... +$100
Dc to 500 kHz.
Display Linearity
Vertical Axis : ,.;2% (center 6 divs).
Horizontal Axis : ,.;6% (center 8 divs).
100 kll, within 10%, paralleled by ,.;30 pF.
ORDERING INFORMATION
1424 XV Display Monitor for
NTSC/PAL •..•.••. , ..••.....••.•.•••..•...••....•..•• $2,450
check with Ampex for compatibility.
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Side·by·Side Rack Adaptor
Order 016·0115·02 .......................................................... $180
40 W.
0.52 A.
Blank Half·rack Width Panel Assembly
Order 016·0116·00 ............................................................ $42
48 Hz to 66 Hz.
ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS
Graticule External, scaled in 8 x 10 divs.
Order 331·0406·01 ......................................................... $4.65
Temperature
Nonoperating: - 40· C to + 75·C.
Operating : O· C to + 50·C.
Camera, Trace Recording Tektronix C·5C camera recom·
mended for display photos. See camera section of this catalog.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dimensions
Width
Height
Depth
Weight
Net with cabinet
Net without cabinet
Shipping =
mm
216
133
470
kg
7.0
5.9
9.1
in
8.5
5.3
18.5
Ib
15.5
13.0
20.0
153
PICTURE MONTORS
TEK COLOR
650HR High Reso/ution C%r Monitor
~
650HR
High Resolution Trinitron CRT
Variable Aperture Correction
Precise Color Tracking Over Full Signal
Range
Two Switchable Inputs Isolated From
Ground for Hum Rejection
External Sync Switching Capability
Differential (A-B) Inputs for Sync Timing and
Burst Phasing Adjustments
NTSC, PAL, and Dual Standard Versions RGB Inputs Optional
Rapid Retrace - Entire active Picture Area
Can Be Displayed in Underscan
Precision Decoding - Outputs Can be Used
to Present Vector Displays on X-Y
Oscilloscopes
Unique "Blue Only" Capability for Optimizing
VTR Settings
The Tektronix 650HR Series Color Picture Monitors are designed for exacting applications where
picture quality is particularly important. The
650HR offers the features and capabilities of earlier Tektronix 650 Series Color Monitors and adds
a high resolution Trinitron CRT and improved decoder, The improved CRT features more phos-
154
phor stripes than before, and the decoder gives
wider (1 ,3 MHz) bandwidths for even greater
detail.
The unique Blue Only mode ties the blue drive
signal to the red , green , and blue channels simultaneously, This provides a monochrome display
with a high sensitivity to VTR noise and banding
problems,
Circuits in the Tektronix 650HR Series are designed for color stability and consistency, Outputs are provided from the precision decoders
and may be used to drive an X-Y monitor for a
vector display, The regulated EHT supply is not
affected by extreme changes in APl even when
calibrated brightness, at peak white, is set at
30 fl, Raster size is held within 1%, while excellent clamping maintains a stable black level with a
0% to 100% range of APl ,
The Mode switch controls the chrominance channel activation, In the Auto mode, the chrominance
channel is activated by the presence of burst. In
the Color mode, the chrominance channel is activated whether burst is present or not. In the
Monochrome mode, the chrominance channel is
deactivated at all times,
In all Tektronix Color Monitors, you can shift the
picture either horizontally or vertically, or both
(pulse cross), This lets you monitor sync, burst,
blanking, vertical interval test and reference signals, When the monitor is operating in any of
these display modes, brightness is automatically
advanced to permit observation of the sync
pulses and burst. Expansion of the vertical scan
is provided in the pulse cross and vertical delay
modes, so you can view individual lines in the
vertical blanking inteval.
The 650HR Series Monitors can be used in rack
installations or separately in their own cabinets,
They are compact, requiring only 276 mm (10,5 in)
vertically, Versions are available for NTSC and
PAL systems , Dual standard and RGB input versions are also available,
CHARACTERISTICS
Input Signal Level - 0,5 V p-p minimum composite video 2 V
p-p maximum, (Exceeds CCIR recommendations 567, Part D
and D,2,)
Impedance - Unterminated : High Z bridging inputs loopthrough compensated for 75 n (not internally terminated), Return Loss : ;;.46 dB to 5 MHz, power on or off, input in use or
not.
Maximum Safe Input 451 -2 (±5 V peak),
Exceeds CCIR Recommendation
Hum Rejection - Hum is ;;. 50 dB down when 4 V maximum
RMS common mode mains hum signal is applied to the monitor
in floating ground mode,
NTSC Luminance Channel - Bandwidth (notch filter removed) = 6 MHz. Subcarrier notch IiIter automatically removed
when burst is not present and MODE switch is in AUTO position. Subcarrier notch filter removed when MODE switch is in
Monochrome position. Dc Restoration back porch type; not
affected by burst. Mains hum reduction due to dc restorer is
< 6 dB. Amplitude Linearity: within 2%.
NTSC Chromlnance Channel - Demodulation Axis : R-Y,
B-Y. Bandpass: 1.3 MHz equiband . Gain Range: preset at
dB ; adjustable from - 6 dB to + 10 dB.
o
PAL Luminance Channel - Bandwidth (notch filter removed)
= 6 MHz. Subcarrier notch filter can be removed by changing
internal jumper. Subcarrier notch filter normally left in circuit.
PAL Chrominance Channel Demodulation Axis: U, V.
Bandpass : = 1.2 MHz. Gain Range: Preset at 0 dB; adjustable
from - 6 dB to + 10 dB.
Residual Subcarrier Detection (on applied signal) - Color
of displayed picture will shift due to any residual subcarrier.
This feature can be inhibited by a jumper on the decoder board.
Chrominance/ Luminance < 3%.
Time Error: < 30 ns, Gain Error:
TEK
650HR
SERIES
~A)
PO WER
EXTERUAl SYNC
(8 )
0000 0000
~ III'
[IJ
[JJ
~I
0
0
FUS E
III
"'"
""'"
0
0
.. Oil "SU I
WIII'SII!
PO WER INPUT
DEGAUSS
"(111'/
!,;I lO nA,,.,,
CONvERGE NCE
~I
Al
" 011,, $1.f.",
$, &"e
0
0
0
0
HO A!lP&'UIO '&
H()lII/IUI
TAllY LIGHT
24 VOLTS
!~~ 0".'"
.. , e ' A"
BRIGHT N ESS
5011 UP
.",. (j)
1I1 05C" (("
(Qf"
0"
Rear Panel
Delay -
0
Red to green to blue < 50 ns.
Subcarrier Regeneration - Phase Error: within 1 • with input
burst variation of ± 10Hz from subcarrier nominal burst frequency. With Temperature Variation : within 5· with ambient
temperature variation from O· C to + 50 · C; with 1· , for any
+ 10· C increment within the range O·C to + 50· C. With Input
Signal Variation: within 1 0 with input s~nal variatkms of
± 3 dB from 1.0 V, within 3 · with variation of burst/sync ratio
of - 6 dB to + 10 dB. Breezeway Stability: .. 0.2· for burst
timing errors including burst width variance (8 to 11 cycles),
and breezeway variance ± 0.28 ~s . Phase Error Due to Noise:
within 1· with RMS white noise at - 24 dB (0 dB - 700 mV
RMS).
Height -
PICTURE
184 mm (7.2 in).
Width -
244 mm (9.6 in).
Underscan Aspect Ratio -
Unblanking - All active picture elements are displayed. (Horizontal retrace is accomplished within 10 ~s . )
Color Temperature standards .
6500 · K. Easily adjustable to other
Calibrated Contrast signal.
30 fL at peak white of standard 1 V
Calibrated Brightness - Displayed black may be preset to a
level appropriate for ambient conditions.
Impedance - Unterminated : High Z bridging inputs loopthrough compensated for 75 0 (not internally terminated). Terminated : 75 O. Return Loss: ... 46 dB to 5 MHz with respect to
75 fl.
H UE
0"
~ 0
C A' N
Right Panel Operational Controls - The variable
aperture control is concentric with the contrast
control.
Left Panel - Convergence is simple in the
650HR Series. Adjustments are located behind a
locked panel door.
Synchronization - Stable subcarrier regeneration, limited by
line sync performance. Une sync white noise immunity is
20 dB. Fteld sync white noise immunity is 20 dB. Field sync
stable with tilt equal to 100% of sync amplitude in vertical
blanking. Stable with 20 IRE mains hum.
AFC (Two Loop AFC Type) - Phase Corrector: Corrects for
phase errors due to side pincushion correction and other effects within the monitor. Slow AFC: Displays timing errors of
Incoming sync, particularly, 60 Hz or 240 Hz timing errors.
Bandwidth is ",,25 Hz. Fast AFC: Largely corrects for incoming
sync errors, ",,2 kHz bandwidth.
Scan Delay - Horizontal Delay: ",, ' /,Iine; displays burst. Vertical Delay: Displays the vertical blanking interval of the input
signal expanded ",,2.5 times unless underscan is activated. If
the unclerscan button is depressed, vertical expand is inhibited.
AC POWER
Mains Voltage Range - 115 V: within 10% (104 V ac to
126 V ac). 230 V: within 10% (207 V ac to 250 V ac maximum).
650HR , 650HR-1 are factory set for 115 V. 651HR, 651HR-1 ,
655HR , 652HR and 652HR-1 are factory set for 230 V.
Mains Current - 1.5 A RMS maximum at 115 V, 60 Hz.
0.75 A maximum at 230 V, 50 Hz. Current is substantially higher during degaussing.
Signal Range - Composite sync 0.5 V p-p to 8 V p-p or compoSite video 0.5 V p-p to 2 V p-p.
flUf
ONlY
@ o.
Crest Factor -
SYNC and TIMING
. . n@
0
flI VI5( II(( N
Kinescope Protection - Failure of horizontal or vertical scanning shuts off the EHT. Failure of HV Regulator circuit does not
cause EHT to soar excessively. EHT supply is current limited.
Regulated dc.
n~
UNC"~ ~V("'lO"O
o CH' O"" 0
C. ,N
0
EHT (Extremely High Tension) - 19 kV nominal, regulated .
Load variations cause < 1% picture size variation. Monitor
complies, as of date of manufacture, with applicable DHHS
standards under Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of
1968.
Heater Voltage -
....
@f"
.. ,
4:3.
Convergence Error - < 1 mm within the central area. Outside
of the central area, color separation (misconvergence) is
< 2mm.
CO NTRAST
G
C AUN SC MHN
",,20% reduction in both height and width.
Dellection Linearity - Vertical and Horizontal : 1% of picture
height within a central area bounded by a circle whose diameter equals picture height, ± 2% of picture height outside of central area.
",TI C
1n1
C A' H
... 1.3.
Degaussing Surge Current Power Consumption Mains Frequency -
5 ARMS .
150 W maximum, 110 W typical.
48 Hz to 66 Hz.
ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS
Temperature Range - Nonoperating: - 40· C to +65 · C.
Operating: O· C to + 50· C.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dimensions
Cabinet
mm
Width
Heighl
Depth
426
279
419
Rackmount
in
16.8
11 .0
16.5
mm
in
483
266
464'
19.0
10.5
18.3'
Weights
kg
Ib
kg
Ib
Net
Domestic
Shipping
Export Shipping
22.7
28.5
50.0
65.0
23.5
30.4
52.0
67.0
36.3
80.0
37.2
82.0
'With handles
650HR ORDERING INFORMATION
All 650HR Monitors are shipped with rackmounting hardware.
Cabinet version hardware is also included.
650HR NTSC ....................................... $5,650
650HR-1 NTSC + RGB ..................... $5,850
651HR PAL ....................................... _.. $5,890
651HR-1 PAL
+
RGB ............. _...... ,.... $6,130
652HR PAL-M ..................................... $6,300
652HR-1 PAL-M
+ RGB
.................... $6,530
655HR NTSC + PAL .......................... $6,530
655HR-1 NTSC + PAL + RGB ___ ._ .. _, $6,790
For Vector Display with NTSC, PAL or NTSC
+ PAL Monitor. Order Type 1424 Display Unit ....... $2,450
Altitude Range - Nonoperating: to 15 km (50,000 It). Operating: to 4.5 km (15,000 It).
Shock -
To 30 g's, ,/, sine, 11 ms duration .
155
PICTURE MONITORS
TEK COLOR
653HR C%r Picture Monitor
653HR
Color Sequencing from Field Identification
Signals or Line Burst
Precision Decoding Allows Use of R-Y, B-Y
Outputs for Vector Display Measurements
RGB Inputs with Vector Display Outputs
(Optional)
PAL/SECAM Version Available (656HR) with
Front Panel Control of Decoding Standard
Variable Aperture Correction
Vertical and Horizontal Delay Display Modes
Reduced Chrominance Line Crawl
Indicates Color Sequence Error
Rapid Retrace - Entire Picture Area is Displayed in Reduced Scan
Two Switchable Inputs Isolated From
Ground for Hum Rejection
Tektronix SECAM Color Picture Monitors are identical to the 650HR Series except they are specially designed for use on SECAM systems. They are
available in versions for SECAM (653HR), SECAM
+ RGM (653HR-1), SECAM/PAL (656HR) and
SECAM/PAL + RGB (656HR-1).
All monitors provide unique measurement possibilities and are designed for exacting applications. For example, with an auxiliary vector display , encoding tolerances (including white
reference quality) are displayed for both 75% and
25% amplitude color bars. You can observe encoder-limiting action on field identification signals
and encoder transient behavior.
Color sequencing is front panel controlled by a
three position mode switch . In the Field mode,
field identification signals are used for color sequencing and a color display is enabled by the
presence of detectable field identification signals.
In the Line mode , line burst determines color sequence, and a color display is enabled whenever
detectable SECAM subcarrier is present. Use of
the Monochrome mode blanks the chrominance
channel.
156
In the internally selectable
Forced-Color mode, the very
high limiting ratio of the chrominance channel lets you use
the Tektronix 653HR Series
monitors to search for very
small amounts of crosstalk or
other unwanted signals. By
displaying the chrominance
portion of such signals on a
brightened display, you can
easily identify the source. Two
PROMs (Programmable Read
Only Memories) are used in
the Tektronix 653HR Series
Monitors for generating accurate timing signals. Their use
eliminates the need for many
internal adjustments and possible drift related to
the timing of internal signals. One of these
PROMs is programmed with information corresponding to the lines containing subcarrier (including field identification lines) in 625/50 SECAM
systems. The monitor then serves as a check on
improper additions or deletions of lines that might
possibly occur in improperly adjusted VTRs, processing amplifiers, and switchers.
Chrominance line crawl is greatly reduced by using separate acoustical delay lines; one for O'R
and one for O'B. With front panel controls, you
can turn off luminance or chrominance, and examine each one separately. Brightness is automatically advanced for easier viewing when luminance is turned off for ex amination of
chrominance. For purity checks, you can set up
the equivalent of a flat field display by switching
luminance off in a monochrome mode (chrominance off).
The monitor's chroma control has two operating
modes. When the control is in, the chrominance is
independent of subcarrier amplitude . When the
control is out, the chrominance is proportional to
subcarrier amplitude. In the first mode, the saturation will vary with incoming video level. In the latter mode, correct saturation will be maintained for
varying signal levels. In either mode, both a preset (detent) position and a variable range are
available. Switching between the two modes in
the preset position provides an indication of abnormal chrominance or luminance amplitude.
CHARACTERISTICS
SECAM PERFORMANCE· LUMINANCE CHANNEL
Bandpass without Chromlnance Trap - (Aperture Corrector
set for 0 dB). Amplitude: ± 0.5 dB to 5 MHz. Aperture Corrector Maximum Range: 8 dB; doubled peaked at 2.5 MHz and
7 MHz; .. 3 dB between 4.0 MHz and 5 MHz.
Chrominance Filter - Subearrier Rejection: > 25 dB at 4.250
and 4.406 MHz, < - 1 dB at 5.5 MHz. NOTE: The chrominance filter is removed from the luminance channel whenever
the display is monochrome.
Pulse Distortion - < 1% tilt on 50 Hz squarewave. < 0.5% tilt
on 15 kHz squarewave.
Drift (CENTER FREQUENCY) Luminance Rejection Limiting Ratio -
Within ± 20 kHz.
> 46 dB at t5 kHz .
> 60 dB.
Ultrasonic Delay Line Error -
< 30 ns.
Crosstalk at Input to Discriminators - Between Direct and
Delayed Chrominance Signals: Alternate line crawl on display
is minimized through the use of separate delay lines for the O'R
and O'B chrominance signals.
Discriminator linearity within 1%.
Overall within ± 1%. Incremental
Demodulator Center Frequency - Clamped to crystal reference stabilized within ± 0.250 kHz.
Chrominance Sequence and Color Enable - Chrominance
sequence and enable are statistically averaged with hysteresis
for best perform3nce under poor signal-to-noise conditions.
Field Mode: Based upon field identification signals. Chrominance Amplitude: Disable when chrominance is more than
12 dB low, may be internally selected. Line Mode: normally
based upon line burst with no chrominance amplitude disable.
An internal jumper provides chrominance amplitude disable if
required .
Chrominance Unblanklng - Programmed internally according to 625 line 50 Hz SECAM standards. Field identification
signals are displayed in vertical scan delay modes.
Saturation - Selectable to treat subearrier as FM signal or to
vary the saturation with incoming chrominance level. Independent of Subearrier Amplitude: Gain Error < 3%. Dependent on
Subearrier Amplitude: Tracking error < 5% for signals within
± 3 dB to - 6 dB of normal amplitude. Chroma Control Separately Adjustable: ± 6 dB.
Cross Talk -
Between R-Y and B-Y > 40 dB attenuation.
Chrominance/Luminance Time Error - < 60 ns with properly adjusted bell filter and low frequency de-emphasis.
Sequence Error Indicator - When the front panel red light
indicates that the incoming SECAM signal has a chrominance
sequence oPPOsite to that indicated by an externally applied
7.8 kHz signal. Also when the monitor is used in the Line mode
the light will indicate when the field identification signals are
reversed with respect to the Chrominance Sequence present
during the active picture.
VECTORSCOPE OUTPUTS
Calibrated Modes (dots in boxes) - Selected by front-panel
control for either 75% color bars or 25% color bars ISECAM
and RGB only). Vector locations are within ± 2% of vector
magnitude.
Vectorscope Drive Capability - Suitable to drive 10 It of
75 !l coa xial cable (unterminated) to X·Y display.
Required X·Y Display Deflection Sensitivity both X and Y axis.
Required X-Y Display Input Resistance -
0.05 V/cm on
.. lOOK n.
RGB Vector Display - R, G, and B input signals are matrixed
to form R-Y and B-Y signals which are switched to the rearpanel vector output connectors when the RGB inputs are
selected.
RGB Matrix Error - R-Y and B-Y relative output signal amplitudes are within ± 2% of desired values when equal R, G, and
B Signals are supplied.
RGB Centering - Black level is clamped to within ± 9 mV
which corresponds to ± 1 mm in the 75% vector display.
Other Inputs and Outputs and field 1 pulse output.
7.8 kHz input, 7.8 kHz output,
ORDERING INFORMATION
653HR SECAM Monitor ......•••.•...•....... $6,900
+ RGB ..•..•...•.•••.••.
+ PAL ...••.••.••..•..••..•..
SECAM + PAL + RGB •.••..
653HR-1 SECAM
$7,140
DC Restoration - Back porch type, not affected by burst.
Mains hum reduction due to dc restorer is < 6 dB.
656HR SECAM
$7,370
Amplitude Linearity -
656HR-1
$7,590
Within 2%.
Luminance Off Facility - Displays chrominance only and
automatically advances brightness.
SECAM PERFORMANCE·CHROMINANCE CHANNEL
High Frequency De-emphasis - Matching to encoder high
frequency pre-emphasis : Error .. 0.5 dB over the range
3.9 MHz to 4.75 MHz; < 3 dB at 2.85.
Option 01 -
MiniQuick Connectors ........................... +$200
HIGH RESOLUTION
PICTURE MONITORS
TEK
690SR
Color Monitor
High-Resolution 19-in Dot-Shadowmask CRT
Precise Color Convergence
Stablized Color Balance
Rugged Modular Construction
Plug-in Interface Modules
Adjustable Picture Size and Aspect Ratio
Recommended for Critical Picture Evaluation
The 690SR is designed to meet critical needs for
picture evaluation and quality control. With a highresolution delta gun, dot-shadowmask picture
tube, and precise stable decoding circuitry, the
690SR provides faithful rendition of picture details
and ease of closeup viewing. An optional medium
resolution CRT provides tightly controlled phosphor chromaticity, uniform screen appearance,
and excellent resolution at normal viewing
distances.
With both picture tubes, Tektronix' unique color
convergence system provides accurate color registration over the entire screen (less than 0.5 mm
maximum error, equivalent to less than 0.18% of
picture height) so that fine details can be observed anywhere in the picture. Stabilized circuitry compensates for picture tube aging and maintains accurate color balance.
A logical and non-interactive set of convergence
controls makes reconvergence a quick and
straight forward task. All controls are identified by
color-coded patterns and produce a comfortable
up-down or right-left motion on the screen with
negligible interaction. Several function switches
are also located within the front drawer in the
television models (Options 01 , 02, and 11). In
general, these switches permit the 690SR to be
used either as an accurate picture/signal monitor
to display faults if they are present, or as a high
quality picture display monitor that provides a
clean picture even in the presence of signal
defects.
Front panel controls have detent positions so that
the monitor may be returned to its preset condition quickly and accurately. Adjustments for the
preset positions of front panel controls are located within the lockable front drawer together with
virtually all other adjustments needed for routine
servicing.
Picture size can be adjusted from overscan to
underscan without significant loss in convergence
or linearity. This feature makes it possible to
conduct experiments at various image sizes and
aspect ratios or to set the monitor for different
system characteristics by readjusting the size
and position controls.
White balance is adjustable to standard 06500 or
to other desired standards using controls located
in the front drawer. A Setup switch allows the
raster height to be reduced to facilitate low-Ievellight adjustments. CRT beam currents are regulated to a preset level to minimize effects of CRT
aging, helping to maintain accurate colorimetry
without frequent maintenance. Additional features in the television models include horizontal
and vertical scan delays, and pulse cross. The
CRT is automatically brightened in these modes
to facilitate evaluation of blanking interval detail.
A modular plug-in design permits the 690SR to
accommodate changes in standards, and additional plug-in modules will become available to
satisfy future needs.
All 690SR color monitors are fully enclosed and
may be mounted in a standard relay rack. The
690SR complies with UL478 and UL 1244, CSA
Bulletin 556B, IEC348, and IEC435. The 690SR
also complies, as of date of manufacture, with
applicable DHHS standards under Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968 and with
FCC/CBEMA standards for electromagnetic-interface control.
690SR OPTION 01
The 690SR Option 01 is a NTSC color monitor
system that consists of a notch filter/decoder
module (69MOO NTSC Decoder) installed in a
690SR mainframe.
690SR OPTION 02
The 690SR Option 02 is a NTSC color monitor
system that consists of a comb / notch
filter/decoder module (69MOI Comb Decoder)
installed in a 690SR Mainframe.
690SR OPTION 11
The 690SR Option 11 is a PAL color monitor
system that consists of a notch filter/decoder
module (69Ml0 PAL Decoder) installed in a
690SR Mainframe. The picture tube has controlled phosphor chromaticity values in accordance with EBU recommendations.
690SR OPTION 42
The 690SR Option 42 is a RGB color monitor
system which is suitable for television and nontelevision color graphics or imaging applications.
This system consists of a RGB module (69M41
RGB/Comp Sync Interface) installed in a 690SR
mainframe. Flexible scan rate circuitry allows the
system to be calibrated for a horizontal scan rate
from 15 kHz to 37.5 kHz and be used with either
interlaced or non-interlaced fields. (The standard
display is factory-calibrated to operate at a horizontal scan rate of 31.5 kHz.) With these scan
rates, the monitor displays from 240 to 600+
active lines, non-interlaced at a 60 Hz frame rate;
or from 480 to 1200+ active lines, 2:1 interlaced
at a 30 Hz frame rate.
157
RESOLUTION
PICTURE MONITORS
TEK HIGH
RGB INTERFACE CHARACTERISTICS
(690SR Option 42, 69M41)
RGB VIDEO INPUTS
Nominal Non-Compoalte Signal (external sync required) o V low light (black); 0.7 V high light for each RGB channel.
Nominal Composite Signal (Internal sync) - 0 V low light
(black); 0.7 V high light ; - 0.3 V sync. Sync may be present on
each RGB channei, but internal sync is taken only from green
channel.
Maximum Allowable Signal Range - Equivalent to the nominal levels :t 6 dB (0.5 to 2X nominal pop signal leveis).
Connector Type (BNC)
Input Impedance: 75 Il :t 1% loop through or switch selectable
internal termination; > 15 kll unterminated.
Return Losl - 30 dB from 50 kHz to 25 MHz; 27 dB from
25 MHz to 50 MHz.
Ac Coupled -
< 1% line-time tilt for a 64 #s line.
Back Porch Clamp Timing - Clamp is active from a minimum
of 0.54 #s to a maximum of 1.44 #s after the trailing edge of
sync; vertical serrations must be at least 1.44 #s wide, if used.
Pulle Responae -
(10% to 90%) .. 5.5 ns risetime or falltime.
SYNC AND TIMING
Input -
Internal and external sync; Jumper selectable.
External Sync Operating Inpm Range - 100 mV to 6 V pop
adjustment range with compoSite sync applied to Comp Sync
input connector.
400 mV to 8 V pop adjustment range with composite video
applied to Comp Sync input connector.
TV INTERFACE CHARACTERISTICS
(690SR Optlona 01, 69MOO; Option 02, 69M01 ;
Option II, 69Ml0 as noted.)
VIDEO INPUT
Amplitude -
0.5 V to 2.0 V pop composite video.
Connector Type -
BNC.
Return LOll - 46 dB minimum to 5 MHz loop-through compensated for 75 Il (not internally terminated).
Common-Mode Hum Rejection - 50 dB minimum (with 4 V
RMS mains hum applied to the shield and center conductor).
LUMINANCE CHANNEL
Amplitude Linearity - Within 2%.
Bandwidth -
Option 02 removed).
15 kHz to 8 MHz (with chrominance filter
Note: The chrominanc8 filter is automatically removed when
Mode switch is in Auto position and burst is not present or
when Mode switch is in Manual and Color Monochrome
switch is in Monochrome.
Aperture Corrector Range - ",,6 dB boost available at
3.5 MHz or 7 MHz depending upon an internal Jumper position.
Chrominance Rejection Dc Reatoratlon burst amplitudes.
.. 20 dB at fsc .
Back porch negligibly affected by normal
CHROMINANCE CHANNEL
Demodulation Axis
Option 01 and 02 (NTSC) Option 11 (PAL) -
R-Y, B-Y .
Option 01 (NTSC) -
Option 11 (PAL) - Auto, color (PAL Deluxe and PAL simple), and Monochrome.
3 dB down at 0.6 MHz and 10
Option 11 (PAL) - Simple Decoding = :t 1.3 MHz from fsc
to - 3 dB response; Deluxe Decoding :t o.8 MHz from fsc to
- 3 dB response.
-6 dB to + 10 dB (preset at 0 dB).
Chromlnance/Lumlnance Timing Error -
SYNC AND TIMING
Stable subearrier regeneration limited by line-sync performance; field sync stable with tilt = to 100% of sync amplitude
in vertical blanking ; field stable with 20 IRE mains hum for Option 02, and 143 mV of mains hum for Option 11 .
Modes panei.
50 ns maximum.
Internal Sync Operating Input Range - 400 mV to 2 V pop
adjustment range with composite video applied to Green input
connector.
Connector Type (BNC)
Input Impedance: 75 Il :t 1% terminated loop through or switch
selectable internal termination ; > 15 Il unterminated.
Return LOll Coupling -
30 dB from 50 kHz to 10 MHz.
Ac coupled and de restored at sync tip.
Sync Polarity -
Jumper selectable.
Horizontal Timing - RS-170, RS-330 or RS-343A sync; vertical serrated pulses and/or equalizers may be omitted ; front
porch not required (Block Sync).
Horizontal Ratel (AFC) -
Auto , color , and
Internal or external sync, selectable from the front
Input - 0.5 V to 2 V pop compoSite video or 0.2 V to 8 V pop
compoSite sync.
Return LOll - 46 dB minimum to 5 MHz ; Loop-through compensated for 75 Il (not internally terminated).
Line Sync White Noise Immunity -
26 dB.
Field Sync White Noise Immunity -
26 dB.
Horizontal Jllter - Typically 50 ns or less (SlOW AFC Mode)
with 1 RMS V of voltage mains hum, variable APL 10% to
90%, and - 26 dB white noise.
1 #s pop maximum ; typically .. 100 ns.
AFC - Switchable Slow/ Fast ; Slow AFC displays errors of
incoming sync; Fast AFC largely corrects for incoming sync
timing errors.
1.3 MHz.
Option 02 (NTSC Comb) dB down at 1.0 MHz.
:t 3%.
Options 01 and 02 (NTSC) monochrome.
Vertical Jilter -
V and U.
Bandwidth
158
Color Bar Decoding Error -
15 kHz to 10 MHz (with the chrominance filter
Option 11 - Flat within :t 1 dB from 15 kHz to 8 MHz and
:t 1.5 dB from 8 MHz to 12 MHz with the response at 15 kHz
as the reference.
Gain Range -
Blue Only - Selectable from the front panel. (When activated,
all three output amplifiers are driven with the blue signal resulting in a monochrome display. This enhances noise visibility and
is useful for checking and adjusting chroma and hue controls
using SMPTE Bar test signals. Not available in the Option 01
system).
Display Modes
(Measured with aperture corrector off).
Option 01 removed).
Residual Subcarrier Detection - 3-position switch selects to
display or not display color shift due to residual subearrier; the
third switch position causes color to shift at a 2 Hz rate for
enhanced visibility when residual subearrier is present.
Scan Delay - Horizontal Delay : ""one-third line time. Vertical
Delay: ""one-half field time. Display is intensified in delayed
scan modes to enhance blanking and sync details.
Underscan - Switchable; factory-set to reduce size by 10%;
adjustable range "" 1% to 15%.
Random Sync Jilter (p-p) Lock-In Range -
15 kHz to 38 kHz.
< 0.2% of horizontal period.
:t 500 Hz without adjustment.
Horizontal POlition Adjustment Range zontal period.
Vertical Rates -
> :t 12% of hori-
43 Hz to 90 Hz.
Vertical Sync Pulse Required Vertical Sync Random Jilter -
> 60 ItS ; < 240 #s.
0.2 ItS pop.
TEK
690 COLOR CRT SCREEN CHARACTERISTICS AND OPTIONS AVAILABLE
Dot
Pitch
Application
Information
Phosphor
Screen
Red
X
Nominal
Standard
Product
0.31 mm
0.610
Tolerance
0.43 mm
Option 26
Computer
Display
(Interlaced)
0.31 mm
0.340
0.630
Tolerance
0.340
± 0.OO5
Persistance
0.620
0.330
Tolerance
±0.02
Persistance
0.6 ms (to 10%)
Nominal
0.43 mm
Blue
Y
0.280
X
0.152
0.590
±0.02
Y
0.063
Optimized for highest resolution and
good brightness
±0.02
Medium Persistance
0.310
0.595
0.155
0.070
Optimized for good white field uniformity
Tight chromaticity tolerance
±0.OO5
± 0.OO5
Medium Persistance
Nominal
Option 27
Television
Display
(EBU)
X
±0.02
Persistance
Nominal
Option 25
Television
Display
(U.S.)
Green
y
0.640
Tolerance
0.330
±0.OO5
0.210
0.675
0150
± 0.02
16 ms
0.290
0.060
±0.02
0.02 ms
0.060
0.150
0.600
±0.OO5
±0.OO5
Medium Persistance
Persistance
Optimized for computer displays with low
refresh rates and good resolution
Less brightness than standard product
Antiqlare face plate
Optimized for good white field uniformity
Tight chromaticity tolerance
centered upon EBU spec
Note: X, Y values are based upon 1931 GIE system
Operating Temperature -
PICTURE
19 in diagonal (Nominal).
CRT Size Height -
279 mm (11 in).
Width -
373 mm (14.7 in).
Aspect Ratio -
4:3.
Geometric Distortion ± 1% within a circle bounded by
screen height ; ± 1.5% anywhere else.
Incremental Linearity Error - ± 1.8 mm ( ± 0.07 in) over a
nominal 25.4 mm (1 in) distance anywhere on the screen.
White ColOrimetry - Factory-adjusted to Standard 06500;
may be adjusted to other standards.
Contrast (light output)
Standard or Option 25 CRT: highlight preset range 10 to 50
fl, maximum control range 6 to 62 fL
Option 11 or Option 27 CRT (EBU): highlight preset range 9
to 45 fl, maximum control range 5 to 55 fL
Option 26 CRT (long persistance): highlight preset range 9 to
23 fl, maximum control range 5 to 23 fL
Determined by CRT (= 2.3).
~s.
Horizontal: < 6.75
~s .
POWER REQUIREMENTS
Input Voltage Ranges 250 V ac.
Frequency Range -
103 V ac to 127 V ac or 207 V ac to
ORDERING INFORMATION
690SR Television Color Monitor
Mainframe ........................................... $7,450
Option 01 -
69Moo NTSC Decoder Installed
Option 02 -
69M01 NTSC Comb Decoder Installed. +$900
u
u
.u uu
Width
Height
Depth
483
444
579
Weights =
kg
Net
Domestic Shipping
49.9
72.6
in
19.0
17.5
22.8
+ $700
Option 11 - 69M10 PAL Decoder and EBU Phosphor,
Medium-Resolution (0.43 mm triad pitch)
CRT Installed
$1,000
Australian 240 V/10 A, 50 Hz
Option A4 -
North American 240 V/15 A, 60 Hz
Option A5 -
Swiss 250 V./10 A, 50 Hz
NC
NC
uu uu
NC
uuuuuu
NC
uuuuuuuuuu
NC
uu u
uu u
. uu
.
uuu u
u
u
uuu u
u
'u u
u
Rigid Module Extender for circuit modules.
Order 067-0999-00
uu u
. u.u.uu uuuuuuu.Uuuuuuuuuuuuuu
Minimum Load Unit for power supply.
Order 067-0998-00
uu uu . u
uuu. u
uuuu . uuuuuuu U uu.u
Flexible Extender for interface modules/decoders.
Order 067-1000-00
uu u
uuu u
uUU'uuuu Uuuuu u
u
u
. u
$125
. U ' uU ' U uuu,u uu
$150
Linearity Graticule (NTSC) 14 x 17 lines.
Order 067-1054-00
u.u u.U uu u
uuuu.uuu.uu uuuuUU'U u
Linearity Graticule (PAL 15 x 20 lines.
Order 067-1055-00
u. Uu . uuUu uuuu. u
$175
u.
uuuuu . uuuuuuuuuuuuuu u
Linearity Graticule 11 x 15 ines.
Order 067-1034-00
$50
u.uuuu u
u
, u
U'Uuuu,uuu
$150
$150
Option 20 -
Delete rack slides and front handles
u
' u
-
$150
Option 25 - Controlled Phosphor, Colorimetry, Medium
Resolution (0.43 mm triad pitch) CRT
$250
Option 26 -
uuuu u
uuuuuu.
Long Persistence Phosphors CRT
uuuu
Option 27 - EBU Phosphors, Colorimetry, Medium
Resolution (0.43 mm triad pitch) CRT Installed
uuuu . u
Option 40' - Mainframe Only, Multirate
Calibration Capability
u.uuuuuuuuuu. U u.u uu uu uuuu ,
uu u
. u
u
u
u
. u,
-
+ $150
+ $150
+$1,000
+$1,750
Option 48' - Mainframe Only, Single Rate
Calibration Capability
NC
• 690SR OptionS 40, 42 and 48 are factory calibrated to operate at 31.5 kHz horizontal scan rate unless otherwise specified on the order and will operate at any vertical scan rate
within the specified range without special adjustment.
.uu
.uuu
Ib
69MOO NTSC Decoder ........................... $800
110
160
69M10 PAL Decorder .......................... $1,000
Rackmounting Information - Rear surface of monitor
559 mm (22 in) behind rackmounting surface, 690SR with interface module installed.
Option A3 -
uuuu u
,uu U' U ' uU ' u u u u u u u u u u u u u u u u u u u u u u u ,
uuuu uuuuuuuuuuuuuuuu u. u
mm
UK 240 V/15A, 50 Hz
uu u
uuuuuu u
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dimensions
Universal European 220 V/16 A, 50 Hz
Option A2 -
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Power cord, 8 It (161-0104-00); Slide-eut tracks (1 pair)
w/mounting hardware (351-0395-00); Front drawer keys (2)
(214-3292-00).
Option 42 ' - 69M41 RGB Interface Installed,
Multirate Calibration Capability
48 Hz to 66 Hz.
Option A1 -
Altitude - Operating: Sea level to 4500 m (15,000 It). Nonoperating: Sea level to 15 000 m (50,000 It).
u
CRT Protect - Failure of horizontal or vertical scan will turn
off CRT high voltage supply.
Vertical : .. 600
- 55·C to + 75 · C.
Relative Humidity - Operating: To 90% at + 30 · C (derated
by 0.75% for each degree above + 30· C). Nonoperating: to
90% at + 60 · C.
Convergence Error - Maximum misconvergence 0.5 mm
anywhere on the screen .
Blanking -
O· C to + 50 · C.
Nonoperating Temperature -
Phosphor Dot Triad Spacing - 0.31 mm (standard); (see
CRT OPtions for other triad spacing).
Gamma -
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORDS AND PLUG OPTIONS
ENVIRONMENTAL
MAINFRAME CHARACTERISTICS
69M01 NTSC Comb Decoder ............. $1,000
69M41 RGB Interface ............................ $750
159
PRODUCTS
TEK TELEVISION
SELECTION
CHART
NTSC SIGNAL GENERATOR SELECTION CHART
The following chart will help you select the proper NTSC generator to meet your needs. We recommend that you contact your nearest Tek sales engineer for
further assistance.
TSG7
1410 SERIES MAINFRAME
TSP1
TSG2 TSG3 TSG5 TSG6
*
VIRS
Full Field Color Bars
EIA Color Bars
SMPTE Color Bars
Color Bars/Y Reference
Color Bars/Red Reference
Color Bars/Reverse
Red Field
SPG1
SPG2
·
·
·
·
·
·
1900
1900
147A
149A
1900
OPT 01
OPT 02
VITS
ONLY
VITS
ONLY
..
..
..
..
..
..
·
·
··
·
·
·
·
Green Field
Modulated 5-Step Staircase
Modulated 10-Step Staircase
Modulated Ramp
Modulated Pedestal
.
Convergence Signal
·
··
Blue Field
Composite Test Signal
1470
·
··
·
·
Black Burst
Full/Reduced Amplitude Multiburst
Frequency Sweep
·
·
·
·
Sin2 Pulse and Bar
Sin2 Pulse and Window
Modulated Pulse and Modulated Bar
Field Square Wave
Noise Measuring Capability
·
·
.
*1
·
·
·
·
Flat ReldNariable Level
APL Bounce (AC)
APL Bounce (DC)
Test SignalNariable APL
Multipulse
·
·
·
..
..
•• *2
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
• • *4
·
·
..
..
..
..
•• *3
•• *3
*1
*1
*1
·
·
·
·
·
·
*5
*5
..
..
..
·
..·
·
·
·
..
·
·
··
·
Sin X/X
..
..
MATRIX
•• *6
NTC? Combination
Digital Signal Generation
Ext VIT Input
YES
Digital Input/Output
RS232 Programmability
RS 1?OA Standard Output
·
.
·
·
·
.
A few signals may require reprogramming and some signals may not be available simultaneously.
Test Signals:
*1 Window only.
*2 Unmodulated.
*3 Reduced only.
*' NTC? Composite Test Signal.
*5 10,50,90 only.
*6 Specify 149A Opt 01 .
• Full-Reid Signal.
•• Full-Field Signal, also available as VITS.
As a line 19 signal on the Black Burst output.
*
160
YES
·
*5
..·
YES
YES
Yes
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
·
·
·
TEK
1410
SERIES
Test Signal Generators
1410 NTSC/1411 PAL/1412
PAL-M
Two Sync Generators
Subcarrter Input - Amplitude: 1.0 V to 4.0 V pop. Frequency:
4.43361875 MHz ± 10Hz . Return Loss : .. 46 dB to
4.43361875 MHz.
AC POWER (1411, 1412)
Mains Voltage Range - 100 V ac: 90 to 112 V ac. 120 V ac:
106 to 132 V ac: 180 to 224 V ac. 240 V ac: 212 to 250 V ac.
Maximum Power Consumption -
Six Test Signal Generators and One
Switcher
Mains Frequency -
130
w.
47 to 63 Hz.
ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS (all 1410 Series)
Temperature Range
Operating: O·C to 50 · C.
The 1410 NTSC, 1411 PAL, and 1412 PAL-M Series Sync Pulse and Test Signal Generators are
functionally identical within the specifications of
each television system .
Each series provides a wide selection of sync
pulse and test signal generators that can be combined with the mainframe in the color standard of
your choice.
The mainframe unit for each generator series includes the power supply, an extender board, an
interface board, and color-standard circuitry. Two
color-standard circuits are available for the 1410.
The standard 1410 Mainframe generates chrominance subcarrier at 3.579545 MHz ± 10 Hz. An
Option 01 Mainframe generates chrominance
subcarrier at 3.579545 MHz ± 1 Hz. The color
standard circuitry for the PAL 1411 Mainframe
has a chrominance subcarrier frequency of
4.43361875 MHz ± 1 Hz. The color standard for
the PAL-M 1412 Mainframe has a chrominance
subcarrier frequency of 3.57561149 MHz ± 1 Hz.
Unless otherwise indicated by a statement enclosed by parentheses ( ). all information characteristics and descriptions of the 1410 NTSC
Series and its generators applies equally to
equivalent mainframes or generators for the
1411 PAL and 1412 PAL-M Series. Information
in parentheses applies only to the specified
series.
CHARACTERISTICS
(1410 MAINFRAME)
Subcarrier Frequency - 3.579545 MHz ± 10Hz.
Option 01: 3.579545 MHz ± 1 Hz.
Pull-In Range -
Fsc ± 50 Hz. Option 01 fsc ± 20 Hz.
Storage: 40·C to + 65·C.
Amplitude Range
Operating: Sea level to 4500 m (15,000 ft).
Storage: Sea level to 15 200 m (50,000 ft).
PHYSCIAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dimensions
Width
Height
Depth
mm
in
482.6
88
487.7
19.0
3.5
19.2
Weight (w/Plug-Ins)
kg
Net =
Rackmount
9.7
13.8
Ib
21 .2
30.0
SAFETY CERTIFICATIONS (all 1410 and 1411 Series)
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.: Usted, 242T; Canadian Standards Association: Certified, LR37158; International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC 348): Certified by Tektronix. Inc.
SPG1, SPG11, SPG12 and
SPG2
Sync Pulse Generators
Sync to Subcarrier Phasing Maintained or
Corrected
Color Frame Reference Output
Genlock to Composite Video
(SPG2, SPG12)
Lock to External References
Adjustable Blanking Widths
Broadcast Quality
Subcarrier Input Requiremenll - Amplitude: 1.0 V to 4.0 V
pop. Frequency: 3.579545 MHz ± 10Hz.
Subcarrter Input Return Los. -
.. -46 dB to 3.579545 MHz.
Main. Voltaga Range. - 90-112 V ac. 106-132 V ac, 180224 V ac and 212-250 V ac. Factory set at 106-132 V ac.
Power Consumption Main. Frequency -
130 W maximum.
50-60 Hz.
(1411, 1412 MAINFRAMES)
1411 Subcarrter - Frequency (fsc): 4.43361875 MHz ± 1 Hz.
Drift .. 1 part in 10' per week. Pull-In Range: fsc ± 20 Hz.
1412 Subcarrler - Frequency (fsc): 3.57561149 MHz ± 1 Hz.
Drift: .. 1 part in 10' per week . Pull-In Range: - fsc ± 20 Hz.
In the external reference mode , line , field ,
subcarrier, and PAL pulse timing is derived from
individual reference signals appl ied to the
generator.
The sync-to-subcarrier (SCH) phasing can be set
or maintained at any offset. This is made possible
by locking the generator color subcarrier to the
reference color subcarrier and referencing generator-line and field-sync-signal timing to subcarrier
rather than line and field sync on the incoming
reference signals. This feature is of value in
editing and program assembly applications. A
color frame identification pulse output identifies
field 1 of the color field sequence. Should the
user desire, the SCH phasing feature of the Sync
Pulse Generator can be disabled with a front panel control. In this mode of operation the SCH
phasing of the incoming signal is maintained by
locking subcarrier to incoming burst or subcarrier,
sync to incoming sync.
A slow gen-Iock mode is provided for those applications where fast-lock may upset the system.
The slow-lock selector is located on the generator
card sets.
Genlock or external reference lock mode selection may be remotely controlled. Remote manual
phasing of the SPG11 or SPG12 signal to an external source is possible in the internal mode. Vertical and/or horizontal timing are altered as in slow
lock operation . Front panel LED's are used to indicate generator lock status.
Internal adjustments permit some variation of
burst and blanking widths on the burst flag , comp
blanking, and black burst outputs. These adjustments are preset to conform to recognized standards. You can reduce widths initially to allow for
the widening that sometimes occurs when the
video signal is processed.
The SPG 1, SPG 11 , SPG2, SPG 12 provide a black
burst output independent of all other outputs. For
NTSC systems, the Vertical Interval Reference
Signal (VIRS) is factory programmed on line 19,
field 1 and 2 of the black burst when selected by
a front panel switch on the SPG 1 and SPG2. VIRS
can be selected on line 18 if desired.
The SPG1 (SPG11) and SPG2 (SPG12) are high
quality sync generators designed for use in systems where accuracy, stability sync to subcarrier
(SCH) phasing capability, and lockup mode versatility are of prime importance.
Two external synchronization modes, external reference or genlock, are available. In the genlock
mode (SPG2, 12 only), line, field, subcarrier, and
PAL pulse (SPG12 only) timing are derived from
the incoming composite video signal.
161
SYNC AND TEST SIGNAL
TEK GENERATORS
o
SYNC GENERATOR
BLACK
BURST
SIGNAL
Bur.t Flag - Delay From Line Sync: adjustable. Duration:
2.51 ~s ± 50 ns (9 cycles of subearrier, adjustable).
Horizontal Line Drive - Duration : start of line blanking to end
of line sync ± 100 ns. Output Level into 75 n : 4 V ± 5%.
Vertical Drive ± 5%.
PH AlE
HO.Ul
UNLOCk
OUTPUTS
VI . .
•
COMP lLANKINO
Duration: 9 lines. Output Level Into 75 n: 4 V
Field REF - Position: field one, line 11 or field three, line ten.
(internally selectable).
VIR Signal - Chrominance: amplitude 286 mV ± 2.85 mV
(40 IRE); phase within 0.5· of burst ; envelope risetime Sin'
shaped, 1 ~s ± 150 ns. Luminance: setup level 53.57 mV
± 3.57 mV (7.5 IRE ± 0.5 IRE); gray level 357 mV (50 IRE
± 0.5 IRE); chroma pedestal 500 mV ± 5 mv (70 IRE ± 0.7
IRE); risetime and falltime Sin' shaped, 250 ns ± 39 ns.
The SPG2 and SPG12 Sync Generators have gen./OCk capabil.
Black Burst - Setup 53.57 mV ± 3.57 mV (7 .5 IRE ± 0.5
IRE).
COMPOSITE VIDEO OUTPUT (SPG1, SPG2)
ity. The almost identical SPGI and SPGII do not.
Total Amplitude -
1 V into 75
Sync Amplitude -
- 285 mY. ± 2.86 mY.
1"02 IJIInc
CHARACTERISTICS
SYNC GENERATOR OUTPUTS
Output Level (into 75 n) ± 0.2 V.
Return Lo,. -
1 V, 2 V, or 4 V (selectable)
GEN·LOCK (SPG2 ONLY)
75
n
loop.through with return loss
Input Requirement. - 1 V nominal composite video or black
burst, sync negative. Sync Amplitude: 286 mV ± 6 dB. Burst
Amplitude: 286 mV ± 12 dB. Burst Sync Ratio: within 6 dB.
Subearrier Phase Range -
360· via front.panel goniometer.
Line Sync Delay Range - Adjustable to advance output sync
... 1 0 ~s or delay ... 4 ~s (internal adjustment). A front panel
screwdriver adjustment provides a delay/advance range of
± 0.5 ~s .
Stability (over ambient temperature range O·C to 50·C) Line Lock : Within 70 ns. Subearrier Lock : Within 35 ns.
Field/lrame Sync - Fast Lock: Direct.acting in one field .
Slow Lock : One line/field slew.
EXTERNAL REFERENCE (SPG1 / SPG2)
Input Configuration .. - 46 dB to 5 MHz.
75
Blanking Dc Level Isolation -
Risetime and Falltime SPG11 / SPG12 -10% to 90%. (Linear
Ramp) Normally set to 2 V, 250 ns. Other values internally
selectable.
Input Configuration ... - 46 dB to 5 MHz.
Paak Level Amplitude -714.3 mV ±7.14 mY.
Return Loss -
... 30 dB to 5 MHz.
n
loop.through with return loss
0 V ± 50 mV.
... - 30 dB.
Field Period Line Period -
16.68 ms.
63.56
~s .
Risetime and Falltlme Front Porch Duration set.
Comp Sync Input Requirements p.p. Polarity: negative.
Amplitude: 2.0 V to 8.0 V
130 ns, + 20, - 10 ns.
Adjustable, 1.6
Line Blanking Interval Breezeway -
~s
Adjustable 10. 7
± 100 ns, factory
~s,
factory set.
800 ns-3135 ns.
Burat - Risetime and Falltime: 400 ns ± 60 ns. Delay From
Line Sync: 5.309 ~s (19 cycles of subcarrier) ± 35 ns.
HAD of Envelope Amplitude -
2.51 ~s (9 cycles of subearrier) ± 70 ns.
285.7 mV ± 8.75 mV . Phase 180· .
GEN LOCKS (SP012 ONLY)
Input Configuration -
75
n loop.through.
Input Requirement, - Sync Source: 1 V nominal composite
video or black burst, sync negative. Sync Amplitude: 300 mV
± 6 dB. Burst Amplitude: 300 mV ± 12 dB. BursVSync Ratio:
within 6 dB. Return Loss : ... 40 dB to 7 MHz.
Loss of Lock - Indicated by front·panel LED's (automatic
switching to full or partial internal).
360· via front.panel goniometer.
Line Sync Delay Range - Internal switch sets delay range to
+ 10 ~s, - 4 ~s. Front panel range ± '/, ~s .
Subearrter Stability (over ambient temperature range 0 to
50·C) - Line Lock: Within 70 ns. Subearrier Lock: within
35 ns.
Loss of Lock - Indicated by front.panel LED indicators. Automatic switching to partial or full internal reference.
Horizontal Jitter .. 4 ns.
Subearrier Stability -
Field/Frame Sync - Fast Lock : direct acting in 1 field ± 1 line
time off·set provided. Slow Lock: 1 line/field slow.
Ouput follows input.
Line Sync Delay Range - Adjustable to advance output sync
... ,0 ~s or delay ... 4 ~ s (internal adjustment). A front panel
screwdriver adjustment provides a delay/advance range of
± 0.5 ~s .
Subcarrier Phase Range -
360 · via front.panel goniometer.
OUTPUTS (SPG1 / SPG2)
Subearrier - Amplitude: 2 V p.p into 75 n . Return Loss:
.. 30 dB to 5 MHz.
Composite Sync - Equalizing Pulse Duration : 2.3 ~s
± 100 ns. Field Sync Duration: 27.0 ~s ± 200 ns. Interval Be·
tween Field Sync Pulses: 4 . 7 > ~s ± 100 ns. Line Sync Dura·
tion: 4.7 ~s ± 100 ns. Return Loss: ... - 30 dB to 5 MHz. Iscla·
tion: ... - 30 dB. Output Level into 75 n : 4 V ± 5%. Risetime
and Falltime: linear ramp, 10% to 90% time 140 ns ± 20 ns.
Jitter -
Linelock : .. 10 ns. Subearrier Lock : ",4 ns.
Comp Blanking - Line Blanking Duration: 10.7 ~s nominal,
adjustable 9 to 12 ~s . Field Blanking Duration: 20 lines nomi·
nal, adjustable 16 to 21 lines. Output Level into 75 n: 4 V
± S%.
162
Line Lock : .. 10 ns. Subcarrier Lock :
EXTERNAL REFERENCE INPUTS SPGll , SPG12
Input Configuration -
75 n Ioop.through.
Subcarrter Input Requirement, - Amplitude: 1.0 V to 4.0 V
p.p. Frequency : 4.43361875 MHz (3.57561149). Return Loss:
... 46 dB to 4.43361875 MHz (3.57561149 MHz).
Comp Sync Input - Amplitude: 1.0 V to 8.0 V p.p. Polarity:
negative.going. Return Loss: ... 40 dB to 7 MHz (46 dB to
5 MHz).
Lo., of Lock - Indicated by front·panel LED indicators. Automatic switching to partial or full internal reference.
Subearrter Stability -
Output follows input.
Line Sync Delay Range - Internal switch sets delay range to
+ 10 ~s, - 4 ~s . Front Panel Range to ± '/, ~s .
Chroma Phase Range -
Field Sync Pul •• Duration sured at 50% points.
360 · via front.panel goniometer.
PAL Pulse Input - Amplitude: 1.0 to 8.0 V p.p, negative going. Waveshape: pulse or squarewave. Timing: pulse duration
... 4 ~s. Squarewave Rate: H/2. Phasing: pulse·negative going
transitions coincident with start of line sync on either a + V or
- V line. Return Loss: ... 40 dB to 7 MHz (46 dB to 5 MHz).
2.30 ~s (2.38 ~s) ± 100 ns.
27.2
~s
(27.0 ~s) ± 100 ns. Mea·
Interval Between Field Sync Pul.e. sured at 50% points.
Field Period Line Period -
~s
Lin. Sync Duration Jitter -
4.8 ~s ± 100 ns. Mea·
20 ms (16.68 ms).
64
(63.56
4.7
~s) .
~s
±100 ns.
.. 4 ns.
Comp Blanking - Line Blanking Duration: 12.0 ~s (11.1 ~s)
nominal, adjustable 9 to 12 ~s . Measured at 50% points, Field
Blanking Durations: 25 (21 lines nominal, adjustable 16 to 25
(21) lines.
Burat Flag - Delay from Line Sync: Adjustable. Duration:
3,6 ~s (2,51 ~s) ± 100 ns (adjustable),
Horizontal Drive - Duration: Start of line blanking to end of
line sync ± 100 ns, or line sync time.
Vertical Drive - Duration: Starts at Vertical blanking: 7 'I, (9)
lines. Starts at Vertical Sync: 5 lines.
Field Reference -
- 40 dB.
Chromo Phase Range -
Subearrier Input Requirements - Amplitude: 1.0 V to 4.0 V
p.p. Frequency: 3.579545 MHz ± 10Hz. Return Loss: ... 46
dB to 3.579545 MHz .
n.
COMP SYNC SPGll, SPG12
Equalizing Pul.e Duration Measured a1 50% points.
Position Field 1. Line 7 (8).
PAL Pul .. , Phasing - Negative transition coincident with
leading edge of line sync on either + V or - V lines. Factory
set to + V. Duration: 4.7 ~s , within 0.2 ~s . Level: 2 V 75 n at
H/2 Rate.
PAL Pulse Squarewave - (May be internally selected in place
of pulse.) - Level: 1 V, 75 n, H/2 rate. Phasing Transition is
coincident with leading edge of line sync. Polarity may be high
or low during - 135· burst lines.
V/2 - Level: 1 V, 75 n. Rate: 25 (30) Hz squarewave. Phasing: positive during fields 2 and 4 (1 and 3). V/4 Level: 1 V,
75 n. Rate: 12.5 Hz (15 Hz) squarewave. Phasing: positive duro
ing fields 1 and 4 (1 and 2). 64H Level: 1 V, 75 n. Frequency:
1 MHz (1 .006993 MHz).
Subcarrter - Amplitude: 2 V p.p ± 10% 75
... 30 dB to 5 MHz. Isolation: ... 40 dB.
n. Return
Loss:
Black Burat Amplitudes - Sync: - 300 mV ± 3 mV from
blanking. Burst: Absolute 300 mV ± 9 mV. Relative: alternate
burst amplitudes equal within 1%. Blanking Level : 0 V
+50 mY . Setup Level: 0% setup (50 mV ± 2.5 mY).
COMPOSITE VIDEO SPG11, SPG12
Amplitude - Sync: - 300 mV ± 3 mV from blanking . Setup
Level: 0% setup (50 mV ± 2.5 mY). Pedestal: 175 mV ± 5 mY .
Burst: absolute, 300 mV ± 9 mY. Relative: alternate bursts are
equal within 2%. U and V Components: equal within 1%.
Blanking level 0 V ± 50 mV .
Timing - Line Blanking Interval: 12.05 ~s ± 250 ns. Front
Porch: ... 1.40 ~s . Sync Risetime: 250 ns ± 50 ns. Sync HAD:
4. 7 ~s ± 100 ns. Breezeway: 800 ns typical. Burst Delay:
5.6 ~s ± 100 ns or 25 cycles of subcarrier. Burst Risetime:
350 ns ± 50 ns. Burst Envelope HAD : 2.25 ~s ± 230 ns. Line
Period : 64 ~s. Field Period: 20 ms.
Bur,t Phase - +135 · and -135 · on successive lines. Angle
Between Bursts: 90· ± 1 • .
Return Los, -
... 30 dB, f < 5 MHz.
I,olatlon - ... 40 dB.
TEK
1410
SERIES
The /RED switch selects a split-field display of
color bars, as in /Y REF, followed by red chrominance. (Same phase and amplitude, and at the
same luminance level as the red bar.) Use this
signal for adjusting VTR playback controls. Head
equalization errors and noise are easily spotted
on a red field . Other bar colors can be chosen by
internal programming. The signal is also remotely
switchable to color bars/white.
TSG7 Color Bars Generator
TSG7 (TSG11)
Color Bars Generator
Color Bars Signals
EIA (TSG7 only)
Fixed Full Field (TSG11 only)
Full Field with Switchable Components
75% or 100% Amplitude
Split Field/Y Reference
Split Field/Red
Split Field Bars/Bars Reversed
The TSm and TSG 11 provide high-quality full
field and split field color bars for the 1410 NTSC
and 1411 PAL Series. The TSG7 (TSG11) operates independently from any other test signal installed in the mainframe with generator card sets.
Its output is available simultaneously with all other
test signal outputs. One of the sync pulse generators must be installed in the mainframe to drive
the TSm (TSG11).
The composition of the TSG7 can be altered by
switching off Y, B-Y, R-Y, Burst, and Sync. For the
TSG 11 , this same change is made by switching
off the Y, U, V, U & V, components of Burst and
Sync. You may also select fixed or alternating R-Y
(V) subcarrier phase, bar amplitude, white reference, and setup level (or pedestal).
The IY REF switch selects a split field display of
color bars in the same sequence as full field , followed by the luminance portion of the color bars
for the remainder of the field . The split can be '12
or 3/. field as selected by internal programming in
the sync pulse generator. With this signal , you
can check chrominance to luminance delay and
picture monitor gray scale tracking while simultaneously evaluating color performance.
The/REVERSE switch selects a split field display
of color bars as in /Y REF, followed by color bars
in a reverse sequence. That is black, blue, red ,
magenta, green, cyan, yellow, white. This signal
helps detect chrominance to luminance delay
while vi ewing the kinescope of a color
monitor/receiver . Reverse bars are also useful in
detecting VTR velocity errors.
The TSG7 (TSG 11) will produce color bars VIT on
any VIT line desired. (VIT signals cannot be inserted on the program line. Use a 147A, 149A or 1900
for insertion of VITS on a program line.)
CHARACTERISTICS
(TSG7)
luminance Signal Accuracy - Within 1% or 1.5 mV, whichever is greater.
CONVERGENCE
0
V.RTlCAL POSITION •
HOR"ONTAl PosmON •
DOTS .
CROSSHATCH
HOAI ZONTAL U NES •
TIG2 Nne
TEKTAONllIIt
TSG2 Convergence Generator
TSG2 and TSG12
Convergence Test Signal Generators
Dots and Crosshatch
Dots Only
Vertical Lines Only
Chrominance Accuracy - Absolute Amplitudes: within 3%
(all subcarrier components). Relative Amplitudes: within 1% of
the red chrominance bars or 1 mV plus p-p residual subcarrier
amplitude, whichever is greater.
Horizontal Lines Only
Full Field Displays - Bar Width: 6.45 I's. White Bar Risetime:
130 ns, +20, - IOns. Time Difference Between Chroma and
lum Channels: .. 20 ns.
Position Controls
TSG11
luminance Component Accuracy level, which is greater.
The TSG2 and TSG 12 provide high-quality convergence test signals for the 1410 NTSC and
1411 PAL Series respectively. You can use them
to determine picture monitor or camera scanning
linearity, aspect ratio, and geometric distortion.
Signals for the TSG2 conform to IEEE Standard
Within 1.5 mV, or 1% of
Chrominance Component Accuracy - Absolute Amplitudes:
±3%. Relative Amplitudes: Within 1% of red bar, or 1 mV plus
p-p residual subcarrier, whichever is greater.
Bar Width -
6.5 I'S + 325 ns.
202.
luminance Riaetlme < 20 ns.
115 ns ± 15 ns . C/l DELAY -
Chromlnance Riaetime -
350 ns ± 50 ns.
U,
v
Quadrature Error -
< 0.5° .
V Axis Phase Switch Error Split Field Displays selectable in SPG.
Vertical and Horizontal Lines
< 0.5°.
Split is '/2 -
'/2 or 31. - 'I. internally
Fixed Full Field Display - Amplitude: 75%. Pedestal: 0%
(Setup 5%). White Reference: 100%.
Provision is made in the TSG2 and TSG12 for
on/off switching of the dots, vertical lines, and/or
horizontal lines and for positioning vertical and
horizontal lines. The signal output is located on
the rear panel of the mainframe in which the test
signal generator is installed. The convergence
signal output is available simultaneously with all
other test signal generator outputs.
A sync pulse generator must be installed in the
mainframe for TSG2 and TSG12 operation.
CHARACTERISTICS
(TSG2, TSG12)
Displaya Available - Crosshatch, vertical lines only, horizontal lines only, dots only, and crosshatch plus dots (dots appear
centered in the rectangles formed by the crosshatch pattern).
Horizontal and vertical positioning.
Convergence Pattern - Setup: 7.5 IRE ± 1. Sync Amplitude:
40 IRE ± 2. Peak level : 77 IRE ±3. Risetime and Falltime:
135ns ± 15.
COMPOSITE VIDEO (TSG12)
Dlsplaya Available - Vertical lines, horizontal lines, dots or
any combination of these (dots appear centered in the rectangles formed by the crosshatch pattern).
Rlaetime and Fantlme (125 ns ± 20 ns).
Pulses and setup 115 ns ± ns
CompoSite Video Amplitude - Sync: - 300 mV ± 3 mV from
blanking. Blanking level: 0 V ± 50 mY. Setup level: 0% setup
(50 mV ±2.5 mY). Pulse Amplitude: 525 mV (537.5) ±2S mY.
163
SYNC AND TEST SIGNAL
TEK GENERATORS
LINEARITY
0
With the switch set to dc bounce, ac bounce
occurs as described above. In addition, the entire
signal changes dc level in the opposite direction
at the same rate resulting in no change in average dc level. Clamp circuits may be checked
using dc bounce.
The modulated pedestal, a unique, Tektronixdeveloped chroma-step signal, facilitates measurement of luminance signal distortion caused
by the subcarrier signal (chrominance-Iuminance
inter-modulation), and chrominance nonlinear
gain and phase distortions.
CHARACTERISTICS
TSG3, TSG13, and TSG23
Linearity and Modulated Pedestal Test
Generators
5 and 10 Step Staircase Signal
Ramp Signal
2 Modulation Amplitudes
(TSG3, TSG13)
Luminance Component - Peak Amplitude : 714 mV
±7.14mV. 5 Step Amplitude: 143 mV. 10 Step Amplitude:
71 .5 mV. Aberrations: within 2% of step amplitude. Step Risetime: 250 ns ± 39 ns between steps within 1%.
180' Subcarrier Component - Absolute Amplitudes : ± 3%.
Relative Amplitudes: ± 1%. 20 IRE: 143 mV ± 3%. 40 IRE:
285.7 mV ± 3%.
Subcerrier Envelope - Risetime: 400 ns ± 60 ns. Duration:
47.7 ..s. Delay from Une Sync: 9.93 .. s.
Differenllal Ph..e APL.
One-or-Three Level Modulated Pedestal
Differential Gain -
Flat Field with 11 Fixed Levels
Modulated Pedestal 1 Level -
Ac and Dc Bounce
3 Level. -
O. l' or loss at 10%, 50%, and 90%
0.5% or less at 10%, 50% and 90% APL.
90' Subcarrier. Amplitude.
5 to 20 IRE (internally adjustable).
You can select the 5 step and 10 step staircase
signals and the ramp signal with or without 180°
subcarrier modulation for NTSC, or U subcarrier
modulation for PAL and PAL-M. The subcarrier
amplitude is front panel selectable at 20 IRE or
40 IRE on the TSG3, or at 140 mV and 280 mV on
the TSG13 and TSG23. Applications include measuring differential phase and gain, dynamic gain,
luminance linearity, and burse phase errors.
With the TSG3, the flat field signal can be used
on all active picture lines with levels set by the IRE
Level control, or flat field on four lines can be
alternated with one line of linearity or modulated
pedestal (90° subcarrier). When using the alternate mode APL is controlled by the IRE level
control.
The ac Bounce position of the IRE level switch
(TSG3) or the peak white switch (TSG13, 23)
percentage provides a signal in which the active
portion of each line (excluding sync) changes
APL levels at a rate determined by the rate
control (1 to 30 second intervals).
For the TSG, amplitude of the bounce excursions
is fixed at 0 to 100 IRE in flat field mode and 10%
to 90% APL in alternate modes. Blanking level
remains fixed at 0 V. To check ac coupled
circuitry use ac bounce.
164
Pulse and Bar Overlay
Full and Half Amplitude Pulse and Bar
Field Squarewave and Window
Modulated Pulse and Modulated Bar
Front Panel Selection of 2T, T, and T/2 Pulse
Width and Bar Risetime
20, 40, and 80 IRE.
COMPOSITE VIDEO (TSG13, TSG23)
The TSG3 (TSG13, 23) provide high-quality linearity and modulated pedestal test signals for the
1410 NTSC, 1411 PAL, and 1412 PAL-M, respectively. Combine variable APL with either of these
signals to measure nonlinear distortions. The
TSG3, TSG13 an TSG23 generators operate independently of all other test signal generators installed in the mainframe, while its rear panel
output is available simultaneously with all other
test signal generators' outputs. One of the sync
(pulse) generators must be installed in the mainframe to drive the TSG3, TSG13, or TSG23.
TSG5 and TSG15
Pulse and Bar Generators
Luminance Riselime -
250 ns ± 50 ns.
Five·step Signal- Step Amplitudes Nominal: 140 mV. Relative: largest within I % of smallest.
Ten·step Signal - Step Amplitudes Nominal: 70 mV. Relative: largest within I % of smallest.
Ramp Signal- Uneanty: ± 1%.
Linearity Subcarrier - Amplitudes: 140 mV ± 3%. 280 mV
± 3%. Differential Gain: .. 0.5%. Phase: 180' ± I '. Differential
Phase: O. l ' Start: 6t after To. Stop: 29t after To. Risetime:
350 ns ±50 ns (400 ns ± 60 ns).
t = 2 ....
Flat·fleld Signals - Pedestal Start: 5t after To. Stop: 311
after To. Flat Field Subcarrier: One level. Start: 6t after To.
Stop: 29t after To. Three-level: Amplitudes absolute 140 mV
±3%; 420 mV ± 3%; 700 mV ± 3%. Relative Percentage:
within I % of the largest chrominance amplitude, or 1.5 mV plus
residual subcarrier amplitude, whichever is greater. Risetime:
350 ns ± 50 ns (400 ns ± 60 ns). Phase 90 ' ± 2' , internally
adjustable to 60' ± 3·. Phase Error: Largest amplitude to
smallest .. 0.5 ' .
Bounce Modes - Ac: rate, '/", to 'Iz Hz. Dc: rate, slow '/", to
'Iz Hz. Dc Rate, Fast Selectable: line rate, field rate, or frame
rate. Offset: 418.6 mV for 10% to 90% APL bounce.
The TSG5 and TSG15 are sin2 pulse and bar television test signal generators designed for use
with the 1410 NTSC and 1411 PAL mainframes,
respectively. They're well suited for testing on
equipment manufacturers' production lines and
for testing of television transmitters, common carrier microwave and wire lines, and studio distribution systems. Front panel controls provide most
test signal options, while internally selectable options provide additional versatility.
The pulse and bar test signal consists of a sin 2
modulated pulse, a sin 2 pulse, and luminance bar.
The pulse and bar overlay mode lets you conveniently compare pulse to bar ratio without manipulating waveform monitor controls.
The inverted and non-inverted 2T pulses may be
overlaid to compare shape and half amplitude duration (HAD). This capability is particularly useful
in detecting quadrature distortion which results
from envelope detection of the RF modulated video signal. The pulse and bar test signal is also
useful in measuring line time and short time
distortions.
For sin2 pulse signals, three self-cancelling switches permit independent selection of pulse half amplitude duration (2T, T, T/2) independent of bar
risetime. In the bar mode, four self-cancelling
switches permit selection of luminance bar
risetime (2T, T, T/2) or modulated bar.
Full or half amplitude pulse and bar test signals
can be provided with or without pedestal or setup
(the TSG15 does not offer setup capability). For
the TSG5, full amplitude is 100 IRE units with no
setup. Half amplitude is 50 IRE with no setup. For
the TSG15, full amplitude is 100% (700 mV) with
no setup. Half amplitude is 50% (350 mV) with no
setup.
TEK
1410
SERIES
The luminance pulse, luminance bar, and luminance components of the modulated pulse and
modulated bar may be switched off to provide
chrominance pulse and chrominance bar. The
chrominance pulse and bar may be placed on a
pedestal (50 IRE for the TSG5, 50% for the
TSG15) to prevent chrominance from extending
below blanking level.
Use the standard field squarewave (with full
amplitude and no setup) to measure field time
distortion, and the window signal to measure line
time distortion and picture monitor smearing. You
can switch the color burst off without affecting
the chrominance components of the test signals.
Use the TSG5 (and TSG15) for measuring overall
gain , transient response , line and field time tilt,
and chrominance to luminance delay and gain.
Full
Amplitude
714.3 mV
±7.1 mV
Half
Amplitude
3.57.1 mV
± 3.6 mV
Modulated
Ba. Amplitude
Setup 011
P-P
Chrominance
357.1 mV
± 3.6 mV
178.6 mV
± 1.8mV
714.3 mV
±14.3 mV
357.1 mV
±7.1 mV
714.3 mV
± 7.1 mV
714.3 mV
±1 0.7 mV
714.3 mV
± 10.7 mV
714.3 mV
± 14.3 mV
714.3 mV
± 7.1 mV
357.1 mV
± 5.4 mV
357.1 mV
± 7.1 mV
357.1 mV
± 7.1 mV
347.1 mV
±1 4.3 mV
357.1 mV
± 5.4 mV
Pul.e to Ba. Ratio
2T
- 2T
T
T/2
1:1
1:1
1:1
1:1
1:1
1:1
1:1
1:1
Modulated Pul.e
to Modulated Ba.
1:1 ± 0.01
Pul.e Amplitude
Setup 011
2T
-2T
T
T/2
Modulated
luminance Pulse
2T
T
T/2
Chrominance-luminance Gain: 3.5 mV maximum amplitude difference of peak chrominance and peak luminance.
250ns ± 5%
125ns ± 5%
62.5 ns ± 10%
0.5%
1.0%
2.0%
Delay' 5 0 ns maximum
Modulated Pul.e
12.5T
20T
1562.5ns ± 5%
2500 ns ± 5%
1.0%
1.0%
Ba.
Rlsetlme
Overshoot
Detail
2T
T
T/2
12.5T Modulated
20T Modulated
UneTiit
241 .1 ns ±10%
120.5 ns ± 10%
60.3 ns ± 15%
1506.8ns ±1 0%
2410.9 ns ± 10%
0.5% maximum
0.5%
1.0%
2.0%
1.0%
1.0%
Window
± 0.005
± 0.01
± 0.01
± 0.02
± 0.01
± 0.02
± 0.02
± 0.04
1:1 ±0.02
Modulated Pul.e and Ba.
Ch.ominance-luminance Gain: 3.6 mV maximum amplitude diffe.ence of peak chrominance and peak luminance.
Ba.
2T
T
T/2
lOT Modulated
20T Modulated
UneTilt
Overshoot
200 ns ± 5%
100 ns ±5%
50 ns ±10%
0.5%
1.0%
2.0%
1000 ns ±5%
2000 ns ±5%
1.0%
1.0%
RI.etlme
Ove.shoot
192.9 ns ± 10%
94.9 ns ±10%
48.2 ns ±15%
964 ns ± 10%
1929 ns ±10%
0.5% maximum
0.5%
0.5%
2.0%
1.0%
1.0%
Field Tilt: 0.5% maximum.
Window
Field Squa.ewave
line Timing: Ba. Timing
Amplitude: 714.3 mV ± 14.3 mY.
Field Timing: White lines 65 to 270 each field
Field Timing: White lines 75 to 206 each field.
Field Tilt: 0.5% maximum.
Field Tilt: 0.5% maximum.
Field Squa.ewave
Setup
Amplitude: 700.0 mV ± 14.0 mY.
Amplitude: 53.6 mV ± 1.6 mV (7.5% or 7.5 IRE).
Field Timing: White lines 65 to 220 each field.
Risetime Timing: 130 ns + 20 ns - IOns. F.om 1410 mainframe Horizontal and Vertical Blanking.
Pedestal
Pedestal
Amplitude luminance Off or Half Amplitude: 357 .1 mV
±7.1 mV (50 IRE).
Phase Modulated 360· at
Optional Subcarrier Harmonics: Fixed phase. At least 40 dB
down.
Field Tilt: 0.5% maximum.
Amplitude luminance 011 or Half Amplitude: 350.00 mV
± 7.0 mV (50%).
TSG15 CHARACTERISTICS
luminance Ba.
Amplitude
Full
Amplitude
Half
Amplitude
700.0 mV
+7.0 mV
350.0 mV
+5.3 mV
350.0 mV
± 3.5 mV
175.0 mV
±1.8mV
700.0 mV
± 14.0 mV
350.0 mV
±7.0 mV
700.0 mV
± 7.0mV
700.0 mV
±10.5 mV
700.0 mV
±10.5 mV
700.0 mV
±14.0 mV
700.0 mV
±7.0 mV
350.0 mV
±5.3 mV
350.0 mV
±7.0 mV
350.0 mV
±7.0mV
340.0 mV
±14.0 mV
350.0 mV
±5.3 mV
1:1
1:1
1:1
1:1
1:1
1:1
1:1
1:1
Modulated
Ba. Amplitude
Luminance
P-P
Chrominance
Pul.e Amplitude
2T
- 2T
T
T/2
Modulated
Delay Residual: 5 ns maximum.
Subca.rie. Phase Factory Set field rate.
luminance Pul.e
2T
T
T/2
Modulated Pul..
lOT (12.5T)
20T
Half Amplituda
Du.atlon (HAD)
Field Timing: White lines from line 67 to line 218 each field.
(TSG5)
Luminance
Ove •• hoot
Une TIming: Ba. Timing.
CHARACTERISTICS
luminance Ba.
Amplitude
Setup 011
Modulated Pul.e and Ba.
Half Amplitude
Du.atlon (HAD)
Pulse to Ba. Ratio
2T
-2T
T
T/2
Modulated Pulse
to Modulated Ba.
± 0.005
± 0.01
± 0.01
± 0.02
1:1 ±0.01
±0.01
±0.02
± 0.02
± 0.04
1:1 ±0.02
165
SYNC AND TEST SIGNAL
TEK GENERATORS
CHARACTERISTICS
TSG8
TSG16
High Range
Low Range
Multiburst
Frequencies
,."a..:t
TIG.
NTac
IUIST
TlKT"Oflill . .
TSG6 and TSG16
Multiburst Signal Generators
Multiburst Signal
Controlled Risetime Burst Packets
Last Burst Frequency Variable
Manual and Field Swept Frequency Signals
to 20 MHz
Markers for Both Frequency and Amplitude
Reference
Amplitude (First
Multiburst Packet)
Full
Reduced
Flatness, Reduced
and Full
Packet Envelope
Risetime
Burst Phasing
Sweep/Manual
Sinewave
Frequencies
Start
Stop
Amplitude at
First marker
Full Reduced
F1atnesso,
Full and Reduced
Marke,.
Frequencies
Full and Reduced Amplitude on all Signals
The TSG6 and TSG 16 are television multiburst
and video sweep test signal generators designed
for the 1410 NTSC and 14f1 PAL mainframes,
respectively. They feature front-panel controls for
most test signar options, plus special Remote
functions for additional versatility. The TSG6 and
TSG16 can be used in many testing applications,
including equipment manufacture and microwave
or 10ng-ITne transmission systems.
Performance advances include reduction in harmonic content of sinewave signals and skirt
energy associated with gating burst packets.
Phase modulation of the burst packets aids ease
of measurement by filling in shape of packets.
Two ranges of multibursf frequencies are available: the 000 kHz to 4.1 MHz (TSG6) range aids in
testing television transmitters and common carrier
links, while the 1.25 MHz to 12 MHz range is used
in testing television studio equipment and
cabling.
Use these new generators where nonlinearities
make reduced amplitude test signals desirable.
The reduced ampITtude multiburst signal allows
accurate testing of video tape recore/playback
systems, since it is not subject to the false
distortion of the full amplitude multiburst that
often occurs in such applications.
Using the front panel controls, you can select a
high-or low-frequency band for each operating
mode: Sweep, Manual, or Multiburst, Sweep arlows selection of field sweep signal with or
without markers. Markers inserts amplitude/
frequency markers in Sweep, and amplitude
markers in Composite/Manual. Burst allows
insertion/deletion of color burst on composite
video for use with systems that operate differently when burst is present. Composite/Continuous
determines where sync, blanking, and a pedestal
will be added to the sweep and manual signals.
Manual selects a fixed-frequency sinewave with
frequency determined by the Frequency control
and Frequency Range switch. Amplitude allows
selection of either fun or reduced amplitude in all
operating modes, Multiburst selects ITne-rate discrete-frequency packets with reference insertion
levels.
166
Multibu,.t/Manual
(Last Burst Variable
Mode)
Frequency Range
Start
Stop
Accuracy
Amplitude
(Markers & Pedestal
all Modes)
Markers Relative
to Pedestal Lavel
Full
Reduced
Pedestal Level
Full
Reduced
Risetime
Harmonic Dlltortlon
(Single Frequency
Relative to
Fundamental
500 kHz ± 3%
1.25 MHz ± 3%
2.00 MHz ± 3%
3.00 MHz ± 3%
3.58 MHz ± 3%
4.10 MHz ± 3%
1.25
3.50
5.50
8.00
10.0
12.0
643 mV (90 IRE) ± 20 mV
428 mV (60 IRE) ± 12 mV
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
± 3%
± 3%
± 3%
± 3%
± 3%
± 3%
1.00
3.00
5.00
8.00
10.0
12.0
643 mV ± 25 mV
428mV ± 16mV
700 mV ± 21 Mv
420 mV (60 IRE)
700 mV ± 28 mV
420mV ± 16mV
10 mV or less
16 mV or less
10 mV or less
17.5 mV or less
400 ns ± 60 ns
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
± 3%
± 3%
± 3%
± 3%
± 3%
± 3%
400 ns ± 60 ns
400 ns ± 60 ns
400 ns ± 60 ns
Phase shifted at field rate to provide filled-in burst packets.
100 kHz minimum
6'MHz ± 1()%
330 kHz minimum
20 MHz ± 10%
100kHz minimum
6 MHz ± 10%
330 kHz minimum
20 MHz ± 10%
643 mV ± 20 mV
428 mV ± 12 mV
643 mV ± 25 mV
428 mV ± 16 mV
700 mV ± 21 mV
420mV ± 12mV
700 mV ± 28 mV
420 mV ± 16 mV
10mV
15 mV to 12 MHz
20 mV to 20 MHz
10mV
17.5 mV to 12 MHz
21.0 mV to 20 MHz
1.0 MHz ± 3%°,
2.0 MHz ± 3%0'
4.0 MHz ± 3%0'
6.0 MHz ± 3%0'
8.0 MHz ± 3%0'
10.0 MHz ± 4%0'
12.0 MHz ± 4%0'
14.0 MHz ± 6%"
16.0 MHz ± 7%"
18.0 MHz ± 7%0'
20.0 MHz ± 7%0'
500 kHz
1.0 MHz
2.0 MHz
3.0 MHz
4.0 MHz
5.0 MHz
< 3.8 MHz
> 4.5 MHz
± 0.2% short term
< 14 MHz
20 MHz ± 10%
± 1% short term
< 5.0 MHz
> 6.0 MHz ± 10%
± 0.2% short term
< 14 MHz
20 MHz ± 10%
+ 1% short term
± 321 mV ± 1%
± 214 mV ± 1%
± 321 mV ± 1%
± 214 mV ± 1%
± 350 mV ± 1%
± 210 mV ± 1%
± 350 mV ± 1%
± 210 mV ± 1%
393mV ± 1%
286mV ± 1%
250 ns ± 50 ns
393 mV ± 1%
286 mV ± 1%
250 ns + 50 ns
350mV ± 1%
350mV ± 1%
250 ns ± 50 ns
350 mV ± 1%
350mV ± 1%
250 ns ± 50 ns
- 44 dB, 0.3 to
4.2 MHz
- 40 dB, 0.1 to
0.3 MHz
- 40 dB, 4.2 to
6.0 MHz
- 38 dB, 0.33 to
6.0 MHz
- 36 dB, > 6 to
20 MHz
43 dB, 300 kHz
5.0 MHz
- 40 dB, 100 kHz to
300 kHz
- 40 dB, 5.0 MHz to
6.0 MHz
- 30 dB, 330 kHz
56.0 MHz
- 36 dB, 6 MHz to
20 MHz
500 kHz
1.0 MHz
2.0 MHz
3.0 MHz
4.0 MHz
5.0 MHz
± 3%0'
± 3%0'
± 3%0'
± 3%0'
± 3%0'
± 3%0'
Above 10 MHz, difference frequency between markers is 2 MHz ± 400 kHz.
OJ Maximum-minimum
High Range
500 kHz ± 3%
1.00 MHz ± 3%
2.00 MHz ± 3%
4.00 MHz ± 3%
4.80 MHz ± 3%
5.80 MHz ± 3%
" Within one television line either side o( the marker.
02
Low Range
diode detected peak-tlHJ8ak voltages.
± 3%0'
± 3%"
± 3%"
± 3%0'
± 3%"
± 3%0'
1.0 MHz ± 3%0'
2.0 MHz ± 3%0'
4.0 MHz ± 3%0'
6.0 MHz ± 3%0'
8.0 MHz ± 3%0'
10.0 MHz ± 4%0'
12.0 MHz ± 4%0'
14.0 MHz ± 6%0'
16.0 MHz ± 7%0'
18.0 MHz ± 7%' 2
20.0 MHz ± 7%0'
SYNC AND TEST SIGNAL GENERATORS
ORDERING INFORMATION
1410
TEK SERIES
Convergence Pattern
Large squares
Small Squares
Vertical Lines
Une to Une Duration
6.36 ~s
3.18 ~s
Position Range
;;'6.4
Number per Field
TSP1, TSP11 and TSP21
Switchers and Convergence Generators
Single Switchable Output for Two to Six
Generated Signals
Blanking, Sync and Burst Insertion for
External Signal
Matrixing - Eight Programmed Display
Formats to up to Six Sequential Signals
Convergence Border
Convergence Key
Crosshatch or Dots
Combined Crosshatch and Dots
The TSP1, TSP11, and TSP21 combine the capabilities of a test signal switcher and convergence
signal generator in a single unit. They simplify and
expand the uses of the 1410 NTSC, 1411 PAL
and 1412 PAL-M Series Generators, respectively.
From a single, electronically switched output, you
have access to all the test signals (from two to
six) generated by the card sets in the mainframe.
Meanwhile, you may continue to use the individual generator card sets' parallel outputs, so no
restrictions are imposed on an established system . As an added feature, one of the input
signals can be external (composite or
noncomposite). All of the switcher inputs are
provided with clamp circuitry.
Eight different matrixes are stored in the PROM.
This signal matrixing capability, combined with
the full-field mode of the TSP1 (TSP11, TSP21)
presents several combinations of signals sharing
the full field display.
Most of TSP1 (TSP11 , TSP21) switching functions
can be remotely controlled through the 1410,
1411, and 1412 mainframe's Remote connector
J41 .
CHARACTERISTICS
TSPll SWITCHER
Input Signal
Amplified Limits: 1.4 V p-p.
Input Return Loss: ;;.30 dB, to 5 MHz.
Input Isolation: ;;.50 dB, internal inputs.
Input Impedance: 75 n.
~s
8.9
;;.3.2
~s
16-17
Pulse Duration
225 ± 40 ns
225 ±40 ns
Horizontal Linea
Une-to-Une Duration
35 lines
17 lines
Position Ranges
;;.35 lines
> 16 lines
Number per Fleid
6.7
13-14
Height
2 lines/frame
2 linesllrame
Dots
Width (HAD)
225 ns ± 40 ns
350 ns ± 50 ns
Height
2 lines/frame
3 lines/frame
Switcher Output Signal
Timing : Same as inputs, delayed by 10 ns (10-20' of
subcarrier).
Amplitudes: Within 2% of inputs.
Blanking de Level: 0 V ± 100 mY.
Relative Blanking Level : Within 15 mV, between signals.
Added Olstortlon
Noise: < 60 dB, to 5 MHz.
Residual Subcarrier: < 1 mY.
Differential Gain: < 0.5%.
Differential Phase: < 0.3%.
Luminance Linearity: 1%.
Pulse to Bar Ratio: 2T: 1:1 ± 0.5%.
Tilt: < 1%, line or field .
Flatness: 1% to 5 MHz, 2% to 10 MHz, 4% to 20 MHz.
Clamping
Aberrations: < 10 mV, at burst gate time.
Output Return Loss: ;;.30 dB to 5 MHz.
CONVERGENCE - (TSP", TSP21)
Convergence Signal Line and Dot Pulses
Amplitude: 525 mV ±25 mV (537.5 mV ± 25 mY). Horizontal
Une Bar Amplitude: within 1%.
Risetime and Falltime: 115 ns ± 15 ns (125 ns ± 20 ns).
Setup
Amplitude: 0% (Selectable 50 mV ± 5 mY).
ORDERING INFORMATION
The 1410 NTSC and 1411 PAL Sync Pulse and Test Signal
Generator Series card set construction allows you to order lust
the capabilities you need while leaving roorn for future expansion. For easy ordering of a 1410 or 1411 Generator, follow the
steps listed here.
I .Select the functions you need. Choose from two mainframes
for the 1410 (NTSq and for the 1411 (PAL), two sync pulse
generators, five test signal generators and one switcher. Put
together any combination you desire. See typical packages
information where X indicates installed and tested together.
2. If your order dIoes not consist of Options 02, 03, or 04 for the
mainframe selected, you can still order a test signal generator that has been tested and calibrated as a package. It is
only necessary to add the words ' Option 88' following each
alternate plug-in designation on the purchase order to ensure shipment as a single-unit package.
3. If you already own a 1410 or 1411 Mainframe and are adding
functionS , you need order only the generator required.
Do not order Option 88 when adding to a mainframe package you already own.
4. If you are ordering more than one 1410 or 1411 Generator
package on the same purchase order, be sure to indicate the
appropriate optionS and/or functions to be included in each
package.
5. For information on the 1412 Option 04 PAL M generator
please contact your Tektronix representative.
6. Add the suffix letters C or R for cabinet or rackmount configurations as: 1410C or 1411 R, etc.
1410C NTSC Mainframe
(Cabinet Version) ................................. $1,830
1410R NTSC Mainframe
(Rackmount Version) ........................... $1,830
Option 01 - ± 1 Hz Color Subcarrier Frequency
Accuracy...................................................................... + $405
Option 02 - NTSC Package Installed and
Tested Together ......................................................... +$2,750
Option 03 - NTSC Package Installed and
Tested Together ......................................................... +$5,880
Option 04 - NTSC Package Installed and
Tested Together ....................................................... +$1 0,310
141OC/1410R NTSC PACKAGES
TYPICAL SYNC & TEST SIGNAL GENERATOR PACKAGES
Option 02 Option 03 Option 04
SPG2 (Sync Generator)
TSG2 (Convergence)
TSG3 (Unearity)
TSG5 (Pulse and Bar)
TSG8 (Multiburst)
TSG7 (Color Bars)
TSPI (Switcher)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
ALTERNATIVE SYNC GENERATOR PACKAGES
Master sync genertor without gen-Iock . Color standard
± 10 Hz :
Order 1410C or 1410R Generator Option 88
and SPGl Sync Generator Option
$4,450
Master sync generator without gen-Iock , Color standard
± 1 Hz:
Order 1410C or 1410R Generator Option 01 + Option
and SPGl Sync Generator Option
$4,855
aa .......................
aa .......................
aa
ALTERNATIVE SYNC AND TEST SIGNAL GENERATOR
PACKAGES
Master sync generator with gen-Iock. Color standard ± 10Hz.
Select from test signal generators and switcher as required
and:
Order 1410C or 1410R Generator Optlon 88 and
SPG2 Gen-Lock Sync Generator Option
$4,940
Select from :
TSG3 Linearity Generator Option 88 ......................... $1,220
TSG5 Pul.e and Bar Gene..tor Option
$1,810
TSG8 Multlburst Generator Option
$2,230
TSG7 Color Bars Generator Option 88 ..................... $1,750
TSPI Switcher Option 88 ........................................... $1,540
aa .............
aa ................
aa .......................
1411C PAL Mainframe
(Cabinet Version) ................................. $2,245
1411R PAL Mainframe
(Rackmount Version) ........................... $2,245
Option 02 - PAL Package Installed and
Tested Together ......................................................... +$2,880
Option 03 - PAL Package Installed and
Tested Together ......................................................... +$5,575
Option 04 - PAL Package Installed and
Tested Together ......................................................... +$9,945
1411C/1411R PAL PACKAGES
TYPICAL SYNC & TEST SIGNAL GENERATOR PACKAGES
Option 02 Option 03 Option 04
SPG12 (Sync Generator)
TSGll (Color Bars)
TSG12 (Convergence)
TSG13 (Unearity)
TSG15 (Pulse and Bars)
TSG18 (Multiburst)
TSPll (Switcher)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
ALTERNATIVE SYNC GENERATOR PACKAGE
Master sync generator without gen-Iock :
Order 1411C or 1411R Generator Option
and
SPGll Sync Generator Option
$4,885
aa
aa .............................
ALTERNATIVE SYNC & TEST SIGNAL
GENERATOR PACKAGES
Master sync generator with gen-Iock. Select from test signal
generators and switcher as required and:
Order 1411C or 1411R Generator Option
and
SPG12 Gen·Lock Sync Generator Option 88 ........... $5,380
Select from:
TSG11 Color Bars Generator Option 88 ................... $1,505
TSG13 Linearity Ganerator Option
$1,230
$1,805
TSG15 Pul.e and Bar Generator Option
TSG18 Multiburst Gene.. tor Option 88 ..................... $2,230
TSPll Switcher Option 88 ......................................... $1,545
aa
aa .......................
aa ..............
There are many other 1410 and 1411 Test Signal Generator
packages available. Choose the combination that best suits
your needs. A Tektronix Television Sales Engineer will gladly
assist you in selection of test signal generator packages.
OPTIONAL ITEMS (FOR ALL CONFIGURATIONS)
One Wide Blank Panel Order 333-2171-00 ................. $1.35
Conversion kit for SMPTE Bar. for
TSGI Module Order 040-1010-00 .................................. $375
167
NTSC
TEK GENERATORS
1470
SERIES
CHARACTERISTICS
1474
SYNC GENERATORS OUTPUTS (1470/1474)
Horizontal Blanking - Leading Edge: 2.2 ~s to 0.6 ~s before
the leading edge of sync. Trailing Edge: 9.1 ~s to 10.7 ~s after
the leading edge of sync.
Horizontal Drive - Leading Edge: 2.2 ~s to 0.6 ~s before the
leading edge of sync.
Vertical Blanking - 20 or 21 lines.
Subcarrier Phase Controls - Composite Test Signals: SuDcarrier 1 and 2. Blackburst: Independent adjustment range of
,.,120· , and jumpers allow a full 360· shift in 90· steps. GenLock Master: Independent 360· front panel adjustment and
100· remote control, via a rear-panel BNC connector.
1474 NTSC Color Sync Generator
-- .
. . ... .
- 8
1470 NTSC Color Sync and Test Signal Generator
I
i
•
3
•
1474 Rear Panel
•
•
•
•
•
-i
• • •i . .i.•.-.-.-.,=-.
....
••
-
.~'::~
•
...
-. '-;;;'~ - .
.... ::....
1470 Rear Panel
1470/1474
Full Color Sync Generator with Gen-Lock
Locks to Most Helical Scan VTRs
Simple to Operate
Compact and Economical
Full Selection of Sync and Timing Signals
Simplified Timing Via Multiple Subcarrier
Phasing Controls
The 1470 Sync and Test Signal Generator is a
compact, full color, gen-Iock sync generator providing a full selection of high quality test signals.
The 1474 is identical in performance to the 1470
with the exception of test signals which, in the
interest of economy, are not included. Both products have color gen-Iock compatible with composite video from all normal sources including
most helical scan video tape recorders.
The 1470 and 1474 can operate as master-sync
generators or as units fully or partially timed from
external sources. Color gen-Iock capable of locking to most helical scan VTRs is a standard
feature.
Front-panel pushbutton selection of external synchronization is provided. In external mode, the
1470 and 1474 automatically lock on composite
video (1 V), composite sync (-4 V), or reference
subcarrier (2 V). Two front-panel lights show
subcarrier and/or sync external lock. Lights outs
indicate a switch to internal standard.
1470 Test Signal Functions
To simplify your test Signal selection and speed
testing operations, the 1470 has push button selection of test signals. All test signal push buttons, except the color field selectors, are self-cancelling. Each test signal provides aberration-free
transitions and accurate flat levels.
Color Bars
The 1470 provides full-field color bars signals useful for color monitor adjustments, VTR tape lead
in, and system checks.
Color Fields
Red, green, and blue color-field signals are provided for checking purity on color
monitors/receivers that do not have individual gun
on/off controls. These signals may also be used
to provide a color background source. The red ,
green, and blue selectors may be used simultaneously to provide yellow, cyan, magenta, and
white full field signals.
Linearity (Staircase)
Staircase signal with selection of high, medium,
or low APL. Staircase subcarrier may be switched
on or off from the front panel.
Test Signals
Test Signals available include: Window, Convergence Multiburst.
Window signals are suitable for measuring both
line time and field time distortion. Convergence
test signals are used to check color monitor convergence and linearity, and camera scanning linearity. Multiburst signals are used to check system frequency response.
Both the 1470 and 1474 are configured for
rackmounting and are shipped ready to install in a
19 in rack.
The GV3257 A Changeover Unit is compatible
with the 1470 and 1474.
GEN-LOCK
CompOSite Sync - Output level into 7511: 4 V ± 0.5 V. Risetime and Falltime: 140 ns nominal.
CompOSite Blanking - Output level into 75 11: 4 V ± 0.5 V.
Field Blanking Risetime and Falltime: 140 ns nominal.
Vertical Drive - Output level into 7511: 4 V ± 0.5 V. Risetime
and Falltime: 140 ns nominal. Duration: 9 lines.
Horizontal Drive - Output level into 7511: 4 V ± 0.5 V. Risetime and Falltime: 140 ns nomir,.. 1. Duration: 6.35 ~s.
Burst Gate - Output level into 75 11: 4 V ± 0.5 V. Delay from
line sync: 5.1 ~s ± 0.1 ~s . Risetime and Falltime: 140 ns nominal. Duration: 2.5 ~s ± 100 ns.
Subcarrier Output level into 75 11: 2 V. Frequency :
3.579545 MHz ± 10Hz.
Black Burst - Sync amplitude into 7511: 40 IRE. Burst Amplitude: 40 IRE (286 mV peak-to-peak). Burst Frequency :
3.579545 MHz ± 10Hz.
Gen-Lock Signal Loop Input - Composite Video Input
Range: 0.5 V to 1 V when loop-through connectors are externally terminated into 75 11. Comp sync 1 to 4 V, ref subcarrier
1.5 to 2 V p-p.
TEST SIGNAL OUTPUTS (1470)
Test Signal Generator Outputs CompOSite Video - Return
Loss: .. 30 dB to 5 MHz. Output Level into 7511: 1 V. Sync: 40
IRE, ± 1 IRE (286 mV nominal amplitude). Peak Video Level:
± 100 IRE, ± 2 IRE (714 mV nominal amplitude). Blanking dc
Level : 0 V, ± 50 mY.
NTSC Color Bars - Full Field: 75% amplitude, 100 IRE white
reference, 7.5% setup. Luminance Signal Accuracy: Within 2%.
Chrominance Signal Absolute Amplitudes: Within 3% (all suDcarrier frequency components).
Window Amplitude - 100 IRE, ±2 IRE. Duration: 25.8I's,
± 3%. Starts at line 66 in each field and ends at 218 in each
field . Risetime: 150 ns nominal.
Crosshatch Pattern or Dots - Setup: 7.5 IRE ± 1 IRE. Peak
Level : 77 IRE ± 2IRE. Risetime and Falltime: 150 ns nominal.
Multlburst - White Reference Amplitude: 100 IRE ±2% IRE.
Mulliburst Amplitude: 50 IRE ± 2% IRE. Average Level: 55 IRE
± 1 IRE. Multiburst Frequencies: 0.5 MHz, 1.5 MHz, 2.0 MHz,
3.0 MHz, 3.58 MHz, 4.2 MHz.
Staircase Luminance Component - Five Step Amplitude
(each step): 20 IRE ± 1 IRE (143 mV). Staircase Amplitude:
100 IRE ± 2 IRE (714 mY). Aberrations: Within 2% of step
amplitude. Step Risetime: 150 ns nominal.
Staircase Subcarrier Chrominance Component - Amplitude: 40 IRE ± 1 IRE (286 mV p-p). Phase: 180·. Differential
Phase: < 0.3·. Differential Gain: < 0.5%. Subcarrier Envelope
Risetime: 400 ns nominal.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
1470 Power Requirements - 115 V or 240 V line voltage,
high-low ranges. Selection switches for line voltages and
ranges are accessible internally. Factory set to 120 V. 120 V
Range - High, 108 V 10 132 V; Low, 95 V to 110 V. 240
Range - High, 216 V to 250 V; Low, 198 V to 242 V. Line
Frequency: 50 to 60 Hz. Power maximum: 50 W. 1474 Power
Requirements - 115 V: 90 to 130 V. 240 V: 198 V to 250 V.
Power: Maximum 40 W.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
1470
Dimensions
mm
Width
Height
Depth
Weights
Net
Shipping
483
89
483
kg
4.9
7.8
1474
In
19.0
3.5
19.0
Ib
10.8
17.2
mm
483
44
483
kg
4.2
8.1
in
19.0
1.7
19.0
Ib
9.2
17.9
ORDERING INFORMATION
M~gk~~~~tf~~:.~~~.~~~~.~.i~.~~~.~~~?rl~~t60
Option 01 -
Sync Generator Without Gen-Lock ....... - $245
1474 Color Sync Generator
(Rackmount) ........................................ $1,965
Option 01 -
Sync Generator Without Gen-Lock .. ___.. -$245
GV3257A Automatic Change Over Unit $1,600
168
TEK
SECAM TEST
SIGNAL GENERATOR
FILTUa
IDENT
BeCAM
TEaT .IDNAL. GENERATOR
•
F--"'~
143 SEGAM Test Signal Generator rackmount version.
•• • • • • • •
•• ."e i i
CONY(AOEN CI
-RED--GAEEN-- BLUE-- FIELD--lINE
L...oRlve-J
LSPARE...J
SPARE
12.5 Hl
7' kHz
COMPOSITE COMPOSITE COMPOSITE
G
TEKTRONIX , INC .. BEAVERTON, ORE. US'A
L-----~L----------OUTPUT S
NN
I Al.
10DY
TOR FOR
AN
·ll0Y
lAMP
SLOW
120 V
108- 132 V
220V
198- 242V
240 V
•
216- 250 V
BLOW
05AMr
SLOW
IIlOW
47-63 Hz
100 VA MAX @ 50 Hz
Rear Panel. BNG connectors are standard, miniQUIGK connectors are available (Option 01).
143
Broadcast-Quality Gen-Lock Sync
and Test Signal Generator
CompOSite color Bars, Convergence Patterns, and RGB Color Bar Signals
Provisions to Modify Test Signal
Components
The Tektronix 143 SECAM Test Signal Generator
provides all the test, sync, and drive signals required to align and maintain SECAM television
equipment. You can easily control all test signal
components and synchronization modes from the
front panel. Easy-to-change internal programming
provides additional test signal capability to satisfy
your unique testing requirements.
Test signals provided by the 143 are fully-encoded color bars, convergence pattern, and RGS
color bar signals. You can select color bars in
either a full-field or split-field configuration. Amplitude, white level, and chroma sequence can be
changed from the front panel. You can also
switch off the D'R, D'S and Y signal components
individually using front panel controls.
The convergence pattern consists of movable
vertical and horizontal lines plus dots. All three
signals are available in any combination. A 7 x 9
or 14 x 17 crosshatch pattern may be internally
selected.
The 143 may be operated from its own internal
standards or gen-Iocked to a SECAM composite
video signal. Color lock may be referenced to either the vertical identification signals or the line
burst. Front panel LEDs indicate the gen-Iock
status.
Additional outputs provide useful auxiliary signals
including line and field drive, line and field
blanking, composite sync, and two specialized
output signals. These two signals are a 12.5 Hz
squarewave (for identification of the SECAM four
field sequence), and a 7.8 kHz squarewave (for
synchronizing a waveform monitor to view either
D'S or D'R lines only, while the 143 is generating a
complete test signal). As a special convenience,
the two unmodulated carrier (rest) frequencies
are brought out to the front panel. It's easy to
verify 143 calibration whenever routine maintenance or recalibration is performed.
RGS color bars signals are available from three
separate rear-panel outputs at all times and are
independent of the position of the front panel
controls.
169
TEST
SIGNAL GENERATOR
TEK SECAM
Figure 2
Figure 1
VECTOR
DISPlAY
B-Y
653HR
WAVEFORM
SECAM
SECAM
MONITOR
ENCODER
ENCODER
COMPVIDEO
Encoder luminance level and encoder subcarrier setup test configurations
SYNC AND BLANKING
Line Frequency Line Period -
64
15.625 Hz ±O.oool%.
~s
± O.OOOI%.
Line Sync - Pulse Duration: 4.7 ~s ± 0.2 ~s . Pulse Amplitude: - 300 mV within 1% from blanking dc leVel. Front Porch:
1.5 ~s ± 0.3 ~s . Pulse Risetime (10 to 90%): 0.2 ~s ± 0.02 ~s .
Interval (sync leading edge to end of subcarrier blanking):
5.6 ~s ± 0.2 ~s .
Line Blanking within 100 mY.
Duration : 12
Field Frequency Field Period -
~s
± 0.3
~s .
Dc Level: 0 mV
50 Hz.
Equellzlng Pulae Duration -
2.35
Equalizing Sequence Duration -
~s
27.3
Field Synchronizing Sequence Duration Field Synchronizing Rlsetime ±0.02 ~s .
2.5 lines.
(10 to 90%) - 0.2
Field Blanking - Duration: 1.6 ms + (12
Level : 0 mV within 100 mY.
~s
± 0.3
~s) .
~s
Dc
GEN-LOCK
Sync Source - Nominal 1 V composite video. Input configuration 75 0 loop-through. Return Loss: ~ 46 dB to 5 MHz.
< 0.6 s.
D'R'D'B Lock-Up Level to -18 dB of nominal.
Subcarrier amplitudes from + 6 dB
D'R'D'B Drop-Out Level of nominal.
Subcarrier amplitudes < - 18 dB
D'R'D'B Acquisition Time - Une: < 100 lines (referenced to
line burst). Field: < 300 ms (referenced to field identification
signals).
Pedestal -
dB to 6 MHz.
0 V.
Sync Amplitudes -
300 mV ± 5%.
Retum Loss -
Identical to blanking for the Compos12 ~s ± 0.3
4.7
~s .
1.6 ms + (12
~s
± 0.2
~s
± 0.3
~s) .
~s .
5 lines.
12.5 Hz Squarewave - Rep Rate: 1 cycle/4 fields (12.5 Hz).
Levels: Ground for fields 1 and 2, negative for fields 3 and 4.
7.8 kHz - Rep Rate: 1 cycle/2 lines (tranSition at leading edge
of line drive). '-.evels: Ground for D'R, negative for D'B.
Isolation -
Subcarrier Output frequency counter).
Outputs -
D'R'D'B Subcarrier: ",, 1 V into 50 0 (for
COMPOSITE VIDEO
Full-field or split-field color bars or test pattern.
Retum Loss -
~ 36
dB to 7 MHz.
Isolation Between Outputs -
~ 40
~ 46
Rlsetlme of Subcarrier Envelope at Blanking ± 100 ns.
dB (refer400 ns
Chrominance/Lumlnance Timing red-blue transition of the D'R line).
Luminance Rlsetlme -
Within ± 50 ns (based on
lOOns ± IOns.
Color Bar Signal Subcarrler Tolerance - Frequency :
± (1 .3% of deviation + 1 kHz). Amplitude: D'B line burst
166.7 mV ± 10% (subcarrier amplitude at other frequencies,
relative to D'B line burst, determined by Bell filter tolerance).
Variable: ",, 6 dB to - 54 dB relative to nominal amplitude.
Color Bar Signal Luminance Tolerance -
or 1.5 mV, whichever is greater.
Amplitude: ± 1%
dB.
~ 35
dB to 5 MHz.
AC POWER
Mains Voltage Range - 100 V: 90 to 110 V ac. 120 V: 108 to
132 V ac. 220 V: 198 to 242 V ac. 240 V: 216 to 250 V ac.
Maximum Power Consumption Mains Frequency Range Crest Factor -
100 W.
48-62 Hz.
~ 1 . 35 .
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Rackmount
Cabinet
Dimensions
Width
Height
Depth
Weights
Net
dB.
Suppression of Subcarrier at Blanking enced to nominal subcarrier amplitude).
~ 40
Displays - Vertical lines. Horizontal lines. Dots or any combination of the above.
Output - Risetime (10 to 90%): 0.25 ~s ± 0.05 ~s (all pulse
outputs listed). Return Loss: ~ 30 dB to 4 MHz (all pulse outputs listed).
Bell Filter - Center Frequency: 4.286 MHz ± 20 kHz. Response: ±0.5 dB of theoretical (subcarrier ~- 20 dB referenced to nominal amplitude). Off: Response flat ± 0.5 dB 3.9
to 4.75 MHz.
170
~ 36
RGB Retum Loss -
Composite Blanking ite Video.
300 mV, within 10 dB.
Sync Acquisition Time -
RGB Sync - 300 mV ± 2% green only (delete by moving internal jumper).
Peak Luminance Level- 525 mV ± 5%.
Field Drive Duration -
± 0.2 ~s .
NON-ENCODED OUTPUT
525 mV ± 1% (except white, 700 mY).
Composite Sync - Identical to sync to contained in the CompoSite Video, except risetime.
Line Drive Duration ~s
RGB Amplitude -
CONVERGENCE
PULSE OUTPUTS
I, 2 or 4 V negative going from ground.
Amplitude -
Field Blanking Duration -
± 0.1 ~s .
2.5 lines.
Field Synchronizing Pulse Duration -
Sync Amplitude -
Lock-Up Range - Gen-Lock 15.625 kHz ± 0.0005% (subcarrier is asynchronous with respect to line for line rates above
and below tolerance). Sync-Lock: 15.625 kHz to ± 0.1%.
Line Blanking Duration -
20 ms.
MONITOR
COMPVIDEO
Encoder modulation linearity test configuration using the new Tektronix SECAM color
picture monitor as a decoder.
Line Sync Delay - Range: Adjustable to advance or delay
143 sync ~ 500 ns. Stability: Within 70 ns over operating temperature range. Jitter: .. 5 ns.
CHARACTERISTICS
PICTURE
mm
420
89
471
kg
9.1
In
16.8
3.5
18.5
Ib
20.0
mm
483
89
471
kg
9.3
In
19.0
3.5
18.5
Ib
20.5
ORDERING INFORMATION
143 SECAM Test Signal Generator
(Cabinet) ••.•..•.•••..•..••••••..••..••••.••••.••••.. $10,420
R143 SECAM Test Signal Generator
(Rackmount) ...................................... $10,420
Option 01 -
MiniQUICK Connectors ......................... +$270
NTSC
GENERATORS
TEK
R147A NTSC Test Signal Generator
COLO" naT SIGNAL
... _
----
..
'1'
~ ~~~~BT
_.:ioot_ SIGNAL GENERATOR
R149A NTSC Test Signal Generator
147A/149A
VITS Generation, Insertion, and Deletion
Sync and Burst Regeneration
Program Signal Protected
Full Field Test Signals Independently
Selectable from VITS Program
Reprogrammable for New Signals
Vertical Interval Reference Signal
Noise Test Signal and Measurements
(147A only)
One Unit Source of Signals for Remote
TransmiHer Operation (149A only)
Color Bars when Gen·Locked to a Program
Signal (149A only)
When incoming program is lost, the 147A and
149A will go to one of two operating modes
selectable by internal reprogramming jumpers.
They are: program line bypass, or full-field test
signal, or flat-field signal. In the event the program
signal is lost, the transmitter will continue on the
air.
A preview function lets you observe deletions and
inserted signalsllevels before anything is actually
done to the program signal. The preview/program
function can be locally or remotely controlled.
A front panel address plate provides a means for
identifying the actual VITS inserted and their line
and field location. Externally generated VITS may
be added to the program line if desired.
PROGRAM CONTROL FEATURES
Processing Amplifier
In addition to performing deletion and insertion
functions, the 147A and 149A generators are designed to function as a sync and burst regeneration amplifier.
The 147A and 149A NTSC Television Signal Generators are similar units that supply all the test
signals commonly used for test and measurement of video transmission systems_The signals
generated are available as full-field composite
video test signals and Vertical Interval Test Signals (VITS) that may be inserted on an incoming
composite video signal.
The 147A sync and burst regeneration operating
modes may be jumper selected as follows: (a)
off, (b) monochrome signal - sync and burst regeneration inhibited, (c) monochrome signal sync regeneration only. When in the regeneration
mode, the 147A and 149A will not delete incoming VITS except when the 147A and 149A VITS
programming takes priority.
VERTICAL INTERVAL INSERTION/
DELETION AND PROGRAM CONTROL
The 147A and 149A will insert VITS only when
gen-Iocked to an incoming composite video signal. A VITS deleter/inserter involves active circuit
elements in the program line within the generator.
Fail-safe provisions are provided in the event of a
malfunction within the instrument, including loss
of sync or power. Local and remote-control manual override capability is also provided.
Nonsynchronous Operation
A front panel warning light indicates absence of
incoming synchronizing information without which
VITS deletion or insertion is automatically
discontinued.
Black-burst synchronization may be selected by a
remotely controlled relay. In this mode, the 147A
and 149A automatically go to the program line
bypass operation. This bypassing operation can
be defeated through the remote .
Program Level
A front panel switch allows selection of either a
preset gain, normally adjusted for unit gain between program input and program output, or front
panel level adjustment to normalize the incoming
program Signal to provide 1 volt at the program
output.
Local/Remote Control of Program or Preview
Switching of program or preview modes from the
front panel (local) to a remote position is controlled by connecting a remote switching circuit to
a rear-panel connector. When operating under localor remote control, a light indicates preview or
program status, since the front panel switch position may not indicate the actual operating mode.
TEST SIGNALS
Vertical Interval Reference Signal
The VIR signal is generated and inserted by the
generator on line 19 of both fields . The generator
is programmable for many possible operating
modes depending upon the presence or absence
of a VIR signal on the incoming program line.
Field Squarewave Signal
The Reid Squarewave signal provides a sensitive
means for measuring field time distortions. In this
mode, the 147A and 149A provide a composite
video signal with 170 active lines at 100 IRE,
which approximates a 60 Hz squarewave. This
composite video signal reveals low-frequency
phase and gain distortions as a Simple 60 Hz
squarewave will do, but unlike the latter, it can
pass through clam per amplifiers.
Amplitude -
Within ± 1 IRE of white reference.
Number of White Lines - 57 through 227 on each field. All
remaining active lines are black.
Rlaetime - Shaped by sin 2 filter with first zero in frequency
domain at 4 MHz.
Multiburst Signal
The Multiburst Signal is generated by a function
generator controlled by the digital programmer.
This approach elminates the need for individual
start/stop oscillators for each burst, and for individual amplitude and ac axis adjustments for
each burst. Each burst start time is completely
stable, and each burst consists of an exact integer number of cycles, regardless of the frequency. They start at 0° of the first cycle and end at
360° of the last cycle. Location of the white flag
may be programmed with relation to the bursts
and used for source identification.
171
NTSC
TEK GENERATORS
TO REMOVE INSTRUMENT DURING PROGRAM
1. REMOVE UHE CORD
2. CONNECT BY PASS COAX BETWEEN
3. REMOVE T'I FROM INSTRUMENT
r.
147A 8nd 149A Resr Panel
White Relerence Amplitude -
100 IRE ±1 IRE.
Bur.t Amplitude - Normal Amplitude: 90 IRE plus 10 IRE
setup. Reduced Amplitude: 60 IRE plus 10 IRE setup, or 50
IRE with no setup.
Average Buret Level - 55 ± 1 IRE with 10% setup. Reduced:
40 ± 1 IRE with 10% setup.
Color Bars (149A Only)
The 149A, when gen-Iocked to a program signal,
provides either full-field or split-field color bar signals selectable by a front panel switch. This splitfield signal is used to show gray scale tracking
and consists of the luminance component of color bars on all active lines. The chrominance component is added to lines 66 through 218.
Linearity Signal
Three linearity test signals are selectable with
front-panel controls: 5 step, 10 step, and ramp;
either modulated or unmodulated. The luminance
component is selectable at either 10 equal1O-IRE
step, 5 equal 16-IRE step, or a 1oo-IRE ramp.
Each of these is internally adjustable from 80 to
100 IRE peak amplitude. The subcarrier component is phase-locked to color burst. You can use
these signals for measurement of differential gain
and phase, dynamic gain, luminance signal linearity, luminance signal distortion caused by chrominance signal nonlinearity, and burst phase errors.
Measurements of differential gain and phase can
be made more easily with 40 IRE subcarrier to
override noise than with 20 IRE subcarrier. The
subcarrier amplitude can be varied from 20 to 40
IRE by internal selection . Since the 40 IRE level of
subcarrier should not be used together with full
amplitude staircase or ramp where the test signal
may be radiated, luminance amplitude of modulated linearity signals can be reduced to 80 IRE by
internal adjustment.
Luminance Component - Peak Amplitude: 100 IRE within
1%. Each step is 20 IRE, within 1%, in 5 step and 10 IRE in
10 step. Step Risetlme: 230 ns. Aberrations: within 2%. Step
durations: 6 ~s lor 5 steps, 3 ~s lor 10 steps.
Chromlnance Component - Amplitude: 286 mV I>'P (40 IRE)
within 5% and in phase with burst. (Can be 143 mV 20 IRE with
internal jumper change.)
Dillerential Pha.e Dillerential Gain -
< 0.2°.
< 0.5%.
Subca"ler Envelope -
Risetime: 375 ns.
Ramp Luminance Amplitude -714 mV, 100 IRE ± 1%.
Ramp Linearity -
Within 1%.
Ramp Duration -
40
172
~s.
Flat Field Signal
The Rat Reid signal with VITS inserted is used
primarily for system testing at discrete average
picture levels. It is a composite video signal which
has a constant luminance level during the active
portion of each field .
The luminance level of the Rat Reid signal is
selectable in 10 IRE unit increments from 0 to
100 IRE. An alternate selection provides a bounce
between 10 and 90 IRE at 0.1 to 1.0 Hz rate .
An added feature combines flat field and one other selectable test signal, i.e., color bar (149A
only), multiburst, pulse and bar, linearity, and
composite. This mixed test signal provides a
brighter waveform monitor display (than VITS and
flat field) by alternating four lines of the variable
flat field pedestal with one line of the selected
other test signal during each active field .
Luminance Level - Within 2% 01 the indicated level e.cept
the 100 IRE level which is within 1%.
RI.etime - Shaped by sin' filter with first zero in the frequency domain at 4 MHz.
Pulse and Bar Signal
Two nine-pole Kastelein filters generate highly
precise 2T and T pulses. The digital programmer
provides the high timing accuracy required in
these pulses to elminate jitter and long term drift.
The programmer also determines exact signal element-to-element spacing and bar duration. It
may be readily reprogrammed , in 2 P.s increments, to produce different spacings or bar
widths.
12,ST Modulated Pulle Had - 1.57 ~s or can be internally set
to 2.5 ~s 20T, if desired.
T Modulated Sin' Pulse Residual Subcarrier - < 0.5 IRE on
insertion line.
T Modulated Sin' Pulae Relative Chroma-Luminance Time
Delay - < 10 ns.
Window Signal
The Window signal is the same as the Pulse and
Bar except that the Window occupies lines 66
through 218 only. It is sensitive to both line time
and field time distortions and is especially useful
in evaluating picture monitors. Where field rate
distortion is present, the Window signal will be
more affected than the Pulse and Bar.
Amplitude - 100 IRE within 1 IRE.
Risetlme - Internally Programmable: either 2T pulse and
T Bar, or T pulse and 2T bar.
Window Duration - Unes 66 through 218.
Composite Test Signal
The Composite Test signal is a multiple function
signal suitable for use as a VITS or as a full field
signal. The multiple elements of this signal, available in both NTC? and FCC formats, meet a wide
variety of testing needs. Phase of the subcarrier
of the modulated 20T pulse may be used to identify the VITS insertion point.
The sin2 pulse may be either 2T (0.25 p'S HAD) or
T (0.125 P.s HAD). The transitions of the bar are
also controlled by either of the two Kastelein filters so that frequency spectrum is limited to
4 MHz or 8 MHz. Shape of these transitions is integrated sin 2.
The modulated sin2 pulse (12.5T) is used in measuring relative gain and delay errors between
chrominance and luminance signals. It is extremely sensitive to delay distortion and easily used, as
delay distortion equal 10 d, where d equals baseline sinusoidal ripple in percent. The 20T pulse is
also available
2T Pulse Amplitude - Within 1% IRE of T Bar.
2T HAD - 250 ns within 7.5 ns.
2T Ringing - Amplitude < 0.5 IRE; duration < 4 cycles.
Time Location - Internally programmable in 2 ~s increments.
T Bar Amplitude -714 mV (100 IRE) ±1%.
T Bar Riaetlme -115 ns ± 15%.
T Bar Time Location - Start and stop internally programmable in 2 ~s increments.
12.ST Modulated Puse Peak Chrominance to Peak Luminance Amplitude Dillerence - < 0.5 IRE.
CompoSite Test Signsl per FCC §73.699
Vertical intervsl reference signal (VIRS)
per FCC 73.699
TEK
NOISE TEST SIGNAL (147A Only)
Th e 147 A offers a signal-to-noise measuring
techn ique for in-service testing during the vertical interval. The noise present in the middle portion of a line is deleted while the noise generated in a calibrated source is inserted for
measurements by comparison . You then adjust
the calibarated attenuator until inserted and incoming noise appear the same on a waveform
monitor. The measured noise values are independent of operator interpretation errors to within 2IRE .
External filters are required within the 147A when
making noise measurements.
Noise Pedestal Amplitude within 0.2 IRE .
Variable Pedes tel -
Selectable 10, 50, or 100 IRE
Provided.
- 20 dB to - 59 dB in 1 dB steps (0 dB -
Noise Levels 700 mV RMS).
Flat Noise Spectrum - Energy Until Bandwidth : 15 kHz to
5 MHz ± 6 dB. (Spectrum extends well beyond 5 MHz.
Output Impedance Return Loss -
75 0.
.. - 30 dB to 5 MHz.
Important - External filters are required for low pass filtered
and weighted noise measurements.
CHARACTERISTICS
PROGRAM CONTROL SYSTEM
Input Level -
Adjusted to Unity Gain.
Variable Input level Input Return Loss 5 MHz in bypass.
Output Dc Lavel -
± 30%.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dimension.
Cabinet
In
mm
455
99
436
Width
Height
Depth
Weight.
Net
Domestic Shipping
Expor1 Shipping
17.9
3.9
17.9
Rackmount
mm
483
89
436
In
19.0
3.5
17.9
kg
Ib
kg
Ib
89.0
159.0
250.0
19.0
35.0
55.0
91 .0
163.0
254.0
20.0
36.0
56.0
.
mrJWI111ITfil
·"··t-····~~I~i.
-----
20
Generation, In.ertion and Deletion of Signal. Required for
Remote Operation of Tran.mltte..
149A Option 01
The 149A is an excellent one-unit source of the signals required
for transmitter remote operation. The 149A recognizes m0nochrome transmissions (no burst) and includes facilities which
may be used to inhibit the chrominanoa components of the
color bar signal as required. The 149A has all the features of
the 147A except Noise Test Signal.
40- --
Multiburst per FCC §76.699
147A Option 01
The 147A Option 01 is an alternate source of the signals required for transmitter remote control, but Color Bars must be
provided from an alternate source such as the Tektronix earlier
models 140, 144, 146, or the current model 1410, SPG2,
TSG7.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
75 0, BNC termination (011-0103-02); 2 each BNC-T adaptors
(103-0030-00); 7'/2 It power cabie, three-wire (161-0036-00);
VIT program clear plastic cover plate (200-1474-00); front panel protective cover (200-1328-00); R147A and R149A include
rackmounting hardware.
Color Bars per FCC §76.699
< 46 dB to 5 MHz. Power on, 40 dB to
ORDERING INFORMATION
< 50 mV (no signal).
Isolation Between Program and Program Monitor Outputs
- > 34 dB.
Frequancy Reponse, Program, and Preview Channel
± 1%, 50 kHz to 5 MHz ; + 1%, - 5%, 5 MHz to 8 MHz.
2T Pulse to Bar Ratio 149A.
< 0.5%.
Line Time Tilt -
< 0.5%.
NTSC Signal Generator """."."""" """ ",, •. NC
NTSC Signal Generator
(Rack mount) " """ " """"""".,,""""",,"",,"""""" " """""" NC
149A NTSC Signal Generator ............ $9,555
Option 01 -
Differential Phase at any APL, Standard Input Output: < 0.15%. Preview Output: < 0.3%.
Program
Differential Gain at any APL, Standard Input Output: < 0.2%. Preview Output: < 0.4%.
Program
Line Time Amplitude Nonlinearity -
Option 01 -
Option 01 -
100% ± 0.5%. 100% ± 0.25% for the
Field Time Tilt -
147A NTSC Signal Generator ............ $9,555
R147A NTSC Signal Generator
(Rackmount) ........................................ $9,555
In.ertad Signal Level-714 mV (100 IRE) ± 1%.
NTSC Signal Generator """""""" """"""" NC
R149A NTSC Signal Generator
(Rackmount) ........................................ $9,555
R149A Option 01 -
NTSC Signal Generator
< 0.5%.
< - 75 dB RMS.
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Residual Subcarrler on Nonlnserted Line -
< - 60 dB p-p.
Noise Measurement Filtars
External filters are required with the 147A Generator when
making noise measurements. For systems using 525/60 standards
Low Pa.s Filter
Order 015-0212-00 " """"""""""" " " " ."" ""." .".""".,,,,. $125
Nol.e Weighting Filter
Order 015-0214-00 """"."."""""""""""""".""".",,.,,",,. $90
Low Pa.s 4.2 MHz 525/80
Order 015-0212-00 """"""""" """"" .""."".""""."".".,, $125
Nol.e Weighting 4.2 MHz 525/80
Hum, Transients on Nonlnserted Lines Spurious Signals During Blanking Time Signal Attentuation In Delete Mode subcarrier (color bars) .. - 60 dB.
Full amplitude multiburst
(Rack mount) ."" """"."""".""""""""""""" " "."."" ,,.,,,,.,, NC
Random Noise Output Program Channel -
< - 60 dB.
< - 40 dB.
2T pulse > - 70 dB ;
Crosatalk into Program Channel from Internal Signals pulse < - 70 dB, subcarrier (color bars) < - 60 dB.
2T
Line Timing Adjustment Range with Extemal Sync ± 0.5 s.
Jitter -
J~~UI'I'"JIJIL
,
< 5 ns.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
Power Requirements - 90 to 136 V ac or 180 to 272 V ac,
48 Hz to 66 Hz, 40 W maximum at 115 V ac and 60 Hz. Rear
panel selector provides rapid accommodation for 6 line-voltage
ranges. (Shipped set at 115 V ac.)
Inputs - External VITS Inputs, Program Input, Auxiliary Input,
Composite Sync, and Subcarrier.
Output - Program Monitor, Preview Monitor (two each), and
Full Field .
Order 015-0214-00 "." ",,"""""""""""""""""""""""",,. $90
CCIR recommendation 568 provides for measuring signal-toweighted random noise on all International transmissions (both
525/60 and 625/50) with a 5.0 MHz low pass filter and a unified
noise weighting filter.
Low Pass 5 MHz
Order 015-0213-00 " """ """""" """""""""",,.,," """"". $125
Unified Nol .. Weighting
Order 015-0283-00 """ """""""""""""".""."."".,," " """ $65
1,11,'!!il:I:!lrH'!r~~~
~ I.'!! I"""" -
s
"
,.
;-.----..,r-.-- ,
_8__."_·. '. .
-.f'+'-___
'I1_j _nlll_1l1 iiJ:J_"lil_'1 M:!a
_'
i
+
~ :.
Reduced smplitude multiburst minimizes the effects of nonlinear distortions
Ambient Temperature - Performance characteristics are valid over an ambient temperature range of O· C to + 50 · C.
173
PAL INSERTION TEST
GENERATOR
TEK SIGNAL
Rackmount version; cabinet version has carrying handle less mounting hardware
••••••
it •
,-PREVIEW ___ .--PROGRAM
OUTPUTS
IiIOHITOAlHG OUTPUT
OUTPUT
UNE
COMPOSITE
cw SUB-
FUU AELO
OUT
OUT
OUT
•
INPUT
75 n
SPARE 1
• • TEeN#L.
..pu••
co,..p
SYNC
BURST
FLAG
REMOTE
Insertion Test Signals (Per EBU, CCIR
Recommendation 473-2, Annex 1)
A preview monitor output permits observation of
the ITS deletion/insertion program before anything is actually done to the program signal.
Preview/program operation can be locally or remotely controlled.
Full-Field Test Signals (Per CCIR
Recommendation 567)
Provisions are made for adding an externally generated ITS to the program line.
Easily Reprogrammable
INSERTION SIGNAL CONTROL FEATURES
Free Running Operation
A warning light indicates absence of incoming
synchronizing information and ITS deletion and insertion is automatically discontinued.
Safe In-Service ITS Insertion (Per EBU
Specifications)
Noise Measurement Width
APL Bounce Signal
Source Identification Code
Operates With Sound In Syncs
Locks With Mixed Sync (Per EBU Homologation Specifications for ITS Generators)
Subcarrier, PAL Pulse, Burst Flag, Comp
Sync
The Tektronix 148 Insertion Test Signal (ITS) Generator provides all the test signals you need to
test and measure PAL video transmission systems. Test signals are available as both full-field
composite video and ITS inserted into the incoming program signal's vertical blanking interval. All
timing information for ITS insertion is derived from
the incoming composite video signal.
VERTICAL INTERVAL INSERTIONI
DELETION AND PROGRAM CONTROL
The 148 inserts ITS only when gen-Iocked to an
incoming composite video signal. Since ITS
insertion/deletion involves active circuit elements
in the program line, program line fail safe operation is provided in the event of instrument malfunction, loss of sync, or power failure . You also
have access to local and remote control manual
override capability.
174
Program Level
A front panel switch lets you select a preset gain,
normally adjusted for unity gain between program
input and program output. Or, you can use a front
panel level adjustment to normalize the incoming
program signal to provide 1 volt at the program
output.
Local-Remote Control of Program and
Preview
You can shift control of program or preview
modes from the front panel (local) to a position
remote from the 148. When operating under either local or remote control, front panel lights indicate program line status, since the front panel
program status switch position may not correspond to the operating mode selected.
SUBCARRIER
••
IN
J9014
148/R 148 rear panel
148
PAL
PULSE
EXT VITS
OUT
Bypass: In this switch position, incoming program
material bypasses 148 functions and output is
unchanged.
Auxiliary
A noncomposite video signal (such as a sweep
generator) applied to the auxiliary input appears
at the preview monitor output connector with
composite blanking and sync added. A pedestal
control provides a dc offset so the auxiliary signal
excursion may be positioned between the black
and white limits of the resulting composite video
signal. Remote control is not available.
ITS Subcarrier Phase
A recessed front-panel control adjusts phase of
color subcarrier on internally generated signals to
be correct in relation to the phase of incoming
burst.
Insertion Delay
A recessed front-panel control provides a fine
horizontal timing adjustment for inserted signals.
CHARACTERISTICS
PROGRAM CHANNEL
Input Level -
Adjusted to unity gain.
± 30%.
Variable Input Level -
..30 dB to 7 MHz.
Input Retum Loss Output Dc Level -
< 50 mV (no signal).
Isolation Between Program Preview Outputs -
;;.46 dB to
5 MHz.
Program-Preview-Bypass
This three-position switch is used to select one of
three modes: Program, Preview, or Bypass.
Program: In this switch position, ITS is inserted on
program line output according to internal selection of test signals and their time addresses.
Preview: In this switch position, ITS is inserted
only on program, as viewed on the preview monitor output. Preview is used for verification prior to
inserting these signals on program output.
Isolation Between Program and Program Monitor Outputs
-
;;.34 dB to 5 MHz.
Inserted Signal Level -
Within ± 1% of nominal.
TEK
INSERTION TEST
SIGNAL GENERATOR
Frequency Respon.e, Program, and Preview Channel. ± 1%, 50 kHz to 5 MHz. + 1%, - 5%, 5 MHz to 8 MHz.
2T Pul.e to Bar Ratio -
Within 0.25%.
Field Time Tilt -
< 0.5%.
Line Time Tilt -
< 0.25%.
Dillerenlial Pha.e at any APL, Standard Input output < 0.15 '. Preview output < 0.3'.
Dillerential Gain at any APL, Standard Input put < 0.2%. Preview output < 0.4%.
Line Time Amplitude Nonlinearity -
Program
Program out-
< - 75 dB RMS.
Re.ldual Subcarrier on Nonlnserted Line. Hum, Transients on Nonln.erted Line. -
Signal Attenuation In "Delete" Mode Subcarrier (color bars) > - 60 dB.
.. 0.7 mY.
Inactive line time
2T pulse > - 70 dB.
Crosstalk Into Program Channellrom Internal Signals pulse < - 70 dB, subcarrier (color bars) < - 60 dB.
Unwanted Pede.tal at Time 01 ITS Insertion Preview Channel. < 5 mY .
In.ert Delay AdJu.tment Range -
± 0.5
~s
2T HAD -
2T
Program and
Iront panel.
FULL·FIELD OPERATION
The Tektronix 148 provides full-field test signals
separate from program. These signals are generated with or without external synchronizing information and will be locked to the external synchronizing signal when a program signal or external
synchronizing signals are present.
Full-field signals available include: Multiburst, linearity , Flat Field, Window, NOise , Line 17,
Line 330, and Line 331 . Select these eight signals
using two switches that permit anyone of the
signals to be produced on all active lines. You
can also designate that any two signals be alternated on all active lines, or any two signals be
paired on two successive lines and then alternated with six lines of adjustable flat field .
When operating the 148 in the flat field mode, you
may select a white level preset between 85 and
100% and a black level preset between 0 and
15%. Automatic change between white and black
is available and occurs at a period adjustable
from 1.0 s to 10.0 s.
Eleven APL levels between 0 and 100% of white
can be used in the flat field or alternation mode.
In the alternation mode, flat field lines are alternated with other selected signals, such as multi burst
or linearity.
Within 1% 01 luminance bar.
200 ns.
2T Ringing -
Amplitude < 0.5%; duration < 2 cycles.
Time Locallon -
.. 60 dB down.
Spurious Signals During Blanking Time .. 40 dB down. Active ITS lines .. 60 dB.
The modulated sin2 pulse (2OT) is used in measuring relative gain and delay errors between chrominance and luminance signals. The 20T modulated
sin2 pulse has a 2.0 !'s HAD. Greater sensitivity to
chrominance-Iuminance delay errors may be obtained by using reduced pulse width.
2T Pulse Amplitude -
< 0.5%.
Random Noise Output Program Channel -
The envelope of the modulated sin 2 pulse is
formed by a nine-pole Kastelein filter.
Internally programmable In 2 ~s increments.
Luminance Bar Amplitude -
700 mV ± 1%.
TBarRI.elime-l00ns ± 15%.
T Bar Time Localion ble in 2 ~s increments.
Start and stop internally programma-
Full-field altemation of 2 signals on aI/ active lines (CCIR
ommendation 569, Figure 3)
rec-
20T Modulated Pulse Peak Chromlnance to Peak Luminance Amplitude Difference - < 3.5 mY.
20T Modulated Pulse HAD -
2.0
~s .
20T Modulated Pulse Residual Subcarrier insertion line.
< 3.5 mV on
20T Modulated Pulse Relative Chroma-Luminance Time Delay - < 5 ns.
WINDOW SIGNAL
The window signal is the same as the pulse and
bar except that it occupies the center 205 lines of
each field. This signal lets you measure both line
time and field time distortions, and is especially
useful for observing picture monitors. Where field
rate distortion is present, the window signal will
be affected to a much greater extent than the
pulse and bar signal.
Amplitude -
20
10
o -- - - - - - - - - - - - 2% sin' pulse superimposed on bar by double exposure
700 mY.
Risetime - Internally programmable at either 2T pulse and
T window, or T pulse and 2T window.
LINEARITY SIGNAL
You can select three Linearity Test Signals:
5 step, 10 step, or ramp (either modulated or unmodulated). The subcarrier component is phaselocked to color burst, Use this signal for measuring differential gain and phase, dynamic gain,
luminance signal linearity, luminance signal distortion caused by chrominance signal nonlinearity,
and burst phase and amplitude errors.
Luminance Component - Peak amplitude 700 mV within 1%,
5 step, 10 step, or ramp.
RI.er Shape -
Sin' shape with a nominal 200 ns risetime.
Chromlnance Component 140 mY, or 280 mY.
Amplitude is selectable at 0 mV,
All full-field signals are available with or without
vertical sync and blanking selectable from the
front panel.
PULSE AND BAR SIGNAL
Highly precise 2T and T pulses are generated by
two nine-pole Kastelein Rlters. The 148's digital
programmer provides the high degree of timing
accuracy required to eliminate jitter and long-term
drift. This programmer also determines exact signal element-to-element spacing and element duration . The programmer is adjustable in 2!'s
increments.
Modulated 20T pulse magnified
The sin2 pulse may be either 2T (200 ns HAD) or T
(100 ns HAD). The transitions of the bar are controlled by either Kastelein Riter, and frequency
spectrum is limited to 5.0 MHz or 10.0 MHz. The
shape of these transitions is integrated sin 2.
175
INSERTION TEST
GENERATOR
TEK SIGNAL
FLAT -FIELD SIGNAL
The flat-field signal with VITS inserted is used primarily for system testing at discrete average picture levels.
The flat-field signal is a composite video signal
that, during the active portion of each field , has a
constant luminance level. The luminance level is
selectable in eleven increments from 0 to 100% of
white. An alternate selection provides automatic
change between black and white with a period
variable form 1 to 10 s.
Luminance Level of the Fiat-Field Signal - Within 2% of the
indicated level, except the 100% level, which is within 1%.
RI.etlme Linearity signal, 5 step, 280 m V subcarrier
200 ns.
FIELD SQUARE WAVE SIGNAL
The field squarewave signal is used to measure
field time distortions. In this mode, the Tektronix
148 provides a composite video signal with 205
active lines at 700 mV, approximating a 50 Hz
squarewave. Use this signal to detect low frequency phase and gain distortions, even those
passing through clamper amplifiers.
Amplitude -
Within ± 1 mV of white reference.
Number of White Lines - 65 through 270, and 377 through
582. All remaining active lines are black.
RI.etlme -
Linearity signal, 5 step, 140 mV subcarrier
200 ns.
MULTIBURST SIGNAL
The multiburst signal is generated by a function
generator controlled by a digital programmer.
This design eliminates the need for individual
start/stop oscillators on each burst and individual
amplitude and ac axis adjustments. Each burst
start time is completely stable, and each burst
packet consists of an exact number of cycles,
regardless of the frequency. Each burst starts at
0° of the first cycle and ends at 360° of the last
cycle. Location of the white flag with relation to
the bursts is programmable and may be used for
source identification .
White Reference Amplitude ± 1%.
700 mV ± 1% and 420 mV
Bur.t Amplitude - Amplitude selectable at normal or reduced. Internal adjustment presets normal amplitude value.
Burst Frequencies - 0.5, 1, 2, 4.0, 4.8, and 5.8 MHz within
3%. Each burst frequency is independent and internally
adjustable.
Timing - Each burst starts at 0" of the first cycle and ends at
360 " of the last cycle.
NOISE SIGNAL
The 148 offers a unique signal-to-noise measuring
technique for in-service testing during the vertical
interval. The noise present in the middle portion of
an internally selected line is deleted , and noise
generated by a calibrated source is inserted for
comparison. You can vary a calibrated
attentuator until inserted noise and incoming
noise appear the same on a waveform monitor.
The noise values measured are independent of
interpretation errors to within 2 dB.
When measuring transmission nOise, you may delete the noise on an entire line at the point from
which the noise is to be measured using one 148.
Further down the transmission system, you can
use a second 148 to match the noise level in the
manner described previously. Repeat this process to determine the transmission noise level for
several sections of the transmission system.
Noise may be measured at 50 mV, 350 mV, or
700 mV luminance levels. The calibrated noise
generator provides flat (white) noise. External
noise filters are required with the Tektronix 148
when making noise measurements.
50 mV ± 5 mV, 350 mV within
Nol.e Pedestal Amplitude 2%, 700 mV within 2%.
Variable Pede.tal - ± 5% variation provided for hall line insertion in order to exactly match pedestal level of incoming
signal.
- 20 dB to - 59 dB in 1 dB steps (0 dB -
Noi.e Level. 700 mV RMS).
Flat Nol.e Spectrum - Energy unit bandwidth, 15 kHz to
5 MHz ± 6 dB. (Specturm extends well beyond 5 MHz.)
Output Impedance -
75 O.
.. 30 dB.
Return Lo •• -
INSERTION TEST SIGNALS
The signals used as vertical interval test signals
on Line 17, 330, and 331 (per CCIR recommendation 569, 473-2, Annex 1), are also available full
field . The elements of these Signals are specified
as follows :
LUMINANCE BAR
Amplitude -
0.7 V ± 1'10.
"" 100 ns. May be de-
Shape and Time of RI.e and Fall -
rived from the shaping network of the sin2 pulse or of the stair-
case waveform.
Tilt -
< - 0.5% for 10 ~s .
STAIRCASE SIGNAL
Level of the Uppermo.t Tread of Stalrca.e of luminance bar amplitude.
Number of Riser. Shape of RI.er. -
Within ± 1%
Five.
Sin2 shape with a nominal 200 ns risetime.
Line-time Nonlinearity - The difference in amplitude between
the largest and smallest risers is < 0.5% of the largest
amplitude.
Superimposed Subca"ler Frequency and Ph . . e -
4.43361875 MHz ± 10 Hz ; 60" ± 5" to the B-Y axis referred to
the burst (when present).
Risetimes and Fantlme. of Subcarrler Superimposed on
Stalrca.e - "" 1 ~s .
< 0.5%.
Inherent Differential Gain Inherent Differential Pha.e -
< 0.2'.
Amplitude of Superimpo.ed Subcarrier of luminance-bar amplitude.
0.28 V p-p ± 2%
2T PULSE
Amplitude -
± 1% of luminance bar amplitude.
Half-Amplitude Duration -
200 ± 6 ns.
20T COMPOSITE PULSE"
Amplitude -
Within ± 1% of luminance bar amplitude.
Half-Amplitude Duration -
2 ± 0.06
~s .
Inherent Chromlnance /Lumlnance Gain Inequality 420 mV multiburst. Notice burst starts and stops precisely at
the same level.
< 0.5%.
Inherent Chromlnance/Luminance Delay Inequality < 10 ns.
Subcarrler Leak -
< 3.5 mV p-p on insertion lines.
Harmonic Content of Subcarrler Chroma Pha.e phase.
176
< - 40 dB.
60 " standard. Internally adjustable to any
TEK
Peak·to·Peak -
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
CHROMINANCE BAR
Within "" ± t % of luminance bar amplitude.
Power Requirements - 90 to 136 V ac or 180 to 272 V ac;
48 Hz to 66 Hz, 55 W maximum at 115 V ac and 60 Hz. Factory set at 230 V ac.
0.35 V ± 1%.
Pedestal -
Inherent Chromlnance/Luminance Cross Modulation 0.5% of pedestal amplitude.
Envelope Risetime -
Inputs - External ITS, Program, Auxiliary, Composite Sync,
Subcarrier, Pal Pulse, and Burst Flag.
",, 1 !ls.
Outputs - Program, Program Monitor, Preview Monitor (two
each), Full Field, CompoSite Sync, Subcarrler, and Noise.
THREE·LEVEL CHROMINANCE BAR""
Position 01 Transitions -
7H /32 , 9H/32 , and 14H/32 .
Ambient Temperature - Performance characteristics are val·
id over an ambient temperature range 01 O·C to + 50 · C.
'I.
Peak·to·Peak Amplitudes - 1st section, within ± 1% of
01
the luminance bar (nominal value 0.14 V). 2nd section, within
± 1% of 3/. of the luminance bar (nominal value 0.42 V). 3rd
section, within ± 1% of the luminance bar (nominal value
0.7 V).
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
148
Dimensions
Pedeltal- 0.35 V ± 1%.
Chrominance/Lumlnance Cross Modulation pedestal amplitude.
Envelope Risetime -
< 0.5% of
Une 17
"" 1 !ls.
Pedestal -
",, 1 !ls.
SOURCE IDENTIFICATION CODE
18.2
3.8
19.1
mm
483
88
499
kg
Ib
kg
86.0
159.0
19.0
35.0
91 .0
163.0
In
19.0
3.5
19.7
Ib
20.0
36.0
ORDERING INFORMATION
148 Test Signal Generator .................. $7,165
R148 Test Signal Generator
(Rackmount) ••••••••••••••.•••.•.••••••.••••.••...•. $7,165
1 !ls.
630 to 700 mV above blanking.
Zero Level - Within 25 mV of blanking.
'10T composite pulse available by internal jumper
repositioning.
'"700 mV chrominance bar, available as an alternative to 3lev·
el bar by simple internal jumper repositioning.
R148
in
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
75 II, BNC termination (011·0103·02); 2 each BNC·T adaptors
(103·0030·00) ; 7'/2 It power cable, three wire (161·0036·00).
R148 includes rackmountlng hardware. (351·0195·01).
350 mV within 1%.
Pulse Width -
463
97
485
Net Weight
Shipping Weight ""
The Tektronix t 48 is a source identification code generator
with up to 25 pulses available in any combination on Line t 6 or
329.
One Level -
Width
Height
Depth
Weights
CHROMINANCE REFERENCE
Peak·to·Peek Amplitude - 0.42 V ± 1% of luminance bar
amplitude.
Envelope Riletlme -
mm
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Line 330
Noise Measurement Filters
Externallilters are required with the 148 Generator when mak·
ing noise measurements. For systems using 625/50 standards:
Low Pass 5.0 MHz 625/50
Order 015·0213·00 .......................................................... $125
Noise Weighing 5.0 MHz 625/50
Order 015·0215·00 ............................................................ $80
Low Pass 6.0 MHz 625/50
Order 015·0220·00 .......................................................... $100
Unilied Noise Weighing Network
Order 015·0283·00 ............................................................ $65
(per CCIR recommendation 568, use only with 5.0 MHz Low
Pass Filer 015·0213·00)
Multiburst magnified to show start/stop transitions
Une331
Half line adjustable noise comparison signal inserted on a full
line
Une 331 with single level chrominance bar
177
NOISE
MEASUREMENT SET
TEK RANDOM
1430 Random Noise Measurement Set Front Panel
1430
Conforms to CCIR Recommendation 568
In-Service Testing
Out-of-Service Testing
Program Material Protected by Fail-Safe
Provisions
525/60 or 625/50 Standards
The 1430 may be used on both 625/50 and 525/60
systems but is shipped equipped for 525/60. The
1430 Option 01 is equipped for 625/50. Both models use the unified weighting filter per CCIR Recommendation 568. Insertion loss characteristics
are as follows :
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
5.9
10.2
12.0
13.0
13.6
The 1430 has two sections. One section, permanently mounted in the rack , contains inputs and
outputs and program protecting material. The
second section, containing circuitry and controls,
may be easily removed without cable
disconnection.
Monitor Channel
The monitor channel has an output independent
from program for waveform comparison of the
noise on the incoming signal and noise from the
internal noise generator. Front-panel controls determine monitor channel parameters with three
operating modes: VITS, Full Field, and Out-ofService.
In the VITS mode, any line between 10 and 21 in
either or both fields may be selected for insertion
of the reference noise. The Full Field mode provides insertion on all active lines.
The Out-ot-Service mode is provided for measurements on sources that do not have composite sync. In particular, these include transmission
circuits not carrying signals at the time testing is
conducted. Horizontal sync is added for waveform monitor synchronization.
In all modes the insertion width is internally set at
26 /-IS . Delay between insertion and sync is controlled by the Delay adjustment. A switch and a
potentiometer covering a range of 0 to 100 IRE
controls the insertion pedestal level.
Monitor channel gain control, with a ±3 dB
range , allows nomalizing the signal for 1 V peakto-peak signal so that noise measurement relative
to 1 V may be made. The internal noise weighting
filter may be switched in or out from the front
panel for evaluation of the spectral content of the
incoming noise. This filter is the monitor channel
only and does not affect the program output.
178
Input Impedance -
Absolute amplitude: within 1 dB.
Energy/unit bandwidth : flat within 6 dB,
75 !l nominal.
.. 30 dB.
Noise Weighting and Low Pass Filter mendation 421-2.
Per CCIR recom-
AC POWER
Line Voltage Range - 115 V ae: 90 V to 132 V. 230 V ae:
180 V to 264 V. Standard 1430 faetory set at 115 V ae. 1430
Option 01 faetory set at 230 V ae.
Ma.imum Line Cu"ent -
0.25 A.
Maximum Power Consumption Line Frequency Range -
30 W.
48 to 66 Hz.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dimension.
Width
Height
Depth
Weights
Net
Shipping
PROGRAM CHANNEL
Signal Input Level - 1 V nominal.
~s .
20 dB to - 59.5 dB (0 dB - 700 mV
Output Return Loss -
CHARACTERISTICS
mm
483
44
429
In
19.0
1.7
16.9
kg
4.5
7.2
Ib
10.0
16.0
75 !l nominal.
Input Return Loss - POWER ON: ;.46 dB to 5 MHz. POWER OFF or BYPASS: ;.40 dB or 5 MHz.
Output Impedance (operating) Output Retum Loss (all) -
75 !l nominal.
;.30 db to 5 MHz.
Output Blanking, Dc Level pulses.
0 V within 50 mV, for blanking
Inserted Pedestel Level OIRE.
Adjustable to 100, 50, 10, or
2T Pulse to Bar Amplitude -
Field Rate Squarewave < 0.5%, 26 ~s Bar,
Dillerentlal Phase (10% to 90% APL, standard input) Program output, < 0.15·.
Dillerential Gain (10% to 90% APL, stendard input) gram output, < 0.2· .
Pro-
Line Time Amplitude Nonlinearity (10% to 90% APL, standard input) - < 0.5%.
Random Nol.e - Program output: ;.75 dB (RMS) down (using weighting and low pass filters , 5 MHz).
Hum or Transient. on Nonln.erted Line. - ;.60 dB down,
(using weighted and low pass filters , 5 MHz).
Spurious Signal. During Blanking Lines low pass (5 MHz).
;.40 dB down,
Signal Attenuation in Delete Mode - 2T pulse, .. 70 dB
down, Subcarrier (color bars): ;.60 dB down. Insertion pedestallO, 50, and 100 IRE, first half, second half, or entire line (up
to 3; 10 to 21) or full field.
Unwanted Pedestal at Time 01 VITS Insertion < 5 ns.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Three wire power cable (161 -0066-00); one pair slide guide
(351 -0331 -03); cover program front panel (200-1481 -00).
ORDERING INFORMATION
1430 Random Noise Measuring Set
(525/60) ............................................... $4,115
Option 01 - Random Noise Measuring Set
(625/50) .....................................................
Within 0.25%.
Mod Sin' Pulse (chromlnance and luminance) -100% within 0.5%.
Time Jitter -
Noise Amplitude RMS).
Output Impedance -
The Program Channel has a 75 f! input impedance and unity gain and output impedance of
75 11. No program impairment is introduced. A relay provides program signal continuity if the 1430
loses power. Internal programming , readily
changeable, controls all deletion parameters. Up
to three lines between 10 and 21 in either or both
fields may be deleted. The deletion may be varied between the first half, second half, or full active portion of the video line. A pedestal may be
inserted in the deleted portion of a line at 10, 50,
or 100 IRE levels.
Wavelorm, Tilt < 0.5%.
Pedestal Position - (Insertion mode only) Delay: 10 to 50
Noise Spectrum 15 kHz to 5 MHz.
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
Program Channel
The 1430 provides random noise measurement
capabilities on an in-service basis using the spatially adjacent noise matching technique with a
waveform monitor. A program channel allows deletion of VITS and/or noise on selected lines in the
vertical blanking interval, and a monitor channel is
provided for making measurements in conjunction with a waveform monitor.
NOISE
Pedestal Amplitude: 10 IRE, 50 IRE, and
Noise Attenuators -
Insertion lo •• =
1
2
3
4
5
Pedestal Level 100 IRE.
.. 0.7 IRE.
+$85
The 1430 and 1430 Option 01 are provided with the 5.0 MHz
low pass filter and unified weighting filter per CCIR Recommendation 568.
TEK
DIGITAL SWEEP GENERATOR, PEAK-TO-PEAK DETECTOR
AND VIDEO AMPLITUDE CALIBRATION FIXTURE
PEAK-TO-PEAK DETECTOR
NBS-Traceable Frequency Response
Standard
Ultra Flat Response
7
I
Detector Amplifier Corrects Detector Diode
Gain and Offset Errors
4.3
The 015-0408-00 Detector Amplifier, combined
with a 015-0413-00 Detector Head , comprise an
NBS-traceable peak-to-peak detector system for
baseband video frequency response testing. This
system allows precise comparison of sinewave
amplitudes at frequencies throughout the video
spectrum. Typical response is accurate to as low
as ± 0.02% (± 0.002 dB).
... ==t.:.
.&:I..
Video Amplitude Calibration Fixture, Digital Sweep Generator, and poP Detector shown in
Accurate calibration and verification of video
equipment performance is essential for maintenance of optimum television system quality and
thus signal quality.
New products, as well as calibration standards
and procedures, have been developed to help
provide accurate and NBS-traceable calibration
and performance verification of Tektronix television products.
VIDEO AMPLITUDE
CALIBRATION FIXTURE
Provides a Standard Reference For Amplitude Calibration
Preset Values For Common Video Signals
NTSC, PAL, PAL-M, SECAM Compatible
The Video Amplitude Calibration Rxture (VAC) is
a precision test fixture used in the measurement
of common video signals, and the calibration of
video test signal generators and waveform monitors. It provides a simple means of measuring and
calibrating luminance and chrominance amplitudes associated with most video signals.
The VAC provides a squarewave amplitude reference from 0.0 to 999.9 mV peak with a resolution
of 0.1 mV and an accuracy of 0.05%. Signal amplitude may be selected using a 4-digit front panel lever-switch or from over 500 preset values
stored in EPROM. The VAC preset amplitudes are
compatible with NTSC, PAL, PAL-M and SECAM
television systems.
a
TektronIx TM 504 Mainframe
In the design of the VAC, careful attention was
paid to thermal tilt to ensure accurate conversion
from dc calibration to squarewave output. Unique
choice of output impedance compensates loading effects when calibrating equipment with loopthrough inputs.
The calibration of the VAC requires only a digital
voltmeter with an accuracy of 0.01%.
The VAC operates in any of two compartments of
the Tektronix TM 500 or TM 5000 Series power
modules (except TM 501).
CHARACTERISTICS
Output Signal
Front Output Connector - 37.5 0 ; BNC connector located on
Ironl panei.
Rear Interconnect - 0.0 0; Rear edge connector pins 27A
and 28A.
Amplitude Range (Tolerance Disabled) - 0 mV to 999.9 mV
± (0.05% + 0.1 mY); p-p squarewave amplitude.
Amplitude Range (Tolerance Enabled) - 0 mV to 999.9 mV
± (0.5% + 0.1 mY) + TOLERANCE reading ; p-p squarewave
amplitude.
Resolution - 0.1 mY.
Risetime - Less than 1 ~ s .
Frequency - NTSC, PAL-M, 270 Hz nominal ; PAL, SECAM ,
275 Hz nominal.
The frequency response of an analog generator
may be calibrated using the peak-to-peak detector system as a transfer standard. The generator
may then be used as a frequency response transfer standard to calibrate frequency response and
chrominance-Iuminance gain of test equipment
such as waveform monitors and vectorscopes.
A second detector head may be ordered for differential measurements.
CHARACTERISTICS
Input Signal Range - 0.25 V to 1.0 V p-p.
Envelope Gain Unit - ± 0.1% lor 1% signal change.
Input Impedance - 75 n.
Frequency Response
Frequency Performance
Requirements
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
75 n Terminator ( ± 0.025%), (011 -0102-01); 0.06% attenuator,
(011 -0134-00); subcarrier harmonic, rejection lilter, (015-040700).
Order 067-0916-00 Video Amplitude
Calibration Fixture ._ •••••••••.••.•••••.•••••••• " $2,250
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
72 In Low Loss 75 0 Cable Order 012-0159-01 ............. $30
Transler
Uncertainties
Typical
Response
TEK
25 kHz
+ 0.1, - 0.7% + 0, - 0.25% ± 0.05%
50 kHz
NBS
± 0.01 %
+ 0.1. - 0.3% + 0. - 0.1 %
± 0.05%
± 0.02%
100 kHz
± 0.1%
± 0.05%
± 0.02%
200 kHz
± 0.1%
± 0.02%
+ 0.05%
± 0.05%
500 kHz
± 0.1 %
± 0.02%
+ 0.05%
± 0.05%
± 0.02%
± 0.05%
± 0.05%
1 MHz
ENVIRONMENTAL
Normal Operating Temperature - + 15' C to + 35 ' C.
Operating Temperature Range - O' C to + 50' C.
Weightl- Net: 1.4 kg, (3.0 Ib). Net Shipping : 4.5 kg, (10.0 Ib).
Supplemental
Inlormatlon
0.0%
(Relerence)
± 0.05%
2 MHz
± 0.1%
± 0.02%
+ 0.05%
± 0.1%
5 MHz
± 0.1%
± 0.02%
+ 0.05%
± 0.1%
± 0.1%
10 MHz
± 0.15%
± 0.05%
+ 0.05%
20 MHz
± 0.2%
± 0.1%
± 0.05%
± 0.2%
30 MHz
± 0.5%
± 0.2%
± 0.1%
± 0.2%
50 MHz
± 2.0%
± 1.0%
± O.2%
± 0.5%
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Detector head . ( includes data sheet with NBStraceability curves), (015-0413-00); 72 in low loss 75 {l cable.
(012-0159-01 ).
Order 067-0408-00
Peak-to-Peak Detector ._._._"._._"._"._._._ $1,265
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Extra Detector Head (lor differential measurements).
Order 015-0413-00 .......................................................... $195
Digital Sweep Generator on next page.
179
DIGITAL SWEEP GENERATOR
CALIBRATION FIXTURES
TEK OTHER
DIGITAL SWEEP GENERATOR
Digitally Derived Sweep Signal
10-Bit Digital Data For Use With 1900-Series
Digital Test Signal Generators to Reconstruct Analog Sweep
Frequency Range 55.9 kHz to 7.16 MHz Field
Sweep or (Manually Adjustable) CW
CHARACTERISTICS
Digital Sweep Output
Frequency Range - 55.93 kHz to 7.159 MHz in 55.93 kHz
increments ; Field Sweep, or CW digital data.
Format - SMPTE Standard parallel 10-bit signal.
Sample Clock Frequency - 14.31818 MHz (4 fsc) ± 100 Hz ;
also accepts external 14.3 MHz clock from 1900.
Blanking - Vertical: 22-23 lines. Horizontal: 10.8 ~s .
Weights - 0.8 kg, 1.8 lb.
Markers
1 V at 1.006747 MHz
1 V at 2.013494 MHz
1 V at 3.020241 MHz
The Digital Sweep Generator provides 10·bit,
14.31818 MHz, digital data words derived from a
cosine lookup table. The output signal sweeps
from 55.9 kHz to 7.16 MHz in each field with high
spectral purity and amplitude accuracy when
used with the DAC in a 1900 Series generator. A
front panel connector provides SMPTE*' compati·
ble balanced eel data. Data is continuous through
blanking so that it can be used with non-composite video detectors. Sync and burst may be
inserted by a 1900 Series generator using the
blanking output on the DSG if desired . The digital
sweep generator may be locked to a 1900 Series
generator using TRS and clock outputs from the
1900 Series generator. Alternatively, the 1900
Series generator may be genlocked to the black
burst output from the sync generator in the digital
sweep generator. A separate marker output provides identification of 1 MHz intervals, as well as
3.58 MHz and 4.43 MHz, during the sweep.
The digital sweep generator is enclosed in a
single wide TM 500 package. The front panel
includes an LED power indicator, two 25-pin
digital data connectors, three BNC connectors for
blanking , markers, and black burst outputs, and
one variable control to manually set CW frequencies. Digital interfaces of the DSG conform to the
signal levels, clock rate and pinout of the proposed SMPTE standard.
When the Digital Sweep Generator is used in
conjunction with a 1900 and an 015-0408-00 peakto-peak detector (included accessory), it will provide an NBS·traceable analog frequency response standard, and completes an effort to
provide NBS-traceable performance verification
of Tektronix television generators, waveform monitors, and other television equipment.
. , The proposed SMPTE standard ' Digital Format for a Parallel
Interface (System M/NTSC). • draft of July , 1979.
180
0.5 V at 3.579545 MHz
1 V at 4.026988 MHz
0.5 V at 4.418501 MHz
1 V at 4.977805 MHz
1 V at 5.984552 MHz
Marker frequencies are multiples of 55.93 kHz.
ENVIRONMENTAL
Temperature Range - Operating: O·C to + 50 · C. Storage:
- 40·C to + 65 · C.
Altitude - Operating: To 4752 m (15,000 feet). Storage: To
15 240 m (50,000 feet).
Weights -
NetO.6 kg, (1 .3 Ib). Net Shipping: 1.3 kg, (2.8 Ib).
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
ECl data cable assemblies, (175-3671 -00); 72 in low loss 75 II
cable, (012-0159-01); pop detector, (015-0408-00).
Order 067-1011-00 Digital Sweep
Generator .••..••..•...•.••....•..••..••...•..•..•..•. $3,310
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Detector Heed Order 015-0407-00 ........•....•.................. $120
Other Calibration Fixtures for Tektronix Television Products
ORDERING INFORMATION
1450 SERIES DEMODULATORS
Teat Modulator, 37 MHz for 1450-1.
Order 067 ·0886-01 ....................................................... $4,275
Te.t Modulator, 38.9 MHz for 1450-1.
Order 067 -0886-02 ....................................................... $4,275
Te.t Modulator, 45.75 MHz for 1450· 1.
Order 067 -0886-03 ....•.................................................. $4,275
Te.t Modulator, 38.9 MHz for 1450·2.
Order 067 -0886-04 ....................................................... $4,275
Te.t Modulator, 38.9 MHz for 1450-3.
Order 067 ·0886-05 ....................................................... $4,275
Extendar Cable, for TDC/14501 ,·2,-3.
Order 067 ·0899·00 ............................................................ $90
GENERATORS
Dlagnoatlc Prom Order 067-0964-00 ............................. $125
Digital Sweep Generltor Order 067-1011 -00 ............ $3,310
Video Amplituda Calibrator Order 067·0916-00 ........ $2,250
690SR PICTURE MONITOR
Minimum load Unit Order 067-0998·00 ........................ $175
Rigid Module Extander Order 067-0999-00 ............•....... $50
Flexible Interface Module Extender
Order 067-1000·00 ••........••..•....•.......•................•............. $125
CRT Scale, 11 X 15 line for 690SR , Option 40/42.
Order 067-1034-00 ..........................•.......................•••..... $150
Pattern Genarltor Order 067-1039-00 ..................•••.. $3,000
CRT Scale, 14 X 17 line for 690SR .
Order 067·1 054·00 .......................................................... $ 150
CRT Selle, 15 X 20 line for 690 SR .
Order 067·1055-00 .......................................................... $150
1980 ANSWER
Service Kit for the 1980, Order 067-1115-00 ............. $3,000
Tektronix Calibration Fixtures (067 -XXXX-OX part numbers)
are designed for calibration and verification of specific products. Some fixtures may not be supported at the same level as
standard Tektronix products. Your local Tektronix Sales Office
can advise you regarding availability and support.
TELEVISION
DEMODULATORS
TEK
- 2 : .c'
•
'I4I5D-a
TELEVISION DEMODULATOR
~
l,OOtIT
1lIYctronix
The 1450-1 is compatible with System M Television Transmission, and the 1450-2 is compatible with System B/G.
1450-1/1450-2/1450-3
Demodulation of the transmitter IF signal may be
accomplished by using only the mainframe.
Measurement-Quality Performance for
Negligible Distortion
Synchronous Detection Envelope Detection
The 1450-1 and 1450-2 allow you to select either
synchronous or envelope detection. Each method
has advantages, yet both are required for full
measurement capability. For instance, synchronous detection is necessary for measurements
that can be seriously affected by quadrature
distortion.
Synchronous Detection Elminates
Quadature Distortion
Envelope Detection for Accurately
Determined Differential Phase
Surface Acoustic Wave Filter Provides
Precise Nyquist Slope; Excellent Long Short-Term Stability
Digital Readout of Input Power Level for
Easy, Accurate Field Strength Readings
Constant-Bandpass Characteristics Over
Wide Dynamic Range
Any Single VHF or UHF Channel Operation
UHF and VHF Tunable Down Converters
(System M only)
Conforms to EIA Standard RS-462
(System M only)
The 1450-1 (System M), 1450-2 (System BIG) and
1450-3 (System I) Demodulator Mainframes are
combined with a Tektronix Television Down Converter (TDC) to provide an accurate link between
your transmitter's RF signals and video baseband
measuring equipment. Unique components work
together to identify and eliminate any possible
demodulation distortion in reproduced signal
characteristics. You see a transparent picture of
your transmitter's performance and signal output.
Tunable or Fixed-Channel Down Converters
For demodulating an RF signal at a TV channel
frequency, the 1450-1 (M) and 1450-2 (BIG) Demodulator Mainframes must be used with a
Tektronix TDC. Three compatible TDCs are available for each system and provide a selection between tunable and fixed-channel performance.
The TDC Fixed-Channel Down Converter supports your specified system channel number.
Tunable Down Converters available for System M
VHF and UHF channels are the TDC1 and TDC2
respectively.
Both the 1450-1 and the 1450-2 have two synchronous video detectors operating in phase quadrature. One detects the in-phase signal; the other
detects the quadrature component of the video
signal. (The quadrature component is a measure
of change in visual carrier phase resulting from a
change of video leveL)
However, if incidental phase modulation is
present on the picture carrier, the amount of differential phase measured on a synchronously detected signal will be erroneous. Because of this,
an envelope detector is necessary to determine
the actual differential phase present. The envelope detector of the 1450-1 and 1450-2 has linear
transfer characteristics down to 3% carrier and so
provides optimum modulation depth indication.
Tektronix-Developed Surface Acoustic
Wave Filter
The 1450-1 (System M) and 1450-2 (System BIG)
feature a surface acoustic wave (SAW) filter developed by Tektronix. It provides more precise
Nyquist slope characteristics without group delay
distortion, improves long- and short-term stability,
and lowers maintenance costs.
In conventional demodulators, the more precisely
the bandpass characteristics approach an ideal
Nyquist curve, the more complex the filter network required . In the 1450-1 and 1450-2 Mainframes however, the bandpass characteristics
are determined by just ·a single component, the
SAW filter. Precision is the result .
Conventional tuned IF circuitry must be meticulously adjusted and is subject to change with mechanical and thermal shock. But the SAW filter is
in a sealed unit and accurately provides the critical selectivity characteristics of the demodulator
- and requires no adjustments.
Constant-Bandpass Characteristics
The Tektronix 1450-1 and 1450-2 offer constantbandpass characteristics over the entire dynamic
range of input signal level. Amplifiers in the mainframe operate at a constant gain, and pin-diode
attenuators are used to adjust the overall gain of
the demodulator. This more sophisticated approach to automatic gain control (AGC) is necessary to maintain constant-bandpass characteristics over the entire dynamic range of input power
(-69 dBm to -3 dBm). 30 dB of additional attenuation, available in 10 dB steps, can shift the
range for higher input power levels. In addition to
automatic AGC, demodulator RF/IF gain control
can be set for manual operation.
Digital Reading of Input Power
With the accurate (to 0.1 dB) digital readout of
the 1450-1 and 1450-2, you get measurements of
input power you can depend on at transmitter
sites, remote sites, or, for calibrated field strength
measurements.
Split and Intercarrier Sound
For making measurements or adjustments on aural transmitters, the 1450-1 and 1450-2 feature
both split and inter carrier sound channels. The
split carrier channel, which will operate without
the presence of the visual carrier, may be used
when making measurements on the aural transmitter only.
Four audio outputs give added measurement capability: a 600 n output, two low impedance outputs for driving a speaker or headphones, and a
calibrated output for making deviation measurements with an AC voltmeter or an oscilloscope.
Quadrature Distortion
Quadrature distortion occurs when a single sideband signal is demodulated with an envelope
detector.
Quadrature distortion most severely affects the
chrominance signal , causing a loss of brightness
in highly saturated colors, especially those at high
luminance levels. Narrow white picture elements
against the dark backgrounds are reproduced at
reduced brightness.
Synchronous detection of the television RF signal
elminates quadrature distortion, allowing the true
performance of the transmitter to be determined.
High Performance Spectrum Analyzers for your RF measurements are described on pages 198-214.
181
DEMODULATORS
TEK TELEVISION
CHARACTERISTICS
(1450·1/1450·2)
1450·2
1450·1
Fixed Channel TDC
RF Characteristics
RF Input Impedance
Return Loss with 0 dB attentuation
Return Loss with ;;.20 dB attenuation
Frequency
50 II (N)"
;;.20 dB
;;.30 dB
Any System M assigned carrier
frequency ± 20 kHz
Level Range
(0 dB from mainframe attenuator)
(10 dB from mainframe attenuator)
(20 dB from mainframe attenuator)
(30 dB from mainframe attenuator)
- 69 dBm to - 3 dBm
- 59 dBm to + 7 dBm
- 49 dBm to + 17 dBm
- 39 dBm to + 27 dBm
AGC Range
Noise Figure
Tunable TOCl or TOC2
50 II (N)"
;;.10 dB
;;.30 dB
(TOC1) All System M VHF assigned
carrier frequencies , ± 27 kHz. (TOC2)
All System M UHF assigned carrier
frequencies, ± 27 kHz
.. 10 dB
.;; 11 dB
- 69 dBm to - 3 dBm
- 59 dBm to + 7 dBm
- 49 dBm to + 17 dBm
- 39 dBm to + 27 dBm
66 dB
66 dB
TOC1 , .. 19 dB
TOC2, .. 19 dB
Alternate Channel Cross Modulation
Variation in Frequency Response
with AGC
50 II (N)"
;;. 10 dB
;;.30 dB
System B (TOC1) or G (TOC2)
assigned carrier frequency
± 27 kHz.
- 65 dBm to + 1 dBm
- 55 dBm to + 11 dBm
- 45 dBm to +21 dBm
- 35 dBm to +31 dBm
66 dB
.. 10 dB
.. 11 dB
TOC1 , .. 19 dB
TOC2, .;; 19 dB
;;.60 dB
.. 60 dB
(VHF) ;;.60 dB
(UHF) ;;.50 dB
;;. 50 dB
;;. 60 dB
;;.60 dB
.. 60 dB
.. 60 dB
.. 60 dB
.. 60 dB
.. 60 dB
.. 60 dB
.. 0.3 dB
(VHF) ± 0.1 dB
(UHF) ± 0.15 dB
.. 0.4 dB
7 MHz Bandpass
Output IF Image Rejection Ratio
Adjacent Channel Cross Modulation
Tunable TDCl or TOC2
50 II (N);;.20 dB
;;.30 dB
System BorG assigned carrier
frequency ± 20 kHz.
- 65 dBm to + 1 dBm
- 55 dBm to + 11 dBm
- 45 dBm to + 21 dBm
- 35 dBm to + 31 dBm
66 dB
VHF
UHF
Fixed Channel TDC
(VHF) .. ± 0.1 dB
(UHF) .. ± 0.15 dB
Readout Accuracy
± 2dB
± 2 dB
± 2dB
± 2 dB
Readout Resolution
± 0.1 dB
± 0.1 dB
± 0.1 dB
± 0.1 dB
-In 501/(N) :
+ 27 dBm - 5 V RMS
- 3 dBm - 158 mV RMS
- 69dBm - 80 p VRMS
+ 31 dBm - 8 V RMS
+ 1 dBm - 251 mV RMS
- 65 dBm = 126 p V RMS
CHARACTERISTICS,1450-10nly
Input Impedance (Zin) Return Loss -
IF
50 II (BNC).
> 18 dB.
IF Level Range - - 20 dBm to - 64 dBm. (Signal to noise
ratio deteriorates as signal level decreases.)
IF Frequency - Visual: 37, 38.9, or 45.75 MHz ± 127 kHz (if
specified by the mainframe/TDC options). Aural: 4.5 MHz below visual.
VIDEO
Video Output - ZO: 75 II (BNC, 2 each). Return Loss:
.. 34 dB. Levell V pop sync tip to peak white.
Dc Level - Back Porch AGC: Blanking level at 0 V ± 50 mY.
Sync Tip AGC : Referenced to blanking level, sync tip is at
- 286mV ± S.7 mV .
Line Time Distortion - 2T - 0.5% in wideband synchronous
mode only. 2T - 1% in all other modes.
Field Time Distortion Line Time Nonlinearity -
- 0.5%.
.. 1%.
Dillerential Gain - Synchronous: .. 1%. Envelope: .. 4%.
Peak Chroma Level : .. 100 IRE.
Differential Phase -
.. 1'.
Zero Carrier Reference Gate - Width : 30 ~s ± 10%. Delay:
20 ~s ± 10% from leading edge of sync. Carrier Cutoff:
.. 50 dB. Zero Carrier: ± 0.5 IRE. Timing Factory: Set to line
20 of both fields, internally selectable from lines 10 through 25
of both fields.
Chromlnance/Luminance Delay -
.. ± 20 ns.
Chromlnance/ Aural/Carrier Intermod Aural Signal Rejection -
;;. 50 dB down.
.. 46 dB.
EXT Zero Carrier Reference Drive Input - Zin: ",,5 kll
(BNC). Level Required: = + 1 V (accepts input from Tektronix
1440).
AUDIO
Frequency Response - De-emphasis Out Flat: ± 0.4 dB
(30 Hz to 15 kHz). De-emphasis In Standard: 75 ns. De-em·
phasis Curve: ± 0.4 dB.
Harmonic Distortion - .. 0.2% (30 Hz to 15 kHz at full output
with ± 25 kHz deviation).
Return Loss -
50 II (BNC).
> 18 dB.
Level Range - - 20 dBm to - 64 dB. (Signal to noise ratio
deteriorates as signal level decreases.)
Frequency below visual.
Visual: 38.9 MHz ± 127 kHz. Aural: 5.5 MHz
VIDEO
Video Outputs - ZO: 75 II (BNC, 2 eaCh). Return Loss:
.. 34 dB. Level : 1 V pop sync tip to peak white.
Audio Signal to Noise Ratio - Intercarrier Mode: .. 55 dB
with ± 25 kHz deviation. Split Carrier Mode: ;;.75 dB with
± 25 kHz deviation. External Aural Intercarrier In: ;;.75 dB with
± 25 kHz deviation. Aural Only Mode: .. 75 dB with ± 25 kHz
deviation.
Dc Level - Back Porch AGC. Blanking level at 0 V ± 50 mY.
sync tip AGC. Referenced to blanking level, sync tip is at
- 300 mV ± 6 mY .
Deviation Output- lO: 600 II (BNC). Level: 50 mV/kHz ± 1%
(20 kHz/V ± 1%).
Line Time Distortion - .. 0.5%, wideband IF, synchronous
detection. 1.0% in all other IF, detection mode combinations.
Aural Intercarrier In - Zin: 50 II (BNC). Return Loss:
;;.20 dB. Level : - 30 dBm ± 5 dB. Frequency: 4.5 MHz ± 1
kHz.
Field Time Distortion -
Aural Intercarrier Output - ZO: 50 II (BNC). Return Loss:
.. 20 dB. Level Nominal: - 6 dBm up to 0 dBm.
Chromlnance/Luminance Delay -
600 Il Balance Line Output - Level + 10 dBm (internally ad·
justable from .. - 10 dBm to + 15 dBm). Connector XLR.
Aural Signal Rejection -
8 Il Speaker Output - Level up to 5 W RMS, front panel
adjustable. Connector Barrier block.
Headphone Output - Level up to 50 mW into 8 II headphone
(stereo or mono style). Connector phone jack.
Remote Connector - Alarm output SPOT relay contact rated
at 28 V, 3 A. External synchronous/envelope switch. Ground
for envelope detection.
Line Time Nonlinearity Differential Gain -
.. 0.5%.
.. 1%.
Synchronous: .. 1%. Envelope: .. 4%.
.. ± 20 ns .
Chrominance/Aural Carrier Intermod -
.. 50 dB down.
;;.46 dB.
Video Signal to Noise Ratio - Low Frequency (p-p video/pop
hum): .. 60 dB. Mid Frequency Coherent (p-p video/pop noise):
.. 50 dB. White Noise (p-p video/RMS noise): .. 60 dB (10 kHz
to 5.5 MHz).
Quadrature Output - Z: 75 II (BNC). Return Loss: .. 34 dB.
Quadrature Phase:90 ' ± 2' (with respect to VIDEO OUT).
1 W maximum (any attenuator
Zero Carrier Reference Gate - Width: 30 ~s ± 10%. Carrier
Cutoff: ;;.50 dB. Zero Carrier: ± 3.5 mV . Timing Factory Set to
Une: 16/329 of both fields, internally selectable from lines
10/323 through 25/338 of both fields.
Rear Panel Outputs - Video (BNC), 2 each Quadrature. BNC
Deviation, BNC 4.5 MHz. BNC 600 II (balanced) 8 II speaker.
EXT Zero Carrier Reference Drive Input - Zln: = 5 Kll
(BNC). Level Required: = ± 1 V (accepts input from Tektronix
1460).
Electromagnetic Susceptibility -
Up to 10 V/meter.
Video Signal to Noise Ratios - Low Frequency (p-p video/
p.p hum): .. 60 dB. Mid Frequency Coherent (p-p video/pop
noise): .. 50 dB . White Noise (p-p video/RMS noise): .. 60 dB
(10kHz to 5 MHz).
Damage Level at RF Input setting).
Quadrature Output - ZO: 75 II (BNC). Return Loss: .. 34 dB ;
Quadrature Phase: 90 ' ± 2' (with respect to Video Out).
Rear Panel Inputs - 50 II RF. N; 4.5 MHz, BNC; External
zero carrier, BNC ; remote alarm Jack.
182
CHARACTERISTICS, 1450-2 Only
Input Impedance (Zln) -
TEK
1450
SERIES
~AlINTE"CA01
IN
OUT
1_1.10 ...... 1
•
•
AUDIO OUT
....
M=m
IMAX 5 W)
•
REMOTE
DEVIATION OUT
(9
ZERO CARRIER
REF DRIVE IN
IMAG)"' P)
VIDEO
L ,so !uTS
QUADRATURE
•
ct>J
AUDIO
Frequency Response - De-emphasis Out Flat: ± 0.4 dB
(30 Hz to 25 kHz). Oe-emphasis In Standard: 50 ~s . De-emphasis curve: ± 0.5 dB.
Harmonic Di,tortion - .. 0.2% (30 Hz to 15 kHz at full output
with ± 50 kHz deviation).
NOMINAL
100
120
220
240
50 m Y/kHz
VIDEO
•
. 0 SPEAKER
ORDERING INFORMATION, SYSTEM M
1450-1 Television Demodulator
(Order one vision IF option) .............. $13,935
Option 01 -
37 MHz Vision IF ......................................... NC
Option 02 -
38.9 MHz Vision IF ...................................... NC
Option 03 -
45.75 MHz Vision IF .................................... NC
RANGE
'UtE
90- 110 Y
108-132 V
125 A SLDW
198·242 V
0 6 A SLOW
•
218 -250 Y
FREO 47-63 Hz
110WMAXATSOHz
•
COUNTRIES: SYSTEM M (Option 11)
Antigua, Barbados, Bermuda, Brazil, Canada, Chile, Colombia,
Costa Rica, Cuba, Curacao, Dominican Repubiic, Ecuador, EI
Salvador, Guam, Guatemala, Johnston Islands, Korea, Mexioo,
Micronesia, Netherlands, Antilles, Nicaragua, Panama, Peru,
Phillipines, Puerto Rioo, Samoa, SI. Kilts, Surinam, Taiwan,
Trinldad/Tobago, Unuguay, U.S.A., Venezuela, Virgin IslandS.
Audio Signal to Noise Ratio - Intercarrier mode: .. 55 dB
with ± 50 kHz deviation and 1 kHz modulation. Split carrier:
.. 75 dB with ± 50 kHz deviation and 1 kHz modulation. EXT
aural intercarrier: IN .. 75 dB with ± 50 kHz deviation and 1
kHz modulation. Aural Only: .. 75 dB with ± 50 kHz deviation
and 1 kHz modulation.
TDC Fixed Channel Down Converter
(stiplulate channel number when ordering) .................. $3,445
Oeviation Output- Z0600 [l (BNC). Level: 50 mV/kHz ± 1%;
20 kHz/V ± 1%.
TDC-l Tunable Down Converter
System M, VHF Band .................................................. $7,435
Aural Intercamer IN - Zin: 50 [l (BNC). Return Loss: .. 20
dB. Level: - 30 dBm ± 5 dB. Frequency: 5.5 MHz ± 1 kHz.
TOC-2 Tunable Down Converter
System M, UHF Band .................................................. $7,435
Aural Intercarrier Output - ZO: 50 [l (BNC). Return Loss:
.. 20 dB. Level Nominal: - 6 dBm up to a dBm.
Order one vision IF option and Option 11 or 14. If your country
is not listed, contact your nearest field office for a quotation.
600 0 Balanced Line Output - Level: + 1a dBm (internally
adjustable from at least - 10 dBm to + 15 dBm). Connector
XLR.
Option 01 -
37 MHz Vision IF ......................................... NC
COUNTRIES: SYSTEM B/G (Option 12)
Algeria, Austria, Bahrain, Bangladesh, Belgium', Brunei, Cyprus, Denmark, East Germany, Egypt, Ethiopia, Finland, Ghana, Gibraltar, Greeoe, Guinea, Hong Kong' , Iceland, India, Indonesia, Iran, Israel, Italy (UHF), Jordan, Kenya, Kuwait, lebanon, Uberia, Ubya, Malta, Mauritius, Netherlands, Nigeria,
Norway, Oman, Pakistan, Portugal, Oatar, Rhodesia, Saudla
Arabia', Sierra Leone, Singapore, Spain, Sudan, Sweden,
Switzerland, Syria, Tanzania, Tunisia, Turkey, Uganda, United
Arab Emirates, West Germany. Yemen Arab Repubiic, Republic of Yemen, Yugoslavia, Zambia.
Option 02 -
38. MHz Vision IF ........................................ NC
'System B only.
Option 03 -
45.75 MHz Vision IF .................................... NC
Option 11 -
System M Countries .................................... NC
Option 14 -
System M Countries .................................... NC
8 0 Speaker Output - Level up to 5 W RMS, front panel
adjustable. Connector Barrier biock.
Headphone Output - Level: up to 50 mW into 8 [l headphone
(stero or mono style). Connector Phone jack.
Remote Connector - Alarm Output: SPOT relay contact rated at 28 V 3 A. External Synchronous/Envelope Switch:
ground for envelope detection.
Electromagnetic Susceptibility Damage Level at RF Input setting).
Up to 1 V/meter.
1 W maximum (any attenuator
Rear Panel Outputs - Video: BNC, 2 each Ouadrature; BNC
Deviation: BNC, 5.5 MHz. BNC 600 0 (balanced), 8 0 speaker,
remote alarm jack.
Rear Panel Inputs - 50 0 RF. N: 5.5 MHz, BNC; External
zero carrier, BNC; Remote alarm jack.
Option 10 - Wide Bandwidth Audio
20 Hz to 55 kHz ±0.4 dB ........................................... +$165
COUNTRIES: SYSTEM M (Option 14)
Japan and Okinawa.
ORDERING INFORMATION, SYSTEM BIG
1450-2 Television Demodulator
(Order one vision IF option and one group delay
option) ............................................... $13,145
Option 02 -
38.9 MHz Vision IF ...................................... NC
Option 09 -
+ 90/- 170 ns Group Delay ........................ NC
TOC Fixed Channel down Converter
(stipulate channel number when ordering) ................... $3,445
Order one vision IF option and Option 12. If your country is not
listed, contact your nearest field office for a quotation.
Option 02 -
38.9 MHz Vision IF ...................................... NC
Option 12 -
System B/G countries ................................. NC
ORDERING INFORMATION, SYSTEM I
1450-3 Television Demodulator ......... $13,145
183
VIDEO
TEK AUTOMATIC
MEASUREMENT SET
11111111111111111111111111 11111111111111111111
....... ,...
...,:'1m:. ..
111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111
-1980 ANSWER
Complete Video Measurement Capability
Waveform Digitizer to Capture Video Signal
ANSWER BASIC Software for Measurements, Analysis and Report Generation
Remote Terminal Capability
The 1980 ANSWER Automatic Video Measurement Set provides total video measurement capabilities and offers maximum versatility and
testing power. Special features provide quality
measurement performance for a wide variety of
applications.
Programmability
The 1980 can be programmed uSing ANSWER
BASIC (BASIC software, Options 01, 02 or 03) to
make specific measurements required for a wide
range of video applications. It can be tailored for
a specific operation, automatically performing a
single measurement or a group of measurements continuously, on operator demand, or at
184
prescheduled times. The results can be returned
in report format, with or without graphics, on a
variety of terminals and printers . ANSWER's
microprocessor control and ROM memory give
you extensive flexibility . Format or standard
changes can be made without the expensive
modifications or recalibrations associated with
analog test equipment.
High Measurement Accuracy
The 1980 provides consistent measurement accuracy with high repeatability. Special features
like signal offset, gain control, dither generation,
and signal averaging can be used to minimize
possible errors. Using these features can significantly reduce noise on the incoming signal and
provide an effective resolution of 11 bits. This
means you can use the 1980 for the most stringent measurement problems and have fast accurate results .
Due to its digital nature ANSWER has very few
intemal adjustments, providing a high degree of
reliability over long periods of time.
User-Definable Measurement Limits
Inner (caution) and outer (alarm) limits may be
programmed for each measurement parameter.
The "limit-exceeded" signal generated on ANSWER's display is in the form of asterisks. Either
of these limit signals may be programmed to initiate data logging, and the outer limit signal may
be programmed to activate user interface
alarms. Limit files are linked to the input source,
allowing different limit values for each source.
Amplitude, Phase and Timing Measurement
All type of measurements can be programmed
into the 1980, including sync, burst, and bar amplitudes, differential gain and phase, and timing
measurements. The 1980 can tell you immediately if video signals are within acceptable or legal
limits.
Remote Operation
The 1980 can also be operated from a remote
terminal over telephone lines. With Option 12
(Autocall), it can even be programmed to automatically telephone a remote terminal under user
specified conditions, e.g., an out-of-limits signal.
The 1980 can be used in a wide range of applications including unattended and remote transmission systems, and systems under computer
control.
TEK
Display Terminal
ANSWER requires the use of a terminal for display. We offer several including the 4006-1
11 inch CRT Graphics Terminal , the 4014 -1
19 inch CRT Graphics Terminal , and the 4025
12 inch Raster Scan CRT Terminal , also with
graphics. We also offer the 4631 Hard Copy Unit
for clean, dry, hard copies.
Monotonlclty -
All 256 codes present and in sequence with
no polarity reversals .
Sampling Rate
1980 ANSWER Option 01
NTSC Applications Software
NTSC: 910 x horizontal frequency .
PAL: 1135 x horizontal frequency .
Automatic Operation
Note: User selectable means that the function is controlled
from the keyboard.
Programmability
DIGITAL PROCESSING
All Digital Circuitry
Signal Memory
Available Measurement Programs
Application programs taking full advantage of
the 1980's capabilities can be purchased from
Tektronix to make most NTSC and PAL video
broadcast measurements.
This flexibility , unavailable in analog instruments,
combined with the video measurement capability
means that the 1980 can be tailored to a wide
range of your applications for the analysis, measurement , and testing of baseband video
signals.
Video Acquisition Memory Capacity: 32 k samples.
Video Acquisition Memory Controller Sampling Modes: Line
rate, fteld rate or block sampling between two points on signal.
Save Value: Multiples of 8.
Skip Value: Multiples of 2.
Picture Monitor Bright-Up Pulse Output: Amplitude: ",,240 mV.
Termination : Internal in 75 n .
Real Time Clock
Internal
+50'C;
External
External
Reference Stability: 10 P/M total over + 10' C to
crystal controlled.
Input Frequency: 1 MHz.
Input Amplitude: 0.3 to 4.0 V.
Simple display format means measurement results are easy to read and understand. User-definable measurement limits quickly identify an outof -tolerance condition. Programmability
accommodates present and future needs without
additional hardware.
Microcomputer
RS-232C Compatibility
ANSWER has RS-232C (ASCII coding) interface
capability. This means ANSWER can be adapted
to a wide range of applications, including unattended and remote systems and computer
control.
CHARACTERISTICS
SIGNAL HANDLING
Inputs -
A and B (user selectable).
Impedance -
75 n .
Video: .. 46 dB to 5 MHz.
Signal Level -
0.5 to 2 V ~p ; sync negative.
Dc or ac nonfloating (user selectable).
Clamp
TEK ANSWER BASIC.
DIGITAL INTERFACE
Access Ports
Interface: RS-232C ; (ASCII code).
Number: 5; 3 DCE' (full duplex). 2 DTE" (full duplex).
Baud Rate
Five pons: Up to 9600; user programmable.
Automatic Call-Up User Operation -
Return Loss
Coupling -
User Memory: 32 k words.
Nonvolatile Memory: 8 k words.
Software Control -
RS-866 (optional).
Via keyboard (ASCII).
'OCE - Oats Communication Equipment
"OTE = Data Terminal Equipment
ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS
Temperature Range - Storage: -55'C to + 75'C. Operating: O' C to +50·C.
Selection - Fast, slow, or off (user selectable).
Level - Sync tip or back porch.
Altitude Range - Storage: Sea level to 15 240 m (50,000 tt).
Operating: Sea level to 4572 m (15,000 tt).
Hum Rejection
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Fast: > 36 dB.
Slow: < 1 dB.
Cabinet
Signal Averaging
Dimensions
Noise Reduction : 15 dB ; with 32 line averaging and incoming
signal-ta-noise ratio of 46 dB or less.
Dynamic Range: 2.5 V maximum; with 0 offset.
Gain Range: 0 to 15.5 times in 0.5 increments.
Offset Range : 0 to 248 LSB ± 0 .5 LSB (8 LSB increments);
referred to input at unity gain .
Noise Floor: - 72 dB (0 dB = 714 mV).
Width
Height
Depth
mm
429
355
593
Weights""
kg
Net
25.0
The 1980 ANSWER Option 01 Applications software is programmed to make both NTC 7 and
FCC measurements on all industry standard VITS
and full-field signals. Amplitude, phase, and timing parameters can all be determined quickly and
accurately. Automatic measurements allow quick
evaluation of VIT or full-field signals. NTC 7 and
FCC measurement routines provide detailed analysis of signal amplitude, phase, and timing.
Rackmount
in
mm
In
16.9
14.0
24.0
483
355
644
19.0
14.0
22.0
Ib
kg
Ib
55.0
Automatic Operation
ANSWER is programmed with 47 individual measurements, many of which are combined into
easy-to-use amplitude , phase, and timing
routines. All of these operations are completely
automatic and may be invoked using simple, oneword commands. You tell ANSWER whether to
run a whole measurement routine , a partial measurement routine , or a single measure ment-periodically or on command. Results are
ready within minutes and offer a high repeatability
you can depend on.
In-Service Measurements
ANSWER measures virtually all signal parameters
on an in-service basis. Many of these measurements, including timing, do not even require the
presence of a VIT signal. This full in-service capability minimizes the need for out-of-service measurements, so time may be spent on maintaining
the system rather than on isolating system
problems.
Distortions
Differential Gain Error: .. 0.5%.
Differential Phase Error: .. 0.4 '.
Luminance Nonlinearity Error: .. 1.0%.
Amplitude/Frequency Error (0 to 5 MHz): 0 dB ± 0.25 dB ; 7.16
MHz = .. - 46 dB.
Delay/Frequency Error (0 to 5 MHz): .. 20 ns.
SYNCHRONIZATION
Modes
Internal: Satisfactory operation with 26 dB signal-ta-noise ratio
(Sound-in-Syncs disabled). Channel A and B (user selectable).
External: Channel A and B (user selectable).
Amplitudes
':. r.. TIO tl
.,p:.. .:
10 8 1
4 . 32
140 . 0
148 , e
7 ,9
9 , 03
1 78
,6
9.0
USEC
USEC
USEe
NSEC
USEC
USEC
USEC
USEC
CYC LES
FC C
Ae " CH HHHEL
ItHM
~ ~
v.
U
TIMING
9. 2 1
1000 0
20 -NOV - 79 01 14 ' 50
SOUR CE ' AO ( CHANNEL A)
IHT A
SY NC'
'.' I OLATEO LI MI TS
LOW ER
UPPER
20 . I
19 7
2 38
4 . 78
RMS: ± 0 .25 LSB ( ± 0.1%).
Peak : ± 0 .5 LSB ( ± 0.2%).
Conversion Rate -
20 - HOIJ- 7.? (\1 1~ ~ '"
';OURCE
SY NC '
27 % ( I RE)
BL ANK F 1
BL ANK F2
EQUALI ZER WIOTH
SERRA TI ON WIDTH
U
U
H. TIM ltl G
{)J OLHTED U til T;
IJP?E?
LO" ER
STATI ON NAME
APL =
Accuracy
FCC
1~ :,
CHANNEL A:
19-0CT-81 13 :21 :27
0 to
± 180· ± 0.4 · .
" V/TS for NTC 7 and FCC.
'2 V/TS not required.
OUT-OF-SERVICE MEASUREMENTS
CHANNEL A:
19-0CT-81 13 :21 :48
CHANNEL A:
19-0CT-81 13 :22 :52
CHANNEL A:
19-0CT-81 13 :23 :36
SYNC AMP ERROR RESTORED
11.00 SYNC AMP CAUTION
SYNC AMP ERROR RESTORED
Field Time Distortion Range -
0 to 40% ± 0.5%.
Long Time Distortion Range
Overshoot Range: 20 to 100 IRE ± 1 IRE. 0 to 20 IRE
± 0.5IRE.
Settling Time: 1 to 30 s ± 2% of bounce rate.
Distortion
Dynamic Picture Gain Range: ± 25% ± 1.0 IRE.
Dynamic Sync Gain Range: ± 25% ± 1.0 IRE.
DEMODULATOR OUTPUT MEASURMENTS
(CARRIER REFERENCE PULSE PRESENT)
Blanking Level Range - 65 to 85% of maximum carrier
± 0.5% (VITS not required) .
Figure 3. Error report in monitor mode
IIHlCT.... 1 14 . 17<18
CHAIf£l A.
LINE IU1BER
331
DITEW LEVEl- 8
Reference White Level Range*1 carrier ± 0.5%.
2.5 to 22.5% of maximum
" V/TS for NTC 7 and FCC.
FCC AND RS-170A TIMING MEASUREMENTS
For all timing measurements, blanking level is 0 IRE. VITS are
not required for timing measurements. RS-170A information,
where different, is given in parentheses.
H Sync Width Range -
1 to 8
Front Porch Duration Range -
~s
± 25 ( ± 15) ns.
0.5 to 2
~s
Sync to Start 01 Video Duration Range (+20) ns.
Sync to Burst Start Duration Range Sync to End 01 Burst Duration Range ± 0.05 burst cycle.
H Blanking Width Range Color Burst Width Range tude detection ± 0.5 IRE.
8 to 30
~s
± 25 ( ± 20) ns.
8 to 15
~s
± 25
4 to 30 cycles ± 20 ·.
6 to 15
~s
± 20 ns
± 25 ( ± 50) ns.
6 to 13 cycles ± 1 cycle ampli-
Breezeway Width Range - - 2.0 to 3.5 ~s, (To is the - 4 IRE
point on the trailing edge of H sync ± 25 ns ± 0.5 burst cycle).
~~~+ ~
'~"~,+I~,~~I~~I
48
Figure 4. Copy of screen display of line 331
186
58
118
78
TEK
0.14 to 0.3 ~s ± 20 ns.
H Sync Rlsetimes and FaUtimes 0.31 to 1.0 ~s ± 30 ns.
Equalizing Pulse Width Range -
1 to 20
Serration Width Range -
~s
1 to 20
Vertical Blanking Width Range -
~s
t~T-8t
± 25 ( ± 15) ns.
14 121 133
0WHl. A,
LINE NlJI!ER 343
INTEliI' LEVEL- 3
251
± 25 ( ± 15) ns.
1118
20 to 50 lines ± 140 ns.
t51l
Inner Limits -
MEASUREMENT LIMITS
Two per measurement.
Outer Limits -
Two per measurement.
tll8
!IV
Limits Memory Required Limits Outputs -
-91
-tll8
Eight words per set of four limits.
-t58
To the selected RS-232C por1(s).
Front Panel LED Indicators Progress. I/O Failure. Busy.
58
•
Limit. Values - Default values standard. Other user defined
limits may be stored in nonvolatile memory. Umits may be
linked to input source.
-2118
Battery Failure. Sampling in
-251
-3118
1980 ANSWER Option 02,
-358
PAL Applications Software
IIICRIlSECIJNI)S
Automatic Monitoring of PAL Video Signals
Automatic Report Generation
Figure 5. Copy of screen display showing horizontal sync and color burst.
Operator Initiated Individual Measurements
+fW!-82 1201111041
Signal Plots for Analysis
Remote Operation
PAL Applications Software makes automatic or
operator-initiated measurements on ITS and fullfield signals. Amplitude, phase and timing parameters can all be determined quickly and
accurately.
Automatic Monitoring
The Option 02 program will continuously monitor a
signal, make standard measurements, compare
them against user defined limits, and print alarm
messages when these limits are exceeded. The
program can even be set up to report alarms only
when n out of m measurements are outside the
limits, where nand m are defined by the user.
Measurement Routines
All measurement accuracies specified are valid
over the entire dynamic range with an
unweighted signal-to-noise ratio of 45 dB on the
incoming signal. Any number and combination of
these routines may be selected at one time. In
monitor mode, all these measurements are made
sequentially.
CHARACTERISTICS Option 02
Sync Amplitude Error Range" -100 to -50% ±1.25%.
Burst Amplitude Error Range -
30 to - 70%
CYN
6RN
IlAG
R£»
ELU
-7.'
-14.4
-a.8
-14.8
-14.5
-15.3
25 to - 90% ± 1.0%.
a to 10% Kf
± 0.5% Kf.
Chrominance Luminance Gain Inequality Range" -
75 to
- 75% ± O.S%.
Chrominance Luminance Delay Inequality Range" to - 300 ns ± 20 ns
ChrominancelLumlnance Interrnodulation Range" - 50% ± 0.5%.
Luminance Nonlinearity Range" -
a to 50%
Low Frequency Error Range -
0.3 to 25% ± 0.5%.
a
Average Picture Level Range to 110% ± 3%.
• In accordance with CCIR Reg. 569.
.. Not specified in CCIR Reg. 569. In accordance with CCIR
Reg. 567.
1980 Option 03,
Unattended Monitoring of NTSC Video Signals from Studios, STLs, Earth Stations, and
Transmitters
Waveform Plots for Analysis and
Documentation
50 to
Remote Operation
± 1%.
Differential Gain Range" -
a to 50%
±0.5%.
Differential Phase Range -
a to 180·
± 0.4· .
Continuous Random Noise Range" - 28 dB ± 1 dB.
300 ns
-8.2
-4.1
.4
2.5
-1.4
4.'
I
I
I
I
I
I
CARR
CARR
CARR
CARR
BAR
S'OC •
USEt
USEt
NSEt
NSEt
USEt
USEt
USEt
USEt
C"tCU'S
DES
QtU\..lM RATIO
1101
82.'
...as.'. .
88.5
77 .7
".8
.
Figure 6. Measurement results are displayed in an easy-to-read format indicating the time. signal source. measurement. and whether
the measured value exceeded caution t) or alarm t·) limits. This same format is also used for printing errors during the monitoring
process. and for reporting manual measurements.
NTSC Transmitter Monitoring Software
40 to - 40% ± 0.5%.
2T Pulse/Bar Ratio Error Range" 2T Pulse K Rating Range"" -
va
80 to - 50% ± 1.25%.
Luminance Bar Amplitude Error Range" ± O.S%.
Bar Tilt Range" -
1888~3
A (8) IlJI«IIj6 L.£VEl.
74.0
A (8) lUI« VARIATmI
3.2
A (8) S'OC VARIA TmI
2.7
A (I) BAR AIf'I.ITI.I)(
12.8
A (I) S'OC AIf'I.ITI.I)(
48.1
A (2) lUST AIf'I.ITI.I)(
82.2
A (7) H lUI« 4 IRE
18.8
A (8) S'OC vmTH
4.8
A (8) S'OC RISETlIE
188.'
A (8) S'OC f'ALlTlIE
185.'
A (8) S'OC-S£TI.f
8.46
A (8) f1QIT PORCIt
1.48
A (8) S'OC-IlRST £M)
7.78
A (8) 8R£EZ£lIAY
.47
A (8) lUST vmTH
8.8
A (8) SCH PHASE
15.8
A (14)
AIt'L ERIQ!
PHASE ERIQ!
1
DES
QWf(l
QWf(l
QWf(l
QWf(l
QWf(l
QWf(l
QWf(l
QWf(l
QWf(l
QWf(l
QWf(l
QWf(l
QWf(l
QWf(l
QWf(l
QWf(l
QWf(l
Automatic Logging
Operator Initiated Individual Measurements
(Weighted) - 68 to
User Specified Alarms
The NTSC Transmitter Monitoring Software 1980
ANSWER Option 03 makes automatic or operatorinitiated measurements on VITS and full field signals. Amplitude, phase, and timing parameters
can all be determined quickly and accurately.
Automatic Monitoring
The Option 03 application program can continuously monitor video signals, make standard measurements as selected by a user, compare them
against user defined limits, and print alarm messages should these limits be exceeded. A confirmation message will be generated when the value no longer exceeds the limit.
Studio and Visual Transmitter Signals
Both transmitter output and studio signals can be
monitored. When a limit is exceeded on the primary channel (e.g., transmitter output), the measurements are made on the secondary channel
(e.g. , studio or transmitter input) for comparison.
Measurement results from both sources are
logged.
187
AUTOMATIC VIDEO
SET
TEK MEASUREMENT
_
12.10.41 I. . IPTllIN ,
DiAN A (QWfEI. /.) FmJ) I Lll£ II CL.IJQCEI)
£NTB 0< F.fU..L fit' START .EII) TIllES c.sEt) .
_
11062.44 1. . 1PTllIN S
DiAN A (QWfEI. /.) FmJ) I Lll£ II CL.IJQCEI)
£NTB 0< F.fU..L fit' START.EII) TIllES c.sEt) .
ZI>I2IlII£
Zl>12I lII£
I t.\IIR
I.
•
•
•
21
,.
18
~
58
48
58
21
•
II
71
,.
-18
5
•
~
~
S lNTEIIPCU'Im POlIfTS
Figure 7. Any line of video can be graphed on graphic display terminals and hard copy
devices locally, or at remote locations.
Automatic Logging
A complete set of measurements will automatically be made and the results printed at times
scheduled by the operator at up to 24 different
times for a 24-hour period .
Individual Measurements
At any time. the operator can select one or more
measurements to be made once or continuously.
In this mode. the measured value will be printed
each time the measurement is made. Results are
available within seconds with accuracy and repeatability seldom achievable with manual
measurements.
User-Definable Measurement Limits
Upper and lower limits, caution and fail are provided . These limits are readily set as appropriate
for the primary and secondary signals to be measured , independently of each other as needed.
Waveform Plots
For further analysis of distortions, the waveform
can be plotted on a graphic terminal or plotter,
even at long distances. Any portion of the waveform can be selected for display on the full
screen. This allows small distortions to be examined in detail. Hard copy plots also make useful
support documents for the measurement reports .
Measurement Routines
All measurement accuracies are valid on a video
signal having SIN of 45 dB or better. From 26 dB
to 45 dB the effects of noise masking will gradually diminish until it disappears at 45 dB. Any number and combination of these routines may be
selected at one time for monitoring or making
manual measurements.
CHARACTERISTICS, Option 03
AMPLITUDE AND PHASE MEASUREMENTS
Bar Amplitude
Zero-Carrier Pulse Present : 0 to 90% of maximum carrier
± O.4%.
Nonzero-Carrier Pulse: 0 to 200 IRE ± 0.5 IRE.
188
~
(.Il1O
44
~
48
~
US£t
48
',N' Fa! IO>-lNTEIIPCU'Im PLOTS)
Figure 8. Any portion of a line can be expanded for detailed analysis.
Burst Amplitude - 0 to 200% of sync ± 1.3% or ± 0.5 IRE
whichever is greater (VITS not required).
Color Bar
Amplitude Error: 100% ± 1.0% or 1 IRE whichever is greater.
Phase Error: 0 to 180' ± 1'.
Chrominance-Luminance Gain Ratio: 0 to 200% ± 2%.
Chrominance-Luminance Delay (Relative Chroma Time) - 0
to 300 ns ± 20 ns.
Chrominance-Luminance Gain Ratio (Relative Chroma Gain)
- 0 to 160% of Bar ± 1%.
Differential Gain - 0 to 100% ± 0.5%.
Differential Phasa Range - 0 to 180' ± 0.4 '.
Luminance Nonlinearity Range - 0 to 50% ± 1%.
Relative Burst Gain Range - 0 to 100% ± 0.5%.
Relative Burst Phase Range - - 180 to 180' ± 0.4 '.
Sync Amplitude Range (VITS not required)
Bar Present: 20 to 80% of Bar ± 0.5%.
No Bar Present: 20 to 80 IRE ± 0.5 IRE.
Multiburst Flag Amplituda Range
Zero-Carrier Pulse Present: 0 to 90% of maximum carrier
± O.S%.
Bar Present: 20 to 130 IRE of Bar ± 0.5 IRE.
No Bar Present: 20 to 130 IRE ± 0.5 IRE.
Multlburst Amplitude Range - 0 to 100% of flag ± 3%.
Blanking Level Range - 0 to 90% of maximum carrier
± 0.5% (zero carrier pulse required).
Sync Variation Range
Zero-Carrier Pulse Present: 0 to 50% of maximum carrier
± 0.5%.
Bar Present: 0 to 50% of Bar ± 0.5%.
No Bar Present: 0 to 50 IRE ± 0.5 IRE.
Blanking Variation Range
Zero-Carrier Pulse Present: 0 to 50% of maximum carrier
± O.5%.
Bar Present : 0 to 50% of Bar ± 0.5%.
No Bar Present: 0 to 50 IRE ± 0.5 IRE.
Vertical Interval White Range
Zero-Carrier Pulse Present: 0 to 90% of maximum carrier
± 1%.
Bar Present: 0 to 100% of Bar ± 1%.
No Bar Present: 0 to 100 IRE ± 1 IRE.
Maximum Picture White Range
Zero-Carrier Pulse Present: 0 to 90% of maximum carrier
± 1%.
Bar Present: 0 to 100% of Bar ± 1%.
No Bar Present: 0 to 100 IRE ± 1 IRE.
Minimum Picture Black - - 4010100 IRE ± 1 IRE.
LINEAR WAVEFORM DISTORTION MEASUREMENTS
Line Time Distortion Range - 0 to 40% of Bar ± 0.5%.
Pulse-to-Bar Ratio - 10 to 125% of Bar ± 1%.
HORIZONTAL INTERVAL TIMING MEASUREMENTS
Breezeway Width Range - 2 to 3.5.s ± 25 ns ( ± 0.5 burst
cycles).
Color Burst Range - 6 to 13 cycles ± 1 cycle.
Front Porch Duration Range - 0.5 to 2 .s ± 25 ns.
Horizontal Blanking Width Range - 8 to 30.s ± 25 ns.
Sync Risetime and Sync Falltime - 0.14 to 3.0.s :!: 20 ns.
0.31 to 1.0 .s ± 30 ns.
Sync Width Range - 1 to 8.s ± 25 ns.
Sync to End of Burst Duration Range - 6 to 15 .s ± 20 ns.
SCH Phase Range - - 90 to 90' ± 7' .
VERTICAL INTERVAL TIMING MEASUREMENTS
Equalizing Pulse Width Range - 25 to 200% nominal horizontal sync width ± 0.5%.
Serration Width Range - 1 to 20.s ± 25 ns.
Blanking Width Range - 19 to 29 lines +0.16 line. - 0.03
line.
SIGNAL-TO-NOISE MEASUREMENTS
Unwelghted SNR Range - 26 to 72 dB ± 1 dB, 66 to 72 dB
± 2.5 dB.
Luminance Weighted SNR Range - 26 to 72 dB ± 1 dB.
Chromlnance Weighted SNR Range - 26 to 72 dB ± 1 dB.
Low Frequency SNR Range - 26 10 60 dB ± 1 dB.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Left rackmounting adaptor (367-0279-00); right rackmounting
adaptor (367-0280-00); tracks (351-0104-03); 15 ft RS-232C
modem connecting cable (012-0939-00); rubber cabinet feet
(348-0068-00) ; power cord (161 -0066-01) ; rack slides
(351-0623-00).
ORDERING INFORMATION
1980 ANSWER with Option 01,
NTSC Applications Software ............ $26,000
1980 ANSWER with Option 02,
PAL Applications Software ............... $26,000
1980 ANSWER with Option 03,
NTSC Transmitter Monitoring
Software ............................................ $26,000
Option 12 -
Automatic Call Equipment ..................... +$500
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Service Kit
Order 067-1115-00 ........................................................ $3000
PAL Replacement Circuit Board Kit
Order 020-0519-01 ..................................................... $20,000
Additional Modem Cable for RS338 Port
(provided as part of Option 12)
Order 012-0939-00 .......................................................... $115
TEK
AUTOMATIC
VIDEO CORRECTOR
&1440
1440 NTSC Automatic Video Corrector: VIR signal referenced.
1440
Reduces Operating Costs
Extends TransmiHer Tube Life and Reduces
Maintenance Costs
Maintains Consistent High Quality Color
Pictures
The 1440 VIRS Automatic Video Corrector gives
fully automatic correction of video gain, chrominance to luminance gain ratio, black level (set
up), chroma phase, burst amplitude, and sync
amplitude errors. With this corrector in your facility, the quality of the program signal is rigidly
maintained . Ordinary changes and even many severe distortions are automatically corrected.
Maintains Correct Sync-To-Video Ratios
During Line Voltage Fluctuations
The 1440 is an in-line NTSC processing amplifier
that uses the VIRS (Vertical Interval Reference
Signal) to automatically correct video gain, chrominance to luminance gain ratio, setup level,
burst phase relative to chroma (hue), burst gain,
and sync gain.
Automatic VIRS Referenced Correction of:
Overall Video Signal Amplitude
Chrominance to Luminance Gain Ratio
Black Level
Chrominance Phase
Burst Gain
Sync Gain
Video gain correction is referenced to the 50 IRE
level of the VIRS. Chrominance to luminance gain
ratio and burst phase corrections are referenced
to the amplitude and phase of the VIRS chrominance respectively. Setup level correction is referenced to the 7.5 IRE level of the VIRS. Sync and
burst gain corrections are controlled respective to
their standard amplitudes.
Automates TransmiHer Modulation Level
Control
Sync and Burst Regeneration
(Optional 1440 Only)
White Clip Automatic Clip Level Tracking
(Optional 1440 Only)
Optional Closed Loop Capabilities for Greater Efficiency and Economy in TransmiHer
and VTR Operations
Automatic Correction
Automatic Video Correctors sample six parameters of the reference signal in the vertical interval
and then automatically change their operating
characteristics until correct values for the Reference Signal are achieved. Distortions in the full
field signal are simultaneously corrected by the
automatic changes that restore the Reference
Signal to its original characteristics. The corrector
has no front or rear panel controls other than the
power switch and the preset pedestal width adjustments. Operating modes other than full automatic correction are indicated by front panel
lights. Oscilloscope test points are provided for
program input and program output.
Since the 1440 is automatic, it continues to operate as a unity gain device without distorting program video if the reference is lost. If burst is lost
with reference present, monochrome correcting
continues. An excellent source of VIR is the 1441 .
A bypass relay located in the corrector interface
unit ensures continuity of the program line
through the Automatic Corrector. The relay automatically bypasses the progam line to maintain a
constant program delay line in the event of a
power failure. The remote control unit can also
activate this bypass relay. The program delay in
all modes is 145 ns.
Auxiliary Units
In most applications, the usefulness of automatic
correction is enhanced by a Tektronix Remote
Control Unit. You can conveniently select corrector modes and manually correct six signal parameters with this unit. The remote unit allows easy
adjustment of the parameter's preset values for
operation in the absence of a reference signal.
Automatic correction value adjustments are also
provided.
The Tektronix Remote Monitoring Unit provides
meter indications of the amount of correction applied to the signal. For 1440 systems order 015-
0239-00.
Program Protection and Operating
Considerations
In most cases the automatic operation is straightforward . Reference signal distortions will cause
correcting action to occur.
189
VIDEO CORRECTOR
TEK AUTOMATIC
Video Signal to Random Noise Ratio, Unwelghted ~ 60 dB to 5 MHz.
Open loop operation
VIDEO SOURCES WITH
REFERENCE SIGNAL INSERTED
Spurious Subcarrier -
- 60 dB.
Field Time Tilt Correction reduced to ';; 1%.
25% tilt on input signal -
will be
Clamping Characteristics - 10-90% APL or 90-10% APL.
Recovery within one line to within live IRE (1440) without overshoot. Slow clamp option provided to reduce keyboarding
when used with noisy signals. Hum Reduction : 1 V hum on
input signal can be reduced to .;;25 mV .
TOSTL
As a corrector (open loop) - The 1440 Monitor the video signal at its program line input and automatically corrects
distortions.
Closed loop operation
FROMSTL
Maximum Correction Ranges - Video Level at Input: ± 6 dB.
Sync Level at Input: ± 3 dB. Chrominance/Luminance Gain:
± 3 dB. Burst Level: ± 6 dB BursVChrominance Phase: ± 25 ".
Black Level Setup: ± 10 IRE.
Reduced Correction Ranges - Video Level: ± 2 dB. Sync
Level : ± 3 dB . Chrominance/Luminance Gain : ± 3 dB .
BursVChrominance Phase: ± 25 ". Black Level Setup: ± 5IRE.
Dc Error-Signal Output - Source Impedance: 10 kO. Open
Circuit Voltage: 10 V for remote metering and telemetry. Six
Outputs: video gain, sync gain, burst gain, relative chroma
gain, burst phase, and setup.
Chroma/luminance Gain Correction (+3 dB to - 3 dB) -2T
pulse/bar ratio - 110% maximum and 92% minimum. T Pulse/Bar Ratio: 125% maximum and 85% minimum. 2T Pulse
Preshoot: 5% maximum. T Step Overshoot: 5% maximum. T
Step Risetime: 95 ns minimum and 155 ns maximum. Chrominance/Luminance Delay: 10 ns minimum and 10 ns maximum.
VIR Signal Correction Rate: 0.35 s (90% correction without
overshoot).
Line Voltage Range Crest Factor -
POWER SUPPLY
115 V ac ± 10% and 230 V ac ± 10%.
.. 1.35.
Maximum Line Current -
0.5 A.
Maximum Power Conlumption Line Frequency Range -
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
CHARACTERISTICS
Input Impedance -
75 0 nominal.
Input Return Loss - 46 dB to 5 MHz, operating; 40 dB to
5 MHz, bypass mode.
Video Delay -
145 ns.
Output Impedance Output Return Loss -
75 O.
36 dB to 5 MHz.
Linear Wavelorm Distortions (Maximum) Field Time: 0.5%,
Une Time: 0.5%, Short Time: T Pulse/Bar: 2%. 2T Pulse/Bar:
1%.
Nonlinear Wavelorm Distortions - Differential Gain (10-90%
APL): 0.5%. Differential Phase (10-90% APL): 0.5%. Dynamic
Gain (10-90% APL): picture 0.5%, sync 0.5%. Chrominance/Luminance Intermodulation: 0.5%. Une Time Nonlinearity:
0.5%.
Relatl.e Signal Timing Errors - Sync-burst, burst video,
sync-video jitter, and burst jitter: none.
190
35 W.
48 to 66 Hz.
Dimensions
Width
Height
Depth
mm
483
881
412
in
19.0
3.5
16.2
Weight
kg
Ib
Net
Domestic Shipping
Export Shipping
7.6
11 .0
16.8
16.7
24 .1
37 .0
Vertical interval reference signal (VfRS).
ORDERING INFORMATION
1440 NTSC Automatic Video
Corrector
$6,205
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Remote Control Unit lor 1440 (Includes 2 connectors).
Order 015-0240-00 "."."."",, ........................................... $775
Remote Monitor Unit for 1440 (Includes 1 connector).
Order 015-0239-00 """"" """""""""""""""""""""""" $865
Six Foot Extender Cable with connectors for use
between the 1440.
Order 012-0131 -00 """"""""""""""""""" """",,",,,,.,,. $275
Three Foot Extender Cable with connectors. for use
between the 1440 chassis and the rear rackmounting
section.
Order 012-0137-00 """""""""""""""""""""""""""""" $90
TEK
NTSC DIGITAL
GENERATOR/INSERTER
1900 Digital Generator
+ PROGRAM OUT
10 Bits
PROGRAM MONITOR
Vits
fULL FIELD OUT
Digital
Remote Control
Outputs always SCH Phased
The 1900 Digital Generator Series and VITS inserters are designed for state-of-the-art performance
testing of NTSC video systems and equipment.
Available in three different versions, these generators support a wide range of transmitter, studio,
common carrier, and equipment manufacturing
applications. The three 1900 versions available
are the Transmitter Test Set, the Studio Test Set,
and the NTC 7 Test Set. Each version provides a
special test signal complement, and all three
provide the following features:
10-bit digital signal generation to increase test
signal accuracy and long-term stability.
PROM memory to allow easy signal modification
when industry signal formats change.
SMPTE Color Bars, Sin xlx, and Multipulse signals
to facilitate the alignment of color monitors and
enhance testing of frequency response and
group delay. Each version of the 1900 contains
one or more of these new test signals.
VITS and VIRS generation and insertion meet
vertical interval testing requirements and provide
a reference signal for automatic video correctors.
Digital signal output to allow accurate alignment
of D to A converters; digital Signal input to allow
alignment of A to D converters and to facilitate
conversion of user-generated digital signals to an
analog format.
An External VITS input connector is provided on
the rear panel to permit an externally-generated
VIT signal to be gated and selectively inserted on
any of lines 10 through 21 , field 1 or 2, or the
incoming program line signal.
AII-digital signal generation, microprocessor control, 800 precision 100bit D to A conversion make the 1900 Generator the Industry's
most versatiie and accurate NTSC video test instrument.
All Digital Signal Generation
The 1900's generator functions are controlled by
an internal microprocessor and its associated
PROM memory. Test signals are stored as 10-bit
digital words and converted to analog form by
10-bit precision DAC to ensure signal accuracy as
well as long term stability.
Since the 1900's signals are stored in PROM , test
signal format changes are accomplished by replacing the appropriate test signal memory. No
recalibration is required , and changing industry
test signal standards will not cause
obsolescence.
Genlock and Program Line Control
The 1900 Series may be genlocked to the incoming program Signal or to a black-burst signal. This
assures accurate timing and phasing of the inserted VITS and the full-field signals to the incoming reference signal. When the 1900 is genlocked,
loss of incoming color burst will cause the generator to lock its sync and subcarrier to the leading
edge of incoming sync. If there is a loss of sync,
the 1900 will enter into an internal oscillator state
that is controlled by a crystal in a constant temperature oven. When in the internal mode, H sync
is locked to subcarrier and SCH phased.
Normally, with loss of incoming sync, the program
line signal is bypassed to prevent nonsynchronous VITS insertion. Through pin jumper programming, the 1900 can be set to enter into a transmitter-protect mode. In this mode, sync and burst or
a full field signal (user selectable) will appear at
the program line output to maintain continuity until normal operation is restored .
Full sync and burst regeneration capabilities are
also included in the 1900 Series. When the incoming program signal is monochrome, burst regeneration is inhibited. Normal sync and burst regeneration occurs when the incoming program signal is
color.
Phasing of the inserted burst to program signal
phase is accomplished with front panel screwdriver adjustment. As the 1900 is fully SCH
phased, the leading edge of the regenerated
sync will occur 19 subcarrier cycles before the
50% point of the leading edge of the regenerated
burst. No sync phasing adjustment is required
and program signal because SCH phasing is always maintained.
RS-232C of ground closure interfaces allow wideranging remote control functions and application
versatility.
191
NTSC DIGITAL
TEK GENERATOR/INSERTER
VITS and VIRS Insertion
The 1900 Digital Generator series offers full VITS
and VIRS insertion capabilities. The inserted VITS,
either FCC or NTC 7, are a function of the 1900
test set version in use. FCC VITS are available in
the Transmitter and Studio Test Sets, while NTC 7
VITS are provided in the NTC 7 Test Set. All 1900
versions are factory programmed to insert the
standard FCC or NTC 7 VITS.
For special applications, all VITS and VIRS line
and field programming may be modified through
the RS-232C interface or through ground closures
with the Remote Control Unit (part number
015-0374-00). Phasing of the inserted VITS chrominance is handled through a front panel screwdriver adjustment.
An External VITS input connector is provided on
the rear panel to permit an externally-generated
VIT signal to be gated and selectively inserted on
any of lines 10 through 21 , field 1 or 2, or the
incoming program line signal.
Digital Word Input and Output
The 1900 Series features a digital word input and
output. The digital word output provides a 10-bit
digital word of the selected test signal. This highly
accurate digital test signal may be used to
evaluate and align D to A converters and is a
useful feature as the error incurred in digitizing an
analog signal for this purpose is eliminated.
The digital word input will accept a user-generated digital word (up to 10-bits) for conversion to
analog with the precision DAC in the 1900 Series.
It's 10-bit resolution , 0.6 percent differential gain,
and 0.3 degree differential phase performance
guarantee a highly accurate conversion.
Interfacing and Remote Functions
The 1900 Digital Generators include RS-232C and
ground closure interface capabilities. With these
interfaces, the 1900 compatible with it's own remote control unit, a number of terminal devices,
or a host computer system. All test signal selections and VITSNlRS insertion functions are controllable through these interfaces.
Modulated Ramp
Consists of a linear ramp going from 0 to 80 IRE
(100 IRE on Options 01 and 02) modulated with
40 IRE Subcarrier at 180 degrees. The modulated
ramp allows measurement of differential gain and
phase distortions and is also available as a VITS.
Field Squarewave
Approximates a 60 Hz squarewave with sync and
blanking added. This signal is useful in measuring
field time distortions and clam per performance.
Window
An 18 microsecond white bar occurring on lines
72 through 202 of the field . This signal is used in
measuring line-time and short-time distortions and
picture monitor smear and ringing .
VIRS
Consists of 70 IRE, 50 IRE, and 7.5 IRE pedestals.
Chrominance modulation on the 70 IRE level is
40 IRE at a 180° phase. Also available on line
19 in vertical blanking .
APL
In addition to these standard full-field signals,
each generator test set offers 4 out of 5 lines
High or Low APL, and 4 out of 5 lines Bounce.
The bounce rate is front panel adjustable.
Diagnostic PROM
The Diagnostic PROM may be used for fault isolation in the event of failure. This PROM is designed
specifically for locating processor faults , however, all 110 ports, RAM, VITS insertion functions and
the front panel keyboard are fully exercised. The
Diagnostic PROM is available as an optional accessory to the 1900 Series.
STANDARD FULL FIELD SIGNALS
There are a wide range of test signals common to
all 1900 Generator versions. All of the following
test signals are included with each version:
LowAPL
Field Squarewave
192
Convergence Pattern
Window
Verlicallnferval Reference Signal (VIRS)
High APL
NTSC DIGITAL
GENERATOR/INSERTER
TEK
TRANSMITTER TEST SET
This 1900 Test Set is especially designed for
testing broadcast TV transmitters. It contains all
the common generator signals plus the following
additional signals:
Multiburst
Consists of a 100 IRE white flag and six 60 IRE
pop packets of sinewave bursts on a 40 IRE
pedestal. Bursts are risetime controlled to reduce
out of band harmonics. This signal conforms to
FCC 73.699. Multiburst is used to check the
television system frequency response . Multiburst
is also available as a VITS.
Color Bars
Consist of eight equal intervals arranged in descending order of luminance. The signal conforms to FCC 73.699. When the incoming program signal is monochrome, VITS chrominance
only is inhibited. The color bars are used for testing the luminance, hue, and saturation parameters of the television system. Color bars are also
available as VITS.
Convergence
(Crosshatch and dot pattern) is helpful when adjusting color picture monitor convergence and
linearity.
Modulated Pedestal
Consists of three chrominance levels (20, 40, and
80 IRE) modulated on a 50 IRE pedestal, followed
by 50 IRE pedestal having no modulation.
Phase of the chrominance is 90° . The modulated
pedestal allows measurement of chrominance to
luminance intermodulation and chrominance nonlinear gain and phase distortions. Modulated pedestal is also available as a VITS.
Staircase
Consists of 5 equal steps of unmodulated luminance information going from 0 to 100 IRE. The
staircase signal allows measurement of differential luminance gain distortion. Staircase is also
available as a VITS.
Bars/Y
A split field signal consisting of color bars followed by luminance levels only (gray scale). The
Bars/Y signal is useful for Simultaneously evaluating picture monitor gray scale tracking and color
performance.
Sin x/x
Consists of two Sin xix pulses and an 26 usec
bar. Used in the frequency domain, this signal
provides an easy means for measuring the frequency response of television systems. Sin xix is
also available as a VITS.
Multipulse
Consists of white flag , a 2T pulse, a 25T
(1 .25 MHz) modulated pulse, and four 12.5T
(2 MHz, 3 MHz, 3.58 MHz, 4.1 MHz) modulated
pulses. The white flag and all pulse elements are
70 IRE riding on a 10 IRE pedestal. The multipulse
signal is especially useful for checking frequency
response and group delay characteristics .
Multipulse is also available as a VITS.
Composite
Consists of 5-step modulated staircase, a 2T sine
squared pulse, a 12.5T modulated pulse, and a
100 IRE white bar. This signal conforms to FCC
73.699. The composite signal allows measurement of linear and nonlinear distortions including
chrominance to luminance gain and delay, transient response, differential gain and phase, and
line-time distortions. Composite is also available
as a VITS.
Color Bars Per FCC 73.699
5 Step Staircase
Composite Per FCC 73.699
Multipulse
Multiburst Per FCC 73.699
Sin xix-Frequency Domain
Modulated Pedestal
Sin xix
Color Bars/Y Reference
193
NTSC DIGITAL
TEK GENERATOR/INSERTER
Combination consists of multiburst for the first
portion of the line and modulated pedestal for the
last portion. This signal conforms to NTC 7 specifications. The combination signal is used for frequency response, chrominance to luminance
intermodulation, and chrominance nonlinear gain
and phase measurements. Combination is also
available as a VITS.
_1900
OlOJTAlO(lIIIll'I"lOI'l
NTC 7 Test Set Option 02
STUDIO TEST SET (OPTION 01)
This 1900 Generator version is designed for use in
TV studio environments. In addition to the common test Signals, the Studio Test Set provides
following additional test signals:
Color Bars
See Transmitter Test Set.
EIA Bars is a split-field signal consisting of standard color bars for the first 3/4 lines of the field,
then-IWQB for the remaining '/4 lines of the field .
SMPTE Bars is a split-field signal consisting of
Standard EIA color bars for the first 213 of the field ,
reverse blue bars for the next ';'2 of the field , andIWQB with pluge for the remaining '/4 of the field.
The SMPTE Bars signal is extremely useful in color monitor alignment.
Composite
See Transmitter Test Set.
Multiburst
See Transmitter Test Set.
Bars/Y
See Transmitter Test Set.
Convergence (Crosshatch and dot pattern) is
helpful when adjusting color picture monitor can·
vergence and linearity.
SMPTE Color Bars
194
Matrix is a split-field signal consisting of a
Multiburst signal for the first '/4 of the field, followed by a Composite signal for the second '/4.
The third quarter consists of 40 lines of EIA bars
followed by 20 lines of Reversed Blue Bar. The
bottom '/4 is a Modulated Ramp Signal.
NTC 7 TEST SET (OPTION 02)
Featuring NTC 7 VITS, this test set is designed for
common carrier and network center applications.
It offers the signals common to all generator versions plus following additional signals:
Multipulse consists of a 100 IRE white flag , a 2T
pulse, a 25T 1-MHz modulated pulse, and four
12.5T (2-MHz, 3-MHz, 3.58-MHz, and 4.2 MHz)
modulated pulses. The multipulse signal is useful
in checking frequency response and group delay
characteristics. Multipulse is also available as a
VITS.
Composite consists of a 100 IRE bar, 2T sinesquared pulse, 12.5T modulated pulse, and a 5step modulated staircase. This signal conforms to
NTC 7 Specifications. The composite signal allows measurement of linear and nonlinear distortions such as chrominance to luminance gain and
delay, transient response, differential gain and
phase, and line time distortions. Composite is
also available as a VITS.
SMPTE Bars
See Studio Test Set.
EIA Bars
See Studio Test Set.
Sin x/x
See Transmitter Test Set.
Matrix is a split field signal consisting of
successive quarters of the following signals: Modulated Ramp; EIA bars; Reversed Blue Bars and
the Multipulse Signal.
CHARACTERISTICS
PROGRAM CONTROL SYSTEM
VITS INSERTER
PROGRAM LINE INPUT
Input L.v.1 -
1 V ± 3 dB (0.7 to 1.4 V).
Input Impedanc. Retum Lo.. -
75 !l nominal.
Power On: .. 46 dB to 5 MHz.
Power Off/Bypass: .. 40 dB to 5 MHz.
PROGRAM LINE/MONITOR OUT
Impedanc. Retum Lo.. -
75 !l nominal.
... 36 dB to 5 MHz.
Hum Rejection - .. 10 dB. ijumper selectable to 20 dB). referenced to 1 V hum.
Keyboard (no noi.e) Video Oaln -
< 0.25 IRE.
Unity gain ± 0.5%.
Dc Output Lev.l- 0 V ± 100 mY.
Ped.... 1 Off••t -
0 V Hum: .. 2 mY.
1 V Hum: < 10 mY.
SMPTE Color Bars
Composite Per NTC 7 snd CCIR Recommendstion 473-2
Combination Per NTC 7 and
CCfR Recommendstion 473-2
Multipulse
TEK
NTSC DIGITAL
GENERATOR/INSERTER
I.olation - Program line to Program Monitor: .. 40 dB to
5 MHz, referenced to 1 V.
T/2 100% ± 2%. H : 100% ± 0.5%. 2T
Pul.e to Bar Ratio 100% ± 0.25%.
Wavelorm Tilt -
Field Tilt: .. 0.5%. Bar Tilt: .. 0.5%.
Differential Phlle Differential Gain -
(10-90 APL) .. 0.15 ·.
(10-90 APL) .. 0.2%.
Line-Time Amplitude Nonlinearity Random Noise Output 1 V.
Residual Subcarrier Hum -
.. 0.25%.
.. 75 dB (RMS) down, referenced to
.. 60 dB down, referenced to 1 V.
.. 60 dB down, referenced to 1 V.
Spurious Signals During Blanking - Up to 5 MHz: .. 40 dB
down ( .. 10 mY). Above 5 MHz: .. 46 dB down (.. 5 mY).
Delete Mode Signal Attenuation - 2T Pulse: .. 70 dB down,
referenced to 0.714 V. Subcarrier: .. 60 dB down, referenced
to 0.714 V.
Crosstalk (Internal to Program Line) - 2T: .. 70 dB down,
referenced to 0.714 V. Subcarrier: .. 60 dB down, referenced
to 0.714 V.
Back Porch Duration Line Sync -
4.7
In •• rt Subcarrler-Phase Adjust Range -
Minimum 10· total.
Inllnument Delay (program input to program output) 25 ns typical.
GEN LOCK
Input - Burst Amplitude: 40 IRE ± 6 dB. Sync Amplitude:
40 IRE ± 6 dB. Sync Source: Composite video or black burst
(sync negative going). Return Loss : .. 46 dB to 5 MHz.
Performance - Burst Lock : 3.579545 MHz ± 20 Hz. Burst
Loss : Clock referenced to leading edge of sync. Sync Lock:
15.73426 kHz ± 0.079 Hz. Sync and Burst Loss: Clock is referenced to internal temperature controlled crystal oscillator. Oscillator: (Free running) Subcarrier frequency: 3.579545 MHz
± 10 Hz. Sync frequency : 1573426 kHz ± 0.04 Hz.
4.7
~s
to the 20 IRE point.
± 50 ns, at 50% amplitude point.
Vertical Serration - Duration: 4.7 ~s , ± 50 ns, at 50% amplitude point. Sequence: 3 lines. Period : 262.5 lines.
Equalizing Pul.e - Duration: 2.33 ~s , ± 50 ns, at 50% amplitude point. Sequence: 3 lines.
Burat - Rlsetime and falltime: 400 ns ± 40 ns. Delay From
Line Sync: 5.308 ~s ± 35 ns (19 cycles of subcarrier). HAD of
Envelope: 2.51 ~s ± 100 ns (9 cycles of subcarrier). Amplitude:
285.7 mV ± 8.57 mY.
Re.ldual Subcarrter - (Luminance and Blanking) .. 52 dB below 1 V (2.5 mY).
Spuriou. Subcarrter on Output. (2.5mV).
.. 52 dB below 1 V
TEST SIGNALS
Modulated Ramp Signal - Luminance Amplitude: 0 to
100 IRE ± 0.7 IRE. Linearity: Within 1%. Chrominance: Amplitude: 40 IRE ± 0.5 IRE. Differential Gain: .. 0.6%. Differential
Phase: .;;0.3·. Envelope Risetime: 400 ns ± 40 ns. Phase:
Same as burst 0.3·.
Field Squarewave Signal - Field Timing: Lines (white): lines
72 to 202. Lines at blanking: all remaining active lines. Field
Tilt: 0.5% maximum. Line Tilt: 0.5% maximum. Amplitude:
100 IRE ± 0.7 IRE. Risetime: 250 ns ± 25 ns.
Window Signal - White Bar Amplitude: 100 IRE ± 0.7 IRE.
Risetime: 250 ns ± 25 ns. Field Tilt: 0.5% maximum. Line Tilt:
0.5% maximum. Field Timing : Lines 72 to 202.
VIRS (Vertical Internal Reference Signal) - Chrominance
Reference: Amplitude: 40 IRE ± 0.4 IRE. Phase: Same as
burst ± 0.3·. Envelope Risetime: 1 ± 0.1 ~s . Average Level of
Chrominance Signal: 70 IRE ± 0.7 IRE. Luminance Reference
- 50 IRE Level: 50 IRE ± 0.5 IRE. Black Reference: 7.5 IRE
± 0.5 IRE.
APL Signal Bounce, Flat Field Signals - Ac Bounce: 0 and
100 IRE on 4 out of 5 lines . Rate adjustable from '" '/30 Hz.
Amplitude: 100 IRE ± 0.7 IRE. Risetime: 250 ns ± 25 ns.
Amplitude -
FULL FIELD OUTPUT
1.2 V maximum p-p into 75 11.
Blanking Level - DAC Dc Restorer Disabled: 0 V ± 50 mY.
DAC Dc Restorer Enabled: 0 V ± 2 mY.
Field Period Line Period -
.. 10 ns.
Group Delay -
Other B..ellne Perturbation -
.. 0.5 IRE.
Convergence Signal
Pe.k Level -
77 IRE ± 1 IRE.
CrolShatch Vertical line. - Unblanked Pulses: 17 per active
lines. Pulse Polarity: positive. Line pulse HAD: 225 ns ± 25 ns.
Dot Pulse HAD: 350 ns ± 35 ns.
Output Impedance -
Full Field Color Bara Signal -
Return Loss -
75 11 nominal.
.. 36 dB to 5 MHz.
Isolation (Front and Rear Panel Outputs) -
.. 4OdB.
SYNC AND SUBCARRIER
SIGNAL OUTPUT
CompoSite Sync
Amplitude -
4 V, negative going, ± 10% into 75 11.
Return Lo•• -
.. 30 dB to 3.58 MHz.
Rlsetime and Falltlme - 140 ns ± 20 ns, measured from 10%
to 90% amplitude points.
241 lines/field
Compo.lte Signal - Modulated 5-step staircase: Luminance
Amplitude, FCC : 80.4 IRE ± 0.7 IRE; NTC7 :90-2 . IRE
± 0.6 IRE. Riser Amplitude:
of step amplitude Risetime: 250
± 25 ns. Chrominance Phase: same as burst ± 0.3·. Chrominance Amplitude: 40 IRE ± 0.5 IRE (3.6 mY). Inherent Differential Phase: .. 0.3· . Inherent Differential Gain: .. 0.5%. Envelope
Risetime, FCC: 375 ± 37.5 ns. NTC 7: 400 ± 40 ns.
'I.
2T Pulse - Pulse to Bar Ratio: 100% ± 0.5%. HAD: 250 ns
± 25 ns. Ringing Amplitude: .. 1.0 IRE.
Equalizer Pulse - Duration: 2.3 ~s ± 50 ns, measured at
50% amplitude. Sequence Duration: 3 lines each.
Modulated Sine Square Pul.e - Pulse to bar peak amplitude: 100% ± 0.5%. HAD: 1.563 ~s ± 150 ns. ChrominanceILuminance Delay .. 10 ns. Chrominancel Luminance Gain Inequality: ± 0.5 IRE ( ± 1%). Other Perturbations on Baseline:
.. 0.5 IRE. Harmonic Distor1ion of Subcarrier: .. 40 dB down.
Phase: 60.8· ± 1· .
Vertical Sync Pulse - Serration: 4.7 ~s ± 50 ns; measured at
50% amplitude point. Sequence Duration : 3 lines.
Ber - Amplitude: 100 IRE ± 0.7 IRE. Risetime, FCC: 250
± 25ns; NTC7: 125 ± 14ns.
Line Period -
~s .
63.556
Line Sync Duration -
Field Period -
4. 7 ~s ± 50 ns.
262.5 H lines, 16.6835 ms nominal.
Amplitude -
2 V p-p ± 10% into 75 11.
Return Lo.. -
.. 30 dB to 5 MHz.
Frequency - Locked to incoming burst or to leading edge of
incoming sync if burst is not present. If sync is not present,
frequency is determined by the internal oscillator.
TRANSMITTER TEST SET-TEST SIGNALS
Multiburat Signal
White Reference Ber time: 250 ns ± 25 ns.
Amplitude: 100 IRE ± 0.7 IRE. Rise-
Multlburat Packet. - Amplitude: 60 IRE p-p ± 1 IRE. Average Level : 40 IRE. Frequencies: 500 kHz, 1.25 MHz, 2.0 MHz,
3.0 MHz, 3.58 MHz, 4.1 MHz. Risetimes: 500 kHz, 140 ns ; the
remaining, 400 ns ± 40 ns. Harmonic Content: .. 40 dB down.
Modulated Pede.tal Signal
Pede.tal - Amplitude: 50 IRE ± 0.5 IRE. Risetime: 250 ns
± 25 ns. Tilt: .. 0.5%.
Chromlnance - Amplitudes: 20.01 IRE p-p, ± 0.5 IRE;
40.02 IRE p-p, ± 0.5 IRE ; 80.04 IRE p-p, ± 0.6 IRE.
Phase - Relative to Burst: 90· ± 0.5·. Relative to Other two
Levels: O· ± 0.3· . Harmonic Distor1ion: .. 40 dB down.
Rlsetlme -
400 ns ± 40 ns.
Stlircase Signal
Luminance linearity:
± 25 ns.
Amplitude: 100 IRE ± 0.7 IRE.
'I. of 5-step
Chromlnlnce -
amplitude ± 0.5%. Risetime: 250 ns
No modulation.
BARSIY Slgnll - Modulated bars first 181 active lines/field;
unmodulated bars last 60 lines of the field.
Sin xix Signal
Pul.e to Ber Ratio Spectnurn -
100% ± 1%.
Flat to 4.5 MHz ± 0.2 dB.-3 dB at 4.75 MHz.
Pulse and Ber Height - 80 IRE ± 1 IRE.
Main Pulse Zero Crolling - 210 ns ± 21 ns.
Small Lobe Zero Cro..lng Bar Risetime -
105 ns ± 15 ns.
250 ns ± 25 ns.
Multipulse Signal
White Reference Ber Risetlme -
80 IRE ± 0.7 IRE.
150 ns ± 25 ns.
Pulse to Bar Ratio -
100% ± 1%.
16.68 ms.
63.56
~s .
Sync Rioetime and Falltime Front Porch Duration Line Blanking Interval point.
Breezeway amplitude.
Modulation Frequencle. - 1st pulse: 1.25 MHz. 2nd pulse:
2 MHz; 3rd pulse: 3 MHz. 4th pulse: 3.58 MHz. 5th pulse:
4.1 MHz.
Chromlnlnca Subcarrler Frequency - Free Running :
3.579545 MHz ± 10Hz. Locked Mode: Locked to incoming
burst or the leading edge of sync if burst is not present.
Subcarrter
All 1900 Versions
Pul.e Hall Amplitude Duration - 2T HAD: 250 ns ± 20 ns.
25T HAD: 3.14 ~s ± 300 ns. 12.5T HAD: 1.57 ~s ± 150 ns.
CrolShatch Horizontal Line. - Unblanked Pulses: 14 per
frame. Pulse Polarity: positive. line Pulse Risetime: 140 ns
± 15 ns. line Pulse Duration: 2 lines (1 line each field). Dot
Pulse Duration : 3 lines (1 line on one field , two lines on the
other field).
± 8 ~s (16 ~s total) in 70 ns increments
In.ert Delay Range (internal DIP switch).
~s,
140 ns ± 15 ns.
1.5 ~s, ± 100 ns.
10.9
~s
± 100 ns at the 20 IRE
0.6 ~s , ± 50 ns, at 50% of sync to 50% of burst
195
NTSC DIGITAL
TEK GENERATOR/INSERTER
STUDIO TEST SET-TEST SIGNALS
Color Bars Signal
Luminance and Chrominance - Absolute amplitudes of luminance signal, setup, and sync are within 1% or 1.5 mV, whichever is greater, with respect to blanking. Chrominance amplitudes are within 1% of their given value.
Luminance Risetime 140 ns ± 15 ns.
Full Field: 250 ns ± 25 ns. EIA:
Chrominance Risetime -
400 ns ± 40 ns.
Bar Duration -
Full Field : 6.5 Its/bar (8 bars).
EIA : 7.5 Its/bar (7 bars).
Time Difference Between Luminance and Chrominance .. 20 ns.
Residual Subcarrier -
At least 52 dB below 1 V.
Spurious Subcarrier -
At least 52 dB below 1 V.
Other Spurious Outputs 40 dB for 2nd harmonic.
At least 52 dB below 1 V except
Field Timing - Full Field Color Bars: - 241 lines per field.
Bars/Y - Modulated bars first 181 active lines per field : unmodulated bars last 60 lines of the field .
EIA Bars - EIA color bars first 181 active lines per fJeld : Iwa
last 60 lines of the field.
Composite Signal
Modulated 5-step Staircase - Luminance amplitude ; FCC :
80.4 IRE ± 0.7 IRE ; NTC 7: 90.2 IRE ± 0.6 IRE. Luminance
Riser Amplitude: '/. of 5-step amplitude ± 0.5%. Risetime:
250 ns ± 25 ns. Chrominance phase: Same as burst ± 0.3·.
Chrominance Amplitude: 40 IRE ± 0.5 IRE (3.6 mY). Inherent
Differential Gain: .. 0.5%. Inherent Differential Phase: .. 0.3·.
Envelope Risetime; FCC: 375 ± 37.5 ns ; NTC 7: 400 ns
± 40 ns.
Sampling Frequency (14.31818 MHz).
4 times color subearrier nominal
Sampling Phase Angle -
Referenced to I and a axis.
2T Pulse - Pulse to Bar Ratio: 100% ± 0.5%.
HAD: 250 ns ± 25 ns. Ringing amplitude: .. 1.0 IRE.
Setup Time - Data needs to be valid at leasl IOns before the
50% point of the negative transition of the clock pulse.
Modulated Sine Square Pulse - Pulse-ta-bar peak amplitude: 100% ± 0.5%. HAD : 1.563 itS ± 150 ns.
Chrominance/Luminance Delay : .. 10 ns .
Chrominance/Luminance Gain Inequality: ± 0.5 IRE ( ± 1%).
Other Perturbation on Baseline: .. 0.5 IRE.
Hold Time - Data needs to be valid for at least IOns alter
50% point of the negative transition of the clock pulse.
4 times color subearrier nominal
Combination Signal
Multiburst White Reference Bar - Amplitude: 100 IRE
± 0.7 IRE. Risetime: 250 ns ± 25 ns. Overshoot: .. 1%. Tilt:
.. 0.5%.
Sampling Frequency (14,31818 MHz).
Sampling Phase Angle -
Referenced to I and a axis.
Same as Transmitter Test Set: Test
Multiburst Signal Signals.
Same as Transmitter Test Set: Test
Modulated Pedestal Signal: Pedestal Amplitude Risetime: 250 ± 25 ns. Tilt: .. 0.5%.
Peak Level: 77 IRE ± 1 IRE.
Crosshatch Vertical Lines - Unblanked pulses: 17 per active
lines. Pulse polarity : positive. Une pulse HAD: 225 ns ± 25 ns.
Dot pulse HAD: 350 ns ± 35 ns.
Crosshatch Horizontal Lines - Unblanked Pulses: 14 per
frame. Pulse polarity: positive. Line pulse risetime: 140 ns
± 15 ns.
Line pulse duration : 2 lines (1 line each field). Dot pulse duration : 3 lines (1 line on one field , two lines on the other field).
NTC 7 TEST SET-TEST SIGNALS
Multipulse Signal
White Reference Bar - 100 IRE ± 0.7 IRE.
Pulse to Bar Ratio -
Pulse Half-Amplitude Duration 25T HAD: 3.14 itS ± 300 ns.
12.5T HAD: 1.57 itS ± 150 ns.
2T HAD: 250 ns ± 20 ns.
Modulation Frequencies - 1st pulse, 1 MHz; 2nd pulse,
2 MHz; 3rd pulse, 3 MHz, 4th pulse, 3.58 MHz; 5th pulse,
4.2 MHz.
Group Delay -
.. 10 ns.
Other Baseline Perturbation -
SMPTE Bars Signal Signals.
EIA Bars Signal Sin x/x Signal Baud Rate Input -
.. 0.5 IRE.
RS-232C INTERFACE
300 bits/sec., full duplex input and output.
Serial asynchronous data.
ASCII.
9 bits per character including a start and
Parity - Input : No parity is required and if present it is ignored. Output: No parity is sent.
DIGITAL INPUT INTERFACE
Digital Format - Parallel, 12 balanced signal pairs consisting
of 10 data bits per sample, a clock, and a timing reference
signal.
Positive binary.
OU T,"", T
II
Rear Pane/
Dynamic Range - 10 bits/sample: Blanking level (0 IRE) is at
digital word 240. Reference white (100 IRE) is at digital word
800. (5.6 LSB/IRE).
Clock Timing - The 50% point of the positive edge of the
clock pulse precedes the data by 5 ns ± 5 ns.
POWER SUPPLY
Line Voltage Range - 90 to 110 V ac; 99 to 121 V ac; 108 to
132 V ac, 180 to 220 V ac; 198 to 242 V ac and 216 to 250 V
ac.
Crest Factor -
:;.. 1.35.
Maximum Power Consumption Line Frequency -
130 W.
47 Hz to 63 Hz.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Same as Studio Test Set: Test Signals.
Character Length one stop bit.
Positive binary.
Logic Levels - ECL compatible. High: - 0.96 to - 0.81 V.
Low: - 1.85 to - 1.65 V.
Same as Studio Test Set: Test Signals.
Encoding Format -
IN,"", T
Same as Studio Test Set: Test
Serial asynchronous data.
Data Code -
100% ± 1%.
50 IRE.
Chrominance Amplitude - 20.01 IRE ± 0.5 IRE ; 40.02 IRE
± 0.5IRE; 80.04 IRE ± 0.6 IRE.
Phase: relative to burst, 90· ± 0.5·, relative to the other two
levels O· ± 0.3 ·. Harmonic distortion : ;;. 40 dB down. Risetime:
400 ± 40 ns.
Output -
Risetime: 250 ns ± 25 ns.
DIGITAL OUTPUT INTERFACE
Digital Format - Parallel, 12 balance signal pairs consisting of
10 data bits per sample, a clock , and a timing reference signal.
Encoding Format -
Composite Signal Signals.
Convergence Signal -
Dynamic Range - 10 bits/sample: Blanking level (0 IRE) is at
digital word 240. Reference white (100 IRE) is at digital word
800. (5.6 LSB/lRE).
Bar - Amplitude: 100 IRE ± 0.7 IRE. Risetime; FCC: 250
± 25 ns ; NTC 7: 125 ± 14ns.
Multiburst Packets - Amplitude: 50 IRE p-p ± 0.5 IRE. Average Level: 50 IRE ± 0.5 IRE.
Frequencies: 500 kHz, 1 MHz, 2 MHz, 3 MHz, 3.58 MHz,
4.2 MHz. Packets Risetime NTC 7 (500 kHz and 1 MHz): 140
± 14 ns ; all others, 400 ± 40 ns. Harmonic Content: ;;.40 dB
down .
SMPTE Bars - EIA color bars first 161 active lines per field ;
reverse blue bars for 20 lines; and Iwa with pluge for the last
60 lines of field .
Input Logic Levels - 10k ECL compatible. High : - 1.105 to
- 0.81 V @25 · C. Low: - 1.85 to - 1.475 V@25 · C.
POWER INPUT
47-63Hz
130VA MAX
AT SOHz
Rackmount
Dimensions
Width
Height
Depth
mm
482
89
522
Weights
kg
Net
Shipping =
12.2
19.1
in
18.9
3.5
20.5
Ib
27
42
Cabinet
mm
444
96
522
in
17.5
3.8
20.5
kg
Ib
11 .6
16.7
25.5
37
ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS
Temperature - Operating range: O· to + 50· C.
Storage: - 40 · C to + 65· C.
Altitude - Operating range: to 4500 m (15,000 It).
Storage: to 15 200 m (50,000 It).
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Power Cord, 3-wire, (161-0066-00); Slide Section pair, drawer
(for rackmounting), (351-0636-00).
ORDERING INFORMATION
1900 Transmitter Test Set
(cabinet model). ........................ ___ ........ $9,600
R1900 Transmitter Test Set
(rackmount model).......... _.. _.. _. ___ . __ ....... $9,600
Option 01 -
Studio Test Set. .................................. +$5,200
Option 02 -
NTC 7 Test Set. .................................. +$5,200
Option 03 -
Special Test Set # 1 (CBC) ........................ NC
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORD AND PLUG OPTIONS
Option AI - Universal European 220 V/16A, 50 Hz ....... NC
Option A2 - UK 240 V/13A, 50 Hz ................................. NC
Option A3 - Australian 240 V/l0A, 60 Hz ...................... NC
Option A4 - North American 240 V/15A, 50 Hz ............. NC
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
1900 and R1900
Remote Control Unit, Order 015-0374-00 . .................... $425
Remote Control Unit
1900 to Remote Control Unit 1.83 m (6 It) Interconnecting
Cable, Order 012-0108-00 .............................................. $150
1900 to Remote Control Unit 6.7 m (22 It) Interconnecting
Cable, Order 012-0251-00 .............................................. $285
Diagnostic PROM for Instrument Service,
Order 067-0964-00 . ......................................................... $125
196
TEK
TELEVISION
PRODUCTS
The following are a selected group of professional video dealers that are authorized to sell Television products. For other Tektronix products, please contact
your nearest Tektronix field office listed on page 9 of this catalog.
Alaska
NVS Systems, Inc.
Anchorage , AK 99502
Michigan
General Television Network
Oak Park, MI 48237
Oregon
Videosonics, Inc.
Portland, OR 97214
Alabama
Pro Video Systems, Inc.
Birmingham , AL 35209
Thalner Electronic Labs, Inc.
Ann Arbor, MI 48103
Pennsylvania
Alpha Video and Electronics Company
Carnegie, PA 15106
California
Broadcast Marketing Associates
San Jose, CA 95131
Minnesota
Emmons Associates , Inc.
Burnsville, MN 55337
Electromedia, Inc.
Pittsburgh, PA 15213
Todd Communications, Inc.
Minneapolis, MN 55435
Lerro Electrical Corporation
Philadelphia, PA 19132
Video Midwest, Inc.
Minneapolis, MN 55435
Peirce-Phelps, Inc.
Philadelphia, PA 19131
Hoffman Video Systems
Los Angeles , CA 90015
Missouri
Television Engineering Corporation
Chesterfield, MO 63017
Texas
Auta-Tronics
Houston, TX 77057
Merlin Engineering Works, Inc.
Palo Alto , CA 94303
Video Masters, Inc.
Kansas City, MO 64141
Broadcast Systems, Inc.
Austin , TX 78758
Omega Video , Inc.
Lawnsdale, CA 90260
VMI Company
St. Louis, MO 63141
Magnetic Media Corporation
Dallas, TX 75248
North Carolina
Technical Video Systems, Inc.
Winston-Salem, NC 27101
MZB and Associates
Dallas, TX 75234
California Video Sales, Inc.
Sacramento, CA 95841
General Electronic Systems, Inc.
Berkeley, CA 94702
Pacific Video Products, Inc.
Anaheim , CA 92806
R.E. Snader and Associates , Inc.
Mill Valley, CA 94941
Tri-Tronics, Inc.
Burbank, CA 91505
Colorado
Ceavco Audio-Visual Company, Inc.
Denver, CO 80215
Video Teknix, Inc.
Denver, CO 80219
Florida
Florida Video Systems, Inc.
Miami, FL 33168
Hubbard Communications, Inc.
St. Petersburg, FL 33702
Georgia
Gray Communications Consultants
Albany , GA 31705
Illinois
Harris Corporation
Quincy, IL 62305
Roscor Corporation
Morton Grove, IL 60053
Swiderski Electronics, Inc.
Elk Grove Village, IL 60007
MassachuseHs
Cramer Video, Inc.
Needham, MA 02194
Lake Systems Corporation
Newton, MA 02160
Maryland
Professional Products, Inc .
Bethesda, MD 20814
New Jersey
A.F. Associates, Inc.
Northville, NJ 07647
Central Dynamics Corporation
Mahwah, NJ 07430
Landy Associates, Inc.
Cherry Hill, NJ 08034
Tele-Measurements, Inc.
Clifton, NJ 07014
Turner Engineering, Inc.
Mountain Lakes, NJ 07046
New York
Camera Mart, Inc.
New York, NY 10019
Camera Service Center, Inc.
New York, NY 10019
Utah
Skaggs Video Sales
Salt Lake City, UT 84127
Virginia
AVEC Electronics Corporation
Norfolk, VA 23510
Washington
Bennett Engineering Associates, Inc.
Mercer Island, WA 98040
Custom Video Systems, Inc.
Seattle, WA 98155
Northwest Electronics, Inc.
Spokane, WA 99220
Wisconsin
Video Images
Milwaukee, WI 53214
Laumic Company, Inc.
New York, NY 10016
MPCS Video Industries, Inc.
New York, NY 10019
Reves AV Systems, Inc.
New York , NY 10017
Sonocraft Corporation
New York, NY 10001
Ohio
Kavco , Inc.
Dayton, OH 45414
Tektronix, Inc_
Television Products
Communications Division
PO Box 500
Delivery Station 58-699
Beaverton, OR 97077
Midwest Corporation
Cincinnati, OH 45203
Oklahoma
Diversified Electronics Communications
Tulsa, OK 74145
197
TEK
SPECTRUM ANALYZERS &
SWEPT FREQUENCY SYSTEMS
CONTENTS
Portable Spectrum Analyzers
492/492P 50 kHz to 220 GHz .. ......... ........... 200
Waveguide Mixers .. .......... ... ....... ............ ...... 203
496/496P 1 kHz to 1800 MHz
204
Plug-in Spectrum Analyzers
7L14 10 kHz to 1.8 GHz .......... .. .. ..
7L18 1.5 GHz to 60 GHz ............................. .
7L5 20 Hz to 5 MHz .
7L12 100 kHz to 1800 MHz ............... .. ..
5L4N 20 Hz to 100 kHz
206
207
208
210
211
Tracking Generators
TR 502/TR 503 100 kHz to 1800 MHz .
212
1405 TV Sideband Adapter ................... .
213
Accessories .............. ..
214
7000 Series
Plug-in Versatility
Here's high performance with economy.
No one plug-in spectrum analyzer
meets every need. So there's a choice
of five ... to best meet yours.
The VHF/UHF 7L 12 plug-in brings you capabilities similar to the 7L 14, but without digital
storage and with minimum resolution of
300 Hz instead of 30 Hz.
These easy-to-use plug-in models cover
20 Hz to 60 GHz, with individual ranges appropriate for applications from
audio/baseband to microwave measurement. A variety of features let you select the
capability you need. They share the versatility that is basic to the Tektronix plug-in concept - there are over 30 other test and
measurement plug-ins.
7000 Series characteristics make spectrum analysis easier.
The 7L plug-in family displays CRT readout
for referencing and easy documentation.
And each analyzer is compatible with any
Tektronix 7000 Series oscilloscope mainframe including the 7854 digitizing GPIB unit
which offers programmable solutions to
complex measurements.·
• For detailed information on the comprehensive 7000 Series
and 5000 Series of instruments, refer to pages 230 to 308
respectively.
198
And to 5000 Series mainframe owners,
Tektronix offers spectrum analysis capability with the 5L4N.* It covers 20 Hz to
100 kHz. Ideal for accurate audio frequency,
distortion, and noise measurements.
Match your needs with unmatched
value.
Three models provide digital storage.
For high performance with convenience ,
there's our digital storage family of plug-ins,
the 7L5, 7L 14, and 7L 18. They cover 20 Hz
to 60 GHz, with performance in the microwave frequencies that is comparable to
what you expect in the baseband region .
Digital storage provides clean, flicker-free
displays, plus valuable functions such as
digital averaging and peak detection, waveform comparison and subtraction and a
MAX HOLD function to measure long term
amplitude and frequency changes .
All these instruments point up both the immediate and long-term value of the
Tektronix plug-in concept. If you already
own a 7000 Series mainframe, you select
only the analyzer plug-ins that cover your
requirements, without paying for more capability than you need. And with all Tektronix
spectrum analyzers, come a large choice of
accessories, worldwide service and technical support.
I tK
Performance for the Lab that
goes into the Field
The Tektronix 492 and 496 are two spectrum analyzers that go where you go. Their
compact size, light weight, and rugged
design combine to offer unmatched portability in laboratory quality analyzers.
Single-handle carry and portable form factor
make them ready to travel. The 492 and 496
move as easily in the field as in the design
lab or systems test area. They even fit under an airplane seat.
You can count on the same exceptional performance no matter where you 're working . If
its antenna test measurements, pOint-topoint transmission maintenance, or any
number of critical field applications, the 492
and 496 work with you .
For on-site applications reduced warmup
time means reduced measurement time.
Long-term frequency drift of 5 kHz/10 minutes after 30 minute warm up for the 492
and 492P; 2 kHzl10 minutes after 30 minute
warm up for the 496 and 496P.
Here's Proof of Their Performance
The Tektronix 492 has the widest amplitude
calibrated frequency range of any spectrum
analyzer on the market: 50 kHz to 220 GHz
using external waveguide mixers above
21 GHz. The VHF/UHF 496 covers from
1 kHz to 1.S GHz.
They offer SO dB dynamic range on-screen
and excellent sensitivity, with an average
noise level of -123 dBm at 100 Hz resolution bandwidth for the 492, - 127 dBm at
30 Hz resolution bandwidth for the 496. Low
phase noise - 70 dBc at only 3 kHz offset
-for accurate small-signal analysis . High
stability for signal source spectral purity
analysis , with residual FM of no more than
50 Hz peak-to-peak for the 492, 10 Hz peakto-peak for the 496. For precise measurement of signal differences, there's amplitude comparison in super-fine 0.25 dB
steps. And the 496 provides 1 kHz frequency resolution in AF mode. All this and more
in one compact package that goes where
you go.
Programmability/IEEE (GPIB)
Compatibility
The GPIB interface enables full control of all
measurement settings. Additional control of
horizontal (span) and vertical display (1 to
15 dB/div) and smart functions (such as signal search) provide added measurement
versatility. A desktop computer or computer
controller (4052A or 4041) and 492P or 496P
Spectrum Analyzer provide repetitive measurements, data collection, and consistent,
rapid results. Automated testing and monitoring may include data correction and analysis enabling complex measurements such
as total harmonic distortion and power
spectral density. The thermal printer of the
4041 or hard copiers for 4052A simplify
documenting tests and spectral displays in
hard copy form .
Programmability Now - or Later
Most manual 490 Series spectrum analyzers
can be converted into fully programmable,
GPIB compatible analyzers. Conversion may
be performed via the Tektronix Service Center near you.
Easy to Use - Anywhere
Tektronix designed the 492 and 496 to handle your measurement task with microprocessor-aided ease. Setting frequency, span
and reference level is a simple three-knob
operation. Most-used functions are automatically controlled. Digital storage and signal processing eliminate time-consuming
display adjustments. And constant tuning
rate helps you position a signal quickly and
accurately. All part of the convenience and
capability the 492 and 496 deliver, on site or
on the bench.
Tektronix offers service tr.lnlng cl..... on the 490 Porteble Speclrum Analyzer• • For further training Inform.tion,
contact your local Sales/Service Office or requesl • copy of
the Tektronix Service Training Schedule on the retum card
In the cenler 01 this catalog.
199
kHz to 220 GHz
SPECTRUM ANALYZERS
TEK 50PORTABLE
The 492P complies with IEEE Standard 488-1978,
and with Tektronix Standard Codes and
Formats.
492
492P
IGrill
IEE-4
Microprocessor Aided Controls
Automatic Modes
Portable Form Factor
(Compact Size/ Light Weight)
50 kHz to 220 GHz Frequency Range
Amplitude Comparison in 0.25 dB Steps
CRT Readout of all Important Parameters
Fully Calibrated in Amplitude and Frequency
80 dB Dynamic Range
Wide Range of Options
GPIB/Fully Programmable (492P)
Three-knob Operation
Lab Quality You Can Get a Handle On
The 492 is a high performance, rugged , state-ofthe -art instrument of compact size , with
microprocessor logic control. Full programmability
via GPIB (IEEE Standard 488-1978) compatibility is
available in the 492P version.
Three-knob operation provides use as simple as
1, 2, 3 through microprocessor coupled functions
such as resolution bandwidth, video bandwidth,
sweep time, frequency span, RF attenuation, and
reference level. Measurement accuracy is enhanced through the use of ~ dB mode, which
switches in 0.25 dB steps.
Digital storage and processing facilitate trace
comparisons and add measurement capability
through the MAX HOLD function for frequency
drift and amplitude change measurements.
Arithmetic operations can be performed between
traces or between a trace and a reference . Digital
noise averaging mode results in trace smoothing.
With digital storage, the display is steady and
without flicker, even at the lowest sweep speeds;
plus, trace values may be retained as long as
power is on.
Environmentalized per MIL-T -28800B
492P Makes Spectrum Analysis
Automatic, and Easy.
Digital Storage and Signal Processing
Two instruments in one, the 492P is a fully
programmable version of the 492 Spectrum Analyzer. It incorporates all of the 492's lab quality
performance and ease of use features when
used as a manual instrument. Push the "Reset to
Freedom from Spurious Responses
Through Preselection
200
Local " button and the 492P becomes a 492-with
operation from the front panel. But, most important, the 492P opens the way to automated
spectrum analysis and documentation via its IEEE
Standard-488 (GPIB) interface. This versatility
makes the 492P useful in many applications in the
lab, factory or field .
Programmability/GPIB features can be added to
492 Spectrum Analyzers, serial number B030000
and above. This means if you want to postpone a
programmability/GPIB decision because of budget constraints, or for any other reason , you can
convert your 490 Series Spectrum Analyzer later.
Conversions are made at designated Tektronix
Service Centers.
492P
TEK
-40
-60
." -eo
"""
I\.
, IIIII
\
1\
,JHz',.iou'll
__ bandWidth (Oplton 3)
E
~
"7kHz resolution bandWidth
K
-lIlO
t--...
t-...
- '20
10
100
1000
Frequancy (kHz)
Typical /ow end frequency performance for the 492 with
Option 01 .
AMPLITUDE RELATED
Reference Level Range Full screen, top of graticule
- 123dBm to + 40dBm ( + 40dBm, includes maximum safe
input of + 30 dBm and 10 dB gain of IF gain reduction) for
10 dB/div and 2 dB/div log modes. 1 W maximum safe input in
the linear mode.
Reference Level Step. - 10 dB, 1 dB, and 0.25 dB for relative level (6) measurements in LOG mode. 1-2-5 sequence and
1 dB equivalent increments in LIN mode.
When used with the Tektronix 4052A Graphic Computing System controller and 4631 Hard Copy Unit, or with the 4662 Digital
Plotter, the 492P can provide test results in both graphic and numeric form for the evaluation of microwave signal sources.
Remotely Controllable via GPIB
Switches on the rear panel select the mode of
operation as a GPIB instrument. In the normal
TALKER/LISTENER mode, the 492P listens to and
executes commands from a GPIB controller. All
important front panel settings can be operated
remotely . Some functions are controlled with
more detail through the GPIB than possible from
the front panel.
GPIB ADDRESS
lFOREOI~
TAlKONLY:-=r
LISTEN ONLY
168 4 2 1
1 J I 1I I I
I
1-
0-
.
111111111
--
r'fr~
EOI -=:::::::::J --~-~
Easy to Use
The 492P is designed for ease of operation via
the GPIB, just as the 492 is designed for front
panel operational ease. Most commands for program control are simply abbreviations of the front
panel nomenclature.
The 492P's high level command language and the
similarity of commands and responses simplify
programming and make program listings easily
readable for editing.
Put it to Work
With the programmable 492P on your measurement team, repetitive measurements can be
done the same way every time. Your throughput
will increase-and your confidence in results.
And, the intemal processing and high level programming language makes software develop-
ment faster. You get high power results with easy
programming. When you look at the total performance capability of the 492P, you 'll recognize its
value: ease of operation both as a programmable
and manual instrument. Wide frequency range .
The versatility to go where you go. Into the lab for
automated testing; into the field for data
collection.
The Tektronix 4932 GPIB Extender provides a
cost-effective way to interconnect remotely located GPIB instruments, allowing communication at
distances of up to 500 meters (1650 feet) . See
page 26 for additional information.
CHARACTERISTICS
The following characteristics and features apply to the
492/492P Spectrum Analyzers after a 30 minute warmup period unless otherwise noted.
FREQUENCY RELATED
Center Frequency Range - 50 kHz to 21 GHz standard, amplitude specified coverage to 140 GHz with optional Tektronix
waveguide mixers. (Frequency calibrated to 220 GHz).
Frequency Accuracy - ±(5 MHz + 20% of span/div) or
± (0.2% of the center frequency + 20% of span/div) whichever
is greater, after 2 hour warmup.
Readout Resolution - Within 1 MHz.
Frequency Span Per Division - 10kHz to 500 MHz plus zero
and full band maximum span, down to 500 Hz with Option 03 in
1-2-5 sequence.
Span Accuracy - ± 5% of span/div, measured over center 8
divs.
Resolution Bandwidth (- 6 dB POints) - 1 MHz to 1 kHz
(100 Hz for Option 03) in decade steps, plus an AUTO position.
Resolution is within 20% of selected bandwidth.
Resolution Shape Factor (60/6 dB) - 7.5:1 or less.
Residual FM - 1 kHz p-p for 2 ms time duration, improves to
(50 Hz) for 20 ms with phaselock Option 03.
Long Term Drift (At Constent Temperature end Fixed Center Frequency) - 200 kHz/hour unphaselocked, 15 kHz/l0
minutes (Option 03 after 30 minutes warmup, phaselocked for
fundamental mixing), 3 kHz/l0 minutes (Option 03 after 1 hour
warmup, phaselocked for fundamental mixing).
Noise Sidebands - At least - 75 dBc at 30x resolution offset
from the center frequency (- 70 dBc for 100 Hz resolution
bandwidth or less, Option 03).
Reference Level Accuracy - Accuracy is a function of
changes in RF attenuation, resolution bandwidth, display mode
and reference level. See amplitude accuracies of these functions. The RF attenuator steps 10 dB for reference level
changes above - 30 dBm (-20 dBm when Min Noise is active)
unless Min RF attenuation is greater than normal. The IF gain
increases 10 dB for each Reference Level change below - 30
dBm (- 20 dBm when Min Noise is active).
Display Dynamic Range - 80 dB at 10 dB/div, 16 dB at
2 dB/div and 8 divisions in linear mode.
Display Amplitude Accuracy - ± 1 dB/l0 dB to maximum of
± 2dB/80dB; ±0.4 dB/2 dB to maximum of ± 1 dB/16 dB,
± 5% of full screen in LIN mode.
Resolution Bendwid1h Gain Veriation -
± 0.5 dB.
SPURIOUS RESPONSES
Residual (No Input Signal Raferenced to Mixer Input) - 100 dBm or less.
Harmonic Distortion (cw Signal, MIN Distortion Mode) - At
least - 60 dBc for full screen signal in the MIN Distortion mode
to 21 GHz. At least - 100 dBc for preselected Option 01 . 1.7 to
21 GHz. Third-Order Intermodulation Distortion (MIN Distortion
Mode) - At least - 70 dBc from two on-screen signals within
any frequency span. At least - 100 dBc for two signals spaced
more than 100 MHz apart from 1.8 to 18 GHz for preselected
Option 01.
LO Emissions (Referenced to Input Mixer) - -10 dBm
maximum; - 70 dBm maximum to 18 GHz for Option 01.
INPUT SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS
RF Input - Type N female connector.
Input Impedance - 50 n.
Maximum VSWR· with ;>0 10 dB Attenuation
Frequency Range
Typical
Specified Maximum
Dc to 2.5 GHz
2.5 GHz to 6.0 GHz
6.0 GHz to 18 GHz
18 GHz to 21 GHz
1.2:1
1.5:1
1.9:1
2.7 :1
1.3:1
1.7:1
2.3:1
3.5:1
• At Type N female connector to mtemal mixer, With 10 dB
attenuation
Input Level (Optimum Level for Linear Operation) -30 dBm referenced to input mixer. Full screen not exceedled
and MIN Distortion oontrol settings.
1 dB Compression Point - - 28 dBm from 1.7 to 2 GHz for
Option 01 ; otherwise - 18 dBm.
Maximum Safe Input Level (RF Attenuation at Zero dB) + 13 dBm without Option 01. +30 dBm (1 W) with Option 01.
Maximum Input Level (With 20 dB or more RF Attenuation)
- + 30 dBm (1 W) oontinuous, 75 W peak for 1 ~s or less
pulse width and 0.001 maximum duty factor (attenuation limit).
Dc must never be applied to RF input.
201
50 kHz TO 220 GHz
SPECTRUM ANAL VZERS
TEK PORTABLE
SENSITIVITY AND FREQUENCY RESPONSE
Average Noise Level
for 1 kHz Resolution
Frequency Range
Mixing
Number (n)
No
Preselection
-
50 kHz to 1.8 GHz"
50 kHz to 4.2 GHz"
1.7 GHz to 5.5 GHz
3.0 GHz to 7.1 GHz
5.4 GHz to 18 GHz
1
1
1
1
3
-
115dBm
115dBm
115 dBm
115dBm
loodBm
-
15 GHz to 21 GHz
100 MHz to 18 GHZ'3
3
-
95 dBm
-
-
Preselected
Option 01
110dBm
110dBm
110dBm
110dBm
95 dBm (12 GHZ!
90 dBm (18 GHz
85 dBm
Frequency Response
With 10 dB Attenuation
No
Preselection
Preselected
Option 01
± 2.5 dB
± 2.5 dB
± 1.5dB
± 1.5dB
± 2.5 dB
± 2.5 dB
± 2.5 dB
± 3.5 dB
± 3.5 dB
± 3.5 dB
± 5.0 dB
± 4.5 dB
~-------~~------~
I
WITH TEKTRONIX OPTIONAL HIGH PERFORMANCE WAVEGUIDE MIXERS
18
26
40
60
GHz
GHz
GHz
GHz
to
to
to
to
26
40
60
90
GHz
GHz
GHz
GHz
- 1oodBm
± 3.0 dB
95dBm
± 3.0 dB
95dBm
± 3.0 dB
± 3.0 dB"
95 dBm 160 GHz
- 85 dBm
90 GHz
± 3.0 dB"
90 GHz to 140 GHz
23
- 85 dBm
90 GHz
± 3.0 dB"
- 75 dBm
140 GHz
± 3.0 dB"
., Low frequency end performance does not include effects due to zero Hz feedthrough. Frequency response ± 1.5 dB, 100 kHz to
1.8GHz.
'2 Over any 5 GHz bandwidth.
'3 Includes frequency band switching error of I elB maximum.
6
10
10
15
-
OUTPUT SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS
Calibrator (Cal Out) - 20 dBm ± 0.3 dB , 100 MHz
± 1.7kHz.
1st and 2nd LO - Provides access to the output of the respective local oscillators (1 st LO + 7.5 dBm minimum to a
maximum of + 15 dBm; 2nd LO - 22 dBm minimum to a maximum of + 15 dBm). These ports must be terminated in 50 n at
all times.
Vartlcal Out - Provides 0.5 V ± 5% of signal per division of
video above and below the center line.
Horizontal Out - Provides 0.5 V either side of center. Full
range - 2.5 V to + 2.5 V ± 10%.
Pen Lift - TTL, + 5 V nominal to lift pen.
IF Out - Output of the 10 MHz IF. Level is approximately
- 16 dBm for a full screen signal at - 30 dBm input reference
level. Nominal impedance 50 n.
492P Only: IEEE Standard 488-1978 Port (GPIB) - In accordance with IEEE Standard 488.
GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
Sweep Time - 20 ~s to 5 s/div (10 sldiv in auto) in 1-2-5
sequence.
CRT Readout - Displays reference level, center frequency,
frequency range, vertical display mode, frequency span/div resolution bandwidth and RF attenuation.
CRT - 8xl0 ern, P31 Phosphor.
Input Voltage - 90 to 132 V ac or 180 to 250 V ac, 48 to
440 Hz.
Power - 210 W maximum with all options, at 115 V and
60 Hz.
Environmental Characteristics - Per MIL-T-288ooB Type III,
Class 3, Style C.
Configuration - Portable, 20 kg (44 Ib) (all options), 17.5 x
32.7 x 49.9 cm (6.9 x 12.9 x 19.7 in) without handle or oover.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
50 n ooaxial cable, N to N oonnectors, 6 ft (012-0114-00); 50 n
ooaxial cable, BNC to BNC oonnectors, 18 in (012-0076-00);
adaptor, N male to BNC female (103-0045-00); CRT mesh filter
(378-0726-01); fuse 2 A, fast blow (159-0021 -00); fuse 4 A fast
blow (2)(159-0017-00); power cord, 115-V (161-0118-00); cord
clamp (343-0170-00); CRT visor (016-0653-00); diplexer assembly (015-0385-00); CRT light filter, amber (378-0115-01);
CRT light filter, blue (378-0115-00); CRT light filter, gray
(378-0115-02). 492P also includes GPIB cable, 2 m, double
shielded (012-0630-03).
----01_
,. ... ",
.............
---
...
CRT mask for eligital raelia application. Ask about the mocIifiecl
492 optimized for eligital radia measurements.
202
ORDERING INFORMATION
492 Spectrum Analyzer ..................... $21,300
492P Fully Programmable/GPIB
Spectrum Analyzer ............................ $27,500
492 to 492P Conversion - Conversion made by your Tektronix Service Center. For 492's with OptionS 01, 02, 03, 08.
Order 040-1038-02 ....................................................... $6,800
For 492's with Options 01 , 02, 03. Order 040-1 037-02 .. $6,800
Option 01 - Internal Preselection ........................... +$3,900
Provides calibrated preselected filtering of input to first mixer
for each frequency band.
Option 02 - Digital Storage .................................... +$1,900
Provides multiple memory display storage with SAVE A, MAXIMUM HOLD, B MINUS SAVE A, display averaging. and storage bypass.
Option 03 - Frequency Stabilization/
100Hz Resolution ..................................................... +$3,500
Provides first local oscillator stabilization by phase locking the
oscillator to an internal reference. Also provides 100Hz
resolution.
Option 08 - Delete External Mixer Capability ........ -$1,750
Deletes internal switching front panel oonnector and external
diplexer to oonnect and use external wavequide mixers.
Option 20 - General Purpose 12.4 to 40 GHz Waveguide Mixer Set ............................................................................ +$740
Includes three mixers (12.4 to 18 GHz, 18 to 26.5 GHz, and
26.5 to 40 GHz) and attaching hardware to extend the upper
frequency.
Option 21 - High Performance 18 to 40 GHz Waveguide Mixer Set ......................................................................... +$1,970
Includes two mixers (18 to 26.5 GHz and 26.5 to 40 GHz) and
attaching hardware to extend the upper frequency .
Option 22 - High Performance 18 to 60 GHz Waveguide
Mixer Set ................................................................... +$3,220
Includes three mixers (18 to 26.5 GHz, 26.5 to 40 GHz. and 40
to 60 GHz) and attaching hardware to extend the upper
frequency.
Option 30 - Rackmount. 19 inch rack width with front panel
input/outputs ................................................................ + $790
Option 31 - Rackmount. 19 inch rack width with rear panel
input/output capability .................................................. + $840
Option 32 - Benchmount. Adds side and top panels, carrying
handles and feet for a stackable bench top
oonfiguration ................................................................. + $940
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORD AND PLUG OPTIONS
Option 1.1 - Universal Euro 220 V/16A, 50 Hz .............. NC
Option 1.2 - UK 240 V/13A, 50 Hz ................................. NC
Option 1.3 - Australian 240 V!10A, 50 Hz ...................... NC
Option 1.4 - North American 240 V/15A, 60 Hz ............. NC
Option 1.5 - Switzerland 220 V!10A, 50 Hz ................... NC
PERIPHERAL PRODUCTS FOR
492P SPECTRUM ANALYZER
4041 System Controller ...............................................
40521. Graphic Computing System Controller ............
4611 Hard Copy Unit ...................................................
4831 Hard Copy Unit ...................................................
4662 Interactive Digital Plotter .....................................
4924 Digital Cartridge Tape Drive ................................
4932 GPIB Extender ....................................................
$4,995
$9,900
$4,550
$5,950
$4,800
$2,990
$1,195
IOOI-bBW
~ ~
:
,
II
II
II
II
I
I
I
I
I
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
The following listed accessories may be ordered in any
oombination.
High Performance Waveguide Mixer.
18to 26.5 GHz Mixer. Order WM490K .......................... $975
26.5 to 40 GHz Mixer. Order WM490A .......................... $975
40 to 60 GHz Mixer. Order WM490U .......................... $1,250
60 to 90 GHz Mixer. Order WM490E .......................... $2,400
90 to 140 GHz Mixer. Order WM490F ........................ $2,600
High Performance 18 to 40 GHz Waveguide Mixer Set
Order WM490-2 ........................................................... $2,010
18 to 26.5 GHz Mixer. Order WM490K .......................... $975
26.5 to 40 GHz Mixer. Order WM490A .......................... $975
Cable. Order 012-0649-00 ................................................ $25
Case. Order 016-0465-01 ................................................. $45
High Performance 18 to 80 GHz Waveguide Mixer Set
Order WM490-3 ........................................................... $3,280
18 to 26.5 GHz Mixer. Order WM490K .......................... $975
26.5 to 40 GHz Mixer. Order WM490A .......................... $975
40 to 80 GHz Mixer. Order WM490U .......................... $1,250
Cable. Order 012-0649·00 ................................................ $25
Case. Order 016-0465-01 ................................................. $45
High Performance 18 to 90 GHz Waveguide Mixer Set
Order WM490-4 ........................................................... $5,680
18 to 26.5 GHz Mixer. Order WM490K .......................... $975
26.5 to 40 GHz Mixer. Order WM490A .......................... $975
40 to 60 GHz Mixer. Order WM490U .......................... $1,250
60 to 90 GHz Mixer. Order WM490E .......................... $2,400
Cable. Order 012-0649-00 ................................................ $25
Case. Order 016-0465-01 ................................................. $45
High Performance 18 to 140 GHz Waveguide Mixer Set
Order WM490-5 ........................................................... $8,280
18 to 26.5 GHz Mixer. Order WM490K .......................... $975
26.5 to 40 GHz Mixer. Order WM490A .......................... $975
40 to 60 GHz Mixer. Order WM490U .......................... $1 ,250
60 to 90 GHz Mixer. Order WM490E .......................... $2,400
90 to 140 GHz Mixer. Order WM490F ........................ $2,600
Cable. Order 012-0649-00 ................................................ $25
Case. Order 016-0465-01 ................................................. $45
General Purpose 12.4 to 40 GHz Waveguide Set
Order 016-0640-00 .......................................................... $710
12.4 to 18 GHz Mixer. Order 119-0097-01 ..................... $180
18.0 to 26.5 GHz Mixer. Order 119-0098-01 .................. $220
26.5 to 40 GHz Mixer. Order 119-0099-01 ..................... $275
Cable. Order 012-0748-00 ................................................ $20
Case. Order 016-0465-02 ................................................. $45
Microwave Comb Generator
Order 067-0885-00 ....................................................... $1,600
75 0 to 50 0 Minimum Lo.. Attenuator
Order 011-0112-00 ............................................................ $80
Dc Block BNC to BNC Order 015-0221-00 ...................... $85
FET Probe P6201 to 900 MHz Order 010-6201-01 .... $1,090
1405 TV Sideband Adaptor (525/80 Markers) ......... $5,480
TR 503 Tracking Generator ......................................... $8,400
For more information on the TR 503 see page 212.
C-5C Camera .................................................................. $525
TV Trigger Synchronizer Order 015-0261·01 ............... $330
Hard Caoe (Tranoit) Order 016-0658-00 ....................... $625
Soft Case Order 016-0659-00 ........................................ $125
Lab Cart Model 3 ........................................................... $525
Note: 490 Series Spectrum Analyzers are compatible with al/
Tektronix C-50 Series cameras. Battery Pack 016-0270-02 is
required for C-50, C-51, C-52 and C-53 Cameras.
TEK ~~~IES
WAVEGUIDE MIXERS
RACKMOUNT /BENCHMOUNT
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Frequency Range
Sensitivity"' (dBm)
Frequency Response"'
Amplitude Accuracy"'
18 to 26.5 GHz
- 100
± 3dB
± 6 dB
26.5 to 40 GHz
- 95
± 3dB
± 6 dB
40 to 60 GHz
- 95
± 3 dB
± 6 dB
'f EqUivalent average fIOtSS leve/ at 1 kHz bandwidth.
" Maximum amplitude variation across each waveguide mixer band (with peaking control optimized) in responss to a - 3~ dBm CW
input signal to the waveguide mixer.
" Maximum reference level error with respect to the internal calibrator. Amplitude accuracy can be improved 3 dB by measuring
amplitude responss in each band with respect to a known external waveguide signal source level.
Frequency Range
Typical Sensitivity". (dBm)
Typical"' Frequency Response 3 dB Compres.ion Point (Seturation)
- 95 at 60 GHz
- 15 dBm at 60GHz
±3 dB
- 85 at 90 GHz
- 5 dBm at 90GHz
90 to 140 GHz
- 85 at 90 GHz
±3 dB
- 5 dBm at 90GHz
- 75 at 140 GHz
o dBm at 140 GHz
• EqUIValent average fIOtSS level at 1 kHz bandwidth.
'S Over any 5 GHz bandwidth.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Frequency Range
Length
WIdth
Height
Weight
Flange
18 to 26.5 GHz
8.97 em (3.53 in)
3.68 em (1 .45 in)
180 g (6.5 oz)
UG-595/U
2.22 em (.875 inl
26.5 to 40 GHz
UG-5991U
100 g ~.7 oz)
1.90 em !.750 in
3.35 em (1 .32 inj
6.93 em !2.73 inj
40 to 60 GHz
4.52 em 1.78 in
1.84 cm" .725 in)"'
UG-383/U-M
2.45 cm"' !.980 in "
80 g ( .9ozl
60 to 90 GHz
0.89 em" (.350 in)"'
2.29 em"' .900 in "
UG-387/U
4.31 c~ 11 .70 in
40 ~ n.5 O~j
90 to 140 GHz
4.31 em 1.70 inj
0.89 cm" (.350 inj"
2.29 em)"' (.900 in)"'
40 9 1.50z
UG-387/U-M
'. Excludes contrlbutton to d,ffl8nston due to the dIameter of the round waveguide flange.
Overall length contribution of flange is included.
60 to 90 GHz
490
Series Waveguide Mixers
The 490 Series Tektronix Waveguide Mixers cover
from 18 to 140 GHz with at least - 75 dBm
sensitivity. They are designed specifically for use
with the TEKTRONIX 4921492P and 7L 18 Spectrum Analyzers.
The two microwave mixers cover ranges 18 to
26.5 GHz and 26.5 to 40 GHz. They have field
replaceable diodes and frequency response of
± 3 dB when used with the spectrum analyzers
indicated above.
The three millimeter wave mixers cover ranges 40
to 60 GHz (also specified at ±3 dB frequency
response) , 60 to 90 GHz and 90 to 140 GHz.
The units are all gold plated brass, conforming to
MIL-G-45204 Class 1, Type 1 specifications and
will withstand harsh environments. Each set
comes complete with a container for spare diodes, a 28 inch cable, a 32 page instruction
manual and a wood storage box with foam cutout
storage locations for all five mixers.
Typical Frequency Response for
18-60 GHz Waveguide Mixers.
Typical Frequency Respon.e for
60-140 GHz Waveguide Mixers,
Me•• urwd Signal Lenl (dBm)
with - )0 dBm RF Iopull o mixer, CWo
- 25
- JO
~
- JO
(dBm)
,i
- 35
11 18
20
22
24
I
26
wlttl - 20dlSm
AFlnpul
to ml ..... C.W.
- 35
-"'~
- 40
- 45
FREQ· IGHz l
..
=~ ~
- 35
r,,.:::!-7.,,,..--;,,,c.:--,"',----:',.:----c,.""""'"""":--40:::-- FREQ· IGHz)
IdBm)
with - 10dBm
RF""""
toml...., C.W.
::: ~
-35
!
-4'
!
70
"-4'
-4'
- SO
. .
FREO· IGHI)
_
- 51
- 55
..
'00
"'
,,,
,'"
FREO· IGHz)
'40
L 40
!::---""
" :--;
..
~-:-;;
. .--"
..:----c50
;:;-7.52; ---;..
o---;';56:--;
..
: - :..
~.,,- FREQ. (GHz )
CHARACTERISTICS
For All Waveguide Mixers + 10 dBm (to mW).
Maximum cw RF input level:
Maximum PULSED RF Input Level - 1 W peak w ith 0.001
maximum duty factor and 1 I'S maximum pulse width.
L.O. Requirement + 10 dBm typical.
+ 7 dBm minimum, + 15 dBm maximum,
Bias Requirement - - 2.0 to + 0.5 V with respect to the
mixer body through a current limiting resistor, to provide 0 to
20 rnA of bias current.
For the 18 to 60 GHz Waveguide Mixers sion point (saturation): -10 dBm (typical).
3 dB compres-
Conversion Loss - 30 dB typical (when used in the proper
spectrum analyzer frequency band).
ORDERING INFORMATION
When ordering, please use the nomenclature given below:
18 to 26.5 GHz: WM 490 K ................................. __ .... _.... $975
26.5 to 40 GHz: WM 490 A ___ ........ __ ..... _________ .. __ ......... _... $975
40 to 60 GHz: WM 490 U __.......... ____.. ___ .......... _.... __ .... _. $1,250
60 to 90 GHz: WM 490 E ..... _............... __ ._... _.... _........ __ $2,400
90 to 140 GHz: WM 490 F .................... _.................. __ . $2,600
18 to 40 GHz set (items 1,2): WM 490-2 ... _............ ___ $2,010
18 to 60 GHz set (Items 1,3): WM 490-3 ................. _. $3,260
18 to 90 GHz set (items 1,4): WM 490-4 ........... _..... _. $5,660
18 to 140 GHz set (items 1,5): WM 490-5 .......... _...... $8,260
490 Series Spectrum Analyzers
Rackmount/Benchmount Options
The following options denote mechanical configurations of the 4921492P/496/496P. Option 30 is a
rackmount configuration for the 490 Series with
standard front panel input/outputs. Option 31 is a
rackmount configuration with rear panel
input/output capability. Option 32 adds side covers and trim to an Option 31 making it into a
stackable bench top configuration.
The Option 30 and 31 Rackmount is a standard
19 inch rack width and comes with standard
rackmount fittings. A spectrum analyzer accesso-
ries storage drawer is also included. Dimensions
are 22.23 x 42.9 x 63.5 cm (8.75 x 16.89 x
25.00 in). Weight is 24.5 kg (54 Ib); including the
spectrum analyzer.
The Option 32 Benchmount is approximately the
same size as the Rackmount but is dressed with
side and top panels and carrying handles and
feel. The Benchmount provides a convenient surface for stacking other instruments. Dimensions
are 23.5 x 45.7 x 63.5 cm (9.25 x 17.9 x 25.00 in).
Weight is 25.9 kg (57 Ib); including the spectrum
analyzer.
See Ordering Information on previous and following pages,
203
1 kHz TO 1800 MHz
SPECTRUM ANAL VZERS
TEK PORTABLE
The 496P complies with IEEE Standard 488-1978,
and with Tektronix Standard Codes and For-
mats.
496
496P
Microprocessor Aided Controls
Automatic Modes
Portable Form Factor
(Compact Size/Light Weight)
1 kHz to 1800 MHz Coverage
Amplitude Comparison in 0.25 dB Steps
1 kHz Frequency Resolution in AF Mode
CRT Readout of all Important Parameters
Fully Calibrated in Amplitude and Frequency
80 dB Dynamic Range
GPIB/Fully Programmable (496P)
Three-knob Operation
Environmentalized per MIL-T 288008
Digital Storage and Signal Processing
204
The 496 provides high performance spectrum
analysis and measurements in the 1 kHz to
1.8 GHz range. Its high stability and 80 dB dynamic range meet your demands for proof-of-performance measurements, on site or on the bench.
The 496 offers state of the art performance and
rugged portability. Resolution bandwidth can be
varied from 1 MHz to 30 Hz over the entire
frequency range . Automatic phase lock stabilization reduces incidental FM to 10 Hz p-p; phase
noise sidebands are at least - 75 dBc at 30 times
the resolution offset. Frequency drift with phase
lock is typically 1 kHz in 10 minutes after 30
minute warmup. And the 496 provides 1 kHz
frequency resolution in AF mode.
Easy to use.
Anywhere.
Simple 1,2,3 knob adjustment sets center frequency, frequency span and reference level.
Power on sequence automatically normalizes operational settings and provides maximum input
protection.
Digital storage eliminates time-consuming display
adjustments. SAVE A, B MINUS SAVE A, MAX
HOLD and AVERAGE modes let you compare,
subtract, save maximum values or noise average
(smooth) your spectral displays. Constant tuning
rate lets you position the signal quickly and
accurately at any frequency span .
Microprocessor-aided controls take care of the
rest. Most-used functions are automatically
controlled.
The 496 Goes Where You Go
Light weight and compact size combine to provide unmatched portability in a laboratory quality
spectrum analyzer. With its Single-handle carry,
the 496 is easily moved around the design lab or
systems test area, to the field , or wherever it may
be needed .
It even fits under an airplane seat.
Automate your Spectrum Analysis with the
496P
The 496P is the fully programmable/GPIB compatible version of the 496 Spectrum Analyzer. Operation, features and benefits of the 496P are essentially the same as the 492P. See discussion on
pages 201 and 202. 496 Spectrum AAalyzer
specifications also apply to the 496P.
The Tektronix 4932 GPIB Extender provides a
cost-effective way to interconnect remotely located GPIB instruments, allowing communication at
distances of up to 500 meters (1650 feet). See
page 26 for additional information.
Manual instruments can be converted to programmable instruments at a later time. Contact
your Tektronix Sales Engineer for details.
TEK
Sensitivity
CHARACTERISTICS
The following characteristics and features apply to the
496/496P Spectrum Analyzers after a 30-minute warm up
period unless otherwise noted.
Resolution Bandwidth
Average Noise Level
30 Hz
- 126 dBm
FREQUENCY RELATED
Center Frequency Range - 1 kHz to 1800 MHz.
Frequency Accuracy -
± 5 MHz + 20% of span/div·· .
'Frequency Readout Resolution - Within 1 MHz. 496P
TUNE Command Accuracy (Span/div ... 50 kHz) - ± 7% or
± 100 Hz, whichever Is greater.
'Delta Frequency Readout Accuracy (Span/Div .. 50 kHz)
- ± 5% of the Delta Frequency Readout.
Residual FM (short tenn), Phase Lock ON over 20 ms.
Residual FM (short tenn), Phase Lock OFF over 20 ms.
... 10 Hz p-p
... 1 kHz p-p
Long Term Drift (at constant temperature and fixed center
frequency) - Phase Lock ON .. 3.3 kHzJl0 minutes. Phase
Lock OFF ... 33 kHzl l0 minutes."
Resolution Bandwidth (-6 dB) - 30 Hz, then 100 Hz to
1 MHz in decade steps, plus an AUTO position. Resolution
bandwidth is within 20% of selected bandwidth.
Resolution Shape Factor (60 dB/6 dB) or less for 30 Hz Resolution Bandwidth.
100 Hz
- 123 dBm
1 kHz
- 115dBm
10 kHz
- 105 dBm
100 kHz
- 95 dBm
1 MHz
- 85 dBm
SPURIOUS RESPONSE
Residual (no input signal) - - 100 dBm or less referenced to
mixer input.
Thlrd·Order Intennodulatlon Distortion (Minimum Distortion
mode) - At least -70 dBc below any two on·screen signals
within any frequency span.
Zero Frequency Spur (referenced to Input mixer) or less.
20 dBm
Option 30 - Rackmount 19 inch rack width with
front panel input/outputs ....... " ............•....•..• " .... " " •.• " . +$790
- 70 dBm
Option 31 - Rackmount 19 inch rack width with
rear panel input/output capability """""" .,,""""""" "" +$840
Option 32 - Benchmount adds side and top panels.
carrying handles and feet for a stackable benchtop
configuration " " .""""" """" .... " ............ " ....................,, +$940
LO Emissions (referenced to Input mixer) maximum.
RF Input -
INPUT SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS
Type N female connector.
Input Impedance - 50 Il; vswr 1.3 maximum (1 .2 typical)
with 10 dB or more RF attenuation.
Frequency SpanlDiv Range 100 MHzJdiv in a 1.2.5 sequence.
Input Level (optimum level for linear operation) - - 30 dBm
relerred to input mixer. Full screen not exceeded and MIN DIS·
TORTION control setting.
Zero Span - When selected , the horizontal axis of the CRT is
calibrated in time (instead of frequency). The span/div readout
is changed to time/div.
Frequency Span/Div Accuracy - Within 5% of the selected
span/div over the center eight divisions of the ten-division CRT
display.
'LlF mode provides measurements to the nearest kHz plus di·
rect center frequency readout to the nearest kHz between
I kHz and 500 kHz.
"After 2 hour warmup.
AMPLITUDE RELATED
Reference Level Range (full screen, top 01 graticule) - 123 dBm to + 40 dBm (+ 40 dBm includes maximum safe
input of + 30 dBm and 10 dB of IF gain reduction) for 10 dB/div
and 2 dB/div LOG modes. 20 nV/div to 2 V/div (1 W maximum
safe input) in LIN mode.
Reference Level Steps - 10 dB, 1 dB, and 0.25 dB for differ·
ential (Ll) measurements in LOG mode. 1·2·5 sequence and
1 dB equivalent increments in LIN mode.
Reference Level Accuracy - Accuracy is a function of
changes in RF attenuation, Resolution BandWidth, Display
Mode and Reference Level. See amplitude accuracies of these
functions. The RF attenuator steps 10 dB for reference level
changes above - 30 dBm (- 20 dBm when Minimum Noise is
active) unless Minimum RF attenuation is greater than normal.
The I F gain inqeases 10 dB for each 10 dB Reference Level
change below - 30 dBm (- 20 dBm when Minimum Noise is
active).
Display Dynamic Range - 80 dB at 10 dB/div, 16 dB at
2 dB/div, and 8 divisions in LIN mode.
Display Amplitude Accuracy - ± 1.0 dB/l0 dB to a maxi·
mum cumulative error of ± 2.0 dB over the 80 dB window and
± 0.4 dB/2 dB to a maximum cumulative error of ± 1.0 dB over
the 16 dB window. LIN mode is 5% of full scale.
496P Fully Programmable/GPIB
Spectrum Analyzer ............................ $26,950
496 to 496P Conversion (040·1046-02) - Conversions made
by your Tektronix Servioe Center. Contact your Spectrum Ana·
Iyzer Sales Engineer or Servioe Center for details.
Noise Sidebands - At least 75 dBc at 30 times the Resolution Bandwidth offset from the Center Frequency (70 dBc for
100 Hz Resolution Bandwidth or less).
Maximum Span - When selected, the entire effective frequen.
cy range is scanned and displayed.
ORDERING INFORMATION
496 Spectrum Analyzer ..................... $22,950
Hannonlc Distortion (cw Signal, Minimum Distortion mode)
- At least - 60 dBc for a full·screen signal.
7.5: 1 or less. 15: 1
From 50 Hz/ div to
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Power cord, 115-V (161·0118-oo);501l coaxial cable, N to N
connectors, 6 ft (012.0114-00); 50 Il coaxial cable, BNC to
BNC connectors, 18 in (012·0076-00); adaptor, N male to BNC
female (103-0045·00); cord clamp (343-0170·00); fuse 4 A fast
blow (2) (159·0017·00); fuse 2 A, fast blow (159·0021.00);
CRT visor (016-0653-00); CRT mesh filter (378-0726-01); CRT
light filter, blue (378-0115·00); CRT light filter, amber (378·
0115.01); CRT light filter, gray (378.0tI5-02);. 496P also in·
cludes GPIB cable, 2 meter, double shield (012·0630·03).
1 dB Compression Point -
- 18 dBm, no RF attenuation.
Maximum Input Level (RF allenuation at 0 dB) -
+ 30 dBm.
Maximum Input Level (with 20 dB or more RF allenuation)
- +30 dBm (1 W) continuous 75 W peak, pulse width 1 I'S or
less with a maximum duty lactor of 0.001 (attenuation limit). Dc
must never be applied to RF input.
OUTPUT SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS
Calibrator (Cal Out) - - 20 dBm ± 0.3 dB at 100 MHz
± 1.7 kHz.
1st and 2nd LO - Provides access to the output of the respective local oscillators (1st LO + 7.5 dBm minimum to a max·
imum of + 15 dBm, 2nd LO - 16 dBm minimum to a maximum
of + 15 dBm). These ports must be tenninated in 50 Il at all
times.
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORDS .. PLUG OPTIONS
Option AI - Universal Euro 220 V/16A, 50 Hz .............. NC
Option A2 -
UK 240 V/13A, 50 Hz .............. " ................. NC
Option A3 -
Australian 240 V!10A, 50 Hz .... "."""".. ",,. He
Option A4 -
North American 240 V/15A, 60 Hz ............. NC
Option A5 -
Switzerland 250 Vll0A, 50 Hz ................... NC
PERIPHERAL PRODUCTS FOR
496P SPECTRUM ANALYZER
4041 System Controller .............................................. $4,995
4052A Graphic Computing System Controller ......... $9,900
4611 Hard Copy Unit "" .... " ..... "."".... " .... " ........."."". $4,550
4631 Hard Copy Unit .. " ........ " .... " ............................... $5,950
4662 Interactive Digital Ploller .. " ...... " ...................... $4,800
4924 Dlgitsl Cartridge Tape Drive ""." .................... " $2,990
4932 GPIB Extender ...... " ........................................... $1,195
Vertical Out - Provides 0.5 V ± 5% of Signal per division of
video above and below the centerline.
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
75 0 to 50 0 Minimum LOll Allenuator
Order 011·0112·00 ............................................................ $80
Horizontal Out - Provides 0.5 V either side of center. Full
range - 2.5 V to +2.5 V ± 10%.
Dc Block BNC to BNC Order 015·0221·00 ...................... $85
Pen Lift -
TIL compatible, nominal + 5 V to lift pen.
IF Out - Output of the 10 MHz IF. Level is ",,- 16 dBm lor a
full screen signal at - 30 dBm input reference level. Nominal
impedance 50 n.
496P Only: IEEE Standard 488·1978 Port (GPIB) dance with IEEE Standard 488.
In accor·
Probe Power - Provides operating voltages (+ 5 V, + 15 V,
- 15 V, and ground) for active probes.
GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
Sweep Time - 20 Its/div to 5 s/div in 1·2·5 sequence (10 sldiv
in Auto).
CRT Readout - Displays: Reference Level, Frequency, Frequency Span/div, Vertical Display, RF allenuation, and Resolu·
tion Bandwidth.
CRT -
1405 TV Sideband Adapter (525/60 Markers) ........... $5,460
For more information on the 1405 see page 213.
TR 503 Tracking Generator ........................................ $8,400
For more information on the TR 503 see page 212.
C·5C Camera .................................................................. $525
TV Trigger Synchronizer Order 015·0261·01 ............... $330
Hard Ca.e (tranSit) Order 016-0658-00 ......................... $825
Soft Case Order 016-0659·00 ........................................ $125
lab Cart Model 3 ........................................................... $525
Note: The 490 Series spectrum analyzers are compatible with
a/l Tektronix C-50 Series cameras. Battery pack 01~270-02
is required for C-50, C·SI, C-52 and C-53 Cameras.
8 x 10 cm. P31 Phosphor.
Differential Amplitude - Delta A mode provides differential
measurement in 0.25 dB increments.
Configuration - Portable, 20 kg (44Ib), 17.5 x 32.7 x 49.9 cm
(6.9 x 12.9 x 19.7 in) without handle or cover.
Display Flatness - ± 1.5 dB, 1 kHz to 1800 MHz measured
with .. 10 dB RF attenuation.
Input Voltage 440 Hz.
Power -
P6201 FET Probe to 900 MHz Order 010·6201·01 .... $1,090
90 to 132 V ac or 180 to 250 V ac, 48 to
210 W maximum, 3.2 A, at 115 V and 60 Hz.
Environmental Characteristics Type III , Class 3, Style C.
Per MIL·T·28800B,
205
10 kHz TO 1.8 GHz
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
TEK PLUG-IN
Sen.itivity -
7L14
At 50 MHz applicable from 100kHz to 1 8 GHz
Resolution Bandwidth
Averaged Input Noise Level
30 Hz
Digital Storage and Averaging
Automatic Phase Lock
Swept Frequency Measurements
with TR 502
- 130dBm
300 Hz
120 dBm
3 kHz
110dBm
30 kHz
- 100dBm
300 kHz
90dBm
3 MHz
RF Attenuator -
Input Limiter for Extra Input
Protection
Accuracy -
- 80 dBm
Calibraled in 10 dB steps.
± (0.25 dB + 1.2% of dB reading).
IF Gain
Range - 70 dB (80 dB when operating in 30 Hz resolution
bandwidth).
The Tektronix 7L 14 is the VHF/UHF
member of the 7000 Series Digital Storage Family replacing the 7L 13. It provides high performance in the 10 kHz
to 1.8 GHz range. Measurements for
RFI/EMI, FM , TV, avionics, navigation,
two-way and other communications
systems are made with accuracy and
convenience .
Step Accuracy - ± 1 dB per 10 dB step to ± 2 dB maximum
over entire range.
SPURIOUS RESPONSES
Second Order Intermodulation Products - 100 kHz
- 1.8 GHz ; down 70 dB or more from two - 40 dBm Signals,
within any frequency span .
Third Order Intermodulation Products 100 kHz
- 1.8 GHz ; down 70 dB or more from two - 30 dBm signals,
within any frequency span.
GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
Noi.e Sideband. - - 70 dBc minimum at frequency offsets
;;0 25 x resoiution bandwidth settings.
Resolution bandwidth can be varied
from 30 Hz to 3 MHz over the entire
frequency range . Automatic phase
lock ensures excellent stability - incidental FM is ..;; 13 Hz p-p. Phase noise
sidebands are no greater than
- 70 dBc at 25 resolution bandwidths
away.
Sweep -
An input limiter provides automatic overload protection of the first mixer. Signals up to one watt
can be connected to the input for any setting of
the RF input attenuator. In addition, the input is
ac-coupled for protection from dc and large
voltages at line frequency (50/60 Hz). Frequency
coverage down to 1 kHz can be obtained by
deleting the built-in limiter. Talk to your Tektronix
Sales Engineer for details.
CHARACTERISTICS
The following characteristics and features apply to the
7L 14 Spectrum Analyzer after a warm up period of 20 minutes.
FREQUENCY RELATED
Center Frequency Range Readout Resolution Readout Accuracy span/div).
10kHz to 1.8 GHz.
Within t MHz.
± (5 MHz + 20% of frequency
Frequency Span - 200 Hz/div to 100 MHz/div in calibrated
steps in a 1-2-5 sequence.
Accuracy Linearity -
Within 5% of the span selected.
Within 5% of the span selected.
Maximum Span -
206
Provides 1.8 GHz of span.
Triggered, manual, extemal.
Sweep Tim. Accuracy -
10 s/div to 1
~s/div
in a 1-2-5 sequence.
± 5% of selected Time/div.
Trigg.ring Modes Line.
Internal, External, Ext in HoriZ/Trig and
Sen.itivity - ± 0.6 div of internal signal (p-p) and/or ± 0.6
(p-p) of external signal.
All this gives you the critical accuracy
necessary for design and proof-of-performance measurements . Check
broadband RF networks, filter networks, amplifiers, and more ... easily
and economically.
Digital storage expands 7L 14 capability - you
can compare waveforms - such as a filter
response to a standard - simultaneously using
independent A and B memories. A Max Hold
function makes it easy to measure amplitude and
frequency drift such as in an oscillator. Or capture
short duration signals such as in spectrum occupancy monitoring .
< - 100 dBm (referenced to the 1st mixer input).
Re.ldual -
Shipping Weight -
v
10.8 kg (24 Ib).
INPUT SIGNAL CONNECTORS
RF Input - Maximum Input Power Level: + 30 dBm. Maximum Input Power Level to the RF Attenuator ;;0 10 dB: 1 W
average (including de), 100 W peak simultaneously. Input Impedance: 50 n ; vswr 1.35 maximum with 10 dB of RF
attenuation.
Zero Span - Provides fixed frequency operation for time domain display.
Resolution Bandwidth
Range -
External Horizontal/Trigg.r Input Conn.ctor - Input Voitage Range: Typically 0 V to 10 V for 10 div sweep. Typically
0.5 V (p-p) to trigger the sweep circuits. 40 V peak maximum.
30 Hz to 3 MHz. in decade steps.
Accuracy (6 dB down) selected.
Within ± 20% of the resolution
Shape Factor (60/6 dB) - 4:1 or less for 3 MHz to 300 Hz ;
12: 1 or less for 30 Hz resolution .
Signal Level Change Between Any Two Bandwidths ± 0.5 dB at room temperature. ± 2.0 dB maximum over
temperature.
Residual FM - 13 Hz (p-p) when phase locked ± 10kHz (p-p)
for 20 ms when not phase locked.
Stability - At a fixed temperature after two hour warm up ;
± 2 kHz/hour phase locked; ± 75 kHz/hour not phase locked.
At constant frequency, wa it 10 minutes/GHz of tuning when
the frequency is changed.
AMPLITUDE RELATED
Display Modes
Log 10 dB/div -
Provides 70 dB display dynamic range .
Accuracy within 0.15 dB/dB to 2 dB maximum over 70 dB dy-
namk= range.
Log 2 dB/div -
Provides 14 dB display dynamic range.
Accuracy within ± 0.4 dB/2 dB to 1.0 dB maximum over 14 dB
dynamic range .
Cal Out -
OUTPUT SIGNAL CONNECTORS
- 30 dBm, ± 0.3 dB at 50 MHz, ± 0.01 %.
l.t Lo Out, 2nd Lo Out, Swp Out and Vid.o Output
ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS
The 7L 14 meets its electrical characteristics over the environmentallimits per MIL-T-28800 Type 3 Class 6, Style E instruments. The 7Lt4 is operable over the limits of a MIL-T-28800
Class 5 instrument. The 7L 14 is physically and electrically compatible with all Tektronix 7000 Series Mainframes.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Spectrum Analyzer Graticule. 50 n Coaxial Cable, with BNC
connectors, 6 ft (012-0113-00); BNC male to female adaptor
(103-0058-00); Amber Light Filter (378-0684-01); Light Filter
(378-0625-07); Clear plastic implosion shield with Log, Lin, Ref,
and F (frequency) direction markings (337-1439-01) for 7603
Oscilloscope and (337 -1159-02) for other 7000 Series
Oscilloscopes.
ORDERING INFORMATION
7L 14 Spectrum Analyzer ,•• ,.",., ••••••• , $17,900
7603 Mainframe (shown) ,•• ,." •• "., •••• ,•• $2,700
R7603 Mainframe (Rack mount) ."., .. ". $3,100
LIN - Within 10% over 8 divisions. Deviation between display
modes (for full screen signal): ± 2 dB from 2 dB/div to
10 dB/div, 0.5 divisions from 2 dB/div to LIN .
Option 06 -
Internal SA Graticule ............................... + 5SO
Reference Level
Option 08 -
Protective Front Cover (Cabinet Only) .. +5100
Below 100 kHz - + 30 dBm to - 50 dBm , as the center frequency approaches 10kHz.
Option 77 -
P7 Phosphor and Internal SA Graticule .. +535
Above 100 kHz ed steps.
+ 30 dBm to - 110 dBm in 10 dB calibrat-
Display Flatness - ± 1.5 dB, with respect to 50 MHz, over
any selected frequency span.
MAINFRAME OPTIONS
Frequency Range to 2.5 GHz: ask about the 7Lt4 Mod 139U.
T.ktronix ofters •• rvic. training cia •••• on the 7L 14 Spectrum Analyzer. For furth.r training information, contact your
local Sale./S.rvlc. Office or request a copy of the T.k·
tronix S.rvlc. Training Schedul. on the r.tum card in the
cent.r of this catalog.
7000
1.5 GHz to 60 GHz
PLUG-IN SPECTRUM ANALYZER
SERIES
Sensitivity and Frequency Response with External Mixers
- (Averaged noise level specified for 3 kHz resolut ion
bandwidth)
7L18
Digital Storage and Averaging
Frequency
Range
(GHz)
Automatic Phase Lock
Built-in Preselector
30 Hz Resolution to 12 GHz, 300 Hz to
60 GHz with Optional Waveguide Mixers Above 18 GHz
The Tektronix 7L 18 makes your most demanding microwave measurements with
accuracy and ease. In application after
applicaton - microwave relay, ECM, satellite communications and microwave development - the 7L 18 is helping make
state-of-the-art measurements with the
cleanest displays possible.
It delivers close-in 30 Hz resolution to
12 GHz, with ,,;; 10 Hz residual FM peak-topeak on local oscillator fundamental
bands. Amplitude calibration is maintained
from 1.5 to 60 GHz for absolute power
measurements, using high-performance
Tektroni x waveguide mi xers above
18 GHz. This is the kind of performance
you 'd expect from a baseband analyzer,
but the 7U8 provides it in the microwave
spectrum - and does so with versatility
and ease typical of our 7000 Series plugins. Make high-performance microwave
measurements without paying for more
frequency coverage than you need.
Digital storage and digital signal processing features all help simplify operation. MAX HOLD helps
you easily measure amplitude or frequency drift,
such as oscillator drift resulting from time or
temperature change. Digital averaging reduces
on-screen noise - helps you measure low-level
signals or spectral purity.
A built-in tracking preselector eliminates spurious
responses in all coaxial bands. And for harmonic
measurements, it increases dynamic range to
100 dB by rejecting signals outside its bandwidth.
If you design, test or evaluate state-of-the-art
microwave systems, choose the 7L 18 for high
performance, and 7000 Series versatility.
CHARACTERISTICS
The following characteristics and features apply to the 7L18
Spectrum Analyzer after a warm up period of 30 minutes unless otherwise specified .
FREQUENCY RELATED
Center Frequency
Range - 1.5 GHz to 18 GHz in five bands (coaxial input).
12.5 GHz to 60.5 GHz in six bands (with extemal waveguide
mixers).
Readout Resolution - Within 1 MHz with direct input and
10 MHz with waveguide mixers.
Readout Accuracy - ± (5 MHz + 20% of frequency span/div)
times the oscillator harmonic (n) of the band in use.
Frequency Span - 200 Hz/div to 500 MHz/div in a 1-2-5
sequence.
Accuracy - Within 5% of the span selected over center 8
division.
Linearity - Within 5% over the center 8 divisions of a 10 division display.
Maximum Span - Depends on mixing mode. Span width - n
x 2 GHz where n is the mixing mode. Maximum span full screen
is 8.5 GHz with internal mixer (9.5 to 18 GHz band).
Zero Span - Provides fixed frequency operation for time d0main display.
Resolution Bandwidth
Range - 30 Hz to 3 MHz, in decade steps plus auto
bandwidth.
Accuracy (6 dB down) - Within 20% of the resolution
selected.
Mixing
Mode
Averaged
Noise Level
(dBm Max)
- 85
Response
(dB Max)
12.5 to 18.0
6+
18.0 to 26.5"
7+
90
±3
26.5 to 40.0"
10+
- 85
±3
- 75
±3
40.0 to 60.5"'
15+
• 'Htgh performance mixer Ime.
SPURIOUS RESPONSES
Residual - .. - 11 0 dBm, referred to band 1, with no input
attenuation, and with no signal present at the input. Calibrator
related may be - 100 dBm.
Intermodulatlon DI8tortion - Third order down 70 dB or more
from any two full screen Signals, when if gain Is not set to gain
reduced position (red sector).
Mixed - All harmonic mixing, image, and multiple responses
down 70 dB or more to 18 GHz.
GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
Noise Sidebands - When phase locked, for fundamental (n
- 1) conversion, - 70 dBc minimum at frequency offsets
.. 20 x resolution bandwidth settings.
Sweep - Triggered, auto, manual, extemal.
Sweep Time - 20 sldlv to 1 ~s/div in a 1-2-5 sequence.
Accuracy - Within 6% of selected time/div.
Triggering Modes - Internal, external, line, free run , single
sweep.
Sensitivity - 0.5 div intemal, 0.5 V external (50 V maximum).
Shipping Weight - 11.7 kg (26 Ib).
Shape Factor (60/6 dB) - 4:1 or less for 3 MHz to 300 Hz ;
12: 1 or less for 30 Hz resolution.
Residual FM .. 10 Hz (p-p) x n when phase locked.
.. 10 kHz (p-p) x n when not phase locked.
Stability - At a fixed temperature after two hour warm up;
within 2 kHz/hour x n when phase locked; within 50 kHz/l 0
minutes x n when not phase locked.
Tracking Preselector - Internal and automatic 1.5 to
18 GHz, for rejection of harmonic mixing, image, and multiple
responses.
AMPLITUDE RELATED
Display Modes
Log 10 dBldiv - Provides 80 dB display dynamic range.
Accuracy within ± 1 dB/l0 dB to 2 dB maximum over 80 dB
display dynamic range.
Log 2 dB/ div - Provides 16 dB display dynamic range.
Accuracy within ± 0.4 dB/2 dB to 1.0 dB maximum over any
16 dB range.
LIN - Within 10%, of full screen, over 8 div.
Reference Level- + 40 dBm to - 110 dBm in 10 dB calibrated steps ( + 30 dBm is the maximum safe input level).
RF Attenuator - 60 dB range calibrated in 10 dB steps.
Accuracy within ± 0.3 dB or 1% of dB reading (whichever is
greater) to 4 GHz ; ± 0.5 dB or 2% of dB reading (whichever is
greater) from 4 GHz to 18 GHz.
IF Gain Range - 90 dB.
Step Accuracy - ± 1 dB per 10 dB step to ± 2 dB maximum
over entire range.
Sensitivity and Frequency Response with Internal MlxersAveraged noise level specified for 300 Hz resolution bandwidth.
Frequency response with 10 dB input attenuator selling
Frequency
Range
(GHz)
Mixing
Mode
Averaged
Noise Level
(dBm Max)
Worst Case·
Frequency
Response
Optimum
Peaking (dB Max)
1.5 to 3.5
1-
119
± 1.8
2.5 to 4.5
1+
2
119
± 1.8
+ 2.5
3+
5
- 107
3.5 to 7.5
6.5 to 12.5
9.5 to 18.0
109
92
± 4.0
± 4.0
INPUT SIGNAL CONNECTORS
RF Input - Maximum Input Power Level to the RF Attenuator:
1 W average and 200 W peak. Burnout, 1 W or more at the
input. Input Impedance: 50 II nominal (1.5 GHz to 18 GHz);
VSWR 1.35 maximum wtih 10 dB of RF attenuation. Input
Compression Point : .. - 28 dBm from 1.5 to 1.8 GHz .
.. - 18 dBm from 1 .8 to 18 GHz (both with zero RF
attenuation).
External HOrizontal/Trigger Input Connector - Requires 0 V
to 10 V ± 1 V for 10 div sweep. Requires 0.5 V (p-p) to trigger
the sweep circuits. 50 V peak maximum.
OUTPUT SIGNAL CONNECTORS
Cal Out - - 30 dBm, ± 0.5 dB at 25°C at 2.0 GHz ± 0.01 %.
Sweep Out and Video Out
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Spectrum Analyzer Graticule (337-1439-01); Spectrum Analyzer Graticule (337-1159-02); Adaptor, BNC female to N male
(103-0045-00); 50 II Coaxial Cable, lOin (012-0208-00); Plugin to Mainframe Securing Kit (016-0637-00).
ORDERING INFORMATION
7L 18 Spectrum Analyzer .................. $19,200
7603 Mainframe (shown)" ................... $2,700
R7603 Mainframe (Rackmount) .......... $3,100
Option 06 - Internal SA Graticule ............................... +$50
Option 08 - Protective Front Cover
(Cabinet Only) ............................................................... +$100
Option 77 - P7 Phosphor and Intemal
SA Graticule ................................................................... +$35
· Suggested Mainframe: 7603 Option 08/0ption 06 for maximum transportability. Has protective front cover (Option 08)
and Spectrum Analyzer Graticule (Option 06). See 7000 Series
pages for oscilloscope specifications and options.
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
General Purpose Waveguide Mixers Set
Order 016-0640-00 ........... ,.............................................. $710
12.4 to 18 GHz Mixer Order 119-0097-01 .••..••.......•..••... $160
18 to 26.5 GHz Mixer Order 119-0098-01 ...................... $220
26.5 to 40 GHz Mixer Order 119-0099-01 .•.••••.••....•..••... $275
Cable Order 012-0748-00 ................................................. $20
Case Order 016-0465-01 .................................................. $45
High Performance Wavegude Mixers
18 to 40 GHz Set WM490-2 ........................................ $2,010
18 to 60 GHz Set WM490-3 ........................................ $3,260
18 to 26.5 GHz Mixer WM490K ..................................... $975
26.5 to 40 GHz Mixer WM490A ..................................... $975
40 to 60 GHz Mixer WM490U ..................................... $1,250
Cable Order 012-0649-00 ................................................. $25
Case Order 016-0465-01 •...........•..•...••.•...............•••••....... $45
'Includes mixer frequency response, RF altenuator frequency
response, internal preselector frequency response, mixing
mode gain variation, RF input VSWR.
207
20 Hz to 5 MHz
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
TEK PLUG-IN
7L5
Digital Storage and Averaging
Synthesizer Tuning
Three-knob Operation
Swept Frequency Measurements with
Option 25
Preset Reference Level and Dot Frequency
for Extra Input Protection
Selectable Input Impedance
Reference Level Selection in 1 dB and 10 dB
Steps
Absolute Calibration in dBm, dBV, or
Volts/div
The Tektronix 7L5 provides lab grade, easy-touse low-frequency measurement capability. The
7L5 can cover 20 Hz to 5 MHz in one display.
Resolution bandwidth can be varied from 10 Hz
to 30 kHz, with residual FM of no more than 1 Hz
peak-to-peak. Comparing baseband channel performance is easy because the 7L5 switches from
a single channel to a 50-channel supergroup
without retuning . You see all channel amplitudes
at a glance, side-by-side.
Digital storage proves particularly useful in the
7L5. With digital averaging and peak detection,
you can accurately measure low level signals,
such as intermodulation distortion products, in
the presence of noise. With MAX HOLD, you can
capture short duration signals and random transient phenomena that would otherwise be lost.
The 7L5 combines high performance with easyto-use three-knob operation 1) Set frequency span
2) Set center frequency
3) Set reference level ... and measure!
Sweep speed and resolution bandwidth are set
automatically.
Digital tuning and synthesizer stability let you set
center frequency with six-digit accuracy immediately upon tum-on. Reference level can be set in
1 dB and 10 dB steps, eliminating the need to
interpolate amplitude levels. And for measuring
wide relative amplitude differences, the 7L5 offers 80 dB spurious-free display dynamic range.
7L5 Option 25 Spectrum Analyzer with L3 Plug-in Module in a 7603 Option 06 Mainframe with internal spectrum analyzer graticule
The 7L5 makes accurate baseband communications measurements such as noise, spurious response, distortion, and transient interference, all
with the certainty of 10 Hz resolution . By adding
an Option 25 Tracking Generator, you can measure filter shape.
This highly capable audio/baseband analyzer
finds a place in many areas of use, including
measurement of communications system
basebands, power line distortion, EMI/RR, and
computer systems.
208
----
Probe-compatible plug-in input modules provide a
variety of impedances for the 7L5. The L3 may be
switch-selected to 50 n, 600 n or 1 Mn. The L3
Option 1 is switch-selectable to 75 n, 600 n or
1 Mn.
7000
TEK SERIES
20 Hz to 5 MHz
PLUG-IN SPECTRUM ANALYZER
Spurious Re.pon...
CHARACTERISTICS
The following characteristics and features apply to the 7L5
Spectrum Analyzer after a warmup period of 10 minutes.
FREQUENCY RELATED
Center Frequency
Range - Input frequency range is 20 Hz through 5.0 MHz.
Dot frequency range is 0 Hz through 4999.75 kHz tuned in
10kHz or 250 Hz steps.
Accuracy - O' C to 50 ' C ± (20 Hz + 10-' of dot frequency) ;
20 ' C to 30 ' C ± (5 Hz + 2 x 10- 0 of dot frequency).
Frequency Span 1-2-5 sequence.
Accuracy Linearity -
50 Hz/div to maximum (500 kHz/div) in a
Residual the input).
... - 143 dBV (non calibrator related , referenced to
Intermodulation Products - Within any frequency span for
two on screen signals of any input level, third order down
75 dB or more and second order down 72 dB or more; of any
input level up to - 53 dBV or of any input level with Input buffer
on , second and third order down 80 dB or more.
GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
Sweep -
Triggered, manual , auto.
Sweep Time Accuracy -
Within 5%.
Within 5% over the center 8 divisions.
Zero Span - Provides fixed frequency operation for time 20 MHz - Within ± 0.2 dB from 100 kHz to 10 MHz of
picture carrier, increasing to ± 0.3 dB at 15 MHz; within
± 0.5 dB from 50 kHz to 20 MHz.
Response of Transmitter Under Test Within
±0.2 dB
For Transmitter Frequency of 0 to 20 MHz from 100kHz to 15 MHz.
Frequency Response of Rf and If Circuits for
Transmitters with Frequency to 1 GHz
Video Frequency Range -
Video Circuits Can Be Swept
For In-service Testing, Use of External
Blanking Allows Either Full-field or
Single-line Operation
Check Aural Fm Deviation with Built-in
Bessel Null Technique
Flexible Marker System Will Accept
Standard Crystals
System Span -
Within ± 0.5 dB
;;. 200 kHz per division.
The 1405/Spectrum Analyzer combination will display frequency-response characteristics of RF
and IF circuits for transmitters with frequencies to
1 GHz. Video circuits can also be analyzed .
CHARACTERISTICS
The following characteristics apply to the 1405 and 1405!7L12
or 7L 14 combination. They are applicable over the environmental specification limits for the 1405 and 7000 Series
Mainframes.
± 2 IRE.
Three Preset Levels - Preset A: 0 to 50 IRE. Preset B:
25 IRE to 75 IRE. Preset C: 50 IRE to 100 IRE.
Horizontal Sync, Blanking, and Pedestal Duration - Within
NTSC (PAL - Option 01) limits (no vertical interval is provided). Transition time is 0.24 I's ± 10%, from 10% to 90% points.
Composite Sync Source Blanking turns cw off.
Line Strobe -
0 V turns
cw on
> - 5V
TIL pulse from 0 to 5 V turns cw on.
AURAL OUTPUT
Cw Output - Amplitude variable up to .. + 12 dBm into 600 II.
Harmonics down 45 dB or more.
Crystal Requirements - Series resonant: Rl
Q > 5000; Case, HC/6U or HC/25U .
< 2000 II;
MARKER CRYSTAL INSTALLATION
Because of the various international standards the 1405
Option 01 is shipped with the marker crystals installed. Frequencies installed are 0.75 , 1.25 , 2 .25 , 4.43 , 5.00 , and
5.75 MHz. Additional crystals are shipped with the unit.
Note: Option 01 instruments are connected for a nominal power line voltage of 240 V. They are furnished with the standard North American plug unless Options At, A2, A3,
A4, or AS is specified.
ORDERING INFORMATION
1405 TV Sideband Adaptor
525/60 Markers ................................... $5,460
Option 01 -
TV Sideband Adaptor (625/50 Markers) . +$200
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORD AND PLUG OPTIONS
FREQUENCY (FREQUENCY OFFSET)
Option A1 -
Range - Will tune and provide a swept video output for a
7L 12 or 7L 14 center frequency range of 0 to 1 GHz.
Option A2 -
UK 240 V/13A, 50 Hz ................................. NC
Option A3 -
Australian 240 V/10A, 50 Hz ...................... NC
Frequency Dial Accuracy - Dial reading is within 10 MHz of
transmitter frequency when properly tuned.
Option A4 -
North American 240 V/15A, 60 Hz ............. NC
Option A5 -
Switzerland 250 V/ l0A, 50 Hz ................... NC
Fine Tuning Range - From ± 0.5 MHz to :t 1.25 MHz, de..
pending upon transmitter frequency setting.
Tuned Frequency Drift warm up.
< 1 MHz per hour after a 30 minute
75 ohm Input Impedance and Calibration
in dBmV
0 to 100 IRE in 10 IRE steps.
Accuracy -
Output Frequency 10.396 kHz, ± 0.01 % (crystal controlled). Option 01 , 9.058 kHz.
To analyze the sideband response of a television
transmitter, the 1405 Sideband Adaptor is recommended for use in tandem with the Tektronix
7L 12, 7L 14, 496 and 492 Spectrum Analyzers. It
generates a composite video signal, which is applied as modulation to a television transmitter.
The output is displayed on the spectrum analyzer
and appears as a response curve, to within
±0.2 dB, of the transmitter being tested .
CATV Preamplifier
Extra Sensitivity for CATV and Field
Intensity Measurements
15-0-15 MHz.
AVERAGE PICTURE LEVEL (APL)
Variable -
7K 11
Universal Euro 220 V/16A, 50 Hz .............. NC
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Rackmount-conversion kit for mounting 1405 or 1405
Option 01 in standard 19 in rack.
Order 016-0489·00 .......................................................... $330
This 7000 Series plug-in preamplifier for use with
the 7L 12 or 7L 14, is tailored to CATV and field
intensity measurement applications, where extra
sensitivity is required for demanding measurements. The 7K11 handles 12 channels without
overload.
The 7K 11 provides a 75 ohm input impedance
and calibration in dBmV. Its low noise figure
makes it especially suitable for signal-to-noise
and low·level radiation measurements.
CHARACTERISTICS
(with 7L12 or 7L14)
Frequency Range -
30 MHz to 890 MHz.
Display Flatness - ± 1.0 dB, with respect to the level at
50 MHz over the frequency range of 50 MHz to 300 MHz; increasing to + 2.0 dB , -2.5 dB over the full frequency range.
Sansltivity - Signal + noise - 2X noise, in LIN
50 MHz. - 90 dBmV at 30 Hz, - 80 dBmV at
- 73 dBmV at 3 kHz, - 65 dBmV at 30 kHz, - 55
300 kHz, - 45 dBmV at 3 MHz. Noise figure is no >
mode at
300 Hz,
dBmV at
5 dB.
Intermodulatlon Dlltortlon (with 7L 12 or 7L 14) - Imd products and harmonics from two signals within the frequency
range are 70 dB or more down from the reference level for third
order intermodulation with two signals at the reference level
(full screen).
Reference Level - Calibrated level in 1 dB steps from
+ 79 dBmV to 0 dBmV . Accuracy is referenced to the
+ 30 dBmV calibrator at 50 MHz.
Input Impedance -
75 II.
Calibrator - 50 MHz ± 0.01 % with an absolute amplitude levelof +30 dBmV ±0.3 dB, from 75 II.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
BNC to BNC 50 II Cabie, 5.5 in (012-0057-01); BNC to F Adaptor (013-0126-00) ; BNC to BNC 75 II Cable, 42 inch
(012-0074-00).
Order 7K11 CATV Preamplifier ......... $1,050
Limited quantities of the 2701 and 2703 Step Attenuators
are still available. CaU your nearest Spectrum Analyzer
Sales Engineer for information.
213
ANALYZER
ACCESSORIES
TEK SPECTRUM
PADS AND ADAPTORS
75 0 to 50 0 Minimum Loss Allenuator with dc block ,
5.7 dB loss. Order 011-0112-00 ........ ,.............................. $60
75 0 to 50 0 Matching Allenuator with 11 .25 dB conversion
factor from dBm to dBmV with dc block.
Order 011 -0118-00 ..................... _...................................... $60
Fixed 10 dB Allenuator with 3 mm fittings for use with
TR 502 with 7L12 . Order 307-0553-00 ............................ $30
-•
Dc Block BNC to BNC maximum dc potential 50 volls.
Order 015-0221-00 ............................................................ $85
"F" Female to BNC Male Adaptor Order 013-0126-00 .. $15
BNC Female to "F" Male Order 103-0158-00 .............. $8.50
PROBES
Calibrator Jumper 50 0 BNC to BNC 5.5 in.
Order 012-0214-00 ............................................................ $35
A variety of probes is available in varying frequency and impedance ranges that can be used with the 7L5, 7L12, 7L14 , 492
and 496 Spectrum Analyzers:
Jumper Cable BNC to BNC 50 0 42 in.
Order 012-0057-01 ............................................................ $17
FET Probe P6201 to 900 MHz. Order 010-6201-01 ... $1,090
Jumper Cable BNC to BNC 75 0, 42 in.
Order 012-0074-00 ............................................................ $17
"N" Female to BNC Male Order 103-0058-00 ............. $7.00
Conventional Probe P6056 Dc to 3.5 GHz 6 ft .
Order 01 0-6056-03 .......................................................... $154
PROTECTIVE VINYL COVERS
Conventional Probe P6057 Dc to 1.4 GHz
with adaptor. Order 010-6057-03 ................................... $159
For extra protection in field environments, soft vinyl covers are
available to fit over the entire cabinet model mainframe.
7000 Series 3 Hole Mainframe Cover
Order 016-0192-01 ............................................................ $20
7000 Series 4 Hole Mainframe Cover
Order 016-0531-00 ............................................................ $20
5000 Series Mainframe Cover Order 016-0544-00 ........ $25
RIGID FRONT COVERS
Solid snap on or friction fit covers are available to protect the
instruments in transit or field use.
See appropriate spectrum analyzer and mainframe ordering information regarding the Option 08 Protective Front Cover for
7603 and 7613, or the Option 02 Protective Front Cover for
5100 Series Mainframes.
FET Probe P6202A to 500 MHz. Order 010-6202-03 ... $583
Current Probe P6022 to 150 MHz. Order 015-0135-00. $360
Complete specifications are available in the probes and accessortes section.
CAMERAS
A camera can greatly enhance the versatility of a spectrum
analyzer. Many different units are available. However, the most
popular units for the 5000, 7000 and 490 Series Spectrum Analyzers are:
Polaroid Film Pack C-59AP ........................................ $1,260
C-5C Camera .................................................................. $525
Complete specifications on all cameras are available in the
Camera section.
Protective Front Cover for existing 7603 or 7613
Mainframes:
Blue, Order 040-0835-00 ................................................ $175
In addition, our staff of specialists stands ready to
help you solve any special measurement problems. Contact your local Tektronix Sales Office or
representative .
Gray, Order 040-0628-00 _.............................................. $150
GRATICULES, FILTERS
Plastic Implosion Shield and S A Graticule 7613 and
7623 Mainframes. Order 378-0625-07 .......................... $9.50
Plastic Implosion Shieid and S A Graticule 7403 and
7603 Mainframes. Order 337-1439-01 ..........................
sa.OO
Plastic Implosion Shield and S A Graticule for all other 7000
Series Mainframes. Order 337-1159-02 ........................ $8.00
(Internal gratlcules are available with most 7000 Series
mainframes)
EMC Metal Screen Mesh Filter for 7500, 7700, 7800, 7900
Series and 7613, 7623, 7633 instruments.
Order 378-0603-00 ............................................................ $55
EMC Metal Screen Mesh Filter for 7400 Series and 7603 instruments. Order 378-0696-00 ......................................... $55
Audio 20-20 kHz Log Graticule for 5000 Series instruments.
Order 331-0429-00 ......................................................... $2.50
Complete selection of colored filters is available in the accessories section .
Numerous application notes and magazine article
reprints on spectrum analyzer measurements are
available. Notes on baseband, EMC, AM, FM,
two-way radio and television measurements, audio amplifier testing, noise and pulse testing, and
others have been written to help you with your
measurements.
CARRYING CASES AND MOUNTS
Specialized carrying cases are available in 2 forms to protect
your spectrum analyzer.
Metal carrying cases are available for the 7L5, 7L 12, 7L 14 or
7L18 Plug-in units.
Military style fiberglass and foam type transit cases can be
custom fitted to many of the instruments.
A special mounting bracket assembly can be fitted to bolt the
analyzer securely into the mainframe if desired .
Securing Kit fits 7L 12 or 7L 14. Order 016-0637-00 ........ $44
3-wide Carrying Case for 7L14, 7L5 Option 25, 7L18. Order
016-0626-00 .................................................................... $220
2-wide Carrying Case for 7L 12, 7L5.
Order 016-0625-00 .......................................................... $220
Luggage-type Carrying Case for 7603 Option 08, 7613
Option 08. Order 016-0628-00 ........................................ $450
(Analyzer must have 016-0637-00 Securing Kit) .............. $44
Hard Case (transit) for the 490 Series.
Order 016-0658-00 .......................................................... $625
SoH Case for the 490 Series.
Order 016-0659-00 .......................................................... $125
Your local Sales Office or representative can quote prices and
availability on any of these accessories.
Option 08 protective front cover is shown with 7613
Mainframe.
214
INSTRUMENTS
TEK DIVISION
INSTRUMENT DIVISION PRODUCTS INDEX
Page
Signal Processing Systems .,.,."""" .. ,, ... 225
Minicomputer·Based Systems ..........••......•.• 228
Desktop Computer-Based Systems .••.......••• 229
Laboratory Oscilloscopes .......................
7000 Series Instruments ..•...•............••......•.•
7000 Series Non-Storage Mainframes .......•.•
7000 Series CRT Storage Mainframes ...••..••.
7000 Series High Performance Digitizers ..•.•
7000 Series Plug-ins ., ..•.••...•...... ..................
5000 Series Instruments ..............................
230
231
237
250
258
267
291
Portable Oscilloscopes .... " ..................... 309
Portable Non-Storage Scopes .........•..........• 312
Portable Storage Scopes ........•.•..•....•..•. "". 330
General Purpose Instruments .................
Mainframes ..••...••.......•••.•.........•••....••..... " ...
Digital Multimeters ....•..•.••......•..••.••.•••..• " ....
Counters/Timers ...... ..•.••.. ............................
Power Supplies ••. ...•.. ...•.. ............................
Digital Delay . ..•...•..•.. •.. ............................ .•.
Digital Latch •.••.••..••.•..•.....•..•••.•.•.••.•..•....••.•
Pulse Generators •..••......•...•...•........•....•. "".
Function Generators .•.••..•..••...•.•..••.......•.•••••
Current Probes ......•..•....••..•.. " ..•..•.•••...•. "".
Amplifiers ..•.•..•..••.••...•.. ,. ...••..•..•..••••....•..•.••
Calibration Generators •..•..•....••.......•.......•.•.
Distortion Analyzer, Oscillator ...••.••..•.......•••.
Plug-in Oscilloscopes ..................................
Interface and Scanner ..•..•..••..••..•.•...••..•. "".
Controllers .•.•••.•••...•.•.•••.•••.•..••...•...••.••......••
Accessories .. ..••..••.......•.••..••..••.•..••..•...••"".
338
342
349
356
363
365
365
366
370
375
376
378
382
384
388
391
394
Curve Tracers ............ ........................ ....... 396
Digital Photometer/Radiometer .............. 406
Accessories .............................................
Cameras •..•..•..•......•.•..•..•.........••..•............•.
Isolation Measurement Accessories .........•.•.
Carts ..••.......•.•...•..••.•..•..•...•......•.•...••..•...•.••
Probes .•.•..••......•.......•........••..•..•..•.•••..•...••.•
Probe Accessories ..•.•.••.••...•..••.••.•...•....•.•...
Adapting/Connecting Accessories .••........••..
Viewing Accessories •..•..•......••.••..•.••...•....•..
410
415
422
424
431
442
444
447
REFERENCE INFORMATION
Modular and Integrated Oscilloscopes. 216
Understanding Oscilloscopes
Specifications ......................................... 217
ChOOSing a Phosphor For Your Scope .. 219
Sampling Oscilloscopes ......................... 220
Storage Oscilloscopes ........................... 221
Digital Storage Oscilloscopes ................ 223
Waveform Digitzers ....... ......................... 224
Signal Processing System Automation . 225
Programmable General Purpose
Instruments ............................................. 338
ChOOSing a Scope Camera .................... 415
Making Floating Scope Measurements. 422
216
The Tektronix Instruments Division designs, manufactures, markets, supports, and services test
and measurement products worldwide. The Instruments Division 's products are test and measurement instruments and systems for scientists,
engineers, and technicians in basic research ,
product design , manufacturing test , training,
maintenance, and service applications in a broad
range of industries and public institutions.
Instruments Division products include:
- Fully-automated desktop-, computer- and
minicomputer-based signal processing systems.
- The state-of-the-art laboratory 7000 Series
plug-in instruments.
- The 5000 Series instruments, that continue
the 7000 Series concept of flexibility and
expand ability with a line of plug-ins and mainframes for the cost·conscious user.
- A complete line of portable oscilloscopes that
range from hand-held , battery -operated
miniscopes to full-featured , high-performance instruments that have become the standards
against which all other portables are measured.
- Two modular and compact product lines of
general purpose instrumentation, including the
cost-effective TM 500s and the GPIB-compatible
and programmable TM 5OOOs.
- Curve tracers that acquire complete information about a multitude of semiconductor devices
and integrated circuits and present it in a quickly
comprehended curve.
- A portable digital photometer/radiometer with
eight interchangeable probes for measuring illuminance, irradiance, luminance, LED output, and
relative intensity.
- Accessories , from cameras to isolation measurement devices, that support all Instruments
Division products.
MODULATED AND INTEGRATED
INSTRUMENTS
There are two basic configurations for test and
measurement instruments: modular and integrated. Modular instruments, also called "plug-in" or
"laboratory" models, combine a mainframe and
one or more interchangeable plug -in
subassemblies . Integrated instruments (also
called "monolithic"), are one-piece units.
Although portable instruments are traditionally
designed as integrated units, not all integrated
instruments are portable, and some modular systems (such as scopes within the Tektronix General Purpose Instrument line) are designed for
easy transport.
Modular DeSign Advantages
Examples of modular design in Tektronix Instrument Division products include the 7000 Series,
the 5000 Series, the TM 500 General Purpose
Plug-ins and the TM 5000 programmable units.
Versatility is the prime advantage of a modular
instrument. Many more functions than could be
economically or practically combined in a single
unit are available by choosing the right plug-ins.
Plug-ins can also extend the original instrument's
range of functions . Digital multi meters, curve
tracers, spectrum analyzers, and logic analyzers
are just a few examples of the many specialized
plug-ins Tektronix offers for modular oscilloscope
mainframes.
Performance is another advantage. In the case
of the 7000 Series instrument, modularity gives
you the maximum performance available in an
oscilloscope. And modularity also allows you to
upgrade your instruments to take advantage of
advances in technology.
Often modular instruments can be very cost effective too, because within a given product line,
they can be shared . For example the TM 500 test
and calibration plug-ins used in the lab for design work can be inserted in a portable mainframe and easily carried to the site of a service
problem. Or as another example, a few high-performance laboratory plug-ins from the 7000 Series can be shared among several 7000 Series
mainframes.
Consider the versatility and performance advantages as you read about the wide range of
Tektronix modular instruments: page 230 for the
7000 Series instruments, page 291 for 5000 Series instruments, and page 338 for General Purpose Instruments.
Integrated Design Advantages
Integrated instruments are often optimized for a
single range of functions. One-piece instrument
design can provide reductions in weight, increased ease of use, smaller size, lower power
requirements , and often , higher perform ance/price ratios for your key requirements.
Portability can be essential for some test and
measurement applications, and in these cases,
an integrated design is often the best choice.
Because a wide variety of options and optional
accessories extend their ranges of applications,
versatility can also be a feature of Tektronix integrated instruments.
Tektronix integrated scopes, either portable or
rackmounted , are instruments where the design
emphasis is often on the factors of economy,
ruggedness , environmental protection, and internal or external battery power. See page 309.
TEK
KEY OSCILLOSCOPE
SPECIFICATIONS AND FEATURES
You should choose an oscilloscope by matching
both performance and features to measurement
applications . Don 't choose by performance
alone, because when features make measurements easier, the result is likely to be more accurate measurements. And if your applications involve repetitive measurements, features that
make the measurement faster will be costeffective.
The key oscilloscope specifications and features
described below may help you make a decision.
~
VERTICAL
SECTION
r--+
~
TRIGGER
SECTION
DISPLAY
SECTION
Vertical System Considerations
Because a faithful reproduction of the signal is
necessary for measurement accuracy, and because very small signals must often be measured, the key specifications of the vertical system include bandwidth and sensitivity.
Depending on your applications, you might also
want to consider oscilloscopes that display more
than one signal at a time and those with differential or balanced inputs; these features are also
described below.
Although bandwidth is the most important spec
when making amplitude measurements, risetime
is the specification to use if you are making timing measurements.
The frequency response of most scopes is designed so that there is a constant that allows you
to relate the bandwidth and risetime of the instrument with this approximation:
Tr = 0.35
BW
Bandwidth and Risetime
Bandwidth is the range of frequencies that a
scope can handle with less than a 3 dB loss in
amplitude compared to midband performance.
Since modern oscilloscopes work well at low frequencies down to dc , the bandwidth specification is commonly the highest frequency that can
be displayed; dc as the lowest, is implied . The
figure below illustrates bandwidth specifications.
While a bandwidth specification is essential for
the vertical system(s) of a scope, bandwidth is
also sometimes specified for the horizontal system (which gives you a chance to evaluate performance in X-Y measurement applications) and
for trigger systems (which permits you to determine the range qf possible triggering signals).
i
~
HORIZONTAL
SECTION
OdB: 6 div at 50 kHz
- 3 dB: 4.2 div at 100 MHz
217
IN::ilIiUME.N I :s
Il::K DIVISION
Given either specification (bandwidth or
risetime) , you can derive the other and determine if the instrument is suitable for your applications. The rule of thumb for timing measurements
is to use an instrument with a risetime at least
five times faster than the measurement you expect to make . A 5:1 ratio gives you a risetime
measurement with ..;;;2% error. Other ratios and
measurement errors are shown in the chart
below.
1:1
1.5:1 2:1
~
,
Note that very accurate absolute-risetime measurements are not always a requirement. When
you are comparing risetimes, for instance , an instrument risetime equal to those being measured
is often adequate.
5:1
3:1
Note that at a given state-of-the-art, sensitivity
and bandwidth are trade-offs. The small amount
of noise in even the best input circuit will mask
very small signals. Raising the bandwidth also increases the noise picked up by the amplifiers,
requiring a larger signal to create a clear display.
As a consequence of this relationship , many
high-sensitivity scopes provide bandwidth-limiting
controls to allow you to make cleaner low-level
measurements at moderate frequencies .
7:1
30%
~
,
20%
1\
,,
~
10%
9%
8%
~
\
7%
6%
~L
1\
\
\
\
\
Ratio of Rise Times
218
2%
~
~
Sensitivity
An oscilloscope sensitivity specification describes the input signal level needed to produce
a stated deflection of the electron beam within
the CRT. Specifications typically are given in
mV/cm or mV/div; with this spec you can determine if small signals will be displayed with
enough amplitude for you to make measurements quickly and accurately.
Although sensitivity specifications are most often
associated with oscilloscope vertical channels,
this specification can also be provided for horizontal systems and for trigger circuits.
Multiple Inputs
It is often quite useful to be able to view more
than one input signal without disturbing the connections to your scope. Common applications include: comparisons of a device's input and output signals; checking signals against standards;
making timing and/or phase measurements between events. These measurement requirements
are usually satisified by dual-trace oscilloscopes
that use electronic switching to alternately connect two input signals to a single deflection system. Dual-trace scopes offer the lowest cost and
the best comparison capabilities (because there
is a single horizontal amplifier and one set of deflection plates). On the other hand, since a fast
transient event might occur on one channel while
the beam is tracing the other, dual-beam scopes
like the Tektronix 7844 (page 242) and 5113
(page 301) are recommended for viewing oneshot phenomena. The 5113 has two independent
vertical systems and a common horizontal system and can display up to eight waveforms in its
chop vertical operating mode. The dual-beam
7844 can be equipped with dual-time base plugins and then used to see a single event at different locations in the signal path, at two sweep
rates if necessary.
Vertical System Operating Modes
Multiple inputs, the Add vertical operating mode,
and the ability to invert one channel lets you cancel or reject any signal components equal in amplitude and phase that appears at both inputs.
This ability provides a simple and accurate way
to measure the difference between two signals,
and of rejecting most unwanted signal components common to both inputs (such as power
supply hum).
Other vertical operating modes are Alternate (in
which a complete waveform from a vertical
channel is drawn before switching to draw the
other), Chopped (in which the scope draws small
parts of the waveforms while switching back and
forth between the channels at a fixed rate) , and
Trigger View.
TEK
The Trigger View mode is useful anytime you
measure events dependent on an external triggering event. This capability is particularly useful
in scopes such as the 465B, where a zero· delay
trigger view circuit is provided.
Horizontal System Considerations
The horizontal system of a modern oscilloscope
provides a built-in sawtooth sweep generator.
With this constant -speed horizontal deflection,
measurements calibrated directly in units of time
are possible. (As a consequence, the horizontal
system of a scope is often called the time base.)
This permits direct measurement of time between events, accurate time measurements on
small portions of pulse trains, and even time
measurements on single, nonrecurrent events.
Sweep Speeds
How fast a sweep speed do you need? One rule
states that for frequency measurements at moderate frequencies , a sweep capable of displaying one cycle across the full horizontal scale is
usually considered adequate. For example, one
cycle of a 1 MHz signal can be displayed across
10 div with a 10 ns/div sweep. Don't apply this
rule at very high frequencies, however , as
scopes seldom have sweeps that fast.
Another approach emphasizes risetime measurements. For maximum accuracy here, the scope
should show the step signal (squarewave, pulse,
etc.) across most of the full vertical scale with
the rising portion of the signal at nearly a 45°
slope. For very fast risetimes, this objective is
rarely met because of compounding difficulties
and the cost of providing extremely fast sweeps
which are both linear and accurate.
Though neither rule can be applied at the very
limits, fast sweep speeds are readily available:
sweeps to 10 ns (1 ns/div, magnified) in the portable 475, 475A and 485; to 200 ps/div with plugin time bases for laboratory scopes; or to
10 ps/div with sampling plug-ins. (See Sampling
Applications below.)
Delayed Sweep Measurements
Delayed sweep scopes can offer you many measurement advantages. If the scope has two calibrated time bases and the alternate horizontal
operating mode (electronic switching of the
trace between time bases), then convenient
comparisons of the same signal at two different
sweep speeds are possible.
If the second time base has an independent trigger, then jitter-free measurements on the delayed sweep are possible.
In every case, timing measurements with delayed sweep are easier to make, and in most
cases, there is increased timing measurement
accuracy. Many plug-in time bases for laboratory
scopes and most portable scopes offer delayed
sweep.
Accuracy
Accuracy in a scope's horizontal system is as important to timing measurements as vertical accuracy is to amplitude measurements. Horizontal
accuracy to 1.5% is possible with several 7000
Series plug-in time bases and to 1% with the 475
and 475A Portable oscilloscopes.
Trigger System Considerations
Besides sensitivity and bandwidth, the flexibility
of a trigger system should be a consideration
when choosing a scope. Some trigger system
features you might need for your measurement
applications include:
High and low frequency reject coupling - for
stable triggering with noisy signals.
TV triggering - for automatic synchronization
with video signals.
Alternate triggering - for steady display of either signal with dual-channel scopes.
Peak-to-peak auto triggering - for quick, convenient triggering with automatic level limits.
Variable trigger holdoff - permits trigger holdoff
period to be varied to trigger on repetitive complex waveforms.
Single sweep operation - for special applications such as capturing a transient pulse and for
CRT photography.
CRT System Considerations
CRT system speCifications will tell you how well
the scope can display waveforms for direct viewing and for photography. A full complement of
CRT system controls contributes greatly to the
instrument's ease of use.
CRT Controls
CRT system controls to consider include:
Beam Finder - A single pushbutton that allows you to quickly locate any off-screen trace.
Auto Focus - Auto focusing on both laboratory and portable scopes reduces the need for
manual readjustments with changes in trace intensity; very useful when traces are displayed at
different sweep rates as in alternate time base
operations.
Auto Intensity - Reduces trace intensity adjustments over a wide sweep-speed range .
External Z-Axis Input - Permits trace brightness modulation, makes some measurements
easier by identifying events with an intensified
zone on the trace.
Writing Speed and Photographic Writing
Rate
The writing speed of a scope is the maximum
speed at which the CRT's electron beam can
move and still produce a visible or
photograph able trace. The writing speed is dependent on the CRT's phosphor and the electronics. The photographic writing rate is additionally dependent on the camera, the film, and the
technique you use. Your Tektronix sales engineer, representative, or distributor will be glad to
help you determine the writing speed or photographic writing rate necessary for your applications. For more camera information refer to page
412.
Selecting a Phosphor
The catalog description of each oscilloscope indicates the phosphors normally supplied or available as options. While a special phosphor may
be desirable for a specific measurement application, remember that each phosphor has its own
color, persistence, burn resistence, etc. Improvements in one characteristic are usually at the expense of others . The chart below provides
comparisons.
COMPARATIVE CRT PHOSPHOR DATA
Phosphor"
Phosphorescence
Where Different
from
Fluorescence
Relative
Luminance·'
Relative
PhotographiC
Writing
Speed"
Decay
Relative
Burn
Resistance
-
50%
20%
Medium
-
50%
40%
35%
75%
JEOC
WTOS
Pl
GJ
P4
ww
White
P7
GM
Blue
Pll
BE
Blue
-
15%
P31
GH
Green
-
P39
GR
Yellowish-green
-
P43
GY
Yellowish-green
Fluorescence
Yellowish-green
P44
GX
Yellowish-green
P45
WB
White
Yellowish-green
-
Ordering
Information
Comments
Option
Medium
Replaced by P31 in
most applications
Special
order
Med-Short
Med-High
Television displays
74
Long
Medium
Long decay, doublelayer screen
76
100%
Med-Short
Medium
For photographiC
applications
78
100%
50%
Med-Short
High
General purposes,
brightest available
phosphor
80
27%
NA"'
Long
Medium
40%
NA"'
Medium
Very High
High current
density phosphor
68%
NA"'
Medium
High
Bistable storage
32%
NA"'
Medium
Very High
PhotographiC applications
40
Special
order
Monochrome TV displays
"' Measured with Tektronix J16 Photometer and J6523 Luminance Probe which incorporates a CIE standard eye filter. Representative of 10 kV aluminized screens. P31 as reference.
Pll as reference with Polaroid 410 film. Representative of 10 kV aluminized screens.
Not available.
". Tektronix is adopting the Worldwide Phosphor Type Designation System (WTDS) as a replacement for the older JEDEC ·P" number system referenced in this catalog. The chart lists the comparable
new WTDS designations for the most common ·P" numbers.
"2
"3
219
DIVISION
TEK INSTRUMENTS
MODULAR NONSTORAGE OSCILLOSCOPES
DIGITAL ADDITIONS
You can make delay and time interval measurement with digital ease on several Tektronix oscilloscopes. The DM 44 factory-installed option for
five of the 400 Series scopes allows you to read
the delay time, time interval, or frequency right
from an LED readout, with no calculation or interpolation required. The DM 44 also incorporates a
digital volt/ohm meter and temperature-measurement capabilities.
The 7810, 7815, 7885 and 7880 plug-ins for the
7000 Series oscilloscopes also provide ~time
measurements. With these plug-ins the time interval measurement can be shown on the screen
using the 7000 Series CRT readout capability.
For 7000 Series instruments, there is a wide variety of other digital plug-ins. These include a universal counterltimer, a digital multimeter with a
temperature mode, digital delay by time or
events, a versatile 0.01% ND converter with vertical amplifier, and a special read-out unit to label
each test for future reference .
The digital plug-ins offer many advantages over
separate test units such as: increased accuracy,
scope-controlled digital measurements, measuring convenience and confidence , easier and
faster solutions to complex problems, a lower
dollar investment, more bench space, and signal
conditioning.
SAMPLING APPLICATIONS
Sampling is a powerful technique for examining
very fast repetitive signals. In principle, sampling
is similar to the use of stroboscopic light to study
fast mechanical motion . Progressive samples of
different portions of successive waveforms are
taken; then they are ' stretched" in time, amplified by relatively low-bandwidth amplifiers, and finally shown (all seemingly at one time) on the
screen of a CRT. The graph produced is a replica of the sampled waveforms.
This sampling technique is limited to depicting
repetitive signals, since no more than a portion
of the signal is captured and displayed each
time the signal occurs. The sampling method,
however, provides a means of examining fastchanging signals of low amplitude that cannot
be examined in any other way.
Sampling scopes are capable of resolving
events that occur in less than 30 ps on an
"equivalent" time base of less than 20 ps/div with
less than 5 mV of peak amplitude.
If your measurement needs require equivalent
bandwidths to 14 GHz or sweeps to 10 ps/div,
consider the sampling plug-ins described on
page 285.
220
Minimum
Maximum
Number
01 Traces
Sweep Rate
Delayed
Sweep
Page
Prlce*2
1 GHz
10 mV/div at BW
up to 4
200 ps/div
X
238
$20,160
7904
R7903
500 MHz
10 mV/div at BW
10 ~V/div
1 mNdiv
up to 4
500 ps/div
X
240
240
$8,510
$8,035
7844
400 MHz
20 mV/div at BW
10 ~V/div
1 mNdiv
up to 4
Dual-Beam
1 ns/div
X
242
$12,665
7704A
Opt 09
250 MHz
20 mV/div at BW
10 ~V /div
1 mNdiv
up to 4
2 ns/div
X
244
$4,760
7704A
200 MHz
10 mV/div at BW
10 ~V/div
1 mNdiv
up to 4
2 ns/div
X
244
$4,260
7603
100 MHz
5 mV/div at BW
10 ~V/div
1 mNdiv
up to 4
5 ns/div
X
246
$2,700
5440
50 MHz
5 mV/div at BW
10 ~V/div
0.5 mNdiv
up to 8
5 ns/div
X
296
$2,615
5110
2 MHz
1 mV/div at BW
10 ~V/div
0.5 mNdiv
up to 8
100 ns/div
X
301
$1,425
5 mV/div at BW
up to 2
5 ns/diy
X
248
$7,580
Product
Bandwidth"
7104
Dellectlon Factor
7603Nl1S Ruggedized
oscillosoopes
system [meets
or exceeds
MIL-0-24311 (EG)
(AN/USM 281
Specs)]
-, Bandwidths are rea/ time. Sampling plug-ins that extend bandwidths to 14 GHz are available for most mainframes.
-2 Price
does not include plug-ins.
PORTABLE NONSTORAGE OSCILLOSCOPES
Bandwidth
Minimum
Dellectlon Factor
Dual-Trace
Delayed
Sweep
485
350 MHz
5 mV/div at BW
X
Page
1 ns/div
X
312
$7690
475A
250 MHz
5 mV/div at BW
475
200 MHz
2 mV/div at BW
X
1 ns/div
X
314
$4,630
X
1 ns/div
X
314
465B
100 MHz
$4,300
5 mV/div at BW
X
2 ns/div
X
316
465M
$3,140
100 MHz
5 mV/div at BW
X
5 ns/div
X
318
$3860
2337
100 MHz
5 mV/div at BW
X
5 ns/div
X
320
$3145
2336
100 MHz
5 mV/div at BW
X
5 ns/div
X
320
$2550
2335
100 MHz
5 mV/div at BW
X
5 ns/div
X
320
$2,845
2215
60 MHz
2 mV/div at BW
X
5 ns/div
X
322
$1450
2213
60 MHz
2 mV/div at BW
X
5 ns/div
X
322
$1200
335
35 MHz
10 mV/div at BW
1 mV/div
X
20 ns/div
X
324
$3,015
305
5 MHz
5 mV/div at BW
X
100 ns/div
X
325
$2,315
221
5 MHz
5 mV/div at BW
X
100 ns/div
X
326
$1765
213
1 MHz
20 mV/diy at BW
5 mV/div
400 ns/div
X
327
$2,320
212
500 kHz
10 mV/div at BW
1 mV/diy
X
1 ~s/div
X
328
$1,710
SC 504-'
80 MHz
5 mV/div at BW
X
5 ns/div
384
$3000
SC 502"
15 MHz
5 mV/div at BW
1 mV/div
X
20 ns/div
386
$2,210
Product
se
se
-, The
502 and
504 are oscilloscopes that must be plugged into
pages 384 and 386 for more information.
Maximum
Sweep Rate
a
Price
TM 500/ 1M 5000 Mainframe for operation. Please tum to
TEK
STORAGE
When a conventional oscilloscope cannot capture an event and display it for your measurements because the signal is too slow, or too fast
and infrequent, or when you need to compare
events that happen at different times instead of
simultaneously, consider a storage scope. These
are obvious applications, but there are many other situations that also call for the unique advantages of storage including:
Ob se rvi ng signal c hang es during cir c uit
adjustments
Comparing new signals with a standard
Increasing the brightness of a dim, low-repetition-rate signal for normal viewing
Reducing fl icker or noise in a signal
Babysitting (unattended monitoring) for a transient event
Capturing fast signals that occur infrequently or
only once
Capturing a complete display of a slowly occurring signal
Enhancing other record-keeping techniques like
photography
With the right Tektronix storage instrument , the
capabilities you need are available, and the storage time can be anywhere from a few minutes
to a practically unlimited length of time depending on your choice of instruments.
Types of Storage Oscilloscopes
Two broad categories of storage instruments are
named for the storage medium. CRT storage
scopes store the captured waveform when the
electron beam writes on a target within the cathode-ray tube . Digital storage scopes quantize
the waveform and then store it in a digital memory. In addition there are waveform digitizers; a
very special class of storage instruments available in the Tektronix 7000 Series. Within each
category there are different technologies and
each has its own set of features and benefits.
Bistable CRT Storage
The phosphor in a bistable CRT storage scope
has two stable states: written and unwritten .
Once stored, this phosphor allows waveforms to
be displayed typically for several hours, or until it
is erased by the operator. Bistable storage is the
easiest CRT storage type to use. It is also the
least expensive CRT storage technology. It features bright, long-lasting displays, but in comparison with other storage technologies, bistable
storage displays have less contrast.
The advantages of bistable storage make it particularly useful for mechanical measurements,
signal comparisons, and data recording .
Split-screen viewing is another advantage of
most bistable storage scopes. The feature allows
a reference waveform to be stored on one half
the screen while the other half can be used to
store the effects of changes made on the circuit.
You can also use the split screen to have the
reference waveform in the stored mode and the
other half of the display in the nonstored mode
to monitor an external input.
Variable Persistence CRT Storage
If you don't need to store waveforms for hours at
a time , variable-persistence CRT storage has advantages. The variable-persistence storage CRT
has a storage mesh where the electron beam
writes the input signal; thereafter, flood guns in
the CRT illuminate the phosphor where the storage mesh permits.
CRT storage controls vary the charge on the
mesh, allowing you to control the contrast between the trace and the background and to fine
tune how long the trace is stored .
The first capability provides easy viewing with
high constrast between the dark background
and bright waveforms. And this type of storage
provides the best displays when viewing traces
with varying intensities (such as delaying and delayed sweeps, or traces with external Z-axis intensity modulation).
Varying the persistence permits you to set up
the scope so that the entire waveform can be
viewed, yet the stored trace will fade from view
just as a new waveform is being stored. Or you
can view several traces before the first one
fades from view. Then you can see signal response variations as you make changes in a
circuit.
CRT STORAGE PERFORMANCE
Step Rise Time
250 i.LS 125 i.LS
50!.LS
25!.LS
1 kHz 2 kHz
5 kHz
10kHz 20 kHz
500 ns
12.5!.LS
50 kHz 100 kHz 200 kHz
250 ns 125 ns
500 kHz 1 MHz
2 MHz
Sine Wave Frequency
50 ns
25 ns 12.5 ns
5 MHz 10 MHz 20 MHz
5.0 ns
2.5 ns
1.25 ns
50 MHz 100 MHz 200 MHz 400 MHz
-466 and 7633
limiled 10 100 MHz
vertical bandwidth
221
INSTRUMENTS
TEK DIVISION
Variable persistence can also be used to provide
display integration so that only the coincident
portions of a repetitive signal are displayed. Aberration or jitter not common to all traces will not
be stored or displayed. Low repetition rate , fast
risetime signals that are not discemible on conventional CRT's can be easily viewed with this
storage technology by allowing each repetition
to build up the trace brightness.
Applications for variable persistence storage include spectrum analysis, time-domain
reflectrometry, sampling, and any other measurements that require displays of low-repetition-rate
signals.
Fast Transfer CRT Storage
Fast transfer storage scopes use a CRT with a
special intermediate mesh target optimized for
speed. This target captures the waveform and
then transfers it to another mesh, one optimized
for longer-term storage. As the name implies, the
fast transfer storage mode provides increased
writing speed (see the next heading) for the 466
portable oscilloscope and the 7623A, 7633, and
7834 lab scopes.
The second target can also be designed to offer
bistable, variable persistence or both modes in
combination with the transfer mesh or by itself.
In the 7623A, 7633, and 7834, this combination of
capabilities provides unique multi-mode storage
instruments. Using front panel controls, you can
select the operating mode suited to your specific
measurement situation.
Stored Writing Speed
For CRT storage scopes, the storage capability
specification is the stored writing speed. This figure of merit is expressed in distance per unit of
time. Often div/lLs is more meaningful in terms of
your measurements. But because some scopes
have nonstandard sized graticules (i.e., other
than 1 cm square major divisions) cm/lLs is useful
for comparisons.
The specification is dependent on the speed
and amplitude of the input signal. If you know
the pulse risetime or sinewave frequency of the
input signal and the amplitude of the waveform
you want to display, you can use the chart on
page 221 to determine which writing speed you
need.
CRT STORAGE OSCILLOSCOPES
(In order of Stored Writing Speed)
Product
7834
Stored
Writing Speed
5500
d i v/~s
div/~ s
776
div/~s
12
View Time
305. 3
30 min·'
minimum
305. 3
Type of
Storage
Fast variable
perSistence
Bandwidth·'
Minimum
Deflection Factor
Number
of Traces
Delayed
Sweep
Plug-In
Page
400 MHz
20mV/div at BW
10mV/divat
325 MHz
Up to 4
X
X
252
$11,705
332
$6,700
Fast bistable
.
Variable
perSistence
d i v/~ s
0.2
466
3000
3
7633
d iv/~s
div/~s
2200
d i v/~s
30 min·'
minimum
155. 3
15 S·3
30 S·3
Price
"\
Bistable
Fast variable
perSistence
Variable
perSistence
100 MHz
5mV/div at BW
Up to 2
X
Fast variable
persistence
100 MHz
5mV/div at BW
Up to 4
X
X
254
$7,765
Up to 4
X
X
255
$5,950
332
$5,695
10~V/div
lmNdiv
d i v/~s
400
7623A
3
div /~s
2
d i v/~s
150 div/~ s
30 min
minimum
30 S·3
30 min
minimum
30 S·3
Fast bistable
Variable
perSistence
Bistable
Fast variable
perSistence
100 MHz
5mV/div at BW
lO~V/div
lmNdiv
div/~s
50
30 min
Fast bistable
minimum
0.5
0.03
464
7613
5441
div/~s
div/~s
110 div/~s
0.5 di v/~s
5
5
div/~s
div/~s
div/~s
305. 3
30 min
minimum
15 S·3
155.3
1 hr
1 hr
Variable
perSistence
Bistable
Fast variable
persistence
100 MHz
5mV/div at BW
Up to 2
X
Variable
perSistence
100 MHz
5mV/div at BW
Up to 4
X
X
257
$5,025
Up to 8
X
X
297
$4,425
Up to 2
334
$4,840
Up to 2
336
$2,320
10~V/div
Variable
perSistence
50 MHz
4 hrs
Bistable
split screen
25 MHz
lmNdiv
5mV/div at BW
lO~V/div
0.5mNdiv
10mV/div at BW
lmV/div
434
5
214
0.5
div/~s
1 hr
Bistable
500 kHz
314
0.4
div/~s
4 hrs
Bistable
10 MHz
10mV/div at BW
lmV/div
2mV/div at BW
Up to 2
335
$3,655
0.4
div/~s
4 hrs
Bistable
10 MHz
lmV/div at BW
Up to 2
385
$3,240
4 hrs
Bistable
10 MHz
2mV/div at BW
Up to 2
337
$2,170
2 MHz
lmV/div at BW
Up to 8
dual-beam
X
X
301
$3,350
2 MHz
0.5mNdiv
lmV/div at BW
Up to 8
X
X
300
$2,300
sc
503·'
div/~s
T912
0.25
5113
0.2 div/~s
5111A
0.02
div/~s
10 hrs
10 hrs
Bistable
split screen
Bistable
split screen
10~V/div
10~V/div
0.5mNdiv
., 8ancJwidths are real time. Sampling plug-ins that extencJ bancJwidths to 14 GHz are available for most mainframes.
·z The SC 503 is an oscilloscope that must be plugged into a TM 500/TM 5000 Mainframe for operation. Please tum to page 340 for more information .
•, View times are at full stored display intensity. They may be increased by using reduced intensity in the save display mode.
•• Save intensity at minimum
222
My phone number is _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _,Ext _ _ __
Send me information on:
05010 Waveform Digitizers for 5000 Series mainframes
o Computer Graphic Products
o GPIB Products
o Signal Processing Systems
0 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Product Applications
o Customer Training for _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Products
o Tektronix Service Programs for _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Products
o Please drop me from your mail list.
Name
5010 Waveform Digitizer
Title
Firm
COMMTTED TO EXCELl..ENCE
Address
State
City
(Please type
Of
Zip
0659
pmt)
Please have a Sales Representative contact me regarding
My phone number is _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _Ext _ _ __
Send me information on:
05010 Waveform Digitizers for 5000 Series mainframes
o Computer Graphic Products
o GPIB Products
o Signal Processing Systems
o _________________________ Product Applications
o Customer Training for _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Products
o Tektronix Service Programs for _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Products
o Please drop me from your mail list.
Name
5010 Waveform Digitizer
Title
Firm
"ft!ktronix~
COMMITTED TO ExeELl.£NCE
Address
City
State
Zip
0659
(Please type or print)
Please have a Sales Representative contact me regarding
My phone number is _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _,Ext _ _ __
Send me information on:
05010 Waveform Digitizers for 5000 Series mainframes
Computer Graphic Products
GPIB Products
o Signal Processing Systems
0 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Product Applications
o
o
o Customer Training for _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Products
o Tektronix Service Programs for _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Products
o Please drop me from your mail list.
5010 Waveform Digitizer
Title
Name
Firm
Address
City
State
Zip
111111
I~U t"'u~
If\llC
NECESSARY
IF MAILED
IN THE
UNITED STATES
BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
FIRST CLASS
PERMIT NO. 1
BEAVERTON, OR
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE
Tektronix, Inc.
Attn: Fulfillment
P.O. Box 1700
Beaverton, Oregon 97075
I II II I
NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY
IF MAILED
IN THE
UNITED STATES
I II II I
NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY
IF MAILED
IN THE
UNITED STATES
BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
FIRST CLASS
PERMIT NO.1
BEAVERTON, OR
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE
Tektronix, Inc.
Attn: Fulfillment
P.O. Box 1700
Beaverton, Oregon 97075
BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
FIRST CLASS
PERMIT NO. 1
BEAVERTON , OR
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE
Tektronix, Inc.
Attn: Fulfillment
P.O. Box 1700
Beaverton, Oregon 97075
TEK
Digital Storage
The fundamental difference between digital storage scopes and CRT storage scopes is that digital scopes quantize the captured waveform and
CRT storage scopes do not. Having quantized
waveforms in a digital memory gives you measurement capabilities not possible with any other
kind of oscilloscope.
With digital storage scopes, you have the advantage of pretrigger viewing. In other words you
can look at a waveform both before and after
the trigger event. Another feature is babysitting;
available because the digital storage scope's
trigger can stop , as well as start signal
acquisition.
Other digital storage scope advantages include
signal processing features like averaging a number of samples of the input signal to reduce the
effects of noise; performing calculations on the
waveform parameters; or outputting the signal
data over RS-232 or GPIB standard interfaces.
With Dot Display
5 MHz Signal
Digital storage scopes are typically easy to use
and give you crisp, clear displays, Because the
data is stored in a digital memory, no fading or
blooming of the trace on the CRT phosphor will
occur, and storage time is essentially unlimited.
This type of storage is excellent for many applications involving single-shot or low-repetition signals, or where the unique advantages of a digitized waveform may be the answer to your
measurement needs.
Quantization Techniques
Within digital storage scopes there are two main
techniques of quantizing signals - and the
technique has a direct effect on the applications
of the instruments in that only one kind of digital
storage scope can capture single-shot signals,
The digital scopes that can capture signals in a
single sweep use what is called "real-time sampiing". Other digital storage scopes use "equivalent-time sampling ". There are two equivalenttime sampling methods and both require many
repetitions of the input signal. In exchange for
that requirement you have the ability to measure
signals more than ten times faster than can be
captured with real-time sampling.
Digital Storage Scope Specifications
For digital storage oscilloscopes that use real
time sampling, there is a useful storage bandwidth specification. It expresses the highest frequency sinewave that can be captured in a single sweep and displayed so that you can make
measurements. Both the digitizing rate (how often the scope takes samples) and the display reconstruction technique (how the scope displays
what's in its memory) must be taken into account in the useful storage bandwidth. See the
examples below.
For Digital scopes using equivalent time sampling , the specificaton is "equivalent-time bandwidth", the highest frequency signal that can be
stored and displayed with less than 3 dB signal
amplitude loss. Besides the analog specifications
that are common to all oscilloscopes, other
specifications of interest to digital scope users
are:
Maximum Digitizing Rate - How often the instrument takes samples of the input signal.
Vertical Resolution (usually expressed in "bits of
resolution) - How finely the instrument can discriminate between signals very much alike in
voltage; for example, 8 bits of resolution is
0.391% when expressed as a percentage, and
10 bits is 0.098%.
Data Word Per Waveform or Horizontal Resolution - How many words of digital memory are
used to store the captured waveform; if the signal is stored in 512 data words, the horizontal
resolution is 1 in 512 or 0.195%.
10 MHz Signal
10 MHz Signal
Digitizing Rate With Sine Interpolator
5 MHz Signal
25 MHz
10 MHz Signal
223
DIVISION
TEK INSTRUMENTS
DIGITAL OSCILLOSCOPES AND WAVEFORM DIGITIZERS
Type
Analog
BW
390AO
15 MHz
468
100 MHz
Maximum
Digitizing
Rste
30 MHz
dual channel
60 MHz
CH 1
Maximum
Stored
Waveform.
Useful-'
Storage
BWISS)
Equiv"
Storage
BWlrep)
15 MHz
15 MHz
Vertical
Resolution
Data Words
per Waveform
10 Bits
2048
dual channel
4096
CH 1 only
2
4
10 MHz
25 MHz
8 Bits
512 in Alt
256 in chop
-
Page
261
331
Price
$14,530
$6,500
5223
10 MHz
1 MHz
10 Bits
1024/plug-in
4
100 kHz
10 MHz
294
$4,930
7854
400 MHz
500 kHz
Ext Clock
10 Bits
Up to 1024
Up to 40
50 kHz
400 MHz
259
$13,750
7912AO
500 MHz
100 GHz
9 Bits
512
1
500 MHz
500 MHz
265
$24,800
90 MHz
200 MHz
8 Bits
Up to 2048
Up to 16
80 MHz
80 MHz
263
$26,400
5010
1 MHz
8 Bits
1024 Single
Trace
512 Dual Trace
3 w/Oual
Differential in
the left
plug-in slot
100 kHz
302
$2,850
7020
40 MHz
8 Bits
Up to 1024
6
10 MHz
268
$7,750
76120
70 MHz
"Useful Storage Bandwidth is a measure of the highest frequency sif16wave that can be stored in a single sweep and displayed in a
visually useful manner. This is dependent on both the maximum digitizing rate as well as the display reconstruction technique used.
"Equivalent Storage Bandwidth indicates the highest frequency repetitive signal that can be stored and dIsplayed with less than 3 dB
loss of signal amplitude using equivalent time digitizing techniques.
Your local Tektronix Sales Engineer, Representative, or Distributor can help you determine the
digital oscilloscope parameters necessary to
meet your measurement applications needs.
The Tektronix digital storage scopes are:
468
Portable Storage Oscilloscope. Real-time
sampling to 10 MHz and special features
like the envelope operating mode, a very
useful glitch-catching feature.
5D10 Waveform Digitizing Plug-in for the
5000 Series offering real time sampling
to 100 kHz , CRT readout, 8-bit vertical
resolution , and up to 1024 data words per
waveform.
5223 Digitizing Oscilloscope with 10 bits of
vertical resolution , roll mode, X-Y plotter
output, and optional GPIB interface.
7020 Waveform-Digitizing Plug-in with dual
samplers (capable of capturing two independent 25-ns-wide transient events)
and with displays of six independent
signals as well as a reference waveform.
7854
Waveform Processing Oscilloscope with
400 MHz equivalent-time bandwidth, keystroke programming, and calibrated
sweep speeds to 500 ps/div.
WAVEFORM DIGITIZERS
Along with conventional oscilloscopes, plug-in or
integrated, and with storage oscilloscopes, both
digital and analog, Tektronix leads the way in
waveform acquisition instruments. This commitment to the future of test and measurement instrumentation can be seen today in three programmable waveform digitizers.
The 390AD Programmable Waveform Digitizer is
a dual-channel waveform-acquisition digitizer with
a maximum sampling rate of 30 MHz (or 60 MHz
in single channel operations). Vertical resolution is
10 bits and the memory length is 2048 data words
(4096, single channel) with one breakpoint provided to allow changing the digitizing rate during
waveform digitizing. More information is available
on page 261 .
The 7612D Programmable Waveform Digitizer has
full dual-channel operations, a maximum sampling
rate of 200 MHz, selectable record lengths from
256 to 2048 data words, and the ability to change
sampling rates several times during waveform
digitizing. See page 263.
The 7912AD Programmable Transient Waveform
Digitizer captures waveforms with a scan converter CRT capable of recording 500 MHz single-shot
signals. See page 265 for more information if your
applications demand equivalent digitizing rates to
100 GHz and 9-bit resolution both vertically and
horizontally.
TM 500 MANUAL INSTRUMENTS
The Tektronix TM 500 line is a modular system.
One-, three-, four-, five-, and six-compartment
mainframes accept a broad selection of plug-in
instruments. The mainframe provides a common
primary power supply, keeping total instrument
weight, size, and cost down. Just as important,
TM 500 mainframes also provide a signal control
and data interface between modules. This allows
TM 500 instruments to work either individually or
together as integrated measuring systems. The
Tektronix General Purpose Instrument line is
extensive-more than 35 instruments, including
224
digital multimeters, counter/timers, power supplies, signal sources, oscilloscopes, and more.
Custom plug-in kits allow you to add your own
unique circuits. With this feature, you can also
apply TM 5OO's capability to unusual applications.
The TM 500 General Purpose Instrument line has
several configurations designed for portability.
The TM 515 Traveler Mainframe travels like luggage but works like a lab bench setup. Although
it is attractive and convenient enough to treat as
carry-on luggage (it will even go beneath your
seat on most airlines), the TM 515 is designed to
take rugged travel. It carries up to five TM 500
plug-in instruments. The TM 503 three-compartment mainframe or the TM 504 four-compartment
mainframe, with carrying case or protective cover, provide additional protability for the TM 500
instruments. Again, relatively lightweight, rugged
construction, and convenient size are the key to
portability.
TM 5000 PROGRAMMABLE INSTRUMENTS
The Tektronix TM 5000 products extend the
TM 500 concept of configurability to a line of IEEE
Standard 488 compatible, fully programmable
measurement, stimulus, and interfacing instruments. Tek's TM 5000 programmables are the
easiest IEEE Standard 488 test and measurement
instruments you can use. Because they are compatible with our TM 500 line of modular instrument, it is possible to configure literally hundreds
of customized systems-systems that are programmable, manual , or hybrid-with plug-in, pullout ease.
Tek 's Standard Code and Formats make communication between TM 5000 instruments easier
than ever before. This same set of Standard
Codes and Formats is used to communicate
with all the Tektronix IEEE Standard 488 instruments, such as the 7854 and 468 oscilloscopes,
and the 492P Spectrum Analyzer. TM 5000 commands are mnemonic. Each bus command is in
"standard engineering English", matching the
front panel nomenclature-ideal for the programmer who realizes the frustrations of working with
many of today's instruments.
With the Learn Mode, one keystroke transfers a
complete front panel setup to the controller for
storage in memory. This greatly increases the
productivity of the engineer by reducing setup
time where test settings are constantly changing.
You can change a routine without having to reprogram the whole system.
All TM 5000 programmables have an internal diagnostics capability designed right in. They perform self-test on power-up, and indicate an error
if a malfunction has occurred. Plus they've all
been designed for fast troubleshooting using signature analysis. All are UL listed.
As with TM 500, TM 5000 programmable systems
take up less than half the space of standard
rackmount equipment. This size advantage really
pays off-on the bench, on the manufacturing
floor, or in the field where portability is essential.
TEK
SIGNAL PROCESSING
SYSTEMS
CONTENTS
System Products ...................... __ .. ...... .. __ ......
Software
.....................................
Mini-Computer Based Systems ..................
Desktop Computer Based Systems ...........
Computer - Based 7912AD System
Precise automatic waveform
measurements for demanding applications in research,
design, manufacturing and
quality assurance
226
227
228
229
Desktop Computer Based 7854 System
waveform manipulations, and graphic display. And they 're the first to provide system
compatibility that allows configuration for
many types of test and measurement
applications.
Plus, system automation gives greater measurement accuracy and accountability on
your finished product. Since there's less operator involvement in measurements, there's
less chance of human error.
Automatically save hours, days,
even months of work
Tektronix Signal Processing Systems are
specially designed to handle the increasingly complex, expensive , and time-consuming
task of waveform characterization .
With Tektronix Signal Processing Systems
you concentrate on test results, not test procedures. There are no human-eye interpretations, hand processing, or complex statistical graphing. Tektronix Systems
automatically capture the signals you need,
make the measurements you want, then display, store, and document your solutions.
From today's research and development
tasks to tomorrow's production testing,
Tektronix Systems give you all the capabilities needed to characterize your waveforms
quickly, efficiently, and automatically.
They're the first measurement systems to
offer all the power and flexibility of oscilloscope acquisition , coupled with fully automatic analysis. They're the first systems to
feature signal processing software with extensive control over instrumentation,
This means work that used to take hours,
now takes only minutes. System automation
saves you time and money by greatly increaSing your productivity. Projects not only
get completed on schedule, they get completed on budget.
For measurement solutions
you can't beat the SYSTEM.
225
COMPONENTS
TEK SYSTEM
SPS AUTOMATION
ACQUISITION UNIT
HARDCOPY
Me) M~
SIGNAL TO BE
ACOUIRED&
PROCESSED
,
• • •
FIVE MAJOR SYSTEM COMPONENTS
AND TEK'S COMPREHENSIVE SOFTWARE
MEET YOUR MEASUREMENT NEED
'0'1O
Acquisition, built around Tektronix GPIB Waveform Digitizers and 7000 Series Oscilloscope
Plug-ins, captures analog data, converts and
stores it in a digital format acceptable to the
system processor.
fi
01010
01110
Processor, either minicomputer or desk-top
computer, controls the system, accepts the digitized data, and then performs the needed mathematical calculations and operations.
IEEE488 BUS>
Mass Storage, in the form of disk or magnetic
tape, keeps a log of the processed data and also
stores the test programs.
Display, including graphic terminal and hard
copy units, provides both alphanumeric and
graphic presentation of data and permanent
documentation.
STORAGE
PROCESSOR
DISPLAY
Software, specially developed for ease of use
with Tektronix Signal Processing Systems, controls all other system components and performs
the desired computations. Commands are highlevel BASIC and accessible through a standard
terminal keyboard .
A WIDE RANGE OF SYSTEM PRODUCTS PROVIDES THE SOLUTIONS YOU NEED
Signal Acquisition - Fast or Slow, Transient
or Repetitive
The growing family of GPIB compatible High
Performance Waveform Digitizers provides a
broad range of acquisition capabilities. They offer
the ability to analyze signals ranging from seconds to picoseconds in duration, and risetimes to
25 ps. Plus, all are compatible with a broad range
of 7000 Series Plug-ins.
7912AD"
For high-speed transient signal acquisition, the
7912AD Programmable Digitizer has the capability to capture signals in the millisecond to
subnanosecond range with a bandwidth of up to
1 GHz.
76120"
For medium-speed signals, the 76120 Programmable Digitizer offers dual channel acquisition,
selectable sampling rates within records, and preand post-triggering. With the 76120 you can
capture transient signals from seconds to submicroseconds in duration with high resolution .
7854"
For fast, repetitive signals, the 7854 Oscilloscope
is ideal when configured in a system. The 7854
features an on-board microprocessor. This instrument provides the system with the capability to
acquire high speed signals with rise times to
25 ps.
'See High Performance Oigitizing Mainframes Section for
details.
226
390AD" , . . ,
For low to medium speed signals . The
SONYfTEKTRONIX 390AD offers crystal-controlled 3O-MHz sampling on two channels, or
60 MHz sampling on one channel. Features include cursor based measurements, sample rate
switching, and direct plotter output capability.
System Controllers Dedicated to Speed and
Precision
Tektronix Signal Processing Systems are divided
into two major processor families: the minicomputer family, and the desktop computer family.
The Tektronix minicomputer systems, built around
DEC PDP-11 compatible controllers, are designed
to handle large amounts of data, They offer
flexibility in peripheral selection, processing
speed, and up to 128k words of memory space.
Plus, the software support is specially developed
for waveform manipulations, array processing
and display efficiency.
The desktop computer systems are built around
the 4052A Desktop Computer-one of the most
powerful analytical performers available today. Its
built-in extended BASIC software is complemented by special ROM packs featuring commands
most often used in signal processing
applications.
Wide-ranging System Peripherals for Fu"
Documentation and Display
Tektronix Signal Processing Systems provide the
best in display- the 4012 or the 4052A graphic
screen. These terminals provide an excellent medium for displaying graphic and alphanumeric
information with high resolution . In addition, a
wide range of system peripherals is available,
including graphic plotters, hard copy units, disk
and magnetic tape storage devices.
Multiplexer 1360P/S
The 1360 is a microprocessor-based GPIB compatible system instrument that can be used to
multiplex electrical signals at bandwidths up to
250 MHz. It includes two separate chassis: the
1360P Programmable Switch Controller and the
1360S Switch Matrix. Up to four 1360S Switch
Matrix units may be operated by one 1360P. With
one 1360S one may multiplex one output with 33
inputs, two ganged outputs with 17 inputs, or four
ganged outputs with nine inputs. With four 1360S
units these numbers increase so one may multiplex one output with 129 inputs, two ganged
outputs with 65 inputs, or four ganged outputs
with 33 inputs.
Total Support
Complete details and application consultation is
available through your local Tektronix Sales Office . SPS Specialists and Application Engineers
stand ready to answer all your system questions.
TEK
SYSTEM
SOFTWARE
The next logical step
ANY SYSTEM IS ONLY AS GOOD AS ITS SOFTWARE
SPS SYSTEMS OFFER THE BEST SOFTWARE AVAILABLE
TEK SPS BASIC is a comprehensive, general
purpose programming language with enhancements for instrument control and waveform processing, Modular in design, it provides an optimum balance between flexibility , space
efficiency, and computing power. Yet it retains
the "easy-to-Iearn, easy-to-use, easy-to-remember" character of traditional BASICs, This makes it
an ideal tool for beginning users as well as expert
programmers,
TEK SPS BASIC runs on the Tektronix CP1164X
Instrument Controller, on the PDP-11 /23 Computer, or on any Digital Equipment Corporation
PDP-11 Minicomputer, It consists of a Resident
Monitor and an expandable library of over 100
non-resident commands, This lets you configure a
software system to meet your unique measurement needs,
Advanced Signal Processing
Waveforms can be integrated, differentiated ,
convolved, correlated , and fast Fourier transformed , Also , polar conversions can be
performed,
Flexible I/O
Information can be read or written in ASCII or binary, ASCII may be used for display on a terminal
or to store information for use by another software system, Binary can be used for storing large
information blocks for later processing by TEK
SPS BASIC, File may be structured either serially
or by random access,
GPIB
With BASIC commands, you can control multiple
IEEE Standard 488 interfaces at any level, from
setting individual data lines to reading in entire
arrays with a single command, The GPIB feature ,
which can be deleted from the BASIC system to
save memory, is integrated with the Resident
Monitor to make GPIB control commands more
space economic, A high level GPIB driver is also
available to facilitate programming for those not
thoroughly familiar with GPIB,
It's ready to use, TEK SPS BASIC requires a
minimum system consisting of a controller with
two hard-disk or two flexible-disk drives, Commands can be added to the system from the disk
as needed to provide maximum space efficiency
in available memory,
Named files can be accessed by TEK SPS BASIC
on hard or flexible disk, or magnetic tape and
information can be read from files either sequentially or randomly, BASIC commands give you
complete file management capability, Files are
compatible with DEC's RT11 operating system.
Comprehensive graphics permit waveform plots
and X-Y plots between waveforms, Either can be
done with single commands, The output is complete with scaled and labeled axes and can be
hard-copied to paper.
Extended Memory
Extended memory capability is offered in V02XM
software, Computers with memory management
and up to 128k words of memory can use extended memory to manipulate large data arrays,
Software Maintenance
Customers receive a periodic newsletter containing programming hints and responses to user
questions, Reported system errors can usually be
corrected by customer-applied "patches." These
short code sequences are published in the newsletter with instructions for adding them to established systems, Specific problems encountered
by customers which appear to be caused by software defect may be addressed by submitting a
Software Performance Report (SPR) which will be
responded to in writing, (Category B suppor!.)
TEK SPS BASIC data-logging capabilities let you
turn tedious and repetitive measurements into
automated procedures, Program control can eliminate human intervention, reduce errors, and give
you time to concentrate on test results ,
Better than seven-digit precision means much
higher resolution than possible in conventional
oscilloscope measurements, Special data structures retain both numeric and literal information
associated with a given waveform, These waveform structures, as well as numeric arrays or
portions of numeric arrays, can be operated on
arithmetically as easily as can simple numeric
variables,
ORDERING INFORMATION
SOFTWARE PACKAGES
CP57000 TEK SPS BASIC (Monitor) . $5,475
CP57001 Signal Processing ......•..•••.... $1 ,285
CP57002 Graphics ................................. $975
CP57003 R7912 Transient Digitizer
Driver ................................................... $1 ,445
CP57004 Digitizing Oscilloscope (DPO)
Driver .••.••.•.•••..•..•••••.••..•...••...•••••.•••.•••.•..• $865
CP57005 DPO Envelope Command •..... $350
CP57006 7912AD Programmable
Digitizer Driver .................•.....••••.••..••••••.• $875
CP57007 High Level Support .••...••.••••••• $580
CP57008 Assembly Level Support ..•.• $2,890
CP57009 GPIB High Level Driver •••••.•••• $750
CP57010 76120 Special Commands •..•. $300
CP57500 Extended Memory (V02XM ) TEK
SPS Basic (Monitor) .••.•..••.•••... ••..••.••.. $7,125
CP575XX Ex t ended Memory Software
(V02XM) are priced the same as V02 modules
above, except for CP57500,
There is also available a versatile GPIB software
module for RSX 11 -M, This requires special quotation from SPS Marketing ,
For additional information or a demonstration of the TEK
SPS BASIC software family, call the Tektronix Sales Office
in your area and ask for your SPS Specialis"
227
BASED SYSTEMS
TEK MINI-COMPUTER
Measurement requirements and technologies are
changing rapidly in the dynamic fields of physics,
optics, chemistry, biology, and electronics. Improved bandwidths, sensitivities, triggering circuits, and storage capabilities have done a great
deal to increase the value of oscilloscopes as
general-purpose measurement equipment in
these fields . But in more and more applications
scope measurements are being supplemented by
computations to get the information in a form that
is easy to interpret.
Some Applications
The development and manufacturing of today's
increasingly complex electronic devices require
extensive analysis of the signals these devices
generate and transmit. For example, performance
and calibration of high density cartridge disks can
be characterized using Tektronix Signal Processing Systems - providing accurate, reliable results in seconds. Other components, such as
semiconductors and optical fibers , have benefited from Tektronix Signal Processing System
analysis.
Evaluating equipment designed to be used in
hostile environments is a growing challenge for
today 's test and measurement technology. In the
area of lightning effects, Tektronix Signal Processing Systems are used because they can
capture randomly occurring events generated in
such hostile environments. Other examples include shock and vibration testing, and electromagnetic pulse testing.
High performance instrumentation and waveform
analysis have always been required in research
and development for the discovery and quantification of new phenomena. With acquisition bandwidths up to 14 GHz, Tektronix Signal Processing
Systems are ideally suited for such fields as laserrelated research , fusion research , biochemistry,
ballistics and ultrasonics.
The WP3201 is one of the many configurations for the minicomputer-based systems.
Systems
Tektronix Minicomputer-based systems offer
combinations of Tektronix Waveform Digitizing
instruments, fle xible instrument controllers, and
the most powerful waveform (array) processing
BASIC software available on the market. These
systems are tailored for medium and large scale
experiments and for use in areas where medium
or high power, dedicated systems are best suited
to the task. System versatility and easy-to-use
software allow for a wide variety of tasks to be
performed at a multi-purpose test area. Large
amounts of data storage and waveform analysis
are manageable under the TEK SPS BASIC operating system which handles full arrays of data as
easily as single-valued variables.
-
Instrument control and data communication are
accomplished over the IEEE Standard 488 (GPIB)
bus, allowing for easy expandability. Multiple instruments performing different functions may be
added as needs expand or change. Control or
data busses other than GPIB may be added by
the user and controlled by TEK SPS BASIC
software.
Mass storage includes either floppy or hard disk
systems for operating system, non-resident commands, data files and user program storage.
Hard copy capability may be added by ordering
the Tektronix 4631 option to these systems.
-
AVAILABLE MINI COMPUTER BASED SYSTEMS
228
7912AD
7612D
PDP-11 /23/Floppy Disk
WP2252
WP3202
CP1164X/Hard Disk
WP2251
WP3201
Warranty
Systems defined as ' WP" Systems are installed at
the user's site free of charge. On-site warranty is
for 90 days from date of system start-up, or 120
days from date of shipment, whichever is shorter.
Individual instruments are warranted for one year
at a Tektronix Service Center. Post-warranty service is available on a normal charge basis, or
system components may be sent to a Service
Center for repair.
DESKTOP COMPUTER
BASED SYSTEMS
TEK
Desktop Computer Software
4052A software is an easy-to-Iearn enhanced
form of BASIC which provides the simplicity
desired by the beginner and the flexibility and
power required by the experienced programmer.
Device independent keywords make programming input and output operations easy. Fast
matrix functions are also part of 4052A BASIC.
Special ROM Packs provide 15 commonly used
waveform processing functions-from the location of waveform maximums and minimums to
Fast Fourier Transforms. And Tektronix supports
the software of the 4052A with an extensive
applications software library-including mathematics, statistics and graphics packages-which
aids the user in solving measurement problems
from modeling to final report generation.
For graphic display control, an entire set of
commands allows graphic displays to be created
on the 4052A. For example, one ROM Pack
command provides the ability to display a complete array of data with a single statement.
The WP2110 is one of three desktop computer-based systems.
Systems
Tektronix Desktop Computer-based Systems offer combinations of Tektronix Waveform Digitizing
instruments and the 4052A Graphic Computing
System. These systems are tailored especially for
single user, small and medium scale experiments
and for use in areas where medium power,
dedicated, self contained systems are best suited to the task. Each system contains the flexibility
to be easily moved between areas or to perform a
variety of tasks at a multi-purpose test bench.
Instrument control and data communication are
accomplished over the IEEE Standard 488 (GPIB)
bus, allowing for easy expandability. Multiple instruments of the same type or GPIB-interfaced
instruments performing different functions may
be added as needs change. Data communication
with external intelligence for additional flexibility is
available via an RS-232C port. Hard-copy capability from the display may be added by ordering the
Tektronix 4631 option to these systems. Raw and
processed data and user programs may be
stored using the integral magnetic tape, or the
Tektronix 4907 flexible disk File Manager may be
ordered to supplement the system.
Desktop Graphic
Computer and Display
The Tektronix 4052A Graphic Computer has
gained wide acceptance as a powerful data
processing tool for system applications. For rapid
calculations this desktop computer contains a
fast processor with microcoded floating point.
The 4052A, with state-of-the-art graphics capability, can provide hard copies of any combination of
text and high density graphics via an optional
hardcopy unit. For peripheral support the 4052A
uses the GPIB and RS-232C to interface with
additional instruments as your needs require . And
with memory expandable to 64k bytes, the 4052A
can handle lengthy programs and large amounts
of data.
7854
7912AD
76120
WP1310
WP2110
WP3110
For complete information on SPS Systems and
Digitizers described, contact your SPS Specialist
Signal Processing ROM Pack #2 (4052,
4052A, 4054, and 4054A only)
Extends array handling capabilities by adding
commands that perform Fast Fourier Transform
(FFT), its inverse (1FT), convolution, correlation,
windowing and related utility functions . Functions
execute 7-20 times faster than BASIC routines.
Order 4052R08 ............... ....................... $700
Broad Support Completes the
Package and Assures You of
Continuing Value
From signal acquisition through final display ongoing support guarantees you the most value for
your investment dollar. The many support programs available are yours as a part of your
system purchase.
AVAILABLE DESKTOP COMPUTER-BASED SYSTEMS
4052A
Signal Processing ROM Pack #1 (4052,
4052A, 4054, and 4054A only)
Adds seven new functions which can be applied
to one dimensional data arrays; integration , differentiation (2 and 3 point), fast graphing, locating
minimum and maximum, and crossing over a
threshold . Functions operate 2-10 times faster
than equivalent BASIC routines .
Order 4052R07 ______________________________________ $350
for data sheets and descriptive literature through
your nearby Tektronix Sales Office.
HANDSHAKE is a newsletter forum for users of
Tektronix programmable instruments and systems. Published quarterly, HANDSHAKE has articles of interest concerning applications of measurement and analysis techniques.
SPS PROGRAMMING UPDATE is published
periodically and sent to users of Tektronix Signal
Processing Systems. It contains information to
help maintain software and firmware system components. It also contains useful programming
hints and software and firmware product information .
Most important of all , a staff of Signal Processing
Systems Specialists, located at various offices,
stand ready to assist you in all aspects of system
specification and performance.
229
TEK
7000 SERIES
INSTRUMENTS
CONTENTS
~~ffiMe ...............•.... .... ........ . .... ... .... .........
231
7000 Series
Nonstorage Mainframes ........ ............. ......... 237
7000 Series
CRT Storage Mainframes
High Performance
Digitizing Mainframes
.... .. 250
....... 258
7000 Series Plug-ins .. .. .... ........ ................... 267
The 7000 Series ...
Superior Performance
The 7000 Series of plug-in laboratory instruments embodies more state-of-the-art performance features than any other oscilloscope-based measurement system. The
7104 Oscilloscope features a 1 GHz bandwidth combined with the fastest rise time
and writing speed available today.
Flexibility
A choice of over 40 plug-ins and 19 mainframes gives you the flexibility to configure
the scope package to meet your individual
-
needs. When your needs change, your
present package can be reconfigured with
a minimum of additional equipment and
effort.
Expandability
This assures you that the instrument you
buy today will adapt to changing measurement needs, and that it won 't become obsolete soon after you buy it. Tektronix' most
recent developments in plug-in scope capability are: the Waveform Processing Oscilloscope, the 1 GHz High Writing Rate Oscilloscope, and the Programmable Digitizer
Plug-In Unit.
.
=~===~=====
-~
--- =
_...=,=,===
- --- -~-. . =
=
----......
..
~-~'!'!'!
= !::: =
. . . . . - . ... -
===
TEK
7000
SERIES
SUPERIOR PERFORMANCE, FLEXBILITY AND EXPANDABILITY
Pick The Trigger Source
CRT Readout
Convenient Camera
Mountings and
Connections
High Resolution
Large, No Parallax
Illuminated Graticules
ibration Standard
Easy Display Selection
Plug-in Flexibility
The 7000 Series is a unique family of instrumentation components, a continuation of the Tektronix
committment to bringing the ultimate in measurement technology to the laboratory.
Numerous measurement concepts-oscilloscopy, synergistic analog-digital measurements,
spectrum analysis, sampling, time domain reflectometry, curve tracing-are fused into a family of
interdependent cathode-ray-tube mainframes
and instrumentation plug-ins.
A system can be tailored for your exact measurement needs. Mainframes in the family offer a
choice of popular bandwidth ranges and a wide
selection of additional features . Plugins-including oscilloscope vertical amplifiers and
time bases as well as instruments for a variety of
applications-can be selected to round out your
tailored system.
In opposition to an industrial world that is frequently faulted for planning obsolescence, this
instrument family strategically defers obsolescence. Each mainframe and each plug-in reflects
the latest technology at its inception, yet each fits
a well-planned niche in this interdependent family.
The result is an array of instrumentation components that can adapt to our new developments
while protecting your initial investment. Today's
system may be expanded to meet future needs
at a relatively low cost by the addition of a plug-in
or two. When the time comes to add a more
powerful mainframe, your older model continues
to be useful for a host of applications.
231
TEK REFERENCE
_ ~_
•
CRT Readout"
All significant parameters are displayed in alphanumeric characters right on the CRT. They are
readily visible when you need them for quick
oscilloscope measurements, and they are permanently recorded on your waveform photographs
for future analysis, When your 7000 Series Measurement System includes a digital instrument
plug-in , the measurement is presented in clear,
accurate digital terms, along with a corresponding analog waveform.
d
~
0Ji\"U'i'
J
"
Independent Intensity Controls
Separate intensity controls allow for independent
adjustment of A sweep, B sweep, and character
readout brightness, The intensity of each sweep
may be adjusted to a level that suits your
application,
Autofocus
The trace stays in focus with changes in intensity,
After the focus is initially set, an autofocus circuit
reduces the need for additional adjustments,
Bright Traces
All 7000 Series CRTs have bright displays and
excellent photographic writing speeds, For applications requiring maximum photographic writing
speeds, several mainframes feature a reduced
scan on a reduced area in the center of the CRT,
and one uses a micro-channel plate CRT.
Adjustable Graticule Illumination
This gives you easier viewing and sharper photos,
Large, Illuminated
and Parallax-Free Graticules
The display area is 8 by 10 divisions (0,85, 0,9,
1,0, or 1,22 cm/div depending upon mainframe)
with a parallax-free graticule,
Analog/Digital Synergism
Digital instrumentation plug-ins create unsurpassed measurement capabilities, Highly accurate digital measurements may be made at
selectable points on complex waveforms by visually superimposing gate waveforms over signal
waveforms,
Convenient Camera Mountings
and Connections
A standard bezel connector matches all Tektronix
Oscilloscope Cameras to 7000 Series
Mainframes,
'Not available in mainframes or plug-ins with ' N' suffix,
232
IIOtI
iti'lil.' lI; • &,"
<
""
j
Mainframes
Calibration Standard
All the 7000 Series Calibrators serve as a voltage
standard for calibrating vertical plug-ins, a 1 kHz
squarewave for adjusting probe compensation.
and a 1 kHz frequency standard in the 7800, 7900
and 7100 Series Mainframes, The output is available in several dc or 1 kHz squarewave voltages,
Trigger Source Flexibility
The left and right trigger selector mainframe
pushbuttons route the desired trigger source to
the appropriate time base, A VERT mode position
automatically routes whichever source has been
chosen for vertical inputs,
Easy Display Selection
Vertical mode switches allow you to easily select
the desired vertical amplifier or interaction of
amplifiers (e,g" alternate, chopped, or added
modes), Four-compartment mainframes provide
equivalent fle xibility for time bases as well.
Mainframe Flexibility
Numerous options add even more fle xibility in
creating the oscilloscope system that most closely meets your measurement requirements,
TEK
Nonstorage 7104
This. 300 ps risetime is displayed on a 7104 Non-Storage
Oscilloscope. Readout indicates 10 mVl div vertical sensitivity
and 200 pSl div sweep speed.
7000
SERIES
Sampling/Time Domain
Reflectometry
Digital Measurement Plug-ins
The 7000 Series digital plug-ins include: A universal counterltimer, digital multimeter with temperature mode, digital delay by time or events, a
versatile 0.01 % NO converter with vertical amplifier, and a special read-out unit to label each test
for future reference . Together with a 7000 Series
mainframe, these give you the advantage of
seeing what you 're measuring, plus accuracy of
digital techniques.
This combination offers many advantages over
separate test units. You get : scope-controlled
digital measurements, measuring convenience
and confidence, increased accuracy, easier and
faster solutions to complex problems, a lower
dollar investment, more bench space and signal
conditioning.
7854 Digital Oscilloscope with 7512 Plug-in provides digital
processing capability for sampling and time domain
reflectometry.
Dual Beam 7844
Digital Readout Measurements
Sampling
The 7000 Series sampling plug-ins provide some
unique measurement capabilities not available in
other sampling oscilloscopes. You get: A low-cost
storage CRT for slow scans, a random mode that
lets you see leading edges with pretrigger or
bandwidth-limiting delay line, a wide choice of
sampling heads at minimal cost, and the convenience of sampling and conventional displays at
the same time on the CRT.
The adjacent sampling waveform shows the power of the 7S12 TDR Plug-in with the 7854 Digital
Storage Oscilloscope. First, the 7854 acquired the
TOR signal from a prototype connector design,
using waveform averaging to eliminate noise on
the trace. Then, positioning the 7854 cursors to
the area of interest on the waveform , the internal
7854 program calculates an impedance of
52.41 f! at the discontinuity.
The 400 MHz, dual-beam 7844 Oscilloscope displays one input
signal at two sweep speeds (full vertical and horizontal crossover switching). Also provides full overlap on 8 x 10 cm display.
400 MHz Dual-Beam
Dual-beam oscilloscopes are essentially two oscilloscopes in one. Each beam operates separately
and independently of the other. They are required
for many applications where two transient events
must be compared Simultaneously. These application areas include stimulation and reaction
events in such fields as medicine , biology, chemistry, engineering mechanics, to name just a few .
Depending on the plug-ins selected , up to eight
traces can be displayed at a time.
7854 Digital Oscilloscope with 70121M2 Plug-in measures
+ O. 737 volts difference between two points on complex waveform. Gate waveform indicates leading and trailing edges
where voltage difference is measured.
Spectrum Analysis
Unexcelled plug-in performance from 20 Hz to
60 GHz is provided by the 7L5, 7L14 and 7L 18
Spectrum Analyzers. Stable, sensitive and spurious-free, these analyzers work in any 7000 Series
mainframe. The same mainframe may be used
with other plug -ins for oscilloscope
measurements.
Some plug-in analyzers have microprocessor-aided controls for easy operation, and digital storage
and display capability for recalling and comparing
signals. Others offer 30 Hz resolution for viewing
close-together signals. Some optional tracking
generators are available for swept frequency
measurements.
Refer to the Spectrum Analyzer section beginning
on page 198 for more information.
CRT Storage see page 250
High Performance Digitizing see page 258
233
TEK REFERENCE
7000 SERIES OSCILLOSCOPE SYSTEMS/PROBE SELECTION CHART·'
PASSIVE VOLTAGE' Mil INPUT COMPATIBLE
P6106
P6055'z
P6009
P6015
P60628
P6105
1 Meter
3 .5ft
9ft
10 ft
P610S
6ft
P60538
2 Meter
3.5ft
Miniature
Fastest
Ad)
1.5 kV 40 kV Pk Selectable Minature
Probe
Probes
Attenuation
ComPulse
Attenuation
Probe
Compatible
for
patibility
ComlX:l0X
with I-Mil Differential
patibility
Input
Use
PROBE
P6101
1 Meter
FEATURES
ATTENUATION
7104
7A19
7A24
7A26
7A29
7900
7All"'
FAMILY 7A13
7A15A
7A16A
7A18A
7A19
7A22
7A24
7A26
7800
7All
FAMILY 7A13
7A15A
7A16A
7A16A
7A19
7A22
7A24
7A26
7704A 7Al1
7A13
7A15A
7A16A
7A18A
7A19"'
7A22
7A24
7A26
7600
7Al1
FAMILY 7A13
7A15A
7A16A
7A18A
7A22
7A26
IX
Ne
Ne
34 MHz
Ne
Ne
34 MHz
34 MHz
34 MHz
34 MHz
Ne
1 MHz
Ne
34 MHz
Ne
34 Mhz
34 MHz
34 MHz
34 MHz
Ne
1 MHz
Ne
34 MHz
Ne
34 MHz
34 MHz
34 MHz
34 MHz
Ne
1 MHz
Ne
34 MHz
Ne
34 MHz
34 MHz
34 MHz
34 MHz
1 MHz
34 MHz
lOX
Ne
Ne
175 MHz
Ne
Ne
105 MHz
75 MHz
200 MHz
75 MHz
Ne
Ne
Ne
175 MHz
Ne
95 MHz
75 MHz
160 MHz
85 MHz
Ne
Ne
Ne
145 MHz
Ne
100 MHz
70 MHz
145 MHz
75 MHz
Ne
Ne
Ne
140 MHz
Ne
75 MHz
60 MHz
95 MHz
70 MHz
Ne
95 MHz
lOX
Ne
Ne
Ne
Ne
65 MHz
Ne
1 MHz
Ne
Ne
65 MHz
Ne
1 MHz
Ne
Ne
65 MHz
Ne
1 MHz
Ne
55 MHz
l00X
Ne
Ne
125 MHz
Ne
Ne
85 MHz
70 MHz
130 MHz
70 MHz
Ne
l000X
Ne
Ne
75 MHz
Ne
Ne
65 MHz
60 MHz
80 MHz
60 MHz
Ne
Ne
125 MHz
Ne
85 MHz
70 MHz
110 MHz
80 MHz
Ne
1 MHz
Ne
105 MHz
Ne
85 MHz
65 MHz
115 MHz
70 MHz
Ne
Ne
75 MHz
Ne
60 MHz
55 MHz
75 MHz
60 MHz
Ne
1 MHz
Ne
75 MHz
Ne
65 MHz
55 MHz
75 MHz
60 MHz
Ne
Ne
105 MHz
Ne
60 MHz
55 MHz
85 MHz
65 MHz
Ne
75 MHz
Ne
55 MHz
50 MHz
65 MHz
55 MHz
85 MHz
65 MHz
Selectable
Ne
Ne
1 MHz
" The values in the above table represent the approximate
useful frequency response for the measurement systems at
the probe tip.
Ne
75 MHz
75 MHz
Ne
1 MHz
Ne
Ne
75 MHz
85 MHz
Ne
1 MHz
Ne
Ne
70 MHz
75 MHz
Ne
1 MHz
Ne
Ne
70 MHz
60 MHz
95 MHz
70 MHz
1 MHz
95 MHz
PASSIVE VOLTAGE
50 Il INPUT COMPT
P6056
P6057
6ft
6ft
Fastest
lOX
Passive
Probe
LowC
FET PROBES 50 Il/' Mil
INPUT COMPATIBLE
P6202A"
P6046
P6201"
2 Meter
6ft
6ft
Fastest
l00X
Passive
Probe
LowC
10-Mlllnput Differential
Impedance Probe High
Dc Offset
CMRR
lOX
lOX
l00X
Ne
500 MHz 480 MHz
Ne
350 MHz 350 MHz
100 MHz
Ne
950 MHz 800 MHz
Ne
75 MHz
105 MHz
75 MHz
80 MHz
205 MHz
75 MHz
75 MHz
Ne
500 MHz 480 MHz
Ne
Ne
100 MHz
75 MHz
100 MHz
85 MHz
Ne
1 MHz
Ne
100 MHz
Ne
70 MHz
70 MHz
100 MHz
75 MHz
Ne
1 MHz
Ne
100 MHz
Ne
70 MHz
60 MHz
95 MHz
70 MHz
1 MHz
95 MHz
Selectable
300 MHz
300 MHz
185 MHz
450 MHz
105
80
205
75
300
350 MHz 350 MHz
400 MHz 400 MHz
300 MHz 300 MHz
250 MHz 250 MHz
200 MHz 200 MHz
Low
Capacitive
LoadingAe
Coupling
Dc Offset
Selectable
100 MHz
100 MHz
90 MHz
100 MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
70
60
90
60
95
Selectable
430 MHz
310 MHz
195 MHz
660 MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
105
75
215
75
430
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
290 MHz
185 MHz
90 MHz
85 MHz
310 MHz
180 MHz
100
80
170
75
320
70
60
85
65
95
100
80
165
90
360
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
270 MHz
150 MHz
90 MHz
85 MHz
280 MHz
155 MHz
100
75
160
75
220
70
55
80
60
85
100
70
150
75
215
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
185 MHz
160 MHz
80 MHz
80 MHz
75
65
100
75
55
50
70
55
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
100 MHz
'2015-0437-00 Matched pair recommended
'3 Option 09 Mainframe
'4 Requires 1101 Power Supply when used with 7854, 7603,
7633, 7623, or 7613.
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
180 MHz
140 MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
70 MHz
CURRENT PROBES
P6302/
P6022
P6021
w/passive w/passive AM 503
term,5ft
term,5ft
6ft
10 mV/mA 10 mV/mA
Ae High
Ae High
Dc High
Current
Frequency Current
Selectable
Ne
Ne
60 MHz
Ne
55 MHz
50 MHz
45 MHz
55 MHz
45 MHz
Ne
1 MHz
Ne
55 MHz
55 MHz
50 MHz
45 MHz
55 MHz
45 MHz
Ne
1 MHz
Ne
55 MHz
55 MHz
50 MHz
45 MHz
55 MHz
45 MHz
Ne
1 MHz
Ne
55 MHz
50 MHz
45 MHz
40 MHz
50 MHz
45 MHz
1 MHz
50 MHz
Selectable Selectable
Ne
50 MHz
Ne
45 MHz
140 MHz
50 MHz
Ne
50 MHz
150 MHz
45 MHz
90 MHz
45 MHz
70 MHz
40 MHz
150 MHz
45 MHz
70 MHz
40 MHz
Ne
50 MHz
1 MHz
1 MHz
Ne
45 MHz
140 MHz
45 MHz
130 MHz
45 MHz
85 MHz
45 MHz
70 MHz
40 MHz
130 MHz
45 MHz
70 MHz
40 MHz
Ne
50 MHz
1 MHz
1 MHz
Ne
45 MHz
125 MHz
45 MHz
125 MHz
45 MHz
40 MHz
85 MHz
70 MHz
40 MHz
125 MHz
45 MHz
70 MHz
40 MHz
Ne
45 MHz
1 MHz
1 MHz
Ne
45 MHz
115 MHz
45 MHz
85 MHz
40 MHz
70 MHz
40 MHz
60 MHz
35 MHz
85 MHz
40 MHz
70 MHz
40 MHz
1 MHz
1 MHz
85 MHz
40 MHz
Nc - Not compatible
If there is no bandpass specified, the probe/plug-in combination
is compatible but not recommended.
P6130 up to 250 MHz bandwidth see page 437 for more information.
7000 SERIES MAINFRAME/TIME BASE RECOMMENDATIONS
MAINFRAME
7104
7844/ R
7654
7834
7904
R7903
7704A
R7704
•
TIME BASE
7850A
PERFORMANCE FEATURE
Single time base
7853A
Dual time base with mixed sweep
7853A Option 05
7853A with tv sync triggering
7880
Single time base (used also as delayed time base)
•
7885
Single time base with delaying and t;, delay sweep funetion
7892A
Dual time base with display switching
7Bl0
Single time base (used also as delayed time base)
7815
Single time base with delaying and t;, delay sweep function
'No trace separation on R7704 only.
7603/R
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
"No mainframe readout.
7603Nl1
7633/R
7623A/R
.".
."."
7613/R
INDICATES RECOMMENDED COMBINATION
•
.'.'
.'•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
7000 SERIES MAINFRAMES AND PLUG-INS DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
Dlmenalona
76120
7912AD
7854"
7104
7904
R7903
7844
R7844
7834
7704A
R7704
7603
R7803
7803NMS
7633,
R7633,
7623A, R7623A,
Plug-Ina
7613
R7613 Single Double
Width
mm
in
483
19.0
483
19.0
305
12.0
305
12.0
305
12.0
483
19.0
305
12.0
483
19.0
305
12.0
305
12.0
483
19.0
221
8.7
483
19.0
246
9.7
221
8.7
483
19.0
7.1
2.8
140
5.5
Height
mm
in
178
7.0
178
7.0
348
13.7
345
13.6
343
13.5
135
5.3
328
12.9
178
7.0
345
13.6
345
13.6
178
7.0
290
11 .4
133
5.3
292
11.5
305
12.0
133
5.3
127
5.0
127
5.0
Depth
mm
in
679
26.8
679
26.8
627
24.7
592
23.3
592
23.3
579
22.8
605
23.8
630
24.8
589
23.2
577
22.7
569
22.4
610
24.0
627
24.7
640
25.2
597
23.5
566
22.3
368
14.5
368
14.5
25.0
55.0
22.7
50.0
20.4
45.0
19.8
43.6
14.5
32.0
12.3
27.0
16.3
36.0
15.0
33.0
16.1
35.5
13.6
30.0
20.0
44.0
13.6
30.0
13.6
30.0
20.4
45.0
13.6
30.0
14.5
32.0
0.9
2.0
4.1
9.0
32.6
72.0
28.1
62.0
25.4
56.0
20.0
44.0
23.6
52.0
21 .3
47.0
28.5
63.0
21.3
47.0
19.5
43.0
35.0
77.0
20.8
46.0
28.2
62.0
32.7
72.0
19.0
42.0
28.2
62.0
2.3
5.0
5.4
12.0
Weights
=
Net
kg
Ib
Shipping
kg
Ib
7854 Calculator dimensIOnS and wfJIghts, width 277 mm (10.9 m), height 69 mm (2.7 In) , Depth 165 mm (6.5 m).
234
7000
TEK
SERIES
7000 SERIES VERTICAL SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
Minimum Deflection Factor
7A11
273
Low-capaci.
tance FET
probe
amplifier
5 mV/div
Accuracy" Without Probe
2% (integral)
PLUG·IN AMPLIFIER
PAGE
Performance Fealure
7100
FAMILY
~to
5°C)
250 MHz
Tr
1.4 ns
BW
250 MHz
Tr
1.4 ns
SIG OUT
BW
140 MHz
BW
200 MHz
Tr
1.8 ns
BW
200 MHz
Tr
1.8 ns
BW
170 MHz
Tr
2. 1 ns
SIG OUT
BW
70 MHz
BW
170 MHz
Tr
2. 1 ns
SIG OUT
BW
70 MHz
BW
150 MHz
Tr
2.4 ns
SIG OUT
BW
60 MHz
7904
R7903
7912AO" ,"'
BW
100 MHz
Tr
3.5 ns
SIG OUT
BW
60 MHz
BW
80 MHz
Tr
(Calculated)
5.0 ns
customize
amplifier
50 mV/div
-
7A18A
271
Dual·
channel
amplifier
5 mV/div
2%
7A19
274
Wide band·
width 50 Il
input
amplifier
10 mV/div
3%
7A22
273
Dc-coupled,
7A26
271
Dual.
channel
amplifier
amplifier
10 ~ V /div
7A24
274
Dual.
channel
SO il
amolifier
5 mV/div
5 mV/div
7A29
274
Widest
Bandwidth
Single
Channel
10 mV/div
2%
2%
2%
2%
~~~~~~?al
150 MHz
75 MHz
600 MHz
1 MHz
± 10%
400 MHz
200 MHz
1000 MHz
3.5 ns P6053B"
3.5 ns P6106·' .
5.4 ns P6055
105 MHz P6053B"
105 MHz P6106· '·
65 MHz P6055
0.38 ns
4.4 ns
1.6 ns
2.4 ns
4.7 ns
0.6 ns
± 350 ns
± 9%
O.S ns
1.8 ns
80 MHz
225 MHz
150 MHz
75 MHz
500 MHz
1 MHz
± 10%
350 MHz
200 MHz
500 MHz
4.4 ns
1.6 ns
2.4 ns
4.7 ns
0.8 ns
350 ns
± 9%
1.0 ns
1.8 ns
0.8 ns
70 MHz
140 MHz
15 MHz
70 MHz
300 MHz
1 MHz
± 10%
140 MHz
140 MHz
300 MHz
80 MHz
200 MHz
150 MHz
75 MHz
400 MHz"
± 10%
300 MHz
180 MHz
400 MHz
4.4 ns
1.8 ns
2.4 ns
4.7 ns
O.S ns
350 ns
± 9%
1.2 ns
1.9 ns
0.9 ns
80 MHz
200 MHz
150 MHz
75 MHz
400 MHz"
1 MHz
± 10%
300 MHz
180 MHz
400 MHz
4.4 ns
1.8 ns
2.4 ns
4.7 ns
0.9 ns
350 ns
± 9%
1.2 ns
1.S ns
O.S ns
75 MHz
170 MHz
150 MHz
75 MHz
250 MHz"
1 MHz
± 10%
200 MHz
170 MHz
250 MHz
4.7 ns
2.1 ns
2.4 ns
4.7 ns
1.5 ns
350 ns
± 9%
1.8 ns
2.1 ns
1.5 ns
60 MHz P6053B"
60 MHz P6106·'·
50 MHz P6055
55 MHz
70 MHz
15 MHz
55 MHz
80 MHz
1 MHz
± 10%
70 MHz
70 MHz
80 MHz
100 MHz P6053B"
100 MHz P6106·'.
65 MHz P6055
75 MHz
160 MHz
150 MHz
75 MHz
200 MHz
± 10%
200 MHz
150 MHz
200 MHz
3.5 ns P6053B"
3.5 ns P6106· '.
5.4 ns P6055
4.7 ns
2.2 ns
2.4 ns
4.7 ns
1.8 ns
350 ns
± 9%
1.8 ns
2.4 ns
1.8 ns
60 MHz P6053B"
60 MHz P6106· '.
50 MHz P6055
55 MHz
70 MHz
15 MHz
55 MHz
80 MHz
1 MHz
± 10%
70 MHz
70 MHz
80 MHz
100 MHz P6053B"
100 MHz P6106·'.
65 MHz P6055
75 MHz
150 MHz
150 MHz
75 MHz
175 MHz
1 MHz
± 10%
160 MHz
140 MHz
175 MHz
3.5 ns P6053B"
3.5 ns P6106·'·
5.4 ns P6055
4.7 ns
2.4 ns
2.4 ns
4.7 ns
2.0 ns
350 ns
± 9%
2.2 ns
2.5 ns
2.0 ns
55 MHz P6053B"
55 MHz P6106· ' .
45 MHz P6055
50 MHz
60 MHz
15 MHz
50 MHz
65 MHz
1 MHz
± 10%
60 MHz
60 MHz
65 MHz
75 MHz P6016
55 MHz P6055
65 MHz
100 MHz
100 MHz
75 MHz
100 MHz
± 10%
100 MHz
100 MHz
100 MHz
5.4 ns
3.5 ns
3.5 ns
4.7 ns
3.5 ns
350 ns
± 9%
3.5 ns
3.5 ns
3.5 ns
55 MHz P6016
45 MHz P6055
50 MHz
60 MHz
15 MHz
50 MHz
65 MHz
1 MHz
± 10%
60 MHz
60 MHz
65 MHz
65 MHz
60 MHz
80 MHz
65 MHz
80 MHz
80 MHz
80 MHz
80 MHz
6.7 ns
5.0 ns
6.0 ns
5.0 ns
5.0 ns
5.0 ns
5.0 ns
3.4 ns P6053B··
3.4 ns P6106·' .
5.4 ns P6055
100
100
65
100
100
65
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
P6053B"
P6106· '·
P6055
P6053B"
P6106· ' ·
P6055
1 MHz
7844/R
mf'
7700
FAMILY
7704A
OptS
~O to
O°C)
7704A
(0 to
50°C)
R7704
(0 to
50 °C)
7600
FAMILY
~~~~~~\f:~;
7A17
271
Low cost.
easy to
7104
7S00
FAMILY
&0 to
O°C)
7800
FAMILY
(0 to
35 °C)
BW
7A13
7A15A
7A16A
270
270
272
Differential de offset, Low cost
Wide band·
high.freq CMRR
conventional width con·
amplifier
input
amplifier
I
1 mV/div
5 mV/div
5 mV/div
0.5 mV/div)'2
1.5%
2%
2%
100 MHz P6053B"
100 MHz P6106·' .
80 MHz
225 MHz
65 MHz P6055
7603/R
7633/R
(0 to
50°C)
3.5 ns P6053B"
3.5 ns P6106·' .
5.4 ns P6055
95 MHz P6053B"
95 MHz P6106· '·
65 MHz P6055
3.7 ns P6053B"
3.7 ns P6106·' ·
5.4 ns P6055
100 MHz P6053B"
100 MHz P6106· '·
65 MHz P6055
3.5 ns P6053B"
3.5 ns P6106·' ·
5.4 ns P6055
7623A/R
7613/R
(0 to
50 °C)
7603Nl1"
(0 to
50 °C)
761 20 "
(0 to
40 °C)
5.0 ns P6016
6.4 ns P6055
6.0 ns
. , Accuracy percentages apply to all deflection fa ctors. Plug.in
gain must be set at the deflection factor deSignated on each
plug.in. When a probe is used, the gain must be set with the
calibration signal applied to the probe tip . The calibration
signal is supplied by an external calibrator whose accuracy is
within 0.25%.
' 2 Obtained with lOX gain at reduced bandwidth of 10 MHz.
' 3 Refer to Transient Digitizer, 7912AD not available with signal
outputs
'. Bandwidth is 325 MHz to 10 mV/div.
' 5 Bandwidth is 200 MHz at 10 mV/div.
'. All 7000 Series Plug.ins are compatible with the 7603N
Opt 11. However, they do not meet the rigid environmental
specification required by the military.
1 MHz
1 MHz
1 MHz
± 10%
350 ns
± 9%
Bandwidth with equivalent time sampling and time display
only.
Fully programmable mainframe. 7A 16P Programmable Am·
plifier recommended. 7A 16P provides 200 MHz, 1.8 ns in
7912AD and 80 MHz, 5.0 ns in 76120, see page 263.
P6053B has Trace Identify
" . P6106 has Ground Reference
"7
'8
235
7000
TEK REFERENCE
SERIES
TEK Lab Cart Model 3
Model 3 Lab Cart accepts all 7000 Series Oscilloscopes. A lockable drawer for storage and
a movable shelf for additional instrumentation
are included . The shelf accepts TM 500 Test
and Measurement Instruments, 5000 Series
Oscilloscopes, or 400 Series Oscilloscopes.
For full details see SCOPE-MOBILE Cart section, page 424.
SUMMARIZED CAMERA CHARACTERISTICS
LENS
FILM BACKS
RE COMMENDED
CAMERA
OSCILLOSCOPES
PERFORMANCE
FEATURES
AND
BENEFITS
C-51P
7904, R7903 ,
Fastest writing speed
7844,7704A
7854
with 0.5 mag lens
All except 7603
7603NllS
General-purpose
with 0.85 mag lens
1/1.9
General-pupose
at low price
f/2.8
0.67
0.65
10.2x 12.7cml
4 x 5 in
Polaroid Pack
4 x 5 in Graflok
416
Low cost
f/ 16
0.67 or
0.85
0.02
9.76 x 12.2 cm
Polaroid Pack
None
419
C-53P
C-59AP
7603
7603NllS
C-5C
All
MAXIMUM
RELATIVE
APERTURE
MAG
f/ l .2
0.5
RELATIVE
SPEED "
FIELD OF VIEW
(with 3.25 x 4.25 in
Polaro id Film
except where noted)
ORDINARILY
USED
OPTIONAL AND
INTERCHANGEABLE
PAGE
3.0
8 x l0 cml
Polaroid Pack
4 x 5 in Graflok
415
Polaroid Pack
4 x 5 in Graflok
415
3. 15 x 3.93 in
0.85
8 x 10 cml
1.0
3.15 x 3.93 in
selectable
'Rela tive light-gathering power.
C-50 Series Camera Adaptor, part number 016-0249-03, included wilh camera.
For full details see camera section, page 415.
Current Application Notes for 7000 Series·
Title
Featuring
Part No
Title
Featuri ng
Part No
ULTRASONIC MEASURE-
7fiJ3rT A22rTD 15rTB53A
AX-3681
7(xx) Senes digllal plug-Ins (counter-lImers.
A-3002
MENTS With digital accuracy
Timing measurements between nonadjacent pulses. Ultrasonic transducers
DIGITAL INSTRUMENTS
combined Within TektroniX
Oscilloscope give unparalleled
EASIER. FASTER. MORE
7885rT880
ACCURATE OSCilloscope
liming measurement
Delayed sweep & della lime
measurements
X-Y DISPLAYS With Interval
liming for measuring SOA
7D15rTA ISrTA22
x ·y power diSSipation measurements
AX-3957
DAC MEASUREMENTS:
The samphng oscilloscope
7S 14rTD 12JM2rTB92ArT904
MeaSUring DAC (digital analog converter
AX -3632
A-3269
settling time
SCR GATING WAVEFORM
70 t 2JM2rT A 16A
MEASUREMENTS With hlghresolution digital accuracy
(four compartment mainframes) SCR
measurements. Absolute and relative (two
point) voltage mOnltonng
Digital delay In an OSCilloscope
makes your radar pulse time
delay measurements qUicker,
eaSier, and more accurate
7011
The measurement of radar pulse delay
time IS given as an example of 7011
operation
AX-2659-2
MeaSUring time Interval
between non-adjacent digital
word train pulses or multiecho
radar pulses
7015
Demonstrates the ability of the 7015 to
measure the time between adjacent
pulses with digital counter accuracy
AX-2680-2
MeaSUring memory core I/O
Signals With digital accuracy
7(xx) Series Digital Plug -ins
AX-2686-1
MeaSUring diSC dnve time and
access voltages With TektroniX
7(xx) Senes Digital Plug-Ins
digital and analog analYSIS of complex
waveforms
'Check with your local sales office for availability.
236
7854IWAVEFORM CALCULATOR
Demonstrating baSIC operation, application
software for percent overshoot, data
monitoring and histogram.
AX -4281
GPIB COMMUNICATION
with the 7854
7854 /4052 and 7854/4924
AX-44t6
Pulse and digital timing meas'
urements-a better technique
7880rT885
USing storage to find trouble·
some logic ghtches
7633
Shows how the 7633 Storage OSCilloscope
can be used to capture and evaluate
Variable persistence storage
applications
76t3/5441
Bistable storage applications
Tektronix Storage Oscilloscopes.
featuring the 7854
A-2893-1
Types of 1/0 transfers , transmiSSion formats ,
and operational software in TEK BaSIC
compatible With any 4050 Series computer
AX ·3379-1
General overview of the operation of the
7885 and 7880 Delta-Time Measurement
Plug'lns
AX·3085
glitches
Demonstrates how digital plug-jns can be
used to make accurate pulse parameter
measurements both of amplitude and
pulse timing
7(xx) Series DIgital Plug-ins
Use a single CRT display to perlorm both
accuracy and capability
MEASUREMENT VARIETY
An Engineering challenge
approach
DVM 's, temperalure probes. sample-hold
modules) wllh apphcallon examples
AX-2687-1
AX ·3198
Describes various applications for variable
persistence storage oscilloscopes
AX·3t99
DescribeS various applications for
bistable storage oscilloscopes
Introduction to 7854 Oscilloscope Measurement to Programming Techniques
7854 Programming Techniques
AX -4682
TEK
7000 SERIES
NONSTORAGE MAINFRAMES
CONTENTS
7104 1 GHz General Purpose
....
7904/R7903 500 MHz
....
General Purpose .... ... ... ... .. ...... ... .... ..
7844/R7844 400 MHz Dual Beam
........
7704A/R7704 200 MHz General Purpose ....
7603/R7603 100 MHz General Purpose .....
7603N11 S Ruggedized
Oscilloscope System .......................................
238
240
242
244
246
248
A high performance instrument system begins with the basic oscilloscope building
block - the 7000 Series Mainframe. Each
mainframe consists of a cathode-ray tube , a
power supply, electron beam deflection systems , and the switching circuitry necessary
to integrate a versatile and complete measurement system .
The Tektronix 7104 is a 1 GHz oscilloscope
featuring the fastest rise time (350 ps) and
writing speed (20 cm/ns) available today.
Choose from a variety of features, including
bandwidth , dual-beam , alphanumeric displays, rackmounting , and three- or fourplug-in flexibility.
237
1 GHz
TEK GENERAL
PURPOSE OSCILLOSCOPE
7104
Ultra High Writing Speed
1 GHz at 10 mV/div
0.38 ns Risetime
200 psec/div Fastest Calibrated Sweep Rate
Horizontal Bandwidth 350 MHz
Phase Compensation Option-Phase
Matching to 250 MHz
CRT Readout
APPLICATIONS
High Speed Semiconductor Design
Laser and High Energy Research
Digital Communications
The 7104 has both the highest writing speed and
highest bandwidth available in a general-purpose
oscilloscope today.
The 7104 with 7A29 Amplifier plug-ins provides
1 GHz real-time vertical bandwidth at 10 mV/div.
Combined with the 7B1017B15 Time Base plugins, having fastest sweep speeds of 200 ps/div,
very high-speed signals can now be measured
with confidence.
The 7104's outstanding writing speed means
unsurpassed single-shot capability, with trace
brightness about one-thousand times that of
conventional oscilloscopes. Any single-shot signal
within the 7104's bandwidth can be seen directly
on the CRT in average room light. Also, singleshot photography is now simple and straightforward , using standard oscillographic cameras and
film without high-speed enhancement
techniques.
Horizontal bandwidth of 3SO MHz, with the X-V
phase compensation Option 02, gives accurate
X-V displays to 250 MHz. Designers can now
directly obtain V-I curves for high-speed switching
power supply evaluation or monitor performance
of digital communication systems using phase
constellation displays.
238
7000
TEK
SERIES
CHARACTERISTICS
1 GHz at 10 mV/div
Distinct Image Viewing
Circuit faults such as high frequency pulse overshoot and ringing can easily be observed with the 71 04 's 1 GHz bandwidth.
A digital circuit that shows no jitter on a conventional oscilloscope is found to have a 2.0 ns jitter when viewed with the
distinct image viewing capability of the 7104.
VERTICAL SYSTEM
Channels - Two left-hand plug-in compartments; compatible
wilh all 7000 Series Plug-ins. 8andwidth determined by mainframe and plug-in unit.
Vertical Display Modes Chopped Mode -
LEFT, ALT, ADD, CHOP, RIGHT.
Rep rate is ",, 1 MHz.
Vertical Trace Separation - Operative when any vertical signal is displayed with both A and 8 time bases. Positions 8
trace at least 4 div above and below A trace.
Delay Line
waveform.
Permits viewing leading edge of displayed
HORIZONTAL SYSTEM
Channels - Two right-hand plug-in compartments; compatible with the time bases of the 7810 and 7880 Series and the
7850A and 7892A. The 7850 Series (except the 7850A), the
7870 Series and the 7892 (non A) are not recommended. 7000
Series Vertical Amplifiers and specialized plug-ins may also be
used.
Horizontal Display Modes -
A, ALT, CHOP, 8 .
Fastest Calibrated Sweep Rate or 7815.
Chopped Mode -
200 psldiv with the 7810
Rep rate is ",,200 kHz.
Bandwidth - Dc to 350 MHz . With delay compensation (7104
Option 02 using 7A 19s or 7A29s, at least one of which has the
Variable Delay Option , 8 Horizontal compartment only), within
2· from dc to 50 MHz after adjusting variable delay for balance
at 35 MHz. Phase balance can be obtained at any frequency up
to 250 MHz. Phase shift is within 2· from dc to 50 kHz without
delay compensation.
Horizontal Bandwidth: 350 MHz
Writing Speed: 20 cm/ns
loo.lI
1,,0$
/'\
/ \
I \
I \
I
\\//",",,-/.___-1
OUTPUTS/INPUTS
+ Sawtooth - User selectable from A or 8 horizontal. Output
voltage is 50 mV/div (±5%) into 50 0,1 V/div (±10%) into
1 MO. Output R is ",,950 0.
+ Gate - Positive-going rectangular waveform user seiectable from A or 8 horizontal. Output voltage is 0.5 V (± 10%) into
50 0, 10 V (± 10%) into 1 MO. Output R is ",,950 0 .
Sig Out - Selected by 8 TRIGGER SOURCE switch. Output
voltage is 25 mV/div into 50 0, 0.5 V into 1 MO. 8andwidth
depends upen vertical plug-in. Output R is ",,950 0 .
Camera Power - Three-prong connector to the left of the
CRT provides power, ground, and remote single-sweep reset
access for C-50 Series Camera.
Probe Power - Two rear-panel connectors provide correct
operating voltages for two active probes.
Single-sweep Ready Indicators A and B - + 5 V, rear panel
8NC outputs for single sweep ready indications.
View of a single clocking pulse 0.8 ns rise and 2 ns pulse width.
CALIBRATOR
Voltage Output - Squarewave pesitive-going from ground.
Ranges are 40 mY, 0.4 V, and 4 V into 100 kr!; 4 mY, 40 mY,
and 0.4 V into 50 0 . Amplitude accuracy is within 1%; rep rate
is 1 kHz within 0.25%.
Current Output- 40 mA rectangular waveshape with optional
current-loop accessory (012-0341-00) connected to calibrator
output. Output R is 450 0.
The transient load line of a fast switching transistor in a power
supply prototype (switching time - l0 ns) is easily measured for
compliance with safe operating area. (Horizontal - V:
vertical- I).
GraticulelReadout, Single-shot- Ground closure, rear panel
8NC input initiates one frame of CRT read-out and the GRAT
ILLUM is illuminated for ",,0.5 s.
External Single-sweep Reset - Ground closure, rear panel
8NC , provides input to reset sweep.
POWER REQUIREMENTS
Power Requirements - Une voltage ranges, 90 to 132 V ac
and 180 to 250 V ac. Une frequency , 48 to 440 Hz. Maximum
pewer consumption, 215 W, 3.3 A at 90 V line, SO Hz.
Dimensions and Weights -
See page 234.
For Recommended Cameras -
Plug-in Compatibility
For Recommended Plug-ins -
See page 23S.
See page 234.
7104 ORDERING INFORMATION
(PLUG-INS NOT INCLUDED)
CRT AND DISPLAY FEATURES
7104 Oscilloscope ................•...•........ $20,160
CRT - Internal 8 x 10 div (0.85 cm/div) graticule with variable
illumination. Accelerating potential is 12.5 kV with P31 Phosphor standard.
Readout and Graticule Modes - Each continuous or pulsed
(pulse source selecton by front panel controls: + Gate, external, manual). The pulsed graticule is on for ",,0.5 s.
Min Photographic Writing Speed (using Polaroid Film
Type 106, 20,000 ASA wl out Film Fogging) - 20 cml ns (w/o
blue filter) . Phosphor : standard P31. Camera: Tektronix C-53,
f/ l .9, 1:0.85 lens.
Autofocus - Reduces the need for additional manual focusing
with changes in intenSity after focus control has been set.
Beam Finder -
x-v Horizontal Comp
Option 03 -
EMC Modification ........ _.. _...................... +$300
.__ ,__ ..•........ _...... _... +$300
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORDS AND PLUG OPTIONS
Plug-in compatibility. The 7104 is compatible with standard
7000 Series plug-in units that provide for full 7104 System
performance.
Limits display within graticule area.
External Z-Axis Input - 2 V pop for full intensity range. A
pesitive signal blanks the trace. Maximum input voltage is 15 V
(dc + peak ac) and pop ac. Input is dc coupled.
Option 02 -
The 7001, 7002 Logic Analyzers and 7020 Digitizer are not
recommended for use with the 7104 Mainframe. Such use
will void the 7104 warranty.
Option At -
Universal Euro 220 V/1SA, 50 Hz ............. _ NC
Option A2 -
UK 240 V/13A, 50 Hz .............. _.................. NC
Option A3 -
Australian 240 V/1 OA, 50 Hz ...................... Ne
Option A4 -
North American 240 V/15A, SO Hz ............. NC
7A29 - Vertical amplifier to bw of mainframe; 10 mV/div to
1 VIdiv vertical sensitivity.
7810 - Delayed timebase (similar to 7880) with 200 ps/div to
0.2 sl div calibrated sweep speed ; triggering up to 1 GHz.
78t5 - Delaying timebase (similar to 7885) with 200 psldiv to
0.2 s/div calibrated sweep speed; triggering up to 1 GHz ; capa·
ble of Mime measurements in conjunction with 7810.
239
500 MHz
PURPOSE OSCILLOSCOPES
TEK GENERAL
7904/R7903
500 MHz at 10 mV/div
0.8 ns Risetime
500 ps/div Fastest
Calibrated Sweep Rate
Greater Than 2.5 cm/ns Writing Speed
CRT Readout
Over 30 Compatible Plug-ins
900 MHz FET Probe Available
APPLICATIONS
Digital Design
Radar
Laser Research
The 7904 and 5.25 in rackmount R7903 are high
bandwidth, general-purpose oscilloscopes. The
7A 19 Amplifierl7904 Mainframe attains 500 MHz
at 10 mV/div. A 7A19 variable delay option allows
for the matching of signal transit times of two
plug-ins and their probes to better than 50 ps.
The P6201 IX FET probe gives you high impedance and wide bandwidth. It has a 900 MHz
bandwidth by itself, and in combination with the
7A 19/7904 , it provides a system bandwidth of
450 MHz at 10 mV.
The CRT, the major contributor to the performance of the 7904 and R7903, has good visual
brightness and an 8 x 10 cm display area.
CHARACTERISTICS
7904 and R7903 - VERTICAL SYSTEM
Channels - Two left-hand plug-in compartments; compatible
with all 7000 Series plug-ins. Bandwidth determined by mainframe and plug-in unit.
Modes 01 Operation Chopped Mode -
LEFT, ALT, ADD, CHOP, RIGHT.
Rep rate is ",, 1 MHz.
Trace Separation Range (Dual-sweep Modes) - The B
trace can be positioned lour divisions above or below the A
trace (7904 only).
Delay Line - Penmits viewing leading edge of displayed wavefonm when using 7B80 and 7B90 Series Time Bases. 7650
Series not recommendled.
7904 - HORIZONTAL SYSTEM
Channels - Two right-hand plug-in compartments; compatible with time bases of the 7B80 and 7B90 Series. 7000 Series
Vertical Amplifiers and specialized plug-ins may also be used.
Fastest Calibrated Sweep Rate 7B92A.
Chopped Mode -
500 ps/div with the
Rep rate is ",, 200 kHz.
X-Y Mode - Phase shift is within 2 · from dc to 35 kHz without phase correction (de to 1 MHz with phase correction, Option 02) between vert and horiz channels. Bandwidth is de to at
least 1 MHz.
240
R7903 -
HORIZONTAL SYSTEM
Single Channel - Right-hand plug-in compartment compatible with time bases of 7B80 and 7B90 Series. 7000 Series
Vertical Amplifiers and specialized plug-ins may also be used.
Fastest Calibrated Sweep Rate 7B92A.
7904 and R7903 -
500 ps/div with the
CRT AND DISPLAY FEATURES
Standard - Internal 8 x 10 cm graticule with variable illumination. Accelerating potential is 24 kV with P31 Phosphor
standard.
Option 01, Without CRT Readout -
No CRT readout.
Option 04, Max Brightness CRT With Reduced Araa - Internal 4 x 5 cm graticule with variable illumination. Accelerating
potential is 24 kV. Pll Phosphor provides max writing rate.
This provides extremely high photographiC and information
writing speed and increases the visibility of low-rep-rate, highspeed signals.
Option 78, Pll Phosphor
Option 10, Pulsed Graticule (R7903 Only) - Provides a
means of pulsing the graticule lights at a preset level coincident
with a single-shot event in one exposure. The graticule lights
may be pulsed by the event, an external ground closure, or a
front panel pushbutton . If the mainframe is equipped with CRT
readout, Option 10 provides additional controls and inputs for
CRT readout pulsed operation.
TEK
7000
SERIES
POWER REQUIREMENTS
7904 Power Requirements - Line voltage ranges, 90 to
132 V ac and 180 to 264 V ac. Line frequency , 48 to 440 Hz.
Maximum power consumption, 190 W, 2.5 A at 115 V line,
60 Hz.
R7903 Power Requirements - Line voltage ranges, 90 to
132 V ac and 180 to 264 V ac. Line frequency, 48 to 440 Hz.
Maximum power consumption, 160 W, 2 A at 115 V line,
60 Hz.
7904 INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Test adaptor , (012-0092-00) ; two 18 in test leads ,
(012-0087-00); 9 pin cable·mount plug, (134.0049-00).
R7903 INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Test adaptor , (012 - 0092 -00); two 18 in test leads ,
(012-0087-00); rack-mounting hardware.
Dimensions and Weights The R7903 requires only 5.25 in o ( rack height in a standard 19 in rack. It is (an-cooled and comes complete with slide-ut chassis
External Z·Axis Input - 2 V p-p for full intensity range from
dc to 2 MHz ; intensity range diminishes to 20% of full range at
10 MHz. A positive signal blanks the trace. Maximum input
voltage is 10 V (dc + peak ac) and p-p ac.
Autolocus - Reduces the need for additional manual focusing
with changes in intensity after focus control has been adjusted.
Belm Finder -
Limits display within graticule area.
OUTPUTS/ INPUTS
+ Sawtooth - Sawtooth starts 1 V or less from ground (into
1 Mil). Output R is 950 Il. Output voltage is 1 V/div ( ± 10%)
into 1 Mil, 50 mV/div ( ± 15%) into 50 Il.
+Gate - Positive pulse of the same duration and coincident
with sweep. Output R is 950 Il. Output voltage is 10 V ( ± 10%)
into 1 Mil. 0.5 V ( ± 10% ) into 50 Il. Risetime is 20 ns or less
into 50 II. Source is selectable from Main, Delay, or Auxiliary
Gate.
Option 04 - Maximum Brightness CRT With 8 x 10 cm
Display (specify phosphor) ........................................... +$350
Option 05 -
Line Frequency Change (50-400 Hz) ..... +$300
Option 06 - With Internal Spectrum
Analyzer Graticule .......................................................... + $50
CAMERA POWER OUTPUT
Three-prong connector to the left of the CRT provides power,
ground, and remote single-sweep reset access for the C-50
Sertes cameras.
Option 20 - IEEE Standard 488 Interface
for the 7020 only ......................................................... +$250
7603 CONVERSION KITS
CALIBRATOR
CRT Readout Order 040-0654-02' ................................. $850
Voltage Output Rectangular waveshape, positive-going
from ground (dc voltage available when selected by internal
jumper). Ranges are 40 mV, 0.4 V, 4 V into 1 Mil; 20 mV,
0.2 V. 0.4 V into 50 Il. Amplitude accuracy is within 1%
(+15"C to + 35 "C); within 2% (O"C to +50 "C). Rep rate is
", 1 kHz.
Current Output - 40 mA rectangular waveshape (dc current
available when selected by internal Jumper) with optional cur·
rent.loop accessory (012-0259-00) connected between 4 V and
ground pin Jacks.
POWER REQUIREMENTS
Sig Out - Selected by TRIGGER SOURCE switch. Output
voltage is 0.5V/div into 1 Mil. 25 mV/div into 50 Il. Output R is
950 n. Bandwidth depends upon vertical plug·in; see Vertical
System Specifications Chart.
Line Voftage Ranges 100. 110, 120, 200. 220, and
240 V ac ± 10%; internally selectable with quick.change
jumpers.
External Single·sweep Reset - Ground closure. rear panel
BNC provides input to reset sweep.
Option 05. Line Frequency Change (50-400 Hz) the R7603 and 7603 to 50-400 Hz operation.
Single·sweep Ready Indicator - Rear panel BNC provides
5 V for single·sweep ready condition.
Maximum Power Consumption -180 W, 2.0 A at 115 V line,
60 Hz. Cooling is provided by a fan.
Line Frequency -
50 Hz to 60 Hz (R7603 and 7603).
Converts
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
EMC Modilication Order 040-1000-00 ........................... $230
Power Supply to Light Plug·in Pushbuttons
Order 040-0686-01 ............................................................ $60
X·Y Horizontal Comp Order 040-0718-00 ..................... $410
R7603 CONVERSION KITS
CRT Readout Order 040-0674-02 .................................. $850
EMC Modilication Order 040-0955-00 ........................... $100
Power Supply to Light Plug·in Pushbuttons
Order 040-0686-01 ............................................................ $60
X·Y Horizontal Comp Order 040-0718-00 ..................... $410
PHOSPHOR OPTIONS (7603/ R7603)
Option 76 -
Option 78 - PII Phosphor .......................................... +$35
'Not A vai/able (or 7603Nll S.
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORD AND PLUG OPTIONS
(71103 and R7603)
The 20 in cable, for 7603 and R7603 , two·pin·to·BNC ,
(175-1178-00); CRT Filter (blue 337.1700-01); CRT Filter (clear
337-1700-04). The R7603 includes rackmounting hardware.
Option AI -
Dimensions and Weights -
See page 234 .
For Recommended Cameras For Recommended Plug·lns -
P7 Phosphor ............................................ + $35
Option 77 - P7 PhosphOr with Internal
Spectrum Analyzer Graticule ......................................... +$35
Universal Euro 220 V/16A, 50 Hz .............. NC
Option A2 -
UK 240 V/ 13A, 50 Hz ................................. NC
Option A3 -
Australian 240 V/10A, 50 Hz ...................... NC
Option A4 -
North American 240 V/ 15A, 60 Hz ............. NC
See page 236.
See page 234.
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES (R7603)
A field installable kit adds Option 20 to the standard R7603.
Intended for use with a previously purchased R7603. this kit
provides parts to connect the 7D20's IEEE Standard 488 Inter·
face to the R7603 mainframe.
'Order 040-1093-00
Five other field installable kits are available. one for each of the
international power cord and plug options, A I-A5. Contact
your local Tektronix Field Office for information.
• A 1 Universal Euro. Order 040-1094-00
'A2 UK. Order 040-1095-00
• A3 Australian. Order 040-1096-00
• A4 North American. Order 040-1097-00
• AS Switzerland. Order 040-1098-00
'Contact your local (ield office (or prices.
247
RUGGEDIZED
SYSTEM
TEK OSCILLOSCOPE
7603N11S
Ruggedized for Extreme Environments
Meets or Exceeds MIL-O-24311 (EC)
(AN/USM-218C Specifications)
Large, Bright Display - 6.5 in CRT (15 kV)
5 ns/div Delaying Sweep
0.5 mV Vertical Sensitivity
Three-plug-in Flexibility
Versatile Trigger-Source Selection
Pushbutton Switching
Illuminated No-Parallax Graticule
Color-keyed Panels
CHARACTERISTICS
ENVIRONMENTAL
Protective Cover with Accessories
The 7603N11S Ruggedized Oscilloscope System
meets the rigid environmental and electrical
specifications required by MIL-O-24311 (EC) and
appears on U.S. Navy QPL-24311 . The system
consists of a three plug-in mainframe, two singletrace amplifiers, a dual time base, and a frontpanel cover with probes and accessories.
Although the military spec requires only 50 MHz
performance, this system actually performs to
65 MHz. Other better-than-required specs include
operating altitude, sensitivity at reduced bandwidth with 10X gain, 'X' sensitivity in X-V mode,
triggering frequency range , delaying and delayed
sweep speeds, and CRT size.
The mainframe and plug-ins are compatible with
the Tektronix 7000 Series product line. The system does not have CRT readout, and it can 't be
used with the digital plug-ins.
248
Electromagnetic Interference - As per MIL-STD-462 performed by MIL-STD-461 for the following tests '
Temperature - Nonoperating : - 62 · C to + 75 · C. Operating :
- 2S · C to + 65 · C.
CE-Ol
30 Hz to 20 kHz
Power lead emission
CE-03
20 kHz to 50 MHz
Power lead emission
Humidity - 0 to 95% rh over entire temperature range , operating or nonoperating.
CS-Ol
30 Hz to 50 kHz
Power lead, radiation
susceptibility
Altitude - Nonoperating: Sea level to 15 000 m (50,000 It).
Operating : Sea level to 4500 m (15,000 It).
CS-02
50 kHz to 400 MHz
Power lead, radiation
susceptibility
CS-06
Spike Test
Power lead, spike
susceptibility
Shock (Operating) - Nine consecutive 400 pound hammer
blows without lailure from I, 3, and 5 It in vertical, horizontal,
and longitudinal axis as per MIL-S-901 lor Grade A, Class "
Type A for lightweight equipment.
RE-Ol
30 Hz to 30 kHz
Instrument radiation ,
magnetic
RE-02
14 kHz to 10 GHz
Instrument radiation ,
electric
Inclination (Operating) -
RS-Ol
30 Hz to 30 kHz
Instrument susceptibility,
magnetiC
RS-03
14 kHz to 10 GHz
Instrument susceptibility,
electric
Vibration (Operating) - 5 to 15 Hz at 0.060 in ± 0.012 in p-p
amplitude, 16 to 25 Hz at 0.040 in ± O.OOS in p-p amplitude, 26
to 33 Hz at 0.020 in ± 0.004 in p-p amplitude.
As per MIL-E-I6400.
Drip Proof (Nonoperating) -
As per MIL-STD-19S
Salt Spray (Nonoperating) -
As per MIL-E-I6400.
TEK
7000
SERIES
Reliability - Optimum perlormance and reliable service are
provided during continuous or interrupted operation. The MIL0-24311(EC) MTBF requirement of > 600 hrs is met as tested
under the following conditions: temperature + 40 ' C ± 2' C;
relative humidity 70% ± 5%; vibration 25 Hz at 0.040 in
± 0.008 in p-p amplitude for 10 minutes of each ·Power On ·
hour during each day of the 8 hr manned schedule; power cycled at 4 hr intervals with 10 min power oN for each 4 hr period
of the manned test schedule. An MTBF of > 2000 hrs was
achieved during testing.
VERTICAL SYSTEM
(Includes Two 7A15ANll Plug·ins)
Channels - Two left-hand plug-in compartments, with a delay
line which allows the leading edge of the displayed waveform to
be vieWed. All 7000 Series Plug-ins are compatible (except
those which require CRT readout).
Display Modes - LEFT, ALT, ADD, CHOP, RIGHT. Chopped
frequency is '" 1 MHz. Added mode displays signals algebraically with a CMRR of 20 :1 to 25 MHz.
Bandwidth /Sensitivity - Dc to 65 MHz from 5 mV/div to
10 V/div, accuracy within 2%, variable extends to 25 V/div.
Maximum sensitivity is 0.5 mV at 10 MHz with lOX gain. Accoupling lower - 3 dB point is < 2 Hz. Risetime is 5.4 ns with
< 2% aberrations.
Input Rand C -
1 Mil within 2%, < 27 pF.
Maximum Input Voltage Dc Stability -
400 V (dc + peak ac).
HORIZONTAL SYSTEM
(Includes One 7B53ANll Plug·in)
Triggering Frequency Range
Ac - 30 Hz to 50 MHz.
Dc - 30 Hz to 50 MHz.
System Includes - One each 7603Nll Oscilloscope, two
each 7A15ANII Amplifier Plug-Ins, one each 7B53ANII Time
Base, and one each C281 Cover with accessories.
Sweep Rate - 0.05 ~s/div to 0.5 s/div in 22 steps (1-2-5 sequence). The delayed sweep runs after delay time or is triggerable after delay time.
Sweep Accuracy - Within 3% from 50 ms/div to 0.5 ~s/div,
within 4% for all other sweep rates except the magnified Xl0
sweep rate of 5 ns/div, which is within 6%.
LEFT VERT, VERT MODE, RIGHT
X·Y Mode - The phase shift between vertical and horizonal
channels is < 2' from dc to 35 kHz. Bandwidth is at least
2 MHz. Risetime is < 175 ns. Using the 7B53AN11 Time-Base
external amplifier, 10mV, 100 mY, and 1 V sensitivities ( ± 10%)
are available. Input Rand C for 7B53AN11 is 1 Mil within 2%,
20 pF within 2 pF. Any vertical plug-in, such as the 7A15AN11 ,
may be used in the horizontal compartment, providing a greater number of sensitivities for calibrated X-Y displays.
15 kV.
Graticule - Internal 8 x 10 cm with variable illumination. The
6.5 in CRT permits 2 cm of linear overscan in both axes, making a total viewing area of '" 10 x 12 cm.
7853AN11 Time Base
Plug-in (TD-1085/U)
Order 7B53ANM ......••.. ,.•........•..••...••.• $1,905
Accelerating Potential Phosphor -
P31 .
CRT Controls - Located on front panel are Focus, Intensity,
Graticule Illumination, Beam Finder, and Trace Rotation. Astigmatism is an internal control.
Calibrator (BNC Connector on Front Panel) 1 kHz squarewave within 20%.
1 V within 1%,
Sweep Modes -
Normal, Auto, Single Sweep.
Delay Time - Multiplier range is 0 to 10 times the Time/Div
setting. Accuracy is within 1% from 0.5 s/div to 0.5 ~s/div ,
within 2% from 5 s/div to 1 s/div. Incremental linearity is within
0.2% of full scale. Jitter is < 1 part in 20,000 of lOX time/div
setting.
Option A2 -
UK 240 V/13A, 50 Hz """.""""",.,,""",,.,,. NC
Option A3 -
Australian 240 V/l0A. 50 Hz " ...." •..... " __ •.,, NC
Option A4 -
North American 240V/15A, 60 Hz ." ... ". __ •.. NC
C281 COVER WITH ACCESSORIES
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
(ALL PACKAGED IN COVER)
to 5 s/div,
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORD AND PLUG OPTIONS
Option Al - Universal Euro 220 V/16A, 50 Hz _""",, ____ ,, NC
POWER REQUIREMENTS
MAIN (DELAYING) SWEEP
~s/div
'CRT readout not available.
Input Voltages - 100, 110, 120, 220, and 240 V ac ± 10%
internally selectable with quick-ehange Jumpers with 47.5 to
440 Hz single phase line frequency. Maximum power consumption is 125 W.
The cover provides protection during transporl and packages
the included accessories.
Sweep Accuracy - Within 3% from 0.05
within 5% at 5 ns/div.
C281 Cover W/Accessories
Order 016-0553-00 •.••.••.••..•.•...•..••.•.•••••.. $300
Horizontal- Main Sweep + 5 V, Delayed Sweep +5 V, Main
Sweep Gate +2 V, Delayed Sweep Gate + 2 V, Delayed Trigger + 1 V with pulse width of > 50 ns. All amplitudes are minimum and measured when working into at least 100 k!1 and
15 pF.
Sweep Display Modes - Main Sweep, Main Sweep Intensified by Delayed Sweep, Delayed Sweep.
Sweep Rate - 0.05 ~s/div to 5 s/div in 25 steps (1-2-5 sequence). 5 ns/div fastest calibrated sweep rate, obtained with
Xl0 magnifier. The uncalibrated variable is continuous between
steps and to 12.5 s/div.
To Order Separately:
7603N11 Oscilloscope(OS-245(P)/U)
Order 7603N11 •....••••••••.•••••••...•..••••••••• $3,720
7A15AN11 Amplifier
Plug-in (AM-6565/U)
Order 7A15ANM .....................•......••...... $790
CRT
OUTPUTS
Channels - One right-hand plug-in compartment. All 7000
Series Plug-ins are compatible (except those which require
CRT readout).
ORDERING INFORMATION
7603N11 S Oscilloscope System
(AN/USM-281C) 7603NMS .....•........... $7,580
External Z-Axis Input (BNC Connector on Rear Panel) - 2 V
p-p for full intenSity range from dc to 2 MHz, intenSity range
diminishes to 20% of full range at 10 MHz. Maximum input
voltage is 10 V (dB + peak ac).
< 1 div/hr drift at 25 ' C.
Internal Trigger Modes VERT.
DELAYED SWEEP
Triggering (Source /Sensltivity) - Internal 0.3 div to 10 MHz
increasing to 1.5 div at 50 MHz. External, 0.1 V to 10 MHz
increasing to 0.5 V at 100 MHz. Input R and C is 1 Mil within
2%, 20 pF within 2 pF.
The P6OO6 Probe packages (010-0127-00); two 8 ft long 50 Il
BNC Cables (012-0366-00); two BNC Female to UHF Male
Adaptors (103-0015-00); two BNC Male to UHF Female Adaptors (103-0032-00); two BNC Male to binding post adaptors
(103-0033-00); two BNC T Connectors (103-0030-00). One set
of technical manuals (not packaged in cover).
Dimensions and Weights -
See page 234.
For Recommended Cameras -
See page 236.
Triggering (Source/ Sensitivity) - Internal 0.5 cm to 50 MHz.
External, 0.25 V to 20 MHz, 0.5 V to 50 MHz. Ext -;- 10,2.5 V
to 20 MHz, 5 V to 50 MHz . Triggering extends to 100 MHz
with reduced sensitivity in both Internal and External Modes.
Input Rand C is 1Mil within 2%, 20 pF within 2 pF.
Triggering Frequency Range - Ac, 30 Hz to 50 MHz ; ac If
ReJ . 30 kHz to 50 MHz; ac HF ReJ. 30 Hz to 50 kHz; dc, dc to
50 MHz. With external level range, slope is ± 30 V.
249
TEK
7000 SERIES
CRT STORAGE MAINFRAMES
Storage mainframes in the 7000 Series offer
a full selection of stored writing speeds:
from = 0.03 cm/lJ.s for mechanical, spectrum analysis, or TOR applications, to
2500 cm/lJ.s for capturing fast single events
such as high speed digital logic. A selection
of storage modes offers the following
features :
CONTENTS
Nonstorage Mainframes .... ...... .. .
...... 237
Storage Mainframes ................ ..
..... . 250
High Performance
Digitizing Mainframes ...................................... 258
Bistable ....................... Long View Time
Variable
Persistence .................... High Contrast
Displays
FAST Bistable
FAST Variable
Persistence ........... Provides Maximum
Stored Writing Rate
Plug-Ins ..... .. ...... .... .. .. .. . ...... .. .. .... ... .. .... ........ .. 267
7613
7623A
Variable
Persistence
7633
FAST
Multimode
7834
FAST
Multimode
FAST
Multimode
8
500 ns
250 ns 125 n.
O.S ns
7
6
5
iii
z
0
4
en
:;
e.w
3
c
.....
::>
:::i
Q.
:E
2
<
Graph shows the stored writing speed
needed to display a given sinewave or
step rise time at a given amplitude.
5 MHz 10 MHz 20 MHz
250
Captures Fast Single
or Multiple Events
SINE WAVE FREQUENCY
TEK
Readout is stored with the waveform on several CRT storage
scopes including the 7613, 7623A, 7633 and 7834. Multimode
storage is available on the 7623A, 7633, and 7834.
7000
SERIES
7000 Series Storage Oscilloscopes
Storage, as it applies to most instruments in the
Tektronix 7000 Series, involves techniques for
capturing and retaining signals within the cathode-ray tube itself, or as numeric values in digital
memory.
Bistable CRT Storage
Bistable storage, available as one storage mode
on the 7834, 7633 and 7623A Mainframes, employs a mesh between the electron gun and the
CRT phosphor. It features bright, long lasting
displays with reduced contrast.
Why Store?
Capturing an event for detailed analysis is perhaps the most obvious application for a storage
CRT, but many other situations also call for its
unique advantages. Some examples include capturing the entire display of a slowly occurring
signal. .. observing signal changes during circuit
adjustment ... comparing incoming signals with a
standard ... increasing the brightness of a repetitive signal for viewing in normal ambient
light .. .reducing flicker or noise ... baby-sitting, or
unattended monitoring for a transient event...and
enhancing other recording techniques such as
photography.
Variable Persistence CRT Storage
Variable persistence storage is available in the
7613, 7623A, 7633, and 7834 Mainframes. It features bright, high contrast displays and controlled
persistence.
Storage Features
Since 1962, when Tektronix introduced phosphor
target bistable storage in the 564, techniques for
capturing and retaining waveforms have grown at
an explosive rate in order to keep pace with
measurement demands.
However, the language of storage-such terms
as bistable, variable persistence, mesh transfer
and digital storage-frequently presents as much
confusion as the measurement that must be
made.
Characteristics of individual 7000 Series mainframes employing storage techniques are listed
on pages 250 through 266. A review, though, of
storage concepts should prepare the reader to
evaluate the various alternatives more knowledgeably.
A front-panel persistence knob provides control
of the decay (fade-away) rate of the stored
image. The rate can be varied from almost instantaneous disappearance to a view time of greater
than 15 s in the 7613 (30 s in the 7623A, 7633, and
7834).
Fast Multimode CRT Storage
Fast multi mode storage, available in the 7623A,
7633, and 7834, provides four storage modes.
The four modes combine the previously discussed bright bistable and variable persistence
storage modes with fast bistable and fast variable persistence.
The display characteristics of fast bistable and
fast variable persistence are the same as bistable
and variable persistence respectively. In either
fast storage mode the trace image is first written
on a fast mesh, then transferred to a long
retention mesh for viewing.
As the name implies, the fast storage mode
provides increased storage writing speed. For
example, in the reduced scan display mode, the
variable persistence writing speed of 5.4 cm/lts is
increased to 2500 cm/lts by selecting fast variable persistence.
Digital Storage
The fundamental difference between the digital
storage scope and the CRT storage scope is the
form of storage. Digital scopes store data representing waveforms in a digital memory; CRT
storage scopes store waveforms within the CRT.
251
STORAGE OSCILLOSCOPE
TEK FAST
7834
2500 cm/jJ.s Stored Writing Speed
Stores Single-shot Risetimes as
Fast as 1.4 ns
Dc to 400 MHz Bandwidth
Multimode Storage
I
r
Long View Time
APPLICATIONS
Laser Fusion
Digital Design
Radar/Lidar
.,
The 7834 Storage Oscilloscope has a stored
writing speed of 2500 cml jJ.s, enabling storage of
single-shot rise times to 1.45 ns, 3.6 cm high, at
eight-divisions amplitude, reduced-scan mode.
The 7834's mainframe bandwidth is 400 MHz
(nonstore). The system bandwidth may vary from
160 MHz to 400 MHz depending on the plug-in
selected .
This instrument has four storage modes-bistable
and variable persistence , FAST bistable and
FAST variable persistence.
FAST VARIABLE PERSISTENCE provides the
maximum stored writing rate of 2500 cmijJ.s (reduced scan) . View time is at least 30 s.
FAST BISTABLE increases bistable writing rates
to 350 cml jJ.s (reduced scan).
BISTABLE provides stored displays with long (30
minute) view time.
VARIABLE PERSISTENCE gives high contrast displays of both single-shot and repetitive phenomena. When viewing changing waveshapes, variable
persistence provides continuous bright displays
of new information as old information fades from
the CRT.
The four-compartment flexibility means that more
than one measurement can be performed at the
same time without switching plug-ins. The 7834
also offers auto-erase for automatic display
updating ... a save control for 30 times longer
viewing ... gated readout which prevents the
blooming that tends to occur between sweeps
with non gated readout. .. and an adjustable
multitrace delay for varying the viewing time prior
to the next sweep in the FAST transfer mode.
The multi mode storage unit is designed for single
shot, low-rep-rate or fast pulse analysis.
CHARACTERISTICS
CRT AND DISPLAY FEATURES
VERTICAL SYSTEM
Graticule - Internal variable illuminated graticule. 8 x 10 div
(0.9 cm/div) gratule in lull scan and 8 x 10 div (0.45 cm/div) in
reduced scan.
Channels - Two left-hand plug-in compartments ; compatible
with all 7000 Series plug-ins.
Modes of Operation Mainframe Bandwidth in.
LEFT, ALT, ADD, CHOP, RIGHT.
400 MHz with 7 A29 Amplilier plug-
Mainframe Step Response lier plug-in .
Chopped Mode -
0.9 ns or less with 7 A29 Ampli-
Option 01, without CRT Readout and Probe Power letes CRT readout and probe power.
Accelerating Potential in reduced scan mode.
Phosphor -
Rep rate is ",, 1 MHz.
Delay Line - Permits viewing leading edge 01 displayed wavelorm (not recommended for use with 7B50 Series time bases).
Trace Separation Range - In dual-sweep modes, B trace
can be positioned four divisions above or below the A trace.
HORIZONTAL SYSTEM
"" 10 kV lull scan mode, and 12 kV
P31 .
CRT Display Modes - Nonstore, Bistable, Variable Persistence, FAST Bistable and FAST Variable Persistence (lull and
reduced scan).
Persistence - (Variable Persistence mode only) controls rate
of continuous erasure of the variable persistence and fast variable persistence stored displays.
Auto Erase -
Continuously variable from
< 1 s to > lOs.
Input - Two right-hand plug-in compartments ; compatible
with all 7000 Series plug-ins. 7000 Series vertical amplifiers
and specialized plug-ins may also be used.
Multitrace Delay - Adjusts the transfer cycle time in the
FAST transfer modes. Continuously variable from < 1 s to
Modes of Operation -
Save - Prevents display from being aCCidentally erased, and
provides up to 30 times longer viewing times in all modes.
A, ALT, CHOP, B.
Fastest Calibrated Sweep Rate Chopped Mode -
1 ns/div.
Rep rate is ",,200 kHz.
X-Y Mode - Phase shift between vertical and horizontal channels is within 2 · Irom dc to 35 kHz without phase correction (de
to 1 MHz with phase correction, B horizontal only, Option 02).
Bandwidth is de to at least 1 MHz.
> 4 s.
External Z-Axis Input - 2 V peak-te-peak for full intensity
range from dc to 1 MHz. Positive signal blanks the trace. Maximum input voltage is 15 V (de plus peak ac).
Auto-Focus - Maintains CRT focus following changes in display intensity after focus control has been initially set.
Beam Finder -
252
De-
Limits display within graticule.
TEK
Display
Mode
Stored
Wri ting
Speed
View
Time
7000
SERIES
STORAGE WRITING SPEED
CALIBRATOR
FULL SCAN (Center 6 x 8 div at 0 9 cm/div)
Voltage Output - Squarewave, posiUve-going from ground.
Ranges are 40 mY, 0.4 V, and 4 V Into 100 kll ; 4 mY, 40 mY,
and 0.4 V into 50 n. Amplitude aocuracy is within 1%; rep rate
is 1 kHz within 0.25%.
7834 Storage Oscilloscope ............... $11,705
Current Output - 40 mA available through CALIBRATOR
output with optional BNC to current loop adaptor.
Option 01 -
Fast
Variable
Persistence
Fast
Bistable
Variable
Persistence
Bistable
270
45
1.8
0.027
cm/~s
cm/~ s
2 div/~s
.03
cm/~s
300
cm/~s
d i v/~s
50
div/~s
div/~s
Dimensions and Weight -
30 min"
30 s·
30 min
(PLUG· INS NOT INCLUDED)
For Recommended Plug·ins -
See page 236.
See page 234.
Line Voltage Ranges 1.4 s
0.9 s
1.4 s
0.9 s
REDUCED SCAN (Center 8 x 10 div at 0.45 cm/div)
Display
Mode
Stored
Writing
Speed
View
Time
Line Frequency -
90 to 132 V ac and 180 to 250 V ac.
X-V Mode Phase Correction """""""." +$250
Option 03 -
EMC Modification """""""""""""."",,. + $300
CONVERSION KITS
48 to 440 Hz.
Maximum Power Consumption -
CRT Readout Order 040-0811 ·02 ""."" ",,",,""""""",,. $480
215 W.
EMC Modification Order 040·0880·00 """".""""",,... ,,. $500
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Gray CRT filter. installed (378-0625.02); green CRT filter
(378-0625-08); power cord (161·0066.00).
Fast
Variable
Persistence
Fast
Bistable
Variable
Persistence
Bistable
2500
350
5.4
0.09
Option A2 -
UK 240 V/13A. 50 Hz """"""""".. "" ...,," " NC
c m/~ s
cm/~s
cm/~s
cm/~s
Option A3 -
Australian 240 V/l 0A, 50 Hz "."" " " ,,""",,.
Option A4 -
North American 240 V/1 5A, 60 Hz """""". NC
5,500
d i v /~ s
776
div/~s
12
div/~s
0.2
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORD AND PLUG OPTIONS
Option AI -
div/~s
30 s·
30 min"
30 s'
30 min'
1.4 s
1.4 s
0.9 s
0.9 s
Universal Euro 220 V/16A. 50 Hz ." " ... "" .. NC
He
STEP RISETIME (n8)
'"
Erase
Time
Option 02 -
Cradle Mount Adaptor For Rackmounting.
Order 040-0560-00 ."" """" .",,"""""""""""" """",, .. ,," $445
POWER REQUIREMENTS
'"
Erase
Time
OPTIONS
Without CRT Readout and Probe
Power """ .""""".""""""""" ,,",,",,""""""""" """,,.,, -$300
See page 234.
For Recommended Cameras 30 s'
ORDERING INFORMATION
250
125
50
25
12.5
5.0
2.5
1.25
0.6
2
5
10
20
50
100
200
400
8
'V,ew times are at full stored dIsplay mtenslty. They may be
increased more than 30 times by using reduced intensity in the
SAVE display mode.
7
"Save intensity at minimum.
Fast Variable Persistence Writing Speed
Scan
Mode
Reduced Scan
5,500 div /~ s
(0.45 cm/div)
Full Scan
300 div/~s
(0.9 cm/div)
Sweep
Speed
~1
Peak·to·Peak
Sinewave
Step
Response
7.1 div
250 MHz
7.7 div
1.4 ns
8 div
221 MHz
8 div
1.45 ns
3.2 div
30 MHz
3 div
10 ns
6.4 div
15 MHz
5 div
16.6 ns
ns/div
~ 10
ns/div
OUTPUTS/INPUTS
+ Saw100th - Positive going with baseline at 0 V ± 1 V into
1 Mil. Voltage is 1 V/div ( ± 10%) into 1 Mil, 50 mV/div ( ± 15%)
into 50 n. Output R is ",,950 Il.
+Gate - Positive pulse of the same duration and coincident
with sweep. Output voltage is 10 V ( ± 10%) into 1 Mil, 0.5 V
( ± 10%) into 50 Il. Output R is ",, 950 n. Source is selectable
from A Gate, B Gate or A Delayed Gate.
Vertical Signal Out - Selected by A TRIGGER SOURCE
switch. Output voltage is 0.5 V into 1 Mil, 25 mV into 50 n .
Output R is ",,950 n. Bandwidth depends upon vert plug.in.
-
6
E
5
UJ
4
(.)
C
::J
I-
-
..J
3
Q.
:E
«
~
a:
2
o
L,
Remote Single Sweep Reset, Remote Save and Remote
Erase - Rear panel BNC connector inputs, ground closure
activated.
Remote FAST Transfer Gate - TTL compatible. Low to high
transition enables high speed target to receive information to
be stored; high to low transition initiates transfer from high
speed target to storage target.
Camera Power Output - Three·prong connector to the left of
the CRT provides power, ground, and remote single-sweep reset access for the C-50 Series cameras.
Probe Power - Two rear-panel connectors provide operating
voltages for two active probes such as P6201 .
SINEWAVE FREQUENCY (MHz)
Graph showing the stored writing speed needed to display a given sinewave or step risetime at a given amplitude.
253
STORAGE OSCILLOSCOPES
TEK MULTIMODE
7633/R7633
1000 cmll's Stored Writing Speed
Long View Time
Multimode Storage
Dc to 100 MHz Bandwidth
APPLICATIONS
Digital Design
Destructive Testing
Communications
The Tektronix 7633 Storage Oscilloscope provides 2200 div/l's (1000 cm/l's) stored writing
speed and 100 MHz bandwidth . The instrument
has three display modes-store, nonstore, and
save-and four storage modes-bistable, variable persistence, fast bistable , and fast variable
persistence. The maximum writing speed of 1000
cm/l's (using the center 8 x 10 reduced scan divisions, 0.45 cm/div) is achieved in reduced scan
mode.
This multimode storage instrument allows for retention and viewing for fast-rise, low-repetitionrate, single-shot, or slow-moving waveforms.
Characteristics are common to the 7633 and the
7623A unless noted.
CHARACTERISTICS
VERTICAL SYSTEM
Channels - Two left-hand plug-in compartments; compatible
with all 7000 Series plug-ins. Bandwidth determined by mainframe and plug-in unit.
Modes of Operation Chopped Mode Delay Line
LEFT, ALT, ADD, CHOP, RIGHT.
Rep rate is ",, 1 MHz .
Permits viewing leading edge of displayed
waveform .
HORIZONTAL SYSTEM
Channel - One right-hand plug-in compartment ; compatible
with all 7000 Series plug-ins.
Fastest Calibrated Sweep Rate -
5 ns/div .
X-Y Mode - The phase shift between vertical and horizontal
channels is < 2 ' from dc to 35 kHz. Bandwidth is dc to at least
2 MHz.
CRT AND DISPLAY FEATURES
CRT - Internal 8 x 10 div (0.9 cm/div) and 8 x 10 div
(0.45 cm/div) graticule with variable illumination.
Phosphor -
P31.
Option 01 -
No CRT readout.
Accelerating Potential reduced scan mode.
",, 8.5 kV in normal mode, 10 kV in
Storage Display Modes - Nonstore, FAST variable persistence, FAST bistable, variable perSistence, bistable. Full or reduced scan may be selected on the 7633 in all display modes.
Select normal scan to view the entire CRT; select reduced
scan for the fastest writing rate.
Persistence -
Variable. When set to maximum, provides the
STORAGE WRITING SPEED
Full Scan (7633 and 7623A)
Display
Mode
Fast
Variable
Persistence
FAST
Bistable
Persistence
Bistable
Stored
Writing
Speed
135
45
0.45
0.027
cm/~s
cm/~s
cm/~s
cm/~s
30 s-
30 min
minimum
30 s·
30 min
minimum
1.4 s
0.9 s
0.9 s
View
Time
'"
Erase
Time
longest retention of high contrast stored displays, without the
characteristic fading of variable perSistence.
Autoerase -
Variable up to 10 s.
Save - Prevents erasing and storing additional displays; also
extends view time in variable perSistence mode.
External Z-Axis Input - 2 V pop for useful intenSity range
from de to 2 MHz; intenSity range diminishes to 20% of full
range at 10 MHz. A positive signal blanks the trace. Maximum
input voltage is 10 V (dc + peak ac) and pop ac.
Autofocus - Reduces the need for calibrated manual focusing with changes in intenSity after focus control has been set.
Beam Finder -
Limits display within graticule area.
Variable
1.4 s
Reduced Scan (7633 Only)
Display
Mode
Fast
Variable
Persistence
FAST
Bistable
Variable
Persistence
Bistable
Store
Writing
Speed
1000
180
1.35
0.09
cm/~s
cm/~s
cm/~s
cm/~s
View
Time
30 s·
30 min
minimum
30 s·
minimum
1.4 s
1.4 s
0.9 s
0.9 s
30 min
""
Erase
Time
·These times are at full stored display intensity. They may be
increased more than 30 times by using reduced intensity in the
save display mode.
254
TEK
7000
SERIES
STEP RISETIME (ns)
250
125
50
25
12.5
5
2.5
10
20
50
100
SINEWAVE FREQUENCY (MHz)
Graph showing the stored writing speed needed to display 8
given sinewave or step risetime at a given amplitude.
OUTPUTSI INPUTS
+ Sawtooth - Sawtooth starts 1 V or less from ground (into
1 Mil). Output voltage is 50 mV/div (± 15%) into 50 11, 1 V/div
( ± 10%) Into 1 Mil. Output R is 950 11 within 2%.
+Gate - Positive pulse of the same duration and ooincident
with sweep. Output voltage is 0.5 V ( ± 10%) into 50 11, 10 V
(± 10%,) into 1 Mil. Risetime is 20 ns or less into 50 11, output
R is 950 11 within 2%. Source is selectable from main, delay, or
auxiliary gate.
Vertical Signal Out - Selected by TRIGGER SOURCE
switch. Output Voltage is 25 mV/div into 50 11, 0.5 V/div into
1 Mil. Bandwidth depends on vertical plug-in. Output R is
950 11 within 2%.
7623A/R7623A
135 cm/J.ls Stored Writing Speed
Long View Time
Multimode Storage
FAST VARIABLE PERSISTENCE WRITING SPEED
Scan
Mode
Reduced Scan-2200 div /~s
(0.45 cm/div)
Sweep
Speed
Ultrasonics
Power Supply Design
Step
Response
7.1 div
100 MHz
7.7 div
3.5 ns
(7633
only)
8 div
3.7 ns
.. 5 ns/div
8 div
89 MHz
Dc to 100 MHz Bandwidth
APPLICATIONS
Peak-to-Peak
Sinewave
3.2 div
15 MHz
Full Scan
150 div/~s
(0.9 cm/div)
.. 50 ns/div 6.4 div
7.5 MHz
External Single-Sweep Reset - Ground closure; rear panel
SNC provides input to reset sweep.
Remote Erase - Ground closure; rear panel BNC provides
input to erase stored trace.
CAMERA POWER OUTPUT
Three-prong connector to the left of the CRT provides power,
ground and remote single-sweep reset access for the C-50 Series cameras.
3 div
20 ns
7633
7623A
5 div
33 ns
"Applies to 7633 only.
Component Testing
The Tektronix 7623A Storage Oscilloscope has all
the features and performance of the 7633 except
the reduced scan mode.
The R7633 and R7623A require only 5.25 inches of rack height in
with slide-out chassis tracks.
a standard 19 inch rack. They are fan cooled and come complete
255
SERIES
TEK 7000
VARIABLE PERSISTENCE
STORAGE OSCILLOSCOPES
CALIBRATOR
Voltage Output - Rectangular waveshape, positive-going
from ground (de voltage available when selected by internal
jumper). Ranges are 40 mY, 0.4 V, 4 V into 1 Mil; 20 mY,
0.2 V, 0.4 V into 50 Il. Amplitude accuracy is within 1% (15 to
35 · C) ; within 2% (0 to 50 · C). Rep rate is ,., 1 kHz.
Current Output - 40 rnA dc or 40 rnA rectangular waveshape
with optional current-loop accessory (012-0259-00) connected
between 4 V and ground pin jacks.
POWER REQUIREMENTS
Line Voltage Ranges - 100, 110, 120, 200, 220, and 240 V
ac ± 10%; internally selectable with quick change jumpers.
Line Frequency -
50-60 Hz.
Option OS, Line Frequency Change (50-400 Hz) - Converts
the 7633, R7633, 7623A and R7623A to 50-400 Hz operation.
Maximum Power Consumption - 180 W, 2.0 A at 115 V line,
60 Hz. Fan cooling is provided for both models.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
20 in cable, two-pin-to-BNC, (175-1178-00); CRT filter, green
(378-0625-08). The R7633 and R7623A include rackmounting
hardware.
Weights and Dimensions -
See page 234 .
For Recommended Cameras For Recommended Plug-ins -
See page 236.
See page 234 .
ORDERING INFORMATION
(PLUG-INS NOT INCLUDED)
7633 Storage Oscjlloscope ." ••.•• ".".". $7,765
R7633 Storage Oscilloscope ._"_,,_,,._. __ $8,165
7623A Storage Oscilloscope ""_,,_,,_,,_ $5,950
R7623A Storage Oscilloscope "._,,_,,_._ $6,350
OPTIONS
Option 01 -
Without CRT Readout .. ,..... _.................. - $300
Option 03 -
EMC Modification .........,................ _._ ..... +$300
Option 05 -
Line Frequency Change (50-400 Hz) _.... +$300
CONVERSION KITS
CRT Readout Cabinet
Order 040-07 48-01 .......................................................... $850
Rackmount Order 040-0759-01 ..................................... $850
EMC Modification Cabinet
Order 040-0663-01 .......................................................... $525
Rackmount Order 040-0678-01 ..................................... $285
Power Supply to Light Plug-in Push buttons.
Order 040-0686-01 ............................................................ $60
7613
Variable Persistence Storage
4.5 cm/I'-s Stored Writing Speed
Dc to 100 MHz Bandwidth
5.25 inch Rackmount Height
APPLICATIONS
Audio
Mechanical Transducers
Spectrum Analysis
The Tektronix 7613 Storage Oscilloscope offers
variable persistence operation with a stored writing speed of 5 div/l'-s or nonstorage operation .
Stored traces may be viewed up to 60 minutes on
a display area of 8 x 10 div (0.9 cm/div).
256
CHARACTERISTICS
VERTICAL SYSTEM
Channels - Two left-hand plug-in compartments ; compatible
with all 7000 Series plug-ins. Bandwidth determined by mainframe and plug-in unit ; see Vertical System Specifications
Chart.
Modes of Operation Chopped Mode Delay Line
waveform .
LEFT, ALT, ADD, CHOP, RIGHT.
Rep rate is = 1 MHz.
Permits viewing leading edge of displayed
HORIZONTAL SYSTEM
Channel - One right-hand plug-in compartment; compatible
with all 7000 Series plug-ins.
Fastest Calibrated Sweep Rate -
5 ns/div.
X-Y Mode - The phase shift between vertical and horizontal
channels is within 2· from dc to 35 kHz. Bandwidth is dc to at
least 2 MHz.
TEK
7000
SERIES
Phosphor -
P31 .
Option 01 -
No CRT readout
Accelerating Potential -
8.5 kV.
> 4.5
cm/~s .
View Time - The view time is the amount of time the stored
signal can be viewed before it fades away.
At the maximum writing speed the view time is 15 s or 0.25 min
with the stored intensity control fully cw o Adjusting the stored
intensity ccw will reduce the stored writing speed. but view time
can be increased up to 5 minutes (see the chart below).
w
500
250
125
}.IS
ns
ns
ns
0
Z
5
UJ
4
(PLUG-INS NOT INCLUDED)
7613 Storage Oscilloscope .____________ .... $5,025
\
R7613 Storage Oscilloscope _______________ $5,425
•
~ :
>'5
wE
SAVE TIME
CONTROL
~ :1 5.0
II:
2
a:
7613 OPTIONS
\~
~
3
,~
I~
:E
:I
2
Erase Time -
0.5 s or less.
Persistence - The persistence control also varies the view
time. The persistence can be adjusted from almost instantaneous disappearance (fade away). to off. which provides the
view time selected by the stored intensity control.
Save - Prevents erasure of the stored display and activates
the save time control.
Save Time Control - Allows an extension of the view time
(see Storage View Time Chart above).
External Z-Axis Input - 2 V peak-te-peak for full intensity
range from dc to 2 MHz; intensity range diminishes to 20% of
full range at 10 MHz . A positive signal blanks the trace. Maximum input voltage is 10 V (dc + peak ac) and peak-te-peak ac.
Autolocus - Reduces the need lor additional manuallocusing
with changes in intensity after focus control has been set.
Beam Finder -
Limits display within graticule area.
OUTPUTS/ INPUTS
+Sawtooth - Sawtooth starts 1 V or less from ground (into
1 Mil). Output voltage is 50 mV/div ( ± 15%) into 50 II. 1 V/div
( ± 10%) into 1 Mn. Output R is 950 II within 2%.
+Gate - Positive pulse 01 the same duration and coincident
with sweep. Output voltage is 0.5 V ( ± 10%) into 50 II. 10 V
( ± 10%) into 1 Mil. Risetime is 20 ns or less into 50 II; output R
is 950 !l within 2%. Source is selectable from main. delay. or
auxiliary gate.
Sig Out - Selected by TRIGGER SOURCE switch. Output
voltage is 25 mV/div into 50 II. 0.5 V/div into 1 Mil. Bandwidth
depends upon vertical plug-in; (see Vertical System Specifications Chart). Output R is 950 II within 2%.
0.1
0.2
Without CRT Readout ........................... -$300
Option 03 -
EMC Modification .................................. +$300
Option 05 -
Line Frequency Change (50-400 Hz) ..... +$300
Option 08 -
Protective Panel Cover .......................... + $1 00
Option 01 -
Without CRT Readout ........................... -$300
Option 03 -
EMC Modification .................................. +$300
Option 05 -
Line Frequency Change (50-400 Hz) ..... + $300
R7613 OPTIONS
Option 06 - Special Internal Graticule
(Spectrum Analyzer) ....................................................... +$50
\
1
Option 01 -
Option 06 - Special Internal Graticule
(Spectrum Analyzer) ....................................................... +$50
\
0
1,
1.0
0.25 :-:-_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _...,.........:..:"""-.::a---.;;=...,
0.1
1.0
5.0
STORED WRITING SPEED
(div/~I at Maximum Persistence)
See page 236.
See page 234.
ORDERING INFORMATION
\
::J
...J
Q.
See page 234.
For Recommended Plug-Ins -
C
!:::
Dimenllona and Weight -
\
6
:E
20 in cable. twe-pin-te-BNC. (175-1178-00); CRT filter. (gray.
378-0625-02). The R7613 includes rack mounting hardware.
For Racommanded Cameras -
«
60.0
i=
~
1.25
}.IS
7
Nonstore Mode - For displaying waveforms in the conventional (nonstorage) mode.
Maximum Stored Writing Speed -
2.5
8
Store Mode - For displaying waveforms using the variable
persistence storage feature.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES (FOR 7613 AND R7613)
STEP RISETIME (ns)
CRT AND DISPLAY FEATURES
Variable Persistence Storage CRT - Internal 8 x 10 div
(0.9 cm/div) graticule with variable illumination.
7613 CONVERSION KITS
CRT Readout Order 040-0656-02 .................................. $850
EMC Modification Order 040-0663-01 ........................... $525
0.5
2
Graph showing the stored writing speed needed for
sinewave or step risetime at a given amplitude.
X-Y Horizontal Comp Order 040-0718-00 ..................... $410
a
given
Power Supply to Light Plug-In Pushbuttons
Order 040-0686-01 ................ ............................................ $60
R7613 CONVERSION KITS
CAMERA POWER OUTPUT
CRT Readout Order 040-0676-02 .................................. $850
Three-prong connector to the left 01 the CRT provides power.
ground. and remote single-sweep reset access for the C-50
Series cameras.
Power Supply to Light Plug-In Pushbuttons
Order 040-0686-01 ............................................................ $60
CALIBRATOR
Voltage Output - Rectangular waveshape. positive-going
from ground. (Dc voltage available when selected by internal
jumper.) Ranges are 40 mY. 0.4 V. 4 V into 1 Mil; 20 mY.
0.2 V. 0.4 V into 50 II. Amplitude accuracy is within 1% (15 to
35 · C); within 2% (0 to 50· C). Rep rate is = 1 kHz.
EMC Modification Order 040-0678-01 ........................... $285
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORD AND PLUG OPTIONS
Option AI - Universal Euro 220 V/16A. 50 Hz .............. NC
Option A2 - UK 240 V/ 13A. 50 Hz ................................. NC
Option A3 - Australian 240 V/ l0A. 50 Hz ...................... NC
Option A4 - North American 240 V/15A. 60 Hz ............. NC
Current Output - 40 rnA dc or 40 rnA rectangUlar waveshape
with optional current-loop accessory (012-0259-00) connected
between 4 V and ground pin Jacks.
POWER REQUIREMENTS
Line Voltage Ranges - 100. 110. 120. 200. 220. and 240 V
ac ± 10%; internally selectable with quick change jumpers.
Line Frequency -
50-60 Hz.
Option OS, Line Frequency Change (50-400 Hz) the 7613 and R7613 to 50-400 Hz operation.
Converts
Maximum Power Consumption -180 W. 2.0 A at 115 V line.
60 Hz. Fan COOling is provided lor both models.
External Single-Sweep Reset - Ground closure; rear panel
BNC provides input to reset sweep.
Remote Eraae - Ground closure ; rear panel BNC provides
input to erase stored trace.
...
"
'"
"
r
,
••
"
••
I
••
The R7613 requires only 5'1. in of rack height in
chassis tracks.
a standard 483 mm (19 in) rack. It is fan cooled and comes complete
with slkJe.<)ut
257
TEK
HIGH PERFORMANCE
DIGITIZING MAINFRAMES
CONTENTS
7854 Waveform Processing Oscilloscope ... .
390AO Programmable Waveform Digitizer ...
76120 Programmable Waveform Digitizer ...
7912AO Programmable Waveform Digitizer.
7000 Series Reference .................................
7000 Series Non-Storage Mainframes .. ....
7000 Series CRT Storage Mainframes ......
7000 Series Plug-Ins .....................................
259
261
263
265
218
237
250
267
IEEE STANDARD 488
COMPATIBLE
Especially designed for precise automatic
waveform measurements in demanding applications in R&D and production
environments.
High Performance Digitizing Mainframes offer wide performance capabilities suited to
today's demanding measurement needs.
Depending on mainframe, capture high or
low speed signals that are repetitive or single shot. Configure Mainframes to your individual needs from a choice of over 31 plugins. The 7854 combines outstanding analog
and digital performance with microprocessor-based waveform processing whereas
the 76120 and 7912AD combine outstanding analog and digital performance with full
programmability. All mainframes are fully
GPIB compatible.
Adjunct to the 7000 Series digitizing mainframes is the SONyrrEKTRONIX 390AD.
This new addition to the Tektronix waveform
digitizer family features dual-channel, dualtime-base operation and is fully programmable over the GPIB.
Digital Storage
The fundamental difference between the
digital storage scope and the CRT storage
scope is the form of storage. Digital scopes
store data representing waveforms in a digital memory; CRT storage scopes store
waveforms within the CRT. Digital storage
requires digitizing and reconstruction processes. "Digitizing" consists of "sampling"
and "quantizing." Sampling is the process of
obtaining the value of an input signal at discrete points in time; quantizing is the transformation of that value into a binary number
by the analog-to-digital converter (ADC) in
the digital scope . You determine how often
digitizing occurs by the time base. The time
base uses a digital clock to time the analogto-digital (NO) conversion and to store the
data in memory. The rate at which this happens is the digitizing rate (or sampling rate) .
Once the data is in the digital memory, it
can be read out and reconstructed for displaying or further waveform processing.
258
Store Repetitive Signals up to 400 MHz
with Standard Plug-ins, and up to 14
GHz with the 7S12 Sampler
Digital Storage with Waveform
Processing
Common Waveform Measurements at
the Touch of a Button
Keystroke Programming
GPIB Interface
SERIES
TEK 7000
400 MHz
WAVEFORM PROCESSING OSCILLOSCOPE
7854
The 7854 complies with IEEE Standard 488-1978.
--------
, __
' __
c _ _:._
U,,""'\\\\\: :\,'"
-•
Waveform Parameters at the Touch of a Key
Dc to 400 MHz Bandwidth @ 10 mV/div
Calibrated Sweep Rates to 500 ps/div
o-c
Stores Repetitive Waveforms up to 400 MHz
Single Shot Events up to 50 !'s/div
(with 7B87 Time Base)
Dcoefe ere
Signal Averaging
Pretrigger (with 7B87 Time Base)
Resolution up to 0,01 div on Stored Data
(10 bits)
Choose 128, 256, 512, 1024
Points/Waveform
Keystroke Programming (up to 2000 Key
Strokes)
GPIB Interface (Standard)
APPLICATIONS
Power Supply Testing
Fiber Optics
The 7854 Digital Storage/Real-time Oscilloscope
represents a unique approach to today's test and
measurement problems. It combines the features
of a high performance real-time oscilloscope with
state-of-the-art digital storage and waveform processing. When integrated with any of a wide
variety of 7000 Series plug-ins, it becomes a very
powerful measurement system. The 7854 offers
programmable measurement routines, GPIB (IEEE
Standard 488) interface for mass data and program storage plus simultaneous display of real
time and stored waveforms. The 7854's on board
memory can store up to 40 waveforms and 1000
lines of programming.
Mainframe and calculator keyboard functions provide cursor control and waveform parameter information at the touch of a button, e.g., maximum , minimum, peak-to-peak, rise. Additional
features on the calculator keyboard enable
arithmetic manipulation of waveforms such as
differential, integral, log , and absolute value.
~ .
••
•
pre trigger data may be varied continuously from
10 divisions of pretrigger to 10 divisions of
posttrigger.
Signal averaging can recover signals buried in
random noise and improve measurement accuracy. One or two cursors are selectable for voltage
and time measurements. One cursor provides
voltage measurements referenced to ground and
time measurements referenced to time zero. Two
cursors enable c.time and c.voltage measurements. Cursors may· also be used to bracket an
area of interest for measurement consideration.
The 7854's key stroke programming, with its easyto-use editing and debugging features, assures
repeatable measurement results and lowers the
skill level needed to operate the system. Measurement loops can be written to save time, log
results and make pass/fail decisions. Full subroutine and conditional branching capabilities are
provided.
For single-shot applications, the 7887 Time Base
plug-in allows storage of events that occur prior
to a trigger (pretriggering) . The amount of
VERTICAL REAL TIME SYSTEM
Input - Two plug-in compartments; compatible with 7000 Series plug-ins.
CHARACTERISTICS
Modes of Operation - LEFT, ALT, ADD, CHOP, RIGHT.
Mainframe Bandwidth - 400 MHz with 7A29 or 7AI9 Amplifief plug-in.
Mainframe Step Response - 0.9 ns or less with 7A29 or
7A 19 Amplifier plug-in.
Chopped Mode - Chop rate is = 1 MHz.
Delay Line - Permits viewing leading edge of displayed waveform (7850 Series time bases not recommended for 7854 except 7850A).
Trace Separation Range - In dual-sweep modes, 8 trace
can be positioned four div above or below the A trace.
CRT AND DISPLAY FEATURES
CRT Display Modes
SCOPE (Conventional display.)
STORED (Digital data display .)
80TH (Stored mode plus real time waveforms.)
PROGRAM ENTRY (User program text display.)
259
7000
MHz
WAVEFORM PROCESSING OSCILLOSCOPE
TEK 400
Conventional Scope: In the SCOPE mode.
the 7854 provides a complete plug.in scope
giving standard displays like other Tektronix
high performance scopes.
Storage Scope: Risetime is calculated by
pushing a single key. Time and voltage differ·
ences between cursors are shown on the line
above risetime.
HORIZONTAL REAL TIME SYSTEM
Input - Two plug·in compartments; oompatible with 7000 Series plug·ins. 7000 Series vertical ampliflefs and specialized
plug·ins may also be used:
Mode. of Operation - A. ALT. CHOP. B.
Faltest Calibrated Sweep Rate - 0.5 ns/div.
Chopped Mode - Rep rate is ",,200 kHz.
X· Y Mode - Phase shift between vertical and horizontal chan·
nels is within 2' from dc to 35 kHz without phase oorrection.
(dc to 1 MHz with phase correction . B horizontal only .
Option 02).
• Note: See plug.in compatibility for exceptions for digital
storage.
PROGRAM STORAGE
Keystroke programming allows the mainframe to remember a
sequence of keystrokes (with remote calculator keyboard or
GPIB:)
Editing - Line by line editing capability.
"Note: Mainframe vertical and horizontal modes and a/l other
keys except edit commands are programmable.
DIGITAL STORAGE
Equivalent Time Bandwidth - 400 MHz. See 7000 Series
system bandwidth specifications.
Accuracy - Refer to plug.in specifications.
Acquisition Channels - One or two simultaneous channels
(Plug.in CHOP mode not valid).
Acquilition Window - ± 5 divisions from center screen both
vertical and horizontal.
Relolutlon
Vertical - 0.01 div.
Horizontal- Selectable points/waveform on remote keyboard.
Fixed at 512 points with Option 00.
Horizontal Relolution (diva)
Polntl/Waveform
0.01
0.02
0.04
0.08
1024
512
256
128
PLUG·IN COMPATIBILITY
Most 7000 Series plug.ins are compatible in the standard oscil·
loscope display mode. The 7L5 and 7L 18 Spectrum Analyzers
require factory modification for optimum use with digital stor·
age operation. The 7001. 7002 and 7Tll are not oompatible in
STORED mode.
The 7B87 provides pretrigger for the 7854. Pretrigger allows
you to view what has occurred before the trigger event in single
shot applications. The amount of pre·trigger time is determined
by the Acquire·Stop delay time setting. The total amount of
pretrigger is 0.2 to 9.9 times the time/div setting.
Single Shot Performance - Using 7B87 with 7854 Internal
clock.
Faatest Sweep (T1me/Div)
50~s
100~s
200 ~s
500~s
Points/Waveform
128
256
512
1024
OUTPUTS/INPUTS
+ Sawtooth - Positive.going with baseline at 0 V ± 1 V into
1 Mil. Voltage is 1 V/div ( ± 10%) into 1 Mil. 50 mV/div ( ± 15%)
into 50 II. Output R is ",,950 II.
260
SERIES
Multiple Storage and Calculation: Volts. cur·
rent. and power are a/l shown on the display.
Power (V - . 1) is calculated with two
keystrokes.
Waveform Processing: Keystroke Program.
ming enables the user to design measure..
ment routines tailored to individual tests or
experiments.
MEMORY FORMAT
STANDARD
Points Per Waveform·
128
Maximum No of Waveforms
16
I
I
256
I
I
8
Maximum No of Constant Registers
Maximum No of Prog Commands plus lines
512
4
OPTION 20
I 1024
I
2
128
I
256
40
I
20
I
I
512
10
OPTION 00
I 1024
I
5
512
1
50
100
0
920
2000
0
·Unless otherwise selected. default value is 512 at power·up.
+ Gate - Positive pulse of the same duration and coincident
with sweep. Output VOltage is 10 V ( ± 10%) into 1 Mil. 0.5 V
( ± 10%) into 50 II.
Output R is ",,950 11. Source is selectable from A gate. B gate.
or DELAYED gate.
Vertical Signal Out - Selected by A TRIGGER SOURCE
switch. Output voitage is 0.5 V/div into 1 Mil. 25 mV/div into
50 II. Output R is ",,950 II. Bandwidth depends upon vertical
plug.in.
Remote Single Sweep Reset sure activated.
Rear panel BNC. ground clo-
TTL Output - Rear panel BNC. TTL output under remote
keyboard controi (SWH and SWL).
External Z·Axls Input - 2 V p-p for full intenSity range from
de to 1 MHz. Positive signal blanks the trace. Maximum input
voltage is 15 V (de plus peak ac).
Came.. Power Output - Three·prong connector to the left of
the CRT provides power. ground. and remote single-sweep reo
set access for the C·50 Series cameras.
Memory Back·Up Power Input - 6.0 V to 6.5 V at 0.7 amp to
preserve stored data if mainframe's power is interrupted.
CALIBRATOR
Voltage Output - Squarewave. positive.going from ground .
Ranges are 40 mY. 0.4 V. and 4 V into 100 kll; 4 mY. 40 mY.
and 0.4 V into 50 11. Amplitude accuracy is within 1%; rep rate
is 1 kHz within 0.25%.
Current Output - 40 mA available through Calibrator output
with optional BNC to current loop adaptor.
POWER REQUIREMENTS
Line Voltage Ranges - 90 V·132 V. 180 V·250 V.
Line Frequency -
48-440 Hz.
Maximum Power Consumption -
230 W.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Power cord (161 ·006&'00); BNC-to-BNC cable (012·0208-00).
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dimensions Malntrame
Width
Height
Depth
Wavetorm Calculator
Width
Height
Depth
Cord Length (within 70 mm)
mm
305
348
627
mm
277
69
165
142
Weights
kg
Net
Shipping
20.4
28.2
In
12.0
13.7
24.7
in
10.9
2.7
6.5
5.6
Ib
45.0
62.0
IEEE STANDARD 488 INTERFACE
Standard - Conforms to IEEE Standard 488·1978.
Interface Functions Subset Implemented :
SHI
AH 1
T5
L3
SRI
RLI
DCl
DTI
Complete Source Handshake
Complete Acceptor Handshake
Talker Function
Listener Function
Complete Service Request Capability
Complete Remote/Local Capabiiity
Complete Device Clear Capability
Com lete Device Tri er Ca abilit
I/O Records - Wavelorms constants. program text. and dis·
play text.
End of Me..age Terminator (Selectable In TALK/LISTEN
mode tor EOI or LF/EOI). - Compatible with Tektronix and
other popular controllers.
Device Addre.. - Selectable via rear panel switch.
Remote Operation - All keystroke functions and vertical and
horizontal modes can be remotely operated via the GPIB.
ORDERING INFORMATION
(PLUG· INS NOT INCLUDED)
7854 Oscilloscope (including remote
calculator keyboard) ........................... $13,750
Option 02 - x·y Phase Correction ............................ +$150
Option 03 - EMC Modification .................................. +$300
Option 78 - Pll Phosphor .......................................... + $35
Option 00 - Delete GPIB and Remote Keyboard .
one waveform storage ................................................. - $500
Option 20 - 4k Expanded Memory.
040·0941·00 ................ ........... ................. ..................... + $500
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORDS & PLUG OPTIONS
Option AI - Universal Euro 220 V/16A.50 Hz ................
Option A2 - UK 240 V/13A.50 Hz ..................................
Option A3 - Australian 240 V/l0A. 50 Hz ......................
Option A4 - North American 240 V/15A. 60 Hz .............
NC
NC
NC
NC
7887 Time Base required only for
pretrigger and single shot digitizing .... $1,575
The 7854 I. allo available as a WP1310 Signal Proce..lng
Sy.tem. This IYltem I. a synerglltic combination ot the
Tektronix 7854 Oscilloscope and 4052 Graphic Computer.
Together, these two In.truments automate the entire wave·
form test and measurement proce.s. from acquisition and
calculation to storage and display formatting.
Tektronix ofte.. lervlce training cla.s.s on the 7854 Wave·
torm ProceSSing Oscillolcope. For turther training Intorma·
tlon, contact your local Sales/ Service Office or request a
copy of the Tektronix Service Training Schedule on the reo
tum card In the center ot this catalog.
SONYi'TEKTRONIX@
-
•
CH 1
t.IH'UT ftANGI! {Offill
",.,UT
RA"O'
....
,IMnl
.............
CHZ
u"".
!:!::
y;J
'"'0
'fOC
m •
390AD
The 390AD complies with IEEE Standard 4881978 and with Tektronix Standard Codes and
Formats.
True Dual Channel 30 MHz Sampling Rate
(60 MHz in Single Channel Mode)
10-Bit Resolution
T.UO MOOt IUC MODe
MOItIo!
C'LO
g D..
...
[J
•
'"' -'
0
m
OL~'
CU"SOfl
LAlCH
(f] J~J.
DLV CLiI
... ,.
MfM LATCH
•
o
'Rill
2048 Word Memory Per Channel
(4096 Single Channel Mode)
[!]
lOC:"'~
DIe'CIU!MIi!NT / INC Ill t: MI!NT
Features include 10 bit vertical resolution , dualchannel synchronized digitizing, pretriggering and
posttriggering, sample-rate switching during acquisition, internal cursors for two-point time or
voltage measurements and 2048 words of memory per channel. Excellent dynamic accuracy is
achieved using a two-stage flash-conversion
process.
r-'lOT-,
~c:::@
C
Used for low-to-medium-speed signals, the
390AD Programmable Waveform Digitizer provides crystal-controlled, 3O-MHz sampling on two
channels. Or, a single channel of data may be
digitized at up to 60 megasamples per second.
~fUNCTlON---,
OISP'LA"
DI"lA., TIME
. ...~~0
.".'
=-:' ::
g @ .Q,..
.-GITTIIIG
o
I'fITlto!
•
':::~l
DOD ~0
0 0 0
IOUIIICI!
oc
AfA'I
1'U!AOOUT
,- ,-, -, -, -,
,-aLO"",
tlfll'UT IIANGI/Off,U
1I1.\,IT
-
~
TIII!GOfJIIlIVlL
OC
O".U
PROGRAMMABLE
WAVEFORM DIGITIZER
",'''OTl
• o
The X versus Y display mode coupled with the
shift mode function provides a powerful tool for
visual comparison of related phenomena.
To ensure reliable operation the 390AD includes
built-in self calibration and self-test features that
are automatically employed at power-on and may
be activated during operation by the user.
A A A A A A AAl A A
I\
\
I \ I Ii i \ i Ii
r\ I\
' \ . i ,. \
I
I
\i
\!
II.!
i \
,; \ i !
i \
I\
I \
,I \
i II
! !\!I
\!
I
V V V V V V VV V v
.----t------+
- - -- ~-- -----.I.-~
Cursor-Based Measurements
Sample-Rate Switching
Direct Plotter Output Capabilty
•
i
Figure 3. Two cursors may be positioned by the user or
APPLICATIONS
'J!!/;;~::, ~i:::~i~~:~:;~e; r;,/::eoo;;:~=:,s ~,v:;~r:;
absolute values may be directly read from the LED display, or
sent to a controller. Positioning may be precisely accomplished
with the aid of the "zoom" feature.
Extracting Information from Signals Containing Components from dc to 15 MHz
Ultrasonics/Stress/Strain
Mechanical/Vibration
Audio
Flflure I. Photo showing sample of Rate Switching. In this
example switching occurs at the I024th sample, to extend the
display window. The sample rate can be either increased or
decreased at the trigger point. A minor time discontinuity may
occur at the trigger point under some conditions.
ATE
Laser Spectroscopy
Biomedical Research
LlDAR
Geo-Seismic
Figure 2. The 390AD display is set to X vs Y mode. Rolling
channell or 2 will produce a "correlation" indicative figure.
Figure 4. Complex manual set-ups may be avoided by recording the desired instrument settings for a particular measurement on a system peripheral device, then sending the Englishlike command string to the 390AD. (e.g., the above signal was
digitized with a horizontal record of 4k samples as per the
instructions of the 4052A Desktop Computer (Figure 5 followingpage)).
OUTPUTS
CRT Display
X - 1 V pop Ramp. (Changeable to 5 V pop by internal strap)
8 ms: Dual. 16 ms: CH 1 only. Mag gain X1 to X10 variable.
Y - 1 V p-p (Changeable to 5 V pop by internal strap).
Z - 0 to 1 V, (changeable to 0 to 5 V by internal strap), selectable polarity.
X-Y Plot - Output Voltage: 0 to 5 V. Plot Speed: 20, 50,
100 ms/word. Auto Slow. Auto Fast Mode: (Changeable by internal strap).
Rectangular 1 kHz ( ± 10- 5 ), 4 V ( ± 1%).
Voltage Calibrator -
Rear Panel Connectors - CRT-X, CRT-Y, CRT-Z, INT ClKOUT, EXT ClK-IN , EXT ARM-IN, EXT DlY ClK-IN, PLOT-X,
PlOT-Y, PLOT-PEN, WRITE END, GPIB.
Standard Ftgure 5. 390AD operating under control of a TtJlctronix 4052A Desktop Computer equipped with signal pr0C9ssing ROM Packs
IEEE STANDARD 488 iNTERFACE
iEEE Standard 488-1978.
Interface Functions DC1 , CO, DT1 .
SH1 , AH1 , T6, l4, SR1 , Rll , PPO,
Interface Control Message SPE-SPD, IFC.
GTl, llO, SDC-DCl, GET,
Programmable Functions - All inslrument setting and operating modes are programmable, except power switch, verticaV
horizontal position, horizontal mag, and external clock switch.
Format - Commands in ASCII , Waveform data in 2 byte/point
high byte first .
ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS
Temperature Range - Operating : 0 to 40· C. Nonoperating:
- 25 to + 70·C.
Altitude
Operating - Sea level to 4570 m (15,000 It).
Nonoperating - Sea level to 15 200 m (50,000 It).
390AD Rear Panel connectors and switches
line Voltage Range ac (230 V).
DIGITIZING
CHARACTERISTICS
Vertical Resolution -
VERTICAL
line Frequency -
10 bits ('".,.).
Sensitivity - ± 100 mV to ± 50 V full scale (200 mV pop to
100 V pop) 9 steps, 1-2-5 sequence.
Input Rand C -
Aperture Jitter (Including Internal Clock) -
Two, single ended.
1 M(l ± 2% ; ",, 24 pF.
Input Dc Offset Voltage Accuracy: < 0.5%.
0 to ± 99% full scale, 1% step.
Effective Bits
.. 1 MHz
.. 8.5
Automatic Calibration
Gain Accuracy - ± 0.4%
Dc Drift Accuracy - < ± O.1%.
TIME-BASE A AND B
Sample Rate
Internal - CH 1 Only: 5 Hz to 60 MHz, 23 steps, 1-2-5 sequence except 30 MHz and 60 MHz. DUAL: 5 Hz ",,30 MHz,
22 steps.
External - Dc to 60 MHz.
Clock -
TRIGGERING
Coupling -
Internal CH 1 and CH 2 or external.
Positive, negative, both.
Trigger Sensitivity
Trigger
Frequency
Renge
Minimum Signal
Required
Internal
External
Ac
25 Hz to 15 MHz
30 lSB
300 mV pop
HF REJ
25 Hz to 50 kHz
30 lSB
300 mV pop
Dc
Dc to 15 MHz
30 lSB
300 mV pop
Arming -
Modes - Auto, Norm, Single.
Pretrigger Range
CH 1 Only Mode - 0 to 4092.
Dual Channei Mode - 0 to 2046.
Posttrigger Range
in
17.6
6.0
21.3
Weights
kg
Ib
Net (without accessories)
15.5
34.0
ORDERING INFORMATION
390AD
Option 10 -
Time
Base
Vertical
Mode
Range
A
Dual
CH 1 only
A+ B
Duai
CH 1 only
o to 9998
o to 9998
o to 2046
o to 4092
$14,530
Rackmount 390AD ................................ +$250
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORD AND PLUG OPTIONS
Option AI - Universal Euro 220 V/16A, 50 Hz .............. NC
Option A2 - UK 240 V/13A, 50 Hz ................................. NC
Option A3 - Australian 240 V/10A, 50 Hz ...................... NC
Option A4 - North American 240 V/15A, 60 Hz ............. NC
Option A5 - Switzerland 220 V/1OA, 50 Hz ................... NC
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
390AD Service Manual Order 070-4452-00 .................... $25
A+B Time Base
Pretrigger Mode - Sample frequency A is switched to B at
trigger. Recording stops at dlelayed trigger. The transition point
(switch point) is weil dlefined.
Posttngger - Sample frequency A is switched to B at delayed
trig and recording stops alter total of 2048 (or 4096) samples.
Stored digital data are addressable by key entry while monitoring cursors on the waveform.
Readout Display - 5 digit lED (Reads voltage difference on
the same waveform or between CH 1 and CH 2, absolute voltage, time interval, and 1fT.
AUTO , MANual, EXTernal.
'For further information refer to HANDSHAKE Vol 5 No I,
33-A-4463
262
446
152
540
Width
Height
Depth
STANDARD ACCESSORIES
Power cord (161-0066-00); GPIB cable (012-0630-03); two 4A
fast-bloW fuses (159-0017-00); 390AD Programming Aid
(070-4467-00).
A Time Base - Recording is taken at one rate (sample frequency A) continuously.
Ac, dc, HF REJ.
Level Range
Internal - 0 to ± 99% full scale, 1% step.
External - ± 4.95 V, 0.05 V step.
Coupling
.. 7.5
Record Length
Dual Channel Mode - 2048 words/channel.
CH 1 Oniy Mode - 4096 words.
60 MHz ± 10 ppm, crystal-controlled.
Sources Slope -
... 10 MHz
mm
Dimensions
150 ps, nominal.
Signal Frequency
Bandwidth - Dc to 15 MHz ( - 3 dB); lower - 3 dB point, Ac
coupled: 10Hz.
200 W.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dynamic Accuracy· (at Sampling Frequency 30 MHz)
Maximum Input Voltage
Dc Coupled - 250 V (dc + peak ac).
Ac Coupled - 500 V (dc + peak ac).
48 to 440 Hz.
Power Consumption -
Sample Rates
Dual Channel Mode - 30 MHz.
CH 1 Only Mode - 60 MHz.
Input Channels -
90 to 132 V ac (115 V); 180 to 250 V
The 624 monitor is recommended for use with the 390AD. See
Alphanumeric Index .
The SONyofTEKTRONIXo 390AD is manufactured and marketed in Japan by SonyfTektronix Corporation, Tokyo, Japan.
Outside of Japan, lhe 390AD is available from TektroniX, Inc.,
its marketing subsidiaries and distributors.
7000
TEK SERIES
PROGRAMMABLE
WAVEFORM DIGITIZER
I·,V.,
II '!89 .:tIIW-'
-:;5""
-:f-
--
-~ ;;J -~' ;;
~ _"!j
-~
;J
•-
0
,->
7.120
76120
The 76120 complies with IEEE Standard 4881975, and with Tektronix Standard Codes and
Formats.
200 MHz Maximum Sampling Rate
Two Channels, Two Time Bases
8 Bit Resolution
2048 Words of Memory per Channel
"'t! ••••Wt .... hl ...
And there's still more flexibility available. The
number of samples per waveform (record length)
can be selected, from 256 to 2048. The sample
rate can be changed during waveform digitizing,
for example, using dense sampling on fast transitions and switching to sparser sampling for slow
decays. Also, each channel's local memory can
be partitioned into one to eight equal-length
records. You have the choice, too, of looking at
waveforms before the triggering event
(pretrigger), immediately after the trigger, or delayed from the trigger (posttrigger). Or you can
choose to operate the channels dependently by
triggering one after the other.
Pretrigger and Posttrigger Operation
All 76120 functions can be selected manually or
operated under program control over the IEEE488 bus. Add two 7A16P Programmable Amplifier
plug-ins, one for each channel, and you have
program control over every waveform acquisition
function .
Fully Programmable over IEEE-488 Bus For
System Oriented Operation
Extracting information from medium-speed signals is a typical application of 76120 systems.
5 ns to 1 s Selectable Sampling Intervals
with Interval Switching Allowed During
Waveform Acquisition
SYSTEMS
The 7812D I. el.o evelleble In WPJOOO Serie. Slgn.1 Proce..lng Syetem._ Th ••• fully lu10mltlc Iy.t.m. Ire d..Ign.d, ....mbl.d, t••ted, Ind docum.nted to IItl.1y the
demend for .peed, lutomltlon, Iccuracy, Ind repeetabillty
In charecterizlng devlc•• or ph.nom.ne which glv. rie. to
wlv.form. In the ••cond to eubmlcrolecond reng._ For
more Informetlon on th... IYlt.ml, contact your local
Tektronix Sele. Engln•• r,
Figure 3. A signal with two echoes recorded at a uniform
sampling rate (top trace), the same signal recorded at an
increased sampling rate during each echo (bottom trace), to
capture each echo with increased resolution.
"."\\':"::"
I,.',
"
"'~v:/,':,':.',·:/rNVV'rI'v'i':.'.',','.'::I't/"V"'I\·,I.'::;'.'.'.':~Y-Iv
,':";',,.
','
'i,
"'·~\'I',',',',',·:.·;V>/lNllll;'I','.','.'.'.':"/V'NtIII:,'.'
APPLICATIONS
Automated Testing
Figure 4. A transient response of a system at power-up
recorded with no pretrigger (top trace); by using the pretrigger
the complete response can be digitized (bottom trace).
EMP
Nondestructive Testing
The 76120 Programmable Oigitizer is a dualchannel, dual time base waveform digitizer for
use under computer control. It has a maximum
sampling rate of 200 MHz. Each channel has its
own analog-to-digital converter, a new type designed by Tektronix for accurate, high-speed
waveform digitizing . Each channel also has its
own time base operating from a single 200 MHz
crystal-controlled clock. The result... two fully independent channels capable of capturing one
waveform each, simultaneously, with the same or
different vertical sensitivities and time-base
settings.
Figure 1. The complete ~ of a signal (top trace) is rqccrded
at 200 ns; by changing the sample rate to 10 ns during
risetimes and falltimes and 800 ns duri~ the plateau (bottom
trace), you can measure risetime, fa/ltlme, pulse width and
interval accurately on a sing/e-shot signal.
Figure 5. The initial portion of an exponential decay is recorded
on Channel A (top trace); Channel B, set at a higher sensitivity
and triggered to record after Channel A has fimshed, captures
the remaining pulse tail with increased vertical resolution
(bottom trace).
Figure 2. A decaying signal recorded at a 10 pS sampling rate
(top trace); the same siflnal can be recorded at a 100 ns
sampling rate during the Initial portion and switched back to a
10 pS sampling rate (bottom trace), to capture a/l information
on a single-shot signal.
263
TEK PROGRAMMABLE
WAVEFORM DIGITIZER
7000
SERIES
76120 CHARACTERISTICS
VERTICAL SYSTEM
Ch.nnel. - Two left-hand plug-in compartments compatible
with all 7000 Series amplilier plug-ins. Fully programmable
when 7A16P Plug-ins are used.
B.ndwldth - 80 MHz with 7A16P Plug-in.
Modes of Oper.tlon - Left channel with Time Base A and
right channel with Time Base B.
TIME BASES A AND B
Type - Two built-in digital time bases with a common crystalcontrolled clock.
Clock - Internal: 200 MHz ± 0.0035%; stability: within
10 ppm/year. External: from signal source ..;200 MHz.
S.mple Interv.1 - With internal clock: selectable from 5 ns to
1 s in a 1, 2, 3...9 sequence (excluding 6, 7, 8 and 9 ns). With
external clock: Selectable from 1 to 200 x 11)6 times the external clock period in a 1, 2, 4. 6 ... 20 sequence.
Interv.1 Switching - Sample interval can be changed up to
13 times per waveform record with preservation of time
relationships.
TIME MEASUREMENT ACCURACY
Without sample interval sw itching : 0.0035% (stability
10 ppm/year). With sample interval switching: 0.0035% (stability 10 ppm/year) for all sample intervals slower than 5 ns.
Mode. of Oper.tlon - Time Base A with left channel and
Time Base B with right channel. Independent or B triggerable
after A completes its acquisition.
TRIGGERfNG A AND B
Source - Left or right plug-in, external, manual by push
button.
Mod. - Single sweep.
Coupling - Ac. dc, ac HF REJ, dc HF REJ.
Slop. - Positive or negative.
Lev.1 R.nge - Internal : at least ± 128 LSB in 256 steps.
External: at least ± 1.28 V in 256 steps.
Trigger Jilt.r (Intern.l) - 0.1 ns or less. de to 100 MHz.
Trlgg.rlng Error - ± 1 sample ambiguity in recognizing the
trigger, 1 sample maximum recognition error between channels
(using same trigger channel for both time bases).
Trlgg.r S.nsltivlty
Min Slgn.1 Required
Triggering
Coupling
Fr.quency R.ng.
Int.m.1
Extem.1
Ac
Ac HF REJ
Dc
Dc HF REJ
40 Hz to 50 MHz
50 MHz to 100 MHz
20 lSB
44 lSB
100mV
loomV
40 Hz to 50 kHz
20 lSB
100mV
dc to 50 MHz
50 MHz to 100 MHz
20 lSB
44 lSB
100mV
100mV
dc to 50 kHz
20 lSB
100mV
ARMING A AND B
Push button or computer control.
DIGITIZING AND STORAGE
Method - Continuous, sequential digitizing of the input signals with storage of samples selected by instrument settings.
Resolution - Eight bits.
Dyn.mlc Accur.cy· - Signal to noise ratio performance at
25 ' C for a half scale sinewave input signal (an ideal eight bit
digitizer would give a SIN ratio of 43 8 dB)
Slgn.1 Frequency
SIN R.tlo
Effective Bit.
300 kHz
42.0 dB
7.8
20 MHz
32.0 dB
6.0
80 MHz
20.0 dB
4.0
Internal Memory - Type: ECL. Size: 2048 8-bit words per
channel . total of 4096 B-bit words.
Record L.ngth, A or B - 256, 512, 1024, or 2048 samples.
Number of stored records : Up to eight 256-word, four 512word. two 1024-word. or one 204B-word records per channel.
each requires a trigger. Trigger is automatically rearmed after
each record acquisition.
Pr.trlgger Delay R.ng. - Selectable in multiples of eight
samples. Without sample interval switching: from 0 up to 16
samples less than the record length. With sample interval
switching : from 0 up to 16 samples less than the position of the
first sample interval change.
'For further information refer to HANDSHAKE VOL 5 NO 1.
33-A-4463.
264
76120 rear panel: the GPIB connector and outputs for an X- Y-Z monitor (right); clock input/output. trigger inputs. and BNG connectors to feed signals to the front panel (left): remote power ON/ OFF is also provided through the two central BNG connectors.
Posltrlgg.r Del.y R.nge - Selectable in multiples of eight
samples from eight to the record length (requires selection of
only one record).
OUTPUTS/INPUTS
X, Y, Z An.log Output - Provides for analog display of data
in memory. X and Y level is 1 V peak-to-peak into 100 kl1 or
greater; adjustable from 0.75 V to 1.3 V.
Z level is 0 to 1 V (full white) into 100 kl1 or greater.
Clock Out - Provides internal clock signal at ECl level.
Extem.1 Clock In - ECl levels ... 1 ns risetime and falltime.
2.5 ns minimum pulse width and .. 200 MHz.
l .nd R Trig In - Provide external trigger input to the left and
right trigger channels (50 11 terminated).
1, 2, 3, 4 - Four feed-through connections to the front panel.
Digital Interf.ce - Conforms to IEEE Standard 488-1975.
IEEE Stand.rd 488 INTERFACE
Standard - Conforms to IEEE Standard 488-1975.
Interface Function. Subset Implemented:
SH1
AH 1
TE6
lE4
SR1
Rl1
PP0
DC1
C0
DT0
Complete source handshake
Complete acceptor handshake
Extended talker function
Extended listener function
Complete service'request capability
Complefe remote/lOCal function
No parallel poll
Complete device clear capability
No controller function
No device
Re.pon •• to Int.rfac. Control M....ge. - The 76120 responds to the following interface control messages:
GTl
llO
SDC-DCl
SPE-SPD
IFC
Go to local
local lockout
Selected device clear and device clear
Serial poll enable and disable
Interface clear
IEEE-488 Bus Addresses - Mainframe and programmable
plug-ins share a common primary address and are differentiated through the use of secondary addresses.
Programmable Function. - All instrument settings and operating modes are programmable.
Form.t - Commands in ASCII, waveform data in binary
(range 0 to 377.).
Tran.fer Rate - 710k bytes/s maximum.
W.veform Tran.f.r Tim. - To an infinitely fast controller:
8.35 ms for one 2048 points record. Actual transfer time depends on controller and software speed.
ENVIRONMENTAL
Temperature Range - Operating: O' C to +40' C. Nonoperating: - 62' C to + 85' C.
Altitude - Operating: - 76 to + 4570m (- 250 to + 15,000
ft). Nonoperating: - 76 to + 15200 m (- 250 to + 50,000 ft).
POWER REQUIREMENTS
line Voltage Range - 90 V to 132 V ac, 180 V to 250 V ac.
Lin. Frequency - 48 to 440 Hz.
Power Con.umptlon (Including plug-In.) - Maximum
400 W. 5 A at 115 V 60 Hz.
Remote Control - Power ON/OFF capability is provided.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dlmen.ion.
mm
Width
Height
Depth
483
178
703
in
19.0
7.0
27 .7
Weight.
kg
Ib
Net
25.0
55.0
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
IEEE-488 Bus Cable (012-0630-03) ; set of rack slides ,
(351 -0375-01); power cord. (161 -0066-00).
ORDERING INFORMATION
(PLUG-INS NOT INCLUDED)
76120 Programmable Digitizer ......... $26,400
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORDS 6 PLUG OPTIONS
Option A1 - Universal Euro 220 V/1 6A, 50 Hz ..............
Option A2 - UK 240 V/13A, 50 Hz .................................
Option A3 - Australian 240 V/10A, 50 Hz ......................
Option A4 - Nor1h American 240 V/15A, 60 Hz .............
Option AS - Switzerland 240 V/10A. 50 Hz ...................
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
--
-•
•••
.. ROGRAMMABU:
AMPUFII R
The 7A 16P is a fully programmable vertical amplifier used in
the 76120. For further information see page 271.
T.ktronix offers .ervice tr.ining cl..... on the 7612D Programmable Waveform Digitizer. For further training inform.tlon, cont.ct your local Sal••/ Service Offic. or reque.t •
copy of ihe Tektronix Service Tr.lnlng Schedule on the return card In the cent.r of this c.talog.
SERIES
TEK 7000
PROGRAMMABLE
TRANSIENT WAVEFORM DIGITIZER
o
7912AD
The 7912AD complies with IEEE Standard 4881975, and with Tektronix Standard Codes and
Formats.
Digitize and Store Single-Shot or
Repetitive Signals from Millisecond
to Subnanosecond duration
500 MHz Bandwidth at 10 mV/div
500 ps/div Fastest Calibrated Sweep Rate
Capturing high-speed waveforms is the 7912AD's
forte . Each waveform can be sampled up to 512
times within selectable time window ranging from
ten milliseconds to five nanoseconds (50 kHz to
100 GHz equivalent sampling rate) .
This pertormance is accomplished by a Tektronix
scan converter which writes the signal onto a
silicon-diode target array. In TV Mode, the signal
information is read from the target and converted
to composite video for a bright display on a
television monitor. However, in the Digital Mode
the waveform data is read into an internal memory. From this memory, the digitized waveform can
be transferred via the IEEE-488 bus to an external
controller for processing.
SYSTEMS
The 7912AD I. 11.0 IVllllble In WP2000 Sarle. Sign. I
Proce •• lng SYlteml_ Thele fully eutomatic IYlteml .re
de.lgned, .... mbled, telted, Ind documented to satilly
the demlnd for lpeed, automltion, accuracy, and repeltability In characterizing devlcel or phenomenl which give
rile to wlveforml In the millilecond to nlnolecond range.
For mora Information on th..e Iy.tem. contact your local
Tektronix Slle. Engineer.
The 7912AD Mainframe is programmable over the
same IEEE-488 bus. When the programable plugins (one 7A16P Programmable Amplifier and one
7B90P Programmable Time Base) are used, the
7912AD becomes a fully programmable digitizer
with a bandwidth of 200 MHz. This is a significant
step toward fully automated test and measurement in disciplines such as laser and energyrelated research , component or subassembly
testing, and other areas requiring information
extraction from high-speed waveforms.
Waveform Digitizing to 9-Bit Vertical
and 9-Bit Horizontal Resolution
Built-In Signal Averaging Capability
Fully Programmable over IEEE-488 Bus
For System Oriented Operation
APPLICATIONS
Destructive Testing
Laser Research
Automated Testing
265
PROGRAMMABLE
WAVEFORM DIGITIZER
TEK TRANSIENT
CHARACTERISTICS
VERTICAL SYSTEM
Channel a - Single plug-in compartment accepts any 7000
Series amplifier plug-in. Fully programmable when 7 A 16P is
used.
Bandwidth Determined by amplifier plug-in . 7 A 16P:
200 MHz. 7 A 19: 500 MHz.
Delay Line waveform.
Penmits viewing of leading edge of acquired
HORIZONTAL SYSTEM
Channela - Single plug-in compartment accepts any 7000
Series time base. Fully programmable with 7B90P.
Faatest Callbrsted Sweep Rate or 7B92A Time Bases.
500 ps/div with the 7B90P
Sioweat Recommended Sweep Rate mode.
1 ms/div in digital
DIGITIZING AND STORAGE
Method -
Scan conversion.
Resolution - Nine bits. In the Digital Mode. the target is
scanned in a 512 x 512 point matrix offering at least 400 discrete horizontal elements. each with a range of at least 320
discrete vertical values. In the TV Mode. the target is scanned
in a standard TV format with a resolution of at least 400 lines at
SO% response .
Writing Rate (+10·C to +40·C) - TV Mode: writes an !kliv
sinewave of at least 500 MHz in a single sweep. Digital Mode:
stores a single 8-div pulse with a risetime of 1 ns or less.
Target Dafects - No more than six points digitized other than
those written by input waveform. Built-in firmware allows for
defect removal by an external controller.
7000
SERIES
ELECTRONIC GRATICULE
8 x 10 division dlat matrix written onto the scan converter target immediately alter wavefonm acquisition. Can be displayed
simultaneously with the input signal on the TV monitor or digitized and stored.
OUTPUTS/INPUTS
X. Y. Z Analog Output - Provides for analog display of data
in memory. X and Y level is 1 V peak-to-peak into 100 kll or
greater; adjustable from 0 .75 V to 1.3 V. Z level is 0 to 1 V (full
white) into 100 kll or greater.
Composite Video Output - Only available in TV mode. Used
to drive a TV monitor for displaying signal written on scanconverter target as an aid to setting intensity for complete digitizing. Linear Output: Replica of the signal read from the target
with sync added. Binary Output: Two-level output derived from
the linear composite video output. Used to indicate on the TV
monitor how well a waveform will be digitized. Scale factor
readout included in both linear and binary.
Sync Output RS-170.
At least 4 V into 75 II. Conforms to EIA
Sync Loop - Allows TV Mode to be synchronized with external EIA RS-170 sync waveform.
+ Gate Output - Provides a positive pulse with a duration
equal to and COincident with the time-base sweep.
OTt
ENVIRONMENTAL
Temperature Range - Operating: O·C to + 40·C. Nonoperating: - S5·C to + 7S·C.
Altitude - Operating: Up to 2135 m (7000 It). Nonoperating:
Up to IS 200 m (50.000 It).
EMC (plug-Ins inserted) - Meets MIL-STD-461A and 462
radiated and conducted interference from 30 Hz to 1 GHz.
POWER REQUIREMENTS
Line Voltage Range ac.
Line Frequency -
90 V to 132 V ac and 180 V to 250 V
48 to 440 Hz.
Probe Power -
Dimensions
Provides power for Tektronix active probes.
360 W
Remote power ON/OFF capabilities
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Width
Height
Length
mm
483
178
679
Weight
kg
Net
24.7
in
19.0
7.0
26.8
Ib
54.6
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Power cord (161-0066-00); set of rack slides (351-0375-01);
IEEE-488 Bus Cables (012-0630-03).
T.tQOf ....O
.001 CHf'UIII ......
• •• ••
•ii'''''
i
""".c:
IotUIU
I'
ORDERING INFORMATION
(PLUG-INS NOT INCLUDED)
.,
U.
i i"
•-•. Ii
Ii ii
Ii i i
INPUT
:::.
••
Programmable Amplifier
ctl
Complete source handshake
Complete acceptor handshake
Extended talker function
Extended listener function
Complete service request capability
Complete rernote/local function
No parallel poll.
Complete device clear capability.
No controller function .
Device trigger complete.
Remote Control provided.
~
PROGRAMM .... U
AMPLIFIER
SHI
AH 1
TE6
LE4
SRI
RL 1
PPtI
DC 1
Vert In. Cal In. Trig In - Three internal SO II coaxial cables
connect signals from the rear panel to the front panel to ease
system configuration in rackmounts .
_
. : :. . . .DWlDTM
Intertace Functions Subset Implemented:
Power Conaumptlon (Including plug-Ina) maximum.
7B90P
.........
....
Conforms to IEEE Standard 488-1975.
Z-Axis Input - ± 1 V input modulates the writing gun intensity
over its full range.
Memory - Type: semiconductor. Size: 4096 10-bit words for
data from target and two 512 IS-bit word areas for internally
processed and reduced data. Record Length: 512 samples per
waveform maximum.
7A16P
IEEE STANDARD 488 INTERFACE
Standard -
It is recommended that 7912ADs not be purchased or operated
without an accompanying Tektronix 634 Raster Scan Display
Monitor with Option 11 (see page 120).
7912AD Programmable Digitizer ....... $24,800
Option 13 -
Change TV Scan to 625 lines at SO Hz ...... NC
Option 30 -
Delete IEEE Bus Cable ............................ -$90
634 Option 11 Raster Scan
Display Monitor ................................ ___ $2,940
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORDS AND PLUG OPTIONS
Option Al -
Universal Euro 220 V/1 6A. 50 Hz .............. NC
Option A2 -
UK 240 V/13A. 50 Hz ................................. NC
Option A3 -
Australian 240 V/10A. 50 Hz ...................... NC
Option A4 -
North American 240 V/ 15A. 60 Hz ............. NC
Option A5 -
Switzerland 240 V/10A. 50 Hz ................... NC
PROGRAMMABLE
T_'M_'_._A_'E____- l'
7890P ~____
Programmable Time Base
The 7A 16P and 7890P are programmable plug-ins used in the 7912AD. For further informa tion. see plug-in specifications in the 7000
Series Plug-in Section.
Tektronix offers aervice training claa. .a on the 7912AD
Programmable Tranalent Waveform Digitizer. For further
training information, contact your local Salea/Servlce Office
or neque.t a copy of the Tektronix Service Training Schedule on the return card In the center of thia catalog.
266
TEK
7000 SERIES
PLUG-INS
CONTENTS
For the 7000 Series you can select from over
forty different plug-ins. For example, digital
multimeters, counters and A-D converters .
With this plug-in selection you can solve
problems in many applications including
spectrum analysis , curve tracing, logic analysis, and sampling . This variety lets you tailor your instrument to meet your immediate
need. And to expand its capabilities later as
your needs change.
Dc to 225 MHz Amplifiers ............................ 270
Differential Amplifiers ........ .. .. .. .. .......... . .. .. . 272
FET Probe Amplifier ...............
273
Amplifiers .. .. ......................... ................
.. ... 274
Programmable and Digital
Pretrigger Time Base .. ...... ................ .. .... .. .. . 275
Delayed and ~Delaying
Time Base .... .. .......... ................................... .... 276
Dual Time Bases .. ............. ................. .. ........ .. 278
Single Time Base ..................... ..................... . 280
Digital Delay .................................................... 281
Universal Counter(Timer .... .. .............. .. .... .. .. . 282
ND Converter .. .. .. .. .... ........................ .. .. ......... 284
Digital Multimeter .. .. .......... .. .. .... .. .. .. .. .... .. .. ..... 284
Sampling Units to 14 GHz ............................ 285
45 ps TOR or General Purpose
Sampler .. .... .. .. .. .. .. .... .. .. .. .. .. .... .. .. .... .. .. .. .. .. .. .... 286
1 GHz Dual Trace, Delayed
Sweep Sampler ................................... .. ...... 287
Sampling Heads to 14 GHz ......................... 288
Trigger Recognizer Heads .. .. ............ .. .. ........ 288
Pulse Generator Heads ................................. 288
Trigger Countdown Head ............................. 289
" 290
Curve Tracer .
Readout Unit ...
.. ....................................... 290
Tektronix offers service training classes on varioul 7000
Series plug-ins. For further training information, contact
your local Sales/ Service Office or request a copy of the
Tektronix Service Training Schedule on the return card in
the center of this catalog.
267
DIGITIZER
TEK PROGRAMMABLE
CH1
~
_
•. •· •
.
.......
I
•-•·.-••
• •
.....
•
... ... ..
• ..• •
-•· !
.
---•
--•-•
•
••
-
Digital Storage
A 40 MHz maximum sampling rate provides approximately 10 MHz single-shot bandwidth and
up to 70 MHz bandwidth with repetitive signals.
Cursor Measurements
Accurate amplitude measurements (referenced
to ground) and time measurements (referenced
to trigger position) are made using one cursor.
Point-to-point difference (~) measurements are
made using two cursors.
Master Menu
7020
The 7020 complies with IEEE Standard 488-1978,
and with Tektronix Standard Codes and
Formats.
Digital Storage for 7000 Series Mainframe
40 MHz Maximum Sampling Rate for up to
10 MHz Single-Shot Bandwidth
70 MHz Bandwidth for Repetitive Signals
Totally Programmable and Remotely
Controllable
Storage of Six Independent Waveforms
Enveloping and Signal Averaging
Cursor Measurements
Pretrigger and Posttrigger
APPLICATIONS
Ultrasonics
Digital Design
RF Modulation
Automated Production Testing
dent waveforms plus a reference waveform ,
cursors for more accurate two-dot measurements, and user prompting and menu displays to
improve user interface effectiveness.
Hands Off Operation With Probe Identify
Feature
Recommended for use in interactive. computercoordinated tasks, the Tektronix P6053B Probe
allows computer routines to be sequentially activated at the 7020's probe tip. This probe's
' Identify" button signals the IEEE Standard 488
Interface via an input channel coded request.
This capability allows the operator to work at a
short distance from the 7020 without the need to
touch front panel controls. Two such probes may
be used, one for each vertical channel.
The master menu offers a convenient way to enable special
functions such as the STORE and RECALL of front panel
settings and also allows you to branch-out to other menus.
Measurement Flexibility
Storage and Recall Front Panel Settings
Up to six different front panel set-ups can be
stored and recalled as desired. These settings
plus the last panel set-up are saved in nonvolatile memory and are restored automatically when
power is applied to the 7020.
Fully Automated Measurements
Since the 7020 is completely programmable,
fully automated measurement and testing is possible . Tektronix programmable signal sources ,
multifunction interface. and RF scanner provide
and control the test signals while the 7020 acquires waveforms for the computer or controller.
View and compare two different portions of the same waveform or of two different waveforms. All of these waveforms
have been repositioned and vertically compressed. The two
upper waveforms, two pulses from a single pulse train, are
magnified portions of the lowest waveforms. The time (Ll T) between the two cursors indicates the time between the leading
edges of two pulses in the pulse train.
Enveloping
X-V Waveform Display and Time Reference
l.ae .. ¥
The 7020 brings state-of-the-art digital performance to Tektronix 7000 Series mainframes and
rackmounts .
EH¥=342
DSW 2
,~.
"'"
.~
The 7020 is a GPIB programmable plug-in that is
compatible with all 7000 Series mainframes (including the USM 281C) except the 7104. When
combined with a 7000 Series mainframe, this
plug-in creates a fully programmable, digitizing
oscilloscope.
268
~.
,I
f
I
\J
"
The 7020 can accurately measure the amplitude
of a 50 ns wide transient event. Dual samplers
simultaneously acquire two channels as if it were
a "dual-beam" scope.
Beyond basic acquisition , the 7020 offers signal
averaging to reduce un correlated noise, envelope displays to compare dynamic characteristics of changing signals, pretrigger for viewing
prior to the trigger event, storage of six indepen-
.~
f\
!
leel'S
TPOS-II
1oZ.'
CSI.I
Unique display capability allows viewing Y versus X events
and Y versus time simultaneously. X- Y channels are matched
at 10 MHz with less than 2' of phase shift
2
~
100 .. \1
100v5
\/=-613.(1 .. \1
Y:OR 0 .13
T= I 213875",;'.
Enveloping reveals subtle variations in signals by recording
maximum and minimum values of recurring sweeps while vectors 'paint- in the envelope. The effects of frequency shift are
dramatically displayed.
7000
TEK
SERIES
Automated Testing
IEEE STANDARD 488 INTERFACE
HORIZONTAL SYSTEM
Time Division Range in 1-2-5 sequence.
External Clock , 20 s/div to 50 ns/div
Digitizing Technique Versus Time/Division
Real Time (Rolling Display) - External Clock , 20 s/div to
0.1 s/div.
Real Time - 50 ms/div to 500 ~s/div .
Extended Real Time - 200 ~s/div to 2 ~s/div .
Equivalent Time - 1 ~s/div to 50 ns/div.
Note: Single events can be captured as fast as 2 I's/div. For
1 I's/div to 50 ns/div, repetitive events are required to build a
complete waveform.
Time Measurement Accuracy - One cursor: 0.1% of reading
+ 0, - 1 sample interval ± 300 ps. Two cursors : 0.1% of reading ± 600 ps.
Horizontal Resolution
Time/Division
For interactive test procedures, text messages, waveforms,
and front panel set-ups may be transmitted and received from
the 7020 to a controller or computer. The procedure in this
display informs the operator of the next task. Upper and lower
tolerance limits are displayed as a single envelope. This envelope was initially constructed using the 7020's envelope feature while a test signal was varied to its allowable limits. The
waveform was then transferred and saved by the controller to
serve as the test reference or overlay.
Signal Averaging
External, 20 s to 500
200 ~s to 2 ~s
1~st050ns
~s
Points/
Waveform
Resolution
Points/Division
1024
820'
1024
100
80'
100
'Waveform interpolation to 1024 points is available for transfer
over the IEEE Standard 488 Interface.
Trigger Position
Pretrigger - 0 to 10 div in 1 div increments.
Posttrigger (delay) - 0 to 1500 div in 1 div increments (disabled during Roll with Envelope or Average)
Sensitivity
Frequency
Range·
Internal
External
Normal
(dc Coupling)
dc to 30 MHz
30 MHz to 70 MHz
0.4 div
1.0 div
SO mV
150 mV
P-P and
AUTO
30 Hz to 200 Hz
200 Hz to 30 MHz
30 MHz to 70 MHz
2.0 div
O.S div
1.2 div
300 mV
90 mV
200 mV
• The ac coupling low frequency limit is 30 Hz. In Time/OIV
settings of II'S to 50 ns, when using P-P or AUTO, Iowfrequency limit is 300 Hz.
Interface Function
SH 1
AH 1
T5
L3
SR1
RL 1
DC 1
DT1
PP~
C~
E2
Complete Source Handshake
Complete Acceptor Handshake
Complete Talker - No Secondary Address
Complete Listener - No Secondary Address
Complete Service Request
Complete Remote Local
Complete Device Clear
Complete Device Trigger
No Parallel Poll
No Controller
Three State
Programmable Functions - All instrument setting and operating modes are programmable except for Variable V/DIV and
Horizontal Position. However, these uncalibrated controls can
be overridden and forced into the 'CAL' position on command
from the IEEE Standard 488 Interface. The display of MENU
and 10 is selectable from the front panel only.
Format - Device dependent commands in ASCII . Waveform
data points selectable as BINARY or ASCII .
Waveform Output Time - 250 ms minimum for BINARY and
2.5 s minimum for ASCII . Actual transfer times depend upon
the speed of the receiving device.
INPUTS
External Trigger (Front Panel) - Maximum Input Voltage:
250 V (dc + peak ac).
Signal Input Impedance - 1 Mr!, = 20 pF.
Hold Next (Mainframe Rear Panel) - Initiates Hold Next condition ; connected to Single Sweep Reset connector.
OUTPUTS
Hold Next Ready - High level indicates unit is in Hold Next
condition ; output level remains low when unit is not in Hold
Next condition; connected to Single Sweep Ready connector.
+ Gate Out - Provides high level output signal for duration of
waveform/character readout.
PLUG-IN COMPATIBILITY
The 7020 is compatible with all 7000 Series mainframes with
the exception of the 7104 mainframe. Use with the 7104 will
void the 71 04 warranty.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
SIGNAL PROCESSING
Averaging reduces uncorrelated noise to improve measurement accuracy and display quality. Continuous and self-terminating averaging are provided. The self-terminating averaging
processes a fixed number (N) of waveforms and then holds
the result in memory. The N value is selectable from 8 to 256
in powers of 2. The top waveform in this display is the result
of averaging the bottom waveform 128 times.
CHARACTERISTICS
VERTICAL SYSTEM
Input -
2 channels, simultaneous sampling, BNC connectors.
Acquire Modes Sensitivity -
CH 1, CH 2, ADD, BOTH (dual channel).
5 mV to 5 Vldiv ; 1-2-5 sequence.
Bandwidth - 70 MHz maximum. (Ac Coupled Low Frequency
Response: 10Hz or less.)
Step Response -
5 ns or less.
Input Impedance -
R - 1 Mil, C = 20 pF.
Maximum Input Voltage
Dc Coupled : 250 V, 1 kHz or less (dc + peak ac).
Ac Coupled : 400 V, 1 kHz or less (dc + peak ac).
Signal Isolation -
100: 1 dc to 20 MHz.
Vertical Resolution -
8 bits, 256 levels, 0.04 divllevel.
Gain Ratio Accuracy - < 2%. Maximum error throughout the
V/div range with acquire gain calibrated at 10 mV/div. Measurement valid with CURSORS or GPIB .
Noise - Mean value of 50 measurements taken at 0.02 division increments
Volts/ Div
Full Scale /
RMS Noise
Percent of
Full Scale
5mV
52 dB
0.25
10 mV to 5 V
55 dB
0.18
NOTE: Full scale - 10.24 divisions.
Phase Match X-Y -
< 2· from dc to 10 MHz.
Cursors Readout - With one cursor (dOFF), vertical and horizontal coordinate values are referenced to zero volts and Ihe
trigger position as zero time. With two cursors (dON), vertical
and horizontal coordinate values are the difference between
the two cursors.
Signal Averaging
AVE N - A self-terminating, stable average processing ' N"
number of waveforms and then holds the result in memory. The
'N' value may be selected using the SET N function (N - 8,
16, 32, 64, 128, 256).
AVE - A continuous, stable averaging process. N waveforms
are averaged as in AVEN , then additional waveforms are
weighted at 1/N. In Roll mode a running average (smooth) is
available to provide high frequency filtering.
Enveloping
ENV N - A self-terminating recording of waveform maxima
and minima. When N waveforms are processed, the result is
held in memory.
ENV - A continuous (infinite) recording of waveform maxima
and minima.
Waveform Modifiers
VPUP t (Vertical Position Up), VPDN t (Vertical Position
Down) - Provide vertical positioning control of any stored
waveforms.
VCMP ; (Vertically Compress), VXPD (Vertically Expand) Provide vertical display expansion or compression. Two expansions or compressions in 1,2,5 calibrated steps, from the original V/div are available.
HMAG (Horizontal Magnify) - Displays the cursor waveform
horizontally magnified by a factor of 10.
HMAG ALL (Horizontally Magnify All Waveforms) - Displays
all waveforms at 10 times horizontal magnification .
VS (Versus) - Creates a Y versus X display of any two
waveforms.
*
Dimensions
Width
Height
Depth
Weight
Net
Shipping
mm
206
127
371
kg
3.6
8.0
in
8.1
5.0
14.6
Ib
8.1
17.8
ORDERING INFORMATION
7020 Programmable Digitizer ............. $7,750
RECOMMENDED PROBE (7020)
P6053B Identify Probe - For remote service request via
probes 'Identify' button. 10X attenuation ; 200 MHz bandwidth; scale factor coding; 6 ft .
Order 010-6053-13 .......................................................... $154
RECOMMENDED MAINFRAME
R7603 Option 20 - The R7603 mainframe provides a six-inch
diagonal CRT display and three-wide plug-in compartment in a
5.25 inch high rack mount configuration. Option 20 permits rear
panel access to the 7D20's IEEE Standard 488 Interface. See
pages 246 and 247 for further information. Order R7S03 Option
20 Mainframe ............................................................ +$3,350
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES (R7603)
A field installable kit adds Option 20 to the standard R7603.
Intended for use with a previously purchased R7603, this kit
provides parts to connect the 7D20's IEEE Standard 488 Interface to the R7603 Mainframe.
'Order 040-1093-00
Five other field installable kits are available, one for each of the
international power cord and plug options, A 1-A5. Contact
your local Tektronix Field Office for information.
• A 1 Universal Euro. Order 040-1094-00
'A2 UK. Order 040-1095-00
• A3 Australian. Order 040-1096-00
• A4 North American. Order 040-1097-00
• A5 Switzerland. Order 040-1098-00
'Contact your local field office for prices.
269
AMPLIFIERS
TEK WIDEBAND
7A16P
7A16A
7A15A
....
-..-
c
. : : . . . . .DWlOTM
""""-
i i
o
--
.......
....
",,,,.IAIII(,CALJIII
YOLTS / DIY
~o
INI"UT
,.".
f
·
7A16A
Dc to 80 MHz Amplifier
Dc to 225 MHz Amplifier
Programmable-Dc to 225 MHz Amplifier
7A15A
7A16A
7A16P
Dc to 80 MHz Bandwidth (7900 Family)
Dc to 225 MHz Bandwidth (7900 Family)
5 mV/div to 10 V/div
Calibrated Deflection Factors
5 mV/div to 5 V/div
Calibrated Deflection Factors
Fully Programmable Plug-in for
7912AD or 7612D Digitizers only
500 ",V/div at 10 MHz (X10 Gain)
1 MO Input
200 MHz Bandwidth (7900 Family)
1 MO Input
The 7A15A is an easy to use, 80 MHz amplifier
that features a X10 magnifier to increase the
sensitivity to 500 ",V/div with 10 MHz bandwidth. It
has a constant bandwidth at all deflection factors
in the X1 setting . Polarity of the display is
selectable.
CHARACTERISTICS
Dellectlon Factor - 5 mV/div to 10 V/div in 11 calibrated
steps (1 -2-5 sequence). XI gain accuracy is within 2% with XI
gain adjusted at 10 mV/div. Xl0 gain (increases sensitivity to
500 ~V) accuracy is within 10% at 10 MHz bandwidth throughout dellection lactor settings. Uncalibrated VARIABLE is continuous between steps to at least 25 V/div.
The 7A16A is an easy to use, 225 MHz amplifier. It
features constant bandwidth over the deflection
factor range of 5 mV/div to 5 V/div. Polarity of the
display is selectable; bandwidth is selectable to
FULL or limited to 20 MHz for low-frequency
applications.
CHARACTERISTICS
Dellection Factor - 5 mV/div to 5 V/div in 10 calibrated steps
(1 -2-5 sequence). Accuracy is within 2% with gain adjusted at
10 mV/div. Uncalibrated VARIABLE is continuous between
steps to a least 12.5 V/div.
Input Rand C -
1 M{J within 2%; ",, 20 pF.
1 Mil within 2%; ",,20 pF.
Maximum Input Voltage - Dc-coupled: 250 V (dc + peak
ac), ac component 500 V peak-te-peak maximum, 1 kHz or
less. A(X()Upled: 500 V (dc + peak ac); ac component 500 V
peak-te-peak maximum, 1 kHz or less.
Maximum Input Voltage - Dc-<:oupled : 250 V (dc + peak
ac), ac component 500 V peak-te-peak maximum 1 kHz or
less. Ac-coupled : 500 V (dc + peak ac), ac component 500 V
peak-te-peak maximum , 1 kHz or less.
Dc Stability - Drill with ambient temperature (constant line
voltage) is 0.01 div/' C. Drill with time (ambient temperature
and line voltage constant) is 0.02 div in anyone minute aller
1 hour wanm-up.
Input Rand C -
10 mV/div to 5 V/div Calibrated
Deflection Factors
Order 7 A 15A Amplifier . ......................... $600
O~der 7A16A Amplifier ...............•.•.•... $1,095
50 0 or 1 MO Input Selectable
The 7A16P is designed for use only in Tektronix
7000 Series Programmable Digitizers. All of the
normal operational features of a high-quality,
wide-band 7000 Series plug-in amplifier are provided in the 7A16P. These are available at the
front panel for manual selection , or they can be
set under program control via a programmable
mainframe and the IEEE Standard 488 bus.
Whether operated manually or under program
control , the front-panel push buttons light to indicate plug-in status. Plug-in status can also be
read over the IEEE Standard 488 bus by an external controller for input to instrument set-up and
control routines.
Two switch selected input connectors are also
provided for selecting input signal source.
CHARACTERISTICS
Bandwidth - 225 MHz, plug-in only. 200 MHz in the 7912AD.
Bandwidth may be limited to 20 MHz ± 3 MHz by bandwidth
limit switch.
Ac Coupled Lower Bandwidth - 10Hz or less.
Step Response - 50 Il input plug-in only, 1.8 ns risetime.
Dellectlon Factor - 10 mV/div to 5 V/div, 9 steps in a 1-2-5
sequence. Accuracy is ± 2% of indicated deflection lactor with
GAIN adjusted at 10 mV/div.
Uncalibrated VARIABLE is continuous between steps and extends selected deflection factor to at least 2.5 times the calibrated value.
Input Rand C - Selectable: 1 Mil within 2% and ",, 20 pF or
50 Il ± 1 Il with VSWR .. 1.5:1 at 200 MHz or less.
Inputs - Selectable A or B signal input connectors.
Maximum Input Voltage - 1 Mil, de coupled: 250 V (de +
peak ac), ac component 500 V peak-te-peak maximum, 1 kHz
or less. Mil, ac coupled : 500 V (de + peak ac), ac component
500 V pop maximum, 1 kHz or less. 50 Il: 0.5 W maximum.
Programmable Functions - All functions except VARIABLE,
GAIN, and IDENTIFY are programmable.
Order 7 A 16P Programmable Amplifier $2,200
270
For recommended probes-reler to page 234.
TEK
7000
SERIES
7A18A
7A17
7A26
..........
COl
i
""'"
'-
~.
7A28
Dc to 75 MHz Dual Trace Amplifier
Dc to 200 MHz Dual Trace Amplifier
Dc to 150 MHz Bandwidth
7A18A
7A26
7A17
Dc to 75 MHz Bandwidth
Dc to 200 MHz Bandwidth (7900 Family)
Low Cost
5 mV/ div to 5 V/div
Calibrated Deflection Factors
5 mV/div to 5 V/div
Calibrated Deflection Factors
Dc to 150 MHz Bandwidth (7900 Family)
1 M!llnput
1 M!llnput
50 mV Idiv Calibrated Deflection Factor
Easy to Customize
Optional Dc Offset
The 7A 18A, the basic building block of 3- and 4trace operation, is a dual-trace plug-in amplifier.
The 7A 18A features constant bandwidth for all
deflection factors , five operating modes (CH 1,
CH 2, ALT, CHOP, ADD), trigger source selectivity and color-keyed control grouping. The 7A 18A
has a trace identify function. Polarity of Channel 2
is selectable.
CHARACTERISTICS
Deflection Factor - 5 mV/div to 5 V/div in 10 calibrated steps
(1 -2-5 sequence). Accuracy is within 2% with gain adjusted to
10 mV/div. Uncalibrated VARIABLE is continuous between
steps to at least 12.5 V/div.
Input Rand C - 1 Mn within 2%; ",,20 pF.
Maximum Input Voltage - Dc-coupled : 250 V (de + peak
ac); ac component 500 V p-p maximum, 1 kHz or less. Accoupled : 500 V (dc + peak ac): ac component 500 V p-p maximum, 1 kHz or less.
Dc Stability - Drift with ambient temperature (constant line
voltage) is 0.01 div/" C. Drift with time (ambient temperature
and line voltage constant) is 0.02 div in anyone minute after
1 hr warm-up.
Common Mode Rejection Ratio (ADD, CH 2 Invert) - At
least 10:1, dc to 50 MHz.
Order 7A18A Amplifier ....................... $1,180
The 7A26, a dual-trace plug-in amplifier, is a basic
building block for 3- or 4-trace operation. It features constant bandwidth for all deflection factors, 5 operating modes (CH 1, CH 2, ALT, CHOP,
ADD), trigger source selection (CH 1, CH 2,
MODE), and color-keyed control groupings. Polarity of Channel 2 is selectable. Bandwidth may be
set at FULL or limited to 20 MHz for low-frequency applications.
CHARACTERISTICS
Deflection Factor - 5 mV/div to 5 V/div in 10 calibrated steps
(1 -2-5 sequence). Accuracy is within 2% with gain adjusted at
10 mV/div. Uncalibrated VARIABLE is continuous between
steps to at least 12.5 V/div.
Input Rand C - 1 Mn within 2%; ",,22 pF.
Maximum Input Voltage - [)c.{:oupled: 250 V (de + peak
ac); ac component 500 V p-p maximum, 1 kHz or less. Accoupled: 500 V (de + peak ac); ac component 500 V p-p maximum, 1 kHz or less.
Common Mode Rejection Ratio (ADD, Ch 1 Invert) - At
least 10: 1, de to 50 MHz.
Dc Stability - Drift with ambient temperature (constant line
voltage) is 0.02 div/" C. Drift with time (ambient temperature
and line voltage constant) is 0.02 div in anyone minute after
1 hr warm-up.
The 7A 17 is a unique wideband, plug·in amplifier
electrically and mechanically suitable for do-ityourself design and modification.
The layout of the circuit board assembly provides
a blank soldering pad matrix and ground plane
surface totaling approximately 40 square inches.
Circuits may be installed here. Mainframe power
is identified and available on the circuit board.
The front sub·panel is prepunched with holes of
various sizes and shapes which allow for the
mounting of connectors, switches, indicators, etc.
CHARACTERISTICS
Deflection Factor - Adjustable to 50 mV/div. There is no step
attenuation.
Input Z - 50 n .
Maximum Input Voltage - 5 V RMS.
Order 7A17 Amplifer .............................. $390
Order 7A26 Amplifier .......................... $1,910
DC OFFSET OPTION
Dc Offset is for the user who needs to analyze small signals
that are riding on larger signals, such as power supply ripple.
Option 06, Dc Offset - Two separate Channel 1 and Channel 2 variable offset control s are concentric with the position
controls replacing the identify pUSh-buttons of the standard
7A18A. The ac-dc-ground sw.itch of each channel is expanded
to accommodate a fourth position for dc offset.
Olfset Range Display - ± 200 div maximum, equivalent to
± t V at 5 mV/div.
Accuracy - When in Dc OFFSET the deflection accuracy is
derated by t %.
Order Option 06 Dc Offset ........ .........
+ $200
For recommended probes-refer to page 234.
271
AMPLIFIERS
TEK DIFFERENTIAL
7A13
7000
SERIES
High CMRR Probes for Differential Amplifiers
We recommend the P6055 high CMRR adjustable
10X probes for use with Tektronix differential
amplifiers.
COMPARISON
",O.. T"'II (ycl
CC»JtI t + . ....
7A22
When used in pairs, these probes allow adjustment for maximum common mode rejection
ratio (CMRR) . See page 441 for P6055
characteristics.
CHARACTERISTICS
Input Rand C - 1 Mil within 0.15%; ", 20 pF. R in "'00, is
available in the 1 mV to 50 mV/div range, selectable by an
intemal switch.
Deflection Factor - 1 mV/div to 5 V/div in 12 calibrated steps
(1 -2-5 sequence). Accuracy is within 1.5% with gain adjusted at
1 mV/div. Uncalibrated VARIABLE is continuous between
steps to at least 12.5 V/div.
Signal Range
Deflection
Factor
Senings
DlFF£fI'NnAl. COMPA"ATOR
Differential Comparator Amplifier
7A13
Dc to 105 MHz Bandwidth (7900 Family)
1 mV/div to 5 V/div
Calibrated Deflection Factors
20,000: 1 CMRR
10,000 cm Effective Screen Height
1 Mf! Input Switchable to
00
The 7A 13 is a differential comparator amplifier. It
incorporates a number of features which make it
particularly versatile, especially in multitrace combination with other 7000 Series vertical plug-ins.
The 7A 13 has constant bandwidth over the
1 mV/div to 5 V/div deflection factor range. The
bandwidth is selectable to FULL or 5 MHz for
best displayed noise conditions for low-frequency
applications.
As a differential amplifier the 7A13 provides a
balanced (+ and - ) input for applications requiring rejection of a common-mode signal. The
CMRR is 20,000:1 from dc to 100 kHz, derating to
200:1 at 20 MHz. The unit can reject up to 10 V of
common-mode signal at a deflection factor setting of 1 mV/div, increasing to 100 V rejection
potential at 10 mV/div (XlO Vc pulled) and 500 V
at 0.1 V/div.
As a comparator amplifier the 7A 13 loses its
differential capability, but provides an accurate
(0.1%) positive or negative internal offsetting
voltage covering the common-mode signal range
of the unit. A signal of up to ± 10 V may be
applied to an input (+ or -) at a deflection
factor setting of 1 mV/div and, with an opposing
Vc (offset voltage), viewed in 10,000 segments of
1 mY. The offset voltage is also available as an
output for external monitoring.
272
1 mVto
50 mV/div
10mVto
50 mV/div
(Xl0 Vc out)
and 0.1 V to
0.5 V/div
0.1 V to 0.5
V/div (Xl0 Vc
out) and 1 V
to 5 V/div
± 10V
± 100 V
± 5oo V
± 40 V
± 4oo V
± 5oo V
Differential Amplifier
Commonmode Signal
Maximum Dccoupled Input
(de + Peak
Ac at 1 kHz
or less)
7A22
Dc to 1 MHz Bandwidth
10 /lV/div to 10 V/div
Calibrated Deflection Factors
Maximum Accoupled Input
(de Voltage)
± 500 V
100,000:1 CMRR
Maximum Input Gate Current - 0.2 nA or less from 0 to
35 · C; 2 nA or less at 85 to 55· C.
Selectable Upper and Lower - 3 dB Points
Dc Stability - Drift with time (constant ambient temperature
and line voltage): short term, 1 mV pop or 0.1 diY, or less
(whichever is greater) over any I-minute interval after 20 minute warm-up, Long term, 1 mV pop or 0.1 div or less (whichever
is greater) during any 1 hr interval after 20 minute warm-up.
Drift with ambient temperature (constant line voltage),
2 mV/l0· C to 0.2 div/ l0 · C or less, whichever is greater.
Dc Offset
Displayed Noise (Tangentially measured) - With Xl0 Vc in,
400 ~V (200 ~V RMS) or less at 1 mV/div; 0.2 div or less at
2 mV/div to 5 mV/div; 0.05 div or less at 10 mV/div to 5 V/div.
With Xl0 Vc out, 0.4 div or less at 10 mV/div to 0.5 V/div.
Overdrive Recovery - 1 ~s to recover to within 2 mV and
0.1 ms to recover to within 1 mV after a pulse of ± 10 V or less
at 1 mV/div only regardless of pulse duration.
Intemal Comparison Voltage - Range, 0 V to ± 10 V; accuracy , ± (0.1 % of setting + 3 mY); Vc output R, ", 15 kll.
Common Mode Reiection Ratio
10 /lV/Hour Dc Drift*
1 Mf! Input
The 7A22 is a differential amplifier well suited for
difficult low -amplitude , low-frequency
measurements.
.
High CMRR Probes for Differential Amplifiers
We recommend the P6055 high CMRR adjustable
10X probes for use with Tektronix differential
amplifiers.
When used in pairs, these probes allow adjustment for maximum common mode rejection ratio
(CMRR) .
GMAA SpeClllc~hon ( I mV / d,v, to so mV / dlv only!
See page 441 for P6055 characteristics.
p .p Amo"tude SinUSOid Tesl Signal
'"
-
'
I~---+----~___
I
I
20.000 1
1\
~ 1 - - - t - - - t - -=-'k---t-----1 'OOOO I
~ -----~,.
~" l0I - - - t - - -t-- -'k--
'"
"
"j flhcat,on
POT'S
-Tt-----1 "XlO'
\
"""
\
~
oC;---~':';-"::H-:' --:'~
OO7:'H7:',---'-:,M
:::-H
::, -~
'O'::
MH::'-'---::I~~H~
FREOUENCY
At least 2000:1,10 mV/div to 50 mV (Xl0 Vc out) and 0.1 V/div
to 5 V/div. Ac-roupled input at least 500:1 at 60 Hz.
Order 7 A 13 Amplifier .......................... $2,865
·With constant temperature. See de stability specifications.
7000
TEK SERIES
FET PROBE
AMPLIFIER
7A11
CHARACTERISTICS
Bandwidth - HF - 3 dB point ; selectable in nine steps (1-3
sequence) from 100 Hz to 1 MHz , accurate within 10% of selected frequency ; risetime in 1 MHz position is 350 ns ± 9%. LF
- 3 dB point ; selectable In six steps (1-10 sequence) from
0.1 Hz to 10 kHz, accurate within 12% of selected frequency .
The switch also contains dc and dc with OFFSET positions.
Ac-coupled at input, 2 Hz or less.
~
•.
VOUI / OIV
MIn_Ie.
-
I~
Deflection Factor - 10 ~V/d iv to 10 V/div in 19 calibrated
steps (1 -2-5 Sequence). Accuracy is within 2% with gain adjusted to 1 mV/div. Uncalibrated VARIABLE is continuous between steps to at least 25 V/div.
Input Rand C -
...
1 Mil within 1%; ,.,47 pF.
P'Ol.AltfTT
Maximum Input Gate Current - Differentially measured,
40 pA ( + 25 ' C) and 200 pA ( + 50 ' C) at 10 ~V / div to
10 mV/div ; 10 pA (+ 25 ' C) and 20 pA ( + 50' C) at 20 mV/div
to 10 V/div.
..... : -
Single ended, one-half the differential measurement. Display
shift is ± 4 div (+25'C) and ± 20 div (+ 50' C) at 10 ~V/div (accoupled).
Signel end 011 set Range
I
Deflection
Factor
Settings
10 ~V
to 10
mV/div
20 mV
to 0.1
V/div
Common-mode
Signal Range
± 10 V
± 100V
± 500 V
Maximum Dc-coupled
Input (dc + peak ac
at 1 kHz or less)
± 15 V
± 200V
± 500 V
Maximum Ac-coupled
Input (dc voltage)
Dc Offset
Range
0.2 V
to 1
V/div
2V
to 10
V/div
Built-in FET Probe
±500 V
dc rejection, at least 4 x 10': 1
+ IV
to
- IV
+10 V
to
- 10 V
+ I00~I
+ l000V
to
to
- 100V
1000 V
DC Stebility - Drift with time (constant ambient temperature
and line voltage): short term, 5 ~V (p-p) or 0.1 diy, whichever is
greater in any minute after one hr warm-up. Long term, 10 ~V
(p-p) or 0.1 diY, whichever is greater in any hr after one hr
warm-up. Drift with ambient temperature (constant line voltage)
is 50 ~V/' C or less.
DI.played Noi.e - 16 ~V or 0.1 div (whichever is greater) at
maximum bandwidth ; source resistance 25 Il or less measured
tangentially .
Overdrive Recovery - 10 ~s or less to recover within 0.5% of
zero level after removal of a test signal applied for 1 s (signal
amplitude not to exceed differential dynamic range). Front-panel OVERDRIVE light indicates that an overdrive condition is
being approached.
Common Mode Rejection Ratio (for signals not exceeding
common mode signal range)
100,000 I
7A11
r----,-----,-.-:..:....--,----~
Dc to 250 MHz Bandwidth (7900 Family)
5 mV/div to 20 V/div
Dc Stability - Drift with time (constant ambient temperature
and line voltage): short term, 0.1 div or less per minute after
20 minute warm-up. Long term, 0.3 div or less per hr after
20 minute warm up. Drift with ambient temperature (constant
line voltage), 200 ~V/' C or less.
Displayed Nol.e - 0.5 mV or 0.1 diY, whichever is greater, in
FULL BANDWIDTH mode, measured tangentially.
Off ••t Function - An internal dc source, continuously variable between + 1 Vand - 1 V, may be used to offsetthe trace.
(See chart for offset range.) An OFFSET OUT jack allows for
monitoring of the offset voltage. OFFSET OUT source resistance is 500 Il within 3%.
Calibrated Deflection Factors
Dc Offset
1 MO Input
The 7A 11 is a wide band plug-in amplifier. The
captive FET probe input configuration optimizes
signal acquisition with high resistance (1 MO) and
low capacitance (5.8 pF at 5 mV/div), without loss
of signal amplitude by probe attenuation. Two
20X attenuators, physically mounted in the probe
tip, are relay-switched into the input signal path at
the appropriate deflection factor. Therefore you
need not concern yourself with manual plug-on
attenuators and signal dynamic range .
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Capacitor-coupler head, (011-0110-00); retractable hOok tip,
(013-0106-00); probe tip ground adaptor, (013-0085-00); three
in ground lead (nose), (175-0849-00); three in ground lead
(screw-in), (175-0848-00); 12 In ground lead (screw-in), 18 in
cable (offset out), (175-1092-00); (175-0848-02); three miniature alligator clips, (344-0046-00); two insulated sleeves, probe
tip to GR 50 Il termination, (017-0088-00); (166-0404-01);
probe hook tip, (206-0114-00).
Order 7A11 Amplifier .......................... $2,470
CHARACTERISTICS
10, OOCI . '
Dellection Factor - 5 mV/div to 20 V/div in 12 calibrated
steps (1-2-5 sequence). Accuracy is within 2% of gain adjustment at 0.1 V/div. Uncalibrated VARIABLE is continuous between steps to at least 50 V/div.
Input Rand C - 1 Mil within 1%; ,., 5.8 pF (5 mV/div to
50 mV/div), = 3.4 pF (0.1 V/div to 1 V/div), ,.,2 pF (2 V/div to
20 V/div).
Signal and Offset Range
Order 7A22 Amplifier .. ________________________ $1,500
Deflection
Factor
Settings
5 mV/div to
50 mV/div
0.1 V/div
to 1 V/div
2 V/div
to 20 V/div
Offset
Range
+1 Vto
- IV
+ 20 V to
- 20 V
+ 400 V to
- 400 V
Offset
Range to
Offset Out
1:1 within 1%
+0.5 mV
20:1 within
400: 1 within
1.5% + 0.5 mV 2% + 0.5 mV
Maximum
Dc-coupled
Input
200 V (dc
200 V (dc
+ peak ac,
+ peak ac,
ac component ac component
to 50 kHz)
to 40 MHz)
Maximum
Ac coupled
Input (Dc
Component)
200 V (dc
+ peak ac,
ac component
to 70 MHz)
± 200 V
For recommended probes-refer to page 234.
273
TEK
7000
SERIES
AMPLIFIERS
7A24
7A29
7A19
-...,-
......... .
VOlTS/ DIV
"
I ··_.
I~
--
_ _ _ NAIl.
AMItUFI(R
Dc to 400 MHz Dual Trace Amplifier
Dc to 600 MHz Amplifier
Dc to 1 GHz Amplifier
7A24
7A19
7A29
Dc to 400 MHz Bandwidth (with 7104)
Dc to 600 MHz Bandwidth (with 7104)
Dc to 1 GHz Bandwidth (with 7104)
5 mV/div to 1 V/div
Calibrated Deflection Factors
10 mV/div to 1 V/div
Calibrated Deflection Factors
10 mV/div to 1 V/div
Calibrated Deflection Factors
50
n Input
50
The 7A24, a high-performance, wide band, dualtrace amplifier, is designed primarily for use with
the 7700, 7800, 7900, and 7100 Series Mainframes. The 7A24 offers 350 MHz bandwidth and
5 mV/div sensitivity; this provides the basic building block for three or four trace operation. It
features constant bandwidth for all deflection
factors, five operating modes (CH 1, CH 2, ALT,
CHOP, ADD) , trigger source selection (CH 1,
CH 2, MODE), and color-keyed control groupings.
Polarity of channel 2 is selectable.
CHARACTERISTICS
Deflection Factor - 5 mV/div to 1 V/div in eight calibrated
steps (1-2-5 sequence). Accuracy is within 2% with gain adjusted to 5 mV/div. Uncalibrated VARIABLE is continuous between
steps to at least 2.5 V/div.
Input R - 50 n within 0.5%; vswr 1.25:1 or less at 5 mV/div
and 10 mV/div, 1.15:1 or less from 20 mV/div to 1 V/div at
250 MHz.
Mulmum Input - 5 V RMS ; 0.5 W maximum input power,
internally protected.
Common Mode Rejection Ratio 50 MHz.
At least 10:1, de to
50
n Input
n Input
Optional ±500 ps Variable Delay Line
Optional ± 500 ps Variable Delay Line
The 7A 19 is a high-performance, wide band, single-trace, plug-in amplifier designed primarily for
use with the 7100, 7700, 7800, and 7900 Family
Mainframes . The polarity of the display is
selectable, either normal or inverted.
The 7A29 is a high performance, wide-bandwidth,
single-trace, plug-in amplifier designed primarily
for use with the 7104 Mainframes. The polarity of
the display is selectable, either normal or inverted. RMS sensed input protection protects the
7A29 against most common overloads.
CHARACTERISTICS
Deflection Factor - 10 mV/div to 1 V/div in seven calibrated
steps (1-2-5 sequence). Accuracy is within 3%.
Input R -
50 n.
Ac Coupling -
- 3 dB at 1 kHz or less from a 50
n source.
Option 04, Variable Signal Delay - Permits matching the
transit time of two preamps and probes to better than 50 ps.
Range is ± 500 ps.
Maximum Input - 50 div peak or 10 V RMS (2 W), whichever
is less, in the dc-coupled mode. 100 V de additional in the aecoupled mode.
ORDERING INFORMATION
7A19 Amplifier . ____ ......••..•..•..•.•..•..••. ._ •._ $2,225
Option 04 -
Variable Signal Delay .....................
Dc Stability - Drift with ambient temperature (constant line
voltage) is 0.02 div/o C. Drift with time (ambient temperature
and line voltage constant), 0.02 div in anyone minute after one
hour warm-up.
+$350
CHARACTERISTICS
Deflection Factor - 10 mV/div to 1 V/div in seven calibrated
steps (1-2-5 sequence). Accuracy is within 2% with gain adjusted at 0.1 V/div. Uncalibrated variable is continuous between
steps to at least 2.5 V/div with some bandwidth penalty.
Input R -
- 3 dB at 1 kHz or less from a 50
n source.
Option 04, Variable Signal Delay - Permits matching the
transit time of two preamps and probes to better than lOps.
Range is ± 500 ps.
Maximum Input - 10 V RMS or 1 W-second pulses not exceeding 50 V peak in de coupled mode. 100 V de additional in
ac coupled mode.
Input Protection - Internal detection circuitry provides protection by automatically disconnecting exoessive signals of up
to 50 V. The 'disconnected' condition is indicated, and has
manual reset.
ORDERING INFORMATION
Order 7 A24 Amplifier ____ •._ •• ._ •._ .•.••• ._ •._. $2,225
7 A29 Amplifier ••................................... $2,530
Option 04 -
274
n.
50
Ac Coupling -
For recommended probes-reler to page 234.
Variable Signal Delay .................... .
+$350
SERIES
TEK 7000
PROGRAMMABLE TIME BASE
DIGITAL PRETRIGGER TIME BASE
7B90P
7B90P
7B87
500 ps /div to 500 ms/div
Calibrated Time Base
Tlme/Diy'
400 MHz Trigger Bandwidth
. n.:::
....OGRAMM ... 8LE
Unmagnilled
Magnilled
2%
3%
50 ns/div to 10 ns/div
3%
4%
500 ps/div
-
5%
Trigger Holdott - Programmable in 62 steps between minimum and maximum
Min (ccw)
Max (cw)
500 ps/div to 2 "s/div
..;3.5 "s
;;.90"s
5 "s/div to 20 "s/div
..;35 "s
;;.900 "s
50 "s/div to 200 "s/div
..;350 "s
;;.9ms
500 "s/div to 2 ms/div
.. 3.5 ms
;;. 90 ms
5 ms/div to 500 ms/div
..;35 ms
;;. 900 ms
0.1 ns or less at 400 MHz.
External Trigger Input - Selectable: 1 MO ± 5%, 20 pF
± 10% or 50 0 ± 5% with 1.22 maximum vswr at 400 MHz.
Maximum input is 250 V (de + peak ac) for 1 MO or one W for
50 0 or one W for 50 o. The level range (excluding peak-topeak AUTO) for a 1 kHz sinewave input is at least ± 3 V in EXT
and at least ± 30 V in EXT .... 10.
Order 7B90P Programmable
Time Base .....•.......•.•.........••....••...•...•.. $2,650
P-P AUTO MODE
Min Signal Required
Int
Ext
At least 50 Hz
2.0 div
500 mV
200 Hz to 50 MHz
0.5 div
125 mV
1.5 div
375 mV
NORM MODE
Triggering
Frequency Range
Min Signal Required
Int
Ext'
Ac
30 Hz to 50 MHz
50 MHz to 400 MHz
0.3 div
1.5 div
100mV
250 mV
Ac LF REJ""
30 kHz to 50 MHz
50 MHz to 400 MHz
0.3 div
1.5 div
100mV
250 mV
Ac HF REJ'"
30 Hz to 50 kHz
0.3 div
l00mV
Dc to 50 MHz
50 MHz to 400 MHz
0.3 div
1.5 div
100mV
250 mV
'External + 10 operation attenuates external trigger signal ten
times.
"Will not trigger on sinewaves or < 8 div Internal, or3 V External, at or below 60 Hz.
"'Will not trigger on 50 MHz sinewaves 1.5 div or less Internal,
or o.15 V or less External.
Same as NORM mode.
7B87
2 times TIME/DIV
setting or less
0.5 "s/div to
10 ns/div
2.0 "s or less
0.2 or less to at least 9.0 times
0.02% of TIME/DIV setting + 0.1 ns, or less .
TRIGGERING
Triggering Sensitlylty (Auto and Norm Mode.) petitive signals.)
(From re-
Min Signal Required
Triggering
Coupling
Frequency Range'
Int
Ext
Ac
30 Hz to 50 MHz
50 MHz to 400 MHz
0.3 div
1.5 div
50mV
250 mV
Ac LF REJ""
30 kHz to 50 MHz
50 MHz to 400 MHz
0.3 div
1.5 div
50mV
250 mV
30 Hz to 50 kHz
0.3 div
50 mV
De to 50 MHz
50 MHz to 400 MHz
0.3 div
1.5 div
50 mV
250 mV
Ac HF REJ
"Triggering frequency ranges are limited to the frequency of the
vertical system when operating in the internal mode.
1 ns/div to 5 s/div Calibrated
Time Bases
"Will not trigger on sinewaves of < 8 div Internal, or 3 V External, at or below 60 Hz.
Triggering to 400 MHz
"'Triggering Frequency Range for de coupling applies to frequencies above 30 Hz when operating in the autotrigger mode.
Variable Trigger Holdoff
Single Sweep inputs.
Pretrigger when used with 7854
The 7887 is a time base designed for use with the
7854 Mainframe to provide additional pretrigger
capability. The pretrigger feature is only compatible with the 7854 at this time. When used in the B
horizontal of the 7854, the 7887 provides both
single shot and pretrigger capability to the 7854.
The 7887 has the same characteristics as the
7B80!7B85 Time Base Plug-ins except for single
shot pretrigger capability. Pretrigger allows you to
view what has occurred before the trigger even in
single shot applications. The amount of pretrigger
time is determined by the Acquire-Stop delay
time setting. The total amount of pretrigger is 0.2
to 9.9 times the time/div setting .
The INT ..;- 1000 control reduces the stored
time/div to 1000 times slower than the real time
display on a 7854. This does not, however, affect
the Acquire-Stop delay time. The INT ..;- 1000
control allows stored sweep speeds from 10 ms
to 5000 s/div for slow speed applications.
An EXT CLOCK-IN connector is provided for
clock frequencies other than what is offered by
the INT clock of the 7B87.
Programmable in 0.05 div steps.
Horizontal Position - Programmable in 0.0125 div step unmagnified, 0.125 div step magnified .
5 s/div to
1 "s/div
Extends holdoff time through at least
2 sweep lengths for rates of 20 ms/div
or faster
De'"
Triggering Sensitiyity
Single-Sweep Mode -
4.0%
Jilter ~
Intemal Trigger Jilter -
500 ms/div to 100 ns/div
Trigger Level -
2.5%
2.5%
Delay Time Range TIME/DIV setting .
,..Op _____TO_M_. _.._._. __
Sweep Accuracy - Measured over center 8 div, + 15" C to
+ 35 " C, with any 7000 Series Programmable Mainframe. Derate accuracies by an additional 1% for 0 to + 50 " C
Dc
1.5%
20 ns/div to 10 ns/div
Variable
Hoidoff
Range
•
Sweep Retes - 500 ms/div to 10 ns/div in 24 steps. Magnifier
extends fastest calibrated sweep rate to 500 ps/div.
Coupling
0.5 s/div to 50 ns/div
Minimum
Hoidoff
Selting
CHARACTERISTICS
50 MHz to 400 MHz
unspecified
Trigger Holdott Time
The programmable 7B90P is designed for
use with a Tektronix 7912AD Programmable Digitizer. Its operating functions can be
manually selected at the front panel or
selected under program control via the
IEEE 488 bus. The only non programmable
functions are the Sweep Calibration adjustment and the External Trigger Input
Terminator Switch .
Triggering
Frequency Range
Magnilled
4%
'Fastest caliixated sweep rate is limited by 7700 and 7600.
Single-Sweep Operation
Timel Diy
Unmagnified
5 s/div to 1 s/div
Fully Programmable Plug-in
7912AD Digitizer only
Tlmel Dly
Sweep Accuracy - Measured over the center 8 div, 15 to
35 " C, in the 7700, 7800, or 7900 Series Mainframes. Derate
aocuracies by an additional 1% for O" C to + 50 " C.
CHARACTERISTICS
Sweep Rates - 5 s/div to 10 ns/div in 27 steps (1-2-5 sequence). Xl0 MAGNIFIER extends lastest calibrated sweep
rate to 1 ns div. The uncalibrated VARIABLE is continuous to
at least 2.5 times the calibrated sweep rate.
Requirements are same as for repetitive
Internal Trigger Jilter Sensitlylty -
0.1 ns or less at 400 MHz.
P-P AUTO Mode (ac or dc coupling)
Triggering
Frequency Range
Min Signal Required
Int
Ext
Low Frequency Response:
At least 50 Hz
2.0 div
500 mV
200 Hz to 50 MHz
0.5 div
125 mV
50 MHz to 400 MHz
1.5 div
375 mV
Extemal Trigger Input - Maximum input voltage is 250 V (dc
+ peak ac). Input Rand C is 1 MO within 5% and 20 pF within
10%. The level range (excluding P-P AUTO) is at least ± 1.5 V
in External .... 1, and at least ± 15 V in External + 10.
Intemal Clock - Pretrigger 0.02048 Hz to 20.45 MHz determined by the time/div. Xl 0 magnification and -;- 1000 switches.
Accuracy of internal + Internal -;- 1000 = 0.1 %.
Extemal Clock - Maximum input is 5 V peak . Input R is
100 kO within 5%. Threshold voltage TIL compatible. Maximum input frequency 10 MHz with 8NC input. Delay 0.5 "s or
less.
Acquire Stop Delay - Total range is 0.2 or less to at least 9.9
times Time/Div setting. Jitter from 5 s/div to 10 "s/div 0.07% of
time/div setting or less. Delay accuracy (+ 15"C to + 35 "C)
from 0.5 s/div to 10 ~s/div is within 0.5% of measurement plus
5% of time/div setting.
Single Shot Performance Clock.
FASTEST Sweep (Time IDly)
50
100
200
500
"s
"s
"s
"s
Using 7887 with 7854 Internal
PointslWaYeform
128
256
512
1024
Order 7887 Time Base ....................... $1,575
275
BASE
TEK DELAYEDYINGTIMETIMEBASE
~DELA
7810/7815
7B15
7B10
0.2 ns/div to 0.2s/div Calibrated
Time Bases
Triggering to 1 GHz
Variable Trigger Holdoff
Peak-to-Peak Autotriggering
7B15 Features:
!:J. Time Measurements
with CRT Readout
Delayed Time Measurements
with CRT Readout
='i'
Vertical Trace Separation
between Two Delayed Sweeps
The 7B10 and 7B15 are horizontal time bases
designed for use with the 7104 Mainframe to
provide
optimum
bandwidth / sweep speed/compatibility, but may also be used with
the 7700, 7800, and 7900 Series Mainframes.
(Each may be used in any slower 7000 Series
Mainframe with some reduction in sweep accuracy at the fastest sweep speed .)
The 7B10 and 7B15 or the 7880 and 7B85 provide
the !:J.time measurement capability in addition to
the standard delay time capability. Either time
interval is digitally displayed on the CRT. A single
intensified zone which you can position anywhere
on the trace identifies the delay time interval (the
time from the ' A" or main sweep to the start of
the intensified zone). Two intensified zones which
you can position anywhere on a trace identify the
!:J.time interval (time between intensified zones).
Altemate sweep switching makes it possible to
display the information between the intensified
zones full screen at the ' B" sweep speed. By
overlapping the two expanded waveforms, you
are confident of the exact positioning of the
intensified zones on the ' A" sweep. This results in
easy-to-make, precise and repeatable timing
measurements.
By rotating the TRACE SEPARATION control out
of the OFF position, the !:J.time mode is activated.
Two intensified zones can be independently positioned . As in the conventional delay mode, the
DELAY TIME knob adjusts the time to the first
intensified zone; the !:J.TIME knob adjusts the time
between the two intensified zones. Now, the CRT
digital readout shows the !:J.time between the two
delays.
7811
OELAYIN G T IME BASE
Delayed Time Base
!:J.Delaying Time Base
Either plug-in can be used separately as an
independent single time base, or they can be
combined in any mainframe with two horizontal
compartments for delaying and delayed
operation.
Delay Time Range TIME/DIV setting.
0.2 or less to at least 9.0 times
Jitter - 0.02% 01 TIME/DIV setting up through 50 "s/diY.
0.03% 01 TIME/DIV setting piUS 0.1 ns lor sweep speeds 01
20 "s/diY through 100 ns/diy.
TRIGGERING
CHARACTERISTICS
Triggering Sensitivity
Sweep Rates - 0.2 s/diy to 2 ns/diy in 25 steps. X1 0 MAGNIFIER extends lastest calibrated sweep rate to 0.2 ns/diy. The
uncalibrated VARIABLE is continuous to at least 2.5 times the
calibrated sweep.
Sweep Accuracy - Measured oyer the center 8 diY, + 15· C
to + 35 · C, in the 7104, 7800 or 7900 Series Mainlrame. Derate accuracies by an additional 1% lor O· C to + 50 · C.
Coupling
Int
Ext
30 Hz to 250 MHz
250 MHz to 1 GHz
0.5 diY
1.5 diy
50 mV
150 mV
Ac LI REr
50 kHz to 250 MHz
250 MHz to 1 GHz
0.5 diy
1.5 diy
50 my
150 mV
30 Hz to 40 kHz
0.5 diy
50 mV
Dc to 250 MHz
250 MHz to 1 GHz
0.5 diY
1.5 diy
50 mV
150 mV
Magnilied
0.2 s/diy to 10 ns/diy
2%
3%
Ac HI REJ
5 ns/diy and 2 ns/diy
3%
4%
Dc'"
'Fastest calibrated sweep rate is limited by 7900, 7800, 7700,
7600 and 7300 Series Mainframes.
Trigger Holdofl Time
0.2 s/diy
to 50 ms/diy
20 ms/diy
to 2 ~s/diY
1 ~s/diY
to 0.5 ~s/diY
0.2 ~s/diY
to 2 ns/diy
~ Time
Range -
Minimum Trig~ering
Signal Requ red
Ac
Unmagnified
Time/Dlv·
Triggering
Frequency Range·
'The triggering frequency ranges given here are limited to the
- 3 dB frequency of the oscilloscope vertical system when 0perating in the internal mode.
Minimum
Maximum
with VARIABLE
"Will not trigger on sinewaves at or below 60 Hz when amplitudes are < 8 div Internal or 3 V Extemal.
40 ms
400 ms
X2 the
TIME/Diy Setting
X20 the
TIM E/Diy Setting
"'The Triggering Frequency Range for DC COUPLING applies
to frequencies above 30 Hz when operating in the AUTO TRIGGERING MODE.
2
~s
2 "s
20
~s
6 "s
0 to at least 9 times TIME/DIV setting.
~ Time Accuracy Within (0.5% measurement piUS 3 least
significant digits) 20 ms/diy to 100 ns/diy.
Trace Separation Range - Functional only in ~Delay Time
mode when alternating or chopping between tim.... base units.
The second delayed sweep display can be Yertlcally positioned
at least 3 diy below the lirst delayed sweep display.
Single Sweep inputs.
Requirements are the same as lor repetitive
Internal Trigger Jitter HF Sync Mode 0.75 mV external.
30 ps or less at 1 GHz.
250 MHz to 1 GHz 0.3 diy internal and
External Trigger Input - Maximum input yoltage is 250 V (de
+ peak ac) for 1 Mil input, 1 W average for 50 II input. Input R
and C for 1 Mil input is 1 Mil within 5%, 20 pF within 10%; lor
50 II input, 50 !l within 2%. Leyel range is at least ± 3.5 V in
EXT .,. 1.
ORDERING INFORMATION
7B10 Time Base .................................. $2,110
7B15 Delaying Time Base ................... $2,390
276
7000
TEK SERIES
7880/7885
DELAYED TIME BASE
aDELAYING TIME BASE
7B80
7B85
Delayed Time Base
ADelaying Time Base
Sweep Accuracy - Measured over the center 8 diy, + 15°C
to + 35°C, in the 7700, 7800, or 7900 Series Mainframe. Derate accuracies by an additional 1% for O°C to + 50°C
TRIGGERING
Triggering Sensitivity (Auto and Norm Modes)
(from repetitive signals)
1 ns/div to 5 s/div Calibrated
Time Bases
Triggering to 400 MHz
Variable Trigger Holdoff
Peak·to·Peak Auto Triggering
7B85 Features:
A Time Measurements
with CRT Readout
Delayed Time Measurements
with CRT Readout
Vertical Trace Separation
Between Two Delayed Sweeps
The 7B80 and 7B85 are horizontal time bases
recommended for use with 7700, 7800 and 7900
Series mainframes to provide optimum
bandwidth/sweep-speed compatibility. (Each
may be used in any slower 7000 Series mainframe
with some reduction in sweep accuracy at the
fastest sweep speed.)
Either plug-in can be used separately as an
independent single time base, or they can be
combined in any mainframe with two horizontal
compartments for delaying and delayed
operation .
X-V displays are available using a 7B80 with
Option 02. A front-panel button (DISPLAY MODE)
selects either normal sweep or X-V display. Both
signals are applied to vertical (Y) amplifiers, and
the desired horizontal (X) signal is then routed
through plug-in and mainframe trigger paths to
the ?B80, An X-V mode selection then applies the
signal to the horizontal deflection system.
CHARACTERISTICS
Characteristics are common to both units unless otherwise
noted.
Sweep Rates - 5 s/div to 10 ns/div in 27 steps (1-2-5 sequence). Xl0 MAGNIFIER extends fastest calibrated sweep
rate to 1 ns div. The uncalibrated VARIABLE is continuous to
at least 2.5 times the calibrated sweep rate.
Time/Diy·
5 s/div to 1 s/div
0.5 s/div to 50 ns/div
20 ns/div to 10 ns/div
Unmagnified
Magnified
4%
1.5%
2.5%
Unspecified
2.5%
4.0%
'Fastest calibrated sweep rate is limited by 7700 and 7600.
Trigger Holdolf Time
Minimum
Holdoff
Setting
Variable
Holdoff
Range
5 s/div to 1 ~s/div
0.5 ~s/div to 10 ns/div
2 times TIMEJDIV
setting or less
2.0 ~s or less
Extends holdoff time through at least
2 sweep lengths for rates of 20 ms/div
or faster
6 Time Range - 0 to at least 9 times TIMEJDIV setting.
6Time Accuracy - (+ 15°C to + 35 °C)
Within (0.5% measurement 0.3% of TIMEJDIV setting + 1 least
significant digit) from 20 ms/div to 100 ns/div.
Trace Separation Range - Functional only in 6Delay Time
modIe when alternating or chopping between time-base units.
The second delayed sweep display can be vertically positioned
at least 3 div below the first delayed sweep display.
Delay Time Range - 0.2 or less to at least 9.0 times TlMEIDIV setting.
Jitter -
0.02% of TIMEJDIV setting plus 1 ns, or less.
Triggering
Coupling
Frequency Range"'
Int
Ext
0.3 div
1.5 div
0.3 div
1.5 div
50 mV
250 mV
50mV
250 mV
Ac Lf
REJ'2
30
50
30
50
Ac Hf
REJ
30 Hz to 50 kHz
0.3 div
50mV
Dc'
Dc to 50 MHz
50 MH to 400 MHz
0.3 div
1.5 div
50mV
250mV
Ac
Hz to 50 MHz
MHz to 400 MHz
kHz to 50 MHz
MHz to 400 MHz
Min Signal Required
~
Triggering frequency ranges are limited to the frequency of
the vertical system when operating in the Internal mode.
Will not trigger on sine waves of less than 8 div Internal, or
3 V External, at or below 60 Hz.
., Triggering Frequency Range for de coupling applies to frequencies above 30 Hz when operating in the Auto Triggering
mode.
"2
Single Sweep - Requirements are same as for repetitive
inputs.
Internal Trigger Jitter - 0.1 ns or less at 400 MHz.
Sensitivity - poP AUTO Mode (ac or dc coupling)
Triggering
Frequency Range
Low Frequency Response:
At least 50 Hz
200 Hz to 50 MHz
50 MHz to 400 MHz
Min Signal Required
Int
Ext
2.0 div
0.5 div
1.5 div
500 mV
125 mV
375 mV
External Trigger Input - Maximum input voltage is 250 V (de
+ peak ac). Input R and C is 1 Mil within 5% and 20 pF within
10%. The level range (excluding poP AUTO) is at least ± 1.5 V
in EXT -;- I, and at least ± 15 V in EXT -;- 10.
7B80 Option 02 - X-V Phase Shill (Determined by the circuitry in mainframe) - For mainframe without X-V horizontal compensation, the mainframe phase shill specifications are retained for frequencies of 50 kHz and below. For mainframes
with optional X-V horizontal compensation, the extra delay
adds to the phase shift error above 50 kHz.
ORDERING INFORMATION
7B80 Time Base •..•..•........................... $1,335
Option 02 Figure 1. Delaying and delayed sweeps are shown with the
mainframe selecting ALT sweep modes. The delay time to the
start of the delayed sweep is digitally presented on the lower
edge of the CRT.
X-V Horizontal Compensation .. _..... _.... __ +$100
7B85 Delaying Time Base .•..•..•••••....... $1,605
Figure 2. With the mainframe still selecting ALT sweeps, delaying and both delayed sweeps are shown. The digital readout on
the lower CRT edge shows the time between the two sweep
delays. The TRACE SEPARATION knob is used to position the
second delayed sweep below the first delayed sweep with up
to 3 div of separation.
277
DUAL
BASES
TEK TIME
7B92A
CHARACTERISTICS
DELAYING SWEEP (MAIN SWEEP)
Sweep Rate - 0.2 s/div to 10 ns/div in 23 calibrated steps (12-5 sequence). An uncalibrated variable rate is continuous between steps, and extends sweep rate to at least 0.5 s/div. The
VARIABLE control is internally switchable between delaying
and delayed sweeps.
Sweep Accuracy - Measured over the center 8 div in a 7900
Family Oscilloscope·
Timel DiY
+IS oC to +3S'C
O'C to +sooC
+IS'C to +3S'C
O'C to +SO'C
0.2 s/div to 20 ns/div
Within 2%
Within 3%
0.2 s/div to 20 nsldiy
Within 2%
Within 3%
10 ns/div to 5 ns/div
Within 3%
Within 4%
10 ns/div
Within 3%
Within 4%
2 ns/div to 1 ns/div
Within 4%
Within 5%
0.5 ns/div
Within 5%
Within 6%
Differential Delay Time Measurement Accuracy + 35°C).
Dual Time Base
50 ns/div to
10 ns/div
0.5 ns/div to 0.2 s/div Calibrated Time Base
Triggering to 500 MHz
Triggering
Coupling
Both delay time mult
dial settings at 0.5
or greater
± (0.75% of measurement + 0.25%
of full scale)
One or both delay time
mult dial settings at
less than 0.5
± (0.75% of measurement + 0.5% of
full scale + 5 ns)
Both delay times
equal to or greater
than 25 ns
± (1 % of measurement + 0.5% of
full scale)
One or both delay
times less than 25 ns
± (1 % of measurement + 1% of full
scale +5 ns)
Alternate Display of Intensified
Delaying and Delayed Sweeps
Full scale is 10 times the TIME/DIV or DlY TIME setting. Accuracy applies over the center 8 Delay Time Multiplier div from
+ 15°C to +35 °C.
Contrast Regulation between
Delaying and Delayed Sweeps
Delay Time Jitter'
There are four display modes: normal sweep,
intensified delaying sweep, delayed sweep, and
alternate sweep (excepting alternate in R7704).
When operating in the AUTO mode of main
triggering, a bright base line is displayed in the
absence of a trigger signal.
0.2 s/div to
50 ~s/div
1 part in 50,000 of the maximum available
delay time
20 ~s/div to
10 ns/div
1 part in 50,000 of the maximum available
delay time + 0.5 ns
, Not applicable for the first 2% of maximum available delay
time (DELAY TIME MULT dial setting > 0.2). Maximum available delay time is 10 times the TlME/DIV or DLY TIME switch
setting.
MAIN TRIGGERING
Auto Norm
Triggering
Coupling
Min Signal Required
Frequency Range
Int
Ext
Ac
30 Hz to 20MHz
20 MHz to 500 MHz
0.5 div
1.0 div
100 mV
500 mV
Ac IF REJ'
30 kHz to 20 MHz
20 MHz to 500 MHz
0.5 div
1.0 div
100 mV
500 mv
Ac HF REJ
30 Hz to 50 kHz
0.5 div
l00mV
Dc to 20 MHz
0.5 div
1.0 div
100 mV
500 mV
Dc
20 MHz to 500 MHz
EXT -;- 10 switch attenuates external signal 10 times.
HF Sync - Triggering sensitivity is 0.5 div INT or 100 mV EXT,
from 100 MHz to 500 MHz for any coupling except Ac HF Rej.
Single Sweep - Triggering requirements are the same as normal sweep. When triggered, time base produces one sweep
only until reset.
Internal Trigger Jitter -
50 ps or less at 500 MHz.
External Trigger Input - Selectable 50 II or 1 Mil inputs
(1 Mil is paralleled by ",,20 pF). Maximum safe input is 250 V
(de + peak ac) for 1 Mil input and 1 W average for 50 II input.
Range of trigger level is at least ± 3.5 V in EXT, and at least
± 35 V in EXT -;- 10.
278
Delayed Triggering
(15 °C to
Sweep Speed
0.2 s/div to
0.1 ~s/div
The 7B92A Dual Time Base is recommended for
use only in the 7800 and 7900 Series mainframes
(the 7B92A may be used in all other mainframes
at slower sweep speeds).
Sweep Accuracy - Measured over the center 8 div in a 7900
Family Oscilloscope·
TimelDiy
Delay Time Multiplier Range - 0 to 9.8 times the DlY TIME/
DIV setting from 0.2 s/div to 10 ns/div (0 to 1.96 s).
7B92A
DELAYED SWEEP
Sweep Rate - 0.2 s/div to 0.5 ns/div in 27 steps (1-2-5 sequence). An uncalibrated variable rate is continuous between
steps, and extends sweep rate to at least 0.5 s/div . The VARI ABLE control is internally switchable between delaying and delayed sweeps.
Min Signal Required
Frequency Range
Int
Ext
Ac
30 Hz to 20 MHz
20 MHz to 500 MHz
0.5 div
1.0 div
l00mV
500mV
Dc
DC to 20 MHz
20 MHz to 500 MHz
0.5 div
1.0 div
l00mV
500 mV
Internal Trigger Jitter -
50 ps or less at 500 MHz.
External Trigger Input - Selectable 50 II or 1 Mil inputs
(1 Mil is paralleled by ",, 20 pF). Maximum safe input is 250 V
(dc + peak ac) for 1 Mil input, and 1W average for 50 II input.
Range of trigger level is at least ± 3.5 in EXT.
Order 7B92A Dual Time Base ............ $3,175
TEK
7000
SERIES
7B53A
CHARACTERISTICS
DELAYING SWEEP
Sweep Rate - 0.05 ~s/div to 5 s/div in 25 steps (1-2-5 sequence). 5 ns/div, the fastest calibrated sweep rate, is obtained
with the Xl0 MAGNIFIER. The uncalibrated VARIABLE Is continuous between steps. The variable control is internally switchable between main, delayed-sweep, and variable main-sweep
hoIdoff.
Sweep Accurecy (Measured over the center 8 div )
TlmelDly
Unmagnified
Magnified
+ 15· C to O·Cto + 15· C to
+ 35· C + 50· C
+ 35 · C
O· C to
+ 50· C
5 s/div to 1 s/div
3%
4%
0.5 sldlv to
0.05 ~/div
3%
4%
3.5%
5%
50 ms/div to
0.5 ~s/div
2%
3%
2.5%
4%
Unspecified Unspecified
Delay Time Multiplier Range - 0 to 10 times the DELAY
TlME/DIV setting from 5 s/div to 1 ~s/div .
Dual Time Base
7B53A
Differential Delay Time Meaaurement Accuracy - 5 s/div to
1 s/div ± 1.4% of measurement + 0.3% of full scale; O.S s/div
to 1 ~s/div : ± 0.7% of measurement + 0.3% OJ full scale. Full
scale is 10 times the DELAY TIME/DIV setting. Accuracy applies over the center 8 DTM divisions from 15 to 35· C.
Jitter -
0.05% or less of TIME/DIV setting.
Calibrated Mixed Sweep
Ac
Ac LF REJ'
Single-Sweep Operation
Ext
30 Hz to 10MHz
10 MHz to 100 MHz
0.3 div
1.5 div
l00mV
500mV
Dc
Dc to 10 MHz
10 MHz to 100 MHz
0.3 dlv
1.5 div
l00mV
SOOmV
Intemel Trigger Jitter -
1 ns or less at 75 MHz.
External Trigger Input - Maximum input voltage Is 500 V (de
+ peak ac), 500 V peak-to-peak ac at 1 kHz or less. Input R
and C is 1 Mil within 2%, 20 pF within 2 pF. LEVEL range Is at
least + 1.5 V to - 1.5 V in EXT.
MIXED SWEEP
Sweep Accuracy - Within 2% plus measured main sweep
error. Exclude the following portions of mixed sweep: first
0.5 div after start of main sweep display and 0.2 div or 0.1 ~
(whichever is greater) after transition of main to delayed sweep.
EXT HORIZONTAL INPUT
Bandwidth
Coupling
Lower -3 dB
30 Hz to 10MHz
10 MHz to 100 MHz
0.3 div
l.S div
100mV
500mV
Ac
40Hz
Ac LF REJ
16kHz
30 kHz to 10 MHz
150 kHz to 10 MHz
10 MHz to 100 MHz
0.3 div
--
Ac HF REJ
40 Hz
1.5 div
100 mV
500mV
Dc
Dc
30 Hz to 50 kHz
0.3 div
l00mV
Dc to 10 MHz
0.3 div
1.5 div
l00mV
500 mV
--
10 MHz to 100 MHz
The 7B53A Time Base features four kinds of
sweep: normal, intensified delaying, delayed, and
mixed. The pushbutton switches cannot be lit.
Int
Ac
Ext
Ac HF REJ
'Will not trigger on sinewaves 0(3 divor/ess INT or 1.5 V EXT
below 120 Hz.
Single Sweep - Triggering requirements are the same as normal sweep. When triggered, sweep generator produces one
sweep only until reset.
Intemel Trigger Jitter -
Min Signel Required
Frequency Renge·
Int
Dc
The easy-to-use 7B53A Dual Time Base is recommended for use with 7600 mainframes to provide
optimum bandwidth/sweep-speed compatibility.
It may, however, be used in any 7000 Series
mainframe. The fastest rate (5 ns/div) is obtained
with the X10 MAGNIRER .
Triggering
Coupling
Frequency Range
Coupling
Triggering to 100 MHz
Optional TV Sync-Separator Triggering
Min Signal Required
Triggering
Triggering
Deflection Factor- l 0 mV/divwithin 10% when in EXT, MAG
Xl0; 100 mV/div within 10% when in EXT; 1 V/div within 10%
when In EXT -;- 10.
Triggering
5 ns/div to 5 s/div Calibrated Time Base
Delayed Sweep Gate - Output voltage Is "" + 3.5 V Into at
least 10 kll shunted by 100 pF or less, or 0.5 V into 50 Il. Rise
time is 50 ns or less ; output R Is 350 Il within 10%. Gate Is
available at the DLY'D TRIG IN connector when the delayed
sweep source switch Is set to INT.
1 ns or less at 75 MHz.
External Trigger Inpu1 - Maximum input VOltage is 500 V (dc
+ peak ac), 500 V peak-to-peak ac at 1 kHz or less. Input R
and C is 1 Mil within 2%, 20 pF within 2 pF. LEVEL range is at
least 1.5 V to - 1.5 V in EXT, at least 15 V to - 15 V in EXT ~
10.
2MHz
2 MHz
100 kHz
2 MHz
TV SYNC
Option OS, TV Sync Separator Triggering - Permits stable
internal line or field rate triggering from displayed composite
video or composite sync waveforms. Conventional waveform
displays and measurements can be made from standard broadcast or closed circuit tv systems, domestic or international,
with up to 1201-line, 60 Hz field rates. Individual lines may be
displayed with delayed sweep features . The wide range of d&layed sweeps permits accurate alternate-frame, color-burst 0bservations in the PAL color system. Option 05 deletes ac line
trigger and External -;- 10 from trigger source.
ORDERING INFORMATION
7B53A Dual Time Base ...... _.. __ ............ $1,430
Option 05 -
DELAYED SWEEP
Upper -3 dB
TV Triggering ......................................... +$150
Sweep Rate - 0.05 ~s/div to 0.5 s/div in 22 steps (1-2-S sequence). 5 ns/div, the fastest calibrated sweep rate, is obtained
with the Xl0 MAGNIFIER. The uncalibrated VARIABLE is con·
tinuous between steps to at least 1.25 s/div and is switchable
between the main, delayed sweep, and variable main sweep
hoIdoff.
Sweep Accuracy (Measured over the center 8 div )
TlmelDiv
Unmagnified
Magnified
+ 15· Cto O· C to + 15· C to O· C to
+ 35 · C + 50·C + 3S · C + SO· C
O.S s/div to 0.1 s/div
and 0.2 ~s/div to
0.05 ~s/div
4%
5%
4.5%
6%
50 ms/div to
0.5 ~s/div
3%
4%
3.5%
5%
279
7000
SINGLE
BASE
TEK TIME
7B50A
SERIES
Ac LF REJ attenuates undesirable trigger components below 30 kHz. Ac HF REJ attenuates
components above SO kHz, which can cause
triggering problems during low-frequency applications. Single-sweep functions with lighted READY
indicator and manual reset are associated with
the trigger mode controls.
X-V displays are available with Option 02 installed. A front-panel button (DISPLAY MODE)
selects either normal sweep or X-V display. Both
signals are applied to vertical (Y) amplifiers and
the desired horizontal (X) signal is then routed
through plug-in and mainframe trigger paths to
the 7BSOA. An X-V mode selection then applies
the signal to the horizontal deflection system .
CHARACTERISTICS
Sweep Rates - 0.05 ~s/div to 5 s/div in 25 steps (t -2-5 sequence). 5 ns/div, the fastest calibrated sweep rate, is obtained
with the Xl0 MAGNIFIER. The uncalibrated VARIABLE allows
continuous sweep rate selection between steps.
Time Base
Sweep Accuracy - Measured over center 8 diY, 15 to 35 " C,
with any 7000 Series mainframe. Derate accuracies by an additional 1% each for a to 50 " C
TimelDiv
7B50A
0.5 s/div to 0.5
0.2
Triggering to 150 MHz
Trigger HoldoH Time
Peak-to-Peak Auto Triggering
Single-Sweep Operation
The easy-to-use 7BSOA Time Base is recommended for use with 7f:IYJ Series mainframes to provide optimum bandwidth/sweep-speed compatibility. It may, however, be used in any 7000 Series
mainframe. The fastest rate (5 ns/div) is obtained
with the X10 MAGNIFIER.
This time base features expanded capability in
maximum triggering frequency - now 150 MHz
- and variable trigger holdoff - for stability on
lengthy asynchronous data trains.
Pushbutton positions select triggering mode, coupling method, and source. For routine applications, hands-off triggering is accomplished by
actuating three switches: INT SOURCE, AC COUPLING, and Pop AUTO MODE . The Pop AUTO
MODE provides a base line trace in the absence
of a signal and a triggered trace at any position of
the LEVEUSLOPE control when a signal of 0.5 div
or greater is present. Except for the selection of
+ or - SLOPE this mode is automatic. The other
triggering positions are useful for specific
applications.
280
Magnified
4%
Unspecified
2%
3%
3%
4%
~s/div
5 ns/div to 5 s/div Calibrated Time Base
Variable Trigger Holdott
Unmagnified
5 s/div to 1 s/div
~s/div
to 0.05
~s/div
~s/div
2 times TIME/DIV
setting or less
Minimum
Holdofl
Setting
5 s/div to 1
Variable
Extends holdofl time through at least
2 sweep lengths for sweep rates of
20 ms/div or faster
Holdofl
Range
0.5
~s/div
to 50 ns/div
2.0
~s
or less
Triggering Sensitivity (AUTO and NORM modes)
Triggering
Coupling
Min Signal Required
Frequency Range"
Int
Ext
Ac
30 Hz to 50MHz
50 MHz to 150 MHz
0.3 div
1.5 div
50 mV
250mV
Ac LF REJ"
30 kHz to 50 MHz
50 MHz to 150 MHz
0.3 div
1.5 div
50mV
250 mv
Ac HF REJ
30 Hz to 50 kHz
0.3 div
50 mV
Dc'"
Dc to 50 MHz
50 MHz to 150 MHz
0.3 div
1.5 div
50 mV
250 mV
"Tnggenng frequency ranges are limited to the frequency of the
vertical system when operating in the intemal mode.
"Will not trigger on sinewaves of less than 8 div Intemal, or 3 V
External, at or below 60 Hz.
"'Triggering Frequency Range for de coupling applies to frequencies above 30 Hz when operating in the Auto Triggering
mode.
Sensitivity (P-P AUTO MODE) (Ac or Dc Coupling)
Triggering
Min Signal Required
Frequency Range
Int
Ext
200 Hz to 50 MHz
0.5 div
125 mV
50 MHz to 150 MHz
1.5 div
375 mV
Option 02 X-V Phase Shift (Determined by the circuitry in
mainframe) - For mainframes without X-V horiz compensation, the mainframe phase shift specification is retained for frequencies of 50 kHz and below. For mainframes with optional XV horiz compensation, the extra delay adds to the phase shift
error above 50 kHz.
ORDERING INFORMATION
7B50A Time Base .................................. $890
Option 02 - x-v Horizontal Compensation ................. + 100
TEK 7000
SERIES
7011
DIGITAL
DELAY
An accurate and jitter-free delay-by-time is very
useful when working with digital logic, pcm telemetry, sonar, radar, shock tube testing, and delay
line measurements, to name a few. On receipt of
a trigger, the 7011 in the delay-by-time mode
counts a highly accurate clock; at the selected
delay time, it delivers a delayed trigger to its
front-panel con ector and mainframe. In both
modes, delay time or number of events to be
counted is selected by a Single front-panel
control.
When the 7011 is installed in a vertical compartment, the CRT can display a waveform that lasts
for the duration of the delay interval. This waveform may be displayed together with the Signal
waveform the 7011 triggers on . From a vertical
compartment, the 7011 can trigger a time base
such as 7880, 7B53A, or another 7011 through
the internal mainframe trigger path .
Digital Delay Unit
7011
Delay by Time or Events
Digital Delay Readout to 7'/2 Digits
100 ns to 1 s Delay Time
1 ns Resolution
2.2 ns Delay Time Jitter
0.5 ppm (±2 ns) Accuracy
Delay Interval CRT Display
The 7011 Digital Delay Plug-in gives stable delayed triggers for measurements requiring low
jitter. The 7011 also provides precision time
delays. The 7011 may be used in any compartment of a 7000 Series mainframe equipped with
CRT readout. It provides a variety of outputs.
The delay-by events mode is used to eliminate
jitter in mechanically based systems such as disc
file memories. It is also useful for selecting a
certain time frame in data for analysis and for
making other measurements under complex timing conditions.
In the delay-by events, the 7011 counts arbitrary
trigger events, periodic or aperiodic, and delivers
an output after the preselected count has been
reached (see Figure 2).
In any horizontal compartment, the 7011 generates a display similar to the ' A intensified by B"
mode of conventional delayed sweep (see Figure 2). When used in the A horizontal compartment, the 7011 B sweep delay mode controls will
permit the B sweep to run after the delay generated by the 7011 . This delay interval is also
available at the front panel for such uses as
gated interval counter measurements and generating pulses of highly accurate width.
In delay-by-events, an external pulse (events start
trigger) may be used to enable counting of the
events. In such applications as a line selector on
a video monitor, the vertical sync pulse is the
events start trigger. Then the 7011 counts ' n°
number of horizontal sync pulses (events) into the
field or frame . In a similar manner, the origin pulse
of a disc memory can be used as the events start
trigger, and the disc clock pulses become the
events that are counted.
For timing measurements that require a higher
degree of accuracy than the 0.5 ppm source
available in the 7011 , the delay-by-time clock may
be referenced to an external 1 MHz timing standard through the EXT 1 MHz input.
Time delay resolution up to 1 ns may be obtained
by using the front-panel fine delay control.
CHARACTERISTICS
EVENTS DELAY
Event. Delay Range - One to 107 events.
Delay Increment - One event.
Insertion Delay - 35 ns ± 5 ns.
Recycle Time - < 500 ns.
Max Event Frequency - At least 50 MHz.
TRIGGERING
Extemal Trigger
Source
Coupling
Int Line Ext Ext -;- 10
Dc, Ac, Ac LF Rej, Ac HF Rej
Max Input
Voltage
250 V DC
Level
Range
± 1.75 V In Ext
± 17.5 V In Ext -;- 10
Input
Rand C
1 MO ± 5%. 20 pF ± 2 pF
Ac
Sensitivity
Ac LF
REJ'
Ac HF
REJ
Min Signal
Required
Int
Ext
Frequency
Range
Coup·
ling
30 kHz to 10 MHz
10 MHz to 50 MHz
30 kHz to 10 MHz
150 kHz to 10 MHz
10 MHz to 50 MHz
0.3 div
1.0 div
0.3 dlv
150mV
750mV
--
150mV
750mV
--
1.0 div
30 Hz to 50 kHz
0.3 div
Dc to 10 MHz
0.3 div
10 MHz to 50 MHz 1.0 div
150mV
150mV
Dc
750mV
'W,II not tflggeron Sinewaves of 3 d,v oriess INT or 1.5 V EXT
below 120Hz
Events Start Trigger
Source
External Only
Coupling
Dc Only
Max Input
Voltage
150 V de
Level Range
±3V
Input Rand C
1 MO within 5%, 20 pF ± 2 pF
Sensitivity
100 mV min, 30 Hz to 2 MHz; Increasing to
250 mY, 2 MHz to 20 MHz; increasing to
500 mY, 20 MHz to 50 MHz.
+ peak
ac
TIME DELAY
Digital Delay Range - Normal mode: lOOns to 1 s in 100 ns
increments. Echo mode: 200 ns to 2 s In 200 ns increments.
Analog Delay - Continuously variable from 0 to at least
100 ns. accuracy within 2 ns of indicated delay.
Jitter with Intemal Clock - 2.2 ns or delay time x 10-7 • whichever is greater.
'0".
a:
' '''
DIS
f-
100 ns
D
w
By setting an internal switch, the indicated delay
time is half the actual delay time. In such applications as TOR, radar timing, etc, the CRT readout
would display the 'one-way-trip" time.
+ peak Ac
..,~
LA~'JI~TER
LAv~'TI~E
10 ns
2.2 ns
, ns
10 J.IS
2V
V
/
/
ms
100 IJS
1 ma
10 ms
100 ms
, S
10 s
100 s
DELAY TIME
Insertion Deley - Zero within 2 ns.
Recycle Time - Less than 575 ns.
Time Baae - 500 MHz oscillator phase-locked to intemal or
external clock.
Internal Clock - 5 MHz crystal oscillator. Accuracy is
0.5 ppm.
Extemal Clock - 1 MHz within 1%, ac coupled. 50 o.
Dela~ed
Trigger Out -
OUTPUTS
Amplitude: 2 V or
~reater
into open
~~~~'~~II~:e 9~~~t~~i~t?0~~:05 ~~~~Te~~~t~ul~eO~~;t~:: ~oo f~
250 ns.
Delay Interval Out - Amplitude: 2 V or greater into open
circuit, 1 V or greater into 50 0. Risetime into falltime: 5 ns or
less. Accuracy: equal to delay interval less 20 to 30 ns.
Figure 2. Delay-by events. The lower trace is the master cJock
in our logic circuit. The top trace is our data which is delayed by
265 clock pulses.
READOUT
Display - 7'/2 digit with leading zero suppression, ms legend
in time delay mode. Plus (+) symbol reminds the operator to
add on the FINE DELAY (ns) setting.
Order 7011 Digital Delay Unit .••.••.•.... $2,915
Figure I. Delay-by-time. A 0.2}1s lIme marker delayed
4.9998 ms by the 7DII and displayed at 5 ns/div.
281
UNIVERSAL
TEK COUNTER/TIMER
7015
Modes 01 Operation
Dc to 225 MHz
Resolution
0.1 Hz maximum
Range
Frequency
Mode
1
Accuracy
f f req{ H ll = ±
Range
01 XI to Xl000 in decade steps.
TB .
±T
' in
10 ns to 10' seconds with averaging times
Resolution : 10 picoseconds maximum
Period and
Multi-Period
Mode
10-'
7015
Time Interval Averaging
CRT Display of Counting Interval
10 ps Period-Averaging Resolution
Frequency Measurements Directly
to 225 MHz
Signal Conditioning via Mainframe
Trigger Source
Accuracy
Worst Case
(Nominal)
f TI Is) = ± T8 •
Frequency Ratio,
CH B/Ext Clock
Range
10.1 to 10'
Manual Stop Watch
Range
Totalize , Ch B
Range
o to
o to
The 7015 offers all the measurement capabilities
of the counterltimer, such as time interval, period,
freqency, frequency ratio, totalize, and manual
stop watch.
pc.
± 10 - 9
±
2E np ,
~
-..fM
dt
10' seconds
10' counts
FREQUENCY MODE
1000r-------_r------~--------.-------~------_r------_,
a:
Measurement Interval
r-______t-______- r______-1~~__~~------i
~100~0~.0~1~s~e~c__
a:
w
fZ
W
~
W
g;
+ ______-i
1a r°:..:.·l;....::.;se~cC-.-r______-t________I-"=____7"'C-.____
en
<
w
~
w
en
<
u 1.0
+ ______
!--W!S!..!i.__
liia:
~
• Internll oscillator
-+~=~~j,£----
• Within 3 month5 sinc::e c.libr.tion
• ~50·C oper.tlon
• Tr. recognition occurs only
.t desir«i point on waveform no f,l. tri..,ing
10 kHz
0.1 MHz
1 MHz
10 MHz
INPUT FREQUENCY
Three displays, the pseudo gate, CH B Schmitt
trigger output, and true gate, are selected by a
7015 front panel switch and are also available at
a front panel connector.
The 7015 can also be completely controlled by
the oscilloscope's delayed gate. Arming inputs
are provided for each channel. By using the
delayed B gate to control the start and stop count
points, visually selective measurements can be
made at any point on the CRT display.
Two identical high-speed trigger circuits provide
complete signal processing. Identical trigger circuits also allow single-shot time interval measurements to be made with 10 ns resolution. With
repetitive signals, time interval averaging will increase the accuracy of a measurement by a
factor of ten or more.
282
Pin ± -
NOTE : Formulas given where E is th e error : TB (expressed as a decimal) is the
time base accuracy : P ;o is the period or time interval of unknown signal : M is the
number 01 averages gi ven: Pot is the measurement clock period: T is the gate time :
f ;n is the frequency of the unknown signal : Eop. equals peak noise p"lse amplitude
as presented to Schm it! trigger circuit: dvldt equals signal slope at input to Schmit!
trigger (volts per second). Th ese formulas were used to develop the associated charts .
1000 Hz
The 7015 is a universal counter/timer designed
for use in all 7000 Series Oscilloscope Mainframes with CRT readout.
2E npk
PCk
±-- ± ~-M
M
dt
6 ns to 10' seconds with averaging times
of XI to Xl000.
0.1 ns resolution (usable)
Oscilloscope-controlled Time and
Frequency Measurements
10 ns "Single-shot" Time Interval
Measurement Resolution
M
Range
Time Interval
TI and (TI
Average)
Mode
225 MHz Counter/Timer
fp er io d lsl = ± TB . P,n :! -
Accuracy
100 MHz
1 GHz
The 7015 has high resolution because of a 10 ns
clock, one of five clock pOSitions obtainable from
the front panel. A front panel Clock Out connector makes the selected clock signal available at a
front-panel connector. This provides a time mark
function that is TIL compatible and will drive a
50 Gload.
The Ext Clock in connector allows an external
1 MHz timing standard to be used for measurements requiring a higher degree of accuracy than
that provided by the internal time base.
The 7015 may be used in vertical or horizontal
compartments of 7000 Series mainframes. It provides a full eight digit CRT display with leading
zero suppression and positioned decimal. Legend and averaging information appear at the
bottom of the CRT display.
7000
TEK
SERIES
CHARACTERISTICS
INTERNAL TIME BASE
ACCURACY
rn
~
«
er w
TIME INTERVAL MOOES
1 ms Clock 1 Average
1 ms
• Internal oscillator
-: i2 1001's
ow
• 0_50
0>
10 p s
~~
wffi
~
1 p.s
• When more than one average is
made, synchronization does not
become a problem (see manual )
,
!z~
~
1 ms dlOCk 106
e operation
10 I'S t ock 1 l verage
g; 100 ns
I
1l ns Cl l
w 10 ns
::=:~
-V
1 ns
10 ns
100 ns
o
::=:
-'
er
Dllplay Mode Switch - 0.1 to 5 s; also a preset position for
infinite display time. Allows selection of readout "follow or
store:
1s
10s
PERIOD MODE
Frequency Range (CH B only Ae-coupled: 5 Hz to 225 MHz.
Input Rand C -
I
--V
er
w
100 ns
::=:
100 ns b lOCk 1 l verage
10 ns d lOCk 1 Alarage
~ 1 ns
10 ns d lOCk 10 L erages
1 Mn and 22 pF.
is 100 ps
l
Ii;
0 10 ps
• 0_ 50° operation
10 ns ( lock 100 AVerages
10 ns Clock
10 ns
100 ns
100h"ve~
1 jJ.s
10l's
V
----
• Within 3 months since calibration
• Peak noise level does not eJl(ceed
Anmlng Inputl - Input Rand C: 10 kn and 20 pF. Sensitivity
arm A: logical 1 .. + 0.5 V, logical 0 ... + 0.2 V. Sensitivity ann
B: logical 1 .. + 0.2 V,logical 0 .. + 0.5 V.
Extemal Clock-In -
20 Hz to 5 MHz.
Relet Front Panel - Reset readies the instrument. All
counters are affected, including averaging circuits.
Order 7015 Universal
Counter/Timer ..................................... $3,020
eff ective counter hysteresis
• Signal rise ti mes
8S
encountered
in typical TTL logic en vironments
1001'5
1 ms
10 m.
PERIOD MEASURED
Figure 1. Oscilloscope-controlled digital measurements using
the delayed 8 gate as the arming input logic allow user to make
precise time interval measurement from third to seventh pulse
on CRT display. Counter CH A is "armed" with leading edge of
8 gate while CH 8 Counter is "armed' with falling edge of 8
gate. Lower trace is pseudo gate of 7015. CRT readout displays the result of 2325.295 "s.
Automatically triggers at 0 V.
Level Control Range (CH A and B Inputl) - 100 mV range:
± 500 mY. 1-V range: ± 5 V. 10-V range: ± 50 V.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
• I nter nal oscillator
w
Dc-coupled: de to 225 MHz.
Two cables RF 44 in (012-0403-00 , Sealectro to BNC
connector).
Cond;';on"
«
rn
V
--
V:--/
~ 10 ns
rn
::>
i:
Same as intemal except position control
Sensitivity (CH A and B Inputl) - 100 mV peak-to-peak.
Trigger source: 0.5 division to 100 MHz, 1.0 division to
225 MHz, or to the vertical system bandwidth, whichever is
less.
1 jJ.s Clock 1 Average
~ 1 1's
er
Displayed Wavelonm (Intemally Connected) - Front-panel
switch selects true gate, pseudo gate, or Channel B signal out.
Position controlled by Iront-panel screwdriver control.
INPUT SIGNAL CH A & B
100 ms
10 jJ.s C'IOCk 1 Al rage
10 jJ.s
± 0.5 V into
Readout - Eight-digit display; the four most significant have
zero suppression. Overflow indicated by a greater than symbol.
1 ms CL Ck 10 Ala rageS
I
w
Zout ",, 1 kn, Vout -
Triggering (Prelet POlition) -
8100 jJ.S
!z
A and B Trigger Level 1 Mn.
Extemal Display has no effect.
t;?'
1 I'S
10l's 100 1's 1 ms 10 ms
TIME INTERVAL MEASURED
1 ms Clock 1 Average
~ 1 ms
0..
Clock Out - Logical 1.. + 0.5 V into 50 n. Logical 0 ... 0 V
into 50 n. TTL compatible without 50 n load (1 .6 mA current
capacity).
10 ns Clock 1000 Averages
1 ns
z i:
a:w
rage
10 ns Clock 10 Averages
10 ns Clock 100 Averages
--'0
00
1J
V
V
....----
100 ns Clock 1 Average
~::=:
hi
::=: er
....----
1 I'S l ock 1 l verage
wrn
er«
::>w
W
OUTPUT SIGNALS
AVerag~s
• Signa l rise times as encountered
in typical TTl logic envi ron ment.
~~
~ ~
G
• Wit hin 3 months since calibration
• Peak noise level does nOI exceed
effec tive counter hysteresis
~«
T""
l
1 ms dlOCk 10 Avera gJs
Conditions :
~C!l
g
Crystal OSCillator - Accuracy: within 0.5 ppm (0 to + 50 · C
ambient). Long-term drift : 1 part or less in 10' per month. Oscillator is temperature compensated; no wann up is required.
100 ms
1.
10 s
Figure 2. The propagation delay time between the input of a
delay line (upper trace) and the output of the delay line (middle
trace) is measured digitally. Lower trace is 7015 pseudo gate
display. CRT readout displays the result of 151.0 ns.
Figure 3. Independent slope and level control allows the user to
visually select precise points on the waveform where the
counter starts and stops. CRT readout displays the result of
1543.9 ns.
AID CONVERTER
MULTIMETER
TEK DIGITAL
7D12/M2
7000
SERIES
VE" T1CAL DIS PLAY
Oscilloscope-controlled Sampling DVM
7D13A
7D13A
7D12/M2
~
Temperature Mode
MOO£'UNOE
10 ns Aperture Uncertainty
"(S1ST~~
Input Signal and Sample Points
o.'··
<::
no
Z..Ul
,,,,~
t
1".
Displayed on CRT
DC
1 mV Resolution
500 V Maximum Common-mode Voltage
')
,Ii11tJ
lIY
..,
"""
DC
CURfitl NT
tl
VOlTS
Yn~
25 MHz Bandwidth
0-to-2 V and 0-to-20 V Input Range, 200 V
with P6055 Probe
Automatic, Manual, or External Triggering
Automatic Polarity and Overrange
Indicators
3 1/2 Digit CRT Readout
DIGITAL MUlTIMETER
7D13A
The 7012 is designed for use w ith all 7000
Series oscilloscope mainframes with CRT
readout.
A/D Converter and
+ IS ' C to
+ 40 ' C
± 0.25% of peak.topeak input voltage,
± 0.2% of reading,
± 3 counts, ± % of
ac decay·
± 0.35% of peak.topeak input voltage,
± 0.25% of reading,
± 3 counts, ± %
of ac decay'
'Applicable when M2 is ac-coup/ed.
Included Accessory 6055·01).
3.5 ft P60SS Probe package (01 Q.
Overrange Indication - When overrange occurs, a > symbol
appears to the left of the reading.
Aperture Uncertainty - IOns or less.
Pulse·Wldth Sample Time (52.5' mode) - 30 ns to 5 ms
with repetitive signal. 150 1's to 5 ms with single.shot signal.
Measurement Rate - External Trigger: 1 to 12 measure·
ments per second, depending on external trigger frequency and
internal adjustment. Auto Trigger: 1 to 4 measurements per
second, internally adjustable.
284
The 7D13A measures de volts , dc current, and
resistance. It also measures temperature from a
temperature sensor on the tip of the P6601 tem·
perature probe. The temperature probe functions
regardless of 7D13A mode or range setting and
provides a front· panel analog signal output of
10 mV/o C (O ° C = 0 V). Temperature may be
measured Simultaneously along with any other
function.
When the 7D13A is used, the character generator
trac es out a 3 '/2 digit display on the CRT and a
legend for units like kn, mA, ° C .
CHARACTERISTICS
Dc Voltage Range - 0 to 500 V in four ranges. 3 '/2 digit
presentation of 1.999 V, 19.99 V, 199.9 V, and 500 V full scale.
Accuracy is ± 0.1 % of reading ± 1 count from + IS ' C to
+ 3S' C, ± 0.2% of reading ± 2 counts from O' C to + SO· C.
Input impedance is 10 Mil on all ranges. Maximum safe input is
500 V peak between either contact and ground, 500 V peak
between voltage contacts.
Dc Current Range - 0 to 2 A in four ranges. 3'/2 digit presen·
tation of 1.999 rnA, 19.99 rnA, 199.9 rnA , and 1999 rnA full
scale. Accuracy is ± 0.5% of reading ± 2 counts from + IS' C
to + 3S ' C, ± 0.7% of reading ± 4 counts from O' C to + SO· C.
Maximum input is fuse protected.
Resistance Range - 0 to 2 Mil in five ranges. 3'/2 digit prasentation 199.9 Il. 1999 Il, 19.99 kll. 199.9 kll. and 1999 kll full
scale. Accuracy is ± 0.5% of reading ± 1 count from + IS "C to
+ 3S ' C, ± O.S% of reading ± 2 counts from O' C to + SO · C.
Input is fuse protected.
Temperature Measurement Range - - 62 ' C to + 2oo' C in
one range. 3'/2 digit presentation to + 200· C.
Temperature Measurement Accuracy (Probe calibrated to
the instrument)
CHARACTERISTICS
Sample·gate Display Amplitude - 2 div, risetime and falltime
5 ns or less.
Analog·slgnal Display - Bandwidth is de to 25 MHz (de·
coupling), 3.4 Hz to 25 MHz (ac-coupling). Vertical sensitivity is
100 mV/div to 5 V/div in 6 steps (1-2-5 sequence in combination with M2 range and 7012 vertical display attenuation). Accuracy is within 5%.
Input Rand C - 1 Mil and 20 pF.
Maximum Input Voltage - 100 V peak .
Measurement Readout - 0 to 20 V in two ranges. 3'/2 digit
presentation of 1.999 V and 19.99 V full scale, extended to
199.9 V with P60SS Probe.
The 7013A is a digital multimeter designed for
use in all 7000 Series Oscilloscope mainframes
with CRT readout. The 7013A functions in any
compartment.
Digital Multimeter
Sample/Hold Module
Settling Time - 40 ns.
Accuracy without Probe (40 ns after Input Signal Step
The M2 Sample/Hold Module measures voltage
Function)
amplitude from ground to a selected point or the
Temperature
difference voltage between any two selected
Range
5, Mode
S2·S, Mode
points (independent control of each point) . The
± O.IS% of peak·to- ± 0.25% of peak.to+ 20 ' C to
sample point(s) may be triggered automatically,
peak input voltage,
peak input voltage,
+ 30 ' C
manually , or externally from sources such as the
± 0.1% of reading,
± O.IS% of reading,
oscilloscope 's Delayed B gate, the 7015's pseu± 2 counts. ±% of
± 2counts, ±%
do gate, 7D11 's delayed trigger out , etc.
of ac decay·
ac decay'
On command , the 7012/M2 samples the displayed waveform and also generates a gate
display. Both the signal and 701 21M2 gate are
displayed together, providing a visual indication
of where the sample(s) is taken . In the S, mode
(sample one) , a s ingle sample coinc ident w ith the
rise of the 7D1 21M2 display ed gate is taken, and
the voltage amplitude , from the 0 V level, is
digitally displayed on the CRT readout. In the S2SI mode (sample two minus sample one) , two
samples are taken , one at the rise and one at the
fall of the 7D12/M2 displayed gate, and the
voltage difference between these two points is
digitally displayed on the CRT readout.
3 1/2 Digit CRT Readout
7D13A Operating
Conditions
Temperature
Value Measured
+ IS' C to + 2S' C
(room temperature)
- 62' C to + IS0' C
± 2' C
+ IS0' C to + 2oo' C
O' C, - 6' C
O' C to + 'S' C
+ 2S ' C to + SO ' C
- 62 "C to + 2OO' C
Measurement
Accuracy
Add I .S· C to
above tolerance
in each direction
Settling Time - 1 s or less (voltage, current, and resistance
modes).
Polarity - Automatic indication.
Sample and Hold DVM measures difference voltage
( - 168.6 V) between two points on complex waveform. Gate
waveform indicates two points: leading and trailing edges
where voltage difference ;s made.
ORDERING INFORMATION
7D12A/D Converter (Module
not included) ....•....•.•.........•.•..•...•...••• .•. $1,500
M2 Sample/Hold Module ••.•......•...•...•.• $1,315
Option 02 without P6055 ...................... ...................... - $120
Maximum Common· Mode Voltage two terminals and ground.
500 V peak between
Normal·mode Rejection Ratio - At least 30 dB at 60 Hz.
Common·mode Rejection Ratio - With a 1 kll imbalance, at
least 100 dB at de; SO dB at 60 Hz.
Over Range Indication - When over range occurs, the readout blinks and the most significant digit displays a 3.
Temperature Out - 10 mV/' C into a load of at least 2 kll.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
P6601 Temperature Probe package (010·6601 ·01); pair of test
leads (003·0120.00).
Order 7D13A Digital Multimeter ......... $1,105
SERIES
TEK 7000
SAMPLING UNITS TO 14 GHz
50 (2 DELAY LINE
7M11
7T11
7S11
Random Mode Trigger Rate - 100Hz minimum.
Dllplay Jitter - Measured under optimum trigger conditions
with TIME/DIV switch clockwise
Time POI Range
Sequential Mode
Random Mode
50 ItS to 500 ns
50 ns
0.4 div or less
10 ps
1 dlv or less
30 ps
Pulle Out - Positive pulse amplitude at least 400 mV (into
50 Il) with 2.5 ns risetime or less.
Trigger Klckout -
"Ill
ill!::
External Scan - Dellection factor is continuously variable
from 1 V/div to 10 V/div. Input R is 100 kll within 10%. Maximum Input voltage is 100 V (de + peak ac).
rIll·'
'"
~
Iii '::'
......
SWHP Out- 1 V/div within 2%. Source R is 10 kll within 1%.
,T'"
7sn
~
Ambient Temperature - Performance characteristics are valId over an ambient temperature range of O'C to + 50·C.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
42 in BNC 50 Il cable (012-0057-01); SMA (3 mm) male to BNC
adaptor (015-1018-00); lOX 50 Il attenuator (011 -0059-02);
SMA (3 mm) male to GR874 adaptor (015-1007-00).
__._AM_~
__'N_. _U_. _'T__~
Sampling Sweep Unit
Sampling Unit
2 mV or less into 50 Il (except HF SYNC).
Dllplay Scan Rate - Continuously selectable from at least 40
sweepsl s to < 2 sweeps/s.
Delay Line
Order 7T11 Sampling Sweep Unit ••..• $4,460
7511
7T11
7M11
2mV/div to 200 mV/div
Calibrated Deflection Factors
10 ps/div to 5 ms/div Calibrated Time Base
75 ns Time Delay
Random or Sequential Sampling
Selectable Trigger Out
Equivalent or Real Time Sampling
175 ps Risetime
Plug-in Sampling Heads
No Pretrigger Required
The 7S 11 is a single-channel sampling unit. The
input configuration employs the sampling plug-in
head concept. The heads, which mount in the
7S 11 , range in bandwidth from 350 MHz to
14GHz.
The 7S 11 can be used in a variety of combinations. Single-channel sampling uses one 7S11
with a 7T11 Time Base . Two 7S11s and one 7T11
provide dual-trace sampling. One 7S 11 and one
7S12 provide dual-trace sampling . Two 7S11s can
be used for X-V operations.
CHARACTERISTICS
Deflection Factor - 2 unitsl div to 200 unitsl div in 7 steps (1 2-5 sequence). accurate within 3%. Uncalibrated VARIABLE is
continuous (extends deflection factor from 1 unit/div or less to
at least 400 units/div). Deflection factor is determined by the
plug-in sampling head.
Bandwidth -
Determined by the sampling head.
Input Impedance -
Determined by the sampling head.
Dc Olllet - Range. + 1 V to - 1 V or more. Offset out is lOX
the offset voltage within 2%. Source R is 10 kll within 1%.
Delay Range - At least 10 ns for comparing two signals in a
dual-trace application.
Memory Slash -
0.1 div or less at 20 Hz.
Vertical Signal Out -
200 mV per displayed div within 3%.
Ambient Temperature - Performance characteristics are valid over an ambient temperature range of O' C to + 50 · C.
Order 7S11 Sampling Unit
without Sampling Head __ ..................... $1,780
The 7T11 Sampling Time Base provides equivalent-time and real-time horizontal deflection for
single- or dual-trace sampling. Timing accuracy is
within 3% and nonlinearity is well below 1%. Triggering range is from approximately 10 Hz (sequential mode) to above 12.4 GHz.
CHARACTERISTICS
Tlme/Div Range - 10 psl div to 5 msl div (1-2-5 sequenoa)
directly related to time position ranges. Uncalibrated VARIABLE is continuous between steps to at least 4 ps/div .
Time POlition Range - Equivalent time is 50 ns to 50 ItS in
four steps; real time is 0.5 ms to 50 ms in three steps.
Time/Div Accuracy center 8 em.
The 7M11 is a passive dual delay line for use with
the 7000 Series Sampling System. In low-repetition-rate applications requiring the sequential
mode of operation, the 7M11 provides the trigger
source and signal delay necessary to view the
triggering event at fast time-per-div settings.
Vertical delay for two 7S 11 vertical sampling units
is available with the dual 50 fl, 75 ns delay lines.
The closely matched (30 ps) lines have GR874 input-output connectors, 175 ps risetime, and 2X
signal attenuation. Trigger selection is from either
input, 5X attenuated, with a risetime of 600 ps or
less.
CHARACTERISTICS
Within 3% for all timel div settings over
DELAY LINE
Time Delay -
TRIGGERING
Ext 50 Illnput - Frequency range is de to 1 GHz in 1 X TRIG
AMP mode. Sensitivity range is 12.5 mV to 2 V peak-to-peak
(de to 1 GHz) in Xl TRIG AMP. 1.25 mV to 2 V peak-to-peak (1
kHz to 50 MHz) in Xl0 TRIG AMP. Input R is 50 Il within 10%.
Maximum input voltage is 2 V (de + peak ac).
Ext 1 Mil Input - Frequency range is de to 100 MHz in Xl
TRIG AMP mode. Sensitivity range is 12.5 mV to 2 V peak-topeak (de to 100 MHz) in Xl TRIG AMP. 1.25 mV to 2 V peakto-peak (1 kHz to 50 MHz) in Xl0 TRIG AMP. Input R is 1 Mil
within 5%. Maximum input voltage Is 100 V peak-to-peak to 1
kHz (derating 6 dB per octave to a minimum 5 V peak-to-peak).
EX1 HF Sync - Frequency range is 1 GHz to 12.4 GHz. Sensitivity range is 10 mV to 500 mV peak-to-peak. Input R is 1 Mil.
Maximum input voltage is 2 V peak-to-peak.
Int Trigger Source (Sinewave Triggering)' - Frequency
range is 5 kHz to 500 MHz in Xl TRIG AMP; 5 kHz to 50 MHz
in Xl0 TRIG AMP. Sensitivity range is 125 mV to 1 V peak-topeak (referred to the vertical input) in Xl TRIG AMP ; 12.5 mV
to 1 V peak-to-peak (referred to the vertical input) in the X 10
TRIG AMP.
'Trigger circuits will operate to de with pulse triggering. except
forHF Sync.
75 ns within 1 ns.
Delay Difference Rlletlme -
30 ps or less between channels.
175 ps or less.
Altenuatlon -
2X within 2% into 50 Il.
Input Impedance Maximum Input -
50 Il within 2%.
± 5 V (de + peak ac).
TRIGGER OUTPUT
Rlaetlme -
600 ps or less.
Attenuation -
5X within 10% into 50 II (referred to INPUT).
Output Impedance -
50 Il within 10%
Ambient Temperature - Performance characteristics are valId over an ambient temperature range of O'C to + 50·C.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Ten inch. BNC Cable (012-0208-00); two 2 ns GR cables
(017-0505-00).
Order 7M11 Delay Line ..•.•.•....••..•....... $1,335
285
7000
PS TOR OR
SAMPLER
TEK 45GENERAL-PURPOSE
SERIES
7S12
COMPARISON OF SAMPLING FEATURES
Maximum Bandwidl
Fastest Risetime
7S11/7T11
14 GHz
.. 25 ps
14 GHz
.. 25 ps
7S12
7S14
1 GHz
.. 350 ps
Vertical Sensilivity
Range
2 to 200 mV/div
2 10 500 mV/div
2 10 500 mV/div
Sequential
Equiv Sampling
YES
YES
YES
Random
Equiv Sampling
YES
NO
NO
Real Time
Sampling
YES
NO
NO
Smoothing
YES
YES
YES
Channels
1 (2 with an additional
7S11)
1 (2 wilh an addilional 7S 11)
2
TOR
NO (but can be done)
YES
NO (but can be done)
Changeable Heads
YES (vertical only)
YES (horizontal and vertical)
NO
Input
Impedance
5000r1 MO
(depending on head)
5000r1 MO
(depending on head)
500
TOR/Sampler
7512
CHARACTERISTICS
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE WITH S-6 AND S-52
System Risetime - 35 ps or less for lhe incident slep. 45 ps
or less for the displayed reflection from a shor1-circuited, 1 ns
test line.
Time and Distance Ranges - Direct-reading tape dial gives
calibraled one-way dis lance 10 at least 400 ft (air line). Time
range is at least 0.9 .s round Irip. Both ranges are limiled by
lhe duration of the pulse from the S-52.
Pulse Amplitude - At least +200 mV into 50 O.
45 ps TOR or a General-purpose Sampler
6 Plug-in Sampling Heads Available
2 Plug-in Pulse Sources Available
1 Trigger Recognizer Head Available
1 Trigger Countdown Head Available
The 7S12 is a combined vertical-horizontal, double-width plug-in for high resolution TOR or general purpose sampling measurements. As a TOR
using the S-6 Sampling Head and S-52 Pulse
Generator Head , the 7S12 has a system risetime
of 45 ps (return from short-circuit termination) and
distance range to 290 feet in any cable. Its
vertical scale is calibrated in reflection coefficient
(p) from 2 mp/div to 500 mp/div and in voltage
from 2 mV/div to 500 mV/div, Two-way time or
one-way distance to a discontinuity of interest is
read directly from tape dial calibrated for time, air,
polyethylene , or your choice of dielectrics. As a
long line TDR using the S-5 Sampling Head and
S-54 Pulse Generator Head, distance calibration
extends to 4900 ft (air line) and discontinuities to
twice this distance may be viewed. System
risetime with this combination is 1.5 ns.
General-purpose measurements may be made by
using an S-1, S-2, S-3A, S-4, S-5, or S-6 Sampling
Head with an S-53 Trigger Recognizer Head or
S-51 Trigger Countdown Head. For dual-trace
sampling displays, use a 7S11 Sampling Unit with
a 7S 12. The addition of a 7M 11 Dual Delay Line
provides the signal delay necessary to view the
triggering event when a pretrigger signal is not
available.
Input Characteristics - Nominal 50 n, feed-through signal
channel (termination supplied). SMA (3 mm) connectors.
Jitter - < 10 ps (without signal averaging).
Aberrations - + 7%, - 7%, total of 10% p-p within 1.8 ns of
step with reference point at 1.8 ns from step; +2%, - 2%,
total of 4% p-p after first 2.5 ns with reference point at 300 ns
from step.
TDR SYSTEM PERFORMANCE WITH S-5 AND S-54
System Rise Time - 1.5 ns or less for the displayed reflection
from a shor1-circuited test line.
Time and Distance Ranges - Direct-reading tape dial gives
calibrated one-way distances to 4900 ft air line, 3240 ft solid
polyethylene. Time range is 20 .s round trip.
Pulse Amplitude - At least +400 mV into 50 n.
Input Characteristics - Nominal 50 0 test line connection
(cable and T supplied). BNC connectors.
Jitter - < 20 ps (without signal averaging).
Aberrations - + 4%, - 6%, total of 10% p-p within first 17 ns
of step; + 1.5%. - 1.5%. total of 3% thereafter.
Display Modes nal scan.
Repetitive or single sweep. manual or exter-
Signal Outputs sweep outputs.
Pin jacks provide both vertical signal and
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
750 ps rigid 'U' delay line (015-1017-01); shor1-circuit termination (015-1021-00); TOR slide rule (003-0700-00).
ORDERING INFORMATION
7S12 TOR/Sampler
(tape dial in feet) without
Sampling Heads ................................... $3,390
Option 03 Tape Dial Change (Meters) ........................ + $25
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Patch Cords - Available for the OFFSET OUT. EXT SWEEP
INPUT. VERT SIG OUT. and SWEEP OUT jacks of the 7S12,
Pin-jack to pin-jack. 0.08 in dia. pin.
Red, 8 In Order 012-0179-00 ........................................ $3.75
Red, 18 in Order 012-0180-00 ...................................... $3.75
Black, 8 in Order 012-0181 -00 ...................................... $3.75
Black, 18 in Order 012-0182-00 .................................... 53.75
Tape Dial (Calibrated in It)
Order 331-0273-00 .............. .................................... ..... $20.50
Tape Dial (Calibrated in Meters)
Order 331-0276-00 ....................................................... $20.50
OTHER 7S12 CHARACTERISTICS
Vertical Scale - Calibrated in mp (reflection coeffICient 10- ')
and mV from 2 to 500 units/div in 8 steps (1-2-5 sequence).
accurate within 3%. Uncalibrated VARIABLE is continuous between steps.
Resolution - Reflection coefficients as low as 0.001 may be
observed. Signal averaging reduces test-line noise in display.
Dc Offset Range - + 1 V to - 1 V. Allows open-circuit reflections to be displayed at full sensitivity. Monitor jack provides X
10 de offset through 10 kO.
Time/Distance - Tape dial is calibrated in time and distance:
full-scale ranges of 4900 ft. 490 ft. 49 ft (air dielectric); 3200 ft.
320 ft. 32 ft (polyethylene dielectric); and 10 .s, 1 .s. 0.1 .s
(time). Accurate within 1%. Distance calibration may be preset
for dielectric having propagation factors from 0.6 to 1.
Time/DiY - 20 ps/div to 1 .s/div (1-2-5 sequence) in three
ranges with direct-reading magnifier. Accurate within 3%. Uncalibrated variable is continuous between steps.
Locate Button - Provides instant return to unmagnified display showing entire full-scale range. Brightened portion of trace
indicates time position and duration of magnified display.
3 It Sampling-Head Extender Order 012-0124-00 ....... $375
6 It Sampling-Head Extender Order 012-0125-00 ....... $445
NOTE: See 1502 and 1503 Portable TDR Cable Testers on pages 140-141 .
286
SERIES
TEK 7000
7S14
1 GHz DUAL-TRACE, DELAYED SWEEP SAMPLER
70 ps PULSE GENERATOR
Vertical Signal Output- 0.2 V/div of vertical deflection; 10 k!l
source resistance.
Channal Delay Dillerence - Adjustable to zero, or for any
time difference up to at least 1 ns.
TIME BASE
Scan Modes -
Repetitive, single, manual, or external.
Delaying Sweep - May be used as the CRT time base or as a
deiay generator for the deiayed sweep. The sweep starts with
minimum deiay from the instant of trigger recognition. When
the deiaying sweep mode is selected for the time base, two
bright dots in the trace, which may be positioned anywhere on
the dispiayed waveform, are generated. The time between dots
is equal to the reading on the Delay Time Multiplier dial multi·
piied by the time/div.
Delayed Sweep - This mode is used when the signal to be
dispiayed occurs considerabiy later than the inslant of trigger
recognition or when the time must be 5 ns or less per div. The
deiayed sweep may be started with zero delay time with respect to the start of the delaying sweep. Or the start may be
delayed by any time interval up to that represented by ten divisions of the delaying sweep selected.
Horizontal Signal Output- 1.0 V/div of horizontal deflection;
10 k!l source resistance.
Dual Trace Delayed Sweep Sampler
DELAYING SWEEP
Range -
7S14
10 ns/div to 100 ~s/div in 13 steps (1 -2·5 sequence).
AccurACY - Within ± 3%, excluding first one·half division of
dispiayed sweep.
Calibrated Delayed Sweep
Two-dot Measurements
Delayed Zero (1st Dot) - Adjustable to correspond to any
instant within the time interval represented by the first 9 division of the delaying sweep selected.
Dc to 1 GHz Bandwidth
Delay Time (2nd Dot) - Adjustable to any position of the lime
interval represented by 10 div of the delaying sweep selected.
Dual Trace, 2 mV Sensitivity
Delay Accuracy - Within ± 1% of 10 division when measure·
ment is made within the last 9.5 division.
CRT Readout
DELAYED SWEEP
Range - 100 ps/div to 100 ~s/div in 19 steps (1-2-5 sequence). Variabie between steps by at least 2.5 to 1.
Simplified Triggering
Operational Ease of a
Conventional Oscilloscope
The 7S 14 Sampling Unit combines vertical and
time·base functions in one double·width plug·in.
Two identical vertical channels provide dual·trace
sampling, a two'ramp time base and calibrated
delayed sweep. Front·panel controls are grouped
by color, and the control nomenclature is similar
to conventional oscilloscope nomenclature.
Learning to operate the 7S14 requires a minimum
of effort for those familiar with conventional oscil·
loscope operation.
CHARACTERISTICS
VERTICAL CHANNEL
Modes - CH 1 only; CH 2 only; Dual Trace ; CH 1 added to
CH 2; CH 2 subtracted from CH t (CH 2 INVERT); CH 1 Verti·
cal (Y), CH 2 Horizontal (X).
Input Impedance Bandwidth Rise Time -
Nominally 50 !l.
Equivalent to dc to 1 GHz.
350 ps or less.
Step Aberrations - + 2% , - 4%, total of 6% peak.te-peak
within first 5 ns, ± 1% thereafter, tested wilh a 284 Pulse
Generator.
Deflection Factor - 2 mV/div to 0.5 V/div in 8 steps (1 ·2.5
sequence). Continuously variable between steps by at least 2.5
to 1.
Accuracy -
Within ± 3%.
Maximum Input Voltage -
± 5 V.
Input Signal Range - 2 V peak.te-peak maximum within a
+ 2 V to - 2 V window at any sensitivity.
Dc Ollset Range -
At least + 2 V to - 2 V.
Displayed Noise -
2 mV or less unsmoothed (measured tan-
gentially). Low nOise pushbutton reduces random noise by a
faclor of 4 to 1 or more.
Accuracy - Within ± 3% excluding first one·half division of
dispiayed sweep.
Start Delay - Depends on the delaying sweep time selected
and the setting of the Delay Time Multiplier dial. Adjustable
from zero to any time interval up to that represented by 10
divisions of the delaying sweep selected. The delaying sweep
start point corresponds to the position of the second bright dot.
284
70 ps or Less Risetime Pulse
Sinewave and Squarewave Outputs
CHARACTERISTICS
Pulse Output - 70 ps or less risetime with a pulse width of
more than 1 ~s and a repetition rate of ", 50 kHz. Aberrations
immediately following positiv~ng transitions are < ± 3%,
3% total peak. te-peak ; after 2 ns < ± 2%, 2% total peak-tepeak. Pulse ampiitude is more than + 200 mV into 50 !l.
Source resistance is 50 !l.
Squarewave Output - Periods of 10 ~s , 1 ~s , or lOOns.
Ampiitude is 10 mV, 100 mV, or 1 V into 50!l.
Sinewave Output - Periods of IOns or 1 ns. Output ampii·
tude is 100 mV into 50 !l.
Trigger Output - Squarewave, sinewave, or pretrigger pulse
output, depending on the selected main signal output. Ampii.
tude is 200 mV, accurate within 40%. When PULSE OUTPUT
is selected, the trigger can be switched to arrive 5 ns ± 5 ns, or
75 ns ± 5 ns ahead of the main pulse. Risetime is 3 ns or less;
pulse width is IOns or greater.
Output
Timing
Period Accuracy
~s
± 10%
Square·
10 ~s
1 ~s
~ O.5 %
± 0.5%
± 1%
± 1.5%
± 0.05%·
± 2%t
± 2.5%t
± 3%t
wave
100 ns
10 ns
1 ns
TRIGGERING AND SYNC
Signal Sources - Internal from CH 1 vertical input or external
through front·panel connector.
'crystal contro/Ied
Triggered Mode - Trigger recognition may be made to occur
at any selected voltage level between + 0.5 V and - 0.5 Von
either a + slope or a - slope of the triggering signal.
Autotrigger Mode - For small signals or when there may be
no triggering Signal. Sampling pulses are automatically gener·
ated at a low rate in the absence of a triggering signal so that a
trace may always be generated and dispiayed. The trigger level
range automatically adjusts 10 approximately the peak.te-peak
voltage of the signal.
10 mV
20
Sinewave
Internal Triggering - Pulse amplitude 50 mV peak.te-peak or
more with risetime of 1 ~s or less. Sinewave ampiitude 50 mV
peak.le-peak or more from 150 kHz to 100 MHz.
100 mV
Pulse
Delay Jilter - < 0.05% of the time represented by 1 division
of the delaying sweep selected.
External Triggering - Nominal 50 !l input, ac coupled, 2 V
peak·te-peak 50 V de maximum. Trigger pulse ampiitude 10
mV peak-te-peak or more with risetime of 1 ~s or less. 10Hz to
100 MHz. Sinewave ampiitude 10 mV peak·te-peak or more
from 150 kHz to 100 MHz.
Amplitude Accuracy
1V
+ 1%
+ 20%
t 20 ns after transition
Order 284 Pulse Generator ................ $2,000
ACCESSORY PROBES FOR 50 11 SAMPLERS
Passive
Atenu- LenType ation gth-
Loading
Risetime
In ns
Bandwidth
Package
Number--
P6056 lOX 6.0 500 !l 1 pF 1<0.1
De to
010-6056·03
3.5 GHz
P6057 100X 6.0
De to
5k !l
1 pF 1< 0.25
010·6057-03
1.4 GHz
Active - FET--'
P6201
IX 6.0 100
De to
900 MHz
De to
010-6201·01
900 MHz (includes
1 Mfl 1.5 pF < 0.4 De to
attenuators)
900 MHz
k~
3 pF < 0.4
lOX 6.0 1 M!l 1.5 pF < 0.4
l00X 6.0
010·6202-03
De to
plus
500 MHz 010-0384-00
100X 2M 10 M!l 2 pF < 0.7 Dc to
to provide
500 MHz 100X
Holdol! - Varies the length of the interval during which recog·
nition is inhibited. Variation is at least 5 to I . The control is
particularty useful for displaying digital words when triggering
on binary pulses.
P6202 lOX 2M 10 M!l 2 pF < 0.7
HF SYNC Mode - For sinewaves from 100 MHz to 1 GHz,
10 mV peak·te-peak or more from external source, 50 mV
peak. te-peak or more from internal pickoff.
'Length In feet except where Specified.
"Refer to probe section for additional information.
"'Requires power source: Most four compartment mainframes provide probe power. For other oscilloscopes, use 1101
Accessory Power Supply.
Order 7S14 Dual-Trace
Delayed Sweep Sampler ..................•.. $5,235
287
7000
HEADS
TO 14 GHz
TEK SAMPLING
SERIES
S-1
Dc to 1 GHz Bandwidth
Clean Transient Response
The 5-1 Sampling Head is a low noise, 350 ps risetime unit
with a 50 11 Input impedance. The 5-1 can be plugged in or
attached by a cable for remote use. A trigger pickoff within the
5-1 provides a trigger signal output from the plug-in unit.
Rls.tlme Bandwidth -
350 ps or less.
Equivalent to dc to 1 GHz at 3 dB down.
Transient Response - Aberrations as observed with the 284
Pulse Generator are + 0.5%, - 3% or less, total of 3.5% or
less pop, first 5 ns following the step transition ; - 0.5% or less,
total of 1% or less p-p after 5 ns.
Olspleyed Noise smoothed.
2 mV or less, un smoothed
1 mV,
Signal Range - Variable dc offset allows signals between
+ 1 V and - 1 V limits to be displayed at 2 mV/div. Signals
between + 2 V and - 2 V limits may be displayed at
200 mV/div. For best dot response with random-sampling
sweep unit, signal amplitude should be < 500 mV p-p.
Input Characteristics - Norminally 50 11. Safe overload in
:!: 5 V. GR874 input connectors.
Included Accessories 5 ns, 50 11 RG58 A/U Cable
(017-0512-00) ; lOX , 50 11 GR Attenuator (017-0078-00).
Order S-1 Sampling Head _________ .. _______ $1,160
S-2
Displayed Noise < 6 mV (Unsmoothed)
The 5-2 Sampling Head is a 75 ps risetime unit with a 50 11
Input impedance. The 5-2 can be plugged in or attached by a
cable for remote use. A trigger pickoff within the 5-2 provides a
trigger signal output from the plug-In unit.
Bandwidth -
75 ps or less.
Equivalent to dc to 4.6 GHz at 3 dB down .
Transient Response - Aberrations as observed with the 284
Pulse Generator are + 5%, - 5% or less, total of 10% or less
pop, first 2.5 ns following a step transition ; + 2%, - 2% or less
total of 4% or less p-p after 2.5 ns.
Displayed Noise smoothed .
Dc to 1 GHz Bandwidth
Input Characteristics - Nominally 50 n . Safe overload :!: 5 V.
SMA (3 mm) input connector.
Displayed Noise < 3 mV (Unsmoothed)
The S-3A Sampling Head is an active sampling-probe unit with
100 kl1, 2.3 pF input impedance. Up to 2 V of dc offset may be
used while maintaining a 2 mV/div deflection factor .
Risatime - 350 ps or less.
Bandwidth (Probe Onfy) - Equivalent to dc to 1 GHz at 3 dB
down.
Transient Respone (Probe Only) - Aberrations in the first
2 ns following a step are + 8%, - 2% or less, total of 10% or
less p-p, + 1%, - 1% or less, total of 2% or less p-p after 2 ns,
with 284 pulse displayed.
Displayed Noise (Probe Only) probe tip (includes 90% of dots).
Dc to 4.6 GHz Bandwidth
Risetime -
Compact, 4.5 ft, 100 kO, 2.3 pF Probe
Signal Range - Variable dc offset allows signals between
+ 1 V and - 1 V limits to be displayed at 2 mV/div. For best
dot·transient response with random-sampling sweep unit, signal amplitude should be less than 500 mV p-p.
S-3A
6 mV or less, unsmoothed ; 3 mY,
Signll Range - Variable dc offset allows signals between
+ 1 V and - 1 V limits to be displayed at 2 mV/div. Signals
between + 2 V and - 2 V li mits may be displayed at
200 mV/div. For best dot response with random-sampling
sweep unit, signal amplitude should be < 200 mV pop.
Input Characteristics - Nominally 50 11. Safe overload Is
:!: 5 V. GR874 input connectors.
Included Acce .. orles - 5 n s, 50 11 RG213/ U Cable
(017-0502-00); lOX , 50 11 GR Attenuator (017-0078-00).
Order S-2 Sampling Head .................. $1,365
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
P6040/ CT-l Current Probe
Order (Std) 015-0041 -00 .... ................... .......................... $143
3 mV or less referred to
Signal Range - Variable dc offset allows signals between
+ 1 V, lX range, or + 2 V and - 2 V, 2X range, to be displayed
at 2 mV/div. The signal range may be increased lOX or l00X
with the probe attenuators.
Included Accessories - lOX attenuator head (010-0364-00);
100X attenuator head (010-0365-00); two test-point jacks
(131 -0258-00); coupling capacitor (011 -0098-00); probe tip
(206-0114-00); tipground adaptor (013-0085-00) ; 5' {, in
ground lead (175-1017-00); 12'/2 in ground lead (175-1018-00);
3 in cable assembly (175-0249-00); end cap (200-0834-00);
three ground clips (344-0046-00); two end caps (200-0835-00);
probe holder (352-0090-00); carrying case (016-0121-01); 6 in
elec lead (175-0849-00) 3 in elec lead (175-0849-00) retractabie
hook tip (013-0097-01); 5011 voltage pickoff (017-0077-01).
Order S-3A Sampling Head ................ $1,780
S-4
25 ps Sampling Head
S-5
1 MO, 15 pF Input Impedance
Passive Probe
Internal Trigger Pickoff
The 5 ·5 Sampling Head is a low-noise, 1 ns risetima sampling
unit with a 1 Mil, 15 pF input impedance. When used with the
included P6010 Passive Probe, the input impedance increases
to 10 Mil, 10 pF while maintaining the 1 ns risetima at the
probe tip. A switch on the sampling head selects either ac or de
coupling of the input.
Rlsetlme less.
5-5 only, 1 ns or less; with 3.5 ft P6010, 1 ns or
Bandwidth - Equivalent to de to 350 MHz at 3 dB down at
input connector or probe tip.
Transient Response - 5-5 only (driven with a 50 11 source
terminated in 50 11): aberrations + 2.5%, - 5% or less, total of
7.5% or less pop within 17 ns after step; + 1%, - 1% or less,
total of 2% or less p-p thereafter.
S·5/P6010 (3.5 ft probe, properly compensated): aberrations
+ 5%, - 5% or less total of 10% or less p-p within 25 ns after
step; + 1%, - 1% or less total of 2% or less p-p thereafter.
Signal Range - 5·5 only: dc coupled, 1 V p-p from + 1 V to
- 1 V; ac coupled, 1 V p-p. S5/P6010: de coupled (de + peak
ac), 10 V p-p; ac coupling, dc voltage, 100 V.
Input Characteristics - 5·5 only, 1 Mil within 1% paralleled
by 15 pF. S-5/P6010, 10 Mil paralleled by ", 10 pF.
Dc to 14 GHz Equivalent Bandwidth
Displayed Noise < 5 mV (Un smoothed)
Attenuator Accuracy The 5-4 Sampling Head is a 25 ps risetime unit with a 50 11
input impedance. The 5-4 can be plugged into the sampling
unit or attached by a sampling head extender for remote use. A
trigger pickoff within the 5-4 provides a trigger signal output
from the plug-in unit.
25 ps or less.
Risetime -
pa057 looX Probe
Order (Std) 010·6057·03 ................................................. $159
Transient Response - Aberrations in the first 400 ps following a step from an 5-52 Pulse Generator Head are - 10%,
+ 10% or less, total of 20% or less p-p. From 400 ps to 25 ns
following a step from a 284 Pulse Generator, - 0%, + 10% or
less, total of 10% or less, pop with 284 pulse displayed ; after
25 ns, - 2%, + 2% or less, total of 4% or less p-p.
GR to BNC Adaptor
Order 017 -0063-00 ............................................................ $43
Order S-4 Sampling Head .................. $2,665
Displayed Noise - 5-5 only, 500 ~V or less (includes 90% of
dots). S5/P6010, 5 mV or less (includes 90% of dots).
P60S6 lOX Pa..lve Probe
Order (Std) 010-6056-03 ........ ..... .................................... $154
Coupling Capscltor, GR874·K
Order 017·0028-00 ............................................................ $90
Power Divider GR874-TPO
Order 017· 0082-00 .......................................................... $260
Included Accessories - 2 ns cabie with SMA Connectors
(015· 1005-00); lOX 50 11 SMA Attenuator (015-1003-00);
GR874 to SMA Male Adaptor (015· 1007-00); SMA Male-toMale Adaptor (015-1011 . 00); 'I" in wrench (003-0247-00).
Bandwidth -
Equivalent to de to 14 GHz at 3 dB down.
Probe attenuation is lOX within 3%.
Included Accessories - 50 11 termination (011-0049-01);
P6010 Probe package (010-0188-00).
Order S-5 Sampling Head .................. $1,250
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Probe Tip·to·BNC Adaptor
Order 013-0084· 01 ......................................................... $8.00
Probe Tlp-to-GR Adaptor
Order 017·0076-00 ....................................................... $42.00
Probe Tip·to-GR Terminated Adaptor
Order 017·0088-00 ....................................................... $50.00
Displayed Noise - 5 mV or less, un- smoothed ; 2.5 mY ,
smoothed (inciudes 90% of dots).
SAMPLING HEAD CHARACTERISTICS
Bandwidth
Risetime
Input Impedance
Noise: Smoothed
Unsmoothed
Connector
288
5·1
5-2
Dc to 1 GHz Dc to 4.6 GHz
Dc to lGHz
S-3A
5-4
Dc to 14 GHz
.. 350 ps
.. 75 PS
.. 350 PS
.. 25 PS
.. 1 ns
.. 30 PS
50 11
50 11
100 kl1
50 11
1 Mil
50 11 feed thru
.. 1 mV
.. 2 mV
.. 3mV
.. 6 mV
GR
GR
.. 3mV
at Drobe tiD
Probe
TIMING HEAD CHARACTERISTICS
5-5
5·6
Dc to 350 MHz Dc to 11 .5 GHz
-
.. 2.5mV
.. 5 mV
.. 500 ~V
.. 5 mV
.. 5mV
SMA (3 mm)
BNC
SMA (3 mm)
551
Bandwidth
1 to 18 GHz trigger countdown
Risetime
Application
552
-
553
Dc to 1 GHz trigger recognizer
High
Resolution
TOR
.. In
.. 25 os
Extremely
High Speed
Sampling
554
General
Purpose
Sampling
Medium
Resolution
TDR
SERIES
TEK 7000
SAMPLING AND PULSE GENERATOR HEADS
TRIGGER RECOGNIZER AND TRIGGER COUNTDOWN HEADS
5-53
............ MUD
--o -
Dc-to-1 GHz Operation
...... ") '='
10 mV Sensitivity
' .~ ::""
The 5 · 53 Trigger Recognizer Head is intended for use with the
7512 to permit operation as a general.purpose sampling sys·
tem. The 5·53 supplies triggering for the 7512.
5-6
5-51
30 ps Risetime
18 GHz Countdown
Displayed Noise < 5 mV (Unsmoothed)
10 ps or Less Trigger Jitter
Loop-Through Input
The 5·6 Sampling Head is a 50 !l feed· through unit for high.
speed applications.
Risetime - 30 ps or less. 35 ps or less as observed with
5·52 Pulse Generator.
Bandwidth -
Equivalent to dc to 11 .5 GHz at 3 dB down.
Transient Response - Pulse aberrations following the steps
are + 7%, - 7%, total of 10% pop within 1.8 ns of step with
reference point at 1.8 ns from step ; + 2%, - 2%, total of
4% pop after first 2 .5 ns with reference point at 300 ns from
step.
Displayed Noise -
5 mV or less, measured tangentially.
The 5·51 Trigger Countdown Head is a free·running tunneldiode oscillator designed to provide stable sampling displays of
signals up to 18 GHz. The 5·51 has a front·panel sync control
that synchronizes the oscillator frequency to a subharmonic of
the input signal. The output from the 5·51 is available at a
front. panel trigger output connector and through a rear.panel
connector for internal triggering. The output signal is a direct
countdown of the input and permits triggering by a standard
sampling time·base unit.
Input Signal - Frequency range is 1 GHz to 18 GHz. Stable
synchronization on signals at least 100 mV pop, as measured
separately into 50 !l, 5 V, pop maximum.
Input Characteristics -
50 !l SMA (3 mm) connector.
Open termination paralleled by 1 pF.
Signal Range - + 1 V to - 1 V (dc + peak ac). 1 V pop. Dc
offset allows any portion of input signal to be displayed.
Input Characteristics - Nominally 50!l, loop-through system,
unterminated. SMA (3 mm) connectors. Maximum safe over·
load is ± 5V.
Included Accessories - 50 !l termination (015· 1022·00);
1 ns 50 II cable (015.1019.00); SMA (3 mm) Female·tO-Female
Adaptor (015·1012.00); combination wrench (003-0247-00);
SMA Male·tO-GR874 Adaptor (015·1007·00).
Trigger Output Front·panel trigger output is at least
200 mV into 50 !l, B5M type connector. Internal trigger output
is at least 100 mV into 500 !l, internally connected to sampling
unit. Jitter is lOps or less with signals from 5 GHz to 18 GHz ;
15 ps or less with signals from 1 GHz to 5 GHz. Kickout at
signal input connector is 400 mV or less; kickout occurs be·
tween successive samples.
Order S-51
Trigger Countdown Head .................... $1,300
Order S-6 Sampling Head .................. $2,295
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES FOR
SAMPLING HEADS WITH SMA (3 mm) CONNECTORS
2X 50!l Attenuator Order 015· 1001 ·00 .""""""."•••",,. $120
5X 50 11 Attenuator Order 015· 1002·00 ".""""".,,.... ,," $120
lOX 50 11 Attanuator Order 015·1003·00 "".""""""".,, $120
50 11 Termination Order 015·1004·00 ." .... " .. """""" .. ",,. $60
2 ns 50 !l Signal Cable Order 015·1005·00 "." ..... ".""." $80
5 ns 50!l Signal Cable Order 015-1006·00.""" ..."".". $130
Female·to·GR874 Adaptor Order 015-1007·00 ... """",,. $90
Male·to·GR874 Adaptor Order 015·1008-00 """""" .... ". $90
Male·to·N Female Adaptor Order 015·1009·00 ".""."",, $50
Male·to·7 mm Adaptor Order 015-1010·00 " .. " ....,,""" $175
Male·to·Male Adaptor Order 015·1011·00 """"" ..,,"""" $20
Female·to·Female Adaptor Order 015·1012·00 .. """"". $18
Coupling CapaCitor Order 015·1013·00 ."."."."•. " •. ".". $170
50 11 Power Divider T Order 015·1014·00 """."",, ••• ,,'" $200
500 p. 50 11 Semrigid Cable Order 015· 1015·00 .. """,,. $40
SMA T Adaptor Order 015·1016·00 "."."""" •• ",, •• ,,"""" $30
SMA Male·to·BNC Female Adaptor
Order 015·1018-00 .. " •• """""".",.,."" .. "."""" .. ,,.....,,.,,' $8.00
1 n. 50 !l Cable Order 015·1019·00 " ... """,, ... ,,"""",," $105
SMA Male Short·Circuit Termination
Order 015·1020·00 •• " •• """"""""" .. """".""""",, •. ,,.,,. $17.50
SMA Female Short·Circuit Termination
Order 015·1021·00 ..... """"""... "" ... " .. " .."".,,"",, ....,,""" $24
SMA Male 50 11 Termination Order 015·1022·00 .•• """,,. $32
With BNC Connector.
50 11 Feed·through Termination
Order 011·0049·01 "." .• ".".""""."".. " .. ".""""."."."".,,,,.
50 11 Feed·through (5 W) Order 011·0099·00 .. """""",,.
50 11 2X Attenuator Order 011·0069·02 " ...... """""",, ....
50 11 2,5X Attenuator Order 011·0076-02 " •• " .""" """,, ..
50 11 5X Attenuator Order 011·0060·02 " ..... """""""",,.
5011 lOX Atteuator Order 011·0059·02 "."""""".,,....,,"
50 11 18 In, Coaxial Cable Order 012·0076-00 """"" •..,,'
50 11 42 In, Coaxial Cable Order 012·0057·01 ""." ...... ".
$25
$40
$35
$35
$35
$35
$17
$17
5-52
50
{l
Output Characteri.tlc. - Risetime is 1 ns or less. Amplitudie
is at least 1.5 V positive-go;ng into 50 !l. Pulse duration Is 3 ns
within 2 ns at the 50% amplitudie level. Pulse period is 27 ~s
minimum. Trigger.tO-signal delay is 15 ns or less; jitter is 15 ps
or less.
Connector. - Trigger input connector is BNe type. Front·
panel trigger output connector is BSM type. Trigger output is
also available at rear connector for intemal triggering.
Included Acce •• orie. - 42 in, 50 !l cable (012.0057.01); lOX
50 !l attenuator (011·0059·02).
Order S-53
Trigger Recognizer Head .................... $1,190
5-54
1 ns Risetime
Low Aberrations
400 mV into 50
50
{l
{l
Source
Variable Pretrigger Lead Time
The 5·54 Pulse Generator Head is a step generator designed
for use with the 7512 as a long line Time Domain Reflectometer unit.
25 ps Risetime
200 mV into 50
Input Characteri.tlc. - Frequency range Is de to 1 GHz. Sen·
sitivity range is 10 mV to 2 V pop into 50 !l. Kickout at input,
± 5 mV or less.
Intended for TOR applications, the 5-54 is 50 !l reverse termi·
nated to minimize rellections and has a 0 V base line to eliminate base line shift with load changes. A continuously variable
front·panel control enables adjustment of pretrigger lead time.
The pretrigger output allows the 5·54 to be operated in sequential sampling systems without a delay line.
{l
Source
Pretrigger Output
The 5·52 Pulse Generator Head is a tunnel-diode step genera·
tor designed for use with the 7512 as a high resolution TIme
Domain Rellectometer.
Pul.e Output - Risetime is 1 ns or less. Amplitudie into 50 !l is
+400 mV or greater. Pulse duration is 25 ~s within 2 ~s. Pulse
aberrations following the step are + 1.5%, -1.5%, total of
1.5% pop, as displayed with 5·1 Sampling Head. Base line level
is 0 V within 20 mV, terminated in 50 !l.
For TOR applications, the 5·52 features automatic bias circuit
control to eliminate effects of tunnel-diode and load changes. A
50 !l reverse termination minimizes rellections. The pulse width
is suffICient for distances up to 32 ft in any cable. A pretrigger
output allows the 5·52 to be operated in sequential sampling
systems without a delay line.
Pretrigger Output - Risetime is 5 ns or less. Amplitudie into
5011 is at least 200 mY, positive-going. Pretrigger pulse dura·
tion is 20 ns or less at the 50% amplitudie point. Pretrigger lead
time is front panel adjustable from 120 ns or less to 1 "s or
greater. Pretrigger·tO-pulse-output jitter is 100 ps or less at
120 ns lead time to 1 ns or less at 1 "s lead time.
Pulse Output - Risetime is 25 ps or less. Amplitudie into 50 !l
is at least 200 mV, positive-going. Pulse duration 800 ns, pulse
period 16 ~s within 2 ~s . Pulse aberrations following the step
are + 7%, - 7%, total of 10% pop within 1.8 ns of step with ref·
erence point at 1.8 ns from step, +2%, - 2%, total of 4% pop
after first 2.5 ns with reference point at 300 ns from step.
Output Connectors - Pulse output uses a BNe connector.
Pretrigger output uses a BSM connector.
Pretrigger Output - Risetime is 1 ns or less. Amplitude into
50 !l is at least 1 V, positive going. Pretrigger pulse duration is
4 ns. Pretrigger occurs 85 ns (within 5 ns) before the pulse
output. Pretrigger to pulse output jitter is lOpS or less. Pretrig.
ger output is also available at rear connector for internal trig.
gering of the sampling sweep unit.
Included Acce ••orie. - BNe T connector (103-0030-00);
8 in 50 !l cable (012-0118-00).
Order S-54 Pulse Generator Head ..... $1,075
-
SAMPLING HEAD 5-1
kg
Net
Shipping
Output Connectors - Pulse output uses an SMA (3 mm) con·
nector. Pretrigger output uses a BSM connector.
Included Acce.sory (015-1023-00).
Ib
S-8
Net
Shipping
kg
Ib
WEIGHTS
S·3A
kg
Ib
5-4
kg
Ib
S·5
kg
Ib
0.5 1.0 0.5 1.0 1.4 3.0 0.5 1.0 0.3 0.6
1.4 3.0 1.4 3.0 2.3 5.0 0.9 2.0 0.9 2.0
kg
1 ns, 500 semirigid coax delay line
Order S-52 Pulse Generator Head ..... $1,655
5·2
Ib
S-52
kg
Ib
5-53
kg
Ib
S-54
kg
Ib
S·51
kg
Ib
0.5 1.0 0.3 0.8 0.3 0.8 0.3 0.8 0.5 1.0
0.9 2 .0 0.5 1.0 0 .5 1.0 0.5 1.0 2.3 5.0
289
7000
CURVE TRACER
UNIT
TEK READOUT
SERIES
7CT1N
7M13
CHARACTERISTICS
COLLECTOR/DRAIN SUPPLY
Xl0
XI
Horizontal
Volts/Div
Voltage
Range
Max Current
0.5
2
5
20
a to
a to
a to
a to
7.5 V
30 V
75 V
300 V
240 mA
60 mA
24 mA
6mA
Maximum Open Circuit Voltage short-drcuit current, within 30%.
Within ± 20%. Maximum
High Voltage Warning - When the horizontal V/div switch is
in the Xl0 position, a flashing warning light, indicating that dangerous voltages may exist at the test terminals, appears on the
front panel.
cuwv. T.....CIll
Curve Tracer
7CT1N
10 nA/div to 20 mA/div
Vertical Deflection Factors
0.5 V/div to 20 V/div
Horizontal Deflection Factors
STEP GENERATOR
Transistor Mode - Step amplitude range is 1 ~A/step to
1 mA/step, 1-2-5 sequence. Maximum current (steps plus aiding offset) is 15X amplitude selling. Maximum voltage (steps
plus aiding offset) is at least 13 V. Maximum opposing offset
current is at least 5X amplitude selling.
II
K
D
M
•
Q
W
X
"0 -0 -0 -0 -0
10 <0 10 >0
-
Readout Unit
FET Mode - Step amplitude range is 1 mY/step to 1 V/step,
1-2-5 sequence. Voltage amplitude (steps plus aiding offset) is
15X amplitude setting, 13 V maximum. Source impedance is 1
kG ± 1%.
7M13
Accuracy - Incremental: within 3% between steps.
Absolute: within ± (3% + 0.3X amplitude selling).
Easy and Convenient Identification
of Photographed Displays
Step Polarity - The step generator polarity is the same as the
ootlector/drain supply in the transistor mode and opposing in
the FET mode.
Automatic Sequence Advance
with Each Camera Exposure
Number 01 Steps -
The 7CT1N Curve Tracer Plug-in displays characteristic curves of small-signal semiconductor devices to power levels up to 0.5 W. The 7CT1N
operates in horizontal or vertical compartments of
7000 Series Oscilloscopes.
C
0
Y
Series Resistance - Automatically selected with horizontal
V/div switches. Peak power is 0.5 W or less, depending upon
control sellings.
7CT1N
..
Selectable in 1 step increments between
a and 10.
OIIset - Selectable to 5 steps. Polarity aids or opposes the
step polarity.
Vertical Dellectlon Factors - 10 nA/div to 20 ~A/div with the
+ 1000 control activated. 10 ~A/div to 20 mA/div in the 1X
mode.
Vertical Display Accuracy - Within 5% in the 1X mode.
Within 5% ± 0.2 nA per displayed horizontal volt in the + 1000
mode.
Horizontal Dellection Factors or 20 V.
Selectable: 0.5 V, 2 V, 5 V,
Horizontal Display Accuracy - Within 5% plus the deflection
factor accuracy of the plug-in being driven. The plug-in is a
vertical or horizontal amplifier with a 100 mV/div deflection factor and an input R of at least 50 kG when it is used in the
horizontal compartment.
The 7M13 Readout Unit provides front-panel keyboard operation for convenient access to the
CRT readout characters. Up to ten alphanumeric
characters can be displayed at the top and/or at
the bottom of the CRT. The 7M13 is designed for
use in all 7000 Series mainframes with CRT readOUt. A remote-advance cable is supplied with the
7M13 to connect it to the shutter X-sync connector of the C-50 Series Cameras. An optional cable
is available for cameras using an ASA connector
for X-sync.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Remote-advance cable (012-0339-01).
Order 7M13 Readout Unit ..................... $950
Order 7CT1N Curve Tracer ................ $1,385
2N3904 transistor characteristic generated by the 7CT/N. Control settings are indicated on front panel o( 7CT/N.
Vertical - 2 mNdiv
Horizontal - 0.5 V/ div
8ase Current - 10 ",Nstep
The photograph above was identified as TEST 14 by using the
7M13 in 7834 Oscilloscope.
Optional Accessory - Remote-advance cable with ASA connector for camera X-sync.
Order 012-0364-01 .... _.... __ ..... _............................. __ ..... _...... $21
290
TEK
5000 SERIES
INSTRUMENTS
CONTENTS
Mainframes
5223 10 MHz Digital Storage ..................... .. 294
5440/R5440 50 MHz General Purpose .... 296
5441/R5441 50 MHz
Variable Persistence Storage .............. " .... .. .. . 297
5111A2MHz
Single Beam Bistable Storage ........................ 300
51102 MHz Single Beam ............................... 301
51132 MHz Dual Beam Bistable Storage .... 301
Plug-Ins
Digital Storage Capability
The 5223 Digitizing Oscilloscope provides
digital storage at the touch of a button, intensified pretrigger viewing , equivalent time
sampling, and X-V displays. This 5000 Series scope, with optional IEEE Standard 488
interface, is ideal for physical, mechanical
and biomedical applications.
Performance Value
Designed for the cost-conscious user as an
alternative to the monolithic scope the 5400
Series gives you 50 MHz bandwidth in both
nonstore and variable persistence storage
mainframes with CRT readout.
MAINFRAMES
Mainframe/
Display
Unit
Beams
5110
301
Single
5111A
300
Single
Bistable
8xl0div
(1.27 cm/div)
5113
301
Dual
Bistable
8xl0div
(1 .27 cm/div)
5223
294
Single
Digital
8x 10div
(1.22 cm/div)
5440
296
Single
5441
297
Single
Maximum Flexibility
The 5100 Series is ideal for low frequency
applications such as medical and mechanical measurements requiring up to 2 MHz
bandwidth. It gives you unparalleled choices
in measurement flexibility such as dualbeam, split-screen, bistable storage displays, differential inputs and spectrum
analysis .
Expandability
With the 5000 Series plug-in oscilloscope,
you are making a cost-effective investment
in current technology-and ensuring yourself a share in the future.
Display
Size
Page
Storage
Waveform Digitizer .................. " ........ .. .......... 302
Single Channel Amplifiers ...... " ..................... 304
Two Channel Amplifiers ........ "" ........... 298, 304
Four Channel Amplifier .......... " .... .. ............... 304
Differential Amplifiers ............ " ...................... 305
Dual Differential Amplifier ...... ,,, ........ ............ 306
Time Bases .............. ,.. ,............ ,.. ,...... ,.. , 299,307
Curve Tracer ............ .. .. "" .... .. .. ,.............. ,....... 308
Spectrum Analyzer .. ,.... " .. .. ,.. " ........ ,.. " ........ , 308
Dual Trace Sampler .. ,.. ,...... ,.. " .. ,.. ,.... "" ........ 308
8xl0div
(1 .27 cm/div)
8x 10div
(1.22 cm/div)
Variable
Persistence
8 x 10div
(0.9 cm/div)
-
TIME BASE PLUG INS
vons/
Product Page
5Bl0N
307
5B12N
307
Type
Dual
Delaying
AMPLIFIERS
Product Page
Type
Minimum
Deflection
Factor
5A13N
305
Single
1 mV/div
5A14N
304
Four
1 mV/div
1 MHz
5A15N
304
Single
1 mV/div
2 MHz
5A18N
304
Dual
1 mV/div
2 MHz
5A19N
305
Single
1 mV/div
2 MHz
5A21N
305
Single
(voltage
and
current)
50 ~V/div
0.5 mNdiv
5A22N
306
Single
10
~V
Bandwidth
-3dB
CMRR
2 MHz
10,000:1
5940
298
5942
299
1 MHz 100,000:1
306
Dual
50 ~V/div
5A38
298
Dual
10 mV/div
35 MHz
5A48
298
Dual
1 mV/div·
50 MHz
Digitizer
5B25N
299
Product
Page
5CT1N
308
1000:1
1 MHz 100,000:1
Single DiY Ext
Mag Sweep Mode
1~st05s
Xl0
Yes
50mV
and
500 mV
A 1 ~s
to 5 s
B 2 ~s
to 0.5 s
Xl0
Yes
50mV
and
500mV
0.1 ~s
to 5 s
Xl0
Yes
50mV
A 0.1 ~s
to 5 s
B 0.1 ~s
to 0.5 s
Xl0
Yes
50 mV
Xl0
-
0.2 ~s
to 5 s
Xl0
Yes
-
-
50mV
SPECIAL PURPOSE PLUG INS
1 MHz 100,000:1
5A26
Delaying
Sweep
Rage
Description
Semiconduelor Curve Tracer
5L4N
308
Low-Cost Spectrum Analyzer
5S14N
308
Dual-Trace Delayed Sweep Sampler
5010
302
Waveform Digitizer
·Bandwidth is de to 25 MHz at 1 mV/div and 2 mV/div.
291
INFORMATION
TEK REFERENCE
Low Cost
2 MHz, 10 MHz or 50 MHz Bandwidth
Sampling to 1 GHz
o to 100 kHz Spectrum Analysis
6 Oscilloscope Models
21 Plug-ins Available
Digital, Dual-Beam and Storage Displays
CRT Readout (5400 Series only)
Large 6_5 inch CRT (8 x 10 div)
10 /l-V /div High Gain Differential Amplifier
1 to 8 Trace Capability
Delayed-Sweep Time Bases
Y-T or X-Y Operation
Bench-to-Rack Convertibility
The 5000 Series oscilloscopes are designed to
provide optimum versatility and performance at
the lowest possible price.
5100 SERIES OSCILLOSCOPES
Three 5100 Series oscilloscopes are available.
They include single-beam , dual-beam, and storage displays. The storage display units feature
bistable, split-screen storage with large 6.5 inch
CRTs. The dual beam units, have two writing
guns and two pairs of vertical deflection plates.
One pair of horizontal deflection plates drives
both beams.
5400 SERIES OSCILLOSCOPES
Two 5400 Series display units are presently available: a single-beam, nonstorage display and a
variable persistence storage display. Both feature CRT readout of plug-in scale factors, three
plug -in compartments and benchmount -torackmount convertibility.
To date, 15 plug-ins are available for use with
the 5100 Series. Among these are the low-cost
5L4N Spectrum Analyzer for the 0 to 100 kHz
frequency range the 5S14N , a general purpose 1
GHz dual-trace sampling plug-in and the 5010
Waveform Digitizer.
5223 DIGITIZING OSCILLOSCOPE
You can get the benefits of digital storage, along
with the time-tested advantages of a conventional analog scope, in the 10 MHz 5223 Digitizing
Oscilloscope. Combined in one powerful, convenient oscilloscope are pushbutton ease, high
quality waveform display, pretrigger signal manipulation, and optional GPIB interface, plus realtime analog display capability.
Use the 5223 in the digital storage mode to capture repetitive events at speeds of up to 10 MHz
or single-shot events at speeds of up to 100 kHz.
The 5223's maximum sample rate is 1 MHz; storage capacity is 1024 bits per vertical
compartment.
The 5010 is a dual channel waveform digitizer
with cursors, CRT scale factor readout, roll mode
and plotter output.
The 5400 Series offers 50 MHz bandwidth and is
capable of satisfying a wide range of measurement needs. It features readout of plug-in scale
factors on the CRT (except with plug-ins having
a suffix N: 5A22N, 5B10N, etc.). This feature,
previously available only on more sophisticated
oscilloscopes, allows you to make measurements more quickly and conveniently. The CRT
readout can also be externally accessed.
Back-lighted knob skirts on the plug-ins provide
scale-factor readout. The correct scale factor is
automatically indicated when using the X10 magnifier and the recommended 1X and 10X probes.
In addition , the 5400 Series automatically
presents correct scale factors on the CRT when
used with non-N suffix plug-ins. This feature helps
reduce human errors and enables photographic
recording of measurement conditions.
PLUG-IN VERSATILITY
Twenty-one plug-ins are now available in the
5000 Series family. All these plug-ins are compatible with the 5400 Series, and all but six are compatible with 5100 Series mainframes.
SCOPE-MOBILE" Carts Cart, Model 3.
CARTS
For cabinet models, order TEK Lab
CAMERAS
All 5100 Series - C-SC, suitable for repetitive or stored
traces.
5100 Storage Instrumants, 5440 (with P back), 5441 (with G
back) - C-S9, general purpose.
For full details see camera section.
The amplifier plug-ins include single, dual, and
four trace units, various differential amplifiers (including one with a current probe input), and a
differential comparator amplifier. The time-base
plug-ins include single, dual, delayed sweep
units, and a digital time base.
ACCESSORIES
Blank Plug-In Kit Order 040-0818-03 .......... _................ _ $105
Blank Panel Order 016-019S-02 __________ ____ ___ .. ___________________ $18
Viewing Hoods Order 016-0154-00 __ ___ .. _________ .... _______ .. ____ $28
or Order 016-04S2-00 folding ._________.. ____________________ ___________ $18
Protective Cover Order 016-0544-00 _____________ .. ___ _______ .. _.. $25
For full details see accessories section.
5000 SERIES INSTRUMENTS-PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
5100 and 5400 Series
5223
Rackmount
Cabinet
Dlmenaions
The 5100 Series also features 2 MHz mainframes
with large 6.5 inch single-beam CRTs that accommodate two vertical deflection plug-ins and
one horizontal deflection plug-in. They can be
easily converted from bench to rackmount
configuration .
Four special-purpose plug-ins are also available.
The 5L4N is a spectrum analyzer for the 0 to
100 kHz frequency range . It has 10 Hz bandwidth
resolution . The 5Cn N is a semiconductor
curvetracer plug-in . It allows characteristic curves
of transistors, FETs, diodes and other semiconductor devices to be displayed on the CRT. The
5S14N, a general-purpose dual-trace, delayed
sweep sampler, extends the bandwidth of the
5100, the 5400 Series, and the 5223 to 1 GHz at
2 mV sensitivity.
The digitized display will never fade or bloom , so
you get more accurate measurements , more
conveniently. High 10-bit vertical resolution gives
you an accurate representation of your signals.
Width
Height
Depth
mm
214
328
572
Weight ",
kg
Net
Shipping
16.9
20.5
In
8.4
12.9
22.5
In
mm
9.0
7_0
22.4
483
178
569
Ib
37.3
45.0
kg
Ib
19.1
23.6
42.0
S2.0
Cabinet
mm
213
302
S18
kg
10.4
10.S
In
8.4
11 .9
20.4
Ib
23.0
32.0
Plug-ins
Rackmount
mm
in
483
133
483
19.0
5.25
19.0
kg
10.9
19.5
Single Width
mm
66
127
305
Double Width
in
2.6
5.0
12.0
Ib
kg
Ib
24.0
43.0
1.3
4.5
2.8
10.0
mm
In
5.2
5.0
12.0
132
127
305
kg
Ib
2.6
4.9
5.8
10.8
RECOMMENDED PROBES FOR 5000 SERIES AMPLIFIER PLUG-INS
The following probes are recommended for general use with
the listed amplifier plug-ins. These probes automatically program the knob-skit readout and the CRT readout (available
only in the 5400 Series) to indicate correct deflection factor.
Probe packages include various tips , ground leads and
Probes are also available in different lengths, attenuation ratios, input loading and bandwidths. Special purpose probes,
such as high voltage, FET and current probes are available for
use with 5000 Series Amplifier Plug-ins. See Probe section for
complete information.
accessories.
Standard
Langth
P6060
lOX
6ft
Full bw, low cost (not compatible with CRT readout).
010-6060-03
P60628
lX/ lOX
6ft
010-6062-13
P60628
IX/ lOX
6ft
Full bw, switchable attenuation, ground reference
button.
Full bw, switchable attenuation, ground reference
button.
P6101
IX
2m
Full bw, miniature. Modular construction simplifies
repair.
010-6101 -03
P60S5
Adjustable
to lOX
3.5 ft
Adjustable attenuation. Will give up to 20,000; 1 CMRR
when used in pairs. (5A21 N, SA22N and 5A26).
010-605S-01
P6105
lOX
2m
Full bw, miniature. Modular construction simplifies
repair.
010-6105-03
P60628
lX/10X
6ft
Switchable attenuation (full bandwidth in the lOX
position) ground reference button.
010-6062-13
P6101
IX
2m
Miniature, modular (reduced bandwidth).
010-6101 -03
Voltage
Probe
5A14N
5A15N
5A18N
SA13N
SA21W
5A22N
SA26
SA38
5A48
Package
Number
Attenuation
Amplifier
Plug-In.
Features
010-6062-13
"The 5A21N also prOVideS dlfect access to current probe P6021 . Order 5A21N, OptIon 01 for 5A21N Amplifier and Current Probe
package. See pages 305-306 for complete information.
292
SERIES
TEK 5000
•••• [>
A-
REFERENCE
D
~
~DDDv
All 5000 Series Rackmount Oscilloscopes and
cabinet-to-rackmount kits include complete slide
out tracks and mounting hardware to interface
with standard 19 inch racks.
CONVERSION KITS
Cabinet-to-Rackmount Order 040-0583-03 ............. __ .... _ $95
Rackmount-to-Cabinet Order 040-0584-03 __ ___ ___ __ ________ $150
MECHANICAL MEASUREMENT TRANSDUCERS
RANGE: 3000 paig
TYPE:
Bonded Sirain Gage
" arm 350 0 bridge
Scale Factor: 3 mV!V I.•.
RANGE: 300 pslg
TYPE :
Bonded Strain Gage
Accuracy: ,'''
Excitation : ~10 Vdc
Accu racy: 1%
Excitation: !:::!10 Vdc
Built-In CAL t.,I.tor
PRESSURE
015-0162..()Q "
t.
" arm 350 n bridge
BUill-in CAL r•• llio r
PRESSU RE (EAS)
RANGE: 3000 palg (dynamic only)
015-0117-00
TYPE :
RECOMMENDED
PERFORMANCE
DESCRIPTION
PRESSURE
015-0161-00 "
APPLICATION NOTES
ACCESSORIES
0 12"()20i-OO
20 ft mult lconductor cabla
~65kH z
012-{)209-00
20 It multl-
Scale Faclor: 3 mVlV f. • .
conductor cabl,
Accuracy: <5"-
015-011a..oo
cooling adapter
f.~2" kHz
Plazoelectrlc
Sensitivity: 200 pc/pal
Mu Overpre ssure: 300%
remp: -""'-::--- - - i
II:
CRT Readout
o
Iii
Dc to 50 MHz
1.0
0.25 L..._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
0.1
3 Plug-in Flexibility
20 Versatile Plug-ins
...:..:.:::!........::IIIo....:=~
1.0
STORED WRITING SPEED
(dly/ps .t M.xlmum Persistence)
5.0
External Intensity Input - + 5 V turns beam on from off condition. -5 V turns beam off from on condition. Dc to 2 MHz
usable frequency range. Input Rand C = 10 kll paralleled by
= 40 pF. Maximum input 50 V (dc + peak ac).
Bench to Rack Convertibility
5 div/~s Stored Writing Speed
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
Beam Finder -
Intensifies trace and brings it into graticule
area.
APPLICATIONS
Ultrasonics
Auto Focus - Reduces Ihe need for manual focusing with
changes in intensity after the front-panel FOCUS control has
been set.
Low Power Laser
Calibrator - Voltage amplitude 400 mV ± 1%. Current amplitude 4 mA ± 1%. Frequency is 2 times line frequency .
Fiber Optics
Ambient Temperature - Performance characteristics valid
from O· C to 50 · C unless otherwise specified .
With the 5441 Variable Persistence Storage Oscilloscope, view time at normal intensity can be
varied from a fraction of a second to more than
five minutes. In the save mode, signals can be
viewed at lower intensity for up to an hour.
High-speed events that occur only once or at very
low repetition rates are easily observed. You can
make low frequency measurements more easily
and accurately by eliminating flicker or transforming a slowly moving dot into a stable display.
Repetitions of the same signal can be compared
simultaneously to detect changes in amplitude or
phase. The integrating effect of variable persistence can be used to suppress the random noise
that obscures low signal -to -noise ratio
waveforms.
The 5441 enhances the capabilities of the 5000
Series sampler and spectrum analyzer plug-ins. In
sampling applications, discrete dot traces are
converted into a continuous waveform by holding
repeated sweeps on the CRT.
In spectrum analysis, slow scan rates are used to
maximize resolution . With the 5441, it is easy to
display a full-scan pattern simultaneously even
when the scan rate yields full-scale periods of
more than a second .
Like other 5400 Series oscilloscopes, the 5441
offers CRT readout of deflection factors for convenient, error-free measurements and optional
user-programmable CRT readout of test information for ready identification and easy photographic recording . With the flexibility of a 3 plug-in
mainframe and a choice of 20 plug-ins, you can
make virtually any measurement from dc to
50 MHz.
CHARACTERISTICS
VERTICAL SYSTEM
Channels - Left and center plug-in compartments compatible
with all 5000 Series plug-ins. CRT readout not available for
plug-ins with suffix N.
Deflection Factor Bandwidth -
Determined by plug-in.
50 MHz, determined by plug-in.
Chopped Mode - The 5441 will chop between channels at
= 25 kHz to 100 kHz, depending on plug-ins and operating
modes.
Allemate Mode - Each plug-in is swept twice before switching to the next. A single-trace amplifier is swept twice and each
channel of a dual-trace amplifier is swept once before the 5441
switches to the second amplifier.
HORIZONTAL SYSTEM
Line Vollage Ranges - 100, 110, 120, 200,220, and 240 V
ac ± 10%; (except that maximum input should not exceed 250
V ac) internally selected with quick change Jumpers. Line frequency range . 48 to 440 Hz.
Maximum Power Consumption -
Option 01 Without CRT Readout - The 5441 may be ordered
without CRT readout. This feature can easily be added later
with a conversion kit.
Option 03 User Addressable CRT Readout - CRT readout
access allows the operator to program up to two 10-digit
words.
Option 04 Protective Panel Cover (Cabinet Model Only) The 5441 may be ordered with a protective front-panel cover.
The cover protects the front panel and knobs during transportation and storage.
For Recommended Cameras Functional Index.
Channel - Right-hand plug-in compartment compatible with
all 5000 Series plug-ins. CRT readout not available for plug·ins
with suffix N.
Internal Trigger Mode -
Left vertical, right vertical.
Fastest Calibrated Sweep Rate plug-in.
X-Y Mode -
10 ns/div. determined by
Phase shift within 2· from de to 20 kHz .
CRT AND DISPLAY FEATURES
CRT - Internal, parallax-free, 8 x 10 div (0.9 cm/div) graticule
with edge-lit illumination.
100 W at 120 V ac, 60 Hz.
OPTIONS
Refer to camera section in
ORDERING INFORMATION
(PLUG-INS NOT INCLUDED)
5441 Oscilloscope ............................... $4,425
R5441 Oscilloscope (Rackmount) ....... $4,475
Option 01 -
Without CRT Readout .................. ......... -$300
Option 03 -
User Addressable CRT Readout ............. + $75
Option 04 - Protective Panel Cover
(Cabinet Model Only) ...................................................... +$25
CONVERSION KITS
Persistence - Continuously variable, may be turned off when
not needed, thus producing high-contrast stored displays without the characteristic fading of variable perSistence.
Rackmount-to-Cabinet Order 040-0584-04 ........ .......... $150
Phosphor -
CRT Readout Order 040-0691-02 .................................. $755
P31 .
Accelerating Potential -
8.5 kV .
Maximum Stored Writing Speed for a view time of 15 s.
Cabinet·to·Rackmount Order 040-0583-03 .................... $95
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORDS AND PLUG OPTIONS
Writing speed > 5 div/"s
Storage View Time - The view time is the amount of time the
stored signal can be viewed before it fades away.
At the maximum writing speed the view time is 15 s or 0.25
minutes with the writing speed control fully cw o Adjusting the
stored intensity ccw will reduce the stored writing speed, but
view time can be increased up to 5 minutes (see the chart next
column).
Option AI -
Universal Euro 220 V116A, 50 Hz .............. NC
Option A2 -
UK 240 V/13A, 50 Hz .. ............................... NC
Option A3 -
Australian 240 V/ l0A, 50 Hz ...................... NC
Option A4 -
North American 240 V/15A, 60 Hz ............. NC
Save Mode - Extends view time of stored displays up to 1 hr;
prevents erasure of stored display and storage of unwanled
displays.
Erase Time -
0.5 s ± 10%.
297
DUAL TRACE AMPLIFIERS
BASE
TEK TIME
5A38
5000
SERIES
5A48
-
5B40
-
Dc to 35 MHz
Dc to 50 MHz
Time Base
5A38
5A48
5840
Dual·trace Amplifier
Dual·trace Amplifier
Time Base
Low Cost
Dc to 50 MHz Bandwidth
Low Cost
Dc to 35 MHz Bandwidth
1 mV/div to 10 V/div Calibrated
Deflection Factors
10 ns/dlv to 5 s/div
Calibrated Time Base
10 mV/div to 10 V/div Calibrated
Deflection Factors
The 5A38 is a dual-trace, 35 MHz plug-in amplifier
for use only in the 5223 and the 5400 Series
mainframes. It features 10 mV/div sensitivity and
CRT readout of deflection factor:
CHARACTERISTICS
Bendwldth - Dc coupled, to ..35 MHz. Lower end response,
ac coupled, .. t 0 Hz.
Ol.pley Mode. - Channell only, Channel 2 only (normal or
inverted), Dual-trace, and Added. Altemated or chopped operation determined by time base plug-in. Intemal trigger selectable
from Channell or Channel 2.
RI ••tlme -
.. 10 ns.
Calibrated deflection factors from
Deflection Fector, 10 mV/div to 10 V/div in a 1-2-5 sequence. Accuracy .. 3%
from IS ' C to 3S'C, 4% from O'C to SO·C. A continuously
variable control provides ;;. 2.SX additional attenuation on each
range.
Common-Mode Rejection Retio Chennel I,oletlon displayed.
Input Rand C -
;;.50:1 up to 1 MHz.
;;.50:1 to 35 MHz with both traoas
1 Mil shunted by ",,20 pF.
Mexlmum Input Voltage - Dc coupled, 250 V (de .;. peak ac);
ac coupled, 500 V (dc + peak ac). Ac component 500 V pop
maximum at 1 kHz or less.
Stablilly - .. 0.3 mV vertical shift in anyone minute after one
hour warm-up, ambient temperature and line voltage held constant ... 0.2 mV/' C vertical shift with line voltage held
constant.
Triggering to 50 MHz
The 5A48 is a dual-trace 50 MHz plug-in amplifier
for use only in the 5223 and the 5400 Series mainframes. The 5A48 features five operating modes,
selectable trigger source, and CRT readout of deflection factor.*
CHARACTERISTICS
Bandwidth - Dc coupled, de to at least 50 MHz at 5 mV/div to
10 V/div, decreasing to de to 25 MHz at 1 mV/div and 2 mV/div
(3 dB down). Ac coupled, 10Hz or less (1.0 Hz with a lOX
probe) at all deflection factors (3 dB down).
Ol,play Mode, - Channel 1 only, Channel 2 only (normal or
inverted), Dual-traoa, Added, Altemated, Chopped (determined
by time-base plug-in horizontal compartment). Intemal trigger
souroa is selectable from Channell or Channel 2.
The 5B40 Time Base is designed for use only in
5400 Series mainframes. It features sweep rates
from 10 ns/div to 5 s/div and CRT readout of the
sweep rate selected.
CHARACTERISTICS
Sw"p Rate - 0.1 p.s/div to 5 S/div in 24 calibrated steps (1 -25 sequenoe). 10 ns/div is fastest sweep rate obtained with Xl0
magnifier. Uncalibrated, continuously variable between steps
and up to 12.5 s/div.
Sweep Accuracy - Measured in 5400 Series oscilloSCOpe
over oanter 8 gratlcule divisions. Valid for 100 div of magnified
sweep after the first 30 ns
Unmegnlfled
RI.etlme - 7 ns or less (5 mV/div to 10 V/div), 14 ns or less
(1 mV/div and 2 mV/div).
Time/DIY
Deflection Factors Calibrated deflection factors from
1 mV/div to 10 V/div in a 1-2-5 sequenoe. Accuracy .. 5% at
1 mV/div and 2 mV/div ; ..3% from 5 mV/div to 10 V/div from
15'C to 35'C; .. 4% from 5 mV/div to 10 V/div from O'C to
50"C. A continuously variable control provides ;;.2.5X additonal attenuation on each range.
5 s/div and 2 S/div,
0.2 p.s/div and
0.1 p.s/dlv
1 Mil within 1%, ",,24 pF.
Maximum Input Voltage - Dc coupled, 250 V (de + peak ac;
ac coupled, 500 V (de + peak ac). Ac component 500 V pop
maximum, 1 kHz or less.
Stablilly - .. 0.3 mV vertical shift in anyone minute after one
hour wanm-up, ambient temperature and line voltage held canstant ... 0.2 mV/"C vertical shift with line voltage held
constant.
4%
5%
6.5%
5%
TRIGGERING
Common-Mode Rejection Ratio - ;;.50:1 from 5 mV/div to
10 V/div, up to 1 MHz. ;;.20:1 from 1 mV/div to 2 mY/diy, up to
1 MHz.
Input R & C -
Magnified
+1S·C to O·C to +1S·C to O·C to
+3S·C +SO·C +3S·C +SO·C
1 s/div to 0.5 p.s/div
3%
4%
4%
5.5%
Frequency
Coupling
Dc
Minimum Signal
Required
Range
Inte"",1
I
External
Dc to 10 MHz
0.4 div
1.0 div
I
60mV
150mV
10 MHz to 60 MHz
Ac
Trigger requirements increase below 50 Hz
LF REJ
Trigger requirements increase below 7.5 kHz
HF REJ
Trigger requirements increase above 50 kHz
Single Sweep - Triggering requirements are the same as normal sweep. When triggered, sweep generator produces only
one sweep.
External Trlgge, Input - Maximum input voltage is 350 V de
+ peak ac, 350 V pop ac at .. , kHz. Input R and C is 1 Mil
paralleled by ",,24 pF. Trigger level range is ;;. ± 1.5 V.
'CR T readout not functional in 5223.
'CRT readout not functional in 5223.
For recommended probe, -
298
refer to page 292,
External Horlzontel Input - Deflection factor is 50 mV/div
± 3%. Input R and C is 1 Mil paralleled by = 24 pF. Dc coupled
bandwidth is de to .. 2 MHz. The ac coupled lower response is
.. 50 Hz. Maximum input voltage is 350 V (de + peak ac) or
350 V pop ac at .. I kHz.
SERIES
TEK 5000
5842
TIME
BASES
Delaying Time Base
5B42
5B25N
Delaying Time Base
Digitizer Time Basel Amplifier
10 ns/div to 5 s/div Calibrated Time Base
Single-Sweep Operation
Triggering to 50 MHz
The 5B42 Delaying Time Base is designed for use
in 5400 Series Mainframes. The 5842 is designed
so that the user may easily operate the time base
in the many applications where delayed sweep
and sweep rates up to 10 ns/div are required .
The 5B42 also features CRT readout and an
edge-lighted seconds/div selector switch.
CHARACTERISTICS
Sweep Rate - 0.1 ~s/div to 5 s/div in 24 calibrated steps (1-25 sequence). 10 ns/div is the fastest calibrated sweep rate obtained with Xl0 magnifier. Uncalibrated, continuously variable
between steps and to 12.5 s/div.
Sweep Accuracy - Measured over the center 8 div. Same as
5B40. See chart on previous page.
TRIGGERING
Frequency
Coupling
Range
Minimum Signel
Required
Internal
External
0.4 div
1.0 div
0.4 div
l00mV
400 mV
l00mV
Oc 5400 ampl
5400 ampl
5100 ampl
Octo 10 MHz
10 MHz to 60 MHz
Dc to 2 MHz
Ac
Requirements increase below 50 Hz
Ac LF REJ
Requirements increase below 7.5 kHz
Single Sweep - Triggering requirements are the same as normal sweep. When triggered, sweep generator produces one
sweep.
External Trigger Input - Maximum input voltage is 350 V (de
+ peak ac), 350 V pop ac at 1 kHz or less. Input R and C is 1
Mil within 2%, "", 20 pF. Trigger level range is at least ± 2.5 V.
5825N
Bi-Slope Triggering
Triggering to 15 MHz
DELAYED SWEEP
The 5B25N is designed specifically for use in the
5223 Digital Storage Oscilloscope. Pretrigger is
only available with the 5223 (see page 294). However, the standard analog sweep features including Bi-Slope Triggering and X10 Mag are compatible with 5400 Series Mainframes.
BI-SLOPE TRIGGERING
Besides the standard positive and negative slope and levei
control, the 5B25N has Bi-Siope triggering. When selected, BiSlope will trigger on either a positive or negative slope and the
threshold or sensitivity is controlled by the trigger level knob.
This eliminates the uncertainty of which slope is select, for example, in collision and destructive testing where a wrong guess
could be costly.
Modes -
Auto, Normal, Single Sweep.
Sweep Rate - 0 .1 ~s/div to 0.5 s/div in 21 calibrated steps (12-5 sequence). 10 ns/div is the fastest calibrated sweep rate
obtained with the Xl0 magnifier.
Single Sweep - Triggering requirements are the same as normal sweep. When triggered, sweep generator produces only
one sweep.
Sweep Accuracy - Measured over the center 8 div. Same as
undelayed sweep. See chart on previous page.
External Trigger Input - Maximum input voltage is 350 Vpeak. Input A and C is 1 Mil paralleled by = 24 pF.
TRIGGERING
External Horizontal Input - Deflection factor is 50 mV/div
± 3%. Oc coupied bandwidth is de to 2 MHz.
Frequency
Coupling
Minimum Signal
Required
Range
Dc 5400 ampl
5400 ampl
5100
Dc to 10 MHz
10 MHz to 60 MHz
Dc to 2 MHz
Internal
0.4 div
1.0 div
0.4 div
EXTERNAL HORIZONTAL INPUT
Dellection Factor -
50 mV/div within 3%.
Range
Internal
External
+ or -
Oc to 1 MHz
1 MHz to 15 MHz
0.4 div
0.6 div
50mV
200 mV
Oc' to 1 MHz
± 0 .5 div
± 50 mV
± (Bi-Slope)
CHARACTERISTICS
Jitter - < 0.05% of the time represented by one div of delaying sweep selected.
Slope
'30 Hz when ae coupled.
0 .2 to 10 times the TIME/DIV
Differential Time Mealurement Accuracy - Within 1% plus
0 .2% of full scale from 1 ~s to 0.5 s delay time. Within 2% plus
0 .2% of full scale of 1 s to 5 s delay time.
Minimum Signal
Required
Frequency
20 ns/div to 5 s/div Calibrated Time Base
DELAYING SWEEP
Delay Time Multiplier Range setting.
TRIGGERING
Digital Time Base
5B25N CHARACTERISTICS
WHEN USED WITH THE 5223 MAINFRAME
PRETRIGGER
For viewing events that occur prior to the trigger, a Pretrigger
control is continuously variable from 0% to 100% of full screen.
An intensified zone is generated which corresponds to the
amount of pretrigger selected. This intensified zone remains
with the saved waveform. Pretrigger is available from 5 s/div to
0.1 ms/div.
SAMPLING RATE
For single shot acquisition, the 5B25N has a maximum sample
rate of 1 MHz at 0 .1 ms/div (only when used with 5223).
REPETITIVE STORE
For repetitive signals, the 5B25N controls the equivalent time
sampiing feature of the 5223 to allow digitizing from 50 ~s/div
to 0.2 ~s/div .
EXTERNAL CLOCK INPUT
Clock-In pin lack allows the user to introduce an external sampiing clock. Maximum input frequency of 1 MHz, with TIL
threshold, and 5 V peak input voltage.
Digitizer·Ralated Function (S223 Mainframe Only)
Overall Speed Accuracy
Digitized Wave-
Sweep Rate - 0.2 ~s/div to 5 s/div in 24 calibrated steps (1-25 sequence). 20 ns/div is fastest sweep rate obtained with Xl0
magnifier. Uncalibrated, continuously variable between steps
and up to 12.5 s/div.
Of Digitized Signal (Center 8 Div). Excluded
Portions: First 200 ns or
0.2 Div of Each Waveform
form Relative
To Real-Time
Wavaform
Sweep Accuracy - Measured in 5400 Series Oscilloscope
over center 8 graticule divisions. Valid for 100 div of magnified
sweep after the first 30 ns.
Unmagnified
CAL
UNCAL
2 and 5 s/div
3%
4%
6%
1 s to 0 .1 ms/div
3%
3%
5%
50 ~s to 0.2 us/div
3%
3%
3%
Magnified
Time/Div
+IS'C to
+3S'C
O'C to
+SO'C
+IS'C to
+3S'C
O'C to
+SO'C
1 s/div to
0.2 ~s/div
3%
4%
4%
5%
5 s/div and
2 s/div
4%
5%
5%
6%
Bandwidth - Dc coupled, dc to at least 2 MHz, Ac coupied,
50 Hz or less to at least 2 MHz.
Digitized
Waveform
ORDERING INFORMATION
5B25N Digital Time ................................ $795
5B42 Delaying Time Base ................... $1,215
5A38 Dual-Trace Amplifier ........ _............ $640
5B40 Time Base ..................................... $660
5A48 Dual-Trace Amplifier ..................... $940
299
MHz SINGLE-BEAM, DUAL-BEAM
STORAGE OSCILLOSCOPES
TEK 2AND
51 00
Series Oscilloscopes
Low Cost
Dc to 2 MHz
Sampling to 1 GHz
Choice of 15 Plug-ins
Rear Panel Signal Outputs Optional
COMMON CHARACTERISTICS
FOR 5110, 5111A, 5113
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
VERTICAL SYSTEM
Channels - Left and center plug-in compartments compatible
with all 5100 Series Plug-ins.
Deflection Factor Bandwidth -
Determined by plug-in.
2 MHz, determined by plug-in.
Chopped Mode - (5110, 5111A) The mainframe vertical amplifier will chop between left and center plug-in compartments,
and/or between two or more amplifier channels. The total time
segment per channel is ",,5 ~s , consisting of ",,4 ~ s displayed,
",, 1 ~ s blanked . Chop or alternate mode is selected at the time
base unit.
Chopped Mode - (5113) The left and right mainframe vertical
amplifiers are dedicated to the left and center plug-in compartments. Each mainframe vertical amplifier will chop between two
or more channels in their associated plug-in compartments. No
channel switching is necessary between left and center plug-in
compartments. The total time segment per channel is ",,5 ~s ,
conSisting of 4 ~s displayed, "" 1 ~s blanked. Chop or alternate
mode is selected at the time base unit.
Alternate Mode - (5110, 5111A) Each amplifier plug-in is
swept twice before switching to the next. A single-trace amplifier is swept twice and each channel of a dual-trace amplifier is
swept once before switching to the second amplifier.
Alternate Mode - (5113) Single-trace amplifiers are swept full
time. Each channel of a multitrace amplifier is swept once before switching to the next channel. No channel switching is
necessary between left and center plug-in compartments.
HORIZONTAL SYSTEM
Channel - Right-hand plug-in compartment compatible with
all 5100 Series Plug-ins.
Fastest Calibrated Sweep Rate 5Bl0N or 5B12N .
X-Y Mode -
0.1 ~s/div (Xl0 mag) with
Phase shift within l ' from dc to 100 kHz.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
Ambient Temperature - Performance characteristics valid
from O' C + 50· C.
Line Voltage Ranges - 100, 110, 120, 200, 220, and 240 V
ac ± 10% (except that maximum input should not exceed
250 V ac). Internally selected with quick change jumpers.
Line Frequency Range -
48 to 440 Hz.
Maximum Power Consumption 110 W.
5110 , 5111A, 5113 :
External Intensity Input - + 5 V turns beam on from off condition. - 5 V turns beam off from on condition. Frequency
range dc to 1 MHz. Input Rand C is "" 10 k!1 paralleled by
",,40 pF. Maximum input ± 50 V (dc + peak ac.)
Calibrator - Voltage output 400 mV within 1%. Current output (loop) 4 mA within 1%. Frequency is 2 times line frequency .
Beam Finder - Positions beam on screen regardless of vertical and horizontal position control settings.
300
5111A
Single-Beam Storage Oscilloscope
Bistable, Split-Screen Display
Stored Writing Speed
20 divs/ms in Normal Mode
50 divs/ms in Enhanced Mode
or
200 divs/ms in Normal Mode
800 divs/ms in Enhanced Mode with
Option 03
The 5111A incorporates the time proven features
of the 5111 plus improvements that futher extend
the usefulness of this popular instrument.
In addition to the normal storage function, the
5111A incorporates an Enhanced Mode which extends the stored writing speed to 50 div/ms.
For those applications where even greater stored
writing speed is needed, we offer Option 03, Fast
Writing Speed CRT. Option 03 provides ten times
the standard stored writing speed at lower stored
brightness.
Other new features for the 5111 A include a detachable power cord and international power
cord and plug options.
The 5111 A is a single-beam, split-screen, bistable
oscilloscope with a large-screen, 6 '12 in diagonal
(1.27 crn/div) display.
The 5111 A extends measurernent capability into
areas requiring retention of single and multitrace
displays for long-term examination and/or photography. It is particularly useful for recording low
and rnedium speed displays like those found in
audio spectrum analysis, semi-conductor curve
tracing , sampling , vibration analysis, and the biophysical sciences.
When using two amplifiers and a dual time-base
plug-in in the dual-sweep mode, the sweeps are
slaved to the amplifiers.
CHARACTERISTICS
CRT AND DISPLAY FEATURES
CRT - Internal 8 x 10 div (1 .27 cm/div) parallax-free, non-illuminated graticule'"
Accelerating Potential - 3.5 kV.
Phosphor - Equivalent to PI .
Maximum Stored Writing Speed - At least 20 div/ms in the
Normal-Mode and 50 div/ms in the Enhanced Mode.
At least
With Option 03, Fast Writing Speed CRT 200 div/ ms (center 6 x 8 div) in the Normal-Mode and
800 divs/ms (center 6 x 8 div) in the Enhanced Mode'"
Storage View Time - At least 1 hr at normal intensity: up to
10 hr at reduced intensity, after which time it may be increased
to original level.
Erase Time - ",,250 ms.
"Illuminated graticu/e avai/able at extra cost.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Power cord (161 -0066-00).
5000
TEK
SERIES
OPTION 07: 5100 SERIES
REAR PANEL SIGNAL OUTPUTS
Lefland Cente, Compartment. - Two BNC connectors provide access to the CRT related signals from the left and center
plug.in amplifiers. Sensitivity : 0.5 V/CRT division. Output im·
pedance: 1 kfl.
Right Compartment (Sweep) - One BNC connector provides
access to the CRT· related sweep waveform . Sensitivity :
0.5 V/CRT division; positive-going sawtooth. ;;. 5 V. Output 1m·
pedance: 1 kll.
Right Compartment (Gate) - One BNC connector provides
access to TIL compatible gate. Positive-going. coincident with
displayed sweep.
X· Y Mode - CRT ·related X-Y signals are available at the appropriate rear panel connectors when amplifier plug·ins are
used in either the left or center compartment and the right com·
partment to display x· Y informat ion . Sensitivity (X. Y):
0.5 V/CRT division.
ORDERING INFORMATION
(PLUG· INS NOT INCLUDED)
Cabinet Models
5110 Oscilloscope ............................... $1,425
Single Beam
Dual-beam Bistable Storage
5111A Oscilloscop .............................. $2,300
5110
5113
Rackmount Models
Lowest Cost Single-Beam Nonstorage
Oscilloscope with Plug-in Configurability
Dual-beam Bistable Storage Oscilloscope
5113 Oscilloscope ............................... $3,350
R5110 Oscilloscope ............................. $1,475
B Channels at 1 mV /div, 4 Channels at
50 /lV/div, 2 Channels at 10 /lV/div,
with Appropriate Amplifiers
The 5110 is a single-beam nonstorage oscilloscope featuring a large diagonal 6.5 in
(1 .27 cm/div) CRT.
Tailor your measurement needs with the appropriate plug-in units to obtain high-gain differential
(10/lV/div) , four channel differential at 50 /lV/diY,
eight-channel displays at 1 mV/div. Or choose
from our extra low cost basic amplifier and timebase plug-ins to suit the special needs of education and industry.
When using two amplifiers and a dual time-base
plug-in in the dual-sweep mode, the sweeps are
slaved to the amplifiers.
CRT AND DISPLAY FEATURES
CRT - Internal 8 x 10 div (1 .27 cm/div) parallax-free. nonilluminated graticule.'
Accelerating Potential Phosphor -
3.5 kV.
P31 standard. P7 or Pll optional.
Two Independent Vertical Systems
Can Display Two Single-Shot Signals
Without Timesharing, or up to Eight
Signals in the Chop Mode
Split-screen Storage. Stored Writing Speed
.. 20 div/ms.
The 5113 is a dual-beam bistable storage oscilloscope featuring easy-to-use split-screen storage.
Stored writing speed is at least 20 div/ms.view
time is at least one hour at normal intensity and
can be increased to ten hours at reduced
intensity.
The 5113 can display two simultaneous events,
either single-shot or repetitive, against a common
time base within the bandwidth and writing rate
limits of the system. Both beams are driven by
one set of horizontal deflection plates.
The 5113 is particularly useful in biomedical research where low-repetition -rate stimulus/response potentials need to be observed and
recorded.
'Illuminated graticule available at extra cost.
CRT AND DISPLAY FEATURES
CRT - Internal 8 x 10 div (1 .27 cm/div) parallax-free. nooilluminated graticule.Accelerating Potential Phosphor -
R5111A Oscilloscope .......................... $2,350
R5113 Oscilloscope ............................. $3,400
Option 02 - Protective Panel Cover (Cabinet Models Only) The cover protects the front panel and knobs during
transportation and storage """""."""".".,," """",, ..•,," + $25
Option 03 -
Fast Write CRT (5111NR5111A Only) . +$130
Option 03 -
Fast Write CRT (5113/R5113 Only) " .... +$150
Option 07 - Add Rear Panel Signals Out
(All Models) " " """"""" .. """."""""""".""""",, ..,,,,.,,"" +$75
Option 76 -
P7 Phosphor (5110. R5110 Only) .... " .." . +$35
Option 78 -
Pll Phosphor (SIlO. R5110 Only) """ ... +$35
CONVERSION KITS
Cabinet·to-Rackmount Conversion Kit
Order 040·0583·03 "." .........." .. " ..........." .............. " ..."",,. $95
Rackmount·to·Cabinet Conversion Kit
Order 040·0584·04 ................ "." ........... ""." ............ """. $150
Protective Panel Cover Kit
Order 040·0620·00 ........ " .. " ...... """"."."""""",,.,,"",,.,," $40
Rear Panel Signal Outputs
Conver.ion Kit (Option 07)
Order 040·0915·01 .............." ............"" ..." .. " " ."" ....." ... $180
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORDS AND PLUG OPTIONS
Option AI -
Universal Euro 220 V/16A. 50 Hz ".""."." . NC
Option A2 -
UK 240 V/13A . 50 Hz "" ............ "."."" •...... NC
Option A3 -
Australian 240 V/ l0A. 50 Hz ."""".""",,.,,. NC
Option A4 -
North American 240 V/15A. 60 Hz "" .. "",,. NC
Option AS -
Swiss 220 V/l0A. 50 Hz ."" ... "" .. "" ......,," NC
For Recommended Camera. Functional Index .
Refer to camera section in
3.5 kV.
Similar to PI .
Maximum Stored Writing Speed -
At least 20 div/ms.
Storage View Time - At least one hour at normal intensity ;
up to ten hours at reduced intenSity. after which time it may be
increased to original level.
CRT Readout as shown above, is generated via the new
5010 Waveform Digitzer, described on page 302.
Erase Time -
= 250 ms.
'Illuminated graticule available at extra cost.
301
WAVEFORM
TEK DIGITIZER
5010
Compatible with all 5000 Series Mainframes
.......
Digital Storage
CRT Readout for Complete Operational Status at a Glance
Powerful Triggering Capability
1% Accuracy
Dual Channel
1 MHz Sample Frequency
Save Reference Waveforms
x-v Recorder Output
_I
Signal Conditioning Via Left Vertical Plug-In
DOTI
The 5010 enhances all Tektronix 5000 Series
mainframes by providing storage for transient
events with frequency components up to
100kHz for a single channel acquisition and up
to 50 kHz for dual channel acquisition, all in a
compact two-wide plug-in.
MVID
~y
ounvr
r
l'lOT
The Digital Storage characteristics of the high
performance 5010 duplicate most of what CRT
storage can do and in addition provides the following important features :
Digital Storage
Provides clear, crisp and bright displays with indefinite viewing time.
Cursors
To permit convenient single pOint or pOint-topoint measurements of time and amplitude for
fast , accurate and reliable answers.
CRT Readout
Displays all pertinent instrument settings ,
cursors, and waveform levels. Lets you read out
complete operational status at a glance.
Pretrigger
Allows viewing information prior to the trigger
event so you can see all your data. Center and
posttrigger selection is also provided.
Free Run
Optimizes the data presentation for low speed
phenomena, much like a stripchart recorder.
1% Accuracy
Improves measurement quality in both vertical
and horizontal modes.
Dual Samplers
Ensures time coincidence between the two input
channels.
Bi-Slope Triggering
Ensures triggering when you are unsure of the
slope of a transient event.
1 MHz Sample Frequency
Stores Single-shot events to approximately
100 kHz in bandwidth with 8-bit vertical
resolution.
Save Reference
Permits comparisons of signals stored at different times.
X-V Displays
Provides less than 1 phase shift up to 100 kHz
of parametric related signals.
0
302
x-v Recorder Output
Provides inexpensive, archivable hard copies
complete with readout , graticule and displayed
waveforms.
Left Vertical Plug-in
May be used to precondition up to two signals
for Channel 2 of the 5010 (when used in 5100
Series mainframes only).
For example, plug-ins such as the 5A21N, 5A22N
and 5A26 can provide differential performance
with sensitivities ranging to 10 JJ.V/div (5A22N).
The 5010 can acquire a total of three signal
channels when using the Channel 2 left plug-in
acquisition feature.
TEK
5000
SERIES
CHARACTERISTICS
VERTICAL
CH I , CH 2, ADD, Dual, X-CH I , and
Vertical Mode. Y-CH2.
Accuracy -
Channel 2 Mode. -
V/div, Left plug in.
Deflection Factor - 1 mV/div to 20 V/div in 14 calibrated
steps (1 -2-5 sequence).
Accuracy
Input to Readout Numbers: 5 mV/div to 1 V/div ± 1%; 1 mV/div
to 2 mV/div ± 2%; 2 V/div to 20 V/div ± 2%; Input to CRT
graticule ± 2%.
From Left Vertical Plug-in: Add ± 1% to above specifications.
Add Mode: Add ± 1% to above specifications.
Input Rand C Maximum Input 1 kHz or less.
1 Mil ± 0.5% at = 47 pF.
250 V (dc
+
peak ac); 250 V p-p ac at
Bendwidth
Single Channel : Suitable from dc to 100 kHz.
Dual Channel: Suitable from dc to 50 kHz.
Ac Coupling: 3 dB point-10Hz or less (1 Hz with lOx probe).
Common Mode Rejection -
At least 50: I , dc to 100 kHz.
Re.olution
Vertical : X-Y or Y-T; 0.04 div (S-bit digitzer).
Horizontal: Y-T; 0.01 div (1024 memory locations shared
among all traces displayed).
Pha.e Shift to 100 kHz.
Sweep Rat•• sequence.
TIME BASE
0.1 ms to 50 s/div in 18 claibrated steps 1-2-5
Within ± 1% of readout numbers.
External Input - Allows external pulse generator to determine
acquisition rate. Accepts TIL levels up to 1 MHz rate.
Possible Under-Sampling Indicator - Indicator lights when
fewer than eight sample pulses occur during interval between
successive threshold crossing of triggering signals.
Sourc •• external.
Coupling -
TRIGGERING
CH I , CH 2, left plug-in (via mainframe), line,
Dc, ac.
San.ltlvlty
External : 100 mY; de to 50 kHz or pulsewidth > 5 1'5; 250 mV
50 kHz to 250 kHz or pulsewidth > 1 1'5.
CH I , CH 2, Left Plug-in: 0.4 diY, de to 50 kHz or pulsewidth
> 51'5; 1.0 diY, 50 kHz to 250 kHz or pulsewidth > 1 1'5.
BI-Slope Trigger - Amplitude, frequency , and pulsewidth
specifications apply to absolute value of signal (rectified).
External Trigger Input
Input R and C: 1 Mil ± 2% at = 47 pF. Maximum input 250 V
(de + peak ac). 250 V p-p ac at 1 kHz or less.
5010 Installed in 5110 mainframe
Order 5010 Waveform Digitizer •.•.••.••. $2,850
.. 1.0· phase shift between CH 1 and CH 2, de
Ol.play Output (to X-Y Recorder)
Amplitude: 0.2 V/div ± 2%.
Speed : Compatible with X-Y reoorders with 20 in/s slew rate,
or faster.
Pen Lift: Isolated switch contacts , SPST (floating); normally
open or normally closed selected by internal jumper.
2V
6=
2.5 V
2CptnS
6=
36tn
.1'\
/ '\ / 1\ / 1\ / \ I \
\\. !/ \\ J \\l// \ J/ \
I
/ \ / 1\ / \ I \
II \ / \ j \ / \ / \
/
\
\.
2V
\
6=
\/
'V
2. 4 V
Example of plotter waveforms with graticule scaling
information
303
DUAL CHANNEL,
FOUR-CHANNEL AMPLIFIER
TEK SINGLE-CHANNEL,
5A15N
5000
SERIES
5A14N
5A24N
5A18N
t!.J
,.0:,
..
"
..., ." -..,. .. _"
lMQC7p#
~l!
0
-
..!'!.l
~·\1
"".N
1A11N AMPLIFIER
Dual Trace Dc to 2 MHz
Single Trace Dc to 2 MHz
SA 1SN
SA24N
Amplifier
SA 14N
Amplifier
50 mV/div to 1 V/div Deflection Factors
1 mV/div to 5 V/div
Four Trace Dc to 1 MHz
Single Trace Dc to 2 MHz
Amplifier
1 mV/div to 5 V/div
Easy to Customize
The 5A 15N Single Trace Amplifier features easy
to use front-panel controls and can be used in
many 5000 Series mainframe.
Two SA 15Ns (one must be located in the right-hand compartment) provide versatile X-Y operation when used in a 5100
Series Mainframe.
CHARACTERISTICS
Bandwidth - Oc coupled : dc to at least 1 MHz at all deflection
factors . Ac coupled : 2 Hz or less to at least 2 MHz at all deflection factors .
Deflection Factor - 1 mV/div to 5 V/div in 12 calibrated steps
(1-2-5 sequence). Accuracy is within 2%. Uncalibrated , continuously variable between calibrated steps and to 12.5 V/div.
Input Rand C -
The 5A24N is a low cost utility plug-in providing
direct access to either the vertical or horizontal
deflection system of the 5000 Series mainframes.
It contains mode switching, CRT beam positioning, trigger pickoff for basic measurements, and
a built-in 3 3/8 x 2 3/4 inch soldering pad matrix for
use by the customers who wish to build their own
input circuits for special applications. Customerbuilt circuits are powered through the circuit
board which provides access to all mainframe
power supplies.
CHARACTERISTICS
1 M!l within 1% at ",, 47 pF.
+
Amplifier
Bandwidth - Dc coupled : dc to at least 2 MHz at 50 mV/div,
decreasing to dc to 200 kHz at mid-attenuator range . Ac coupled: 25 Hz to at least 2 MHz at 50 mV/div, decreasing to
25 Hz to 200 kHz at mid-attenuator range. Uncompensated
input.
1 mV /div to 5 V /div
Deflection Factor - 50 mV/div, accurate within 3%. Continuously variable, uncalibrated from 50 mV/div to at least 1 V/div.
Maximum Input - Dc coupled: 350 V (dc
coupled: 350 V dc.
SA 18N
peak ac). Ac
Input Rand C -
The 5A 18N Dual Trace Amplifier features easy to
use front-panel controls and can be used in any
5000 Series mainframe.
Maximum Input -
50 V (dc
+ peak ac).
Input Rand C -
1 M!l within 1% at ",, 47 pF.
Maximum Input - Dc coupled: 350 V (dc
coupled: 350 V dc.
+
peak ac). Ac
Chopping Rate - 25 kHz to 100 kHz depending upon plug-in
combinations and number of traces displayed.
ORDERING INFORMATION
5A18N Dual Trace Amplifier ................... $690
5A24N Single Trace Amplifier ................ $180
Deflection Factor - 1 mV/div to 5 V/div in 12 calibrated steps
(1 -2-5 sequence). Accuracy is within 2%. Uncalibrated, continuously variable between calibrated steps and to 12.5 V/div.
1 M!l within 1% at ",, 47 pF.
peak ac). Ac
Chopping Rete - 25 kHz to 100 kHz to 100 kHz depending
upon plug-in combinations and number of traces displayed.
304
Dellection Factor - 1 mV/div to 5 V/div to 12 calibrated steps
(1-2-5 sequence). Accuracy is within 2%. Uncalibrated, continuously variable between calibrated steps and 12.5 V/div.
5A15N Single Trace Amplifier ................ $330
CHARACTERISTICS
+
CHARACTERISTICS
Bandwidth - Dc coupled : dc to at least 1 MHz at all deflection
factors . Ac coupled: 2 Hz or less to at least 1 MHz at all deflection factors .
5A14N Four Trace Amplifier ............... $1,390
Bandwidth - Dc coupled: dc to at least 2 MHz at all deflection
factors. Ac coupled : 2 Hz or less to at least 2 MHz at all deflection factors .
Maximum Input - Dc coupled : 350 V (dc
coupled: 350 V dc.
5A 14N operating modes are: each channel separately , and alternated or chopped between any
combination of channels. Internal trigger is available from Channel 1 only.
",, 100 k!l at ",,30 pF.
5A 18N operating modes include Channel 1 or 2
only, Channels 1 and 2 added, Channel 2 inverted
and Channel 1 alternated or chopped with Channel 2. Internal trigger source is selectable from
Channel 1 and Channel 2.
Input Rand C -
The 5A14N Four Trace Amplifier features Simplified front-panel controls and can be used in any
5000 Series mainframe.
For recommended probes -
refer to page 292.
DIFFERENTIAL
AMPLIFIERS/COMPARATORS
SERIES
TEK 5000
5A13N
5A13N
5A19N
5A21N
Dc to 2 MHz Bandwidth
1 mV Idiv to 5 VIdiv
10,000:1 CMRR
10,000 Div Effective Screen Height
The 5A 13N is a differential comparator plug-in
amplifier for the 5000 Series. It incorporates a
number of performance features that make it
particularly versatile.
Conventional Mode
The 5A 13N has constant bandwidth over the
1 mV/div to 5 V/div deflection factor range. The
bandwidth is selectable at 2 MHz or 10 kHz for
best displayed noise conditions during low-frequency applications. The plus or minus inputs
allow normal or inverted displays.
Differential Mode
The 5A13N maintains its conventional features
and provides a balanced input for applications
requiring rejection of a common-mode signal. The
CMRR is 10,000:1 from dc to 20 kHz, decreasing
to 100:1 at 2 MHz. The unit rejects up to 15 V of
common-mode signal at a deflection factor setting of 1 mV/div, increasing to 350 V rejection
capability above 100 mV/div.
Comparator Mode
The 5A 13N provides an accurate positive or
negative internal offsetting voltage. A signal of up
to ± 10 V may be applied to an input (plus or
minus) at a deflection factor setting of 1 mV/div
and viewed in 10,000 div by offsetting the signal
with the opposing comparison voltage. A ± 1 V
comparison voltage is also available for applications requiring maximum resolution. The offset
voltage may be externally monitored through a
front-panel output.
CHARACTERISTICS
Bandwidth - Dc to 2 MHz. Bandwidth limit mode, dc to
10 kHz. Ac coupled. 2 Hz or less at the lower - 3 dB point.
Deflection Factor - 1 mV/div to 5 V/div in a 1-2-5 sequence.
Accuracy is within 3%. Uncalibrated, continuously variable between steps and to at least 12.5 V/div.
Input Rand C -
1 Mf! at ",, 51 pF.
Signal Range
Deflection Factor Settings
Common-Mode Signal Range
Max Dc Coupled Input (Dc + Peak
Ac at 1 kHz or Less)
Max Ac Coupled Input (Dc Voltage)
1 mV to
50 mV/div
±10 V
0.1 V to
5 V/div
± 350 V
±350 V
+ 350 V
Maximum Input Gate Current - 0.1 nA or less (equivalent to
100 ~V or less, depending on external loading) at 25·C.
Overdrive Recovery - 1 ~s to recover to within 3.0 mV and
0.1 ms to recover to within 1.5 mV after removal of an overdrive signal between + 10 V and - 10 V, regardless of overdrive signal duration.
Internal Comparison Voltage - Ranges, 0 V to ± 10 V and
o V to ± 1 V. Accuracy, within 0.2% of dial setting plus 5 mV
from ± 1 V to ± 10 V; within 0.2% of dial setting plus 1 mV
from ± 25 mV to ± 1 V on the 0 V to ± 1 V range. From 0 V to
± 25 mV, use the on-screen display for greater resolution. Vc
output R, ",, 15 kit
Common-Mode Rejection Ratio - At least 10,000: 1, dc to
10 kHz at 1 mV/div to 50 mV/div dc coupled, with up to 20 V
pop sinewave, decreasing to 100:1 at 1 MHz. At least 400 :1, dc
to 10 kHz at 0.1 V/div to 5 V/div dc coupled, with up to
100 V pop sinewave, decreasing to 40: 1 at 1 MHz. For frequencies above 5 kHz ac coupled, CMRR is the same as stated for
dc coupled . Below 5 kHz ac coupled, CMRR decreases to
400 :1 at 10 Hz. CMRR with two P6060 Probes is at least
400: 1 at any deflection factor.
-
~. ,
Differential Comparator
Differential
..
IA11N DI"11t1NTlAL AM"-
Differential
5A21N
5A19N
Dc to 1 MHz Bandwidth
Dc to 2 MHz Bandwidth
10 kHz Bandwidth Limiter
1 mV/div to 20 V/div
50 /lV/div to 5 V/div
Dc Offset
100,000:1 CMRR
The 5A19N is a low-cost differential amplifier featuring variable dc offset and simplicity of controls.
It is ideal for monitor and systems applications. It
operates in the left or middle plug-in compartment of the 5000 Series mainframe for Y-T displays , or in the right compartment for X-V
displays.
CHARACTERISTICS
Voltage and Current Probe Inputs
The 5A21N is a 50 /lV/diy, dc coupled differential
amplifier for the 5000 Series and has a current
probe input.
High CMRR Probes for Differential Amplifiers
We recommend the P60SS high CMRR adjustable
10X probes for use with Tektronix differential
amplifiers.
When used in pairs, these probes allow adjustment for maximum common-mode rejection ratio
(CMRR).
See page 441 for P60SS characteristics.
CHARACTERISTICS
Bandwidth - Dc coupled: dc to at least 1 MHz. Ac coupled:
2 Hz less at least 1 MHz. Bandwidth may be limited to 10kHz.
Deflection Factor - 50 p.V/div to 5 V/div in 16 calibrated
steps (1-2-5 sequenoe). Accuracy is within 2%. Uncalibrated,
continuously variable between calibrated steps and to 12.5
V/div.
Input Rand C - Voltage mode, 1 Mf! within 0.15% at
",,47 pF.
Maximum Input Voltage
I
50 ~V/div to
50 mV/div
10 mV/div
to 5 V/div
Dc Coupled
Ac Coupled
10 V (de + 1350 V dc (coupling cap prepeak ac)
charged), 10 V peak ac
350 V (dc + peak ac)
Input Gate Current - 100 pA or less (equivalent to 100 ~V or
less, depending on external loading, at 25 · C.
Displayed Noise - 30 ~V or less, tangentially measured.
Common-Mode Rejection Ratio - Ac coupled, 50 ~V/div to
0.5 mY/diy, at least 20,000: 1 at 5 kHz and above decreasing to
400:1 at 10 Hz. Dc coupled, at least 100,000:1 dc to 30 kHz at
50 ~V/div and 100 ~V/div with up to 20 V pop sinewave, de-
50e~~')~ivbYFr~OI o~B~~~~e tg"5 ~~~~~iv~~~~n~:satuFea;~
400:1 with up to 100 V pop sinewave. CMRR with two P6060
Probes is at least 400: 1 at any deflection factor.
PROBE INPUT (with P6021 CURRENT PROBE)
Bandwidth - 15 Hz or less, to at least 1 MHz. Bandwidth may
be limited to 10kHz.
Deflection Factor - 0.5 mNdiv to 0.5 Ndiv in 10 calibrated
steps (1-2-5 sequence). Accurate within 3%. Uncalibrated, continuously variable between steps and to 1.25 Ndiv.
Maximum Input Current - 4 A pop (at probe loop) with 125turn P6021 Current Probe.
Displayed Noise - 300 p.A or less, tangentially measured.
Performance characteristics are valid for the 5A21 N from O'C
to +50·C.
For recommended probes -
r.f.r to page 292,
Bandwidth - Dc coupled: dc to at least 2 MHz at all deflection
lactors. Ac coupled : 2 Hz or less to at least 2 MHz at all deflection factors.
Deflection Factor - 1 mV/div to 20 V/div in a 1-2-5 sequenoe.
Accuracy is within 2%. Uncalibrated, continuously variable between calibrated steps and to 50 V/div.
Input Rand C -
1 Mf! within 0.3% at ",,47 pF.
Signal and Offs.t Range
Deflection Factor Settings
Common-Mode Signal Range
Maximum Dc Coupled Input
{Dc + Peak Ac at 1 kHz or Less
Maximum Ac Coupled
Input (Ac Voltage)
Dc OffSet Range
1 mV /div to 1500 mV/div
200 mV/div to 20 V/div
I
± 16 V
± 350 V
+ 350 V
+ 350 V
+ 15Vto
-15 V
I
+350 V to
-350 V
Common-Mode R.jectlon Ratio - Dc coupled, 1 mV/div to
200 mY/diy, at least 1000:1 from dc to 10 kHz; decreasing to
100:1 at 500 mV/div to 20 V/div.
ORDERING INFORMATION
5A 13N Differential Comparator
Amplifier .............................................. $1,245
5A19N Differential Amplifier •••••••..•••••.•..• $410
5A21N Differential Amplifier ••.•••••.•••••••••• $510
Option 01 -
(Includes P6021 , 5 ft current probe) """ +$280
The 5A21 Nand 5A22N Differential Amplifiers are
available with CRT readout at additional cost
(CRT readout functional in 5400 Series mainframes only). Contact your local Tektronix Sales
Engineer for details.
305
DIFFERENTIAL AMPLIFIER
DIFFERENTIAL AMPLIFIER
TEK DUAL
5A22N
5000
SERIES
The 5A26 has many applications in areas that require dual differential performance, especially in
biomedical and electromechanical fields , education, and component manufacturing.
5A26
High CMRR Probes for Differential Amplifiers
We recommend the P6055 high CMRR adjustable
10X probes for use with Tektronix differential
amplifiers.
When used in pairs, these probes allow adjustment for maximum common-mode rejection ratio
(CMRR).
See page 441 for P6055 characteristics.
CHARACTERISTICS
Number of Differential Channell -
Two.
Bandwidth - Dc coupled , dc to at least 1 MHz. Ac ooupled,
2 Hz or less to at least 1 MHz. Bandwidth may be limited to
10 kHz.
Deflection Factor - 50 "V/div to 5 V/div in 16 calibrated
steps (1-2-5 sequence). Accuracy is within 2%. Uncalibrated,
continuously variable between calibrated steps and to
12.5 V/div.
Dual Differential
Differential
5A22N
CRT Readout - CRT readout of deflection factors. Functional
in CRT readout-equipped 5400 Series oscilloscopes, nonfunctional in 5100 Series oscilloscopes.
Signal and Offset Range
Dc to 1 MHz Bandwidth
Deflection Factor
Settings
10 /lV/div to 5 V/div
Common-Mode
Signal Range
100,000:1 CMRR
Selectable Upper and Lower - 3 dB Points
Max Dc Coupled
Input (Dc + Peak
Ac at 1 kHz or Less)
0.1 V to
5 V/div
+ 10 V
-350 V
± 12V
Max Ac Coupled
Input (Dc Voltage)
Dc Offset
10 "V to
50 mV/div
± 350 V
Input Rand C -
1 MO within 0.15% paralleled by = 47 pF.
MAXIMUM INPUT VOLTAGE
Dc Coupled
Ac Coupled
50 "V/div to
50 mV/div
10 V
(dc + peak ac)
10Vac, 350V
(coupling cap precharged)
100 mV/div
to 5 V/div
350 V
(de + peak ac)
350 V
(dc + peak ac)
± 350 V
Dc rejection, at least 4 x 10':1
Dc Offset Range
+ 0.5 V to - 0.5 V + 50Vto - 50V
Input Gate Current - 100 pA or less (equivalent to 100 "V or
less, depending on external loading) at 25 ' C.
Displayed Noise -
The 5A22N is the most versatile of the 5000
Series Differential Amplifiers. It features front
panel selectable filtering which enables reduction
of undesirable displayed noise; both upper and
lower 3 dB points are selectable. Dc offset at full
bandwidth is available for viewing signals riding
on a dc component such as low-level ripple and
noise on a power supply.
These features , together with its high commonmode rejection, make the 5A22N well suited for
measurements in difficult low-amplitude, low-frequency areas.
CHARACTERISTICS
Bandwidth - HF - 3 dB point: selectable in 9 steps (1 -3 sequence) from 100 Hz to 1 MHz. 100 Hz to 0.3 MHz, accurate to
within 20% of selected frequency ; at 1 MHz, bandwidth is
down 3 dB or less. LF - 3 dB point: selectable in 6 steps (1-10
sequence) from 0.1 Hz to 10kHz accurate to within 20% of
selected frequency. Ac coupled , 2 Hz or less.
Daflectlon Factor - 10 "V/div to 5 V/div in a 1-2-5 sequence.
Accuracy is within 3%. Uncalibrated, continuously variable between steps and to at least 12.5 V/div.
Common·Mode Rejection Retio - Ac coupled, 10 "V/div to
0.5 mV/div, at least 20,000: 1 at 5 kHz and above, decreasing
to 400: 1 at 10Hz. Dc coupled, at least 100,000: 1, dc to 30 kHz
from 10 "V/div to 100 "V/div with up to 20 V p-p sinewave,
decreasing by < 20 dB/decade on sensitivity ranges up to
50 mV/div. From 100 mV/div to 5 V/div, CMRR is at least
400:1 with up to 100 V p-p sinewave. CMRR with two P6060
Probes is at least 400: 1 at any deflection factor.
Input Rand C -
1 M{} within 0.15% at = 47 pF.
Overdrive Recovery - 10 "s or less to recover within 99.5%
of reference level after removal of a test signal applied for 1 s.
Signal amplitude not to exceed common-mode signal range.
Maximum Input Gate Current -
200 pA or less.
Displayed Noise - 20 I'V at maximum bandwidth, source resistance 25 {} or less, measured tangentially.
Drift with Temperature -
100 "V/' C or less.
5A26
Two Differential Amplifiers in One Plug-In
50 /lV/div Sensitivity at 1 MHz
Dc Coupled
50 "V/div to
50 mV/div
At least 100,000: 1 from dc to 30 kHz
with up to 20 V p-p sinew ave
100 mV/div to
5 V/div
At least 300: 1 from de to 30 kHz
with up to 100 V p-p sinewave
Ac Coupled
50 "V/div to
50 mV/div
At least 20,000:1 at 5 kHz to 30 kHz, decreasing to not less than 2000:1 at 60 Hz
With 2 P6062A
Probes
400: 1 at lOx probe attenuation
ORDERING INFORMATION
100,000: 1 CMRR
5A22N Differential Amplifier ......•.•..•.... $1,025
CRT Readout
5A26 Dual Differential Amplifier .......... $1,105
The 5A26 Dual Differential Amplifier combines
two independent differential amplifiers in one
plug-in. It adds no-compromise differential measurement capability to the line of low-cost, highperformance 5000 Series Laboratory Oscilloscopes. It may be used in any 5000 Series
mainframe.
The 5A26 provides 50 /lV/div sensitivity at 1 MHz,
high common-mode rejection ratio, CRT readout
in any standard 5400 Series mainframe, triggersource selection and bandwidth limit on each
channel. With two 5A26s, it is possible to observe
up to four differential channels at one time in the
chop or alternate mode.
For recommended probes-reler to page 292.
306
30 "V or less, tangentially measured.
COMMON-MODE REJECTION RATIO
TIME
BASES
SERIES
TEK 5000
5B12N
5B10N
CHARACTERISTICS
A Sweep Rates - 1 ~s/div to 5 s/div in 21 calibrated steps (12-5 sequence). Xl0 magnifier extends displayed sweep timeIdiv to lOOns. Uncalibrated , continuously variable between
steps and to 12.5 s/div.
A Sweep Accuracy - Unmagnified, within 3% from 1 ~s/div
to 1 s/div and within 4% at 2 s/div and 5 s/div . Magnified,
displays accurate to within 1% in addition to specified timebase sweep accuracy.
B Sweep Rates steps.
0.2
~s/div
to 0.5 s/div in 20 calibrated
B Sweep Accuracy - Within 3% from 1 ~s/div to 0.1 s/div.
Within 4% at 0.2 ~s/div, and 0.5 s/div, 0.2 s/div, and 0.5 s/div.
TRIGGERING
The following applies to the A and B trigger except as noted
Coupling
To 1 MHz
Internal
0.4 div
At2 MHz
0.6 div
External·
200 mV
200 mV
Dc
Requirements increase below 50 Hz
Ac
•A Trigger only.
Dual Sweep Time Base
Single Sweep Time Base
B sweep operates in triggered or free-run mode after delay
time.
5B10N
5B12N
100 ns/div to 5 s/div Calibrated Time Base
100 ns/div to 5 s/div Calibrated Time Base
Single Sweep
Dual and Delayed Sweep
X10 Magnifier
X10 Magnifier
Auto Trig above.
Same as above on signal rates of 15 Hz and
The following characteristics apply to the A trigger only.
Provides Alternate and Chopped Displays
50 mV/div and 500 mV/div External Input
The 5810N is a time base/amplifier plug-in unit for
generating a sweep in the 5000 Series oscilloscopes. An external input allows use of the
5810N as a voltage amplifier with calibrated
deflection factors of 50 mV/div and 500 mV/div.
Multiple triggering modes may be pushbutton
selected with the 5810N. Source positions include left or right plug-in , composite (from the
mainframe vertical amplifier), line and external.
CHARACTERISTICS
Sweep Rates - 1 ~s/div to 5 s/div in 21 calibrated steps (1-25 sequence). Xl0 magnifier extends displayed sweep time/div
to 100 ns. Uncalibrated , continuously variable between steps
and to 12.5 s/div.
Sweep Accuracy - Unmagnified, within 3% from 1 ~s/div to
1 s/div and within 4% of 2 s/div and 5 s/div. Magnified displays
accurate within 1% in addition to specifMKJ time base sweep
accuracy.
Coupling
TRIGGERING
To 1 MHz
At 2 MHz
Internal
0.4 div
0.6 div
External
200 mV
200 mV
Dc
Ac
Requirements increase below 50 Hz
Auto Trig - Same as above except Signal rate reqUIrements
are 15 Hz and above.
Single Sweep - Same as for ac and dc coupled.
External Trigger Input - Maximum input is 350 V (dc + peak
ac). Input Rand C is 1 M!l within 2% paralleled by = 70 pF.
Trigger level voltage range is + 5 V to -5 V.
EXTERNAL HORIZONTAL MODE
Deflection Factor - 50 mV/div and 500 mV/div, accurate
within 3%. Xl0 variable extends range to at least 5 V/div .
Bandwidth - Dc coupled: dc to at least 1 MHz. Ac coupled :
50 Hz or less to at least 1 MHz.
Input Rand C - 1 M!l within 2%, = 70 pF.
Maximum Input Voltage - 350 V (dc + peak ac).
The 5812N is a time base for generating single,
dual, or delayed sweeps in 5000 Series oscilloscopes. The 5812N is normally used in the right
plug-in compartment but is compatible with the
vertical deflection compartments as well.
The display modes are A sweep, 8 sweep, A intensified -8 delayed, and dual sweep. Each
mode is selectable by pushbutton switches. Triggering sources for A and 8 sweep include left
and right plug-in, line, and display composite. In
the display composite mode the sweep is triggered from the composite signal being displayed.
Auto and external trigger and single sweep are
provided for the A sweep. The 8 sweep is
triggerable after the delay time.
When operated in the dual-sweep mode in a dualbeam oscilloscope with two amplifier plug-ins,
first the A sweep and then the 8 sweep displays
the signals from both amplifiers; four traces will
be displayed. 80th sweeps are displayed simultaneously in chop mode.
Single Sweep -
Same as for ac and de coupled.
Extemal Trigger Input - Maximum input voltage is 350 V (dc
+ peak ac). Input R and C is 1 M!l within 2% paralleled by
= 70 pF. Trigger level voltage range is +5 V to -5 V.
DELAYING SWEEP
Delay Time Accuracy - 1 ~s/div to 0.5 s/div, within 1%.
1 s/div to 5 s/div , within 2%.
Delay Time Multiplier Range selting.
0.2 to 10.2 times the time/div
Delay Time Multiplier Incremental Linearity -
Within 0.2%.
Differential Time Measurement Accuracy - Within 1% plus
2 minor dial div for 1 ~s to 0.5 s delay times. Within 2% plus 2
minor dial div for 1 s to 5 s delay times.
Jitter - < 0.05% of the time represented by one div of the
delaying sweep selected.
EXTERNAL HORIZONTAL MODE
Deflection Factor - 50 mV/div and 500 mV/div accurate to
within 3%. Xl0 variable extends range to at least 5 V/div.
Bandwidth - Dc coupled: dc to at least 1 MHz. Ac coupled :
50 Hz or less to at least 1 MHz.
Input Rand C -
1 M!l within 2%, = 70 pF.
Maximum Input Voltage -
350 V (dc + peak ac).
ORDERING INFORMATION
5B10N Time Base/Amplifier ••...•••••••••••••. $500
5B12N Dual Time Base •.••.•••••..••.•••••.•. $1,060
When operated in the dual-sweep mode in a single-beam oscilloscope with two amplifier plug-ins,
the A sweep is slaved to the left plug-in and the
8 sweep is slaved to the right plug-in.
The display mode pushbutton selects chop or alternate time-share switching between vertical
plug-ins and amplifier channels. Chop rate is
25 kHz to 100 kHz depending on plug-in combinations and number of traces displayed .
307
DUAL TRACE SAMPLER
TRACER, SPECTRUM ANAL VZER
TEK CURVE
5CT1N
5000
SERIES
5S14N
5L4N
• .,. . DUAL TIlAC' DUAYID IWII'
Curve Tracer
Spectrum Analyzer
5CT1 N Curve Tracer
• Test Semiconductor Devices to 0.5 W •
10 nAldiv to 20 mA/div Vertical Deflection Factors
• 0.5 V/div to 20 V/div Horizontal Deflection Factors. For a complete description see page 404.
Dual Trace Delayed Sweep Sampler
by the Delay Time Multiplier Control to the end of
the event. The time-interval between the selected
points is then determined by multiplying the
number read directly from the Delay Time Multiplier Dial by the selected time per division.
CHARACTERISTICS
5L4N Spectrum Analyzer
• Low Cost • 0-100 kHz Frequency Range •
Resolution Bandwidth 10Hz to 3 kHz • Log and
Linear-Span Modes • Auto Resolution • For a
complete description see page 211 .
AMPLIFIER
Modes - CH 1 only ; CH 2 only; Dual Trace ; CH 1 added to
CH 2; CH 2 subtracted from CH 1 (CH 2 INVERT); CH 1 vertical (Y), CH 2 horizontal (X).
Input Impedance Bandwidth -
5S14N
Sampler
Dc to 1 GHz Bandwidth
Dual Trace, 2 mV/div Sensitivity
Calibrated Delayed Sweep
Rlsetime -
Nominally 50 n.
Operational Ease of
Conventional Oscilloscope
Two-Dot Time Measurements
Deflection Factor - 2 mV/div to 0.5 V/div in 8 calibrated
steps (1-2-5 sequence). Variable between steps by at least 2.5
to 1.
Within ± 3%.
± 5 V.
Input Signal Range - 2 V pop maximum within a + 2 V to
- 2 V window at any sensitivity.
Dc Offset Range -
At least +2 V to - 2 V.
Displayed Noise - 2 mV or less unsmoothed (tangentially
measured). Low noise pushbutton reduces random noise by
factor of 4 to 1 or more.
Two identical amplifier channels provide dualtrace sampling . A two-ramp time base introduces
calibrated delayed sweep operation to sampling
in an inexpensive package.
A unique feature is a system for making two-dot
time-interval measurements. This feature provides
an easy and accurate means for measuring the
time between two points on a waveform. One
bright dot on the trace is positioned with the
Delay Zero control to the start of an event to be
measured . Next a second bright dot is positioned
source resistance.
Channel Delay Difference - Adjustable to zero or for any
time difference up to at least 1 ns.
TIME BASE
Scan Modes -
Within ± 3% excluding first
'I, div of displayed
Delay Zero (1st Dot) - Adjustable to correspond to any instant within the time interval represented by the first 9 div of
the Delaying Sweep selected.
Delay Time (2nd Dot) - Adjustable to any portion of the time
interval represented by 10 div of the Delaying Sweep selected.
Delay Accuracy - Within ± 1% of 10 div when measurement
is made within the last 9.5 div.
DELAYED SWEEP
Vertical Signal Output- 0.2 V/div of vertical deflection ; 10 kn
The 5S14N Sampling Unit combines amplifier and
time-base functions in one double-width plug-in
unit designed to operate in all 5000 Series mainframes . Combining the sampling amplifier and
time-base functions in one plug-in enables the
5S14N to provide new economy and ease of
operation.
Accuracy sweep.
Range - 100 ps/div to 100 ~s/div in 19 calibrated steps (1-2-5
sequence). Variable between steps by at least 2.5 to 1.
350 ps or less.
Maximum Input Voltage -
Simplified Triggering
10 ns/div to 100 ~s/div in 13 steps (1-2-5 sequence).
Dc to 1 GHz.
Step Aberrations - + 2%, - 3%, total of 5% pop within first
5 ns, ± 1% thereafter, tested with 284 Pulse Generator.
Accuracy -
DELAYING SWEEP
Range -
Repetitive, Single, Manual, or External.
Delaying Sweep - May be used as CRT time base or as a
delay generator for the Delayed Sweep. The sweep starts with
minimum delay from the instant of trigger recognition . When
the Delaying Sweep mode is selected for the time base, two
bright dots in the trace are generated which may be positioned
anywhere on the displayed waveform. The time between dots
is equal to the reading on the Delay Time Multiplier dial multiplied by the time/div.
Delayed Sweep - This mode is used when the signal to be
displayed occurs considerably later than the instant of trigger
recognition or when the time must be 5 ns or less per div. The
Delayed Sweep may be started with zero delay time with respect to the start of the Delaying Sweep. Or the start may be
delayed by any time interval up to that represented by 10 div of
the Delaying Sweep selected.
Horizontal Signal Output- 1.0 V/div of horizontal deflection;
10 kn source resistance.
Accuracy sweep.
Within ± 3% excluding first
'I, div of displayed
Start Delay - Depends on the Delaying Sweep time selected
and the setting of the Delay Time Mult dial. Adjustable from
Zero to any time interval up to that represented by 10 div of the
Delaying Sweep selected. The Delaying Sweep start point corresponds to the second bright dot position.
Delay Jitter - < 0.05% of the time represented by 1 div of the
Delaying Sweep selected.
TRIGGERING AND SYNC
Signal Source - Interval from CH 1 vertical input or external
through front-panel connector.
Extemal Triggering - Nominal 50 n input, ac coupled, 2 V
p-p, 50 V de maximum. Trigger pulse amplitude 10 mV pop or
more with risetime of 1 ~s or less. 10Hz to 100 MHz. Sinewave
amplitude 10 mV pop or more from 150 kHz to 100 MHz.
Internal Triggering - Pulse amplitude 50 mV pop or more with
risetime of 1 ~s or less. Sinew ave amplitude 50 mV pop or more
from 150 kHz to 100 MHz.
Triggered Mode - Trigger recognition may be made to occur
at any selected voltage level between + 0.5 V and - 0.5 V at
instants when either a + slope or a - slope of the triggering
signal crosses that level.
Auto Triggered Mode - For small signals or when there may
be no triggering signal. Sampling pulses are automatically generated at a low rate in the absence of a triggering signal so a
trace may always be generated and displayed. The trigger level
range automatically adjusts to approximate the pop voltage of
the signal.
Holdoff - Varies the length of the time interval during which
recognition is inhibited. Variation is at least 5 to 1. The control
is particularty useful for displaying digital words when triggering
on binary pulses.
HF SYNC Mode - For sinewaves from 100 MHz to 1 GHz
10 mV pop or more from external source, 50 mV pop or mor~
from internal pickoff.
Order 5S14N Sampler ._ ..... ._._ ... ._ ........ $5,310
308
TEK
PORTABLE
OSCILLOSCOPES
CONTENTS
..... 310
Portable Scopes Comparison Chart
Portable Scopes Application Notes
... 311
Portable Scopes Accessories Chart
311
485 350 MHz Dual Trace .
...... 312
475/475A 250 MHz and
200 MHz Dual Trace
.... .... ... 314
4658/DM 44100 MHz Dual Trace ....
.. .... 316
465M (AN/USM) 425 (V1)
100 MHz Dual Trace Tri-service Standard
. 318
2335100 MHz Dual Trace
....... 320
2336100 MHz Dual Trace wIt.. Time ........... 320
2337100 MHz Dual Trace wIt.. Time
& DMM .....................................
320
221360 MHz Dual Trace
............. 322
2215 60 MHz Dual Trace,
Alternate Time Base .... ....................
322
........ .........
324
335 35 MHz Dual Trace
305 Battery Powered 5 MHzlDMM ................ 325
221 5 MHz .......................... ................
. 326
2131 MHzIDMM
..................................... 327
212 500 kHz Dual Trace ..................... ........... 328
T922R 15 MHz Dual Trace Rackmount . . .... 329
Portable Storage Oscilloscopes
468 100 MHz Dual Trace Digital Storage
466/464 100 MHz Dual Trace
43425 MHz Dual Trace ...................... .
31410 MHz Dual Trace
214 500 kHz Dual Trace .................... ..
T912 10 MHz Dual Trace ....................... .
330
332
334
335
336
337
309
REFERENCE
TEK PORTABLE
PORTABLE REALTIME OSCILLOSCOPES COMPARISON CHART
PRODUCT
485
BANDWIDTH
(MHz)
SENSITIVITY
(mV/div)
DUAL
TRACE
DELAYED
SWEEP
FASTEST
SWEEP
(ns/div)
350
5
yes
yes
1
Widest BW in a
portable instrument
'I
FEATURES
WEIGHT
kg (Ib)
POWER
REQUIREMENTS
170x310x470
(7x12x19)
9.5
(21)
SIZE
mm(in)
H.W.D
PAGE
PRICE
Line (90-136/180-272 V ae,
48-440 Hz)
312
$7,690
475A
250
5
yes
yes
1
High performance
250 MHz portable
160x330x460
(7x12x21)
10.3
(23)
Line (99-132/198-264 V ae,
48-440 Hz) or battery paek
314
$4,630
475
200
2
yes
yes
1
Highest gain/BW
in a portable scope
160x330x460
(7x12x21)
10.3
(23)
Line (99-132/198-264 V ae,
48-440 Hz) or battery pack
314
$4,300
465B
100
5
yes
yes
2
Cost effective, full-featured
100 MHz portable
160x330x460
(7x12x21)
10.3
(23)
Line (99-132/198-264 V ae,
48-440 Hz) or battery paek
316
$3,140
465M
100
5
yes
yes
5
Tri-service standard
100 MHz portable
180x320x550
(7x13x24)
10.9
(24)
Line (100-132/200-264 V ae,
48-440 Hz)
318
$3,860
2335
100
5
yes
yes
5
Rugged,compaet
lightweight
140x270x430
(5x11x17)
7.7
(17)
Line (100-132/200-250 V ae,
48-440 Hz)
320
$2,550
2336
100
5
yes
yes
5
B trigger, atime
140x270x430
(5x11x17)
7.7
(17)
Line (100-132/200-250 V ae,
48-440 Hz)
320
$2,845
2337
100
5
yes
yes
5
B trigger, atime,
DMM
140x270x430
(5x11x17)
7.7
(17)
Line (100-132/100-250 V ae,
48-440 Hz)
320
$3,145
2213
60
2
yes
yes
5
Low cost delayed
sweep
140x240x440
(5x14x17)
6.1
(13.5)
Line (90-250 V ae,
48-440 Hz)
322
$1 ,200
2
yes
yes
5
Dual time base
delayed sweep
140x240x440
(5x14x17)
6.1
(13.5)
Line (90-250 V ae,
48-440 Hz)
322
$1,450
"
2215
60
"
335
35
10
yes
yes
20
1 mV sensitivity at 25 MHz,
external de power
110x240x350
(4.4x9x14)
4.7
(10.3)
Line (90-132/180-264 V ae,
48-440 Hz) or external de
324
$3,015
T922R
15
2
yes
no
20
Raekmount, front
and rear inputs
130x480x430
(5.25x19x17)
9.1
(20)
Line (90-132/198-250 V ae,
50-60 Hz)
329
$1,970
305
5
5
yes
no
100
Autorang ing DMM
battery power
110x240x370
(4.4x9x15)
4.8
(10.6)
Line (90-132/180-264 V ae,
48-440 Hz) built-in battery,
or external de
325
$2,315
221
5
5
no
no
100
5 MHz hand-held
80x130x230
(3x5x9)
1.6
(3.5)
Built-in battery, line (90-250
V ae, 48-62 Hz)
326
$1,765
213
1
20
no
no
400
DMM/scope
at < 4lbs
70x130x230
(3x5x9)
1.7
(3.7)
Built-in battery, line (90-1361
180-250 V ae, 48-62 Hz),
or external de
327
$2,320
212
0.5
(500 kHz)
10
yes
no
1000
(1 .s/div)
Integral 1 Mf! probe
80x130x240
(3x5x10)
1.6
(3.5)
Built-in, battery, line
(104-126 V ae 58-62 Hz)
328
$1,710
468
100
5
yes
yes
2
GPIB Interface option
10 MHz Stored Writing Speed"
160x330x550
(6x13x22)
12.7
(28)
Line (90-132/198-250 V ae
48-440 Hz)
330
$6,500
466
100
5
yes
yes
5
Two storage modes
and reduced scan
3000 div/.s Stored Writing Speed
160x330x550
(6x13x22)
11 .8
(26)
Line (99-132/198-264 V ae,
46-440 Hz) or battery paek
332
$6,700
464
100
5
yes
yes
5
Two storage modes
110 div/.s Stored Writing Speed
160x330x550
(6x13x22)
11 .8
(26)
Line (99-132/198-264 V ae
48-440 Hz) or battery paek
332
$5,695
434
25
10
yes
no
20
Split screen storage
5000 div/.s Stored Writing Speed
140x330x480
(6x13x19)
9.4
(20.7)
Line (99-136/180-272 V ae,
48-440 Hz) or external de
334
$4,840
314
10
1
yes
no
100
Stored Viewing Time to 4 hr
400 div/ms Stored Writing Speed
110x240x350
(4.4x9x14)
4.7
(10.3)
Line (90-132/180/264 V ae,
48-440 Hz) or external de
335
$3,655
T91 2
10
2
yes
no
50
Low cost bistable storage
250 div/ms Stored Writing Speed
250x180x480
(10x7x19)
8.2
(18)
Line (90-132/198-250 V ae
50-60 Hz)
337
$2,170
0.5
(500 kHz)
10
yes
no
1000
(1.s/div)
Fully self-contained
500 div/ms Stored Writing Speed
80x130x240
(3x5x10)
1.6
(3.5)
Built-in battery or line
(104-126 V ae, 58-62 Hz)
336
$2,320
PORTABLE STORAGE OSCILLOSCOPES COMPARISON CHART
214
" Bandwidth specifications for the 485 are de to 350 MHz with
50 II inputs and de to 250 MHz with I Mil inputs.
310
'2
The 2213 and 2215 are specified at 60 MHz for sensitivities
from 10 V/div (lOX probe) to 20 mV/div (IX probe) and
50 MHz from 10 mV/div to 2 mV/div.
'3
Useful Storage Bandwidth
TEK
PORTABLE SCOPE APPLICATION NOTES
Tektronix product literature is readily available from your local Tektronix Sales office. Addresses and phone numbers are listed on pages 10 through 12 of this catalog.
For data sheets and product brochures, just ask for literature on the specific instrument. Additional related publications also available are listed below.
TITLE
FEATURING
PART NO
How To Select Your Portable Oscilloscope
(Also ask for 2200 and 2300 Series literature.)
Miniature, Battery-Powered Scopes
Built to Tek 's High-Performance Standards
40A-5000
300 Series Portable Oscilloscopes
Brochure for the full line of SONY -TEKTRONIX mini-portable scopes
40AX-3792-2
40A-3793-2
40AX-4232
400 Series Portable CRT Storage Scopes
Descriptions of the 466, 464, and 434 portable storage scopes
T900 Series Data Sheet
Inclucles the popular T922R rackmount scope and the T912 low cost storage scope.
Ask for 2200 Series literature to supplement this data sheet
41X-3933
OM 44 Differential Time/DMM Option
Describes the OM 44 option available for the 464, 465, 466, 475, and 475A portable scopes
40X-3877-1
41 AX-4758
XYZs Of Using a Scope
A basic primer that features the 2213
Basic Oscilloscope Measurements:
Period And Frequency
41 AX-3839-1
Basic Oscilloscope Measurements:
Amplitucle
41 AX-3840
Basic Oscilloscope Measurements:
Setup And Analysis
Basic Oscilloscope Measurements:
Dual-Trace And X-Y Phase
41 AX-3841 -1
41 AX-3928
Basic Oscilloscope Measurements:
Risetime
41 AX-3929
Using Delayed Sweep In Measuring Digital Word Trains
41 AX-3349
VITS Analysis for TV Servicing
41 AX-4047-1
Troubleshooting Color TV Power Supplies
41 AX-4048-1
The Digital Storage Oscilloscope
A primer that describes digital storage concepts and the 468
40AX-4319-1
Select The Right Kind of Storage For Your Application
Describes bistable, variable persistence, FAST transfer, and digital storage for portable and plug-in scopes
42AX-4280-1
Variable Persistence Storage Applications
42AX-3198
Bistable Storage Applications
42AX-3199
Fast And Multimode Storage Applications
42AX-32oo
Spotlight Hidden Pulses With High Speed Storage
Three-page application note that features the 466
468 ELECTRONICS Reprint
Describes digital storage scopes and concepts
4OAX-4444-1
468 BROADCAST ENGINEERING Reprint
External Storage For The 468 Digital Storage Oscilloscope
USing The 468 In Envelope Mode
468 COMPUTER DESIGN Reprint
468 EON Reprint
Making broadcast timing measurements with the 468
4OAX-4483
Application note describes transferring waveforms captured with the 468 to external data storage devices.
4OAX-4614
Application note on the 468 envelope mode for glitch·catching and babysitting applications.
4OAX-461S
Dual sampling rates in the 468 envelope mode
4OAX-4838
Your Direct Line To The World 's Best Instruments And Technical Expertise
40AX-3225
Catching glitches on slow sweeps with the 468
41 AX-4765
Find out about the Tektronix National Marketing Center and Tek 's service offices
6OA-4873
PORTABLE SCOPE ACCESSORIES CHART
PROBES
400 SERIES
P•••ive
485
P6101
P6106
P6056
P6057
475
475A
465B
468
CART
CAMERAS
Single Shot or
Low Rep R.te
Stored/Stable or
Repetition
MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES
Low
Co.t
Active
Current
P6201
P6202
P6021
P6022
A6302/AM 503
A6303/AM 503
C-31B with
016-0306-01
adaptor
C-30B with
016-0306-01
adaptor
NA
200C
P6101
P6015
P6106
P6OO9
P6063B P6048
P6130
P6201
P6202
P6102
P6022
A6302/AM 503
A6303/AM 503
C-31B with
016-0269-03
adaptor
C-30B with
016-0269-03
adaptor
C-5C with
016-0359-01
adaptor
200C
P6101
P6015
P6105
P6009
P6062B P6048
P6130
P6201
P6202
P6021
P6022
A6302/AM 503
A6303/AM 503
C-31B with
016-0269-03
adaptor
with
C-5C with
016-0359-01
adaptor
200C
adaptor
Viewing hood (Binocularj-016-0566-00;
Folding Polarized Viewing hood-016-0180-00.
1105 or 1106 Battery Power Supply Mesh Filter-378-0726-01
Rack Adaptor (468) 016-0675-00.
465M
6021
P6101
P6104
P6015
P6009
P6130
P6201
P6202
P6022 P6021
A6302/ AM 503
A6303/AM 503
C-31B with
016-0269-03
adaptor
C-30B 0f-t 01 with
016-026 -03
adaptor
C-5C with
016-0359-01
adaptor
200C
FOldin~ Polarized Viewing Hood-016-0180-oo.
Mesh ilter-378-0726-01 ; 1105 Battery Power Supply;
Rack Adaptor-040-0825-01
466
464
P6101
P6015
P6105
P6OO9
P6062B P6130
P6202
P6201
P6021
P6022
A6302/ AM 503
A6303/AM 503
C-31B with
016-0269-03
adaptor
~~~2~f-hgl
C-5C with
016-0359-01
adaptor
200C
adaptor
P6021 P6022
A6302/ AM 503
A6303/AM 503
C-31B with
016-0269-03
adaptor
C-30B Of-' 01 with
016-026 -03
adaptor
C-5C O~t 02 with
016-03 9-01
adaptor (handheld)
200C
FoIdi~ Polarized Viewing Hood-016-0180-oo;
Mesh ilter-378-0682-oo. 11 05 Battery Power Supply
Rack Adaptor-016-0272-oo
P6021 P6022
A6302/ AM 503
A6303/AM 503
NA
NA
C-5C with
016-0357-01
adaptor
NA
2335 Rack Adaptor Kit 016-0468-00
C-5C with
016-0359-01
adaptor (with flash)
200C
Clear CRT Lillht Filter Custom Mod-337 -2775-01
CRT TV Gratlcule Custom Mod-035-0175-00
Accessories Pouch-016-0677 -00, Front Cover 200-2520-00
RM Kit 016-0466-00
NA
Viewing Hood-016-0297-00; Mesh Filter-378-0063-oo
1105 Batte/: Power Supply
Rain Cover 314, 335) 016-0612-00
434
P6101
P6108
P6009
P6063B
P6015
P6009
P6048
P6130
P6015
P6120
~i~~2~f-~gl
with
FOldi, Viewin~ Hood-016-0274-oo & 016-0082-00;
1105 attery ower SU P
Rain Cover-016-0554-oo;
Rack adaptor 016-0558- .
81!
Folding Polarized Viewing Hood-016-0269-03.
Collapsible viewi"8 hood (binocularj-016-0566-oo
Protective Cover 16-0554-00; Mesh Filter 378-0726-01 .
1105 or 11 06 Batte~ Power Supply;
Rack Adaptor 016-0 56-00
Folding Polarized Vie~ Hood-016-0180-oo.
~~~~I~~e6,~:;~ ~036J~~~:;~~11~~~~26-01
1105 Battery Power Supply; Rack Adaptor-016-0675-oo.
2300 SERIES
2335
2336
2337
P6063B P6130
P6202A
2200 SERIES
2213
2215
P6120
P6101
P6021 P6022
A63021AM 503
A6303/AM 503
P6101
P6149A
P6021 P6022
A6302/AM 503
A63031AM 503
T912
P6101
P6015
P6108
P6120
P6062B P6007
P6021 P6022
A63021AM 503
AM6303/AM 503
C-5C Opt 03 with
016-0358-01
adaptor
NA
Protective Cover-016-0340-00;
Dust/Rain Jacket-016-0361-oo
T922R
P6101
P6015
P6108
P6120
P6062B P6007
P6021 P6022
A63021AM 503
A6303/ AM 503
C-5C with
016-0357-01
adaptor
NA
Viewing Hood-016-0377-00
300 SERIES
314
305
335
C-31B with
016-0327-01
adaptor
C-30B with
016-0327-01
adaptor
T900 SERIES
311
350 MHz
TRACE OSCILLOSCOPE
TEK DUAL
CHARACTERISTICS
VERTICAL DEFLECTION
(2 IDENTICAL CHANNELS)
Bandwidth' and Risetime - (At all deflection factors from
50 II terminated source).
- 15' C to + 35 ' C
50 Il
+ 35 ' C to + 55'C
I Dc to 350 MHz, 1 ns
1 Mil l
Dc to 300 MHz, 1.2 ns
Dc to 250 MHz, 1.41ns
Dc to 200 MHz, 1.8 ns
'Measured at - 3 dB. Bandwidth may be limited to = 20 MHz
by bandwidth limit switch.
Lower - 3 dB point, ac coupling 1X probe: 1 kHz or less for
50 Il, and 10Hz or less for 1 Mil. lOX probe: 100 Hz or less for
50 Il, and 1 Hz or less for 1 Mil.
Deflection Factor - 5 mV/div to 5 V/div (1-2-5 sequence),
accurate + 2%. Uncalibrated, continuously variable between
steps and to at least 12.5 V/div. Gain can be recalibrated at the
front panel.
Display Modes - CH 1, CH 2 (normal and inverted), alternate,
chopped (= 1 MHz rate), X- Y (CH 1- Y and CH 2-X), ADD (CH 1
± CH 2).
CMRR - Common mode rejection ratio at least 20 dB at
50 MHz for common-mode signals of 6 div or less.
Automatic Scale Factor - Probe tip deflection factors for 1X,
lOX , and 100X coded probes are automatically indicated by
three readout lights at the edge of the knob skirts. All lights are
off when the channel is not selected for display or when the
trace identification control on the probe is depressed.
Selectable Input Impedance - 50 Il and 1 Mil impedances
are available at a single BNC connector by pushbutton
selection.
50 Il ± 0.5%; VSWR 1.15:1 or less from 20 mV/div to 5 V/div,
1.25:1 or less at 5 mV/div and 10 mV/div to 350 MHz.
Input Rand C - 1 Mil ± 1% paralleled by = 20 pF.
50 11 Protection - Internal detection circuitry provides protection by automatically disconnecting excessive signals of up to
50 V. The "disconnected" condition is indicated, and has manual reset.
Maximum Input Voltage
485
350 MHz at 5 mV/div
1 ns/div Sweep Rate
2.0 div/ns Writing Speed
1 Mil and 50 Il Input Impedances
Input Protection 50 Il Internal
Automatic Deflection Factor Readout
Pushbutton Ext Trigger View
Battery Operation (Optional)
Weighs = 9.5 kg (21 Ib)
At just 21 pounds, the 1 ns/div dual-trace 485 is
the only true portable, 350 MHz oscilloscope on
the market. This wide bandwidth is one reason
why the 485 is highly compatible with today 's
increasing technology.
Many features contribute to the 485's extraordinary overall performance. Fast 2.0 div/ns writing
speed is one, making it especially attractive for
use in field research environments.
The 485 features a wide bandwidth at its full
5 mV/div vertical sensitivity (350 MHz at 50 nand
250 MHz at 1 Mil). Selectable input impedance
provides the capability to measure low and high
impedance pOints with the same scope and
without active probes.
Internal detection Circuitry protects the 50 n input
by automatically disconnecting when the signal
exceeds approximately 5 V RMS .
312
You no longer have to mentally compensate for
attenuating probes. Automatic vertical scale-factor readout is provided by three light-emitting
diodes located around the edge of each input
attenuator knob. A quick glance at the readout
tells the operator the correct on-screen V/div
when the recommended 10X or 100X probes are
used .
You always know exactly where you are in a pulse
train when making a delayed sweep measurement. An alternate sweep mode allows the delayed sweep to appear alternately with the intensified main sweep. In this mode, you can view the
intensified zone and the delayed display
simultaneously.
The external trigger signal can be easily viewed
on the 485. A front-panel pushbutton automatically routes the external signal used to trigger time
base A to the vertical deflection amplifier. This
feature can also be used to quickly make time
comparisons between the signal of interest and
the external trigger signal.
On the 485, focus is always correct for single-shot
photography. An autofocus circuit eliminates the
need to readjust the focus each time the intensity
is changed .
When commercial power is not available, use the
1105 Battery Power Supply. It weighs only 19.5
pounds, and lets you take the high-performance
485 virtually anywhere.
Often chosen as a general-purpose scope for
computer and electronic servicing environments
because of its fast writing speed and wide
bandwidth, the 485 can also be found in specialized and unusual applications. For example, to
maintain a groundbased laser/radar acquisition
system, the 485's alternate sweep switching capability can be very useful.
50 Il
Protection disconnect occurs for voltages
that exceed approx :
5 V RMS continuous
0.1 W-second for instantaneous
voltages of 5 V to 50 V
Signals in excess of 150 V
will damage the instrument
1 Mil
Dc coupled
250 V (dc + peak ac),
500 V pop to 1 kHz
Ac coupled
500 V (dc + peak ac)
500 V pop to 1 kHz
Selectable Input Coupling -
Ac; dc; GND (provides zero refn load
erence, precharges coupling capacitor disconnects 50
I
in 50 Il mode).
Delay Line - Permits viewing leading edge of displayed
waveform.
Probe Power - Connectors provide correct voltages for two
optional P6201 FET Probes.
HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION
Time Base A and B - Calibrated sweep range ; 1 ns/div to
0.5 s/div (1-2-5 sequence).
Variable Time Control - Time Base A provides continuously
variable uncalibrated sweep rates between steps and to at
least 1.25 s/div.
Time Base A and B Accuracy Center 8 Oivision
Sweep Rate
+ 15' C to
+ 35 ' C
- 15' C to
+ 55 ' C
1 ns/div to 20 ns/div
± 3%
± S%
50 ns/div to 0.1 s/div
± 2%
± 4%
0.2 s/div and 0.5 s/div
± 3%
± S%
Horizontal Display Modes - A, intenSified, alternate, and B
(delayed sweep). A only is displayed for A sweep rates of 1, 2,
and 5 ns/div B ends A for increased intensity in the delayed
mode.
Alternate Display Modes - Allows the B delayed sweep to
appear alternately with the intensified A sweep. Trace separation control poSitions B (delayed sweep = 4 div from the A
sweep).
TEK
400
SERIES
CALIBRATED SWEEP DELAY
Delay Time Range 10 nsldiv to 0.5 s/div.
0 10 lOX delay timeldiv setting of
Differential Delay Time Measurement Accuracy
Delay Time Setting
+15'C to +35'C
10 nsldiv and 20 nsldiv
± (1 % of measurement
+ 0.2% of full scale)'
50 nsldiv to 1 msl div
± (0.5% of measurement
+ 0.1% of full scale)'
2 msldiv to 0.5 sl div
± (1 % of measurement
+ 0.1% of full scale)'
'Full scale is 10 times the delay time/ div setting.
Jitter -
1 part or less in 20,000 of lOX the timel div setting.
TRIGGERING A and B
A. Trigger Mode. - Normal (sweep runs when triggered).
Automatic (sweep free-runs in the absence of a triggering signal and for signals below 20 Hz). Single sweep (sweep runs
one time on the first triggering event after the reset selector is
pressed). Lights Indicate when sweep is triggered and when
single sweep is ready .
A Trigger Holdoll - Adjustable control permits a stable presentation ot repet itive complex waveforms. The control covers
at least the time of one full sweep for faster than 0.2 s/div.
B Trigger Mode. - B runs after delay time (starts automatically at the end of the delay time) and B triggerable after delay
time (runs when triggered). The B (deiayed) sweep runs once,
in each of these modes, following the A sweep delay time.
Time B..e A and B Trigger Sensitivity and Coupling
Coupling
Dc
Internal
External
To 50 MHz
0.3 div deflection
20 mV
To 350 MHz
1.5 div deflection
100 mV
Ac
Signals below 16 Hz are attenuated
Ac LF Reject
Signals below 16 kHz are attenuated
Ac HF Reject
Jitter -
Z-Ali.lnput - Risetime ",, 15 ns. Input R ",,500 0. + 0.2 V (de
to 20 MHz) decreases intenSity. + 2 V (de to 2 MHz) blanks
maximum intenSity trace.
Ambient Temperature - Operating: - 15' C to + 55 ' C. Nonoperating: - 3S ' C to + 75 ' C. Filtered forced air ventilation is
provided.
Altitude - Operating : to 4500 m (15,000 ft) : maximum allowable ambient temperature decreased by I ' C/l 000 ft from 5000
to 15,000 ft . Nonoperating : to 15 200 m (50,000 ft).
Vibration - Operating: 15 minutes along each of the three
axes. 0.06 em (0.025 in) pop displacement (four g 's at 55 Hz)
10 to 55 to 10Hz in one minute cycles.
Humidity - Operating and nonoperating: five cycles (120 hrs)
to 95% reiative humidity referenced to MIL-E-I64ooF (par 4.5.9
through 4.5.9.5.1, class four).
Shock - Operating and nonoperating - 30 g's, '/2 sine,
11 ms duration, two shocks per axis in each direction for a
total of 12 shocks.
A Sweep Output - Open circuit, "" 10 V positive-going sawtooth : into 50 0. ",0.5 V.
A and B Gate Outputs - Open circuit. ", 4 V positive-going
rectangular pulse : into 50 0 ", 0.5 V.
Power Requirement. - Recessed slide switch selects nominal operating line range . Line voltage range is 90 V to 136 V
and 180 V to 272 V. 60 W maximum power consumption at
115 V. Line frequency 48 to 440 Hz.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Cabinet
mm
Dimensions
12.0
6.6
523
470
20.6
18.5
Weight. ""
kg
Level and Slope - Internal, permits selection of triggering at
any point on the positive or negative slope of the displayed
waveform. External, level is adjustable through at least ± 0.5 V
for either polarity : ± 5 V for Ext + 10.
Net (with accessories)
Net (without accessories)
Shipping
10.9
9.5
15.0
Internal , line, external, external + 10.
B runs after delay time, internal, external, exter-
Elternal Input. - R and C '" 1 MO paralleled by "" 20 pF.
Maximum input voltage; 500 V (dc + peak ac), 500 V pop to
1 kHz.
X-Y OPERATION
Full Sensitivity X- Y (CH 1 Vertical. CH 2 Horizonlal) 5 mV/div to 5 V/div, accurate ± 2%. Y-axis bandwidth identical
to CH 1. X-axis bandwidth is dc to at least 4 MHz (- 3 dB).
Phase difference between amplifiers is 3 ' or less to 4 MHz.
Rackmount
In
305
168
A Trigger View - A spring-loaded pushbutton overrides other
vertical controls and displays the external signal used for A
sweep triggering. This provides quick verification of the external signal and time comparison between a vertical signal and
the external trigger signal. The deflection factor is '" 50 mV/div
(0.5 V/div with external + 10 source).
A Sources -
mm
483
177
457
in
19.0
7.0
18.0
Ib
kg
Ib
24.0
21 .0
33.0
11 .9
24 .5
26.2
54.0
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
50 0, 18 inch BNC cable (012-0076-00); two BNC jack posts
(012-0092-00): two 50 0 terminators (011-0049-01): clear filter
(386-0118-00): four 3 amp fuses (159-0015-00): accessory
pouch (016-0535-00): or (016-0537-00). Rack models also include mounting hardware and slide out assemblies.
Attenuatlon
Input
Impedance
Bandwidth'
with
485
P6056
6ft
lOX
500 0
1 pF
350 MHz
P6057
6ft
100X
5000 0
1 pF
350 MHz
IX
100 kO
3 pF
1 Mil
1.5 pF
1 Mil
1.5 pF
P6201
FET
2m
lOX Head
l ooX Head
50 0 or
1 MO
1 Mil
Input
Current
Probe
330 MHz
P6202
2m
lOX
looX Head
(optional)
10 Mil
2 pF
285 MHz
P6106
2m
lOX
10 MO
13 pF
250 MHz
P6063B
6ft
IX
Switchable
lOX
1 MO
12 pF
10 Mil
14 pF
Probe
Calibratlon
P6022
5ft
1 mA/mV
10 mA/mV
(selectable)
In.ertlon
Impedance
0,0311@
1 MHz Increasing
to
Type
6 MHz
200 MHz
Bandwidth'
with
485
130 MHz
f2~~~
'Bandwidths are measured at the upper - 3 dB. and sppIy only
to the csbIB length shOwn. Generally, shOrter csbIB lengths increase bandwidth, longer ones decrease bandWidth.
Current Loop Adaptor - The adaptor provides an accurate
50 mA squarewave calibrator when connected to the 485 voltage calibrator. The risetime is ",, 25 ns.
Order 012-0341 -00 " ... " ... " " .. " .. " """ ." " ,,.,,""""""" " ",, .. $45
50 II 5X Pad - Provides reverse termination for the calibrator,
Order 011 -0060-02 .. ,," """"" """"""""""""""" """"...... $35
Folding Viewing Hood.
Folds to 1.2 x 11 .5 x 19.1 cm ('I.. x 7'/2 x 7'/2 in).
Order 016-0274-00 ...... " ......... " ........................................ , $15
Folds to 1.4 x 17.2 x 34.9 cm (9/.. x 6 '1. x 13'1. In).
Order 016-0082-00 ....... " .. ...................................... " ." ...... $15
SCOPE-MOBILE" Cart - Occupies < 18 in aisle space. has
storage area in base.
Order 200C ................. " ............................................ " .... $295
Battery Power Supply
Order 1105 Battery Power Supply .. " .......................... $1.375
Rack Adaptor - Order 016-0558-00 ................ " ......... , $320
RECOMMENDED CAMERAS
C-30BP General Purpo.e Cam.ra - Includes 016-0306-01
mounting adaptor.
Order C-30BP ............................................ " .......... " .... $1.380
C·31BP High Speed Camera - Includes 016-0306-01 mounting adaptor.
Order C-31 BP .................................................. " ....." ... $1.570
For further information see camera section.
ORDERING INFORMATION
485 Oscilloscope .............................. _.. $7,690
R485 Rackmount Oscilloscope ........... $7,910
DISPLAY
Option 04 -
INSTRUMENT OPTIONS
EMC Modification for 485 ...................... +$140
CRT - 8 x 10 division display. each division is 0.8 cm. Horizontal and vertical centerlines further marked in 0.2 division
increments. P31 Phosphor standard: Pll optional. 21 kV accelerating potential.
Option 04 -
EMC Modification for R485 .................... +$140
Option 78 -
Pl1 Phosphor .......................................... +$35
Photographic Writing Speed - At least 1. divl ns with standard P31 Phosphor and at least 2 divl ns with optional Pll
Phosphor using the Tektronix C-31 B Camera and 3000 speed
type 107 film .
Option AI -
Auto Focu. - Automatically maintains beam focus for all intenSity settings.
Graticule Internal, nonparallax : variable edge lighting :
markings for measurement of risetime .
50 U
Input
Probe
Type
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
Two-Frequency. Fa.t-Ri.e Calibrator - Output resistance is
450 0 with a risetime (positive slope) into 50 0 of 1 ns or less.
1 kHz, duty cycle 49.8% to 50.2%. Amplitude is 5 V ± 0.5%
into 1 MO and 0.5 V ± 1% into 50 0 ( ± 0.5%). Optional BNC
accessory current loop provides 50 mA ± 1%. Selectable repetition rates are 1 kHz and 1 MHz ± 0.25%. Specifications apply
over + 15' C to + 35 ' C range.
Width
Height
Depth
(handle extended)
(handle not extended
B Source. nal + 10.
Input
Terminal
ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS
Signals below 16 Hz and above
50 kHz are attenuated
0.1 ns or less at 350 MHz at 1 ns/div.
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Probes
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORDS AND PLUG OPTIONS
Universal Euro 220 V/16A, 50 Hz .............. NC
Option A2 -
UK 224 V/13A, 50 Hz ................................. NC
Option A3 -
Australian 240 V/ l0A. 50 Hz ...................... NC
Option A4 -
North American 240 V/15A. 60 Hz ............. NC
For more information on instrument options, see your Tektronix Sales Engineer. Distributor. or Representative.
Tektronix offers service training classes on the 400 Series Oscilloscopes. For further training information, contact your local
Salesl Service Office or request a copy of the Tektronix Service
Training Schedule on the return card in the center of this
catalog .
Beam Finder - Compresses trace to within graticule area for
ease in determining the location of an off-screen signal.
313
250 MHz AND 200 MHz
TRACE OSCILLOSCOPES
TEK DUAL
Dellection Factor at BW
475 -
2 mV/div to 5 V/div
475A -
5 mV/div to 10 V/div
1-2-5 sequence, accurate ± 3%. Uncalibrated, continuously
variable between steps and to at least 12.5 V/div (475) to at
least 25 V/ div (475A) . In casc ade mode sensitivity is
",,400 ~V/div (475); and ",,2.5 mV/div (475A). Cascaded bandwidth is at least 50 MHz (475/475A) when signal out is
terminated in 50 n.
DI.play Mode. - CH 1 ; CH 2 (normal and inverted), alternate,
chopped - (",, 1 MHz rate) , added ; X-V (CH I -X, CH 2-Y).
CMRR - Common-mode rejection ratio at least 20 dB at
1 kHz lor common-mode signals of 8 division or less.
Automatic Scale Factor - Probe tip deflection factors for 1X
or lOX coded probes are automatically indicated by two readout lights behind the knob skirts. All lights are off when the
channel is not displayed. Ground reference display selectable
at probe (when dc coupled).
Input Rand C -
1 Mn ± 2%, paralleled by ",,20 pF.
Maximum Input Voltage
Dc coupled
250 V (dc + peak ac)
500 V (p-p ac at 1 kHz or less)
Ac coupled
500 v (de + peak ac)
500 V (p-p ac at 1 kHz or less)
Delay Line -
Permits viewing leading edge of displayed
waveform.
Probe Power - Connectors provide correct voltages for two
optional P6201 FET Probes.
HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION
Time Ba.e A and B - 0.01 ~s/div to 0.5 s/div (1-2-5 sequence). Xl0 magnified extends maximum sweep rate to
1 ns/div.
Variable Tlma Control - Time Base provides continuously
variable uncalibrated sweep rates between steps and to at
least 1.25 s/div. Warning light Indicates uncalibrated setting.
475/475A
1 ns/div Sweep Rate (475) (475A)
with X10 Sweep Magnifier
Trigger View
Versatile Trigger Selection
Battery OperBtion (Optional)
Weighs = 10_3 kg (22_75 Ib)
Time Base A and B Accuracy full 10 em
Determining deflection factors used to be errorprone and costly. Now, it's a problem of the
past...readout lights behind knob skirts automatically indicate the proper probe tip deflection
factors for recommended 1X and 10X probes.
Measuring with respect to ground is important in
many applications. This is controlled at the probe
when dc-coupled by simply pressing the small
ground reference button on recommended
probes.
Both of these Tektronix portable oscilloscopesfeature high performance and light weight for
making complex measurements in the field.
You can choose from the 1105 or 1106 Battery
Packs. Both are small and light weight,and provide a ready solution for making accurate measurements in difficult environments such as conducted EMC, ground loops, power line
fluctuations or where line power is nonexistent.
The 475A provides a 250 MHz bandwidth at
5 mV/div. It features wider bandwidth than the
475, plus a more concise spot size and trace for
particular applications.
Applications for these instruments are widespread. The 475 performs tests and measurements aboard flight test aircraft, in both stationary and portable modes.
With 200 MHz at 2 mV/div, the 475 features better
sensitivity than the 475A. This bandwidth/
sensitivity combination is useful in a wide variety
of measurements.
Both the 475 and 475A offer 2% (1 ns/div) or 1%
(10 ns/div) timing accuracy, which can be critical
in seNicing computers.
Both oscilloscopes are light, compact, and rugged for portability and durability, yet each contains a large, bright 8 X 10 cm CRT. Operation has
been simplified by single-function pushbuttons,
control knob design, layout, and color-coordinated front panels.
314
+ 20 ' C to + 30'C
- 15' C to +55 ' C
Unmagnified
± 1%
+ 2%
Magnified
± 2%
± 3%
Horizontal Display Mode. - A, mixed sweep, A Intensified, B
delayed. B ends A for increased intensity in the delayed mode.
Calibrated Mixed Sweep - Displays A sweep for period determined by delay-time position control, then displays B sweep
for remainder of horizontal sweep.
CALIBRATED SWEEP DELAY
Delay Time Range - 0 to Xl0 delay time/div settings of 50 ns
to 0.5 s (minimum delay time is 50 ns).
Differential Time Measurement Accuracy
Delay Time Setting
+ 15' C to + 35' C
Over one or more
major dial divisions
± 1%
Less than one major
dial division
± 0.01 major
dial division
Jitter - One part or less in 50,000 (0.002%) of Xl0 the A
sweep time/div setting. One part in 20,000 when operating
from 50 Hz line.
CHARACTERISTICS
TRIGGER
All characteristics are common to the 475 and 475A except
where indicated.
A Trigger Mode. - Normal (sweep runs when triggered).
Automatic (sweep free-runs in the absence of a triggering signal and for signals below 30 Hz). Single Sweep (sweep runs
one time on the first triggering event after the reset selector is
pressed). Lights indicate when sweep is triggered and when
single sweep is ready.
VERTICAL DEFLECTION
(2 IDENTICAL CHANNELS)
Bandwidth' and Rlaetlme 50 n terminated source)
(At all deflection factors from
- 15' C to + 40' C
+40'C to + 55'C
475
Dc to 200 MHz, 1.8 ns
175 MHz, 2.0 ns
475A
Dc to 250 MHz, 1.4 ns
250 MHz, 1.4 ns
'Measured at - 3 dB, bandwidth may be limited to ",, 20 MHz
or 100 MHz by bandwidth limit switch.
Lower - 3 dB point, ac coupling 1X probe: 10Hz or less. lOX
probe: 1 Hz or less.
TEK
400
SERIES
A Trigger Holdofl - Adjustable control permits a stable pre·
sentation of repetitive complex waveforms.
B Trigger Modes - B runs after delay time (starts automati·
cally at the end of the delay time) and B triggerable after delay
time (runs when triggered). The B (delayed) sweep runs once,
in each of these modes, following the A sweep delay time.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
Output Voltage
Probes
0.3 V
Output Current
30 mA
Time Base A and B Trigger Sensitivity and Coupling
475
Coupling
Internal
Dc
External
External
+ 10
Ac
Frequency
475A
To 40
MHz
At 200
MHz
to 40
MHz
At 250
MHz
0.3 div
deflection
1.5 div
deflec·
tion
0.3 div
deflec
tion
2.0 div
deflec
tion
50 mV
250 mV
50 mV
250 mV
500 mV
2.5 V
500 mV
2.5 V
Requirements increase below 60 Hz
Ac LF Reject
Requirements increase below 50 kHz
Ac HF Reject
Requirements increase below 60 Hz
and above 50 kHz
475 Jitter 475A Jitter -
0.2 ns or less at 200 MHz and 1 ns/div.
0.2 ns or less at 250 MHz and 1 ns/div.
A Trigger View - A spring.loaded pushbutton overrides other
vertical controls and displays the external signal used for A
sweep triggering . This provides quick verification of the signal
and time comparison between a vertical signal and the trigger
signal. The deflection factor is = 50 mV/div (0.5 V/div with ex·
ternal + 10 source).
Level and Slope - Internal, permits selection of triggering at
any point on the positive or negative slope of the displayed
waveform . Level adjustment through at least ± 2 V in external,
through at least ± 20 V in external + 10.
A Sources + 10.
Normal, CH 1, CH 2, line, external, and external
B Sources external.
Starts after delay, normal, CH 1, CH 2, and
External Inputs - Rand C = 1 Mil paralleled by = 20 pF.
250 V (dc + peak ac) maximum input.
X·Y OPERATION
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Amplitude Calibrator
1%
+ O·C to + 40 · C
Probe
Type
2%
+ 20 · C to + 30·C
P6063B
6ft
Vertical Signal Output - CH 2 vertical signal is dc to at least
50 MHz (- 3 dB), and = 10 mV/div terminated into 50 Il, and
", 20 mV/div terminated in 1 Mil.
Positive gates from both time bases (= 5 V).
Power Requirements - Quick-dlange line voltage selector
provides six ranges; 110 V, 115 V, 120 V, 220 V, 230 V, and
240 V, each ± 10%.48 to 440 Hz, or 100 W maximum at 115 V
and 60 Hz. Operation from 12 or 24 V de is available with
Option 07.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Cabinet
mm
Dimensions
Width (with handle)
Height (w/o pouch)
Depth (with panel cover)
Depth (handle extended)
328
157
460
516
Input
Impedance
Bandwidth· with
475
475A
1 Mil
105 pF
6
MHz
6
MHz
10 Mil
14pF
145
MHz
160
MHz
lOX
10 Mil
2 pF
185
MHz
220
MHz
looX Head
10MU
2 pF
185
MHz
220
MHz
Ac Head
10 Mil
4 pF
185
MHz
220
MHz
IX
Switchable
= 1 kHz
Gate Outputs -
Attenuation
Rackmount
In
13.1
6.2
lB .l
20.3
mm
483
177
457
in
19.0
7.0
lB.O
Weights =
kg
Ib
kg
Ib
Net (without panel
cover)
Net (with panel cover
and accessories)
Shipping
10.3
22.B
13.3
29.4
11 .5
25.3
16.7
37.0
26.3
58.0
lOX
P6202
FET
Probe
2m
Current
Probe
P6022
5ft
Calibration
1 mNmV
10mNmV
(Selectable)
Inaertlon
Impedance
Bandwidth with
475
475A
0.031l@
1 MHz
Increasing
toO.21l@
120 MHz
125
MHz
160
MHz
'Bandwidths are measured at the upper -3 dB and apply only
to the cable length shown. Generally shorter cable lengths increase bandwidth, longer ones decrease bandwidth.
Folding Polarized Viewing Hood
Order 016·0180·00 ..•...................•...............•..••..•••••••••...... $40
Collapsible Viewing Hood Binocular.
Order 016-0566-00 ......•.............................•••..••.....•••......... $15
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Two P6106 lOX probes (010·6106-03); blue accessory pouch
for DMM version only (016-0594·00); blue accessory pouch for
standard cabinet versions only (016-0535.02); blue CRT light
filter, (337. 1674·00); clear CRT light filter, (337. 1674.01); clear
pouch (016-0537.00); two 1 'I,·amp fuses , (159·0016-00); one
'I•. amp fuse (159·0042·00); BNC male to ground wire, (134·
0016-01). Rack models also include mounting hardware and
slide out assemblies, do not include accessory pouches.
Protective Cover Waterproof, blue vinyl.
Order 016·0554·00 ....................•.......•.......•.••.••••..••...••...... $17
Mesh Filter Improves contrast and EMC filtering .
Order 378-0726-01 ......................•......•••....•••••••.•••••••••••..•" $55
SCOPE·MOBILE" Cart Occupies < 18 in aisle space,
has storage area in base. Order 200c ....•••••.••••..••••.••..•. $285
Order 1105 Battery Power Supply •.•••....••..•.........•...... $1,375
Rack Adaptor (Not for use with OM 44).
Order 016-0556-00 ......." ..••..••.••••••.....•......•••••••••..••••.•• ,," $3C!O
RECOMMENDED CAMERA
Fun·Sensltivity x·y (CH 1 HOrizontal, CH 2 Vertical) 2 mV/div to 5 V/div (475), 5 mV to 10 V/div (475A) accurate
± 3%. Bandwidth is dc to at least 3 MHz. Phase difference
between amplifiers is 1· or less from dc to 1 MHz.
ORDERING INFORMATION
475 Oscilloscope ................................. $4,300
C·30BP Option 01 - General Purpose Compact Camera
Includes 016-0301·01 mounting adaptor/corrector lens.
Order C·30BP Option 01 ........................................"". $1,380
475A Oscilloscope .............................. $4,630
For further information see camera section.
DISPLAY
R475 Rackmount Oscilloscope •..•....... $4,520
CRT - 8 x 10 cm display. Horizontal and vertical centerlines
further marked in 0.2 cm increments. P31 Phosphor standard ;
Pll optional. 18 kV accelerating potential.
475 OM 44 OM 44 info on page 317 •• $4,820
R475A Rackmount Oscilloscope •••••..• $4,850
Graticule Internal, nonparallax; variable edge lighting;
markings for measurement of risetime.
475A OM 44 (order 475A 44) .•••••.••..•• $5,150
Beam Finder - Compresses trace to within graticule area for
ease in determining the location of an off·screen signal. A preset intenSity level provides a constant brightness.
Option 01 - Delete Temperature
Probe on OM 44 "" •... " ""..... " ...... " ......................•" " .. ,,. -$90
Z·Axis Input - Dc coupled, positive-going signal decreases
intenSity; 5 V pop signal causes notioeable modulation at nor·
mal intensity; dc to 50 MHz.
ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS
Ambient Temperature - Operating: - 15· C to + 55 · C. Non·
operating: - 55 · C to + 75 · C. Filtered forced air ventilation is
provided.
Altitude - Operating: to 4500 m (15,000 ft); maximum allowa·
ble ambient temperature decreased by I · C/l000 ft from 5000
to 15,000 ft . Nonoperating to 15 200 m (50,000 ft).
Vibration - Operating - 15 minutes along each of the three
axes, 0.06 cm (0.025 in) pop displacement (4 g's at 55 Hz) 10 to
55 to 10Hz in 1 minute cycles.
Humidity - Operating and nonoperating: 5 cycles (120 hours)
to 95% relative humidity referenced to MIL·E·I6400F (par 4.5.9
through 4.5.9 5.1, class four).
INSTRUMENT OPTIONS
Option 04 -
EMC Modification .................................• +$160
Option 07 - Ext Dc Operation
(Cannot be ordered with OM 44.) .........................•.."". +$245
Option 78 -
Pll Phosphor ..............••••....••........•.••...... +$35
Modification kits for field conversion of existing 475s or 475As
to Option 04, Option 07, or OM 44 equipped scopes are avail·
able. These are typically more expensive than when the option
is ordered with the instrument. Contact your Tektronix Sales
Engineer, Distributor, or Representative for information.
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORDS AND PLUG OPTIONS
Option AI -
Universal Euro 220 V/16A, 50 Hz ...•...•...•.. NC
Option A2 -
UK 240 V/13A, 50 Hz ....... " .........•.•••...•...•.. NC
Option A3 -
Australian 240 V/l0A, 50 Hz •..................... NC
Option A4 -
North American 240 V/15A. 60 Hz ..........•.. NC
The 1106 is a convenient, snap·on battery power
supply for Tektronix 455, 464, 4658, 466, 475 or
475A Oscilloscopes when the scope is ordered
with Option 07.
Output Power -
22 to 26 V de; 100 W·hours from full charge.
Charging Power Source - 90 to 132 V ac, 50 to 400 Hz; or
180 to 264 V ac, 50 to 400 Hz.
Charging Time Weight -
14 to 16 hours.
7.2 kg (16Ib).
Order 1106 Battery Pack ••••••..••..••••••• $1,000
Shock - Operating and nonoperating: 30 g's 't. sine, 11. ms
duration, two shocks per axis in each direction for a total of
12 shocks.
315
100 MHz
TRACE OSCILLOSCOPE
TEK DUAL
CALIBRATED SWEEP DELAY
Delay Time Range - 0.2 to X10 delay time/div settings of
200 ns to 0.5 s .
Differential Time Measurement Accuracy
Delay Time Setting
+lS'C to +3S'C
± 1%
Over one or more major dial divs
Less than one
m~or
dial div
+ 0.01 major dial divs
Jitter - one part or less in 50,000 (0.002%) of 10X the A
sweep timeldiv setting. One part in 20,000 when operating
from 50 Hz line.
TRIGGER
A Trigger Modes - Normal (sweep runs when triggered),
automatic (sweep runs in the absence of a triggering signal and
for signals below 30 Hz), Single Sweep (sweep nuns one time
on the first triggering event alter the reset selector is pressed).
LED lights indicate when sweep is triggered and when single
sweep is ready.
A Trigger Holdoff - Adjustable control permits a stable presentation of repetitive complex waveforms.
B Trigger Modes - B runs alter delay time (starts automatically at the end of the delay time) and B triggerable alter delay
time (runs when triggered). The B (delayed) sweep runs once,
in each of these modes, following the A sweep delay time.
Time Base A and B Trigger Sensitivity and Coupling
Coupling
To 2S MHz
At 100 MHz
Internal
0.3 div deflection
1.5 div deflection
External
External 7 10
50 mV
500 mV
150 mV
1.5 V
Dc
Ac
Requirements increase below 60 Hz
Ac LF Reject
Requirements increase below 50 kHz
Ac HF Reject
Requirements increase below 60 Hz
and above 50 kHz
465B44 Oscilloscope/DMM shown above includes DM 44 Digital Multimeter.
Jitter -
465B/DM 44
Dellection Factor at BW - 5 mV/div to 5 V/div .
1-2-5 sequence, accurate ± 3%. Uncalibrated, continuously
variable between steps and to at least 12.5 V/div . LED warning
light indicates uncalibrated setting. In cascade mode sensitivity
is = 1 mV/div.
100 MHz at 5 mV/div
2 ns/div Sweep Rate with X10 Sweep
Magnified
Display Modes - CH 1; CH 2 ADD (normal and inverted),
alternate, chopped- = 500 kHz rate, in any combination electronically switched.
Trigger View
CMRR - Common-mode rejection ratio at least 20 dB at
20 MHz for common-mode signals of 6 div or less.
Versatile Trigger Selection
Automatic Scale Factor - Probe tip deflection factors for 1X
or lOX coded probes are indicated by two readout lights behind
knob skirts. LEOs are off when channel not displayed. Ground
reference display selectable at probe (when dc coupled).
Alternate Sweep
Input Rand C -
1 MI1 ± 2%, paralleled by = 20 pF.
Maximum Input Voltage
The 4658 continues the tradition of the 465 as the
industry standard 100 MHz oscilloscope.
It is the scope most preferred for servicing mainframes and minicomputers as well as meeting the
most demanding service needs in the telecommunications, medical instrumentation, and aerospace industries.
4658 trace selection versatility allows you to
choose channel 1 and/or channel 2, sum or
difference, and A trigger view in any combination.
In addition, the 4658 has all the features of the
original 465: 5 mV/div vertical trace, delayed
sweep, the differential time/DMM option, and a
sharp, bright 8 x 10 cm CRT.
CHARACTERISTICS
Dc coupled
Ac coupled
Delay Line
waveform.
-1 5 ' C to +40 ' C
+40'C to + 55 ' C
Dc to 100 MHz, 3.5 ns
85 MHz, 4.1 ns
"Measured at - 3 dB. Bandwidth may be limited to = 20 MHz
by bandwidth limit switch.
Cascaded bandwidth is at least 50 MHz when signal out is
terminated in 50 11.
Lower - 3 dB point, ac coupling 1 X probe: 10 Hz or less. 10X
probe - 1 Hz or less.
316
250 V (dc + peak ac)
500 V
at 1 kHz or less
Permits viewing leading edge of displayed
HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION
Time Base A - 0.02 ~s/div to 0.5 s/div (1-2-5 sequence). X10
magnified extends maximum sweep rate to 2 ns/div. LED indicates X10 magnified.
Time Base B - 0 .02 ~s/div to 50 ms/div (1-2-5 sequence).
X10 magnified extends maximum sweep rate to 2 ns/div . LED
indicates X10 magnified.
Variable Time Control - Time Base A provides continuously
variable uncalibrated sweep rates between steps and to at
least 1.25 s/div. LED warning light indicates uncalibrated
setting.
Level and Slope - Internal, permits selection of triggering at
any point on the positive or negative slope of the displayed
waveform. Level adjustment through at least ± 2 V in external,
through at least ± 20 V in external 7 10.
A Sources 7 10.
Normal, CH 1, CH 2, line, external, and external
B Sources external.
Starts alter delay, normal, CH 1, CH 2, and
External Inputs - R and C = 1 MI1 paralleled by = 20 pF.
250 V (dc + peak ac) maximum input.
X-Y OPERATION
Full-sensitivity X- Y (CH 1 HOrizontal, CH 2 Vertical) 5 mV/div to 5 V/div , accurate ± 4%. Bandwidth is de to at least
4 MHz. Phase difference between amplifiers is 3' or less from
de to 50 kHz.
DISPLAY
CRT - 8 x 10 em display. Horizontal and vertical centerlines
further marked in 0.2 em increments. P31 phosphor standard ;
P11 optional. 18 kV accelerating potential.
Gratlcul. Internal, nonparallax; variable edge lighting;
markings for measurement of risetime.
Beam Finder - Compresses trace to within graticule area for
ease in locating an offscreen signal. A preset intenSity level
provides a constant brightness.
Z-Axis Inpm - Dc coupled, positive-going signal decreases
intenSity; 5 V p-p signal causes noticeable modulation at normal intensity; dc to 50 MHz.
ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS
Time Base A and B Accuracy, lull 10 cm
VERTICAL DEFLECTION
(2 IDENTICAL CHANNELS)
Bandwidth' and Risetime - (at all deflection factors from
50 11 terminated source)
250 V (dc + peak ac)
500 V (p-p ac at 1 kHz or less)
0.5 ns or less at 100 MHz and 2 ns/div.
Zero Delay A Trigger View - Electronically switched trigger
view displays the external signal used for A sweep triggering.
This provides quick verification of the signal and time comparison between a vertical signal and the trigger signal which can
be displayed simultaneously. The deflection factor is = 100
mV/div (1 V/div with external 7 10).
+20'C to +30'C
- 15'C to +55'C
Unmagnified
± 2%
± 3%
Magnified
± 3%
± 4%
Horizontal Display Modes - A, A intensified, alternate (A intensified and B delayed), B delayed. B ends A for increased
intenSity in the delayed mode. Electronic switching between intensified and delayed sweep. A sweep and B sweep may be
viewed simultaneously.
Ambient Temperature - Operating: - 15'C to +55·C. Nonoperating: - 62 ' C to + 85 · C. Filtered forced air ventilation is
provided.
Altitude - Operating : to 4500 m (15,000 It); maximum allowable ambient temperature decreased by 1' C/1OOO It from 5000
to 15,000 It. Nonoperating: to 15 200 m (50,000 It).
Vibration - Operating: 15 minute along each of the three
axes, 0.06 cm (0.025 in) p-p displacement (4 g's at 55 Hz)
10-55 to 10Hz in 1 minute cycles.
Humidity - Operating and nonoperating: 5 cycles (120 hours)
to 95·/~97 % relative humidity as specified in MIL-T-288ooB
(par 3.9.2.2).
Shock - Operating and nonoperating : 30 g's '/2 sine, 11 ms
duration, three shocks per axis in each direction for a total of
18 shocks.
TEK ~~~IES
DMM WITHIN
PORTABLE OSCILLOSCOPES
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
Amplitude Calibrator
Output Voltage
0.3 V
1% O' C to + 40' C
Output Current
30 mA
2% + 20'C to + 30' C
Frequency
",, 1 kHz
Vertical Signal Output - CH 1 vertical signal is de to at least
50 MHz (-3 dB), and ",,25 mV/div terminated into 50 II, and
",, 50 mV/div terminated into 1 Mil.
Gate Outputs - Positive gates from both time bases (", 5 V).
Power Requirements - Qulck-change line voltage selector
provides six ranges ; 110 V, 115 V, 120 V, 220 V, 230 V, and
240 V, each ± 10%. 48 to 440 Hz, 85 W maximum at 115 V
and 60 Hz. Operation from 12 or 24 V dc is available with
Option 07 .
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Cabinet
Dimensions
mm
Width (with handle)
Height
Depth (with panel cover)
Depth (handle extended)
328
157
460
516
Rackmount
In
13.1
6.2
18.1
20.3
mm
In
19.0
7.0
18.0
483
177
457
Ib
kg
Ib
Weights ""
kg
Net (w/o panel cover)
Net (with panel
cover and accessories)
Shipping
10.3
11.5
22.8
25.3
13.3
16.7
37.0
26.3
29.4
58.0
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Two P6105 lOX probes (010-6105-03); blue accessory pouch
for standard cabinet version only (016-0535-02); blue accessory pouch for DMM version only (016-0594-00); clear pouch
(016-0537-00); blue CRT light filter (337-1674-00); clear CRT
light filter (337-1674-01); ground wire (134-0016-01); two l 'kamp fuses (159-0016-00); one "1.- amp fuse (159-0042-00).
Rack models also include mounting hardware and slide out assemblies, but not pouches.
ORDERING INFORMATION
465B Oscilloscope ._."".,." •••• ,••• ,••••• "." 13,140
R465B Rackmount Oscilloscope .",,_,,_ 3,360
465B44 Oscilloscope/DMM ,., ••• '" ___ ,,.,. 3,660
INSTRUMENT OPTIONS
Option 01 -Delete Temperature Probe on
465844 """." """ .""" •. """""" ...... " ...... """"",,.,,.,,,,.,," -$90
Option 04 - EMC ModifICation """"""""""""" " """ +$160
Option 05 - TV Sync Separator (Provides
triggering on TV field and TV line) """""""""""""""" +$300
Option 07 - Ext Dc Operation
(not for 465B44) """" """"""""""".,,""""""""""""" +$245
Option 78 - Pll Phosphor """""".""",,"""",,"""",,. +$35
Modification kits for field conversion of existing 465Bs, to Option 04, Option 07, or 465B44 scopes are available. These are
typically more expensive than when the option is ordered with
the instrument. Contact your Tektronix Sales Engin_, Distributor, or Representative for information.
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORDS AND PLUG OPTIONS
Option A1 - Universal Euro 220 V/16A, 50 Hz """"""" NC
Option A2 - UK 240 V/13A, 50 Hz """""""""""""" "". NC
Option A3 - Australian 240 V/l0A, 50 Hz """ """"."",,. NC
Option A4 - North American 240 V/15A, 60 Hz """""". NC
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
P6063B
6ft
P6202
FET
Probe
2m
Current
Probe
P6022
5ft
Attenuation
Compare the OM 44 sequence with the measurement technique you may now be using. Calculating the interval from the CRT may take 10 times
as long.
Voltage, resistance, and temperature measurements are also much easier with a OM 44equipped 400 Series Oscilloscope. The OM 44
measures dc voltage with 0.1% accuracy, resistance with 0.3% accuracy, and temperature from
-55°C to 150°C. Previously, you would have
needed a separate DMM and digital thermometer
in addition to your oscilloscope. Now, these features are combined in one small, inexpensive, integral package.
The OM 44 is available as a factory installed option on the 464, 4658, 466, 475 and 475A Portables. It adds Delta Delayed Sweep and independent DMM capabilities to these 400 Series
Scopes. Rrst, consider your bandwidth, sensitivity, storage, and price requirements . Then specify
the OM 44 Option for simple and accurate digital
measurements.
OM 44 CHARACTERISTICS
Timing Me ••urements
Differential Time Delay Accuracy
+1S'C to +3S'C
Used with 464, 465B,
466, 475, and 475A
Within 1% of
reading
+ 1 count
Input
Impedance
Band·
width'
1 Mil 105 pF
6 MHz
lX
Switchable
lOX
10 Mil 14 pF
90 MHz
lOX
10 Mil 2 pF
100 MHz
100X Head
10 Mil 2 pF
100 MHz
Ac Head
10 Mil 4 pF
100 MHz
Celibratlon
Insertion
Impedance
1 mNmV
10mNmV
(Selectable)
0.031l@ 1 MHz
Increasing to
0.211 @ 120 MHz
85 MHz
'Bandwldths are measured at the upper - 3 dB and apply only
fa the cable lengfh shown. generally, shorter cable lengths in·
crease bandwidth.
-1S'C to +SS'C
used with 464,
4658, and 466
used with 475
and 475A
within 2.5%
of reading
± 1 count
within 1.5%
of reading
+ 1 count
1/Tlme Accuracy
+1S'C to +3S'C
Probes
Probe
Type
OM 44 DIFFERENTlAL-TIME/DMM OPTION
1% timing measurements were never this easy!
With the DM 44 Option, available on five Tektronix
400 Series Portables, time intervals can be read
directly from the 3 1/2 digit LED Screen. Simply use
the Delay Time control and the totime dial to posi·
tion intensified spots at the beginning and end of
the interval you wish to measure. Next, switch to
delayed sweep and use the totime dial to superimpose the end of the interval on the beginning.
Then read its differential time or frequency from
the 3 1/2 digit LED panel. It's that simple. Time intervals are accurate to 1% and the frequency of
periodic waveforms can be read out with 2% accuracy by simply pushing the 1/Time button.
Used with 464, 465B,
466, 475, and 475A
Within 2% of
reading
+ 1 count
-1S'C to +SS'C
used with 464,
465B, and 466
used with 475
and 475A
within 3.5%
of reading
± 1 count
within 3%
of reading
± 1 count
DC Voltage
Ranges - 0-200 mY, 0-2 V, 0-20 V, 0-200 V, 0-1 .2 kV.
Resolution - 100 !lV .
Accuracy - Within 0.1% of reading ± 1 count.
Input Resistance - 10 Mil for all ranges. Removal of an internal strap increases resistance to "" 1000 Mil on 200 mV and
2 V ranges.
Normal·Mode Rejection Ratio - At least 60 dB at 50 Hz and
60 Hz.
Common Mode Rejection Ratio - At least 100 dB at dc,
80 dB at 50 Hz and 60 Hz.
Recycle Rale - ",,3.3 measurements/so
Response Time - Within 0.5 S.
Maximum Sala Input Voltage - ± 1200 V de + peak ac
between + and common inputs or between + and chassis.
± 500 V (de + peak ac) common floating voltage between
common and chassis.
Re.l.tance
Range. - 0-200 II, 0-2 kll, 0-20 kll, 0-200 kll, 0-2 Mil and
0-20 Mil.
Re.olutlon - 0.1 II.
Accuracy
Ranga
Accuracy
200 11
within 0.25% ± 1 count
+ probe resistance
2 kll, 20 kll, 200 kll, 2 Mil
within 0.25% ± 1 count
20 Mil
within 0.3% ± 1 count
Recycle Rate - .. 3.3 measurements/so
Re.pon.. Tlme
200 11 through
200 kll ranges
within 1 s
2 Mil ranges
20 Mil ranges
within 5 s
Maximum Sale Input Voltage common inputs.
120 V RMS between + and
Temperature U.lng 1'1430 Probe
Range - - 55 ' C to + 150· C.
Accuracy
OM 44
Temperature
P8430
Tip Temperature
Accuracy
(Probe
Calibrated
to OM 44)
+ 15' C to
+35'C
- 5S ' C to
+ 150' C
±2'C
- 55 ' C to
+ 125 ' C
+ 125' C to
+ 150' C
± 3' C
- 15' C to
+ 55 ' C
± 4'C
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
One pair, Test Leads (003-0120-00); one P6430 Temperature
Probe (010-6430-00).
ORDERING INFORMATION
465B OM 44 (Order 4658 44) ." •• " ••••••
475 OM 44 Oscilloscope/DMM "."." •••
475A OM 44 (Order 475A 44) " •• "." ••••
466 OM 44 Oscilloscope/DMM ••• "." •••
464 OM 44 Oscilloscope/DMM •• " •••••••
$3,660
$4,820
$5,150
$7,220
$6,215
INSTRUMENT OPTIONS
Option 01 - Delete Temperature Probe ",,"",,",,"""" -$90
Modification kits for field conversion of existing 464s, 4655,
466s, 475s, and 475As to OM 44~uipped scopes are available. These are typically more expensive than when the option
is ordered with the instrument. Contact your Tektronix Sales
Engineer, Distributor, or Representative for information.
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORDS AND PLUG OPTIONS
Option A1 - Universal Euro 220 V/16A, 50 Hz .............. NC
Option A2 - UK 240 V/13A, 50 Hz ................................. NC
Option A3 - Australian 240 V/l0A, 50 Hz ...................... NC
Option A4 - Nor1h American 240 V/15A, 60 Hz ............. NC
For information on hood., cove,., filter., cart., battery
packs, rack adapter, and camera., see previous page.
317
100 MHz DUAL TRACE
STANDARD OSCILLOSCOPE
TEK TRI-SERVICE
CHARACTERISTICS
VERTICAL SYSTEM
Bandwidth and Risetime - Dc to at least 100 MHz (- 3 dB)
and rise time 3.5 ns or less for de coupling and - IS · C to
+ SS·C. For ac coupling the lower 3 dB point is 10 Hz or less
with a 1X probe and 1 Hz or less with a 1OX probe.
Bandwidth Limit Mode -
Bandwidth limited to 20 MHz.
Deflection Factor - 5 mV/div to 5 V/div in 10 steps (1 -2-5
sequence). Dc accuracy: ± 2% O· C to + 40 · C; ± 3%, - IS · C
to O· C, + 40· C to + SS · C. Uncalibrated, continuously variable
between settings, and to at least 12.SV/div.
Common-Mode Rejection Ratio - 25:1 to 10 MHz ; 10:1
from 10 to 50 MHz, 6 cm sinewave, (ADD Mode with CH 2
inverted.)
Display Modes - CH I, CH 2 (normal or inverted), altemate,
chopped (250 kHz rate), added, X-Yo
Input Rand C -
1 Mil ±2%, = 20 pF.
Maximum Input Voltage - Dc or ac coupled : ± 2S0 V de +
peak ac at 50 kHz, derated above 50 kHz.
Cascaded Operation - (CH 2 Out into CH 1), Bandwidth, dc
to at least 40 MHz. Sensitivity, = 1 mV/div when terminated in
50 II at CH 1 input with both CH 1 and CH 2 V/div switches set
to 5 mV/div.
HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION
Time Ba.e A - 0.5 s/div to 0.05 ~s/div in 22 steps (1-2-5
sequence). Xl0 magnifier extends fastest sweep rate to 5
ns/div.
Time Base B - 50 ms/div to 0.05 ~s/div in 19 steps (1-2-5
sequence). Xl0 magnifier extends fastest sweep rate to 5
ns/div.
Unmagnified
Magnified
+ 20·C to + 30 · C
± 2%
± 3%
- IS · C to + S5 · C
± 3%
± 4%
Mixed Sweep Accuracy
A Portion: ± 4%.
B Portion: ± 2%.
465M (AN/USM)42S (V) 1
Fully Provisioned through the Federal
Supply System
Meets MIL-T -28800, Type II, Class 4,
Style C for the Environmental
Conditions Listed
100 MHz at 5 mV/div, Dual Trace,
Delayed Sweep
Accepted and Specified by All
Branches of the Military and by
Several Civil Agencies
Horizontal Display Modes by A, and mixed.
If you're a contractor involved in designing and
specifying systems for the govemment, here's a
100 MHz oscilloscope that should top your recommended support equipment list-the
Tektronix 465M Portable Oscilloscope.
The Tektronix 465M is the AN/USM-425 (v) 1 triservice standard 100 MHz portable oscilloscope.
The instrument is accepted, fully provisioned, and
supported throughout the Federal Supply System. Because the MIL manuals and support
documentation are already complete, your required paper work is greatly reduced and it's
much simpler for the government to accept your
recommendations .
You can now order the 465M directly from your
Tektronix Sales Engineer with the AN/USM 425 (v)
1 nomenclature by simply specifying option 49.
This assures the fastest possible delivery of your
ANI USM 425 (v) 1.
A, A intensified by B, B delayed
CALIBRATED SWEEP DELAY
Calibrated Delay Time - Continuous from 0.1
5 s after the start of the delaying A sweep.
~s
to at least
Diffarentlal Time Measurement Accuracy - For measurements of two or more major dial divs: + IS · C to + 3S · C, 1%
+ 0.1 % of full scale
O· C to + SS · C, additional 1% allowed.
Jitter - 1 part or less in 20,000 (0.005%) of Xl0 the A TIMEIDIV switch setting.
TRIGGER
A Trigger Modes - Normal Sweep is triggered by an intemal
vertical amplifier signal, extemal Signal, or internal power line
signal. A bright baseline is provided only in presence of trigger
signal. Automatic: A bright baseline is displayed in the absence
of input signals. Triggering is the same as normal-mode above
40 Hz. Single (main time base only): The sweep occurs once
with the same triggering as normal. The capability to re-arm the
sweep and illuminate the reset lamp is provided. The sweep
activates when the next trigger is applied for rearming.
A Trigger Holdoff - Increases A sweep hoIdoff time to at
least Xl0 fhe TIME/DIV settings, except at 0.2 s and 0.5 S.
Triggering Sensitivity and Coupling
Coupling
Dc Intemal
Extemal
318
From 30 Hz to 25 MHz
At 100 MHz
0.3 div
50 mV
1.0 div
150 mV
Ac
Attenuates signals below 30 Hz
Ac LF Reject
Attenuates signals below 15 kHz
Ac HF Reject
Attenuates signals below 50 kHz
400
TEK
SERIES
Jitter - 0.5 ns or less at 100 MHz and 5 ns/division. - 15' C
to + 55 ' C.
Trigger View - View external and internal trigger signals; Ext
tX . 100 mV/dlvlslon. Ext + 10. 1 V/division.
Level Ind Slope - Internal. permits triggering at any point on
the positive or negative slopes of the displayed waveform. External. permits continuously variable triggering on any level between + 1.0 V and - 1.0 V on either slope of the trigger signal.
A Sources - CH 1. CH 2. Normal (all display modes triggered
by the combined waveforms from CH 1 and 2). LINE. EXT. EXT
+ 10.
B Sources - B starts after delay time; CH 1. CH 2, Normal.
EXT. EXT + 10.
X-Y OPERATION
Sensitivity - 5 mV/divison to 5 V/division in 10 steps (1-2-5
sequence) through the vertical system. Continuously variable
between steps and to at least 12.5 V/division.
X-Axis Blndwldth -
Dc to at least 4 MHz.
Y-Axis Blndwldth -
Dc to 100 MHz.
X-Y Phlse -
< 3 ' from dc to 50 kHz.
SIGNAL OUTPUTS
A Glte -
= 5.0 V positive-going pulse.
B Glte -
= 5.0 V positive.
DISPLAY
CRT 5 in, rectangular tube; 8 x 10
Phospltor.
em
display; P31
Grllieule - Inlernal, non-parallax ; illuminated. 8 x 10 em
markings with horizontal and vertical centerlines further
marked in 0.2 cm increments. 10% and 90% markings for risel ime measuremenls.
Grilleule illumination - Provides variable illumination from
to greater than oplimum iIIuminalion.
o
Belm Finder - Limits the display to within the gratcule area
and provides a visible display when pushed.
Z-Axis Input - A female BNC connector is provided to permit
intensty modulation over the de to 15 MHz range. At optimum
intensity. intensity modulalion is accomplished wilh a Z-axis
Input of from - 5 V (to inlensify) to + 5 V (10 blank). Continuous
operation maximum input shall be ± 50 V (dc + peak ac).
ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS
EMC - Complies with the following limits as specified in
MIL-T-288ooB. CEOI (10 kHz to 20 kHz only), CE03, CS01 ,
CS02. CS06, REOI (relaxed 10 dB at fundamental , third harmonic. and fifth harmonic of the power source frequency) RE02
(limited to 7 GHz), RSOI and RS03 (limited to 1 GHz).
Ambient Temperllure - Operating: - 15' C to + 55 ' C. Nonoperating: - 62 ' C to + 85' C.
Altitude - Operating: to 4500 m (15,000 ft) . Maximum operating temperature decreased 1 ' C/l.oo0 ft above 5.000 ft . Nonoperating: to 15 200 m (50.000 ft).
Vlbrltlon - Operating: along each of the three major axes:
a. cycling 5 to 25 to 5 Hz for 10 minutes at 0.025 in p-p;
b. cycling 25 to 55 to 25 Hz for 5 minutes at 0.020 in p-p;
e. dwelled at 55 Hz for 10 minutes at 0.020 in p-p.
Total vibration time 75 minutes.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dimensions
mm
In
Width (w ith handle)
Width (w/o handle)
Height (with feet)
Depth (including panel cover)
Depth (handle extended)
347
317
179
546
611
13.6
12.5
7.0
24.4
24 .1
Weight ..
kg
Net (w/o cover and accessories)
Net (with panel cover,
modules. and accessorieS)
Shipping
10.9
12.2
24.0
27.0
Ib
15.5
34.2
Transportation - Meets the limits of National Safe Transit
Committee test procedure 1A with a 30 in drop.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
One accessory and cover assembly (200-2055-01); one 1X
probe (010-6101-00); two lOX probes (010-6104-00); three
pincer tips (013-0107-03); two UHF male to BNC female adaptors (103-0015-00); two BNC male to UHF female adaptors
(103-0032-00); one T connector (103-0030-00); one BNC male
to dual binding post adaptor (103-0035-00); three probe tip
adaptors (103-0051 -01); three banana tips (134-0013-00);
three 6 in. leads w ith spring clips (175-0124-01 ); three hooked
probe tips (206-0105-00); one blue filter (337-2122-00); one
clear filter (337-2122-01) ; three miniature alligator clips
(344-0046-00); one power cord (161 -0118-00).
ORDERING INFORMATION
465M Portable Oscilloscope ............... $3,860
Option 49 -
AN/USM 425 (v)1 ........................................ NC
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORDS AND PLUG OPTIONS
Option AI - Universal Euro 220 V/16A, 50 Hz ............... NC
Option A2 - UK 240 V/13A. 50 Hz ................................. NC
Option A3 - Australian 240 V/1 OA, 50 Hz ...................... NC
Option A4 - North American 240 V/15A, 60 Hz .......•..... NC
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Probe - P6022 Current Probe, 9 ft cable with termination.
Order 015-0135-01 .......................................................... $360
Folding Polarized Viewing Hood
Order 016-0180-00 ............................................................ $40
Mesh Filter - Improves contrast and EMC filtering .
Order 378-0726-01 ............................................................ $55
SCOPE-MOBILE- Cart - Occupies < 18 in of aisle space.
Order 200c ...•.................................•............................... $295
Reck Adeptor (Credle Mount) Kit - Rack height 7 in, depth
18.75 in, width 19 in. Order 040-0825-01 ....................... $350
1105 BATTERY POWER SUPPLY
The 11 05 is a rugged . portable power suppiy suitable for
powering virtually any portable oscilloscope in the field. The
11 05 is not recommended for the T912.
Frequency -
Squarewave, 60 Hz ± 1 0%.
Amplitude - "" 108 V peak. operating from 24 V de external
or 22 V internal charge. = 137.5 V peak. operating from 28 V
de external or 30 V internal charge.
Amplitude (Option 01) - = 216 V peak, from 24 V de external
or 22 V internal charge. ",275 V peak . operating from 30 V de
extemal or 28 V internal charge.
Charging Power Source - 100 to 132 V ac. 48 to 440 Hz (or
internal connections expand range). Option 01 - 200 to 264 V
ac. 48 to 440 Hz (or internal connections expand range).
Battery Operating Time -
",, 100 W hours.
Recommended Maximum Output Current Weight -
0.9 A.
8.8 kg (19.5Ib).
ORDERING INFORMATION
Order 1105 Battery Power Supply ..... $1,375
Option 01 -
230 V Operation .......................................... NC
RECOMMENDED CAMERA
C-30 BP Option 01 Generel Purpose Camera - Includes
016-0301 -01 mounting adaptor/corrector lens.
Order C-30BP Option 01 Camera ................................ $1 ,402
For further Information see camera section.
Humidity - Five cycles (120 hours) referenced to MIL-E16400F (operating and nonoperating).
Shock - Operating: 30 g·s. '/2 sine, 11 ms duration, three
shocks each direction per axis for a total of 18 shocks.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
Cilibrator Output Voltage + 55'C. Frequency = 1 kHz.
1.0 V ± 1.0% to - 15' C to
Chlnnel 2 Slgnll Output - Through main module CH 2 OUT
connector. Output voltage : ", 50 mV/division into 1 Mil .
", 25 mV/division into 50 Il. Output resistance: ",50 Il. Bandwidth: Dc to at least 40 MHz into 50 Il.
Powar Requirements -100 V to 132 V RMS. 200 V to 264 V
RMS. 48 Hz to 440 Hz. Maximum power consumption 60 W at
115 V, 60 Hz.
Tektronix offers servioe training classes on the 400 Series Oscilloscopes. For further training information, contact your local
Sales/Service Office or request a copy of the Tektronix Service
Training Schedule on the return card in the center of this
catalog.
319
2300
100 MHz FIELD SERVICE
TRACE OSCILLOSCOPES
TEK DUAL
SERIES
Display Modes - CH 1, CH 2, ADD CH 2 (normal and inverted), alternate, chopped (= 275 kH z rate).
2335
CMRR - Common-mode rejection ratio at least 10:1 at
50 MHz for common-mode signals of 6 div or less.
Input Rand C - I Mil ± 2% paralleled by 20 pF ± 10%.
Maximum Input Voltage - Ac or de coupled, 400 V (dc +
peak ac) or 500 V p-p ac at I kHz or less.
HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION
Time Base A - 0.05 #s/div to 0.5 s/div (1-2-5 sequence). Xl0
magnified extends maximum sweep rate to 5 ns/div.
Time Base B - 0.05 #s/div to 50 ms/div (I -2-5 sequence).
Xl0 magnified extends maximum sweep rate to 5 ns/div.
Variable Time Control - Time base A provides continuou sly
variable uncalibrated sweep rates between steps and to at
least 1.25 s/div.
Time Base A and B Accuracy full 10 div
+20' to +30'C
-15' to +55'C
Unmagnified
± 2%
± 3%
Magnified
± 3%
± 4%
Display Modes -
A, A intensified by B, B delayed.
CALIBRATED SWEEP DELAY
Delay Time Range - Continuous from 50 ns to at least 5 s
after start of delaying sweep.
Differential Time Measurement Accuracy
+15' to +35'C
2335
+
2336/2337
om
0.75%
5 major dial div
± 1% of reading
± 1 count
-15' to +55'C
1.5%
+ 0.015 major dial div
± 2.5% of reading
± 1 count
Jiller - I part or less in 20,000 (0.005%) of 10 times the
A SWEEP TIME/DIV setting.
TRIGGERING, A AND B
A Trigger Mode - Normal (sweep runs when triggered). Automatic (sweep free runs in absence of a triggering signal and for
signals below 30 Hz). Single Sweep (sweep runs once on first
triggering event after reset selector is pressed). LED indicates
when sweep is triggered and when single sweep is ready.
Sensitivity and Coupling
2335/2336/2337
Dc to 100 MHz Bandwidth
5 mV/div to 5 V/div
5 ns/div Sweep Rate with X10 Magnifier
Rugged for Field Service
Compact and lightweight for ultra-portability,
these oscilloscopes are designed and built for onsite trouble-shooting . The 2335, 2336, and 2337
are useful for high speed logic and digital applications. They feature an innovative and protective
flip-top cover that doubles as a front panel with
ATime on the 2336 and ATime/DMM on the 2337
versions. The entire outside case of all three
instruments is made of durable, one-piece aluminum and the front panels are coated with scratch
resistant plastic. When the flip-tops are latched
shut, the entire scope can withstand the abuse
and heavy usage of field service environments.
Vertical channels have calibrated deflection factors from 5 mV/div to 5 V/div with a variable gain
control to increase the sensitivity to at least
2 mV/div. An internal delay line permits observation of the leading edge of a waveform. Variable
sweep speeds range from 0.5 s/div to 50.0 ns/div
and a 10X magnifier can increase the sweep rate
to 5 ns/div. An auto-trigger mode allows triggering
on waveforms with repetitive rates down to approximately 10 Hz. The sweep rate will run freely
and provide a base line trace in the absence of
an adequate trigger signal.
320
Many exterior features have been incorporated
into these new ultra-portable scopes to make
them fast and convenient to use. The CRT produces bright, high resolution traces that are
readily visible in most light conditions. The
ATime/DMM readouts are distinct, backlighted
Liquid Crystal Displays (LCD) for clear viewing in
any lighting condition. All knobs and switches
have been located in logical groupings to avoid
errors and delays during operation. And for the
2336 and 2337 models, ATiming and DMM display
and controls are in the hinged , fliptop cover.
All three oscilloscopes come with detachable
power cord, integral EMI shielding, and an accessories pouch. They are manufactured to withstand impact shocks of 50 g's, almost twice that
of other portable scopes from Tektronix. This
ruggedness meets MIL-T-28800, Class 3 environmental requirements for aerospace and military
qualification.
CHARACTERISTICS
The following characteristics are common to the 2335, 2336,
and 2337 Oscilloscopes except where indicated.
VERTICAL DEFLECTION
(TWO IDENTICAL CHANNELS)
Bandwidth' and Risetime
-15to +40'C
+40 to +55'C
Dc to at least 100 MHz,
3.5 ns
Dc to alleast 85 MHz,
4.15 ns
·Measured at - 3 dB point at al/ deflection factors from a
50-a source terminated in 50 a. Bandwidth may be limited to
",, 20 MHz by bandwidth limit switch.
Lower - 3 dB Point (ac coupling) IX probe lOX probe: I Hz or less.
10 Hz or less ;
Deflection Factor - 5 mV/div to 5 V/div. 1-2-5 sequence, accurate ± 3%. Uncalibrated, continuously variable between
steps and to at least 2 mV/div.
Coupling
To 25 MHz
At 100 MHz
Internal
0.3 div deflection
1.5 div deflection
External
External -;- 10
50 mV
500 mV
150 mV
1.5 V
Dc
Ac
Requirements increase below 60 Hz
Ac LF Reject
Requirements increase below 50 kHz
Ac HF Reject
Requirements increase above 50 kHz
A Trigger Hold Off - Adjustable control permits a stable presentation of repetitive waveforms.
to TIME B Trigger Modes (2336 and 2337 only) - Provides
two intensified zones on the CRT trace for differential time
measurements. Time difference between the two intensified
zones is determined by B DELAY TIME POSITION and ATIME
POSITION controls, and is displayed on the LCD readout.
RUNS AFTER DELAY - B Sweep starts immediately after the
delay time selected by the DELAY TIME POSITION control and
is independent of B trigger signal.
TRIGGER ABLE AFTER ADJUSTABLE DELAY TIME - The
B Sweep Trigger is sourced from a composite of CH I and CH
2; CH 1 only, 2 only or from the EXT Trigger input connector.
Jiller - 1.0 ns or less at 100 MHz and 5 ns/div.
A Trigger View - A spring loaded pushbutton overrides other
vertical controls to display the Signal used to trigger the
A Sweep. This control provides quick verification of the (trigger) signal and permits a time comparison between the vertical
input signal and the trigger signal. Deflection Factor is
100 mV/div ± 40% (I V/div with EXT -;- 10).
Level and Slope - Internal, permits selection of triggering at
any point on positive or negative slope of vertical input signal.
Level adjustment through at least ± I V in external, through at
least ± I 0 V in external -;- 10.
TEK
A Sources 10.
2300
SERIES
Vertical Mode, CH I , CH 2, LIN E, EXT, EXT -;-
B Sources (2336 and 2337 only) - ~ Time ru ns after delay,
Vertical Mode, CH I , CH 2, EXT (All modes ac coupled).
External Inputs - R and C 1 Mil :t 10%, 20 pF :t 30%. 400 V
(dc + peak ac) or 500 V ac pop at 1 kHz or less.
AC VOLTAGE
Full Scale Ranges - 2 V (auto-ranging to 200 mY): 200 V
(auto-ranging to 20 V): and 350 V.
Crest Factor scale) Six.
(When peak voltage input is < 3 times full
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
Accuracy·
X-V OPERATION
+ 15· to + 3S · C
Fuli Sensitivity X-Y (CH 1 Horizontal, CH 2 Vertical) 5 mV/dlv to 5 V/div (1-2-5 sequence), accurate :t 5% from O· to
+ 40 · C, accurate :t 8% from - 15· to + SS · C . X-axis bandWidth is dc to at least 2 MHz. Y-ax is bandwidth is de to at least
100 MHz. Phase difference between amplifiers is 3 · or less
from dc to 200 kHz .
- 15· to + IS · C
Add ± O.OS% for every · C below + IS· C
+ 35 · to + SS · C
Add ± O.OS% for every ·C above + 3S · C
Within ± 3%, ± 6counts' , 20Hzt020kHz
'Non sinewaves: Derate to 50 Hz to 20 kHz. For crest (actors
t % o( reading.
> 3, add + 0, -
DISPLAY
Input Impedance - Resistance 10 Mil ± 0.25% in series with
input blocking cap. CapaCitance (20 V, 200 V, and 350 V range)
< 150 pF: (200 mY, 2 V range) < 220 pF.
CRT - 8 X 10 div (8 mm/div) display. Horizontal and vertical
centerlines further marked in 0.2 div increments. P31 Phosphor
standard . 18 kV accelerating potential.
Common-Mode Rejection Ratio - 60 dB minimum at SO and
60 Hz, 2 V range : 53 dB minimum at SO and 60 Hz, 200 VI and
300 V range.
Graticule - Internal, nonparalla x , non-illuminated : markings
for measurement of risetime.
Response Time - Within 3 s (no autorange) : within 9 s (up
range) : within 7 s (down range) .
Beam Finder - Compresses trace to within graticule area to
locate an off screen signal.
Maximum Input Voltage - 500 V (dc + peak ac) at 60 Hz
(between positive and negative inputs or between either input
and ground).
Z-Axis Input - Positive-going, dc coupled signal decreases
intensity : 5 V pop signal causes noticeable modulation at normal intensity : dc to 20 MHz.
RESISTANCE
Full Scale Ranges - 2 kll (auto-ranging to 200 Il): 200 kll
(auto-ranging to 20 kll); 20 Mil (auto-ranging to 2 Mil).
Resolution - 0.1 Il.
Accuracy
DC VOLTAGE
Full Scale Ranges - 2 V (Auto-ranging to 200 mY): 200 V
(auto-ranging to 20 V): and 500 V.
Resolution -
100 " Vat 200 mV full scale.
Accuracy
+ 15 · to + 3S · C
With in :t o.1S% of reading ± one count
- 15· to + IS · C
Add 0.01 % for every · C below + IS· C
+ 35 · to + SS · C
Add ± O.OI % for every · C above + 3S · C
> 80% Relative
Humidity
Add ± 0 .25% of read ing ± 3 counts
Input Resistance -
10M!! ± 0.25%.
Rejection Ratio - Normal-Mode 60 dB minutes at SO and
60 Hz. Common-Mode 100 dB minutes at dc, 60 dB minutes at
SO and 60 Hz.
Response Time - With in 3 s (no autorange): within 9 s (up
range): within 7 s (down range).
Maximum Input Voltage - 500 V (dc + peak ac) at 60 Hz
(between positi ve and negative inputs or between either input
and ground).
Amplitude Calibrator - 0.2 V accurate :t 1% from O· to
+ 40 · C , ± 1.5% from - 15· to + SS · C .
Power Requirement. - Quick-change selector for operation
from 100 V to 132 V ac or 200 to 250 V ac, 48 to 440 Hz .
Maximum power consumption is 60 W at 132 V, 48 Hz. Typical
power consumption is 35 W at 115 V , 60 Hz. Option 03 provides operation from 90 to 115 V ac or 180 to 230 V ac, 48 to
440 Hz.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dimensions
mm
Width
Width (with handle)
Height (without pouch)
Height (with feet and pouch)
Depth (with front cover
Depth (handle extended)
274
315
135
210
430
528
Weight. (2335)
kg
Net (no accessories or pouch)
Net, Rackadapted Opt 1 R
Net (with accessories and pouch)
Shipping, Domestic
Shipping, Export
7 .7
8 .3
8 .6
10.6
14.7
+ 15· to + 3S · C
Within ± O.S% ± 1 count + 0.4 Il
Weight. (2336)
kg
- 15· to + IS · C
Add 0.05% for every · Cbelow + IS · C
Net (without accessories and pouch)
Net (with accessories and pouch)
Shipping
7 .9
8 .8
10.9
Weights (2337)
kg
Net (without accessories and pouch)
Net (with accessories and pouch)
Shipping
8 .0
8 .9
10.9
+ 35 · to + SS · C
Add 0.05% for every · C above + 3S · C
> 80%
Add ± 1% of reading ± 8 counts
Relative
Humidity
DIGITAL MULTI METER (2337 only)
"The 2335 Oscilloscope meets all environmental requirements
MIL- T-28800, Class 3. The 2336 and 2337 Oscilloscopes
meet the environmental requirements o( MIL- T-28800, Class 3
except as indicated herein to avoid potential damage to the
LCD readout.
o(
Response Time - < 4 s.
Maximum Input Voltage - 500 V (dc + peak ac) at 60 Hz
(between positive and negative inputs or between either input
and ground).
ENVIRONMENTAL CAPABILITIES'
Operating Temperature Range - - 15· to + SS · C (forced
air ventilation during normal operation).
Operating Temperature Range, Rackadapted (2335 Option
1R only) - Temperature inside equipment rack must be between - 15 and + 55 · C. 2335 exaust fan temperature must
not exceed + 6S · C .
Storage Temperature Range (2335 only) - 62 · to
+ 8S · C .
Storage Temperature Range (2336 and 2337) - - 40 · to
+ 80· C.
Operating Altitude Range - Sea level to 4500 m (15 ,000 ft).
Nonoperating Altitude Range - Sea level to 15 000 m
(50,000 ft).
Vibration, Structural Integrity - Test samples were SUbJected to sinusoidal vibration in the X, Y, and Z-axes with the frequency varied from 10Hz to 55 Hz to 10Hz in one minute
cycles for a duration of 15 minutes. Total displacement was
0.025 in pop at (4 g ' s at (55 Hz).
Shock, Operating and Nonoperating - Test samples were
subjected to 3 shocks, both directions along each axis (X , Y.
and Z) for a total of 18 shocks. Peak acceleration of each
shock was 50 g 's, '12 sine.
Humidity, 2335 only, Operating and Nonoperating - Test
samples were exposed to 120 hrs (5 cycles) of 95% relative
humidity as specified in MIL-T-288ooB Paragraph 3 .9 .2.2.
Humidity, 2336 and 2337 OSCilloscopes, Operating - Test
samples were subjected to 90% relative humidity at SS · C for a
maximum of 72 hours.
Humidity 2336 and 2337 DMM, Operating - Test samples
were subjected to 90% relative humidity at 3S · C for a maximum of 24 hours and to 70% relative humidity at SO · C for a
maximum of 24 hours.
Humidity 2336 and 2337 Oscilloscope and DMM, Nonoperating - Test samples were subjected to 90% relative humidity
at 60 · C for 72 hours.
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) - Test samples were
found in compliance with the Class 3 requirements of
MIL- STD-461 A using procedural steps outlined in
MIL-STD-462 .
(Increase RS03 requirements from 1 Vi m to 10 V i m) for RE01 ,
use 500 Hz to 30 kHz in place of 30 Hz to 30 kHz.)
in
10.8
12.4
5.3
8.3
17.0
20.8
Ib
17.0
18.3
19.0
23.5
32.5
Ib
17.5
19.5
24.0
Ib
17.6
19.6
24 .1
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Two P6108 lOX Probes (010-6108-03); accessory pouch
(016-0674-00); zip lock accessory pouch (016-0537-00); blue
CRT implosion shield (337-2760-00) installed, clear CRT implosion shield (337-2781-00); two lA fuses (159-0022-00); '/2 A
fuse (159-0025-00) : power cord (161-0104-00). 2337 also includes test lead pair (012-0941-00).
Rackmount 2335 Option lR
ORDERING INFORMATION
2335 Oscilloscope ............................... $2,550
2336 Oscilloscope wjth t:.Time ....••...... $2,845
2337 Oscilloscope with t:.Time
and DMM •.•.....••.•...•..••.•.....•..............•• $3,145
Option 1R Option 03 -
OPTIONS
Rack Conversion (2335 only) ................ + $210
100/200 V, ac nominal, 48 to 440 Hz ......... NC
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORDS & PLUG OPTIONS
Option AI - Universal Euro 220 V/ 16A, SO Hz ..............
Option A2 - UK 240 V/13 A , 50 Hz ................................
Option A3 - Australian 240 V/ l0A, SO Hz ......................
Option A4 - North American 240 VIS A, 60 Hz .............
NC
NC
NC
NC
321
MHz
TRACE OSCILLOSCOPES
TEK 60DUAL
2213
2213/2215
Dc to 60 MHz Bandwidth
Light Weight
Easy to Use
2 mV Sensitivity
Advanced Trigger System
5 ns /div Sweep Speed
Delayed Sweep Measurements
Large, Bright CRT
New 10X Probes Included
Two 60 MHz, dual trace oscilloscopes from
Tektronix offer unprecedented value in both initial
and life cycle costs. They are ideal everywhere
general purpose scopes are needed.
These oscilloscopes provide unexcelled performance in a small light-weight package; 6.1 kilograms (13.5 Ib). With pouch and front cover, only
6.8 kilograms (15 Ib).
X-V operation is simple and easy to use . Both
vertical input channels (CH 1 and CH 2) can be
used through their full range of sensitivity
settings. Vertical sensitivities range from 2 mV to
10 V/div. Sweep speeds range from 0.5 seconds
per division to 50 nanoseconds per division . A
10X magnification provides 5 nanoseconds per
division.
A pushbutton beam finder allows easy scope
setups. The scope bezel accepts a Tektronix
C-5C Scope Camera with graticule illuminating
flash (Option 04).
The advanced triggering system features true
vertical mode alternate triggering; both the 2213
and 2215 will trigger alternately even with unrelat-
ed signals. Other features include variable trigger
holdoff, TV line and TV field triggering at any
sweep speed, and an enhanced auto mode. On
the 2215, the dual time base operates in either
run after A or trigger after A. The latter permits
jitter-free B measurements.
The 2213's single time base delay provides the
user with the performance of intensified and
delayed sweep operations at a low price. Where
dual time base performance is required, the 2215
delivers it with alternate sweep switching. The
2215 can display four traces; vertical channels
1 and 2 at the A sweep rate , and vertical
channels 1 and 2, delayed, at the B sweep rate.
Both scopes also incorporate new auto-intensity
and auto-focus circuits that provide convenient
operation over a wide range of sweep speeds.
Low life cycle cost is brought about by the
inherent reliability of the new scopes. The parts
count and cabling have been greatly reduced as
compared to older designs. Even the traditional
line transformer and line voltage selector switches have been eliminated, thanks to a new highefficiency power supply. The advantages of
these power supply improvements are that the
2213 and 2215 will operate from mains voltages
of 90 to 250 Volts RMS at frequencies from 48 to
440 Hz. Additional reliability also results from
superior mechanical design and packaging, soldered-in components, absolute minimum of connectors and very low power consumption .
CHARACTERISTICS
The following electrical characteristics are common to both instruments except where noted:
VERTICAL DEFLECTION
(2 IDENTICAL CHANNELS)
Bandwidth" and Ri.etime - (At all deflection factors from 50
!l terminated source).
O'C to +40'C
Dc to 60 MHz, 20 mV/div
to 10 VIdiv. 5.8 ns reduced
to 50 MHz for 2 mV to
10 mV/div , 7 ns
'Measured at - 3 dB.
322
eo "'" OIlCa.L06COP£
+40'C to +50'C
50 MHz, 7 ns
Deflection Factor - 2 mV/div to 10 V/div ± 3% ( + 20' C to
+ 30 · C) or ± 4% (O ' C to + 50·C).
1-2-5 sequence. Uncalibrated, continuously variable between
steps to at least 25 V/div.
Display Modes - CH 1. CH 2, CH 2 ADD (normal and inverted), alternate, chopped = 250 kHz rate, electronically
switched.
.
CMRR - Common-mode rejection ratio at least 10: 1 at
10 MHz for common-mode signals of 6 division or less.
Input Rand C - 1 Mil ± 2% paralleled by = 30 pF.
Maximum Input Voltage
Dc coupled
400 V (dc + peak ac)
800 V (p-p ac at 1 kHz or less)
Ac coupled
400 V (dc + peak ac)
800 V (p-p ac at 1 kHz or less)
Delay Line -
Permits viewing leading edge of displayed
waveform.
HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION
Time Ba.e A - (Both 2213 and 2215) - 0.05 "s/div to
0.5 s/div (1-2-5 sequence). 10X magnifier extends maximum
sweep rate to 5 ns/div.
Time Ba.e B - (2215 only) - 0.05 "s/div to 50 ms/div (1-2-5
sequence). 10X magnifier extends maximum sweep rate to
5 ns/div.
Variable Time Control - Time Base A (both 2213 and 2215)
provides continuously variable uncalibrated sweep rates between steps to at least 1.25 s/div.
Time Base A (both 2213 and 2215) and B (2215 only) Accuracy Center 8 Divisions
+ 20'C to +30'C
O·C to +50·C
Unmagnified
± 3%
± 4%
Magnified
± S%
± 6%
Horizontal Display Mode. (2213) lay, delayed.
A, A intensified after de-
Horizontal Display Mode. (2215) - A, alternate (A intensified
by B and B), B. Electronic switching between intensified and
delayed sweep.
2213 SWEEP DELAY
Delay Times Multiplier Jitter -
< 0.5 "so10 "so and 0.2 ms.
Increases delay time by 20 to 1 or more.
5000 to 1 (0.02%) of maximum available delay time.
2200
TEK
SERIES
2215 SWEEP DELAY
X-Y OPERATION
Delay Times - Conlinuously variable by means 01 a 10 to 1
vernier control. Delayed (B) portion is intensified on the main
(A) trace.
Full Sensitivity X-Y (CH 1 HOrizontal, CH 2 Vertical) 2 mV/div to 10 V/div, accurate ± 5%. Bandwidth is de to at
least 2 MHz. Phase difference between amplifiers is 3· or less
from de to 50 kHz.
Delay Position Range 10div.
Delay Dial Accuracy -
< 0.5 div + 300 ns to more than
DISPLAY
± 1.5% of reading past 1 div.
A/B Sweep Separation - Control permits main and delayed
sweep to be separated by at least 3.5 div.
Jitter -
10,000 to 1 (0.01 %) of maximum available delay time.
TRIGGERING
2213 and 2215 A Time Base Trigger Modes - Normal
(sweep runs when triggered), automatic (sweep runs in the absence of a triggering signal and triggers automatically for signals down to 20 Hz), and tv field (with slope set for negative
going transitions, and trigger level adjusted close to blanking
level, sweep starts at first line of video; use NORMAL for tv line
display). LED indicates when sweep is triggered.
CRT - 8 x 10 em display. Horizontal and vertical center lines
further marked in 0.2 em increments. P31 Phosphor standard.
10 kV accelerating potential. mesh grid, halo suppressed.
Graticule - Internal, non-parallax, not illuminated; markings
for measurement of risetime.
Belm Finder - Compresses trace to within graticule area for
ease in locating an off-screen signal. A pre-set intenSity level
provides a constant brightness.
Z-Axis Input - Dc coupled, positive-going signal decreases
intenSity ; 5 V p-p signal causes noticeable modulation at normal intensity; de to 5 MHz.
ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS
A Trigger Holdoff - Adjustable control permits a stable presentation of repetitive complex waveforms.
Ambient Temperature - Operating : O· C to + 50 · C. Nonoperating: - 55· C to + 75 · C.
Sensitivity - Auto and Normal Internal: Below 2 MHz, signal
must be at least 0.4 div amplitude; requirements increase
above 2 MHz; at 60 MHz, signal must be at least 1.5 div
amplitude.
Altitude - Operating: To 4500 m, (15,000 It); maximum allowable ambient temperature decreased by 1· C/l 000 It from
5000 to (15,000 It). Nonoperating: 15 200 m to (50,000 It).
Auto and Normal External - Up to 2 MHz, trigger signal must
be at least 50 mV p-p; requirements increase up to 60 MHz,
where Signal must be at least 250 mV p-p.
TV Field -
Composite video must be at least 2 div amplitude.
Level and Slope (NORM Mode) - Internal: Trigger level can
be adjusted over the range of amplitudes displayed on the
CRT. External, de coupled : Level can be adjusted over a range
of at least ± 2 V, or 4 V p-p. External, de coupled and attenuated ( -.- 10): Level can be adjusted over a range of at least
± 20 V, or 40 V p-p.
External Inputs - Rand C ",, 1 Mf! paralleled by ",, 30 pF.
400 V (dc + peak ac) or 800 V ac p-p at 1 kHz or less.
2215 DELAYED (B) TIMEBASE
Level and Slope gering B sweep.
Separate slope and level controls for trig-
Sensitivity - Up to 2 MHz, signal must be at least 0.4 div in
vertical amplitude; requirements increase up to 60 MHz, where
signal must be at least 2 div in amplitude.
Vibration - Operating test samples were subjected to sinusoidal vibration in the X, Y, and Z axis with the frequency varied from 10Hz to 55 Hz to 10Hz in 1 minute sweeps for a
duration of 15 minutes per axis and a dwell of 10 minutes at
55 Hz. Total displacement was 0.015 in p-p (2.4 g's at 55 Hz).
Humidity - Operating and nonoperating : Test samples were
subjected to 5 cycles (120 hours) of humidity testing.
Shock - Operating and nonoperating: Test samples were
subjected to 3 shocks, both directions along each axis for a
total of 18 shocks. Peak accelerations of each '/,-sine shock
were 30 g's.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
Probe Adjust Signal ± 20%.
Squarewave, 0.5 V ± 20%, 1 kHz
Power Requirements - 90 to 250 V, 48 to 440 Hz without
range switching, 50 W maximum at 115 V and 60 Hz.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Cabinet Dimensions
Width (with handle)
Width (without handle)
Height (with feet and handle)
Depth (with front cover)
Depth (without front cover)
Depth (with handle extended)
mm
360
237
137
445
440
511
kg
Weights ""
Net (with cover
accessories, and pouch)
Net (without cover
accessories, and pouch)
Shipping (domestic)
In
14.2
12.9
5.4
17.5
17.3
20.1
Ib
7.6
16.8
6.1
13.5
8.2
18.0
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Two P6120 lOX voltage proibes (010-6120-01), two IC grabber
proibe accessories (013-0191 -00).
ORDERING INFORMATION
2213 Single Time Base Oscilloscope with
Delayed Sweep .... ,......... " ................... $1,200
2215 Delayed Alternate Time Base
Oscilloscope .... " ....... " ... " ... ,.. " .... " ...... $1,450
Power Cords -
Standard: 110 V ac North American plug.
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORDS & PLUG OPTIONS
Option Al - Universal Euro 220 V/ 16A, 50 Hz ..
Order 020-0859-00 ............................................................ $15
Option A2 - UK 240 V/ 13A, 50 Hz.
Order 020-0860-00 ............................................................ $31
Option A3 - Australian 240 V/10A. 50 Hz.
Order 020-0861-00 ............................................................ $23
Option A4 - North American 240 V/ 15A. 60 Hz.
Order 020-0862-00 ............................................................ $24
Option A5 - Switzerland 220 V/ l0A, 50 Hz.
Order 020-0863-00 ....................................................... $15.75
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Front Panel Cover Order (200-2520-00) ....................... $5.00
Accessory Pouch Order (016-0677-00) ........................... $42
Pouch and Cover Order (020-0672-00) ........................... $47
Viewing Hood Order (016-0566-00) ................................. $15
C-5C Option 04 Scope Camera ..................................... $525
Model 200c SCOPE-MOBILE" Cart .............................. $295
RIck Adaptor Kit Order (016-0466-00) ......................... $100
323
/TEKTRONIX@35MHZ
SONY@
/
DUAL TRACE OSCILLOSCOPE
Trigger Sources - Internal CH 1, internal CH 2, internal composite (uses a composite of CH 1 and CH 2 signals to produce
trigger), external, external """ 10, and line. The B sweep can
also be started automatically at the end of the time base A
delay.
X-Y OPERATION
Input - X-axis input is via the external horizontal input connection. Both CH 1 and CH 2 provide vertical inputs. Using
chopped mode , two simultaneous X-V displays can be
Obtained.
X-Axis Deflection Factors - Variable from ",,20 mV/div to
",, 2 V/div. Dc to at least 500 kHz .
Input Impedance -
= 1 Mil paralleled by 24 pF.
DISPLAY
CRT - 8 x 10 div (0.6 cm/div) display. P31 Phosphor. 12 kV
accelerating potential.
Graticule - Internal (non-parallax) non-illuminated. Vertical
and horizontal centerlines marked in 5 minor division per major
0.6cm.
Z-Axis Input - + 5 V signal causes noticeable modulation at
normal intenSity. Useful bandwidth de to 600 kHz.
ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS
Ambient Temperature - Operating : - 15' C to + 55'C. Nonoperating: - 40 ' C to + 75' C.
Altitude - Operating : to 4500 m (15 ,000 ft) maximum, decrease maximum temperature by I ' C/1000 ft from 5000 ft to
15,000 ft. Nonoperating: to 15 200 m (50,000 ft) maximum.
335
HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION
Time Base A - 0.2 ~s/div to 0.5 s/div (1-2-5 sequence). Xl0
magnifier extends fastest sweep rate to 20 ns/div.
35 MHz at 10 mV/div
Small Size, Weighs ",, 4.7 kg, (10.5 Ib)
Time Base B - 0.2 ~s/div to 50 msl div (1-2-5 sequence). XI 0
magnifier extends fastest sweep rate to 20 ns/div.
1 mV/div Vertical Sensitivity at 25 MHz
Variable Time Control - Time Base A provides uncalibrated,
continuously variable sweep rates between steps and to at
least 1.25 s/div.
Delay Lines Input
Time Base A and B Accuracy Center 8 Divisions
Rugged Construction
The portability of the 335 is a big plus in many
digital and analog trouble-shooting applications.
And it weighs only 10.5 pounds.
1 mV/div (at 25 MHz) vertical sensitivity insures
that low level signals from magnetic recording
heads, optical read heads, or industrial control
transducers can be accurately and easily measured. Delay line allows viewing the leading edge
of the triggering signal. By using a composite of
Channels 1 and 2 as a trigger source, stable
displays of non-time-related signals can be
obtained.
Operation from either ac (90 to 132 V, or 180 to
264 V, 48 to 440 Hz) or dc (+ 11 to + 14 V or +22
to +28 V) assures that power can be obtained at
nearly any location.
CHARACTERISTICS
VERTICAL DEFLECTION
(2 IDENTICAL CHANNELS)
Bandwidth
1 mV to 5 mV/div
10 mV to 5 V/div
10 V/div
+20'C to +30'C
-1S'C to +SS'C
de to 25 MHz
de to 35 MHz
de to 25 MHz
de to 20 MHz
dc to 30 MHz
dc to 20 MHz
For ac coupling, the lower 3 dB point is 10Hz or less with a 1 X
probe and 1 Hz or less with a lOX probe.
Deflection Factor - 1 mV/div to 10 V/div (1-2-5 sequence)
accurate ± 3%. Uncalibrated, continuously variable between
steps and to at least 25 V/div.
Display Modes - CH 1, CH 2 (normal or inverted) alternate,
chopped (",,300 kHz rate) added , X-Y o
Input Rand C -
Delay Line -
-1S'C to +SS'C
± 3%
± 4%
Magnified
± S%
± 6%
Horizontal Display Modes - A only. A intensified by B, B
delayed by A, B triggerable after A.
CALIBRATED SWEEP DELAY
Permits viewing leading edge of displayed
~s
to at
Differential Time Measurement Accuracy
Delay Time Settings
Between 1.0 and 9.0
Humidity -
5 cycles (120 hours) referenced to MIL-E-16400 F.
'I,
Shock - Operating and nonoperating: 30 g's,
sine, 11 ms
duration each direction along each major axis. Total of
12 shocks.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
Amplitude Calibrator - 0.5 V ( ± 1%) ",, 1 kHz from 20' C to
30 'C.
Power Source - External ac source, 90 V to 132 V or 180 V
to 264 V with a line frequency of 48 Hz to 440 Hz. Maximum
power dissipation 24 W at 115 V. External dc source: + 11 V to
+ 14 V or + 22 V to + 28 V with a maximum current drain of
2 A at + 12 V or 1.0 A at + 24V .
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
mm
Dimensions
Delay Time Range - Continuously variable from 1
least 5 s after the start of the delaying (A) sweep.
+ 15'C to +35'C
One or more
major dial divisions
± 2%
Less than one
major dial division
± 0.02%
Jitter - 1 part or less in 20,000 (0.005%) of Xl0 the A timel div
setting.
TRIGGERING A AND B
A Trigger Modes - Normal (sweep runs when triggered).
Automatic (sweep free-runs in absence of a triggering signal
and for signals below 20 Hz). Single sweep (sweep runs once
on the first trigger signal after the reset button is pushed).
Variable Trigger Holdo« - For the A sweep an adjustable
holdoff control permits a stable display of complex waveforms.
Sweep holdoff time can be increased at least XI O.
Width (with handle)
Height
Depth (handle not extended)
Depth (handle extended)
236
112
347
448
kg
Weight ""
Net (w/o accessories)
Shipping
4.7
7.6
Ib
10.5
17.0
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Two P6149 lOX probes (010-6149-03); carrying case and
pouch (016-0485-00); external dc cable assembly
(012-0406-00); strap assembly (346-0131-00); two I-A fuses
(159-0064-00); two O.4-A fuses (159-0139-00);two 2-A fuses
(159-0107-00); three 0.2-A fuses (159-0080-00).
ORDER 335 Portable Oscilloscope ....... $3,015
The SONyo/TEKTRONIX· 335 is manufactured and marketed
in Japan by Sony/Tektronix Corporation, Tokyo, Japan . Outside of Japan, the 335 is available from Tektronix, Inc., its marketing subsidiaries and distributors.
CRT Filter -
Light blue. Order 378-2016-01 .................$1.80
Trigger Sensitivity and Coupling
CRT Filter -
Light amber. Order 378-0843-01 ..............$1.80
Dc
Coupling
To 10 MHz
At 3S MHz
Internal
External
Ext """ 10
0.35 div
70 mV
700 mV
1.5 div
250 mV
2.5 V
Ac
requirements increase below 60 Hz
Ac HF Rej
requirements increase above 20 kHz
Ac LR Rej
requirements increase below 40 kHz
Viewing Hood -
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Order 016-0297-00 ............................ $6.50
CRT Mesh Filter - With frame and holder.
Order 378-0063-00 ............................................................. $27
RECOMMENDED CAMERA
C-30BP General Purpose Camera ...................... $1 ,360
Camera Adaptor - Mounts C-30B to 335.
Order 016-0327-01 ............................................................$169
For further information see camera section.
324
in
9.3
4.4
13.6
17.6
B Trigger Modes - B runs after delay time (starts automatically at the end of the delay time). B triggerable after delay time
(runs when triggered). The B (delayed) sweep runs once in
each of these modes, following the A sweep delay time.
1 Mil ± 2%, paralleled by ",,24 pF.
Maximum Input Voltage - ac or dc coupled, 300 V (dc +
peak ac). 300 V pop ac at 1 kHz or less.
waveform.
+20'C to +30'C
Unmagnified
Vibration - Operating and nonoperating: 15 minutes along
each of the three major axes, 0.06 cm (0.025 in) pop displacement (4 g's at 55 Hz) 10 to 55 to 10 Hz in I-minute cycles.
SONYi'TEKTRONIX@
BATTERY POWERED 5 MHz
DUAL TRACE OSCILLOSCOPE/DMM
Response - < 1 s plus range step time « 1 s/step).
Input R - 10 MU ± 2%.
Maximum Input Voltage - ± 1000 V (dc + peak ac) between
HI and LO inputs or between HI and chassis. ± 500 (dc + peak
ac) between LO and chassis (LO Floating Voltage).
AC VOLTAGE
Ranges - 2 V, 20 V , 200 V, 700 V, (autoranging).
Accuracy - Within 0.5% of reading , ± 10 counts. 40 Hz to
500 Hz.
Response Time - < 5 s plus range step time «1 s/step) .
Input Impedance - 10 Mil paralled by "" 70 pF.
Maximum Input Voltage - 700 V RMS if sinusoidal. ± 1000 V
(dc + peak ac) between HI and LO inputs or between HI and
chassis. ± 500 V (dc component) between HI and LO inputs.
± 500 (dc + peak ac) between LO and chassis (LO Floating
Voltage).
RESISTANCE
Ranges - 2 kll, 20 kll, 200 kll, 2000 k!l.
Accuracy - Within 0.6% of reading ± 3 counts.
Response Time - < 5 s plus range step time « 1 s/step) .
Maximum Input Voltage - ± 100 V (dc + peak ac) between
HI and LO inputs. 500 V (dc + peak ac) between LO and
chassis (LO Floating Voltage).
Variable Time Control - Uncalibrated, continuously variable
between steps and to at least 1.25 s/div.
Time Base Accuracy Center 8 Divisions
305
5 MHz at 5 mV /div
Dual-Trace
Weighs = 10.6 Ib
The 305 Oscilioscope/DMM is the ideal oscillo·
scope for those who demand portability and
multi· function versatility in their test instrumen·
tation.
The SONY"'ITEKTRONIX'" 305 combines a 5 MHz
oscilloscope with an integral auto ranging DMM
and a built-in rechargeable battery pack. Take the
305 instead of multiple instruments when you
climb the ladder to maintain your in-plant industrial controls. Or leave the extension cord at your
bench when you go on location to service medical instrumentation.
The 305 features a dual-trace 5 MHz oscilloscope
with a large 8 x 10 div (0.6 cm/div) CRT display
and an autoranging DMM with dc and ac volts,
and resistance measurement functions-all in a
10.6 Ib (4.8 kg), 4.4 x 9.3 x 14.6 inch (11 .2 x 23.6
x 37.1 cm) package. The front panel TIL marker
presets the trigger generator for optimum level
control on TIL signals.
CHARACTERISTICS
VERTICAL DEFLECTION
Bandwidth -
Dc to at least 5 MHz. For ae coupling , the lower
3 dB point is ~ 10 Hz.
Deflection Factor - 5 mV/div to 10 V/div (1-2-5 sequence)
accurate ± 3% from ODe to + 40 °C, ± 4% through remainder
of operating range. Uncalibrated , continuously variable between steps and to at least 25 V/div.
Display Modes - CH 1, CH 2, Chopped, Alternate. Added,
Invert CH 2 and X- Y. Bandwidth in Add mode is dc to at least
4.5 MHz.
Input R & C - 1 MU ± 2%, paralleled by = 47 pF.
Maximum Input Voltage - ac or dc coupled, 250 V (dc +
peak ac), or 250 V p-p at < 1 kHz .
Time Base -
O·C to +40·C
-IS·C to +SS·C
Unmagnified
± 3%
± 4%
Magnified
± S%
± 6%
Full X-V
HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION
500 ms/div to 1 "s/div (1 -2-5 sequence). Xl0
magnifier extends sweep rate to 0.1 J.ls/div.
(Excludes first 10 div and all sweep past 90 div in Xl0
magnifier.)
TRIGGER
Modes - Normal and Auto (p-p).
TIL Triggering - TIL position of trigger level control presets
for optimum triggering from TIL levels, in 50 mY. 0.1 V and
0.2 Vldiv or external trigger Signals.
Trigger Sources - Internal CH 1, internal CH 2, external. TIL
Threshold voltage, internal (with lOX probe) 1.4 V within
± 0.3 V , External (with lOX probe) 1.4 V within ± 0.2 V .
Trigger Sensitivity in Normal·Mode
Dc
Coupling
To 0.5 MHz
At 5 MHz
Internal
0.3 div
15 mV
0.75 div
50 mV
External
Ac
Requirements increase below 60 Hz
P-P Auto Operation Sensitivity
Dc, Ac
Coupling
500 Hz
to 0.5 MHz
0.5 MHz
to 5 MHz
Internal
External
0.5 div
35 mV
1.0 div
70 mV
External Trigger - Maximum Input Voltage : 250 V .(dc +
peak ac) at 1 kHz or less (same as vertical). Input Rand C,
= 1 MQ paralleled by = 47 pF.
X·Y OPERATION
Input - X-axis input is via the CH 1 connector; Y-axis input is
via the CH 2 connector.
X·Y Characteristics - Same as stated for vertical deflection,
except deflection factor accuracy is ± 4% from O· C to + 40· C
over the center 8 div.
X·Axis Bandwidth - Dc to 150 kHz.
DISPLAY
CRT - 8 x 10 div (0.632 cm/div) display. P31 Phosphor. 2 kV
accelerating potential.
Graticule - Internal. non-illuminated .
DMM
DC VOLTAGE
Ranges - 2 V, 20 V, 200 V, 1000 V (autoranging).
Accuracy - Within 0.1% of reading. ± 2 counts.
Common·Mode Rejection - > 100 dB at dc, 80 dB at 60 Hz
with 1 kU imbalance.
Normal-Mode Rejection - > 30 dB at 60 Hz increasing 20 dB
per decade to 2 kHz.
ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS
Ambient Temperature - Operating: - 15· C to + 55 · C (Oscilloscope), O· C to + 55 · C (DMM). Nonoperating : - 25 · C to
+ 75 · C.
Altitude - Operating : to 9000 m (30 ,000 tt) maximum, decrease maximum temperature by I · C/l000 tt from 5,000 tt to
30,000 ft. Nonoperating : 15 200 m (50,000 tt) maximum.
Vibration - 15 minute along each of the three major axes,
0.025 in (0.06 cm) p-p displacement (4 g's at 55 Hz) 10 to 55 to
10Hz in one minute cycles.
Humidity - Nonoperating : five cycles (120 hours) of
MIL-E-16400G. Omit freezing and vibration and allow a posttest drying period at + 25 · C, ± 5· C and 20% to 80% relative
humidity.
Shock - Operating and nonoperating : 30 g's, '/z sine, 11 ms
duration. Total of 12 shocks .
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
Amplitude Calibrator - 0.3 V accurate ± 1% from 20 · C to
30 · C ± 2% from - 15· C to + 55 · C.
Power Sources - External ac source, 90 V to 132 V or 180 V
to 250 V with a line frequency of 48 Hz to 440 Hz. Maximum
power dissipation of 17 W. External de source + 9 V to + 32 V.
Charge Time - At least 16 hours for full charge.
Operating Time - Internal NiCd batteries provide "" 1.6 hours
of scope and DMM operation, 10 hours of DMM alone operation, or two hours of scope alone operation at maximum trace
intensity and 20 · C to 25 · C operating temperature.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dimensions
Width (with handle)
Height
Depth (handle not extended)
Depth (handled extended)
Weights ""
Net (without accessories)
Shipping
mm
236
112
371
458
kg
4.8
7.8
in
9.3
4.4
14.6
18.0
Ib
10.6
17.1
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Two lOX probes (010-6149-03); one DMM probe package
(012-0732-00); one carrying case (016-0401-00); one carrying
case cover (200-2260-00) ; one carrying strap assembly
(346-0131-00); one clear CRT filter (331-0394-01); one blue
CRT filter (378-2016-01); one external de cable assembly
(012-0406-00).
ORDERING INFORMATION
305 DMM/Oscilloscope ....................... $2,315
The SONY· /TEKTRONIX'· 305 DMM/Oscilioscope is manufactured and marketed in Japan by SONY/TEKTRONIX Corporation, Tokyo, Japan, Outside of Japan the 305 is available from
Tektronix , Inc., its marketing subSidiaries and distributors.
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Viewing Hood Order 016-0297-00 ................................ $6.50
Adaptor Connector BNC to binding post.
Order 103-0033-00 ......................................................... $4.75
RECOMMENDED CAMERA
C·30BP General Purpose Camera.
Order C-30BP .............................................................. $1 ,360
Camera Adaptor Mounts C-30B to 305.
Order 016-0327-01 .......................................................... $169
For further information see camera section.
325
5MHz
TEK OSCILLOSCOPE
200 SERIES
MINISCOPES
ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS
Ambient Temperature - Operating : (battery only). - 15' C to
+ 55 ' C. Charging or operating from ac line: O' C to + 40 · C.
Nonoperating: - 40' C to + 60'C .
Altitude - Operating : 7600 m (25.000 ft). decrease maximum
temperature by "C/lOOO ft above 15.000 ft . Nonoperating :
15 200 m (50.000 ft) .
Vibration - Operating and nonoperating : 15 minutes along
each of the 3 major axes. 0.06 em (0.025 in) p-p displacement
(4 g's at 55 Hz) 10 to 55 to 10 Hz in 1 minute cycles. Held for
3 minutes at 55 Hz.
Humidity -
5 days at + 50'C. 95% humidity.
'I,
Shock - Operating and nonoperating : 100 g's.
sine. 2 ms
duration each direction along each major axis. Total of
12 shocks.
Internal BaHery Pack
The 221 is used in a wide assortment of service
applications. For example. in data transmission
systems. the 221 is preferred for maintenance
and testing of modems because of its ability to
see higher frequency noise. It can even help in
building roads by spot checking motors in a road
grader's closed loop servo system that controls
blade angle. depth of cut and machine direction.
Integral 1 MO Probe
CHARACTERISTICS
221
5 MHz,S mV/div to 100 V/div
0.1 /Ls/div Sweep Rate with
X10 Sweep Magnifier
Weighs = 1.6 kg, (3.5 Ib)
The 221 Miniscope weighs just 3.5 pounds and
easily fits into a tool box or brief case; it measures
only 3 x 5.2 x 9 inches. Yet it has the capability
needed for on-site service of much of today's
complex equipment. This versatile miniscope has
a 5 MHz bandwidth . 5 mV/div sensitivity. and
0.1/Ls/div sweep rate (using X10 magnifier) packaged in an impact-resistant case.
Internal rechargeable batteries allow at least two
hours operation away from external power
sources. And the 221 will operate and charge
from practically all the world 's principal line voltages: 90 to 250 V. 48 to 62 Hz ac. or 80 to 250 V
dc (all without making any change to the
instrument).
The 1 Mf! low-capacitance probe minimizes circuit loading. And because it's attached . it's always there when you need it. Vertical deflection
factors extend from 5 mV/div. allowing on-screen
measurement of signals up to 600 V dc + peak
ac. The 1 /Ls/div to 200 ms/div time base is
enhanced by a X10 magnifier that extends the
fastest range to 0.1 /Ls/div. A variable control will
slow the sweep to about 0.5 s/div.
A single rotary control on the 221 is used for all
trigger level and slope functions . Controls are
side mounted and recessed for protection . yet
are easily accessible.
In applications where it is necessary to "float" the
oscilloscope to make your measurements. 200
Series Miniscopes can be elevated to 700 V (dc
+ peak ac) above ground when operated from
batteries. Although insulated. caution should be
observed when connecting the probe to test
points.
326
Insulation Voltage - 500 V RMS or 700 V (dc + peak ac)
when operated from internal batteries. with the line cord stored
and the plug protected. When operated from an external line,
line voltage plus floating Voltage not to exceed 250 V RMS ; or
1.4 x line + (dc + peak ac) not to exceed 350 V.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
VERTICAL DEFLECTION
Bandwidth - Dc to 5 MHz (- 3 dB point) at all calibrated
deflection factors . Lower - 3 dB point ac coupled is = 2 Hz.
Dellection Factor - 5 mV/div to 100 V/div. accurate ± 3%
from O' C to + 40' C and ± 5% from - 15' C to O' C and
+ 40'C to + 55 ' C. Uncalibrated. continuously variable between steps to at least 300 V/div.
Input Rand C - = 1 Mil paralleled by = 29 pF via attached
signal acquisition probe.
Maximum Input Voltage ac. 5 MHz or less.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
Power Sources - Internal NiCd batteries provide at least two
hours operation at maximum trace intensity for a charging and
operating temperature between + 20'C and + 30'C. Internal
charger charges the batteries when connected to an ac line
with instrument turned on or off. Dc operation is automatically
interrupted when battery voltage drops to = 10 V to protect
batteries against deep discharge. Full recharge requires
= 16 hours. Extended time charges will not damage the batteries. An expanded scale battery meter indicates full . low. and
recharge. External power source. 90 to 250 V ac (48 to 62 Hz)
or 80 to 250 V dc. 5 W or less.
600 V (de + peak ac). 600 V p-p
Dimensions
mm
Width
Height
Depth
133
76
228
Weights =
kg
Net (w/o accesssories)
Shipping
1.6
3.6
in
5.2
3.0
9.0
Ib
3.5
8.0
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Viewing hood (016-0199-01) ; carrying case (016-0512-00);
neck strap (346-0104-00); two spare fuses (159-0080-00).
HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION
Time Base -
1
~s/div
to 200 ms/div. accurate ± 3%.
Magnifier - Increases all sweep speeds X10 with a maximum
sweep speed of 0.1 ~s/div .
ORDERING INFORMATION
221 Oscilloscope,
jncludes batteries and probe ............... $1,765
Variable Time Control -
Extends minimum sweep rate to
= 0.5 s/div. Continuously variable between calibrated settings.
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
TRIGGER
Modes - Automatic or manual. Level and slope selected with
a single control. Automatic operation minimizes trigger adjustment and provides a bright baseline with no input.
Trigger Sensitivity
Source
To 1 MHz
AtS MHz
Intemal
0.5 div
1 div
External
0.5 V
1V
X-Y OPERATION
Input - X-axis input is via the external trigger or the external
horizontal input.
X-Axis Deflection Factor - 1 V/div ± 10%. dc to 500 kHz.
Sensitivity is increased by a factor 0110 (0.1 V/div) using horizontal magnifier.
Maximum External Horizontal Input Voltage - 200 (dc +
peak ac). 200 V (p-p ac) to 500 kHz. decreasing to 20 V p-p ac
at 5 MHz.
Input Impedance -
= 0.5 Mil paralleled by = 30 pF.
DISPLAY
CRT - 6 x 10 div (0.52 cmJdiv) display. P31 Phosphor normally supplied. 1 kV accelerating potential.
Graticule -
Internal . black line. non-illuminated.
Alligator Clip Kit A pair of alligator clips that allow connecting
the probe and ground lead to large (up to "Is in) conductors.
Includes: red Clip (015-0229-00); yellow clip (015-0230-00);
6-32 to probe adaptor (103-0051-01).
Order 015-0231-00 ........ _..... _._ .. _........... _____ ... _. __ ................. $20
Probe-tip to BNC Panel Connector Adaptor.
Order 013-0084-01 .......... _.... _................................__.......
sa.OO
Probe-tip to BNC Cable Adaptor.
Order 103-0096-00 _.............. _.... _..............................__ .... _.. $11
Power Cable Adaptor Assembly A short length of twa-wire
power cord. One end has a female NEC socket fitting the
200 Series power cords; the other end is left open so that the
wires can be attached to a non-NEC male power plug. Plugs
not supplied.
Order 161-0077-01 ............ _............................................ $7,00
SERIES
MINISCOPES
TEK 200
1 MHz
OSCILLOSCOPE/DMM
213
Range
Within % of reading shown ±5 counts'
1 MHz at 20 mV/div
DMM and Miniscope in
One Unit
Rugged Construction
Internal Battery
True RMS Voltage & Current Measurements
In operation, the light·weight 213 can be hand
held, rested on the equipment being tested or
carried conveniently on a neck·strap. Operating
controls are designed for speedy measurements
and easy understanding.
Rugged construction enables the 213 to with·
stand hostile industrial or transportation
environments .
The 213, combining both oscilloscope and DMM
functions, fits many on·site service applications.
As an example, the 213 is used extensively for
preventive maintenance on industrial control
systems.
CHARACTERISTICS
VERTICAL DEFLECTION (VOLTAGE)
Bandwidth - Dc to 1 MHz ( - 3 dB point) for 20 mV/div to
100 V/div deflection factors. Dc to 400 kHz (- 3 dB point) lor
5 mV/div and 10 mV/div. Lower - 3 dB poinl for ac coupling is
",, 1 Hz.
Deflection Factor - 5 mV/div to 100 V/div (1.2-5 sequence),
accurale ± 3%. Uncalibrated ; continuously variable between
sleps to at least 250 VIdiv .
Input Rand C - 10 Mil paralleled by 150 pF lor 5 mV/div
through 1 V/div and 100 pF lor 2 V/div through 100 V/div.
Maximum Input Voltage
Input Condition
Maximum Input Voltage
Dc coupled, S mV/div
to 1 V/div
500 V (dc + peak ac)
at 1 MHz or less
Ac coupled, S mV/div
to 1 V/div
800 V (dc + peak ac)
500 V peak ac component
Ac, Dc coupled,
2 V/div. to 100 V/div
800 V (dc + peak ac)
at 1 MHz or less
VERTICAL DEFLECTIOfi (CURRENT)
Bandwidth - Dc to at least 400 kHz (- 3 dB point) for
20 ~Ndiv through 100 mNdiv deflection factors . Dc to at least
200 kHz ( - 3 dB point) for 5 ~Ndiv and 10 ~Ndiv .
Deflection Factor - 5 ~Ndiv to 100 mNdiv (1.2.5 sequence),
accurate ± 3%. Uncalibrated ; continuously variable between
steps to at least 250 mNdiv.
Maximum Input Current - 2 A RMS or 3 A peak for any
range (fuse and diode protection).
HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION
2 ~s/div to 500 ms/div (1 -2-5 sequence), accu-
Time Bue rate ± 5%.
Variable Magnifier - Increases all sweep speeds to at least
X5 with a maximum sweep speed of 0.4 ~s/cjiv .
TRIGGER
Modes - Normal (sweep runs when triggered). Automatic
(sweep free-runs in absence of trigger signal or for frequencies
below 7 Hz).
Trigger Sensitivity and Coupling - Ac Internal, (auto and
normal, 1 MHz) 0.5 div. Dc External, 1 MHz, 1 V.
DISPLAY
CRT - 6 x 10 div (0.52 cm/div) display. P43 Phosphor is
standard.
Graticule - Internal, black line, non·illuminated.
ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS
Ambient Temperature - Operating : (battery only). - 15·C to
+ 55·C. Charging or operating from ac line: O· C to + 40· C.
Nonoperating: - 40·C to + 60· C.
Altitude - Operating: To 7500 m (25,000 ft) , decrease maximum temperature by 1·C/1 ,000 ft above 15,000 ft . Nonoperating: 12500 m (40,000 ft).
Vibration - Operating and nonoperating: 15 minutes along
each of the 3 major axes, 0.06 cm (0.025 in) pop displacement
(4 g 's at 55 Hz) 10 to 55 to 10Hz in 1 minute cycles. Held for 3
minute at 55 Hz.
Humidity - +40·C or less, 80% or less relative humidity.
Shock - Operating and nonoperating : 150 g 's, '" sine, 2 ms
duration in each direction along each major axis. Total of
12 shocks.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
Power Sources - Internal NiCd batteries provide three to five
hours operation at maximum trace intenSity for a charging and
operating temperature between +20·C and + 30· C. Internal
charger charges batteries when connected to an ac line with
instrument turned on or off. Dc operation is automatically inter·
rupted when battery voltage drops below 2 V to protect batter.
ies against deep discharge. Full recharge requires "" 16 hours.
External power source, 90 to 136 V ac (48 to 62 Hz). Option 01
allows operation from an external 180 to 250 V ac (48 to 62 Hz)
or dc supply. Power consumption, 8 W or less.
Insulation Voltage - 500 V RMS or 700 V (de + peak ac)
when operated from internal batteries with line cord and plug
stored . When operated from ac, line voltage plus floating voltage not to exceed 250 V RMS or 1.4 X line + (dc + peak ac)
not to exceed 350 V.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dimensions
Width
Height
Depth
mm
133
76
226
Weights ""
Net (without accessories)
Shipping
kg
1.7
3.9
in
5.2
3.0
8.9
Ib
3.7
8.6
DMM
Provides true RMS readings of voltage and current.
DC AND AC VOLTAGE
Range - 0.1 V to 1000 V full scale in five ranges .
Resolution - 100 ~V at 0.1 V full scale.
Accuracy in Dc Mode - For +25·C ±5·C.
Range (Full Scale)
0.1 V
± 0.1% of reading ± 3 counts. Temp coef is
(±0.015% of reading + 0.04% of full scale) per · C
1V
± 0.1% of reading ± 1 count. Temp coef is
( ± 0.01 % of reading + 0.01 % of full scale) per · C
10 V and ± 0.15% of reading ± 1 count. Temp coef is
100 V
( ± 0.015% of reading + 0.01 % of full scale) per · C
1000 V
4 kHz to
40 kHz
3.5%
2.5%
1.5%
2%
1%
1%
1000 V
2%
1%
2%
;~'::~~~;'::f ,:~7r~~~~e~7~:~ro:':t g~:st
factor > 2 up to
Input Resiatance - 10 Mil.
Input CapaCitance - 150 pF on 0.1 V to 10 V ranges , 100 pF
on 100 V and 1000 V ranges .
Settling Time - Dc: 1.5 s toO.1% of reading . RMS: 2 s to 1%
of reading .
Maximum Input Voltage
Dc Coupled
Compact, Weighs ",, 1.7 kg (3.7 Ib)
The 213 combines a precision 3'/2 digit digital
multimeter and a 1 MHz oscilloscope in one
instrument. It is a compact (3 x 5.2 x 8.9 inches)
and lightweight (only 3.7 pounds) package that
will fit easily into your briefcase or tool kit.
40 Hz to
4 kHz
1 V,10V, & 100V
0.1 V
0.4 /ls/div Sweep Rate
with X10
Sweep Magnifier
Dc
± 0.2% of reading ± 1 count. Temp coef is
( ± 0.02% of reading +0.01% of full scale) per · C
Accuracy in RMS Mode - For 25· C ± 5·. Temperature coef·
ficient ( ± 0.05% of reading +0.1% of full scale) per · C.
0.1Vt010V
500 V (dc + peak ac)
100 V to 1000 V
800 V (dc + peak ac)
Ac Coupled
0.1Vt010V
800 V (dc + peak ac)
DC AND AC CURRENT
Range - 0.1 rnA to 1000 rnA full scale in five ranges.
Resolution - 100 nA at 0.1 rnA full scale.
Accuracy in Dc Mode - For + 25 · C ± 5· C.
Temperature Coef - ( ± 0.02% of reading ± 0.04% of full
scale) per · C. 0.1 rnA ± 0.5% ± 3 counts. 1 rnA to 1000 rnA
± 0.25% ± 3 counts.
Accuracy in Ac Mode
Within % of reading shown ± 5 counts·
Range
Dc
40 Hz to
4 kHz
4 kHz to
40 kHz
0.1 rnA
2.5%
1.5%
4.5%
1 rnA to 1000 rnA
2 .5%
1.5%
3.5%
Accuracy limit mcreases Imearly for crest factor > 2 up to
twice the indicated limit for crest factor of five.
Settling Time - 1.5 s to 0.1% of reading.
Maximum Input Current - 2 A RMS or 3 A peak on any scale
(fuse and diode protection).
RESISTANCE
Ranges - 1 kll to 10 Mil full scale in five ranges.
Resolution - 1 Il on 1 kll scale.
Accuracy - For 25 · C ± 5· C.
Range
% of Reading
1 kll
0.5% ± 3 counts
10 kll to 1 Mil
0.5% ± 1 count
10 Mil
1% ± 1 count
Settling Time -
Two seconds ± 2 counts.
READOUT
Number of Digits - 3'/2 digits plus decimal point and sign .
Display Size - 1 cm high by 4 cm wide (five characters).
Over-range Capability - At least 200% of full scale.
Over-range Indication - Displays scrambled characters.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Viewing hood (016.0199-01) ; carrying case (016-0512.00); two
test leads (alligator clip to banana jack) (red 012-0015-00);
(black 012·0014.00); neck strap (346.0104-00; two power line
fuses (159-0080·00); power line plug adaptor (option 01 only)
(161·0077-01), identification tag (334-2614-00); identification
tag (000·7983-00).
ORDERING INFORMATION
213 Miniscope/DMM includes batteries and
probe ................................................... $2,320
Option 01 - 180 to 250 V ac (48 to 62 Hz) or dc
(includes batteries and probe) " ."""."." "."".", •••,,"""",.,,. NC
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Alligator Clip Kit A pair of alligator clips that allow connecting
the probe and ground lead to large (up to "I. in) conductor.
Includes: red clip (015.0229-00) ; yellow clip (015-0230.00); 632 to probe adaptor (103-0051-01).
Order 015·0231·00 " •. " ... "".",."" •.••. " ' "."".,.,.,,.,.,,""",.,,' $20
Probe-tip to BNC Panel Connector Adaptor.
Order 013-0084-01 " •• """.""""." ...." .. " ." .. ",, ..... ,,",,",,. $8.00
Probe tip to BNC Cable Adaptor.
Order 103·0096-00 ... " " ."""""."... "."."" ..•,•.." .•".""",,.,,. $11
Power Cable Adaptor Assembly A short length of two-wire
power cord. One end has a female NEC socket fitting the
200 Series power cords; the other end is left open so that the
wires can be attached to a non·NEC male power plug. Plugs
not supplied.
Order 161 -0077·01 ... ""."""""""""".,,"" ",, .. ,,""""""" $7,00
327
200 SERIES
MINISCOPES
kHz
DUAL TRACE OSCILLOSCOPE
TEK 500
Shock - Operating and nonoperating: 150 g·s. '/2 sine. 2 ms
duration in each direction along each major axis. Total of
12 shocks.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
Power Sources - Internal NiCd batteries provide = three to
five hours operation for a charging and operating temperature
between + 20 · C and + 30 · C. Internal charger charges the
batteries when connected to an ac line with instrument turned
off. Battery operation is automatically interrupted when battery
VOltage drops to = 10 V to protect batteries against deep discharge. Full recharge requires
16 hours. Extended charge
times will not damage the batteries.
=
A pilot light battery-charge indicator light will extinguish when
oscilloscope has about 10 minutes of operating time remaining
in the batteries.
External Ac Source - 110 to 126 V. 58 to 62 Hz. 3 W. Can be
operated at 104 to 110 V with resulting slow discharge of internal batteries.
212
Maximum Input Voltage (1 X probe only)
1 mV/div to 50 mV/div
600 V (dc + peak ac)
ae not over 2 kHz.
0.1 V/div to 50 V/div
600 V (dc + peak ac)
600 V p-p ac 5 MHz or less
500 kHz, 1 mV/div to 50 V/div
Internal Battery
Integral 1 MO Probe
HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION
Time Base -
Weighs = 1.6 kg, (3.5 Ib)
The 212 features these signal acquisition capabilities: bandwidth to 500 kHz with deflection factors
from 1 mV/div to 50 V/div. It is lightweight (only
3.5 pounds) and compact (3 x 5.25 x 9.5 inches).
Built of impact-resistant plastic and fully selfcontained , this miniature portable is perfect for
applications in severe environments. And it permits "floating " measurements since it is double
insulated and can be elevated to 700 V (dc +
peak ac) above ground when operated from
batteries. Although insulated , normal caution
should be observed when connecting the oscilloscope probe to the test point.
The 212 features integral probes that are color
matched with the vertical deflection controls to
minimize measurement error. The probes have
their own storage space and are part of the
instrument-you can't forget and leave them
behind . Clip-on 10X attenuators are available for
higher voltage applications.
5 "s/div to 500 ms/div, accurate ± 5%.
Variable Magnifier - Increases each sweep rate X5 with a
maximum sweep speed of 1 "s/div.
External Horizontal Input - (CH 1) 1 mV/div to 50 V/div
± 10%: dc to 100 kHz: X-Y phasing to 5 kHz < 3·. Input characteristics same as CH 1.
Maximum External Horizontal Input Voltage and Impedance
- Same as for vertical inputs.
TRIGGER
Modes -
Trigger Sensitivity and Coupling
Dc Coupling
To 500 Hz
Internal (w/composite trigger source)
0.2 div
Internal (w/CH 2 trigger source)
0.2 div
1V
External
Maximum External Trigger Input Voltage ac), 16 V (p-p ac) at 1 MHz or less.
Input Impedance -
8 V (dc + peak
CHARACTERISTICS
VERTICAL DEFLECTION
Bandwidth - Dc 10 al least 500 kHz from 10 mV Id;v to
50 V/div . reducing to at least 100 kHz at 1 mV/div. Lower
- 3 dB point ac coupled is < 2 Hz.
Deflection Factors - 1 mV/div to 50 V/div (1-2-5 sequence),
accurate ± 5%. Uncalibrated , continuously variable between
steps to at least 125 V/div.
Display Modes - CH 1 only , CH 2 only , or CH 1 and CH 2
chopped (chop rate = 50 kHz) lrom 500 ms/div to 2 ms/div of
time base , alternate from 1 ms/div to 5 "s/div 01 time base.
Input Rand C - = 1 Mil paralleled by = 160 pF from 1 mV/div
to 50 mV/div : and 140 pF from 100 mV/div to 50 V/div.
328
mm
Width
Height
Depth
Weight.
133
76
241
=
kg
Net (with out accessories)
Shipping
1.6
3.2
in
5.3
3.0
9.5
Ib
3.5
7.0
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Viewing hood (016-0199-01): carrying case (016-0512-00): two
4-A fuses (159-0121-00): identification tags (000-7983-00):
identification tag (334-2614-00): carrying strap (346-0104-00).
DISPLAY
6 x 10 div (0.52 cm/div) display. P31 Phosphor.
Graticule -
ORDERING INFORMATION
212 Dual-Trace Oscilloscope, includes
batteries and probes ........................... $1,710
POWER OPTIONS
Option 01 - For 220-250 V. (48 to 52 Hz) includes
batteries ....... ..... ............ ...... ............................................... NC
Option 02 - For 90 to 110 V. 48 to 52 Hz includes
batteries ............................................................................. NC
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
A and C. 1 Mil paralleled by = 30 pF.
Internal. black line, non-illuminated.
ENVIRONMENTAL CAPABILITIES
Trigger level and slope functions are simplified to
one rotary control on the side of the unit. A
convenient neckstrap is an included accessory,
freeing both hands to perform other tasks.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dimensions
Automatic or normal. Level and slope selected with
a single control. Automatic operation minimizes trigger adjustment and provides a bright baseline with no input.
CRT -
Insulation Voltage - 500 V RMS or 700 V (dc + peak ac)
when operated from internal batteries. with the line cord and
plug stored . When operated from ac. line voltage piUS floating
voltage not to exceed 250 V RMS : or 1.4X line + (dc + peak
ac) not to exceed 350 V.
Ambient Temperature - Operating : (battery only). - 15· C to
+ 55 · C. Charging or operating from ac line, O·C to + 40·C.
Nonoperating : - 40 · C to + 60 · C.
Altitude - Operating: 7500 m (25,000 ft) , decrease maximum
temperature by 1· C/1000 ft above 15,000 ft . Nonoperating :
15200 m (50,000 ft) .
Vibration - Operating and nonoperating: 15 minutes along
each of the three major axes. 0.06 cm (0.025 in) p-p displacement (4 g's at 55 Hz) 10 to 55 to 10Hz in 1 minute cycles. Held
for 3 minutes at 55 Hz.
Humidity - Five cycles (120 hours). 95% relative humidity.
referenced to MIL-E-16400F.
10X Attenuator Package A slip-on tip to provide lower circuit
loading (4.4 Mil. = 20 pF) and higher maximum input voltage
1000 V (dc + peak ac) includes: 10X attenuator
(010-0378-01) : pincher tip (013-0071-00); flex tip
(206-0060-00) : banana tip (134-0013-00) ; IC adaptor
(206-0203-00).
Order 010-0378-01 ............................................................ $45
Alligator Clip Kit A pair of alligator clips that allow connecting
the probe (or optional 10X attenuator) and ground lead to large
in) conductors. Includes: red clip (015-0229-00) ; yellow Clip
(015-0230-00); 6-32 to probe adaptor (103-0051-01).
Order 015-0231-00 ............................................................ $20
'I.
Probe-tip to BNC Panel Connector Adaptor.
Order 013-0084-01 ......................................................... $8.00
Probe-tip to BNC Cable Adaptor.
Order 103-0096-00 ............................................................ $11
Power Cable Adaptor Assembly A short length of two-wire
power cord. One end has a female NEC socket fitting the
200 Series power cords ; the other end is left open SO that the
wires can be attached to a non-NEC male power plug. Plugs
not supplied.
Order 161-0077-01 ......................................................... $7.00
15 MHz DUAL TRACE
RACKMOUNT OSCILLOSCOPE
SERIES
TEK T900
::
AC POWER REQUIREMENTS
Line Voltage Ranges - 100-120 V, 220-240 V line voltage
and HI/LO range are accessible e 15s
Full Scan
(Center 6 x 8 div ;
0 .9 cm/div)
FAST TRANSFER
VARIABLE
PERSISTANCE
Reduced Scan
(Center 8 x 10 div ;
0.45 cm/div)
FAST TRANSFER
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Probes
Probe
Type
P6063B
61t
P6202
FET
PROBE
2m
Positive gales from bolh time bases (= 5 V).
Power Requirements - Quick-change line voltage selector
provides six ranges : 110 V. 115 V. 120 V. 220 V. 230 V. and
240 V. each ± 10%. 4810 440 Hz. 100 W maximum al115 V
and 60 Hz. Operation from 12 to 24 V dc is available with Option 07.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dimensions
mm
Width (with handle)
330
in
13.1
Height (Without pouch)
159
6.2
Depth (with panel cover)
Depth (handle extended)
550
597
21.7
23.8
Weights =
kg
Ib
Net (without panel cover
or accessories)
Net (with panel cover
11 .8
26.0
13.5
29.8
18.8
41 .5
Current
Probe
P6022
51t
Altenua·
tlon
Input
Impedance
1 MO 105 pF
Bandwidth'
with
464/466
6 MHz
IX
Switchable
lOX
10 MO 14 pF
90 MHz
lOX
10 MO 2 pF
100 MHz
100X Head
10 Mil 2 pF
Ac Head
10 MO 4 pF
Calibra·
tion
Insertion
Impedance
1 mA/mV
10mNmV
(Selectable)
0.030@ 1 MHz
Increasing to
0.2 0 @ 120 MHz
Bandwidth
with
464/466
85 MHz
'Bandwidths are measured at the upper - 3 dB point. and apply only to the cable length shown. Generally. shorter cable
lengths increase bandwidth, longer ones decrease bandwidth.
and accessories
Shipping
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Two P6062B Probes (010-6062-13); blue accessory pouch
(016-0535-02); clear pouch (016-0537-00); CRT light filter
(337-1674-01); two 1 ',,-amp fuses (159-0016-00); one "I.-amp
fuse (159-0042-00); adaptor. ground wire (134-0016-01); viewing hood (016-0592-00).
ORDERING INFORMATION
466 Storage Oscilloscope ................... $6,700
466 OM 44 Storage Oscilloscope/DMM
0 .5 div/~s
0 .5 div/~s
> 15s
DM 44 Multimeter info on p.317 ••••••••••••••••••••••
$7,220
464 Storage Oscilloscope ................... $5,695
3 .000
Reduced
Scan not
available
on 464
DM 44 Multimeter info on p.317 ......................
3 d i v/~s
$6,215
INSTRUMENT OPTIONS
> 15s
> 15s
"These times are at full-stored display intensity; they can be
extended at least 25 times using reduced intensity in SAVE
Display Mode.
ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS
Ambient Temperature - Operating: - 15· C to + 55 · C. Nonoperating : - 55 ' C to + 75 · C . Forced air ventilation is
provided.
Altitude - Operating: To 4500 m (15 .000 ft) ; maximum allowable ambient temperature decreased by I ' C/l 000 ft from
5000 to 15.000 ft. Nonoperating: To 15 200 m (50.000 ft) .
1106 Battery Pack (Used with Option 07) . .................. $1,000
1105 Battery Power Supply (See page 319) . .............. $1,375
464 OM 44 Storage Oscilloscope/DMM
div/~ s
VARIABLE
PERSISTANCE
Gate Outputs -
Modification kits for field conversion 01 existing 466s and 464s
to Option 07 or DM 44 equipped scopes are available. These
are typically more expensive than when the option is ordered
with the instrument. Contact your Tektronix Sales Engineer.
Distributor. or Representative for information.
Mesh Filter Improves display contrast in high ambient light.
Order 378-0726-01 ............................................................ $55
Option 01 - Delete DM 44 Temperature Probe
(466 DM 44. 464 DM 44 only) ....................................... -$90
Protective Cover Waterproof vinyl. (For 464/466.)
Order 016-0365-00 ............................................................ $21
Option 04 -
EMC Modification .................................. +$160
Folding Viewing Hood Order 016-0592-00 ..................... $12
Option 05 - TV Sync Separator (Provides
triggering on TV rlflld) ................................................... + $300
Folding Binocular Hood Order 016-0566-00 ................... $15
Option 07 -
External Dc Operation (not for DM 44). + $245
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORDS AND PLUG OPTIONS
Option AI -
Universal Euro 220 V/16A. 50 Hz .............. NC
Option A2 -
UK 240 V/13A. 50 Hz ................................. NC
Option A3 -
Australian 240 V/l0A . 50 Hz ...................... NC
Option A4 -
North American 240 V/1'5A, 60 Hz ............. NC
Polarized Collapsible Viewing Hood
Order 016-0180-00 ............................................................ $40
SCOPE·MOBILE" Cart Occupies < 18 inches aisle space. has
storage area in base. Order 200 C ................................. $295
Rack Adaptor (Not for OM 44).
Order 016-0676-00 .......................................................... $325
RECOMMENDED CAMERA
C·30BP Option 01 General Purpose Camera Includes 0160301-01 mounting adaptor/corrector lens.
Order C-30BP Option 01 ............................................. $1,402
Camera Adaptor - Mounts C-30B Series Camera to
464/466 Oscilloscopes. Order 016-0301 -01 ................... $105
For further inlonnatlon see camera section.
333
25 MHz DUAL TRACE
OSCILLOSCOPE
TEK STORAGE
Stored Writing Speed (Center 8 div) - Normal. 100 divl ms.
Enhanced. increases single-sweep storage writing speed to at
least 400 divl ms. (Option 01. 500 divl ms. normal ; to 5000
divl ms. enhanced).
Erase Time - 300 ms or less.
Locate - Beam can be positioned lelt of the graticule area to
determine vertical position of next sweep without disturbing
stored display.
ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS
Ambient Temperature - Operating: - 15' C to + S5 · C . Nonoperating: - 5S ' C to + 75 · C.
Altitude - Operating: to 4500 m (15.000 It); maximum allowable ambient temperature decreased by 1'C/ 1000 It from 5000
to 15.000 It. Nonoperating: to 15 200 m (50.000 It).
Vibration - Operating: 15 minutes along each of the three
axes. 0.06 cm (0.025 in) p-p displacement (4 g 's at 55 Hz) 10 to
55 to 10Hz in 1 minute cycles.
Humidity - Operating and nonoperating: 5 cycles (120 hours)
to 95% relative humidity referenced to MIL-E-16400F (par 4.5.9
through 4.5.9.1. class 4).
Shock - Operating and nonoperating : 30 g·s. ' /2 sine. 11 ms
duration. 2 shocks per axis in each direction for a total of
12 shocks.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
Amplitude Calibrator-0.6 V ± 1.0%. 1 kHz ± 1.0% ( + 20· C
to + 30·C). Output resistance is 575 fl.
Power Requirements - Operates on all voltages from 90 V to
136 V and 180 V to 272 V. 48 to 440 Hz. 60 W maximum. Also
operates from 220 V dc to 350 V dc.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Cabinet
Dimensions
mm
Width (with handle)
Height (w/o pouch)
Depth
434
25 MHz at 10 mV/div
20 ns/div Sweep Rate with X50 Sweep
Magnifier
Weighs "",9_4 kg (20.8 Ib)
A bistable, split-screen storage oscilloscope with
a 25 MHz bandwidth, the compact 434 fills many
needs. The split screen provides full-screen storage, or upper or lower screen storage, with the
other half conventional.
Tektronix 434s are used for maintaining display
boards, video monitors, automatic baggage handling systems, X-ray systems, and air-conditioning
and heating systems.
HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION
Time Base - 0 .2 ~s/div to 5 s/div (1-2-5 sequence). X50 magnifier extends fastest sweep rate to 20 ns/div.
Variable Time Control - Uncalibrated. continuously variable
between steps and to 12.5 s/div.
Time Base Accuracy Full 10 Division
+20'C to +30'C
-15'C to +55'C
Unmagnified
± 3%
± 4%
Magnified
± 4%
External Horizontal Input Input resistance is ",50 kfl.
TRIGGER
Modes - Auto trigger (sweep free-runs in absence of triggering signal. normal trigger. single sweep.
Trigger Sensitivity and Coupling
' Bandwidth derated to 22 MHz above + 3CPC.
334
Coupling
To 5 MHz
At 25 MHz
Internal
0.3 div deflection
1 div deflection
External
50 mV
125 mV
kg
Ib
kg
Ib
20.8
30.0
10.5
22.0
23.1
49.0
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Two P6105 Probes (010-6105-03); accessory pouch
(016-0165-00). Rack models also include mounting hardware
and slide out assemblies. but not pouch.
ORDERING INFORMATION
434 Storage Oscilloscope ................... $4,840
R434 Rackmount Storage
Oscilloscope ........................................ $5,060
Option 01 -
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Probe
Type
P6062A
61t
Requirements increase below 20 Hz
Requirements increase below 50 kHz
P6022
51t
DISPLAY
CRT - 8 x 10 div (1 div - 0.975 em) horizontal and vertical
divisions further marked in 0.2 div increments. P1 Phosphor.
4 kV accelerating potential.
Graticule - Internal. non parallax; non-illuminated.
Beam Finder - Compresses trace to within graticule area for
ease in locating an off-screen signal.
Z-Axis Input - Dc coupled. positive going signal decreases
intensity. 5 V p-p signal causes noticeable modulation; dc to
20 MHz usable frequency range .
STORAGE FEATURES
Display Modes - Split-screen with storage on upper or lower
half of screen with conventional display on other half. Storage
on entire screen or conventional display. Independent operation of halves.
Increased Writing Speed ....................... +$350
Probes
Ac
Requirements increase above 50 Hz
19.0
5.3
18.0
9.4
13.6
Ac LF Reject
Ac HF Reject
in
483
133
457
Weight '"
Current
Probe
Sources - CH 1 only. composite line. external and external
+ 10. External trigger level range is at least + 2 V to - 2 V or
+ 20 V to - 20 V .
Extemallnputs - Input R '" 1 Mfl paralleled by 100 pF + 1 or
70 pF + 1O. 250 V (dc + peak ac).
13.0
5.6
18.7
mm
Net
Shipping
Dc
CHARACTERISTICS
VERTICAL DEFLECTION
(2 Identical Channels)
Bandwidth and Riselime - (From 50 fl terminate 10' fl.
200 V - 1000 V Range - 10 Mfl ± 0.25%.
Maximum Input Voltage -
1000 V peak .
TRUE RMS AC VOLTS (ACV AND AC+DC)
Input Signal - Must be between 5% and 100% of full scale.
Ranges - 200 mV, 2 V, 20 V, 200 V, 700 V.
Accuracy·
Normal and Fast Conversion
+18'C to +28'C
Programmable Digital Multimeter
OM 5010
The DM 5010 complies with IEEE Standard 4881978 and with Tektronix Standard Codes and
Formats.
Fully Programmable
4.5 Digit, 0.015% Accuracy
Autoranging
Dc Volts, 0.015% +1 Count
Ohms, 0.015% +2 Count
Easy Calibration
Fast-Slow Mode
Microprocessor Nulling
Math Functions (dB, average, offset, scale,
HI/LO/PASS test)
tor, or a GPIB command. Measurement rates of 3
readings/second at 4.5 digit resolution and 26
readings/second at 3.5 digit resolution are avail·
able. Powering up the DM 5010 automatically
initiates the instruments's self·test cycle. The
autoranging feature eliminates the need for operator·selected ranges . The math functions resident
in the DM 5010 permit various capabilities includ·
ing: averaging of up to 19,999 readings; calcula·
tion of dB referenced either to 1 mW and 600 n or
to an operator-supplied constant (dB subject to
limitations of ac measurement capabilities;) off·
setting of measurements by an operator-supplied
constant; scaling of measurements by an opera·
tor-supplied constant; comparing measurements
to operator-supplied upper and lower limits
(DM 5010 responds with HI/PASS/La); or any
combination of these. Note that through the use
of an external shunt resistor and a scaling factor
equal to the shunt reSistor, current values may be
displayed directly on the DM 5010 display. A
single button Null function provides rapid nulling
in any mode. A special Low Frequency Response
function provides stable readouts at low frequen·
cy ac voltages.
Diode Test
UL 1244 Listing
CHARACTERISTICS
The fully programmable DM 5010 Digital
Multimeter measures dc voltage, resistance, true
RMS ac voltage, and true RMS (ac+dc) voltage.
The Ohms function allows in-circuit resistance
measurements without turning on diode and transistor junctions. A Diode Test function is provided
for testing diode and transistor junctions. All
controls and features of the DM 5010 are fully
addressable via the GPIB. The English-like programming commands make GPIB control exceptionally straightforward. The front panel controls
may be used in conjunction with the GPIB or may
be ' locked out" entirely. Measurements and calculations are triggered via internal circuitry, a
front panel pushbutton, a rear interface connec-
350
Normal Conversion
Rate
Fast Conversion
Rate
± (0.05% of reading
+ 0.05% of full scale)
2 V through
200 V
± (0.015% of reading
+ 0.005% of full scale)
± (0.05% of reading
+ 0.05% of full scale)
± (0.05% of reading
± (0.020% of reading
+ 0.01 0% of full scale) + 0.1% of full scale)
Rate
Fast Conversion
Rate
200 mV
± (0.06% of reading
+ 0.035% of full scale)
± (0.1% of reading
+ 0.1% of full scale)
2 V through
200 V
± (0.06% of reading
+ 0.03% of full scale)
± (0.1% of reading
+ 0.1 % of full scale)
1000 V
± (0.065% of reading
+ 0.035% of full scale)
± (0.1 % of reading
+ 0.15% of full scale)
Normal Conversion
± (0.2% of
± (1 .0% of
rdg + 0.2% rdg + 0.5%
of full scale) of full scale)
700 V
(15 kHz max)
± (O.S% of
rdg + 0.6%
of full scale)
± (0.2% of
rdg +0.6%
of full scale)
20 kHz to
100 kHz
Normal and Fast Conversion
200 mV
through
200 V
± (1 .25% of
rdg + 0.35%
of full scale)
± (0.65% of ± (1.45% of
rdg +0.3% rdg + 0.65%
of full scale) of full scale)
700 V
(15 kHz max)
± (1.25% of
rdg + 0.95%
of full scale)
± (0.65% of
rdg + 0.95%
of full scale)
Ac Volts + Dc Volts Only
Normal and Fast Conversion Rate;
10 to 20 Hz
+18'C to +28'C
200 mV through 200 V ± (0.8% of rdg + 0.3% of full scale)
700 V
± (O.S% of rdg + 0.9% of full scale)
O'C to +18'C,
+28'C to +SO'C
Normal and Fast Conversion Rate;
10 to 20 Hz
200 mV through 200 V ± (1 .25% of rdg + 0.45% of full scale)
700 V
± (1.25% of rdg + 1.25% of full scale)
Unguarded -
± (0.015% of reading
+ 0.01 % of full scale)
O'C to 18'C,
+28'C 10
+SO'C
± (0.8% of
rdg + 0.2%
of full scale)
Guarded -
200 mV
1000 V
200 mV
through
200 V
O'C to +18'C,
+28'C to +SO'C
100 Hz to
20 kHz
Common-Mode Rejection Ratio -
Ranges - 200 mV, 2 V, 20 V, 200 V, 1000 V.
Accuracy·
+18 ' C to
+28'C
20 Hz to
100 Hz
'Valid for a period of six months or 1000 hours, whichever
occurs first.
DC VOLTS
True RMS
Voltage
Ranges
'Valid for six months or 1000 operating hours, whichever occurs first.
Typically .. SO dB from de to 60 Hz.
Typically .. ,00 dB from de to 60 Hz.
Maximum Resolution -
10 "V.
Response Time - < 1.2 s (except for LOW FREQUENCY
RESPONSE mode).
Input Impedance -
2 Mil ± 0.1% paralleled by < 150 pF.
Maximum Input Voltage Crest Factor -
1000 V peak ac, 500 V de.
4 (subject to maximum peak input voltage).
TEK
GENERAL PURPOSE
INSTRUMENTS
RESISTANCE
Ranges -
200 I!. 2 kl!. 20 kl!. 200 kl!. 2 MI!. 20 Mil.
DM 502A
Accuracy·
+ 18·C to + 28 · C
Resistance
Range
Normal Conversion
Rate
Fast Conversion
Rate
200 I!
± (0.015% of reading
+ 0.015% of full scale)
(using null)"'
± (0.05% of reading
+ 0.05% of full scale)
(using null)"'
2 kl! to
200 kl!
± (0.015% of reading
+ 0.01 % of full scale)
(using null on)
(2 kl! only)"'
0.05% of reading
+ 0.05% of full scale)
2 MI!
± (0.10% of reading
+ 0.01 % of full scale)
± (0. 10% of reading
+ 0.05% of full scale)
± (0.15% of reading
+ 0.005% of full scale)
± (1 .0% of reading
+ 0.05% of full scale)
20 MI!
+/
B. Un
:i:r
c."
J\ j
.,~
TRUE RMS AC VOLTS
Ranges - 200 mY. 2 V. 20 V. 200 V. and 500 V. Automatic or
manual ranging (ac coupled).
Accuracy·
O· C to + lS·C
Normal Conversion
Rate
Fast Conversion
Rate
± (0.06% of reading
+ 0.06% of full scale)
(using null)"
± (0.1% of reading
+ 0.1% of full scale)
(using null)"
± (0.06% of reading
+ 0.035% of full scale)
(using null on
2 k!! only)"
± (O.l % of reading
+ 0.1% of full scale)
2 MI!
± (0.54% of reading
+ 0.035 of full scale)
± (0.55% of reading
+ 0.1% of full scale)
20 Mil
± (0.9% of reading
± 1.6% of reading
+ 0.05% of full scale)
200 I!
2 kl! to
200 kl!
+ 0.01 % of full scale)
'Valid for a period of six months or 1000 hours. whichever
occurs first.
"When the null function is not used add ±0.2 fI to all readings.
Maximum Resolution -
10 mI!.
Maximum Input Volts -
400 V peak .
Maximum Open Circuit Voltage Developed -
< 5 V.
DIODE TEST
Operation - AlmA current is generated and the resultant
VOltage is measured on the 2 V de range. This produces a
voltage sufficient to turn on diode and transistor junctions.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
Overrange Indication - For OHMS and DIODE TEST. ' OC'
is displayed ; for ACV. DCV. ACV + DCV. the display blinks.
Measurement Rate
ACV . DCV . ACV + DCV . Diode Test -3/5 at 4.5 digits ; 26/5 at
3.5 digits.
OHMS - 1.6/5 at 4.5 digits ; 7.1/5 at 3.5 digits.
Power Consumption GPIB Commands commands.
",, 20 VA .
Addressable by 30 English-like GPIB
I
40 Hz
I
± [1 .5% of reading
+ 0.3% of full scale
(6 counts)[
± [0.6% of reading
+ 0.3% of full scale
(6 counts)[
500 V
± [1 .5% of reading
+ 1.2% of full scale
(6 counts)[
± [0.6% of reading
+ 1.2% of full scale
(6 counts)[
Digital Multimeter
Normal and Fast Conversion Rate
I
20 Hz
40 Hz
I
OM 502A
± 11 .8% of reading
± 10.8% of reading
+ 0.35% of full scale + 0.35% ot full scale
(7 counts)[
(7 cou nts)[
True RMS
500 V
Range
± 11 .8% of reading
+ 1.4% of full scale
(7 counts)[
Autoranging
Seven Functions Including Temperature and
dB
0.1 % Dc Volts Accuracy
The OM 502A Digital Multimeter measures seven
different functions with pushbutton convenience.
Autoranging, in all modes except current, eliminates any need for operator selected ranges . The
OM 502A measures dc and ac voltage, dc and ac
current, dB, resistance and temperature. True
RMS provides more accuracy in ac measurements on distorted , noisy, random or other
nonsinusoidal ac waveforms . The resistance
mode features HI-LO voltage (2 V to 0.2 V). The
low voltage is user-selectable for making in-circuit
ohms measurements without turning on diode
and transistor junctions. The high voltage is available for testing junctions for forward and reverse
resistance. The LED indicators provide a bright,
readable 3 '/2 digit display.
-Valid for a period of six months or 1000 hours whichever occurs first. Typically usable to 100 kHz.
Common· Mode Rejection Ratio - ;,.60 dB at 50 Hz to 60 Hz
ith 1 kll imbalance.
Maximum Resolution - 100 "V .
Resolution Time - 1 5 within a range . + 1.5 5 for each range
change in autoranging mode.
Input impedance - 10 Mil paralleled by < 100 pF.
Maximum Input Voltage - 500 V ac RMS. 600 V dc. not to
exceed 1000 V peak.
Crest Factor - 4 at full scale all ranges (..;;2 on 500 V range).
dB (TRUE RMS)
Zero dB Reference - 1 mW in 600!l (0.775 V) (dBm). Internal
jumper change for zero dB reference of 1.000 V (dBV).
AutomallC or manual rangmg.
Ranges
Range Selected
DynamiC on front Panel
Range
Aula
+50d8
+40d8
+30d8
+20d8
+10d8
OdB
- IOd8
- 20d8
CHARACTERISTICS
DC VOLTS
Ranges - 2000 mY. 2 V. 20 V. 200 V. and 1000 V. Automatic
or manual ranging .
Accuracy·
± [0.8% of reading
+ 1.4% of full scale
(7 counts))
- 30d8
- 40d8
- SOd8
- 60d8
l yp!cal1y -75dB
Normal and Fast Conversion
~
Indicates dynamiC operating range.
± [O.l % of reading + 0.05% of full scale
(1 count)[
D
Indicates over or under range With blinking display.
Temperature - Operating: O' C to + 50 · C. Nonoperating :
- 20· C to + 65 · C.
1000 V
± [0.1% of reading + 0.1% of full scale
(1 count)[
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
One set Test Leads (003-0120-00).
o·c to
Order DM 5010 Programmable
Digital Multimeter ..................... ........... $1,995
200 mV to
200 V
± 10.2% of reading + 0.1% of full scale
(2 counts)[
1000 V
Range
± 10.2% of reading + 0.2% of full scale
(2 counts)[
ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS
20 kHz
200 mV to
200 V
Range
20 mV to
200 V
Mainframe Compatibility - The DM 5010 requires a
TM 5003 or a TM 5006 Mainframe.
20 kHz
200 mV to
200 V
O·Cto +1 8·C,
+28 "C to +SO· C
3 1/2 Digit Display
Step Response Time (To Rated Accuracy) RUN Mode
Normal Conversion Rate - ..;; 1.24 s.
Fast Conversion Rate - ";; 0.33 s.
TRIGGERED Mode
Normal Conversion Rate - ~ O . 73 s.
Fast Conversion Rate - ..;;0.19 s.
Normal and Fast Conversion Rate
20 Hz
O·C to +1 8·C, +28 · C to +SO·C
Resistance
Range
Common-Mode Rejection Ratio - ;,. 100 dB at dc . ..;; 80 dB
at 50 Hz to 60 Hz with 1 kll imbalance.
Normal-Mode Rejection Ratio - ;;;. 50 dB at 50 Hz or 60 Hz
± 0.2 Hz.
Maximum Resolution - 100 "V.
Step Response Time - 1 5 within a range. + 1.5 5 for each
range change in autoranging mode.
Input Resistance - 10 Mil.
Maximum Input Voltage - 1000 V peak .
- lS· to +2S·C
Accuracy·
+lS·C, +28·C to +SO·C
Normal and Fast Conversion Rate
'Valld for a period of
SIX
50 dB to
60 dB
± 1.5 dB Typically ± 2.5 dB
'From O"C to + IB' C and + 2B' C to + 50"C. add 0.6 dB to
above accuracy specifications. For example. at 0" C the accuracy in the + 50 db to - 50 dB range from 20 Hz to 20 kHz
would be ± 1. 1 dB.
months or 1000 hours. whichever
occurs first.
351
MULTI METER
TEK DIGITAL
Noise Level -
Typically - 7S dB.
Maximum Resolution -
0.1 dB.
Response Time - .;; 1 s within a range, .;; 1.S s for each
range change in autoranging mode.
Input Impedance -
Crest Factor -
Maximum Resolution -
10 Mll paralleled by < 100 pF.
Maximum Input Voltage peak .
HI·LO Ohms Operation - A low voltage is user·selectable for
making in-circuit ohms measurements without turning on silicon diode and transistor junctions. A high voltage is also avail·
able for testing junctions for forward and reverse resistance .
SOO V RMS, not to exceed 1000 V
0.1 ll.
Maximum Open·Circuit Voltage Developed -
= 14 V.
RESISTANCE
Ranges - 200 !1 , 2 k!1, 20 kll, 200 kll, 2000 k!1, and 20 M!1.
Automatic or manual ranging.
Accuracy·
Ranges - 200 ~A, 2 mA, 20 mA, 200 mA, and 2000 mAo
Manual ranging only.
Dc Current Accuracy + 18' C to + 28 ' C: ± [0.2% of reading + 0.05% of full scale
(1 count)].
O' C to + 18' C and + 28 ' C to + SO ' C: ± [0.3% of reading
+ 0.1% of full scale (2 counts)].
+18'C to +28'C
200 !1 to 2000 kll
Ranges
± [O.S% of reading + O.OS% of full scale
(1 count) + 0.2 !1]
20 Mil Range
± [1% of reading + O.OS% of full scale
(1 count)]
200 !1 to 2000 k!1
Ranges
± [0.8% of reading + 0.1% of full scale
(2 counts) + 0.2 !1]
20 Mll Range
± [1 .3% of reading + 0.1% of full scale
(2 counts)]
Ac Current Accuracy 20 kHz.
O' C to + 18' C and + 28 ' C to + SO ' C: ± [0.7% of reading
+ O.S% of full scale (10 counts)].
Input Resistance
Ranges
200
oc·
Response Time - .;; 1 s within a range, ';; 1.S s for each
range change in autoranging mode.
20 mA
200 mA
2000 mA
Maximum Input Volts - 130 V dc or ac RMS indefinitely.
230 V dc or ac RMS for 30 minutes maximum.
Approximate Resistance
~A
2 mA
·Valid for a period of six months or 1000 hours whichever
curs first.
(from 40 Hz to 10kHz) Usable to
+ 18'C to + 28 ' C: ± [0.6% of reading + 0.3% of full scale
(6 counts)].
O'C to +18'C and +28'C to +50'C
- SS 'C to + 200 ' C.
Resolution -
O.I ' C.
Accuracy·
+18'C to +28'C
Temperature to be Measured 1-55'C
DC AND TRUE RMS AC CURRENT
4 at full scale (.;; 2 above 40 dB).
TEMPERATURE
Range -
Response Time -
1.0 kll
100.0 II
10.2 II
1.2 II
0.4 II
.;; 1
Maximum Floating Voltage Maximum Resolution -
± 2.S' C
± 3.S' C
P6601 and instrument not
calibrated as a pair
± 4.S' C
± S.S' C
·For O'C to + 18'C and + 28' C to + SO' C ambient temperatures, add ± 1.5' C to accuracy specifications.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
Overrange Indication and SOO V ac).
Measurement Rate Power Consumption -
Blinking display (except 1000 V dc
3 per second.
= 8 W.
Inputs - Maximum input voltage is 1000 V. The front panel
volts/!1, or LOW, or mA terminal can be floated 1000 V peak
maximum above ground , the rear input 200 V peak . For the
rear input, ae volts, ohms and maximum input specifications
are derated.
ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS
Temperature - Operating: O' C to + 50 ' C.
Nonoperating : - SS ' C to + 7S ' C.
S.
Maximum Open Circuit Input Voltage (mA to LOW) peak, fused with 2 A fast blow.
I +150'C I +200'C
P6601 Probe and OM S02A
calibrated as a pair
2S0 V
1000 V peak .
0.1 ~A .
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
One pair test leads (003-0120-00) ; P6601 Temperature Probe
(010-6601-01 ).
ORDERING INFORMATION
OM 502A Digital Multimeter ................... $570
Option 02 - (Deletes temperature probe
and capability) ............... ............................................... - $100
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
The following accessories may be ordered as option s for use
with any of the three TM SOO/TM SOOO Digital Multimeters.
..
013-0107·03
t--
012·0426-00
a.
012·0425-00
012-0426-01
Test Lead black, 4 11. Order 012·042S-00 ........................ $12
Test Lead red , 411. Order 012-0426-00 ...................... $17.50
Test Lead black, 411. Order 012-0426-01 ................... $17.50
Test Lead Set of 012-042S-00, 012-0426-00,
and 013-0107-03.
Order 012-0427 -00 ............................................................ $29
High Voltage Probe to 40 kV (complete information page 3S4).
Order 010-0277·00 .......................................................... $127
P6420 RF Probe 2 m cable included (complete information
page 433).
Order 010-6420-03 ................. ,........................................ $131
Female BNC to dual banana adaptor.
Order 103-0090-00 ......................................................... $7.50
P6601 Temperature Probe
The P6601 Probe is a temperature measuring device designed to operate with the DM S02A and
DM S01A Digital Multimeters. The temperature
senSing element consists of a thin-film platinum
resistor on the tip of the probe . Measurements
are made by touching the senSing element to the
surface whose temperature is in question. The
thermal signal is transmitted to the associated
digital multimeter through a two-conductor cable.
352
The thermal time constant on the P6601 Probe is
0.5 s ± 0.2 S . The P6601 is totally immersable except in liquids that are not compatible with Dow
Corning 308 molding compound, BeO, silicone
rubber, or epoxy adhesives. The sensor and tip
are limited to a maximum of 240°C, and cable is
limited to a maximum of 140°C.
P6601 Temperature Probe
Order 010-6601-01 .............................•..• $201
Tektronix offers service training classes on the TM SOO/ TM
5000 Measurement Product Systems and a multi· media
training package on Digital Counter and Meter concepts.
For further training information, contact your local Sales·
IService Office or request a copy of the Tektronix Service
Training Schedule on the return card in the center of this
catalog.
TEK
GENERAL PURPOSE
INSTRUMENTS
DM 501A
_,, CJ
0 LI
n :'
-, U ,_
TRUE RMS AC VOLTS
Input Signal - Must be between 5% and 100% of full scale.
Ranges - 200 mV, 2 V, 20 V, 200 V, and 500 V (ac coupled).
Accuracy'
Maximum Open-Circuit Voltage Developed - < S V.
Ranges - 200 II, 2 k!I, 20 k!I, 200 k!I, 2000 k!l. and 20 M!I.
Accuracy'
+ 18'C to +28'C
200 II Range
LO ll
± 10.15% of reading + 0.015%
of lull scale (3 counts)!
2 kll to 2000 kll
Ranges
HIli
± 10.15% of reading + 0.015%
of full scale (3 counts)1
2 kll 10 200 kll
Ranges
LOll
± [0.15% of reading + 0.015%
of full scale (3 counts)1
2000 kll Range
LOll
± 10.3% of reading + 0.015%
of full scale (3 counts)!
20 M!I Range
HI li
only
± 10.5% of reading + 0.015%
of full scale (3 counts)!
10 kHz I 20 kHz
200 mV ±[1%of
±[O.S% of
± [W. of
to 200 V reading + 0.05% reading + 0.05% reading + 0.05%
Ranges of full scale
of full scale
of full seale
(10 counts))
(10 counts))
(10 counts))
I
20 Hz
500 V
Range
40 Hz
± [l %of
reading + 0.2%
of full scale
(10 counts))
+18'C to +28'C
I
± [O.S% of
± [l%of
reading + 0.2% reading + 0.2%
of full scale
of full scale
(10 counts))
(10 counts))
O'C to +18'C and +28'C to +50'C
I
20 Hz
Digital Multimeter
OM 501A
0,05% dc Voltage Accuracy
Seven Functions Including dB
4 '/2 Digits of Readout Resolution
True RMS Capability
40 Hz
I
10 kHz
I
20 kHz
200 mV ± [1.3%of
to 200 V reading
Ranges + 0.075% of
f"" scale
(15 counts))
± [O.S%of
reading
+ 0.075% of
full scale
(15 counts)]
500 V
Range
± [O.S% of
+ [1 .3% of
reading + 0.3% reading + 0.3%
of full scale
of full seale
(15 counts))
(15 counts))
± [1 .3% of
reading + 0.3%
of full scale
(15 counts))
± [1 .3%of
reading
of full scale
+ 0.075%
(15 counts))
'Valid (or a period o( six months or 1000 hours whichever occurs first.
Common-Mode Rejection Ratio - ... SO dB at 50 Hz to SO Hz
with 1 kll imbalance.
Maximum Resolution - 10 ~V.
Response Time - < 2 s.
Input Impedance - 10 Mil paralleled by 1S0 pF.
Maximum Input Voltage - 500 V ae RMS, SOO V dc, not to
exceed 1000 V peak .
Crest Factor - 4 at full scale.
dB (TRUE RMS)
Zero dB Reference - 1 mW in SOO Il (0.775 V) (dBm) Internal
jumper change for zero dB reference of 1.0000 V (dBV).
Accuracy·
+lS'C to +2S'C
The OM S01A Digital Multimeter measures dc and
ac voltage, dc and ac current, resistance , dB and
temperature. The OM S01A gives 4 '12 digits of
readout resolution . All with 0.05% accuracy and
true RMS capability. True RMS allows accurate
measurement of distorted waveforms. DB is useful when making critical audio and communication
measurements. Fast accurate temperature measurements to 240°C come from the Tektronix
P6601 platinum film temperature sensing probe.
The P6601 reaches 90% of final reading in
1.5 seconds.
CHARACTERISTICS
ange Selected
ontront
Dynamic
DC VOLTS
Panel
""0 de
+20 dB
OdB
-20dB
- 40dB
+30 dB
+20 dB
+10dB
+OdB
± [0.05% of reading +0.015% of
full scale (3 counts))
2Vt0200V
Ranges
± [0.05% of reading + 0.01 % of
full scale (2 counts))
1000 V Range
± [0.05% of reading + 0.02% of
full scale (2 counts))
O'C to + lS'C and + 2S'C to + 50'C
200 mV to 200 V
Ranges
± [0.1% of reading + 0.025 of
full scale (5 counts)]
1000 V Range
± [0.1% of reading ± 0.05% of
full scale (5 counts))
a period o( six months or 1000 hours, whichever
occurs first.
Common-Mode Rejection Ratio - .. 100 dB at dc .... SO dB
at 50 Hz and SO Hz with 1 kll imbalance.
Normal-Mode Rejection Ratio - .. SO dB at 50 Hz or SO Hz
± 0.2 Hz .
Maximum Resolution - 10 ~V.
Step Response Time - < 1 second.
Input Resistance - 10 Mil.
Maximum Input Voltage - 1000 V peak.
± [0.3% of reading + 0.025%
of full scale (5 counts)1
2 kll to 2000 kll
Ranges
Hili
± 10.3% of reading + 0.025%
of full scale (5 count)!
2 kll to 200 k!1
Ranges
LO II
± 10.3% of reading + 0.025%
of full scale (5 counts)1
20 Mil Range
LO !I 2000 kll
Range
HI li
± [1 .2% of reading + 0.025%
of full scale (5 counts)!
'Valid (or six months or 1000 hours whichever occurs first.
DC AND TRUE RMS AC CURRENT
Input Signal - Must be between 5% and 100% of full scale
(ac only).
Ranges - 200 ~A . 2 rnA. 20 rnA. 200 rnA , and 2000 rnA.
Dc Current Accuracy - + lS ' C 10 + 2S ' C: ± [0.2% of reading +0.015% of full scale (3 counts)]. O' C to + 1S' C and
+ 2S ' C to + 50' C: ± [0.3% of reading + 0.025% of full scale
(5 counts)).
Ac Current Accuracy' - From 20 Hz to 10 kHz.
+ 18'C to + 2S' C: ± [O.S% of reading + 0.05% of full scale
(10 counts)). O' C to 1S'C and 2S ' C to 50 ' C: ± [0.7% of reading + 0.075% of full scale (15 counts)). Usable to 20 kHz.
Relponse Time - < 1 s dc current. < 2 s ac current
- 'OdS
-20 dB
-30 dB
-"OdS
-so dB
-00 dB
-Aef...-.cedto1V
~ indicates dynamic operating range
o
indicates out of range with blinking display
To obtain the correct dB reading, algebraically add the range
selected to the display reading ('dynamic range ' should be
± 20 dB from range reflected on front panel except + 54 dB).
RESISTANCE
Responle Time - < 2 seconds in 200 Il to 2000 kll ranges;
< 10 seconds in 20 Mil range.
Maximum Input Voltl - 250 V peak.
Maximum Resolution -10 mil.
HI-LO OHM Operation - A low voltage is user-selectable for
making in-circuit ohms measurements without turning on silicon diode and transistor junctions. A high voltage is also available for testing junctions for forward and reverse resistance.
Approximate Resistance
200 ~A
1.0 kll
2 mA
100.0 Il
20 mA
10.211
200 mA
1.2 11
0.4 11
2000 mA
Maximum Open-Circuit Input Voltage (mA to LOW) peak . fused with 2 A last blow.
Maximum Floating Voltaga - 1000 V peak.
Maximum Resolution - 10 nA.
250 V
TEMPERATURE
Range - - S2 ' C to + 240 ' C.
Resolution - 0.1 ' C.
Accuracy' - ( + lS ' C to + 2S ' C ambient temperature.)
Temperature to be mea lured
-62'C
""0 de
+lS'C to +2S'C
200 mV Range
LO II
+S4""
Ranges - 200 mV, 2 V, 20 V, 200 V, and 1000 V.
Accuracy'
'Valid (or
± 0.5 dB ± 1.5 dB Typically ± 2.5 dB
'From O'C to + 18"C and +28"C to + SO'C, add 0.6 dB to
aoove accuracy specifications.
Maximum Resolution - 0.1 dB.
Response Time - < 2 s.
Input Impedance - 10 Mil paralleled by < lS0 pF.
Maximum Input Voltage - 500 V RMS, not to exceed 1000 V
peak. Equivalent to + 54 dBV or + 5S.2 dBm.
Crest Factor - 4 at full scale.
Range
200 II Range
Range
20 kHz
- 15 dB to - 20 dB
O'C to +18'C and +28'C to +50'C
I
+150'C
I
+240'C
PSSOl and OM 501 A
calibrated as a pair
± 2' C
O' C to - S' C
PSS01 and instrument
not calibrated as a pair
±4'C
+2'C to - S' C
'For O'C to + 18"C and +28"C to + SO'C ambient temperatures, add 1.5' C to aoove limit in each direction.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
Overrange Indication - Blinking display (except on 1000 V dc
and 500 V ac ranges).
Measurement Rate - 3'/3 per second.
Power Consumption - ",, 9 w.
Inputs - Maximum input voltage is 1000 V. The front panel
Volts/. or LOW. or rnA terminals can be floated to 1000 V peak
maximum. above ground, the rear input only 200 V peak. For
the rear input. ac volts. ohms. and maximum input specfieations are derated.
ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS
Temperature - Operating: O' C to + 50 'C. Nonoperating:
- SS ' C to +7S'C.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
One pair of test leads. (003-0120-00); PSSOl Temperature
Probe. (010-SS01-01).
ORDERING INFORMATION
DM 501A Digital Multimeter ................... $650
Option 02 - (Deletes PSS01 Temperature Probe and
temperature measurement capability) ...... __ ........ _... ___ ... -$100
353
ACCESSORIES
TEK MUlTIMETER
PROBES AND OPTIONAL
ACCESSORIES FOR
DIGITAL MULTIMETERS
P6601 Temperature Probe
P6420 RF Probe
t
I
The following accessories may be ordered as options for use with all of the three TM 500ITM 5000
Digital Multimeters.
•
•
HIGH VOLTAGE PROBE
•
I
•
The High Voltage Probe will measure dc voltages
from 1 kV to 40 kV with an accuracy of 1% at
25 kV. The division ratio is 1000:1. Common uses
include measuring anode voltages on monitors or
oscilloscopes. Probe plugs directly into the front
end of the multimeter.
The thermal time constant on the P6601 Probe is
0.5 seconds ± 0.2 seconds. The P6601 is totally
immersible except in liquids that are not compatible with Dow Corning 308 molding compound ,
BeO, silicone rubber, or epoxy adhesives. The
sensor and tip are limited to a maximum of
+240°C, and cable is limited to a maximum of
+ 140°C.
CHARACTERISTICS
Voltage Range -
1kV to 40 kV dc.
Input Resistance Division Ratio -
1000 MI1.
1000: 1.
Overall Accuracy -
20 kV to 30 kV 2%.
Upper Limit Accuracy 4% at 40 kV .
Changes linear from 2% at 30 kV to
Lower Limit Accuracy 4% at 1 kV .
Changes linear from 2% at 20 kV to
Input Z at Meter -
10 MI1 required .
High Voltage Probe Order 010-0277-00 • $127
The P6601 Probe is a temperature measuring device designed to operate with the DM 502A and
DM 501A Digital Multimeters. The temperature
sensing element consists of a thin-film platinum
resistor on the tip of the probe. Measurements
are made by touching the sensing element to the
surface whose temperature is in question . The
thermal signal is transmitted to the associated
digital multi meter through a two-conductor cable.
The P6420 RF Probe is compatible with DMM's
that have an input impedance of 10 megaohms or
less and comes with a two meter cable. See
page 433 for complete information including accessories and other cable lengths.
P6601 Temperature Probe
Order 010-6601-01 ................................. $201
CHARACTERISTICS
Voltage Range -
5 V to 25 V RMS (70.7 V pop).
Ac to Dc Transfer Ratio Accuracy - 0.5 V to 5 V RMS
± 10% ( + lS · C to + 3S · C). 5.0 V to 25 V RMS ± S% ( + lS · C
to + 3S · C).
Frequency Response - 100 kHz to 300 MHz ( ± 0.5 dB),
50 kHz to 500 MHz ( ± 1.5 dB), 10 kHz to 1 GHz ( ± 3.0 dB).
Input Capacitance -
",3.7 pF.
Maximum Inp,ut Voltage -
42.4 V (peak ac + dc).
Temperature Range - Nonoperating : - SS· C to + 7S · C.
Operating: + 15· C to + 35 · C.
Length -
Probe only 96 mm. Cable only 2 meters.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
TIP, probe, retractable (013-0097-01 ): adaptor, BNC female to
dual banana (103-0090-00): clip, alligator (344-0046-00): holder, probe (352-0351-00) : lead, ground, 76.2 mm (3 in) (1750849-00): lead , ground, 152.8 mm (6 in) (175-1017-00): insulating sleeve, electrical (166-0404-01) : 2 tips, probe replaceable'
'A vailable In package of 10 only, Order 206-0230-03
DMM OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
The following accessories may be ordered as options for use
with any of the three TM SOO/TM 5000 Digital Multimeters.
~."-.I.'3-.0..'_0~_ 10" or B > 10'2
will cause overflow).
to 350 MHz.
Resolution ±LSO ± I .4 x
Accuracy -
A Trigger Jitter Error (F
AI>
N
x requency I
Resolution ± (Time Base Error x Frequency A.)
PERIOD A
Range -
3.125 ns to 7.6 hours.
0 to 350 MHz.
TOTALIZE A-B
Repetition Rate -
0 to 350 MHz.
RISE/FALL A
Range -
4 ns to 10' s (50 II) 5 ns to 10' s (I Mil).
Repetition Rate - Minimum time between rising (falling)
edges is 12.5 ns (80 MHz).
Input Amplitude - (1.4 V to 8 V) x Attenuation (50 II), (0.7 V
to 4 V) x Attenuation (I Mil).
Resolution ± LSD +
~ (± Start Trig Jitter Error
± Stop Trig Jitter Error)
Resolution 1.4 x A Trigger Jitter Error
±LS0 ±
N
Accuracy -
Resolution ± (Time Base Error) x Period A.
RATIO B/A
Range -
I O-Oto 10' (Frequency range 36 ~Hz to 350 MHz).
Rasolution -
Accuracy - Resolution ± (Time Base Error x Risetime/Fall·
time) ± 2 ns ± 4 mV x Slew Rate A Error (near lOOk ) ± 4 mV
Slew Rate A Error (near 90%).
Resolution and Accuracy Dellnition. Trigger Jitter Error (seconds RMS) =
V
(enl)2 + (9n2)2 (Volts RMS)
Input Slew Rate at trigger point (V/s)
1.4 x B Trigger Jitter Error X Frequency B
± LSD ±
N
Accuracy -
Same as Resolution.
TIMEA ..... B
Range -
2.0 ns to 7.6 hours.
Resolution ± LSD +
~ x (±
CH A Trig Jitter Error ± Ch B Trig Jitter
Error)
Accuracy Resolution ± (Time Base Error x Time A ..... B) + (B Trigger
Slew Error) - (A Trigger Slew Error) ± (Channel Delay
MismatCh·).
Resolution -
Best time A ..... B Avg resolution = ± Ips.
Minimum Dead Time Rep Rate -
12.5 ns (stop to start).
< 70 MHz.
Where: enl - 140,uV RMS typical counter input noise for
1 MG filter on; 250 ,uV RMS typical for 1 MG filter off
and 340,u V RMS typical for 50 G.
en2 - RMS Noise Voltage of input signal at trigger
point measured with 150 MHz bandwidth.
trigger accuracy times
AnN factor
(trigger accuracy + hyst)
times AnN factor
(trigger accuracy + hyst)
times AnN factor
trigger accuracy times
AnN factor
Same as Wdith, exoept each number
Is multiplied by (Frequency B)
Events B
During A
Resolution -
Arming Input - Permits measurements of oornplex waveforms. A nL high allows averaging of selected events within a
measurement.
FREQUENCY A
~Hz
L.r
stop edge
4 ns to 7.6 hours.
Repetillon Rate -
36
stop edge
start edge
WIDTH A
Range -
Shaped Out - Shaped replica of signal being measured, aids
proper triggering on complex waveforms (~I 00 mV typically to
350 MHz Into 50 II load).
Range -
start edge
± Trig Jitter Error CH A stop edge).
Accuracy - Resolution + Freq B (Stop Slew Rate Error Start Slew Rate Error) + Freq B x (5 ± 2 ns).
Resolution -
Maximum Input Vollege - I Mil input impedance.
I X - ± 42 V (de + peak ac) to 200 kHz; ± 2 V (de + peak ac)
to 300 MHz.
5X- ±42V(de + peak ac) to I MHz; ±IOV(de + peakac)
to 300 MHz.
In 50 II input impedance, signals > ± 2 V x attenuator will
cause input protection circuitry to switch input to I Mil.
Width A....rL.
-IN
10Hz to 350 MHz.
Slope +/-, atten 1x/5X, Coupl
4.0 ns (and 8.5 ns minimum time
Slew Rate Error (seconds) ·trigger level error (V)
input slew rate at trigger point (V/s)
'Trigger levei error All functions
Positive
Trigger accuracy times
except Width
Slope
AnN factor
and Events B
During A
Negative
(trigger accuracy ± I 0 mY)
times AnN factor
Slope
Note: Input hysteresis is typicaly 50 mV p-p x attenuation.
N - Number of Averages
The minimum number of averages is selected by the Averages
button and the t + buttons in decade steps from I to IO'. At
Channel A repetition rates above ",250 Hz the actual number
of averages will be:
N - [Frequency A (Hz) x 4 ms] + Averages.
N _ Averages setting (below 250 Hz).
This calculation typically leads to better than expected resolu·
tion in the displayed answer for small N with oniy minimai im·
pact on measurement time. It does mean, however, that Arm·
ing must be used where only N - I is desired for signals ~ 250
Hz.
In the Auto mode the counter measures with a fixed measurement time of about 300 ms (or the time for one event, whichev·
er is greater).
N - Frequency A (Hz) x 0.3 s (N always ~ I).
Prolbe Cornp display indicates I for over oornp, 0 for under
oornp. Accuracy - (A x 0.300)%. A - Prolbe Attenuation times
counter attenuator setting.
Time Base Error based used.
The sum of all errors specified for the time
STANDARD TIME BASE
Crystal Frequency - 10 MHz.
Temperature Stability - ± 5 x 10- 0, 0 to + 50·C.
Aging Rate - ... 1 x 10- 0/year.
Satability - Adjustable to within ± 5 x 10-°.
HIGH STABILITY TIME BASE (OPTION 01)
Crystal Frequency - 10 MHz.
Temperature Stability - ± 2 x 10- 7 of final frequency in
< 10 minutes when cold started at 25 · C.
Aging Rate - ... 1 x 10- 0/ day at time of shipment ,
4 x 1O - o/ week after 30 days of continuous operation ,
4 x 10- 0/year after 60 days of continuous operaton.
Satabillty - Adjustable to within ± 2 x 10-°.
REAR INTERFACE
Inputs - Arming; reset ; external time base (I, 5, or 10 MHz).
Outputs - I MHz clock.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
Power Consumption - DC 510: 14.6 W ",,(19 W with Option 01). DC SOlO: 14.5 W ,.,(19.3 W with Option 01).
GPIB Data Output Rate (DC 5010 only) - ,., I 0 readings/s
maximum.
GPIB Command. (DC 5010 only) - Addressable by 45 En·
glish-like GPIB commands.
TM 5000 Power Module Compatibility - Due to the extended
GPIB interlace connector the DC 5010 is not oornpatible with
TM 500 Series mainframes.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Shaped output cable (012-0532-00).
ORDERING INFORMATION
DC 510 Universal Counter/Timer ........ $3,380
DC 5010 Programmable Universal
CounterfTimer ..................................... $3,900
Option 01 - High Stability nme Base .......................... $295
Field Option 01 Kit for DC 510/5010
Order 040·0966-00 .......................................................... $250
Field GPIB Kit for DC 510 Order 040-1023-02 .............. $500
RECOMMENDED PROBE
5 X Passive Probe,
Order 010-6125-01 ...........
$58
'Can be removed with 'NUll".
359
COUNTERS
TEK DIGITAL
DC 50BA
Maximum Operating Input Voltage - For 50 !l is ,,;;,7 V peak .
For 1 M!l 1X attenuation, V peak ,,;;,400 V; V p-p < 300 V from
10Hz to 0.75 MHz, V p-p 225/fMHz V from 0.75 MHz to
22 MHz, V p-p < 10 V above 22 MHz ; for a pulse, V peak
< 400 V and dV/dt < 5 V/ns. For 1 MO, lOX attenuation, V
peak ,.;400 V; V p-p < 300 V from 10 Hz to 1 MHz, V p-p
< 300/fMHz V from 1 MHz to 6 MHz, V p-p < loa V above
6 MHz.
Attenuation -
DC 503A
IX, lOX.
Resolution (without resolution multiplier) - 0.1 Hz with las
gate, 1 Hz with 1 s gate, 10Hz with 100 ms gate, 100 Hz with
lams gate, and 1 kHz with 1 ms gate.
Rear Interface Internal Input Sensitivity SO MHz.
125 mV RMS to
Rear Interface Intemel Input Impedance -
50 !l.
Reer Interface Internal Input Maximum Input Voltage Resolution Multiplier Frequency Range Resolution Multiplier Multiplication Resolution Multiplier Lock Time -
4 V.
10Hz to 25 kHz.
Xl00.
< S s.
PRESCALE INPUT ( + 8)
Frequency Range -
Frequency Counter
Impedance -
DC S08A
Vswr -
Frequency up to 1.3 GHz
Sensitivity to 20 mY RMS Prescale,
15 mY RMS Direct
X100 Resolution Multiplier to 25 kHz
Input Out-of-Range Light
Nine Digit LED Readout
Front Panel Fuse Protection on
Prescale Input
Designed to operate in TM 500fTM 5000 Series
Mainframes, the DC 508A Counter measures
frequency from 10 Hz to 1.3 GHz. A nine·digit
LED display shows frequency or total events from
o to 999,999,999. The prescaler input allows it to
measure frequency from 100 MHz to 1.3 GHz,
and the direct input from 10 Hz to 100 MHz. The
decimal point is automatically positioned and
leading zeros suppressed. Digit overflow is indio
cated by a front panel LED. Option 01 includes a
high-stability time base, and Option 07 includes
Option 01 and an interface for the TR 502 and
TR 503 Tracking Generator/Spectrum Analyzer.
An audio frequency resolution multiplier multiplies
the resolution by 100 from 10 Hz to 25 kHz. This
allows resolution of 0.01 Hz in 1 second. Detent
position of Display Time knob provides a hold
mode.
CHARACTERISTICS
DISPLAY
Nine-digil LED display, leading zeros blanked, automatic decimal point positioning , LED front panel indicators for gate open,
overflow, kHz, and MHz.
Frequency Range Sensitivity Impedance -
DIRECT INPUT
10Hz to 100 MHz.
15 mV RMS.
100 MHz to 1.3 GHz.
Sensitivity - 20 mV RMS from ,,;;, 100 MHz to .. 1.1 GHz
(- 21 dBm) 40 mV RMS (- 15 dBm) from 1.1 to 1.3 GHz.
DC 503A
< 2.2:1.
Maximum Operating Input Voltage ,,;;,2 V (+ 19 dBm).
V peak < 15 V, V RMS
125 MHz both A and B Channels
Resolution - 1 Hz with 8 s gate, 10Hz with 800 ms gate,
100 Hz with 80 ms gate, and 1 kHz with 8 ms gate.
Eight Measurement Functions:
input Protection Voltage ( + 30 dBm).
Frequency
Input fuse opens at = 9 V RMS
Input Out·ol-Range LED - Indicates voltage or frequency too
low for error-free counting.
TIME BASE
Frequency - 10 MHz; may also be used with external time
bases with TTL levels at 1, 5, and 10 MHz.
Temperature Stability Aging Rate -
a to SO ' C -
± 5 x 10- 0 .
OPTION 01 TIME BASE
(OVEN OSCILLATOR)
10 MHz.
Frequency -
Temperature Stability, 0 to 50'C After Warmup 0.2 parts in 100 atter warmup.
± 2 x la- B.
Frequency, reset, external clock, start count.
Rear Outputs - BCD, decimal point, time slot zero, scan
clock , data good, overflow, reset, gate out.
ACCURACY
The overall DC S08A accuracy is:
Accuracy (Of. of reading) ± (time basa accuracy + (
I d. lIed
)) x 100
tota ISP ay counts
Time base accuracy < ± [calibration accuracy + temperature
stability + (aging rate x time since calibration) + short-term
stability].
ORDERING INFORMATION
DC SOB A Frequency Counter ..........•... $1,630
Option 01 -
(Time Base) ..... ,..................................... +$295
Option 07 - (Includes Option 01 Time Base)
for use with TR S02 ..................................................... +$340
Selectable 50 !l and 1 M!l paralleled by 25 pF.
ralar to paga 430.
Time A -
B and Time A -
B Average
Events A During Band
Events A During B Average
Ratio A /B Average
Within
Aging Rate - ,.; 1 x 10- B/day at time of shipping. < 4 x
10- B/week after a month of continuous operation. < I x
10- B/year atter two months of continuous operation.
Rear Inputs -
Width and Width Average
Time Manual
Warmup Time - Within ± 0.2 ppm of final frequency in < 1a
minutes when cold-started at 2S ' C.
Setability -
Period and Period Average
Totalize
1 x 10- 0 per year.
For recommended probes -
360
Universal Counter/Timer
50 !l.
10 ps Resolution in Time Interval
Average with 108 Averages
Shaped Outputs for Ease of Triggering
40 MHz Rep Rate in Time Interval Average
Simplified Width Measurement
DeSigned for True Probe Compatibility
Trigger Level Outputs for
Accurate Trigger Setting
The DC 503A offers a broad range of measure·
ment features at an affordable price. The instru'
ment has two input channels, A and B, each with
125 MHz capability. Each channel has separate
triggering level, triggering slope, attenuator, and
coupling mode controls. Eight measurement func·
tions are available with the DC 503A and an averaging feature allows measurements to be aver·
aged from 1 to 108 times. Signals to be counted
or timed can be applied to channels A and B via
front panel BNC connectors, or through rear inter·
face connections. The DC 503A features an easy
access front panel and an LSI based design for
increased instrument reliability.
GENERAL PURPOSE
INSTRUMENTS
TEK
The DC 503A can be equipped with an optional
10 MHz crystal oscillator, (temperature controlled
self contained oven) Option 01 , to obtain a highly
stable and precise internal time base. Both the
optional oscillator and the standard 10 MHz crystal oscillator provide 100 ns resolution of singleshot time intervals.
CHARACTERISTICS
Display overflow.
WIDTH B (AVERAGE)
Range -
5 ns to 10 s.
Resolution _
100 ns
.fN
Number of Averages -
Accuracy·'·2*)·.
±
100ns
.fN
N - 1 to 10" in decade steps.
=
.
.
B
± time base error x Width .
± CH B start trigger Jitter error
Frequency Range - 0 to 125 MHz, dc coupled. 10Hz to
125 MHz, ac coupled.
.fN
Impedance -
1 Mil paralleled by ",, 27 pF.
Resolution -
Attenuation -
Selectable 1X, 5X.
Accuracy·'·)··
Adjustable ± 3.5 V
x attenuation.
Independent Controls Slope +/-, Attenuation 1X/5X,
Coupled ac/dc, Source Internal/External.
Temp Stability Aging Rate -
+ (CH B stop slew rate error - CH B start slew rate error)
Rsnge -
Trigger level -
Crystal Frequency -
± CH B stop trigger jitter error
Sensitivity - 20 mV RMS sinewave to 100 MHz, 35 mV RMS
sinewave to 125 MHz. 60 mV p-p; at minimum pulse width of
5 ns to 100 MHz . 100 mV p-p at minimum pulse width of 4 ns
to 125 MHz.
Dynamic Range - V p-p .. 3 V x attenuation.
V peak .. 3 .5 x attenuation.
STANDARD TIME BASE
.fN
",,0.2 seconds to 5 seconds and hold.
CHANNEL A AND B INPUT
Frequency Range -
0 to 100 MHz.
100 ns to 1O's.
100 ns to 10 s in decade steps.
=
± 1 count ± time base error x Time A -- B
± CH A trigger jitter error
± CH B trigger Jitter error
± (CH B stop trigger slew error
- CH A start trigger slew errorl ± 4 ns.
Range -
12.5 ns to 10 s.
5X: 200 V peak ; 400 V p-p from dc to 5 MHz, derate to 20 V
p-p from 100 MHz to 125 MHz.
Minimum Dead Time -
12.5 ns (Stop-te-Start).
Number of Averages -
N = 1 to 10a in decade steps.
100 ns
FREQUENCY A
Accuracy·,*a*)· .. =
± 100 ns ± time base error x Time A
Accuracy·' = ± 1 count ± time base error x Frequency A .
PERIOD B (SINGLE SHOT)
+
+
+ (CH B stop trigger slew error
- CH A start trigger slew error) ± 4 ns
Minimum B Pulse Width Number of Averages -
Frequency Range -
Accuracy*2*1·. -
8 ns to 10 s.
1 fs (10 -
Number of Averages A ccufacy·l
.,.,
15 )
to 100 ns in decade steps.
+ 1.4 x CH B trigger Jitter error
-
N
0 to 125 MHz.
WIDTH B (SINGLE SHOT)
Range -
100 ns to 10's.
Resolution -
100 ns to 10 s in decade steps.
Accuracy·'·)·" =
± 1 count ± time base error x Width B.
± CH B start trigger jitter error
± CH B stop trigger jitter error
+ (CH B stop slew rate error -CH B start slew rate error).
125 MHz.
5 ns.
N = 1 to 10" in decade steps.
Period A
.
+ Width B x .fN x Events A dUring B
Aging Rate 1 x 10- a/day at time of shipment, 4 x
10 - a/ week after 30 days of continuous operation , 1 x
1O- 6 /year after 60 days of continuous operation.
Setability -
Adjustable to within 2
x 10- 8 .
REAR INTERFACE
Outputs - BCD serial-by-digit, decimal point, overflow, scan
clock ; trigger level; time base reference.
NOTES
.') Time base error is the sum of al/ errors specified for the time
base used.
.') Trigger jitter error (in I's) =
J(en,)' + (en,)2 (V)
Input slew rate at trigger point (V/I's)
Where: en, = 100l'V RMs typical internal noise.
en, - RMS noise of signal input at trigger point for
a 125 MHz bandwidth.
·0) Trigger slew rate error (in I's) =
Input hysterisis (V)/2
Input slew rate at set trigger point V/I'S
Where: Input hysterisis = 20 mV peak-te-peak typical.
+ CH B start trigger jitter error x Frequency A (in MHz)
.fN
N = 1 to 10'.
100 ns
.
.
= ±-N
-± time base error x Period B
Frequency Range -
Warmup Time - Within 2 x 10- 1 of final frequency in < 10
minutes when cold started at 25· C.
(AVGS) mode, the number of widths of B averaged in Width
B (AVGS) and Events A During B modes, and the number of
periods of B in the Ratio NB mode.
.fN
Accuracy·'·2 = ± 1 count ± time base error x Period B ± 1.4
x CH B trigger jitter error.
PERIOD B (Average)
± 2 x 10- 1 after warm-up, O· C to
CH B trigger jitter error
EVENTS A DURING B (AVERAGE)
0 to 125 MHz.
10 MHz.
<
·2) N is the number of periods averaged in Period B (AVGS)
mode, the number of intervals averaged in the Time A -- B
Maximum A Frequency -
Resolution -
-+ B
.fN
100 ns to 10 s in decade steps.
Range -
Temp Stability + 50· C.
CH A trigger jitter error
100 ns to 10' s.
Resolution -
Crystal Frequency -
.fN
0 to 125 MHz .
0 .1 Hz to 10 MHz in decade steps.
10- 0 per year.
Adjustable to within 5 x 10-°.
reset ; external time base .
.fN
50 II.
Trigger level - A dc level corresponding to the actual trigger
level. Accuracy ± 20 mV ± 0.5% of reading .
<1 x
10 MHz.
± 5 x 10-°, O· C to + 50·C .
Inputs - Direct count input to 50 MHz, (50 Il impedance, resistor may be removed for 1 Mil impedance, remote start/stop,
Resolution _
Shaped Out - Shaped replica of signal being measured, aids
proper triggering on complex waveforms. ;;.200 mV p-p from
<
OPTION 01 HIGH STABILITY TIME BASE
TIME A -- B (SINGLE SHOT)
1X: 200 V peak ; 400 V p-p from dc to 50 kHz , derate to 15 V
p-p from 1.33 MHz to 125 MHz.
Resolution -
Setability -
TIME A -- B (AVERAGE)
Maximum Input Voltage
Range -
TIME MANUAL
Electronic stopwatch, accumulates and displays time between
activation of front panel start/stop button or rear interface signal line. Clock rates selectable from 100 ns to 10 s in decade
steps. Range 100 ns to 10' s.
Eight digit lED ; indicators for units , gate open, and
Display Time -
Range -
TOTALIZE A
1 to 99,999,999 counts at maximum rate of 125 MHz. Start,
stop and reset controlled by front panel pushbuttons or rear
interface signal lines.
ORDERING INFORMATION
+ CH B stop trigger jitter error x Frequency A (in MHz)
.fN
Option 01 -
+ (CH B stop trigger slew error
- CH B start trigger slew error) x Frequency A (in MHz)
RATIO A/B
Averaged over 1 to 10a cycles of CH B signal.
Frequency Range -
Accuracy.2*l _ +
DC 503A Universal Counter/Timer •••.• $1,020
0 to 125 MHz (bOth CH A and CH B).
High Stability Time Base ....................... +$295
Field Option Kit Order 040-0966-00 .............................. $250
RECOMENDED PROBE
P6125 5X Passive Probe,
Order 010-6125-01 .•.....•...•.............••...•••.. $58
Frequency B
Frequency A x N
+ 1.4 x CH B trigger jitter error x Frequency A
N
+ Frequency A
0.3 x 10"
361
DIGITAL COUNTERS
TEK ACCESSORIES
DC 504
GENERAL PURPOSE
INSTRUMENTS
Maximum Input Voltage - (sinew ave, dc + peak ac) :t: 250 V
at 500 kHz or less; derate - 20 dB/decade to 25 MHz. :t: 5 V
from 25 MHz to 80 MHz.
Impedance - 1 MO paralleled by = 20 pF .
• This assumes that the transducer output is one pulse per
revolution.
Coupling - Dc or ac.
Internal Time Base
Standard
...."...... DC 104 COUNTEIVTlMfJI
Counter/Timer
DC 504
Direct Frequency Counting to 80 MHz
Period Measurement for Resolution
at Low Frequency
Rpm Counting
5 Digit LED Display
Low Cost
The DC 504 CounterlTimer measures frequency
from 0 Hz (with 0.1 Hz resolution) to 80 MHz,
period from 1 microsecond to 999.99 seconds,
and totalizes events from 0 to 99,999 at a maximum rate of at least 80 MHz. A resolution of
0.1 Hz can be obtained by allowing the more
significant figures of the counter to overflow. Five
7-segment light emitting di.odes (LEDS) provide a
visual numerical display .. The decimal point is
automatically positioned and leading zeros are
blanked . Digit overflow is indicated by a frontpanel LED. Signals to be countedltimed can be
applied to either a front-panel BNC connector or
to the rear interface connector. Internal switches
select frequency or rpm operation, internal time
base or external standard, and override display
storage.
Option 01
Crystal Frequency
1 MHz
5 MHz temperature
compensated
Stability (O·C to
+ 50 · C) after '/2
hour warm-up
With in 1
part in 10'
Within 5
part in 107
Long-Term Drift
.. 5 parts in
10' per month
.. 1 part in
107 per month
Setability
Adjustable to
1 x 10- 7
Adjustable to
5 x 10 - '
Totalize Events (Resolution) - 1 count.
Period (Resolution) - mSec Position : 1 ~s and 10 ~s Sec
Position: 0.1 ms, 1 ms, and 10 ms.
Display Time - Variable fr9m about 0.1 s to about lOs. Detent position at cw position of DISPLAY TIME knob provides a
HOLD mode.
Data Inputs and Outputs - Available at rear of plug-in for
intra-compartment routing in any TM 500 Power Module/Mainframe. BCD serial-by-digit (parallel data for one digit at a time)
plus timing and control functions.
The P6125 is a low-capacitance, 5X attenuation
passive probe specially designed for use with
counter/timers. It makes possible more accurate
time interval measurements of high speed logic
signals. Five-times attenuation provides an optimum match between the counter input characteristics and the voltage levels of all common logic
families . The low input capacitance permits acquisition of high frequency signals with minimum
loading of the circuits under test.
CHARACTERISTICS
Attenuation -
5X.
Input Resistance -
ORDERING INFORMATION
DC 504 Counter/Timer ........................... $675
Option 01 -
(Time Base) ........................................... +$215
OPTIONAL COUNTER ACCESSORIES
P6101 XI Probe, Dc to 34 MHz.
Order 010-6101 -03 ............................................................ $67
P6106 Xl0 Probe, Dc to 300 MHz.
Order 010-6106-03 .......................................................... $131
P6201 FET Probe, Dc to 900 MHz.
Order 010-6201-01 ....................................................... $1,090
P6056 50 0, Xl 0 Probe, Dc to 3.5 GHz.
Order 010-6056-03 .......................................................... $154
Power Divider, GR, 500.
Order 017-0082-00 .......................................................... $260
Adaptor, GR to BNC female.
Order 017-0067-00 ............................................................ $55
Adaptor, GR to BNC male.
Order 017-0064-00 ............................................ _............ _.. $75
Cable, adaptor, BNC to tipjack
(DC 503A, DC 509. DC 5009).
Order 175-3765-01 ............................................................ $23
Cable, Adaptor, BNC to Rf
(DC 510, DC 5010).
Order 012-0532-00 .... _........ _.............................................. $23
CHARACTERISTICS
Display - 5 digits LED display.
Accuracy - :t: 1 counl :t: lime-base accuracy ( :t: trigger error
in period mode only).
Frequency (or rpm) - Dc coupled: 0 Hz to at least 80 MHz.
Ac coupled : 10Hz to at least 80 MHz .
Frequency/ rpm (Maximum Resolution) - kHz Positions:
0.1 Hz, 1 Hz, and 10 Hz (1 rpm, 10 rpm, and 100 rpm)" MHz
Positions : 0.1 kHz and 1 kHz (1000 rpm and 10 k rpm)"
Sensitivity - 20 mV RMS (56.6 mV pop) below 15 MHz,
35 mV RMS (99 mV pop) at or below 50 MHz derating to typically < 175 mV RMS (495 mV pop) at 80 MHz.
Triggering Level - Adjustable from at least - 1.5 V to
+ 1.5V .
Trigger Slope - + for all functions.
Trigger Source - Internal (rear connector interface) or external (front-panel BNC).
For recommended probes -
362
P6125 COUNTER PROBE 5X
reler to page 430.
Capacitance Bandwidth -
5 MO Input.
= 20 pF.
Dc to 200 MHz.
Voltage Rating 100 MHz.
Cable Length -
250 V (dc + peak ac) derated to 35 V at
1.5 meters.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Lead, ground, 8 cm (175-0263-01); 2 clips, miniature, alligator,
(344-0046-00); pouch , accessory, (016-0521-00); tip, IC tester'; 2 tips, probe" lead , ground, 13 cm, (175-0124-01); tip,
retractable hook, (013-0107-03); Holder, probe, (352-0351-00);
sleeve, insulating, (166-0404-01).
• Available in packages of 10 (015-0201-04)
or 100 (015-0201-05) only.
•• A vailable in packages of 10 only (206·0191-03).
P6125 Counter Probe, 5X, 1.5 m,
Order 010-6125-01 ................................... $58
PURPOSE
INSTRUMENTS
TEK GENERAL
POWER
SUPPLIES
PS 5010
PS 503A
PS 501-1
.....
--
•
PS SOlO
Power Supplies
PS 501-1
PS S03A
Logic
+ and -32 V
+ and -20 V
o to 20 V
+SV
+ SV
Floating
150 V peak front panel,
42 V peak rear interlace
Ground Referenced
350 V (dc + peak ac)
Ground Referenced
350 V (de + peak ac)
Ground Referenced
Voltage Range
Oto ± 32V
4.5 to 5.5 V
Oto ± 20V
5V
a to 20 V
5V
50 mA to 0.750 A
(1 .6 A up to 15 V)
100 mA to 3.0 A
100 mA to 1 A
1A
40 mA to 400 mA
1A
Current Range
High Power Compartment
Standard Compartment
Voltage Mode (Constant)
Overall Accuracy (total effect)
50 mA to 400 mA
(0.750 A up to 15 V)
40 mA to 400 mA
± (0.5% + 20 mY)
± 50 mV
Source Effect (line regulatiOn)
± (0.01 % + 2 mY)
1 mV
Load Effect (load regulation)
10 mV for 1 A change in load current
1 mV using remote sensing
Temperature Coefficient
Typically « 0.01 %
+ 0.1 mV)I" C
Typically < 500
Resolution (step size)
10 mV up to 10.0 V
100 mV above 10.1 V
10mV
PARD (ripple and noise)
(Periodic and Random
Deviations)
10 mV pop
1 mV RMS
10 mV pop
2 mV RMS
Constant current
± (5% + 20 mAl
Current limit with fold
back ± (5% + 20 mAl
4.75 to 5.25 dc at 1 A
0.5%
5mV
5V ± 0.25 V
5mV
3 mV for 1 A change in
load current
100 mV for 1 A change
in load current
Accuracy
Current Mode
Overall Accuracy (total effect)
Source Effect (line regulation)
1 mA
Load Effect (load regulation)
lamA
Temperature Coefficient
Typically « 0.1%
+ 1 mA)I"C
Resolution (step size)
50 mA
PARD (ripple and noise)
10 mA pop
5 mA RMS
Display
Voltage
~V/" C
Typically < 0.025%/"C
4.75 to 5.25 de 1 A
50 mV
1 mV for a 400 mA
change in load current
100 mA for 1 A change
in load current
Typically < O.OI %/" C
50 mV
1.6 mV
3 mV pop
5 mV pop
0.5 mV pop
0.1 mV RMS
5 mV pop
Current limit
Current limit
Current limit
Current limit
Voltage indicator lights.
Brightness varies with
output voltage
None
10 turn potentiometer with
a three digit in-line dial and
range pushbutton
None
Current limit indicator lights
l00mA
Each supply has three digit LED display shared between voltage and current 10 LED mode and bus
status indicators.
Current
None
LED indicator
None
Programmability
IEEE Standard 488-1978 (GPIB) full listen and talk
capability with interrupt status reporting
Voltage and resistance
programming
None
Voltage Programming
None
Tracking
Arithmetic
Ratio
None
None
None
Remote Sensing
Output On/Off
Mainframe Capability
None
Rear interconnect
Rear interconnect
Rear interconnect
Yes
Yes
Yes
TM 5000 Series
TM 500/TM 5000 Series
TM 500/TM 5000 Series
For recommended accessories -
refer to page 410.
363
GENERAL PURPOSE
INSTRUMENTS
SUPPLIES
TEK POWER
PS 5010
Programmable Triple Power Supply
PS 5010
common front panel terminal, or voltages from 0
to 64 V are available across the dual supply terminals. Currents up to 0.75 A, from 0 to 32 V and
1.6 A from 0 to 15 V (installed in a TM 5006 high
power compartment). Currents from 50 mA to
400 mA are available from 0 to 32 V and 50 mA
to 0.75 A from 0 to 15 V (installed in two standard compartments of a TM 5006/5003 power
module). The logic supply provides +4.5 V dc to
+ 5.5 V dc with currents to 3 A. The three supplies can be independently programmed for voltage and current limits. Since the PS 501O's
microprocessor monitors the voltage and current
feedback loops of each supply, a simulation of
true DMM output monitoring of all supplies is
possible. This allows each display to automatically indicate the appropriate voltage or current lim·
it, which will be the true output voltage or current
of that supply. Whenever a load change causes
a supply to change modes from constant voltage to constant current (or vice-versa), the display also changes to show the known current or
voltage value. This condition can be reported
over the bus via an interrupt when the PS 5010 is
in the remote state.
With its English-like GPIB commands , performance , and combination of features , the
PS 5010 Triple Power Supply reduces both software and hardware system development time.
PS 5010 CHARACTERISTICS
The PS 5010 complies with IEEE Standard 4881978, and with Tektronix Standard Codes and
Formats.
Fully Programmable
Three Programmable Supplies 0 to ±32 V
Dual Floating Supply to 0.75A (1.6A to 15 V)
in High Power Compartment, +4.5 V to
+ 5.5 V Logic Supply to 3A.
Three Independent Digital Displays
Programmable Voltage and Current Over Full
Range
Automatic Crossover
Powerful Set of GPIB Status Reporting
Commands
Front Panel Lock-Out Capability
Programmable Output ON /OFF (Independent
ON /OFF for Floating Supply and Logic
Supply)
±0.5% Accuracy
UL 1244 Listing
The PS 5010 Programmable Power Supply is a
two-wide TM 5000 module that provides a complete and rapid high performance solution for
many system power supply applications. Its
three supplies provide the most commonly used
voltages, and the three digital displays automatically indicate all six voltage and current parameters. Automatic crossover from voltage to current
limit and a powerful set of GPIB status reporting
commands allow the user to be constantly aware
of the power supply's status. Also , the user can
program the output on or off and lock-out the
front panel controls with GPIB commands.
The PS 501O's dual floating supply provides: 0 to
+ 32 V and 0 to - 32 V, both with respect to a
364
POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE FLOATING SUPPLIES
Configuration - Dual floating with shared common terminal.
Isolation - 150 V peak front panel, 42 V peak Irom rear interface, 0.015 ~f typical shunt capacitance to ground.
Voltage Range - 0 to + 32.0 V; 0 to - 32.0 V.
Voltage Accuracy - ± (0.5% + 20 mY) overall ; ± (0.01 %
+ 2 mY) line regulation ; ± 10 mV lor lA load current change
(1 mV when using rear interface output with remote sensing).
Voltage PARD (Ripple and NOise) - 10 mV p-p; 20 Hz to
20 MHz.
(typ ± 2 mY) to
Voltage Resolution - 10 mV ± 10 mV
10.0 V. 100 mV HO mV (typ ± 10 mY) > 10.0 V.
Load Transient Recovery - 500 ~s to recover with in 20 mV
of nominal value lor a 1A change.
Voltage Change Response Time - 1 ms for up or down
change with maximum load , 20 ms lor down change with no
load.
Current Range - 50 mA to 0.75 A (1 .60 A at 15 V and below)
in high power compartment; 50 mA to 400 mA (0.750 A at 15 V
and below) in two standard power compartments.
Current Accuracy - ± (5% + 20 mAl overall ; ± 1 mA line
regulation ; ± 10 mA load regulation. Output impedance is typically 5 k!l shunted by 20 ~F .
Current Mode PARD (Ripple and Noise) - 10 mA p-p, 20 Hz
to 20 MHz.
Current Change Response Time - 20 ms up or down.
Current Resolution - 50 mA ± 15 mAo
LOGIC SUPPLY
Voltage Range - + 4.50 to + 5.50 V, ground referenced.
Voltage Accuracy - ± 50 mV overall ; ± 1 mV line regulation ;
± 10 mV for 1 A load current change (1 mV when using rear
interface output with remote sensing).
Voltage PARD (ripple and noise) - 10 mV p-p, 20 Hz to
20 MHz.
Voltage Resolution - 10 mV ± 10 mV (typ ± 2 mY).
Load Transient Recovery - 500 ~s to recover within 20 mV
of nominal value.
Current Limit Range - 100 mA to 3.0 A (Foldback characteristic below 4.5 V, maximum short circuit current is < 1.5 A).
Current Limit Accuracy - ± (5% + 20 mAIo
Current Resolution - 100 mA ± 30 rnA.
Scaled Current Output - 10 mA - 1 mV ± (2% + 2 mY)
available at rear interface (not ground referenced).
Overvoltage Protection - SCR crowbar typically trips at 6 to
7 V.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
TM 5000 Power Module Compatibility - Due to the extended
GPIB interface connector the PS 5010 is not compatible with
TM 500 mainframes.
Operating Temperature - 0 to + 50 · C.
Storage Temperature - - 55 · C to + 75 · C.
Operating Altitude - 4.6 km (15,000 It).
Storage Altitude - 15 km (50,000 It).
Power Consumption - 250 VA maximum in high power compartment, 200 VA in standard compartment.
Order PS 5010 Power Supply ............ $2,690
PS 501-1
•
•
" ...., ...... """
Power Supply
PS 501-1
Floating Output, 0-20 V
o to 400 mA
Precise Regulation
Low Ripple and Noise
Fixed Output + 5 V @ 1 A
3 1/2 Digit Ten Turn Dial
The PS 501 -1 features precise regulation and bet·
ter than 2 mV resolution (setability) over a 0 to 20
V range .
CHARACTERISTICS
Output - 0 to 20 V dc.
Maximum Rated Current - 400 mA to + 30 · C derating to
300 mA at + 50· C.
Accuracy - ± (0.5% + 10 mY).
Current Limit - < 40 to 400 mAo
Line Regulation - Within 5 mV for a + 10% line VOltage
change.
Load Regulation - Within 1 mV for a 400 mA load change.
Ripple and Noise - 0.5 mV p-p or less ; 20 Hz to 5 MHz.
Temperature Coefllclent - Typically « 0.01 % + 0.1 mV)/· C.
Minimum Resolution - Typically 1.6 mY.
Transient Recovery Time - .. 20 ~s to recover within 20 mV
of final output voltage after a 400 mA change in output current.
Order PS 501-1 Power Supply .............. $480
CHARACTERISTICS COMMON TO
PS 501-t, PS 503A
20 V FLOATING SUPPLY
Primary Powar Input - Determined by mainframe (TM 501 .
TM 503, etc).
Output - Floating, isolated for 350 V dc + peak ac above
ground.
Stability - Typically (0.1% + 5 mY) or less drift in 8 hours of
constant line, load, and temperature.
Indicator Light. - Voltage variation and current limit.
+5 V GROUND·REFERENCED SUPPLY
Output - 5 V nominal, ± 0.25 V at 1 A.
Load Regulation - Within 100 mV with a 1 A load change.
Line Regulation - Within 50 mV for a 10% line voltage
change.
Ripple and Noise (tA) - 5 mV p-p or less, 20 Hz to 5 MHz.
Stability - Typically 30 mV or less drift in 8 hours.
Overload Protection - Automatic current limiting and overtemperature shutdown.
POWER SUPPLY, DIGITAL DELAY,
DIGITAL LATCH
PURPOSE
INSTRUMENTS
TEK GENERAL
PS 503A
DL 502
DD 501
-_TO
...
II.......
DD ...
Triple Power Supply
Digital Delay
PS 503A
DO 501
Independent
+ and
- Controls
Dual Tracking Voltage Control
o to
± 20 V at 1 A (in High-power
Compartment)
Fixed Output
+5V@
1A
Remote Resistance Programming
Over-Voltage Protection Standard
The PS 503A features superior dual tracking
performance, over-voltage protection , and remote resistance programming of voltage. When
operated in the high-power compartment of a TM
504 or TM 506 Mainframe, the PS 503A provides
up to 1 amp from both 0 to 20 volt supplies.
CHARACTERISTICS
±20
v FLOATING SUPPLIES
Outputs - 0 to ± 20 V dc with respect to the common terminal or 0 to 40 V dc across the + and - terminals. Outputs can
be varied independently or at a constant ratio.
Maximum Rated Current - 400 mA (1 A in high power compartment to + 30 · C derating to 300 mA (750 mAl at + 50· C.
Tracking Mode Offset Error - If the two supplies are set
independently to any given voltage ratio and then varied by use
of the VOLTS OUAL TRACKING control, the two supplies will
maintain the same voltage ratio as initially set within ± 50 mY.
Current Limit - Adjustable from < 100 mA to 1 A (high-power
compartment) or < 40 mA to 400 mA (standard compartment)
on each supply.
Load Regulation - Within 3 mV for 1 A change (high-power
compartment) or 1 mV for 400 mA change (standard
compartment).
Ripple and Noise - 3 mV p-p or less at 1 A load (high-power
compartment). 0.5 mV p-p or less at 400 mA load (standard
compartment).
Indicators - Individual VOltage indicators and current limiting
indicators for both + and - supplies. Standard compartment
(400 mAl indicator.
Order PS 503A Power Supply............... $590
Digital Events Delay
Delay to 99,999 Events
Digital Latch
Divide by N up to 20 MHz
DL 502
Pulse Counting to 65 MHz
16 Channel Latching Capability
Time Delay with Ext Clock
Captures Glitches as Narrow as 5 ns at
Probe Tips
Compatible with Most AHenuator Probes
Allows Expansion of Information Time Frame
The DD 501 is an events count or count down
plug-in unit. The unit counts a predetermined
number of events, from 0 to 99,999, selected by
the front-panel thumb -wheel switches . The
DD 501 can also function as a frequency divider,
or it can be used in a ' counted burst" mode with
pulse or function generators that can be synchronously gated . Tektronix generators capable of being gated by the DD 501 are the FG 501A,
FG 502, FG 504, FG 507, FG 5010, PG 508 and the
PG507.
CHARACTERISTICS
EVENTS DELAY
Count - 10 to 99,999 events.
Maximum Count Rate - 65 MHz.
Insertion Delay - 30 ns or less from final event to trigger
output pulse.
Recycle Time - 50 ns or less.
Reset - Manually resets delay counter.
INPUT CHARACTERISTICS
(All characteristics apply to both events and start Inputs).
Input Impedance - 1 Mil, 20 pF.
Slope - Either + or - , selectable.
Sensitivity - 85 mV peak-to-peak @ 30 MHz.
Frequency Response - Up to 65 MHz at 120 mV sensitivity.
Minimum Detectable Pulse Width - 5 ns,
Threshold Level Range - From - 1.0 V to + 1.0 V ( - 10 V to
+ 10 V with lOX probe). Can be externally programmed or
monitored at front panel jacks.
Trigger View Out - Threshold detector output, at least 0.5 V
(200 Il or less source impedance).
Events Triggered Light - Visual indica lion that events are
being detected.
Start Triggered Light - Visual indication that delay is in
progress.
TRIGGER OUTPUT
Pulse Width - Width of events pulse piUS 6 ns or less .
Voltage Swing - + 0.8 V or less to at least + 2.0 V with 3
TTL loads (",,5 mAl.
Light - Indicates output trigger.
ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS
Temperature Range - Operating: O· C to + 50 · C. Nonoperating: - 40· C to + 75 · C.
Altitude Range - Operating: to 15,000 ft . Nonoperating: to
50,000 ft .
TM 500 Compatibility
Companion For Logic Analyzers
The DL 502 Digital Latch extends the logic analyzer's measurement capabilities. The Digital
Latch aids in detecting narrow pulses in a data
stream that cannot be captured by a logic analyzer alone. The 16 channel latch captures asynchronous glitches of less than one sample interval or
as narrow as 5 ns.
In asynchronous measurements without latching
capability, high speed data anomalies go undetected if they do not appear on a clock edge. The
DL 502 Digital Latch captures the glitch and holds
it until the next clock edge, then expands and
displays it for one sample interval.
The DL 502 Digital Latch plugs into any compartment of a TM 500fTM 5000 Mainframe and can be
used in a variety of configurations.
CHARACTERISTICS
Minimum pulse width to Initiate latch Minimum amplitude to Initiate latch threshold.
5 ns.
500 mV centered at
Minimum sample intarval asynchronous clock INCLUDED ACCESSORY -
50 ns.
Six inch BNC cable.
Order DL 502 Digital Latch ................. $1,800
Order DD 501 Digital Delay ................ $1,270
365
PULSE
TEK GENERATORS
PRODUCT SUMMARY
The TM 500 Pulse Generator family offers a wide
variety of capabilities suitable for most pulse
testing applications. Whether testing wide-band
systems, simulating data transmission signals, or
driving a laser, the versatile TM 500 Pulse Generators have the capabilities to meet your needs.
Particularly important in today 's digital world is
the capability to generate a variety of pulse
signals compatible with the key logic families .
The newest addition to the TM 500 Pulse Generator family , the PG 507, features complementary
dual outputs making it ideally suited for digital
applications. The dual output feature is particularly useful when working with ECl logic families .
366
Similar to the PG 507 Pulse Generator is the
50 MHz PG 508 featuring independently variable
rise and fall times. The PG 508's high level
performance and versatility cover a broad range
of test and measurement applications.
The PG 507 or PG 508's accurate 50 ohm output
impedances deliver clean signals into logic families, reactive loads, or at the end of an
unterminated cable. These 50 MHz multipurpose
generators are also designed for high level performance on high impedance circuits (MOS, HTl,
and CMOS logic).
In 50 ohm systems, our PG 501 and PG 502 are
designed to be compatible with common digital
integrated-circuit families, (TIL, DTl and ECl), in
repetition rates, amplitudes and transition times.
Our TM 500 Pulse Generators' wide range of
features afford you ease of operation, even on
the most challenging test and measurement
problems.
TEK
GENERAL PURPOSE
INSTRUMENTS
PULSE GENERATORS COMPARISON OF CHARACTERISTICS
'
--....
•..
..,.
. . ..
-
.
I a.
.. =
,;0
....
-- ; :- .. ~.~
- ....~:
~ II V
PG 507
Pulse Period
PG 508
PG 501
..; 10 ns to .. 100 ms
..; 10 ns to .. 100 ms
Pulse Duration Duty Factor
.. 70% to 0.2
~s
PG 502
..;20 ns to .. 200 ms (50 MHz to 5 Hz) ..;4 ns to ;;. 100 ms (250 MHz to 10Hz)
.;; 20 ns to .. 200 ms (50 MHz to 5 Hz)
.;;2 ns to ;;. 50 ms
~ 50%
period, .. 50% at 20 ns period
Squarewave Mode
Yes
Yes
Puis. Delay Duty Factor
..; 10 ns to .. ,00 ms"
", ,0 ns to .. ,00 ms"
Double Pulse
Yes
Yes
Fixed, ",3.5 ns. ",4 ns @
.;;5.5 ns to .. 50 ms. Independently
variable up to 100: 1
Fixed , ",3.5 ns
Fixed "".0 ns
.;; 5% pop + 25 mV into 50 II load
.;;5% pop + 50 mV for pulse within
± 5 V into 50 II load
Within 3.5% at 5 V into 50 II load
Within 5% at 5 V pop (durations .. 5 ns)
.. 7.5 V p-p, ± 7.5 V window
" 10p-p, ± 10 V window
.. 5 V
5 V, ± 5 V window
5 V. ± 5 V window
.. 70% to 0.2
~s
period, .. 50% at 20 ns period
Transition Times
>5V
Aberrations
Amplitude:
Into 50 II
Open Circuit
No
Yes
Fixed, 20 ns from external trigger
Fixed, 17 ns from external trigger
No
No
;;. 15Vp-p, ± 15 V window
.. 20 p-p, ± 20 V window
Not specified
Source Impedance
50 II
50 II
Not specified
1 kll or 50 II
Simultaneous Outputs
Yes, complementary
No
Yes, positive and negative
No
Pulse Coincidence
'" 1 ns at 50% amplitude
NA
'" 1 ns at 50% amplitude
NA
Output Control.
Normal/Complement
Independent pulse top and pulse bottom , normal or PRESET
Independent amplitude controls for
+ and - outputs, no offset
Independent pulse top and pulse bottom
Yes, both outputs
No
Yes
Yes
Remote Amplitude
Rear interface inputs
Rear interface inputs
No
No
Locked On Mode
No
No
Yes
NO
Back Termination
Always back terminated
Always back terminated
No
Yes, switchable
External Input
1 Mil to 50 II input impedance
1 Mil or 50 II input impedance
50 II input Z
50 II input Z
+ 1 V required
+ 1 V required
Trigger Level
- 3 V to + 3 V, 80 mV pop sensitivity to 10 MHz 250 mV pop to 50 MHz
TRIG 'O/GATEO light
Slope
+
Trigger Mode
Yes
Yes
or -
+ or
-
+ Only
+ Only
Yes
Yes
Manual Trigger
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Duration Mode
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Gate Mode
Yes
Yes
No
No
Counted Burst
Yes, with DO 501 .,
Yes, with DO 501 .,
No
No
Trigger Output (50% squarewave .. + 2 V from 50 II approximately 35 ns prior to pulse output (23 ns in
or follows external signal)
squarewave or EXT OUR modes)
.. + 2 V from 50 II, approximately 8 ns .. + 2 V from 50 II, approximately
IOns prior to pulse output
prior to pulse output
CUltom Timing Positions
User installed capacitors
User installed capacitors
No
Control Error Light
Yes
Yes
No
Temperature
O' C to + 50 ' C Operating, - 55 ' C to
No
No
+75 °C Nonoperating
" Add 60 ns for delay from external trigger.
., Exact count to 20 MHz, usable to 50 MHz.
For recommended accessoriel -
reler to page 410.
367
PULSE
TEK GENERATORS
PG 507/PG 508
PG 507
--.
""""" .........
Common Characteristics
5 Hz to 50 MHz Plus Custom Range
Delay and Double Pulse Capability
Independent Pulse Top and Bottom Level
Controls
True 50 !l Output Impedance for Clean
Waveforms
Control Error Light Warns of Improperly
Set Switch or Variable Controls
Three State Trigger Light Indicates Proper
External Triggering
Selectable 1 M!l/50 !l Trigger Input
Impedance for Optimum Match to Circuitry
- Lets You Use Your Scope Probe
PG 507
The PG 507 and PG 508 combine TM 500
configurability with state-of·the-art capabilities.
Their high-level performance and unique versatility cover a broad range of test and measurement
applications and logic design functions in MOS,
CMOS, TIL and ECL.
With an output of up to 15 V peak-to-peak for the
PG 507 and 20 V peak-to-peak for the PG 508,
both instruments also feature independent controls for output period, delay and duration times.
Other features include selectable 1 M!l/50 !l
trigger input impedance, a control error light, a
three-state trigger/gate light, and preset or external control of output voltage levels.
Simply pushing the preset button can change the
output from variable top and bottom controls to
front panel screwdriver adjustments, or track
external supply voltages.
The complement mode of either generator allows
an output duty cycle range approaching 100% to
be conveniently set up with more accuracy, range
and stability.
You can gate the PG 507 or PG 508 with a
positive- or negative-going signal , or by pressing
the Man button. Or dial up a predetermined
number of pulses in a burst by adding the
DO 501 's independent digital delay capabilities
for Counted Burst mode. This is especially useful
for testing circuits at different frequencies with
the same number of pulses.
With the trigger input switched to 1 MQ impedance, you can explore circuitry using a 1X or 10X
scope probe. The PG 507 or PG 508 can be used
as a pulse regenerator, logic level translator, or
sinewave to pulse converter.
The PG SOTs and PG 508's output is capable of
driving MOS, CMOS, DTL, HTL 12L,FL or ECL.
Dual Outputs with Tracking Level Controls
Normal or Complement Pulse Output on
Both Channels
15 V Output in a ±15 V Window into High
Impedance, 7.5 V into 50 !l
3.5 ns Risetime/Falltime
PG 507 trigger output and outputs switched to positive going
mode.
The PG 507 is a high performance, 50 MHz pulse
generator designed specifically for logic design
applications.
The PG 507 features complementary dual outputs
which greatly increase its applicability in logic
design areas, especially interfacing within systems or to peripherals. For instance , the complementary outputs allow simulation of line drivers or
opposite phase clocks.
The PG 507 also offers versatility to the design
engineer in an analog environment. For example,
the dual outputs can be used to test differential
input amplifiers or multiplexers.
The PG 507 features four output modes: normal
complement mode (Channel A output positive
going, Channel B output negative going), opposite phase complement mode (Channel A output
negative going, Channel B output positive going),
simultaneous negative mode (Channel A output
negative going, Channel B output negative going), and simultaneous positive mode (Channel A
positive going Channel B output positive going).
In addition, the Output High Level and Low Level
voltage controls track between channels, making
amplitude settings easy.
This unique output flexibility within the normal and
complement modes is particularly useful in logic
design or control applications requiring simultaneous signals.
PG 508 output with falltimes set 100 times longer than
risetime.
ORDERING INFORMATION
PG 507 50 MHz Pulse Generator ....... $2,000
DO 501 Digital Delay (page 365) ......... $1,270
P60628 and P610B Probes are recommended.
For recommended accessories -
368
refer to page 410.
PG 508 output in paired pulse mode with risetimes set equally.
GENERAL PURPOSE
INSTRUMENTS
PG 502
PG 501
PG 508
..
...,.',...,nl
......ft.
... 1"" ....
((i)
_"'.
-+-"'
$
~l~tf:l
CJ
.'.
- M.
..no,
_'III
.....
--
•
......
C '"
- It : : : : . :: ·U
-CJ
(l.l ....It\IDl
_
-,..:.
I-lei.'
I::':':~
• ::1
(i
• :::1
50 MHz Pulse Generator
.. . . -=50 MHz Pulse Generator
... 10. - ••• -;;;..;.•.•
~
250 MHz Pulse Generator
PG 508
PG 501
PG 502
Independently Variable Rise- and
Falltimes to 5 ns
5 Hz to 50 MHz
10 Hz to 250 MHz
Simultaneous Plus and Minus Outputs
1 ns Rlsetime
5 V and 3.5 ns into 50 0
5 V Output ± 5 V Window
Independent Period and Duration Controls
Independent Pulse Top and BoHom Level
Controls
20 V Output in a ±20 V Window to Hi
Impedance, 10 V into 50 0
Normal or Complement Output
The PG 508 50 MHz Pulse Generator is a highly
versatile, general purpose pulse generator. The
circuitry of the PG 508 is designed so that rise
and fall waveforms closely simulate real world
waveforms. This capability is particularly useful in
research and development applications demanding versatility in risetimes and falltimes like testing
of amplifiers, slew rate testing, comparator simu lation and logic circuitry performance tests.
For example, controllable risetimes and falltimes
are extremely desirable when working with CMOS
where logic power consumption increases with
slower rise times. Also , variable rise times and
falltimes are used to reduce ringing (transient
distortion) problems associated with too fast a
pulse.
The PG 508 features a vernier control on the
risetimes and falltimes controllable from 100 to 1.
This completely overlaps the next decade range
and increases the PG 508's versatility in applications simulating different rise- and falltimes, espec ially the output of nonlinear devices. This overlap
feature can also be used to generate a ramp
signal or simulate unequal slew rates in an
amplifier.
Also adding to the simplicity of using the PG 508,
is the capability of changing output amplitude
while variable rise- and falltimes remain constant.
ORDERING INFORMATION
PG 508 50 MHz Pulse Generator ....... $1 ,970
PG 508T 50 MHz Pulse Generator ..... $2,290
(includes PG 508. TM 503 Mainframe. and 016-0195-03 blank
panel).
For counted Burst. order the
DD 501 Digital Delay (page 365) ......... $1 ,270
Suggested 10 in BNC 50 n cable (2 required) for interconnecting PG 508 and DO 501 :
Order 012-0208·00 ........................................................... $20
P6062B and P6108 Probes are recommended. See acces-
Trigger Out
The PG 501 is a 50 MHz Pulse Generator featuring simultaneous plus and minus outputs, a wide
range of pulse-period durations and duty factors ,
trigger output and external trigger/duration input.
Its performance and ease of operation make it
well -suited to basic digital and analog
applications.
Order PG 501 50 MHz Pulse Generator
$710
MANUAL (ONE-SHOT) TRIGGER
GENERATOR
RG 501
and
PG 501
The Manual (one-shot) Trigger Generator is used
for manually initiating a pulse or complete train of
events with instruments which do not have a
manual trigger button or where a remote operation capability is desired, such as with some oscilloscopes and the PG 501 .
The internal trigger generator circuitry eliminates
contact bounce, but will generate pulses as rapidly as the operator can manually cycle the
pushbutton.
The output pulse is nominally 2 ms in width and 3
V in amplitude with a rapid risetime and falltime .
Output impedance is low (50 0); the pulse amplitude drops from about 3.6 to 1.8 V when changed
from a high impedance to a 50 ohm termination .
Both voltages decrease with battery aging. The
battery is a 5.4 V dry cell.
Order 016-0597-00 ................................ $155
Selectable Internal Reverse Termination
Manual Trigger BuHon
The PG 502 (250 MHz Pulse Generator) features :
fast rise times and falltimes; independent top and
bottom pulse levels; and adjustable pulse duration. The fast rep rate makes the instrument ideal
for design and testing of fast logic and switching
circuits.
Order PG 502 250 MHz Pulse Generator $2,520
50 0 PRECISION COAXIAL CABLE
For use with the PG 502, PG 506, and SG 503.
These instruments are internally calibrated for use
with this 3 It 50 n coaxial cable into a 50 n load .
50 0 Cable Order 012-0482-()() .................. $25
369
FUNCTION
TEK GENERATORS
FUNCTION GENERATORS
PRODUCT SUMMARY
For full programmability and IEEE Standard 488
compatibility , select the new FG 5010
Microprocessor based 20 MHz function generator
featuring : 10 complete stored front panel setups,
counted burst and phase lock capabilities as well
as programmable symmetry and phase. Basic
frequency accuracy is 0.1% and all signals can
be AM and FM modulated.
For applications demanding logarithmic or linear
sweep the FG 507 offers an accurate and versatile solution . The low distortion of the FG 507
(0.25%), combined with log and linear sweep is
particularly useful in audio and linear communications-oriented applications.
For low-frequency function generator applications, set the FG 501A, FG 502, FG 503,or FG 507
to work on biological, geophysical and mechanical simulations or on servo systems.
Applying an external ramp to the VCF (voltage
controlled frequency) input, allows our function
generators to double as sweep generators. The
VCF input fed from a low-level modulating signal
can produce a frequency-modulated carrier. The
FG 507 and FG 504 have sweep capabilities
conveniently built in that simplify setting up start
and stop frequencies in addition to providing
logarithmic sweep.
Sweeping wide frequency ranges (100:1 or greater), with logarithmic sweep allows you to spread
out lower octaves, sweep a full range in less time,
and produce easy-to-read Bode plots and
graphs.
You can control the starting phase of a waveform
with the FG 501A, FG 504, FG 507 and FG 5010 in
the gated (burst) or triggered mode. A gated or
triggered waveform efficiently tests tone-controlled systems, loud speaker transient response
characteristics, automatic gain control circuits, or
other amplitude sensitive systems.
The FG 504's and FG 5010 phase lock mode
feature lets you convert digital signals to high or
low voltage sinewaves, pulses, or triangles; ideal
for locking the function generators output to a
house or system frequency standard. With the
DO 501 Digital Delay Generator in the 'divide by
n' mode, the FG 504 or FG 5010 can be locked to
your frequency reference at a lower frequency .
When your test and measurement problems require more waveforms for more applications, the
high performance TM 500 Function Generators
are a versatile solution singly or in combination
with one another.
" + IS· C to
+ 3S· C ambient
+ 20·C to + 30· C ambient
'320 Hz to 20 kHz modulation frequency
'2
'. FG 504 requires forced air circulation above + 40"C
" Fully programmable
"IEEE Standard 488 Compatible
'7 Percent of indicated frequency
'. Absolute voltage accuracy
" Separate FM function provided (I %IV)
FG 501A
Sine, Square, Triangle, Pulse and Ramp with variable symmetry
Symmetry
.. 5% to ;. 95% Variable
.. 5% to > 95% Variable
Frequency Range
0.002 Hz to 2 MHz
200 kHz ± 10% with variable symmetry on
0.002 Hz to 2 MHz
200 kHz ± 10% with variable symmetry on
Dial Accuracy
(% of Full Scale)
(except FG SOlO)
Within 3%
Within 3%
Within 5% in sweep mode*2
Custom Frequency Range
No
No
Frequency Stability
(% of Full Scale)
.. 0.05% for 10 min., .. 0.1% for 1 hour, .. 0.5% for 24 hours, constant temperature
Amplitude: Open Circuit
Into 50 0
30 V pop
15 V pop
Attenuator
o to
Ollset:
30 V pop
15 V pop
- 60 dB in 20 dB Steps
> 20 dB additional with AMPL control
Open Circuit
fnto 50 0
± 13 V dc, step attenuator decreases offset
± 6.5 V dc, step attenuator decreases offset
Pk Sig + OIIset:
Open Circuit
Into 50 0
Output Impedance
± 15 V
+7 .5 V
50 !l
+ 15 V
± 7.5 V
50 !l
Amplitude
Flatness
(10 kHz ref,
500 load)
± 0.1 dB 20 Hz to 20 kHz
± 0.5 dB 20 kHz to 1 MHz
+ 1 dB 1 MHz to 2 MHz
± 0.1 dB 20 Hz to 20 kHz
± 0.5 dB 20 kHz to 1 MHz
+ 1 dB 1 MHz to 2 MHz
± 0.5 dB 20 Hz to 200 kHz
± 2 dB 200 kHz to 2 MHz
± 0.5 dB 20 Hz to 200 kHz
± 2 dB 200 kHz to 2 MHz
Sinewave Distortion
(Maximum output,
500 load)
+ 0.5 dB 20 Hz to 2 MHz
..0.25% 20 Hz to 20 kHz"
.. 0.5% 20 kHz to 100kHz
Harmonics :
.. - 3OdB , 100 kHz to 2 MHz
± 0.5 dB 20 Hz to 2 MHz
.. 0.25% 20 Hz to 20 kHz"
.. 0.5% 20 kHz to 100 kHz
Harmonics:
.. - 30 dB, 100 kHz to 2 MHz
Squarewave
Response
.. 25 ns riselfall
< 3% pop aberrations
.. 25 ns rise/fall
< 3% pop aberrations
;.99% 20 Hz to 200 kHz
;.97% 200 kHz to 2 MHz
;.99% 20 Hz to 200 kHz
;. 97% 200 kHz to 2 MHz
;.+ 4 V from 50!l
;.+ 4 V from 50!l
Impedance ",, 2 k!l
Trigger threshold level + 1 V ± 20%
Impedance ",,2 k!l
Trigger threshold level + 1 V ± 20%
± 90· variable start phase control
± 90· variable start phase control
± 90· variable start phase control
± 90· variable start phase control
Sinewave
Triangle
Squarewave
Triangle Linearity
(10% to 90%)
Trigger Output
External Input
Trigger
Gate
Phase Lock
Counted Burst
Internal Sweep
No
No
With DO 501
No
With DO 501
Logarithmic or Linear, Separate Start/Stop Dials
Duration
External Trigger
1 mstol00s
± 1 V ± 20 % trigger level
"" 2 k!l input impedance
Ramp Output
NA
Gate Output
O1her Modes
.. 0.3 V to 10 V from 1 k!l ± 5%
;.+ 4 V from 50!l
Manual Sweep Trig
Manual Sweep
Sweep and Hold
Amplitude
Modulation
Voltage Controlled
Frequency (FM)
No
No
Up to 1000; 1 FreqUen~ change with 10 V external signal
Slew rate ;'0.3 V/~s, 1 k!l input impedance
Nominal Hz/Volt Sensitivity
2 x Frequency Multiplier setting
Ou\J)ut Hold Mode
Temperature *4
No
No
O· C + 50 · C Operating, - 55·C to + 75 ·C Nonoperating
Compatible accessories begin on page 410.
370
FG 507
Waveforms
2 x Frequency Multiplier
I TEK
GENERAL PURPOSE
INSTRUMENTS
COMPARISON OF CHARACTERISTICS
FG 504
Waveforms
FG 5010*5*6
FG 503
FG 502
Sine, Square, Triangle, Pulse and
Ramp with variable symmetry
Sine, Square, Triangle Pulse,
or Ramp
Sine, Square, Triangle
Sine, Square, Triangle, Pulse and
Ramp witn variable symmetry
Symmetry
7% to 93% Variable
5%, 50%, 95% Fixed
50% Fixed
10% to 90%, 1% steps
Frequency Range
0.001 Hz to 40 MHz
4 MHz nominal with variable symmetry on
0.1 Hz to 11 MHz
Pulse and Ramp, 1.1 MHz
1.0 Hz to 3 MHz
Usable 0.Q1 Hz to 5 MHz
0.002 Hz to 20 MHz
Dial Accuracy
(% of Full Scale)
(except FG 5010)
With in 3% to 4 MHz·'
Within 6% to 40 MHz· '
Within 3% to 1 MHz
Within 5% to 10 MHz
Within 5%
Within 0.1% of selected frequency
Digital LED Display
Custom Frequency Range
Shipped with capacitor for 20 Hz to 20 kHz
No
With user-installed capacitor
Frequency Stability
(% of Full Scale)
.. 0.05% for 10 minutes, .. 0.1% for 1 hour, .. 0.5% for 24 hours, constant temperature
Amplitude: Open Circuit
Into 50 11
30 V p-p
15 V p-p
Attenuator
o to
Offset:
Open Circuit
Into 50 11
Pk Siy + Offset:
Open Circuit
Into 50 11
Output Impedance
Amplitude
Flatness
(10 kHz ref,
50 11 load)
10 V p-p
5 V p-p
20 V p-p
10 V p-p
20 V p-p
10 V p-p
- 50 dB in 10 dB steps
< 10 mV p-p with VAR control
Variable control only
Variable control only
Digital Control of fixed and variable
10 mV p-p into 50 11
+ 7.5 V dc
± 3.75Vdc
+ 5 V dc
± 2.5 V dc
+ 7.5 V dc
± 3.75 V dc
+ 7.5Vdc
± 3.75 V dc
+ 20 V
+ 11 .25 V
50 11
± 10 V
+5 V
500
± 15 V
+6 V
50 11
± 15 V
+ 7.5 V
500
+ 0.5 dB 0.001 Hz to 40 kHz
± 0.5 dB 20 Hz to 20 kHz
+ 1.5 dB 0.1 Hz to 11 MHz
± 0.5 dB 20 Hz to 20 kHz
± 2 dB 0.1 Hz to 3 MHz
± 2 dB 40 kHz to 40 MHz
± 3 dB referenced to Sinew ave
± 1 dB referenced to Sinew ave
.. 0.5% 10Hz to 50 kHz·'
Harmonics :
.. - 30 dB al all other frequencies
.. 0.5% 1 Hz to 30 kHz
.. 1.0% 30 kHz to 300 kHz
.. 2.5% 300 kHz to 3 MHz
Sinewave
Triangle
Squarewave
Sinew ave Distortion
(Maximum output,
50 11 load)
NA
.. 0.05% for 1 hr, 0.05% for 24 hrs (.. 0.1%
In trigger, gate, burst mode < 200 Hz)"1
± 0.5 dB to 20 MHz
+ 2 dB to 40 MHz
.. 0.5% 20 Hz to 40 kHz·'
Harmonics:
.. - 30 dB 40 kHz to 1 MHz
< - 20 dB 1 MHz to 40 MHz
± 3% from 0.002 Hz to 1 kHz
± 3.5% from 1 kHz to 1 MHz
± 5% from 1 MHz to 5 MHz
+ 5%, - 10% from 5 MHz to 20 MHz
± 2% from 0.002 Hz to 1 kHz
± 3.5% from 1 kHz to 100 kHz
± 4% from 100 kHz to 1 MHz
+ 4%, - 5% from 1 MHz to 5 MHz
+ 4%, - 20% from 5 MHz to 20 MHz
± 2% from 0.002 Hz to 1 kHz
± 3.5% from 1 kHz to 1 MHz
± 5% from 1 MHz to 10 MHz
+ 10% from 10 MHz to 20 MHz
.. 0.5% 20 Hz to 19.99 kHz·'
"; 1.0% 20 kHz to 99.99 kHz
Harmonics > 30 dB down, 100 kHz
to 20 MHz
Squarewave
R.sponse
.. 6 ns rise/fall fixed IOns to 100 ms variable
.. 5% p-p + 30 mV aberrations
.. 20 ns rise/fall
.. 3% p-p aberrations
,.;60 ns riselfall
,.;3 p-p aberrations
.. IOns riselfall
.. 5% p-p aberrations
Triangle Linearity
(10% to 90%)
;;. 99% 10Hz to 400 kHz
;;. 95% 400 kHz to 40 MHz
type ;;.98% 0.001 Hz to 10Hz
;;.99% 0.1 Hz to 100 kHz
;;.97% 100 kHz to 1 MHz
;;.95% 1 MHz to 11 MHz
;;.99% 1 Hz to 100 kHz
.. 95% 100 kHz 10 3 MHz
> 98% to 2 MHz
> 90% to 20 MHz
Trigger Output
.. + 2 V from 50 0
+ 2.5 V to 50 11 load
+ 2.5 V to 600 11 load
+ 2 V from 50 11
External Input
Impedance ;;. 10 kl1
Sensitivity .. 1 V p-p
Trigger level - 1 V to + 10 V
Impedance = 1 kO
.. + 2 V Gate Signal required
No
1 MI1/50 11 internal setability
0.0 V/0.5 V internal setability
No
Fixed O· start phase
No
No
+ 90 · variable start phase control
± 90 · variable start phase control
100 Hz to 40 MHz
± 80 · phase range
No
No
20 Hz to 20 MHz
(Auto Scan)
Counted Burst
Internal Sweep
With DO 501
Logarithmc or Linear, Separate Start/Stop Dials
With DO 501
No
No
No
1 to 9999
No
Duration
External Trigger
0.1 ms to 100 s
+ 1 V to + 10 V trigger level
1 V p-p sensitivity
NA
NA
NA
No
100% with nominal 5 V p-p input
Dc to 100 kHz modulation frequency
< 2% distortion to 2 MHz at 70%
< 4% distortion to :aD MHz at 70%
Up to 1000: 1 frequency·'
change with 10 V external input
Trigger
20 MHz maximum
± 80 · start phase control to 10 MHz
Gate
Phase Lock
Ramp Output
Oto + 10Vfroml kO
± 5% to 1 ms, ± 10%
Gate Output
Other Modes
.. 1 ms
No
Manual Sweep Trig
Amplitude
Modulation
Voltage Controlled
Frequency (FM)
100% with nominal 5 V p-p input
Dc to 100 kHz modulation frequency
< 5% distortion to 4 MHz at 70%·'
< 10% distortion to 40 MHz at 65%·'
No
Up to 1000: 1 FreqUenC change with 10 V external signal
Slew rate ;;'0.3 V/ms, 1 kl1 input impedance
Nominal Hz/ Volt Sensitivity
4 x Frequency Multiplier
Output Hold Mode
Temperature·"
0.001 Hz to 400 Hz
No
O· C to + 50 · C Operating, - 55 · C to + 75 · C Nonoperating
b
1.1 x Frequency Multiplier
I 3 x Frequency Multiplier
I No
10% of selected range
0.002 Hz to 200 Hz
Compatible accessories begin on page 410.
371
FUNCTION
TEK GENERATOR
FG 5010
20 MHz range , Automatic phase lock to
an external signal is possible from 20 Hz
to 20 MHz.
Output amplitude is programmable from
20 mV to 20 V pop from 50 nand dc
offset is programmable from 20 mV to
7.5 V, For dc voltage applications, offset
only can be programmed. Programmable waveform hold can freeze the output
voltage of any 200 Hz or less waveform
at its instantaneous value, Waveform
complement and + /- trigger slope allow interfacing to circuits with the proper
waveform phase, especially important in
pulse and digital applications.
The ability to store ten front panel set·
ups reduces GPIB programming time
and enhances stand'alone bench appli·
cations, And the english·like GPIB com·
mands reduce software development
time .
CHARACTERISTICS
Waveform - Sine. Square and Triangle with variable Symme·
try providing Pulses and Ramps.
FG 5010
Symmetry - 10% to 90%, 1% steps. ± 2% accuracy. Range
above 4 MHz is limited by 25 ns minimum triangle transition
time (decreases to 50% at 20 MHz).
0.002 Hz to 20 MHz, 4 digits
20 mV to 20 V peak-to-peak, ±7.5 V Offset
Sine, Square, and Triangle Waveforms
10%-90% Variable Symmetry in 1 % Steps
Pulses to 25 ns, 10 ns Rise/Fall
Trigger, Gate and Burst
Phase Lock with Autoscan
AM, FM, and VCF
Waveform Complement and Hold
UL 1244 Listing
The FG 5010 Programmable 20 MHz Function
Generator is a two-wide TM 5000 module with
versatile overall performance and an unusually
high degree of programmability for many parameters and settings. Its Sine, Square, and Triangle
modes are optimized for superior waveform capability and include trigger, gate, counted burst,
phase lock, AM, and FM modes. The VCF mode
allows the output frequency to be swept over
1000:1 ratio by an external input. Variable symmetry that is usable to 20 MHz extends pulse and
ramp capabilities beyond those of normal generators; and variable phase enhances the trigger,
gate, burst, and phase lock modes,
An error correction circuit maintains frequency
accuracy within 0.1% over the full 0.002 Hz to
Frequency - Range : 0,002 Hz to 20 MHz. Accuracy : Contino
uous mode. ± 0.1%. Trigger. Gate. Burst modes: frequency
.;;200 Hz. ± 0.1%; frequency > 200 Hz. ± 5.0%. Resolution:
Continuous mode. 4 digits Trigger. Gate. Burst modes. Fre·
quency .;; 200 Hz. 4 digits. Frequency > 200 Hz. 3 digits.
Amplitude circuit.
Range: 20 mV to 20 V p-p from 50 Il into open
Accuracies
Frequency
0.002 Hz to 1 kHz
Sine
Square
+ 3%
+ 2%
1 kHz to 1 MHz
+ 3.5%
1 MHz to 10 MHz
-
5 MHz to 20 MHz
+ 5%,
10 MHz to 20 MHz
-
Minimum Pulse Width - 25 ns.
Maximum Frequency - 20 MHz .
Maximum Input Amplitude peak into 1 Mil.
Bur.t Range -
+ 10%
± 5 V peak into 50 II. ± 20 V
1 to 9999 cycles .
Phase Lock Range 20 MHz .
Automatic capture from 20 Hz to
Phase Lock Time - Typically 8 ms to 88 s, depending on final
frequency and start frequency .
AM INPUT
10 kll ( ± 5% when AM is selected).
Input Impedance Sensitivity -
5 V p-p produces .. 100% modulation.
Distortion - < 2% at 70% modulation and .;;2 MHz ; < 4% at
70% modulation and > 20 MHz .
Bandwidth -
Dc to .. 100 kHz .
Maximum Input Amplitude -
Input Impedance -
± 20 V pk ,
10 kit
Sensitivity - 0 to ± 1V modulates to .. ± 1% deviation from
center frequency .
Distortion -
~ 2% .
Bandwidth -
Dc to .. 100 kHz.
Maximum Input -
± 20 V peak.
VCF INPUT
Input Impedance -
10 kll ± 5%.
Sensitivity - 0 to 10.0 V produces a .. 1000: 1 frequency
change. positive going voltage increases frequency .
V/~s .
Slew Rate -
.. 0.063
Bandwidth -
Dc to .. 100 kHz.
Maximum Input -
Range value).
± 20 V peak.
0.002 Hz to 200 Hz. (Output holds at instantaneous
PHASE (TRIG, GATE, and BURST MODES)
Range -
+ 4%,
5%
+ 4%,
20%
+ 5%
10%
.. 250 mV pop.
Plus or Minus. plus only in PH LOCK .
+ 2%
-
Measured at + 25 · C ± 10· C into 50 nload at 50% symmetry.
Resolution : 20 mV from 2.02 V to 20.00 V P-P. 2 mV from
202 mV to 2,000 V P-P. 0.2 mV from 20.0 mV to 200.0 mV p.p.
Offset - Range: - 7.5 V to + 7.5 V from 50 Il into an open
circuit. Maximum peak signal plus offset cannot exceed ± 15 V
open circuit. Accuracy : All waveforms except squarewave > 2
MHz .;; ± (1 '10 of the selected offset. + 2% of the signal p-p
amplitude. + 20 mY). Squarewave > 2 MHz < ± (1 '10 of the selected value + 5% of the signal p-p amplitude + 20 mY). Resolution: 10 mV open circuit , 5 mV into 50 Il load. 0 V is also
provided.
Output Impedance -
Slope -
OUTPUT HOLD MODE
+ 4%
+ 5%
0 V or + 0.5 V. internally selectable.
Amplitude sensitivity -
+ 3.5%
100 kHz to 1 MHz
1 MHz to 5 MHz
Triangle
+ 3.5%
1 kHz to 100 kHz
1 Mil or 50 II. internally selectable.
Trigger Threshold -
FMINPUT
Programmable
20 MHz Function Generator
The FG 5010 complies with IEEE Standard 4881978, and with Tektronix Standard Codes and
Formats.
TRIG, GATE, BURST, and PH LOCK INPUT
Input Impedance -
50 Il.
Sinewave Distortion - 20 Hz to 19,99 kHz, .;; 0.5%; 20.0 kHz
to 99.99 kHz, .;; 1.0%; 100 kHz to 20.0 MHz. harmonics
> 30 dB down from 100 kHz to 20 MHz. Valid at 25 .;; lO· C
into 50 n loadwith 0 V offset, continuous mode. 50% symme·
try, and AM. FM. VCF, and Complement off,
Squarewave Response - Risetime and falltime are .;; 10 ns.
Aberrations are .;;5% p-p + 20 mY.
.;; 90 · to 1 MHz. decreasing to .;; 80 · at 20 MHz .
Accuracy freq
± 3· to 500 kHz; ± (7" + (20 MHz x 28% x 1<1>1 )· 1 for freq
> 500 kHz
At 25 ± 1O· C VCF off. output in Normal and symmetry at 50%.
Resolution -
1·.
PHASE (PH LOCK MODE)
At 25 ±10·C.
Range - .;;90 ·, 20 Hz to .;; 10 MHz ; .;; 45 · to ;;. 10 MHz
(Complementing the output extends effective 0 range to
± 180· ).
Accuracy Resolution -
± (2 · + 5% of selected value).
1·.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
TM 5000 Power Module Compatibility - Due to the extended
GPIB interface connector the FG 5010 is not compatible with
TM 500 Series mainframes.
Operating Temperature Storage Temperature Operating Altitude Storage Altitude -
O· C to + 50· C.
- 55· C to + 75 · C.
4500 m (15 .000 It).
15 000 m (50.000 It).
Power Consumption -
60 W.
Typical Triangle Linearity (10% to 90%) - 0.002 Hz to 200
Hz. ';; 1%; 200 Hz to 100 kHz , .;; 1%; 100 kHz to 2 MHz.
.;;2%; 2 to 20 MHz, .;; 10%.
Net Weight -
Trigger Output - 0 V ± 100 mV to ;;. + 2 V from 50 n source
impedance into an open circuit.
Extender board kit (067·0152·00), rear interface signal cable kit
(020.0701.00). service kit (067.1041.00).
6.2 lb.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Order FG 5010 20 MHz
Function Generator ............................. $4,300
372
TEK
GENERAL PURPOSE
INSTRUMENTS
FG 507
FG 504
2 MHz Sweeping Function Generator
40 MHz Function Generator
FG 507
FG 504
0.002 Hz to 2 MHz
0.001 Hz to 40 MHz
Includes aU FG 501 A Features
Separate Start/Stop Frequency Dials
Three Basic Waveforms,
Plus a Wide Range of Shaping
with Variable Risetimes and Falltimes
and Symmetry Controls
Sweep Up or Down
Logarithmic or Linear Sweep
Sweep and Hold
Separate Frequency Dials
Set Lower (START) and
Upper (STOP) Limits of Sweep
Logarithmic or Linear Sweep
FG SOl triggered sweep mode with output gat.
ed on by sweep gate.
Manual Sweep
Up to 30 V pop Output
The FG 507 features the same basic performance
as the FG 501A and adds flexible, easy·to·use log
and linear sweep capability.
The log sweep of the FG 507 is mathematically
correct and allows accurate frequency plots
when using log scales, log paper, or a storage
oscilloscope like the SC 503. Separate start and
stop frequency dials make frequency settings
easy to adjust and interpret. The instrument can
be internally or externally swept up or down . A
third frequency control allows you to manually
sweep between the preset start and stop frequencies without disturbing their settings. This is
especially convenient for examining frequency
and amplitude anomalies of a circuit under test or
in setting start and stop pOints. The sweep
generator can be swept and the sweep gate
output can be used to gate (burst) the generator
on for swept bursts. The sweep hold mode allows
the generator to sweep to the stop frequency
and remain there until released .
Built-in Attenuator
FG SOl in logarithmic sweep with sweep ramp
and gate outputs.
Am and Fm
Phase Lock Mode
External and Manual Trigger or Gate
Counted Burst with DD 501
True four quadrant multiplier permits normal
am or double sideband suppressed carrier
modulation.
The output of the FG 504 may be phase locked,
gated, or triggered by a reference signal, letting
you convert from one waveform to another, such
as pulses to sinewaves, as well as adjust phase
relationships . Post attenuator offset enables use
of the full ± 7.5 V offset range with small signals.
And the FG 504 output can be amplitude or frequency modulated by external signals.
The FG 504 also provides trigger output, external
voltage control input, and sweep output.
The accurate log/linear sweep capability of the
FG 507 plus the low distortion (0.25% over the
audio range) make it ideally suited to audio
testing .
FG 504 40 MHz Function Generator •• $2,570
Order FG 507 2 MHz Sweeping
Function Generator ......•...•...•...•........•. $1,420
(includes FG 504, TM 503 Mainframe, and 016-0195-03 blank
panel)
ORDERING INFORMATION
FG 504T 40 MHz Function Generator
$2,890
FG 504 30 vo/t output with 6 ns rise time and
falltimes for superior pulse waveforms.
373
FUNCTION
TEK GENERATORS
FG 501A
f.G
~lA
GENERAL PURPOSE
INSTRUMENTS
FG 502
FG 503
11 MHz Function Generator
3 MHz Function Generator
2MMI fUMCTOf GEIllfRA'OA
2 MHz Function Generator
FG 501A
0.002 Hz to 2 MHz
30 V Peak-to-Peak, ±13 V Offset
5% to 95% Variable Symmetry
FG 502
0.1 Hz to 11 MHz
Five Waveforms
VCF and Gated Burst
FG 503
1.0 Hz to 3 MHz
Three Waveforms
VCF
Trigger or Gate, ± Slope
60 dB Step Attenuator
,,;;; 0.25% Sinewave Distortion
,,;;; 25 ns Rise/Fall
The FG 501A provides low-distortion outputs from
0.002 Hz to 2 MHz. It is capable of generating five
basic waveforms - sinewave, squarewave, triangle, ramp, and pulse - at output levels up to
30 V peak-to-peak with up to ± 13 V of offset
from a 50 n source. Waveform triggering and
gating are provided with a variable phase control
to permit up to ± goo of phase shift for generating haversines, sin 2 pulses, and haver triangles. A
step attenuator provides 60 dB of output signal
attenuation in 20 dB steps with an additional
20 dB of variable attenuation . Variable symmetry
from 5% to 95% provides ramps and pulses.
Pulse risetime is ,,;;;25 ns. Audio sinewave distortion is less than 0.25% and audio amplitude
flatness is within 0.1 dB.
Because of its ability to generate low distortion
sinewaves, the FG 501A is uniquely appropriate
for applications demanding audio signals.
Also useful in audio applications is the 0 to 60 dB
attenuator designed into the FG 501A.
The wide range variable symmetry of the FG 501A
is useful for generation of pulses and ramps .
Order FG 501A 2 MHz
Function Generator ................................ $760
374
The FG 502 Function Generator provides low-distortion sine, square, and triangle waveforms, and
positive or negative ramps and pulses. Output
frequency is continuously variable from 0.1 Hz to
11 MHz. The high frequency range from 1 to
11 MHz permits the versatility of the function generator to be extended into the medium radio frequency range. Voltage controlled frequency input
permits the FG 502 to be used as a sweep generator. The external gate input permits the FG 502
output in any of its modes to be controlled by an
externally supplied pulse to generate bursts of
various output waveforms. This feature has application in wireless or radio remote control equipment and in certain phases of the telephone
industry.
The FG 503 Function Generator provides highquality low-distortion sine, square, and triangle
waveforms . Six decade frequency multi pier
steps, a custom position for user-determined frequency multiplication, a dial calibrated from 1.0 to
30 (uncalibrated from 0.1 to 1.0), and a frequency
vernier control work together to select frequencies in overlapping ranges from 1 Hz to 3 MHz.
The output frequency may be swept over a
1000:1 ratio by an external voltage. Output amplitude and offset controls are provided. A trigger
output is available for controlling external devices
or equipment. Amplitude up to 10 V peak-to-peak
can be developed across a 50 n load (20 V peakto-peak open circuit). Selectable offset up to
3.75 V dc across 50 n (7 .5 V dc open circuit) is
also featured .
Order FG 502 11 MHz
Function Generator ................................ $840
Order FG 503 3 MHz
Function Generator .•..•.•..••..••...•.••.....••••. $570
CURRENT PROBE~
PURPOSE
INSTRUMENTS
TEK GENERAL
PRODUCT SUMMARY
AMPLIFIER~
AM 503
The TM 500 Signal Processors offer unique capabilities for solving electrical measurement and
analysis problems. Compact portability and plugin flexibility allow complete lab instrumentation
set-ups, within stringent space and budget
limitations.
These versatile signal alteration devices are applicable to a broad range of measurement needs
including: preamplification of low level signals,
addition or removal of dc offset, integration,
differentiation, or summing of multiple signals;
impedance transformation; or amplification (to
80 V peak-to-peak).
A6303
Ac and Dc Current Measurements to 100 A
The AM 503 is specifically designed to work with
the A6303/A6302 Current Probes (up to 50 MHz),
and incorporates a feature that limits the bandwidth to 5 MHz, to eliminate transients or noise.
An illuminated knob skirt indicates calibrated
current per division.
Dc to 15 MHz Bandwidth
Peak Pulse Measurements to 500 A
Ac or Dc Coupling
1 Inch by 0.830 Inch Jaw Opening
To use these current probes to their full bandwidth, the bandwidth of the oscilloscope should
be greater than the probe/AM 503 combination.
For example, with the A6302/AM 503, a scope
such as the 80 MHz SC 504 can be used to
obtain full bandwidth capability.
Current Probe Amplifier
The A6302/AM 503 and A6303/AM 503 Current
Probe Systems have a wide variety of applications from SCR and power supply measurements
to medical applications. These probes use inductive coupling to minimize interference with the
circuit under test.
Current Range, Maximum Current, and
Bandwidth Determined by the Probe Used
The versatile AM 502 Differential Amplifier lets
you control gain, dc offset, low-frequency and
high-frequency response for maximum rejection
of unwanted signals. Adjustable dc offset allows
high amplification even when low-level signals
have a dc component of up to 1 V. High performance features of the AM 502 are a dc to 1 MHz
bandwidth and 100 dB common-mode rejection
ratio .
The AM 501 Operational Amplifier's output power
( ± 40 V and ± 50 mA across 800 fl loads) is more
than adequate for most electronic and electromechanical applications. This high-output unit has
front panel connectors that let you change configurations by selecting feedback components.
The AM 501 is easily set up for differentation,
integration, summing and impedance transformation problems.
Our extremely versatile AF 501 Bandpass
Filter/Amplifier has a center frequency that is oneknob tunable over the entire audio range (3 Hz to
35 kHz). It's switch-selectable in broad (0=5 ,
"'" '13 octave) and narrow (0= 15, "'" '/10 octave)
bandwidths. It provides sinewave generation to
35 kHz and flat signal amplification to 50 kHz. You
can select amplification from 1 to 500 in a 1-2-5
sequence in both filter and amplifier modes.
Current Probe
One·hand Operation
AM 503
Displays Current Signals on an Oscilloscope
The AM 503 is a modular current-probe plug-in
amplifier that operates in TM 500 Mainframes. It
allows display of current on any oscilloscope with
10 mV/div sensitivity, 50 fl or 1 Mfl input, and (for
performance to full bandwidth specifications) at
least 75 MHz when using the A6302 or 50 MHz
when using the A6303. The amplifier attenuator is
calibrated in 12 steps with a 1, 2, 5 sequence,
and the knob-skirt is illuminated to indicate current per division. The current range, maximum
current rating, and bandwidth are determined by
the particular probe in use. Bandwidth can be set
to Full (where it is limited by the probe in use) or
to 5 MHz. Coupling may be switch selected to ac
or dc. Ac coupling offers a convenient means of
measuring low-amplitude ac signals on a highlevel dc current. A front-panel indicator warns of
input current overload.
CHARACTERISTICS
(AM 503 Current Probe AmpUfier with A8302 Probe or
A8303 Probe)
Maximum Input Current - 20 A (de
100 A (de + peak ac) for A6303.
+
peak ac) for A6302.
Maximum Voltage for Current Under Te.t (Bare Conductor)
- 500 V (de + peak ac) for A6302. 700 v (de + peak ac) for
A6303.
Bandwidth (- 3 dB) - Dc to at least 50 MHz with A6302. Dc
to at least 15 MHz with A6303.
RI.etlme (Full Bandwidth) or less with A6303.
7 ns or less with A6302. 23 ns
Dellection Factor - 1 mAldi. to 5 Aldi. for A6302. 20 mAldi.
to 50 Aldi. for A6303. In aI, 2, 5 sequence for both probes.
Allenuator Accuracy for both probes.
Within 3% of indicated Current/Diy
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
50 !l cable with BNC (012-0057-01); 50 !l terminator
(011-0049-01 ).
This clamp-around probe satisfies requirements
for current measurements to 100 A from dc to 15
MHz. Equipped with a convenient pistol grip, the
A6303 can easily be clamped to cables up to
0.830 in. Other measurement parameters of the
probe include: 100 A continuous and 500 A peak.
By combining an oscilloscope, like the SC 504,
with the A6303/ AM 503 Current Probe Amplifier in
a TM 500ITM 5000 Mainframe you will have a convenient and compact high current amplification/measurement system .
Order A6303 Current Probe •••••••••.••.••••• $930
A6302
Current Probe
1 mA to 20 A Current Measurement Range
50 A Peak Pulse Measurements
Dc to 50 MHz Bandwidth
When a A6302 Current Probe is used with the
AM 503 Current Probe Amplifier, the current
range is from 1 mA to 20 A. Maximum current is
20 A (dc + peak ac). Peak pulse maximum is
50 A, not to exceed a product of 100 A jJ.S. The
probe operates through inductive coupling with
no electrical contact. A flick of your forefinger operates the sliding jaw in the insulated probe tip.
Just put the probe tip around the conductor under test for immediate current readings.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Fi.e inch ground lead (175-0124-01); three inch ground lead
(175-0263-01); two alligator clips (344-0046-00).
Order A6302 Current Probe .................. $490
Order AM 503 Current Probe Amplifier. $980
375
TEK AMPLIFIERS
GENERAL PURPOSE
INSTRUMENTS
AM 502
AM 501
Differential Amplifier
Operational Amplifier
AM 502
AM 501
1 to 100,000 Gain
± 40 V, 50 mA Output
100 dB CMRR
Open Loop Gain 10,000
Selectable Upper and Lower -3 dB Points
50 V/ p'S Slew Rate
Dc to 1 MHz Maximum Bandwith
Symmetrical Differential DeSign
Adjustable Dc Offset
The AM 502 Differential Amplifier features wide
bandwidth; high CMRR; and selectable calibrated
gain and filtering . Well-suited for general purpose
or laboratory work. it can drive oscilloscopes.
monitors. chart recorders. displays. or processing
devices . In the unity gain mode. it can be used as
a signal conditioner. Input dc offsetting to ± 1 V is
provided .
CHARACTERISTICS
AMPLIFIER
Gain - 100 to 100,000 : 1-2-5 sequence : accurate within 2%.
1X gain obtained by 100X attenuation.
HF - 3 dB POINT - Selectable in 9 steps (1-3 sequence) from
100 Hz to 1 MHz . Upper - 3 dB point reduces to 500 kHz at
50 k gain : 250 kHz at 100 k gain.
LF - 3 dB POINT - Selectable in 6 steps from 0.1 Hz to
10kHz: ac coupling limits - 3 dB point to 2 Hz or less.
Variable DC Offset - At least ± 1 V.
Normal-Mode CMRR - At least 100 dB, dc to 50 kHz, ± 5 V.
+ 100 Mode CMRR - At least 50 dB , dc to 50 kHz, ± 50 V.
Maximum Input Voltage - Normal mode dc coupled: 15 V (dc
+ peak ac). + 100 Mode dc coupled: 350 V (dc + peak ac).
Ac coupled : 350 V (dc + peak ac) with coupling capaCitor
precharged.
Input Rand C - 1 Mil paralleled by = 47 pF. Input impedance
can be increased to a FET input via a simple internal jumper
change.
Maximum Voltage Drill - 100 "V,· C relerred to input Norm
mode.
Input Gate Current - ± 100 pA for T < 30 · C.
Maximum Noise - < 25 "V or less (tangentially measured)
referred to input NORM mode.
OUTPUT
-
AM 501 Accessory
The AM 501 Operational Amplifier features high
input impedance (FET), high slew rate , a wide
range of input and output voltage. and high output current. Applications include: amplification;
impedance transformation; integration; differentiation and summing. It is well-suited as a postamplifier or offset-generator for signal sources, including the TM 500 Modules. Components may
be added externally or internally making it ideal
for teaching operational amplifier theory.
CHARACTERISTICS
OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
Open Loop Gain -
At least 10,000 at 60 Hz into 800
Unity Gain Bandwidth -
376
load.
Common-Mode Reiection Ratio - Typically > 20,000 to 1 at
60 Hz for common-mode signals up to ± 40 V.
Slew Rate -
At least 50 V'"s into an 800
{1
load.
INPUT
Input Bias Current 50 · C.
Typically < 500 pA at 25· C, < 2 nA at
Dril!- < 100 "V'· C.
Noise -
< 10"V RMS.
Maximum Differential Input Voltage -
80 V.
OUTPUT
Voltage Range Current Limit -
At least ± 40 V into 2 kll.
At least ± 50 rnA.
Open Loop Output R -
= 150 11.
Order AM 501 Operational Amplifier ..... $580
Maximum Output - ± 5 V, ± 20 rnA , output resistance is 5 11
or less.
Minimum Load Impedance - 250 11
Over Range - Front-panel lamp inc;cates most over-range
conditions.
Order AM 502 Differential Amplifier ._. $1,150
{1
At least 5 MHz into 800 11 load .
For compatible accessories -
refer to page 410.
AM 501 Auxiliary Circuit Board Kit
The AM 501 Auxiliary Circuit Board Kit attaches to
the input and output terminal plugs on the front of
the AM 501 Operational Amplifier. The kit is a pc
board that has six terminal studs for attachment
to the amplifier's banana jacks and is approximately 2.5 inches square. This permits the designer to build a ciruit of reSistors, capacitors, and
other components for use in conjunction with the
AM 501 's input, output. or feedback circuits. With
several boards, the AM 501 Op Amp circuit can
be changed instantly in configuration from integrator to differentiator to amplifier.
An additional advantage of the kit is that it does
not interfere with the other connectors on the
face of the AM 501 .
Order 013-0146-00 ._._ .. ._ .... ._ .. ._ .. ._._ .. ._._ .. ._ $22
GENERAL PURPOSE
TEK INSTRUMENTS
BANDPASS FILTER/AMPLIFIER
OSCILLOSCOPE CALIBRATION INSTRUMENTS
The AF 501 is a Bandpass Filter/Amplifier, accoupled amplifier and sinewave generator. Used
alone or in conjunction with other TM 500 instruments, the AF 501 is a highly versatile and accurate signal analysis tool. Developed primarily for
the mechanical measurement domain, the AF 501
can be used as a manual-sweep spectrum analyzer for complex sound and vibration signals.
Single-frequency tuning facilitates isolation of
1X rpm signals in dynamic balancing , or viewing
higher order disturbances on a CRT monitor. An
output pulse, synced to the filter or oscillator
output signal , is available for triggering a stroboscope or oscilloscope and for frequency
counting.
AF 501
Output Current -
Gain -
Gain Accuracy Bandwidth -
3 Hz to 35 kHz in 4 decade
Output Voltage - 20 V pop (maximum frequency times amplitude = 400 V kHz).
Sinewave Outrange -
Phase Shift -
< 10· at tuned frequency below 5 kHz.
Bandpass Filter/Amplifier
AF 501
Maximum Filter Attenuation -
3 to 40 Hz/180 to 2400 cpm.
Filter Selectivity -
Tunable Bandpass Filtering to 35 kHz
Broad :
a-
5 ± 1. Narrow:
a-
15 ± 5.
Bandwidth at Half-power Points
~F - 3 dB _ center frequency
Gain Range -
Sinewave Generation to 35 kHz
Strobe Trigger Synced to Oscillator or Filter
Output
Dial Readings in Hz or Cycles per Minute
PRODUCT SUMMARY
Downtime is one problem no production manager
can afford
and the time seNice engineers
spend transporting oscilloscopes from the job
site to the calibration bench is wasted time. In the
end , for a production house or manufacturing
unit, the production line is the bottom line.
With the CG 5001, Tektronix Oscilloscope Calibration Instruments come close to solving the entire
range of oscilloscope calibration problems.
The CG 5001 is the computerized solution to
large-scale scope calibration needs. The CG 5001
can be used as part of a computer based system
to calibrate and verify all of the major oscilloscope parameters. The CG 5001 is specifically
designed for use at those installations where
many oscilloscopes are used and maintained. Its
programmability, combined with state-of-the-art
performance , helps to minimize calibration lab labor while maximizing accuracy of verification
checks.
Input Impedance -
TRIGGER OUTPUT
> 10 V.
10 ± 5
~s.
Minimum signal Required -
500 mV, pop.
Risetime and Falltime -
~s.
<1
= 50 fl .
Order AF 501 Bandpass
Filter/Amplifier ........................................ $920
1,500; 1-2-5 sequence.
Gain Accuracy -
< 1 fl (within 50 mA output current
Outputlmmpedance -
a
Signal Amplification to 50 kHz
Pulse Amplitude -
< 3%.
Maximum 50 mA pop.
Output Impedance limit).
Pulse duration -
> 70 dB.
1, 2, or 5 V pop ± 20%, depending on
Waveform Distortion -
Xl , Xl0, Xl00, Xl k.
Dial Range -
OSCILLATOR
3 Hz to 35 kHz.
3 to 40 Hz/ 180 to 2400 cpm.
Output Current -
Frequency Dial Error - < 5% dial setting between 3 to 20.
< 10% dial setting between 20 to 30.
Frequency Multiplier -
1 Mfl ± 1% paralleled by = 47 pF.
25 mV rms (referred to output).
Output Amplitude gain position.
BANDPASS FILTER
Center Frequency Range steps.
± 3%.
< 0.5 Hz to > 50 kHz (at 3 dB point).
Input Impedance Noise -
< 1 fl.
AMPLIFIER
1 to 500 ; 1-2-5 sequence.
Dial Range -
CHARACTERISTICS
20 mA pop ma ximum (at 20 V pop).
Output Impedance -
± 3 dB (Broad), ± 5 dB (Narrow).
1 Mfl ± 1% paralleled by = 47 pF.
Maximum Dc Input Voltage -
± 100 V.
Output Voltage - 20 V pop (maximum frequency times amplitude - 400 V kHz).
In addition to the CG 5001 , TM 500 offers a complete set of calibration instruments that can be
configured into a portable test set for in-field oscilloscope seNice and calibration. These TM 500
Oscilloscope Calibration instruments offer the
widest range of standard amplitude
squarewaves, fastest risetimes , lowest aberrations, fastest time marks and widest frequency
range of leveled sinewaves available today.
In addition to its crystal-controlled mode, the
TG 501 provides a variable mode. This means you
can quickly adjust and accurately align the time
mark spacing to your oscilloscope's graticule
marks, and read the percentage timing error directly off the TG 501 's digital display.
Our PG 506 Calibration Generator offers TM 500
portability plus state-of-the-art performance features. With the PG 506 in the amplitude calibration
mode, you can generate a 1 kHz squarewave and
vary its amplitude around the calibrated level until
the squarewave aligns with your oscilloscope 's
verticle graticule divisions. At that point, you can
read the scope deflection error right off the
PG 506's digital display in percentage high or low.
TM 500 leveled-sinewave generators, the SG 503
and SG 504, round out a scope calibration and
verification package. These generators provide
leveled sinewaves for bandwidth checks (-3 dB
points) and triggering performance checks.
The SG 503 is a general-purpose leveled sinewave oscillator providing variable output from
250 kHz to 250 MHz. The SG 504 provides a leveled output amplitude that is variable from
245 MHz to 1050 MHz in two bands.
Another TM 500 plug-in, the SG 502 Oscillator,
could also benefit calibration applications where
verification of low frequency rolloff in ac modes
and performance measurement of low frequency
reject triggering modes is required .
For features that allow time and error reduction
for on-the-job oscilloscope evaluation, our TM 500
Calibration instruments are the best value on the
market today.
OSCILLOSCOPE CALIBRATION COMPARISON GUIDE
CG 5001
Programmable Calibration Generator
Primary
Functions
Amplitude Calibration 40
~V
to 200 V
Time-Base Calibration 400 ps to 5 5
Secondary
Functions
Risetime and transient response testing. attenuator
compensation testing. Testing oscilloscope nonlinearity
PG 506
Calibration Generator
Ampliutude Calibration
200 ~V to 100 V
TG 501
Time Mark
Generator
Time-Base
Calibration
lnst05ns
SG 503
Signal Generator
Bandwidth Calibration
250 kHz to 250 MHz
SG 504
Signal Generator
Bandwidth Calibration
245 MHz to 1050 MHz
Aisetime and transient response
Testing oscilloGeneral leveled RF signal General leveled RF signal source
with frequency modulation capability
testing. attenuator compensation testing scope nonlinearity source
377
CALIBRATION
INSTRUMENTS
TEK OSCILLOSCOPE
ator with the calibration signals being sent from
the CG 5001 . The operator follows these instructions to make the necessary settings of the
oscilloscope controls as the calibration or test
procedure progresses. The CG 5001 returns error
or deviation information to the controller, where it
can be compared with preprogrammed reference
values for the oscilloscope. A permanent record
of the entire maintenance procedure can be
stored by the controller and can be printed via
peripherals such as a hard copy unit or line
printer. Throughout the process, all calibration
settings are determined by the computer's program . All front panel settings on the oscilloscope
are specified in detail for the operator. Calculations of error percentages are performed
automatically.
CG 5001
-I
0
"
,..U 'V
"
•
I u'
,
.'
h'"
as
"
. L
v
~
J
,,~
l
r
Programmable Oscilloscope Calibration Generator
CG 5001
The CG 5001 complies with IEEE Standard 4881978, and with Tektronix Standard Codes and
Formats.
The Tektronix CG 5001 Programmable Oscilloscope Calibration Generator is a microprocessorbased generator that can be used as part of a
computerized system for the calibration and verification of major oscilloscope parameters ,
including :
Vertical Gain
Horizontal Timing and Gain
Vertical Bandwidth/ Pulse Characteristics
Probe Accuracy and Compensation
Current Probe Accuracy
Calibrator Output Accuracy
The CG 5001 's front panel features a wide range
of functions , many of which represent a new
state-of-the-art in calibration performance. All
these functions are programmable by a controller
via the GPIB (General Purpose Interface Bus) . A
"Learn" mode allows any manually-set function or
range to be acquired by a controller. Subsequent
use of the resulting program requires a minimum
of operator skill and makes data logging an
automatic operation .
This computer-assisted test and calibration system can provide step-by-step instructions to the
operator, thus significantly reducing the skill level
required .
Many of the calibration and test steps previously
performed by the operator can now be transferred to a computer which executes them in a
consistent and error-free manner. To calibrate a
particular oscilloscope, the computer's program
can send control-setting information to the CG
5001, which then sends the appropriate calibration signals to the oscilloscope. At the same time,
a series of operator instructions can be placed on
a terminal to automatically coordinate the oper-
To develop the specific software to test and
calibrate different oscilloscopes, Tektronix has
designed the CG 5001 ScopeCal Procedure Development Aid program (SCPDA). This program
assumes you are not familiar with programming.
To incorporate the calibrator's knowledge into the
system software, the (SCPDA) program uses two
simplified techniques. First is a series of questions that appear on the controller's CRT. The
calibrator's answers to these questions form the
foundation for the software that will eventually run
the system. Second is the CG 5001's "Learn"
mode, which allows the calibrator to set functions
and ranges using the CG 5001 's front panel
controls (as would have been done on older
generations of manually-operated calibration generators), and have these entries automatically
transferred to the controller for use in forming the
program. Once the calibrator has completed interacting with the ScopeCal Procedure Development Aid program, all the acquired information is
automatically converted into a simpler program
format that will govern the system's operation
when a less experienced operator is using it. This
operator-oriented program will take care of all
the CG 5001 's settings, while giving the operator a step -by-step description of any
4052A Graphics Computer Controller showing the development of a typical calibration procedure using the ScopeCal Procedure Development Aid program
TEK
GENERAL PURPOSE
INSTRUMENTS
settings that must be made on the oscilloscope. It
will also accept data from the CG 5001 or the
controller keyboard.
The CG 5001 is designed to greatly reduce your
maintenance costs. Built·in self test routines and
hardware check the operation of all major circuits
each time the power is turned on.
Modular construction means that all circuit
boards unplug (except the Main Interconnect) for
easy exchange if service is required . A signature
analysis mode is included to facilitate trouble·
shooting of the digital portion of the instrument.
CHARACTERISTICS
VOLTAGE (AMPLITUDE MODE)
The standard VOltage is used to calibrate vertical display
accuracy.
Range -
~V
40
Multipliers Polarity -
to 200 V (1.2.5 steps with multiplier).
1.2.3.4.5 .6.8.10 divisions.
Positive from ground .
+ 0.25% r 1 ~V .
Accuracy -
r 9.9%.
CURRENT (AMPLITUDE MODE)
The standard current is used to calibrate current probes.
Range -
1 mA to 100 mA (1.2.5 sequence).
Multipliers -
1.2.3.4.5.6.8.10.
Accuracy -
r 0.25% r 2 ~A.
Frequancy Droop-
0.4 ns to lOOns (1.2·5 steps plus 0.4 ns).
X10 Magnifier - Increases Slewed Edge rate by a factor of
ten (5 ns to 100 ns range).
Accuracy -
± 0.01 % (Optional TCXO ± 0.0003%).
Edge Position Uncertainty Amplitude -
~ 1 %.
± 40 ps.
> 1 V into 50 11.
Variable Range -
± 9.9%.
TRIGGER OUTPUT
The oscilloscope under test is normally triggered externally
from this source.
Output Amplitude -
1 V minimum into 50
n.
Trigger Rate - Marker Mode
Normal - Slaved to marker rate from lOOns to 5 5 ; remains at
lOOns for faster markers.
Divided by 10 - Reduces normal trigger rate by a factor of
ten.
Divided by 100 - Reduces normal trigger rate by a factor of
one hundred.
TIMING REFERENCE OUTPUT
EXTERNAL TIMING REFERENCE
Input Frequency - Any integral multiple of 1 MHz up to
5 MHz.
Input Amplitude Input Resistance -
r 9.9%.
Range - 20 mV to 1 V pop (50 11 load only) (1.2.5 steps with
multipliers).
Multipliers Polarity -
1.2.3.4.5.6.8.10.
Positive or negative transitions to ground.
Risetime (Falltime) Abberrations -
± 2%.
Long Term Flatness Frequency -
.... 1.3 ns.
r 0.5% alter first IOns.
10Hz to 1 MHz (decade steps).
V.riable Amplitude Range -
> ± 9.9% from nominal.
10 kll (nominal).
Range - 1.2 V to 100 V .. 1 Mil load (1.2.5 steps with
multipliers).
Polarity ground).
Positive transition only (negative voltage to
Rlsetlme -
< 100 ns.
Vibration - Operating: Displacement (pop). 0.015 inch. Vibra·
tion Frequency: 10Hz to 55 Hz. Total time: 75 minutes.
Shock - Nonoperating: 30 g·s. '/2 sine. 11 ms duration.
3 shocks in each direction along 3 major axes; total shocks.
18.
Bench Handling - Operating : 45· 4 inches or point of bal·
ance. whichever occurs first.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Maximum Overall DimensionsJlripie comllartment Plug,inl
Dimensions
mm
Width
Height
Depth
203
124
305
Weights
Aberrations -
r 2% of squarewave amplitude.
Long Term Flatness Frequency -
3.9
4.0
r 0.5% alter first 500 ns.
MARKERS (TIMING MODE)
IOns to 5 s (, ·2·5 steps).
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Output Cable Assembly (012.0884.00) ; Pulse Head
(015·0311.01).
MAINFRAMES
CG 5001 requires either a TM 5003 or TM 5006. The
CG 551 AP is a TM 500 version of the CG 5001 and requires a
TM 506 Mod JB . TM 515 Mod UB or RTM 506 Mod JB. The
CG 5001 is not compatible with TM 500 power module
mainframes.
CG 551AP Programmable Calibration
Generator .......................................... $13,000
Option 01 - Adds High Accuracy Time Base
(TCXO) CG 5001/CG 551AP ....................................... +5595
Option 02 - Deletes Pulse Head
CG 5001/CG 551AP .................................................. - 51,100
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Comparator Head,
Order 015·0310·01 .......................................................... 5500
Remote Variable,
Order 015·0309·01 .......................................................... 5375
Pulse Head Order 015·0311 ·01 .................................. 51,400
(When purchased separately.)
4052A Graphics Computing Controller
(32k bytes memory) (see page 98) ........................•...•. 59,900
Option 10 -
Printer Inter1ace .....................................
+5550
Blank 4052A Tape,
Order 119·0680-01 (box of 5) ......................................... 5180
Order 119·0680-00 (One each) ......................................... $40
4632 Hard Copy Unit (See page 110) ......................... 56,050
Option 01 -
Copy Counter ........................................ + 5120
Paper, Carton of four rolls,
Order 006·1603-01 ...............................................•••........ 5275
4642 Matrix Printer (see page 112) ............................ 52,900
Option 01 -
Rear Feed Tractor Assembly ................. +5280
The Pulse Head is used to generate fast rise. low distortion
pulses for testing higher bandwidth vertical amplifiers.
Paper, Carton of 2,500 sheets,
Order 002·0262·01 ............................................................ 560
Amplitude -
GPIB Cable, 2 meter Cable.
Order 012·0630-01 ............................................................ 575
1.1 V peak ± 5% into 50 11.
Adjustable Range -
± 10%.
Risetime -
Accuracy -
± 0.01 % (optional TCXO ± 0.0003%).
Amplitude -
1 V minimum into 50 11.
Aberrations - r 3% of pulse amplitude; not to exceed 4%
peak.to-peak for adjacent peaks.
± 9.9%.
Chop Parameters - Frequency - 30 Hz nominal. (Auto).
Auto Timeout - Internally selectable. 0.5. 1 or 2 minutes.
Ib
X10 Magnifier - Increase marker rate by a factor of ten
(0.1 ~s to 5 s range).
Variable Range -
Input Resistance - 'Open" position - The resistance of the
oscilloscope input. "50 !l" position - 50 11 ± 1%.
8.5
8.7
PULSE HEAD
(Standard Accessory)
FAST EDGE (AMPLITUDE MODE)
> ± 9.9% from nominal.
The markers obtained in this mode are used to calibrate oscilloscope time bases.
In
8.0
4.9
12.0
kg
Standard
Option 01
10Hz to 100 kHz (decade steps).
Variable Amplitude Range -
Range -
90% to 95% at +50·C for 5 days.
Altitude - Operating : 4500 m (15.000 It). Nonoperating:
15 240 m (50.000 It).
HIGH EDGE (AMPLITUDE MODE)
The Low Distortion Pulse obtained in this mode is used to test
oscilloscope input amplifier and attenuator compensation.
Input - Ac Voltage - r 40 ~V to ± 100 V.
Signal Frequency - 10Hz to 1 MHz squarewave.
Dc Voltage - +1 00 mV to + 100 V.
ORDERING INFORMATION
Temperature - Operating: O·C to +50· C. Nonoperating:
- 20· C to + 65·C.
Relative Humidity -
Both the oscilloscope calibrator and CG 5001 standard ampli.
tude signals are applied to the Comparator Head and simulta·
neously displayed on the oscilloscope CRT. The CG 5001 sig·
nals are then varied to obtain congnuent displays. Errors are
then displayed on the CG 5001 readout.
CG 5001 Programmable Calibration
Generator •••••••.••.•.••••••...••..•••.••.••.••.••• $13,000
Meets or exceeds MIL·T· 28800B. Class 5 requirements.
The Low Distortion Pulse obtained in this mode is used to test
oscilloscope input amplifier and attenuator compensation.
COMPARATOR HEAD
(Optional Accessory)
The Comparator Head is used to calibrate built·in oscilloscope
calibrators against the signals available from the CG 5001.
± 0.001%.
1 V to 10 V RMS.
ENVIRONMENTAL
LOW EDGE (AMPLITUDE MODE)
REMOTE VARIABLE HEAD
(Optional Accessory)
The Remote Variable Head permits the operator to concentrate
on the oscilloscope CRT while remotely operating the following
front panel controls: Units/ Div control; Variable· Fixed button;
Continue pushbutton and the VAR control.
One trigger per slewed edge.
All other Modes Normal - Slaved to output frequency .
Divided by 10 - One·tenth output frequency .
Divided by 100 - One·hundredth output frequency .
Required Accuracy -
Dc or 10Hz to 1 MHz (decade steps).
Variable Range -
Range -
Slewed Edge Mode -
Frequency - 40 mV to 80 mY : 10 Hz to 100 kHz. 100 mV to
10 V: dc or 10 Hz to 100 kHz. 12 V to 200 V: de or 10 Hz to
10kHz.
Variable Range -
SLEWED EDGE (TIMING MODE)
Slewed Edges are used to calibrate the very fastest ranges
found on oscilloscope time bases.
Polarity -
.,;;200 ps.
Positive or negative transitions from ground.
Frequency -
100 Hz to 100 kHz (decade steps).
SCPDA I (ScopeCal Procedure Development Aid and
465B Verification Program) .......................................... 53,140
Rigid Circuit Board Extender
Order 067 ·0975·00 ............................................................ 565
Flexible Circuit Board Extender
Order 067· 0974·00 .•...•.....................................................• 580
CG 551AP Field Modification Kit to convert to CG 5001
Order 040·1 041·00 ....................... ..................................... 555
379
CALIBRATION
INSTRUMENTS
TEK OSCILLOSCOPE
PG 506
TG 501
CHARACTERISTICS
AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR MODE
Period -
Fixed at = 1 ms or dc.
Amplitude - From 100 V peak-to-peak to 200 ~V peak-topeak in 1-2-S sequence, accurate within ± 0.2S% into 1 Mfl .
S V peak-to-peak to 100 ~V peak-to-peak into SO fl.
Error Readout Range -
± 7.S%.
Error Readout Resolution -
0.1 %.
PULSE MODES
Period - 1 ~s to 10 ms (within S%) in decade steps with the
Variable control in Cal position. Variable extends period to at
least 100 ms.
Symmetry -
= SO% duty cycle.
HIGH AMPLITUDE OUTPUT
Risetime - Unterminated : 100 ns or less. Terminated into
SO fI : 10 ns or less.
Amplitude Range -
Unterminated: 6 V or less to at least
60 V. Terminated into SO fI : O.S V or less to at least S V.
Leading Edge Aberrations - Within 2% or SO mV peak-topeak, whichever is greater, when terminated into SO lJ.
Polarity -
Calibration Generator
Output Resistance Source -
600
Time Mark Generator
n within 5%.
FAST RISE OUTPUTS
PG 506
Three Squarewave Output Modes
10 Hz to 1 MHz
Risetlme (Terminated into 50 lJ) -
Direct Readout of Oscilloscope Deflection
Error
The PG 506 is a calibration generator for oscilloscopes. It provides three modes of squarewave
output, selectable dc outputs, and a variableamplitude output with front-panel digital indication of oscilloscope deflection error. The PG 506
can be used for checking attenuator performance
and transient response of oscilloscopes. Simultaneous plus and minus low-level, fast rise (1.0 ns)
squarewaves or high amplitude (60 V), extremely
clean squarewaves are available at frequencies
from 10 Hz through 1 MHz. A 5 mA calibration
current loop is useful for current probe calibration.
A 1 kHz squarewave can be generated in the
amplitude calibration mode. Its amplitude may be
varied around the calibrated level until the
squarewave aligns with the oscilloscope vertical
graticule divisions. Scope deflection error then
can be read directly off the PG 506 digital display
in percentage high or low, permitting rapid verification of oscilloscope performance.
TG 501
1.0 ns or less.
Amplitude Range (Terminated Into 50 lJ) to at least 1.0 V.
100 mV or less
Marker Outputs, 5 s to 1 ns
Leading Edge Aberrations - Within 2% or 10 mV peak-topeak, whichever Is greater, during first 10 ns.
Flatness -
~ ""_MO
TG 501 TIMl IrilAIIl GtllMTUR
Positive going from a negative potential to ground.
Within O.S% after first 10 ns_
External Trigger Output
Polarity - Simultaneous positive and negative going. Positive
going is from a negative rest potential to ground. Negative going is from a positive rest potential to ground.
Output Resistance Source output connectors.
SO fI within 3% at
Trigger Output (Terminated into 50 lJ) nal of at least 1 v.
Direct Readout of Oscilloscope Timing Error
+
and -
Positive-going sig-
Order PG 506 Calibration Generator •. $2,460
TUNNEL DIODE PULSER
The Tunnel Diode Pulser provides a clean, fastrise pulse for adjusting the transient response of
high-frequency oscilloscopes and other instruments. The Tunnel Diode Pulser can be driven by
the PG 506 Calibration Generator at repetition
rates exceeding 50 Hz. Output amplitude of the
pulse is approximately 250 mV into 50 fl, while
rise time is .. 125 ps; aberrations are <1% in a 1
GHz system.
Order 067-0681-01 .•.•.••.....••...••.•....•..•..• $155
PRECISION VOLTAGE DIVIDER
Designed for use with the PG 506 in the Standard
Amplitude mode, this 0.4 divider allows your oscilloscope to display a constant four divisions when
checking amplitude calibration from 20 /J.V/div
through 1 V/div. It also allows the PG 506 to be
more conveniently used with oscilloscopes that
cannot display five divisions of amplitude.
The TG 501 Time Mark Generator provides marker outputs from five seconds to one nanosecond .
A unique feature on the TG 501 is a variable timing output with a front-panel two digit LED display. The display indicates percentage of timing
error between the normal time interval and a variable interval set to line up the marker pulse with
graticule or division mark on the display. This feature not only provides direct readout in terms of
percent error, but also helps eliminate errors associated with visually estimating error from a
display.
CHARACTERISTICS
Markers - 1 ns through S s in a 1-2-S sequence.
Marker Amplitude - ;;. 1 V peak into SO lJ on S s through
10 ns markers. ;;. 7S0 mV peak-to-peak into SO lJ on S ns and
2 ns markers. ;;.200 mV peak-to-peak into SO fI on 1 ns
markers.
Trigger Output Signal - Slaved to marker output from S s
through 100 ns Remains at 100 ns for all faster markers
Internal Time Base
Standard
Crystal Frequency
1 MHz
Stability (0° to SO°C) within 1 part
in 10'
after '/2 hour
so lJ with output load .. 100 kfl,
Maximum Input Output -
.. S V RMS.
0.4 x PG S06 amplitude.
Voltage Accuracy -
± 0.4%.
Order 015-0265-00 _............................... $140
S MHz
within S parts
in 10'
Long-term Drift
1 part or less in
10' per month
Setability
adjustable to with- adjustable to within 1 part in 10'
in S parts in 10'
CHARACTERISTICS
Input Z -
Option 01
1 part or less in
10' per month
External Relerence Input - Available with internal changes.
Acceptable frequencies , 1 MHz, S MHz, or 10 MHz. Input amplitude must be TIL compatible.
Timing Error Readout Range - To ± 7.S%.
Timing Error Measurement Accuracy - Device under test
error is indicated to within one least significant digit (to within
one displayed count).
ORDERING INFORMATION
TG 501 Time Mark Generator _._ .. __ ..•.. $1,970
Option 01 For compatible accessories -
380
refer to page 410.
S MHz Time Base ................... _____ .......... +$295
TEK
GENERAL PURPOSE
INSTRUMENTS
SG 504
SG 503
SG 502
•
•
_-...
'1Il'''K'
":"
,
u
I
u
1I:\W::
•
....
.."'-Oft
·.e..."
" ~"'.:6"
...
,
-
Signal Generator
Signal Generator
Oscillator
SG 504
SG 503
SG 502
leveled, Variable Output
leveled, Variable Output
245 MHz to 1050 MHz
250 kHz to 250 MHz
5 Hz to 500 kHz Sinewaves and
Squarewaves
Frequency Modulation Capability
Digital Readout of Frequency
The SG 504 Signal Generator provides a leveled
output amplitude that is variable from 245 MHz to
1050 MHz in two bands. Frequency is indicated
by a high-resolution tape dial that expands each
band over 28 inches. The accurately calibrated
output voltage is variable from 0.5 V to at least
4.0 V peak-to-peak into 50 f!.
The SG 503 Signal Generator is a general-purpose leveled-sinewave oscillator. It provides a leveled output amplitude that is variable from
250 kHz to 250 MHz. The selected frequency is
indicated by a built-in autoranging frequency
counter with a three-digit LED read-out on the
front panel. Accurately calibrated output voltage
is variable from 5 mV to 5.5 V peak·to·peak into
50 ohms.
low Distortion Sinewave
5 V RMS Open Circuit-600 f! Source
CHARACTERISTICS
Frequency Range - Low Band: 245 MHz to 550 MHz High
Band : 495 MHz to t050 MHz, plus 50 kHz or 6 MHz reference
frequency (internally selected).
Frequency Accuracy Amplitude Range -
Amplitude Accuracy amplitude.
Flatness -
± 2% of dial indication.
0.5 V to at least 4.0 V p-p.
(at reference) Within 3% of indicated
± 4% of amplitude at reference frequency .
Harmonic Content - 2nd harmonic at least 25 dB down ; 3rd
and all higher at least 40 dB down.
Fm Input - Frequency Range : dc to 100 kHz. Deviation Sensitivity: ± 9 V produces from ± 0.05% to ± 0.5% deviation of
carrier, depending on output frequency.
Frequancy Monitor Output from 245 MHz to 1050 MHz.
.. 0.3 V p-p into a 50 fI load
Rear Card Edge Connections - Address fm input, frequency
monitor output, and amplitude control.
CHARACTERISTICS
Frequency Range - 250 kHz to 250 MHz. plus 50 kHz refer·
ence frequency .
Accuracy - Within ± 0.7 of least significant digit of indicated
frequency .
Amplitude Range - 5 mV to 5.5 V p-p into 50 fI termination in
three decade ranges.
Amplitude Accuracy - (50 kHz reference) Within 3% of indio
cated amplitude on (XI) range, 4% on (XO.l) range, and 5% on
(XO.Ol) range.
Flatness - (peak·to-peak) From 250 kHz to 100 MHz, output
amplitude will not vary more than 1% of the value at 50 kHz
except that up to + 1.5%, - 1% variation may occur between
50 MHz and 100 MHz on amplitude multiplier XO.l and XO.Ol
ranges only. From 100 MHz to 250 MHz, amplitude variation is
within 3% of the value at 50 kHz.
Harmonic Content - Second harmonic at least 35 dB down.
Third and all higher harmonics at least 40 dB down.
Other - Rear edge card connection available to address the
leveling circuit.
INCLUDED ACCESSORY
Precision 50 fI cable. 3 It long (012·0482·00).
Order SG 503 Signal Generator ........... $1,940
ORDERING INFORMATION
SG 504 Signal Generator
(Includes leveling Head) ..................... $3,000
Replacement Leveling Head.
Order 015-0282-00 ••••••• ••••••••• •••••••••••••••••••••••••
$450
Tektronix oilers service training classes on the TM 500 Cal·
ibration Systems Package, For further training inlormation.
contact your local Sales/Service Office or request a copy 01
the Tektronix Service Training Schedule on the return card
in the center 01 this catalog.
For compatible accessories -
0-40 dB Output Variable Plus 0-70 dB in
10 dB Steps
The SG 502 Oscillator features a wide frequency
range of 5 Hz to 500 kHz with low distortion
(0.035% between 20 Hz and 50 kHz) and is desir'
able for general test purposes where the ex·
tremely low distortion levels of the SG 505 are not
required . Other SG 502 features include 70 dB
amplitude control plus a simultaneous fixed ampli·
tude squarewave.
CHARACTERISTICS
slNEWAVE
Frequency Range - 5 Hz to 500 kHz in 5 decade steps.
Accurate within 5% of dial setting from 5 Hz to < 50 kHz; with·
in 10% of dial setting from 50 kHz to 500 kHz.
Amplitude Response - Fiatness is 0.3 dB over entire range
(1 kHz reference).
Attenuation - Selectable from 0 dB to 70 dB in 10, 20. and
40 dB steps with pushbuttons. Accurate within 0.2 dB for each
step selected. additive. An uncalibrated control provides con·
tinuous variation from 0 dB to - 40 dB.
Harmonic Distortion - < 0.035% (-70 dB) from 20 Hz to
50 kHz. < 0.15% from 50 kHz to 500 kHz (RL .. 600 fI).
Maximum Output Voltage - 5 V RMS open circuit ; 2.5 V
RMS into 600 fl.
Output Impedance - 600 fI , grounded.
SaUAREWAVE
Frequency Range and Accuracy - Same as sinewave. The
squarewave switches on the O· phase of sine out.
Rise and Falltime - 50 ns or less.
Amplitude - + 5 V, fixed , open circuit.
Output Impedance - 600 fI, grounded.
SYNC INPUT
Oscillator can be synchronized to external signal. Sync range,
the difference between sync frequency and set frequency , is a
linear function of sync voltage.
Input impedance - 10 kfl.
Order SG 502 Oscillator .•••••..•..•.••.•...•..• $800
refer to page 410.
381
ANALYZER
TEK DISTORTION
ter site for distortion measurements. Together
or thousands of miles apart, the AA 501
Distortion Analyzer automatically tunes to the
oscillator'S (SG 505 or your present oscillator)
signal with no operator assistance required .
The SG 50S's frequency or level can be
changed repeatedly and the AA 501 will automatically accommodate these changes as
they occur.
AA 501 Option 02
The AA 501 Distortion Analyzer makes complex measurements easier than ever with no
compromise in performance. The AA 501
measures total harmonic distortion, gain/loss,
signal to noise ratio, and audio levels. With
Option 01 the ability to measure
intermodulation distortion is added. These
measurements are accomplished automatically, with no level setting, nulling, or meter
ranging to be done by the operator. The
measurement result appears on an LED display with no additional scale factoring
necessary.
I H ~T
MONITOR
~
J-
-!-
~
J-
The AA 501 and SG 505 can be coni igured
with several other audio-quality instruments
from Tektronix. For instance, the FG 507
Sweeping Function Generator features a low
distortion sinewave output (up to 2 MHz) and a
log/lin sweep making it an ideal signal source in a
communications test set. The FG 501A 2 MHz
Function Generator is specifically designed for
those audio/communications measurements not
demanding log/lin sweep capability. (See pages
370-374 for information on the FG 507 and FG
501A).
Four filters are included and can be switched in
and out from the front panel. They are: 400 Hz
high pass, 30 kHz low pass, 80 kHz low pass (all
18 dB per octave Butterworth), and ' A" weighting.
For user convenience, an extra position on the
filter switch provides for an external, user-provided filter .
AA 501 Option 02 Distortion Analyzer
The AA 501 Option 02 Distortion Analyzer and SG
505 Oscillator permit noise measurement in accordance with CCIR recommendation 468-2 and
DIN 45405. The Option 02 incorporates the stateof-the-art features of the standard as well as the
enhanced measurement capabilities of the Option 01 (intermodulation distortion SMPTE/DIN and
difference tone testing CCIF frequency
distortion).
Selection from the front panel allows readings to
be expressed in true RMS or quasi-peak response . These features permit comparison with
readings obtained on other instruments.
"W
CHARACTERISTICS
1..;....._ _ __ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _....
AA 501
Distortion Analyzer
Fully Automatic: No Level Setting, Tuning or
Nulling
Total System Harmonic Distortion plus Noise
(THD + N) - 0,0025% (Option 02 0,0032%)
Extremely Low Residual Noise -
< 3 "V
Novel Analog-like "bar graph" plus
Complete Digital Readout
True RMS or Average Responding
(Option 02 - True RMS or Quasi-Peak
Response) in All Modes
Intermodulation Distortion (Option 01)
to SMPTE, DIN, and CCIF
Differential Input
Option 02 - Permits Noise Mesurements in
Accordance with CCIR Recommendation
468-2 and DIN 45405 (Includes Option 01)
Used together, the AA 501 Distortion Analyzer
and SG 505 Oscillator provide the easiest solution
to your distortion measurement needs. The
AA 501 and SG 505 combination permits harmonic distortion, intermodulation distortion, frequency
response , gain/loss, and signal-to-noise ratio
measurements to be accomplished with minimal
operator skill level. At the same time , both instruments feature state-of-the-art performance in residual noise and distortion .
When using the Tektronix AA 501 Distortion Analyzer and SG 505 Oscillator, complex distortion
measurements become a totally automated process. All steps previously requiring several minutes of skilled operator time, such as level setting,
tuning and nulling are now done quickly, precisely, and automatically by the AA 501 's internal
circuitry.
Because the AA 501 Distortion Analyzer and
SG 505 Oscillator are two separate plug-ins they
may be used as a powerful package in the same
mainframe or apart. For instance, the SG 505 can
be left in a rackmount mainframe at a broadcast
station while the AA 501 is transferred to a
portable mainframe and taken to the transmit-
382
To complete an audio test set add the OM 502A
Digital Multimeter with an accuracy of 0.1% dc
volts and seven functions including autoranging
dB and temperature (see page 352). The SC 503
Storage Oscilloscope is also ideal for
aUdio/communications applications with a bandwidth of 10 MHz and X-V capability. Storage
permits slow audio sweeps to be displayed or
enables the long term monitoring of peak audio
levels (see page 386).
AA 501 Option 01 Distortion Analyzer
When used with the SG 505, residual distortion is
0.0025%. Residual noise in the analyzer is less
than 3 JJ.V.
To measure Total Harmonic Distortion plus noise
(THD+N) or Intermodulation Distortion (1M D) the
operator simply feeds the audio signal to the
analyzer. The AA 501 automatically locks on the
signal, sets the proper level, and switches in the
proper filter. In the THD+N measurement the
filter nulling is totally automatic, with no presetting
of controls required . When used with a separate
oscillator, no loss of automatic features is
experienced.
The optional IMD mode measures signals to any
of three usual standards: SMPTE, DIN, or CCIF.
Internal circuitry identifies the standard being
used and configures itself to display the appropriate results .
The AA 501 has a 0 dB reference memory. This
feature allows an audio level to be set to 0 dB
with all subsequent signal levels compared to it.
The result is expressed in dB on the display.
Selection from the front panel allows readings to
be expressed in true RMS or average response ,
RMS calibrated. Although true RMS is more accurate in most applications, the average response
permits comparisons with measurements previously taken with older instrumentation.
The digital voltmeter is auto ranging on all scales,
from the lowest, 200 "V full scale, to the highest,
200 V full scale.
The following electrical characteristics are common to the standard AA 501 , Option 01 and Option 02 unless otherwise noted :
THO
Complete automatic Total Harmonic Distortion (THO) measurements to specified accuracy in 7 s or less.
LEVEL
Autoranging digital voltmeter displays input signal level in volts,
dBm, or dB ratios .
IMD
(OPTION 01, OPTION 02)
Fully automatic SMPTE, DIN, and CCIF difference frequency
test measurements.
OPTION 02
Noise measurements to CCIR recommendation 468-2 and DIN
45402. True RMS or quasi-peak response. Total system
THO + N - 0.0032% (90 dB) RMS response. Balanced input.
DISTORTION FUNCTION
Fundamental Frequency Range - 10Hz to 100 kHz automatically tuned to input frequency .
Distortion Ranges - Auto (100%), 20%, 2%, 0.2%, and dB
(autoranging).
Accuracy (readings .. 4% of range) - 20 Hz to 20 kHz
± 1 dB, 10 Hz to 100 kHz + 1, - 3 dB. (Accuracy is limited by
residual THO + N and filter selection.)
AA SOI/SG 505 System Re.idual THO + N - Yin .. 250 mY,
(all distortion, noise, and nulling error sources combined).
20 Hz to 20 kHz
c; 0.0025% (- 92 dB) Average Response with 80 kHz filter
(standard and Option 01 only).
';;0.0032% (- 90 dB) RMS Response with 80 kHz filter.
10 Hz to 50 kHz
c; 0.0071 % ( - 83 dB) RMS Response.
50 kHz to 100 kHz
.;;0.010% ( - 80 dB) RMS Response.
TYPICAL THO + N
O. 01 ~f--t---t---;=--+--t--+
--+--
'0 dB
.~
AMI RESPONSE (0.003 2'110 GUARANTEED)
AVO RESPONSE (0.0025" GUA"AN TlI!D)
O' OO4"'~~~.
20
so
100
200
500
1K
2K
SK
10K
20K
Typical Fundamental Reiection - At least 10 dB below
specified residual THO + N or actual signal THO, whichever is
greater.
Minimum Input Level- 60 mV (- 22 dBm).
LEVEL FUNCTION
Modes - Volts, dBm (600 {'I), or dB ratio with push to set zero
dB reference.
Level Rangas - 200 ~V full scale to 200 V full scale in ten
steps. manual or autoranging.
PURPOSE
INSTRUMENTS
TEK GENERAL
OSCILLATOR
SG 505 Option 01
Accuracy
COMMON CHARACTERISTICS
Frequency
VollI
dBm or dB ratio
MAIN OUTPUT
20 Hz 10 20 kHz
+ 2%
+ 0.3 dB
10 Hz to 100 kHz'
± 4%
± 0.5 dB
Frequency Range - to Hz to 100 kHz in four overlapping
bands. Accurate within 3% of dual setting (with Vernier at center). Vernier Range is at least ± 1% of frequency setting.
(Vin .. ,00 " V. level ranging indicators extinguished).
Calibrated Output - Selectable from + 10 dBm to - 60 dBm
into 600 11 in eight 10 dB steps. Accurate to within 0.2 dB at
+ 10 dBm and 1 kHz. Step accuracy is ± 0.1 dB/I 0 dB step.
An uncalibrated control provides continuous variation from at
least + 2.2 dB to < - 10 dB from calibrated positon.
Bandwidth - .. 300 kHz .
Residual Noise - ... 3.0 "V ( - 108 dBm) with 80 kHz and
400 Hz filters .
... 1.5 "V ( - 114 dBm) with ' A' weighting filter.
'On the 200 I' V range, accuracy above 50 kHz is + 4 %, - 6%
( + 0.5 dB, - 0.7 dB).
Amplitude Re.pon.e - Level flatness ± 0.1 dB from 10Hz
to 20 kHz (1 kHz ref); within 0.2 dB from 20 kHz to 100kHz
(excluding > 50 kHz on - 60 dB output level range).
INTERMODULATION DISTORTION FUNCTION
(OPTION 01/02)
< 0.0008% (- 102 dB) THO from
Harmonic Distortion 20 Hz to 20 kHz (typically 0.0003%); 0.0018% (- 95 dB) THO
from to Hz to 20 Hz, and from 20 kHz to 50 kHz ; 0.0032%
(- 90 dB) THO from 50 kHz to 100 kHz (RL .. 600 n).
SMPTE and DIN Tests - Lower frequency range: 50 Hz to
250 Hz.
Upper frequency range: 3 kHz to 100 kHz.
Level ratio range: l : t to 5:1 (Iower:upper).
Residual IMD : ... 0.0025% ( - 92 dB) for 60 Hz and 7 kHz or
250 Hz and 8 kHz , 4: 1 level ratio.
CCIF Difference Frequency - Frequency range: 4 kHz to
100 kHz.
Difference frequency range : 50 Hz to t kHz.
ResiduallMD : ... 0.0018% ( - 95 dB) with 14 kHz
and 15 kHz.
Minimum input level: 60 mV ( - 22 dBm).
Accuracy -
± 1 dB.
ALL FUNCTIONS
Filters - 400 Hz high pass: - 3 dB at 400 Hz ± 5%; at least
- 40 dB rejection at 60 Hz.
80 kHz low pass: - 3 dB at 80 kHz ± 5%.
30 kHz low pass : - 3 dB at 30 kHz ± 5% (standard and Option 01 only).
•A' weighting : Meets specifications for Type 1 sound level meters (ANSI S 1.4, IEC Recommendation 179) (standard and
Option 01 only).
EXT: Allows connection of external filters .
22.4 Hz - 22.4 kHz : - 3 dB ± 5% (Option 02 only).
CCIR WTG: CCIR Recommendation 468-2 and DIN 45405,
functional only with Q-PK detector (Option 02 only).
Input Impedance differential.
100 kll ± 2%, each side to ground, fully
Maximum Input - 300 V pk , 200 V RMS either side to ground
or differentially.
Fully protected on all ranges.
Common Mode Rejection - .. 50 dB at 50 or 60 Hz.
Typically .. 40 dB to 300 kHz.
Detection factors .. 3.
Average or true RMS for waveforms with crest
FRONT PANEL SIGNALS
Input Monitor - Provides constant amplitude version of signal
applied to input. Output vottage: 1 V RMS ± 10% for input
signals > 50 mY. Source impedance: 1 kll ± 5%.
Function Output - Provides a scaled sample of selected function signal (tOOO count display - 1 V RMS ± 3%). Source
impedance: 1 kll ± 5%.
Auxiliary Input - Provides input to detector circuit when EXT
FILTER button is depressed. Sensitivity: 1 V RMS ± 3% 1000 count display. Impedance: 100 kll ± 5%, ac coupled.
REAR INTERFACE SIGNALS
Rear INTFC INPUT - Front panel selected. Same as main
INPUT except, maximum signal input is limited to 42 V pk, 30 V
RMS . (Potential crosstalk at rear interface may degrade noise
and distortion on performance).
Monitor -
Same as front panel Input Monitor.
Function Output Auxiliary Input -
Same as front panel Function Output.
Same as front panel Auxiliary Input.
Converter Output - Dc output of selected response converter. 1 V ± 5% for 1000 count display. Source Z: 500 11 ± 5%.
dB Output - Dc output of logarithmic dB converter. 10 mV
± 5% per 1 dB of display. Source Z: 1 kn ± 5% .
Output Impedance - 600 n ± 2%; floating or grounded
through ",30 n . Output impedance does not change with OUTPUT ON/OFF selection. Maximum floating voltage ± 30 V
peak .
Maximum Output Voltage - At least 6 V RMS open circuit;
3.16 V RMS ( + 10 dBV or + 12.2 dBm) into 600 n.
Oscillator
SYNC OUTPUT
Signal - 200 mV RMS ± 20% sinewave to 20 kHz, at least
120 mV RMS at 100 kHz .
SG 50S/Option 01/0ption 02
Common Characteristics
Frequency -
Same as main output.
Impedance - Nominally 1 kn, ground referenced and isolated
from main output.
10 Hz to 100 kHz Sinewave
(typically 9 Hz to 110 kHz)
REAR INTERFACE SIGNALS
Buffered Main Output - Buffered version of actual output
signals from front panel connector. ",300 n Output impedance.
Ultra-Low Distortion-0.0008% THD
(typically 0.0003 %)
Sync Output - Same as front panel SYNC OUTPUT except
output impedance is ", 50 11.
Floating or Grounded Output
OPTION 01 1M TEST SIGNAL
Vernier Frequency Control
Selecting the 1M Test Signal causes a LF sinewave to be mixed
with the normal oscillator signal in a 4:1 amplitude ratio.
Isolated and Ground Referenced Sync
Output
SG 505
Internally selectble 60 Hz ( ± 1 Hz) or 250 Hz
Main Output - CompoSite peak-te-peak output within 0.2 dB
of normal oscillator mode output.
Option 01
Calibrated Output into 600
-60 dBm
600
LF Frequency ( ± 3 Hz).
n - + 10 dBm
to
n Source
Option 01 Adds Intermodulation Test Signal
ReslduallMD -
Typically < 0.0005% from 2.5 kHz to 10kHz.
Sync Output ± 20%.
LF signal component only, 200 mV RMS
ORDERING INFORMATION
SG 505 Oscillator ................................... $710
Option 01 -
(1M Test Signal) ...................................... +$200
Option 02 - Oscillator described on following page
(includes Option 01) ...................................................... + $550
The SG 505 Oscillator features the lowest distortion level commercially available today in the
10 Hz to 100 kHz band (0.0008% between 20 Hz
and 20 kHz). The SG 505 assures you of freedom
from residual distortion effects; particularly critical
when making audio and communication measurements. This extremely low distortion performance
is coupled with many designed-in convenience
features.
For instance, the main signal output may be floated to help avoid interference due to troublesome
ground loops, or it may be ground referenced.
The SG 505 also features an isolated and ground
referenced sync output. This allows you to monitor the phase or the frequency of the output of
the oscillator without disturbing the floating output of the main signal.
ORDERING INFORMATION
AA 501 Distortion Analyzer ...••.....•...•. $2,130
Option 01 -
Intermodulation Distortion ..................... +$690
Option 02 -
CCIR/DIN (includes Option 01) ........... +$1,050
383
OSCILLOSCOPE
TEK OSCILLATOR,
SG 505 Option 02
CHARACTERISTICS
SC 501
MAIN OUTPUT
Frequency Range - 10Hz to 100 kHz in four overlapping
bands. Accurate within 3% of dual setting (with Vernier at centerl. Vernier Range is at least ± 1% of frequency setting.
ac:
.0'1
O.CILLOac:OPE
Calibrated Output - Selectable from + 22 dBm to - 68 dBm
into 600 0 in ten 10 dB steps. Accurate to within 0.2 dB at
+ 22 dBm and 1 kHz . Step accuracy is ± 0.1 dB/10 dB step or
20 dB step change. An uncalibrated control provides continuous variation from < - 10 dB to + 0.3 dB from calibrated
position.
Amplitude Response - Level flatness ± 0.1 dB from 10Hz to
20 kHz (1 kHz ref); within 0.2 dB from 20 kHz to 100 kHz
(excluding > 50 kHz on - 58 dB and - 68 dB output level
ranges).
< 0.0008% (- 102 dB) THO from
Harmonic Distortion 20 Hz to 20 kHz (typically 0.0003%); 0.0018% ( - 95 dB) THO
from 10Hz to 20 Hz, and from 20 kHz to 50 kHz; 0.0056%
(- 85 dB) THO from 50 kHz to 100 kHz (RL .,.6000).
Output Impedance - Selectable 600 0 ± 2%, 150 0 ± 2% or
50 Il ± 3% floating or grounded through ",,30 Il. Output impedance does not change with Output On/Off selection. Impedance to CT is '/' the selected impedance. Maximum floating
voltage ± 25 V peak .
Oscillator
Maximum Output Voltage - At least 21 V RMS open circuit;
19.45 V RMS (+ 28 dBm) into 600 Il from 50 Il.
NIIIN
SG 505
Option 02
Fully Balanced Output
Calibrated Output into 600 11 (from 600 11),
+22 dBm to -68 dBm
Selectable Source Impedance, 5011, 150 11,
or 600 11
Ultra Low Distortion-0.0008 % THD (typically 0.0003%)
Three Banana Jack Outputs Including
"Center Tap"
For communications and broadcast applications,
Option 02 provides a fully balanced output with a
maximum amplitude of +28 dBm into 600 ohms
from 50 ohms. A ten-position (10 dB per step)
attenuator and a variable attenuator with a minimum 10 dB range reduce the SG 505 Option 02
output to below - 78 dBm into 600 ohms. These
output signals appear on the front panel at 3/.
inch spaced banana jacks with a third banana
jack providing a ocr center tap. A pushbutton
switch allows grounding or floating the center
tap.
A front panel switch enables selection of three
different source resistances : 50 ohms for low
impedance applications (improves measurement
accuracies on long cable runs and reduces loading effects), 150 ohms for matching microphone
circuits, and 600 ohms for complying with
aUdio/communication industry standard and general purpose applications . In the 50 ohm position ,
the SG 505 Option 02 delivers +28 dBm into a
600 ohm balanced load, or typically + 30 dBm
into 150 ohms. In the 600 ohm position, the
SG 505 Option 02 delivers a calibrated +22 dBm
into a 600 ohm balanced load.
The Option 02 retains the ultra-low distortion of
the SG 505 through 50 kHz and includes the
Option 01 intermodulation test signal.
384
Balance - ..;0.5% mismatch of output open-circuit voltages
referenced to CT for f .. 20 kHz with output Grounded.
INCLUDED ACCESSORES
Cable assembly for sync output (175-1178-00).
Order SG 505 Option 02 Oscillator .... $1,360
SC 501
5 MHz Bandwidth
Single Compartment Size
6.4 cm (2.5 inches) CRT
Versatile Operating Features
5 MHz Oscilloscope
many auxiliary functions , for example sweeping a
voltage-controlled frequency oscillator.
The triggering circuits allow stable triggering from
either internal or externai sources. An Auto triggering mode and manual Level/Slope selection is
combined in a single control. It is useful above
10 Hz and provides a bright baseline at all sweep
rates.
An internal switch converts the horizontal deflection system of the SC 501 to an external horizontal amplifier which is internally calibrated for
100 mV/div deflection factor with a bandwidth of
100 kHz.
CHARACTERISTICS
The SC 501 is a single-channel , 5 MHz plug-in unit
oscilloscope with a 2.5 inch CRT display that occupies a single TM 500 Series plug-in compartment. Oscilloscope capability significantly enhances the application range of the
multifunctional TM 500 Series Test and Measurement Instruments.
With the SC 501 a multitude of versatile test systems may be structured from the TM 500 Series
to suit specific needs for time and frequency response, modulating waveforms, power for devices under test, stimulus and response studies
and voltage, current, and temperature measurements. Since the SC 501 fits any TM 500 Mainframe, it can be used on the bench , in a rack, or
on the road . The single-channel SC 501 has a
calibrated vertical deflection range from
10 mV/div to 1 V/div, selectable in decade steps.
A variable control extends this range to at least
10 V/div.
Calibrated sweep rates are selected by
pushbutton logic in decade steps from 1 /-Ls/div to
100 /-Ls/div (microsecond range), and from
1 ms/div to 100 ms/div (millisecond range) . A variable control extends the slowest sweep rate to at
least 1 s/div and a fixed magnifier extends the
fastest sweep rate to 200 ns/div.
A 0 to 10 V ramp for all sweep rates (excluding
the X5 magnification) is provided at a rear interface connector. This capability may be used for
VERTICAL DEFLECTION
Bandwidth -
Dc to > 5 MHz.
Deflection Factors - 10 mY/diy, 100 mY/diy, and 1 V/div.
Accuracy, within 3%. Uncalibrated (variable) range, continuously variable between steps (10:1) and to at least 10 V/div.
Input Coupling Input Impedance -
Ac or dc.
1 Mil paralleled by 47 pF.
Maximum Input Voltage -
350 V (dc + peak ac).
HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION
Time Bas. - Calibrated sweep rates : 1 ~s/div to 100 ms/div
in decade steps. Uncalibrated (variable) range: extends slowest
calibrated rate to .. 1 s/div. X5 magnifier (fixed): extends fastest calibrated sweep rate to 200 ns/div. Accuracy (over center
8 div): .. 5% for all sweep rates. Linearity (any two div portion
within center eight div): .. 5%.
Ext.rnal Horizontal Amplifier - Bandwidth: dc to 100 kHz.
Input Impedance : .. 100 kll paralleled by 25 pF. Maximum input voltage: ± 3 V.
TRIGGER
Normal Trigger Sensitivity (Triggsr Level/Slope In) - Internal: dc coupled, 0.4 major div of deflection at dc; Increasing to
1.0 major div of deflection at 5 MHz. External : dc coupled, 1 V
minimum to 5 V maximum from dc to 5 MHz. External trigger
input impedance: 22 kll paralleled by "" 150 pF.
Auto (Trigger Level/Slope Out) - Sweep free-runs without
trigger signal, or for trigger repetition rates below 10Hz.
CRT
Phosphor -
P31 .
Graticul. -
6 X 10 div (0.203 in per div).
Order SC 501 5 MHz Oscilloscope .... $1,200
PURPOSE
INSTRUMENTS
TEK GENERAL
OSCILLOSCOPES
x- Y Mode - Bandwidth: de to at least 2 MHz. Deflection Factor, selected by Channel 2 controls and horizontal mag XI , Xl0
with 5% accuracy. X and Y amplifier phase difference, less than
3 ' at 50 kHz or less. Input parameters same as Channel 2.
SC 504
~
,
-
TRIGGER
Trigger Modes -
AUTO, NORM , and SGl SWP.
Enhanced Auto Trigger - The trigger circuit automatically
adjusts to spread the peak-to-peak signal over most of the
range of the triggering level control. This provides more conv&nlent triggering, especially on low amplitude signals.
Trigger Sources Trigger Coupling -
CH I , CH 2, liNE, EXT. INT.
Ac, ae IF REJ, 8C HF REJ, de.
Trigger Sensitivity Required
80 MHz Oscilloscope
SC 504
CHARACTERISTICS
80 MHz Bandwidth
Bandwidth at -3 dB points - Dc to at least 80 MHz from
O' C to + 3S ' C; de to at least 70 MHz from + 3S ' C to + SO· C.
5 mV/div Maximum Sensitivity
Risetlme - 4.4 ns or less from O· C to + 3S'C ; 5 ns or less
from + 3S ' C to + SO · C.
Enhanced Automatic Triggering
True X·Y Capability
Switchable Rear Interface Capability
The SC 504 Plug-in Oscilloscope makes many
new configurations possible, especially for those
applications demanding higher bandwidth capabilities. A double-wide plug-in, the SC 504 is
compatible with all existing TM 500fTM 5000 Plugins and multi-compartment mainframes.
The SC 504 is a general purpose, dual-trace, nondelayed-sweep oscilloscope. It has a high writing
speed with a maximum sensitivity of 5 mV/div,
and a maximum sweep rate of 5 ns/div (with
magnifier). This oscilloscope features Add (CH 1
+ CH 2), differential (CH 1 - CH 2), and ' true" XV modes,and also includes rear interfacing capability (switch able CH 1, CH 2 and ext trig inputs).
Enhanced auto triggering, trigger view , ana variable trigger holdoff make this oscilloscope very
versatile and easy to use.
Ac Low Frequency Response (lower -3 dB points) - Without probe, 10 Hz; with lOX probe, 1 Hz.
Deflection Factors - Calibrated Range: 5 mV to 10 Vl div, 11
steps In a 1-2-5 sequence.
Accuracy - ± 2%, + IS ' C to + 3S' C; ± 3%, O' Cto + SO· C.
Uncalibrated Range - Continuously variable between calibrated steps. At least 2.5:1 range. Extends maximum deflection
factors to at least 25 Vl div.
Modes - CH I , CH 2, Alt., Chop, CH 1 minus CH 2, CH 1 plus
CH 2, X- Y. Chop rate at least 250 kHz.
Input Rand C -
Octo
30 MHz
30 MHz to
10 MHz
Dc
CH I, CH 2
Extemal
Interface
0.4 div 60 mV
Typically
SOmV
1.0dlvlS0mV
Typically 100 mV
to SO MHz
Ac
Requirements increase below ",,50 kHz
Ac IF REJ
REJ
Requlrernl8nts increase below "" 10 kHz
HF REJ
Requirements increase above "" SO kHz
Position Range -
~
± 1.4 V.
Extemal Triggering Input - Input R and C - 1 Mil ± 10%
paralleled by approximately 24 pF. Maximum Input Voltage 250 V (de + peak ac); 250 V peak-to-peak at 1 kHz or less.
AUTO Mode - Sweep free runs In the absence of a triggering
signal. TRIGGER lEVEL range is reduced to approximately the
peak-to-peak range of the triggering signal.
Singia Sweep - Triggering requirernl8nts are as for normal
sweep. When triggered, sweep gl8n9rator produces orI8 sweep
only.
CRT
Phosphor -
P31 .
Acceleration Potential Gratlcule lines.
", 12 kV.
Scale, 8 x 10 div with 0.25 inJdiv Intemal graticule
REAR INTERFACE
Common-Mode Rejection Ratios - At least 50: 1 up to
1 MHz, and 10:1 from 1 MHz to 10 MHz when using the same
attenuator settings ; common-mode signalS divisions or less.
± 6 div.
Pemnits viewing leading edge of displayed
waveform.
Calibrator -
Source
1 Mil ± 1% paralleled by ",,20 pF.
Maximum Input Voltage - 250 V (de + peak ac), 500 V
peak-to-peak ac at 1 kHz or less.
Delay Line -
Coupling
Extemal Triggaring Level Range -
VERTICAL DEFLECTION
5 ns/div Maximum Calibrated Sweep Rate
Minimum Peak to Peak Signal
CH 1 and CH 2 Vertical Inputs - Selected by CH 1 and CH 2
coupling in INT (interface) position. Input impedance: 50 Il. Can
be customer-modified for input impedance of 1 Mil paralleled
by ..,60 pF.
Trigger Input - Selected by TRIGGER SOURCE switch in
INT (interface) position. Input impedance: 50 Il when selected,
25 Il when not selected. Can be customer-modified for input
impedance of 1 Mil paralleled by ",, 40 pF.
Z-Axis Input - Input Impedance: '" 1.5 kll. + 5 V turns beam
ON from OFF condition, - 5 V turns beam OFF from ON
condition.
0.6 V, ± 1%, ",, 1 kHz frequency .
HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION
Sweep Generator Calibrated Sweep Rates: 0.2 s to
50 nsl div, 21 steps in a 1-2-5 sequence, plus a Xl0 magnifl8r
for sweep rates fo 5 nsl div. Uncalibrated (variable) Range The CAL (variable) control provides sweep rates that are continuously variable between the calibrated rates , and extends
the slowest sweep rate to at least 0.5 sl div.
Sw..ep Rate Accuracy - Measured over center 8 divisions,
excluding first 50 ns and all alter the first 100 divisions of magnifl8d sweep. Derate accuracies by an additional 1% from O' C
to + IS ' C and + 3S' C to + SO · C
+IS'C to +3S'C
XI
Xl0
± 3%
20 msl div to 0.2 "sldiv
± 2%
0.2 sldiv to 50 msl div
± 3%
+ 4%
0.1 "sl div to 50 nsldiv
± 3%
± 4%
Channell Output - At least 50 mVl div. Bandwidth: at least
30 MHz. Output Impedance: < 50 Il.
Ramp Output -
0 to + 10 V ramp . Output resistance = 500 Il.
ENVIRONMENTAL CAPABILITIES
Temperature - Operating: O' C to +4S' C (to +SO'C in
mainframes equipped with fan). Nonoperating: - SS'C to
+ 7S· C.
Altitude - Operating: Sea level to 4500 m (15,000 It). Nonoperating: Sea level to 15 200 m (50,000 It).
Order SC 504 80 MHz Oscilloscope .. $3,000
RECOMMENDED PROBES
P6101 IX, P6108 lOX, P6062B IX or lOX. See pages 438,
441 .
Trigger Holdoff - CAL (variable) control, if selected by an
internal switch, increases trigger hoIdolf time by a factor of at
least 20.
Compatible accessories begin on page 410.
385
TEK OSCILLOSCOPES
TRIGGER
SC 503
Trigger Modes (single sweep).
AUTO (enhanced). NORM. and SGL SWP
Enhanced Auto Trigger - The trigger circuit automatically
adjusts to spread the p-p signal over most of the range of the
triggering level control. This provides more convenient triggering. especially on low amplitude signals.
Trigger Sources interface).
Trigger Coupling -
CH 1. CH 2. LINE. EXT. INT (rear
Dc. ac. ac LF REJ .
Trigger Sensitivity' -
Minimum p p signal required
dc to 5 MHz
Source
5 MHz to 10 MHz
CH 1. CH 2
0.4 div
1.0 div
External
60 mV
ISO mV
Interface
Typically 3S mV
Typically 80 mV
'With ac coupling requirements increase below = 50 Hz. With
ac LF REJ coupling requirements increase below = 10 kHz.
Triggering Level Range at least - 6.0 divisions.
CHARACTERISTICS
VERTICAL DEFLECTION
Bandwidth at -3 dB pOints - Dc to at least 10 MHz .
(S mV/div to 20 mV/div) ; dc to at least 7 MHz (2 mV/div). dc to
at least S MHz (1 mV/div).
SC 503
Risetime -
10 MHz Bandwidth
Ac Low-Frequency Response (lower -3 dB points) out probe, 10 Hz ; with lOX probe 1 Hz.
Bi-stable Storage Auto-Erase
Trigger View
Variable Holdott
Switch able Front/Rear X and V Inputs
Rear Z-Axis Input
S mV to 20 V/div, typically 3S ns or less.
Deflection Factors - Calibrated Range: 1 mV/div to 20 V/div.
14 steps in a 1-2-S sequence. Accuracy - S mV to 20 V/div
( + IS ' C to + 3S'C) ±3%, 1 mV/div and 2 mV/div ±S%; (derate accuracy by additional 1% for O' C to + SO'C). Uncalibrated Range: at least 2.S:1 continuously variable between calibrated steps : Extends maximum uncalibrated deflection factor
to at least SO V/div.
Modes - CH 1. CH 2. ALT, CHOP. CH 1 minus CH 2. CH 1
plus CH 2. X-Y oChop rate at least 2S0 kHz.
Input Impedance -
True X-V Capability
With-
The SC 503 is a non-delayed sweep, general
purpose storage oscilloscope that is compatible
with five of our TM 500 Mainframes, (TM 503,
TM 504, TM 515, TM 506 and RTM 506).
Common-Mode Rejection Ratio - At least SO: 1 at 1 MHz
when using same attenuator setting. in CH 1 minus CH 2
mode.
Because the SC 503 is a storage oscilloscope, it
can be used to store and display waveforms after
the input signal is removed . This feature is particularly useful when measuring slow repetition rates
or Single-shot signals, important in the biomedical
and mechanical measurements fields . Low frequency signals at heart or respiration rates can
be stored for detailed analysis. In the mechanical
measurements field the SC 503 can "freeze" fast
or transient signals from transducers, which is
especially useful in pressure-and velocity·versustime analysis and shock testing.
Calibrator -
Other important storage applications of the
SC 503 include measurements of signals in computer peripherals, communication terminals and
industrial control systems.
Major features of the SC 503 also include an autoerase mode that erases the stored signal and
automatically retriggers the oscilloscope, and X-V
capability. The X-V capability allows creation of
Lissajous patterns in many cause and effect
testing relationships including acoustic speech
testing , nerve potential testing, and optical stimulus response testing .
Delay Line waveform.
Permits viewing leading edge of displayed
0.6 V, ± 1%. = 1 kHz frequency.
± 6 div.
Position Range -
Channel Isolation 10MHz.
Displayed Noise -
2% or less display related crosstalk to
Sweep Generator - Calibrated sweep rates: 2 s/div to
O.S ~s/div. 21 steps in a 1-2-S sequence, plus a Xl0 magnifier
for sweep rates to SO ns/div. Uncalibrated (variable) range provides continuously variable sweep rates. between the calibrated rates. and extends the slowest rate of at least S s/div.
Seep
w
Rate Accuracy
+IS'C to +3S'C
XI
Xl0
2 s/div to O.S s/div
+ 4%
+ 5%
0.2 s/div to S ~s/div
+3%
± 4%
+4%
+5%
~s/div
to O.S
~s/div
Derate accuracy by an additional 1% from O'C to +IS'C and
+ 3S ' C to +SO' C.
Trigger Holdoff -
At least 20: 1 range internally selectable.
X-Y Mode - Bandwidth : dc to at least SOO kHz. Deflection
Factor: selected by CH 2 controls and Horizontal Mag XI. Xl0.
Phase Difference: < 3 ' at SO kHz or less.
Compatible accessories begin on page 410.
386
Auto Mode - Sweep free-runs in the absence of a triggering
signal. Level control range automatically varies with the triggering signal amplitude for frequencies above 100 Hz.
Single Sweep - Triggering requirements same as for normal
sweep. When triggered. sweep generator produces one sweep
only.
STORAGE SYSTEM
Stored Writing Speed (center 6 x 8 divisions) 80 div/ms (SO cm/ms).
Erase Time -
At least
400 ms to 600 ms.
Auto-Erase Viewing Time .. O.S s to ;;. S s.
Continuously variable from
Maximum Recommended Storage Time -
= 4 hours.
CRT
Phosphor -
P44 .
CRT Graticule graticule lines.
8 x 10 div .. 0.2S in/div (0.64 cm/div). Internal
REAR INTERFACE
CH 1 and CH 2 Vertical Inputs - Selected by CH 1 and CH 2
coupling in INT (interface) position. Input Impedance: SO n. Can
be customer-modified for input impedance of 1 Mn paralleled
by = 100 pF.
Trigger Input - Selected by Trigger Source switch in Int (interface) position. Input Impedance: SO n, when selected. 2S n
when not selected. Can be customer-modified for input impedance of 1 Mn paralleled by = 60 pF.
Z-Axis Input - Input Impedance: = I.S kn. + S V turns beam
On from Off condition, - S V turns beam Off from On condition.
< 0.2 mV p-p at 1 mV/div.
HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION
2
External Triggering Input - Input Impedance: 1 Mn. paralleled by = 47 pF. Maximum Input Voltage: 3S0 V (dc + peak
ac). 3S0 V p-p at 1 kHz or less. Above 1 kHz recommended p-p
ac limit is 100 V to 10kHz derating to 10 V above 100 kHz.
1 Mn ± 1% paralleled by = 47 pF.
Maximum Input Voltage - 3S0 V (dc + peak ac). 700 V p-p
ac at 1 kHz or less. Above 1 kHz recommended p-p ac limit is
2S0 V to 10kHz derating to 2S V above 100 kHz.
External: at least ± 1.2 V. Internal:
CH 1 Output - At least SO mV/div. Bandwidth: at least 4 MHz.
Output Impedance: SO n .
Ramp Output- 0 to + 10 V ramp Output impedance = SOO n.
ENVIRONMENTAL CAPABILITIES
Temperature - Operating : O'C to + 4S ' C (O ' C to + SO'C in
mainframe equipped with a fan). Maximum operating temperature decreased by I'CIt 000 feet from SOOO feet to IS.000 feet.
Nonoperating : - SS ' C to + 7S'C.
Altitude - Operating: to 4S00 m (IS .000 It). Nonoperating: to
IS 200 m (SO.OOO It).
Order SC 503 10 MHz Storage
Oscilloscope ........................................ $3,240
RECOMMENDED PROBES
P6101 IX. P6108 lOX . P6062B IX or lOX. See pages 438.
441 .
TEK
GENERAL PURPOSE
INSTRUMENTS
HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION
Sweep Generator - Calibrated Sweep Rates : 0.5 s to
0.2 ~s/div, 20 steps in a 1-2-5 sequence, plus a Xl0 magnifier
for sweep rates to 20 ns/div. Uncalibrated (variable) Range: the
CAL (variable) control provides sweep rates that are continuously variable between the calibrated rates, and extends the
slowest sweep rate to at least 1.25 s/div.
SC 502
Sweep Rate Accuracy - Within 3% unmagnified, 4% magnified, + 15'C to + 3S ' C.
Derated by an additional 1% for O' C to + 15' C and + 35'C to
+ 50' C.
Trigger Holdofl - CAL (variable) control, if selected by an
internal jumper, increases trigger hoIdoff time by a factor of at
least 20.
External Horizontal Amplifier - Bandwidth: de coupled, de to
at least 2 MHz; ac coupled < SO Hz to at least 2 MHz. Deflection Factor, Sf) mV/div within 5%. X and Y Amplifoer Phase
Difference: <~J ' at 50 kHz or less. Input Impedance: 1 MO
within 2% paralleled by = 47 pF. Maximum Input Voltage:
350 V (dc + peak ac); 350 V p-p at 1 kHz or less.
15 MHz Dual-Trace Oscilloscope
SC 502
15 MHz Bandwidth
Dual-Trace
20 ns/div Maximum Calibrated Sweep Rate
1 mV Idiv Maximum Sensitivity
Delay Line
The SC 502 makes many new instrumentation
systems feasible , especially in the areas of QA,
production testing, maintenance, and field servicing. The rear interfacing capability of the SC 502
and all TM 500 Instrumentation suggests exceptional applicability to systems of built-in test
equipment or rackmounted installations. The TM
515 Traveler Mainframe with the SC 502, forms a
nucleus for sophisticated, compact field service
"packages."
CHARACTERISTICS
Trigger View
Variable Trigger Hold-off
Enhanced Automatic Triggering
VERTICAL DEFLECTION
Bandwidth at -3 dB points - 5 mV to 20 V/div, dc to at least
15 MHz; 2 mY/diY, de to at least 10 MHz; 1 mY/diY, dc to at
least 5 MHz.
Risetime -
The SC 502 is a compact general-purpose
15 MHz dual-trace oscilloscope designed to operate in any two adjacent compartments of a
TM 500 Power Module/Mainframe. It has a high
writing speed , a wide range of sweep rates , a
wide range of deflection factors , and versatile
triggering , including trigger view and enhanced
automatic triggering.
As with many Tektronix Products, the SC 502
features circuits, sub-circuits, and components
designed and built by Tektronix to fulfill the
special design capabilities of the instrument.
Among its many recommended uses, the SC 502
is intended to be a powerful tool in the field
servicing of digital equipment, where it would be
used in association with disk memories, key-totape, printers, plotters, punches, readers , and
terminals. The CRT of the SC 502 offers a high
writing speed as an advantage in the display of
digital information, while stable, clean triggering is
assured by incorporating well proven circuits.
Thus, the SC 502 offers the engineer a unique
combination of performance, compactness, and
systems capability.
5 mV to 20 V/div, 23 ns or less.
Ac Low-Frequency Response (Lower -3 dB points) Without probe, 10Hz; with probe (lOX), 1 Hz.
Deflection Factors - Calibrated range: 1 mV to 20 V/div, 14
steps in a 1-2-5 sequence. Accuracy: 5 mV to 20 V/div ( + IS ' C
to + 35'C) within 2%, (0 ' to +50'C) within 3%; 1 mV and
2 mV/div within 5%. Uncalibrated (variable) range. At least
2.5:1 range. Continuously variable between calibrated steps.
Extends maximum attenuator step to at least SO V/div.
Modes - CH 1, CH 2, ALT, CHOP, CH 1 MINUS CH 2. Chop
rate at least 2S0 kHz. Triggering waveform is displayed instead
of selected display when desired.
Input Impedance -
1 Mil within 1% paralleled by = 47 pF.
Maximum Input Voltage at ac 1 kHz or less.
350 V (de + peak ac), 700 V p-p
Common-Mode Rejection Ratio (CH 1 minus CH 2 mode)At least 50:1 at 1 MHz when using same attenuator setting.
Channel Isolation 15 MHz.
Displayed Noise Position Range -
2% or less display related crosstalk to
< 0.2 mV p-p at 1 mV/div.
± 6 div.
Calibrator - Voltage, 0.6 V ± 1%. Frequency, twice the power line frequency .
TRIGGER
Enhanced Automatic Triggering - In the automatic mode,
the trigger circuit automatically adjusts to spread the p-p signal
over most of the range of the triggering level control. This provides more convenient triggering, especially on low amplitude
signals.
Trigger Modes Single Sweep.
Auto (enhanced), Nonmal (auto button out),
Trigger Sources Trigger Coupling Trigger Sensitivity -
CH I , CH 2, Une Ext.
Dc, ac, ac LF Rej.
Minimum p-p signal required
de to 5 MHz
Source
5 MHz to 15 MHz
CH 1 CH 2
0.4 div
1.0 div
External
60 mV
150 mV
With ac coupling requirements increase below = 50 Hz. Ac LF
ReJ coupling reqUirements increase below = 5 kHz.
Triggering Level Range at least ± 1.2 V.
Internal : at least ± 8 div. External:
External Triggering Input - Input Impedance: 1 MO within
2% paralleled by ",47 pF. Maximum Input Voltage: 3S0 V (de
+ peak ac); 350 V p-p ac at 1 kHz or less.
Auto Mode - Sweep free-runs in the absence of a triggering
signal. TRIGGER LEVEL range is reduced to approximately the
p-p range of the triggering signal.
Single Sweep - Triggering requirements same as for normal
sweep. When triggered, sweep generator produces one sweep
only. AUTO pushbutton must be in the OUT position for operation and for setting triggering controls.
CRT
Phosphor Deflection -
P31 .
Electrostatic.
Acceleration Potential- ", 12 kV.
Graticule lines.
Scale, 8 x 10 div with 0.25 in/div internal graticule
ENVIRONMENTAL CAPABILITIES
Temperature - Operating: O'C to + 45'C (to + 50'C in
mainframes equipped with fan) . Nonoperating:- 5S'C to
+ 75'C .
Altitude - Operating: Sea level to 4500 m (15,000 It). Nonoperating: Sea level to 15 200 m (SO,OOO It).
Order SC 502 15 MHz Oscilloscope .. $2,210
RECOMMENDED PROBES
P6101 IX, P6108 lOX, P6062B IX or lOX. See pages 438,
441 .
Compatible accessories begin on page 410.
387
MULTIFUNCTION INTERFACE
TEK PROGRAMMABLE
MI5010
Programmable Multifunction Interface
The MI 5010 complies with IEEE Standard 4881978, and with Tektronix Standard Codes and
Formats.
Customer Configured
Automatic Self-Test
Triggered Externally or on Command
Built in Real-Time Clock
Mnemonic Instructions
Instruction Buffer for Unattended Operation
UL 1244 Listed
The MI 5010 Programmable Multifunction Interface is a two-wide, TM 5000 Series plug-in capable of accepting a total of three function cards.
388
The MI 5010, with appropriate function cards installed, is a GPIB compatible system capable of:
- Producing , on command from a GPIB controller, either analog or digital output signals to control the events or conditions in an external
system.
- Receiving, on request from a GPIB controller,
input signals (analog or digital) from external
sensor pOints that represent events or conditions
in an external system.
The MI 5010 has its own intelligence and a built
in buffer capable of storing from 80 to 300 commands (depending on command length). The
buffered commands are sequenced in order and
can be paced with a time-of-day clock, built-in
wait timer, external trigger or software trigger
from the system controller.
One, two, or three function cards plug into the
front of the MI 5010 and communicate with a
microprocessor control card in the MI 5010 via
the backplane connectors of the MI 5010.
Each function card in the MI 5010 or MX 5010
Multifunction Interface Extender contains its own
ROM with the specific firmware required for that
function . Each function can be programmed with
its own, unique set of software commands.
Order MI 5010 Multifunction Interface .. $1,550
MX 5010
Multifunction Interface Extender
The Multifunction Interface Extender is a twowide, TM 5000 plug-in which, when used, mechanically attaches to the MI 5010 and provides
the capability of accepting three extra function
cards into the system. The multifunction interface extender is electrically identical to the
MI5010 with the microprocessor control card removed. The combination of the MI 5010 and the
MX 5010 allows a total of six function cards to
be controlled by the microprocessor control card
in the MI5010 via commands from the GPIB.
Digital control signals between the MX 5010 and
the MI 5010 are connected via a flat ribbon cable
at the backplane connector.
Order MX 5010 Interface Extender ......••. $650
TEK
MIN
GENERAL PURPOSE
INSTRUMENTS
50M30
50M40
Programmable Digital Input/Output Card
Programmable Relay Scanner Card
Programmable D/A Converter
16 Digital Input and 16 Digital Output Lines
16 Mercury Wetted Relay Contacts
12-Bit Resolution
Data Entry/Output Formats in Decimal,
Binary, or Hex
User Configurable
1
1 of 16
2
1 of 8
4
1 or 4
50M20
Voltage or Current Mode
Triggered Externally or on Command
20
!LS
(maximum) Conversion Time
Mnemonic Instructions
Triggered Externally or on Command
Self-Test and Error Indicator
Mnemonic Instructions
250 V RMS Isolation
Mnemonic Instructions
UL 1244 Listed
Self-Test and Error Indicators
Self-Test and Error Indicators
UL 1244 Listed
The Programmable Digital-to-Analog converter is
a function card used in either the MI5010 or
MX 5010. The 5OM20 contains its own ROM with
the specific firmware required for the card, and
is programmed with its own set of software
commands.
The 5OM20 converts digital data to either analog
voltage or current. The voltage or current mode
is selectable manually via an on-board switch.
Data format is 12 bits, sent in two sequential 7bit words. Data may be sent via the IEEE Standard 488 (GPIB) using the MI 5010 as the interface , or from an external (front connector) bus
for high speed data transfer (with appropriate
handshake lines). On-board firmware will convert
commands and data to the proper format to perform the required digital-to-analog conversion .
Two lines at the front panel connector are provided to handshake data into the 5OM20 from
the user's external system .
Programming of the 5OM20 is via the IEEE-488
(GPIB) bus . System commands sent to the
MI5010 microprocessor, along with specialized
programming commands unique to the 5OM20,
control the source and the format of the digital
data. The 5OM20 may be programmed to respond to either external or internal system
triggers.
50M20 CHARACTERISTICS
Voltage Mode
Range - - 10.240 V to +10.235 V.
Accuracy - ± 10.0 mV (20 to 30·C) ± 15 mV (0 to 50· C).
Resolution (I LSB) - 5 mV.
Total Converalon Time (Maximum) - 20 ~s .
Output Ripple and Noise - < 5 mV, pop, at 5 MHz BW.
Output Current Range - 0 to ± 5 mAo
Current Mode
Range - -20.48 mA to +20.47 mAo
Accuracy - ±20 ~A (20 to 30·C) ±40 ~A (0 to 50· C).
Resolution (1 LSB) - 10 ~A.
Total Conversion Time (Maximum) - 20 ~S.
Output Ripple and Noise - < 15 ~A , pop, at 5 MHz BW.
Compliance Voltage - ± 11 V.
Isolation - 250 V RMS maximum to ground.
Order 50M20 Digital-to-Analog Converter
Card " .• " .• ,',.,',." .•• ,................... ,.............. $800
UL 1244 Listed
The Programmable Digital Input/Output Card is a
function card used in either the MI 5010 or the
MX SOlO. The 5OM30 contains its own ROM with
the firmware specified for the card, and is programmed with its own set of software
commands.
The 5OM30 provides 16 digital input and 16 digital
output lines. The digital inputs accept data from
pushbuttons, switches, contact closures, and
most digital devices capable of supplying TIL
output levels. The digital outputs provide TIL levels to control various types of test and measurement instruments, relays, indicators, etc. The digital outputs can be configured for open-collector
outputs by positioning internal jumpers and using
power supplied by the user.
Programming of the 5OM30 is via the IEEE-488
(GPIB) bus . System commands sent to the
MlS010 Microprocessor, along with specialized
programming commands unique to the 5OM30,
control the selection of the data input/output
channels and the arming/trigger functions of the
card.
Four lines at the front panel connector operate as
input/output pairs to handshake data with the user's external system. One handshake pair allows
the user's data source to be synchronized with
the SOM30 data input register and the other handshake pair allows the user's data storage device
to be synchronized with the 5OM30 data output
register.
50M30 CHARACTERISTICS
Data Outputs Using Internal Supply - 16 open-rollector TTL
with 2 kO pullup resistors . Logical '1' ; +5 V ± 2% (open circuit). Source current - 2.5 mA ±7% maximum. Logical '0' ;
0.2 V. Sink current - 40 mA maximum.
Data Outputs USing External (User) Supply - Maximum
Voltage; +15 V. Pull-up Resistors ; 2 kfl. Logical '1 ' Equal to
external supply voltage (open circuit). Source current 7.5 rnA ± 5% plus external supply tolerance. Logical '0' ;
0.2 V. Sink current 40 mA maximum.
Data Inputs - Input Buffers; 16 Schmitt triggers. Logical '1'
(+V threshold); +1.6 V ±25%. Source current - - 0.14 mA
nominal, -0.16 mA maximum. Logical '0' (-V threshold);
+0.8 V ± 40%. Source current - -0.18 mA nominal,
- 0.21 mA maximum.
Order 50M30 Digital Input/Output Card
$425
The Programmable Relay Scanner Card is a function card used in either the MI 5010 or MX 5010.
The SOM40 contains its own ROM with the
firmware specified for the card, and is programmed with its own set of software
commands.
The 5OM40 provides 16 independent, normallyopen relay contacts. The relay contacts may be
used as switch closures to supply power to several external pOints from one source, or scan several sources and supply various inputs to a single
measurement device.
The desired relay switch pattern is configured by
the user with internal jumpers. When the configuration has been established, the relay scanning
sequence, open and close operations, and triggering events are programmed over the IEEE-488
GPIB bus.
Two logic signal lines on the front panel connector are provided for externally controlling the
SOM40-one as an output (READY) to indicate to
the user when the relays have settled, and the
other as an input (EXT TRIG) to tell the MI5010
Microprocessor that the user is ready for the relay
switch configuration to close. Three possible configurations are:
4 groups of 4 individual relays
2 groups of 8 individual relays
1 group of 16 individual relays
Scanning sequence and relay closure is accomplished under program control. Two logic signal
lines on the front panel connector are provided
for externally controlling the 5OM40--one as an
output (Ready) to indicate to the user when the
relays have settled, and the other as an input (Ext
Trig) to tell the MI 5010 Microprocessor that the
user is ready for the relay switch configuration to
close.
50M40 CHARACTERISTICS
Type of Relays -
Mercury wetted reed.
Possible Configurations (Jumper Selectable) - 1 of 4, 4
each. 1 of 8, 2 each.1 of 16, 1 each. 1 of 12 and 1 of 4, 1 each.
Pull In Time; 3 ms, nominal. 30 V connected to oornmon port
through 30 kO. Release Time; 3 ms, nominal. Sequence
through all relays . Contact Resistance; 0.5 0 nominal (end of
life).Peak Applied Voltage ; 40 V, maximum. Peak Contact Current; 1A, maximum. Breakdown Voltage; 100 V de plus peak
ac. Frequency Range; Dc to 1 MHz.
Order 50M40 Relay Scanner Card ........ $600
389
PROGRAMMABLE
TEK SCANNER
50M70
Programmable Development Card
GENERAL PURPOSE
INSTRUMENTS
SI5010
If SCANNlR
32 Data 1/0 Ports
Interrupt and Trigger Lines
Vector Board Development Region
. .NlUnD
•
•
tltllOIl
Mnemonic Instructions
Self-Test and Error Indicator
UL 1244 Listed
IU TIUI
The Programmable Development Card is a function card used in either the MI 5010 or the
MX 5010. The 5OM70 contains its own ROM with
the firmware necessary for IEEE Standard 488
operation of a user's specialized circuit.
The 50M70 contains two interface logic registers,
address and data buffers, a breadboard area for
user development, and (as previously mentioned)
its own firmware .
Possible applications are:
- Specialized DAC/ ADC functions
- Timing functions
- Special communication interface functions
- Keyboard/Display functions , etc.
Special features of the 50M70 include:
- Programmable data direction registers
(input/output)
- Programmable trigger conditions
- Programmable data transfer, register
configuration, status, and interrupts
- Front panel edge connector configured
by the user
50M70 CHARACTERISTICS
I/O through I/O 7 - Open-circuit voltage on Pins 1 through 8
on J1200, J1202 , J1210, and J1214. Output High Level ;
+ 2.4 V minimum, + 5.5 V maximum. Output Low Level; 0 V
minimum, + 0.4 V maximum. Load current - 1.6 mA nominal.
Maximum Load (Sink) Current (Any Output); 3.2 mA at 0.4 V
dc. Input Low Current ; 1.3 mA nominal, 2.4 mA maximum. Vin
= 0.4 V dc. User Ground Points ; Analog Ground ; TP1201 ,
TP1202 . Digital Ground ; TPI2" , TP1212.
Active Indicator Voltage - Output High Level; +2.4 V minimum, + 5.5 V maximum. J1216, Pin 1 pulsed for 20 ms or
greater.
Ready Lines - Pin lOon J1200 and J121 O. Output High Level ; + 2.4 V minimum, + 5.5 V maximum. 14 = - 200 ~A . Output Low Level ; 0 V minimum , 0.4 V maximum . IL - 3.2 mA
maximum.
Trig Lines - Inputs on Pin 9 of J1200, J1202, J1210, and
J1214 ; Input leakage current = 1.0 ~A minimum, 2.5 ~A maximum. Minimum Hold Time; 3 ~s .
Accept/Error Lines - Pin 10 of J1214 and Pin 10 of J1202.
Output High Level ; + 4.5 V minimum, + 5.5 V maximum . IL 10 ~A . Output Low Level; 0 V minimum, + 0.4 maximum. IL =
3.2 rnA maximum.
Error Line States -
High during self-test, goes low if no error.
J1201 , Pin 1; + 26V dc, ± 9%. 100mA maximum. J1201,
Pin 2; - 26V dc, ± 9%. 100mA maximum. J1212, Pinl ;
+ 8 V dc, ± 5%. 600 mA maximum. J1212 , Pin 2; + 5 V dc,
± 5%. 1.5 A maximum.
Total Combined Power Limit -
Not to exceed 7.5 W.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Function Card Extender Cable (015-0430-00).
Order 50M70 Development Card ....••.... $350
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Function Card Extender Cable Order 015-0430-00 .......... $50
390
•
. '
...,""""
Programmable Scanner
515010
The SI 501 0 complies with IEEE Standard 488·
1978, and with Tektronix Standard Codes and
Formats.
Software Configured
Mnemonic Instructions
Triggered Externally or on Command
Built in Real-Time Clock
Instruction Buffer for Unattended Operation
350 MHz Bandwidth (1 ns Risetime)
UL 1244 Listed
The SI5010 Scanner is a two-wide, TM 5000 plugin capable of scanning and switching 16 different
signal channels, or a combination of signal channels, under program control. Optimum frequency
response is 350 MHz.
Of the 20 front panel BNC connectors used for
channel switching, 16 are connected internally to
16 R.F. reed relays and four are connected to
common points. The common points act as output connectors to an external system. The 16 reo
lays can be programmed to connect to the common points in various combinations . Three
possible combinations are:
4 groups of 4 channels
2 groups of 8 channels
1 group of 16 channels
For scanning, channel grouping is always done in
groups of four with each individual channel exhib·
iting a characteristic impedance of 50 ohms and
providing minimum signal degradation when con·
figured for one or more groups of four individual
channels. Channel risetime for groups of four
channels is approximately 1 ns and degrades to
about 4.0 ns for 1 group of 16.
Under program control it is possible to build a
matrix using any or all 16 input channels while
leaving the normal output channels disconnected.
The possible number of combinations precludes
characterization, and it is recommended that any
such matrix established be characterized if degradation of signal quality is a consideration.
The SI 5010 has its own intelligence and a built in
buffer capable of storing from 80 to 300 commands (depending on command length). The
buffered commands are sequenced in order and
can be paced with a built·in real time clock, built·
in wait timer, external trigger or software trigger
from the system controller.
SI 5010 CHARACTERISTICS
RF Connectors - Twenty BNC connectors, 16 channels and
four commons.
Control Input (Ext Trig) - Extemal Trigger; TIL compatible
Control Output Data Accepted (READY) - TIL compatible.
Output goes high when relays have settled.
Channel Configuration (Software Selectable) - " 2, 3, or 4
groups of 4 channels. 2 groups of 8 channels. 1 group of 16
channels.
Frequency Response - Any 1 group of 4; - 3 dB at
350 MHz, decreasing to - 6 dB at 500 MHz or greater. Any 1
group of 8; - 3 dB at 175 MHz or geater. Any 1 group of 16;
- 3 dB at 80 MHz or greater.
Port (Channel) Isolation - 40 dB at 100 MHz.
Characteristic Impedance (Each Channel) - 50 II. See
VSWR specification.
Risetime (Each Channel) - < 1 ns.
Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR) - Any 4 channel
group; 1.25:1 at 100 MHz, increasing to 1.8:1 at 350 MHz. Any
other combination ; 1.5:1 at 100 MHz. 2:1 at 225 MHz.
Insertion LOll - < 1 dB at 100 MHz.
Channel Delay Matching - Any group of 4; 50 piooseconds.
Any group of 8; 110 picoseconds . Group of 16 ; 310
picoseconds.
Type of RelaYI - 16 Form A, EAC 05Y21Al 40 BAB, or
equivalent. 4 Form 'C' , TO-5, Teledyne 712-6, or equivalent.
Pull In Time; 3 milliseconds. Release Time; 3 milliseconds.
Breakdown Voltage; 350 V (de + peak ac). Series Path Resis·
tance (End of Life); 0.5 II.
Peak Carry Voltage - Unterminated ; 40 V maximum. 50 II
terminated; 12.5 V maximum.
Peak Contact Cunent - 0.25 A maximum.
Peak Switching Voltagel - Unterminated ; 15 V maximum.
50 II; 3.73 V Maximum.
Peak Switching Cunent - 0.01 A maximum.
Order SI 5010 Scanner ....................... $1,850
TEK
4041
System Controller
The 4041 complies with IEEE Standard 488-1978
and with Tektronix Standard Codes and
Formats.
Optimized for Instrumentation Control
Modular Design - Rackmount or Portable
Efficient, Easy to use BASIC Language with
Extensions
Expandable Capability Through Memory (to
160 kBytes) and Other Options
The 4041 Controller is a powerful , flexible, expandable IEEE Standard 488 systems controller
designed to work with Tektronix and other vendor's IEEE Standard 488 instruments. While the
basic unit is intended principally for low user-skill
environments such as production line testing, a
SYSTEM
CONTROLLER
variety of options and peripherals to equip the
4041 for full interactive flexibility in research lab
applications Tektronix full line of terminals
(graphics or alphanumeric, storage or raster, and
color) are fully compatible to create an optimum
programmer interface in the more sophisticated
areas. Software features similarly span the range
from the occasional programmer to the sophisticated programming team tackling complex products. The basic 4041 compactness, coupled with
TM 5000 IEEE Standard 488 instruments, permits
very compact system configurations that go into
applications impractical for earlier generations of
systems.
Operator Skill Spectrum
In test and measurement systems applications
the computer skills of the operator typically
range from moderately high to zero. Laboratory
applications are frequently interactive, where the
engineer/programmer/operator are all the same
person. On a production test station, operator
computer skills are often low. Unattended testing
has no operator by definition. The 4041 controller
was designed , with options and peripherals, to
fit these differing needs. The standard 4041 is an
"execute only" controller; it can run only previously developed programs. The operator cannot
tamper with programs, or even list them. The
standard 4041 is non-intimidating, with operator
interaction limited to reading prompts from the
alphanumeric display, inserting a DC 100 tape
casette, and pressing a small number of keys.
Extensive error handling and trapping capabilities can keep the system from "crashing" in almost all situations. Hard copy, perhaps for applications such as failure tags to be attached to a
defective unit under test, can be automatically
generated on the built-in printer. Up to four
ports, two IEEE Standard 488 and two RS-232,
permit networking to host computers, up to 28
IEEE Standard 488 instruments, or even segregation of fast and slow instruments onto two
busses to maximize throughput.
At the sophisticated end of the operator spectrum, an RS-232 CRT terminal attached to a 4041
with program development ROM packs (Option
30) provides a flexible interactive workstation for
the sophisticated programmer. Peripherals such
as printers, plotters, and mass storage add further power. This configuration would be typical in
research labs, or for the test engineer to develop
programs that will then be run by lower-skilled
operators on the production line with executeonly 4041s.
391
SYSTEM
TEK CONTROLLER
Programmer Skill Spectrum
Most test programs are written by ' electronics
types ", not computer science majors. Many test
engineers write programs only occasionally, and
subsequent modifications and maintenance are
frequently done by a second party since ' the guy
who wrote the program doesn't work here
anymore'.
At the other end of the spectrum, however, are
complex requirements demanding a team approach to writing the program and sophisticated
and powerful techniques to maximize memory
utilization and minimize run time.
BASIC is an excellent language for the occasional
programmer, and was chosen for the 4041 . Its
English-like commands, simple syntax, and lineby-line interpreter implementation combine for
friendly , easy use . To improve the selfdocumenting characteristics and thus reduce
maintenance costs, 4041 BASIC is enhanced by
several features. Variable names may be up to
eight characters, allowing the programmer to
select meaningful names like RISETIME, VOLTAGE1, or DELAY. Subprograms and program
lines may be named, with examples such as
SRQHANDLorCALCRMS
Simple BASIC leaves much to be desired for most
sophisticated programmers. 4041 BASIC includes
many enhancements such as FORTRAN-like subprograms. Variable passing from main to subprograms and the ability to declare any variables as
local or global means that a team of programmers
can work quite independently on a massive task,
with the main program ultimately being not much
more than a series of subprogram CALL statements. Other powerful features include optional
data types (short and long floating pOint plus
integer), a COMPRESS command to optimize
memory use, a proceed mode which overlaps I/O
and processing operations for maximum system
speed, logical unit assignment capability, and up
to 160k bytes of memory directly addressable
without overlays or paging techniques.
4041 Architecture
The 4041
controller contains three
microprocessors. The CPU is the powerful 16-bit
68000. Standard memory is 32k bytes (approxi·
mately 19k user-available), with optional32k increments to 160k maximum. A 2O-character alphanu·
meric LED display, 20 character thermal printer,
DC 100 casette drive, 18 function keys, an IEEE
Standard 488 port are standard. A real time clock
and calendar capability are standard on the 4041 .
Option 01 adds a second pair of ports (one IEEE
Standard 488 and one RS-232). The Option 01
IEEE Standard 488 port has Direct Memory Access capability. Other options include an 8-bit
parallel TTL port, (Option 02) the program development ROMs and carrier (Option 30), and a
program development/debug keyboard (Option31). Options 30 and 31 could thus let a test
engineer easily and temporarily convert an installed execute-only 4041 into a debug/edit
mode, make necessary program changes, and
restore it to the tamper-proof condition. Extensive
program development, however, would normally
be accomplished at a programming station consisting of an Option 30 4041 plus a CRT terminal
to permit multi-line viewing of program listings.
392
Option 30 4041 plus a CRT terminal to permit
multi-line viewing of program listings.
The 4041 package is a compact monolithic unit of
identical height and width to the TM 5003 Power
Module. A 4041 and TM 5003 can be easily
fastened together and used on the bench or
rack-mounted as a Single unit, leading to extremely compact system configurations suitable for
crowded benches and racks or use in vans, ships
and aircraft.
Test and measurement Orientation
EEX - Causes the number requested by an INPUT statement
to be entered in scientific notation. Numbers entered alter
pressing the EEX (Enter Exponent) key are considered part 01
the exponent.
PAUSE - Ha"s the program alter executing the ClM'Tentline. "
the current program line is an INPUT statement, the program
stops belore the execution 01 INPUT.
USER·DEFINABLE FUNCTION KEYS
Numeric user-/
350
~,
lI
y
\',
\
\
\
\
'\
J6
~
iii
~
~
c
>-
0
0
,..
500
450
--
\ \\
J6504
J6523
j'J6501
J6503 J6505 \
400
(!)
z
a:
~
600
550
_c c~,..
-- -
--
-
- - - r- ---
-- -
--
-
t--
700
650
---
~a:
800
750
900
850
1000
1100
950
1050
WAVELENGTH-NANOMETERS
(All curve heights adjusted to 100 % for clarity)
408
'\
1\
/
U)
-::? ~ -
,.-
~
U)
W
~~
.... f..-- """""-
60
a:
w >~
> >
~
_\
J6502
J6512
--
--
- T - --:::: - - -
100
TEK
PROBE CHARACTERISTICS
illuminance
Application
J6501
Probe
US
Range
0.001 to 1999
footcandles·t
Irradlance
J6511
0.001 to 1999
footcandles·t
J6502/J6512
0.001 to 1999
microwatts/cm'
Metric 0.Q1 to 19,990 0.Q1 to 19,990 0.01 to 19.990
(Opt. lumens/m'
lumens/m'
milliwatts/m"
02)
(Iux)·t
(lux)
PROBES
Luminance
J6503
Uncorrected
J6523
1 to 1,999,000 1 to 199,900 Relative
candelas/m'
candelas/m' response only
(Nits)'
(Nits)'
0.01 to 19,990
lumens/m'
(Iux)·t
Within 5% of NBS standards
and ± 1 digit in last place.
Calibrated with a 3100 · k
tungsten halogen light source
traceable to NBS
Probe-to-Probe
accuracy ± 5%
with lungsten
light source
Same as
J6501, excepl
calibrated
wilh a 656 nm
filter
UVenhanced
silicon spectral
curve (250 to
1200 nm)
Within 2%
(integrated)
of CI E photopic
curve from
600 10 710 nm
Spectral
Response
Flat within ± 7% Wilin 2% (integrated of CIE
from 450 to
pholopic curve
950 nm
8·
Acceptance
Angle
50"10 sensi·
tivity at 48·
off axis
Stability and
Repeatability
Within 2% per year
Unearity
Within 2% over entire range enabling single point calibration
50% sensitivity
al 48 · off axis
J6505
0.001 to 1999
footcandles·t
Same, except
calibrated with
a 762 nm filler
Cosine
Corrected
(180·)
J6504
0.1 to 199,900 0.1 to 19,990 Relative
footlamberts' footlamberts' response only
Within 5% of NBS standards
Accuracy
(Including J16) and ± 1 digit In last place.
Calibraled with a 3100· k
tungslen halogen light source
traceable 10 NBS
Wilhin 2% (integrated) of CIE
photopic curve
Red LED
1·
50% sensitivity al 48· off axis
ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Ambient Temperature - Nonoperating: - 50·C to + 75·C .
Operating: -1 5·C to +40·C.
Altitude - Nonoperating: to 15 200 m (50,000 It). Operating:
to 4500 m (15,000 It).
For Battery Operated J16 - Battery charger (119·0375·02);
shoulder strap (346·0104·00).
For Ac Operated J16 (Option. 03 or 04) - Ac power pack
(119·0404·00 or 119·0404·01) shoulder slrap (346·0104·00).
Humidity - Operating and storage, 5 cycles (120 hour) to 95%
relative humidity at 40·C. Referenced to MIL·E·16400F.
Vibration - Operating, 15 minutes along each of the 3 major
axes at a total displacement of 0.025 in pop (4 g 's) from 10 to
55 to 10 Hz in 1 minute cycles. Hold for 3 minutes at 55 Hz. All
major resonances must be above 55 Hz.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
WITH PROBE AND BATTERY PACK INSTALLED
Weight. _
Net
Domestic Shipping
Export·packed
123
60
203
kg
1.5
2.3
4.5
J8504 Uncorrected Probe ............................................... $515
J8505 LED Probe, includes LED adaptor ....................... $610
J8511 Illuminance Probe cosine corrected ..................... $540
J8512 Irradiance Probe ................................................... $545
J8523 1· Luminance Probe ......................................... $1,575
Actual Spectral Curve of any probe is available on initial order
at additional cost.
Order Option 05 ............................................................. + $90
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
42 In Probe Extender Cable Connects J16 and probe.
Order 012·0414-02 .......................................................... $104
Spare Battery Pack Order 016-0539-01 ........................ $137
Cable. up to 30 It In Length Available on special order.
Analog and BCD Output Available on special order.
'I.
to 199.9 candelas when used with 014·0047·00 LED adaptor or at 3.8 inches source-to-sensor spacing. Luminous intensity
readings of higher intensity light sources may be easily made at correspondingly greater distances using the formula: Footcandles x
d'-candelas where d is the distance from the source to the sensor in feet. (For metric readings use lux x d 2 =ccsndelas where dis
distance from the source to the sensor In meters.)
Width
Height
Depth
J8503 8· Luminance Probe ............................................ $545
Filter Holder Mounts one·inch diameter filters. of up to
inch
thickness, to probes (except J6511. J6512, J6514, J6523).
Order 016·0527·00 ............................................................ $23
to.OOOOl
mm
J8502 Irradiance Probe ................................................... $545
Light Occluder For TV color monitor balancing.
Order 016·0305·00 ............................................................ $22
• An lHiditional decade of sensitivity is included and is usable if the J16 is carefully zeroed and used at a relatively stabie temperature.
DI....n.lon.
J6501 Illuminance Probe ................................................. $545
ORDERING INFORMATION
J16 Photometer/Radiometer
(without Probes) .................................. $1,180
Option 01 -
230 V ac, 50 Hz Battery Charger ............... HC
Option 02 -
Probe for Metric Readout ............................ HC
Option 03 -115 V ac, 60 Hz .......................................... HC
In
Option 04 -
4.6
2.4
8.0
tFor a J16 with metric readout , specify Option 02 in addition to
above ordering information. No additional charge. Option 02
probes are required for Option 02 J16·s.
Ib
J16·TV Package - For TV color monitor set·up. The package
includes J16 Battery.Operated Photometer, J6502 Irradiance
Probe, Ught Occluder, Probe Extension Cable.
3.3
5 ..0
10.0
LED Adaptor Included with J6505 .
Order 014·0047·00 ............................................................ $83
Ac Power Supply Allows J16 to be used without batteries.
Order 119·0404·00 115 V ac, 60 Hz .............................. $205
Order 119· 0404-01 230 V ac, 50 Hz .............................. $220
When ordering a battery pack for your ac·powered J16, also
order one of the following chargers.
Battery Charger 115 V ac, 60 Hz.
Order 119·0375·02 ............................................................ $50
Battery Charger 230 V ac, 50 Hz.
Order 119·0375·03 ............................................................ $50
Within the basic limitations of the silicon sensors
and the J16 design, a number of modifications
are possible. Contact your local Tektronix Sales
Office or Representative regarding special appli·
cation requirements.
Please use the return card to request data sheet and applica·
tion notes describing the use of the J16.
230 V ac, 50 Hz .......................................... HC
Order J18·TV for 115 V ac, 60 Hz Battery Charger ... $1,770
'Refer to Readout Units of Probe Characteristics chart.
Order J18·TV Option 01 For 230 V ac,
50 Hz battery charger .................................................. $1,770
409
TEK
ACCESSORIES
CONTENTS
Cameras & Adaptors ...................................
Isolation Accessories ..
.. .. ....
Carts ........................
.. .........................
Probes .................................
Probe Accessories ....................
.. ......
Adaptors and Connectors
.......
Mounting Accessories
.......
Viewing Accessories ... ................
...
411
420
424
428
442
444
446
447
For accessory products, you can order direct by calling 800-426·2200 extension 99. In Oregon call collect (503) 627-9000 extension 99.
410
CAMERA
REFERENCE
TEK
Choosing a
Tektronix
Camera ...
Magnification
Modern optical technology has made possible
wide-aperture, wide-angle, flat-field lenses with
short focal length for more compact cameras. To
realize their inherent low distortion, high resolution, and ur.iform focus , these fixed focal length
lenses must be used at their design center
magnification.
an overview of
Tektronix Camera
Families
Operating such lenses at a different magnification tends to compromise their important performance characteristics. For this reason , most
Tektronix cameras are designed for use at one
lens magnification. One exception is the C-30B
Camera which has a magnification range of 0.7 to
1.5 (at some increase in distortion at the magnification extremes) to accommodate several portable oscilloscopes that have displays ranging in
size from 3.8 x 6.3 cm to 8 x 10 cm.
A camera can be a key part of your measurement
system. It allows you to capture single events and
document your results , and it helps you communicate your results with clarity and credibility. The
following pages give information to help you
select a camera well suited to your needs.
MOUNTING
The table on page 413 indicates the camera
adaptors required for most Tektronix Instruments
and a few by other manufacturers. In some
cases, adaptors are available from HewlettPackard or others to mount Tektronix cameras to
their instruments.
POWER
The C-51 and C-53 electric shutters require + 15
volts, normally supplied by a 7000 Series oscilloscope. An optional battery pack is available for
situations where one of these cameras is used on
a non-7000 Series instrument. These shutters can
be actuated by a switch closure to ground . The
C-28 Camera requires + 15 volts at 7SO mA for
operation. The shutter may be actuated with
either a switch closure or TIL logic.
GRATICULE LIGHTING
Some oscilloscopes do not have illuminated graticules. An image of the graticule may be obtained
by using the flash on the C-5C Camera or storage
background (flood guns).
LENSES
Tektronix camera lenses differ mainly in light
gathering ability, magnification, and field of view.
Speed
The f-number of a lens inversely signifies its
aperture area and light gathering ability. For
example: the aperture area of an f/1.4 lens is four
times that of an f/2.8 lens of the same magnification and gathers four times the light. The relative
light gathering ability of all lenses used in
Tektronix cameras is referenced to the 111 .9, 0.85
magnification lens which is arbitrarily rated at 1.0.
For recording a stored or stable recurrent CRT
display, a lens as slow as the f/16 type used in
the C-5C Camera is adequate. However, to
record a fast, dim, single-sweep trace, you may
need a lens as fast as the f/1.2 types used in the
C-31 B and C-51 Cameras.
VIEWING
Except for the C-30 Series, all Tektronix cameras
have a viewing port which provides a binocular
view of the CRT. All Tektronix cameras, except
the C-5C, are hinge mounted and can be swung
aside to allow a wide-angle view of the CRT. The
light-weight C-5C can easily be slipped off the
CRT bezel to view the CRT. The C-28 and C-SO
Series cameras have an off-axis viewing hood
that accommodates eyeglasses for a comfortable
binocular view of the CRT display while excluding
ambient light.
FILMS
The three types of backs used on Tektronix
cameras accommodate most of the films that are
used for CRT trace recording . These include
sheet films, roll films , and pack films .
Polaroid films are the most convenient to use.
They offer the advantages of development in
seconds to a finished dry print with wide spectral
response, good resolution , and high sensitivity.
ASA ratings do not necessarily give a true indication of how a film will respond in CRT recording
due to the narrow spectral output range of most
phosphors and different spectral sensitivity of
various film types.
The rated magnification of a lens signifies its
image-to-object ratio. Note in the table below that
only an image-to-object ratio of less than 7:1 can
record the trace of a 6 '/2 inch CRT.
For maximum resolution , the lens should produce
the largest complete image possible within the
image area of the film . The film most widely used
for oscilloscope trace recording is Polaroid Type
107 pack film which has an image area of
73 x 95 mm. In most cases, the magnification is
selected to provide the largest possible complete
image of a particular display. An exception is in
high writing speed applications where a 0.5 magnification lens is usually used to achieve higher
writing speed by concentrating the trace light in a
smaller area of the film .
Many different types of Polaroid film are available
in rolls, packs, and 4 x 5 inch single-sheet packets. The types most used in oscilloscope and
monitor photography are types 107, 612, 47, 57,
084 and 667. Wet process film can be used with
4 x 5 Graflok with adaptors page 417.
Technical assistance with Polaroid film and back
questions or problems is available directly from
The Polaroid Corporation. Call (800) 225-1618
toll free within U.S.
SHUTTERS
Of the two available types of sutters, mechanical
shutters are simple to operate and are economical. They are actuated by pressure on a release
mechanism. Electrical shutters permit remote ,
automatic, or manual release and offer higher
reliability. They may be actuated by an insulated
switch closure.
Screen Size
Polaroid pack
and roll film
4x5
sheet film
6 x 7 cm format
roll film (70 mm,
120, 220, etc.)
Manufacture of Polaroid 410 ROLL film , ASA 10,000, has been
discontinued. Polaroid 612 PACK film, ASA 20,000, is now
available for most high speed applications.
BLACK BODY COLOR STANDARD
All Tektronix cameras are supplied with a standard black body finish .
MAXIMUM MAGNIFICATION TO RECORD ENTIRE SCREEN
5 x 6.3 cm
7.2 x 9 cm
8 x 10 cm
9.76 x 12.2 cm
1.0
1.0
0.85
0.67
1.0
1.0
1.0
0.85 or less
1.0
0.67
0.67
not recommended
Field of View
The description for each camera includes a statement of its field of view; this signifies how large a
CRT display the camera can fully record . It is
determined by the combined effects of the magnification and angular field of view of the lens, any
field-limiting apertures in the camera adaptor,
camera body, film holder, and the image area of
the film .
411
REFERENCE
TEK CAMERA
PHOTOGRAPHIC WRITING SPEED
Photographic writing speed signifies the ability of
a particular oscilloscopefcamera system to provide a useful photographic record of a fast singlesweep trace. It is stated as an oscilloscope
performance characteristic and is expressed in
cmfj.lS or cmfns. It is designed to answer the
question, ' What is the speed of the fastest singlesweep trace the system can record?" All statements of writing speed must specify the measurement conditions, including the CRT phosphor
and film used, and the definition of a readable
trace image.
Increasing Writing Speed
Film fogging is a technique for increasing the
maximum sensitivity of photographic film by giving it a short exposure to dim, diffuse light. The
Tektronix Writing Speed Enhancer is designed to
fill this need.
Polaroid Type 107, 3000 speed pack film was exposed to the
single-trace display of a pulse waveform with a fast rising
leading edge too dim to produce a developable image.
The Enhancer installs in minutes, and can be
triggered in three ways; by a pushbutton on the
control box; remotely, with a switch closure to
ground (such as provided by the camera-shutter
x-sync switch); or by the oscilloscope-sweep +
gate.
Film from the same pack was exposed to the same single-trace
waveform and Simultaneously to light from a Writing Speed
Enhancer. The Enhancer light supplied the additional photons
needed at the weak film development centers formed by the
dim leading edge, to produce a visible image of the entire
waveform.
POLAROID FILM
ASA
Equivalent
Type
Speed
Thus, the film can be fogged before, after, or
while the sweep occurs. The techniques are
respectively called prefogging, postfogging, and
simultaneous fogging . Of these modes, simultaneous fogging provides the greatest gain in
writing speed. Automatic, simultaneous fogging is
easily achieved by triggering the Enhancer with
the oscilloscope-sweep + gate.
RELATIVE FILM WRITING SPEED
Unfogged
667
107
084
47
612"
3,000
20,000
Fogged
1
(Reference)
3
>2
""2
, Polaroid 612 PACK film , ASA 20,000, IS now available WIth faster wnllng rate than prevIOus 410. ROLL Mm. Wntlng rate
specifications are not complete at this time.
--
The more commonly used films for each type of camera back are listed below_
POLAROID FILMS
CRT Recording Uses
Development
ASA
Equivalent
Speed
Time
(Seconds
at 7S'F)
611"1
200
45
Positive Print
20
612"'
20,000
30
Positive Print
20 to 25
75
30
Positive Print
Negative
160 to 180
Film
Type
Format
Resolution
(Line Pairs/mm)
PACK FILMS
665
Characteristics
-
Repetitive
I
I
Stored
TV Type
(Gray
Scale)
I
Scintillation Type
Medical
X
X
X
3000
15
Positive Print
20
Medium Contrast
X
X
15
Positive Print
16
Medium Contrast
X
X
X
X
667"1 ,"'
3000
30
Positive Print
16
Medium Contrast
X
X
X
X
3000
15
Positive Print
20 to 22
Medium Contrast
X
X
800
130
Positive Trans
35 to 40
Medium Contrast
X
X
146L
200"3
100
30
Positive Trans
40 to 50
High Contrast, Blue Sensitive
X
20
Positive Print
Negative
22 to 25
160
SHEET FILMS
50
Positive Print
15
3000
~ No coating reqUIred.
., Preferred for oscilloscope photography.
., Daylight rating.
57
412
X
Actual image size 7 3 x 9 5 cm (2'1. x 3'1. in) (46L and 146L are 62 x 83 cm)
46L
55
55 PI N
Single
Sweep
X
Medium Contrast, wide gray scale
3000
47
I
X
High Contrast
107
-
Graphics
AlphaNumeric
Actual image size 7 3 cm x 9 S cm (2'1. x 3'1. in)
Low Contrast, wide gray scale
084-'
ROLL FILM
I
20
-
X
X
X
Actual image size 8 9 x 11 4 cm (4 x 5 in)
Medium Contrast , wide gray scale
X
X
Medium Contrast
X
X
X
A limited quantity of ROLL film camera backs is available for customers who wish to use roll films listed
Tektronix Representative for information.
X
X
aoove. Contact your
RECOMMENDED
CAMERAS AND ADAPTORS
TEK
SELECTION GUIDE FOR CAMERAS AND MOUNTING ADAPTORS
RECOMMENDED CAMERAS
HIGH
WRITING
RATE
OSCILLOSCOPE
OR
DISPLAY DEVICE
5000 Series
5100 Series Nonstore*' *2*3 includes;
5110, 5112, 010, 012, 577101
5100 Series Storage*'*2*' includes;
5111 , 5111A, 5113, 5115
011 , 013, 015, 5577102
5400 Series Nonstore* '*2 includes;
5403/040, 5440, 5444, 040
5400 Series Storage*2*. includes;
5403/041 , 5441 , 041
C-51
5233*'
7000 Series
8 x 10 cm Display includes;
71 04, 7503, 7504, 7514, 7603N
7613, 7623, 7633, 7704, 7834
7844, 7854, 7903R, 7904, T922R*2
Large Screen Display includes;*'
7403, 7603
C-51
- 1-
C-5C
C-51, C-53
C-59, C-28,
C-27
C-30
C-31
C-5C
016-0357-01
016-0249-04
Not Recommended
C-59A
C-5C
016-0357-01
016-0249-04
Not Recommended
C-59A
C-5C
016-0357-01
016-0249-04
Not Recommended
C-53
C-59A
C-5C
016-0357-01
016-0249-04
C-5C
016-0357-01
016-0249-04
016-0248-01
Not Recommended
C-53
C-5C Opt 01
016-0357-01
016-0249-04
016-0248-01
016-0357-01
016-0249-04
Not Recommended
016-0357-01
016-0249-04
016-0248-01
GENERAL
PURPOSE
LOW
COST
C-59A
--
- I-
C-59A
Display Monitors
8 x 10 cm*2*3 includes;
601 , 602, 605, 606, 607
Large Screen 10 x 12 cm includes;*'
603, 604, 608, 620, 624, 634
---
1-
Older 5 Inch Round*2
502, 503, 504, 515, 516, 519, 530&
540 Series, 550 Series, 580 Series, 575
C-51
ADAPTOR PART NUMBERS*lO
C-28
-~
C-5C
1-
-
C-5C
-
C-28
C-5C
016-0357-01
016-0249-04
Not Recommended
C-53
C-59A
No adaptor
016-0225-04
016-0243-00
C-53
C-59A
No adaptor
016-0224-01
016-0244-00
No Adaptor
No adaptor
No adaptor
016-0357 -01
No adaptor
No Adaptor
016-0295-01
016-0342-00*9
016-0249-04
016-0224-01
016-0327-01
No adaptor
No adaptor
016-0248-01
016-0244'00
No adaptor
No adaptor
016-0306-01
C·5C Opt 02
016-0359-01
No adaptor
016-0269-03
C-5COpt04
016-0359-01
No adaptor
016-0269-03
No adaptor
No adaptor
016-0327-01
No adaptor
No adaptor
016-0327-01
C-5C
No adaptor
016-0357-01
No adaptor
016-0249-04
016-0306-01
016-0248-01
C-5C Opt 03
No adaptor
016-0358-01
016-0288-01
No adaptor
No adaptor
No adaptor
Older 5 Inch Rectangular
560 Series includes;*2 561 , 564, 567,
5681
TV Products
380, 381
520, 521 , 522A* '*2
1480*2
528A*2, 1420*'*2
529* '
_.
--
C-308
C-59A
C-53
C-59A
C-53
-
Portables*s
Older with 0.8 cm Graticule includes;
422, 453, 454, 485, 491
C-31
C-30 Std
Newer with 1 cm Graticule includes;' 7
455, 464, 465, 466, 468, 475
C-31 Opt 01
C-30 Opt 01
432, 434, 442,
1 cm nonilluminate graticule 2213, 2215
'14 In Graticule includes;
305, 314, 326, 335, 1502
C-30
,- - - TM 500 includes;
SC 502, SC 503, SC 504
C-30
Spectrum Analyzers
491 *S
492, 496'2
Others' 6
576, 5030, 5031
T900 includes; T912, T921 , T922, T932,
T932, T935 (not included; T922R see
7000 Series) 308, 2300 Series*s
.-
I
--
C-30/C-31
C-59A
Only C-59A
" Only cameras with < 0,7 magnification can record the entire screen area of a lOx 12 em
display,
These scopes do not have camera power, The C-51 and C-53 may be used only if powered with
016-0270-02 battery peck,
' 3 These scopes do not have illuminated graticules wlo mod.
" Though these scopes do not have illuminated graticules the graticule may be photographed
usIng storage flood guns,
' 5 Due to physical configuration the C-50 Family cannot be mounted,
" Adaptors for HP and other scope manufacturers are available from those manufacturers.
'2
C-59A
C-5C
1
J
" A corrector lens is required to increase cameras field of view so that the full 8 x 10 cm CRT
display area can be recorded. The camera should be chanQed from standard to Option 01 , to do
this order 016-0301-01 for the standard C-30 or 016-0269-04 for the standard C-31 . These
adaptors include the adaptor and corrector lens.
'S These scopes have no camera bezel, therefore a camera cannot be mounted. A hand held C-5C
can obtain a record.
'. The C-59A may be used with 016-0224-01, however the image size is reduced.
". See pege 414 for mounting adaptor pricing.
413
COMPARISONS
TEK CAMERA
OSCILLOSCOPE CAMERA COMPARISON CHART
Camera
Features
C-S1
C-S9A
C-S3
Adjustable film
& shutter speed
Adjustable film
& shutter speed
Adjustable film
& shutter speed
Built-in viewer
Built-in viewer
Built-in viewer
Single sweep
mode
Single sweep
mode
General purpose
camera for CRTs
up to 6 '/2 inch
Remote control
Remote control
Fastest writing
speed
General purpose
camera for 7000
Series scopes
C-30B
Variable magnification for 400
Series scopes,
adaptable to
8 x 10 cm CRT
or smaller
C-31B
Maximum writing
speed for 400
Series scopes,
adaptable to
8 x 10 cm CRT
or smaller
Low cost
C-28
For XV, XT, gray
scale photos,
precision accuracy
for 600 Series
monitors
C-SC
Low cost
General purpose
Graticule
illuminator
Variable magnification
Viewing door
Power supply
required
Variable magnification
OEM Applications
OEM Applications
Lens speed
f/1.2
f/1.9
f/2.8
f/1.9
f/1.3
f/2.8
f/16
Magnification
0.5
0.85
0.67
Variable : 0.7 to 1.5
0.5
0.67 or 0.85
0.67 or 0.85
Relative light
gathering
ability
3.0
1.0
0.65
1.0
2.7
0.65 or 0.5
0.02
8 x 10 wl Opt 01
7 x 9 cm std
10.2x 12.7 cm
or
8 x 10 cm
9.8 x 12.2 cm
or
8 x 10 cm
Field of view
10.2 x 12.7 cm
with Polaroid
pack
8x10 cm with Polaroid pack
Shutter
Electrical, 1/60 to 4 s (bulb, time ,
Mechanical,
single sweep), remote shutter actua- 1/50 to 1 s (bulb
and time) X-sync
tion , X-sync, scope + gate
Film backs
Polaroid pack or Polaroid pack or
Graflok back
Graflok back
Options
Optional
Accessories
Adaptor framel
corrector lens for
CRT to 6'/2 inch,
reduces magnification to 0.5
(for 576 & 5030)
Mounting adaptors, battery pack (for C-51 , C-53), writing
speed enhancer (one for each model). Polaroid pack
film back. Graflok 4 x 5 inch back and adaptors. X-sync
connector, carrying case
CAMERA MOUNTING ADAPTOR
PART NUMBERS AND PRICES
016-0217-00
016-0223-01
016-0224-01
016-0225-04
016-0226-01
016-0228-01
016-0243-00
016-0244-00
016-0248-01
016-0249-04 -1
016-0263-00
Polaroid pack or
Graflok back
$72
$60
$58
$58
$72
$95
$72
$72
$80
$83
$72
016-0269-03
016-0269-04"
016-0295-01
016-0299-00
016-0301 -01"
016-0306-01"
016-0327-01
016-0342-00
016-0357-01"
016-0358-01"
016-0359-01'7
Mechanical, 1/125 to 1 s (bulb and
time) X-sync
Polaroid pack
Electrical , 1/50 to
2 s (bulb, time
open shutter)
Polaroid pack
Polaroid-Graflok
combination
Electrical 1/10 to
5 s (bulb)
Polaroid pack
01 Lens Adaptor has fixed magnification
of 0.8; relative light gathering ability
of 0.9; 8 x 10 cm field of view.
A bezel to accommodate 400 Series
scopes with 8 x 10 cm CRTs
01 Focus lights
02 Graflok focus
screen & hood
03 No Polaroid
back
04 0.8 magnification
05 0.9 magnification
06 1.0 magnification
08 Mounting Adaptor
01
02
03
04
See page
413 for
specific
selections
Mounting adaptors, writing speed enhancer, Polaroid pack film back, Polaroid
roll film back, Graflok 4 x 5 inch back, carrying case , X-sync cable , porta lens,
(for C-30B only)
View Hood
Mounting
adaptors,
flash unit,
viewing door
" Included with C-50 Series cameras.
Adaptor with /ens included with C-31 B Option 01 cameras.
with lenses included with C-30B Option 01 cameras.
" Included with C-30B, C-31 B Cameras.
'5 Included with C-5C and C-5C Option 01 Cameras.
'. Included with C-5C Option 03 Cameras.
" Included with C-5C Option 02 and Option 04 Cameras.
'2
'3 Adaptor
$83
$90
$58
$72
$105
$83
$169
$230
$19
$19
$19
8 x 10 cm wl Opt 01
7 x 9 cm std
ORDERING INFORMATION
Polaroid Pack Film Back For Older Cameras
C-12. C-19. C-13. C-27
These cameras are no longer produced by Tektronix. However
due to customer need for a Pack Film Back these are now
available. The Pack Film Back accepts the Polaroid pack film .
Order 122-0671-01 ...... _____.... ____ _.. __ _.. _________ _____ .. _______________ $235
Mounting Adaptors
C-12 to 7000 Series and 5000 Series
Order 016-0299-00 __________________________ ___________________ ______ ___ __ .. __ $72
C-12 to 530, 540, 550 Series
Order 016-0226-01 _.. ,_.............. ___ ... __ ....... __ ... _._ .. ____ .. _........ _ $72
C-12 to 560 Series rectangular CRTs
Order 016-0217 -00 _____ •______ .... __ .. _... __....._............... _.... _.....__ $72
414
TEK
HIGH WRITING SPEED CAMERAS
GENERAL PURPOSE CAMERAS
C-51P
C-53P
C-SO Series
C-S1
C-S3
Electronic-Actuated ShuHer
Fastest Writing Speed
General Purpose Medium Speed
Photometer Exposure Aid
Range-Finder Focusing
Automatic Single-Sweep Control
The top of the line
The three C-SO Series cameras are designed for
use with all Tektronix 7000 Series oscilloscopes,
and can be adapted to fit most 5000 Series oscilloscopes. Full selection of film backs, and adjustable film and shutter speeds give you the
flexibility you need to best record your measurernents . The photometer exposure aid, similar to
light meters used in conventional photography,
provides an easy way to approximate the correct
exposure for repetitive or stored traces. X-sync
connectors allow the camera shutter to trigger
the event. And each camera's built-in viewing
tunnel lets you see what's on the display when
the camera is in place.
This camera offers the fastest writing speed of
any Tektronix oscilloscope camera. The f/1.2 lens
shoots images at 0.5 magnification, clearly capturing fast transients or single sweeps, although
at some expense to image size. The C-51 's electric shutter can operate at speeds ranging from
1/60 to 4 seconds, and offers bulb, time, and single sweep modes by manual or remote control.
CHARACTERISTICS
Aperture -
Variable from 1/1 .2 to 1/16.
Lens Speeds -
1/1.2.
Magnification -
0.5.
Relative Light-Gathering Ability -
Synchonrization -
The single sweep mode, available only on the
C-51 and C-53 cameras, automatically closes the
shutter after the trace sweeps the screen.
Width
Height
Depth
Range-finder focusing , a feature the C-53 shares
with the C-51 and the C-59A, results in sharp, focused pictures every time.
X-sync switch closure.
8 x 10 cm.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dimensions
Weights =
Net
Shipping
The C-53, like the C-51, provides an 8 x 10 cm
field of view when used with Polaroid pack film .
Its 111.9 lens and 0.85 magnification, however, offer somewhat slower writing speed. This camera's electric shutter also offers speeds ranging
from 1/60 to 4 seconds, and can be operated
manually or remotely in bulb, time, or single
sweep mode.
CHARACTERISTICS
Power Requirement + 15 V from 7000 Series oscilloscopes, or an optional battery pack for non-7000 Series instruments (see next page).
Field of View -
8 x 10 cm Field of View
3.0.
Shutter - Electric; 1/60 to 4 s bulb, time, and single sweep
modes, manual or remote control. Scope + gate input for shutter actuation.
The electronic actuated shutter allows the shutter to be operated with a contact closure or TIL
logic level.
Is the Fastest Camera without Image
Reduction
mm
248
292
273
kg
4.3
6.8
in
9.8
11 .5
10.8
Ib
9.5
15.0
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Aperture -
Variable from f/ l .9 to 1/16.
Lens Speed -
1/1 .9.
Magnification -
0.85.
Relative Light-Gathering Ability -
1.0.
Shutter - Electric; 1/60 to 4 s; bulb, time, and single sweep
modes, manual or remote control scope + gate input for shutter actuation .
Power Requirement + 15 V from 7000 Series oscilloscopes, or an optional battery pack for non-7000 Series instruments (see next page).
Synchronization Field of View -
X-sync switch closure.
8 x 10 cm.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dimensions
Width
Height
Depth
(C-Sl and C-S3)
Weights
Mounting adaptor for all 7000, 5000, and small 600 Series
(016-0249-04); "P" Models include - focus plate (387-0893-00).
"G" models have an integral focusing screen.
Net
Shipping
mm
191
292
273
=
kg
2.4
5.4
in
7.5
11.5
10.8
Ib
7.5
12.0
For Ordering Information see next page.
415
HIGH WRITING SPEED CAMERAS
PURPOSE CAMERAS
TEK GENERAL
C·51 and C·53 OPTIONAL CAMERA ACCESSORIES
C-59AP
Mounting Adaptors -
See table on page 413.
BaHery Pack - Provides auxiliary + 15 V power source for
using the C·51 , C·53 Cameras with oscilloscopes without cam·
era power. A three.position mode switch on the baHery pack
also allows the camera to be powered from a 7000 Series ascii·
loscope or an external + 15 V source. Net weight, including
batteries, is 1.2 lb. Requires 12 AA size alkaline batteries (not
included).
Order 016·0270·02 .......................................................... $280
Writing Speed Enhancer - Provides controlled film fogging
to increase writing speed by three times for 3000 ASA film and
about two times for 10,000 ASA film . Installs in minutes.
For C·51 Order 016·0279·02 .......................................... $270
For C·53 Order 016·0300·02 .......................................... $300
For C·59A Order 016·0290·02 ........................................ $300
X·Sync Connector Plug - Not shown .
Order 134·0079·00 ......................................................... $1.30
Carrying Case - Hold a complete C· 50 Series camera with
extra film backs and accesssories.
Order 016·0177·00 .......................................................... $270
Polaroid Pack Film Back - Included with 'p. models.
Order 122·0926·01 .......................................................... $163
Focus Plate - Included with · P' models.
Order 387·0893·02 ......................................................... $3.60
C-59A
Graflok Type Film Back - Included with ' G' models, accepts
Polaroid 4 x 5 inch film holder, standard cut·film holders, film·
pack adaptors, roll·film holders' (except heavy motorized
models).
Order 122·0931·01 .......................................................... $220
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dimensions
Low-Cost
Photometer Exposure Aid
Range-Finder Focusing
Internal Battery Power
For Larger CRT'S
This camera is designed for CRTs up to 6 '/2 inch·
es, and has a 10.2 x 12.7 cm field of view with
Polaroid pack film . It is the only camera for the
576 Curve Tracer, and the only C·50 Series
camera for the 7603 Oscilloscope. The f12.8 lens
means slower writing speed , but it also means
economy. The C·59A's mechanical shutter oper·
ating between 1/50 and 1 second also contrib·
utes to a low cost. Still , many of the features of
the high·priced C·50 Series cameras are standard
on the C·59A: photometer exposure aid , range·
finder focusing , bulb and time operating modes,
X·sync contacts, and film back interchange·
ability.
Weights '"
Net
Shipping
in
mm
193
292
273
Width
Height
Depth
7.7
11 .5
10.8
Ib
kg
3.2
5.0
7.0
11.0
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES (C·59)
Focus Plate for Polaroid pack film (387·0893·02); or focusing
screen integral with Graflok type back; mounting adaptor for all
7000, 5000, and small 600 Series (016·0249·04).
C·59 does not include 8 AA size alkaline batteries.
ORDERING INFORMATION
"P" Models accept only Polaroid pack film.
"G" Models have A Graflok type back that
requires A film holder (see next column)
C-51 CAMERA
C-51G
$2,060
C-51P
$2,060
C-53 CAMERA
$1,695
C-53P
CHARACTERISTICS
C-59A CAMERA
Aperture - Variable from f/2.8 fa 1/16.
Lens Speed - f/2.8.
Magnification - 0.67 .
Relative Llght·Gathering Ability - 0.65.
ShuHer - Mechanical ; 1/50 to 1 s; bulb and time.
Synchronization - X.sync switch closure.
Field of View - 10.s x 12.7 cm (6.5 in with optional Adaptor
Frame/Corrector Lens).
Power Requirement - Receives power (+ 15 V from a 7000
Series oscillsocope, or from an internal battery pack , 8 AA size
alkalines, (12 V) if used on a non·7000 Series scope.
C-59AG ..............•...................•.•....••..•. $1,260
C-59AP ................................................ $1,260
ADAPTOR FRAMEICORRECTOR LENS
C·59 CAMERAS
Optional Adaptor Frame Corrector Lens expands the field of
view to fully cover the 6'/' inch CRT and adjacent scale readout
characters of the 576 Curve Tracer and 5030 Series oscilloscopes. The corrector lens reduces the effective magnification
of the C·59 from 0.67 to 0.5 so it can record the entire display
on Polaroid 3'/. x 4'/. inch film (for the C· 59A camera only).
Adapts camera to 576, 5030, and 5031.
Order 016-0288-01 ................................ $125
416
Focusing Screen - For Graflok film back, included with · G·
models.
Order 016· 0249·04 ............................................................ $83
OPTIONAL FILM HOLDERS FOR
GRAFLOK TYPE BACKS
(" G" MODELS ONLY)
Cameras with Graflok type backs must have a film holder in
order to be functional.
Here are several holders" that allow the use of roll film , or
4 x 5 inch Polaroid films . Order these holders from Tek, the
manufacturer or from your local camera store.
I
Polaroid Land #545 4 x 5 Film Holder - For Polaroid
4 x 5 inch Single Exposure Film Packets.
Order 016-0201·01 .......................................................... $310
RHl l0 120 RolI·Film Holder - 10 exposures 2'1. x 23f. inch
for 4 x 5 inch Graflok Backs
Order 122·0736·01 .......................................................... $345
'I.
'I.
RHI 50 70 mm Holder - 50 exposure, 2
x 2
inch for
4 x 5 inch Graflok Backs only.
Order 122·0967·00 .......................................................... $275
Roll film holders are also manufactured by several other
companies.
" Other film holders and adaptors (4 x 5 cm cut film, pack film,
or roll film) are avai/able at local camera store.
OEM
CAMERA
TEK
C-28
Used with UL Approved Medical and Dental
Equipment
Rangefinder Focusing
Rigid Body Design Eliminates Distortion
Errors
OEM Pricing Available
This camera 's versatility extends to its standard
combination Graflok/Polaroid film back. The Polaroid back, which takes 3 '/4 x 4 '14 inch photos
horizontally or vertically, is easily removed to allow the use of Graflok-compatible accessories,
such as 70 mm or 90 mm roll film backs.
OEM Quantities
Both the highly accurate C-28 and the low cost
C-5C, page 419, Oscilloscope Cameras are available in OEM quantities with special pricing ,
terms, and conditions.
Aperture -
Variable from f/2.8 to fl16 .
Lens Speed -
0.67 and 0.85 (0.8, 0.9, and 1.0 optional).
Electric: 1/50 to 2 seconds bulb and time.
Synchronization - Switch closure coincident with shutter
opening. 28 V 750 rnA rating.
Field of View - 80 x 100 mm (0.85 magnification) and 102 x
127 mm (0.67 magnification).
The C-28 f/2.8 lenses has interchangeable 0.67
and 0.85 magnification which you can easily
change to fully record from 102 x 127 mm or 80 x
100 mm CRTs. Lens mounts with fixed magnifications of 0.8, 0.9, and 1.0 are available as options . A reliable electric shutter with a wide
choice of speeds from 1/50 to 2 seconds can be
operated manually or remotely in bulb or time
mode. Optional rangefinder focus lights allow
easy, accurate focusing without necessitating
film removal.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Dimensions
Width
Height
Depth
Weights =
Net
Shipping
Voltage Input -
mm
185
205
246
kg
3.8
5.9
ORDERING INFORMATION
C-28 Camera with Graflok Back ......... $1,565
Graflok Film Back - Accepts 4 x 5 inch film holders, standard
cut film holders, film pack adaptors (Polaroid back comes standard). and roll film holders (including heavy motorized models).
Option 01 - With Focus Lights ................................... +$55
Option 02 - With Graflok focus screen and hood.
(122-0510-00 and 122-0944-00) .................................. +$110
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
The accurate reproduction quality of C-28 photographs results from a special rigid body design
that eliminates focus errors and trapezoidal distortion , even with heavy motorized roll film
backs.
- 1 to + 10 V (dc or peak tranSient).
f/2.8
Magnification Shutter -
Maximum Input -
Input Requirement for Shutter Actuation - TTL: Transition
from ",2.5 V dc to ";0.9 V dc in 10 ~s or less, and remaining
low for at least 50 ~s . Bulb requires a continuous low while the
shutter is open. Switch closure: Transition from .. 7.5 kG to
,.; 1 kG in 10 ~s or less, and remaining low for at least 50 ~s .
Minimum time interval between shutter operations is not
< 500 ms.
Six-pin connector and 18-inch power and control cable assembly (131-1794-00); viewing tunnel and hood (122-0719-01); Polaroid pack film holder (352-0505-01).
CHARACTERISTICS
When Measurement Accuracy is Critical
The C-28 camera is a high quality recording device for systems displaying XV, XT, or gray scale
images. It is recommended for use with 600 Series display monitors, and offers broad interface
capability with many oscilloscopes. And its UL
Component Recognition allows the C-28 to interface with UL approved medical and dental
equipment.
Altitude
Operating - Sea level to 4500 m (15,200 It).
Nonoperating - Sea level to 15 000 m (50,000 It).
in
7.3
8.1
9.7
Ib
8.5
13.0
Option 03 - Without Polaroid pack film holder
(deletes 352-0505-01) .................................................... -$50
Option 04 -
0.8 magnification only .............................. +$45
Option 05 -
0.9 magnification only .............................. +$45
Option 06 -
1.0 magnification only .............................. +$45
Option 08 - With Mounting Adaptor for 600. 5000.
and 7000 Series (016-0249-04) ..................................... +$65
+ 15 V dc ± 0.5 V.
Current Drain - = 260 rnA with focus lights on ; = 250 rnA
with shutter open ; = 25 rnA idle.
Power Consumption - ,.; 12 w.
Note: Power supplied by user - Camera supplied with power
cord and connector.
Special priCing. terms and conditions are available to qualified OEM's. Contact your local Tektronix representative for
complete information.
Temperatuare Range to Assure Specified Performance O°C to + 50 °C ( + 32 ° F to + 122°F).
417
HIGH PERFORMANCE CAMERAS
TEK COMPACT
C-30
Series
Mechanical Shutters
Adaptable to Many Instrument Types
Continuously Variable Magnification (C-30B)
Option 01
Is Optimized for 8 X 10 cm
C-31B
400 Series Portables
The C-30B and C-31B Cameras are primarily designed for use with the 400 Series portable oscilloscopes, but are also adaptable to 80 x 100 mm
or smaller 7000, 5000, and 600 Series instruments , and to others as shown on Camera
Adaptor Selection Guide. The C-30 Series cameras feature mechanical shutters with bulb and
time operating modes . X-sync contacts, and
choice of speeds between 1/125 and 1 second.
Polaroid pack film backs are interchangeable on
both C-30 Series cameras.
•
This camera's f/1.3, 0.5 magnification lens offers
the fastest writing speed for 400 Series oscilloscopes. The C-31B Option 01 covers an 8 x 9 cm
CRT.
C-31 B Option 01
This option includes an adaptor/corrector lens
that accommodates the same oscilloscopes as
the C-30B Option 01 .
CHARACTERISTICS
Aperture -
Variable from 1/1.3 to 1/16.
Lens Speed -
C-30B
1/1.3
Magnification -
The C-30 B is a versatile, general purpose camera that offers a highly reliable mechanical shutter and an f/1.9 lens. It is the only Tektronix oscilloscope camera that features continuousl y
variable magnification (from 0.7 to 1.5) giving you
greater photographing fle xibility. This camera
was designed for the 453, 454, 485C and 491 .
Shutter -
Option 01
An optional adaptor lens with fixed 0.8 magnification photographs an 80 x 100 mm CRT screen
without darkening the edges of a print. This lens
is designed especially to fit the 455, 464, 465,
465B, 466, 468, 475, and 475A oscilloscopes.
2.7 (2.9 on Option 01).
Mechanical; 1/125 to 1 second ; bulb and time.
Synchronization Field of View -
X-sync contact closure.
7 x 9 cm (8 x 10 cm on Option 01).
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dimensions
C-30B
0.5
Relative Light-Gathering Ability -
Width
Height
Depth
Weights ""
Net
Shipping
in
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dimensions
Width
Height
Depth
Weights ""
Net
Shipping
418
mm
191
130
254
kg
2.2
4.1
7.5
5.1
10.4
Ib
4.8
9.0
See page 414.
Polaroid Pack Film Back - Accepts Polaroid pack film . Included with ' P- models.
Order 122-0752-02 .......................................................... $185
6.8
11 .0
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Polaroid pack film back (122-0752-02) ; split-image focus plate
(387-0893-02); mounting adaptor (016-0306-01).
ORDERING INFORMATION
C-31BP Camera .................................. $1,570
Both models include Polaroid pack films back.
Mounting Adaptors -
Ib
C-30BP Camera .................................. $1,360
in
CONVERTING STANDARD MODEL TO OPTION 01 MODEL
A standard-model C-30B or C-31 B can be converted to an Option 01 model by means of the appropriate Adaptor Frame/Corrector Lens. 016-0301 -01 for C-30B ; 016-0269-04 for the
C-31B. Please refer to page 414 for prices and compatibility.
Writing Speed Enhancer - Increases effective film speed
about three times for 3000 speed film . Installs in minutes.
Order 016-0284-01 ......................................................... , $270
CHARACTERISTICS
Aperature - Variable from 1/1.9 to 1/16.
Lens Speed - 1/1 .9.
Magnifications - Variable from 0.7 to 1.5.
Relative Light-Gathering Ability - 1.0 (0.9 on Option 01).
Shutter - Mechanical, 1/125 to 1 second ; bulb and time.
Synchronization - X-sync contact closure.
Field of View - 70 x 90 mm (80 x 100 mm on Option 01).
CONVERTING OPTION 01 MODEL TO STANDARD MODEL
The Option 01 versions of the C-30B and C-31 B Cameras can
be converted to standard models by simply slipping off the Corrector Lens, removing the Adaptor Frame, and adding an 0160306-01 Adaptor. Please refer to page 414 for prices and
compatibility.
9.1
5.5
10.6
kg
3.1
5.4
C-31BP Option 01 , Expanded Field of View - f/l .2, 0.5 magnification lens with relative light gathering ability of 2.9 covers
CRT screens up to 8 x 10 cm. Includes 016-0269-03 adaptor
for 465 size CRT bezel and corrector lens and holder. Recommended for - 455, 464, 465, 465B, 466, 475, 475A.
Specify Option 01 ............................................................ $42
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
mm
231
140
269
OPTIONS
C-30BP Option 01 Expanded Field of View - 1/1 .9, 0.8 magnification lens covers 8 x 10 cm CRT screen without vignetting.
Relative light-gathering ability is 0.9. Includes 016-0269-03
adaptor for 465 size CRT bezel and corrector lens and holder.
Recommended for - 455, 464, 465, 465B, 466, 475, 475A.
Specify Option 01 .. ,......................................................... $42
Graflok Type 4 x 5 in Back - Accepts Polaroid Land 4 x 5 in
film holders, standard cut film holders, filmpack adaptors, roll
film holders (except heavy motorized roll film holders).
Order 016-0487-00 .......................................................... $235
Carrying Case - Molded high-impact plastic case with polyurethane foam liners to protect your camera in transit. 18.5 x
14.5 x 8 in.
Order 016-0587-00 .......................................................... $108
X-Sync Cable
Order 012-0364-01 ............................................................ $21
Portra Lens - A slip-on auxiliary lens which extends the focus
distance of the camera so it can be used for off-scope photography of scenes such as test set-ups. At a distance of 21 inches the camera covers 19 x 21 inches. Usable with either the C30B or C-30B Option 01 .
Order 016-0246-02 ............................................................ $33
TEK
LOW COST
CAMERA
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dimensions
Width
Height
Depth
Weights ,.,
Ib
3.0
4.1
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Viewing Door - Fits all three mounting adaptor hoods. Included with C-5C OptionS 01 and 02.
Order 016-0630-00 .•........................................•..•..•......•• $7.00
Low Cost
Easy to Use
Graticule Flash Unit - Fits all three mounting adaptor hoods.
inciuded with C-5C and C-5C Options 03 and 04.
Order 016-0642-00 .......................................................... $140
CHARACTERISTICS
Lightweight
Maximum Performance at Minimum Cost
If your application does not required specialized
photographic techniques, such as the capability
to record single sweeps, this general purpose
camera may fill your needs at exceptionally low
cost. The C-5C is lightweight and modular, with a
reliable electric shutter offering timed speeds
from 1/10 to 5 seconds. The three-element f/16
lens offers both 0.67 and 0.85 magnifications,
either of which you can easily change, for 98 x
122 mm or 80 x 100 mm fields of view.
This camera's optional features include a variable-intensity xenon flash that evenly lights CRTs
with nonilluminated graticules. A viewing door
allows screen viewing while the camera is in
place, and fits any of the three optional mounting
adaptors which slide onto many oscilloscopes
and small monitors.
OEM Quantities
Both the highly accurate C-28, page 413, and the
low-cost C-5C Oscilloscope Cameras are available in OEM quantities.
6.6
5.5
10.1
1.4
1.9
C-5C
OEM Pricing Available
in
kg
Nel
Shipping
'/10 to 5 s Timing Speeds
mm
168
140
257
Aperture -
Fixed all/16.
Lens speed -1/16.
Magnification -
Relative Light-Gathering Ability Shutter -
Addtional Mounting Adaptor Hoods with viewing door or flash unit.)
0.67 and 0.85.
(Requires assembly
For C-5C and C-SC Option 01
Order 016-0357-01 ............................................................ $19
0.02.
Electric; 1/10 to 5 seconds ; time.
Field of View - 98 x 122 mm (0.67 magnification) and 80 x
100 mm (0.85 magnification).
For C-5C Options 02 and 04
Order 016-0359-01 ............................................................ $19
Power - The C-5C requires (4) AA alkaline batteries (not
included).
For C-5C Oplion 03
Order 016-0358-01 •.............................................•............. $19
ORDERING INFORMATION
Order
For U.e With
Adaptor Hood (Included)
Part Number
Mounting
Flash Unit
(Included)
Price
C-5C
577, 600 Series with unilluminated graticuie 1420 Series,
5100 Series
016-0357-01
Yes
$525
C-5C Option 01
528, 600 Series without graticuie, or with illuminated
graticuie, 5400 Series, 7000 Series, T922R
TELEQUiPMENT 083
016-0357-01
No
-$20
C-5C Option 02
432, 434, 455, 464, 4658, 465M, 466, 475, 475A
016-0359-01
No
- $20
C-5C Option 03
T900 Series eXCilpt T922R
016-0358-01
Yes
NC
C-5C Option 04
2200 Series wilh unilluminated graticule
016-0359-01
Yes
NC
Special pricing, term. and conditiona are available to qualified OEM • . Contact your local Tektronix representative for
complete information.
419
MEASUREMENT CONCEPTS
TEK FLOATING
ISOLATION ACCESSORIES FOR FLOATING
MEASUREMENTS
In the world of oscilloscope use, the problem of
floating measurements is a pressing need that
often causes users to employ questionable and
often unsafe practices to allow the oscilloscope
chassis to float at some potential other than
ground . Such practices are parts of a larger
problem conceming equipment grounding. In a
recent study of computer data, OSHA found that
faulty grounding of electrical equipment
conneted by cord and plug was one of the most
common violations of accepted safety rules.
Recognition of the measurement need and a firm
commitment to test and measurement product
safety have resulted in two new isolator products
from Tektronix. These products will allow you to
make those necessary floating measurements
with minimum risk of operator injury or test
equipment damage. Both meet worldwide safety
standards; including UL 1244, GSA Electronics
Bulletin 556B, lEG 348 and BS 4743.
But, before we delve into the technical and applications aspects of these new accessories,
perhaps some background information would be
appropriate . Just what are floating measurements and why are such measurements
necessary?
A Need Met
Users of oscilloscopes often must make measurements in which neither point of the measurement is at ground potential. The signal common
may be at times hundreds of volts from ground.
Also, many such measurements require rejection
of high amplitude common-mode signals in order
to examine low-level signals. Unwanted ground
currents may add bothersome hum and ground
loops to displays.
Ground Loops
The potential difference between two green wire
grounds on separate mains circuits may be as
great as 5 volts RMS at 60 Hz. An oscilloscope
plugged into one main circuit would thus measure a signal on a system plugged into another
mains circuit equal to the sum of the signal plus
the difference between the green wire grounds.
A logic signal typically swings 1.8 volts. With this
logic signal imposed on that 5 volts 60 Hz signal,
making measurements becomes difficult if not
impossible. Traditional oscilloscope designs cannot effectively cope with these problems alone.
All too often, the problems almost force users
into employing dangerous measurement techniques. But why is this?
Most oscilloscopes have a "signal common" terminal that is connected to the protective grounding system. This is because all signals applied to
or from an oscilloscope must have a common
connection point. This is ordinarily the oscilloscope chassis, which is usually at zero volt. To
420
prevent one input from becoming live when another is connected to a signal, the common connection point is connected to the protective
.
grounding system of the oscilloscope.
While this arrangement usually works well and IS
safe for the user, it also provides that, with few
exceptions, all measurements must be made
with respect to ground. This constrains the oscilloscope (at least in a single measurement) from
being used to measure potential differences between points where neither is at ground potential. Also, measurements can be exceedingly difficult to perform because probes and connectors
can introduce unwanted circulating currents,
ground loops, into the circuit under test. Such
circulating currents impose noise on the signals
to be examined and can interfere with system
operation through the connection of the probe
ground .
"Roating the scope" is the usual technique that
is used in such measurements. It is the technique of defeating the protective grounding system - disconnecting the "signal common" from
ground - and allowing accessible oscilloscope
parts, such as the chassis, enclosure, connectors, and controls to assume the potential of the
point at which the ground lead is connected.
And it is dangerous, for two reasons. Rrst, and
most obvious, is the possibly high voltages on
exposed metal parts of the oscilloscope that
present a shock hazard to the operator. Second,
and not so obvious, is the cumulative stresses
on the oscilloscope power transformer insulation.
Such stresses can cause future failure, with attendant shock and fire hazard, even after the oscilloscope is returned to properly grounded operation. From a measurement standpoint the
"floated scope" has the problem of imposing a
filtering action on the point the "signal common "
is connected. This filtering is caused by capacitance between the floating scope chassis and
the power line which may be considered at ac
ground.
.
Safety Principles
Tektronix has over the years adopted many safety principles in the design of its products. Of particular concem to those making electrical and
electronic measurements are these principles:
• Accessible parts shall not be live, even in the
event of the single worst-case fault.
• Electronic devices (those devices that employ
conduction in a vacuum, gas, or semiconductor) shall not be relied upon to protect the operator from electric shock.
• Products shall not develop insidious hazards
during proper operation. (An insidious hazard
is one that develops so gradually as to be well
established before becoming apparent.)
• An operator shall not have to defeat a protective system to perform a measurement.
• No switch shall be placed in series with the
protective grounding conductor.
Common Floating Measurement Techniques
Roating measurements can be performed using
various methods. Each has limitations and some
are safer and more reliable than others. In the
following paragraphs, ten common methods of
making floating oscilloscope measurements are
reviewed . Note that four of these methods each
violate two or more safety engineering principles.
Tektronix strongly discourages such methods.
Isolation Amplifiers
The isolating amplifier is connected between the
signal under investigation and the oscilloscope.
With respect to the signal, the amplifier is completely insulated, with no accessible conductive
parts. The signal is coupled across an insulating
barrier to the oscilloscope. Use of the isolation
amplifier maintains the usability of all scope
functions .
The Tektronix A6902 Isolator is an isolation amplifier consisting of two identical amplifiers, isolated
from each other, from accessible parts, from the
mains, and from ground. It enables an oscilloscope to measure potentials from ± 20 mV to
± 1500 volts. Each signal common lead can be
independently connected to separate voltages
up to + or - 1500 volts. The A6902 can measure two such signals simultaneously, in combination with any dual trace oscilloscope.
Indirect Grounding
Safety standards specify indirect grounding as
an alternative to direct grounding . All of the
grounding requirements apply, except that the
grounding circuit need not be completed until
the available voltage or current exceeds a prescribed amount.
The Tektronix A6901 Ground Isolation Monitor is
an indirect grounding device. It is connected between the mains and the test instrument. When
activated, it disconnects the protective grounding system and monitors the voltage and current
of the isolated ground. If this voltage exceeds
40 volts peak, the A6901 disconnects the power
to the test instrument, sounds an alarm, and reconnects the protective grounding conductor.
The A6901 can be used with any grounded test
instrument. It also tests ground continuity of the
mains and will not activate if the mains ground is
inadequate. It solves the problems of defeating
the protective ground and provides the means
for valid measurements.
Differential Techniques
The most popular solution to the need for a floating measurement is the A minus B quasi-differential technique . Most general-purpose dualtrace oscilloscopes (such as the Tektronix 465B)
have an ADD Mode in which the two channels
(invert GH 2) can be electrically subtracted, giving a display of the difference signal. This can
be a problem when attempting to examine lowlevel control signals in the presence of high common-mode voltages. Also, the common-mode dynamic range is severely limited (± 6 divisions
beyond screen height) and GMRR is low - approximately 100:1.
True differential solutions are amplifiers specifically designed to have good rejection of the
common-mode signal and display only the difference signal. Because these amplifiers are basically two ground-referenced amplifiers, limited
floating or common-mode capability is provided.
Further, the ability to display a small signal in the
presence of a large common-mode signal
changes as a function of the absolute magnitude
of the common-mode signal, as well as the ratio
of the common-mode signal to the difference
signal. Also, there are bandwidth limitations. The
Tektronix 7A13 provides 500 volts of commonmode dynamic range at 0.1 V/div with a GMRR
of at least 1000: 1 and a bandwidth up to
105 MHz.
TEK
All-Insulated Oscilloscopes
The all-insulated oscilloscope has no accessible
conductive parts. All accessible parts are made
of insulating material. No protective system is
defeated to make the measurement.
The completely insulated oscilloscope provides
true isolation from both the mains and the signal
common. It is not grounded but does not suffer
the problems of being floated . It is not a differential amplifier and therefore does not suffer previously mentioned performance problems. But, it
cannot be interconnected with other equipment
because its internal common is at the elevated
potential of the probe ground lead connection.
The Tektronix 200 Series oscilloscopes are allinsulated, and are rated to 250 V with respect to
mains insulation and 700 V peak with respect to
the signal being measured (when operated on
internal batteries). The 200 Series Oscilloscopes
offer 3 x 5 cm display and bandwidths up to
5 MHz, with sweep speeds to 100 ns/div. These
instruments are especially suitable for power
supply and mechanical measurement
applications.
Grounded Oscilloscopes
A grounded oscilloscope is capable of making
floating measurements by making two separate
measurements , recording the results , and
subtracting the common-mode signal. This requires an oscilloscope system capable of waveform processing such as the Tektronix 7854. The
7854 is capable of digitizing and storing the two
waveforms and subtracting the common-mode
Signal mathematically. It is a highly sophisticated
oscilloscope system with microprocessor-based
waveform processing capability. The 7854 is especially suitable for those floating measurement
applications that justify a substantial instrumentation investment.
Integrated Circuit Amplifiers
Some products purported to be isolators are
nothing more than limited-performance Ie differential amplifiers. Such units not only suffer from
the problems of all differential amplifiers (limited
dynamic range and ability to display small difference signals in the presence of large commonmode signals), but also suffer from lack of control
and versatility. Impressive performance specifications disappear when probes, attenuators, power
supply, and display connections are considered.
Isolation Transformers
Isolation transformers sometimes are employed
between the mains and the test instrument to
enable floating . To do this, the protective grounding system is defeated , resulting in violation of
one safety principle: accessible parts are live due
to the potential to which the signal common lead
is connected.
The isolation transformer can provide some degree of protection in the event of a test instrument mains insulation failure - if the isolated
mains does not have ground reference . If the
transformer does not have a secondary ground
reference, then a single insulation failure in the
test instrument will not result in a hazard, even
though it is insidious. If the isolated main is
ground-referenced (grounded neutral or grounded center-tap), then no protection is provided.
Also, during floating , the insulations of both the
isolation transformer and the test instrument
mains transformers are subjected to a voltage
stress that is the sum of the mains voltage plus
the signal common or floating voltage. This is
because the two primary windings form a capacitive voltage divider among the floating chassis,
the test instrument primary, and the isolation
tranformer primary. This voltage is extra - above
the mains rating . Thus, if the mains insulation
does break down, the test instrument is not
grounded and a hazard exists. In this instance,
the chassis will be live and the operator will have
no indication of a problem. If grounded, smoke
and fire may be the result. Using an isolating
transformer to make a test instrument "safe" to
float is a futile gesture and provides a false sense
of security.
Double Insulated Mains
Some measuring equipment safety standards
allow double insulation of the mains circuits instead of grounding (2-wire mains instead of 2-wire
mains with earth connection). Ordinarily, double
insulation provides protection equivalent to
grounding. This is not true for measuring equipment, since measuring equipment has a second
source of hazardous potentials - the circuit
under test. Equal protection must be provided
from all hazardous circuits, not just the mains
circuits.
Ungrounded oscilloscopes are available in which
protection from the mains is provided by double
insulation, but where the signal common remains
connected to the chassis enclosure and connectors. With respect to the signal being measured,
these designs are the equivalent of defeating the
protective grounding system.
Incidentally, unlike indirect grounding solutions
that complete the protective grounding circuit
when excessive voltage or currents are applied,
this solution gives no warning to the operator that
dangerous voltages and currents are present on
the chassis.
Isolating Circuits
Some users, and at least one oscilloscope manufacturer, have placed semiconductor devices
(back-to-back parallel rectifiers or zener diodes)
in series with the protective grounding conductor.
The purpose is to limit the excursion of voltage on
accessible parts to a "safe" level. One oscilloscope has a switch in parallel with the semiconductors to restore the ground when isolation is
not required.
Unfortunately, these techniques violate two safety principles and lead to another insidious hazard.
Most safety standards assume failure of semiconductors. Should a diode fail, there is no indication
to the operator and an insidious hazard exists.
Also, safety standards commonly specify no
switch in the protective grounding conductor; a
switch defeats the protective grounding system
just as cutting off the ground prong of the mains
plug.
Defeating Grounds
Operators often defeat a test instrument protective grounding system by cutting off the ground
prong or by using a 3-to-2 wire adapter. This
technique allows the scope chassis, enclosure,
and connectors to assume the potential of the
probe ground lead connection.
The only protection for both the operator and
nearby persons is to maintain distance and avoid
simultaneously touching the test instrument and
ground. Some safety officers require the work
area to be roped off, a warning to be posted, and
an observer to maintain surveillance on the operator. Some enforcement agencies accept these
precautions under the heading of "reasonable
caution" and choose not to cite violators. Although these precautions are laudable, we have
described earlier the dangers inherent in floating
oscilloscopes by defeating the protective grounding systems.
Summary
The following table provides a summary of the ten
most common methods of performing floating
measurements and highlights four as being
unsafe.
METHODS OF MAKING FLOATING SCOPE MEASUREMENTS
Meets
Safety
Principles
Isolation
Amplifiers
Indirect
Grounding
Differential
Techniques
All Insulated
Oscilloscopes
.....
.....
.....
.....
Dynamic
Rangel
Bandwidth
High
High
Medium(+)
Medium( - )
Flexibility
High
High( - )
Medium( - )
Medium( - )
ease of
Operation
Isolation
Voltaga
COlt
High
A6902
11500 V
Moderate
High
A6901
140 V
Low
Medium( - )
7A13
1500 V
Moderate
Medium( + )
221
1250 V/l750 V
Moderate
High
Low
Grounded
Oscilloscope
.....
High
High
High
7854
1250 V
IC Isolation
Amplifiers
.....
Low( - )
Low( - )
High
12000 v
Isolation
Transformers
No
Not
Recommended
Double
Insulated
Mains
No
Not
Recommended
Isolating
Circuits
No
Not
Recommended
Defeating
Grounds
No
Not
Recommended
421
ISOLATION MONITOR
TEK GROUND
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
STANDARD INSTRUMENT, NORTH AMERICAN 120 V
161·0150·00 1 LOAD CORD, 17.5 em, IEC Male to NA Female,
t20 V
159·0190·00 1 FUSE, 3 AF, DIN, Metric
159·0051 ·00 1 FUSE, 3 AG, 0.062A, SLO
161·0066·001 POWER CORD, 3 m, North American Male to
IEC Female
UNIVERSAL EURO, OPTION AI
161·0157·001 LOAD CORD, 17.5 em , IEC Male to Euro Fe·
male, 240 V
159·0202·00 1 FUSE, 6.3 A, DIN , Metric
159·0074·001 FUSE, O.IA, DIN, Metric
161·0066-09 1 POWER CORD, 3 m, Euro Male to IEC Female
UNITED KINGDOM OPTION A2
161·0159·001 LOAD CORD, 17.5 em, IEC Male to UK Female,
240 V
159·0202·00 1 FUSE, 6.3 A, DIN Metric
159·0074·00 1 FUSE, 0.1 A, DIN, Metric
161·0066· 101 POWER CORD, 3 m, UK Male to IEC Female
AUSTRALIA, OPTION A3
161·0158·001 LOAD CORD, 17.5 em , IEC Male to Australian
Female, 240 V
A6901
Isolates Test Instrument from Ground
Continuous Voltage Monitoring
Activities Ground Connection with
Over-Voltage Detection
Applications for the A6901 include elevating a
test instrument chassis to logic reference volt·
ages for more accurate logic level measurements, and isolating a test instrument chassis
from common·mode voltages present on ground
systems to eliminate undesirable noise from sig·
nal measurements.
Certified by Worldwide Safety Agencies
In operation, the A6901 isolates the protective
grounding system of a test instrument, monitors
the voltage on that isolated system, and, when
the voltage exceeds predetermined levels, inter·
rupts the voltage supply to the instrument,
sounds an alarm, and connects the isolated
grounding system to the supply circuit grounding
system. Also, the A6901 tests the power source
for a functional ground before activating to the
isolated mode.
Once in the isolated mode, the A6901 continuous,
Iy monitors voltage between the test instrument
and earth ground. If a 40 volt peak level is
exceeded the unit protection circuit activates and
disconnects power from the test instrument, reo
establishes the earth ground connection, and
sounds an alarm.
159·0202·001 FUSE, 6.3 A, DIN, Metric
159·0074·001 FUSE, 0.1 A, DIN, Metric
161·0154·00 1 POWER CORD, 3 m, Swiss Male to IEC
Female.
ORDERING INFORMATION
CHARACTERISTICS
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISITCS
Trip Voltage (Dc) - 40 V peak (28 RMS) or + and - 40 V
(within 5%).
Trip Current -
0.5 mA, 3.5 mA to 5 mA selectable.
Neutral·to·Ground Continuity (8.5 and 28.3 V pop), 50 Hz.
Between 3 and 10 V RMS
Dc Voltage Trip Delay -
< 20 ms.
Line Voltage Ranges RMS.
90 to 128
Line Frequency Range -
48 to 66 Hz.
v RMS, 180 to 250 V
Maximum Power Consumption (No External Load).- 12 W
at 115 V, 60 Hz.
Load Power -
500 W maximum
ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS
Temperature - Operating: - IS " C to + SS " C (+S" F to
+ 131 " F). Nonoperating: - 62 " C to + 85 " C ( - 80"F to
+ 185"F). Meets MIL-T-28800B, Class 3.
Altitude - Operating: to 4500 m (15,000 tt). Nonoperating: to
15000 m (50,000 tt). Exoeeds MIL-T-28800B, Class 3.
Humidity -
Exoeeds MIL-T-28800B, Class 3.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dimensions
Height
Width
Depth
Weights
Net (without aocessories)
Shipping
422
SWITZERLAND, OPTION A5
161·0160·00 1 LOAD CORD, 17.5 em, IEC Male to Swiss Fe·
male, 240 V
A6901 Ground Isolation Monitor ........... $440
Compact, Portable
Placed in the circuit between an oscilloscope or
other piece of test equipment and its power
source, the A6901 , acting as an indirect ground·
ing device, allows floating measurements to be
made with operator protection. It permits the
elevation of the test instrument chassis to voltage
levels other than ground to aid in logic circuit
analysis or to circumvent the effects of ground
loop noise problems.
159·0202·001 FUSE, 6.3 A, DIN, Metric
159·0074·001 FUSE, 0.1 A, DIN, Metric
161·0066-11 1 POWER CORD, 3 m, Australia Male to IEC
Female
mm
87
206
153
kg
1.4
2.3
in
3.4
8.1
6.0
Ib
3.0
5.0
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORD AND PLUG OPTIONS
Option AI - Universal Euro 220 V/16A, 50 Hz .............. NC
Option A2 - UK 240 V/13A, 50 Hz ................................. NC
Option A3 - Australian 240 V/ l0A, 50 Hz ...................... NC
Option A5 - Switzerland 220 V/l0A, 60 Hz ................... NC
(Norih American 240 V not available. Neutral not grounded in
240 V N.A. Systems)
TEK
ISOLATOR
Designed for use with any dual-channel oscillo·
scope, the A6902 permits simultaneous observa·
tion of signals at two points in the same circuit or
of signals in two different circuits. Separate,
calibrated controls for volts per division on each
channel provide for precise floating measure·
ments. The larger, 1500-volt probes are used in
high-voltage industrial applications and can grip
studs as large as one· half inch; the smaller, 500·
volt probes are used in signal applications in
which access to crowded spaces is important
and voltages are lower. Both probes are quickly
interchangeable at the cable connectors inside
the side pouch. The two pairs of probes and
output cables are stored in the two side pouches
for availability and convenience.
Small Probe - PrObe Center Tip to Earth Ground: 500 V (de
+ peak ae). PrObe Center Tip to PrObe Common: 500 V (de +
peak ae) to 3 MHz, derated to 105 V (de + peak ae) at
15 MHz. PrObe Common to Earth Ground: 500 V (de + peak
ae), derated to 200 V (de + peak ae) at 15 MHz.
Frequency Response - Bandwidth (de coupled): ;.15 MHz
(to - 3 dB points). Bandwidth (ae coupied): .;; 1 Hz (to lower
- 3 dB points).
Transient Response Input Impedance -
23 ns or less risetime.
Resistance: 10 Mil ± 3%.
Probe Tip Capacitance - Large PrObe Tip to Common:
",,21 pF.
Small Probe Tip to Common - ",, 17.4 pF.
Common Mode Capacitance mon to earth ground.
Output Impedance Tangential Noise -
",,50 II.
2.0 mY.
Dc Drift With Temperature output.
1100'1
A6902
Delay BNC.
Two Probe Sizes and Ratings
(1500 and 500 V)
MAXIMUM WORKING VOLTAGES
POWER SOURCE CHARACTERISTICS
Line Voltage Ranges - Low: 90 to 132 V RMS. High: 180 to
250 V RMS.
Line Frequency Range -
Compact, Portable
Power Consumption -
Temperature - Operating : O"C to +50"C (+32"F to
+ 122"F). Nonoperating: - 62"C to +75"C (-21.6"F to
+ 167" F).
In recognition of the requirement to perform
floating measurements and low-level signal measurements in the presence of high-amplitude
common-mode voltages, Tektronix offers the
A6902 Isolator. It is a dual-channel, optical- and
transformer-coupled voltage isolator that allows
safely grounded test instruments to make floating
measurements at high sensitivity levels in the
presence of large common-mode signals.
-
48 to 440 Hz.
15 W at 115 V, 60 Hz.
ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISICS
Meets Worldwide Safety Specifications
'D!kttonix A.e902 ISOLATOR
Either Probe: 48 ± 3 ns from prObe tip to output
Common Lead Signal Feedthrough - - 110 dB from prObe
input to output BNC (with oscilloscope having 1 Mil input resistance and up to 47 pF input capacitance, derated to - 80 dB at
10 kHz and to - 50 dB at 3.3 MHz.
Completely Insulated for User Protection
The A6902 acts as a buffer between the test
instrument and the system under test and extends the range of the test instrument to 1500 V
(dc plus peak ac) with the larger industrial probe
and to 500 V (dc plus peak ac) with the smaller
signal probe. Using a combination of optical and
transformer coupling, the unit isolates signals
from and allows the test instrument to be safely
grounded.
.;; 1 mV/"C or 0.1 div/ "C at
Channell.olatlon Voltage - Two 1500 V prObes: 1500 V (de
to peak ae). Two 500 V probes: 1000 V (de + peak ae).
YOI.TGI!
Dc to 15 MHz Bandwidth
Two Isolated Channels That can be
Used Simultaneously
"" 150 pF from prObe com-
Altitude - Operating: to 4500 m (15,000 tt). Nonoperating: to
15 000 m (50,000 tt).
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Operator safety is achieved through design. The
all· plastic case and external controls protect the
user during control settings and other operators.
Other than probe tip connections, the user is
never in close proximity to hazardous voltages.
The A6902 is certified by worldwide safety agencies. These include: UL 1244, lEe 348, BS 4743,
and eSA Bulletin 556B. A high degree of operator
protection is thus afforded, when making nongrounded measurements of voltages as high as
1500 volts.
CHARACTERISTICS
Dimensions
mm
In
Height
Width
Depth
13.6
39.4
34.4
5.4
15.5
13.5
Weight
kg
Ib
Net
Shipping
5.7
7.5
12.6
16.6
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
2 prObe, isolation, 500 V (010-0411-01); 2 prObe, isolation,
1500 V (010-0409-00); 1 Fuse, 4.1 A, 250 V (159-0171-00);
power cord, right angle, (161-0117-00); 2 output cable, 50 11,2
m (012-0204-00).
ORDERING INFORMATION
A6902 Isolator ..................................... $2,345
Option 01 -
(Delete 2 5OD-V prObes) ........................ -$100
Option 02 -
(Delete 2 1500-V prObes) ...................... -$200
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORD AND PLUG OPTIONS
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Option Al -
Deflection Factor - PrObe Tip Sensitivity: 20 mV/div to
200 V/div in 1-2-5 sequence with oscilloscope set to 10 mV/div.
Accuracy: .;; ± 3% of indicated VOLTS/DIV switch setting.
Option A2 -
UK 240 V/13A, 50 Hz ................................. NC
Option A3 -
Australian 240 V/l0A, 50 Hz ...................... NC
Option A4 -
North American 240 V/15A, 60 Hz ............. NC
Maximum Working Voltage
Option AS -
Switzerland 220 V/l0A, 50 Hz ................... NC
Universal Euro 220 V/16A, 50 Hz .............. NC
Large Probe - PrObe Center Tip to Earth Ground: 1500 V (de
+ peak ac) Pulse Tested to 4.4 kV for 1 s. PrObe Center Tip to
PrObe Common: 1500 V (de + peak ac) to 900 kHz, derated to
105 V (dc + peak ac) at 15 MHz. Probe Common to Earth
Ground: 1500 V (de + peak ae) to 440 kHz, derated to 520 V
(de + peak ac) at 5.8 MHz then to 200 V (de + peak ac) at
15 MHz.
423
SCOPE-MOBILE@
TEK CARTS
INCHES
!MILlIMETERS)
I
17.8
"'"
1~
f--~-------+'.5
~AIIC
Model200c
MODEL 205/2050
MODEL 200C/200D
Recommended For:
Recommended For:
All rackmount width instruments. Note width di·
mension of top tray in diagram above .
Rackmounting ears overhang sides of tray. Maxi·
mum top surface weight 80 lb.
All 400 Series Portable Scopes.
MODEL 200C includes brakes on front casters,
safety belt to secure instrument on top tray. Net
weight is 7.3 kg , (16 Ib). Shipping weight is
12.2 kg, (27 Ib).
MODEL 205 includes brakes on front casters,
storage drawer, power distribution module (three
outlets, 15 ft cord) . Net weight is 19.5 kg (43 Ib).
Shipping weight is 25.8 kg (57 Ib).
ORDERING INFORMATION
Model 200C Blue Vinyl Finish .................. $295
ORDERING INFORMATION
Model 2000 Brown Vinyl Finish ....•••...•.••. $295
Model 205 Blue Vinyl Finish .................... $435
Model 2050 Brown Vinyl Finish ............... $435
OPTIONAL SAFETY BELT recommended to
secure instruments on top tray. Net weight is
0.23 kg (0.5 Ib). Shipping weight is 0.45 kg (1 Ib).
Order 346-0070-01 .................................. $48
Model 205
CARTS
QUICK REFERENCE
Product
Cart Model
DAS9100 Series ... ..... ... ......... .......... ....... 2050
TM 5003 ... ............................ .. ............ Model 3
TM 5006 .. .. ....... .... ...... .................... .......... 205
400 Series Portables .................. .... ........ 200C
4000 Desktop Series .......................... .. .... 206
TM 503 .....................................................
3
TM 504 ........ .. ....................... .... ................
3
TM 506 .. ........ ............................ .. ........ ..... 205
4600 Plotters and Hard Copy System .. ... 206
1420 Series .............................. .. ... ..... .... ....... •
5000 Series ........................... .... ...............
2200 Series .. ........ ........ .... ...................... 200C
520A, 521 A, 522A .. .......... ........ ........ ....... . 205
528 ... .... ........... .... ....................................... ...•
2300 Series ................................. .......... . 200C
424
4900 File Managers ...... .... ............ ............ 206
3
530, 540, 550 Series ........ .. .. .. ..... .. .......... .
3
560 Series .... ............ ........ ....... .... ........... ..
3
576 ...... ......... ..... ...... ... ...... ....... .. ....... ........ 206
577 ........ ......... ........ ... ....... .......... .............. 206
600 Series Monitors .... .. ........ ..... ......... ... .... .. . •
650 Series .......... ..... ... ... .......... ... ... ....... .... 205
670 Series .. .............. ....... .... ..... ................ 205
7000 Series ..................... ........ .. ...............
3
'These products are applicable to several carts sions and features for your specific needs.
see dimen.
LAB
TEK
CARTS
INCHES
iMl.IJMETERSl
t----~~ ----l
I
1--1M-
INCHES
iMUJMETERSI
INCHES
IMlWMETERSJ
ATTACHMENT
SLOT FOR
SAFETY BELTS
20.0
1 - - ,5061
.,
13.7
(348)
t--+- ~3~---1
24.
1~;:nt:r;;
14.5
7
13681
/
--
5.0
34.4
(127)
(874)
DlA
,I
II
""
""
:l
1-- ~5~1 --f
:...:
1
3.5
1891
CASTER ARC
::11(4)
: 'MiN
ii r-~:- Ii
16301
T
;t~
20.0
,5061
::
~
UP TO AVE SHE!.VES
MAY BE POSITIONED
AT 1 INCH INCREMENTS
WITHIN THE MIN-MAX
SHOWN ABOVE.
3.5
1691
CASTER ARC
TEK LAB CART MODEL 3/30
MODEL 206/2060
Recommended For:
Computer terminals , calculators, and peripherals.
General instruments, laboratory and office equip·
ment. Maximum top surface weight is 100 lb.
MODEL 206 includes brakes on caster at one
end of cart. Plastic laminate on top tray and base.
Net weight is 13.6 kg , (30 Ib). Shipping weight is
17.2 kg (38 Ib).
ORDERING INFORMATION
Model 206 Light Gray Vinyl Finish ............ $210
Model 2060 Brown Vinyl Finish ................ $210
Recommended For:
Maximum recommended weight 65 Ibs on tray
top. 5100, 5400, and 7000 Series three and four
plug-in oscilloscopes, TM 503, and TM 504 mounted on top tray.
TM 503, TM 504 mounted on shelves.
MODEL 3 includes drawer in base with provision
for padlock, brakes on all casters, power distribution module (four outlets and 15 It cord) , removable scope lock-down bar on top tray, one shelf,
one safety belt, UL listed. Net weight is 25.8 kg,
(57 Ib). Shipping weight is 34 kg , (75Ib).
ORDERING INFORMATION
Model 3 Blue Vinyl Finish .••...••.••..•••...••..•. $525
Model 3D Brown Vinyl Finish ................... $525
INTERNATIONAL VERSION deletes
module for shipment outside U.S.A.
power
Order Option 01 ................................................................
Ne
The Model 3 is shown with the 436-0132-01 Optional Shelf.
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Extra shelf with four mounting screws. Net weight
is 0.4 kg (0.9 Ib). Shipping weight is 1.4 kg (3Ib).
Order 436-0132-01 ...••.••••.•••••.••..•••••.••.••.•••.. $37
SAFETY BELT to secure instruments on top
tray, shelves, or base 42 inch. (Not needed for
5000 or 7000 Series scopes on top tray.) Net
weight is 0.23 kg (0.5 Ib). Shipping weight is
0.45 kg (lib).
Order 346-0136-01 •..••.•.•.•••.•.••..••.••.•..••..••... $24
For 7000 or 5000 Plug-in Storage on shelves contact Modified Products.
TEK PROBES
PJL.SE RESpoNSE
so the probes match at high frequency as well
as low frequencies.
TEKTRONIX INSTRUMENT
PROBES
FET Probes
FET probes include active components (field effect transistors) rather than passive components.
This FET results in a higher impedance without
loss of signal. Also due to an offset control, the
dynamic range of the system is substantially increased. Since FET probes have a selectable SOohm output impedance, the FET probe can drive
a SO-ohm cable. This capability allows the distance from the probe tip to the instrument to be
limited only by the bandwidth limit of the coaxial
cable.
A probe can be any conductor used to establish
a connection between the circuit under test and
the measuring instrument. This conductor could
be a piece of bare wire, a multimeter lead, or a
piece of unterminated coaxial cable. However,
these "simple probes" do not fulfill the basic purpose of a probe; that is to extract minimal energy and transmit it faithfully . The barewire can
load the input amplifier with a short circuit;
multi meter leads are unshielded and are often
susceptible to stray pickup; and unterminated
coax will severely capacitively load the circuit under test (100 pF per meter typical) . Also, the
unterminated coax is usually resonant at frequencies related to the electrical length of the
cable and will not faithfully transfer signals to the
test instrument.
In an effort to minimize the reflection problem associated with unterminated coaxial cable and to
reduce the effect of cable capacitance ,
Tektronix has been designing and manufacturing
instrument probes for more than 30 years.
Many years ago Tektronix obtained a patent for
a resistive-wire , center-conductor probe cable
that minimized reflections . By extending this
technology, present probe cable manufactured
by Tektronix can faithfully transfer a signal frequency that exceeds 300 MHz and presents only
30 pF per meter to a circuit. When employed in a
lOX passive probe.
This resistive center-conductor probe/cable, and
its inherent distributed capacity tends to limit the
frequency response of an associated probe, but
good bandwidth characteristics are obtained by
careful termination.
_lion . .
PlDHMd
I
i~--~'l'c.or~
~~~
!~ j
C':!.~ ___ J
= ~~
r---------------------,
l1KQ
~o
I
II
1I
1
I
I
I
I
I
II
I
I
'~~I!
,_
c""~
II
i
L _____________________ J
To reduce capacitive loading , most modern
probes use a lOX compensated voltage divider.
This divider is adjusted to be "flat" (to have the
same attenuation at all frequencies across the
frequency band of use). This type of compensated voltage divider decreases both the resistive
loading and capacitive loading by a factor of 10.
Because of the basic laws of reciprocity between time and frequency domains, the bandwidth roll-off of a probe must be smooth . A
sharp cut-off in the frequency domain will cause
ringing in the time domain. And, since a sharp
discontinuity in the time domain can cause ringing in the frequency domain, time domain reflections also must be minimized. Sharply peaking a
probe to extend its frequency response will
cause the probe to be underdamped and it will
exhibit ringing when used to view an input step
function .
426
Zo Probes
probes provide the lowest input capacitance
(typically 1 pF for high frequency signals) and
are used with high frequency , 50-ohm -input
scopes. Zo probes provide the most consistent
probe loading because they exhibit a frequency
response that is essentially flat .
TYPES OF PROBES
Tektronix probe products include active voltage
probes and active and passive current probes,
high voltage probes, low impedance/high frequency probes and differential probes.
Current Probes
Current probes provide a method to measure the
current flowing in a circuit. For instance, their use
can eliminate the calculations that would be required to determine the current from the voltage
drop across a current sampling resistor.
Two types of current probes are available, the
traditional ac only probe and the "Hall effect"
type. Ac only current probes use a transformer
to convert current flux into ac signals and have a
frequency response from a few hundred hertz to
100 MHz. Hall effect current probes use semiconductors to provide a frequency response
from dc to SO MHz.
A current probe is used by clipping its jaws
around the wire that is carrying the current to be
measured. Because it is "non-invasive", a current
probe imposes less loading than other probes
(typically less than a few nanohenrys in series
with the wire at a capacitance of less than 1 pF).
Differential current measurements are made by
passing the two wires (in correct phase) through
the current probe jaws.
The CT5 increases the high-current measuring
capability of most current probes by either 20:1
or 1000:1.
Differential Probes
Tektronix oscilloscope plug-ins are available with
high common rejection ratio (7A13 with 10,000:1 ,
the 5A13 with 100,000:1, and the 5A22 with
1,000,000:1). The normal lOX probe has a typical
accuracy of ± 1% and gives a differential measurement accuracy of two parts per 100. Using
this lOX probe, the common mode rejection ratio
0f a scope/probe combination would be no better than SO:1. The use of a matched pair of
P6055 differential probes allows the user to adjust the attenuation of the probes for compatibility with the various Tektronix plug-ins. This attenuation adjustment includes probe compensation
High Voltage Probes
Several high voltage probes are available from
Tektronix that provide 100X or loooX compensated dividers. Because these probes are primarily designed for high voltage applications, input capacitance is reduced to approximately
3 pF by the high division ratio.
PROBE SELECTION CRITERIA
Since proper probe selection will extend and enhance instrument performance while imprudent
probe selection often reduces performance ,
thoughtful consideration of probe characteristics
will help ensure that the performance of your instrument meets your application requirements .
The purpose of a probe is to extract minimum
energy from the circuit under test and transfer it
to a measuring instrument with maximum fidelity.
While the major considerations for an appropriate probe are its loading and fidelity, physical
parameters such as probe length and tip adaptors are required to establish the phYSical connection to the circuit under test and can be
equally important considerations.
Bandwidth/Risetime
The bandwidth/rise time of a probe can be defined as the maximum -3 dB frequency a user
can expect with a scope/probe system. The
bandwidth is rolled off to ensure minimum pulse
aberrations . In most probes, the band width/rise time product is close to 0.35 and in
most cases the bandwidth is verified by pulse
risetime to ensure minimum aberrations. To accurately define these parameters, the source impedance is specified as a terminated SO-ohm
system (i.e., 25 ohm).
Aberrations
A high frequency probe that is specified without
limiting aberrations can be very misleading. Existing aberrations can indicate a severely distorted
bandwidth/roll-off characteristic.
Maximum Voltage
The maximum voltage (dc + peak ac) should be
specified to ensure a usable , upper voltage
range. At Tektronix, probes are tested to two
times the rated voltage plus 1000 V RMS in accordance with standard safety procedures.
TEK
Voltage Derating with Frequency
This specification is applicable for all high frequency probes. Either the termination elements
or the resistive center conductor in the probe cable limit the maximum voltage that may be applied to a probe at a specific frequency. This
derating applies at frequencies above 100 kHz.
TYPICAL
P6130Rp)(p
10
"
10- 2
TYPICAL P6130
VOLTAGE DERATING
.1
Frequency (MHz)
10
100
,,
~
"
1000
, ,,
l\
"
1000
6
....
10
\
""
'"
l\
,,~
~
I'..
10- 5
10-4
10- 3
10- 2
10- 1
Frequency (GHz)
Maximum Current (CW)
The maximum current probe sinewave current
that can be measured with the probe without
distortion.
Compensation Range
The range of a scope's input capacitance over
which a specific probe will compensate to provide a flat frequency/attenuation ratio .
Maximum Current (pulse)
The maximum pulse current that can be measured with the probe without distortion limited by
Amp-Second (A-S) product.
Probe Length
Most Tektronix probes are available with cable
lengths of 1, 2, or 3 meters. Probe cable lengths
should be kept as short as possible because extra length decreases the bandwidth and increases the loading capacitance of the probe. A
longer probe cable also has a greater propagation delay (typical 4 ns/meter).
Amp-Second Product
The maximum integral of the current pulse waveform that may be measured without distortion.
Maximum Dc
At levels lower than the RMS current, dc will saturate some of the current probes causing distortion insertion impedance. The impedance reflected into the circuit being measured is normally in
the form of resistance and inductance.
Probe Tip Accessories
A wide variety of adaptors are available to mechanically connect the probe to the circuit under
test (see catalog page 442). Since the probe tip
conducts very little current many materials that
are considered good conductors have high resistance at low current levels. The Tektronix probe
tip has an alloy coating to minimize current conduction problems.
Attenuator Ratio
When correctly terminated, a probe should have
a flat attenuation ratio with frequency gradually
decreasing to 3 dB below the attenuator ratio at
the rated bandwidth .
Probe Coding
Probe coding provides the user with an indication of the actual probe tip sensitivity. This coding eliminates the need to divide by the
attentuation ratio or remember which probe is
being used.
Modularity
The Tektronix modular probe concept provides
users with an economic design. Portions of a
damaged probe are easily replaceable. Modular
probe parts snap together and can be assembled without tools so maintenance and repair are
less expensive.
Probe Loading
Input resistance and capacitance are used to
determine the loading effect of a probe. But,
these low frequency parameters are erroneous
miss loading at high frequency. Curves showing
typical values of the in-phase (Rp) and out-ofphase (Xp) reactance over the probe's frequency range are included in the users manual for
each Tektronix probe.
427
PROBES
TEK RECOMMENDED
FET PROBES
Where higher frequencies (above 250 MHz) are
encountered , active FET probes that have high
input resistance and low input capacitance
through their dynamic range should be used.
50 n DIVIDER PROBES· 1
For 50 n systems, see adjacent selection chart of
50 n divider probes. For risetime measurements,
the interaction of the probe capacitance with the
source impedance is important (RC time constant). For best results , the capacitance should
be kept minimal. Typical probe specifications represent their response to a 25 n source
environment.
Input Limits
Type
P6046
Diff/Amp
A current waveform may be very different from a
voltage waveform in a current-dependent circuit.
Measuring only the voltage will not show this difference . A measurement of the current waveform
is necessary to obtain the total picture.
Attn Length"'
Package Number
Loading
Risetime
in ns
dc +
pk ac
IX
lOX
6.0
010-0232-00 Std
Inc PS & Amp
1 Mil
10 Mil
10 pF
3 pF
3.5
± 25 V
± 250 V
±5 V
± 50 V
P8201
FET
1X
lOX
100X
6.0
010-6201-01 Std
Inc PS & Amp
100 kll
1 Mil
1 Mil
3 pF
1.5 pF
1.5 pF
0.4
± 100 V
± 200 V
± 200 V
± 0.6 V
± 6V
± 60V
P8202A
FET
lOX
100X
2m
010-6202-03 Std
W/010-0384-00 Atn
10 Mil
10 Mil
2 pF
2 pF
0.7
0.7
± 200 V
± 200 V
± 6V
± 60 V
ReadOut
Page
NO
432
± 5.6 V
± 56 V
± 200 V
YES
435
± 55 V
± 200 V
YES
NO
431
Input Limits
Maximum
linear
in ns
dc +
pk ac
Dynamic
Range
ReadOut
0.1
± 16 V
± 16 V
YES
432
100X
6.0
010-6057-03 Std
5 kll
1 pF
0.25
± 50 V
010-6057-05
9.0
, For use with 50 [/ Input amplifiers
2 Length In feet except where specified.
± 50 V
YES
432
Risetime
Type
P6056
Attn Length"'
lOX
Package Number
6.0
9.0
Loading
010-6056-03 Std
010-6056-05
1 pF
500 Il
P60S7
CURRENT PROBES
To measure currents from dc to 1000 A, see the
adjacent selection chart of current probes.
Current probes can be used where low loading of
the circuit is necessary. Loading is typically in the
milliohm to low ohm range . Current probes can be
used for differential measurements; where the
probe measures the results of two opposing currents in two conductors in the jaw of the probe.
linear
Dc
Dynamic Offset
Range Range
Maximum
Current/Div Scope at
Saturation
Pulse
Dc
Amp-S
Bandwidth
Type
A8302/
AM 503
A6302/
AM 503
with CT-5
Hz to MHz
50
1 mA to 5A
0.5
20
20 mA to 5 kA"'
dc
15
10 mA to 50 A
Term
120
134
CT/S
12
60
38
120
20
A8303/
AM 503
Maximum Current
ac
pop
D ,ate
ac
+ pk
Amp
1 MHz
50
1.2 kHz
50 k
20 kHz
500
5 MHz
5 MHz
250
15
0.5
2000 300 Hz 1.2 kHz
50 k
20
0.5
2000 230 Hz 1.2 kHz
15 k
lor 10
0.2
0.2
9 x 10-'
Amps
Product
Amp
Amp
20
100 x 10-'
20
40
Below
Peak
Pulse
Above
mA/ mV
10 mV/div
dc
dc
40 k
0.1
100
10,000 x 10- '
0.5
0.5 x 10- 3
0.5
0.5 x 10
100
20 Hz
200
Page
Page
434
375
434,
375
435
P6021
Passive
2 or 10
1 mA to lA"'
3
15
15
300 Hz
230 Hz
Passive
Term
CT-S/
134
12
20
40 or 10 kA
20 mA to 1 kA-'
20
436
435
P8022
Passive
Term
134
8.5 k 200
100 65
3 kHz
10 MHz
100
9 x 10 •
6
6
CT-1
30 k 1000
5 mV/mA
0.2
1 x 10- '
1.4
100
436
CT-2
1.2 k 100
1 mV/mA
0.2
50 x 10- '
7
100
436
1 mAto 1A-'
1.3 kHz 10 MHz
15
" Scope at 10 mV/div
-2 Scope at 50 mV/div
OTHER PROBES
Recommended Probes-For 7000 Series see
page 230, for 5000 Series see page 291 , for 400
Series see the individual instrument description.
428
Probe
Package Number
Function
Use
P6048
010-0215-00
Low Capacitance 1 pF, 1 kll
400 Series
Page
P8058A
010-0260-00
010-6058-01
Temperature and
Voltage Probe
OM 501 , 7D13A
432
P6430
010-6430-00
Temperature Probe
OM 44, OM 502
352
P6104
010-6104-00
Voltage Probe
465M
430
40 kV
010-0277-00
High Voltage Dc Probe
2337, OM 501 A, OM 502A
300
P6451
010-6451 -03
Data Acquisition Probe
7001
P8401
010-6401-01
Logic Probe
TTL Logic
77,430
77,430,433
P8406
010-6406-01
Word Recognizer
308
P6420
010-6420-03
RF Probe for OMM's
2337, OM 501A, OM 502A, OM 44
77
P8801
010-6601 -01
Temperature Probe
OM 501A, OM 502A, 7013A
354
P8125
010-6125-01
Digital CounterfTimer Probe, 5X
Attenuation
DC 503A, DC 504, DC 505A,
DC 508, DC 509
362
433,354
TEK
RECOMMENDED
PROBES
PASSIVE PROBES
For amplitude measurements, the capacitance
and resistance of the probe form a voltage
divider with the circuit under test. For low frequency (about 5 MHz and below), the resistive
component is of primary importance in most
probes and should be at least two orders of
magnitude greater than the circuit source imped-
ance. For higher frequencies (greater than about
30 MHz), the importance of the capacitance
increases drastically and will become the prime
consideration.
For general-purpose use, passive voltage probes
offer a wide probe selection for a variety of
applications for 1 Mf! inputs.
Modular probes are an exciting new concept in
probe design. The P6101 , P6105, P6106, P6107,
P6108, P6120 and P6149 Probes divide into three
modules (probe heads, cables , and
connector/compensation boxes).
VOLTAGE PROBES FOR 1 MO INPUTS
MODULAR
LENGTW'
(m)
PACKAGE
NUMBER
USEFUL
BW MHz""
DC
MAXIMUM
IX
1.0
2.0
3 .0
010-S101 -01
010-SI01 -03
010-SI01 -05
1 Mil
SCOPE C IN pF
32.0 pF
54.0 pF
78.0 pF
34.0
15.5
8.0
500 V
ANY
PS105
lOX
1.0
2.0
3.0
01 O-SI 05-01
01 O-SI 05-03
010-SI05-05
10 Mil
10.5 pF
13.0 pF
15.5 pF
100.0
100.0
95.0
500 V
15 to 47
YES
PS10S
lOX
1.0
2.0
3.0
010-SI0S-01
010-SI0S-03
010-SI0S-05
10 Mil
10.5 pF
13.0 pF
15.5 pF
300.0"
250.0
150.0
500 V
15 to 24
YES
PS107
lOX
2.0
010-S107-03
10 Mil
13.0 pF
100.0"
500 V
15 to 47
YES
PS108
lOX
1.0
2.0
3.0
010-SI08-01
010-6108-03
01 O-SI 08-05
10 Mil
10.5 pF
13.0 pF
15.5 pF
100.0
100.0
95.0
500 V
15 to 47
NO
PS120
lOX
1.5
3.0
010-S120-01
010-SI20-05
10 Mil
10 Mil
14.0 pF
17.0 pF
SO.O
SO.O
500 V
500 V
23 to 51
23 to 43
NO
PS125
5X
1.5
010-SI25-01
5 Mil
20.0 pF
200.0
250 V
15 to 33
NO
357, 359, 3S2
PS130
lOX
10.0 pF
250.0
500 V
15 to 47
YES
437
lOX
010-SI30-01
010-SI30-03
010-SI30-05
010-SI49-03
10 Mil
PS149
1.5
2.0
3.0
2.0
10 Mil
15.5 pF
50.0
500 V
20 to S2
NO
439
USEFUL
BW MHz·'·'
DC
MAXIMUM
PAGE
TYPE
ATTEN
PS10l
LOADING
READOUT
PAGE
438
438
438
439
438
437
MONOLITHIC
LENGTW'
(m)
PACKAGE
NUMBER
SCOPE C IN pF
READOUT
lOX
3 .5
S.O
9.0
12.0
010-0127-00
01 0-01 SO-OO
010-014S-00
010-0148-00
10 Mil
7.5
8.5
11.0
15.0
pF'3
pF
pF
pF
35.0
25.0
25.0
12.0
SOO V
15 to 55
NO
PS007
100X
3.5
S.O
9.0
12.0
010-0150-00
01 0-01 S5-00
010-0152-00
010-0154-00
10 Mil
2.0
2.2
2.4
2.6
pF'3
pF
pF
pF
25.0
20.0
15.0
13.0
1.5 kV
15 to 55
NO
PS008
lOX
3.5
010-0129-00
10 Mil
7.5 pF
100.0
SOO V
12 to 47
NO
PS008
lOX
(Environmentalized)
S.O
010-0129-01
7.5 pF
10 Mil
Environmentalized - 50' C to + 150'C
100.0
SOO V
12 to 47
NO
433
PS009
100X
9.0
9.0
1.5 kV
12 to 47
NO
YES
440
P6010
PS015
lOX
1000X
3.5
10.0
010-0170-00
10 Mil
2.5 pF
120.0
010-0264-01
100.0
2.5 pF
Furnished with 5-5 . For other uses see PS105 or PSI OS.
010-0172-00
100 Mil
440
PS028
IX
3.5
S.O
9.0
12.0
010-0074-00
010-0075-00
010-007S-00
010-0077-00
1 Mil
PS048
lOX
S.O
010-0215-00
1 kll
1.0 pF
PS053B
lOX
3 .5
S.O
9.0
01 0-6053-11
010-S053-13
010-S053-15
10 Mil
9.5 pF
12.5 pF
13.5 pF
PS055"
lOX
3 .5
010-S055-01
1 Mil
10.0 pF
PSOSO'3
lOX
3 .5
S.O
010-S0S0-01
010-S060-03
1 Mil
PSOS2B
lOX or IX
3 .5
010-S0S2-11
lOX or IX
S.O
010-S0S2-13
lOX or IX
9.0
010-S062-15
lOX or IX
3.5
010-S0S3-11
lOX or IX
6.0
010-6063-13
TYPE
ATTEN
PSOOS
PSOS3B
" Length in feet except where specified.
' 2 To convert to uhf connectors, use adapter 103-0015-00.
' 3 Rating varies with scopes having other than 20 pF inputs.
'. Designed for use with scopes having differential inputs.
LOADING
3.0 pF
50.0
S7.0
90.0
112.0
pF
pF
pF
pF
7.5 pF'3
8.5 pF
440
75.0
20 kV
12 to 47
NO
17.0
10.0
7.0
4.0
SOO V
ANY
YES
100.0
20 V
15 to 20
NO
200.0
200.0
115.0
500 V
15 to 24
YES'·
SO.O
500 V
20 to 47
YES
35.0
25.0
500 V
15 to 55
YES's
432
441
10
1
10
1
10
1
Mil
Mil
Mil
Mil
Mil
Mil
13.5
100.0
14.0
105.0
17.0
135.0
pF
pF
pF
pF
pF
pF
100.0
8.0
100.0
S.O
95.0
4.5
500 V
15 to 47
YES
10
1
10
1
Mil
Mil
Mil
Mil
11.0
80.0
14.0
105.0
pF
pF
pF
pF
200.0
12.0
200.0
S.O
500 V
15 to 24
YES
441
441
441
Not compatible with CRT readout.
'625 fI source.
' 7 Typically 300 MHz at probe tip with scope bandwidth at /east 325 MHz.
'. Trace identification button.
'5
429
PROBES
TEK RECOMMENDED
PROBE/INSTRUMENT COMPATIBILITY
For quick reference only, identify correct probe types (X1, X10, X100 etc.) from this chart and preceeding charts, or call your Tektronix Sales Representative or the Tek National Marketing Center for assistance.
INSTRUMENT
PROBES
INSTRUMENT
I
PASSIVE
ACTIVE
PROBES
PASSIVE
CURRENT
I
ACTIVE
CURRENT
TM 500 SERIES
7000 SERIES
A6302/AM 503
A6303/ AM 503
DC 508A
P6t2S
P6t08
P60S6
P60t5
P6009
P6105
P602t
P6022
SC 501
SC 502
SC 503
P60t5
P6009
P602t
P6022
P6062B
P6007
P60t3A
P60tS
P602t
P6tOt
P6tOS
P6062B
P6tOt
P6028
P6t08
P6060
SC 504
P6tOt
P6t08
P6062
P6009
P602t
P6022
P6t06
P6tOt
P6063B
P60t5
P6009
P6t30
P620t
P6202A
P602t
P6022
A6302/AM 503
7A18
P6tOt
P6tOS
P6062B
P60t5
P6009
P6202
P602t
A6302/ AM 503
7A19
P6056
P6057
P620t
P6202A
A6302/AM 503
A6303/AM503
7A22
P6tOt
P6062B
7A24
P6056
P60S7
7A26
P6063B
P6048
7All
Built in FET Probe
7A13
P6055
P6tOt
P6062B
7A15A
7A16A
7A29
P6056
P6057
7020
P6053B
P6055
P60 t 5
P6009
400 SERIES
485
P6tOt
P6t06
P6056
P60S7
P6063B
P60tS
P6009
P6048
P6t30
P620t
P6202
P602t
P6022
A6302/AM S03
A6303/ AM S03
475A
475
P6tOt
P6t06
P6063B
P6t30
P60tS
P6009
P6048
P620t
P6202
P602t
P6022
A6302/AM S03
A6303/ AM S03
4658
465
468
P6tOt
P6tOS
P062B
P60tS
P6OO9
P6048
P620t
P6202
P602t
P6022
A6302/ AM S03
A6303/ AM S03
465M
P6tOt
P6t04
P60tS
P6009
P620t
P6202
P602t
P6022
A6302/AM S03
A6303/AM S03
455
P6tOt
P6tOS
P6062B
P60tS
P6009
P6202
P602t
P6022
A6302/AM S03
A6303/AM S03
466
464
P6tOt
P6tOS
P6062B
P60tS
P6009
P6202
P620t
P602t
P6022
A6302/AM S03
A6303/AM S03
434
P6tOt
P6t08
P6009
P60tS
P6t20
P602t
A6302/AM 503
P620t
P6202A
A6302/ AM 503
A6303/AM 503
P620t
P6202A
P6022
A6302/AM 503
A6303/ AM 503
P620t
P6202A
A6302/ AM 503
A6303/AM 503
5000 SERIES
5A14N
P6tOt
P6t08
P6062B
P60t5
P6007
A6302/ AM 503
P602t
5A15N
P6tOt
P6t08
P6062B
P60t5
P6007
A6302/ AM 503
P602t
5A18N
P6tOt
P6t08
P6062B
P60t5
P6OO7
P602t
A6302/AM 503
5A21N
P6tOt
P6055
P602t
5A22N
P6tOt
P6055
5A26
P6tOt
P60SS
P602t
5A38
P6tOt
P6tOS
P6062B
P60tS
P6009
5A45
P6tOt
P6tOS
P6062B
5A48
5010
P602t
P6022
A6302/ AM S03
305, 314, 323
326, 335
P6tOt
P6t49
P60t5
P6009
P602t
P6022
A6302JAM S03
390AD
P6tOt
P6062B
P6tOS
P60tS
P602t
P6022
P6tOt
P6tOS
P6062B
P60tS
P6009
P602t
P6022
A6320/ AM 503
P6t20
P6062B
P6OO7"'
P602t
A6302/ AM S03
A6303/AM S03
P6tOt
P6007
P6062B
P6tOS
P60tS
P6tOt
P6t08
P6009"'
P60tS
P60SS
P6tOt
P6420
40 kV(Ot 0-0277-00)
DC
DC
DC
DC
P6t2S
P6t08
P602t, P6022
A6302/ AM S03
A6303/AM S03
T900 SERIES
T935A, T932A
T922R, T921
T912
P602t
2200 SERIES
P602t
A6302
A6303
OM 501A
OM 502A
OM 505
430
P6404
P64St -OS
P6t07
AM 503
503A
504
505A
509
300 SERIES
308
TM 500 SERIES
AM 502
P602t
P6022
A6302/AM S03
A6303/AM S03
2213 /2215
P6t20
233S/2336/2337
P6tOt
P6009
P6062B
"' For T935A and T932A only
"' For T922R, T921 and T912 only
P602t, P6022
P6t08
P60tS
P602t
P6022
TEK
P6201
FET PROBES
FET POWER SUPPLY
loading. Plug-on attenuator heads provide higher
input resistance and reduced input capacitance.
Dc to 900 MHz
P6202A Dc to 500 MHz
The probe derives its power from the probe
power jack on many Tek scopes or an 1101 FET
Power Supply.
!
Unity Gain
Two Plug-on Attenuator Heads that
Maintain Scope Readout Factor
Low Input Capacitance
CHARACTERISTICS
P6201
P6202
< 0_7 ns
Risetime
< 0.4 ns
Bandwidth (verified by
risetime)
> 900 MHz
> 500 MHz
Attenuation
Xt
X10
Attenuation Accuracy
±3%
±4%
Input Resistance
100 kll
10 M
Input Capacitance
2 pF
3 pF
10 M·
Input R with Attenuator
1 Mil
Input C with Attenuator
1.5 pF
2 pF·
Dynamic Range
±0.6 V
±6.0 V
Dynamic Range with
±60 v·
Attenuator
±6Vor ±60V
Dc Offset Range
± 5.6 V
±55 V
Noise
150 ~V
300 ~V
Maximum Input Probe
Only
+ 100 V peak
+200 V peak
Derated above
60 MHz
2 MHz
20 V at
Derated to - at
5 V at
Frequency
500 MHz
300 MHz
Maximum Input With
200 V peak
200 V peak·
Attenuator
Derated above
150 MHz·
50 MHz
Derate to - at
5 V at
70 V at
400 MHz·
Frequency
500 MHz
Ac Coupling - 3 dB
Low Frequency
10 Hz
16 Hz
Dc Offset
High Input Impedance through Freq Range
Small Probe Size
·Optional accessory
Dc Offset
Ac-Dc Coupling Switch
The P6201 is an active (FET) probe providing
unity gain and dc to 900 MHz bandwidth. The
P6201 is the best general-purpose probe wilhin
its voltage range from the standpoint of electrical
performance. Very low input capacitance permits
acquisition of high frequency signals with minimum loading of circuits under test while high
input resistance minimizes low frequency and dc
11 01
FET Power Supply
~ nPI 1101
(j)
"ccesSOfty POWER SUPPLY
(j)
"'''OWUOUT
.--:-
' ' ' 11 11
.,
•
The 110 Accessory Power Supply provides power
for active probes such as the Tektronix P6201 ,
and P6202A when they are used with oscilloscopes that do not have a probe power supply.
The 1101 will provide power for up to four probes.
Output power features short-circuit protection. A
platform base provides storage for the power
cord .
P6201 INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Tip, probe, retractable (CG, 013-0135-00); attenuator head
lOX (010-0376-00); attenuator head 100X (010-0377-00); 3
tips, probe (CO, 206-0200-00); lead, ground, 30 em (12 inch)
(DB, 175-0848-02); contact, ground (CM 131 -1302-00); tip,
probe (CJ, 103-0164-00); clip, alligator (AS, 344-0046-00); insulating sleeve, electrical (CK, 166-0557-00); insulator, ground
contact (CL, 342-0180-00); carrying case (016-0156-02).
With its standard Tektronix power connector the
P6202A can be used on any instrument that has
standard probe power. The very low input capacitance of the probe permits acquisition of high frequency signals with a minimum loading of circuits
under test while the high input resistance minimizes low frequency and dc loading.
ORDERING INFORMATION
P6201 FET Probe Order 010-6201-01
The probe has a dc offset feature to offset any
dc component within the range of the control to
bring the signal into the dynamic range of the
probe.
$1,090
CHARACTERISTICS
output Voltages - + 15 V dc ±0.75%; - 15 V dc ±1.5%;
+ 5 V de ±2.0%.
Output Currents - 400 mA each supply (short-circuit
protected).
Ripple - .. 1 mV with 400 mA load (each supply).
Ac Input Voltages - Selectable, 90 to 136 V ac or 180 to
272 V ac.
Line Frequency - 50 to 400 Hz.
Power - High Range: 39 W (390 mAl maximum at 115 V ac,
60 Hz. Low Range: 47 W (455 mAl maximum at 115 V ac,
60 Hz.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dimensions
mm
in
5_3
Width
132
Height
79
3.1
Depth
209
8.3
Weight
kg
Ib
3_5
Net
1.6
The P6202A derives its power from the probe
power jack on many of Tek scopes or an 1101
Power Supply.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Tip, probe, retractable (CB, 013-0097-01); two clips, alligator
(AS, 344-0046-00); holder, probe (352-0351-00); lead, ground,
7.5 cm (3 inch) (DC, 175-0849-00); adjustment toci, probe (CP,
003-0675-01); carrying case (016-0378-00); lead, ground,
13 cm (6 inch) (DE, 175-1017-00); two tips, probe, replaceable·; insulating sleeve, electrical (BP, 166-0404-01).
·Available in package of 10 only, Order 206-0230-03 (eF).
ORDERING INFORMATION
P6202A FET Probe, 2 Meter Cable,
Order 010-6202-03 ,•••• ,••• ,••••• ,••••• ,•• ,••• "." $583
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
P6202A lOX Attenuator_
Order 01 0-0384-00 ..........................................................._ $65
P6202A Ac Coupling Cap.
Order 010-0360-00 ............................................ _.. _.......... __ $32
ORDERING INFORMATION
1101 Accessory Power Supply,
Powers to four P6201 or P6202A Probes ", •• " ••• ,••• $535
For Accessory products, you can order diract by calling 800-426-2200 extension 99_In Oregon call collect (503) 627-9000 extension 99.
431
PURPOSE
PROBES
TEK SPECIAL
P6046
Dc to 100 MHz Differential
P6056
P6057
P6048
Dc to 3.5 GHz 10X 500 0
Dc to 200 MHz 10X
Dc to 1.4 GHz 100X 5000 0
i,
I
•
~
I
•
g
•
1000:1 CMRR at 50 MHz
±250 V Maximum Voltage with
10X Attenuator
Dual Probe Tips for Greater CMRR
at High Frequencies
The P6046 Differential Probe and P6046 Amplifier
Unit provide new measurement capabilities with
all Tektronix oscilloscopes. The differential-signal
processing takes place in the probe itself, resulting in high common-mode signal rejection at
higher frequencies . Differential probe-tip signal
processing minimizes the measurement errors
caused by differences in probes, cable lengths,
and input attenuators.
CHARACTERISTICS
CMRR - With deflection factors of 1 mV/div to 20 mV/div: at
least 10.000: 1 at 50 kHz. 5,000: 1 at 1 MHz. and 1.000: 1 at
50 MHz. Common-mode Linear Dynamic Range - ± 5 v.
± 50 V with lOX attenuator. Bandwidth - Dc to 100 MHz
1- 3 dB). Risetime - 3.5 ns or less. Oeflection Factor Range
- 1 mV/div to 200 mV/div in B calibrated steps. 1-2-5 sequence. accurate within 3% (with an OSCilloscope deflection
factor of 10 mV/div). Input RC - 1 Mil paralleled by 10 pF or
less. Input Coupling - Ac or dc. selected by a switch on the
probe. Low frequency response ac-coupled is - 3 dB at 20 Hz.
2 Hz with lOX attenuator. Displayed Noise - 2BO ~V or less
(tangentially measured). Maximum Input Voltage ± 25 V
dc + peak ac). ± 250 V with lOX attenuation. derated with
requency . Output Impedance - 50 II through a BNC-connector. 50 II termination supplied with amplifier for use with 1 Mil
systems. Probe Cable - 6 It long. terminated with special
nine-pin connector.
I
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Termination , 50 II (BR. 011-0049-01); coaxial cable. (RF.
012-0076-00); hanger assembly (014-0029-00); carrying case
(016-0111 -01); lOX attenuator (010-0361-00); amp and power
supply (015-0106-00); dual attenuator head (010-0361-00);
probe tip. swivel; spring ground contact ; connector test point
lack.
ORDERING INFORMATION
P6046 FET Differential Probe, Amplifier,
and Power Supplv Order 010-0232-00 • $1,640
Without Amplifier ana Power Supply,
Order 010-0213-00 ........ ___............................ ___._ ............. $853
Power Supply with Amplifier
Order 015-0108-00 .......... _...................... _........ _.......... _... $808
432
Low Capacitive Loading, 1 pF or Less
For 50
n Wide Band
Scopes
< 70 ps Probe to Probe Variation
The P6056 is a miniature low-capacitance probe
for use with 50 0 wide-band oscilloscopes. Bandwidth is dc to 3.5 GHz. This probe can also be
used with 50 0 sampling systems, with an appropriate BNC adaptor. The P6056 is equipped with
a special BNC connector that provides trace
identification and CRT Readout information when
used with plug-in units and mainframes that have
these features . A convenient button on the probe
activates the trace identification function .
CHARACTERISTICS
Risetime
P6056
P6057
< 100 ps
< 250 ps
Minimum Loading 1 pF to 1 kO
Ac/dc Switch
The P6048 is a miniature low capacitance probe
for use with 1 MO 20 pF oscilloscopes. The probe
input impedance of 1 kO paralleled by 1 pF is
intended for applications where capacitor loading
may distort the circuit waveforms. Ac or dc coupling switch is available to extend the measurement range.
Input Z @ Dc
500 II
5 kll
CHARACTERISTICS
Input Z @ 1 GHz
300 II
1500 II
Attenuation - lOX.
Input Resistance - 1 kll.
Input CapaCitance - 1 pF or less.
Maximum Input - Dc 20 V; ac 200 V.
Ac Low Frequency - 7 kHz or less.
Bandwidth - (With 250 MHz oscilloscope with 1 MIl/20 pF
input) 175 MHz.
Typical Probe Risetime - 1.95 ns.
Maximum Dc
+
Peak Ac
Derated Above
Maximum Peak @ 1 GHz
Maximum Peak Pulse
16V
50 V
BOO MHz
500 MHz
9V
21 V
500 V < 1 ms
500 V < 1 ms
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Clip. alligator (AS. 344-0046-00); lead. ground. 75 mm (3 inch)
(DA 175-0249-00); tip. hook probe (BU. 206-0114-00); tip.
probe bayonet (BM. 013-00B5-00); contact. electrical (BO
214-0283-00).
ORDERING INFORMATION
P6056 10X, 50 n Probe,
6 ft, Order 010-6056-03 ..................................
9 ft, Order 010-6056-05 ..................................
P6057 100X, 50
n Probe,
6 ft, Order 010-6057-03 ................................ ..
9 ft, Order 010-6057·05 ................................ ..
$154
$154
$159
$159
Included Accessories with double alpha codes are pictured
on pages 442 and 443.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Tip. probe. bayonet (BM. 013-00B5-00); tip, probe retractable
hook (CA. 013-0090-00); two insulating sleeve. electrical (BP.
166-0404-01); two clips. alligator (AS. 344-0046-00); lead.
grou~d. 13 cm (5 inch) (175-0124-01); insulating sleeve. ground
lead (eN . 166-0433-00); tip. hook probe (BU . 206-0114-00);
lead, ground. 7.5 cm (3 Inch) (00.175-0263-01); holder. probe
(352-0090-00).
P6048 10X Probe, 6 ft,
Order 010-0215-00 ................................. $196
TEK
P6401
Logic Probe
P6420
RF Probe
10 kHz to 1 GHz Bandwidth
Dc V output/RMS of Sine Input
Illuminated Probe Tip Indicates Logic Level
The small, lightweight, hand-held P6401 indicates
the state of logic levels in TIL, DTL, or any other
system with threshold between 0.7 and 2.15 volts.
A strobe input can be used to detect the coincidence of logic signals at two points. An indication
of whether a logic pulse has or has not occurred
can be obtained in a "store" mode.
Power may be obtained from the unit under test
or any 5 volt supply.
Two bright lights in the probe tip indicate condition of the logic signal.
CHARACTERISTICS
POWER SUPPLY
Low State Input Voltage Range - 0 V to + 0.7 V ± 0.125 V.
High State Input Voltage Range - 2.175 V ± 0.125 V to
Vee.
Minimum Recognizable Pulle Width - 10 ns.
Impedance - ",7.5 kll paralleled by ",6 pF.
Minimum Circuit Reliltance lor Open Circuit Indication 10 kll.
Maximum Sale Input - ± 150 V (de or RMS).
Minimum Recognlzxable Strobe Pulle Width - 20 ns.
Maximum Sale Strobe Input - ± 30 V (dc or RMS).
Strobe Input Impedance - 5.6 kll within 20%.
Cable Length - 1.5 m (5 It).
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Hook tip, (BU , 206-0114-00); strobe lead (175-0958-01);
strobe lead (175-0958-00); probe lip to 0.025 inch square pin
adaptor (AH , 206-0137-01); white plug (348-0023-00); two alligator clips (AS , 344-0046-00); accessory pouch (016-0537-00).
The P6420 RF probe measures high frequency ac
voltage from 10 kHz to 1 GHz. It provides a dc
output voltage proportional to the RMS value of a
sinewave input compatible with any DMM with an
input resistance of 10 Mf!.
CHARACTERISTICS
Voltage Range - 0.5 V 10 25 V RMS (70.7 V pop).
Ac to Dc Trenller Ratio Accuracy - 0.5 V to 5 V RMS
± 10% (+ 15°C 10 + 35 °C). 5.0 V to 25 V RMS ± 5% (+ 15°C
10 + 35 °C).
Frequency Responle - 100 kHz to 300 MHz ( ± 0.5 dB).
50 kHz to 500 MHz ( ± 1.5 dB), 10kHz to 1 GHz ( ± 3.0 dB).
Input Capacitance - ",3.7 pF.
Maximum Input Voltage - 42.4 V (peak ac + dc).
Temperature Range - Nonoperating: - 55 °C 10 + 75 °C.
Operating: + 15° C to + 35 °C.
Length - Probe only: 96 mm. Cable only: 2 m.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Tip, probe, retractable (CB, 013-0097-01); two clips, alligator
(AS, 344-0046-00); two tips, probe, replaceable· ; insulating
sleeve, electrical (BP, 166-0404-01); lead, ground, 75 mm
(3 inch) (~C, 175-0849-00); lead, ground, 130 mm (6 inch) (DE,
175-1017-00); holder, probe (352-0351-00); adaptor, BNC female to dual banana (103-0090-00).
·Available in package of 10 only, Order 206-0230-04 (eF).
ORDERING INFORMATION
P6420 RF Probe (with 2 m Cable)
Order 010-6420-03 .........••....•••.•••••..••."" $131
P600S
(Environmental) 10X 100 MHz
- 50·C to +150·C Temperature Range
The P6OO8 Environmental Probe is designed to
operate over -50°C to + 150°C for the probe
body and cable; the compensation box operates
from - 15°C to +55°C. It is designed for use
with Tektronix dc to 100 MHz oscilloscopes. The
probe can be compensated to match Tektronix
plug-ins and oscilloscopes with nominal input capacitance of 12 pF to 47 pF and input resistance
to 1 M!l
CHARACTERISTICS
Aftenuation -
lOX.
Input Reliltance -
10 Mil.
Input Capecltance - '" 7.5pF when used with an instrument
having a 20 pF input capacitance.
Bandwidth -
Dc 10 100 MHz.
Voltage Rating - 600 V dc, ac peak, or dc and ac peak combined. pop vollage derating is necessary for cw frequencies
higher than 20 MHz. AI 40 MHz, the maximum allowable pop
voltage is 300 V.
Cable Length -
1.8 m (6 It).
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Plug, tip, banana (AK, 134-0013-00); lead, ground, 300 mm
(12 inch) (BO, 175-0125-01); Clip, alligator (AR, 344-0045-00);
tip, probe, retractable hook (AP, 013-0071-00).
P6008 Environmental 10X Probe
Order 010-0129-01 •..•••..••..••..•••.•••..... "". $210
For a 1 meter length cable only (does not
change specifications)
Order 175-1661-00 ..••.•.•...........•..••...•....••. $27
For a 3 meIer lenglh cable only (does not
change specificalions)
Order 175-1661-02 .....••..•......................•.. $27
P6401 Logic Probe
Order (010-6401-01) •." •.•.••..•.•......•.•....... $148
For accellory productl, you can order direct by calling 800-426-2200 extension 99. In Oregon call collect (503) 627-9000 extension 99.
433
PROBES
TEK CURRENT
CURRENT PROBE AMPLIFIER
A6302/ AM 503
Current Probe
A6303/ AM 503
Current Probe
20 A Ac and Dc Current Measurements
100 A Ac and Dc Current Measurements
Dc to 50 MHz Bandwidth
Peak Pulse Measurement to 500 A
Peak Pulse Measurements to 50 A, 50,000 A
with the CT-5 Current Probe
Ac or Dc Coupling
Ac or Dc Coupling
Small Loading-0.1 {} Insertion Z at 1 MHz,
0.5 {} at 50 MHz
AM 503
25 x 21 mm (1 x 0.83 inch) Jaw Opening
Minimal Loading-0.02 {} Insertion at 1 MHz,
0.15 {} at 15 MHz
CHARACTERISTICS
A6302 and AMS03 A6303 and AM 503
The Tektronix A6302 and A6303 Current Probes
are designed to be used with the AM 503 Current
Probe Amplifier, any TM 500 Power Module and
an oscilloscope. Both probes are used to make
SCR, power supply, industrial control and motor
start-up current measurements. The A6303 is
especially recommended for measuring current in
x-ray tubes to ensure compliance with PL 90-602,
the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of
1968.
Sensitivity Scope
@ 10 mV/div
Accuracy 3%
Bandwidth
Aisetime
Max Current CW
Derated above
Maximum Current
Peak Not to
Exceed A-S product
The A6302 and A6303 are valuable measurement
tools when low loading is important, as when
testing high impedance points or with current
dependent devices.
A-S Product
Both probes make ac or dc coupled current
measurements by the simple act of opening their
sliding jaws and placing them around the conductor to be measured. For differential or sum measurements just place properly phased conductors
in the probe jaw.
Max Conductor
Suggested measurements for the A6302 and
A6303 Current Probes include:
X-ray tube currents
SCR currents
Power supply currents
Motor start-up currents
Industrial control currents
Relay currents
Common-mode rejection of dc and ac currents
434
1 mNdiv to
5 Ndiv
10 mNdivto
50 Ndiv
Dc to 50 MHz
Dc to 15 MHz
7 ns
23 ns
20 A peak
100 A peak
20 kHz
20 kHz
12A@10MHz
2.5 A"if» 10 MHz
50 A
1ooAto~s
500 A
10,000 A to
~s
Insertion Z
0_1!l@5MHz
0_02 !l@ 1 MHz
Insertion Z
0.5!l @50 MHz
0.15 !l @ 15 MHz
500 V
700 V
0.15 inch
0.83 inch
= 30 ns
= 40 ns
Max Hardware Volts
~iameter
System Prop Delay
Cable Length
Noise
2m
2m
0.3 mA
Current Probe Amplifier
The AM 503 Current Probe Amplifier operates in
anyone of the TM 500 power modUles and is connected to either the A6302 or A6303 probes
through a multi-pin connector.
Aberrations
+3%
3mA
+ 5%
Magnetic
Sweepability
250 ~NGauss
25 mNGauss
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Carrying case A6303 only (016-0622-00); probe ground lead,
130 mm (5 in) A6302 only, (~O , 175-0124-01); probe ground
lead. 75 mm (3 in) A6302 only, (~O , 175-0263-01); miniature
alligator clips A6302 only, (AS, 344-0046-00).
ORDERING INFORMATION
A6303 Current Probe ............................. $930
A6302 Current Probe ............................. $490
It is calibrated in 12 steps; the knob skirt is illuminated to indicate current per division. Bandwidth
can be limited to 5 MHz to eliminate unwanted
transients. Both ac and dc coupling are provided.
Ac coupling allows the measurement of low amplitude Signals on a high-level dc current. A frontpanel light warns of input currents above 100 A
dc with the A6303 or 20 A dc with the A6302. A
push button allows degaussing of probe when it
is removed from the circuit and locked in operating position.
The output of the A6303/ AM 503 can be displayed on any oscilloscope that has at least a
50 MHz bandwidth and a 10 mV sensitivity. The
A6302IAM 503 can be used on a 75 MHz oscilloscope with 10 mV sensitivity to display the
probe's full bandpass. The AM 503 output can be
plugged directly into a 50 n recording instrument,
or a 50 n termination which is supplied.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Cable BNC, 50 !l (012-0057-01); termination 50!l BNC (BR,
011 -0049-01 ).
ORDERING INFORMATION
AM 503 Current Probe Amplifier ............ $980
The AM 503 Current Probe Amplifier requires one of the
TM 500 Series power modules listed below. The number of
plug-ins the module will accept is deSignated by the last digit in
the part number. The optional interface allows connections between plug-ins to be made through the rear panel of the power
module. See page 375.
TM 501 Power Module
Option 02 -
Interface ................................................... +$60
TM 503 Power Module
Option 02 -
Interface ............................•...................... +$80
TEK
P6021
CURRENT PROBES
CURRENT PROBE AMPLIFIER
P6022
w l Term
wI Term
134 Current Probe Amplifier
81
TYPE 134
The 134 is used to extend the measurement
capabilities and sensitivity of the P6021 or P6022
Current Probe. A Current/Diy switch provides
calibrated current steps from 1 mA/div to 1 A/div
(with the oscilloscope or plug-in unit adjusted for
a deflection factor of 50 mV/div). A passive
termination is not required when using a 134 with
a P6021 or P6022.
The 134 can also be used as an auxiliary voltage
amplifier by placing the CurrenVDiv switch in the
Volts position.
slot and release the slide. No electrical connec·
tion is required .
Shielded probe heads are not grounded when the
slides are in their open positions, eliminating
accidental grounding of the current under test.
Clip-on Capability
Shielded Probe Heads
The P6021 and P6022 Current Probes and 134
Current Probe Amplifier provide versatility in a
user-assembled ac current measurement system.
Both probes provide accurate current measurements over a wide range of frequencies and are
used with real-time oscilloscopes. Together with
the 134 Amplifier or with passive termination, both
of these probes can be used with scopes that
have 1 Mfl or greater input impedance. Both the
P6021 and P6022 avoid breaking a circuit by
clipping on to a conductor. Just open the springloaded slide, place the conductor into the
P6021 Current Probe
For general purpose applications the P6021 Current Probe provides wide-band performance with
excellent low-frequency characteristics. P6021
bandwidth is 120 Hz to 60 MHz.
P6022 Current Probe
The extra small size of the P6022 Current Probe
makes it ideally suited to measure current in
compact semiconductor circuits. P6022 bandwidth is 935 Hz to 200 MHz.
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
P6021 with
Passive Termination
P6022 with
Passive Termination
Probe with
134 Ampillier
I
P6021
Accuracy 3% Sensitivity
Bandwidth
Low - 3 dB
High - 3 dB
2 mA/mV
10 mA/mV
1 mA/mV
10 mA/mV
450 Hz
60 MHz
120 Hz
60 MHz
8.5 kHz
130 MHz
935 Hz
200 MHz
12 Hz
38 MHz
P6022
1 mA to 1 A/div @ 50 mV/div
100 Hz
65 MHz
Risetime
5.8 ns
5.8 ns
2.7 ns
1.7 ns
9.2 ns
5.4 ns
Droop TC
0.35 ms
1.3 ms
18.71'5
0.17 ms
13ms
1.6 ms
7.5 A peak
1.2 kHz
5 MHz
7.5 A peak
300 Hz
5 MHz
6.0 A peak
10 kHz
10 MHz
6.0 A peak
3 kHz
10 MHz
6.0 A peak
230 Hz
5 MHz
6.0 A peak
1.3 kHz
10 MHz
Maximum Ac CW
From
To
Maximum Peak Current
Amp/Second Product
Maximum Dc
250 A
100A
100A
250 A
100 A
500 A/I'S
9 A/I'S
9 A/I'S
500 A/I'S
9 A/I'S
Option 04 - 230 V ac
Order 015-0057-03 ................................ _......................... $594
0.5 A
0.5 A
0.5 A
0.5 A
0.5A
0.5 A
0.03
0.03
Insertion Z (Il)
1.0@60MHz
0.2@120MHz
1.0
0.2
9
15
Conductor Size
P6022
P6022 Current Probe, Term, and 5 It Cable
Order 015-0135-00 ................................. $360
9 ft Cable and Term
Order 015-0135-01 ................................. $360
5 ft Cable wlo Term
Order 010-0238-00 ................................. $281
9 ft Cable wlo Term
Order 010-0238-02 ................................. $281
250 A
0.03@1 MHz
Net Weight
ORDERING INFORMATION
P6021
P6021 Current Probe, Term and 5 It Cable
Order 015-0140-02 ................................. $323
9 ft Cable and Term
Order 015-0140-03 ................................. $323
5 ft Cable wlo Term
Order 010-0237-02 ....•••••..•...•••..••.........•. $276
9 ft Cable wlo Term
Order 010-0244-02 ................................. $276
500 A/I'S
0.03@ 1 MHz
Maximum Voltage
Barewire
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES (P6021 and P6022)
Lead, ground, 13 em (5 inch) (DO, 175-0125-01); two ciips,
alligator (AS, 344-0046-00); lead, ground, 7.5 cm (3 inch) (DO,
175-0263-01 ).
134
134 Current Probe Amplifier
Order 015-0057-02 ................................. $594
Insertion Z (Il)
Propagation Delay (ns)
511
911
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES (134)
Hanger assembly (014-0029-00) ; power supply , 110 V
(015-0058-01); cable assembly (012-0104-00); 230 v power
supply (015-0059-01).
9
15
9
15
9
15
9
15
9
15
600 V
600 V
600 V
600 V
600 V
", 11b
Up to 0.15 in dia
", 11b
Up to 0.1 in dia
600
Calibrator Adaptor - BNC
Order 013-0092-00 ............................................................ $33
Carrying Cale - P6021 or P6022, and a 134 Amplifier
Order 016-0087 -01 ............................................................ $24
v
", 51b
0.15 in dia
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
(lor P6021, P6022, and 134)
Passive Termination - P6021
Order 011-0105-00 .......................................................... $110
Passive Termination - P6022
Order 011-0106-00 .......................................................... $120
0.1 in dia
For accellory productl, you can order direct by calling 800-426-2200 extension 99. In Oregon call collect (503) 627-9000 extenllon 99.
435
PROBES
TEK CURRENT
CT -1 ICT -2
CT -2 with Probe Cable
Current Probes
The 1 GHz CT-1 is used with 50 g Systems,
or Wide Band Oscilloscopes, it has a Minimum Loading Effect on a 50 0 Environment
The CT -2 is used with Oscilloscopes up to
100 mHz Bandwidth, it is Insulated for limited space Applications
The CT-1 and CT-2 Current Probes are designed
for permanent or semi-permanent in-circuit installation . Each probe consists of a current transformer, an interconnecting cable and a termination. The current transformers are traversed by a
small hole through which a current carrying conductor is passed during circuit assembly.
One probe cable can be used to monitor several
current transformers that have been wired into a
circuit.
CHARACTERISTICS
Sensitivity
CT 1
CT 2
5 mV/mA
1 mV/mA
Accuracy
3%
3%
Risetime
350 ps
500 ps
Frequency Response
Low : - 3 dB
High: - 3 dB
25 kHz
1 GHz
1.2 kHz
200 MHz
Decay Time Constant : LJR
6.35 ~s
160 ~s
",, 10
20
0 .10
0 .5 !l
Capacitivie Loading
Barewire
1.5 pF for #14
1.8 pF for #16
Maximum Barewire
Voltage
1000 V
1000 V
75 mA
175 mA
· ,2 A
·36 A
Insertion Impedance :
at 10 MHz
at 100 MHz
Dc Saturation Current:
Current to Reduce
LJR by X2
Pulse Current Rating
Not to Exceed:
Amp Sec Product
Maximum CW Current
Cable Length
Prop Delay
Cable Connector
., A to ~s
·450 mA
18 inch
3.25 ns
GR874
·50 A to ~s
·2.5 A
42 inch
6.1 ns
BNC
·Wlth 50 {} termmatlon. Values are reduced by a factor of 2 IF
unterminated.
The CT-2 Probe Cable (010-0164-00) is used to
connect the CT-2 current transformer with an oscilloscope input. A 50 0 termination is used to
terminate the cable at the high impedance input
of an oscilloscope.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES (CT-2)
Termination, 50 0 (BR, 011-0049-01).
ORDERING INFORMATION
CT-1 Current Transformer and Probe
Order 015-0041-00 .......................................................... $143
CT -2 Current Transformer, Probe,
and Termination Order 015-0047-00 ............................... $154
CT -3
Signal Pickoff
Designed for use with high-frequency oscilloscopes, the CT-3 Pickoff provides a convenient
means of picking off a signal in a 50 0 system .
Used with any of the Tektronix sampling instruments, the CT-3 provides the link for use as a
trigger source.
Sensitivity - 10% of the voltage under test, into a 50 0 load.
Decay Time Constant - 4.5 ",s at 0 de current.
Risetime - < 0.4 ns.
Frequency Response - 50 kHz to 875 MHz at 0 dc current.
Insertion Impedance - With 50 0 termination is 1 0 shunted
by 4.5 ~H , 20 shunted by 4.5 ~H without a 50 M termination.
Vawr - < 1.2 at 1.5 GHz.
Voltage Rating - At 0 V dc is 25 V RMS, 1 kV pulse peak.
The V's product is 100 V~s . If exceeded, the LJR decay will
decay rapidly toward zero.
CT-3 Signal Pickoff Order 017-0061-00 ....................... $143
CT -5
Pulsed Currents to 50,000 A
CT-1 with Probe Cable
The CT-5 is a clip-on high-current transformer that
extends the measurement capability of Tektronix
clip-on current probes. Maximum low-frequency
performance is obtained using the A6302IAM 503
Dc Current Probe. Pulse current to 50,000 amps
may be measured using the P6021 and passive
termination, provided the 0.5 A-s rating is not exceeded. The P6021 and 134 Current Probe Amplifier may also be used for measurements at normal line frequency and above. (The P6022 and
CT-5 are not compatible with each other.) The
CT-5 has receptacles for current probes in either
20:1 or 1000:1 step-down ratios. The 1.5 inch
square opening makes it possible to clip onto
large conductors without breaking the circuit under test. The core and shield assembly are insulated from the windings and the handle. This allows measurements on bare wires to 3000 V, and
to 10 kV RMS with a high voltage bushing.
A dc bucking coil assembly allows up to 300 A of
dc to be tolerated without appreciably degrading
measurements. This is very useful for measuring
ac signals on top of a dc voltage level.
CT -5 CHARACTERISTICS
The following are characteristics of the CT-5 using either the
A6302/AM 503 or P6021 / 134 combinations.
Risetime - 17.5 ns or less.
Insertion Impedance - .. 20 ~O at 60 Hz ; 20 mO at 1 MHz.
Current Range - 20 mNdiv to 100 Ndiv with A6302/ AM 503,
and 20 mNdiv to 20 Ndiv with P6021 / 134 (20:1 step down
ratio) ; 1 Ndiv to 5 kNdiv with A6302/ AM 503, 1 Ndiv to
1 kNdiv with P6021 / 134, (1000:1 step down ratio).
Accuracy - ± 4%. Maximum Current is 1000 A peak cw:
Amp-Sec product - 8 A-s.
Maximum Voltage - Of circuit test is 3000 V (barewire).
Maximum Dc Bucking Current - 300 mA to buck out 300 A
dc (using dc bucking coil).
·Maximum current 1000 A peak from 20 Hz to 1.2 kHz derating
to 100 A peak at 1 MHz.
CT 5 CURRENT MEASUREMENT COMBINATIONS
Maximum
Current
Bandwidth
A-a
Product
RMS
Peak
Pulae
CT-5/A6302/AM 503
0.5 Hz to
20 MHz
0.1
700 A
50 kA
CT-5/P6021 / 134
12 Hz to
20 MHz
0.5
700 A
15 kA
CT-5/P6021/Term
120 Hz to
20 MHz
0.5
700 A
50 kA
Product
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dimensions
Width
Height
Depth
Weight
Net
mm
57
241
266
in
2.3
9.5
10.5
kg
1.8
Ib
4.0
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Carrying case (016-0191 -03); high voltage bushing 12 inch
(015-0194-00).
ORDERING INFORMATION
The CT-1 Probe Cable (010-0133-00) provides the
connection between the CT-1'current transformer
and a scope input. This cable can also be used
with other test point connectors such as
Amphenol Series 27 Sub-Minax or Sealectro SubMiniature RF connectors.
CT -3 Signal Pickoll
Order 017-0061-00 .......................................................... $143
CT -5 Current Probe (Includes dc Bucking Coil)
Order 015-0189-01 ....................................................... $1,080
Without dc Bucking Coil,
Order 015-0189-00 .......................................................... $885
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
1.5 Inch Diameter Conductors
Measurements on Bare Conductors to
3000 V Nullifies Dc Effects to 300 A
436
Dc Bucking Coil
Order 015-0190-00 ........................... , ............ , $255
High-Voltage Bushing - 4 It long, inside diameter 1 inch.
Order 015-0194-01 •• , ..................... ,.................. $43
TEK
MODULAR
PASSIVE PROBES
NIIN
P6130
P6120 Dc to 60 MHz
)1i
Dc to 250 MHz 10X with readout
I
•
P6130 Accessories
00
00
~
•
00
NA
00
r".
J.
~
I,,
CHARACTERISTICS
Lightweight Tip
Flex Lightweight Cable
250 MHz Bandwidth
The P6130 probe accommodates oscilloscopes
with bandwidth's up to 250 MHz. The small size
and lightweight probe tip coupled with an extremely flexible probe cable provide a low bending moment avoids breakage when probing small
fragile components.
The unique reversible ground lead system provides flexible grounding methods from the short
swivel ground lead for high frequency probing
through the 3-inch ground with micro hook tip to
the 6-inch ground with insulated alligator clip for
lower frequencies , are tailored for a wide range of
applications.
The hybrid probe tip circuitry not only provides a
small, rugged , lightweight probe tip; it also provides more uniform probe tip compensation for
better high frequency response with less aberrations. Any of the modular probe tip accessories
may be used with the optional miniature probe tip
adaptor, (see page 442). This selection also
allows the probe to be tailored to a wide range of
applications.
The P6130's modular construction allows snap-on
replacement without tools. (P6130 modules are
not interchangeable with larger modules.) Three
cable lengths are available 1.5, 2.0 and 3.0
meters.
Bandwidth (- 3 dB) Dc to 60 MHz.
1.5 and 2.0 m: Dc to 250 MHz. 3.0 m:
Risetime (System) < 2.0 ns.
1.5 and 2.0 m: < 1.4 ns. 3.0 m:
Attenuation (System) -
lOX ± 3% (with scope Z of 1 Mfl).
9 Mil ± 0.7%.
Input Resistance (Probe) Input Resistance (System) Input Capacitance 3.0 m: < 15.8 pF.
1.5 m: < 14 pF. 2.0 m: < 14.5 pF.
Maximum Input Voltage Compensation Range -
10 Mil ± 1%.
500 V de
+ peak ac.
15 to 35 pF.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
connector (131-2766-03); low inductance lead
(195-4240-00); sub miniature hook tip (013-0208-00); lead with
alligator clip (195-1870-00); test prod holder (352-0687-00);
lead with micro hook (195-4104-00); 2 green band markers
(334-2794-07); 2 red band markers (334-2794-06); 2 gray band
markers (334-2794-03); 2 white band markers (334-2794-01);
carrying pouch (016-0708-00).
Probe-t~ircuit
ORDERING INFORMATION
P6130 lOX High Impedance Probe 1.5 meter
cable and accessories,
Order 010-6130-01
P6130 with 2 meter cable and accessories,
Order 010-6130-03
P6130 with 3 meter cable, and accessories,
Order 010-6130-05
Contact your Sales OffICeS for prices.
500 V Maximum Voltage
Modular, Snap-Together Parts
Low Cost
The P6120 miniature 10X passive probe, a continuation of the modular design concept, offers
good performance at a very attractive price. It
performs particularly well in combination with
2200 Series oscilloscopes. The probe is designed
to be repairable and employs a replaceable compensation box, cable, and probe head, with the
ground attached by a shielded-pin receptacle in
the probe head . User comfort and safety are enhanced by the probe head shape. Two cable
lengths are available: 1.5 and 3.0 meters.
The probe allows use of the optional push on/pull
off Ie Grabber Tip that greatly facilitates attachment in congested circuit areas such as DIP
leads and multipin connectors.
CHARACTERISTICS
Bandwidth - Dc to 60 MHz (- 3 dB).
Risetime - < 5.9 ns.
Attenuation (System) - lOX ± 2% (with oscilloscope resistance of 1 Mfl ± 1% ).
Input Resistance (Probe) - 9.0 Mfl ± 1% series reSistor.
Input Resistance (System) - 10 Mfl ± 1%.
~n~u,:,~:r~~~,:nce - 14 pF with 1.5 meter cable, 17 pF with
Maximum Input Voltage (Ac/Dc Coupled) - 500 V (de +
peak ac) to 3 MHz, derated to 70 V (de + peak ac) at 50 MHz.
Compenaation Range - 23 pF to 51 pF.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Pouch, accessory (016-0521 -00); two band, marker (silverway) (334-2794-02); tip, retractable (BB, 013-0107-04); sleeve,
Insulallng (BP, 166-0404-01); ground lead, 25 cm (10 inch)
(195-1870-00).
ORDERING INFORMATION
P6120 lOX Voltage Probe and Accessories
I .S-Meter Cable Order 010-6120-01 ................................ $77
P6120 with 3 Meter Cable and accessories,
Order 010-6120-05 ............................................................ $77
Optional Tip, Probe with Actuator (IC Grabber)
Order 013-0191-00 ....................................................... $10.50
For accessory products, you can order direct by calling 800-426-2200 extension 99. In Oregon call collect (503) 627-9000 extension 99.
437
MODULAR
PROBES
TEK PASSIVE
P6101
Dc to 34 MHz 1X
P6105
P6108
Dc to 100 MHz 10X with Readout
P6106
Dc to 300 MHz 10X with readout
Dc to 100 MHz 10X
TEK
Simplified, Faster Maintenance and Repairs
High Fidelity Signal Acquisition at Low Cost
Rugged for Greater Reliability
Modular Probe
Replacement
Parts
Available in Three Lengths
Modular probes are an exiciting new concept in
probe design. The P6101 , P6105, P6106, P6107,
P6108, and P6149 Probes divide into three modules (probe heads, cables, and connector/compensation boxes). The modules snap together making maintenance and repair less
expensive, faster, and much easier. Snap-on replacement modules eliminate soldering irons and
tools, and modular probes do not have to be sent
in to be repaired because spare modules can be
ordered and stocked. Strain relief and modular
component design make these probes rugged for
greater reliability .
The P6101, P6105, P6106, and P6108 are available in three color-coded lengths - blue for one
meter, yellow for two meters, and red for three
meters. (The P6149 and P6107 are two meters
long.) These probes may be used to acquire high
fidelity signal from low source-impedance circuits.
Probe
Length
P6101
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
2
1
2
3
2
P6105
P6106
P6107
P6108
P6149
438
Meter
Meter
Meter
Meter
Meter
Meter
Meter
Meter
Meter
Meter
Meter
Meter
Meter
Meter
Probe Head
206-0223-00
206-0223-00
206-0223-00
206-0216-00
206-0217-00
206-0218-00
206-0216-00
206-0217-00
206-0218-00
206-0217-00
206-0224-00
206-0225-00
206-0226-00
206-0234-00
Probe Cable
$19
$19
$19
$45
t,'5
45
$45
$45
$45
$45
$39
$39
$39
$36
175-1661-00
175-1661-01
175-1661 -02
175-1661-00
175-1661 -01
175-1661-02
175-1661-00
175-1661-01
175-1661-02
175-1661-00
175-1661-00
175-1661-01
175-1661-02
175-1661-01
Compensator/Connector
$27
$27
$27
$27
$27
$27
$27
$27
$27
$27
$27
$27
$27
$27
103-0189-00
103-0189-00
103-0189-00
206-0219-00
206-0220-00
206-0221-00
206-0237-00
206-0238-00
206-0239-00
206-0247-00
206-0227-00
206-0228-00
206-0229-00
206-0255-00
$18.50
$18.50
$18.50
$44
$44
$44
$65
$70
$70
$40
$41
$44
$44
$26
TEK
P6107
MODULAR
PASSIVE PROBES
P6149
Dc to 100 MHz 10X with readout
Modular Parts Snap Together
Dc to 50 MHz 10X
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Retractable tip hook (88,013-0107-03); insulating sleeve (8P,
166-0404-01); probe tips (2) available in packages 01 10 only
(80. 206-0191-03); probe holder (352-0351-00); ground lead.
75 mm P6106 only (~O, 175-0263-01); ground lead. 130 mm
(00. 175-0124-01) for P6101 , P6105, P6108 and P6149 only.
300 mm (00.175-0125-01); marker bands, 3 pair, black, white
and silver gray lor all probes except P6149. available in packages of 9 sets 01 dillerent colors (016-0633-00); marker bands.
2 pair. gray and silver gray lor P6149. available in packages of
9 sets of dillerent color (016-0633-00); miniature alligator clips
(2) (AS. 344-0046-00); accessory pouch (016-0521-00).
ORDERING INFORMATION
P6101, 1X Probe, 2 m_
Order 010-6101-03 ................................... $67
Option 01 Option 02 -
1 m Order 010-6101-01 .............................. $67
3 m Order 010-6101-05 .............................. $67
P610S, 10X Probe 2 m.
Order 010-6105-03 ................................. $111
Option 01 Option 02 -
Tektronix Modular Probes are designed for speWith oscilloscopes that are equipped with vertical
cific Tektronix Instruments, but may be purscale or CRT readout, the P6105 and P6106 will
chased as options for all Tektronix oscilloscopes
automatically scale the readout by a factor of 10.
with 1 Mf! and appropriate pF inputs as indicated
This makes mental calculations unnecessary.
in the chart. The P6106 is standard with the 475A
Also ground level can be determined on the disand 475 Oscilloscopes.
play by actuating a button on the probe head,
The P6105 is standard with the Tektronix 434,
without having to return to the oscilloscope.
455, 465B, and rackmount oscilloscopes. The
The P6149 and P6107 feature a right angle BNC
P6101 is a 1X, 1 Mf! probe. The P6105, P6106,
connector. This can be useful when bench space
P6107, and P6108 are 10X, 10 Mf! probes.
is limited.
CHARACTERISTICS
Type
P6101
Attenuation
IX
P6105
lOX
P6106
lOX
P6107
lOX
lOX
Length
Package
Number
1m
2m
3m
1m
2m
3m
1m
2m
3m
010-6101-01
010-6101-03
010-6101-05
010-6105-01
010-6105-03
010-6105-05
010-6106-01
010-6106-03
010-6106-05
010-6107-03
010-6108-01
010-6108-03
010-6108-05
P6149
lOX
010-6149-03
I MaXImum Input Voltage
V de + peak ae to
'2 Maximum Input Voltage
V de + peak ae to
'3 Maximum Input Voltage
V de + peak ae to
•• Maximum Input Voltage
V de + peak ae to
•, Scope bandwidth must be 325 MHz.
P6108
2m
1m
2m
3m
2m
IS 500
is 500
is 500
is 500
Loading
1 Mn
32 pF
54 pF
78 of
Uselul
BWMHz
34
15.5
8
100
100
95
300"
250
150
100
Dc
Maximum
Scope
in pF
500 V·,
ANY
500
10.5 pF
13_0 pF
15.5 of
10 Mn
10.5 pF
500
13.0 pF
15.5 of
500
10 Mn
13.0 pF
500
10Mn
10.5 pF
100
13.0 pF
100
15.5 of
95
15.5 pF
500
10Mn
50
300 kHz clerated to 20 Vat 30 MHz.
1.7 MHz clerated to 27 Vat 10 MHz.
1.7 MHz clerated to 30 Vat 50 MHz.
1.7 MHz derated to 70 Vat 100 MHz.
10 Mn
Readout
1 m Order 010-6105-01 ............................ $111
3 m Order 010-6105-05 ............................ $111
P6106, 10X Probe 2 m.
Order 010-6106-03 .•..•....•.•..................... $131
Option 01 Option 02 -
1 m Order 010-6106-01 ............................ $131
3 m Order 010-6106-05 ............................ $131
P6107, 10X Probe 2 m.
Order 010-6107-03 ................................. $117
P610e, 10X Probe 2 m.
Order 010-6108-03 ..•....•........................• $101
Option 01 Option 02 -
1 m. Order 010-6108-01 ........................... $101
3 m, Order 010-6108-05 ........................... $101
P6149, 10X Probe, 2 m.
Order 010-6149-03 ................................. $106
V'l
15 to 47
YES
V"
15 to 24
YES
V'l
V'l
14 to 47
YES
15 to 47
NO
V'l
20 to 62
NO
Included Accessories with double alpha codes are pictured
on pages 442 and 443.
For accessory products, you can order direct by calling 800-426-2200 extension 99. In Oregon call collect (503) 627-9000 extension 99.
439
MONOLITHIC
HIGH VOLTAGE PASSIVE PROBES
TEK
P6015
P6007
40 kV 1000X
P6009
Dc to 25 MHz 100X
Dc to 120 MHz 100X
1500 V Dc
Dc to 120 MHz
Low Capacitance -
Measure up to 40 kV Peak Pulse
1500 V Dc
High Voltage Probe
Low Capacitance Loading
Up to 20 kV Dc
+ Peak AC
75 MHz Useful Bandwidth
For 1 MO Inputs
The P6015 Provides 1000X attenuation for oscilloscope measurements up to 40 kV peak. Voltage
or duty cycle derating is necessary for RF voltages at frequencies over 100 kHz, or in temperatures above 25°C.
The probe can be compensated for instruments
with nominal input capacitance of 12 pF to 47 pF.
The P6007 is a low input capacitance, high-voltage (1 .5 kV) probe. It can be compensated to
match all Tektronix plug-ins and oscilloscopes
with nominal input capacitances of 15 pF to 55 pF
and input resistance of 1 Mf!. The P6007 is similar
to the photo of the P6006.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Tip. probe. retractable hook (AN. 013-0071-00); plug. tip. banana (AK. 134-0013-00); tip. probe (0.055 inch diameter) (AA.
206-0015-00); lead ground, 13 cm (5 inch) (175-0124-01) ; lead,
ground. 30 em (12 inch) (175-0125-01); tip. probe. hook (AG.
206-0105-00); holder. probe (352-0090-00); two clips. alligator
(AS, 344-0046-00).
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Compensating box. BNC (015-0049-00); high-voltage dielectric
fluid can (AU , 252-0120-00) ; alligator clip (AQ, 344-0005-00);
carrying case (016-0128-020); probe holder (352-0056-00).
P6015 1000X Probe, 10 ft Cable
Order 010-0172-00 ................................. $615
ORDERING INFORMATION
P6007 100X Probe
6 ft Order 010-0165-00 ..........................
3.5 It Order 010-0150-00 ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
9 It Order 010-0152-00 •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
12 It Order 010-0154-00 •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
$106
$106
$106
$106
2.5 pF
The P6009 is a low input capacitance, high-voltage (1 .5 kV) probe designed for use with
Tektronix dc to 150 MHz oscilloscopes. The
probe can be compensated to match Tektronix
plug-ins and oscilloscopes with nominal input capacitances of 12 pF to 47 pF and input resistance
of 1 Mf!.
A version of the P6009 is equipped with a special
BNC connector that provides CRT Readout information when used with plug-in units and mainframes that have these features. The readout
connector is not compatible with most standard
non-readout BNC connecto;s.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Lead. ground. 30 cm (12 inch) (175-0125-01); lead. ground,
13 cm (5 inch) (175-0124-01); lead. ground, 7.5 cm (3 inch)
(DO. 175-0263-01); holder. probe (352-0090-00); tip, probe,
(0.080 inch diameter) (AB, 206-0060-00); tip. probe. retractable
hook (AN, 013-0071-00); tip, probe. hook (AG. 206-0105-00);
bayonet ground assembly (AJ, 013-0052-00); two clips. alligator (AS . 344-0046-00); probe tip. banana (AK. 134-0013-00);
tip. probe (0.055 inch diameter) (AA. 206-0015-00).
ORDERING INFORMATION
P6009 100X Probe, 9 ft, w/Readout
Order 010-0264-01 ................................. $165
wlo Readout Order 010-0170-00 •...•..•... $164
CHARACTERISTICS
Input CapaCitance
Attenuation
Accuracy
Input
Resistance
P6007
100X
3%
10 M!l
14.0 ns
P6009
100X
3%
10 MO
2.5 pF
2.9 ns
P6015
1000X
Adjustable
100 M!l
3 pF (10 It only)
1.4 ns
±5
3'/2 It
2 pF
61t
91t
2.2 pF 2.4 pF
Probe
Risetime
Compensation
Range (pF)
200 kHz
20 kV @ 5 MHz
15 to 55
200 kHz
450 V@40MHz
15 to 47
100 kHz
2 kV @20 MHz
12 to 47
Cable
Length (It)
Maximum
Voltage
Derated
Above
+3
25 mHz
3'/2. 6. 9.12
1.5 kV
±3
120 MHz
9
1.5 kV
250 MHz
10
20.0 kV
Included Accessories with double alpha codes are pictured on pages 442 and 443.
440
Derated to @ Frequency
Bandwidth
Aberrations
MONOLITHIC
PASSIVE PROBES
TEK
P6062B
P6063B
Dc to 100 MHz with Readout
P6053B
1X to 10X with Readout
Miniature
High CMRR
Fast Risetime
Compact Size
Switch on Probe Body
Low CapaCitance
The P6062B and P6063B are passive dual attenuation probes designed for Tektronix oscilloscopes
with bandwidths to 100 and 200 MHz. A sliding
switch on the probe body selects 1X or 10X
attenuation . The probe provides readout coding
and a pushbutton for actuating a ground reference in the 1X or 10X position . The ground
reference can be used as a means of trace
identification for a multitrace display. The 1X
position of the probe allows the use of the full
instrument sensitivity. This is valuable when evaluating small signals of 10 MHz or less. The 1X-10X
switch allows the user to switch in and out a
decade of sensitivity without returning to the
oscilloscope. The user may also arbitrarily switch
from 1X to 10X in order to evaluate the effects of
loading by the oscilloscope.
The P6063B is a fast-rise dual attenuation, passive probe designed for Tektronix oscilloscopes
with bandwidths greater than 100 MHz.
COMMON CHARACTERISTICS
Probe
Lengt~
Attenuation
Accuracy
P6062A
IX
lOX
Same as
3%Scope
P6063A
IX
lOX
Same as
3% Scope
Input
Resistance
Same as
Scope
10 MOO
Same as
Scope
10 MOO
100 pF
105 pF
135 pF
13.5 pF
14 pF
17 pF
80 pF
105 pF
NA
11 pF
14 pF
NA
Input
Capacitance 3'/2 ft
6ft
9ft
12 MHz 200 MHz
6 MHz 200 MHz
NA
NA
Maximum
Voltage
8 MHz 100 mHz
6.7 MHz 100 MHz
4.5 MHz 100 MHz
100 V
500 V
peak
peak
Derated
Above
Derated to
Frequency
450 kHz 3.5 MHz
35 V@ 35V@
10 MHz 50 MHz
450 kHz 4.5 MHz
35V@ 30V@
10 MHz 50 MHz
3'/2 ft
6ft
9ft
Aberrations
Risetime
Compensation Range
20,000:1 CMRR 10X with Readout
Dc to 200 MHz with Readout
1X - 10X Selectable Attenuation
Bandwidth
P6055
± 3%
< 5% p-p
3.5 ns
15 pFt047pF
100 V
± 3%
500 V
< 5% p-p
1.7 ns
15pFt024pF
The P6053B is a minature fast-rise 10X probe designed for Tektronix instruments having a nominal
input capaCitance of 15 to 24 pF. The probe has a
pushbutton for actuating the trace-identify function of the oscilloscope mainframe and readout
capability.
Attenuation - lOX. Input Resistance - 10 Mil. Input Capacitance - 9.5 pF with 3.5 ft probe. 12.5 pF with 6 ft version. 13.5 pF with 9 It version. Bandwidth (with 225 MHz or
greater oscilloscope) - ",,200 MHz for 3.5 and 6 It versions,
"" 115 MHz for the 9 It version. Voltage Rating - 500 V (dc +
peak ac). Peak voltage derating is necessary for cw frequencies higher than 5 MHz . At 10 MHz, the maximum allowable
peak voltage is 275 V; 23 Vat 100 MHz; 18 V at 150 MHz.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Holder, probe (352-0351-00); insulating sleeve , electrical
(BP, 166-0404-01); tip, probe, retractable (BB, 013-0107-03);
tip, hook probe (BU, 206-0114-00); lead, ground , 13 cm (5 inch)
(175-0124-01); two clips, alligator (AS, 344-0046-00); lead,
ground, 30 cm (12 inch) (~O , 175-0125-01); pouch, accessory
(016-0521 -00). For P6053B only, tip, probe bayonet (BM, 0130085-00); lead, ground, 7.5 cm, 3 inch, (~O , 175-0263-01).
ORDERING INFORMATION
P6062B Switchable Attenuation Probe
6 ft. Order 010-6062-13 ......................... $164
3.5 ft. Order 010-6062-11 .........•.•.••..•..•. $164
9 ft. Order 010-6062-15 ......................... $164
P6063B Switchable Attenuation Probe
6 ft. Order 010-6063-13 .....•.......•..•...•.••. $201
3.5 ft. Order 010-6063-11 ...................... $201
P6053B Miniature 10X Probe,
6 ft, Order 010-6053-13 ......................... $154
3.5 ft, Order 010-6053-11 .........••..••..•.••• $154
9 ft, Order 010-6053-15 ....••••....••.••...•.••. $154
Dc-60 MHz
The P6055 is a miniature, low-capaCitance, 1UX
probe designed for use with Tektronix differential
amplifiers with nominal input capacitances from
20 pF to 47 pF. The attenuation ratio is adjustable
to 10X to compensate for differences in input resistance of the amplifier (the amplifier input resistance must be 1 Mf! ± 2%). A special locking
type readout connector allows the probe to be
used with instruments with or without readout
capability.
When two P6055 Probes are used to drive the
two inputs of a differential amplifier, the ability to
change the attenuation ratio of one probe versus
the other is helpful in maintaining the CMRR of
the system. The use of a matched pair of P6055
differential probes allows the user to adjust the
attenuation of the probes for compatibility with
the various Tektronix plug-ins.
CHARACTERISTICS
CMRR - 20,000 :1 from dc to 1 kHz derating to 100:1 at
20 MHz.
Attenuation - Adjustable to lOX.
Input Resistance - 1 Mil ± 0.5%.
Input CapaCitance - "" 10 pF when used with instrument that
has 20 pF input capacitance ; 12.5 pF when used With Instrument that has 47 pF input capacitance.
Maximum Useful Bandwidth - 60 MHz.
Typical Probe Rlsetime - 5.8 ns.
Maximum Voltage - 500 V (dc + peak ac) from dc to
12 MHz. pop voltage derates to 100 V at 70 MHz.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Tip, probe, retractable (BB, 013-0107-03); lead, ground, 13 cm
(5 inch) (175-0124-01); two insulating sleeves, electrical (BP,
166-0404-01)' adlustable tool, probe (CP, 003-0675-01); tip,
hook probe (BU, 206-0114-00); lead, electrical, 13 cm (6 inch)
(OF, 175-1256-00); holder, probe (352-0090-00); two clips,
alligator (AS, 344-0046-00); lead, ground, 30 cm (12 Inch)
(175-0125-01 ).
ORDERING INFORMATION
P6055 10X Differential Probe 3.5 ft.
Order 010-6055-01 ••••.••.••...•.••....••••...•••.. $244
Matched Pair of P6055
Order 015-0437-00 ................................. $420
'In lOX position the input R - 10 Mil :1: 0.5% with an oscilloscope input R ~ 1 Mil :1: 2%.
For accessory products, you can order direct by calling 800-426-2200 extension 99. In Oregon call collect (503) 627-9000 extension 99.
441
ACCESSORIES
TEK PROBE
#6-32 Probe Tips and Accessories
The following tips and adaptors can be used on
all Tektronix Probes that accept a #6-32 screw-on
tip, including the P6006, P6007, P6008, P6009,
P6028 , and P6060 Probes and others with 6-32
adaptor.
CODE DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
AA
Probe straight tip (0.055 in dial . 206-0015-00
AB
Probe spring tip (0.080 in dial .... 206-0060-00
AC
Probe spring tip (accepts
0.065 in dia pin) .. .. ..
.. ... 206-0061-00
AD
Probe spring tip (accepts 0.068
in dia pin) .............. ..
.. .... 206-0168-00
AE
IG test tip ........
.. .......... 206-0203-00
AF
Probe long straight tip
(0.032 in dial
................. 206-0104-00
AG
Probe hook up ........................... 206-0105-00
AH
Probe ground lead adaptor (#6-32 to
0.025 in square pin closing .. ...... 206-0137-01
AI
Probe right angle hook tip ......... 206-0185-00
AJ
Bayonet ground assembly ......... 013-0052-00
AK
Probe banana tip
........... 134-0013-00
AL
Probe ground cover (for P6009) 166-0428-00
AM
Probe calibration tip (0.063 in dial 206-0100-00
AN
Probe retractable hook tip ......... 013-0071-00
AP
Probe retractable hook tip
(for P6008E) ..
.. ...... .. 013-0071-01
AQ
Alligator Clip .. .. ..
...... .. .. 344-0005-00
AR
Alligator clip .. .....
.. ........... 344-0045-00
AS
Minature alligator clip ................. 344-0046-00
AT
Probe tip to BNG adaptor .......... 013-0054-00
AU
High-voltage dielectric fluid 3 oz . 252-0120-00
AV
Probe pin tip (accepts 0.025
in IBM SLT in)
.. 206-0134-03
AW
Probe tip to BNG adaptor (for P6028)
....... 013-0056-00
PRICE
$ 1.00
$ t.75
$1 .25
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AG
AF
AH
AI
AJ
AK
AL
$ 2.50
AM
$ 1.40
$ 1.10
$ 1.10
$ 2.00
$ 1.50
$ 7.00
$ 1.00
$ 1.35
$10.50
$ 3.25
AV
AW
~
high voltal'
telectrlc flUid
$ 3.00
$ 3.75
$ 1.40
$ 1.40
$17.00
$ 5.00
$ 4.25
$18 .00
AN
AQ
AP
AR
AS
AT
Modular Probe
Replacement
Parts
Probe Head
$19
206-0223-00
206-0223-00
$19
206-0223-00
$19
206-0216-00
$45
206-0217-00
$45
206-0218-00
$45
$45
206-0216-00
206-0217-00
$45
206-0218-00
$45
206-0217-00
$45
206-0224-00
$39
206-0225-00
$39
206-0226-00
$39
206-0234-00
$36
Length
1 Meter
2 Meter
3 Meter
1 Meter
2 Meter
3 Meter
1 Meter
2 Meter
3 Meter
2 Meter
1 Meter
2 Meter
3 Meter
2 Meter
Probe
P6101
P6105'
P6106'
P6107
P6108
P6149
Compensator/Connector
$18.50
103-0189-00
103-0189-00
$18.50
103-0189-00
$18.50
206-0219-00
$44.00
206-0220-00
$44.00
206-0221-00
$44.00
206-0237-00
$65.00
$70.00
206-0238-00
$70.00
206-0239-00
$40.00
206-0247-00
206-0227-00
$41.00
206-0228-00
$44.00
206-0229-00
$44.00
$26.00
206-0255-00
Probe Cable
175-1661-00
$27
$27
175-1661-01
$27
175-1661-02
$27
175-1661 -00
175-1661-01
$27
$27
175-1661 -02
$27
175-1661-00
$27
175-1661-01
$27
175-1661-02
$27
175-1661-00
175-1661-00
$27
175-1661-01
$27
175-1661 -02
$27
175-1661-01
$27
'The BNC Connector with readout may be replaced with 131- 1799-01
LENGTH
CODE DESCRIPTION
(in)
DA
Ground lead for S-3A,
P6056, P6057 .................... 3
DB
Ground leads for P6054,
.......... 3
P6075 ..........
7Al1 , and P6201 ...
..... 5
12
DC
Ground leads for P6202
and P6420 ....
.... 3
DO
6
PART
NUMBER
175-0249-00 $5.00
175-0848-00 $1.60
175-0848-01 $t.75
175-0848-02 $t.75
175-0849-00
175-0849-01
175-0263-01
175-0124-01
175-0125-01
$6.00
$6.00
$2.15
$2 .15
$2.15
Ground lead'
.. 3
Ground lead' ...................... 5
Ground lead' ..................... 12
DE
Ground leads for S-3A,
P6202, P6420 ....................... 6
175-1017-00 $3.50
OF
Ground lead for P6055 ....... 6
175-1256-00 $5.00
'For the P6053B, P6054A, P6075A, P6101, P6105, P6106,
P6108, P6149, and other probes requiring clip-on ground
leads.
442
....
DA
PRICE
ell
DB
\
~-
DO
---~:::
DC
------------------..~~
DE
OF
C
CABLE MARKER SETS (Not Pictured)
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
For 1/8 in dia cable .................... .. ... 016-0130-00
For 3/16 in dia cable
...... 016-0127-00
For modular cable .......................... . 016-0633-00
PRICE
$6.00
6.00
$4.00
TEK
MODULAR/MINIATURE ADAPTORS
BN
BA
BC
BB
BD
BE
BF
BG
BI
BH
BJ
BK
BR
BO
BS
BP
BT
BO
BU
BY
BW
CODE DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER PRICE
BA Relractable hook tip (for all modular
$ 7.00
probes) ... ..
............. 013-0105-00
BC Probe tip, IC Grabber
013-0191-00 $10.50
BB Retractable hook tip (for P6053B,
$ 3.25
P6055, P60S2B, P6063B, P6101,
P6105, P6106, P6108, and
P6149) ................... .. .. ... ............... 013-0107-03
BD Miniature retractable hook tip ...... 206-0222-00 $ 3.25
BE Probe tip flexible, adapts miniature
probe to retractable hook tip (BO) . 103-0177-01 $ S.50
BF Probe tip flexible for 0.025 square
$ 7.75
pin .... ......
.. .. .... . 206-0193-00
BG Miniature probe to #S-32 adaptor
$ 4.00
(for all miniature probes except
P6045, P6202, includes all
modular probes) ..
.. ... 103-0051-01
BH MinialUre probe to #6-32 adaptor
$ 5.25
with ground connection
...... 103-0131 -00
CODE DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER PRICE
BI Probe pin tip (accepts 0.025 in
$ 3.50
IBM SLT pin) .
. .... 206-0209-00
BJ MinialUre probe tip to GR
$42 .00
adaptor ........ .. . ................ ............ 017-0076-00
BK Miniature probe tip to GR 50 !l
$50.00
termination adaptor ....
.. ... 017-0088-00
BL Chassis mount test jack (for minialUre probes, including modular) .. 131 -0258-00 $ 4.25
BM Bayonet ground assembly
.... 013-0085-00 $ 6.50
BN Miniature probe tip cover, IC tester,
.. ........... 015-0201-04 $ 6.50
Package of 10 .. .......
Package of 100 ...
.. .. .. . 015-0201 -05 $17 .75
BO Replaceable probe tip, pkg of 10.
$17.00
All miniature probes including
modular except P6202 and
P6420 .......................................... 206-0191-03
CODE DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER PRICE
BP Miniature probe tip ground cover,
insulating sleeve (for all miniature
probes , including modular) ........... 166-0404-01 $ 1.00
BO Electrical contact ...................... .. 214-0283-00 $ 1.00
BR Termination, 50 !l ..
011 -0049-01 $25.00
BS Probe tip to BNC adaptor for all
$ 8.00
probes ......................................... 013-0084-01
BT Probe tip to BNC adaptor for all,
$10.00
except P6202 ........ ........ .... .. .. ....... 013-0084-02
BU Probe tip hook (for all miniature
$ 2.75
probes, including modular)
20S-0114-00
$ 2.75
BY Probe tip straight (for all miniature
probes, including modular) .......
206-0114-01
BW Dual lead adaptor for miniature
$13.00
probes ................ .......................... 015-0325-00
OTHER ADAPTORS
P6201 ACCESSORIES
PROBE TOOLS
The following tips and adaptors are designed for use with Tektronix Miniature Probes and accept a slip-on tip.
II
CK
I•
II
CL
i
CI
CJ
I
CA
CB
CC
CD
CE
CF
CODE DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER PRICE
CA Retractable hook tip (for P6010
$ 4.00
and P6048) ............................ .... . 013-0090-00
CB Retractable hook tip (for S-3A,
$ 7.00
P6202, and P6420)
... 013-0097-01
CC Retractable hook tip (for 7A11
$ 9.25
and P6401) .. .............
.. ..... 013-0106-00
CD Retractable hook tip (for 211 , 212,
$ 3.25
213,214,221) .
.. ............ 013-0107-02
CE Miniature probe to #6-32 adaptor
$ 4.00
(for PS045, PS04S, PS202,
.. ... 103-0051 -00
7A11 , S-3A) .............. ..
CF Replaceable probe tip for
$15.75
PS202 and P6420, pkg of 10
20S-0230-03
CG
CH
CODE DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER PRICE
CG Retractable probe tip (for PS201
$ 4.25
only) ........................................ ...... 013-0135-00
CH PS201 probe tip to GR 50 !l
$55 .00
termination adaptor .... .... .
017-0094-00
CI Probe tip to BNC adaptor
$14.00
(for PS201 only) ...
.. ..... 013-0145-00
CJ Probe tip to test point jack
$ 5.25
(for PS201 only) .... ..............
103-0164-00
CK Insulating sleeve, electrical
$ 1 .00
(for P6201 only)
..... 1SS-0557 -00
CL Ground contact insulator
$ 1.00
(for PS201 only) .............
.. .... 342-0180-00
CM Ground contact (for P6201
$ 1.10
only) ........................ ........ ..
... 131-1302-00
CN Ground lead, insulating sleeve
$ 1.00
(for PS201 only) .............
.. 1S6-0433-00
CO Replaceable probe tip
$ 1 .00
(for PS201 only) ............
20S-0200-00
CP
CO
CODE DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER PRICE
CP Adjustment tool, probe ................. 003-0675-01 $ 2.35
CO Probe tip extractor
... 003-0825-00 $ 2.10
ITEMS NOT SHOWN
FB Female to dual banana
$ 7.50
adaptor, BNC ........ ...................... 103-0090-00
FC,
FD,
and
FE Coaxial cable - see page 444.
FA For LA Probe tip for tri-state
$16.00
logic (308) see page 67 ................ 206-0252-01
443
ADAPTING ACCESSORIES
ACCESSORIES
TEK CONNECTING
LOGIC PROBE TEST LEADS
u
....,-
-
16 pin low profile dip clip (can
be used with 14 or 16 pin ICs)
10 wide comb set with
grabber tips not included
Miniature retractable
hook tip
Dual lead adaptor for
miniature probes
Flexible probe tip,
P6006 type
Ground lead, P6006 type
iii
015-0330-00
$35.00
012-0747-00
$ 50.00
206-0222-00
$ 3.25
015-0325-00
$13.00
103-0210-00
195-0234-00
$ 5.00
$ 4.50
PATCH CORDS
o
BNC to BNC, 18 in
Red
012-0087-00
Black
012-0086-00
BNC to banana plug-jack, 18 in
Red
012-0091 -00
Black
012-0090-00
Banana plug-jack to banana plug-jack, 18 in
Red
012-0031 -00
Black
012-0039-00
$ 6.50
$ 6.50
$ 6.50
$ 6.50
PERSONALITY MODULE
40 Pin Dip Clip-l 0 cm cable
(order M/F adaptor below)
40 Pin Dip Clip-30 cm cable
Male Adaptor for 40 Pin
(order M/F adaptor below)
Low Profile Dip Clip-for
use with PM 101 17D02 General
Purpose Personality Module
(or with individual leads such
as the 1O-wide comb
set 012-0747-00)
Female Adaptor for 40 Pin
Low Profile Dip Clip-for
use with dedicated 7D02
personality modules
TEST LEADS
50 II AIR LINE
015-0339-00
$ 42.00
015-0339-02
$ 42.00
The 20 cm 50 {J air line is useful as a time-delay device and as
an absolute impedance in a time-domain reflectometer system.
The characteristic impedance is 50 {J ± 0.4%. Time delay is
0.6698 ns ± 0.4%.
50 Il Air Line
$165.00
017-0084-00
380-0560-05
$15.00
ADAPTORS
380-0647-01
$ 30.00
COAXIAL CABLES
BNC Connector.
012-0057-01
012-0074-00
012-0075-00
012-0076-00
$17.00
$17.00
$ 25.00
$17.00
012-0104-00
012-0482-00
$ 24.00
$25.00
N Connector. 50 II
Coaxial N connectors, 6 It
012-0114-00
$ 25.00
Coaxial, 50 Il, 42 in
Coaxial, 75 Il, 42 in
Coaxial, 93 Il, 42 in
Coaxial, 50 Il, 18 in
Coaxial, 50 Il, 18 in,
Male to Female
Coaxial, 50 n Precision, 36 in
GR Connector.
Coaxial IOns RG58NU
Coaxial 5 ns RG213/U
Coaxial 1 ns RG58NU'
Coaxial 20 ns RG213/U
Coaxial 2 ns RG58NU
Coaxial 5 ns RG58NU
Coaxial 10 in RG213/U
Coaxial 20 in RG213/U
'Connector on one end only.
50 II
017-0501 -00
017-0502-00
017-0503-00
017-0504-00
017-0505-00
017-0512-00
017-0513-00
017-0515-00
$ 85.00
$160.00
$100.00
$100.00
$120.00
$ 90.00
$ 75.00
$ 90.00
50 II CABLES
SMA (3 mm) Connectors 50 II
103-O028~"
103-0030-00
103-0029-00
103-0031-00
BNC
BNC
BNC
BNC
Female to BNC Female
Male to BNC Male
T
Elbow Male to Female
103-0028-00
103-0029-00
103-0030-00
103-0031-00
BNC
BNC
BNC
BNC
Post
BNC
Male
Male
Male
Male
017-0064-00
103-0032-00
103-0033-00
$ 75.00
$ 4.75
$ 4.75
103-0035-00
103-0058-00
$12.00
$ 7.00
to
to
to
to
GR
UHF Female
Binding Post
Dual Binding
Male to N Female
$
$
$
$
5.00
5.50
6.50
6.00
103_00:~~Z;063_00fi
$ 6.50
$ 6.25
103: :15-00
#
103-0045-00
.
If
013-0076-00
103-0090-00
...-----Pin-jack to pin-jack, 0.08 in dia pin
Red , 8 in
012-0179-00
Red, 18 in
012-0180-00
Black, 8 in
012-0181-00
Black, 18 in
012-0182-00
$ 3.75
$ 3.75
$ 3.75
$ 3.75
Coaxial 2 ns
Coaxial 5 ns
Coaxial semirigid 500 ps
Coaxial semirigid 750 ps
Coaxiall ns
015-1005-00
015-1006-00
015-1015-00
015-1017-00
015-1019-00
$ 80.00
$130.00
$ 40.00
$ 35.00
$105.00
BNC
BNC
BNC
BNC
BNC
BNC
Female
Female
Female
Female
Female
Female
to
to
to
to
to
to
Clip leads
GR
uhf Male
B8M Male
N Male
Dual Banana
013-0076-00
017-0063-00
103-0015-00
103-0036-00
103-0045-00
103-0090-00
$21 .00
$ 43.00
$ 4.50
$15.00
$ 6.50
$ 7.50
013-0076-01
$17.50
017-0021-00
017-0027-00
017-0062-00
017-0065-00
$35.00
$ 55.00
$43.00
$ 80.00
BNC to BSM Connectors 50 II
TEST LEADS
BNC Female to EZ Ball
Test Lead , Black , 4 It
Test Lead, Red, 4 It
Test Lead, Black, 4 It
Test Lead set includes 012-0425-00,
012-0426-00,and 013-0107-03
444
012-0425-00
012-0426-00
012-0426-01
012-0427-00
$12.00
$17.50
$17.50
$ 29.00
Coaxial, lOin, RG58
B8M Female to BNC Male
Coaxial, 18 in, RG58
B8M Female to BNC Male
012-0128-00
$ 20.00
012-0127-00
$ 20.00
017-0021-00
GR
GR
GR
GR
to
to
to
to
N
C
N
C
Male
Male
Female
Female
ADAPTING ACCESSORIES
CONNECTING ACCESSORIES
TEK
ACCESSORY HOUSING
3mm 50 II
015-1001-00
017-0083-00
015·1021-00
017-OQM..OO
017-0063-00
GR to Bt-.C Female
017-0064-00
GR to BNC Male
017-0083-00
50 Il termination, thru-line
'(GR to BNC Male)
'Upper frequency limit vswr not specified
017-0021-00
017-0062-00
103-0045-00
103-0058-00
N Male to GR
N Female to GR
N Male to BNC Female
N Female to BNC Male
$ 43.00
$ 75.00
$ 80.00
$ 35.00
$ 43.00
$ 6.50
$ 7.00
Accessory housing without electrical components is useful for
applications requiring special circuitry.
011-0081-00
$ 30.00
Accessory Housing
ATTENUATORS-TERMINATIONS
50 Il ± 0.1% precision feedthrough termination (de
- 100 kHz, 11 V RMS maximum)
50 Il feed through termination"
50 Il 10X (20 dB) attenuator"
50 Il 5X (14 dB) attenuator"
50 Il (6 dB) attenuator"
50 Il 2.5X (8 dB) attenuator"
50 Il feedthrough termination
(5 W)"
103-0159-00
'F'
'F'
'F'
'F'
'F'
fi
Female to BNC Male
Female to GR874
Male to ' F' Male
Male to BNC Female
Female to 'F' Female
$15.00
$ 45.00
$ 7.50
$ 8.50
$ 7.50
011 -0129-00
011 -0049-01
011-0059-02
011-0060-02
011-0069-02
011-0076-02
$ 95.00
$ 25.00
$ 35.00
$ 35.00
$ 35.00
$ 35.00
011 -0099-00
$ 40.00
Characteristics - Dc resistance is 50 Il ± 1 Il. Attenuation
accuracy is ± 20/0 de, ± 50/0 at 2 GHz. Power rating (except
011 -0099-00) is 2 W average.
vewr
" < 1. 1 de - 2S0 MHz and < 1.2 de - SOOMHz.
'2 < 1.1 de -1.0 GHz and < 1.2 de - 2.0 GHz.
'31.1 de -100 MHz.
75 Il feedthrough termination
93 Il feedthrough termination
50 Il to 75 Il minimum loss
attenuator
50 Il to 93 Il minimum loss
attenuator
75 Il 10X attenuator
93 Il 10X attenuator
600 Il feedthrough termination
(1 W, de to 1 MHz)
75 Il to 50 Il minimum loss
attenuator (ac coupled)
011-0055-00
011-0056-00
$ 25.00
$ 25.00
011-0057-00
$ 25.00
011-0058-00
011-0061 -00
011-0062-00
$ 25.00
$ 30.00
$ 28.00
011-0092-00
$ 30.00
011-0112-00
$ 60.00
CHARACTERISTICS
Accuracy of indicated attenuation ratio is ± 20/0 at dc.
Power rating of attenuators is 1/2 Wand terminations 1 W.
Voltage standing wave ratio (vswr) not specified.
017-0030-00
017-0089-00
GR Insertion Unit
GRT
GR Elbow
015-1022-00
50 Il 2X attenuator
50 Il 5X attenuator
50 Il 10X attenuator
50 Il termination Female
Short-Circuit termination Male
Short-Circuit termination
015-1001-00
015-1002-00
015-1003-00
015-1004-00
015-1020-00
$120.00
$120.00
$120.00
$ 60.00
$ 17.50
Female
50 Il termination Male
015-1021-00
015-1022-00
$ 24.00
$ 32.00
CHARACTERISTICS
Dc12.4112.40 GHz
18.00 GHz
Attenuation
Attenuation
Termination
2X (6 dB)
5X (14 dB)
10X (20 db)
Power
Accuracy
Vswr
Accuracy
ContinVswr
uous
± 11l
± 0.75 dB
± 0.75 dB
± 0.75 dB
1.15
1.40
1.40
1.40
±11l
±1 .oo dB
±1 .00 dB
±1.00 dB
1.15
2.00
1.60
1.60
0.5W
1.0W
1.0W
1.0W
50 II COUPLING CAPACITOR
015-1013-00
The coupling capacitor is a short length of coaxial line with a
disk capacitor (4700 pF, ± 20%) in series with the inner conductor. Reflection ratio (in 150 ps tdr system), is 0.03 maximum. Voltage rating is 200 V.
Coupling CapaCitor SMA
(3 mm)
015-1013-00
$170.00
The coupling capacitor is a sheri length of coaxial line having a
disk capacitor (4700 pF) in series with the inner connector.
High frequencies are transmitted with smail reflection, but de
and low frequencies are blocked. Voltage rating is 500 V.
Coupling CapaCitor GR
017-0028-00
$ 90.00
50 II POWER DIVIDERS
ATTENUATORS end TERMINATORS
017-0070-00
017-0030-00
017-0069-00
017-0070-00
015-1004-00
015-1020-00
$ 80.00
$100.00
$100.00
015-1009-00
015·1008-00
SMA
SMA
SMA
SMA
Male to GR
Female to GR
Male to N Female
Male to 7 mm APC
015-1011·00
015-1012-00
SMA Male to Male
SMA Female to Female
SMAT
SMA Male to BNC Female
015·1010-00
015-1007-00
015-1008-00
015-1009-00
015-1010-00
$ 90.00
$ 90.00
$ 50.00
$175.00
015-1018-00
015-1011-00
015-1012-00
015-1016-00
015-1018-00
$ 20.00
$16.00
$ 30.00
$ 8.00
011-0086-00
011-0085-00
Frequency range is de to 12.4 GHz. Power rating is 2 Waverage, 300 W peak. Impedance is 50 Il.
$ 70.00
10 dB attenuator
011-0085-00
$ 70.00
20 dB attenuator
011-0086-00
$ 90.00
40 dB attenuator
011-0087-00
This coaxial tee is designed for use in broad-band 50 Il systems where the mismatch introduced by ordinary 'Tee' c0nnectors is undesirable. Load isolation is nominally 6 dB while
the voltage attenuation ratio is nominally 2X (input to either
load arm, other load arm terminated in a standard 50 Il termination). Maximum vswr is 1.50 from de to 12.00 GHz and 1.90
from 12.01 to 18.00 GHz.
Power Divider SMA (3 mm)
015-1014-00
$200.00
GR
50
50
50
50
Il
Il
Il
Il
10X attenuator
5X attenuator
2X attenuator
termination, end-line
017-0078-00
017-0079-00
017-0080-00
017-0081-00
$210.00
$210.00
$150.00
$135.00
CHARACTERISTICS
Accuracy of indicated attenuation ratio is ± 20/0 at de, ± 3% at
1 GHz. Voltage standing wave ratio (vswr) is < 1.1 up to 1
GHz. Power rating is 1 W.
This coaxial tee has a 16.67 Il resistor in each leg, connected
so that the tee looks like 50 Il if two legs are terminated in 50 Il.
It is designed for use in broad-band 50 Il systems where the
mismatch introduced by ordinary 'Tee' connectors is undesirable. It is especially useful in a ti~ain reflectorneter setup where test line, pulser, and oscilloscope must be coupled
with a minimum of reflection-producing discontinuities.
Power Divider GR
017-0082-00
$260.00
MOUNTING
TEK ACCESSORIES
em
in
em
In
13.5 18.0 45.7 1.6
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS
G
E
em
In
em
In
em
4.0
-
17.8
17.8
17.8
13.5
17.8
16.3
16.2
17.4
19.0
22.4
41.4
41.1
44.2
48.3
56.9
1.8
1.8
2.1
1.1
2.3
4.6
4.6
5.1
2.8
5.8
13.5
17.8
13.5
13.5
17.8
13.3
13.2
13.5
35.6
40.1
13.3
13.3
13.5
13.5
13.3
22.4
17.8
13.5
13.3
22.3
24.8
22.5
26.9
26.0
18.9
17.0
16.3
22.4
21 .5
18.3
18.3
16.5
16.5
18.3
9.5
13.4
22.3
14.9
56.6
56.6
57.2
68.3
66.0
48.0
43.2
41.4
56.9
54.6
46.5
46.5
41.9
41.9
46.5
24.1
34.0
56.6
37.8
2.0
2.3
2.3
1.8
1.95
1.82
1.7
0.3
0.6
1.9
0.7
0.7
1.1
1.1
0.7
0.3
1.4
2.0
2.0
5.1
5.8
5.8
4.6
5.0
4.7
4.3
0.8
1.5
4.8
1.8
1.8
2.8
2.8
1.8
0.8
3.6
5.1
5.1
H
PRODUCT
in
R434
5.3
R465B', R475',
7.0
R-475A'
R485'
7.0
7.0
R491'
R5100N R5400' 5.3
R7704'
7.0
R7313', R7603',
R7613' R7623' 5.3
R7844'
7.0
R7903'
5.3
5.3
R7912'
7912AO
7.0
RTM506
5.25
T922R
5.2
016-0115-02
5.3
040-0551-01
14.0
040-0554-01
15.8
040-0600-00
5.25
040-0601-00
5.25
040-0616-02
5.3
040-0617-02
5.3
040-0624-01
5.25
437-0031-00
8.8
7.0
437-0071-00
437-0126-03
5.3
016-0468-00
5.2
L
F
3.5
3.5
3.5
1.8
1.8
-
1.75
-
-
-
-
-
8.9
8.9
8.9
4.6
4.6
20.4
19.3
21.1
24.6
33.3
-
25.2 64.0
4.4
-
1.8
1.8
4.6
4.6
-
-
-
-
-
-
51.8
49.0
53.6
62.5
84.6
-
25.3 64.3
26.9 68.3
30.7 78.0
-
-
24.2 61 .5
-
30.9 78.5
31 .3 79.5
-
-
24.6 62.5
24.6 62.5
-
-
-
25.2 64.0
-
-
RF
RR
T
em
13.5
9.6 24.4 6.8
9.3 23.6 6.8
9.3 23.6 6.8
5.3
15.3 38.9 10.7 27.2 18.5 47.0 7.0
17.3
17.3
17.3
13.5
17.8
-
em
-
11.0 27.9
10.9 27.7
11.9 30.2
In
em
In
em
-
-
-
-
7.9 20.1
7.9 20.1
8.5 21.6
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
'These instruments mount with sliding tracks to a standard 19-inch wide rack. Rear support for sliding tracks
enclosed rack.
RACK ADAPTORS
C
in
5.3
in
-
5.3
7.0
5.3
5.3
6.9
5.25
5.2
5.3
-
5.25
5.3
5.25
5.3
5.3
5.25
7.1
6.6
-
13.5
17.8
17.8
13.5
17.5
13.3
13.2
13.5
13.3
13.5
13.3
13.5
13.5
13.3
18.0
16.8
-
is required, such as an
STORAGE CABINETS
DIMENSIONS EXCLUSIVE OF PLUG IN UNITS AND PROBES
Symbol
Definition
H
Height of front panel
L
Rack front to rearmost permanent fixture
eXCluding cabies
F
Back of front panel to foremost protrusion
G
Bottom of front panel to horizontal plane
of rotation
E
Maximum forward clearance with instrument
out and horizontal
RF
Front radius of rotation
RR
Rear radius of rotation
T
Rack front to pivot point
C
Cabinet height
BLANK PANEL
For 7000 Series Plug-in Units - Holds 6 plug-in units, for
mounting in a 19 in rack, 5.25 in high.
Order 437-0126-03 "."".""".".""" ."""""""",,.,,,,""",,. $750
REAR-SUPPORT CRADLES
For rackmounting the 7000 Series oscilloscopes in a standard
19 in wide rack. Rack adaptor includes slide-out assemblies.
7000 Series mask finish is light gray.
For 7704A, 7104, 7834 and 7854, rack height is 15.75 in, rack
depth is 21 .38 in, shipping weight is = 41 lb.
Order 040-0611-01 ........................................... ".""." .... $700
For 7704 and 7904, rack height is 15.75 in, rack depth is 21 .75
in Shipping weight is = 41 lb.
Provide rear support for rackmount instruments with slide-out
assemblies, when mounted in a 19 in backless rack. Shipping
weight is = 3 lb.
For R561 B, R564B, and R647 A.
Order 040-0344-00 "".""""""" """""""""""".""""",,.,, $60
CRADLE MOUNTS
Blenk Pen.1 - When operating the 500017000 Series mainframes or the TM 500 or 2600 Series generators with less than
a full complement of plug-ins, the biank panel may be used to
cover an unused compartment. The panel for the 7000 Series
is also good for EMC Shielding.
7000 Series, 2600 Serie., Order 016-0155-00 """"""". $45
5000 Seri•• , Order 016-0452-00 .""".".""."",,.,,""""",,. $18
TM 500 S.ri•• , Order 016-0195-03 """".""".".".,,""" ,,. $25
BLANK PLUG-IN CHASSIS
Order 040-0554-01 """"" .. " ... ".""" ""."."" ."".,," " " ",,. $800
For 455 and 465M , includes cradle mount, rack height 7 in,
rack depth 18.75 in.
Order 040-0825-01 """"" .. "" ... " " " "." """"".""." " .,,.,,. $350
For rackmounting 7000 Series cabinet-type oscilloscopes in a
standard 19 in wide rack. Cradle mount consists of a cradle (or
'shelf') without slide-out assembiies and a mask to fit over the
regular instrument panel. 7000 Series mask finish is light gray.
For 7704A, rack height is 15.75 in, rack depth is 22 in, shipping
weight is = 16 lb.
Order 040-0560-00 " " " """"."""""""""".,," " " " " """,,. $445
For 468, and OM versions of other 400 Series oscilloscopes.
Order 016-0675-00 "." " ."".".""."""""".,,"""""",,.,,"" $325
Blenk Plug-In Che ••I. - Availabie for all Tektronix mainframes. The 7000 Series provides a printed circuit board, plugin frame, and securing hardware. The 560 Series, I-Series, and
Letter Series plug-in chassis have an interconnecting plug, securing hardware and plug-in frame .
7000 Seri •• Order 040-0553-01 """ """""" """"." ."",,. $130
5000 Serie. Order 040-0818-03 """"".""""""""" " .,,,,. $105
TM 500 Seri •• Order 040-0652-05 """ " " " .,," """ """"" $ 95
560 Seri•• Order 040-0245-00 ." " """"".".,,"""""",,.,,. $125
TEK
VIEWING
ACCESSORIES
VIEWING ACCESSORIES
The viewing accessories listed normally mount on the oscilloscope graticule cover. In many cases, they will also fit cameramounting bezels. If you intend using a camera on your oscilloscope, check with your Tektronix Sales Engi~ for bezelviewer compatibility before ordering.
OSCILLOSCOPE PROTECTIVE COVERS
The cover provides protection for the oscilloscope during transport or storage. Made of waterproof blue vinyl, the covers are
available for both laboratory and portable instruments. The
covers for 500, 5000, and 7000 Series laboratory oscilloscopes
have clear vinyl frontal areas.
INSTRUMENT
PROTECTIVE COVERS
PART NUMBER
PRICE
INSTRUMENT'
Blue
378-2016-01
$1.80
200 Series
Blue
378-0691-00
$ 1.25
337-2122-00
$ 5.25
Blue
Clear
Smoke-gray tilter
337-1674-00
337-1674-01
337-1674-07
$ 5.00
$ 5.00
$ 4.00
540,550 Series
565,575
Smoke-grayt
Green
Blue
Amber
378-0567-00
378-0568-00
378-0569-00
378-0570-00
$ 9.00
$ 4.00
$ 4.00
$ 4.00
View Hood (folding) - 314, 326, 335, 400 Series, 576, 577 ,
5000, and 7000 Series oscilloscopes.
529,561 B,567
568
Smoke-grayt
378-0560-00
$ 4.00
For 576, Order 016-0259-00 ............................................ $20
576
For 577, 5000, and 7000 Series
Order 016-0260-00 ........................................................... $lB
Bluet
Amber
378-0616-00
378-0616-01
$ 5.00
$ 5.00
603,604
Clear (603t)
Green
Amber
Blue
Gray
Graticule
(8xl0 div)
337-1440-00
337-1440-01
337-1440-02
337-1440-03
337-1440-04
331 -0303-00
605,606,607
Blue
Amber
Graticule
Clear Shield
Grayt
Graticule
(8xl0 div)
337-1 674-00
337-1674-05
337-1674-10
337-1674-13
337-1674-06
331-0391-00
$ 5.00
$ 5.00
$ 5.00
$ 5.00
$ 5.00
$5.00
608
Amber
Green
Graticulet
378-0704-00
378-0705-00
337-2126-02
$ 5.00
$ 5.00
$ 5.25
7904,7844
7313,7700
Series,7613
7623
378-0625-00
Bluet
Amber
378-0625-01
Gray
378-0625-02
378-0625-03
Green
Gray Tv Graticule
CCIR
378-0625-05
Gray Tv Graticule
378-0625-06
NTSC
Clear Shield
With Spectrum Analyzer
Graticule
337-1159-02
For 326, 314, 335, SC 502, SC 504 (not pictured),
Order 016-0297-00 ....................................................... $ 6.50
For 464, 466, 455 (not pictured),
Order 016-0592-00 ........................................................... $12
016-0512-00
$15.00
$24.00
314,335
016-0612-00
$115.00
326
016-0532-00
$75.00
453A,454A,491
016-0074-01
$18.00
455
016-0344-00
$18.00
434464,466
016-0365-00
$21 .00
465 4658 475 485
016-0554-00
$17 .00
560 Series (except 565,567 , 568)
016-0067-00
$17.00
565567568
016-0069-00
$20.00
540 Series
016-0068-00
$20.00
5000 Series
016-0544-00
$25.00
7300,7400,7600 Series
016-0192-01
$20.00
7704A,7900
016-0531-00
$20.00
Rectangular Viewer, Order 016-0039-00 _........................ $80
Plastic Round Viewer, Order 016-0053-00 ...................... $42
3-wide Carrying Case for 7L 14, 7L5 Option 25, 7020, 7L18.
Order 016-0626-00 ....... ................................................... $220
Viewing Hood - For Tektronix older 5 inch round oscilloscopes. Includes molded rubber eyepiece and separate tubular
light shield.
Order 016-0001-01 ......................................................... $125
016-0001-01
Polarized Viewers - For Tektronix older 5 inch oscilloscopes.
The viewers reduce troublesome reflections and glare under
high ambient light conditions.
2·wide Carrying Case for 7L 12, 7L5.
Order 016-0625-00 .......................................................... $220
7613,7623
7623A,7633
7403N,7603
Collapsible Viewing Hood - For oscilloscopes with rectangular CRTs. Blue vinyl material, folds flat for convenienl storage.
CRT MESH FILTERS
For 422, 453A, 454A. 485, 491,
Order 016-00B2-00 ........................................................... $15
The mesh filter improves display contrast for oscilloscope viewing under high ambient light conditions.
For 422, 453A, 454A, 485, 491 ,
Order 016-0274-00 ........................................................... $15
A fine metal screen with a matte black surface is utilized to
reduce light reflections. Although light transmission from the
CRT is reduced to approximately 28%, the high attenuation of
external reflections allows viewing low-intensity displays in
room light or other bright surroundings.
Viewing Hood (folding binocular) - For some 400 Series.
For 434, 455, 464, 466. 465B, 475 and 475A.
Order 016-0566-00 ........................................................... $15
PART NUMBER
378-0063-00
$27.00
432 434
378-0682-00
$45.00
422, 491, 453A, 454A, 485
378-0648-00
$24.00
465 465B 475 464 466 434
378-0726· 01
$55.00
7400,7603
378-0696-00
$55.00
7500,7700,7800,7900
Series and 7613,7623
7633
378-0603-00
$55.00
'For both cabinet and rackmount instruments.
Polarized Collapsible Viewing Hood - To reduce reflections
and glare under high ambient light conditions for 432, 434, 455 ,
465, 465B, 475, 464, 466, Order 016-0180-00 ................ $40
PRICE
314, 326,335
PRICE
314,335
Blue
016-0112-00
INSTRUMENT"
PART
NUMBER
455
200 Series
The mesh filter also serves as an EMC filter. Installed on the
instrument, the metal frame of the filter is grounded, providing
effective filtering of the EMC spectrum.
COLOR
465,465B,475,
464,466
323,3241401A 1401A-l , 1501
PLUG-IN UNIT CARRYING CASES
CATHODE RAY TUBE LIGHT FILTERS
Viewing Hood - For 576, 5000 and 7000 Series oscilloscopes. Molded gray polystyrene with polyurethane eyepiece.
For 576, Order 016-0153-00 ............................................ $40
For 5000 and 700 Series, 601, 602, 603, 604, 528 and 577,
Order 016-0154-00 ........................................................... S2B
Spectrum
Analyzer
Green (UV)
Tv Graticule
CCIR
Tv Graticule
NTSC
$ 3.00
$ 3.00
$ 3.50
$ 3 .50
$ 4.50
$10.00
$
$
$
$
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
$ 9.50
$ 9.50
$ 8.00
378-0625-07
378-0625-08
$ 9.50
$ 5.00
378-0625-09
$ 9.50
378-0625-10
$ 9.50
Blue
378-0684-00
Amber
378-0684-01
378-0684-02
Gray
378-0684-03
Green
Gray Tv Graticule
CCIR
378-0684-04
Gray Tv Graticule
NTSC
378-0684-05
With Spectrum Analyzer
Graticule
337-1439-01
Blue Implosion Shieldt
337-1700-01
Clear Implosion Shield
337-1700-04
$ 7.00
$ 7.00
$ 7.00
$ 7.00
$ 12.00
$ 12.00
$ 8.00
$ 6.50
$ 6.50
$ 3.00
5100 and 5400
Series
(except 5441)
Clear
Green
Amber
Blue
Gray
337-1440-00
337-1440-01
337-1440-02
337-1440-03
337-1440-04
$ 3.50
$ 3.50
$ 4.50
5441
Cleart
Gray
Graticule
(8xl0 div)
337-1674-01
337-1674-06
331-0391-00
$ 5.00
$ 5.00
$ 5.00
434
Blue
378-0678-01
$ 1.80
$ 3.00
'For both cabinet and rackmount instruments unless rackmount version is listed.
tStandard filter supplied with instrument.
447
TEK QUALITY
"HUMAN ENGINEERING " -
to
INFUSION of computer-aided design helps Tektronix engineers design in the features that fit your
applications.
THE KEY to managing quality is a
team effort beginning in the early
steps of design and manufacturing.
UNMATCHED VALUE IN
PRODUCTS & SERVICE
To set our standards for quality,
we go to the ultimate judge . . .
Our Customers.
Our Number One job is
understanding your needs.
To achieve the quality you need, we
design in the qualities that fit your
applications, your environment.
Performance.
Reliability. Price.
Our design engineers combine these
qualities to equal one constant:
unmatched value. The highest retum
for your investment.
Do we go to extremes to achieve
reliability?
Yes, we do. In our reliability and
environmental labs, we life-cycle
components and take prototypes and
production models to the extremes of
your environment.
Extremes in temperature and humidity.
EM fields . Vibration . Bench drops. Salt
fogs and suifides.
We engineer for reliability at the initial
stage of design using component
derating , fewer parts and connectors,
less power and lower operating
temperatures.
To minimize your downtime risks, we
track every warranty failure on every
product right down to the component
level. If reliability goals aren 't met,
changes are made. And not just to
new products. Each time a product is
calibrated by a Tektronix Service
Technician, these modifications are
made at no charge to products already
in use.
We give you a solid specification of
performance. Your Tektronix product
will do what we say it will do.
Inside Tektronix, there's no
substitute for materials that meet
specifications.
If incoming materials fall short of spec,
the decision is easy. We don 't use
them.
TEKTRONIX SERVICE TECHNICIANS are
knowledgeable and skilled. They work exclusively
on Tektronix products, with the best diagnostic
equipment in the industry. And a parts inventory
second to none.
To be that rigid in meeting specs, we
work cooperatively with our suppliers
to assure that their materials meet the
same quality standards as our
products .
We're tough on ourselves.
Critical self-evaluation is often painful,
but at Tektronix it's always deliberate.
And deliberate steps to manage
quality are what we take.
Team leadership. Training.
If you have a problem , we have a
problem. The loop isn't closed until you
have a satisfactory answer.
At Tek, quality inspection is
everybody's job, not just
someone's job title.
Our policy is to foster a spirit of pride
among employees regarding the
company's quality performance. Each
person is responsible and accountable
for the quality of their work, and the
only acceptable performance standard
is "doing it right the first time ."
Quality service is our cornerstone
of solid worldwide support.
On any repair, our objective is an
efficient "fix first time."
And, we will tailor Tektronix
maintenance agreements to your
response-time needs and budget.
How do we know that quality is
worth the effort?
A simple handshake with you is our
surest sign.
But we don 't expect you to base your
product selections on a lot of verbiage.
Your applications have to be satisfied.
You want a demonstration of
performance. You want prices, a
written agreement.
You can get all this by contacting the
Tektronix Sales office nearest you.
Over 60,000 companies and
organizations know the difference
quality makes. Chances are you know
Tektronix quality, too. And you know
our commitment.
COMMJTTE() TO EXCELlENCE
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.3 Linearized : No XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:56:37 Create Date : 2013:09:21 08:52:12-08:00 Modify Date : 2013:09:21 16:40:04-07:00 Metadata Date : 2013:09:21 16:40:04-07:00 Producer : Adobe Acrobat 9.55 Paper Capture Plug-in Format : application/pdf Document ID : uuid:dbd24609-ec64-2848-b72a-e6dfc3d0eeec Instance ID : uuid:cc93545c-3dc7-e249-ba3a-a2885ed4b40c Page Layout : SinglePage Page Mode : UseNone Page Count : 454EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools